commit e3d556b7327cb814ebb7b71b0bd0239a9bdc1933 Author: Kristen Hercules Date: Tue Jan 27 18:07:54 2026 -0600 Initial commit - QBPOS Help diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help.html b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000..243b65b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help.html @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + +QuickBooks POS Help - PromptTech Solution + + + + + + + + + + <body> + <h1>QuickBooks POS Help</h1> + <p>Your browser does not support frames. Please <a href="POS_Help/___left.htm">click here</a> to view the documentation.</p> + </body> + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#BSSC b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#BSSC new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ea723d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#BSSC @@ -0,0 +1 @@ +14.0.11.0 \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#IDXHDR b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#IDXHDR new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2c55e5 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#IDXHDR differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#ITBITS b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#ITBITS new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e69de29 diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#IVB b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#IVB new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1a94430 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#IVB differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#STRINGS b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#STRINGS new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3c5c8e0 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#STRINGS differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#SYSTEM b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#SYSTEM new file mode 100644 index 0000000..beb616f Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#SYSTEM differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#TOPICS b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#TOPICS new file mode 100644 index 0000000..82720b8 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#TOPICS differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#URLSTR b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#URLSTR new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9643af Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#URLSTR differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#URLTBL b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#URLTBL new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9068094 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#URLTBL differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#WINDOWS b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#WINDOWS new file mode 100644 index 0000000..305c4e5 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/#WINDOWS differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$FIftiMain b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$FIftiMain new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03d1e5c Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$FIftiMain differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$OBJINST b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$OBJINST new file mode 100644 index 0000000..16d0108 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$OBJINST differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/BTree b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/BTree new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2ea2dac Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/BTree differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Data b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Data new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb18b5b Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Data differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Map b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Map new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0ca111f Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Map differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Property b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Property new file mode 100644 index 0000000..69d161d Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWAssociativeLinks/Property differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/BTree b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/BTree new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8523fe Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/BTree differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Data b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Data new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b80ec41 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Data differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Map b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Map new file mode 100644 index 0000000..91c52aa Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Map differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Property b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Property new file mode 100644 index 0000000..69d161d Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/$WWKeywordLinks/Property differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_Basics_new.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_Basics_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4698999 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_Basics_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +GoPayment Basics + + + + + + + + + +

GoPayment Basics

+

Intuit GoPayment lets your customers make credit and debit card payments to you - on the spot - using their mobile phones. You can process any major card, credit or debit. There's no need to write down payment information or call into your back office. Intuit GoPayment works in conjunction with Point of Sale.

+

Learn more

+

Manage your GoPayment Account

+

If you're the account administrator, you can manage GoPayment Service using the Merchant Service Center web site. This site lets you customize your sales receipt, add GoPayment users, reset passwords, and learn about GoPayment features. You can also review transactions, deposits, and fees.

+

Sign in with your GoPayment User ID and Password here.

+

 

+

GoPayment Security

+

To protect data in transit, GoPayment adheres to online banking industry protection standards, using an https connection over SSL (Secure Socket Layer) at 128-bit encryption.

+

Sensitive credit card information is never permanently stored on your mobile device. When you swipe or insert cards with GoPayment, an additional layer of encryption (3DES combined with DUKPT) protects communication between your device and the card reader.

+

Note: Never use an unsecured wireless network connection to process transactions.

+

Unsecured wireless networks are neither secure nor PCI-compliant. To meet PCI-compliance standards, a wireless network must be password-protected and feature strong encryption for authentication and transmission.

+

 

+

GoPayment Support

+

To manage your account (add users, change passwords, customize receipts, and more), sign in with your GoPayment User ID and Password here.

+

Note: This site is not optimized for mobile browsers.  You must be the account administrator to sign in. 

+

Contact GoPayment support:
+1-800-558-9558
+
+Authorize payments by phone:

+

- MasterCard/Visa 1- 800-228-1122
+- American Express 1- 800-528-2121
+- Discover  1- 800-347-1111

+

 

+
+

Basic

+
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_FAQ_new.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_FAQ_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e27f2ec --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_FAQ_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + + +GoPayment FAQ + + + + + + + + + + +

GoPayment FAQ

+ +

To update your deposit account information, sign in with your GoPayment User ID and Password here. From the web page, choose Account > Account Profile.

+

Note: This site is not optimized for mobile browsers, so you may want to use your computer's browser.

+ +

All newly implemented wireless networks are prohibited from using WEP as of March 31st, 2009. For current wireless implementations, it is prohibited to use WEP after June 30, 2010.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_Password_new.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_Password_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..783f0dd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/GoPayment_Password_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +GoPayment Password + + + + + + + + + + +

GoPayment Password

+

Forgot your GoPayment Password?

+


+Ask your administrator to reset your password. When you are provided a temporary password, use it to sign in and create a new password.

+

If you are the GoPayment administrator, you can reset passwords directly from your iPad:

+
    +
  1. +

    Sign in with your Administrator credentials here.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the menu, choose Account > Manage GoPayment.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Locate and tap the User ID.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Tap Reset Password and click OK.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Use your new password to sign into GoPayment on your mobile device.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Note: Passwords must contain between 6 and 25 letters, numbers or special characters, but no sequential strings like 123456. The password cannot be your User ID.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/Go_Mobile.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/Go_Mobile.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a31d42c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/Go_Mobile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Go Mobile + + + + + + + + + + +

Go Mobile

+

 

+

The Point of Sale Mobile Sync feature gives you the power to make sales and track your inventory using your mobile phone or tablet . Mobile Sync allows you to share your items with your mobile devices and make sales wherever and whenever you need.  

+

 

+

Why Sync to your Phone or Tablet?

+


Point of Sale Mobile Sync gives you the freedom to ring up credit card sales anywhere inside - or outside - of your store.

+ +

To begin, get your QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account

+


Before using the Mobile Sync feature, get a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account. With a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account, you can accept all major credit and debit cards as well as add Gift Card Services to your business.

+

To start accepting credit cards in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. Launch Point of Sale.
    2. +
  2. From the File menu, select Setup Interview, and choose the Payments tab.
    3. +
  3. Click Yes to accept credit and debit cards.
    4. +
  4. Click Sign In.
    5. +
  5. Be sure to sign in using the User ID (email) and password that you had previously created.
    +If there is more than one, you will be prompted to select the right account.
    6. +
+

Learn more

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/Mobile_Sync_Steps_new.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/Mobile_Sync_Steps_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d985b97 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/Mobile_Sync_Steps_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ + + + + + + + +Mobile Sync Steps + + + + + + + + + + +

Mobile Sync Steps

+

Once you have your QuickBooks Desktop Payment Account, you're ready to go.  Follow these steps to activate the Sync feature:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click Mobile Sync.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Sign-in.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter your email and password for your Intuit Payments Account.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Sign-in.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    If you have multiple accounts, click Select on the account you want to use.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Click Close. The Payments screen will now show that you are connected and display your account details.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Click Edit settings to customize your payment preferences and select the items that apply to your business.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    On the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon near the top right of your screen.

    +
    9. +
  9. +

    Click View Sync Preferences.

    +
    10. +
  10. +

    Select Sync Data and then Save. Auto Sync is now on.

    +
    11. +
+

 

+

To sync specific inventory items to your mobile device:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Misc and Shipping section of the Inventory Item Detail screen, click the Sync to Mobile.
    +or
    +Click the Mobile box next to the Item # on the Item List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

To complete the sync:  

+
    +
  1. +

    From your mobile device, click the GoPayment app.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch the GoPayment app and sign in to your QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Settings.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Turn on Items. GoPayment will begin syncing with Point of Sale.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To sync more items or receipts:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Sync Now.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

To view syncing activity:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click View Activity Log.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

To view or change Sync Preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click View Sync Preferences.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If you make any changes, click Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

To turn off Syncing:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click View Sync Preferences.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Do not Sync Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To change sync frequency:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click View Sync Preferences.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Move the slider to increase or decrease sync frequency.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Learn more

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.brs b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.brs new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e69de29 diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.glo b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.glo new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e69de29 diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.hhc b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.hhc new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5a93266 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.hhc @@ -0,0 +1,2966 @@ + + + + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.hhk b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.hhk new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5452f14 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.hhk @@ -0,0 +1,10676 @@ + + + + + + + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/RoboHHRE.lng b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/RoboHHRE.lng new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2f99f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/RoboHHRE.lng @@ -0,0 +1,425 @@ +[MasterPage] +MT_HideString=Hide +MT_ShowString=Show +[MultiScreen] +SearchResultsPerScreen=Search results per page +HomeButton=Home +GlossaryFilterTerms=Filter Terms +HighlightSearchResults=Highlight Search Results +ShowAll=All +EnableAndSearch=Display results with all search words +PreviousLabel=Previous +Next=Next +NoScriptErrorMsg=Enable JavaScript support in the browser to view this page. +Print=Print +Search=-Search- +Canceled=Canceled +ShowHide=Show/Hide +Loading=Loading... +Logo=Logo +JS_alert_LoadXmlFailed=Failed to load XML file +Searching=Searching... +JS_alert_InitDatabaseFailed=Failed to initialize database +Cancel=Cancel +UnknownError=Unknown error +ResultsFoundText=%1 result(s) found for %2 +SearchPageTitle=Search Results +TopicsNotFound=No results found +NextLabel=Next +TableOfContents=Table of Contents +HideAll=Hide All +SearchOptions=Search Options +Back=Back +JS_alert_InvalidExpression_1=The search string you typed is not valid. +Prev=Previous +IndexFilterKewords=Filter Keywords +IeCompatibilityErrorMsg=This page cannot be viewed in Internet Explorer 8 or earlier version. +[AdobeAIR] +DeleteCommentButton=Delete +CommentPodToggleToolTip=Show/hide Comments pod +PreferenceDialogCommentsDeleteMsg=Do you want to delete all the comments? +PreferenceDlgOpenInNewTab=Open Help Topics in New Tab +NewBookmarkURL=Link URL +UpdateAvailable=An update is available. Do you want to update now? +EndModeration=Export +RequireWritePermission=Moderator should have write permissions on the shared folder. +LoadingCommentsForUserMessage=Receiving comments... +PreferenceButtonTitle=Preferences +AboutVersionID=Version ID: +ReceiveFromFileMenu=Receive from File +PrintSequence=Print Sequence +PreferenceDlgReviewerName=Reviewer Name +PrintEntireHelpString=Do you want to print all the topics? +DeleteButtonTitle=Delete +NewFolderName=New Folder +RSSNoneLabel=None +AllAuthors=All Authors +OnlyRejected=Rejected +PreferenceDlgAutoImportCommentsOnLaunch=Receive comments from shared folder +PreferenceDlgAutoImportCommentsOnSignin=Receive comments from server on signin +SyncCommentsFromServerMsg=Send/Receive for comments completed. +CannotImportFileError=Cannot import from file +ViewFavoriteMenuItem=View Favorites +PreferenceDlgShowBreadCrumb=Show Breadcrumbs +PreferenceDlgDeleteCommentButton=Delete All +SearchTextInputToolTip=Enter text to search +Date=Date +RejectAll=Reject All +Username=User Name: +AnonymousDlgText=Anonymous comments will be visible if they are accepted. Do you want to post comments anonymously? +EnableModeration=Show Moderation Pod +CommentsModeToolTip=Switch to Comments Mode +ViewPendingComments=View Pending +CommentsNotFoundMsg=No comments found +SelectAuthor=Select Author +ReceiveCommentsFileMessage=Comments received from the shared location +ShowCommentShowAllMenuItem=All +AddCommentButton=Add +BackButtonToolTip=Back +ServerConnectionError=No connection available to server, switching to offline mode +IndexSearchText=Type in keywords to search +StartModeration=Import +SortByDate=Sort by Date +AllStatus=All Status +SignIn=Sign In +AboutHelpID=Help ID: +AddCommentHereText=Add Comments here +PreferenceDialogContentTabTitle=General +PreferenceDialogCommentTabTitle=Comment +TOCBoxTitle=Contents +FavoriteMessageTitle=Favorites +CommentImportFileDlgTitle=Select Comment XML File to Import +NoUpdatePresent=No update is available +ErrorInDownloadingUpdate=Error encountered while downloading +AsAnonymous=As Anonymous +OnlyAccepted=Accepted +CurrentOnlineText=Currently working online +WrongPassword=Incorrect password. Try again. +CommentTitle=Comments +PreferenceDlgUseOfflineHelp=Use Offline Help +PreferenceDlgCheckForUpdate=Check for Updates +PreferenceDlgCheckUpdateButton=Check Now +LoadingNewTabMsg=Loading... +EditOption=Edit +OpenURL=Open URL +PreferenceDialogBrowseButtonTitle=Browse +CommentText=Comment +ShowBy=Show by +ViewALLComments=View All +ViewRejectedComments=View Rejected +SelectStatus=Select Status +SendCommentsServerMessage=Comments sent to the server +CommentsAddEmptyError=Cannot add empty comments +SaveButtonToolTip=Click to add comments to database +PreferenceDialogUserNameError=Please specify valid reviewer name +PreferenceDlgAutoUpdateContent=Auto Update Content +OpenInNewTab=Open in new tab +PreferenceDlgCommentSyncLocation=Folder Location: +Reject=Reject +EntireHelpPrintProgressMsg=Loading topic %1 of %2 topics... +SendCommentsFileMessage=Comments sent to the shared location +CommentFileMismatchError=Help ID does not match, cannot import comments +InvalidXML=Invalid XML file +GlossaryDefinitionBoxTitle=Glossary Definition +FavoriteDisplayTopic=Display +EditRSSFeedDlgTitle=Edit RSS Feed +CheckingforUpdateMsg=Checking for updates... +GoOnline=go online +ProgressBarTitle=Please wait... +BrowseSeqPrintProgressMsg=Loading topics for printing... +ContentCategoryList=Select a content category +AboutDescription=Description: +SearchResultDefaultBookmark=Search Result for +FavoriteAddFolderTopic=Add Folder +LinksButtonTitle=Links +NewRSSFeedDlgTitle=Add New RSS Feed +FavoriteInvalidNameError=Invalid Name +MinimizeAppButton=Minimize +MaximizeAppButton=Maximize +AllTopics=Comments for All Topics +LoginFailure=Incorrect password +ConfirmDelete=Do you want to delete the comment? +NewestOnBottomLabel=Newest on Bottom +CommentDateTimeFormatter=DD/MM/YYYY, JJ:NN +AboutButtonTitle=About +SendToServerMenu=Send to Server +SaveXMLFileDlg=Save Comments XML File +AddCommentButtonToolTip=Show/hide add comment box +SaveCommentText=Add Comments: +SaveButton=Save +PreferenceDialogAllCommentsDeleted=All Comments are deleted +PreferenceDlgShowBrowseSequence=Show Browse Sequence +NewBookmarkName=Link Name +RSSSelectLabel=Select: +ViewerDialogYesButton=Yes +RememberMe=Remember Me +GoOffline=go offline +ModerationModeToolTip=Switch to Moderation Mode +AboutDialogTitle=About +SendToFileMenu=Send to File +PrintThisCategory=Print this category +BrowseSequenceBoxTitle=How do I +OpenInBrowser=Open in Browser +NewRSSFeedName=RSS Feed Name: +CurrentTopic=Comments for Current Topic +AcceptAll=Accept All +Anonymous=Anonymous +PrintNotAllowedWariningMsg=Cannot print the following topics. Do you want to continue? +NewestOnTopLabel=Newest on Top +FileError=Error while accessing shared comment file +ForwardButtonToolTip=Forward +ErrorShowingHelpFile=Error in accessing help file +FavoriteRenameTopic=Rename +FavoriteAlredyExists=already exists in Favorites +CloseAppButton=Close +ErrorInInstallingUpdate=Error encountered during installation +ErrorWhileUpdating=Error occurred while updating +Author=Author +AuthenticateTitle=Authenticate +LoginFailureTitle=Authentication +CurrentOfflineText=Currently working offline +ShowDateMenu=Date +SendRcvCommentButtonToolTip=Send and Receive Comments +ShowHideButtonToolTip=Show/Hide +AddToFavoriteMenuItem=Add to Links +PrintThisPage=Print this Page +PreferenceDlgUseLoginName=Always use Log-in name for Reviewer name +PrintAlertTitle=Print +FeedsButtonTitle=RSS Feeds +MarkAsRead=Mark as Read +MarkAsUnread=Mark as Unread +NewRSSFeedURL=RSS Feed URL: +EditBookmarkDlgTitle=Edit Link +RSSRefreshLabel=Refresh +GenericDeleteMsg=Do you want to delete selected item? +PreviewMode=Preview Mode +Accept=Accept +Password=Password: +OnlyPending=Pending +ServerSyncRequiredButtonLabel=Synchronize Now +SignOut=Sign Out +CommentsBy=Comments By: +PreferenceDialogBrowseCommentSyncLocation=Select the location to store comments: +ReceiveCommentsServerMessage=Comments received from the server +SaveCommentTextToolTip=Write Comments you want to add +SearchButtonTitle=Search +AddNewFavoriteMenu=Add Link +FavoriteDeleteButton=Delete +NewBookmarkDlgTitle=Add New Link +UpdateMsgTitle=Auto-Update +NoUpdateLocationSpecified=Update location is not present +DownloadingUpdate=Downloading updates... +UpdateAvailableWithVersion=An update to version %s is available. Do you want to update now? +PreferenceDlgChkCommentLocation=Use default location to sync comments +Status=Status +Delete=Delete +ErrorServerConnection=Error while connecting to the server. Check the Internet connection and try again. +WelcomeUserOnSign=Welcome %1 +ModerationRightsNotPresent=Administrator rights are required to show Moderation pod +UpdatingCommentsForUserMessage=Sending comments... +SyncModerationFromServerMsg=Send/Receive for comments completed. +RecieveCommentFromServerStartMsg=Receiving comments... +SyncMessage=Send/Receive for comments completed +SearchButtonToolTip=Press Ctrl+Enter to open search results in new tab +PrintEntireHelp=Print entire Help +PreferenceDlgDeleteAllComments=Delete all Comments +NewSearchTabTitle=Search Results +SearchResultError=No search results found +PreferenceDlgHighLightSearch=Highlight Search Results +View=View +ClickHere=Click here to +ViewAcceptedComments=View Accepted +SendCommentToServerStartMsg=Sending comments... +ShowReviewerMenu=Reviewer +DeleteCommentButtonToolTip=Delete selected Comment +SendRcvCommentButton=Send and Receive +FavoritesTopMenuToolTip=Add or View Favorites +PrefTitle=Preferences +ViewerDialogCancelButton=Cancel +FavoriteDeleteTopic=Delete +FavoriteAddRSSFeed=Add RSS Feed +ViewerDialogNoButton=No +Update=Update +ModerationPodTitle=Moderation +ConnectionError=Cannot access shared location for comments +ReceiveFromServerMenu=Receive from Server +PrintMenuOptionsToolTip=Print Menu +ViewerDialogOKButton=OK +IndexBoxTitle=Index +GlossaryBoxTitle=Glossary +FavoriteBoxTitle=Favorites +InstallationStarted=Starting installation... +NewUpdateAvailableMsg=New Update +RSSReadLabel=Read +RSSUnReadLabel=Unread +OnlyNew=New +ErrorMsgTitle=Error +LoginFailedErrorMsg=Login failed. Try again. +CommentDateFormatter=DD/MM/YYYY +[PrintedDoc] +TitlePageFileName=Chapter__Title_Page.doc +TitlePage=Title Page +GlossaryDefinitionStyleName=Glossary Definition +TitlePageTitleStyleName=Title Page Title +TocPageTitleStyleName=Table of Contents Page Title +CrossReferencePrefix=See +ChapterFileNamePrefix=Chapter_ +GlossaryTermStyleName=Glossary Term +GlossaryHeadingStyleName=Glossary Heading +TableOfContents=Table of Contents +[GlossaryTab] +TabCaption=&Glossary +DefinitionCaption=&Definition For: +TermCaption=&Term +[ResponsiveHelp] +SearchResultsPerScreen=Search results per page +Reset=Reset +HomeButton=Home +GlossaryFilterTerms=Filter Terms +HighlightSearchResults=Highlight Search Results +ApplyTip=Apply +Welcome_header=Welcome to our Help Center +ShowAll=All +EnableAndSearch=Display results with all search words +Welcome_text=What can we help you with today? +PreviousLabel=Previous +Next=Next +NoScriptErrorMsg=Enable JavaScript support in the browser to view this page. +Print=Print +Search=-Search- +Canceled=Canceled +ShowHide=Show/Hide +Loading=Loading... +EndOfResults=End of search results. +favoritesLabel=Favorites +Logo=Logo +ContentFilterChanged=Content filter is changed, search again +SidebarToggleTip=Expand/Collapse +JS_alert_LoadXmlFailed=Failed to load XML file +Searching=Searching... +SearchTitle=Search +Copyright=© Copyright 2017. All rights reserved. +favoritesNameLabel=Name +JS_alert_InitDatabaseFailed=Failed to initialize database +Cancel=Cancel +unsetAsFavorite=Unset as favorite +nofavoritesFound=You have not marked any topic as favorite. +UnknownError=Unknown error +ResultsFoundText=%1 result(s) found for %2 +SearchPageTitle=Search Results +TopicsNotFound=No results found +setAsFavorites=Add to Favorites +setAsFavorite=Set as favorite +Filter=Filter +SearchButtonTitle=Search for... +NextLabel=Next +TableOfContents=Table of Contents +HideAll=Hide All +SearchOptions=Search Options +Back=Back +JS_alert_InvalidExpression_1=The search string you typed is not valid. +Prev=Previous +IndexFilterKewords=Filter Keywords +IeCompatibilityErrorMsg=This page cannot be viewed in Internet Explorer 8 or earlier version. +NavTip=Close +ToTopTip=Go to top +FavoriteBoxTitle=Favorites +ShowTopicInContext=Click here to see this page in full context +[WebHelp] +Definition=Definition: +JS_alert_InvalidExpression_2=Click +IndexSelectTopicTitle=Select a Topic +JS_alert_InvalidExpression_3=Help +Title=Title +nls_button_go_hint=Go Search +nls_body_instruction=Enter your question in the text box above, then click GO. +About=About +RelateTopicListPrompt=Click a topic, then click Display. +FtsInputPrompt=Type in the word(s) to search for: +ToolBarSearchBtnText=Go +SearchLabel=Search +WebSearch=WebSearch +Remote_Page=Remote Page +Page=Page +TotalNumberOfSearchResults=Total Number of Search Results : %1 +TopicsFound=Topics Found +SuggestViewNoFrameMessage=To view the Help system without frames click on this +JS_alert_cantLoadProject=Can't load project: +Print=Print +Display=Display +IndexInputPrompt=Type in the keyword to find: +FtsMaxResult=Search results per page +Blank_topic_text=This topic was created by WinHelp Project Conversion Wizard, and is the destination of a missing topic or broken hyperlink. +JS_alert_NotAllDatabaseInited=Warning: Not all databases have been loaded. Some topics will not be found. +Canceled=Canceled +Book=Book +Show_Navigation_Component=Show Navigation Component +MergeError1=The merged Help system +MergeError2=is using a different language from the master Help system, which will cause the index and full-text search functionality to be disabled in the merged Help system. +ContentCategoryList=Select a content category +JS_alert_ProjectLoadingFail=Could not load correctly, please click Refresh. +GeneratedBy=Generated by +LoadingIndex=Loading Index... +FtsHilitePrompt=Highlight search results +SuggestViewNoFrameMsg2=hyperlink. +JS_alert_LoadXmlFailed=Error: Failed to load xml file. +Rank=Rank +IndexBtnText=Go +LoadingData=Loading data, please wait... +LoadingTOCItem=Loading Table of Contents: +Searching=Searching... +JS_alert_appletNotLoad= Unable to load applet. If you are using an old version of Netscape, the prefs.js file needs to be edited. +SearchPrompt=- Search - +SyncTocTooltip=Sync TOC +nls_button_go_text=Go +Cancel=Cancel +JS_alert_colorlimitation=WebHelp has detected that your display is set to 16 colors. For full WebHelp support, please set your display to use 256 or more colors. +JS_alert_InitDatabaseFailed=Error: Failed to initialize database. +NextTooltip=Next Topic +IndexSelectTopicLabel=Select a topic, then click Display +JS_alert_InvalidExpression_4=to learn how to use query expression.(To be finished) +nls_body_empty=Sorry, we were unable to find a good answer for your question. +IndexSelectTopicError=Please select a topic. +PoweredBy=Powered by +Author=Author +TopicsNotFound=No Topics Found. +CantSearch=Cannot search for that phrase. +FtsBtnText=Go +IndexAlphabetBookmarks=ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ +Term=Term: +Done=Done +InTopicSearchBtnText=Go +PreTooltip=Previous Topic +Hide_Navigation_Component=Hide Navigation Component +LoadingContentsData=Loading, click here to cancel... +LoadingFTS=Reading Search Data... +JS_alert_ErrorInLoading=Error in Loading navigation component. Please regenerate WebHelp. +EnableAndSearchString=Show results that include all search words +CantOpenURLorFile=Can't open URL or file +CompletingContents=Completing Contents... +Find=Find +LoadingContents=Loading contents, please wait... +BrowserLimitedMessage=Your browser does not support frames. We recommend that you update your browser to a version that supports frames. +JS_alert_InvalidExpression_1=The words you typed is not a valid expression. +nls_edit_label=Type in your question: +[BrowseSequence] +NextCaption=Next +BlockTooltip=Select Block +NextTooltip=Next Topic +PreTooltip=Previous Topic +PreCaption=Previous +[Common] +SyncToc=SyncToc +Show=Show +Next=>> +Contents=Contents +Search=Search +Hide=Hide +Logo/Author=Powered By +Disabled Next=>> +Index=Index +Seperate= | +Glossary=Glossary +Disabled Prev=<< +Prev=<< +OpenLinkInNewTab=Open in new tab diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.css b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.css new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e6fc2c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.css @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ +.dtree { + font-family: Verdana, Geneva, Arial, Helvetica, sans-serif; + font-size: 13px !important; + color: #333; + white-space: nowrap; + line-height: 1.3; +} +.dtree img { + border: 0px; + vertical-align: middle; + margin-right: 4px; + width: 14px; + height: 14px; +} +.dtree a { + color: #333; + text-decoration: none; + display: inline-block; + padding: 2px 4px; + line-height: 1.3; + margin: 0; + font-size: 13px !important; +} +.dtree a.node, .dtree a.nodeSel { + white-space: nowrap; + padding: 1px 2px; + margin: 0; +} +.dtree a.node:hover, .dtree a.nodeSel:hover { + color: #000; + background-color: #e8f4ff; + text-decoration: none; +} +.dtree a.nodeSel { + background-color: #c0d2ec; + font-weight: 500; +} +.dtree .clip { + overflow: hidden; + margin-left: 16px; +} +.dtree p { + margin: 4px 0 2px 0; + padding: 2px 0; + font-size: 11px; + line-height: 1.1; +} +.dtree > p { + border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd; + padding-bottom: 3px; + margin-bottom: 4px; +} +.dtree > p a { + padding: 2px 5px; + margin: 0 1px; + background: #f8f8f8; + border: 1px solid #ddd; + border-radius: 2px; + font-size: 10px; +} +.dtree > p a:hover { + background: #e8e8e8; +} +.dtree div { + line-height: 1.1; + margin: 0; + padding: 0; +} \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.js b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.js new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93e2893 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.js @@ -0,0 +1,640 @@ +// Node object + +function Node(id, pid, name, url, title, target, icon, iconOpen, open) { + this.id = id; + + this.pid = pid; + + this.name = name; + + this.url = url; + + this.title = title; + + this.target = target; + + this.icon = icon; + + this.iconOpen = iconOpen; + + this._io = open || false; + + this._is = false; + + this._ls = false; + + this._hc = false; + + this._ai = 0; + + this._p; +} + +// Tree object + +function dTree(objName) { + this.config = { + target: null, + + folderLinks: true, + + useSelection: true, + + useCookies: true, + + useLines: true, + + useIcons: true, + + useStatusText: false, + + closeSameLevel: false, + + inOrder: false, + }; + + this.icon = { + root: "img/base.gif", + + folder: "img/folder.gif", + + folderOpen: "img/folderopen.gif", + + node: "img/page.gif", + + empty: "img/empty.gif", + + line: "img/line.gif", + + join: "img/join.gif", + + joinBottom: "img/joinbottom.gif", + + plus: "img/plus.gif", + + plusBottom: "img/plusbottom.gif", + + minus: "img/minus.gif", + + minusBottom: "img/minusbottom.gif", + + nlPlus: "img/nolines_plus.gif", + + nlMinus: "img/nolines_minus.gif", + }; + + this.obj = objName; + + this.aNodes = []; + + this.aIndent = []; + + this.root = new Node(-1); + + this.selectedNode = null; + + this.selectedFound = false; + + this.completed = false; +} + +// Adds a new node to the node array + +dTree.prototype.add = function ( + id, + pid, + name, + url, + title, + target, + icon, + iconOpen, + open +) { + this.aNodes[this.aNodes.length] = new Node( + id, + pid, + name, + url, + title, + target, + icon, + iconOpen, + open + ); +}; + +// Open/close all nodes + +dTree.prototype.openAll = function () { + this.oAll(true); +}; + +dTree.prototype.closeAll = function () { + this.oAll(false); +}; + +// Outputs the tree to the page + +dTree.prototype.toString = function () { + var str = '
\n'; + + if (document.getElementById) { + if (this.config.useCookies) this.selectedNode = this.getSelected(); + + str += this.addNode(this.root); + } else str += "Browser not supported."; + + str += "
"; + + if (!this.selectedFound) this.selectedNode = null; + + this.completed = true; + + return str; +}; + +// Creates the tree structure + +dTree.prototype.addNode = function (pNode) { + var str = ""; + + var n = 0; + + if (this.config.inOrder) n = pNode._ai; + + for (n; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n].pid == pNode.id) { + var cn = this.aNodes[n]; + + cn._p = pNode; + + cn._ai = n; + + this.setCS(cn); + + if (!cn.target && this.config.target) cn.target = this.config.target; + + if (cn._hc && !cn._io && this.config.useCookies) + cn._io = this.isOpen(cn.id); + + if (!this.config.folderLinks && cn._hc) cn.url = null; + + if ( + this.config.useSelection && + cn.id == this.selectedNode && + !this.selectedFound + ) { + cn._is = true; + + this.selectedNode = n; + + this.selectedFound = true; + } + + str += this.node(cn, n); + + if (cn._ls) break; + } + } + + return str; +}; + +// Creates the node icon, url and text + +dTree.prototype.node = function (node, nodeId) { + var str = '
' + this.indent(node, nodeId); + + if (this.config.useIcons) { + if (!node.icon) + node.icon = + this.root.id == node.pid + ? this.icon.root + : node._hc + ? this.icon.folder + : this.icon.node; + + if (!node.iconOpen) + node.iconOpen = node._hc ? this.icon.folderOpen : this.icon.node; + + if (this.root.id == node.pid) { + node.icon = this.icon.root; + + node.iconOpen = this.icon.root; + } + + str += + ''; + } + + if (node.url) { + // Enhanced mobile detection with error handling - ALWAYS use _self for mobile + var linkTarget = "body"; // Default for desktop frameset + + try { + // Check if it's a mobile/touch device + var isMobile = + /android|webos|iphone|ipod|blackberry|iemobile|opera mini/i.test( + navigator.userAgent.toLowerCase() + ) || + typeof window.orientation !== "undefined" || + "ontouchstart" in window; + + // Mobile devices ALWAYS open in same tab + if (isMobile) { + linkTarget = "_self"; + } + } catch (e) { + // Fallback: check if we're in a frameset + if (window.self !== window.parent) { + linkTarget = "body"; // We're in a frame, use body target + } else { + linkTarget = "_self"; // Not in frame, use self + } + } + + str += + ''; + + str += node.name; + + if (node.url || ((!this.config.folderLinks || !node.url) && node._hc)) + str += ""; + + str += "
"; + + if (node._hc) { + str += + '
'; + + str += this.addNode(node); + + str += "
"; + } + + this.aIndent.pop(); + + return str; +}; + +// Adds the empty and line icons + +dTree.prototype.indent = function (node, nodeId) { + var str = ""; + + if (this.root.id != node.pid) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aIndent.length; n++) + str += + ''; + + node._ls ? this.aIndent.push(0) : this.aIndent.push(1); + + if (node._hc) { + str += + ''; + } else + str += + ''; + } + + return str; +}; + +// Checks if a node has any children and if it is the last sibling + +dTree.prototype.setCS = function (node) { + var lastId; + + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n].pid == node.id) node._hc = true; + + if (this.aNodes[n].pid == node.pid) lastId = this.aNodes[n].id; + } + + if (lastId == node.id) node._ls = true; +}; + +// Returns the selected node + +dTree.prototype.getSelected = function () { + var sn = this.getCookie("cs" + this.obj); + + return sn ? sn : null; +}; + +// Highlights the selected node + +dTree.prototype.s = function (id) { + if (!this.config.useSelection) return; + + var cn = this.aNodes[id]; + + if (cn._hc && !this.config.folderLinks) return; + + if (this.selectedNode != id) { + if (this.selectedNode || this.selectedNode == 0) { + eOld = document.getElementById("s" + this.obj + this.selectedNode); + + eOld.className = "node"; + } + + eNew = document.getElementById("s" + this.obj + id); + + eNew.className = "nodeSel"; + + this.selectedNode = id; + + if (this.config.useCookies) this.setCookie("cs" + this.obj, cn.id); + } +}; + +// Toggle Open or close + +dTree.prototype.o = function (id) { + var cn = this.aNodes[id]; + + this.nodeStatus(!cn._io, id, cn._ls); + + cn._io = !cn._io; + + if (this.config.closeSameLevel) this.closeLevel(cn); + + if (this.config.useCookies) this.updateCookie(); +}; + +// Open or close all nodes + +dTree.prototype.oAll = function (status) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n]._hc && this.aNodes[n].pid != this.root.id) { + this.nodeStatus(status, n, this.aNodes[n]._ls); + + this.aNodes[n]._io = status; + } + } + + if (this.config.useCookies) this.updateCookie(); +}; + +// Opens the tree to a specific node + +dTree.prototype.openTo = function (nId, bSelect, bFirst) { + if (!bFirst) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n].id == nId) { + nId = n; + + break; + } + } + } + + var cn = this.aNodes[nId]; + + if (cn.pid == this.root.id || !cn._p) return; + + cn._io = true; + + cn._is = bSelect; + + if (this.completed && cn._hc) this.nodeStatus(true, cn._ai, cn._ls); + + if (this.completed && bSelect) this.s(cn._ai); + else if (bSelect) this._sn = cn._ai; + + this.openTo(cn._p._ai, false, true); +}; + +// Closes all nodes on the same level as certain node + +dTree.prototype.closeLevel = function (node) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if ( + this.aNodes[n].pid == node.pid && + this.aNodes[n].id != node.id && + this.aNodes[n]._hc + ) { + this.nodeStatus(false, n, this.aNodes[n]._ls); + + this.aNodes[n]._io = false; + + this.closeAllChildren(this.aNodes[n]); + } + } +}; + +// Closes all children of a node + +dTree.prototype.closeAllChildren = function (node) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n].pid == node.id && this.aNodes[n]._hc) { + if (this.aNodes[n]._io) this.nodeStatus(false, n, this.aNodes[n]._ls); + + this.aNodes[n]._io = false; + + this.closeAllChildren(this.aNodes[n]); + } + } +}; + +// Change the status of a node(open or closed) + +dTree.prototype.nodeStatus = function (status, id, bottom) { + eDiv = document.getElementById("d" + this.obj + id); + + eJoin = document.getElementById("j" + this.obj + id); + + if (this.config.useIcons) { + eIcon = document.getElementById("i" + this.obj + id); + + eIcon.src = status ? this.aNodes[id].iconOpen : this.aNodes[id].icon; + } + + eJoin.src = this.config.useLines + ? status + ? bottom + ? this.icon.minusBottom + : this.icon.minus + : bottom + ? this.icon.plusBottom + : this.icon.plus + : status + ? this.icon.nlMinus + : this.icon.nlPlus; + + eDiv.style.display = status ? "block" : "none"; +}; + +// [Cookie] Clears a cookie + +dTree.prototype.clearCookie = function () { + var now = new Date(); + + var yesterday = new Date(now.getTime() - 1000 * 60 * 60 * 24); + + this.setCookie("co" + this.obj, "cookieValue", yesterday); + + this.setCookie("cs" + this.obj, "cookieValue", yesterday); +}; + +// [Cookie] Sets value in a cookie + +dTree.prototype.setCookie = function ( + cookieName, + cookieValue, + expires, + path, + domain, + secure +) { + document.cookie = + escape(cookieName) + + "=" + + escape(cookieValue) + + (expires ? "; expires=" + expires.toGMTString() : "") + + (path ? "; path=" + path : "") + + (domain ? "; domain=" + domain : "") + + (secure ? "; secure" : ""); +}; + +// [Cookie] Gets a value from a cookie + +dTree.prototype.getCookie = function (cookieName) { + var cookieValue = ""; + + var posName = document.cookie.indexOf(escape(cookieName) + "="); + + if (posName != -1) { + var posValue = posName + (escape(cookieName) + "=").length; + + var endPos = document.cookie.indexOf(";", posValue); + + if (endPos != -1) + cookieValue = unescape(document.cookie.substring(posValue, endPos)); + else cookieValue = unescape(document.cookie.substring(posValue)); + } + + return cookieValue; +}; + +// [Cookie] Returns ids of open nodes as a string + +dTree.prototype.updateCookie = function () { + var str = ""; + + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n]._io && this.aNodes[n].pid != this.root.id) { + if (str) str += "."; + + str += this.aNodes[n].id; + } + } + + this.setCookie("co" + this.obj, str); +}; + +// [Cookie] Checks if a node id is in a cookie + +dTree.prototype.isOpen = function (id) { + var aOpen = this.getCookie("co" + this.obj).split("."); + + for (var n = 0; n < aOpen.length; n++) if (aOpen[n] == id) return true; + + return false; +}; + +// If Push and pop is not implemented by the browser + +if (!Array.prototype.push) { + Array.prototype.push = function array_push() { + for (var i = 0; i < arguments.length; i++) this[this.length] = arguments[i]; + + return this.length; + }; +} + +if (!Array.prototype.pop) { + Array.prototype.pop = function array_pop() { + lastElement = this[this.length - 1]; + + this.length = Math.max(this.length - 1, 0); + + return lastElement; + }; +} diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.js.backup b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.js.backup new file mode 100644 index 0000000..51765d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___dtree.js.backup @@ -0,0 +1,612 @@ +// Node object + +function Node(id, pid, name, url, title, target, icon, iconOpen, open) { + this.id = id; + + this.pid = pid; + + this.name = name; + + this.url = url; + + this.title = title; + + this.target = target; + + this.icon = icon; + + this.iconOpen = iconOpen; + + this._io = open || false; + + this._is = false; + + this._ls = false; + + this._hc = false; + + this._ai = 0; + + this._p; +} + +// Tree object + +function dTree(objName) { + this.config = { + target: null, + + folderLinks: true, + + useSelection: true, + + useCookies: true, + + useLines: true, + + useIcons: true, + + useStatusText: false, + + closeSameLevel: false, + + inOrder: false, + }; + + this.icon = { + root: "img/base.gif", + + folder: "img/folder.gif", + + folderOpen: "img/folderopen.gif", + + node: "img/page.gif", + + empty: "img/empty.gif", + + line: "img/line.gif", + + join: "img/join.gif", + + joinBottom: "img/joinbottom.gif", + + plus: "img/plus.gif", + + plusBottom: "img/plusbottom.gif", + + minus: "img/minus.gif", + + minusBottom: "img/minusbottom.gif", + + nlPlus: "img/nolines_plus.gif", + + nlMinus: "img/nolines_minus.gif", + }; + + this.obj = objName; + + this.aNodes = []; + + this.aIndent = []; + + this.root = new Node(-1); + + this.selectedNode = null; + + this.selectedFound = false; + + this.completed = false; +} + +// Adds a new node to the node array + +dTree.prototype.add = function ( + id, + pid, + name, + url, + title, + target, + icon, + iconOpen, + open +) { + this.aNodes[this.aNodes.length] = new Node( + id, + pid, + name, + url, + title, + target, + icon, + iconOpen, + open + ); +}; + +// Open/close all nodes + +dTree.prototype.openAll = function () { + this.oAll(true); +}; + +dTree.prototype.closeAll = function () { + this.oAll(false); +}; + +// Outputs the tree to the page + +dTree.prototype.toString = function () { + var str = '
\n'; + + if (document.getElementById) { + if (this.config.useCookies) this.selectedNode = this.getSelected(); + + str += this.addNode(this.root); + } else str += "Browser not supported."; + + str += "
"; + + if (!this.selectedFound) this.selectedNode = null; + + this.completed = true; + + return str; +}; + +// Creates the tree structure + +dTree.prototype.addNode = function (pNode) { + var str = ""; + + var n = 0; + + if (this.config.inOrder) n = pNode._ai; + + for (n; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n].pid == pNode.id) { + var cn = this.aNodes[n]; + + cn._p = pNode; + + cn._ai = n; + + this.setCS(cn); + + if (!cn.target && this.config.target) cn.target = this.config.target; + + if (cn._hc && !cn._io && this.config.useCookies) + cn._io = this.isOpen(cn.id); + + if (!this.config.folderLinks && cn._hc) cn.url = null; + + if ( + this.config.useSelection && + cn.id == this.selectedNode && + !this.selectedFound + ) { + cn._is = true; + + this.selectedNode = n; + + this.selectedFound = true; + } + + str += this.node(cn, n); + + if (cn._ls) break; + } + } + + return str; +}; + +// Creates the node icon, url and text + +dTree.prototype.node = function (node, nodeId) { + var str = '
' + this.indent(node, nodeId); + + if (this.config.useIcons) { + if (!node.icon) + node.icon = + this.root.id == node.pid + ? this.icon.root + : node._hc + ? this.icon.folder + : this.icon.node; + + if (!node.iconOpen) + node.iconOpen = node._hc ? this.icon.folderOpen : this.icon.node; + + if (this.root.id == node.pid) { + node.icon = this.icon.root; + + node.iconOpen = this.icon.root; + } + + str += + ''; + } + + if (node.url) { + str += + ''; + + str += node.name; + + if (node.url || ((!this.config.folderLinks || !node.url) && node._hc)) + str += ""; + + str += "
"; + + if (node._hc) { + str += + '
'; + + str += this.addNode(node); + + str += "
"; + } + + this.aIndent.pop(); + + return str; +}; + +// Adds the empty and line icons + +dTree.prototype.indent = function (node, nodeId) { + var str = ""; + + if (this.root.id != node.pid) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aIndent.length; n++) + str += + ''; + + node._ls ? this.aIndent.push(0) : this.aIndent.push(1); + + if (node._hc) { + str += + ''; + } else + str += + ''; + } + + return str; +}; + +// Checks if a node has any children and if it is the last sibling + +dTree.prototype.setCS = function (node) { + var lastId; + + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n].pid == node.id) node._hc = true; + + if (this.aNodes[n].pid == node.pid) lastId = this.aNodes[n].id; + } + + if (lastId == node.id) node._ls = true; +}; + +// Returns the selected node + +dTree.prototype.getSelected = function () { + var sn = this.getCookie("cs" + this.obj); + + return sn ? sn : null; +}; + +// Highlights the selected node + +dTree.prototype.s = function (id) { + if (!this.config.useSelection) return; + + var cn = this.aNodes[id]; + + if (cn._hc && !this.config.folderLinks) return; + + if (this.selectedNode != id) { + if (this.selectedNode || this.selectedNode == 0) { + eOld = document.getElementById("s" + this.obj + this.selectedNode); + + eOld.className = "node"; + } + + eNew = document.getElementById("s" + this.obj + id); + + eNew.className = "nodeSel"; + + this.selectedNode = id; + + if (this.config.useCookies) this.setCookie("cs" + this.obj, cn.id); + } +}; + +// Toggle Open or close + +dTree.prototype.o = function (id) { + var cn = this.aNodes[id]; + + this.nodeStatus(!cn._io, id, cn._ls); + + cn._io = !cn._io; + + if (this.config.closeSameLevel) this.closeLevel(cn); + + if (this.config.useCookies) this.updateCookie(); +}; + +// Open or close all nodes + +dTree.prototype.oAll = function (status) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n]._hc && this.aNodes[n].pid != this.root.id) { + this.nodeStatus(status, n, this.aNodes[n]._ls); + + this.aNodes[n]._io = status; + } + } + + if (this.config.useCookies) this.updateCookie(); +}; + +// Opens the tree to a specific node + +dTree.prototype.openTo = function (nId, bSelect, bFirst) { + if (!bFirst) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n].id == nId) { + nId = n; + + break; + } + } + } + + var cn = this.aNodes[nId]; + + if (cn.pid == this.root.id || !cn._p) return; + + cn._io = true; + + cn._is = bSelect; + + if (this.completed && cn._hc) this.nodeStatus(true, cn._ai, cn._ls); + + if (this.completed && bSelect) this.s(cn._ai); + else if (bSelect) this._sn = cn._ai; + + this.openTo(cn._p._ai, false, true); +}; + +// Closes all nodes on the same level as certain node + +dTree.prototype.closeLevel = function (node) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if ( + this.aNodes[n].pid == node.pid && + this.aNodes[n].id != node.id && + this.aNodes[n]._hc + ) { + this.nodeStatus(false, n, this.aNodes[n]._ls); + + this.aNodes[n]._io = false; + + this.closeAllChildren(this.aNodes[n]); + } + } +}; + +// Closes all children of a node + +dTree.prototype.closeAllChildren = function (node) { + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n].pid == node.id && this.aNodes[n]._hc) { + if (this.aNodes[n]._io) this.nodeStatus(false, n, this.aNodes[n]._ls); + + this.aNodes[n]._io = false; + + this.closeAllChildren(this.aNodes[n]); + } + } +}; + +// Change the status of a node(open or closed) + +dTree.prototype.nodeStatus = function (status, id, bottom) { + eDiv = document.getElementById("d" + this.obj + id); + + eJoin = document.getElementById("j" + this.obj + id); + + if (this.config.useIcons) { + eIcon = document.getElementById("i" + this.obj + id); + + eIcon.src = status ? this.aNodes[id].iconOpen : this.aNodes[id].icon; + } + + eJoin.src = this.config.useLines + ? status + ? bottom + ? this.icon.minusBottom + : this.icon.minus + : bottom + ? this.icon.plusBottom + : this.icon.plus + : status + ? this.icon.nlMinus + : this.icon.nlPlus; + + eDiv.style.display = status ? "block" : "none"; +}; + +// [Cookie] Clears a cookie + +dTree.prototype.clearCookie = function () { + var now = new Date(); + + var yesterday = new Date(now.getTime() - 1000 * 60 * 60 * 24); + + this.setCookie("co" + this.obj, "cookieValue", yesterday); + + this.setCookie("cs" + this.obj, "cookieValue", yesterday); +}; + +// [Cookie] Sets value in a cookie + +dTree.prototype.setCookie = function ( + cookieName, + cookieValue, + expires, + path, + domain, + secure +) { + document.cookie = + escape(cookieName) + + "=" + + escape(cookieValue) + + (expires ? "; expires=" + expires.toGMTString() : "") + + (path ? "; path=" + path : "") + + (domain ? "; domain=" + domain : "") + + (secure ? "; secure" : ""); +}; + +// [Cookie] Gets a value from a cookie + +dTree.prototype.getCookie = function (cookieName) { + var cookieValue = ""; + + var posName = document.cookie.indexOf(escape(cookieName) + "="); + + if (posName != -1) { + var posValue = posName + (escape(cookieName) + "=").length; + + var endPos = document.cookie.indexOf(";", posValue); + + if (endPos != -1) + cookieValue = unescape(document.cookie.substring(posValue, endPos)); + else cookieValue = unescape(document.cookie.substring(posValue)); + } + + return cookieValue; +}; + +// [Cookie] Returns ids of open nodes as a string + +dTree.prototype.updateCookie = function () { + var str = ""; + + for (var n = 0; n < this.aNodes.length; n++) { + if (this.aNodes[n]._io && this.aNodes[n].pid != this.root.id) { + if (str) str += "."; + + str += this.aNodes[n].id; + } + } + + this.setCookie("co" + this.obj, str); +}; + +// [Cookie] Checks if a node id is in a cookie + +dTree.prototype.isOpen = function (id) { + var aOpen = this.getCookie("co" + this.obj).split("."); + + for (var n = 0; n < aOpen.length; n++) if (aOpen[n] == id) return true; + + return false; +}; + +// If Push and pop is not implemented by the browser + +if (!Array.prototype.push) { + Array.prototype.push = function array_push() { + for (var i = 0; i < arguments.length; i++) this[this.length] = arguments[i]; + + return this.length; + }; +} + +if (!Array.prototype.pop) { + Array.prototype.pop = function array_pop() { + lastElement = this[this.length - 1]; + + this.length = Math.max(this.length - 1, 0); + + return lastElement; + }; +} diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9b849dc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm @@ -0,0 +1,3777 @@ + + + + + + + QB POS Help Navigation + + + + + + +
+
+

+ Welcome to PromptTech Solution +

+

+ Here is a full documentation of QuickBooks POS 2019 Desktop. +

+

+ Note: All online services are disabled and no subscription required. +

+
+
+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm.broken b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm.broken new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f5febda --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm.broken @@ -0,0 +1,755 @@ + + + + + +Contents + + + + + + + +
+
+ 🏠 Home +
QuickBooks Point of Sale Help
+
+
+
Note: All Online Services are disabled and won't work. This is Completely Offline and No subscription needed
+
+ +
+ + \ No newline at end of file diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm.corrupted b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm.corrupted new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa7f71e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/___left.htm.corrupted @@ -0,0 +1,3577 @@ + + + + + + Contents + + + + + +
+ +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js new file mode 100644 index 0000000..46ea9cf --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js @@ -0,0 +1,5483 @@ +// Dynamic HTML JavaScript +// Copyright © 1998-2012 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rights reserved. +// Version=9.0 + +// Warning:Do not modify this file. It is generated by Adobe RoboHelp® and changes will be overwritten. + +//// Segment Begin -- (JavaScript 1.0) + +/// Section Begin - General and relative topics(JavaScript 1.0) + +//{{HH_SYMBOL_SECTION +var HH_ChmFilename = "C:\\Users\\jbahulekar\\Desktop\\!chm_tmp_folder_0\\POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.chm"; +var HH_WindowName = "Second||main"; +var HH_GlossaryFont = ""; +var HH_Glossary = "0,0"; +var HH_Avenue = "0,0"; +var HH_ActiveX = false; +//}}HH_SYMBOL_SECTION +HH_ChmFilename = "C:\\Users\\jbahulekar\\Desktop\\POS_Help_v19R1_Feb_2020.chm"; + +//Begin to support previous generic parameters +//Get the information about the browser. +var gstrBsAgent = navigator.userAgent.toLowerCase(); +var gnBsVer = parseInt(navigator.appVersion); + +var gbBsOpera = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('opera') != -1); +var gbBsKonqueror = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('konqueror') != -1); +var gbBsSafari = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('safari') != -1); +var gbBsIE = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('msie') != -1) && !gbBsOpera && !gbBsKonqueror && !gbBsSafari; +var gbBsNS = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('mozilla') != -1) && ((gstrBsAgent.indexOf('spoofer') == -1) && (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('compatible') == -1)) && !gbBsOpera && !gbBsKonqueror && !gbBsSafari; + +var gbBsMac = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('mac') != -1); +var gbBsWindows = ((gstrBsAgent.indexOf('win') != -1) || (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('16bit') != -1)); +var gbBsSunOS = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf("sunos") != -1); + +var gbBsIE3Before = ((gbBsIE) && (gnBsVer <= 2)); +var gbBsNS3Before = ((gbBsNS) && (gnBsVer <= 3)); + +var gbBsNS2 = ((gbBsNS) && (gnBsVer <= 2)); +var gbBsNS3 = ((gbBsNS) && (gnBsVer == 3)); +var gbBsIE300301 = ((gbBsIE) && (gnBsVer == 2) && ((gstrBsAgent.indexOf("3.00") != -1)||(gstrBsAgent.indexOf("3.0a") != -1)||(gstrBsAgent.indexOf("3.0b")!=-1)||(gstrBsAgent.indexOf("3.01")!=-1))); +var gbBsIE302 = ((gbBsIE) && (gnBsVer == 2) && (gstrBsAgent.indexOf("3.02") != -1)); + +var gbBsNS4 = ((gbBsNS) && (gnBsVer >= 4)); +var gbBsNS6 = ((gbBsNS) && (gnBsVer >= 5)); +var gbBsNS7 = false; + +var gbBsIE4 = ((gbBsIE) && (gnBsVer >= 4)); +var gbBsIE5 = false; +var gbBsIE55 = false; +var gbBsIE7 = false; + +var gbBsOpera6 = false; +var gbBsOpera7 = false; + +var gbBsKonqueror3 = false; +var gbSafari3 = false ; +var gbAIR = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('adobeair')!=-1); +var gbChrome = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('chrome')!=-1); +var isLocal = document.location.protocol.substring(0, 4) == "file"; +var gbChromeLocal = window.chrome && isLocal ; +var gbInsideCHM = document.location.href.search("::")>0 && document.location.href.search(/chm/i)>0; +var gbBsIsMobile = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf("mobile") != -1); +var gbBsiOSDevice = gbBsMac && (gstrBsAgent.indexOf("ipad") !== -1 || gstrBsAgent.indexOf("iphone") !== -1 || gstrBsAgent.indexOf("macintosh") !== -1); + +if(gbBsIsMobile == false) +{ + gbBsIsMobile = isTouchDevice(); +} +function isTouchDevice() { + return !!('ontouchstart' in window) ? 1 : 0; +} + +gbBsIE = (navigator.appName.indexOf("Microsoft") != -1) && !gbBsOpera && !gbBsKonqueror && !gbBsSafari;; +if (gbBsIE) +{ + if (parseInt(navigator.appVersion) >= 4) { + gbBsIE4 = true; + if (gbBsIE4) { + var nPos = gstrBsAgent.indexOf("msie"); + var strIEversion = gstrBsAgent.substring(nPos + 5); + var nVersion = parseFloat(strIEversion); + if (nVersion >= 5) + gbBsIE5 = true; + if (nVersion >= 5.5) + { + if(nVersion >= 7) + gbBsIE7 = true; + gbBsIE55 = true; + } + } + } +} + +var re = new RegExp("rv:([0-9]{1,}[\.0-9]{0,})"); +if (re.exec(navigator.appVersion) != null) +{ + gbBsIE = true; + gbBsIE4 = true; + gbBsIE5 = true; + gbBsIE55 = true; +} + +var isNetScape = (navigator.appName.indexOf("Netscape") != -1); +var isMSIE = (gstrBsAgent.indexOf('msie') != -1); +if(isNetScape && isMSIE) +{ + //It is the (Preview) Browser Control + gbBsIE = true; + gbBsIE4 = true; + gbBsIE5 = true; + gbBsIE55 = true; +} + +if (gbBsNS6) +{ + var nPos=gstrBsAgent.indexOf("gecko"); + if(nPos!=-1) + { + var nPos2=gstrBsAgent.indexOf("/", nPos); + if(nPos2!=-1) + { + var nVersion=parseFloat(gstrBsAgent.substring(nPos2+1)); + if (nVersion>=20020823) + gbBsNS7=true; + } + } +} +if (gbBsOpera) +{ + var nPos = gstrBsAgent.indexOf("opera"); + if(nPos!=-1) + { + var nVersion = parseFloat(gstrBsAgent.substring(nPos+6)); + if (nVersion >= 6) + { + gbBsOpera6=true; + if (nVersion >=7) + gbBsOpera7=true; + } + } +} +if (gbBsKonqueror) +{ + var nPos = gstrBsAgent.indexOf("konqueror"); + if(nPos!=-1) + { + var nVersion = parseFloat(gstrBsAgent.substring(nPos+10)); + if (nVersion >= 3) + { + gbBsKonqueror3=true; + } + } +} + +if(gbBsSafari) +{ + var nPos = gstrBsAgent.indexOf("version/"); + if(nPos!=-1) + { + var nVersion = parseFloat(gstrBsAgent.substring(nPos+8,nPos+9)); + if (nVersion >= 3) + { + gbSafari3=true; + } + } +} + +if(gbChrome) +{ + //for the time being use same tests as safari + gbBsSafari = true ; + gbSafari3 = true; +} + +function insertAdjacentHTML(obj, where, htmlStr) +{ + if (gbBsIE || gbBsOpera7) + { + obj.insertAdjacentHTML(where, htmlStr); + } + else if (gbBsNS6 || gbBsSafari) + { + var r = obj.ownerDocument.createRange(); + r.setStartBefore(obj); + var parsedHTML = r.createContextualFragment(htmlStr); + + switch (where){ + case 'beforeBegin': + obj.parentNode.insertBefore(parsedHTML,obj); + break; + case 'afterBegin': + obj.insertBefore(parsedHTML,obj.firstChild); + break; + case 'beforeEnd': + obj.appendChild(parsedHTML); + break; + case 'afterEnd': + if (obj.nextSibling){ + obj.parentNode.insertBefore(parsedHTML,obj.nextSibling); + } else { + obj.parentNode.appendChild(parsedHTML); + } + break; + } + } +} + + +function setAttribute(obj, attr, val) +{ + if (gbBsIE) + obj.setAttribute(attr,val); + else + { + if (obj.setAttribute) + obj.setAttribute(attr,val); + else + obj.setProperty(attr,val,null); + } +}; + +function getAttribute(obj, attr) +{ + if (gbBsIE) + return obj.getAttribute(attr); + else + { + if ((obj.getAttribute)&&(obj.getAttribute(attr))) + return obj.getAttribute(attr); + else if ((obj.getPropertyValue)&&(obj.getPropertyValue(attr))) + return obj.getPropertyValue(attr) ; + else if ((obj.getPropertyCSSValue)&&(obj.getPropertyCSSValue(attr))) + return obj.getPropertyCSSValue(attr) ; + else + return null ; + } +}; + +// Utilities functions. +function BsscHasExtJs() +{ + if( gbBsIE3Before || gbBsNS3Before) + return false; + return true; +} + +// Register event handler +var gBsOnLoads = new Array(); // An array holds all the onload event handler. +var gBsOnClicks = new Array(); // An array holds all the onClick event handler. +var gBsOnUnLoads = new Array(); // An array holds all the OnUnLoad event handler. +var gBsOnMouseOvers = new Array(); // An array holds all the OnMouseOver event handler. +var gBsOnMouseOuts = new Array(); // An array holds all the OnMouseOut event handler. + +var gbOrignalOnMouseDown = null; + +function BsscRegisterOnLoad(funcHandler) +{ + var nLength = gBsOnLoads.length; + gBsOnLoads[nLength] = funcHandler; +} + +function BsscRegisterOnClick(funcHandler) +{ + var nLength = gBsOnClicks.length; + gBsOnClicks[nLength] = funcHandler; +} + +function BsscRegisterOnUnLoad(funcHandler) +{ + var nLength = gBsOnUnLoads.length; + gBsOnUnLoads[nLength] = funcHandler; +} + +function BsscRegisterOnMouseOver(funcHandler) +{ + var nLength = gBsOnMouseOvers.length; + gBsOnMouseOvers[nLength] = funcHandler; +} + +function BsscRegisterOnMouseOut(funcHandler) +{ + var nLength = gBsOnMouseOuts.length; + gBsOnMouseOuts[nLength] = funcHandler; +} + +function BsGeneralOnLoad() +{ + if (!gbBsIE4 && !gbBsNS4) + return; + + // Make everything visible in navigator +// if (gbBsNS4) { +// // Make some special effects items visible +// var arr ; +// if (gbBsNS6) +// arr = document.getElementsByTagName('*'); +// else +// arr = document.layers ; +// for (var iLayer = 0; iLayer < arr.length; iLayer++) { +// arr[iLayer].visibility = "visible"; +// arr[iLayer].left = 0 + 'px'; +// } +// } + +} + +// If resize the netscape browser, need to reload it. +function BsReDo() +{ + if (innerWidth != origWidth || innerHeight != origHeight) + location.reload(); +} +// End of the local functions. + +// The following functions are used by the html files. +function BSSCOnLoad(event) +{ + if( !BsscHasExtJs() ) + return; + for (var nElement = gBsOnLoads.length - 1; nElement >= 0; nElement--) + gBsOnLoads[nElement](); +} + +function BSSCOnClick(event) +{ + if (!BsscHasExtJs()) return; + + for (var nElement = gBsOnClicks.length - 1; nElement >= 0; nElement--) + gBsOnClicks[nElement](); +} + +function BSSCOnUnload(event) +{ + if (!BsscHasExtJs()) return; + for (var nElement = gBsOnUnLoads.length - 1; nElement >= 0; nElement--) + gBsOnUnLoads[nElement](); +} + +function BSSCOnMouseOver(event) +{ + if (!BsscHasExtJs()) return; + for (var nElement = gBsOnMouseOvers.length - 1; nElement >= 0; nElement--) + gBsOnMouseOvers[nElement](); +} + +function BSSCOnMouseOut(event) +{ + if (!BsscHasExtJs()) return; + for (var nElement = gBsOnMouseOuts.length - 1; nElement >= 0; nElement--) + { + gBsOnMouseOuts[nElement](); + } +} +// End of invocation of the event handle functions. + +// Add the GereralOnLoad to the onload array. +if (typeof(BsscRegisterOnLoad) != "undefined") +{ + BsscRegisterOnLoad(BsGeneralOnLoad); +} +if (gbBsNS4&&!gbBsNS6) { + origWidth = innerWidth; + origHeight = innerHeight; + onresize = BsReDo; +} +//End to support previous generic parameters + +//Begin to support previous HHActiveX invoking +function BsHHActivateComponents() +{ + if( HH_ActiveX && (HH_ChmFilename != "") && ((self == top) || (self == top.frames[0]))) + { + var objBody = getElementsByTag(document,"BODY")[0]; + if( typeof(objBody) == "object" ) + { + insertAdjacentHTML(objBody, "beforeEnd", ''); + if (typeof(HHComponentActivator) != "undefined" && HHComponentActivator.object) + HHComponentActivator.Activate(HH_ChmFilename, HH_WindowName, HH_GlossaryFont, HH_Glossary, HH_Avenue); + } + } +} + +function BsHHActivXOnLoad() +{ + if( gbBsIE4 ) + BsHHActivateComponents(); +} + +if( typeof(BsscRegisterOnLoad) != "undefined" ) +{ + BsscRegisterOnLoad(BsHHActivXOnLoad); +} +//End to support previous HHActiveX invoking + +//Begin to support previous relative topics +//If webHelp needs Related Topics DHTMLcode, it's supposed to add it here +var gbPopupMenuTimeoutExpired = false; +var gbInPopupMenu = false; +var gbPopupMenuTopicList = null; +var gOlddocumentClick = null; + +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// +// +// Popup Menu code +// +////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////// + +var g_bIsPopupMenuInit = false; +function _WritePopupMenuLayer() +{ + if (!g_bIsPopupMenuInit) + { + if (gbBsNS4&&!gbBsNS6) { +//Do not try to write ininle styles for NS! NS can not handle it and will not stop downloading the html page... + document.write("
"); + } else{ + document.write(""); + if (!(gbBsNS4&&!gbBsNS6)) { + document.write(""); + } + } + g_bIsPopupMenuInit = true; + } +} + +//Seek for the bsscright frame +function _SeekFrameByName( cRoot, strName ) +{ + if( cRoot == null ) return null; + if( cRoot.frames == null ) return null; + if( cRoot.frames[strName] != null ) return cRoot.frames[strName]; + for (var i=0; i'; + } else { + strMenu += '' + gbPopupMenuTopicList[fn_arguments[i]].strTitle + ''; + } + strMenu += ''; + + if (isNaN(fn_arguments[i]) || (gbPopupMenuTopicList == null)) { + i += 2; + } else { + i += 1; + } + } + strMenu += ""; + + if (gbBsMac) { + // totally hack. because ie5 in mac need something. is one of them. mac is mad. + strMenu +="
"; + } + + var layerPopup = null; + var stylePopup = null; + var nEventX = 0; + var nEventY = 0; + var nWindowWidth = 0; + + var nPopupHeight = 0; + var nPopupWidth = 0; + + var e = fn_arguments[0]; + if (typeof (window.event) != 'undefined' && typeof (window.event.clientX) != 'undefined' && typeof (window.event.clientX) == 'number') + { + nEventX = window.event.clientX; + nEventY = window.event.clientY; + } + else + { + if (typeof (e.clientX) != 'undefined') + { + nEventX = e.clientX; + nEventY = e.clientY; + } + else if (typeof (e.pageX) != 'undefined') + { + nEventX = e.pageX; + nEventY = e.pageY; + + nEventX -= getScrollLeft(); + nEventY -= getScrollTop(); + + } + } + + _BSPSGetClientSize(); + + var bFoundBrowser = true; + if (gbBsIE4 || gbBsOpera7) + { + layerPopup = getElement("PopupMenu"); + layerPopup.innerHTML = strMenu; + stylePopup = layerPopup.style; + nPopupHeight = layerPopup.scrollHeight; + nPopupWidth = layerPopup.scrollWidth; + if (gbBsMac) + { + nPopupWidth = 80; // we have no idea how to get the dynamic width of the popup. + } + } + else if (gbBsNS6 || gbBsKonqueror3 || gbBsSafari) + { + layerPopup = getElement("PopupMenu"); + layerPopup.style.visibility = "hidden"; + layerPopup.innerHTML = strMenu; + nPopupHeight = layerPopup.offsetHeight; + nPopupWidth = layerPopup.offsetWidth; + } + else if (gbBsNS4) + { + layerPopup = document.layers.PopupMenu; + layerPopup.visibility = "hide"; + stylePopup = layerPopup.document; + stylePopup.write(strMenu); + stylePopup.close(); + + nPopupHeight = layerPopup.clip.height; + nPopupWidth = layerPopup.clip.width; + } + else + bFoundBrowser = false; + + if (bFoundBrowser) + { + if (nEventY + nPopupHeight + 20 < gBsClientHeight) + { + nEventY += 20; + } + else + { + nEventY = gBsClientHeight - nPopupHeight - 20; + } + + if (nEventX + nPopupWidth + 20 < gBsClientWidth) + { + nEventX += 20; + } + else + { + nEventX = gBsClientWidth - nPopupWidth - 20; + } + + var par = layerPopup.offsetParent; + var offX = 0, offY = 0; + if (typeof(par) != 'undefined' && par) + { + offX = GetXOffset(par); + offY = GetYOffset(par); + } + + nEventX += getScrollLeftElement(par); + nEventX -= offX; + nEventY += getScrollTopElement(par); + nEventY -= offY; + } + + if (gbBsIE4 || gbBsOpera7) + { + stylePopup.top = nEventY; + if (typeof (stylePopup.top) != 'number' ) + { + stylePopup.top = nEventY + "px"; + } + stylePopup.left = nEventX; + if (typeof (stylePopup.left) != 'number' ) + { + stylePopup.left = nEventX + "px"; + } + + stylePopup.visibility = "visible"; + if (!gOlddocumentClick && document.onclick) + gOlddocumentClick = document.onclick; + document.onclick = PopupMenu_HandleClick; + } + else if (gbBsNS6 || gbBsKonqueror3 || gbBsSafari) + { + if (gbBsNS6 || gbChrome || gbSafari3) + layerPopup.style.top = nEventY + "px"; + else + layerPopup.style.top = nEventY; + if (gbBsNS6 || gbChrome || gbSafari3) + layerPopup.style.left = nEventX + "px"; + else + layerPopup.style.left = nEventX; + // set again to avoid the stupid frash in netscape 6. + layerPopup.innerHTML = strMenu; + layerPopup.style.visibility = "visible"; + //window.captureEvents(Event.MOUSEDOWN); + if (!gOlddocumentClick && document.onclick) + gOlddocumentClick = document.onclick; + window.onclick = PopupMenu_HandleClick; + } + else if (gbBsNS4) + { + layerPopup.left = nEventX; + layerPopup.top = nEventY; + layerPopup.visibility = "visible"; + window.captureEvents(Event.MOUSEDOWN); + if (!gOlddocumentClick && document.onmousedown) + gOlddocumentClick = document.onmousedown; + window.onmousedown = PopupMenu_HandleClick; + } + + if(window.addEventListener) + { + var popupDivElem = getElement("PopupMenu"); + if(typeof(popupDivElem) != 'undefined') + popupDivElem.addEventListener("touchstart", onPopupDivTouched, false); + + window.document.addEventListener("touchstart", onPopupParentTouched, false); + } + + + window.gbInPopupMenu = true; + window.gbPopupMenuTimeoutExpired = false; + setTimeout("PopupMenu_Timeout();", 100); + return false; +} + +function PopupMenu_Timeout() +{ + window.gbPopupMenuTimeoutExpired = true; +} + +function PopupMenu_Over(e) +{ + if (gbBsIE4||gbBsOpera7) + e.srcElement.className = "PopupOver"; + else if (gbBsNS6) + e.target.parentNode.className = "PopupOver"; + return; +} + +function PopupMenu_Out(e) +{ + if (gbBsIE4||gbBsOpera7) + e.srcElement.className = "PopupNotOver"; + else if (gbBsNS6) + e.target.parentNode.className = "PopupNotOver"; + return; +} +function onPopupDivTouched(e) +{ + if(typeof(e) != 'undefined' && e) + e.stopPropagation(); +} + +function onPopupParentTouched(e) +{ + if(window.removeEventListener) + { + var popupDivElem = getElement("PopupMenu"); + if(typeof(popupDivElem) != 'undefined') + popupDivElem.removeEventListener("touchstart", onPopupDivTouched, false); + window.removeEventListener("touchstart", onPopupParentTouched, false); + } + + PopupMenu_HandleClick(e); +} + +function PopupMenu_HandleClick(e) +{ + if (window.gbPopupMenuTimeoutExpired) { + window.gbInPopupMenu = false; + if (gbBsNS4 && !gbBsNS6) { + window.releaseEvents(Event.MOUSEDOWN); + } + + var layerPopup = null; + if (gbBsNS4&&!gbBsNS6) { + layerPopup = document.layers.PopupMenu; + layerPopup.visibility = "hide"; + } else { + layerPopup = getElement("PopupMenu"); + layerPopup.style.visibility = "hidden"; + } + + if (gOlddocumentClick) + { + if (gbBsNS4 && !gbBsNS6) + document.onmousedown = gOlddocumentClick; + else + document.onclick = gOlddocumentClick; + } + } + return; +} + +function BSSCPopup_ClickMac() +{ + if ((!DHTMLPopupSupport()) && (gbBsIE4 || gbBsOpera7)) + { + var bClickOnAnchor = false; + var el; + if ((window.event != null) && + (window.event.srcElement != null)) + { + el = window.event.srcElement; + while (el != null) + { + if ((el.tagName == "A") || (el.tagName == "AREA")) { + bClickOnAnchor = true; + break; + } + if (el.tagName == "BODY") { + break; + } + el = getParentNode(el); + } + } + if (BSSCPopup_IsPopup()) + { + if (!bClickOnAnchor) { + parent.window.gPopupWindow = null; + self.close(); + } + } + else + { + bClosePopupWindow = true; + if ((bClickOnAnchor) && + (el.href) && + ((el.href.indexOf("javascript:BSSCPopup") != -1) || (el.href.indexOf("javascript:null") != -1) || (el.href.indexOf("javascript:void(0)") != -1))) + { + bClosePopupWindow = false; + } + if (bClosePopupWindow) + { + if (window.gPopupWindow != null && !window.gPopupWindow.closed ) + { + window.gPopupWindow.close(); + } + } + } + } +} + +function BsPopupOnClick() +{ + if (!gbBsIE4 && !gbBsOpera7) + return; + + BSSCPopup_ClickMac(); +} + +function _BSSCOnError(message) +{ + if(-1 != message.indexOf("denied") + || -1 != message.indexOf("Object required")) + return true; +} + +//End to support previous relative topics + +/// Section End - General and relative topics (JavaScript 1.0) + +/// Section Begin - Popup (JavaScript 1.0) +//Begin to support previous popup functions + +//variables used to isolate the browser type +var gBsStyVisShow = null; +var gBsStyVisHide = null; +var gBsClientWidth = 640; +var gBsClientHeight = 480; + +// here is the varible for judge popup windows size. these parameter is for IE5.0, it may need adjust for others. +var gBRateH_W = 0.618; // 1.618 Golden cut. +var gBMaxXOfParent = 0.8; +var gBMaxYOfParent = 0.8; +var gBscrollHeight = 16; +var gBscrollWidth = 16; +var gBpermitXDelta = 3; +var gBpermitYDelta = 3; + + +var arrayPopupURL = new Array(); +var arrayAbsPopupURL = new Array(); +var arrayIntervalId = new Array(); + +var arrayDirty = new Array(); + +function getBRateH_W() +{ + return 0.618 ; +} + +function getBscrollWidth() +{ + return 16 ; +} + +function getBscrollHeight() +{ + return 16 ; +} + +function getBMaxXOfParent() +{ + return 0.8 ; +} + +function getBMaxYOfParent() +{ + return 0.8 ; +} + +function setIntervalID(nIndex,id) +{ + arrayIntervalId[nIndex] = id; +} + +function getIntervalID(nIndex) +{ + if (nIndex == -1 || arrayIntervalId.length <= nIndex) + return -1; + else + return arrayIntervalId[nIndex]; +} + +function setAbsPopupURL(nIndex, strURL) +{ + arrayAbsPopupURL[nIndex] = strURL; +} + +function getAbsPopupURL(nIndex) +{ + if (nIndex == -1 || arrayAbsPopupURL.length <= nIndex) return null; + else + return arrayAbsPopupURL[nIndex]; +} + +function getPopupURL(nIndex) +{ + if (nIndex == -1 || arrayPopupURL.length <= nIndex) return null; + else + return arrayPopupURL[nIndex]; +} + +function getPopupID(nIndex) +{ + return gstrPopupID + nIndex; +} + +function getPopupShadowID(nIndex) +{ + return gstrPopupShadowID + nIndex; +} + +function getPopupTopicID(nIndex) +{ + return gstrPopupTopicID + nIndex; +} + +function getPopupIFrameID(nIndex) +{ + return gstrPopupIFrameID + nIndex; +} + +function getPopupIFrameName(nIndex) +{ + return gstrPopupIFrameName + nIndex; +} + + +function getPopupTopicStyle(nIndex) +{ + return getElement(getPopupTopicID(nIndex)).style; +} + +function getPopupShadowStyle(nIndex) +{ + return getElement(getPopupShadowID(nIndex)).style; +} + +function getPopupIFrame(nIndex) +{ + if(gbAIR) + { + return window.frames[getPopupIFrameName(nIndex)]; + } + else + { + if (gbBsNS6||gbSafari3) + return eval("window.frames['" + getPopupIFrameName(nIndex) + "']"); + else + return eval("document.frames['" + getPopupIFrameName(nIndex) + "']"); + } +} + +function getPopupDivStyle(nIndex) +{ + return getElement(getPopupID(nIndex)).style; +} + +function getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex) +{ + return getElement(getPopupIFrameID(nIndex)).style; +} + + +function findDiv(strURL) +{ + for (var i = 0; i < arrayPopupURL.length; i ++ ) { + if (arrayPopupURL[i] == strURL) { + return i; + } + } + return -1; +} + +var gnToken = -1; +function takeToken() +{ + gnToken ++; + if (gnToken > 10000) gnToken = 0; + return gnToken; +} + +function IsValidToken(nToken) +{ + return (gnToken == nToken); +} + +function addDiv(strURL) +{ + for (var i = 0; i < arrayPopupURL.length; i ++) { + if (arrayPopupURL[i] == null) { + arrayPopupURL[i] = strURL; + return i; + } + } + arrayPopupURL[i] = strURL; + arrayDirty[i] = true; + return i; +} + +function setDirty() +{ + for (var i = 0; i < arrayPopupURL.length; i ++ ) + arrayDirty[i] = true; +} + +function IsDirty(nIndex) +{ + if (nIndex == -1) + return true; + else + if (arrayDirty.length > nIndex) + return arrayDirty[nIndex]; + else + return true; +} + +function hideAll() +{ + for (var i = 0; i < arrayPopupURL.length; i ++ ) + { + getPopupDivStyle(i).visibility = gBsStyVisHide; + getPopupIFrameStyle(i).visibility = gBsStyVisHide; + if(gbBsIE) + removeThis(document.all(getPopupID(i))); + } + if(gbBsIE) + arrayPopupURL.length = 0; +} + +function getCurrentPopupIFrame() +{ + for (var i = 0; i < arrayPopupURL.length; i ++) + if (getPopupDivStyle(i).visibility == gBsStyVisShow) + return getPopupIFrame(i); + return null; +} + +function setClear(nIndex) +{ + if (nIndex != -1) + arrayDirty[nIndex] = false; +} + +function _BSSCCreatePopupDiv(strURL) +{ + var nIndex = findDiv(strURL); + if (nIndex == -1 ) { + nIndex = addDiv(strURL); + BsPopup_CreateDiv(nIndex); + } + else { + if (IsDirty(nIndex)) { + if("object" == typeof(getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document)) + getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.location.href = strURL; + } + } + return nIndex; +} + +//Here is the browser type +function _BSPSGetBrowserInfo() +{ + if (gbBsNS4&&!gbBsNS6) + { + gBsStyVisShow = "show"; + gBsStyVisHide = "hide"; + } + else + { + gBsStyVisShow = "visible"; + gBsStyVisHide = "hidden"; + } +} + +_BSPSGetBrowserInfo(); + +//Get client size info +function _BSPSGetClientSize() +{ + if( typeof( window.innerWidth ) == 'number' ) + { + gBsClientWidth = innerWidth; + gBsClientHeight = innerHeight; + } + else if( document.documentElement && ( document.documentElement.clientWidth || document.documentElement.clientHeight ) ) + { + gBsClientWidth = document.documentElement.clientWidth; + gBsClientHeight = document.documentElement.clientHeight; + } + else if( document.body && ( document.body.clientWidth || document.body.clientHeight ) ) + { + gBsClientWidth = document.body.clientWidth; + gBsClientHeight = document.body.clientHeight; + } +} + +var gstrPopupID = 'BSSCPopup'; +var gstrPopupShadowID = 'BSSCPopupShadow'; +var gstrPopupTopicID = 'BSSCPopupTopic'; +var gstrPopupIFrameID = 'BSSCPopupIFrame'; +var gstrPopupIFrameName = 'BSSCPopupIFrameName'; + +var gstrPopupSecondWindowName = 'BSSCPopup'; + +var gPopupWindow = null; +var gnPopupClickX = 0; +var gnPopupClickY = 0; + +var gnPopupScreenClickX = 0; +var gnPopupScreenClickY = 0; + +var gbPopupTimeoutExpired = false; + +function DHTMLPopupSupport() +{ + if (((gbBsIE4) && (!gbBsMac))||gbBsOpera7|| gbBsNS7 || gbSafari3||gbAIR || gbBsiOSDevice) { + return true; + } + return false; +} + +function BSSCPopup_IsPopup() +{ + if (DHTMLPopupSupport() && (this.name.indexOf(gstrPopupIFrameName) != -1)) { + return true; + } else if ((gbBsNS4 || gbBsIE4 || gbBsOpera7) && (this.name.indexOf(gstrPopupID) != -1)) { + return true; + } else { + return false; + } +} + +// If there is a hyperlink in a popup window, display the hyperlink in +// the original window. (bsscright) +//commenting this as we are opening popup links in its parent +//also in multiscreen bsscright is not the the name of topic frame, relevant only in webhelp +/*if (BSSCPopup_IsPopup() && !gbBsIE4 && !gbBsOpera7) { +document.write(""); +}*/ + +// Local functions. +function BsPopup_CreateDiv(nIndex) +{ + if(!DHTMLPopupSupport()) + return; + // DO NOT SET Width and height for the div, otherwize it will make IE4 popup do not work when view the topic alone. + var strPopupDiv = ""; + + var objBody = getElementsByTag(document, "BODY")[0]; + if( typeof(objBody) != "object" ) + return; + + insertAdjacentHTML(objBody, "beforeEnd", strPopupDiv); +} + +function handleLoadNS() +{ + if (this.id) + { + var nIndex = parseInt(this.id.substring(gstrPopupIFrameID.length)); + BSSCPopup_PostWork(nIndex); + } +} + +function BSSCPopup_PostWork(nIndex) +{ + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).visibility = gBsStyVisShow; + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).visibility =gBsStyVisShow; + + setClear(nIndex); + window.gbPopupTimeoutExpired = true; + + try{ + BSSCPopup_ChangeTargettoBlank(getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document); + if (gbBsNS6) + getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.body.addEventListener("click",BSSCPopupClicked,false); + else + getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.body.onclick = BSSCPopupClicked; + }catch(e){} + + if (!gbOrignalOnMouseDown && document.onmousedown) + gbOrignalOnMouseDown = document.onmousedown; + + if (gbChrome || gbBsNS6) + document.addEventListener("mousedown", BSSCPopupParentClicked,false); + else + document.onmousedown = BSSCPopupParentClicked; +} + +function BSSCPopup_Timeout(nIndex, nToken) +{ + if (!IsValidToken(nToken)) return; + + if (gbBsNS6||((getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.readyState == "complete") && + (getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.body != null))) { + BSSCPopup_PostWork(nIndex); + } else { + setTimeout("BSSCPopup_Timeout(" + nIndex + "," + nToken + ")", 100); + } +} + +// VH 08/10/00 +// do not change target to parent if the href is using javascript +function BSSCPopup_ChangeTargettoBlank(tagsObject) +{ + var collA = getElementsByTag(tagsObject, "A"); + BSSCPopup_ChangeTargettoBlank2(collA); + + var collIMG = getElementsByTag(tagsObject,"IMG"); + BSSCPopup_ChangeTargettoBlank2(collIMG); +} + +function BSSCPopup_ChangeTargettoBlank2(colls) +{ + if (colls != null) { + for (var j = 0; j < colls.length; j ++ ) + { + var strtemp = colls[j].getAttribute('href'); + if (strtemp) + { + strtemp = strtemp.toLowerCase(); + if (strtemp.indexOf("javascript:") == -1) + if (colls[j].target == "") { + if (IsInternal(strtemp)) + colls[j].target = "_parent"; + else + colls[j].target = "_blank"; + } + } + } + } +} + +function BSPSPopupTopicWinHelp(strURL) +{ + _BSSCPopup(strURL); + return; +} + +function DelayBSSCPopup_AfterLoad(nIndex ,nToken ,cuswidth ,cusheight ) +{ +//before doing any thing clear the interval function + var intervalID = getIntervalID(nIndex); + if(intervalID!=-1) + clearInterval(intervalID); + + BSSCPopup_AfterLoad(nIndex ,nToken ,cuswidth ,cusheight ); +} + +function _BSSCPopup(strURL, width, height) +{ + var cuswidth = 0; + var cusheight = 0; + if ("undefined" != typeof(width) && "undefined" != typeof(height)) { + cuswidth = width; + cusheight= height; + } + + if (DHTMLPopupSupport()) { + if(!gbAIR && !gbInsideCHM) + rhPopupEx.createPopup(strURL, width, height); + else + { + var nToken = takeToken(); // take token first. + var nIndex = _BSSCCreatePopupDiv(strURL, nToken, cuswidth, cusheight); + window.gbPopupTimeoutExpired = false; + var ntWidth = gBsClientWidth; + var ntHeight = gBsClientHeight; + _BSPSGetClientSize(); + if (ntWidth != gBsClientWidth || ntHeight != gBsClientHeight) { + setDirty(); + } + + if (IsDirty(nIndex)) + { + if(gbAIR) + { + var tempappTimer = setInterval(function(){DelayBSSCPopup_AfterLoad(nIndex ,nToken ,cuswidth ,cusheight )}, 400); + setIntervalID(nIndex,tempappTimer); + } + else + { + if (gbBsMac) { + setTimeout("BSSCPopup_AfterLoad(" + nIndex + "," + nToken + "," + cuswidth + "," + cusheight +")", 400); + } else { + setTimeout("BSSCPopup_AfterLoad(" + nIndex + "," + nToken + "," + cuswidth + "," + cusheight + ")", 100); + } + } + } + else { + MoveDivAndShow(nIndex ,nToken, cuswidth, cusheight); + } + } + } else { + _BSSCPopup2(strURL, cuswidth, cusheight); + } + return; +} + +if (gbBsIE55) +{ + var ehlpdhtm_fOldBefureUnload = window.onbeforeunload; + var gnBsUnload=0; + window.onbeforeunload = window_BUnload; +} + +function window_BUnload() +{ + gnBsUnload++; + if (gnBsUnload>1) + return; + for (var i = 0; i < arrayPopupURL.length; i ++) + removeThis(document.all(getPopupID(i))); + arrayPopupURL.length = 0; + if (ehlpdhtm_fOldBefureUnload) + ehlpdhtm_fOldBefureUnload(); +} + +function _BSSCPopup2(strURL, width, height) +{ + if (gbBsOpera6&&gbBsMac) + { + var wmTemp = window.open(document.location.href, gstrPopupSecondWindowName); + wmTemp.close(); + setTimeout("_BSSCPopup3(\""+strURL+"\","+width+","+height+");",100); + } + else + _BSSCPopup3(strURL, width, height); +} + +function _BSSCPopup3(strURL, width, height) +{ + if (window.name == gstrPopupSecondWindowName) { + window.location = strURL; + } else { + if (!gbBsMac || !gbBsNS4) { + BSSCHidePopupWindow(); + } + var nX = 0; + var nY = 0; + var nHeight = 300; + var nWidth = 400; + if (width > 0 && height > 0) { + nHeight = height; + nWidth = width; + } + _BSPSGetClientSize(); + + nX = window.gnPopupScreenClickX; + nY = window.gnPopupScreenClickY; + + if (nY + nHeight + 40 > screen.availHeight) { + nY = screen.availHeight - nHeight - 40; + } + if (nX + nWidth + 40 > screen.availWidth) { + nX = screen.availWidth - nWidth - 40; + } + + // Launch a separate window + var strParam="titlebar=no,toolbar=no,status=no,location=no,menubar=no,resizable=yes,scrollbars=yes"; + if (gbBsNS) { + if (gbBsNS6) { + strParam += ",Height=" + nHeight + "px,Width=" + nWidth+"px"; + strParam += ",screenX=" + nX + ",screenY=" + nY; + strParam += ",dependent=yes"; + } + else { + strParam += ",OuterHeight=" + nHeight + ",OuterWidth=" + nWidth; + strParam += ",screenX=" + nX + ",screenY=" + nY; + strParam += ",dependent=yes"; + } + } + else { + strParam += ",height=" + nHeight + ",width=" + nWidth; + strParam += ",left=" + nX + ",top=" + nY; + } + if (gbBsSafari) + { + if (window.gPopupWindow) + window.gPopupWindow.close(); + window.gPopupWindow = window.open(strURL, "", strParam); + window.gPopupWindow.name = gstrPopupSecondWindowName; + window.gPopupWindow.moveTo(nX, nY); + window.gPopupWindow.document.location.reload(); + } + else + { + var wmTemp=null; + if (gbBsKonqueror3) + { + if (window.gPopupWindow) + window.gPopupWindow.close(); + } + if (gbBsOpera&&gbBsMac) + { + wmTemp= window.open(document.location.href, "Temp", strParam); + } + window.gPopupWindow = window.open(strURL, gstrPopupSecondWindowName, strParam); + if (!gbBsIE) + window.gPopupWindow.focus(); + + if (wmTemp) + wmTemp.close(); + } + + if (gbBsNS4) + setEventHandle(); + else if (gbBsIE4 || gbBsOpera7||gbBsKonqueror3) + setTimeout("setPopupFocus();", 100); + } + return; +} + +function setEventHandle() +{ + window.gPopupWindow.captureEvents(Event.CLICK | Event.BLUR); + window.gPopupWindow.onclick = NonIEPopup_HandleClick; + window.gPopupWindow.onblur = NonIEPopup_HandleBlur; +} + +function setPopupFocus() +{ + window.gPopupWindow.focus(); +} + +function NonIEPopup_HandleBlur(e) +{ + window.gPopupWindow.focus(); +} + +function NonIEPopup_HandleClick(e) +{ + // Because navigator will give the event to the handler before the hyperlink, let's + // first route the event to see if we are clicking on a Popup menu in a popup. + document.routeEvent(e); + + // If a popup menu is active then don't do anything with the click + if (window.gPopupWindow.gbInPopupMenu) { + window.gPopupWindow.captureEvents(Event.CLICK); + window.gPopupWindow.onclick = NonIEPopup_HandleClick; + return false; + } + + // Close the popup window + var href = decodeURI(e.target.href); + if(href) + { + if(href.indexOf("javascript:")==-1) + { + if (e.target.target=="") + window.location.href = encodeURI(href); + else + window.open(href, e.target.target); + this.close(); + } + } + else + this.close(); + return false; +} + +function BSSCPopup_AfterLoad(nIndex, nToken, cuswidth, cusheight) +{ + if (!window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document) { + _BSSCPopup2(getPopupURL(nIndex), cuswidth, cusheight); + return; + } + + if (!IsValidToken(nToken)) return; + + if (gbSafari3||gbAIR) + { + setAbsPopupURL(nIndex, window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.location.href); // change URL to abs url. + BSSCPopup_ResizeAfterLoad(nIndex, nToken, cuswidth, cusheight); + return; + } + + if (gbBsNS6) + { + setAbsPopupURL(nIndex, window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.location.href); // change URL to abs url. + setTimeout("BSSCPopup_ResizeAfterLoad(" + nIndex + "," + nToken + "," + cuswidth + "," + cusheight + ")", 200); + return; + } + + if ((window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.readyState == "complete") && + (window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.body != null)) { + if (window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.location.href.indexOf("about:blank") != -1) { // add this check. IE will use about:blank" as the default vaule for Iframe. + window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.location = getPopupURL(nIndex); + setTimeout("BSSCPopup_AfterLoad(" + nIndex + "," + nToken + "," + cuswidth + "," + cusheight + ")", 200); + } + else + { + setAbsPopupURL(nIndex, window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.location.href); // change URL to abs url. + BSSCPopup_ResizeAfterLoad(nIndex, nToken, cuswidth, cusheight); + } + } else { + setTimeout("BSSCPopup_AfterLoad(" + nIndex + "," + nToken + "," + cuswidth + "," + cusheight + ")", 200); + } +} + +function BSSCPopup_ResizeAfterLoad(nIndex, nToken, cuswidth, cusheight) +{ + if (window.gbPopupTimeoutExpired) return; + + if (!IsValidToken(nToken)) return; + + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).visibility = gBsStyVisHide; + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).visibility = gBsStyVisHide; + if(gbBsIE) + { + //fix for Popup Blank issue + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).visibility = gBsStyVisShow; + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).visibility = gBsStyVisShow; + } + + // Determine the width and height for the window + _BSPSGetClientSize(); + + var size = new BSSCSize(0, 0); + + if (cuswidth <= 0 || cusheight <= 0) + BSSCGetContentSize(window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex), size); + else { + size.x = cuswidth; + size.y = cusheight; + } + + // Determine the width and height for the window + var nWidth = size.x; + var nHeight = size.y; + + // for small popup size, we should allow any size. + // The popup size should be ok if bigger than 0 + if (nWidth < 0 || nHeight < 0) return; // there must be something terribly wrong. + + //make the width and height same for all the browsers now + nWidth = nWidth + 22; + nHeight = nHeight + 10; + + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).width = nWidth+ "px" ; + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).height = nHeight+ "px" ; + + getPopupShadowStyle(nIndex).width = nWidth + "px" ; + getPopupShadowStyle(nIndex).height = nHeight + "px" ; + + + getPopupTopicStyle(nIndex).width = nWidth + "px" ; + getPopupTopicStyle(nIndex).height = nHeight + "px" ; + + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).width = nWidth + "px" ; + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).height = nHeight + "px" ; + + if (gbBsIE55 || gbBsNS6 || gbSafari3||gbAIR) + { + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).top = 0; + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).left = 0; + } + + var strURL = getPopupURL(nIndex); + if (strURL.indexOf("#") != -1&&gbBsNS6) + getPopupIFrame(nIndex).location.reload(); + else if (strURL.indexOf("#") != -1||gbBsNS6) + getPopupIFrame(nIndex).location.href = strURL; // reload again, this will fix the bookmark misunderstand in IE5. + + MoveDivAndShow(nIndex, nToken, cuswidth, cusheight); +} + +function getScrollLeft() +{ + if( typeof( window.pageXOffset) == 'number' ) + return window.pageXOffset ; + else if( document.body && ( document.body.scrollLeft || document.body.scrollTop ) ) + return document.body.scrollLeft ; + else if( document.documentElement && document.documentElement.scrollLeft ) + return document.documentElement.scrollLeft; + else + return 0 ; +} + +function getScrollTop() +{ + if( typeof( window.pageYOffset) == 'number' ) + return window.pageYOffset ; + else if( document.body && document.body.scrollTop ) + return document.body.scrollTop ; + else if( document.documentElement && document.documentElement.scrollTop ) + return document.documentElement.scrollTop; + else + return 0 ; +} + +function getScrollLeftElement(el) +{ + var x = 0; + while (el && typeof (el.scrollLeft) == 'number') + { + if (el == document.body) + { + var top = document.body.scrollLeft || document.documentElement.scrollLeft; + x += top; + } + else + x += el.scrollLeft; + el = el.offsetParent; + } + return x; +} + +function getScrollTopElement(el) +{ + var x = 0; + while (el && typeof (el.scrollTop) == 'number') + { + if (el == document.body) + { + var top = document.body.scrollTop || document.documentElement.scrollTop; + x += top; + } + else + x += el.scrollTop; + el = el.offsetParent; + } + return x; +} + + +function MoveDivAndShow(nIndex, nToken, cuswidth, cusheight) +{ + if (window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.location.href != getAbsPopupURL(nIndex)) { // if redirect, reload again. + window.getPopupIFrame(nIndex).document.location = getPopupURL(nIndex); + if(gbAIR) + { + BSSCPopup_AfterLoad(nIndex ,nToken ,cuswidth ,cusheight ); + } + else + setTimeout("BSSCPopup_AfterLoad(" + nIndex + "," + nToken + "," + cuswidth + "," + cusheight + ")", 200); + return; + } + + // Determine the position of the window + var nClickX = window.gnPopupClickX; + var nClickY = window.gnPopupClickY; + var nTop = 0; + var nLeft = 0; + + var nWidth = parseInt(getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).width); + var nHeight = parseInt(getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).height); + + if (nClickY + nHeight + 20 < gBsClientHeight + getScrollTop()) { + nTop = nClickY + 10; + } else { + nTop = (getScrollTop() + gBsClientHeight) - nHeight - 20; + } + if (nClickX + nWidth < gBsClientWidth + getScrollLeft()) { + nLeft = nClickX; + } else { + nLeft = (getScrollLeft() + gBsClientWidth) - nWidth - 20; + } + + if(!gbBsIE55) + { + if (nTop < getScrollTop()) nTop = getScrollTop() + nTop; + if (nLeft< getScrollLeft()) nLeft = getScrollLeft() + nLeft; + + if(nTop+nHeight>gBsClientHeight + getScrollTop()) + { + nTop = (getScrollTop() + gBsClientHeight) - nHeight - 20; + } + } + + if (isNaN(nLeft)) + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).left = nClickX + "px"; + else + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).left = nLeft+ "px"; + + if (isNaN(nTop)) + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).top = nClickY + "px"; + else + getPopupDivStyle(nIndex).top = nTop + "px"; + + // Set the location of the background blocks + getPopupShadowStyle(nIndex).left = 6 + "px"; + getPopupShadowStyle(nIndex).top = 6 + "px"; + if (gbBsIE55) + { + getPopupShadowStyle(nIndex).left = 4; + getPopupShadowStyle(nIndex).top = 4; + } + + if (gbBsMac&&gbBsIE4) { + // Total hack on the iMac to get the IFrame to position properly + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).pixelLeft = 100; + getPopupIFrameStyle(nIndex).pixelLeft = 0; + // Explicitly call BSSCOnLoad because the Mac doesn't seem to do it + getPopupIFrame(nIndex).window.BSSCOnLoad(); + } + + if(gbChrome) + { + BSSCPopup_PostWork(nIndex); + } + else if (gbBsNS6&&IsDirty(nIndex)) + getElement(getPopupIFrameID(nIndex)).addEventListener("load", handleLoadNS, false); + else + BSSCPopup_Timeout(nIndex , nToken ); + return; +} + +function BSSCSize(x, y) +{ + this.x = x; + this.y = y; +} + +function BSSCGetContentSize(thisWindow, size) +{ + if (!gbBsIE4 && !gbBsOpera7 && !gbBsNS4 && !gbSafari3 && !gbAIR) + return; + + + if ((gbBsMac&&gbBsIE4)||gbBsOpera7) { + size.x = 320; + size.y = 180; + return; + } + + // Resize the width until it is wide enough to handle the content + // The trick is to start wide and determine when the scrollHeight changes + // because then we know a scrollbar is necessary. We can then go back + // to the next widest size (for no scrollbar) + + var ClientRate = gBsClientHeight / gBsClientWidth; + + + var GoldenSize = new BSSCSize(0,0); + GoldenSize.x = gBsClientWidth * getBMaxXOfParent(); + GoldenSize.y = gBsClientHeight *getBMaxYOfParent() ; + + if (ClientRate > gBRateH_W) { + GoldenSize.y = GoldenSize.x * gBRateH_W; + } + else { + GoldenSize.x = GoldenSize.y / gBRateH_W; + } + + // Try to using parent specified max x. + var x = 0; + var maxgoldx = GoldenSize.x; + var maxx = gBsClientWidth * getBMaxXOfParent(); + + // This double resize causes the document to re-render (and we need it to) + if (!gbBsIE5 && !gbChrome && !gbAIR) + thisWindow.moveTo(10000,10000); // this is used to fix the flash on IE4. + if(!gbAIR) + { + thisWindow.resizeTo(1, 1); + thisWindow.resizeTo(maxgoldx, getScrollHeight(thisWindow) + getBscrollHeight()); + } + + var miny = getScrollHeight(thisWindow) + getBscrollHeight(); + + if (miny > GoldenSize.y) // the popup does not fix in the parent wanted golden area. so try to expand itself as large as it can + { + if(gbBsIE55) + { + thisWindow.resizeTo(maxx , getScrollHeight(thisWindow) + getBscrollHeight()); + } + + miny = getScrollHeight(thisWindow) + getBscrollHeight(); + maxy = gBsClientHeight * getBMaxYOfParent(); + + if (miny > maxy) { // the popup must have a scroll, OK let it be. + miny = maxy; + size.x = maxx; + size.y = maxy; + thisWindow.document.body.scroll = 'yes'; // At this time we do want to show scroll any more. so it will looks better a little. + } + else { // popup still can fit in the parent area by someway. now we choose the same h/w rate as parent. + size.y = miny; + + // downsize from maxx , now I try to using binary divide. + x = maxx; + deltax = -maxx/2; + //j = 0; + while (true) { + x = x + deltax; + if(!gbAIR) + thisWindow.resizeTo(x, miny); + diffy = getScrollHeight(thisWindow) + getBscrollHeight() - x * ClientRate; + if (diffy > gBpermitYDelta ) // it is higher than wanted, so x need to be wide a little bitter + deltax = Math.abs(deltax) /2; + else if (diffy < -gBpermitYDelta) // it is shorter than wanted, so x need to be narrow a little bitter + deltax = -Math.abs(deltax) /2; + else + // the y is close enough to wanted. + break; + if (Math.abs(deltax) < gBpermitXDelta) // the next change is too slight and it can be ignore. + break; + } + size.x = getScrollWidth(thisWindow); //+ gBscrollWidth; + size.y = getScrollHeight(thisWindow);// + gBscrollHeight; + thisWindow.document.body.scroll = 'no'; + } + } + else { + if (getScrollWidth(thisWindow) > maxgoldx) { + size.x = maxx; + size.y = miny; + thisWindow.document.body.scroll = 'yes'; + } + else { + // downsize from maxgoldx , now I try to using binary divide. + x = maxgoldx; + deltax = -maxgoldx/2; + while (true) { + x = x + deltax; + if(!gbAIR) + thisWindow.resizeTo(x, miny); + diffy = getScrollHeight(thisWindow) + getBscrollHeight() - x * getBRateH_W(); + if (diffy > gBpermitYDelta ) // it is higher than wanted, so x need to be wide a little bitter + deltax = Math.abs(deltax) /2; + else if (diffy < -gBpermitYDelta) // it is shorter than wanted, so x need to be narrow a little bitter + deltax = -Math.abs(deltax) /2; + else + // the y is close enough to wanted. + break; + if (Math.abs(deltax) < gBpermitXDelta) // the next change is too slight and it can be ignore. + break; + } + size.x = getScrollWidth(thisWindow); + size.y = getScrollHeight(thisWindow) ; + thisWindow.document.body.scroll = 'no'; // At this time we do not want to show scroll any more. so it will looks better a little. + + } + } + if (gbBsNS6) + size.y = size.y + 20 ; + + if(!gbAIR) + thisWindow.resizeTo(size.x, size.y); + return; +} + +function getScrollWidth(thisWindow) +{ + var w = thisWindow.document.body.scrollWidth ? thisWindow.document.body.scrollWidth : thisWindow.window.pageXOffset ; + return w ? w : 0; +} + +function getScrollHeight(thisWindow) +{ + var h = thisWindow.document.body.scrollHeight ? thisWindow.document.body.scrollHeight : thisWindow.window.pageYOffset ; + return h ? h : 0; +} + + +function BSSCPopupParentClicked() +{ + if (!window.gbPopupTimeoutExpired) { + return false; + } + + document.onmousedown = gbOrignalOnMouseDown; + + // Simply hide the popup + hideAll(); + + window.gbPopupTimeoutExpired = false; + + return true; +} + +function isInsideHyperLink(obj) +{ + if (obj&&obj!=getParentNode(obj)) + { + if (obj.tagName=="A"||obj.tagName=="IMG" || obj.tagName=="VIDEO") + return true; + else + return isInsideHyperLink(getParentNode(obj)); + } + else + return false; +} + +function BSSCPopupClicked(e) +{ + if (!window.gbPopupTimeoutExpired) { + return false; + } + + var popupIFrame = getCurrentPopupIFrame(); + if (popupIFrame == null) { + return true; + } + + if (gbBsIE4 && (!((popupIFrame.window.event != null) && + (popupIFrame.window.event.srcElement != null) && + isInsideHyperLink(popupIFrame.window.event.srcElement)))) { + document.onmousedown = gbOrignalOnMouseDown; + + // Simply hide the popup + hideAll(); + window.gbPopupTimeoutExpired = false; + return true; + } + else if (!gbAIR && (gbBsNS6 || gbChrome) && (!((e != null) && + (e.target!= null) && isInsideHyperLink(e.target)))) + { + document.removeEventListener("mousedown", BSSCPopupParentClicked,false); + if(gbOrignalOnMouseDown) + document.addEventListener("mousedown", gbOrignalOnMouseDown,false); + // Simply hide the popup + hideAll(); + window.gbPopupTimeoutExpired = false; + return true; + } +} + +//trace the mouse over's position for hotspot +function BSPSPopupOnMouseOver(event) +{ + rhPopupEx.setClickPosition(event.clientX, event.clientY); + if (gbBsIE4 || gbBsOpera7||gbBsKonqueror3) { + window.gnPopupClickX = event.clientX + getScrollLeft(); + window.gnPopupClickY = event.clientY + getScrollTop(); + window.gnPopupScreenClickX = event.screenX; + window.gnPopupScreenClickY = event.screenY; + } else if (gbBsSafari) { + window.gnPopupClickX = event.clientX + getScrollLeft(); + window.gnPopupClickY = event.clientY + getScrollTop(); + window.gnPopupScreenClickX = event.screenX + window.screenX; + window.gnPopupScreenClickY = event.screenY + window.screenY; + } else if (gbBsNS4) { + window.gnPopupClickX = event.pageX - window.pageXOffset; + window.gnPopupClickY = event.pageY - window.pageYOffset; + window.gnPopupScreenClickX = event.screenX - window.pageXOffset; + window.gnPopupScreenClickY = event.screenY - window.pageYOffset; + } +} + +function BSSCHidePopupWindow() +{ + if (window.gPopupWindow != null) { + if (gbBsNS4) { + if ((typeof window.gPopupWindow != "undefined") && (!window.gPopupWindow.closed)) { + window.gPopupWindow.close(); + window.gPopupWindow = null; + } + } + } + return; +} + +// Add the PopupOnClick to the onclick array. +if (typeof(BsscRegisterOnClick) != "undefined") +{ + BsscRegisterOnClick(BsPopupOnClick); +} +//End to support previous popup functions + +/// Section End - Popup (JavaScript 1.0) + +/// Section Begin - Embedded Stub (JavaScript 1.0) + +function BSSCCreatePopupDiv() +{ + return; +} + +function WritePopupMenuLayer() +{ + if (BsscHasExtJs()) {_WritePopupMenuLayer();} +} + +function BSSCPopup(strURL, width, height) +{ + var re = new RegExp("'", 'g'); + strURL = strURL.replace(re, "%27"); + + if (BsscHasExtJs()) { + _BSSCPopup(strURL, width, height); + }else{ + //Create a temporary window first to ensure the real popup comes up on top + var wndTemp = null; + if (!gbBsNS3) { + wndTemp = window.open("", "temp", "titlebar=no,toolbar=no,status=no,location=no,menubar=no,resizable=yes,scrollbars=yes,height=3,width=4"); + } + // Create the real popup window + var wndPopup = window.open(strURL, "BSSCPopup", "titlebar=no,toolbar=no,status=no,location=no,menubar=no,resizable=yes,scrollbars=yes,height=300,width=400"); + // Close the temporary + if (!gbBsNS3) { + wndTemp.close(); + } else { + wndPopup.focus(); + } + } +} + +var gbWndTemp = null, gbWndPopupLinks = null; +var gbstrParaTotal = ""; + +function PopupMenu_Invoke() +{ + if (typeof(wfRelatedTopic) == 'function' && typeof(IsFlashSupported) == 'function') + { + if (Number(gsSkinVersion) > 2 && IsFlashSupported()) + { + return wfRelatedTopic(PopupMenu_Invoke.arguments); + } + } + if (BsscHasExtJs()) { + return _PopupMenu_Invoke(PopupMenu_Invoke.arguments); + } + if (gbBsNS3Before || gbBsIE3Before ) { + var argLen = PopupMenu_Invoke.arguments.length; + if (argLen < 5) { + window.document.location.href = PopupMenu_Invoke.arguments[3]; + return false; + } + gbWndTemp = null; + gbWndPopupLinks = null; + gbstrParaTotal = ""; + for (var i = 0; i < (argLen - 2) / 2; i++) { + var strParaLine = ""; + if (gbBsNS2){ + strParaLine += "" + strParaLine += PopupMenu_Invoke.arguments[2 * i + 2]; + strParaLine += ""; + } else { + strParaLine += ""); + if (gbBsNS2) { + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write(""); + } else { + //YJ: IE301,302 and NS3.x works fine + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write("<"); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write("script>"); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write("function gotoUrl(aUrl) {opener.window.location=aUrl; close();}"); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write("<"); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write("/script>"); + } + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write("<"); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write("/head>"); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write(""); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write(gbstrParaTotal); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.write(""); + gbWndPopupLinks.document.close(); + + // Close the temporary + if (!gbBsNS3 && gbWndTemp != null) { + gbWndTemp.close(); + }else { + gbWndPopupLinks.focus(); + } + + return true; + } + return false; +} + +/// Section End - Embedded Stub (JavaScript 1.0) + +//// Segment End -- (JavaScript 1.0) + +//// Segment Begin -- (JavaScript 1.2) +/// Section Begin - DHTM (JavaScript 1.2) + +//Begin to support extended and dropdown text effects. +function IsParagraph(el) +{ + return( el.tagName == "P" || el.tagName.indexOf("H") == 0 ) ? true : false; +} + +//Begin to support extended and dropdown text effects. +function kadovIsParagraph(el) +{ + return IsParagraph(el); +} + + +function InitEachChild(el) +{ + for(var i=0; i "") ) + setAttribute(child.style, "x-on-pageload", "" ); + } + + var href = getAttribute(child,"href"); + if( href != null && href > "" && href.indexOf( "BSSCPopup" ) >= 0 ) + FilePopupInit(child.id); // Init for Popup + else if( child.className == "dropspot" || child.className == "expandspot" || + child.className == "glossterm" ) + TextPopupInit(child.id);// Init for Expanding/Glossary or DropDown text + else if( child.className == "trigger") + InitTrigger(child.id);// Init for Trigger + else + { + InitEffects(child.id);// Init for DHTML effects + CEngine.SetOneTargetInitialState( child.id ); + } + } + + if( (child.tagName == "IMG") && (getAttribute(child,"dynsrc") > "") ) + child.start = "mouseover";// to start a AVI file. fileopen doesn't work + + InitEachChild(child); + } +} + +function kadovInitEachChild(el) +{ + InitEachChild(el); +} + +function RetrieveTextInner(el) +{ + var x = ""; + if( (!el) || (el.tagName == "!") || (el.tagName == "SCRIPT" )) + return x; + + if( IsParagraph(el) ) + { + var strNewID = " "; + if( el.id != "" ) + strNewID += "id=" + el.id + "_NewSpan "; + x = "" + el.innerHTML + ""; + } + else + { + for(var i=0; i 0 ) + if( (nTagClose - nTagOpen) != nDistance ) + return strRawHTML; + + var strCleanOnce = strRawHTML.substring(0, nTagOpen) + strRawHTML.substr(nTagClose + strTagClose.length) ; + return RetrieveCleanHTML( strCleanOnce, strTagOpen, strTagClose ); +} + +function kadovRetrieveCleanHTML( strRawHTML, strTagOpen, strTagClose, nDistance ) +{ + return RetrieveCleanHTML( strRawHTML, strTagOpen, strTagClose, nDistance ); +} + +function AdjustObjectTag(strRawHTML, nStartPos) +{// adjust object tag for related topics HTML control, because innerHTML misses out the item settings + + //Is there any DTC? + var strDTCTagOpen = ''; + var nDTCTagOpen = strRawHTML.indexOf( strDTCTagOpen, nStartPos ); + if( nDTCTagOpen < 0 ) + return strRawHTML; + var nDTCTagClose = strRawHTML.indexOf( strDTCTagClose, nDTCTagOpen ); + if( nDTCTagClose < nDTCTagOpen) + return strRawHTML; // no Design Time Controls; + + //Is the DTC HTML Help Control? + var strRTObjTagOpen = 'classid=clsid:ADB880A6-D8FF-11CF-9377-00AA003B7A11'; + var strRTObjTagClose = ''; + var nRTObjTagOpen = strRawHTML.indexOf( strRTObjTagOpen, nDTCTagOpen ); + if( nRTObjTagOpen < nDTCTagOpen ) + return strRawHTML; + var nRTObjTagClose = strRawHTML.indexOf( strRTObjTagClose, nRTObjTagOpen ); + if( nRTObjTagClose < nRTObjTagOpen ) + return strRawHTML; // is not a HTML help control + + // Is it a related Topics html help control? + var strRTObjLabel = ''; + } + + // to insert the reconstructed item params into runtime object tag + var strAdjustedHTML = strRawHTML.substring(0,nRTObjTagClose) + strRunTimeItemParam + strRawHTML.substring(nRTObjTagClose, strRawHTML.length); + return AdjustObjectTag(strAdjustedHTML, nDTCTagClose + strDTCTagClose.length); +} + +function kadovAdjustObjectTag(strRawHTML, nStartPos) +{// adjust object tag for related topics HTML control, because innerHTML misses out the item settings + return AdjustObjectTag(strRawHTML, nStartPos); +} + +function TextPopupOnLoad( el ) +{ + if( typeof(el) == "string" ) + el = getElement(el); + var src = null; + if(el.id) + { + for (var i=0;i= 0 && indx > 0 && indx < str.length) + { + effect = effectsList.substr(nStart, indx-nStart); + var indx2 = str.indexOf(";", nStart); + if(indx2 == -1) + indx2 = str.length; + value = effectsList.substr(indx+1, indx2); + if(effect && value) + setAttribute(srcElement,effect, value); + nStart = effectsList.indexOf("x-on", indx2+1); + indx = str.indexOf(":", nStart); + } + + } + + InitEffect( srcElement, "x-on-hover" ); + InitEffect( srcElement, "x-on-pageclick" ); + InitEffect( srcElement, "x-on-pageload" ); + InitEffect( srcElement, "x-on-trigger-1" ); + InitEffect( srcElement, "x-on-trigger-2" ); +} + +function kadovInitEffects( element ) +{ + InitEffects( element ); +} +//End HTML code invoked function + +function InitEffect( element, prop ) +{ + var values = null; + if( getAttribute(element,prop)) + values = getAttribute(element, prop ); + else if( getAttribute( element, "currentStyle" ) && element.currentStyle.getAttribute) + values = element.currentStyle.getAttribute( prop ); + else if (element.style.getAttribute) + values = element.style.getAttribute( prop ); + + if( !values ) + return; + + var functions = new Array(); + var nIdx = 0, nStart = 0; + var nNext = values.indexOf( "\)", 0); + while( nNext >= 0 && nNext < values.length ) + { + functions[nIdx] = values.substr( nStart, nNext-nStart+1); + nStart = nNext + 1; + nIdx++; + nNext = values.indexOf( "\)", nStart); + } + + for( var i=0; i= 0 ) + { + nPageClick = arrForClickCount[j].indexOf("="); + if( nPageClick > 0 ) + { + nClickTimes = arrForClickCount[j].substring( nPageClick + 1, arrForClickCount[j].length) * 1; + break; + } + } + } + var args = srcargs; + if( j < arrForClickCount.length ) + {// to strip out the "clicks=99" from the arguments string + args = ""; + for( var k = 0; k < arrForClickCount.length; k ++ ) + { + if( k != j ) + { + args += arrForClickCount[k]; + if( k < arrForClickCount.length - 1 ) + args += ","; + } + } + } + bsscFXInit( null, id, translatedProp, fnname, args, nClickTimes ); + } +} + +function kadovInitEffect( element, prop ) +{ + InitEffect( element, prop ); +} + +function TranslateProp( prop ) +{ + switch( prop ) + { + case "x-on-hover" : return "bsschover"; + case "x-on-pageclick" : return "bsscpageclick"; + case "x-on-pageload" : return "bsscpageload"; + case "x-on-trigger-1" : return "bssctrigger1"; + case "x-on-trigger-2" : return "bssctrigger2"; + } + return null; +} + +function kadovTranslateProp( prop ) +{ + return TranslateProp( prop ); +} + +//End to convert iWrite format to RoboEditor Format for DHTML effects + +//Begin the definition of one entry to DHTML effects +function bsscFXInit( trigger_ID, target_ID, event_type, + action_type, action_setting, event_addional ) +{ + //if( typeof(target_ID) != "string" )//MUST have a target_ID + // return; // we don't support Navigator yet + + if( typeof(event_type) == "string" ) + event_type = event_type.toLowerCase(); + if( typeof(action_type) == "string" ) + action_type = action_type.toLowerCase(); + if( typeof(action_setting) == "string" ) + action_setting = action_setting.toLowerCase(); + + // to get the target element then add it to the target list + var eleTarget = CCSSP.GetObject( target_ID ); + if( (eleTarget != null) && (event_type != null) && (action_type != null) ) + { + + CEngine.AddOneTarget( target_ID, eleTarget ); + CEngine.BuildTargetObject(target_ID, event_type, action_type, action_setting, event_addional); + } + + // to validate the trigger_ID parameter + if( typeof(trigger_ID) == "string" && trigger_ID != "" ) + CEngine.BuildTriggerObject( trigger_ID, target_ID ); +} +//End the definition of one entry to DHTML effects + +/// Section End - DHTM (JavaScript 1.2) + +/// Section Begin - CCSSP DHTM (JavaScript 1.2) + +//Begin JavaScript libary for cross-platform positioning object. +function CCSSP(){} // constructor of CCSSP class + +CCSSP.GetObject = function( obj ) +{//convert object name string or reference into a valid object reference + if( typeof(obj) == "object" ) + return obj; + else if( typeof(obj) == "string" && obj != "") + { + if (gbBsNS6) + return getElement(obj); + else if( gbBsNS4 ) + return eval("document." + obj); + else + return eval("document.all(\"" + obj + "\")"); + } + else + return null; +} + +CCSSP.MoveObjectTo = function(obj, x, y) +{//positioning an object at a specific pixel coordinate + if( gbBsNS4 && !gbBsNS6) + obj.moveTo(x,y); + else + { + if (x == '') + x = 0 ; + if (y == '') + y = 0 ; + obj.style.left = parseInt(x) + 'px'; + obj.style.top = parseInt(y) + 'px'; + } +} + +CCSSP.SetTimer = function(obj, timeout) +{ + if( obj.timer == null ) + { + if(gbAIR) + { + obj.timer = setInterval(function(){CEngine.PerformAnimation( obj.aniIndex)}, timeout ); + } + else + obj.timer = setInterval("CEngine.PerformAnimation(" + obj.aniIndex + ")", timeout ); + } +} + + +CCSSP.MoveObjectBy = function(obj, dx, dy) +{//moveing a object by x and/or y pixel + if (gbBsNS6) + { + var left = parseInt(obj.style.left); + obj.style.setProperty('left',(left + dx ) + 'px',0) ; + var top = parseInt(obj.style.top); + obj.style.setProperty('top' , (top + dy) + 'px' ,0); + } + else if( gbBsNS4 ) + obj.moveBy(dx,dy); + else + { + obj.style.pixelLeft += dx; + obj.style.pixelTop += dy; + } +} + +CCSSP.SetObjectBGColor = function(obj, color) +{//set the background color of an object + if (gbBsNS6) + obj.style.setProperty( "background-color" , color , 0); + else if( gbBsNS4 ) + obj.bgColor = color; + else + obj.style.backgroundColor = color; +} + +CCSSP.ShowObject = function(obj, bShow) +{// set the object to be visible or invisible + if (gbBsNS6) + obj.style.setProperty('visibility', (bShow == true) ? 'visible' : 'hidden',null); + else if( gbBsNS4 ) + obj.visibility = (bShow == true) ? 'show' : 'hide'; + else + obj.style.visibility = (bShow == true) ? 'visible' : 'hidden';// when hidden, it still occupy some space. +} + +CCSSP.GetObjectLeft = function(obj) +{// retrieve the x coordinate of a posionable object + if (gbBsNS6) + return obj.style.left ; + else if( gbBsNS4 ) + return obj.left; + else + return obj.style.pixelLeft; +} + +CCSSP.GetObjectTop = function(obj) +{// retrieve the y coordinate of a posionable object + if (gbBsNS6) + return obj.style.top ; + else if( gbBsNS4 ) + return obj.top; + else + return obj.style.pixelTop; +} + +CCSSP.GetObjectContainLeft = function(obj) +{// retrieve the x coordinate of a posionable object relative to it's parent element + if( typeof(obj.pageX) != 'undefined') + return obj.pageX; + else if( typeof(obj.clientLeft) != 'undefined' ) + return obj.clientLeft; + else + return obj.offsetLeft; +} + +CCSSP.GetObjectWindowLeft = function(obj) +{// retrieve the x coordinate of a posionable object relative to browser window + if( gbBsNS4 && !gbBsNS6) + return obj.pageX; + else + { + var nOffsetWindowLeft = 0; + for(var element = obj; element; element = element.offsetParent) + nOffsetWindowLeft += CCSSP.GetObjectContainLeft(element); + return nOffsetWindowLeft; + } +} + +CCSSP.GetObjectContainTop = function(obj) +{// retrieve the y coordinate of a posionable object relative to it's parent element + if( typeof(obj.pageY) != 'undefined') + return obj.pageY; + else if( typeof(obj.clientTop) != 'undefined' && obj == document.body) + return obj.clientTop; + else + return obj.offsetTop; +} + +CCSSP.GetObjectWindowTop = function(obj) +{// retrieve the y coordinate of a posionable object relative to browser window + if( gbBsNS4 && !gbBsNS6) + return obj.pageY; + else + { + var nOffsetWindowTop = 0; + for(var element = obj; element; element = element.offsetParent) + nOffsetWindowTop += CCSSP.GetObjectContainTop(element); + return nOffsetWindowTop; + } +} + +CCSSP.GetObjectHeight = function(obj) +{// retrieve the height of a posionable object + if( gbBsNS4 && !gbBsNS6) + return obj.clip.height; + else + return obj.offsetHeight; +} + +CCSSP.GetObjectWidth = function(obj) +{// retrieve the width of a posionable object + if( gbBsNS4 && !gbBsNS6) + return obj.clip.width; + else + return obj.offsetWidth; +} + +CCSSP.RegisterEventHandler = function( srcObj, rawEventName, funcHandler ) +{ // to add the "funcHandler" as the "rawEventName" 's handler to the "srcObj" object,the original event handler will be combined + + if( srcObj == window && rawEventName == 'onload' ) + { + var bSet = false; + if( window.addEventListener ) + { + window.addEventListener( 'load', new Function("event", funcHandler ),false); + bSet = true; + } + else if( window.attachEvent ) + { + window.attachEvent('onload', new Function("event", funcHandler ), false); + bSet = true; + } + + if( bSet ) + return; + } + + if (gbBsNS4 && !gbBsNS6) + return ; + + var oldHandler = ""; + + if (gbBsMac &&gbBsIE4&&!gbBsIE5) + { + if (typeof(srcObj[rawEventName.toLowerCase()])=="unknown") + { //search for + + +

Canceling, Holding, and Unholding Receipts in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Edit/Delete Items | Locate a Receipt | Reversing a Receipt

+ +

Topic Hidden

+ +

A sales receipt can be canceled or put on hold at any time before saving. Canceling/holding a sales receipt in Simple View has the same effect as canceling/holding a sales receipt in regular view. Refer to the topic Canceling/Holding a Receipt for more details.

+

To cancel a sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Cancel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the confirmation dialog, click Yes to discard the current receipt. The sales transaction of the receipt is canceled.

    +
    3. +
+

Or, click No to return to the current receipt and continue with the sales transaction.

+

To put a sales receipt on hold:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Hold. The current sales receipt is put on hold.

    +
    2. +
+

To take a sales receipt off hold:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Unhold. The held receipt will replace the new receipt form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete the sales transaction by editing, saving, printing or canceling the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Canceling/Holding a receipt in regular view

+

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Edit/Delete items in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Credit_Card_Returns_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Credit_Card_Returns_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cfef780 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Credit_Card_Returns_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Credit Card Returns in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Returns in Simple View

+

Returning Items | Gift Card Returns Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

If a previous credit card transaction has already been settled with the concerned bank, you should issue a credit refund to the customer by making a return receipt.

+

To make a credit card return:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic return procedure adding items to a return receipt. For more information, see Returning Items in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Payments area, click Give Change and select Credit Card from the menu. The Credit Card dialog opens.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Swipe the customers credit card, or manually enter the credit card number, expiration date and the customers ZIP Code.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Update, print the receipt, and have the customer sign the merchant copy.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

If the customer is returning all the items on the original receipt, you can also reverse the original receipt. Reversing the receipt is typically done when the customer is not present to swipe their card or to get a signature for a return receipt.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Returning Items in Simple View

+

Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Customers_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Customers_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b63067 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Customers_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + +Customers in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Customers in Simple View

+

 

+

If the company preference to track customer is enabled, basic customer functionality is supported in Simple View, including:

+ +

Selling items from customer orders

+ +

To list an existing customer in Simple View:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Customer field, begin typing customer information (last name is suggested, but you can also type first name, phone number, company name, or a search keyword).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Enter.

    +
    3. +
+

         Simple View CUstomer Field

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the correct name from the displayed list of customers matching your entry.

    +
    2. +
+

Alternatively, select the down arrow to the right of the customer field to display your entire customer list. Scroll through the list to locate the customer name.

+

Discounts, tax handling, and other customer-specific sales information is automatically suggested or applied to the receipt.

+

To QuickAdd a new customer in Simple View:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Add Cust from the left side of the Simple View screen. The New Customer window is opened.

    +
    2. +
+

          QuickAdd Customer

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter basic customer information. Last Name is required.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save and Select.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete the sale normally.

    +
    3. +
+

You can add additional information for the customer later by editing the customer record.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Customer Overview

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Discounting_Sales_Prices_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Discounting_Sales_Prices_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..690accc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Discounting_Sales_Prices_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Discounting Sales Prices in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discounting Sales Prices in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Edit/Delete Items | Taking Payments /Giving Change Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Simple View supports the following types of discounts:

+

Manual item discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer Discounts and Price Levels Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer Rewards Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Global discount (to entire sale) Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Automatic Discounts and Coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Company Preferences: Pricing

+

Using Markdown Price Levels

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Edit_Delete_Items_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Edit_Delete_Items_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be2a57e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Edit_Delete_Items_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Edit / Delete Items in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit / Delete Items in Simple View

+

Receipt Elements | Making a Sale | Discounting Sales Prices Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

You can edit a sales receipt by editing or deleing items listed in it.

+

To edit an item:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, select an item in the Item List area.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Edit Item to open the Edit Item dialog.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit the Item Name, Item Description, Quantity, Price and Discount % fields for the selected item. Also, select Unit of Measure and the reason for discount from UOM and Disc. Reason drop-down lists respectively.

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click OK to close the dialog and return to the sales receipt form. The edited item details appear in the Item List area.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat Step 1 to 4 to edit other items in the sales receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

To delete an item:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, select an item in the Item List area.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Delete Item to delete selected item from the sales receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Inventory Overview

+

Item Information Fields

+

Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

Taking Payments /Giving Change

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Gift_Card_Returns_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Gift_Card_Returns_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a90e515 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Gift_Card_Returns_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Gift Card Returns in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Gift Card Returns in Simple View

+

Returning Items | Credit Card Returns Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

You can refund amounts for returned merchandise to a gift card. The refunded amount is added to the gift card balance (if you are using the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service).

+

To make gift card return:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic return procedure for adding items to a return receipt. For more information, see Returning Items in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the Payments area, click Give Change and select Gift Card from the menu. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Swipe the gift card, or manually enter the card number.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the gift card service servers and updates the card balance.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the return receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Returning Items in Simple View

+

Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Introduction_to_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Introduction_to_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..73b8715 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Introduction_to_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Introduction to Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Introduction to Simple View

+

Working with Touchscreen | Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

 

+

Point of Sale provides you with Simple View, a simplified version of the regular sales receipt form.

+

Shown here is an example of the Simple View receipt form:

+

Simple View: New Sales Receipt form

+

Using Simple View, you can perform most day-to-day sales tasks:

+ +

Refer to Receipt Elements in Simple View to understand the usage of the Simple View screen.

+

Simple View also supports a touchscreen monitor. Refer to the topic Working with Touchscreen Monitor and Virtual Keyboard for details.

+

To switch between regular view and Simple View:

+ +

regular view: Switch to Simple View

+ +

Simple View: Switch to regular view

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

Working with Touchscreen Monitor and Virtual Keyboard in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Locate_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Locate_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e407e32 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Locate_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Locate a Receipt in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Locate a Receipt in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Canceling/Holding a Receipt | Reversing a Receipt

+

 

+

Saved sales receipts are stored in your sales history. From Simple View, you can scroll through the receipts in sales history to view, print, or reverse them.

+

To locate a saved sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    If you have a receipt in progress, complete, cancel, or hold it.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Last Receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

Simple View switches to Sales History mode and the last saved sales receipt in your sales history is displayed. You can now scroll through your saved receipts:

+ +
    +
  1. +

    To return from the sales history mode, click New Receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Locating a receipt in sales history in regular view

+

History documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Making_a_Sale_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Making_a_Sale_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ef7778 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Making_a_Sale_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Making a Sale in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Taking Payments /Giving Change | Edit/Delete Items | Discounting Sales Prices | Making a Sale in regular view

+

 

+

Making a sale in Simple View is similar to making a sale in regular view of the sales receipt form. To make a sale, you create a new sales receipt in Simple View, and record the sales transaction you perform.

+

To make a sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Sales Receipt or Make a Sale (where is it?) to open a blank receipt form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    (optional) If in Classic View, click Switch to Simple View to open the Simple View.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the <Type/Scan item info here> drop-down list, enter item information to add an item being sold. Click to expand/collapse topic

    + +

    Enter items by any of these methods:

    +
      +
    • +

      Scan the bar code from the item tag

      +
      • +
    • +

      Tap and hold the <Type/Scan item info here> drop-down list to open a virtual Keyboard. Alternatively, use the regular keyboard and mouse to enter the item information using any of the following methods:

      +
      • +
    +
      +
    • +

      Type the UPC, alternate lookup value, or item number of the item in the drop-down list and press <Enter>.

      + +
      • +
    • +

      Type first few letters of the item description in the drop-down list. The list of all matching items is displayed in the expanded drop-down list, with the closest match highlighted. Select an item in the list (keyboard users, press the down arrow key to scroll to an item, and then press  <Enter> to select).

      +
      • +
    +

    The selected item details are listed in the Item List area.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    (Optional) Select an item listed in the Item fields and click Edit Item, to edit the items details if necessary. You can edit an item to change quantity, change price, give discounts, make a return, correct receipt etc.. See Edit an Item in Simple View for more details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Repeat until all items are listed.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    (Optional) In the Discount% field, enter a global discount (in percent) and then <Enter>. The discount you enter is applied on the total receipt amount, and Regular Price-Total field displays the discounted price.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    (Optional) From the Tax drop-down list, select appropriate Sales Tax Location.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    In the Payments area, click appropriate payment button to open corresponding payment dialog. See Payment Options in Simple View for details of making payments from the Simple View.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Take payment and give change, as applicable.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Click Save and Print once to open the Print dialog.

    +

    Alternatively, click and hold Save and Print to open sub menu, and select one of the following options:

    +
      +
    • +

      Save (only saving a receipt)

      +
      • +
    • +

      Save and Print (saving and printing a receipt)

      +
      • +
    +
    9. +
  9. +

    (Optional) Click Preview to preview the receipt.

    +
    10. +
  10. +

    Click Print to record the sale and give the customer a printed receipt. Alternatively, click Cancel to cancel printing the receipt. The receipt is saved but not printed.

    +
    11. +
+

After the receipt is saved, a new blank sales receipt is displayed, ready for the next sale.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Making a Sale in regular view

+

Introduction to Simple View

+

Switching between regular view and Simple View

+

 

+

 

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Merchandise_Exchange_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Merchandise_Exchange_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d634a98 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Merchandise_Exchange_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Merchandise Exchange in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchandise Exchange in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Returning Items Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

When a customer returns an item to exchange for another, you perform two transactions in one sales receipt: return of one item, and sale of another. Point of Sale automatically calculates any difference in item prices.

+

To handle a merchandise exchange:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic sale procedure to add both the returned and exchange items in a sales receipt. For more information, see Making a Sale in Simple View.  

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the returned item in the Item Fields area, and click Return Item.  The quantity of returned item appears negative on the sales receipt.

    +

    Simple View: Receipt for merchandise exchange

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Take payment or give change, as applicable for any difference in the item prices.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the receipt.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Taking Payment/Giving Change in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Paying_Money_out_of_the_Cash_Drawer_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Paying_Money_out_of_the_Cash_Drawer_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c3693f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Paying_Money_out_of_the_Cash_Drawer_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + +Paying Money out of the Cash Drawer in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Paying Money out of the Cash Drawer in Simple View

+

Introduction to Simple View | Opening the Cash Drawer Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Cash sometimes needs to be removed from the cash drawer. For example, you may remove cash from the cash drawer to:

+ +

To record a cash drawer payout:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Cash Payout. The Cash Payout dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
+

Simple View: Cash Payout dialog

+
    +
  1. +

    Select from or enter your name in the Cashier drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Note: If the security is enabled, the name of current cashier is auto-populated in the Cashier drop-down list. In this case, you need to log in to change the cashier name.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Amount field, enter the amount you are taking out from the cash drawer.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    If you are using QuickBooks financial software, select a QuickBooks account from the in the Account drop-down list.

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a comment in the Comment field. This required field is typically used to record how the cash was used or to whom it was paid.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

A Payout receipt is generated and placed in the sales history. The amount of the payout is recorded as a negative amount.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Paying Money out of the Cash Drawer in regular view

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Receipt_Elements_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Receipt_Elements_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f172d34 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Receipt_Elements_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,561 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Receipt Elements in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

Introduction to Simple View | Working with Touchscreen

+

 

+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each receipt element.

+

Fields shown in square brackets, for example [Date], are suggestedClick to display a popup topicor read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale. Toggle buttons,  for example Hold / Unhold, are used to perform two alternate functions.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Date] field

+		 +

Defaults to today's date.

+
+

Item Lookup <Type/Scan item info here > drop-down list

+		 +

Type/scan item name, barcode, or keyword here, or look up the item in the drop-down list using any combination of the following methods:

+
    +
  • +

    Right-click to open the virtual keyboard

    +
    • +
  • +

    Type a partial name and press <Enter> to list all matching items, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the drop-down list arrow to list all items.

    +
    • +
+
+

Customer Lookup

+

<Enter customer here> drop-down list

+

 

+		 +

Enter customer name, company name, or phone to search for matching customer or look up the customer using any combination of these methods:

+
    +
  • +

    Right-click to open the virtual keyboard

    +
    • +
  • +

    Type a partial name and press <Enter> to list all matching customers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the drop-down list arrow to select from your full customer list

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the Add Cust  button from the left-side of the screen to QuickAdd a new customer while making the sale

    +
    • +
+

Available only if Track Customers preference is turned on. Learn More

+
+

Switch View button

+		 +

Switches to the regular view of the sales receipt form

+
+

Hold / Unhold button

+		 +

Hold puts a receipt on hold at any time before saving. Only a single receipt can be kept on hold. Unhold takes the last held receipt off hold.

+
+

Open Drawer button

+		 +

Opens the cash drawer.

+
+

Cash Payout button

+		 +

Records money taken out of the cash drawer for miscellaneous expenses, such as paying vendors or donating to a charity.  Also records cash drops.

+
+

Sell Gift Crd button

+		 +

Opens the Gift Card dialog where you can enter the amount and gift card number.

+
+

Sell Gift Crt button

+		 +

Opens the Gift Certificate dialog where you can enter amount and gift certificate number.

+
+

Give Discnt button

+		 +

Opens a numeric keypad to enter the global discount percentage.

+
+

Add Cust button

+		 +

Allows you to quickly add a new customer to your customer list while making a sale.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Item List area fields

+		 +

These fields contain the detailed list of items being sold.

+
+

[Item #] field

+		 +

Item number of the selected item according to the item record in the Point of Sale Inventory.

+
+

[Item Name] field

+

 

+		 +

Item name of the selected item according to the item record in the Point of Sale Inventory. Item Name can be edited for individual sale, if necessary.

+
+

[Price] field

+		 +

Item unit price at the active price level. Price can be edited for individual sale, if necessary.

+
+

[Qty] field

+		 +

Sales Quantity. By default, displayed Qty value is 1. Qty can be edited for individual sale if necessary.

+
+

[Ext Price] field

+

 

+		 +

Extended item price, calculated by multiplying Qty by Price. If you sell items costing a fraction of a cent, you can list a quantity and enter an extended price. Point of Sale calculates and displays the unit price.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Edit Item button

+		 +

Opens Edit Item dialog to make changes in quantity, price etc. for the selected item.

+
+

Return Item button

+		 +

Marks the selected item as a return item by negating the quantity.

+
+

Delete Item button

+		 +

Deletes the currently selected item from the receipt.

+
+

[Discount %] field

+		 +

Global discount percentage.

+
+

[Tax] drop-down list

+		 +

Lists available sales tax locations. Select appropriate sales tax locations from this drop-down list. Point of Sale calculates applicable sales tax according to the selected tax location, and the calculated sales tax is added to the Regular Price-Total value.

+
+

[Shipping] button

+		 +

Use to enter any shipping cost. The shipping cost is added to the Regular Price-Total value.

+
+

Prev Receipt button

+		 +

Navigates to previous receipt in the Point of Sale Sales History. Disabled by default and enabled only when you click Last Receipt.

+
+

Next Receipt button

+		 +

Navigates to next receipt in the Point of Sale Sales History. Disabled by default and enabled only when you click Last Receipt.

+
+

Reverse Receipt button

+		 +

Reverses the current receipt by creating a reversing entry.  Point of Sale adds returned item quantities back to Inventory and total item price is refunded to the customer.

+
+

Last Receipt button

+		 +

Switches Simple View to Sales History mode, and displays the last saved receipt.

+
+

Close button

+		 +

Closes the active sales receipt form and returns you to the Point of Sale Navigator home page.

+
+

[Regular Price Total] field

+		 +

Total amount due from the customer (or to the customer in case of a return).

+
+

[Due] field

+		 +

Displays the difference between Regular Price-Total value and the amount paid by customer.

+
+

[Change] field

+		 +

Displays the amount to be given to the customer.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Payments area fields

+		 +

Payments area displays various payment fields listed below. These fields are populated with the values entered in response to the respective Payments area button click.

+
+

[Cash] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Cash Payment dialog.

+
+

[Check] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Check Payment dialog.

+
+

[Credit] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Credit Card Payment dialog.

+
+

[Debit] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Debit Card Payment dialog.

+
+

[Gift Card] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Gift Card dialog.

+
+

[Gift Cert] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Gift Certificate dialog.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Payments area buttons

+		 +

Payments area displays various buttons listed below. Click these buttons to open respective payment option dialogs.

+
+

Cash button

+		 +

Click to open Cash Payment dialog.

+
+

Check button

+		 +

Click to open Check Payment dialog.

+
+

Credit button

+		 +

Click to open Credit Card Payment dialog.

+
+

Debit button

+		 +

Click to open Debit Card Payment dialog.

+
+

Gift Card button

+		 +

Click to open Gift Card dialog.

+
+

Gift Cert button

+		 +

Click to open Gift Certificate dialog.

+
+

Give Change button

+		 +

Click to select a payment option to give change.

+
+

Clear Paymts button

+		 +

Click to clear current payment entry.

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Save and Print button

+		 +

Click and hold mouse button to open dialog and choose appropriate option to let you save the sales receipt, or both save and print the receipt.

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Introduction to Simple View

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Returning_Items_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Returning_Items_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a44df7f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Returning_Items_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Returning Items in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Returning Items in Simple View

+

Merchandise Exchange | Gift Card Returns | Credit Card Returns Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

You can use Simple View to record merchandise returns as well. You can create a return receipt for returned items by using the sales receipt form. Such items are added back to the Point of Sale Inventory, and the receipt displays the amount to be refunded to the customer.

+

To process a merchandise return:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic sale procedure for adding the returned item in a new sales receipt. For more information, see Making a Sale in Simple View.

    +

    Or

    +

    Locate the original sales receipt containing the returned items. For more information, see Locate a Receipt in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the returned item in the Item Fields area.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Return Item.

    +

    Or

    +

    Click Edit Item, and enter a negative value in the Quantity field of the Edit Item dialog.

    +

    For more information, see Edit/Delete Items in Simple View.

    +

     

    +

    Simple View: Return receipt

    +

     

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Give Change from the Payments area. A menu with multiple payment options for giving change (refunding item price) to the customer appears.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select appropriate payment option and follow steps for the selected option. For more information, see Taking Payments /Giving Change in Simple View.

    +

     

    +

    Simple View: Refund by giving change

    +

     

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the return receipt.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Merchandise Returns

+

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Reversing_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Reversing_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b19d702 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Reversing_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Reversing a Receipt in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reversing a Receipt in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Locate a Receipt | Canceling/Holding a Receipt Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Saved sales receipts cannot be deleted and editing is restricted to certain informational fields. If information other than what can be edited needs to be corrected, you can reverse the sales receipt. Reversing a sales receipt corrects your sales history, inventory quantities, and customer records.

+

This procedure is not recommended for processing routine merchandise returns from a customer.

+

To reverse a sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the sales receipt to be reversed in the Sales History. For more information, see Locate a Receipt in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Reverse Receipt. The Reversing Document dialog opens.

    +
    3. +
+

Simple View: Reversing receipts

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your name from the Cashier field, and click OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

A reversing receipt is automatically created and added to the sales history. In the sales history, a reversed receipt can be identified by the value Reversing in its Status field. The original receipt is marked as  Reversed Sales Receipt #<receipt number>, when you locate it again in Simple View.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Sell_a_Gift_Card_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Sell_a_Gift_Card_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba6b1da --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Sell_a_Gift_Card_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Sell a Gift Card in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Selling a Gift Card in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Taking Payments / Giving Change | Gift Card Returns

+

 

+

Gift cards are sold or recharged on sales receipts. The gift card item and sales amount are printed on the customer receipt.

+

To sell or recharge a gift card:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, use any of these methods to add gift card to the item list:

    +
      +
    • +

      Click <Type/Scan item info here> drop-down list to focus on it, and swipe the gift card to recharge. The gift card to be sold appears listed in the Item Fields area.

      +
      • +
    • +

      Enter Gift Card in the <Type/Scan item info here> and then press <Enter>. A gift card is added in the Item Fields area.

      +
      • +
    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Sell Gift Crd. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter an amount and gift card number for the gift card in the Amount and Gift Card Number fields respectively.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click OK to confirm transaction, or Cancel to cancel the transaction.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Repeat Step 1 to 4 to add more gift cards to the sales receipt.

    +

    Note:

    +
    6. +
+

You can sell up to three gift cards in a sales transaction.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add other items being sold in the same transaction to the sales receipt. For more information, see Making a Sale in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use general payment procedures to accept the amount due or give change. For more information, see Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the sales receipt.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Gift Card Service overview

+

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Taking payments/Giving Change in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Sell_a_Gift_Certificate_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Sell_a_Gift_Certificate_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..773ab6d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Sell_a_Gift_Certificate_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Sell a Gift Certificate in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell a Gift Certificate in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Taking Payments / Giving Change

+

 

+

A gift certificate is basically "store money" that can be used to purchase merchandise at a future date. Certificate numbers can be recorded both on gift certificate sale and future redemption for tracking purposes.

+

To sell a gift certificate:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Sell Gift Crt. The Gift Certificate dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the amount and certificate number for the gift certificate in the Amount and Gift Certificate Number fields.

    +

    Note:

    +
    3. +
+

Only a single gift certificate can be sold in a sales receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK to confirm transaction. A gift certificate is added to the sales receipt item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Add other items being sold in the same transaction to the sales receipt. For more information, see Making a Sale in Simple View.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use general payment procedures to accept the amount due or give change. For more information, see Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the sales receipt.

    +
    5. +
+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Taking_Payments_Giving_Change_in_Simple_View.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Taking_Payments_Giving_Change_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b0ac30 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Taking_Payments_Giving_Change_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,371 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Taking Payments / Giving Change in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Taking Payments / Giving Change in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Discounting Sales Prices | Merchant Services

+

 

+

This topic contains general instructions for taking receipt payments in Simple View. You can also learn how to take payments made by cash, check, credit card, debit/ATM card, gift certificate, gift card.

+

 

+

After receiving payments, you can give change to the customer by cash, check, credit card, gift certificate, or gift card.

+

To take payment and give change:

+

When you finish adding items to a sales receipt, giving discounts, applying appropriate sales tax and shipping charges, you can view total amount due in the Regular Price-Total field.

+

If the total amount due is negative (refunds to the customer when returning items), and you are only giving change, start at Step 5 below.

+

You can accept the full amount by a single payment/change method, or use multiple payment/change methods.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Payments area, click appropriate payment button to accept the total payable amount. The corresponding payment option dialog opens. Click on the following payment options for the steps to be followed:

    +
    2. +
+

Cash

+

Check

+

Credit

+

Debit

+

Gift Card

+

Gift Certificate

+

After performing the steps for any of the above payment options, you return to the receipt form you are working on.  

+

Or

+

Click two or more payment buttons one by one in the Payments area, and follow the corresponding payment option steps, to break up the total payable amount into different payment methods.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    If change is due to the customer, the Change Due dialog opens, with multiple payment options to give change. Click on the following payment options to see the steps to follow:

    +

    Cash

    +

    Check

    +

    Credit

    +

    Gift Card

    +

    Gift Certificate

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Once complete payment is received from the customer, and change is given to the customer (if applicable), click Save and Print to save and print the sales receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Payment by Cash

+

To receive payment by cash:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Cash in the Payments area. The Cash Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field. In case of multiple payment methods, total payable amount is the balance amount, after part-payment made by different payment options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the amount tended by the customer, if different from the total payable amount, in the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK to confirm the cash payment. You return to the current sales receipt form.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Change by Cash

+

To give change by cash:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Cash in the Change Due dialog. You return to the current sales receipt form and the cash drawer opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Give the appropriate change in cash to the customer.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Payment by Check:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Check in the Payments area. The Check Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +
    2. +
+

Simple View: Check Payment dialog

+
    +
  1. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the check number in the Enter check # field.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK.  You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the sales transaction.

    +
    2. +
+

Change by Check:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Check in the Change Due dialog. The Check Change dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter check number in the Enter check # field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK. You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the sales transaction.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Payment by Credit Card

+

To receive payment by credit card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Credit in the Payments area. The Credit Card Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +

    Simple View: Credit Card Payment dialog

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK.  The Credit Card dialog opens.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Swipe the customers credit card.

    +

    Or

    +

    Click Manual Entry. Enter the credit card information, the fraud prevention information (optional), and then click Authorize. At next prompt, specify whether the card is present or not.

    +

    Simple View: Accept Credit Card dialog

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

    +

    If all of the following are true, Point of Sale will process the transaction and print the receipt without further action on your part. In this case, skip to Step 7.

    + +

    If any of these are not true, continue with the following steps.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +

    Authorized: The charge has been approved. Select OK to close the window.

    +

    Declined: The charge was not approved. Select Cancel to return to the sales receipt. Ask the customer to provide a different form of payment, or select Authorize to try again.

    +

    Referral: Voice authorization is required. The cursor is automatically placed in the Authorization field. Call the displayed phone number and give the operator your Merchant Number. Enter the authorization number the operator gives you and press <Enter>.

    +

    Failed address or card verification check: The address or card verification code entered does not match the issuers records. Depending on your merchant service preferences, you may be allowed to continue or the transaction may be automatically voided.

    +

    For more information, see Address and Card Verification Results Guide.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Wait for the receipt to print, if configured to print automatically. Ask the customer to sign the merchant copy of the receipt.

    +

    Or

    +

    You are returned to the current sales receipt to save and print the receipt.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    In the current sales receipt, the payment is reflected against the appropriate field in the Payments area.

    +
    9. +
+

Simple View: Payment methods

+

 

+

Note:

+

Using the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 or 3070 PIN pad?.

+

 

+

Change by Credit Card

+

To give change by credit card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Credit in the Change Due dialog. The Credit Card dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Swipe the customers credit card.

    +

    Or

    +

    Click Manual Entry. Enter the credit card information, and click Authorize.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

    +
    4. +
+

If authorization is complete, the change due is credited to customers credit card. Else, request the customer to pay by another payment method.

+

You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the remaining sales transaction.

+

 

+

Payment by Debit Card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Debit in the Payments area. The Debit Card Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +

    Simple View: Debit Card Payment dialog

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK.  The Debit/ATM Card dialog opens.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Swipe the customers debit card.

    +

    Or

    +

    Click Manual Entry. Enter the debit card information, and then click Authorize.

    +

    Simple View: Accept Debit Card dialog

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Ask the customer to enter debit card PIN. After the customer enters PIN, click OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Ask the customer to approve the displayed total transaction amount by clicking OK.

    +

    Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

    +

    If both of the following are true, Point of Sale will process the transaction and print the receipt without further action on your part. In this case, skip to Step 5.

    + +

    If either of the above is not true, continue with the following step.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
    4. +
+

Authorized: The debit has been approved. Select OK to close the card dialog.

+

Declined: The debit was not approved. Select Cancel to close the Debit window and return to the payment screen. Request the customer to pay by another payment method.

+
    +
  1. +

    Wait for the receipt to print, if configured to print automatically. Ask the customer to sign the merchant copy of the receipt.

    +

    Or

    +

    You are returned to the current sales receipt to save and print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the current sales receipt, the payment is reflected against the appropriate field in the Payments area.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+

Using the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 or 3070 PIN pad?.

+ 
  +

Payment by Gift Card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Card in the Payments area. The Gift Card Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +

    Simple View: Gift Card Payment dialog

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Swipe the customers gift card.

    +

    Or

    +

    Enter the gift card number manually, and click Authorize.

    +

    Simple View: Gift Card Payment dialog

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Point of Sale connects to the Gift Card Service and checks the balance of the card and a confirmation message displayed:

    +
    6. +
+ +

You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the remaining sales transaction.

+

 

+

Change by Gift Card

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Card in the Change Due dialog. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Swipe the customers gift card.

    +

    Or

    +
    3. +
+

         Enter the gift card number manually, and click Authorize.

+
    +
  1. +

    Point of Sale connects to the gift card service servers and credit the change amount to the customers gift card.

    +
    2. +
+

You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the remaining sales transaction.

+

 

+

Payment by Gift Certificate:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Cert. in the Payments area. The Gift Certificate Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +

    Simple View: Gift Certificate Payment dialog

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the gift certificate number in Enter gift certificate # field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click OK. You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the sales transaction.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Change by Gift Certificate

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Cert in the Change Due dialog. The Gift Certificate Selling dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK. You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the sales transaction.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Returning Items in Simple View

+

Gift Card Returns

+

Credit Card Returns

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Work_with_Simple_View__How_Do_I.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Work_with_Simple_View__How_Do_I.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c2f63f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Work_with_Simple_View__How_Do_I.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + + +Work with Simple View: How Do I + + + + + + + + +

Work with Simple View: How do I?

+

 

+

Make a Sale

+

Discount Prices

+

Track Customers

+

Take Payments /Give Change

+

Return Items

+

Exchange Items

+

Use a Touchscreen or Virtual Keyboard

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Working_with_Touchscreen_Monitor_and_Virtual_Keyboard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Working_with_Touchscreen_Monitor_and_Virtual_Keyboard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a31fc32 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_SimpleView/Working_with_Touchscreen_Monitor_and_Virtual_Keyboard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Working with Touchscreen Monitor and Virtual Keyboard in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Working with Touchscreen Monitor and Virtual Keyboard in Simple View

+

Introduction to Simple View | Receipt Elements

+

 

+

Simple View supports a touchscreen interface. You can interact with the Simple View either by using a regular keyboard and mouse, or from a touchscreen monitor.

+

To use a touchscreen monitor with Simple View, you need to install necessary hardware and configure Point of Sale. Refer to Setting Up Hardware for details.

+

The touchscreen interface has a virtual keyboard that appears automatically when you select/focus on a Simple View receipt field requiring data-entry. The layout of the virtual keyboard is the same as a regular keyboard. You can enter data simply by tapping the keys displayed on the touchscreen monitor.

+

Refer to the table below to for regular keyboard and mouse actions, and the equivalent touchscreen actions.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Mouse / Keyboard Action

+		 +

Touchscreen Action

+
+

Single click field / button / drop-down list

+		 +

Tap field / button / drop-down list once

+
+

Double click field / button /drop-down list

+		 +

Tap field / button / drop-down list twice (in quick succession)

+
+

Right Click field / button /drop-down list

+		 +

Tap and hold field / button / drop-down list

+
+

Select field / drop-down list item

+		 +

Tap field / drop-down list arrow

+
+

Press keys on the keyboard

+		 +

Tap appropriate field on the touch screen to bring up a virtual keyboard on the touchscreen monitor.

+

Tap any alphabet  / number / special character (@, #, and so on) on the virtual keyboard, to enter the alphabet  / number / special character in selected field.

+
+

Entering numbers / special characters

+		 +

The virtual keyboard has only alphabetic keypad visible by default.

+

Tap {.123 on the alphabetic keypad to open the numeric keypad to enter numbers and special characters.

+

Tap ABC on the numeric keypad to return to the alphabetic keypad.

+
+

Click and hold down a mouse button

+		 +

Tap and hold

+
+

 

+

Note: You can use regular keyboard-mouse combination interchangeably with the touchscreen monitor-virtual keyboard combination, except when the virtual keyboard is available for data-entry. You must close the virtual keyboard to be able to use regular keyboard and mouse for data-entry in Simple View.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Introduction to Simple View

+

Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

Setting Up Hardware

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1301.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1301.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..405ac3b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1301.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Accessing Adjustment Memos + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Accessing Adjustment Memos

+

Select one of the following from the Inventory menu:

+ +

Close

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1303.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1303.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f867ea3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1303.htm @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ + + + + + + + + +Creating an Adjustment Memo: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Creating an Adjustment Memo: Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Memo Fields | Adjustments Overview

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

To create a memo:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select New Quantity Memo or New Cost Memo.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter information into the appropriate memo fields at the top of the form.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    List the items to be adjusted, using standard item listing procedures. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the New Qty or New Cost for the item in either of these ways:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save & Print or Save Only.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Notes on the quantity/cost difference FieldsClick to display a popup topic

+

Tip: Changing the quantity of a large number of items or a styleClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copying a memo

+

Canceling or holding a memo in progress

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1307.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1307.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..af205d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1307.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Changing Quantities for a Large Number of Items + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Changing Quantities for a Large Number of Items

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

If you are changing the quantities for a large number of items, you may find it faster to do a Physical Inventory to update these quantities instead of using a quantity adjustment memo.

+

In the Physical Inventory module, enter a new Physical Qty for each item you want to change. Then update the physical inventory as usual.

+

 

+

(Pro Alternative) If you use styles, and are changing the quantities for all items in a style, start a quantity memo as usual, and then:

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Select from Item List from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Locate one style item and then select Switch to Style.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the adjusted (new) quantities in the cells of the style grid. (0 is displayed for each item until you enter a different value)

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Choose Select. The style items and their adjusted quantities are carried to your adjustment memo.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Save.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1308.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1308.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5281d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1308.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + +Reversing and Correcting an Adjustment Memo + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reversing and Correcting an Adjustment Memo

+

Finding a Memo | Adjustments Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Saved memos are permanent records that cannot be deleted. To undo an adjustment, you must create a new adjustment.

+

A quick way to accomplish this is to reverse the original memo, which automatically creates another adjustment to cancel the effect of the original.

+

To reverse a memo:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your adjustment history list, highlight or display the memo that you want to reverse.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Reverse from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Reversing Document dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm or enter your name in the Associate field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

If necessary, the original memo can then be copied and the copy edited to create a new, corrected memo.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Creating a memo manually

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1309.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1309.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..28bfca7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1309.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printing a Saved Memo + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing a Saved Memo

+

Finding a Memo | Adjustments Overview | Printing Basics

+
+

Basic

+
+

Typically, new memos are automatically printed when you save/print them upon completion. You can reprint previously saved memos from your adjustment history using this procedure.

+

To print a saved memo:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and select the memo that you want to print.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print from the window toolbar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If presented with a print option dialog:

    +
    4. +
+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1318.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1318.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d46ba25 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo1318.htm @@ -0,0 +1,228 @@ + + + + + + + +Actions that Generate Memos + + + + + + + + + + +

Actions that Generate Memos

+

Adjustments Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

The actions listed below will result in adjustments to inventory quantities or costs. Certain actions result in program-generated memos; in these cases you may be prompted for your name and a reason for the adjustment, but the memo is automatically created. The Source and Type columns refer to the entries automatically recorded in the corresponding fields in the memo header.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Action

+		 +

Created by

+		 +

Reason

+		 +

Source

+		 +

Type

+
+

Manually creating a memo

+		 +

User

+		 +

User-defined or selected (damaged, shrinkage, etc.)

+		 +

Manual

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Reversing a memo

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

ManAdj

+		 +

Reverse

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Deleting an item with an on-hand quantity

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

Item Deleted

+		 +

Inventory

+		 +

Quantity

+
+

Applying  physical inventory changes

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

Physical

+		 +

Physical Inventory

+		 +

Quantity

+
+

Manually entering item quantity or cost

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

ManAdj

+		 +

Manual

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Merging items

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

MergedItem

+		 +

Manual

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Importing items with the Data Import Wizard

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

Data Import

+

or

+

QBFS Import

+		 +

Import

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Building an Assembly (Pro)

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

CreatAsm

+		 +

Assembly

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Breaking an Assembly (Pro)

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

Brk Asm

+		 +

Assembly

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo_differencefields.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo_differencefields.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8aaf63 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memo_differencefields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +Notes on Difference Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Notes on Difference Fields

+ +

In-help popup: also called from index

+ +

 

+

Item Difference Fields

+

Old, new, and difference fields for adjusted values are included in the item list on adjustment memos.

+

For example, on a cost adjustment memo, the Old Cost field shows the current inventory cost for an item. You enter the adjusted value in the New Cost field (decimal cost entry allowed, up to five decimal places). The difference between the old and new cost is displayed in the Diff Cost field. Likewise, on quantity adjustment memos, you have Old Qty, New Qty, and Diff Qty fields.

+

 

+

image\memo_diff.gif

+

 

+

Document Difference Fields

+

Similar fields in the totals area of the memo (Old Value, New Value on cost memo, and Old Qty, New Qty, Qty Change on quantity memo) summarize the total adjustments to inventory for all items on the memo. One more totals field, Value Change, is used on both memo types to show the dollar change in inventory value resulting from the memo. These totals fields cannot be edited.

+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memosoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memosoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3c1c9c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_adjustments/memosoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + +Inventory Adjustments Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Adjustments Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Memo Fields | Making an Adjustment Memo

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

Adjustment memos are used to make changes to item quantities or costs. The changes tracked are those that would not otherwise be recorded on another transactional document.

+

Typical uses for manually-created adjustment memos include:

+ +

When you create an adjustment memo, the affected On-hand Quantity or Average Unit Cost fields are automatically updated in inventory and a permanent record of the change is added to your adjustment and item history.

+

Some actions in Point of Sale, such as deleting an item with an on-hand quantity, conducting a physical inventory, or manually entering or editing an items average cost or on-hand quantity result in program-generated adjustment memos.

+

Saved memos are permanently stored in your adjustment history lists. A separate list is maintained for each memo type, quantity and cost. Memos can be reversed to correct errors, but never deleted.

+

(Pro w/multiple stores) Item quantities can be adjusted at either Headquarters or remote stores. Headquarters can adjust quantities for any store, while remote stores can adjust only their own local quantities. Only Headquarters can create cost memos, although both quantity and cost memos are generated automatically at remote stores for certain activities.

+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for adjustments

+

How adjustment memos are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+

Note: Automatic quantity adjustments at remote stores

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic219.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic219.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9120325 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic219.htm @@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ + + + + + + + +Use UPCs in Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + +

Use UPCs in Point of Sale

+

Bar Codes & Scanners | Item Identifiers

+

 

+

Some merchandise comes from the vendor pre-tagged with UPC (Universal Product Code) bar codes. If you record those UPCs in inventory, you can scan the UPC bar codes to list the items on documents.

+

The UPC field on an item record can be used to record UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN, or similar identifiers up to 18 digits. Point of Sale will convert UPC formats of less than 13 digits (such as UPC-A and UPC-E) to a 13-digit form using a standard conversion algorithm.

+

Every UPC # recorded must be unique and contain only numbers. UPCs can be entered on an items record by any of the three methods described below.

+

Important Note

+

Bar codes created in Point of Sale are based on the item numbers, not the UPC. Do not scan a Point of Sale-created item number bar code into the item UPC field. Likewise, if a vendor provides alphanumeric bar codes that are not true UPC codes, do not enter those codes into the UPC field. UPC codes have a required format, and other code formats are not accepted. Consider using the Alternate Lookup field for these codes instead.

+

(Pro) You can use the Print Designer to customize your tags to print the UPC bar code if you prefer.

+

To record UPCs in inventory:

+ +

UPC #s can be efficiently and accurately entered by scanning in the UPC bar code on the manufacturer's label. Position the cursor in the UPC field on the item record and scan the tag.

+ +

Refer to the selections below in making manual UPC entries.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type of code

+		 +

# of digits

+		 +

If you enter...

+		 +

Point of Sale will...

+
+

UPC-E

+		 +

6

+		 +

all 6 digits

+		 +

expand those 6 to a 13-digit form

+
+

UPC-A

+		 +

12

+		 +

the first 11 digits

+  +

Example: 12345612345

+  +

all 12 digits

+		 +

add the 12th digit (checksum) & leading zero

+

Example: 0123456123458

+

 

+  +

add the leading zero

+
+

EAN

+		 +

13

+		 +

all 13 digits

+		 +

add nothing

+
+

Other

+		 +

<13

+		 +

all digits

+		 +

expand the entry to a 13-digit form, if necessary

+
+

Other

+		 +

>13

+		 +

all digits

+		 +

no change (note: this ability is to support future UPC technologies)

+
+

When an item with a defined UPC is listed on a receipt, voucher, memo, or slip, the UPC is recorded on the document. Thus, merchandise can be filtered by UPC when running history reports even if the item has been deleted from inventory.

+ +

If you enter a UPC code on a purchase order or receiving voucher, and that UPC code is not already entered in the item record in inventory, Point of Sale will populate the UPC field in inventory with your entry.

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Item identifiers

+

Alternate lookups

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic221.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic221.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d82b701 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic221.htm @@ -0,0 +1,302 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Markdowns and Discounts: Priority and Conflicts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Markdowns and Discounts: Priority and Conflicts

+

Customer Discounts | Giving Discounts on Sales | Price Manager

+

 

+

There are several ways for you to offer different prices and discounts on sales. Click a link for a brief description of each option.

+

Pricing Options (these are not discounts)

+

Regular Price Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Markdown Price Levels Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Discount Options

+

Manual Item Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Global Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer Rewards Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Automatic Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Discount Priority and Conflicts

+

Use care if you use more than one of the discount options or you could run into situations where the combination of customer and items on the sale qualify for more than one discount, resulting in a discount "conflict."

+

In some cases, such as customer-associated discounts and customer rewards, you are prompted to apply the discount (or not) and have some control over conflicts by the choice you make. When a conflict does occur, Point of Sale follows these rules to apply the discounts.

+

Basic Rules

+ +

Automatic Discount Rules (Pro)

+ +

Customer Reward Discount Rules (Pro)

+ +

Learn more about customer rewards

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic223.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic223.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..117227b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic223.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Security and Program Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

Security and Program Preferences

+

Employees/Security | Company Preferences | Workstation Preferences

+

 

+

Security settings and program preferences can control the availability of many program features. If a feature is not available to you, your security group assignment or the program preference settings may not be set to allow you access to that feature.

+

Ask your system administratorClick to display a popup topic to review these settings.

+

 

+

Employees & Security

+

Employees can be added and passwords and security rights assigned by selecting Security from the Employees menu. You must log in as the System Administrator to add employees.

+

Employees must be defined if you want to list their names on documents, create sales performance reports, limit access to specific features or for Pro users, track hours worked or commission sales.

+

By requiring employee logins, you can control access to features by assigning employees to one of four predefined security groups, each with a specified set of security rights. You can also define your own custom security groups with the access rights you prefer.

+

 

+

Program Preferences

+

The Company and Workstation preferences allow you to configure Point of Sale to work with your hardware and accessories, establish data control, and customize many features.

+

There are two preferences modules that are accessible from accessible from File > Preferences:

+

Company Preferences - affects all Point of Sale functions and workstations.

+

Workstation Preferences - applies to an individual workstation.

+

This arrangement allows you to maintain central control over critical program features through Company settings, while also allowing individual workstation setups to be optimized for a particular purpose or hardware.

+

 

+

Data Protection

+

The electronic data that you gather during day-to-day business operations is invaluable and must be protected from harm. Power failure, media defects, disgruntled employees, or hardware problems can destroy days or weeks of accumulated information. Backing up your data on a regular basis enables you to recover from such events as quickly and painlessly as possible. Failure to do so puts your entire business at risk.

+

Note: If you have Free Online Backup through your Point of Sale or QuickBooks Desktop support plans, it is a separate software that needs to be installed and configured for you to be protected.  

+

Please read the data backup/restore overview and implementing a comprehensive data protection strategy for more information and suggestions.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic242.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic242.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..033d352 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic242.htm @@ -0,0 +1,161 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Quick-Entry Date Formats + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Quick-Date Entry Formats

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

Dates are displayed in the format you specified in your operating system. You can enter dates in that same format or use one of the following quick entry formats (without typing hyphens () or slash marks (/) to separate days, months, and years). When you press <Enter> or exit the field, the date will be converted to the format set up in your operating system, with the appropriate hyphens or slashes added.

+

The available quick entry formats are:

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Quick Entry Formats

+		 +

Display Formats and Notes

+
+

mmddyyyy

+

mmddyy

+

ddmmmyy

+

ddmmmyyyy

+		 +

Example: September 8, 2003 can be entered:

+

09082003         090803

+

08Sep03           08Sep2003.

+

Letters for month are not case-sensitive.

+

No matter how you enter the date, it will be displayed according to your operating systems date format.

+
+

Use the keyboard shortcuts below to quickly enter dates. Some commands are relative to the currently displayed date. If there is not a date displayed, the entry is relative to the current date.

+

When keyboard combinations have a + between them press the keys at the same time. When separated by a comma, press the first key, release, and then press the next key.

+
+

<T>, <Enter>

+		 +

Enter today's date.

+
+

<+>, <Number>, <Enter>

+		 +

Move date forward the specified number of days.

+
+

<>, <Number>, <Enter>

+		 +

Move date back the specified number of days.

+

Note: This option is not available if your operating system date is set to use hyphens () as the date separator.

+
+

<Alt+r;>

+		 +

Change date one day forward.

+
+

<Alt+>

+		 +

Change date to one day earlier.

+
+

<Alt+PageUp>

+		 +

Move date forward one month.

+
+

<Alt+PageDown>

+		 +

Move date back one month.

+
+

<Alt+Home>

+		 +

Move date forward one year.

+
+

<Alt+End>

+		 +

Move date back one year.

+
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic248.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic248.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0fa5ef --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic248.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +History Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

History Documents

+

Find a Document | Copy a Document | Edit a Document

+

 

+

Updated transactional documents, including receipts, vouchers, adjustment memos, and transfer slips are called history documents and are stored in your document history lists. History documents provide a permanent record of all transactions that have affected your inventory and provide an accurate audit trail of changes.

+

To view your document history lists:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the specified menu, select:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Use standard sort, search, and filter procedures to locate the desired document.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

How documents affect inventory

+

Remove old documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic254.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic254.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55efa9f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic254.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Use Bar Codes and Scanners + + + + + + + + + + +

Use Bar Codes and Scanners

+

Compatible Bar Code Scanners | FAQs | Physical Inventory Scanner

+

 

+

Point of Sale can print bar codes and supports the use of bar code scanners to list items on documents make entries on item records. No special procedures are required to use a bar code scanner with Point of Sale. Follow the instructions supplied with your scanner to connect it to your PC.

+

The program can read bar codes containing any of these item identifiers:

+ +

Assuming you have the scanned information recorded in inventory for the item, you can quickly list the item on documents by scanning the bar code.

+

 

+

Printing Bar Codes on Tags in Point of Sale

+

Every item has an item number associated with it in inventory. When you print tags from within the program using the default tag templates, it is the item number that is used to create the bar code. This allows you to print and scan barcoded tags for all your inventory items, whether or not they have UPC or Alternate Lookups defined.

+

Using the item number for bar codes has several advantages:

+ +

(Pro) If you prefer, you can use Print Designer to change bar codes printed from within Point of Sale to reflect UPC or alternate lookup values instead.

+

 

+

Print Tags:Overview

+

 

+

Using a Scanner to Enter Information in Inventory

+

Your scanner can also be used to quickly enter the bar code data into item records in inventory. For example, if your vendor supplies you merchandise pre-tagged with the UPC number, you can quickly and accurately enter the information into the UPC field on the item record by scanning the tag. You can scan vendor-provided bar codes containing catalog numbers into the Alternate Lookup field in the same manner.

+

Edit item records

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Using a Scanner to List Items on Documents

+

When scanning to list items on documents, Point of Sale assumes a quantity of one for each scan. To record a different quantity, press <F5> or navigate to the Qty field in the document item list to manually enter the correct quantity after each scan.

+

Although scanning is extremely accurate, scanning errors can occasionally occur, especially when tags have been damaged or defaced. The scanner typically rejects read errors caused by defaced tags, and this scanned information never reaches Point of Sale. An error is reported if the scanned number is not currently defined in inventory or if the Alternate Lookup is not unique.

+

List Items on Documents: Overview

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Using a Scanner for a Physical Inventory Count (Basic)

+

A physical inventory scanner is an optional, portable scanner that can record thousands of item scans and counts while moving around your store. You then connect the scanner to your computer and upload the counts to Point of Sale.  

+

Use a Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic257.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic257.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d633b50 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic257.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Windows, Menus and Toolbars + + + + + + + + + + +

Windows, Menus and Toolbars

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Keyboard Navigation | Mouse & Touchscreen Navigation

+ +

This topic has been hidden

+ +

Point of Sale offers several options for moving between program windows and selecting task actions. The illustration below will help familiarize you with the Point of Sale screens and navigation.

+

Program windows are laid out so that the completion of a task "flows" from the top/left towards the bottom/right of the screen.

+

The program includes the following menus and toolbars, which are common throughout the program (numbers correspond to numbers on example screen below):

+
    +
  1. +

    Text Menus Across the top of the screen, the text menus contain options for all program areas/features, grouped by functional area.

    +
    2. + +
  2. +

    Main Toolbar Selecting a task icon takes you directly to that area or activity. The display and icons included on the main tool bar can be customized to reflect the frequent activities performed at each workstation.

    +
    3. + +
  3. +

    Window Menu - Lists all currently open Point of Sale windows. You can switch between active windows by selecting one from this list or pressing <Alt + Page Up/Page Down>. This list may also be available from the Windows icon on the main toolbar, as shown to the far right of the toolbar in the illustration.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Window Toolbar Contains task icons for common commands related to the currently active window and the I Want To menu (see below).

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    I Want To Menu Contains a drop-down list of tasks related to your current activity. Select a task a perform it.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Bottom Toolbar The icons appearing at the bottom of the screen perform "completing actions" for your current activity, such as saving, holding, printing, or taking payment for a document or record.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Status Bar Information about the currently logged in user, workstation, and current activity.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

image\menuiconbars.gif

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

The Home Page

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic258.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic258.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bcce7fd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic258.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +View Records or Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

View Records or Documents

+

Find a Record or Document | Point of Sale Basics

+

 

+

There are two ways to view Point of Sale records and documents. Click a link for more information about working in each view.

+ +

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+

Program capacities

+ +

View list summary statistics

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic261.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic261.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..539f7a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic261.htm @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Sort & Scroll a Record List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sort & Scroll a Record List

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Find a Record

+ +

 

+

Record lists can be sorted in either ascending or descending order by the information in the column or columns you choose.

+

There are two list types in Point of Sale, with slightly different capabilities. Choose the list type you are working with for more information:

+

Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

All other lists Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Filter lists

+ +

View list summary statistics

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic262.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic262.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..52b27b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic262.htm @@ -0,0 +1,180 @@ + + + + + + + + +Filter a List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter a  List

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

 

+

Filters allow you to group and work with records or documents that have information in common.

+

There are two list types in Point of Sale, with different filtering capabilities. Choose the list type you are working with for more information:

+

Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

All other lists Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Locate a record or document

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic300.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic300.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f06bc1d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic300.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + +Add a New Record + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Record

+

Point of Sale Basics | Program Capacities | Glossary

+

 

+

This general procedure is for adding a non-document record (item, department, vendor, or customer). For specific steps on creating any record or document in Point of Sale, select a link from lists below.

+

New records are typically added using a record form, even if you are in a record list when you select New. This procedure assumes you are using a form to add a record. For instructions to add a record directly in a list, click here.

+

To add a new record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New from a list or form, or Add New from a drop-down in a lookup field.

    +
    2. +
+

A blank form is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Navigate through the form fields, making entries as appropriate. Be sure to complete all required fields for the record type (marked with an *).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

Or click Cancel anytime before saving to discard the new record.

+

 

+

For more information on adding specific record types:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Add an item

+		 +

Add a department

+
+

Add a customer

+		 +

Add an employee

+
+

Add a vendor

+		 +

Add a time record

+
+

 

+

For more information on creating new documents:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

New sales receipt

+		 +

New voucher

+
+

New purchase order

+		 +

New adjustment memo

+
+

New customer order

+		 +

New transfer slip

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+

List items on documents

+

Program capacities

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic301.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic301.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..73618e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic301.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit a Non-Document Record + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Non-Document Record

+

Point of Sale Basics | Find a Record

+

 

+

This general procedure applies to editing items, departments, vendors, customers, and employees.

+

Click here for information about editing documents.

+

 

+

Use the general edit procedure below, or select a record type for specific instructions:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Edit a department

+		 +

Edit a customer record

+
+

Edit an item

+		 +

Edit a vendor record

+
+

Edit an employee record

+		 +

Edit a time entry

+
+

To edit a non-document record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use standard sort, search, and filter procedures to locate the desired record in the applicable list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight the record and select Edit from the window toolbar or I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Navigate through the fields of the record, making changes as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Or, select Cancel at any time before saving to discard your edits.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+

List items on documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic302.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic302.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41e8228 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic302.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + +Enter Data in a Field + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Data in a Field

+

How Do I?Click to display a popup topic | Forms | Lists

+

 

+

Use standard navigation techniques (such as arrow keys, <Tab>, click, or touch) to access the field in which you want to enter data. To accept an entry or bypass the field, press <Tab> if in a form or <Enter> in a list or navigate to the next field in any other manner. Most data entries require that you navigate out of the field to record the entry.

+

Quick topics for various field types.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Blank fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Quantity fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Read-only fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Note fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Check box fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Drop-down listsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Currency fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Suggested entriesClick to display a popup topic

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Document/record data field descriptions

+

Enter dates and times

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic303.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic303.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..20b82bf --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic303.htm @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ + + + + + + + + + +List Items on Documents: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

List Items on Documents: Overview

+

Use Bar Codes | About Item Identifiers | Find an Item

+

 

+

The item list included on documents lists the items to be processed (received, sold, ordered, etc.). This list contains item details such as the description, price or cost, item discounts, etc.

+

The default columns included in the item list will vary depending on the document you are completing. Most list navigation procedures apply, including the ability to customize the columns included in the list.

+

Which type of document do you need help with?

+

Sales Receipts or Receiving Vouchers Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

All Other Documents (Purchase Order, Customer Order, Adjustment Memo, Transfer Slip) Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

For general information about listing document items, select a topic:

+ ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Scan or enter a UPC, Item #, or Alternate Lookup

+
+

Quick Pick Items (receipt and voucher only)

+
+

Using service or non-inventory items

+
+

Enter decimal item quantities

+
+

Add a new item to inventory while making a document

+
+

Handle special orders

+

List a group item

+

List an assembly item

+

List different units of measure

+

View item quantities at other stores

+
+

Editing Listed items:

+
+

Edit items

+
+

Remove items from a document

+
+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic305.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic305.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..abd9da9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic305.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a New Record Using Copy + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Record Using Copy

+

Point of Sale Basics | Find a Record or Document

+

 

+

Note: This is a general procedure. For a list of topics related to using the copy function for specific document or record types, search the help index using keyword "Copying" and choose a specific topic.

+

To add a new record by copying an existing record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the record you want to copy from the record list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

 Click Copy <record> on the window toolbar (where available).

+

A new document/record form is opened, with information from the original record copied to the appropriate fields.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make edits to the copied information, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic306.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic306.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ef615b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic306.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Define Filter Criteria - Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Define Filter Criteria - Overview

+

Filter Lists | Modify Report Options

+

 

+

Point of Sale provides an extensive set of filtering options, allowing you to work with a subset of a list by entering criteria you want to match.

+

When you first open a filter dialog, it is blank (unless opening a saved filter, in which case your previous settings are shown).

+

 With no criteria selected, all data is included in the list or report being generated. Entering filter criteria allows you to include or exclude records based on your choices.

+

Example filter dialog:

+

image\filter_dialog3.gif

+

To enter filter criteria:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click in the field in which you want to enter criteria.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Type your criteria or select the image\f4_symbol.gif or image\f4_symbol_2.gif icons to make selections. These icons open selection dialogs, calendars, or drop-down lists, depending on the field type.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    By default, the filter includes data matching the entered criteria. To exclude matching criteria (i.e. show all other data), click in the Include/Exclude column and change the setting to Exclude.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done, select Apply or Save to filter your list or report data accordingly.

    +
    5. +
+

Other options on the filter dialog may include:

+ +

Learn more about specific filter options:

+

General filtering rules and tips includes information on using spaces, exact matches, include/exclude options, and more.

+

Free-form text and descriptive fields used to filter on document comments, descriptions fields, names, promotional codes, street names, etc.

+

Range fields used to filter on an alphanumeric range, such as a price or cost range, ZIP code range, Item # range, etc.

+

Selection lists used to filter by values restricted to a predefined list, such as when filtering by department or vendor code, item type, workstation, etc.

+

Date/time fields used to filter data by dates or date ranges, either fixed or dynamic.

+

And/or options used to create complex filtering rules to include/exclude data based on multiple criteria.

+

ZIP Codes used to filter on customers or vendors residing in a particular ZIP code or range of Zip Codes.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List overview

+

Reports overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic307.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic307.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39fd09c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic307.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + +Blank Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Blank Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

To enter data in blank fields:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the appropriate data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate to the next field.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic308.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic308.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c47aed --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic308.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Read-Only Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Read-Only Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale automatically populates some fields with information that cannot be edited. These fields cannot be accessed; the cursor will skip them during navigation.

+

An example is the Cashier field on a sales receipt if employee logins are required.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic309.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic309.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f9ebd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic309.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Fields with Suggested Entries + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Fields with Suggested Entries

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

Point of Sale suggests entries in many data fields by automatically completing them for you. You can still manually change a suggested entry. For example, on a purchase order, the Order Date and Ship Date fields are auto-filled with todays date, but these entries can be changed.

+

To change the entry in a suggested field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the field and enter new information.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic310.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic310.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..694530d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic310.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Checkbox Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Check box Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

A check box field can be selected or cleared but no data can be entered. Selecting a check box activates that field/function, while clearing it (removing the check) inactivates the function.

+

To select or clear a check box field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Touch or click the field, or press <Spacebar>, to toggle between selecting and clearing a check box.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic311.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic311.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c780b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic311.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Currency Fields (Cost and Price) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Currency Fields (Cost and Price)

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale supports the use of decimal amounts with up to five decimal places, but displays only two decimal places. You can enter even more than five decimal places, but Point of Sale will round to and store only five.

+

If you enter an amount less than $0.005 (one-half penny), Point of Sale displays $0.00, but is indeed storing the fractional cent amount you entered. You can also make an entry in the extended cost/price on a document and then enter the quantity. Point of Sale will calculate the unit cost/price with decimals for you. This feature makes it easier to order, price, and sell items whose cost or price is less than a penny or in fractional cents.

+

In the case of item cost and price on documents, the extended cost/price is calculated using the stored five decimals.

+

To enter data in the currency fields:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the amount, including decimals.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic312.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic312.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3df850 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic312.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Quantity Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Quantity Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Quantity fields are blank or have a suggested entry until a different quantity is entered. Numbers are the only acceptable entries in these fields. Decimals are allowed (up to five places), but Point of Sale only displays two and does not display trailing zeroes, i.e. if you enter 2.40, Point of Sale will display 2.4.

+

Even though Point of Sale displays a maximum of two decimal places, it actually stores and uses five decimal places for quantity calculations.

+

To enter data in quantity fields:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the appropriate data.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate to the next field.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic313.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic313.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4e4d39a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic313.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + +Note, Comment, and Instruction Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Note, Comment, and Instruction Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

These fields are free-form text fields, allowing any text you wish to record.

+

To enter data in a note field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Type the appropriate data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic314.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic314.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0627c76 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic314.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Drop-Down List Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Drop-Down List Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Fields with drop-down lists available will have a image\f4_symbol_2.gif button in them. Some drop-down list fields only allow a predefined entry and others allow free-form entries.

+

To enter data in a drop-down list field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the image\f4_symbol_2.gif button or press <F4> to access the drop-down list. Then use the arrow keys to highlight your entry and press <Enter> to select it. Alternatively, press <Spacebar> to cycle through the selections without opening the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

If a predefined entry is required, type the first character or two of the entry. The entry will appear in the field.

+

OR

+

In drop-down lists that allow free-form entries, type the appropriate data.

+
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate to the next field.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic315.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic315.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c3c5f3a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic315.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + +Lookup Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Lookup Fields

+

Point of Sale Basics | Entering Data

+

 

+

Lookup fields are used to bring data from another file to the document or record in which you are working. An example is the Customer field on sales receipts, as shown below.

+

 

+

+

 

+

Lookup fields are directly linked to the associated file. You have the following options from a lookup field:

+ +

Note: Looking up items from documents is slightly different (see listing items on documents).

+

To use lookup fields:

+ +

The drop-down list is automatically activated and the closest match(es) to what you type is shown. Click a record (<Enter>) to bring it to the document. Otherwise continue with the following steps.

+

 

+

Lookup alternative (not available from all documents):

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose the Select from <record type> List from the I Want To menu to directly access the associated file.

    +
    2. +
+

Example: Select from Vendor List to access the vendor file.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the list, use standard sort, search, or filtering procedures to locate an existing record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Once the record is selected, choose Select or double-click to add the record to your document.

    +
    3. +
+

When you access the customer, department, or vendor files during a lookup, you have full editing capabilities in that module. This makes it possible to add or edit records without closing the original module.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Listing items on documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic316.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic316.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..704582a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic316.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + +Date Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Date Fields

+

Quick Entry Date Formats | Time Fields

+

 

+

Entering Dates

+

There are two types of Point of Sale dates: fixed dates and dynamic dates.

+ +

Note: A security right is available to block your employees from changing the date on a receipt.

+

To enter data in a fixed date field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the date field and do one or a combination of the following:

    +
    2. +
+ + +
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

 Warning: Do not change your Windows system date to record a different date on a Point of Sale document. Data loss could result.

+

 

+

To enter data in a dynamic date field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose a range from the Date filter type field in the Dynamic Date Filter dialog.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to apply your selected date range.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or move out of the field.

    +
    3. +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Filter lists

+

Define filter criteria

+

Change report dates

+

Enter data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic317.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic317.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3ce3fe --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic317.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +List Items by UPC, ALU, or Item # + + + + + + + + + + +

List Items by UPC, ALU, or Item #

+

Use Bar Codes | About Item Identifiers | Search for an Item

+

To list an item on a document:

+ +

From this list, you can:

+ +

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Overview of listing items on documents

+

Edit listed items

+

Delete listed items

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic318.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic318.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f70989 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic318.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + +Select Items from Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Items from Inventory

+

Find an Item | Filter the Item List | Sort the Item List

+

 

+

This topic applies to purchase orders, inventory adjustment memos, and transfer slips only.

+

 

+

You can go directly to inventory to select items to list on a document or for other tasks. Once in inventory, the item list can be sorted, searched, or filtered to locate the correct item or an item can be added or edited before listing.

+

To look up and select items in inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Select from Item List (<F4>) from the document or task I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

This opens your item list in a special selection mode.

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the items you want to list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Once you have located an item, use one of the following methods to bring it to the document:

    +
    3. +
+ +

             Select items from inventory for document

+ +

             Item selection from tasks

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Repeat steps 2-3 to locate and list all the items you need.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Full item editing is possible while in the item selection screen. This feature allows the flexibility to perform tasks, such as adding items as new merchandise is being ordered, received, or sold.

+

 

+

Tip: Filter your item list to display a single vendor's itemsClick to display a popup topic

+

Note: Add a new style while creating a documentClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a new item while creating a document

+

List items on documents

+

Inventory overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic319.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic319.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..717b165 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic319.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Items Listed on Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Items Listed on Documents

+

List Items | Delete Items | Edit Saved Documents

+

 

+

You can edit an item on a transactional document only until the document has been saved. You can edit items on order documents at any time.

+

These edits will affect only the listed items on the document; they will not affect the corresponding items in inventory. The fields that can be edited vary by document, but typically edits are made to:

+ +

The procedure here is for editing an item on a sales receipt. The general procedure is the same on other documents, though choices may vary slightly.

+

To edit a listed item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the item you wish to edit on the receipt..

    +
    2. +
+

If you just listed the item, it is automatically highlighted and this step is not necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make edits as necessary:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Make other entries on the document as necessary and then take payment and save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List and edit a group Item

+

List an item assembly on a document

+

List different units of measure on documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic320.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic320.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95b5cae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic320.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Remove Items from a Document + + + + + + + + + + +

Remove Items from a Document

+

List Items on Documents | Edit Listed Items

+

 

+

Items listed on a transactional document can be deleted at anytime before the document is saved. Items listed on order documents can be deleted at anytime, since order documents are planning documents that do not affect inventory.

+

These procedures only delete the item from the document. They do not affect inventory.

+

To delete listed items:

+

Method 1

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the document form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight the item(s) you want to delete.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Remove This Item in the list or, if you have selected multiple items, select Remove Selected Items from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
+

The item is removed from the list.

+

 

+

Method 2

+

This method "zeroes out" the item, but leaves it listed on the document.

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the item you want to delete on the document.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use the Qty + or Qty buttons to change the quantity to zero.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic322.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic322.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..043ae65 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic322.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Dynamic Date Range Options + + + + + + + + + + +

Dynamic Date Range Options

+

Date Fields | Quick-Entry of Dates

+

 

+

Note: The following examples are based on a current Point of Sale date of Wednesday, October 12, 2005.

+

 

+

Custom

+

A non-dynamic date range option. Select it to define a fixed date range with a specific starting and ending date that will remain unchanged. An open range cannot be defined with this option.

+

Today

+

Current date. (October 12 October 12, 2005)

+

Yesterday

+

Yesterday. (October 11 October 11, 2005)

+

This year, week-to-date

+

From the first day of the week (Sunday) to today. (October 9 October 12, 2005)

+

Last week

+

Entire previous week. (October 2 October 8, 2005)

+

This year, month-to-date

+

From the first day of the current month to today. (October 1 October 12, 2005)

+

Last month

+

Entire previous month. (September 1 September 30, 2005)

+

Last 30, 60, or 90 days

+

Last 30, 60, or 90 calendar days, crossing into last year if applicable. (30 days: September 13 October 12, 2005; 60 days: August 14 October 12, 2005; 90 days: July 15 October 12, 2005)

+

This year, year-to-date

+

From January 1 of the current year to today. (January 1 October 12, 2005)

+

Last year, week-to-date

+

From the first day of the week to the current day in the same month for last year. May not be the same number of days as week-to-date, this year. (October 10 October 12, 2004)

+

Last year, month-to-date

+

From the first day of the month to the current day/month for last year. (October 1 October 12, 2004)

+

Last year, year-to-date

+

From January 1 to the current day/month for last year. (January 1 October 12, 2004)

+

All

+

All dates.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic335.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic335.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a86c4a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic335.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Doc Qty + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Doc Qty

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

The Doc Qty (Document Quantity) field is available when selecting items for a document in inventory or when bringing the items from a order to a transactional document. For example, when selecting items for a sales receipt, enter the quantity that you are selling in the Doc Qty field. When selecting items for a purchase order, enter the quantity you are ordering.

+

Dont confuse an items Doc Qty with its on-hand quantity in inventory.

+

(Pro) If you use styles and you display the style grid when coming to inventory from a document, you can enter the document quantities directly in the style grid cells. When you choose Select or Save & Select, the entered quantities are carried to the document.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic336.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic336.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..179a649 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic336.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +Doc Cost + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Doc Cost

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

The cost to be used on a purchase order, voucher, or cost memo may be different from the current inventory cost (Average Unit Cost). The document cost field (Doc Cost) is available when selecting items from your item list while creating a document and allows you to specify the cost of the item on the document.

+

In the case of a PO or voucher, the current Order Cost for the item is suggested as the document cost, but can be edited as necessary. If no order cost is defined, then the current average unit cost is suggested. For example, when selecting items from inventory for a purchase order, the current order cost is auto-filled for you. If the vendor's cost for the item has changed, you can enter the new cost in the Doc Cost field and it will be carried to the PO.

+

In the case of a cost adjustment memo, no document cost is suggested. Enter the adjusted (new) cost in the Doc Cost field. This cost will be carried to the New Cost field on the memo.

+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic337.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic337.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed26082 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic337.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + +Doc Price + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Doc Price

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

The document price (Doc Price) field is available when selecting items from inventory to list on sales documents. Doc Price stores the item price for the current document only. For example, when selecting items for a receipt, enter the price at which you want to sell the item in the Doc Price field.

+

If you dont make an entry in this field, your default price (as specified in company preferences) is automatically added to the document.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic340.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic340.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff50e37 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic340.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +basic340 + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Zoom to View Small Print

+ +

Popup topic. has been hidden

+ +

By default, the previewer is set to display the printed record, document, or tag at 100% magnification. Small print, such as on tags, may not appear clear at this magnification. To improve the display of small print, increase the zoom level by selecting to zoom in from the toolbar (or access the zoom control from the right-click pop-up menu).

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_additem_whle_making_document.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_additem_whle_making_document.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1fc7149 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_additem_whle_making_document.htm @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a New Item While Creating a Document + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Item While Creating a Document

+

List Items on Documents | Add a New Style

+

 

+

Need to order, receive, or sell an item not yet added to inventory?

+

Point of Sale allows you to add an inventory item while you are creating a document and then immediately list it on your current document.

+

What are you trying to do?

+

Add an item while receiving or selling Click to expand/collapse topic - Voucher or Receipt

+ +

Add an item while ordering - Purchase Order

+

Add an item while making another document Click to expand/collapse topic - Customer Order, Adjustment Memo, or Transfer Slip

+ +

 

+

 

+

QuickBooks financial software Note: Adding an item and immediately selling it Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Handle special orders

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customize_iconbars.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customize_iconbars.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9fdb4d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customize_iconbars.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Customize Navigation Toolbar + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize the Navigation Toolbar Buttons

+

You can add or remove buttons on the navigation toolbar on the left of the Home Page, receipts, and vouchers.

+

To add or remove toolbar buttons:

+
    +
  1. +

    Right-click any button on the toolbar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Customize buttons.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    To add a button:

    +
      +
    1. +

      In the Available Tasks column, select the button you want  to add.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      Click the right arrow to move it to the Selected Tasks column.

      +
      3. +
    +

    To remove a button:

    +
      +
    1. +

      In the Selected Tasks column, select the button you want to remove.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      Click the left arrow to move it to the Available Tasks column.

      +
      3. +
    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Close.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Mouse & Touchscreen Navigation

+

Keyboard Navigation

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customizelistcolumns.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customizelistcolumns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..27f5a39 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customizelistcolumns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ + + + + + + + +Customize List Columns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize List Columns

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

 

+

Use these procedures to add, remove, or rearrange the columns in a Point of Sale list. The procedure varies slightly depending on your list. Select the list type you are working with for specific instructions:

+

Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

All other lists Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ + + +

Related Topics

+

Locate a record or document

+

Use custom fields

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customizesummarypane.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customizesummarypane.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e91ad44 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_customizesummarypane.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + +Customize List Information Panels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize List Information Panels

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

 

+

This topic applies to department, vendor, employee, customer order, purchase order, transfer history, and adjustment history lists.

+

 

+

When a Point of Sale list is in collapsed format, the right side of the window is called the information panel. The information displayed is for the selected record in the collapsed list to the left and varies depending on the record type.

+ +

To customize a list information panel:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Customize this window link at the bottom-right of the panel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the window displayed:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Apply to implement your changes.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Work with Forms

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_edit_documents.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_edit_documents.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b51f2ec --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_edit_documents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Documents

+

Enter Data in a Field | Find a Document

+

 

+

This discussion assumes you require employee logins and are using default settings. Your actual ability to edit documents will vary based on your security rights, features used, and in a multi-store configuration, your store location (Headquarters or remote).

+

 

+

Order Documents

+

Purchase orders and customer orders, since they have no direct effect on inventory, can be freely edited at anytime (edits to some fields may be restricted if deposits have been accepted towards the order).

+

How do I edit a purchase order?

+

How do I edit a customer order?

+

 

+

Transaction (History) Documents

+

Before saving, all information on transaction documents can be edited.

+

However, transaction documents immediately affect your inventory as soon as saved. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop they may have also already affected your financial records. After saving, only certain informational fields can be edited. Edits that affect the items, total, or payments are generally not allowed (see voucher exceptions below). Once sent from a remote store to Headquarters or to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the ability to edit is even more limited.

+

What can be edited?

+

Receipts: After saving, you can edit the customer, comments, promotional code, and, if a Pro user, the shipping information (except amount). After sending to Headquarters or to QuickBooks Desktop, you can no longer edit the customer or promotional code. Edit options are available from the I Want To menu in Sales History.

+

Receiving Vouchers: Certain voucher fields, such as discounts, freight, fees, and vendor billing information may be edited after saving and, at Headquarters, even after sending to QuickBooks Desktop, depending on where you enter vendor billing information and if you spread discount, freight, and fees across item costs. Edit options are available from the I Want To menu in Receiving History.

+

Adjustment Memos: Memo comments can be edited after saving. Once sent to Headquarters or QuickBooks Desktop, no fields are editable. Select Edit from the toolbar in your Adjustment History. Editable fields are white in color.

+

Transfer Slips: Slip comments, carrier, and freight can be edited after saving. Once sent to Headquarters or QuickBooks Desktop, no fields are editable. Select Edit from the toolbar in your Transfer History. Editable fields are white in color.

+

 

+

Correcting a Document When Editing Isn't an Option

+

If you discover an error on a history document that is not editable, it can still be corrected by reversing the original document and then creating a new, corrected one. This feature is intended for correcting errors and should be used only when necessary.

+

Select a link below to learn more about reversing various documents:

+

Reverse and correct a receipt

+

Reverse and correct a receiving voucher

+

Reverse and correct an adjustment memo

+

Reverse and correct a transfer slip

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_email_documents.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_email_documents.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c83520 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_email_documents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +E-mail a Document + + + + + + + + + + +

Email a PO

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can e-mail Point of Sale documents to your vendors and customers. All documents are e-mailed using the same basic procedure.

+

When e-mailing documents, Point of Sale automatically launches your default Windows e-mail client, creates the e-mail, and attaches the document in PDF format.

+

(Pro) Other document e-mailing preferences allow you to create the document attachment in the format of your choice (PDF, Excel, HTML, or plain text) and define the default message text for each document type.

+

You must have entered e-mail addresses for the customer and/or vendor being e-mailed on their respective records.

+

 

+

To e-mail a document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create the document following normal procedures.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Display or select the document to be e-mailed:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Send as E-mail from the I Want To menu (or from window toolbar in some lists).
    +
    +Point of Sale creates the e-mail, attaches the document, and displays it in your default e-mail client.
    +
    +Important: Your e-mail client may display a permissions dialog for access to your e-mail application. In some cases, the message may be hidden under the POS window. Press <Alt+Tab> on your keyboard to switch to the message and give permission for the access.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review and edit the e-mail address, subject line, and message as necessary, and then select Send.

    +
    3. +
+

Note: If you also have Microsoft Outlook installed, the e-mail and attachment will be generated in Outlook instead. You can either select Microsoft Outlook as your default e-mail client or, if you wish to continue using Outlook Express, use the Add or Remove Programs option from the Windows Control Panel to uninstall Microsoft Outlook.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule1.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule1.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..92a82dc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #1 + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #1

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+Rule: If two or more criteria are joined by AND, the entry in the records field must meet all of the criteria in order to be included in the filter results. + +++ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Goal:

+		 +

Filter for all brown tie shoes

+

 

+
+

Criterion:

+		 +

(an And statement)

+

Brown and Tie must both be in the Description 1 field

+

 

+
+

Item Selected:

+		 +

Item #101

+
+

 

+

Longer chains of criteria joined by And can be built in the same manner.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule2.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule2.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..511766d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule2.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #2 + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #2

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Rule: If two or more criteria are joined by Or, the entry in the records field must meet any one of the criteria in order to be included in the filter results.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Goal:

+		 +

Filter for all brown or navy shoes

+

 

+
+

Criterion:

+		 +

(an Or statement)

+

Either Brown or Navy must be in the Item Name field

+

 

+
+

Items Selected:

+		 +

Items #s: 101, 201, 501, 701

+
+

 

+

Longer chains of criteria joined by Or can be built in the same manner.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule3.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule3.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..35f312b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filter_andorrule3.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #3 + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #3

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Rule: When three or more criteria are joined by any combination of Ands and Ors, the criteria joined by the Ands are grouped together and evaluated first. Then the Or statements are evaluated.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Goal:

+		 +

Select all shoes that are brown tie or black slip-on

+

 

+
+

Criterion:

+		 +

(a mixed And/Or statement)

+

Brwn and Tie or Black and Slon must be in the Item Name field

+

 

+
+

Items Selected:

+		 +

Items #101, #401, #801

+
+

 

+

When designing these more complex statements, it often helps to visualize the AND statements enclosed within brackets and treated as a unit. Rewriting the criteria above would yield:

+

[Brwn and Tie] or [Blck and Slon]

+

Point of Sale evaluates And requirement, i.e., that were both Brwn and Tie (Item #101). Then it identifies all the items that meet the second And requirement (Blck and Slon, Items #401 and #801).

+

After evaluating all the Ands, Point of Sale looks at the Or statements. All items that satisfy either of the requirements joined by an Or are selected. In this case, Item #101 is selected because it satisfies the And statement to the left of the Or, and Items #401 and #801 are selected because they satisfy the And statement to the right.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_andor.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_andor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..df0f9ab --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_andor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: And/Or Statements + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: And/Or Statements

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Some filter fields allow the use of AND/OR statements when defining related free-form criteria. The power and flexibility gained with such statements is immense in that you can filter by what might otherwise be unrelated information. You can define multiple criteria and then include records that meet two or more criteria (and) or those that meet any of the criteria (or). You can also use a combination of AND/OR statements.

+

Example: Your shoes are defined with a color (BRWN, BLCK, NAVY, WHTE) and description (TIE = tie/lace-up, SLON = slip-on, BUCK = buckle) in the Item Name field, resulting in inventory items looking like this:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Item #

+		 +

Item Name

+
+

000101

+		 +

BRWN TIE

+
+

000201

+		 +

BRWN BUCK

+
+

000301

+		 +

WHITE SLON

+
+

000401

+		 +

BLCK SLON

+
+

000501

+		 +

BRWN SLON

+
+

000601

+		 +

WHTE TIE

+
+

000701

+		 +

NAVY SLON

+
+

000801

+		 +

BLCK SLON

+
+

 

+

Using and/or statements as your Item Name filter criteria, you could select such combinations as all black tie shoes, all black and brown tie shoes, or all slip-on shoes.

+

 

+

image\andor.gif

+

 

+

Three rules determine how Point of Sale interprets any AND/OR statement. The following examples of these rules make use of the shoe item list shown above.

+

 

+

And/or Rule #1Click to display a popup topic

+

And/or Rule #2Click to display a popup topic

+

And/or Rule #3Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Entering data

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_datetime.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_datetime.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9813699 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_datetime.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: Dates and Time + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: Dates and Time

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Both fixed and dynamic dates are acceptable entries on most date filters. With a simple selection, you can specify to have the report or list filtered for a specified date or date range, or for month-to-date, year-to-date, last year for this same period, etc.

+

There is a variety of predefined dynamic date ranges available for your use. To specify a single day, enter the same date in both the lower and upper date range fields.

+

Time fields are used only when filtering for reports and allow you to filter on a portion of a day or on a time period traversing multiple days.

+

 

+

Choose a date/time topic for more information:

+

Date entry

+

Time entry

+

Dynamic date range options

+

Tip: Quick-entry date formats

+

Tip: Quick-entry time formats

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Entering data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_freeform.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_freeform.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a7f5c70 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_freeform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: Free-form Text and Descriptive Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: Free-form Text and Descriptive Fields

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Example fields: Item descriptions, size, color, attribute, names, comments, street names, etc.

+

Enter a string of characters. Records that have the matching string of characters anywhere in the field that match your entry are included.

+

Example: Entering a value of "buckle" in the Item Name field would include such records as "ladies buckle shoe," "buckle girls dress shoe," "boys casual shoe buckle," and so on, in the filter results. For an exact match, enclose the string of characters within quotes: "buckle" will only include records that have only the word "buckle" in the field.

+

You can also build powerful and/or statements to filter by free-form descriptive fields.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Entering data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_ranges.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_ranges.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a29661e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_ranges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: Range Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: Range Fields

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Range fields include Item numbers, ZIP Codes, phone numbers, price, cost, margin, date/time, etc.

+

Range fields are evident by the word "to" between two value fields, i.e. <low value> to <high value>. Initially, both values of the range are blank. If left blank, all records are included. To filter on a range, enter the lowest allowed value in the left field and the highest allowed value in the right field.

+

Example: To include only item numbers 1 through 500, enter 1 as the low value and 500 as the high value in the Item # field.

+

 

+

image\filtercriteria_range.gif

+

 

+

Range criteria allow both open-ended and closed ranges of data, except for date/time ranges, which require closed ranges.

+

Example: To filter for all item numbers greater than 500, enter 501 as the lower range and leave the upper range blank (open-ended). Similarly, leaving the lower range open-ended and entering 500 in the upper range would yield the result of all item numbers 1 500.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_selection.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_selection.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..78289b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_selection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: Selection Lists + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: Selection Lists

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Example Fields: Department, vendor, item type, workstation, etc.

+

Selection fields are used when filter criteria must match entries in another program list. If you want to specify a single value for this field and you know what the value is, you can type it directly into the field.

+

If you want to select multiple values, select image\f4_symbol.gif or press <F4> from the field.

+

Select or clear checkboxes to specify the values to be include or excluded, respectively. To select or clear a values check box, click it or highlight it and press <Space>. You can also use the Select All or Clear All buttons. Select OK to return the selected values to the field. <Selection> is displayed in the field if multiple values have been selected.

+

 

+

Filter criteria selection list

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_tips.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a203b5f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: General Rules and Tips + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: General Rules and Tips

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Report Options

+

 

+

Using Spaces: A space made by pressing <Space> is a criteria character (the same as any other entered character). When a space is included in a value, a matching space is required in the data record for the record to be a match during filtering.

+

Upper/Lower-Case: Point of Sale does not distinguish between upper- and lower-case letters when filtering. Navy, navy, and NAVY would all return the same matches.

+

Blank Fields: A blank field acts as a wildcard; it matches every entry. No matter what is contained in that field in each record, the record is included during filtering. If all filter values are blank, all data records are included in the filter results.

+

Blank Entries: To filter for descriptive fields with blank entries, use empty quotes as your filter value.

+

Example: Entering "" as your size value would locate records that have no value recorded in their Size field.

+

Exact Matches: Enclose the criterion in quotation marks to require an exact match, i.e. to require the characters enclosed by the quotation marks to match the entire field entry, character for character. A matching data field cannot contain any characters (even leading spaces) that are not also in your criterion.

+

Example: If your criterion is Blue, both BLUE and SKY BLUE are matches. To find only exact matches for BLUE, i.e. include BLUE but exclude SKY BLUE, use "Blue" as your criterion. Since the entire field entry must match what is contained within the quotation marks, only Blue is a match.

+

Including/Excluding Matches: Select Include (default) or Exclude to the right of a criteria field to either include or exclude matching records in the output, respectively.

+

Example: If you want to filter for all vendors except one, you could select that vendor as the criteria and toggle the Include/Exclude option to Exclude. All vendors except the one specified will be included in the filtered results.

+

You can also exclude matches by using the tilde (~ ) character. Think of the tilde as meaning not or exclude. To exclude all blank records, enter a tilde and empty quotes (~"").

+

Examples:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Entering data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_zipcodes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_zipcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eea31f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_filtercriteria_zipcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: ZIP Codes + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: ZIP Codes

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

When defining ZIP code ranges, keep in mind that Point of Sale treats all such codes as 9-digit entries and that, in a sort sequence, spaces are listed before any digits. (Whether the dash is required depends on how the codes were entered. If dashes were not used, then omit them when specifying filter criteria.)

+

For instance, Point of Sale would append four spaces to the end of the five-digit postal code 94488. If you define a range of 94488-0000 to 94488-9999 (using postal +4 codes), any record with a postal code of 94488 (without the +4 code) would be omitted. To include all 94488 ZIP codes, including the five-digit 94488 code, define the range from 94488 to 94488-9999.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_hdi_dataentry.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_hdi_dataentry.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c76ec2e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_hdi_dataentry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +basic_hdi_dataentry + + + + + + + + +

Entering or Editing Data: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic. and has been hidden

+ +

Enter data in a field

+

Add a record

+

Import data

+

List items on documents

+

Use scanners and bar codes

+ +

Use custom fields

+ +

Edit records

+

Edit documents

+

Reverse history documents

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_hdi_navigate.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_hdi_navigate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ecdb275 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_hdi_navigate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +basic_hdi_navigate + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale Program: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Use the Retail Navigator

+

Use the menus and tool bars

+

Customize the tool bars

+

Use a mouse/touchscreen

+

Use keyboard shortcuts

+

View or switch between open windows

+

Work with lists and forms

+

Filter lists

+

Sort lists

+

Customize list columns

+

Search for records

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_copy.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_copy.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c42266 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_copy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + +Copy a Document + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Document

+

Find a Document | Edit a Document | Reverse History Documents

+

 

+

Copying a previously saved document is sometimes the fastest way to create a new document, especially if you want to list the same items, costs, prices, customer or vendor, etc.

+

See examples of when you might use this procedureClick to display a popup topic

+

(Pro with multiple stores) Headquarters can copy documents originally made at other stores. Remote stores are limited to viewing and copying documents made at their own store.

+

To copy a document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight/display the document to be copied in the appropriate document list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy from the I Want To menu (or from the window toolbar in some areas).

    +
    3. +
+

A new document is created with most of the same information as the original. See the note below for what is not copied.

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the new document, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
+

You can add or delete items, change quantities, costs, or prices, and edit other fields as needed.

+
    +
  1. +

    If making a receipt or customer order, take payment or a deposit, and give change (refund), as applicable.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Print/Save the document.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_copyexamples.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_copyexamples.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..42b1590 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_copyexamples.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +Copy Documents: Examples + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy Documents: Examples

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

Examples of when you might want to copy a document:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_edit.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_edit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c2aae83 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_edit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Reverse, Copy and Correct a History Document + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse, Copy and Correct a History Document

+

Edit a Document | Copy a Document  

+

 

+

Editing of saved history documents is limited to certain informational fields. However, if uneditable errors are discovered the entire document can be corrected by using a reverse, copy and correct procedure as described here.

+

This is a general procedure. Use the links on this page to see specific information for your situation.

+

To correct a history document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Reverse the original document.

    +
    2. +
+

Reversing updates history, inventory, and any referenced order documents. In the case of a sales receipt, payments are canceled/credited to the customer. How?

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the original (reversed) document again.

    +
    2. +
+

The original document is marked Reversed in the status field (displayed in the document history list).

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Copy <document> from the window toolbar.

    +
    2. +
+

A new document of the same type is started, with most of the same information as the original. Read more about what is not copied here.

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the copy as necessary to correct the error.

    +
    2. +
+

You can add or delete items, change costs, prices, or quantities, and edit other information fields as needed before saving.

+
    +
  1. +

    If a receipt, record payment in the usual manner, typically by the same method as the original.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save & Print.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

(Pro multi-store) Reversing of documents at remote stories is allowed only until the document has been sent to Headquarters.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Reverse a sales receipt

+

Reverse a receiving voucher

+

Reverse an adjustment memo

+

Reverse a transfer slip

+

Cancel or hold a document in progress

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_reversing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_reversing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ce1ee6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_historydocs_reversing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Reverse a History Document + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse a History Document

+

Find a Document | Copy a Document | Edit a Document

+

 

+

Note: This is a general procedure for reversing documents. See the related links at the end of the topic to learn more about the effect of reversing specific document types.

+

 

+

Reversing a history document has the opposite effect on inventory of the original. For example, if the original document was a sales receipt that subtracted items from inventory, then reversing it adds the items back to inventory. It does this by creating a new reversing document. In the case of a sales receipt, the reversing document is a return receipt.

+

To reverse a history document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight/display the document to be reversed in the applicable history list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Reverse <document type> from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    The Reversing Document dialog is displayed. If necessary, select your name from the Associate field drop-down list and select OK.

    +
    4. +
+

If necessary, a new, corrected document can then be made as described here.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Reverse sales receipt

+

Reverse a receiving voucher

+

Reverse an adjustment memo

+

Reverse a transfer slip

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_holding_a_document.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_holding_a_document.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..08e10d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_holding_a_document.htm @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ + + + + + + + +Cancel or Hold a Transaction + + + + + + + + + + + +

Cancel or Hold a Transaction in Progress

+

Find a Document | Edit Documents | Reverse Documents

+

 

+

A sales receipt or other transactional document can be canceled or put on hold at any time before saving.

+

Exception: Sales receipts with authorized credit, debit/ATM, or gift card payments cannot be put on hold. See note below.

+ +

What would you like to do?

+

Cancel a transaction in progress Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Hold a transaction in progress Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

View or take a transaction off hold and complete it Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_item_identifiers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_item_identifiers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2798a67 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_item_identifiers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Item Identifiers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Identifiers

+

UPCs | Alternate Lookups | Bar Codes in Point of Sale

+

 

+

The term item identifiers refers to the Item #, Universal Product Code (UPC), and Alternate Lookup values for items in inventory. Item identifiers are used for looking up and listing items on documents, and for other program functions as described below.

+

 

+

Item Numbers

+

Every item (except special order items) has an Item # associated with it in inventory. You can edit the item number but cannot delete it. Valid entries are 1 through 999,999, 999. Item numbers above 999,999 are not recommended as the bar code would be too large to fit on the default tag templates.

+

Item numbers are used to print bar codes on tags in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

image\tagsample.gif

+

(Pro) If you prefer, you can use Print Designer to make bar codes printed from Point of Sale to reflect UPC or alternate lookup values instead.

+

 

+

Universal Product Codes (UPC)

+

Manufacturer-supplied tags with UPCs can be used to lookup and list items on documents, provided the UPC has been recorded in the UPC field on the item record in inventory. UPCs must be unique and can contain numbers only.

+

The UPC field on an item record can be used to record UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN, or similar identifiers up to 18 digits. Point of Sale will convert UPC formats of less than 13 digits (such as UPC-A and UPC-E) to a 13-digit form using a standard conversion algorithm.

+

Record UPC numbers manually or scan the preprinted tags from your vendors into the UPC field.

+

Important: Do not scan bar codes created in Point of Sale from the item number into the UPC field.

+

Likewise, if a vendor provides alphanumeric bar codes that are not true UPC codes, do not enter those codes into the UPC field. UPC codes have a required format, and other code formats are not accepted. Consider using the Alternate Lookup field for these codes instead (see below).

+

 

+

Alternate Lookups

+

An Alternate Lookup (ALU) is an optional field in inventory that can be used to lookup, list, and print items on documents. The use of Alternate Lookups is particularly well suited to retailers that do not tag merchandise or those that want to print documents, such as purchase orders, with alphanumeric product identifiers (such as a vendors part number).

+

This field can contain text descriptions, catalog/part numbers, alphanumeric entries, abbreviated names, duplications of the Item Name field, etc., anything that allows you to quickly and positively identify a unique item.

+

Alternate Lookups must be unique for each item for which they are defined.

+

To be effectively used to list items on documents, each Alternate Lookup entry:

+ +

To print documents that list your Alternate Lookup values, select document templates that have the "-ALU" suffix. Templates can be selected on the Print Options page in workstation preferences.

+

 

+

For more information about item identifiers, search the help index using the keywords UPC, Alternate Lookup, or Item Number.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_iwanttomenus.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_iwanttomenus.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..383ace4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_iwanttomenus.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +About the I Want To Menus + + + + + + + + + +

About the "I Want To" Menus

+

 Work with Lists | Work with Forms

+

 

+

The I Want To menus provides you quick access to the various tasks related to your current window. The options on this menu vary depending on what screen you are currently working in.

+ +

Related Topics

+

Customize the navigation toolbar

+

Switch between tasks

+

Point of Sale basics

+

Keyboard Shortcuts

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_letter_templates.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_letter_templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..23f5ed7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_letter_templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage Letter Templates + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Letter Templates

+

Write Letters | Office Integration Overview | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Microsoft Word templates are used to create letters to your customers or vendors. The templates allow you to include information from your customer, vendor, sales, and purchasing records.

+

A variety of letter templates are provided for your use. Use this procedure to customize these templates or create your own.

+

To create or modify a letter template:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the I Want To menu of a record, document or list, select Write Letters Manage Letter Templates.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    From the drop-down list, choose the letter type you wish to modify or create.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To modify an existing template, select the template from the list and select Modify Template at the bottom of the window. A preview of the selected template is displayed.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

To create a template, select New Template and enter a unique name for it.

+

The template is opened in Microsoft Word. In Word 2003 and earlier, the Point of Sale fields toolbar floats at the top of the document. In Word 2007, select Add Ins from the ribbon at the top of the screen to display the fields toolbar.

+

+
    +
  1. +

    Type or edit the letter, inserting Point of Sale data fields as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

To insert a data field: Place your cursor where you wish the information to appear in the letter and then select a field from the fields toolbar.

+

If placing fields next to each other, such as title, first, and last name, add spaces or punctuation between them as necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Save the document in Microsoft Word.

    +
    2. +
+

The template is saved as a Word document with the .doc file extension. Do not change the file extension when saving.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the template when writing letters.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intuit\Point of Sale n.n\Letter Templates

+

Windows Vista: C:\Users\All Users\Intuit\Point of Sale n.n\Letter Templates

+

Where n.n = Point of Sale version number. In Windows Vista, you may have to change your settings to view hidden folders to access these files.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_edit_mode.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_edit_mode.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b1536b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_edit_mode.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit or Add Records in a List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit or Add Records in a List

+

Filter Lists | Sort Lists | List Overview

+

 

+

This topic applies only to department, vendor, and employee lists.

+

 

+

With list edit mode turned on, you can make changes in editable fields or add new records directly in a list, moving field-to-field in a single row or between rows, similar to working in a spreadsheet.

+

Technical Note: How editing in a Point of Sale list differs from a spreadsheetClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

To enable/disable list editing:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your record list and, if necessary, add columns for the values to be edited .

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the window toolbar, click the small down arrow next to the Edit button and then click Turn List Edit On.

    +
    3. +
+

 List Edit

+
    +
  1. +

    Make edits by navigating field-to-field and entering new values.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    When done making edits, repeat Step 2, selecting Turn List Edit Off.

    +
    2. +
+

Leaving the list in any manner also turns off list edit mode.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Edit a single record

+

Edit a document

+

Edit item styles in inventory

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_multiselect.htm.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_multiselect.htm.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7d45f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_multiselect.htm.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +basic_list_multiselect + + + + + + + + + + +

How do I select multiple records in a list?

+

 

+ +

Popup topic. Has been hidden.

+ +

Use these procedures to select multiple records in a list before selecting a task to perform on them. You may want to filter or sort your list first so that the desired records are grouped together.

+

To select records that are not grouped:

+ +

To select a series of grouped record:

+ +

-OR-

+ +

Note: Multiple record selection is not supported by touchscreen or keyboard.

+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_rigtclick_menus.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_rigtclick_menus.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e791f3f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_rigtclick_menus.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + +basic_list_rigtclick_menus + + + + + + + + + +

Right-click Pop-up Menus in Record Lists

+ +

Popup topic; has been hidden.

+ +

Right-click in any record list to display a pop-up menu of frequently used commands, such as for sorting the list, finding or adding a record, switching to the record form for editing, viewing history, etc.

+

The options available in the popup menu vary by area.

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_scroll_indicator.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_scroll_indicator.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..46402e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_list_scroll_indicator.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + +basic_list_scroll_indicator + + + + + + + + + +

List Scroll Indicator

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden in help

+ +

When scrolling through the records in a list, Point of Sale displays the current position so that you know when to stop. The scroll indicator displays the values in the currently sorted list column. Release the mouse button when the desired entry is displayed.

+

 

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listedit_technote.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listedit_technote.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..29fbc42 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listedit_technote.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +basic_listedit_technote + + + + + + + + + +

Technical Note: List Edit Mode

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Making edits in a Point of Sale list is similar to working in a spreadsheet, but there is an important difference.

+

When you open a typical spreadsheet for editing, the program locks the entire spreadsheet and prevents a second user from accessing the spreadsheet until you have finished your edits and saved.

+

Because Point of Sale allows multiple workstations to access your company data simultaneously, it does not lock the records in the list when you enter list edit mode. You can move row to row (record to record) freely without locking out other workstations. Only when you actually begin editing a record is that one row (record) locked while you make your edits. As soon as you move out of the row, your changes are saved and the record freed again to other users.

+

This is why it is necessary to click in a field a second time to "activate" editing of that individual record character-by-character, even after list edit mode is enabled. Once you begin editing a record you can move field to field within the same row and you stay in active edit mode until you leave that row.

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listing_itemassembly.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listing_itemassembly.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..907d9a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listing_itemassembly.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +List an Assembly Item on a Document + + + + + + + + + +

List an Assembly Item on a Document

+

Assembly Item Overview | List Items on Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

An assembly item is a discrete item that can be listed on documents, such as sales receipts, in the normal manner.

+

When listing an assembly item:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Edit listed items

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listing_uom.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listing_uom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2c2b613 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listing_uom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +List Different Units of Measure on Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

List Different Units of Measure on Documents

+

Unit of Measure Overview | List Items on Documents: Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

When listing items with multiple units of measure on documents the following rules apply:

+

 

+

+ +

Related Topics

+

Define multiple units of measure in inventory

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listingitemgroup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listingitemgroup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f0d735c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_listingitemgroup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +List a Group Item on a Document + + + + + + + + + +

List a Group Item on a Document

+

Group Item Overview | List Items on Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

Once defined in inventory, a group item can be listed on any document except adjustment memos, though typically they are listed on sales receipts and customer orders to sell a collection of items and/or services, optionally at a discounted price.

+

To list a group item on a document:

+ +

Listing the group item on a document adds all of the items included in the group to the document. This example shows a group (baseball package) listed on a sales receipt.

+

 

+

image\receiptgroup.gif

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_liststats.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_liststats.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66d0f51 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_liststats.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + + +View a List Summary (Basic Statistics) + + + + + + + + + + + +

View a List Summary (Basic Statistics)

+

Work with Lists | Filter Lists

+

 

+

The list summary, available for each Point of Sale list, displays basic statistics allowing you to quickly and easily obtain key information about your business without having to run a report. For example, while viewing your item list you can see at a glance your total number of items and the total on-hand quantity, cost, and price for those items.

+

Other Point of Sale list summaries include statistics relevant to that particular area.

+

To view a list summary:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the list for which you wish to view the summary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make sure the list View drop-down is set to show all records.

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

Filter the list to show only certain records. The statistics displayed reflect the currently set list filter.

+
    +
  1. +

    Observe the list summary field in the status bar at the bottom of the window. In this example, the number of items in the item list (294) is the default statistic:

    +
    2. +
+

List Statistics

+

Where more than one statistic
+value is available:List Statistics Popup

+ +

Notes:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_manage_filters.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_manage_filters.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e03a85 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_manage_filters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Manage Saved List Filters + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Saved List Filters

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists

+

 

+

This topic does not apply to Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists.

+

 

+

You can rename, delete, or revise your saved filters and change the order in which they appear on the filter drop-down list.

+

To manage saved filters:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Manage Filters from the filter drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
+

The Manage Filters dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select one of your saved filters, and then select an action:

    +
    2. +
+ +

Related Topics

+

Sort a list

+

Locate a record or document

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_merge_docsaffected.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_merge_docsaffected.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a778fec --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_merge_docsaffected.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +Merge Records - Documents Affected + + + + + + + + +

Merge Records - Documents Affected

+

 

+

This information applies to the Documents Affected confirmation window displayed when merging items, customers, or vendors.

+

What's Important about this window?

+

When merging items, customers, or vendors. and the record to be removed is included on previously made documents, this window lists the number of various documents that will be affected.

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_messages.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f41ef9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Messages + + + + + + + + + + + +

Messages

+

 

+

The Message board, displayed on the Home Page and accessible from the receipts, inventory, receiving, and customer areas, allows you to leave notes for yourself or other employees. Point of Sale will also post messages for you when something needs your attention, such as inventory reminders.

+


+Messages can be displayed in "sticky note" format or as a list and are searchable. System notes, such as inventory reminders, will contain a link to take you to the screen on which you can review or complete the task.

+ +

Related Topics

+

Note, Comment, and Instruction Fields

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_officeintegration.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_officeintegration.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dcf3a7e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_officeintegration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Office integration + + + + + + + + + + +

Office Integration

+

 

+

Point of Sale supports data import/export with Microsoft Excel, letter writing with Microsoft Word, e-mailing of documents via your default Windows e-mail client, and creation of targeted customer lists for use in e-mail marketing campaigns.

+

 

+

Click a link below for more information on a specific feature.

+

You can:

+ +

The use of Excel and Word features requires that you have a supported version of Excel and/or Word installed on the workstation performing the task. Refer to the system requirements in the Point of Sale User Guide (launches PDF version). You must have Acrobat Reader installed on your machine.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_printing_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_printing_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6480f73 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_printing_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + +basic_printing_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Printing: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Print lists or documents

+

Print price tags

+

Print customer labels

+ +

Print shipping labels

+ +

Print my employee list

+

Specify printing options

+

Add my logo to sales receipts

+ +

Customize printed documents and tags

+ +

Install a supported printer

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_quickadd_item.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_quickadd_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2680529 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_quickadd_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + +Quick Add a New Item While Creating a Document + + + + + + + + + + + +

Quick Add a New Item While Creating a Document

+

Add a New Style

+

 

+

The Quick Add option is available from all documents except sales receipts and receiving vouchers. See Add a New Item While Creating a Document for instructions to add an item while making a receipt or voucher.

+

 

+

With Quick Add, you  enter only the basic item information needed to complete your current document quickly. Later, you should go to inventory and edit the item record, adding other information as needed. If speed in entering the new item is not required, we recommend you use the full add Item procedure instead, where all item information fields are available to complete at one time.

+

To Quick Add a new item from a document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Scan the item bar code in the Enter Items field on the document.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

Type the item name or a search string in the field and press Enter on your keyboard.

+

Technical Note: Enter a search string that you know isn't an item identifier for any existing item in your inventory. Do not click Find Items to the right of the Enter Items field; this will open the item search window.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the No matching items found message, select Add as New Item.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Quick Add Item window, enter as much information as you can.

    +
    2. +
+

Quick Add Item window

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Choose Save and Select. You are returned to your document with the new item listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Don't forget to return to inventory later and edit the item record to add other important information.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

QuickBooks financial software Note: Adding an item and immediately selling it Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Handling special orders

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_quickpick_Item.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_quickpick_Item.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4e0c42 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_quickpick_Item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + +Quick Pick Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Quick Pick Item

+

List Items on Documents: Overview

+

 

+

Quick Pick allows you to  group items in inventory and then quickly add items from these groups to be purchased  with fewer mouse clicks. Quick Pick works especially well for frequently sold items or services that you do not tag.

+

One example: In a sports shop, you keep a barrel of ice-cold sports drinks in several flavors near the checkout counter. The icy wet conditions make tagging impractical.  So, you complete the following steps to make them Quick Pick items.

+

Note: These procedures illustrate using Quick Pick for sales.  They can also be set up and used when receiving items from your vendors.

+

 

+

Define Quick Pick Groups

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Make a Sale page, click Quick Pick Items from the left sidebar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Add Group.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Type the name of the new Group on the new icon that displays.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Right-click on any Group icon to change the Group color, rename the Group, or remove the Group from Quick Pick.

    +
    5. +
+

There is no limit to how many Quick Pick groups you can add; add one group for each collection of related items you wish to add as Quick Pick items.  

+

 

+

Add Items to Quick Pick Groups

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Make a Sale page, click Quick Pick Items from the left sidebar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click on the Group to which you want to add items.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Add Item.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the Select an Item box, type, search, and select the item you wish to place into this Group. Once selected, the item information will display within the Group.  An item can be assigned to only one Quick Pick Group at a time.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more items to the same Group.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    To select another Group, click Groups.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

For Quick Pick to work effectively, try to keep the number of items to 12 or less (so they can all be displayed on a single Quick Pick page from a receipt).

+

 

+

Remove Items from Quick Pick Groups

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Make a Sale page, click Quick Pick Items from the left sidebar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click on the Group with the item you wish to remove.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Double-click on the item you want to remove and select  Remove Item from Quick Pick.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

The removed item was only removed from the Quick Pick Group.  It still remains in the Item List.

+

 

+

Sell the Item

+
    +
  1. +

    On the sales receipt, click Quick Pick Item from the left sidebar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Quick Pick Item dialog, click the desired  Group. If more than 12 groups exist, previous and next page buttons are added to this dialog.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click the specific item to add it to the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Make a sale

+

Receive items

+

Run a report

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_serial_number.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_serial_number.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8832389 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_serial_number.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Record Item Serial Numbers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Record Item Serial Numbers

+

List Items on Documents | Find a Document

+
+

Pro

+
+

Item serial numbers can be recorded on documents for purposes of warranty tracking or meeting legal requirements. Once recorded, former documents can be quickly located by searching by serial number.

+

To record serial numbers:

+
    +
  1. +

    In inventory, specify those items for which you want to record serial numbers by selecting the check box for Use Serial #, located in the Misch and Shipping section of the item record. (Note: For an existing item, select Edit first.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When listing these items on documents (except purchase orders and cost memos), you will be prompted to enter a serial number for each unit being processed.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Locating a Former Document by Serial Number

+

You can locate a former document by serial number using search. For example, a former receipt for the sale of an item with serial number 23487497 could quickly be located by entering the serial number in the Quick Find  box on the home page or in the Search field at the top of your Sales History list and.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_serviceitem_shipping.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_serviceitem_shipping.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..279d2d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_serviceitem_shipping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +basic_serviceitem_shipping + + + + + + + + +

Using a Service Item for Shipping/Handling Charges

+

Service Item Overview | Making a Sales Receipt

+

 

+

To charge for shipping and/or handling, you can set up a service item in inventory called "Shipping Charges" or similar.

+

If shipping charges are taxable in your area, assign the appropriate tax code to the item and optionally map the shipping charges to the appropriate QuickBooks financial software income account on the item record. You can enter your standard shipping charge as the item price or leave the price at zero (0) and edit it on a sale-by-sale basis as you create receipts.

+

When creating a receipt, list the shipping charge item on the receipt in the same manner as other items. Sales tax will be calculated and added for the shipping charge item, if applicable.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using tax codes

+

Mapping items to QuickBooks accounts

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_shipping_info.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_shipping_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cbd38b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_shipping_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + +basic_shipping_info + + + + + + + + + +

Entering Shipping Information

+

Making Sales Receipts | Customer Orders | Customer List

+

 

+

Note: The availability of the shipping fields on sales documents is controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Use this procedure to record a shipping address, date, provider, and charges on sales documents. Adding a customers addresses (Bill To and Ship To) to the customer record makes them available for selection in the Shipping information window, available on sales receipts, sales orders, and work orders. A shipping address can also be entered at the time of sale, even if not previously added to the customer record.

+

Shipping information, other than amount, can be added to or edited even after a sales receipt is saved.

+

To enter shipping information:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the items and customer on the document.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Shipping Information from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Shipping Information window, enter:

    +
    4. +
+ +

On a receipt, these additional options are available:

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to record the shipping information and return to the document.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tax_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tax_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e955e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tax_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +basic_tax_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Set up sales tax

+

Use tax codes

+

Use tax locations

+

Assign tax codes to items

+

Handle special tax circumstances by customer

+

Change the tax collected on a sale

+

Collect tax on shipping amounts

+

Collect tax based on item price thresholds

+

Collect and pay tax to more than one agency

+

Run sales tax reports

+

Share sales tax information with QuickBooks financial software

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tax_shipping.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tax_shipping.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..887218d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tax_shipping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +basic_tax_shipping + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Collecting on Shipping Amounts

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

To collect sales tax on shipping amounts, set up a service item called "Shipping Charges" or similar and assign the appropriate tax code to it. List this item on sales receipts like any other item. To collect sales tax on shipping amounts, edit your tax location(s) and select the check box labeled Shipping to this location is taxable and specify the tax code that should be used for the shipping amount.

+

Sales tax will be calculated on the shipping amount and added to the sale according to the instructions specified for the tax code assigned.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Setting up sales tax

+

Using sales tax codes

+

Using sales tax locations

+

Assigning tax codes to items

+ +

Shipping information

+ +

 

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_time_entry.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_time_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..59c6af2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_time_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Quick-Entry Time Formats + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Quick-Entry Time Formats

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

You can enter times manually or use one of the following quick entry formats. When you press <Enter> or exit the field, the time is auto-filled.

+

When keyboard combinations have a + between them press the keys at the same time. When separated by a comma, press the first key, release, and then press the next key.

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Quick Entry Formats

+		 +

Display Formats and Notes

+
+

<T>, <Enter>

+		 +

Enter the current time.

+
+

<+>, <number>, <Enter>

+		 +

Move time forward the specified number of hours. as many hours as the number entered. Example: If the displayed time is 1:00 PM and you enter <+>, <3>, <Enter> the time will be moved forward three hours to 4:00 PM.

+
+

<->, <number>, <Enter>

+		 +

Move time back the specified number of hours.

+
+

<Alt + r;>

+		 +

Change the time to one hour ahead.

+
+

<Alt + >

+		 +

Change the time to one hour earlier.

+
+

<Alt + Home>

+		 +

Set time to 12:00 AM.

+
+

<Alt + End>

+		 +

Set time to 11:59 PM.

+
+

<Alt + Page Up>

+		 +

Set time one minute ahead. Only the minutes are changed, not the hours.

+
+

<Alt + Page Down>

+		 +

Set time one minute earlier than the current time displayed.

+
+

<N>, <Enter>

+		 +

Set time to noon, 12:00 PM.

+
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_time_fields.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_time_fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..22230e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_time_fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Time Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Time Fields

+

Quick Entry Time Formats | Date Fields | Modify Report Dates

+

 

+

Entering Times

+

For added control on reports, time is used in conjunction with dates to define the range of a report (exception: you cannot define time on the EFT Report). For example, you can run a report for the range of 7/3/01 12:00 AM 7/9/01 11:59 PM, or for the range 7/3/01 8:00 PM 7/4/01 4:00 AM.

+

These fields are useful if your business has shifts that span across two days, such as a business that is open 24 hours might have, or if you want to run a report for a specific time range within one day.

+

Enter the time to begin the range with the lower (From) date. Enter the time to end the range with the upper (To) date.

+

For PM times, enter the time using the 24-hour clock or specify "pm" ("PM") after the time. For example, the following are all acceptable ways to enter 3:00 pm: 15:00, 3:00 pm, 3:00 PM.

+

By default, the time fields for a particular report are set as they were last defined.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Defining filter criteria

+

Entering data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tip_memfilters.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tip_memfilters.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..de14f5f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_tip_memfilters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +basic_tip_memfilters + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Memorized Filters Save Time

+

Tip: Memorized Filters Save Time

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden..

+ +

Creating and saving filters will save you time if you frequently work with the same groups of records. Once you have created and saved a custom filter, it can be selected from the drop-down filter View list at the top of the list.

+

If using to modify a report, memorizing the report includes the filter settings.

+

Example uses for memorized filters:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_view_form.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_view_form.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dff765f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_view_form.htm @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ + + + + + + + +Work with a Form + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work with a Form

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Find a Record or Document | Work with a List

+

 

+

A Point of Sale form is a detailed view of a single record or document. Forms are used when creating or editing a document or record.  

+

Point of Sale has three form styles: sectioned, tabbed, and document.  

+

Sectioned Form Example:  Customer Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

Tabbed Form Example:  Vendor Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

Document Form Examples:    Sales Receipt Click to expand/collapse topic        Purchase Order Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + +

 

+

Following are descriptions of available form functions:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

To

+		 +

Do this

+
+

Navigate fields

+		 +

Touch or click the field you wish to select.

+

Use <> or <Tab> to move forward through fields.

+

Use <> or <Shift + Tab> to move back through fields.

+

Only fields yellow/white in color can be edited. Gray fields cannot be selected or changed. If you believe you should be able to edit a field but cannot, check the logged-in user's security rights or read the following:

+

Why is a Point of Sale feature not available to me?

+

Editing Documents

+
+

Change Tabbed Page

+

(Tabbed Forms)

+		 +

Click or touch a tab at the top of the form.

+

Keyboard: Press <Ctrl+1>, <Ctrl+2>, etc. to move to each tab in sequence.

+
+

Expand/Collapse Section

+

(Sectioned Forms)

+		 +

Click or touch the section titlebar.

+
+

Cycle through records

+

(Tabbed Forms)

+		 +

Use <Ctrl + Page Up> to display the previous record in the associated list.

+

Use <Ctrl + Page Down> to display the next record in the associated list.

+

This function is only available from the primary tabbed page (Name & Address page in a customer record) and cannot be used while in the process of creating a new record.

+
+

Enter or edit data in a field

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic

+		 +

Select an editable field and begin typing to overwrite the current entry. Click in the field a second time to edit character-by-character.

+

To edit the items listed on a document, select the item and then click Edit or another action button on that row.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_view_list.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_view_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d813b73 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_view_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,477 @@ + + + + + + + +Work with a List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work with a List

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

 

+

Lists present all (or a filtered subset) of the documents or records created in an area in a format similar to a spreadsheet. A list can be sorted, filtered, and searched to help you locate a record or group of records.

+

There are two list types in Point of Sale, with slightly different features and procedures. Choose the list type you are working with for more information:

+

Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

All other lists Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

 These actions are common to both list types:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

To:

+		 +

Do this:

+
+

Add, remove, or rearrange columns

+		 +

Right-click any column header and select customize columns, or drag and drop a column header to a new position. You can add, remove, and rearrange columns to meet your needs.

+
+

Sort the list

+		 +

Click any column header to sort the list by the values in that column. Click the same header a second time to change the sort order (ascending or descending). A  small triangle symbol   indicates the column by which the list is currently sorted. Select a link above to see additional options, that vary by list type.

+
+

Scroll through the list

+		 +

Use the scroll bar (on the right of window) to scroll through the list of records.

+

If the list is too wide to display on the screen, there will also be a horizontal scroll bar along the bottom of the screen to move left or right.

+
+

Search for a record

+		 +

Enter search keywords above the list. The system finds and displays matching entries.  Select a link above to see additional options, that vary by list type.

+
+

Record selection & list navigation

+		 +

The selected record is highlighted. With records selected, choose an action from the I Want To menu.

+

Mouse/Touchscreen: Click or touch the record you wish to select or select multiple records.Click to display a popup topic

+

Keyboard:

+
    +
  • +

    Use your up/down arrow keys to move through rows.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use <Ctrl + Home> to move to the first record in the list and <Ctrl + End> to move to the last.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use <Page Up> to move to the first record displayed on the screen and <Page Down> to move to the last displayed record.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use your arrow keys or <Tab> and <Shift + Tab> to move one column right or left, respectively, within the selected row.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Press <Home> and <End> to move to the first or last column in the selected row, respectively.

    +
    • +
+
+

Change column widths

+		 +

Drag and drop the separator lines between column headers to change column width.

+
+

View record in a form

+		 +

Double-click the record.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Work with a form

+

Program capacities

+

Clean up your company data

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_welcome.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_welcome.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4572a1b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_welcome.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +Welcome! + + + + + + + + + +

Welcome to Point of Sale!

+

 

+

Point of Sale (Point of Sale) is an advanced inventory control, sales, customer tracking, and reporting solution designed for effective management of retail stores. As you order, receive, and sell merchandise, your inventory quantities and costs are instantly updated.

+

At a glance, you can view item quantities on hand and on order; review costs, prices and margins; and view detailed reports on sales and merchandise activity. You can track customers and use the resulting purchase history information to customize promotions, mailings and other marketing materials. At the end of your business day, Point of Sale will help you reconcile your cash drawer, settle credit card transactions (optional fee-based service), backup your data files, and, if applicable, send the day's transactions to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Are you new to Point of Sale?

+

If so, we suggest you visit these topics to learn the basics:

+

Point of Sale Workstation

+

Completing routine tasks

+

Using this help system

+

Getting additional help

+

Terminology used in Point of Sale

+

How to purchase supplies: tags, labels, or receipt paper

+

Free resources for starting and growing your business

+

 

+

For immediate help on your current task, press <F1> on your keyboard or select Help on this Window from the Help menu.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_windows_emailclient.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_windows_emailclient.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c650c99 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_windows_emailclient.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Verify or Change your Windows E-mail Client + + + + + + + + + + + +

Verify or Change Your Windows E-mail Client

+

E-Mailing Documents

+

 

+

When you e-mail documents, Point of Sale uses your default e-mail client specified in Internet Explorer.

+

To verify or change your default Windows e-mail client:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open Internet Explorer and select Tools Internet Options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Programs tabbed page.

    +
    3. +
+

Your current e-mail client program is listed in the E-mail field. If you would like to change the e-mail client used by Point of Sale (and all other Windows programs), select a different e-mail program from the drop-down list of installed e-mail programs and then select Apply.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_write_letters.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_write_letters.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ce70c40 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_write_letters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + +Write Letters from Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + +

Write Letters from Point of Sale

+

Manage Letter Templates | Office Integration Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

Point of Sale provides Microsoft Word integration for writing letters to customers and vendors. The letters can include data from the customer and vendor records as well as from documents made for the customer or vendor. A variety of letter templates is provided for your use. You can customize the provided templates and create more of your own.

+

Letters can be initiated from the I Want To menu in your customer or vendor list or from your document lists. If you want a letter to include data from a document, such as specific item information, the letter must be initiated from that document.

+

You can create a letter for a single recipient or send letters to a group of selected or filtered recipients.

+

To write letters:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the record or documents for which you wish to print letters.

    +
    2. +
+

If sending letters to a filtered list, you do not need to select specific records in this step.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Write Letters  and then choose to Currently Selected or to Filtered List.

    +
    2. +
+

If using the filtered list option, follow the prompts to enter filter criteria to include/exclude customers or vendors. Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the template you wish to use for the current printing and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the name and title of the person that the letter will be from and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+

The letter(s) are opened in Word. If you are printing multiple letters they are all in a single Word document with each letter starting on a new page.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review and modify in Word if necessary and then print the letter(s).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

E-mail Marketing from Point of Sale

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_writeletters_filter.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_writeletters_filter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17712ca --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basic_writeletters_filter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Write Letters to a Filtered List + + + + + + + + + + +

Write Letters to a Filtered List

+

Letters Overview | Manage Letter Templates | Office Integration Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

When writing letters to customers or vendors, you can choose to write letters for all records in a filtered list. For example, you might filter your customer list by ZIP code to send a letter to all customers in that area. Or, maybe you filter by receipt date to send thank you letters to everyone who made a purchase during a promotional sale.

+

To write letters to a filtered list:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your customer or vendor list, select Write Letters To Filtered List of <record type>.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From the Customer Center, select Write Letters.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the criteria to filter for the desired records and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+

You may have multiple pages of filters. For example, if filtering your customer list the first filter page allows you to filter by information in the customer record (such as by ZIP code) and the second page allows you to filter by sales information (such as sales amount and/or date). In this way, you could filter to write letters for all customers from a certain ZIP code that have spent more than $100 in the last 90 days.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review the list of filtered records displayed and select Next when ready to proceed.

    +
    2. +
+

You can remove records as necessary (clear the checkboxes on the left) or select Back to change filter criteria if necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a letter template and Next.

    +
    2. +
+

Select Modify Template before selecting Next to customize the template.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the name and title of the person that the letter will be from and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+

The letter(s) are opened in Word. If you are printing multiple letters they are all in a single Word document with each letter starting on a new page.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review and modify in Word if necessary and then print the letter(s).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24a4c35 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +How do I? + + + + + + + + + + +

How do I?

+

Help & Support | Glossary

+

What area do you need help with?

+

Inventory

+

Sales and returnsClick to display a popup topic

+

Sales taxClick to display a popup topic

+

CustomersClick to display a popup topic

+

Customer OrdersClick to display a popup topic

+

VendorsClick to display a popup topic

+

PurchasingClick to display a popup topic

+

ReceivingClick to display a popup topic

+

Employees and securityClick to display a popup topic

+

End of Day procedureClick to display a popup topic

+

ReportsClick to display a popup topic

+

Store ExchangeClick to display a popup topic

+

Integration with QuickBooks Desktop financial softwareClick to display a popup topic

+

Entering or editing recordsClick to display a popup topic

+

Program navigation, lists and forms, finding recordsClick to display a popup topic

+

Configuring or customizing Point of SaleClick to display a popup topic

+

Accepting credit & debit cardsClick to display a popup topic

+

Accepting & selling gift cardsClick to display a popup topic

+

PrintingClick to display a popup topic

+

HardwareClick to display a popup topic

+

Working with your company data fileClick to display a popup topic

+

Point of Sale licensingClick to display a popup topic

+

Getting updates to Point of SaleClick to display a popup topic

+

Import/Export Data and Write Letters

+

Troubleshooting

+

Finding other applications that work with Point of Sale

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic244.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic244.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4781eae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic244.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Mouse and Touchscreen Navigation + + + + + + + + + + +

Mouse and Touchscreen Navigation

+

Keyboard Shortcuts

+

 

+

When the documentation says to select, highlight, or place the focus on a button, field, or toolbar, mouse or touchscreen users can simply click or touch that button or field.

+

Note: Not all Point of Sale windows support touchscreen use. For example, managerial tasks, such as running reports and creating purchase orders, are not efficient touchscreen tasks and therefore touchscreen use is not supported in those areas.

+

 

+

Enabling Touchscreen Controls

+

Enable touchscreen use and add the touchscreen controls to Point of Sale by selecting Enable Touchscreen Features in workstation preferences. (From the File menu, choose Preferences, and then select Workstation.)

+

 

+

Note: Touchscreen Controls in DialogsClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Touchscreen Tips

+ +

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic259.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic259.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc22216 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic259.htm @@ -0,0 +1,473 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts

+

Mouse & Touchscreen Navigation

+

 

+

The keyboard shortcuts shown below are common to all program areas.

+

 

+

Common Keyboard Shortcuts:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

Basic Navigation

+		 +

 

+
+

<Ctrl+Q>

+		 +

Log in/out

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Alt>

+		 +

Underscores shortcuts for menus

+
+

<Ctrl+Tab>

+		 +

Cycle through open windows

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Accept entry and/or move from one field to the next in a form

+
+

<Shift+Tab>

+		 +

Reverse tab navigation

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept entry and/or move to next field in a list and on receipt payment window

+
+

<Arrow keys>

+		 +

Navigate in and between fields and columns

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancels current operation; backs out one screen; exits program from Navigator screen

+
+

<Home>

+		 +

Move cursor to first column in list

+
+

<End>

+		 +

Move cursor to last column in list

+
+

<Spacebar>

+		 +

Select/clear a check box

+

Cycle through choices on drop-down lists

+
+

Function Keys

+		 +

 

+
+

<F1>

+		 +

Get Help on current task

+
+

<F3>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field (only on windows with Find fields)

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup fields, access associated list to select

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

On document: Edit selected item.

+

(Pro) Edit selected style item.

+
+

<F6>

+		 +

On document: Edit quantity

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Toggle between list view and form view of the selected record

+
+

<F9>

+		 +

Return to Home screen from Make a Sale window

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Toggle focus between the menu and window

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save (without printing transactional documents)

+
+

<F12>

+

 

+

 

+

Return to top

+		 +

1. Save (record, order document) or save & print (transactional document )

+

2. Go to payment screen (from receipt body)

+

 

+
+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Control (Ctrl) Keys

+
+

<Ctrl+E>

+		 +

Move cursor to customer lookup field

+
+

<Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field (only on windows with Find fields)

+
+

<Ctrl+I>

+		 +

Move cursor to item lookup field

+
+

<Ctrl+N>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages, n = 1, 2, 3, etc.

+
+

<Ctrl+Q>

+		 +

Log in/out

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Go to Item List (from documents)

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

Access Held documents (from history list)

+
+

<Ctrl+F8>

+		 +

Open installed cash drawer

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags (where applicable)

+
+

<Ctrl+Tab>

+		 +

Cycle through open windows

+
+

<Ctrl+Home>

+		 +

Go to first record in list

+
+

<Ctrl+End>

+		 +

Go to the last record in list

+
+

<Ctrl+PageUp>

+		 +

Display previous record or form

+
+

<Ctrl+PageDown>

+		 +

Go to first or last record on window

+
+

Shift Keys

+
+

<Shift+F1>

+		 +

Open Cash window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F2>

+		 +

Open Credit window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F3>

+		 +

Open Debit window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F5>

+		 +

Open Gift Card window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F6>

+		 +

Open Redeem a Gift Certificate window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F7>

+		 +

Open Charge Account window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F8>

+		 +

Open Take Deposit window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F11>

+		 +

Open Check window for customer payment

+
+

Alternate (Alt) Keys

+
+

<Alt>

+		 +

Access text menus

+
+

<Alt+underlined letter>

+		 +

Access visible options that contain an underlined letter by pressing <Alt + the underlined letter>. For example, to access Copy, use <Alt+C>.

+
+

<Alt+F4>

+		 +

Exit Point of Sale

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_cust_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_cust_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97b2a7c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_cust_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Customers + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Customers

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable in customer records.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General:

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Display choices on drop-down list or display calendar in date fields (press within field)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save customer record

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl + n>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages, n = 1,2,3, etc.

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of customer

+
+

Customer List:

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Search for customer

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Cycle between list and form

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print customer labels

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_dept_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_dept_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5126c94 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_dept_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Departments + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Departments

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to departments.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

Adding/Editing a Department:

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Display choices on drop-down list (press within field)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save record

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of department

+
+

Department List:

+
+

<F3> or <Crtl+F>

+		 +

Search for department record

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Cycle between list and form

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

 

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_filter_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_filter_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..143c9b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_filter_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Filter Dialog + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Filter Dialog

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts for the list and report filter dialog.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept entry and move to next field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Open selection dialogs or lists within a field

+
+

<Up/Down Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move up down through lists

+
+

< Tab>

+		 +

Switch focus from criteria fields to bottom toolbar

+
+

<Spacebar>

+		 +

Select/clear item checkboxes or cycle through choices for various options

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_customer.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_customer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2707359 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_customer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Customer + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Customer

+

Sort Lists | Filter Lists

+
+

Basic

+
+

From the Point of Sale Home Page, use Quick Find.

+

Searching in your customer list:

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your Customer List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Begin typing customer keywords in the Search Customers field.  

    +
    3. +
+

Customer Search

+ +

Customer Search

+
    +
  1. +

    If no results are found, use the backspace key on your keyboard to go back and re-enter new characters.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the customer you wish to work with and then click Show Details or choose an appropriate task from the I Want To Menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List a Customer on a Receipt

+

View Customer Purchase History

+
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_dept.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_dept.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41546a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_dept.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Department + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Department

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Department Overview

+

To search for a department record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a search keyword or keywords for the department name or department code in the Find Department field at the top of your department list.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click the magnifying glass icon or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find window, you can confirm and select the correct department or narrow your search:

    +
    2. +
+ +

The department form is displayed.

+

OR

+ +

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_general.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_general.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f51afd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_general.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Finding a Record or Document + + + + + + + + + + + +

Finding a Record or Document

+

Quick Find | Point of Sale Basics

+

 

+

There are three ways to locate records or documents in a Point of Sale list. Select a link for more information about an option.

+ +

Area-specific search instructions: Customers, Items, Receipts, Customer Orders, Vendors, Departments, Adjustment Memos, Transfer Slips, Purchase Orders.

+ + +

Related Topics

+

Customizing list columns

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_item.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..932a1be --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for an Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for an Item

+

 Sort the Item List | Filter the Item List

+

 

+

From the Point of Sale Home Page, use Quick Find.

+

Searching in your item list:

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your Item List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Begin typing keywords in the Search Inventory field.  

    +
    3. +
+

Item Search

+ +

Item Search

+
    +
  1. +

    If no results are found, use the backspace key on your keyboard to go back and re-enter new characters.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the item you wish to work with and then click Show Details or choose an appropriate task from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a New Item

+

List items on documents

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_layso.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_layso.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..27df45e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_layso.htm @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Customer Order + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Customer Order

+

Quick Find | Sort a List | Filter a List

+
+

Pro

+
+

Instructions for searching in your customer order lists (layaway, sales order, or work order) are given below.

+

You can also locate customer orders by looking in the customer's history.

+

To search for a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a search keyword in the Find field at the top of the order list:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

Order #:

+		 +

Enter the order number

+
+

Order Date:

+		 +

Enter in mm/dd/yyyy or mm/yyyy format, including slashes, Example: 10/05/2005 finds all orders made on October 5; 10/2005 finds all orders made in October

+
+

Associate:

+		 +

Enter Associate login name

+
+

Customer Name

+		 +

Enter customers last or first name

+
+

Company Name:

+		 +

Enter the customers company name

+
+

Serial #:

+		 +

Enter an item serial number that was recorded on the order

+
+
    +
  1. +

    Click  Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+

All matching orders are listed in the Find window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm and select the correct order or select from other options:

    +
    2. +
+ +

The order is displayed and all normal options are available to take or refund deposits, sell items, generate a purchase order, or print are available.

+

OR

+ +

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+

Customizing the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_memo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_memo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..65e4d05 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_memo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for an Adjustment Memo + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for an Adjustment Memo

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Adjustment Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Instructions for searching for a memo are given below. You can also locate memos by viewing item history.

+

(Pro with multiple stores) Remote stores only have access to memos made at the local store, while Headquarters can find memos made at any store (assuming Store Exchanges have been completed).

+

To search for an adjustment memo:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find Memo field above your adjustment history list, enter a search keyword:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

Memo #:

+		 +

Enter the memo number

+
+

Memo Date:

+		 +

Enter in mm/dd/yyyy or mm/yyyy format, including slashes, Example: 10/05/2005 finds all memos made on October 5; 10/2005 finds all memos made in October

+
+

Associate:

+		 +

Enter the Associate login name

+
+

Source:

+		 +

Enter keyword matching the entry in the Source field on the memo, e.g. Manual, Physical Inventory, etc.

+
+

Reason:

+		 +

Enter keyword matching the entry in the Reason field on the memo, e.g. Qty Adj, Cost Adj, Shrinkage, Damaged, etc.

+
+

(Pro) Serial #:

+		 +

Enter an item serial number that was recorded on the memo

+
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+

All matching memos are listed in the Find window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm and select the correct memo or select from other options:

    +
    2. +
+ +

The memo is displayed and all normal options to copy,.reverse, or reprint are available.

+

OR

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Reverse and correct a memo

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_po.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_po.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b769e06 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_po.htm @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Purchase Order + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Purchase Order

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Instructions for searching for a purchase order are given below.

+

You can also locate purchase orders in a vendor's history.

+

To search for a purchase order:

+

Searches are done by keyword across one or several selected fields (see the list of searchable fields below).

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find PO field above your PO list, enter a search keyword:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

PO #:

+		 +

Enter the purchase order number

+
+

Date:

+

(Order, Ship, or Cancel date)

+		 +

Enter in mm/dd/yyyy or mm/yyyy format, including slashes, Example: 10/05/2005 finds all orders made on October 5; 10/2005 finds all orders made in October

+
+

Associate:

+		 +

Login name of the associate that made the PO

+
+

Vendor:

+		 +

Enter one or more words from the vendor company name

+
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+

All matching orders are listed in the Find window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm and select the correct order or select from other options:

    +
    2. +
+ +

The order is displayed and all normal options are available to edit, print, e-mail, etc.

+

OR

+ +

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a PO

+

Delete a PO

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_recpt.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_recpt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae51b32 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_recpt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Receipt + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Receipt

+

Sort a List | Filter a List

+

There are three ways to find a saved receipt:

+ +

To search for a receipt in sales history:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your sales history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Begin typing keywords in the Search field above the list.  

    +
    3. +
+

Receipt Search

+ +

     Receipt Search

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    If no results are found, use the backspace key on your keyboard to go back and re-enter new characters.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the receipt you wish to work with and then click Show Details or choose an appropriate task from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Returns and Exchanges from Customers

+

Edit Documents

+

Copy a Document

+

Reverse a Receipt

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_slip.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_slip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b74e821 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_slip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Transfer Slip

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Transfer Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Transfer slips are only available in a multi-store  configuration.

+

Remote stores only have access to transfer slips made at the local store, while Headquarters can find slips made at any store (assuming Store Exchanges have been completed).

+

To search for a transfer slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find Slip field above your transfer history list, enter a search keyword:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

Slip #:

+		 +

Enter the slip number

+
+

Slip Date:

+		 +

Enter in mm/dd/yyyy or mm/yyyy format, including slashes, Example: 10/05/2005 finds all slips made on October 5; 10/2005 finds all slips made in October

+
+

Associate:

+		 +

Enter the Associate login name

+
+

Serial #:

+		 +

Enter an item serial number that was recorded on slip

+
+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+

All matching slips are listed in the Find window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm and select the correct slip or select from other options:

    +
    2. +
+ +

The slip is displayed and all normal options to copy, reverse, or reprint are available.

+

OR

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Notes

+ +

Related Topics

+

Transfer overview

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_vendor.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_vendor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d83a99 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_vendor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Vendor + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Vendor

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Vendor Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

To search for a vendor:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find Vendor field above your vendor list, enter a search keyword or keywords:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

Company:

+		 +

Enter one or more words in company name.

+
+

Vendor Code:

+		 +

Enter the entire vendor code.

+
+

Name:

+		 +

Enter last or first name of vendor contact.

+
+

Phone:

+		 +

Dashes and area code not required.

+
+

ZIP Code:

+		 +

Enter the full zip code. To ensure that phone numbers including the same digits are not matched, select ZIP as the search field. See Advanced Find option below.

+
+

(Pro) Custom Field

+		 +

Your custom named fields.

+
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +

    All matching records are listed in the Find window. Note: If searching by company name from a vendor lookup field on a document or item record and one unique matching record is found, it is immediately listed in the field and the Find window is not displayed.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find window, you can confirm and select the correct record or narrow your search:

    +
    2. +
+ +

If searching from a lookup field, the vendor is listed. Other wise, the vendor form is opened.

+

OR

+ +

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_voucher.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_voucher.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f0078e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_find_voucher.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Voucher + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Voucher

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are a couple ways of searching for a receiving voucher:

+ +

To search for a receipt in sales history:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Begin typing keywords in the Search field above the list.

    +
    3. +
+

Voucher Search

+ +

Voucher Search

+
    +
  1. +

    If no results are found, use the backspace key on your keyboard to go back and re-enter new characters.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the voucher you wish to work with and then click Show Details or choose an appropriate task from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Edit a voucher

+

Enter Vendor Billing Information

+

Reverse and correct a voucher

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_inv_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_inv_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..de9df99 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_inv_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Inventory + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Inventory

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to inventory.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General:

+		 +

 

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Toggle between list and form (edit Item)

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Form: Open the Find window for the active field (vendor, department)

+

List: Find item

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Access list or drop-down lists

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Display I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print Tags

+
+

<Ctrl + n>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages, n = 1,2,3, etc.

+
+

<Spacebar>

+		 +

Select/clear check box fields

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Style Grid (Pro):

+		 +

 

+
+

<Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Navigate between style grid cells

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept cell entry and move to next cell or bypass empty cell (when data entry is allowed)

+
+

<Ctrl+Home>

+		 +

Go to most upper-left cell in grid

+
+

<Ctrl+End>

+		 +

Go to most lower-right cell in grid

+
+

<Ctrl+>

+		 +

Go to first displayed cell in row

+
+

<Ctrl+>

+		 +

Go to last displayed cell in row

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_layso_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_layso_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..10e6f03 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_layso_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,214 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Customer Orders

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to customer orders (layaways, sales orders, and work orders).

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F> 

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup fields, select from associated list

+

From date fields: display calendar

+

From drop-down list fields: display choices

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit listed item (highlight item first)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save order

+
+

<Ctrl+F2>

+		 +

Change tax location

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Refund deposit

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Select from Item List

+
+

<Ctrl+F5>

+		 +

Select from Customer List

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

View payment/deposit history

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

Sell Customer Order items

+
+

<Ctrl+F8>

+		 +

Open cash drawer

+
+

<Ctrl+F9>

+		 +

Add special order item

+
+

<Ctrl+F11>

+		 +

Modify Shipping information

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of customer order

+
+

Customer Order lists only:

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Find a customer order

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_memo_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_memo_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5515511 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_memo_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,179 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Adjustment Memos + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Adjustment Memos

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to adjustment memos.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General

+		 +

 

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup field, select from associated list

+

From drop-down list fields: display list of choices

+

From date field: display calendar

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit item quantity or cost, highlight item first

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save memo without printing

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Save and print memo

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

Go to Adjustment History list

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

View held memos

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of memo

+
+

Memo list only

+		 +

 

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Find saved memo

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Reverse memo

+
+

 

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_nav_popup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_nav_popup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7449056 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_nav_popup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +Navigator Popup + + + + + + + + + +

Navigator

+ +

In-help popup.

+ +

 

+

The Navigator provides one-click access to the program areas that help you complete your most common retail tasks, as well as to reports. Click a task icon to go to that program area to complete the task

+

Navigator.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_navigator.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_navigator.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1af1af6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_navigator.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Use the Home Page + + + + + + + + + + +

Use the Home Page

+

Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

The Point of Sale Home Page provides easy access to common tasks, reports, preferences, and more. To return to the Home Page at any time, click the Home button, located at the top left of all Point of Sale task windows.

+

The main features of the Home Page include the following:

+ +

You can also:

+ +

Note: The icons and activities available on the Home Page will vary depending on the level of Point of Sale you have purchased, the features you are using, and your assigned security rights.

+

Note: If you turn off a feature in company preferences, the related menu choices and icons are removed from the Home Page.   

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize the navigation toolbar

+

Home Page Dashboard

+

Point of Sale Basics

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_openwindows.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_openwindows.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..097868b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_openwindows.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Switch Between Tasks + + + + + + + + + + +

Switch Between Tasks

+

Home Page

+

 

+

There may be times when you are working on one task in Point of Sale and you need to do another, but you aren't done with the first.

+

For example:

+ +

You can switch to another area to complete a second task and then switch back to the original task to complete it.

+

Note: These instructions only apply to windows with the Switch To drop-down arrow. Most of the time, you can start another task simply by selecting it from the Home page or the main menu. When you want to return to the first task, click the Windows button at the top left of the Home page and select the appropriate window.

+

To switch between tasks:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the top left of your current window, select the Switch To drop-down arrow.

    +
    2. +
+

A list of tasks in progress is displayed (Make a Sale is always displayed even if you don't have a receipt in progress).

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the task or document you wish to switch to.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When done with the second task, use Switch To again to return to your original task.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Keyboard Navigation

+

Mouse & Touchscreen Navigation

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_pi_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_pi_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7600bd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_pi_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Physical Inventory

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable while taking physical inventory (PI).

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

PI Count Window:

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Move focus between toolbars and item list

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move focus between fields, toolbars, tabs, and buttons

+
+

<Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Scroll through item list

+

With focus on tabs, change tabbed page

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept count entry and move to next item

+

With focus on button, selects button or opens button submenu

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Find item

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Update PI

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Exit the PI, discarding any counts not updated

+
+

Add Counts Window:

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move between fields and buttons

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept item entry and move to either item quantity field or next item (user-defined)

+

With focus on button, select button

+
+

<>

+		 +

Select radio button option

+

Scroll through item list

+
+

<Space>

+		 +

Select radio button option

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Exit Add Counts window, discard entered counts

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_pm_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_pm_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1eb56d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_pm_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Price Manager + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Price Manager

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to Price Manager.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Switch between using toolbars and item list

+
+

<Up/Down Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Scroll through item list

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept entered price and move to next field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Find item

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Update prices

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print markdown tags (select before updating)

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Exit Price Manager, discarding any price changes not updated

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_po_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_po_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a3efa4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_po_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Purchase Orders

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to purchase orders.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Form: Open the Find window for the active field

+

List: Find PO

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup field, select from associated list

+

From drop-down list fields: display choices

+

From date fields: display calendar

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit item information, highlight item first

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save PO

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F9>

+		 +

Add special order item

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of PO

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_prefs_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_prefs_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2649b58 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_prefs_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Preferences

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to preferences.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move between tool bars, preferences tree, and individual settings

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move up/down in preferences tree

+

Move between selections in a settings group

+
+

<Letter>

+		 +

(With focus on preferences tree) Displays the next page in the tree beginning with the entered letter

+
+

<>

+		 +

With focus on tabs, change tabbed page

+
+

<Space>

+		 +

Select/clear checkboxes

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

With focus on button, select button

+

In lists, accept entry and move to next field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Display drop-down menu associated with the current preference setting, if available

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Cycle focus between text menus and origin (preference page, tree, etc,)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_quickfind.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_quickfind.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e1f651 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_quickfind.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Quick Find from the Home Page + + + + + + + + + +

Using Quick Find from the Retail Navigator

+

Locating a Record or Document

+

 

+

The Home Page offers a Quick Find field to locate customers, inventory items, receipts, help, and more.  You can scan item or receipt bar codes into this field, or manually type customer names, document numbers, or any search keywords.

+

image\quickfind.gif

+

 

+

As you type, the results are instantly displayed, broken down by record types. In the example shown, the letters "Pa" have been typed and records have been found in several categories. As more letters are typed, the results are narrowed helping you quickly find the record or help you need.

+

image\quickfind_list.gif

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_recpt_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_recpt_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6cd3de6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_recpt_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,334 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Receipts + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Receipts

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to receipts.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General:

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

1. Access associated list, from Enter Items and Customer fields to select record

+

2. Display choices in drop-down list fields, e.g. Associate and Price Level fields

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit receipt item, highlight item first

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Go to payment screen

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel receipt

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+I>

+		 +

Move focus to Enter Items field

+
+

<Ctrl+E>

+		 +

Move focus to Customer field

+
+

<Ctrl+F2>

+		 +

Change tax location

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Go to Select Item List, from any field

+
+

<Ctrl+F5>

+		 +

Go to Select Customer List, from any field

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

Go to Sales History List (saved receipts)

+
+

<Ctrl+F8>

+		 +

Open cash drawer

+
+

<Ctrl+F11>

+		 +

Open Shipping Information dialog

+
+

Receipt payment screen:

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Return to receipt body

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept payment entry

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save receipt without printing

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Save and print receipt

+
+

<Shift+F1>

+		 +

Take Cash payment

+
+

<Shift+F2>

+		 +

Take Check payment

+
+

<Shift+F3>

+		 +

Take Credit Card payment

+
+

<Shift+F4>

+		 +

Take Gift Certificate payment

+
+

<Shift+F5>

+		 +

Take Account payment

+
+

<Shift+F6>

+		 +

Take Deposit payment

+
+

<Shift+F7>

+		 +

Take Debit/TM payment

+
+

<Shift+F8>

+		 +

Take Gift Card payment

+
+

Sales History (saved receipts):

+
+

<F3> or <Crtl+F>

+		 +

Search for receipt

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Review payments on saved receipt

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Reverse receipt

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

Access held receipts

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_reminder_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_reminder_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..07f75ca --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_reminder_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Inventory Reminders + + + + + + + + + + +">   +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Inventory Reminders

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts for the inventory reminders window.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move focus between list, options, and toolbar buttons

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Select option or button

+
+

<Up/Down Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Scroll through list

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+Tab>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages

+
+

<Spacebar>

+		 +

Select/clear item checkboxes for various actions

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_reports_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_reports_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8dfc279 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_reports_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Reports

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to reports and sales charts.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move focus between fields and buttons.

+
+

<Up/Down Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Moves up/down through choices in a field or on a toolbar

+

Cycles through choices on drop-down list

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Selects button, opens submenu, or selects menu option

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Opens I Want To menu.

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl + F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Displays choices on selection list

+

Displays calendar in date fields

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Refresh report

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Move focus from page up to menu

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Exit reports/sales chart module

+
+

Modify Report Window

+
+

<Ctrl+Tab>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages

+
+

<Space>

+		 +

Select/clear checkboxes and column selections

+
+

<Ctrl+ Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move focus among fields

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Opens font dialog for selected area on Fonts page

+
+

<Alt+Underlined letter>

+		 +

Select visible option, with an underlined letter

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_slip_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_slip_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff6ac24 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_slip_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Transfer Slips + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Transfer Slips

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to transfer slips when you have multiple stores.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup field: select from associated list

+

From date fields: display calendar

+

From drop-down list fields: display choices

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit item (with slip item selected)

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save slip without printing

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Save and print slip

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Select from Item list

+
+

<Ctrl+F5>

+		 +

Select from Vendor list

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

Go to Transfer History (saved slips)

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of slip

+
+

Transfer History List (former slips):

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Search for a saved slip

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Reverse slip

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

View held slips

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_vendor_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_vendor_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c9c196 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_vendor_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Vendors + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Vendors

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to vendors.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

Adding/Editing a Vendor:

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Display choices on drop-down list or display Terms dialog (press within field)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save vendor record

+
+

<Ctrl + n>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages, n = 1,2,3

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of vendor

+
+

Vendor List:

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Search for vendor

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_voucher_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_voucher_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..26d63d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/navigation_find/basic_voucher_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Vouchers + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Vouchers

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to vouchers.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

Creating a Voucher

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup field: select from associated list

+

From date fields: display calendar

+

From drop-down list fields: display choices

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit listed item (highlight item first)

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save voucher without printing

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Save and print voucher

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Change new voucher to return

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Select from item list

+
+

<Ctrl+F5>

+		 +

Select from vendor list

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

Go to Receiving History (saved vouchers)

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of voucher

+
+

Receiving History (Voucher List):

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Search for voucher

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Reverse voucher

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

View held vouchers

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/note_adding_a_new_style_from_documents.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/note_adding_a_new_style_from_documents.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..35d5db3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/note_adding_a_new_style_from_documents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Note: Add a New Style from a Document + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Note: Add a New Style from a Document

+ +

In-help popup

+
+

Pro

+
+

This feature is not available from a sales receipt or receiving voucher.

+

If you come to your item list from a document (after choosing Select from Item List or by selecting Add New from the Enter Items drop-down list), you can add a new style.

+

However, be aware that the quantities you enter in the style grid are document quantities, not on hand quantities. When you return to the document, the style items will be listed on the document with the entered quantities. The actual on-hand quantities for the style will be zero, and must be entered in the typical fashion, usually by receiving the items on a voucher.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic243.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic243.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c978091 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic243.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing in Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing in Point of Sale

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Printing Tags | Printing Preferences | FAQs

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale can print documents, lists, price tags, labels, reports, letters, and graphs.

+

Before you can print from Point of Sale, you must set up Windows to use your printer or printers. Once set up in Windows, your printer(s) are available to assign to the various types of documents you can print from within Point of Sale.

+

The printed output is determined by the printer and print template you specify in your printing preferences. Each workstation sets up its own print options.

+

A default selection of templates for each area is provided with Point of Sale. Pro users can customize these templates or create new ones to fit your printing needs.

+

Printing options are accessed in various ways:

+

Item, customer, and sales history lists:  Select from the I Want To Menu...:

+

+

All other lists:  Select from the Print  menu (located on the window toolbar as shown) or from the File menu at the top of the screen...

+

+

When making new documents: Select the Print or Save & Print option at the bottom of the document...

+

 

+

+

 

+

At the time of printing, the Print dialog allows you in many cases to change the printer. template, number of copies, or preview the output on screen before sending it to the printer. (Options available vary with document.)

+

 

+

Other Printing Topics

+

Changing print templates at time of printing

+

Compatible printer list

+

Ordering printing supplies

+

Troubleshooting

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic247.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic247.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24fd8c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic247.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Previewing Documents, Reports, and Tags + + + + + + + + + + + +

Previewing Documents, Reports, and Tags

+

Printing Overview | Print Option Preferences | Printing FAQs

+

 

+

The Previewer is used throughout Point of Sale to view documents, reports, tags, labels, and records (collectively called documents here) on the screen before sending them to the printer.

+

Tip: Zoom preview display to see small printClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Preview Options

+

To access these options, right-click in the preview window. Not all options are available on all documents.

+ +

Related Topics

+

Printing lists or documents

+

Printing tags

+

Reports overview

+

Customizing printed documents and tags

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic291.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic291.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9f1ddd9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic291.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing Tags in Code + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Tags in Code

+

Overview | Tag Printing: Basic Instructions | FAQs

+

 

+

You can print an items cost and its last received date on price tags in a code that is defined in company preferences. Only informed employees will know how to read the code.

+

To define and use a price tag code:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Price Levels from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Price Tag code area, specify one letter or number to represent each number 0-9.

    +
    4. +
+

image\tag_codepref.gif

+
    +
  1. +

    In your workstation document & printer preferences, select a tag template with a suffix of "+ cost". These templates contain the Cost Code and Last Rcvd Code fields.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Example: You have an item with a cost of $9.00, last received on 11/26/07. You define your tag code as shown above. The printed tag, using a "+cost" template, would look like this:

+

 

+

image\tag_codesample.gif

+

 

+

Cost: i00 = 9.00 (decimal omitted)

+

Last Received Date: aabf0g = 112607 (mmddyy format)

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize your printed tags

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic292.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic292.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d8127a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic292.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + +Specifying Document Printers & Templates + + + + + + + + + + +

Specifying Document Printers & Templates

+

Printing Overview | Printing Preferences | Importing Templates | Print Designer

+

 

+

Printers and templates for documents, tags, and labels are specified on the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences. When specifying templates, make sure you take into consideration your printers capabilities and the size of the printer paper, i.e., do not select a "Letter" sized sales receipt template if using a 40-column receipt printer. You can also change the printer and/or template used each time you print if you set your printing preferences to display the print dialog.

+

To specify printers and templates in preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences > Workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the drop-down lists for each document, tag, and label type:

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    If you want the ability to change printers or templates when printing, select the Print Options preference page and select the check box for each document type in the Print Dialog section.

    +
    2. +
+

Note: When printing tags, labels, and customer orders, the print dialog is always displayed, so  no checkboxes are displayed in the list for these document types.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic338.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic338.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..38b01f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic338.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing Tags: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Tags: Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Supported Tags | Printing Preferences | FAQs

+ +

 

+

Item price tags can be printed from inventory, purchase and receiving documents, transfer slips, the Price Change reminders window, and from the Price Manager and Physical Inventory windows.

+

The appearance of printed tags is determined by the default print template you have specified in workstation preferences or you can change the template at time of printing.  Pro users can also customize or create new tag templates to meet their individual needs.

+

Tag printing is supported to compatible dedicated tag printers (e.g. the Zebra LP2824) and to standard inkjet/laser printers (using sheet labels). A dedicated tag printer allows you to print to hang tag, jewelry tag, and adhesive tag templates available on roll stock.

+

 

+

Inventory Tag

+

 

+

Tags can be printed with or without bar codes or the reference MSRP (manufacturer's suggested retail price).

+

When printing tags with bar codes and using the default tag templates, Point of Sale uses the inventory item number to produce the bar code, not the UPC code. This allows you to print bar-coded tags and list items on documents by scanning them, even if you do not have a vendor-provided UPC code for the items. Learn more.

+

The MSRP is included on printed tags if it has been entered on the item record. If you do not wish to include the MSRP, don't enter it on the item record or remove the field from the template you are using with Print Designer.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Other Tag Printing Topics

+

List of compatible tag printers

+

Installing supported printers

+

Common issues with Zebra tag printers

+

Printing mailing and shipping labels

+

Printing shipping labels

+

Printing tags for alternate vendors Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Ordering printing supplies

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_disable_tagprinting.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_disable_tagprinting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f1d24d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_disable_tagprinting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +Disable Tag Printing for an Item + + + + + + + + + +

Disable Tag Printing for an Item

+

Tag Printing: Basic Instructions | Edit Items

+

 

+

Dont want to print tags for an item?

+

Clear the Print Tags check box in the Misc and Shipping section of the item record in inventory. This will help prevent accidental printing of tags for an item even if it is displayed in your item list or on a document when printing tags.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing FAQs

+

Ordering tag supplies from Intuit

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_import_templates.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_import_templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8689e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_import_templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Importing Print Templates + + + + + + + + + + +

Importing Print Templates

+

Specifying Templates in Preferences

+

From time to time it may be necessary to get updated print templates to meet legal requirements for printed documents in your area or to more effectively reflect your business practices. Only Pro-level users of Point of Sale can create their own custom templates, but all users may at times have access to updated templates through Point of Sale Pro Advisors, Retail Service Providers, or Intuit technical support. This option allows you to import those templates into Point of Sale.

+

To import print templates:

+
    +
  1. +

    Obtain and save the print template file to your computer. Print template files end in the .xml file extension.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Utilities > Import Print Templates.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Import on the message displayed.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Browse to the template file in the Import Document Templates window and select Open.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select the new template(s) in your workstation Documents & Printers preferences.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing Overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_print_selecttemplate.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_print_selecttemplate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6925272 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_print_selecttemplate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Print Template + + + + + + + + + + +

Selecting a Print Template

+

Printing Overview | Printing Preferences | Printing Tags

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Select Print Template window. Access this window by selecting Preview Template on a Print dialog when printing a document, tag, or label. Your printing preferences must be set to display the print dialog.

+

 

+

Your default print template for each document or tag is set in workstation preferences. This window allows you to preview and switch to another template at the time of printing when necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a template in the list of templates on the left to see a preview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose Select to use the currently displayed template for this printing.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If necessary, change the printer to match the template selected on the Print dialog.

    +
    4. +
+

You can make this the default template on this workstation by selecting the Make this the default... check box at the bottom of the window. Make sure the template you select matches your installed printer on this workstation. Your printing preferences will be updated to always use this template until you change it again.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printdocuments.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printdocuments.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b6d5b92 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printdocuments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printing Lists or Documents + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Lists or Documents

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Printing Overview | FAQs

+ +

 

+

Use these procedure to print record lists or individual documents.

+

To print a non-document list: (item, customer, vendor, department, and employee)

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the list you wish you print.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you want to print only a subset of the list, filter the list to display only the records you want included. To print the entire list, make sure the filter is set to display all records.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the File menu, select Print.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

You can also run list reports, which provide greater flexibility in customizing or exporting the printed output.

+

To print documents:

+

Transactional documents (receipts, vouchers, and memos, and transfer slips) are normally printed at the time you save them. Use this procedure to reprint those documents from your history lists or to print order documents.

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight (list) or display (form) the document you want to print.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print from the File menu.

    +
    3. +
+

Most documents also have a Print or Reprint button at the bottom of the document window, which can be selected instead.

+
    +
  1. +

    If presented with a Print Document dialog (a workstation preference), you can:

    +
    2. +
+ +

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Compatible hardware list

+

Installing supported printers

+

Previewing printed documents

+

Running Point of Sale reports

+

Troubleshooting a receipt printer

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printing_logo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printing_logo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4465e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printing_logo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +Adding your Logo to Sales Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

Adding your Logo to Sales Documents

+

Printing Overview | Print Designer | FAQs

+

 

+

You can easily add your store logo to printed sales receipts,  gift receipts, customer orders, and other documents. You can even add several logos to Point of Sale and then switch between them for seasonal or holiday purposes. Pro users can add different logos to different documents using Print Designer.

+

To add your logo to printed sales documents:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the General Store Info page from the left-side menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the check box for Use Image as Default Logo.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Specify.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    In the Images Collection window, select Add and browse for a graphic file. See notes below for file requirements.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Repeat to add additional logos. Choose the one logo you want printed on documents and choose Select.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select Save on the preference page.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printing_shippinglabels.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printing_shippinglabels.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..96b7b22 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_printing_shippinglabels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,273 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Mailing or Shipping Labels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Mailing or Shipping Labels

+

Printing Overview | Printing FAQs | Supported label styles/sizes

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can print mailing or shipping labels from your customer list, from individual customer records, and from the Customer Center.

+

(Pro) You can also print shipping labels from sales receipts and customer orders.

+

 

+

Print a Label for an Individual Customer

+

From the customer list, display the customer details. In the Addresses section, select one of the entered addresses from the drop-down list and then click Print Label.

+ +

With this option, you can print a mailing label for one, all, or a selected group of customers.

+ +

Step-by-step instructions Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Print Mailing Labels from the Customer Center

+

Printing labels from the Customer Center gives you the added advantage of being able to create a mailing campaign list filtered by customer record information and/or by sales data. Labels printed from the Customer Center always use the customers' billing addresses.

+

Step-by-step instructions Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+ +

Print Shipping Labels from a Sales Receipt or Customer Order (Pro)

+ +

You can print shipping labels from a receipt or customer order. If you use Shipping Manager, special considerations apply as explained below.

+ +

Directions Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Print Shipping Manager Labels (Pro)

+

If you use Shipping Manager to make shipments, a shipping label that includes tracking information and scannable bar code is automatically printed when entering the shipment.

+

Laser/inkjet and thermal printers are supported by Shipping Manager. The printer and options for Shipping Manager labels are set up in Shipping Manager, not in Point of Sale preferences. See Shipping Manager Overview and Setup.

+

The Zebra LP2844 thermal printer, a Point of Sale compatible printer that can print 4" x 6" shipping labels, is also ideal for use with Shipping Manager.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Supported label styles and sizes

+

Print your customer list

+

Compatible label printers

+

Enter shipping information on sales receipts

+

Customize printed documents

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_tagdesigns.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_tagdesigns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..21a42d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_tagdesigns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,236 @@ + + + + + + + +Supported Tag and Label Styles and Sizes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Supported Tag and Label Styles and Sizes

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Printing FAQs

+ +

 

+

The following tag/label styles and sizes are supported for printing in Point of Sale. Be sure to observe your printer's capabilities when selecting a template; some listed styles can be used for both tags and mailing/shipping labels.  Not all sizes and styles listed below are available in every area or compatible with every printer.

+

 

+

Laser and inkjet templates for tags or labels:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

 Size

+		 +

Number Per Sheet

+		 +

Use Template

+
+

1" 2.625"

+		 +

30

+

(3 across)

+		 +

Avery 5160*

+
+

1" x 4"

+		 +

20

+

(2 across)

+		 +

Avery 5161

+
+

0.5" 1.75"

+		 +

80

+

(4 across)

+		 +

Avery 5167*

+
+

3.33" x 4"

+		 +

6

+

(2 across)

+		 +

Avery 5524**, 8164

+
+

* Multiple tag templates within category

+

** Weatherproof tag, for laser printer only

+

 

+

Roll-stock tags/labels, for use with the Zebra LP2824/LP2844 and other compatible tag or label printers:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Tag/Label Type

+		 +

Size (approx.)

+		 +

Use Template

+
+

Hang Tag:

+		 +

2.25" x 1.35"

+		 +

Intuit Hang Tag*

+
+

Jewelry Tag with Flaps:

+		 +

2.1875" x 0.5"

+		 +

Intuit Jewelry Tags with flaps*

+
+

Jewelry Tag without Flaps:

+		 +

2.1875" x 0.5"

+		 +

Intuit Jewelry Tags without flaps*

+
+

Small Label, adhesive:

+		 +

1.19" x 0.84"

+		 +

Intuit Small Label*

+
+

Label, adhesive:

+		 +

2.25" x 1.25"

+		 +

Intuit (Mailing) Label*

+
+

Label, adhesive:

+		 +

4" x 3"

+		 +

Label (4x3)

+
+

Label, adhesive:

+		 +

4" x 6"

+		 +

Label (4x6)

+
+

*multiple tag templates within category

+

 

+

For information about ordering tags and labels directly from QuickBooks Desktop, refer to the ordering supplies topic.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List of compatible tag and label printers

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_taginstructions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_taginstructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..de538dc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_taginstructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing Tags: Basic Instructions + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Tags: Instructions

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Supported Tags | FAQs

+ +

 

+

Item price tags can be printed from inventory, purchase and receiving documents, transfer slips, the Price Change reminders window, and from the Price Manager and Physical Inventory windows.

+

To print tags:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the item(s) for which you want to print tags. How do I select multiple items?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    From the Print or I Want To menu, select Print Tags.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Depending on your program location, printer, and print option preferences, you may have the following choices in the Print dialog displayed:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Preview or Print.

    +
    2. +
+

If you are using a dedicated tag printer, your tags will immediately be previewed or printed. If you are using a laser or inkjet printer and sheet labels, the Print Tags/Labels window is displayed and the following additional steps apply.

+

 

+

If Printing Tags on Sheet Labels

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify where you want to begin printing on the first page:

    +
    2. +
+

        image\print_tagstartposition.gif

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Continue to print or preview your tags.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Tip: Zoom preview to see small tag printClick to display a popup topic

+

Pro Tip: Print tags for alternate vendors Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Common Issues with Zebra Tag Printers

+

List of compatible tag printers

+

Order tag supplies from Intuit

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_tagmrsp.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_tagmrsp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7982def --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/printing/basic_tagmrsp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing the MSRP on Tags + + + + + + + + + +

Printing the MSRP on Tags

+

Tag Printing: Basic Instructions | Supported Tags | FAQs

+

 

+

You can print the manufacturers suggested retail price (MSRP) on your price tags to demonstrate savings to your customers. If you have entered the MSRP on the item record, this value is included when you print tags for the item.

+

 

+

image\tag_msrp.gif

+

 

+

Some jewelry tags are too small to print both the MRSP and a bar code. If you want to print the MSRP and not the bar code on jewelry tags, you must specify a tag template with "MSRP" in its name in workstation preferences.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customizing your printed tags

+

Ordering tag supplies from Intuit

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/reports_export_large.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/reports_export_large.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9fc4380 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/reports_export_large.htm @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + +reports_export_large + + + + + + + + +

Note: Exporting Very Large Reports

+ +

This is a  popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Excel has a display limit of approximately 65,000 rows. If a report exceeds this limit, it is truncated to fit the display capacity. You can rerun the report, filtering to reduce the size. This ensures the entire report is displayed.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic222.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic222.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b12c684 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic222.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Tax FAQs

+ +

 

+

If you charge sales tax, you can setup a sales tax structure in Point of Sale so that sales taxes are automatically collected on sales of taxable merchandise or services.

+

How taxes are applied to sales depend on the tax codes and tax locations you have set up.

+ +

A simple tax structure might have just two tax codes, one for taxable merchandise and one for non-taxable merchandise, in a single tax location with a single tax rate. If you entered a tax rate during the Setup Interview, such a structure was set up for you, using two default tax codes and one default tax location.

+

If your tax requirements aren't that simple, you can set up additional tax codes, tax locations, and other options in company preferences. Point of Sale provides support for the collection of different tax rates based on merchandise categories, item price thresholds, where an item is sold, to whom it is sold, and collection and reporting for multiple taxing agencies.

+

When you make a sale, sales tax is automatically calculated and added to all taxable items according to your tax setup. Customers can be flagged as tax exempt or assigned to a specific tax location, so that the correct sales tax is automatically calculated on sales to that customer. You can also change tax codes or locations on individual sales if needed for special circumstances.

+

Point of Sale provides sales tax reports to help you make your tax payments to the taxing agency or agencies. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, Point of Sale sends sales tax information to QuickBooks Desktop along with other sales information each day. Sales tax reports can be ran in Point of Sale or in your financial software, broken out by tax codes, tax agency, store, or tax location for any time period.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic284.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic284.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6311a22 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic284.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Integration with QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Integration with QuickBooks Desktop

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

Sales tax amounts collected in Point of Sale are sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software according to the sale tax mappings specified for each Point of Sale tax code used. Tax codes and the QuickBooks Desktop tax mappings used by Point of Sale are defined on the sales tax page of company preferences.

+

When configuring your Point of Sale sales taxes, you can leave the QuickBooks Desktop tax mappings blank and Point of Sale will automatically create matching tax items and codes in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

 

+

View exampleClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

If you set up a Point of Sale multi-rate tax code, one tax item is created in QuickBooks Desktop for each component rate included in the code.

+

 

+

Custom Mapping of Sales Tax to QuickBooks Desktop

+

If you prefer, and you have already set up sales tax items/codes in QuickBooks Desktop, you can manually map your Point of Sale tax codes to those when setting up your tax codes in Point of Sale.

+

If you are required to collect and pay sales taxes to multiple agencies (city, county, and state, for example) you should set up a sales tax group in QuickBooks Desktop and then map your Point of Sale tax code(s) to the group. Learn more.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Setting up sales tax in QuickBooks Desktop

+

Setting up sales tax codes in Point of Sale

+

Using sales tax codes

+

Using sales tax locations

+

Assigning tax codes to items

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_multi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_multi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..13b0e24 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_multi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Edit Multi-Rate Calculation + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Tax Code Calculation: Multi-Rate Tax

+

Tax Codes | Tax FAQs | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences when setting up a multi-rate tax code.

+

 

+

Use the third page of the wizard to specify information for up to three components of the multi-rate tax code.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a name for the first rate component of the tax code. Use a name indicative of the tax or provided by the taxing agency.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the tax rate that applies to this component.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter the agency to which the taxes are paid. This name is displayed on sales tax reports and used when sending sales tax information to your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If this rate applies only when the unit price meets certain threshold amounts, select the check box and enter the applicable price range. You can enter lower, upper, or both price thresholds. Leave one end of the range open (blank) if it doesn't apply or is unlimited.

    +
    3. +
+

+

Examples:

+ +
    +
  1. +

    If the rate applies only to that portion of the item price that falls within the specified range (as opposed to the entire item price), check the second check box as well.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Add Another Tax Rate and repeat for each rate component of the tax code.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    When all components have been defined, select Test at the bottom of the window  to enter sample prices and verify the tax rates are applied correctly.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Finish when done, or Back to return to the previous page.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

QuickBooks Tax Information Use the QuickBooks Tax Info fields to map (link) this Point of Sale tax code to tax items/groups and a tax code previously set up in your QuickBooks financial software. This allows you to have your Point of Sales taxes reported in QuickBooks in the manner you choose.

+ +

If you do not make selections here, Point of Sale will automatically map each component to a QuickBooks tax item and the tax code to a QuickBooks tax code of the same name, creating them if they dont exist. Learn more.

+

 

+

When done configuring your taxes, be sure to assign tax codes to applicable items in inventory.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_pricedep.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_pricedep.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9f8ed4f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_pricedep.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Edit Price-Dependent Calculation + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Tax Code Calculation: Price-Dependent Tax

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences to set up a price-dependent tax code.

+

 

+

Use the third page of the wizard to specify:

+

Tax Rate Enter the tax rate that applies to sales of items assigned this tax code. Enter a value between 0.01 and 99.99. You do not need to enter a percentage sign.

+ +

Tax Agency Enter the name of the taxing agency to which you pay sales taxes. This name is displayed on sales tax reports and used when sending sales tax information to your QuickBooks financial software. What if I am required to collect and pay taxes to multiple agencies?

+

 

+

Price Threshold Enter the unit price threshold that triggers collection of sales tax. If tax is collected only on that portion of the unit price in excess of the threshold, also select the Apply Sales Tax Only ... check box.

+

+ +

QuickBooks Tax Information Use these fields to map (link) this Point of Sale tax code to a tax item/group and tax code previously set up in your QuickBooks financial software. This allows you to have your Point of Sales taxes be reported in QuickBooks in the manner you choose. If you do not make selections here, Point of Sale will automatically map this code to a tax item/group/code of the same name in QuickBooks, creating them if they dont exist. Learn more.

+

 

+

image\taxsetup_quickbooksinfo.gif

+

 

+

Select Finish when done, or Back to return to the previous page.

+

 

+

When done configuring your taxes, be sure to assign tax codes to applicable items in inventory.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_snglrate.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_snglrate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e67003 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codecalc_snglrate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Edit Single Rate Calculation + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Tax Calculation: Single Tax Rate

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences, when setting up a single-rate tax code.

+

 

+

Use the third page of the wizard to:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the tax rate that applies to sales of items assigned this tax code. Enter a value between 0.01 and 99.99. You do not need to enter a percentage sign.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter the name of the taxing agency to which you pay sales taxes. This name is displayed on sales tax reports and used when sending sales tax information to your QuickBooks financial software. What if I am required to collect and pay taxes to multiple agencies?

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use the QuickBooks Tax Information fields to map (link) this Point of Sale tax code to a tax item/group and tax code previously set up in your QuickBooks financial software. This allows you to have your Point of Sales taxes be reported in QuickBooks in the manner you choose. If you do not make selections here, Point of Sale will automatically map this code to a tax item/group/code of the same name in QuickBooks, creating them if they dont exist. Learn more.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

image\taxsetup_quickbooksinfo.gif

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish when done, or Back to return to the previous page.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

When done configuring your taxes, be sure to assign tax codes to applicable items in inventory.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..963e4fd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Codes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Codes

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Tax FAQs | Tax Overview

+ +

 

+

Pro: If you have multiple stores, sales tax codes must be set up at Headquarters.

+

Sales tax codes identify the specific taxing instructions for sales of the inventory items to which they are assigned. Once you have defined your tax codes, you assign them to your inventory items so the correct tax is collected. If all the items in a department are taxed the same, associate a tax code with the department record and all new items added to the department will automatically be assigned this tax code.

+

The simplest of tax structures might just include two sales tax codes: taxable and non-taxable. However, you may need to collect different tax rates for certain items, to tax items differently depending on their price, or collect and pay taxes to multiple agencies. In these cases, a separate tax code can be defined and then assigned to applicable items in inventory.

+ +

 

+

Sales tax codes are defined on the Sales Tax page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Using Tax Codes in Conjunction with Tax Locations

+

Tax locations can be used to have different taxing instructions for sales of the same items depending on the geographic location (e.g. out of state sales) or to meet special customer tax needs. Learn more.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_editcodeoptions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_editcodeoptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac7512b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_editcodeoptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Edit Tax Options + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Codes: Edit Tax Options

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Use the second page of the Wizard to specify one of the three tax code options:

+

Single-rate tax Choose this option if all taxable items to which this code will be assigned are taxed at the same rate and you do not need to track and pay taxes to multiple agencies separately (or you choose to do so in your QuickBooks financial software instead of Point of Sale).

+

Price-dependent single-rate tax Choose this option if all taxable items to which this code will be assigned are taxed at the same rate but only when the unit price exceeds a certain threshold.

+

Multi-rate tax Choose this option for the most flexibility in collecting different tax rates based on item unit price ranges and/or to collect varying rates for multiple taxing agencies.

+

 

+

When finished, select Next to go to the next page.

+

 

+

Learn more about using tax codes

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_editcodewizard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_editcodewizard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..886b889 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_editcodewizard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Add or Edit Code + + + + + + + + + + +

Add or Edit Tax Code

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Use the first page of the Wizard to specify:

+

Tax Code Enter one to three characters to represent this tax code. Choose a code that is recognizable to you and your employees. The tax code is used on program screens or reports where space prevents displaying the longer tax code name.

+

Tax Code Name Enter a descriptive name for this tax code. If this code is for a specific merchandise type, such as jewelry or clothing, we suggest you use the merchandise type as the tax code name. If all of your merchandise is taxed the same, you may just have one code named Taxable and a second named Exempt.

+

Tax Code Mark (optional) Enter a one-character mark that identifies items sold with this tax code on printed sales receipts.

+

When finished, select next.

+

 

+

Learn more about using tax codes

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_locations.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_locations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e21a67 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_locations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Locations + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Locations

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Tax FAQs | Tax Overview

+ +

 

+

Pro: If you have multiple stores, sales tax locations must be set up at Headquarters. Remote stores can select the default tax location applicable to sales at their store in company preferences.

+

 

+

Sales tax locations can be used to define different taxing instructions for each of your tax codes to handle sales in different tax jurisdictions or for customers that qualify for special tax rates.

+

One default tax location named Local Sales Tax is defined for you; you can rename this location if you want. The use of additional tax locations is optional.

+

 

+

Sales tax locations are configured on the Sales Tax page of company preferences.

+ +

 

+

Notes

+ +

Related Topics

+

Associating a tax location with a customer

+

Changing tax locations at time of sale

+ + + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_multipleagencies.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_multipleagencies.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..42acaef --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_multipleagencies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax: Using Multi-Rate Tax Codes + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Using Multi-Rate Tax Codes

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

A Point of Sale tax code can include up to three separate tax rate components, each collecting a portion of the total tax rate.

+

This allows you to track taxes payable to different agencies (city, county, and state, for example) and/or to collect tax for each component based on item unit price thresholds or price ranges.

+

Your sales tax reports can be set up to sort and subtotal taxes by tax agency or tax components, depending on how you have to report and pay them.

+ +

To set up a multi-rate tax code in Point of Sale, follow the instructions provided here.

+

 

+

Alternative Method of Collecting Taxes for Multiple Agencies

+

This method requires that you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. You collect a single combined tax rate in Point of Sale and use a tax group in your financial software to break out the taxes payable to each agency on tax reports.

+

Example: You are required to collect and pay 0.5% sales tax to your city, 1.5% to the county, and 5.25% to the state.

+
    +
  1. +

    In QuickBooks Desktop, set up a sales tax group, comprised of the three agencies and individual rates. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop documentation or in-program help for instructions.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In Point of Sale, set up a sales tax code, selecting Single-Rate Tax and entering just the total combined tax rate (i.e. 7.25%). The agency name you enter for the Point of Sale tax code wont effect how the information is transferred to QuickBooks Desktop but will show up on sales tax reports ran in Point of Sale. You may want to enter Combined Sales Tax or similar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the QuickBooks Information area of the Edit Tax Calculation page in Point of Sale, select the QuickBooks tax group from the drop-down list labeled Assigned to QuickBooks Tax Item/Group, and then select the corresponding QuickBooks tax code in the second drop-down list.

    +
    4. +
+

Sales taxes collected in Point of Sale are sent to QuickBooks Desktop and your sales tax reports in QuickBooks Desktop will separate the taxes due to each agency.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Use sales tax codes

+

Sales tax integration with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_pricethresholds.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_pricethresholds.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b63948c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_pricethresholds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax: Price-Dependent Taxes + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Price-Dependent Taxes

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sale supports the collection of sales tax based on the item unit price. The price threshold can be set up as a minimum price, maximum price, or price range that triggers the collection of tax. You can collect tax on the entire price of the item or just that portion of the price that falls blow, exceeds, or is within the specified price range.

+

Combined with Point of Sale's multi-rate tax option, you can define a tax code with almost any combination of price thresholds and tax rates to meet the tax requirements of one or multiple taxing agencies.

+ +

 

+

To set up price-dependent taxes:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the general instructions for add/edit a tax code in company preferences.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Tax Options page of the Tax Code wizard, select either Price-dependent single-rate tax or Multi-tax rate, depending on your needs.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions (select Help if necessary) in the wizard for assistance in setting up your price thresholds and options.

    +
    4. +
+

If tax is collected only on the amount exceeding the price threshold, or within the specified price range, be sure to select the check box indicating such.

+

 

+

image\salestax_calculation.gif

+

Example price-dependent, single-rate tax setup

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

When done configuring your taxes, be sure to assign tax codes to applicable items in inventory.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Use sales tax codes

+

Use sales tax locations

+  + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_qbfsexample.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_qbfsexample.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ecbfdd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_qbfsexample.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax: QuickBooks Mapping Example + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: QuickBooks Mapping Example

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

You add a Point of Sale tax code named "State" (code: STA) with a tax rate of 7.50% and paid to the "State Tax Agency".

+

On the next Financial Exchange with QuickBooks, Point of Sale will look to see if a QuickBooks tax item already exists with a 7.5% rate paid to this agency and if a tax code by the name of "State" already exists for this item. If found, the Point of Sale tax code is automatically mapped to the QuickBooks tax item. If not found, Point of Sale creates a new QuickBooks tax item and/or code with the following information:

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Tax Item

+
+

Name:

+		 +

<Point of sale tax rate> + <Point of Sale tax code name >
+Example: 7.50% State

+
+

Description:

+		 +

<Point of sale tax rate> + <Point of Sale tax code > for <Point of Sale agency>
+Example: 7.50% State for State Tax Agency

+
+

Rate:

+		 +

<Point of sale tax rate>
+Example: 7.5%

+
+

Agency:

+		 +

<Point of Sale agency>
+Example: State Tax Agency

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Tax Code

+
+

Code:

+		 +

<Point of Sale tax code >
+Example: Sta

+
+

Description:

+		 +

<Point of Sale tax code name > Example: State

+
+

Tax Status:

+		 +

Taxable

+
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_reports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..72a44f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Reports

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sale offers two reports for viewing the sales tax amounts you have collected:

+ +

Either report can be modified to filter, sort, and display your tax information in the manner you prefer, and memorized if you wish to use the same settings for the future.

+

To view sales tax reports:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale Reports menu or Report Center, choose Sales.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Sales sub-menu, select either Taxes Sales Tax Summary or Taxes Tax Activity Detail.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale displays the report.

+
    +
  1. +

    Modify the report date range, included tax locations an codes, or other options as necessary.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale displays the report with your changes.

+

 

+

If you also use QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can view sales tax reports in that program as well. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop documentation for instructions.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_shipping.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_shipping.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5737a07 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/sales_tax/basic_tax_shipping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax: Collecting on Shipping Amounts + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Collecting on Shipping Amounts

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

(Free, Basic) To collect sales tax on shipping amounts, set up a service item called "Shipping Charges" or similar and assign the appropriate tax code to it. List this item on sales receipts and edit the amount for the specific sale.

+

(Pro) To collect sales tax on shipping amounts, edit your tax location(s) and select the check box labeled Shipping to this location is taxable and specify the tax code that should be used for the shipping amount.

+

Sales tax will be calculated on the shipping amount and added to the sale according to the instructions specified for the tax code assigned.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Set up sales tax

+

Use sales tax codes

+

Use sales tax locations

+

Assign tax codes to items

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_avspopup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_avspopup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03560ee --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_avspopup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +companyprefs_avspopup + + + + + + + + + +

How is the cardholder's address verified?

+ +

popup topic hidden

+ +

When you manually enter credit card information, you are asked to provide the cardholder's ZIP code and, optionally, the street address. When Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service, the address information entered is checked against that on file at the cardholder's bank.

+

If you have this option enabled (selected):

+ +

If you do not have this option enabled:

+ + +

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_cvc_popup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_cvc_popup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f322031 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_cvc_popup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +companyprefs_cvc_popup + + + + + + + + + +

How is a credit card verified?

+ +

popup topic hidden

+ +

A credit card verification is an important security feature for manually entered (non-swiped) credit card transactions. The code helps verify that the customer, presumably the legitimate cardholder, has the actual card in their possession. The use of this feature is optional, but highly recommended.

+

The verification process compares the card verification code entered against the card issuer's records.

+

This preference controls how you handle transactions that fail the card verification.

+

If you have this option enabled (selected):

+ +

If you do not have this option enabled:

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ + +

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_discounts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_discounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7dd3fb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_discounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Discounts + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Discounts

+

Preference Instructions | Giving Discounts

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Manual Item Discount Reason

+		 +

R = Require a discount reason for manual discounts. Select to require the cashier to specify the reason when giving a manual item discount.

+

This allows you to track discounts given on discount reports.

+

You define manual discount reasons in Price Manager. The names will then be available for the cashier to select from on the sales receipt.

+
+

Print Coupons on Receipts (Pro)

+		 +

R = Print coupons on receipts.  Select and then specify options to print your store coupons with qualifying sales receipts.

+

To avoid giving coupons to customers who also qualify for your rewards program, select the check box titled Exclude receipts with rewards customer assigned.

+
+

 

+

Other Sales Preferences

+

Sales general sales preferences

+

Printed receipt message

+

Shipping list of shipping providers

+

Receipt tendering payment options

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Company preferences overview

+

Customizing printed receipts and other documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_emaildocs.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_emaildocs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c156a0a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_emaildocs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: E-mail Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: E-mail Documents

+

Preference Instructions | E-mailing Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

Specify default settings for e-mailing documents from within Point of Sale.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Default Message Text

+		 +

Select a document type from the drop-down list at the top of the window and then complete the following settings to apply to that document type. Repeat for each document type you wish to e-mail.

+

Enter salutation, subject line, and body text. Point of Sale writes this information to each e-mail it creates, but you can edit individual e-mails before sending.

+

You can add information fields (shown in <brackets> at bottom of window) to your subject line or message, in which case the information from the matching fields on the document being sent is auto-filled to the message when it is created. Enter the field name and bracket just as shown.

+
+

Create attachment as

+		 +

Select one of the e-mail attachment formats:

+

PDF recipient must have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed to view.

+

Excel recipient must have Microsoft Excel 2000 - 2007 installed to view.

+

HTML can be viewed in web browsers.

+

Text plain text format that can be viewed in most text editors or Word processing software.

+
+

 

+

See also the workstation preference for being prompted to e-mail each sales receipts.

+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_instructions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_instructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5164e5c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_instructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +General Instructions for Editing Company Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

General Instructions for Editing Company Preferences

+

Overview | Workstation Preferences

+

 

+

 Warning: Undo and Reset Options Affect All Preferences
+Two powerful options are available from the Preferences I Want To menu:  Undo Changes to discard all changes since your last save, but remain in preferences, and Reset to Default Setting to revert all workstation preferences to their default values. Be aware that these choices affect all workstation preferences, not just the page you are currently viewing.

+

To edit company preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the left pane, choose the page containing the preference you want to change.

    +
    3. +
+

Click the icons (or keys) to expand or collapse the preference menu structure, as necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the preference settings as needed. Help for each page is displayed in the yellow sidebar to the right.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_integratedapps.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_integratedapps.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a5c3f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_integratedapps.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Integrated Applications + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Integrated Applications

+

Preference Instructions

+

 

+

This page lists third-party applications that have previously been granted access to your Point of Sale company data.

+

To remove an application (which blocks further access to your data):

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the application in the list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Remove.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Yes in the confirmation dialog.

    +
    4. +
+

Learn more about integrated applications

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_inventory.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_inventory.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..18f3d60 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_inventory.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Inventory

+

Preference Instructions | Inventory Overview

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

I want to associate pictures with my inventory items (Pro)
+ 

+

 

+

Reset automatic item number sequencing when an item number is edited

+

 

+

 

+

Create reorder reminders based on (Pro)

+		 +

Select to make the item picture fields available on the item form and a thumbnail available in other program areas.

+

 

+

If selected, editing an item number in inventory resets the auto-numbering sequence to begin with the next available number after the edited number.

+

 

+

Select an available option:

+

Available quantity (default): Takes into consideration quantities committed to open customer orders.

+

On-Hand Quantity: Does not take customer order quantities into consideration.

+

With either selection, Point of Sale looks at your reorder points and considers quantities already on open purchase orders before adding items to the reorder reminders. Learn more.

+
+

Inventory Quick Pick Groups

+		 +

Click Add to create a new inventory tag for use with the Quick Pick Item feature. Once defined, you assign the tags to items in inventory and can then use Quick Pick to add them to  sales receipts and receiving vouchers.

+

You can use other action buttons to arrange the order or remove item tags.

+
+

Units of Measure

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Multiple Units of Measure (Pro)

+		 +

Select Add to define a new unit of measure or Remove to delete an existing one.

+

The Move Up and Move Down buttons allow you to arrange the entries into the order they will appear on the drop-down list on item records.

+

Unit of measures defined here are available for use with the multiple unit of measure feature described below.

+

 

+

I want to set up multiple units of measure.. Select to use the multiple unit of measure feature to purchase, receive and sell items by different units, such as by cases and individual units. Learn more.

+

 

+

Unit of measure options:

+

Print unit of measure information in the quantity field on all documents.

+

Select to insert the unit in the quantity field on printed documents. Learn more.

+

 

+

Displaying Units of Measure: Choose whether Point of Sale should add the UOM fields to all documents and lists, or if you want to add them manually as needed.

+
+

Company preferences overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_ratings.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_ratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..efcf325 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_ratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Ratings & Trends + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Ratings & Trends

+

Preference Instructions | Item Ratings | Customer Ratings

+

 

+

Ratings and trends allow you to view graphical indicators of sales performance in your item and customer lists. Returns are subtracted from sales to calculate net sales for this feature. Select a link above to learn more about this feature in each area.

+

Use this page of company preferences to turn on/off the rating and trend feature for each area and specify the value and time periods on which rankings are based.

+

Note: In a networked, multi-workstation configuration, this preference can be set by the Server Workstation only.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Show ratings and trends for items

+		 +

R Select if you want rating and trend information calculated for inventory items.

+

Based on: Choose a value on which rankings are based. Choices are Profit, Quantity (net sales), or Total Sales (net dollars).

+

Time: Choose the number of days in sales history that should be used for calculations. Maximum is 999.

+
+

Show ratings for customers (Basic)

+		 +

R Select if you want sales rating information calculated for customers.

+

Based on: Choose a value on which rankings are based. Choices are Profit or Total Sales (net dollars).

+

Time: Choose the number of days in sales history that should be used for calculations. Maximum is 999.

+
+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_receiptmessage.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_receiptmessage.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b033c7c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_receiptmessage.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Printed Receipt Message + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Printed Receipt Message

+

Preference Instructions | Sales Overview

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Printed Receipt Message

+		 +

Enter text to be printed on all receipts. For example, you might want to use this preference to print your return/exchange policy,  or a thank you message.

+

Pro users might include information about your rewards program.

+
+

 

+

Other Sales Preferences

+

Sales general sales preferences

+

Discounts define and optionally require manual item discount reasons

+

Shipping list of shipping providers

+

Receipt tendering payment options

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Company preferences overview

+

Customizing printed receipts and other documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_receiving.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_receiving.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6eae726 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_receiving.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Receiving + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Receiving

+

Preference Instructions | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Use the Receiving preferences to set various options related to receiving of merchandise from your vendors.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Warn when receiving against PO past its Cancel Date

+		 +

Alert employee when receiving against a PO that has passed the cancel date. If this preference is not selected, the cancel date is ignored.

+
+

Enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale

+		 +

Select to enter vendor billing information on receiving vouchers in Point of Sale.

+

By default, the vendor billing information fields are not available on Point of Sale receiving vouchers, as it is assumed you will track vendor billings in QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Learn more.

+
+

Printed Voucher Message

+		 +

Enter optional default message to print on all vouchers. This message is not displayed on screen.

+
+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_shipping.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_shipping.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b7056b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_shipping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Shipping + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Shipping

+

Preference Instructions | Sales Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

Note: You must have shipping enabled in your Select Features to Use preferences for the following preferences to be applicable.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Shipping Manager

+

 

+

 

+

 

+		 +

Use QuickBooks Desktop Shipping Manager. Select the check box to use Shipping Manager.

+

With the Shipping Manager you can connect to UPS shipping services online to arrange shipments, print shipping labels, and track the shipments from within Point of Sale.

+

Shipping Manager Requirements Click to expand topic

+ +

 

+

I do not charge my customer for shipping. With this option, you can use Shipping Manager to arrange shipments, but the shipping charges will not be added to sales receipts.

+

Learn more about Shipping Manager

+
+

 

+ + + + + +
+

Shipping Providers

+		 +

Select Add or Remove to add or delete shipping providers from the list.

+

The providers on this list are available in the order listed for selection on sales receipts and customer orders. Use the Move Up/Down buttons to arrange the order of providers and the Make Default button to designate the provider that is suggested when entering shipping information on a document.

+

 

+

Important: If using Shipping Manager, ensure you do not include "UPS" in the name of a provider you are adding manually. This string of characters will result in errors when shipping. If adding a legitimate UPS service, select it from the predefined drop-down list in the Add a New Shipping Provider dialog.

+

The shipping providers and service levels on this list are available (in the order listed) for selection on sales receipts and customer orders when you are adding shipping information or charges.

+

Use the Add, Remove, and Move Up/Down buttons to add, delete, or rearrange the providers to meet your needs.

+

Important: Do not include "UPS" in the name of a provider you are adding manually. This string of characters will result in errors when shipping via Shipping Manager. If you need to add a legitimate UPS service, select it from the predefined drop-down list in the Add a New Shipping Provider dialog.

+
+

 

+

Other Sales Preferences

+

Sales general sales preferences

+

Discounts define and optionally require manual item discount reasons

+

Receipt message printed on every sales receipt

+

Receipt tendering payment options

+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_tendering.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_tendering.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..079f36a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_tendering.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Receipt Tendering + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Receipt Tendering

+

Preference Instructions | Taking Payments | Sales Overview

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Payment Methods

+		 +

Select the payment methods you accept on sales. Only the payment methods selected will be available on the receipt payment window. Cash cannot be removed.

+

Default payment method: From the drop-down list, select the payment method most frequently used on sales. This default method will be suggested on all new sales.

+
+

Card Types

+		 +

Specify the credit card types allowed when taking a payment by credit card.

+

Only the selected types will be accepted.

+
+

Tips

+		 +

Select to be prompted to collect and record a tip (gratuity) on credit card, gift card, and account charge sales. Learn more.

+
+

Past Due Payments

+		 +

Select and enter 30, 60, or 90 days to display past due amounts and block additional charges to a customer's account at that age. Past due amounts come from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Learn more.

+
+

 

+

Other Sales Preferences

+

Sales general sales preferences

+

Discounts define and optionally require manual item discount reasons

+

Receipt message printed on every sales receipt

+

Shipping list of shipping providers

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_uom_printing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_uom_printing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a4941e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/companyprefs_uom_printing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +companyprefs_uom_printing + + + + + + + + + + +

How are units of measure printed?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

 

+ + +

<insert image example>

+ +

You can use Print Designer, if necessary, to resize the quantity field on documents to accommodate your unit of measure. With this preference turned off, the unit of measure is not printed on documents unless you use Print Designer to add the Unit of Measure field to the document(s).

+ +

Example: You buy a canned item by the case, but your default sell-by unit is the individual can. There are 24 cans in a case. When printing tags from a purchase order or receiving voucher, the item is listed as one case but tags will print for 24 individual cans.

+

If you do not have a default sell-by unit specified, tags will print based on the base unit specified for the item.

+

 

+ +

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs01.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b1ad5c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Financial + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Financial

+

Preference Instructions | Financial Exchange Overview

+

 

+

Set financial preferences in order to exchange data with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Note that there may be a short delay accessing these preferences as Point of Sale connects with your QuickBooks Desktop software and reads existing account lists and other preferences to make them available for selection here.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Financial

+		 +

 

+
+

Use with QuickBooks financial software

+		 +

R = Select to allow the exchange of data between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

QuickBooks must be running and the financial company file you intend to share data with open to establish the initial connection. Learn more

+

Note: This option must be selected in order for all other financial preferences to be available.

+
+

QuickBooks Company file

+

Where is my QuickBooks financial company file?

+		 +

Once connected, your company name and file location are displayed.

+

To connect to your QuickBooks Desktop company file, launch QuickBooks and open your company file, then select Set Up QuickBooks Connection Now and follow the on-screen prompts.

+
+

Send receipts and vouchers with..

+

Learn more

+		 +

Select an option:

+
    +
  • +

    Detailed item descriptions

    +
    • +
  • +

    Detailed item descriptions for customer charge account transactions only

    +
    • +
  • +

    Summarized item totals (no item detail: default)

    +
    • +
+
+

Order to send customer name to QuickBooks (Basic)

+

Learn more

+		 +

Select the order in which you want customer names sent to QuickBooks Desktop: <Last>, <First> default

+

<First Last>

+

<Title First Last>

+
+

Send discounted items with

+

Learn more

+		 +

Select an option:

+
    +
  • +

    Net value (discounts not reported separately)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Separate original and discounted values

    +
    • +
+
+

Employee Hours (Pro)

+

 

+

Learn More

+

 

+

Return to top

+		 +

R = Send employee time records from Time Clock to QuickBooks Desktop. Select the hourly payroll item to be used for the time entries created in QuickBooks Desktop. Requires integration with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software 2009.

+
+

Financial Accounts: Basic

+
+

Default item accounts

+

 

+

View default accounts

+		 +

Specify a default Income, Cost of Goods Sold , and Asset account for each item type (not all item types use all three accounts).

+

With a few exceptionsClick to display a popup topic related to item Income accounts, all of your QuickBooks Desktop accounts are available for selection from the drop-down list in each field. The default accounts specified are assigned to all items in inventory, but you can change the accounts item-by-item in inventory as needed.

+
+

Automatically create sub-accounts based on:

+		 +

R = Select and then specify how sub-accounts should be created and for which item accounts. Learn more.

+
+

Apply accounts to existing items

+		 +

Select to apply the accounts specified above to all existing items in your Point of Sale inventory. The reassigned accounts will take effect with the next Financial Exchange.

+

Important: This overwrites any previous item accounts you have specified.

+
+

Financial Accounts: Advanced

+		 +

Map custom accounts (except item, see above) for Financial Exchange. Choose Reset to defaults at the bottom of this page to return to the default set of account mappings.

+
+

Account mapping

+

 

+

View default accounts

+		 +

Each account/field in Point of Sale must be "linked" (mapped) to a QuickBooks Desktop financial software account to which data will be transferred. You can accept the default account mappings or define your own mapping structure by choosing from the drop-down list in the QB Account column.

+

Only accounts previously defined in QuickBooks Desktop are available for selection. Learn more.

+
+

 

+

For frequently asked questions about Financial Exchanges, see Troubleshooting Financial Exchange.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

Company preferences overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3b303b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,188 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Merchant & Gift Services + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Merchant & Gift Services

+

Preference Instructions | Merchant Overview | Gift Card Overview

+

 

+

This topic summarizes the company preferences that apply to credit and gift card transactions processed through the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and Gift Card Services.

+

 What if I have multiple store locations?

+

Using another service? If you use another merchant or gift card service, only those preferences marked with an * apply to you.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Merchant Service

+		 +

 

+
+

Merchant Number

+		 +

Enter the number provided via e-mail from the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service.

+

After entry, select Verify to test your account setup.

+

Note: Select the Communication Setup preference page (see below) and confirm your connection setup before verifying your account.

+
+

Credit card address verification

+

 

+

What is address verification?Click to display a popup topic

+		 +

R Do not allow manual transactions that fail address verification Selecting this option provides a degree of protection against fraud and chargebacks but may also block some legitimate transactions. You will not be able to complete a credit card transaction if an address verification mismatch occurs. If you clear this check box, you are alerted when a mismatch occurs but can continue with the transaction at your discretion.

+
+

Credit card verification

+

 

+

What is card verification?Click to display a popup topic

+		 +

R Do not allow manual transactions that fail card verification Selecting this option provides a degree of protection against credit card fraud and chargebacks, by blocking transactions where the card verification code does not match card issuer records. If you clear this check box, you are alerted when a mismatch occurs but can continue at your discretion (subject to card issuer regulations).

+
+

*Debit/ATM setup

+		 +

R = *Accept debit/ATM card payments. Select to allow customer payment by debit/ATM card.

+

R = *Allow cash back up to: Select if you wish to allow cash back to the customer on PIN debit transactions, and specify the maximum cash back allowed (up to $200).

+

A PIN pad device is required for PIN debit/ATM transactions through the QBPOS Merchant Service. Configure your PIN pad in the Hardware Setup Wizard or  workstation preferences.

+
+

*Automatically print and save receipt upon credit, debit, or gift card approval

+		 +

R = If selected, the receipt will be saved/printed automatically after approval for the transaction is received.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Gift Card Service

+		 +

 

+
+

Gift Card Account Number

+		 +

Enter the number provided via e-mail from the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service.

+

After entry, select Verify to test your account setup.

+

Note: If using a dial-up connection (modem) to communicate with the Merchant Service, select the Communication Setup preference page (see below) and change the setting to Direct-dial before verifying your account.

+
+

Communication Setup

+		 +

Applies to Merchant and Gift Card Services

+
+

Use this computer for all credit, debit, and gift card transactions

+		 +

R = All credit, debit, and gift card transactions are authorized and settled through this workstation (workstation must have a modem or Internet connection).

+

If the check box is checked and grayed out, this option has already been selected for this workstation. To transfer this function to another Point of Sale workstation, access this preference from that computer and select the check box. The specified workstation must be running and the connection active for other workstations on a network to authorize transactions. Learn more.

+
+

Communication Options

+		 +

Select an option for communicating with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service:

+

R = Secure Internet Connection provides an IP-based connection through your Internet Service Provider (ISP). This option requires a persistent Internet connection (DSL, Cable, T1, etc.). Click the internet connection setup button if you need help configuring your connection.

+

R = Direct-Dial supports high-speed and advanced modem technologies, typically using your modem's default settings.

+

Read modem setup instructions.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Specifying the credit cards accepted

+

Company preferences overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs04.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f062325 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,179 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: General + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: General

+

Preference Instructions | Employee & Security Overview

+

 

+

The General Page contains preference settings affecting general program usage, rather than a specific area, including the ability to remove features you do not wish to use.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

General Options

+		 +

 

+
+

Require users to sign in

+		 +

R = Require users to login to Point of Sale using the login names and passwords you have assigned.

+

Only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can change this setting after it has been turned on.

+

Changing this setting requires that a System Administrator password be entered and that all open windows be closed before saving.

+
+

Automatically log out users after each sale

+		 +

R = Automatically logs out the current user upon saving a receipt (if users are required to log in).

+
+

Warn when editing documents, items, or customers

+		 +

R = Confirm edits to documents, items, or customers before carrying out the action.

+
+

Warn when deleting documents, items, or customers

+		 +

R = Confirm deletions of documents, items, or customers before carrying out the action.

+
+

Bring back all one time messages

+		 +

Selecting DO NOT SHOW ME AGAIN from a Point of Sale message prevents that particular message from being displayed. Selecting this preference brings back all such messages. This option is then cleared. You may have to close and re-open currently open windows for the messages to show up.

+
+

Select features to use

+		 +

R = Select the checkboxes for features you use in Point of Sale. Clear the checkboxes to remove a feature. Related icons, menu options, and information fields are removed from Point of Sale screens. Return here at anytime to change your choices.

+

Changing these settings may require you to close any open windows in related areas before saving.

+

(Pro) Some choices are interdependent, e.g., if you choose to use customer orders, then customer tracking is a required feature.

+
+

Data Safeguard

+		 +

R = By default, a backup is made of your company file once per day when you exit Point of Sale on the Server Workstation. Change this selection to create a backup at a scheduled time instead. Read the information in the help sidebar about requirements for scheduled backups. Learn more.

+

(Pro) Include item images... Select the check box to include item images in your backup file. This option may greatly increase the time to create and size of your backup file.

+
+

Store Info

+		 +

 

+
+

Headings

+		 +

Store headings are printed across the top of documents.

+

Enter information in the following fields: Store Name, Street, City, State, ZIP, and Miscellaneous 1-3.

+
+

Logo

+		 +

R = Select the check box and then click Specify to add one or more logos. Select one of the added logos to print on sales documents. Adding multiple logos lets you switch between them quickly.

+

(Pro) You can use Print Designer to print different logos on different documents.

+

Learn more about logos and file requirements.

+
+

My Field Labels

+		 +

 

+
+

Field Labels

+		 +

You can define the field labels for the four item description fields. The field labels you specify are displayed throughout the program, on printed documents, and on reports.

+

Choose Restore to Defaults at the bottom of the page to return all labels to the program default values.

+

(Pro) You can also define labels for the custom fields available on customer, vendor, item, and employee records. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the information in customer and vendor custom fields is shared, provided they are named exactly the same in both programs.

+

 

+
+

Return to top

+

Company preferences overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs05.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e35b15b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Pricing + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Pricing

+

Preference Instructions | Price Level Overview

+

 

+

Use this page to define a price tag code, price level names and markdowns, and the default price level to use on sales. Changing your price level information in preferences does not update item prices of existing items in inventory.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Default Price

+		 +

From the drop-down list, specify the default price to suggest for all sales in this store.

+

Default: Regular Price

+
+

Price Levels
+ 

+

 

+

 

+		 +

Define up to four optional markdown price levels.

+

Name: Assign a custom name to each price level you wish to use.

+

Markdown %: Assign a default markdown percent for each price level. The price at each price level is calculated from your regular price by applying the markdown.

+

These default markdowns are used to calculate the prices for new items added to inventory. Changes to the default markdowns do not update existing item prices. Individual prices at each level can be manually edited at any time item-by-item in inventory.

+

Tip: For no markdown, enter 0%. To do a markup, enter a negative markdown, e.g., -10%.

+

Learn more

+
+

Price Tag Code

+

 

+		 +

Enter a character to replace each number (0-9) when selecting to print cost and last received dates in code on price tags.

+

To use this feature, you must select a tag template that includes the cost fields in workstation preferences. Templates that include the cost fields have "+cost" included in the template name.

+
+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs06.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs06.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1189781 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs06.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Purchasing + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Purchasing

+

Preference Instructions | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Use the Purchasing preferences to set various options related to the purchasing of merchandise from your vendors.

+

 

+

Note: You must have purchase orders enabled in your Select Features to Use preferences for the following preferences to be applicable.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Purchase Order Numbering

+		 +

By default, purchase orders are sequentially numbered, starting with 1.

+

If preferred, you can precede the number with a text string, such as the vendor name, vendor code, or the name of the associate making the PO. You can also change the starting number.

+

Follow the instructions provided on the help sidebar on the preference page.

+
+

Purchase Order Status

+		 +

There are default statuses for use in the Status field on purchase orders:

+
    +
  • +

    Open is automatically assigned to every new order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Closed is automatically assigned to the order once all listed items have been received on a voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pending should be assigned to planning orders that haven't been given to your vendor.  (Pro) And so they are not included when Point of Sale calculates available quantities.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Suggested is assigned to purchase orders generated by the Suggest PO feature. (Pro)

    +
    • +
+

You can change the name of these statuses, add new ones, and arrange the order they appear in the Status field drop-down list on order forms. Learn more.

+
+

Purchase Order Instructions

+		 +

Enter up to two lines of optional instructions to print on POs. These instructions are not displayed on screen.

+
+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs07.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c2b6cc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Sales + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Sales

+

Preference Instructions | Sales Overview

+

 

+

Sales preferences allow you to define various options related to sales transactions.  

+

The Sales page covers the general sales preferences. Other sales preferences are discussed on sub-pages (select a link for instructions).

+

Discounts define and optionally require manual item discount reasons

+

Receipt message printed on every sales receipt

+

Shipping list of shipping providers

+

Receipt tendering payment options

+

 

+

Sales General

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Order to display full name field

+		 +

Choose the order in which to display/print customer names on receipts.

+

Example: A record has Sara in the First field, Edward in the Last field, and Ms. in the Title field. If you choose to display the name as last, title, first, Point of Sale will print the name as Edwards, Ms. Sara.

+
+

Require a promotional code entry

+		 +

R = Requires an entry in the Promo Code field on a receipt before payment can be accepted and the document saved. This field facilitates filtering for viewing or reporting purposes.

+

(Pro) This also applies to customer orders.

+
+

Require a manual media count for X/Z-Out

+		 +

R = If selected, associates are required to manually count each denomination of currency when running a Z-Out Drawer Count report.

+
+

When printing group item on receipt or customer order (Pro)

+		 +

Select to print the group item price only, the individual component item prices only, or both. Default is to print individual item prices only.

+
+

Open Cash Drawer

+		 +

R = Select the payment types that will open an attached, compatible cash drawer. Defaults: Cash, Check.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customizing receipt item list columns

+

Customizing printed receipts and other documents

+

Company preference: removing unused features

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs08.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b2aa20 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,150 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Sales Tax + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Sales Tax

+

Preference Instructions | Tax Overview | Tax FAQs

+

 

+

Pro Note: If you have multiple stores, sales tax must be set up at Headquarters. Remote stores can select the default tax location applicable to sales at their store on this page.

+

 

+

Use the procedures below to set up the collection of sales tax in Point of Sale. You can add or edit tax codes or locations, and set specific taxing instructions for each. We recommend you set up all of the tax codes you will use in the default tax location first, then add additional tax locations and edit the codes for each as necessary.

+

From the File menu, select Preferences > Company and then select Sales Tax from the list on the left.

+

To specify that you collect sales tax:

+ +

Adding or editing a tax code Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Adding or editing a tax location Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

How do I use tax codes?

+

How do I use tax locations?

+

Sales tax Integration with QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs10.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3e48954 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Customers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Customers

+

Preference Instructions | Customer Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Customer preferences allow you to specify if you want to share customer information with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and if you want to require that a customer be recorded on all sales. Recording customers on sales allows you to offer customer-specific discounts, use charge accounts, and to build customer sales history. It is not necessary to require that a customer be recorded to use these features.

+

 

+

Note: You must have customer tracking enabled in your general  preferences for the following customer-specific preferences to be applicable.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Use with QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +

Choose Yes if you want information for all new customers to be shared with QuickBooks Desktop by default. You can still change this setting for individual customers on their record.

+
+

Customer tracking options

+		 +

R Require a customer entry on receipts. If selected, a receipt cannot be saved until a customer is entered.

+

Note that this option is not required to list a customer on a sale.

+
+

E-mail Marketing

+		 +

If you have an account with the POS e-mail marketing partner, enter your login name and password here. Targeted customer lists you create in Point of Sale can then be sent automatically to the partner. Learn more.

+
+

Customer Type

+		 +

Create categories of customer types for your business. Customer types can then be assigned in the customer record and used for filtering the customer list and reports.

+
+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs11.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f1a8cbb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Customer Orders

+

Preference Instructions | Customer Order Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Layaway, sales order, and work order preferences allow you to define various options related to these customer order documents. There is a separate preference page for each customer order type, but all have the same options as described here.

+

Note: You must have customer orders enabled in your Select Features to Use preferences for the following preferences to be applicable.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Initial Deposit

+		 +

Select how you want to handle the initial order deposit. Subsequent deposits can be for any amount:

+

Do not require or suggest an initial deposit: = If selected, no initial deposit is required or suggested when you create a new order.

+

Suggest an initial deposit:
+ = If selected, an initial deposit amount is suggested for each new order. Enter the percentage of the total order amount that you want suggested as the deposit amount. When taking the deposit the suggested amount is auto-filled, but can be changed or deleted, at your discretion.

+

Require an initial deposit:
+ = If selected, an initial deposit is required for the order. Enter the percentage of the order total to be required. When taking the deposit the required amount is auto-filled. You can enter a larger amount, if you wish, but you cannot reduce or delete the required amount.

+
+

Order Status

+		 +

There are three default statuses for use in the Status field on customer orders:

+
    +
  • +

    Open is automatically assigned to every new order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Closed is automatically assigned to the order once all listed items have been sold on a receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pending should be assigned to orders used to give estimates or quotes to customers, where the items are not yet committed to sell. Pending orders are not included when Point of Sale calculates available quantities.

    +
    • +
+

You can change the name of these statuses, add new statuses, and arrange the order they appear in the Status field drop-down list on order forms. Learn more.

+
+

Printed Message

+		 +

Enter text to print on the bottom of every order.

+
+

Document Numbering

+		 +

By default, orders are numbered sequentially, starting with 1. You can use this preference page to specify text or a POS field that should precede the sequential number or to change the starting number.

+
+

 

+

Taking deposits on orders

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs14.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs14.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..47c9574 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs14.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Multi-Store + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Multi-Store

+

Preference Instructions | Multi-Store Preferences Overview

+
+

 

+
+

These settings apply only  to Pro users that have multiple stores.

+

Key Topics

+

The table below summarizes the multi-store and Store Exchange preference settings. For more information about setting up your stores from the Store Exchange Center, use these links:

+

Configure Headquarters Store Exchange preferences

+

Configure remote Store Exchange preferences

+

 

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Multi-Store

+		 +

This page summarizes your store type information.

+

You can use this page to change a store from Headquarters to remote. Read the information on this page carefully, as changing store types at any time other than the initial installation requires additional steps to protect your data.

+

Important information about changing store types

+
+

Store Codes / Classes

+		 +

Note: Changing your number of stores requires that all inventory and transactional document windows be closed before saving.

+

(Headquarters only) Enter your total number of stores, and then assign a unique alphanumeric code up to three characters for each. This code is displayed throughout the program and on multi-store reports.

+

Optionally, assign a QuickBooks Desktop financial software class to each store to allow Profit/Loss reporting by store in your financial software. You must have already connected to your financial software and have it configured to use classes before this option is available in Point of Sale. Learn more.

+
+

Store Exchange

+

 

+

For more information, read Configuring Store Exchange.

+		 +

On the Configuration tab:

+

Specify a communication method for Store Exchanges with your other stores, then select Configure to enter the other stores license number and e-mail address, file transfer path, or folder location (depending on exchange method).

+

In the Store Exchange Notification area, you can set an alert so that you are aware if you have not sent or received a file from another store. Enter the number of days after which you will be alerted.

+

On the Options tab:

+

Select Change Password to enter or revise a password to encrypt Store Exchange files (required). The same password must be entered at all stores.

+

Note: If you have multiple POS data files, enter a different password for each file.

+

If you want received files placed in a folder other than the default, browse to a new Process-In Folder. Select Revert to Default Folder to return to using the default folder.

+

Finally, if desired select Automatically exchange store data... and enter a time for files to be exchanged each day. Read the information provided on the right of this screen for important information.

+
+

Store Heading

+		 +

(Headquarters only) Select a store from the drop-down list and enter store name, address, and miscellaneous information. Repeat for each store. This information is included on printed sales documents.

+
+

 

+

Multi-store overview

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefsoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e505126 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Overview

+

Preference Instructions | Workstation Preferences

+

 

+

Company preferences are used to configure Point of Sale features to best suit the needs of your business. Company preferences define settings and options that are shared by all Point of Sale workstations and all stores.

+

From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

+

Company preferences are split into the following categories. Select a category for specific information about the options on that page:

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

General

+		 +

Purchasing

+
+

Financial

+		 +

Receiving

+
+

Merchant & Gift Services

+		 +

Sales

+
+

Inventory

+		 +

Sales tax

+
+

Price levels

+		 +

Customers

+
+

Ratings & Trends

+		 +

Layaways

+
+

Sales orders

+

E-mail documents

+		 +

Work orders

+

Multi-store

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_accessing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_accessing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..48c7453 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_accessing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Access Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Customer Orders

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Field Descriptions | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

To access customer orders:

+

From the Point of Sale menu, select one of the following:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_create.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_create.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ebcdaa1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_create.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + + +Create a Customer Order: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a Customer Order: Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Field Descriptions | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The term customer order collectively refers to layaways, sales orders, and work orders. While each of these documents have specific uses, they share many procedural workflows.

+

To create a new customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New for the appropriate order type from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Enter Item(s) field, scan or enter item information to list the merchandise or service items being ordered. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit individual item information, such as quantity, price, tax code, and discounts, as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Enter a Customer (required, How do I?).

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Enter any other pertinent information in the appropriate fields, such as:

    +
    6. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Deposit/Payment from the I Want To menu to take a deposit on the order.

    +
    2. +
+

If a minimum initial deposit is required or suggested (optional preference setting), the Deposit window is automatically displayed if Save is selected before a deposit is taken.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note: The availability of customer orders can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Handle special order items

+

E-mail orders to customers

+

Fill customer orders

+

Tips for using sales orders

+

Tips for using work orders

+

Generate POs from a customer order

+

Customer order overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_edit.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_edit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..049f55a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_edit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit a Customer Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Customer Order

+

Locate an Order | Take a Deposit | Edit an Order Item

+
+

Pro

+
+

If no deposits have been taken, you can edit any of the information on a customer order. If deposits have been taken, you are not allowed to change the customer. If you need to change the customer on a customer order for which deposits have been taken, you will have to refund the deposits first. You can then change the customer and re-enter the deposit.

+

To edit a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and display the order you wish to edit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make any necessary changes and take any additional deposits.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a customer order

+

E-mail an order to a customer

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_filling.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_filling.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d310150 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_filling.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + +Fill a Customer Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Fill a Customer Order

+

Locate a Customer Order | Make a Sale | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

You fill a customer order by selling the ordered items on a sales receipt. You can sell some or all of the items on a customer order at any time. Selling items updates the Due and Sold fields on the order. When all the items on the order have been sold and the deposit and balance due are both zero, it is completely filled, and Point of Sale changes the status of the order to Closed.

+

To sell the items listed on a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the customer order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Sell Item(s) from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Select Items to Sell window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Select All if you want to sell all the items on the order.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Enter a quantity in the Doc QtyClick to display a popup topic column for each item you want to sell.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Continue.

    +
    2. +
+

The items you selected are listed on a new sales receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add any additional items you are selling at the same time.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Take Payment.

    +
    3. +
+

If deposits have been taken on the order, the total amount of the deposit is automatically suggested as a payment method of Deposit. You can reduce or clear the deposit amount used, if you wish. You might do this if not selling all of the items at this time and you wish to maintain a deposit balance against the remaining items still due.

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal payment procedures to enter amounts for additional payment methods or change as appropriate, and then save/print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View deposit/payment history

+

Customer order reports

+

How customer orders are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_generatepo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_generatepo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d2d9ab --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_generatepo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + +Generating Purchase Orders from Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Generate Purchase Orders from a Customer Order

+

Customer Order Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can quickly generate purchase orders from a customer order to order the listed items from your vendor(s). Point of Sale will propose a PO for all of the items listed (except service items), but allows you to review the proposed PO(s) and choose the items and quantities to actually order. Multiple items from a vendor are combined into a single purchase order.

+

To generate purchase orders from a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete and save the order document, if not already done.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight or display the customer order.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Generate PO from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    The Select Items to Generate PO window is displayed, with all merchandise items from the customer order listed.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Enter the quantity of each item to order from your vendor in the Doc QtyClick to display a popup topic column.

    +
    6. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Continue.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    A confirming message displays the number of POs created and gives you the opportunity to view, print, or e-mail the POs.

    +
    3. +
+

If you want to add additional items to a PO created this way, select Show Me a List of POs created, select a PO and then select Edit to make changes before submitting the PO to your vendor.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Create a customer order: Basic steps

+

E-mail orders to vendors/customers

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a30cf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +custorder_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Orders: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Create a customer order

+

Take a deposit

+

View deposit history

+

Refund deposits

+

Handle special orders

+

Purchase items on a customer order

+

Locate a saved customer order

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

E-mail an order to a customer

+

Edit a customer order

+

Delete a customer order

+

Track an order by status

+

Run customer order reports

+

Set my customer order preferences

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longental_invpref.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longental_invpref.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e56abeb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longental_invpref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Long-term Rental: Inventory and Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long-term Rental: Inventory and Preferences

+

Tips and Notes | Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to set up inventory and preferences to track long-term rentals. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add your rental pianos as an inventory item in the normal manner, recording the actual cost and a sales price (not rental price). This adds the pianos value to your inventory and allows you to sell the pianos at any time by listing this item on a sales receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Create a second inventory item, with the same quantity, called "Rental Pianos", with a cost and price equal to zero. You will list this item on a sales order when renting out a piano.

    +
    3. +
+

Unit Tracking: If you want to track rentals by specific unit, identify each unit with a unique serial number and select the Serial Number Tracking field in inventory for this item.

+
    +
  1. +

    Define a service item with a description of "Piano Rental Charge", with a cost of $0 and a price equal to one months rental charge.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you require a security deposit on rented pianos, set up another service item in inventory called "Piano Rental Deposit" with a $0 cost and the required deposit amount as the price.

    +
    3. +
+

Tip: You can map each of these items to the QuickBooks financial software income account you prefer on the Additional Info tab of the item form. See the note about posting the security deposit amount.

+

 

+

image\rental_inv_piano.gif

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Sales Order page of company preferences:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    On the Financial page of company preferences, select the option to send receipts and vouchers with Detailed Item Descriptions to your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add inventory items

+

Use service items

+

Serial number tracking

+

Sales order preferences

+

Map item financial accounts

+

Send detailed descriptions to QuickBooks

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_billings.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_billings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3597c38 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_billings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Long Term Rentals: Monthly Rental Billings + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long Term Rentals: Monthly Rental Billings

+

Tips and Notes | Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to send your rental customers monthly billing statements using your QuickBooks financial software. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+

When you run financial exchange with QuickBooks after renting a piano, the customer (if new) is added to QuickBooks, enabling you to use account charges for future monthly billings. Typically, you would do monthly billings on a set day of the month for all rental customers.

+

To send out monthly rental billings:

+
    +
  1. +

    Set an account limit for the customer. We suggest this be equal to at least two months additional rental charges.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In Point of Sale, display your sales order list filtered for pianos currently rented out (as explained here).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select a rental sales order and then select Sell Items from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Enter a Doc Qty of one for the "Piano Rental Charge" item and select OK. This charges the customer for one additional months rent.

    +
    5. +
+

As necessary, increment the order quantity on the sales order for the rental charge item, so that some months always remain due. This prevents the sales order from being automatically closed if you "sell" all of the initial months entered.

+
    +
  1. +

    On the sales receipt, take payment by account charge and save.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat for all your open rental sales orders.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Conduct a financial exchange with QuickBooks.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    The new monthly rental charges are posted to each customers account in your financial software.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Generate customer billing statements from QuickBooks and send to your customers. (Refer to your QuickBooks documentation for directions.)

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    When payment is received from a customer, take payment on account.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    On the next financial exchange with QuickBooks, the customers account balance will be adjusted to reflect the payment and the new balance will be sent back to Point of Sale.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Run Financial Exchange with QuickBooks

+

Maintain customer charge accounts

+

Sell sales order items

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_notes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_notes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b2110af --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_notes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Long Term Rental: Tips and Notes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long Term Rental: Tips and Notes

+

Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

These notes apply to the example of renting pianos by the month; adjust for your needs.

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_rentout.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_rentout.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc9c002 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_rentout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + +Long-term Rental: Rent Out Equipment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long-term Rental: Rent Out Equipment

+

Tips and Notes | View the Equipment Out | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to rent out long-term rental equipment. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+

To rent out a piano:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure you have defined the piano rental inventory items and preferences as described here.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Start a new sales order:

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Set the Status field to "Rented"

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    List a "Rental Piano" item with a quantity of one. Also, enter the serial number, if set up to prompt for it.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    List the "Piano Rental Charge" item with a quantity equal to the total rental period anticipated (number of months, the number you enter isnt important, you can edit it later to add or remove months).

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    List the "Rental Piano Deposit" item on the order, if applicable.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    List the customer information. Make sure the customers record is flagged "Use with QuickBooks".

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Record other pertinent information (delivery, etc.) in the Instructions field.

    +
    9. +
  9. +

    Select Save.

    +
    10. +
+

Note: Depending on your sales order deposit preference settings, you may be prompted to enter a deposit. If you listed an equipment deposit item on the order, enter $0 as the deposit amount. The deposit item amount will be applied in the next step.

+
    +
  1. +

    With the sales order displayed, select Sell Items from the sales order I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Select Items to Sell dialog, enter 1 in the Doc Qty column for each item (Rental Piano, Piano Rental Charge, and Piano Rental Deposit, as applicable). This will create a receipt charging the customer for the equipment deposit and the first months rental charges.

    +
    3. +
+

"Selling" the rental piano itself will reduce the quantity of this item in inventory, so you can tell at a glance if you have additional pianos available to rent. However, since it has a cost and price equal to zero, "selling" it has no effect on sales or inventory value.

+
    +
  1. +

    Accept payment and update/print the receipt for the customer.

    +
    2. +
+

You can also print the sales order for the customer, if desired. You may do this so the customer has a record of the anticipated length of the rental, the total estimated charges over the rental period, and any information you have entered in the Instructions field.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Handling monthly billing statements

+

Create a sales order

+

Print a sales order

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_returns.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_returns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c42ffa --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_returns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + +Long-term Rental: Record Rental Returns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long-term Rental: Record Rental Returns

+

Tips and Notes | Rent Out Equipment | Return Receipts

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to record the return of long-term rental equipment. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+

To record the return of a rental piano:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and open the sales order created when the rental was made.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Adjust the rental charge item quantity to 0, change the status to Closed, and then select Save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select New Return Receipt from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    List the customer on the receipt and add items as follows:

    +
    5. +
+ +

Tip: If you have run a recent financial exchange with QuickBooks, the customers current account balance is displayed as you create a sales receipt.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Payment (<F12>).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the payment screen, enter payments/change to the customer as appropriate:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Save and print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Run Financial Exchange with QuickBooks

+

Maintain customer charge accounts

+

Record account charges or payments

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_viewrented.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_viewrented.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e47231f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longrental_viewrented.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Long-term Rental: View Rented Equipment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long-term Rental: View Rented Equipment

+

Tips and Notes | Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to view and track the equipment out on long-term rentals. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+

To view the pianos out on rental:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your sales order list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select <Create Filter> from the filter drop-down and select "Rented" in the Status field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Apply to display only orders for equipment currently rented out.

    +
    4. +
+

Tip: Save the filter criteria if you view this list often, so that it is available with one click from the filter drop-down list.

+

 

+

image\rental_pianosout.gif

+

To view additional detail on rented pianos, including item detail, run a Sales Order report, filtered by the Status "Rented". Modify the report to include the columns and detail you wish to see.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Handle monthly billing statements

+

Filter lists

+

Sales order reports

+

Track sales orders by status

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longterm_rentals.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longterm_rentals.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d11a9b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_longterm_rentals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Long-Term Rentals + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Long-Term Rentals

+

Tips and Notes | Short Term Rentals

+
+

Pro

+
+

Some retailers rent equipment long term, generally billing the customer on a monthly basis. Music stores, for example, often rent instruments this way.

+

Example of Long-term Rental Tracking

+

The following example is for renting pianos by the month, using sales orders, and assumes you will use QuickBooks financial software to send monthly statements to the customer. Adjust this procedure to fit your long-term rental needs.

+

Set up inventory and preferences

+

Rent out a piano

+

View the pianos out on rental

+

Handle monthly billing statements

+

Record piano rental returns

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Rental tracking overview

+

Create a sales order

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_overview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a0d281 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Order Overview + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Order Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Customer Order Preferences

+
+

Pro

+
+

The term customer order collectively refers to layaways, sales orders, and work orders, which are used to record planned sales of merchandise and/or services to your customers.

+

These versatile documents can be used for a variety of purposes, including:

+ +

Customer orders typically involve taking a deposit when the order is placed, optional additional deposits over a period of time, and ultimately final payment when the merchandise or service is recorded on a sales receipt.

+

The ordered items are deducted from inventory only after you record them on a sales receipt to fulfill the order. However, they are immediately reflected in your available quantities, so you can see at a glance if on-hand items are already promised to another customer. Point of Sale alerts you when you receive an item that is on an open customer order.

+

You can sell all the items on an order at one time, or partially "fill" the order by selling some of them as merchandise is received or services completed. When the sale is recorded, deposits previously taken are applied towards the final payment.

+

A permanent record of the order and sale is provided by the receipt(s) in sales history. Fulfilled customer orders can be safely deleted at your discretion.

+

In a multi-store configuration, each store creates and maintains its own customer orders. These order documents are exchanged between stores so that each store can view up-to-date available quantity information for all stores. However, customer orders created at one store cannot be viewed or filled at another store. The deposit and sales receipts created at remote stores to take deposits and fill customer orders are sent to Headquarters in the normal manner.

+

 

+

Note: The availability of customer tracking features can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Tips for using sales orders

+

Tips for using work orders

+

Customer order field descriptions

+

Customer order reports

+

Security rights for customer orders

+

How customer orders are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_printing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_printing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..315d8bb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_printing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Customer Orders

+

Locate an Order | Printing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Typically, you will print a copy of a customer order to give to the customer and/or to keep for your own records. Printed orders include the deposit history, instructions, quantities sold and remaining due, and any customer message you have defined in company preferences.

+

To print a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the customer order that you want to print.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print from the window tool bar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If presented with a print option window:

    +
    4. +
+ +

Related Topics

+

Create a customer order

+

E-mail an order

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_rentaltracking.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_rentaltracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..96ed019 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_rentaltracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Rentals + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Rentals

+

Customer Order Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Many retailers rent items to customers and need a way to track those rentals.

+

While tracking the status of rental equipment (due date, rental period, etc.), item depreciation, damage waivers, and other unique situations related to a rental business are not directly supported, Point of Sale can be used to record rental charges and provide limited physical tracking of items utilizing the versatility of customer orders in conjunction with sales receipts.

+

This topic provides examples for limited tracking of a rental business.

+

What kind of rental situation do you want to track?

+

Short-term rentals (Example: Bicycles by the hour)

+

Long-term rentals (Example: Pianos by the month)

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_reports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e20b45 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Order Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Order Reports

+

Track Orders by Status | Customer Order Reminders

+
+

Pro

+
+

Several customer order reports are available to help you track, order, and follow-up on the merchandise needed for customer orders as well as for seeing the deposits received on these documents.

+

 

+

Order Reports

+

Summary and detail reports are available for each customer order type.

+

These reports are available in the Customers category in the Report Center.

+

Modifying the report data by order status, date, assigned employee (work orders), or due quantities can help you track and manage these versatile documents.

+

You can also view all non-deleted customer orders and corresponding sales receipts made for a specific customer by accessing the customer's history.

+

 

+

Reporting of Order Deposits

+

When you take an order deposit, the deposit amount is reflected in the sales activity for the day on your cash drawer (X/Z-Out) reports. The amount also is reflected on the Deposit Detail report (available in the Customers > Orders area of the Report Center). When the ordered items are sold and the deposit applied to the sale, the total sale amount is reflected in the day's sales activity on your X/Z-Out, while the deposit amount is again reflected as an adjustment (subtraction) to the day's sales activity.

+

 

+

Sales Reports

+

The merchandise/services on a customer order are not included on your general sales reports until the sale is recorded on a sales receipt.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Generate POs from customer orders

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

View deposit history

+

Customer order overview

+

Reports overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_invpref.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_invpref.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..328289f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_invpref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Inventory and Preference Setup + + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: Inventory and Preference Setup

+

Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to set up inventory and preferences to track short-term rentals. This example is for bicycle rentals by the hour; adjust for your needs.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add your rental bicycles to inventory in the normal manner, recording the actual cost and a sales price (not rental price). This adds the bicycles value to your inventory and allows you to sell the bicycles at any time, should you choose to do so.

    +
    2. +
+

Unit Tracking: If you want to track rentals by specific unit, identify each unit with a unique serial number and select the Serial Number Tracking field in inventory for this item.

+
    +
  1. +

    Define a service item with a description of "Bicycle Rental Charge", with a cost of $0 and a price equal to the rental charge for one hour.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: Map the rental charge item to the QuickBooks financial software income account you prefer on the Additional Info tab of the item form.

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Sales Order page of company preferences, define:

    +
    2. +
+ +

image\rental_inv_bicycles.gif

+

Related Topics

+

Add inventory items

+

Use service items

+

Map item financial accounts

+

Sales order preferences

+

Short-tern rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_notes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_notes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..464553d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_notes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Tips and Notes + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: Tips and Notes

+

Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_rentout.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_rentout.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ca4a3f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_rentout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Renting out Equipment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: Renting out Equipment

+

View Equipment Out | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to rent out short-term rental equipment. This example is for bicycle rentals by the hour; adjust for your needs.

+

To rent out a bicycle:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure you have defined your bicycle rental items and preferences as described here.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Start a new sales order:

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Set the Status field to "Rented"

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    List a "Rental Bicycle" item with a quantity of one. Enter the units serial number, if set up to prompt for it.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    List your "Bicycle Rental Charge" service item with a quantity equal to the number of hours being rented.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    List the customer information.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Record other pertinent information in the Instructions field.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Take a deposit per your requirements and save the order.

    +
    9. +
  9. +

    Print a copy of the order for your customer.

    +
    10. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a sales order

+

Take a deposit

+

List a customer on a document

+

Print a sales order

+

Sales order preferences

+

Short-tern rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_returns.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_returns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..080c6cc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_returns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Recording Equipment Returns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: Record Equipment Returns

+

View Equipment Out | Rental Returns | Notes

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to record the return of short-term rental equipment. This example is for bicycle rentals by the hour; adjust for your needs.

+

To record the return of a rental bicycle:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open the sales order created when the rental was made.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: Filter the sales order list for orders made "Today" to quickly locate the sales order.

+
    +
  1. +

    Delete the Rental Bicycle item from the sales order and, if necessary, edit the rental charge quantity if the actual rental time was different than planned.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Sell Items from the I Want To menu, and then choose Select All and Continue in the Select Items to Sell dialog.

    +
    3. +
+

Just the rental charges are listed on the sales receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Apply the deposit taken previously as payment on the receipt and enter any additional amounts or change due from/to the customer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

The sales order status is automatically changed to "Closed" and will no longer be displayed when viewing the bicycles out on rental. Deleting the rental bicycle from the sales order before selecting Sell Items ensures that you dont accidentally sell it and makes it available for the next rental.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Locate a sales order

+

Filter a list

+

Sell sales order items

+

Edit a sales order

+

Track sales orders by status

+

Short-tern rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_viewrented.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_viewrented.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..36437ae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortrental_viewrented.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Viewing Rented Equipment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: View Rented Equipment

+

Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to view your equipment out on rental. This example is for bicycle rentals by the hour; adjust for your needs.

+

To view your bicycles out on rent:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your sales order list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select <Create Filter> from the filter drop-down and select "Rented" in the Status field. Learn more.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Apply to display only orders for bicycles currently rented out, as shown below.

    +
    4. +
+

Tip: Save the filter criteria with a unique name, such as "Bicycles on Rent", if you view this list often, so that it is available with one click from the filter drop-down list.

+

 

+

image\rental_bicyclesout.gif

+

 

+

To view additional detail on rented bicycles, including item detail, run a Sales Order report filtered by the status of "Rented". Modify the report to include the columns and detail you wish to see.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Sales order reports

+

Track sales orders by status

+

Short-tern rental overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortterm_rentals.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortterm_rentals.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b072720 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_shortterm_rentals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Tracking Short-Term Rentals + + + + + + + + + + +

Tracking Short-Term Rentals

+

Customer Order Overview | Long Term Rentals

+
+

Pro

+
+

Some retailers rent equipment to customers on an hourly or daily basis. Sporting goods stores, for example, might rent ski equipment, golf clubs, or bicycles.

+

Note: Point of Sale does not support temporarily authorizing (but not charging) credit card deposits for more than the rental amount. If you require equipment deposits in excess of the rental charge, and the customer wants to use a credit card for the deposit, we recommend that you track the deposit outside of Point of Sale.

+

Example of Short-term Rental Tracking

+

The example presented here is for renting bicycles by the hour, using sales orders. Adjust these procedures to meet your rental tracking needs.

+

Set up inventory and preferences

+

Renting out a bicycle

+

Viewing the bicycles out on rental

+

Recording bicycle rental returns

+

Tips and notes on using this procedure

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_sotips.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_sotips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c74ad67 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_sotips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + +Tips for Using Sales Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tips for Using Sales Orders

+

Customer Order Overview | Order Field Descriptions

+
+

Pro

+
+

Sales orders are a type of customer order that allow you to record the planned sale of items currently out of stock or items that you don't currently carry. Sales orders can also be used to give a customer a quote for merchandise and/or services that you would like to sell.

+

Sales order for out-of-stock items:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the out-of-stock item on the sales order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete other applicable fields, such as discounts, shipping information, etc.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Take a deposit, if you require one.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Print a copy of the order for the customer.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Create a purchase order and receive the merchandise from your vendor.

    +
    6. +
+

Tip: Generate a PO right from the sales order, if necessary

+
    +
  1. +

    When the item is in stock again, contact the customer and record the sale on a sales receipt, applying any deposits toward the final payment.

    +
    2. +
+

Sales order for special order merchandise

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales order and select New Special Order Item from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Define the special order item and then list the item on the sales order.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit the price, quantity, etc. on the sales order.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Take a deposit, if you require one.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Generate PO to create a purchase order for the new item from the sales order.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Print a copy of the order for the customer.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Create a voucher when the item arrives to receive it into inventory.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Contact the customer and record the sale on a receipt. Apply the deposit balance to the sales receipt.

    +
    9. +
+

Sales order for a customer quote

+

If the quote is for services only, you may want to use a work order instead.

+
    +
  1. +

    List the items and/or service items included in the quote.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Change the order status to Pending. This prevents the item quantities from affecting available quantity calculations, since they are not yet committed to a sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Save and print the order. Give the customer a copy of the quote/sales order.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When the customer accepts your quote, deliver the merchandise and/or services and record the sale on a receipt, accepting payment as usual.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Customer orders not available to you? This could be due to your security level or customer orders may be disabled in your Features to Use company preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a customer order: Basic steps

+

Track an order by status

+

Tips for using work orders

+

E-mail a document

+

Customer order reports

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_specialorder.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_specialorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e0cd0f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_specialorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Handle Special Orders + + + + + + + + + + +

Handle Special Orders

+

Customer Order Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

A special order refers to the tasks related to ordering, receiving and/or selling custom or one-time merchandise that you do not currently carry in inventory and may never carry.

+

There are two ways to handle special orders.

+ +

Even though the document reflects the special order edits you have made when selling, purchasing, or receiving the item, it is the original item in inventory that is affected as far as on-hand quantity, cost, etc.

+

View examples

+ +

In a multi-store configuration, the special order item type provides a means for a remote store to create a customer order or receipt for a new item and generate a PO for it. The special order item is sent to Headquarters with the first transactional document listing it. Headquarters can review the special order item and convert it to a regular inventory item, if desired.

+

How do I create a new special order item?

+

 

+

If creating a customer order, you can generate a purchase order right from the customer order to obtain the item from your vendor.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Convert a special order item to an inventory item

+

Create a customer order

+

Tips for using sales orders

+

Add a new item while creating a document

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_specialorderexample1.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_specialorderexample1.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..294a556 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_specialorderexample1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Special Order Examples: Customize Existing Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Special Order Examples: Customize Existing Item

+

Handle Special Orders | Create a Customer Order

+
+

Pro

+
+

Example 1

+

You carry plain white T-shirts in inventory, but then print custom logos, team names, or graphics on them when selling or taking customer orders. List the white T-shirt on the document and then use normal item editing procedures to change the item description, size, attribute, and price information, as necessary, e.g. "Baseball Logo Shirt Bears". In this way, the document stores and prints the custom information.

+

You could also list a fee or labor charge for the customization, using a service item.

+

The printed document you give the customer (and the stored document in Point of Sale) will reflect the special order edits you have made when selling, purchasing, or receiving the item, however it is the original item in inventory that is affected as far as on-hand quantity, cost, etc.

+

 

+

Example 2

+

You carry a style of shoes with the largest size in inventory being 13, but you have a customer request for a size 15 shoe. Knowing this will probably be a one-time sale, and not wanting to permanently add this size to inventory as a new item, you list the size 13 shoe on a sales order and edit the size to 15. You can also edit the price or other information as needed, such as the UPC or other required vendor information needed to order the item.

+

If you generate a purchase order from the sales order, the edited information will be carried to the PO. Likewise, when you eventually make a sales receipt referencing the sales order, it too will reflect the custom information.

+

In inventory, the size 13 item remains unchanged, except it is this item that is affected by the sale as far as on-hand quantity and cost changes, etc.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_statustracking.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_statustracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5655b2f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_statustracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Customer Orders by Status + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Customer Orders by Status

+

Customer Order Overview | Customer Order Reports

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Status field on customer orders allows you to track orders, filter your order lists, and create reports based on the current entry. By default, Point of Sale assigns two order status types. New orders are assigned the Open status. The status of filled orders is automatically flagged as Closed.

+

A third default status, Pending, should be applied to customer orders that don't commit item quantities to sales, such as orders made for estimates or customer quotes. Pending orders are not included in available quantity calculations, and thus don't affect reorder reminders or cause insufficient quantity promptsClick to display a popup topic when selling the items.

+

If it fits your needs, you can rename the  default status types and define more of your own in company preferences. An order's status can be manually changed as an order is made and as it proceeds towards completion. Status field entries can be defined for each order type independently.

+

As the status of an order is changed, Point of Sale records the date and the employee who made the change, so you have a running history of the orders progression.

+

To change the status of an order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the order form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a new status from the drop-down list in the Status field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

If you refund the deposit on a customer order, you are prompted to close the order. Select Yes to close the order or No if you want it to remain open.

+

To view the status history of an order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the order form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the icon next to the Status field.

    +
    3. +
+

All status changes which occurred after the order was created are displayed.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Locate a customer order

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_assigning.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_assigning.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2e23ae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_assigning.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Assigning to Employees + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Assigning to Employees

+

Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Assigned field can be used to record the employee whom is performing the service (as opposed to who took the order).

+

Select a name from the drop-down list of defined employees. If an order involves multiple employees, each performing some aspect of the work, this field can be edited as the order progresses.

+

When running a Work Order Journal report, filtering on the Assigned field can give you a list of the pending jobs for each employee.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_datetracking.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_datetracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3e86b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_datetracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Tracking by Dates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Tracking by Dates

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

Work orders can have both an Order Date and a Due Date recorded when created. This helps you to track the amount of time orders take to complete.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_descriptionofwork.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_descriptionofwork.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74216a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_descriptionofwork.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Describing the Work to be Performed + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Describing the Work to be Performed

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

The work orders Description of problem or services field provides an almost unlimited amount of space for additional information to be recorded in support of warranty and insurance repairs.

+

Select the Edit button at the bottom right of the field to open a larger Comments notepad for this purpose. This information is included when you print a work order.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_printcomments.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_printcomments.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..45f6698 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_printcomments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Printing Messages + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Printing Messages

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

Disclaimers, warranty information, or any custom message can be defined in company preferences and printed on every work order.

+

Common uses for this feature include printing:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_serviceitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_serviceitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7d5959 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_serviceitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Using Service Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Using Service Items

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

Service items are defined in inventory and typically are used to list labor charges to complete the job. Use normal new item procedures to define service items in inventory, selecting the Service item type.

+

Use the following guidelines in defining service items in inventory:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_trackbystatus.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_trackbystatus.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d5e708 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_trackbystatus.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Tracking by Status + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Tracking by Status

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Status field is particularly pertinent to the tracking of work orders. Learn more about tracking orders by status, including how to create custom statuses and use them.

+

Example: You use work orders to do alterations to clothing. Some of the alterations are done in-house while others are sent out to a third party. You may define and assign different statuses for the varying stages of the job as follows:

+ +

As a work order progresses, you can update the status field appropriately. Used in combination with the Assigned field, you now have the ability to filter your work order list by status or assigned employee, and to generate work order journal reports filtered by these field values.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_warrantydiscount.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_warrantydiscount.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..efdafe8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/custorder_wo_warrantydiscount.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Defining a Discount for Warranty Work + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Defining a Discount for Warranty Work

+

Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

If you do warranty work, you may have to list repair parts or labor at a reduced or zero price on the work order. Yet you may want the actual time/items listed for purposes of tracking and billing to the manufacturer. One way to accomplish this is to define an additional item discount type called "Warranty".

+

When you list items for warranty work on a work order, you can give a discount (100% if repair completely paid by warranty) and select warranty in the Discount Type field. When you need a report of warranty work competed, run the report filtered by the discount type "Warranty".

+

Item discount types are defined on the Sales > Discounts page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8316033 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Taking Deposits on Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Take a Deposit on a Customer Order

+

View Deposit History | Refund Deposits

+
+

Pro

+
+

When making a deposit on a customer order, a customer is, in essence, purchasing deposit credits that can later be used to pay for the merchandise/service purchase. Thus, receiving a deposit is an activity tracked on reports but is not a merchandise sale. A virtually unlimited number of deposits can be recorded for each customer order.

+

You can configure Point of Sale company preferences so that a minimum initial deposit is suggested or required on new customer orders.

+

To take a deposit:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create a new order or display an existing order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Deposit/Payment from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Take Deposit window is displayed. If this is the initial deposit and there is a suggested or required minimum deposit amount, it will be auto-filled.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter an amount or accept the suggested/required amount.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

The deposit receipt Payment screen is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Take payment and save/print the deposit receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit customer orders

+

Customer orders on reports

+

How deposits are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+

Preferences for customer orders

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so09.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so09.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c92e44 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so09.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Refund Customer Order Deposits + + + + + + + + + + + +

Refund Customer Order Deposits

+

View Deposit History | Take a Deposit

+
+

Pro

+
+

When a customer order is canceled, the entire amount on deposit is typically refunded and the order closed.

+

To refund the entire deposited amount:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the customer order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Issue a Refund from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The refund confirmation window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Yes.

    +
    2. +
+

The deposit receipt Payment screen is displayed with the refund amount listed in the Change column.

+
    +
  1. +

    Move or accept the amount for the change method (cash, credit card, etc.) you will use to refund the deposit and then save/print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

The change window displays the refund amount and type.

+
    +
  1. +

    You are asked if you would like to close the unfilled order. Select Yes to change the status to Closed or No to leave the order open.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

If necessary, you can refund an individual deposit and leave the remainder by reversing the individual deposit receipt from sales history instead. This removes just the deposit amount made on that receipt from the customer order.

+

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Locate a customer order

+

Delete a customer order

+

Edit a customer order

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so10.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8c89fc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Order Payment History + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Order Payment History

+

Take a Deposit | Refund a Deposit

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Payment History window displays all deposits/payments for a particular order. Included in the Payment History for each deposit is the deposit amount, date, deposit receipt number, form of payment, and whether or not a deposit receipt has been reversed:

+

You can take additional deposits or refund the amount on deposit directly from the Payment History window.

+

When printing orders, the deposit history is included.

+

To display an orders payment history:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Payment History from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Deposit/Payment to take an additional deposit.

    +
    4. +
+

Or

+

Select Refund to refund the amount currently on deposit.

+

Select Cancel to close the Payment History window.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Locate a customer order

+

Take a deposit

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so15.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so15.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57fb22f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/so15.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Delete a Customer Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Customer Order

+

Locate an Order | Refund a Deposit | Edit an Order

+
+

Pro

+
+

Customer orders can be safely deleted at any time as long as no deposit balance exists, .

+

To delete a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select or display the customer order(s) you want to delete. How do I select multiple orders?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To Menu.

    +
    3. +
+

If the customer order has a remaining deposit balance, it cannot be deleted until you refund the deposit. Point of Sale will alert you if this is the case.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Customer order overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/wo_tips.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/wo_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9dbf42 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customer_orders/wo_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Tips for Using Work Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tips for Using Work Orders

+

Customer Order Overview | Order Field Descriptions

+
+

Pro

+
+

The basic procedures used to create, take deposits, edit, or fill work orders are the same as for all types of customer orders.

+

This topic contains specific ideas for using those procedures to best advantage in tracking work orders. Select a link from the following list for more information.

+

Use service items

+

Track warranty work

+

Describe the problem or work to be performed

+

Assign work orders to employees

+

Track work orders by status

+

Track work order dates

+

Print work order messages

+

 

+

Overview

+

Whereas layaways and sales orders usually involve merchandise orders, work orders generally are for service-only jobs, such as alterations, repairs, or warranty service. Merchandise recorded on a work order is typically consumed in the service, such as repair parts. Work orders typically do not include the sale of the item being serviced. Work orders usually include a labor component, identified as a service item in inventory.

+

Work orders can be assigned to the employee who is to perform the service, a due date can be specified, and the completion status can be tracked and reported.

+

 

+

Customer orders not available to you? This could be due to your security level or customer orders may be disabled in your Features to Use company preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a work order

+

Take a deposit

+

Handle special orders

+

Preferences for Customer Orders

+

Tips for using sales orders

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust901.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust901.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c5edcb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust901.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +Access your Customer List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access your Customer List

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Customer Overview

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

To access your customer list:

+ +

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust902.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust902.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f39ff82 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust902.htm @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + + + + + + + + +Add a Customer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a Customer

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Customer Information Fields | Customer Overview

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

Note: If you have accessed this topic after copying a customer record, start with Step 2. Edit the information brought from the copied record as needed.

+

 

+

It is helpful to be consistent when entering customer information. Consistently using the same data format makes it easier to sort, search, and look up customer records.

+

To add a customer:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Home Page Customers menu, select  New Customer.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From your Customer List, click the Add button.

+

OR

+

From the Customer field on a sales receipt, click the icon and then choose Add New Customer.

+

A blank customer form is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Navigate through the sections on the customer form and enter name, contact, and optional information for the customer:

    +
    2. +
+

Expand each section of the form by clicking the small triangle icon to the right of the label:

+

    

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Note: The availability of customer tracking features can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track customers by type

+

Track business customers

+

Edit customer records

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust905.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust905.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d76f7f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust905.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a Customer Record + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Customer Record

+

Find a Customer | Customer Fields | Customer Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

To edit a customer record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and select the record you wish to edit in your customer list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit. The record is opened in an editable form.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit the customer information fields as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+ +

If you have to edit many customer records at once, such as when a ZIP Code or phone area code changes, consider using list edit mode. List edit mode allows you to make changes directly in your customer list, similar to working in a spreadsheet.

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a customer record

+

Merge duplicate customer records

+ +

Manually issuing or canceling a customer reward

+ +

Tracking customers in multiple stores

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust907.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust907.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9c4c8a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust907.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + +Customer Discounts and Price Levels + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Discounts and Price Levels

+

Price Levels | Give Discounts on Sales | Customers Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

A percentage discount or a markdown price level, but not both, can be associated with a customer, so that it is automatically suggested on sales to the customer. You have the option of applying the discount or price level to each sale.

+

If using a percentage discount, it is applied as an item discount to all items being sold (except gift cards/certificates) and it is applied against the active price level.

+

To define a customer discount or price level:

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Add or Edit Customer form, open the Customer Settings section.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Disc(count) button.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Customer Discount window, select Apply fixed percentage discount to all items and enter a discount percentage

    +
    4. +
+

OR

+

Select Use a markdown price level for this customer and then select a price level from the drop-down list.

+

You must have your price levels predefined in company preferences to be available for selection here.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Close Customer Discount Window link.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note: If you click Save at the bottom right, the customer record is saved and closed. Simply re-open it if you have additional information to add/edit.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust909.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust909.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c66d4b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust909.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete Customer Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete Customer Records

+

Find a Customer Record | Merge Customer Records

+
+

Basic

+
+

To delete customers:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the customer record or records you wish to delete in your customer list.  How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale will alert you if a selected customer cannot be deleted.

+
    +
  1. +

    If prompted, confirm the deletion and specify if you want to delete the customer(s) from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software as well.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+

Customers overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust910.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust910.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c7c172 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust910.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +View Customer Purchase History + + + + + + + + + + +

View Customer Purchase History

+

Locate a Customer Record | Merge Customer Records

+
+

Basic

+
+

Customer history reports allow you to view summarized statistical data for customer purchases and returns, as well as a list of all receipts and all non-deleted customer orders made for the customer. You can expand the documents included in the report to view item detail or QuickZoom to view the associated documents.

+

To view a customers history report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the customer history in one of these ways:

    +
    2. +
+ +

+

A list of transactions for the customer is summarized in the History section of the customer details.

+

      image\customer_history.gif

+

 

+

With customer history displayed, you can click a transaction in the list to open it for review.

+  +

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust911.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust911.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e1ba0c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust911.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + + +Customer Charge Accounts and Store Credits + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Charge Accounts and Store Credits

+

Charges to Account | Payments on Account | Past Due Accounts

+
+

Basic

+
+

Store Credit: Even if you don't wish to allow customers to charge purchases, you may still want to set up customer accounts for the purpose of giving store credit when merchandise is returned. Point of Sale will track the customer's credit balance and you can apply the credit towards a future purchase. For purposes of store credit, issuing a credit uses the same procedure as taking a payment on account, while applying a credit uses the same procedure as charging to account.    

+

 

+

Overview

+

You can offer and track customer charge accounts in Point of Sale. As the customer makes charges to and payments on her account, Point of Sale tracks the account balance and the remaining credit available.

+

When making a sale to the customer, this information is displayed on the receipt and further charges are blocked if the sale amount exceeds the available credit (manager override, with sufficient security, is possible).

+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you have additional account tracking capabilities:

+ +

Settings for Charge Accounts

+

Use the following customer fields in the QuickBooks Options section of the customer record to set up and maintain customer charge accounts:

+

     Customer charge account fields (from Additional Info tab of customer record)

+ +

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

How account transactions are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+

Edit a customer record

+

End of Day Financial Exchange

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust934.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust934.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e865ed7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust934.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print your Customer List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print your Customer List

+

Printing Overview | Export your Customer List | Customer Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Your customer list can be printed as a report.

+

To print your customer list:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your customer list and select the customers you want included in the printout:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify which to print:  All Displayed Customers or Selected customers only, and then select OK.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Print dialog, choose Print or Preview.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Many report viewing options are available, including rearranging columns and drilling down to see customer detail. Printing customer lists from the reports area gives you even more flexibility in customizing the layout, records included, and other display properties.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Finding a customer record

+

Tracking customers by type

+

Printing mailing and shipping labels

+

Printing shipping labels from sales receipts

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust935.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust935.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f233f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust935.htm @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + +cust935 + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Customer Labels

+

Printing your Customer List | Printing Overview | Customer Overview

+

 

+

The Print Labels option can be used to print customer mailing or shipping labels from the customer list.

+

 

+

To print customer labels:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your customer list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the customer or customers for whom you wish to print labels.  How do I select multiple customers?

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Labels from the Print menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify the following print options in the Print Labels dialog:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print or Preview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify a label start position (for printing on partial pages of labels) and then select Continue.

    +
    3. +
+

If necessary, you can also align your printer from this dialog.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust936.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust936.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..90978df --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust936.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Customers by Type + + + + + + + + + +

Track Customers by Type

+

Customer Overview | Report Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Customer types let you categorize your customers in ways that are meaningful to your business. For example, you could set up your customer types so that they indicate whether a customer is a business* or individual customer, their geographic location, or how they first heard about your business.

+

You can filter reports and do special mailings that are based on your customer types. For example, if you use customer types to categorize your customers by location, you could print mailing labels for all the customers in a particular region.

+

Define your customer types in company preferences and then associate a type with each customer on their individual records.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_ID_cards.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_ID_cards.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d632816 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_ID_cards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,169 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer IDs and Cards + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer IDs and Cards

+

Printing | Add a Customer

+
+

Pro

+
+

Customer IDs are automatically assigned to new customers and can be used to print scannable ID cards. One of the available Customer ID Card templates

+

The printed ID cards, with bar codes, can then be scanned while making a sales receipt to quickly lookup and add the customer to the receipt. Provided you don't change the default ID number format, you can scan the card while in either the Enter Items field or the Customer field on the receipt to add the customer.

+

 

+

Tips and format of Customer IDsClick to display a popup topic

+

Print templates for ID cards Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To print customer ID cards:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your customer list, select the customer or customers for whom you wish to print ID cards. How do I select multiple customers?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+

If printing for all customers, you do not have to select any.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Print ID Card.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Print dialog, specify if printing cards for the selected customer(s) or for all customers, and make any changes necessary to the printer, template or number of copies.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Print.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Customer Rewards Program

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_business.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_business.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d0f001 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_business.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + +Track Business Customers + + + + + + + + + +

Track Business Customers

+

Customer Overview | Add a Customer | Edit a Customer

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can easily identify and track business customers in Point of Sale (as opposed to an individual customer). Identifying a business customer turns on the following features for that customer:

+ +

To identify a business customer:

+
    +
  1. +

    When adding or editing a customer record, select the Track as Company check box.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Record the customer's Company name (required).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

        Customer PO# field added to sales receipt

+

Related Topics

+

How customer records are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_center.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_center.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..47bc555 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_center.htm @@ -0,0 +1,129 @@ + + + + + + +Customer Center + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Center

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Customers Overview

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

The Customer Center provides a summary of key customer statistics for a specified time period, one-click access to customer contact options, and links to FAQs and tools to help make managing your customers easier.

+

To access the Customer Center:

+ +

Customer Statistics

+

Set the time period for statistics from the Edit drop-down list. Current period statistics are compared to the preceding period of the same length (year-to-date is compared to year-to-date last year).

+

(Pro) At a remote store, customer statistics reflect activity at that store only.

+

View definitions of the displayed statistics Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Reach Out to Your Customers

+

Use the links in this section to launch the Point of Sale wizards that guide you through contacting your customers via:

+

E-mail marketing campaign lists

+

Write letters

+

Print mailing labels

+

Export your customer list to a file

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Office Integration

+

E-mail Customers

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_copy.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_copy.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..157f739 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_copy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Copy a Customer Record + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Customer Record

+

Edit a Customer | Customer Information Fields | Customer Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can quickly add a new customer who has similar information as another customer by copying the existing customers record. You may then modify the new record to reflect the new customer.

+

To copy a customer record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the record to be copied.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Copy.

    +
    3. +
+

A new customer form is opened with most of the information from the original customer. Some information, such as charge account and rewards information, is not copied.

+
    +
  1. +

    Modify the copied information to reflect the new customer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Maintain Charge Accounts

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_create_email_campaign.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_create_email_campaign.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4d61fd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_create_email_campaign.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Create an E-Mail Marketing Campaign List + + + + + + + + + + +

Create an E-mail Marketing Campaign List

+

E-mail Marketing Overview | E-mail FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

This topic applies to the Create an E-mail Marketing wizard, which walks you through the steps to create or manage targeted customer lists that you can use for e-mail marketing.*  You can access this wizard from the Customers menu or from the Customer Center.

+

 

+

You create an e-mail marketing customer list based on information from your customer records or on sales data accumulated for those customers. When the list is completed you can send it directly to the e-mail marketing partner integrated with Point of Sale Click to display a popup topic or save it to an Excel file and then manually upload to an e-mail marketing provider of your choice.

+

The wizard includes the following pages. Click Next when ready to move to the next page.

+
    +
  1. +

    Contact your Customers:  Informational overview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose Campaign Type: Select one of the predefined campaigns or choose Custom to define other criteria:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Review Customer List: This page displays a proposed list of customers based on your selections. By default, all customers in the proposed list are selected for inclusion in the final list (Checkbox indicating a selected customer = selected). You can remove customers from the final list by clearing their checkboxes. Clear/select checkboxes by clicking on them or by using the button options on the right.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review and Send: Enter a name for the customer list and specify how you want to output the list. If you have an account with the integrated e-mail marketing partner Click to display a popup topic, the list can be sent directly to them. Otherwise, you can export the list as an Excel file to send to another provider.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Office Integration

+

Customer Center

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_email_mktg.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_email_mktg.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..faa335d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_email_mktg.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +E-Mail Marketing with Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + +

E-mail Marketing with Point of Sale

+

E-mail a Document | E-mail FAQs | Office Integration

+
+

Basic

+
+

Unlock the hidden value in your retail data with e-mail marketing to get customers into your store more often and getting them to spend more when they do visit. Point of Sale makes it easy to create targeted customer lists to use in e-mail marketing campaigns.*

+

Highlights of this feature include:

+ +

*This feature requires an account with a third-party e-mail marketing provider. Terms and conditions, pricing, and service options are set by the e-mail marketing provider you choose.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer Center

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_emailing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_emailing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d19ee0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_emailing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +E-Mailing a Customer + + + + + + + + + + +

E-mail a Customer

+

E-mail a Document | E-mail FAQs | Export Data

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can quickly send an e-mail to a customer, provided you have entered their e-mail address on the customer record and have a default Windows e-mail client set up.

+

If you wish to attach a Point of Sale document to the e-mail, use the e-mailing a document procedure instead.

+

To send e-mail to a customer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the customer record in your customer list and, if not already showing, click the Details button.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Open the Contact Info section.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the e-mail address link (blue text).

    +
    4. +
+

Your default e-mail client opens with the customer's address pre-filled.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add a subject line and body text to the e-mail.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Send.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Office Integration

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_mergeduplicates.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_mergeduplicates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9589f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_mergeduplicates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + +Merge Customer Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merge Customer Records

+

Delete a Customer | Edit a Customer | Customers Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Occasionally, you may find that a customer has been entered twice in your customer list. This might happen, for example, if an associate spells the name slightly different when looking up the customer, and believing the customer isnt in the list, adds them again with the different spelling. Merging the customer records combines the sales history of the two records into a single record and then deletes the other.

+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you will be prompted to delete the duplicate record in QuickBooks Desktop as well.

+

(Pro) This feature is available at Headquarters only.

+

To merge customer records:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your Point of Sale customer list, select one or both of the customer records you wish to merge. How do I select multiple records in my list?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Merge from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Merge Customers window opens with the pre-selected customer(s) listed.

+

Merge Customers window

+
    +
  1. +

    Review the customers and make changes as necessary:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Customers.

    +
    2. +
+

If the customer being removed has a sales history, a listing of the number of sales receipts and customers orders to be updated is displayed. The customer on these documents will be replaced by the customer you selected to keep. Tell me more.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Customers.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, specify if you want to delete the duplicate from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software as well. See notes below for more information.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

How customer records are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_pastdueacct.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_pastdueacct.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7186383 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_pastdueacct.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + +Past Due Customer Accounts + + + + + + + + + + +

Past Due Customer Accounts

+

Account Overview | Charges to Account | Payments on Account

+
+

Basic

+
+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software and offer customer charge accounts, Point of Sale can let you know when a customers account is past due and block additional charges to the account. By default, the alerts and blocking of additional charges takes effect when an account is past due by 30 days. You can turn off blocking or change the past due period to 60 or 90 days in company preferences.

+

The past due amount and periods are based on your QuickBooks Desktop financial software settings and are received from QuickBooks Desktop during Financial Exchanges.

+

Setting Account Aging Preferences in QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

With the past due preference turned on and when a sale is made to a customer with a past due account, Point of Sale displays the past due alert and amount on the sales receipt and payment window. This reminds the cashier to request a payment on account or alerts them to follow other store policies, such as not giving discounts to past due customers.

+

If requiring employee logins, the ability to allow an additional charge under this circumstance is controlled by the logged-in employee's security rights. If not requiring logins, the cashier is alerted but can still allow the new charge.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

How account information is exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_ratings.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_ratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c78dfd3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_ratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Ratings + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Ratings

+

View Customer Purchase History  

+
+

Basic

+
+

Customer ratings provide a graphical ranking of your customers based on profit realized or total dollar sales volume over a specified time period.

+

 

+

Turning on Customer Ratings

+

You can turn on/off customer ratings and specify the performance criteria and time period on the Ratings & Trends page of company preferences. Only the Server Workstation can change the ratings preferences.

+

Ratings are displayed in the Statistics section of the customer form. In addition to the graphical rating, other statistics are provided for the customer, such as the last sale date and total sales, returns, and discount amounts. You can customize your customer list columns to view the graphical ratings directly in the list.

+

 

+

    

+

 

+

About Customer Ratings

+

Customer ratings use a familiar five star system, reflecting the performance of the customer over the specified time period. Each star represents 20% of the range between the highest and lowest values for your customers.

+

For example, if ranking by sales volume and the range of customer purchases for the period is from $1 to $100, customers buying from $1 and $20 would receive 1 star, buying $21-40 is rated two stars, etc., up to a five-star rating for purchases of $81-100. In theory, all of your customers could be five-star performers.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Rating

+		 +

Description

+
+

+		 +

5 Stars (81st - 100th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

4 Stars (61st - 80th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

3 Stars (41st - 60th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

2 Stars (21st - 40th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

1 Star (0 - 20th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

0 Stars (No purchase this period)

+
+

image\question_marks.gif

+		 +

No purchase ever

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Customer Rewards Program

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_resolveduplicates.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_resolveduplicates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..786bd19 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_resolveduplicates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +cust_resolveduplicates + + + + + + + + + + +

Resolving Duplicate Customer Names

+

Link 1 | Link 2 | Link 3

+

 

+

This new topic is under development. This paragraph will be a short overview of the feature or task, answering questions such as what is it, and when, why, and where do you use it.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    First step

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Second step

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Third step

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Link 4

+

Link 5

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changeexistingrewards.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changeexistingrewards.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e1c01a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changeexistingrewards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +Reward Change: Keep Existing Rewards? + + + + + + + + + + +

Reward Change: Keep Existing Rewards?

+

Modify your Reward Program | Reward Manager | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: This topic applies to the Reward Setup Changed wizard, displayed to help you make selections and confirm changes to your reward program.

+

 

+

Some changes to your reward program, such as changes to the purchase tracking period or the purchase threshold, can affect rewards that have already been earned by your customers. You tell Point of Sale on this page what to do with these existing rewards.

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Your choices on this page are:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changesummary.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changesummary.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5564dde --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changesummary.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + +Reward Change: Summary + + + + + + + + + + +

Reward Change: Summary

+

Modify your Reward Program | Reward Manager | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: This topic applies to the Summary page of the Reward Setup Changed wizard, displayed to confirm changes to your reward program.

+

 

+

This page summarizes the changes you have made to your reward program and includes:

+ +

Review this information carefully, taking reward program legal considerationsClick to display a popup topic in your area into account.

+

To revise your changes, select Previous and make changes on the previous pages. Or, select Cancel to discard all program changes.

+

If you are satisfied with the changes, select Finish. Point of Sale makes necessary recalculations and updates customer records with the results.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changetracking.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changetracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bace7a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_changetracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Reward Change: Purchase Tracking Amounts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reward Change: Purchase Tracking Amounts

+

Modify your Reward Program | Reward Manager | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: This topic applies to the Reward Setup Changed wizard, displayed to help you make selections and confirm changes to your reward program.

+

 

+

When you make changes to your program's purchase tracking period, you may affect the current purchase balances towards rewards your customer's have accumulated. Tell Point of Sale how to handle the affected balances on this page.

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Your choices on this page are:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_manager.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_manager.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eeeba37 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_manager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ + + + + + + + +Reward Manager + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reward Manager

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Rewards Program Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

All settings for your Customer Rewards program are controlled through the Reward Manager.

+

Legal Considerations for a Rewards ProgramClick to display a popup topic

+

Reward Program Terminology Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To define your program:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Rewards Manager from the Customer menu.Reward Manager

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If not already set, select Turn Tracking ON.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter an amount for the Purchase Threshold. This is the amount a customer must spend in your store to earn a reward.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Specify the Reward Amount (dollar amount or percentage) and then select $ off or % off from the drop-down list.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    (Optional) Select a Reward Expiration period.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Specify the Purchase Tracking Period.

    +
    7. +
+

You must enter a Start date; the End date is optional. To leave the program open-ended, select the No End Date check box. All qualifying items purchased during this period accumulate towards earning rewards.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Rewards Options area, make selections for how you wish to enroll members, be alerted when rewards are earned, and set a redemption blocking period.

    +
    2. +
+

Reward Manager +

+

If you enter a redemption blocking period, the entered number of days will be added to the reward expiration date. Example: With a 30-day expiration date, and a 10-day blocking period, the reward will expire 40 days after the purchase date.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

If you get the Reward Change dialog, click OK to close it. This dialog is displayed anytime you modify your rewards program, to alert you to potential effects the change may have on current and future rewards.

+

Other tasks/information available from Reward Manager:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Modify your Rewards Program

+

Use Customer IDs and Cards

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_manual.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_manual.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b28ea29 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_manual.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Manually Issuing or Canceling a Reward + + + + + + + + + + +

Manually Issuing or Canceling a Reward

+

Rewards Program Overview | Legal ConsiderationsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can manually issue or cancel a previously issued customer reward if necessary.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open the customer record in edit mode and navigate to the Rewards section.

    +
    2. +
+

A list of the customer's current rewards is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    To issue a reward, click New. When prompted, indicate if you want to reset the customer's purchase balance toward their next reward to zero (0).

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

To cancel a reward, select the reward in the list and then click Remove. Select Yes in the confirmation dialog.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Redeem a Reward

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_modify.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_modify.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec11d4a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_modify.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +Modify Your Rewards Program + + + + + + + + + + + +

Modify Your Rewards Program

+

Reward Manager | Reward Program Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can modify your reward program at anytime. But we recommend you do so with great care and take into account the Legal Considerations for a Rewards Program.Click to display a popup topic Some modifications may cause previously earned rewards to be lost or result in the creation of new rewards that didn't previously exist.

+

The terms and conditions you set for your program, and communicate to your customers, should clearly spell out the reward program parameters, but just as importantly, should specify under which conditions the program can be revised, how revisions affect the status of current members and rewards, and how the changes are to be communicated (be sure to adhere to all local regulations).

+

Program changes are made from the Reward Manager. Point of Sale will summarize how proposed changes will affect your program, including the number of rewards that may be removed or created, before implementing the changes.

+

To modify your rewards program:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Customer menu, select Reward Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make changes as necessary to the program parameters.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Depending on changes you make, you may be asked how you want to handle the following. Select Help on the Reward Setup Change dialog to learn more about how these choices affect your program. Example Clcik to expand/collapse topic

    +
    5. +
+ +

Based on your answers, Point of Sale will display the Reward Change summary page.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish to make the changes, or Cancel to leave your program unchanged.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note: You can also choose Previous and change your choices to see how that affects your program.

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_oview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0788307 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Rewards Program Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Rewards Program Overview  

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Reward Manager | Redeem Rewards

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Many retailers offer incentives to repeat customers, based upon their spending level. Also referred to as a Customer Loyalty program, this can be a very effective tool for maintaining and expanding your customer base.

+

You define the parameters of your rewards program in the Reward Manager, available from the Customers menu. Customers can be added to the program automatically or selectively as you make sales (or on their customer record).

+

Members are indicated by the rewards program icon in various places in the program.Printed receipt rewards reminder

+

Point of Sale tracks purchases for each program member and alerts the cashier when a reward is earned or when a reward is available for redemption. Merchandise returns are subtracted from the current purchase tracking balance.

+

Rewards earned and rewards redeemed are printed on customer receipts, as is the spending amount needed to qualify for the next reward.

+

Reward redemption reports are available for tracking purposes. Reward discounts are also added to the item grid of saved receipts for later viewing.

+

If you are requiring employees to log in, security rights control access to the Rewards Manager and to redemption reports.

+

In a multiple store configuration, all stores share a single reward program, which can be defined only at Headquarters. Customer purchases and redemptions made at any store are updated to Headquarters with each Store Exchange and the updated information sent back out to remote stores. Important NoteClick to display a popup topic

+

What would you like to know more about?

+

Legal Considerations for a Rewards ProgramClick to display a popup topic

+

What items qualify for earning and redeeming reward? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Reward Program Terminology Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Write Letters to Rewards Members Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

How are rewards reflected in my QuickBooks Desktop financial software? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To set up your Reward Program:

+

Note: You must have company preference I want to track customers enabled to use a customer rewards program. You can turn this preference on the General page of company preferences (access from File menu).

+

These are basic steps of a rewards program. Press F1 or select the help links on any screen for more detailed instructions for that task.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Customers menu, select Reward Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Define your program (purchase amount required, reward amount or percentage off, reward expiration date, qualifying purchase dates, and other options).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enroll customers: You can enroll all customers, be prompted to enroll customers as sales are made, or manually enroll customers by editing their individual record.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Sell and promote your program! Point of Sale tracks reward purchases, and cashiers are alerted when a reward is earned and when one is available for redemption.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use Customer IDs and Membership Cards

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_track.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_track.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2abcfcf --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust_rewards_track.htm @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Customer Rewards + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Customer Rewards

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Rewards Program Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

There are several ways to track your reward program, by individual customer or for the program as a whole.

+ +

Individual Customer Rewards Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Work with Rewards Members in Your Customer List Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Reward Program Reports Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d90293 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + +customer_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Customers: How Do I?

+

 

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Add a new customer

+

Edit a customer record

+

Use customer discounts and price levels

+

Set up special customer tax handling

+

Maintain customer charge accounts

+

Track customers by type

+

Locate a customer record

+

Delete a customer

+

View a customer's purchase history

+

Print customer records

+

Print mailing or shipping labels

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_selectfordoc.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_selectfordoc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a10c98 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_selectfordoc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Customer for Sale + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Customer for Sale

+

Customer Order Overview | Add a Customer

+
+

Basic

+
+

This information applies when coming to your customer list from a customer order to find or edit a customer.

+

To select and list a customer on a sales document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal sort, search, or filter procedures to locate the customer in your customer list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Double-click the customer or highlight the row and choose Select from the bottom tool bar.

    +
    3. +
+

While in your customer list you have complete editing abilities to add a new customer or edit an existing one. After adding or editing a customer record, choose Save & Select to both save the record in your customer list and return to the order  you were working on with the customer.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+

Customers overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_setting_account_limits.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_setting_account_limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24e6dae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_setting_account_limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Setting Account Limits in QuickBooks Financial Software + + + + + + + + + + +

Setting Account Limits in QuickBooks Financial Software

+

Maintaining Customer Charge Accounts

+
+

Basic

+
+

A customers in-store charge account limit can be defined in Point of Sale or in your QuickBooks financial software. This procedure is for setting the limit in QuickBooks. After the next Financial Exchange, the updated account limit and available credit for the customer will be reflected in Point of Sale.

+

To define a customers credit limit in QuickBooks financial software:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Customer List in your QuickBooks financial software, open the Edit Customer window for the customer for whom you would like to establish or change a credit limit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Payment Info tab.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Type in the customers credit limit.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

image\qb_cust_acct_limit.gif

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Charging sales on account or accepting a payment on account

+

How account information is exchanged with QuickBooks

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customers_tax.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customers_tax.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d895f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customers_tax.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Customer Tax Locations and the Tax-Exempt Flag + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Customer Tax Locations and the Tax-Exempt Flag

+

Sales Tax Overview | Using Tax Locations

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are two ways You can automatically have Point of Sale collect the correct amount of sales tax on sales to customers that qualify for special tax handling.

+ + +

Example: The customer is from another state and your tax regulations do not require sales tax to be collected on out-of-state sales.

+ +

 

+ +

A hard-coded tax location, named Exempt, is used on sales to customers you have marked as tax-exempt and has an automatic 0% tax rate for all tax codes. The Exempt tax location is not displayed in your sales tax preferences, but is available for filtering sales reports.

+ + +

To set up special customer tax handling:

+
    +
  1. +

    While adding or editing a customer record, select the Customer Settings section.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a tax location from the Tax Location drop-down list. Only tax locations previously set up in company preferences are available.

    +
    3. +
+ +

Or

+ +

Select the Tax-exempt check box.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Complete the record and save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+

Customers overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customersoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customersoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2072a48 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customersoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + + +Customers Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customers Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Customer Preferences | Add a Customer

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale can store a great deal information for each of your customers, including name and contact information, wether personal checks should be accepted, charge account information, and extensive notes. Customer information can be used for marketing purposes, reporting, and printing mailing labels.

+

Recording of customers on sales receipts (referred to as customer tracking) allows you to:

+ +

Pro-level user have these additional options:

+ +

Note: The availability of customer tracking features can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer Center

+ +

View customer list summary statistics

+ +

Security rights for working with customer records

+

How customer information is shared with QuickBooks Desktop

+

Protecting customers' payment card data

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup01.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bcdafbc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +Manual Data Backups + + + + + + + + + + +

Manual Data Backups

+

End of Day Backups | Automatic Backups | Restore a Backup

+

 

+

Note: This feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

 

+

Manual backups can be initiated at any time. If backing up to removable media, put the blank, formatted media in the drive before beginning.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Back Up Data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify the backup location and options:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    click OK.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale will verify the integrity of your data and perform the backup to the designated location.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Working with your POS Company Data

+

Back up to removable media

+

Backup/restore overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f100bc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Restore from a Data Backup + + + + + + + + + + +

Restore from a Data Backup

+

Backup Overview default backup location

+

 

+

If it becomes necessary to recover from data loss, your company data can be easily restored from a previously made backup.

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, data can be restored only from the Server Workstation.

+

To restore data:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Restore from backup and click Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select from one of the backup files in the default backup location (each file has a date/time stamp). The most recent backup made is at the top of the list.  Typically, this is the backup file from which you will want to restore.

    +
    4. +
+

OR

+

Select Browse  to alternate backup file and then enter the path or browse to the location of the backup file.

+
    +
  1. +

    click Next.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale will uncompress and copy the backup file to your working folder. You will be prompted to insert sequential restore disks if required.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Implement a comprehensive data protection strategy

+

Clean up your company data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9e5e99a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +Back Up to Removable Media + + + + + + + + + + + +

Back Up to Removable Media

+

Restore from a Backup

+

 

+

Backing up to removable media ensures that your data is protected even if harm comes to your computer system. Even greater protection is gained by storing the removable media at a site other than where the computer is located.

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, data backups can be done only from the Server Workstation.

+

To manually back up your data to removable media:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu on the Server Workstation, select Back Up Data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Backup to an alternate location on the Backup dialog.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Place the removable media into the appropriate drive or port.

    +
    4. +
+

Your data files may require multiple disks to successfully complete a backup, especially if backing up to floppy disks. You should have several blank, formatted disks available.

+
    +
  1. +

    Browse or enter the path to the drive or port and enter a file name.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    (Pro) If you use inventory item pictures and want to include them in the backup, select the check box for doing so.  This may substantially increase the backup time and file size.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    click OK.

    +
    4. +
+

Point of Sale will perform the backup to the designated location.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Backup/restore data overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup04.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e2b01e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + +Backups at End of Day + + + + + + + + + + + +

Back up Data at End of Day

+

End of Day Overview | Restore from a Backup

+

 

+

The End of Day procedure includes an option to back up your data.

+

 

+

Note: To include a data backup, the End of Day procedure must be run from the Server Workstation.

+

To back up data as part of End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale menu, select End of Day Procedure.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the check box to Back up your company data and specify to the default location or to an alternate location.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Specify other End of Day options, as needed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    click OK.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Backup/restore overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_3rdparty.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_3rdparty.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..245827c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_3rdparty.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + +Schedule Third-party, Automated Data Backups + + + + + + + + + + + +

Schedule Third-party, Automated Data Backups

+

 

+

Some Point of Sale users prefer to backup their Point of Sale data as part of a larger network backup. Typically, these backups are automated, using a third-party application that creates and copies the backup file to another networked computer, to a tape drive, or to an online backup service.

+

If you wish to include your Point of Sale data in a third-party backup, you will need to first shut down the Point of Sale Database Manager service. This Windows service runs on your Point of Sale Server Workstation and controls access to the Point of Sale data. Third-party applications cannot access the data if the Database Manager is running.

+

 

+

Warning  Warning: This procedure applies to the use of a third-party, automated backup application running outside of Point of Sale. It does not apply to, and may interfere with, scheduled backups within Point of Sale. Ensure that Client workstations have exited Point of Sale before shutting down the Database Manager. Any unsaved work will be lost and all workstations will be automatically disconnected from the data with this procedure.
+
+This procedure is provided as a convenience and is recommended only for advanced users with an understanding of their Windows operating system, the use of batch files, and of the third-party application being used. Intuit does not provide support for third-party applications or for Windows features. Consult a qualified computer consultant if you need additional assistance with this procedure.

+

 

+

Click a link for more information:

+

How it works Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Create the batch files Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Schedule the tasks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_automatic.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_automatic.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..60720fa --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_automatic.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Automatic and Scheduled Data Backups + + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatic and Scheduled Data Backups

+

Overview | Restoring a Backup

+

 

+

By default, your company data is automatically backed up once each day when the Server Workstation exits Point of Sale. If you prefer or if you don't exit Point of Sale each day, you may want to schedule the backup to be made at a specific time each day instead, such as during the night when your computer is otherwise not being used.

+

To change to a scheduled backup:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences > Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Data Safeguard section of the General page, select the check box for Every Day at and specify a time.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Optionally, change the location for the backup file.

    +
    4. +
+

Learn about default backup locations and file names

+
    +
  1. +

    (Pro) If you use item pictures, specify whether they should be included in the backup.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    click Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Important Note: Point of Sale must be running on the Server Workstation at the scheduled time and, if logins are required, a user with adequate rights must be logged in.  We strongly recommend you lockClick to display a popup topic your computer if it will be unattended at the scheduled time.

+

 

+

Backups to the default location (automatic, scheduled, or manual) afford a degree of protection; however, If your working data and backup files are on the same hard drive, both could be lost in the event of a major hard disk problem, natural disaster, fire, or theft.

+

For these reasons, we strongly recommend making periodic manual backups to an alternate location, preferably to removable media which is stored off-site. In the event of a computer failure or disaster, you will be very happy that you followed a vigorous backup routine including each of these components.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

End of Day backups

+

Scheduling third-party backup applications

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_filenames.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_filenames.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f737aff --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_filenames.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Default Backup File Names and Location + + + + + + + + + + + +

Default Backup File Names and Location

+

Backup Overview | Restoring Your Data

+

 

+

By default, Point of Sale creates backup files named as shown below and places them in the indicated locations. If you make manual or scheduled backups, you can change both the location and file name to meets your needs.

+

 

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, data backups can be made only from the Server Workstation.

+

 

+

Backups to Default Location

+

All routine automatic, scheduled, and manual backups to the default location are named in this format and placed in this folder. If you need to restore your data from a backup, these files are listed in the restore dialog by date, allowing you to easily find the backup you need.

+

File name format:  yyyymmdd0001.qpb

+

This file name represents a date plus a sequential counter:

+

yyyy  =  year, mm = month, dd  = day, 0001 = sequential backup number for the day

+

qpb  = the file extension for Point of Sale data files.

+

Location: Server Workstation in the following folder:

+

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Shared Documents\ Intuit\ Point of Sale n.n\Data\<your company file name>\Backup

+

Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\ Intuit\ Point of Sale n.n\Data\<your company file name>\Backup

+

where n.n = Point of Sale version number

+

 

+

Backups to an Alternate Location

+

Backups to an alternate location use the custom file name and location you specify when making the backup. You will need to browse to the same location to restore from these backups.

+

 

+

Special Data Backups

+

Special backups include those made when performing certain data-related tasks, such as when installing a program update, running the Clean Up Company Data utility, or importing data.

+

These backup files are named in the same format as your other backups made in the default folder (see above), but are stored in sub-folders of the default folder, one sub-folder for each task.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Backup Overview

+

Restore Your Data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_strategy.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_strategy.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb5f207 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backup_strategy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + +Implement a Comprehensive Data Protection Strategy + + + + + + + + + + + +

Implement a Comprehensive Data Protection Strategy

+

Data Overview | Backup and Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

The data you accumulate in your business is extremely valuable. Keeping it safe should be a top priority. Point of Sale provides several methods to help you protect your data:

+ +

General System and Network Protection

+

While the steps above are intended to protect your Point of Sale data, you should also be concerned about general system protection. Here are several more suggestions for protecting your data and the systems on your company network.

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backupoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backupoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d321296 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/backupoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Backing Up Your Company Data + + + + + + + + + + +

Backing Up Your Company Data

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Restore from a Backup | Data Protection Strategy

+

 

+

Note: Data backups can be done only from the Server Workstation. There is no need to do backups on client workstations.

+

 

+

The data that you gather during day-to-day business operations is invaluable and must be protected. Power failure, media defects, disgruntled employees, or hardware problems can corrupt or destroy your company information. Backing up your data on a regular basis enables you to recover from such events as quickly and painlessly as possible. Failure to do so puts your entire business at risk.

+

Point of Sale provides several backup and restore features:

+ +

For maximum protection, it is recommended that you do regular backups to removable media that you store off-site.

+

If you create a backup while other workstations are still using Point of Sale, only those transactions that have been updated (saved) are included in the backup file. We recommend that all workstations complete and save any pending transactions before a backup is made.

+

It is important to note that Point of Sale only backs up your Point of Sale data. Therefore, it should serve as only one component of a comprehensive data protection strategy. You must take separate action to back up other important information for your business (QuickBooks Desktop financial software records, payroll records, other applications, etc.).

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for back up/restore

+

Backup file names and location

+

Scheduling third-party backup applications

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_cleanup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_cleanup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed11e93 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_cleanup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + +Clean Up Company Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

Clean Up Company Data

+

 

+

The Clean Up Company Data procedure optimizes your Point of Sale data file, resulting in faster searches, lookups, and reporting. This procedure also allows you to remove old transactions and other information from your data file.

+

Optionally, you can also choose to compress the data file so that it takes less hard disk space. How is compressing different than optimizing the data file?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, this feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

Warning  Warning!  Compressing the data file will significantly add to the amount of time this process takes and may not provide additional improvement to performance. Compressing a large data file may take several hours and is recommended only if you are running out of physical disk space. Complete this process during off-hours as it cannot be canceled once started.

+

 

+

A backup of your current data, before cleanup, will automatically be created during this procedure.

+

Before beginning:

+ +

To clean up your data:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu at the Server Workstation, select Utilities > Clean Up Company Data.

    +
    2. +
+

The Clean Up Company Data wizard is launched.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Next to move through the wizard pages, selecting cleanup options:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Cleanup.

    +
    2. +
+

A progress dialog is displayed as the cleanup procedure is carried out.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Restore from a data cleanup backup

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_connecting.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_connecting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed61722 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_connecting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Connect to the Company Data on the Server + + + + + + + + + + + +

Connect to the Company Data on the Server

+

Data Overview | About Server/Client Workstations | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

In a networked, multi-workstation configuration, use this procedure to connect a Client Workstation to the Point of Sale company data on the Server Workstation. Your computers must be properly networked.

+

To connect a Client to the company data:

+
    +
  1. +

    Ensure that the Server Workstation is running.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale on the Client Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Point of Sale searches your network and locates the server installation of your company data.

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select the company data you wish to access and select OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, select a workstation number for this computer, and select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

If you require employee logins (previously set up), the Log In window is displayed. Use your user name and password to log in to the program.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat this procedure for each Client Workstation.

    +
    2. +
+

On subsequent launches of the Client Workstation, Point of Sale automatically reconnects to the same server/company data.

+

 

+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Install additional workstations

+

About Point of Sale licensing

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_converting.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_converting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f390031 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_converting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Convert Data from a Previous Version + + + + + + + + + + + +

Convert Data from a Previous Version

+

Data Overview | Backup/Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Point of Sale prompts you to convert company data from a previous version, if detected, when the program is first started on the Server Workstation. You can also use the second procedure below to convert previous version data at anytime in the future.

+

 

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, this feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

To convert company data when prompted on initial startup:

+
    +
  1. +

    Answer Yes to converting your prior version data when Point of Sale alerts you it has been detected.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a unique name for the new company data file and select OK.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the dialog displayed, confirm the location of the previous installation of Point of Sale and select OK.

    +
    4. +
+

Alternatively, you can browse to a different location or specify that the conversion should be done from a backup file of previous data.

+
    +
  1. +

    If prompted, be sure all workstations have closed the previous version and then answer Yes to continue with the conversion.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale copies the data files from the previous version and then converts the copied files to the current format. This process may take several minutes, as customer, vendor, and item histories are built. The total time required will vary with the size of your existing data file and hardware configuration. Your data files in the previous version are left unchanged in this process.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to close the import confirmation window when displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you require employee logins, the Log In window is displayed. Use your previous version user name and password to log in to the program.

    +
    3. +
+

To convert company data from a previous version later:

+
    +
  1. +

    Close all open windows and have all other workstations exit Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Convert from previous version and click Next.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the prompts (same as above) to complete the conversion, identifying the location and version number of your previous installation when requested.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Open a company data file

+

Share your data with an advisor or accountant

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_create.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_create.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c292af --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_create.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Create a New Company Data File + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a New Company Data File

+

 

+

Use this procedure to create a new Point of Sale company data file.

+

 

+

Note:  In a multi-workstation configuration, this feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

Note:  If this is the first time you are running Point of Sale and you have been prompted to create a company file, start with step 4 below.

+

To create a new company data file :  

+
    +
  1. +

    In a multi-workstation configuration, close Point of Sale on all client workstations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Create new company and click Next.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Enter a unique name for the new company data, then click OK.

    +
    5. +
+

(Pro) Also specify your store type and, if a remote, specify a store number before clicking OK.

+

Point of Sale displays a status indicator as it creates the new company data.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK when the confirmation dialog is displayed.

    +
    2. +
+

The registration screen (if applicable) and then the Hardware Setup Wizard and Setup Interview will launch to assist you in configuring the program for your store(s).

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0014297 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +companydata_hdi + + + + + + + + +

POS Company Data: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Connect to my company data on the Server Workstation

+

Create a new company data file

+

Open a company data file

+

Rename my company data file

+

Convert data from a previous version

+

Backup or restore my company data

+

Share my company data with an advisor or accountant

+

Troubleshoot data connection problems

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_opening.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_opening.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e5e10e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_opening.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Open a Company Data File + + + + + + + + + + +

Open a Company Data File

+

Data Overview | Backup/Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Point of Sale automatically opens the last company file that you worked with when you start the program.

+

You can use this procedure to open a different Point of Sale company file stored on the Server Workstation or to browse to a file on your network.

+

To open a company data file:

+
    +
  1. +

    Close Point of Sale on client workstations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Open existing company, and select a file from the drop-down list displayed. The list includes all company data files detected on the Server Workstation.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Next.

    +
    5. +
+

Point of Sale opens the specified company data.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Share your data with an advisor or accountant

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_pos.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_pos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..967c201 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_pos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Working with Point of Sale Company Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

Working with Point of Sale Company Data

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Backup and Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Point of Sale allows you to create a new company data file, convert data from a previous version of the software, and to open any company data to which you have access on your network. These options are available only from the Server Workstation and are subject to security rights.

+

You can send your Point of Sale company data to an advisor or accountant, who can open the file on his own computer (must have Point of Sale installed).

+

Upon initial startup of Point of Sale on the Server Workstation, you are prompted to create your company data (or to convert from a previous version of Point of Sale, if detected). If you chose not to create or convert company data initially but need to so now, or if you decide to start over, you can access these choices at anytime by selecting Company Data from the File menu.

+

Select a topic from the How Do I? link above for more information.

+

(Pro) The Server Workstation at each store creates its own company data. Once Store Exchanges begin, the shared company information from Headquarters is added to the company data file at remote stores.

+

 

+

Where is my company data stored?

+

The default locations for your Point of Sale data file is:

+

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\(Shared) Documents\ Intuit\ Point of Sale n.n\Data\<your company file name>

+

Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\ Intuit\ Point of Sale n.n\Data\<your company file name>

+

 

+

To quickly go to this location from Point of Sale:  From the File menu, select Utilities > Browse to Data. A Windows Explorer window opens to the location of your data folder.

+

 

+

Payment Card Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard (DSS)

+

If you use the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service to authorize and settle payment card transactions, you must take measures beyond the general recommendations listed above to protect cardholder data during the collection, transmission, and storage of that data. Refer to the electronic Implementation Guide for assistance in using Point of Sale within an overall system that meets the Payment Card Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard (DSS) requirements.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

General connection, performance, and networking FAQs

+

Importing data

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_rename.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_rename.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d330cb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_rename.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Rename Your Company Data File + + + + + + + + + + + +

Rename Your Company Data File

+

Company Data Overview | Backup/Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, this feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

 

+

You can rename your currently open company data file at anytime. After renaming the file, each Client Workstation that uses the file will have to search and select the new file on next startup.

+

To rename your company data file:

+
    +
  1. +

    Close Point of Sale on all Client Workstations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Server Workstation, open the data file you wish to rename (if not already open).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Rename Company and click Next.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Enter a new name for the file and click Rename. The new name cannot duplicate the name of an existing file.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Restart Client Workstations.

    +
    7. +
+

Point of Sale will search the network and locate the company data file. If a list of files is presented on the Client Workstation, select the new file name.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Share your data with an advisor or accountant

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_share.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_share.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c33b9a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/companydata_share.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Share Your Company Data with an Advisor or Accountant + + + + + + + + + + + +

Share Your Company Data with an Advisor or Accountant

+

Company Data Overview | Protect Customers' Payment Card Data

+

 

+

If you engage the services of an advisor or accountant, you can easily send them a copy of your company data for review. Your advisor must have the same version and level of Point of Sale that you use to view your file.

+

You should give your advisor a copy of your data, not your original company data file. You can continue to carry on normal activities in Point of Sale while your advisor is reviewing your data.

+

Security Note: We strongly recommend that you require user logins if sharing your data with other parties. Add your advisor as an employee and assign a user name and password for access. Typically, you would give your advisor full access rights (Owner or custom security group), but you can assign more limited rights if preferred.

+

To create a copy of your Point of Sale data for an advisor:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Back Up Data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Backup Data dialog, select Backup to an alternate location and then click Browse.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Give the backup file a unique name (leave the .qpb extension) and save it to a removable disk, CD, memory stick, or other media that you can provide to your advisor.

    +
    4. +
+

(Advisor) To access your clients data:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Create new company and click Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter a unique name for the new company data, then click OK.

    +
    4. +
+

The new data file is created and confirmed.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Restore from backup and click Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Browse to alternate backup file and then browse to locate the clients backup file on the provided media. Look for a file with the .qpb extension and then select Open.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK to restore the clients data to the new data file created in Step 2. The clients data is opened on your computer.

    +
    5. +
+

This procedure adds the clients data to your database server list. You can subsequently reopen this data by selecting Company Data Open from the File menu.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a new company data file

+

Open a company data file

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/databackup_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/databackup_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7469a60 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_data_protection/databackup_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +databackup_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Backup/Restore Company Data: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

Automatically back up my data

+

Back up as part of the End of Day procedure

+

Manually back up my data

+

Back up to removable media

+

Restore from a backup

+

Create, open, or rename my POS company data

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept301.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept301.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb3066a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept301.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Access Departments Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Departments Records

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Departments Overview

+

Access your department records in one of these ways:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept302.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept302.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3662b17 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept302.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +Add a New Department + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Department

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Plan Your Departments | Department Overview

+

To add a new department:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Department from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Or, if your department list is already displayed, select New Department from the window toolbar.

+

A blank department form is opened.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a Department name (required).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter any additional information in the optional department fields.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save or Save & New (if immediately adding another record).

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Copy a department record

+

Use a pricing formula for new items

+

Print department records

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept306.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept306.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..80377f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept306.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a Department Record + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Department Record

+

Department Field Descriptions | Department Overview

+

 

+

You can freely edit department records as needed. However, read the notes below about the effect of editing specific department fields.

+

To edit a department record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or select the department record you want to modify.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit from the window tool bar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Modify the department fields, as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

If you want to edit multiple records at one time in your department list, you can do so by turning on list edit mode.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Find a department record

+

Delete a department

+

Edit an item

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept307.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept307.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e22e6a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept307.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copy a Department Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Department Record

+

Department Field Descriptions | Department Overview

+

 

+

If an existing department is similar to one you want to add, copy the existing department and edit the copy to reflect the new department information.

+

To create a department by copying an existing department record:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your department list, highlight the department record to be copied.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy from the window toolbar.

    +
    3. +
+

All the fields from the original department are copied to a new record.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a unique Department Name and modify the other department fields, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save or Save & New (if immediately adding another record).

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Find a department record

+

Edit a department record

+

Delete a department

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept308.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept308.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..19bafc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept308.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete a Department Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Department Record

+

Find a Department Record | Department Overview

+

 

+

Use this procedure to delete a department that you no longer use. Deleting a department record does not affect existing inventory records or history documents. The department name remains in place in both of those areas and reports can still be generated for the deleted department.

+

To delete a department record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the department record that you want to delete.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From I Want To.., choose Delete Department(s).

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Edit a department

+

Add a new department

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept309.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept309.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cd0380a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept309.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Use a Department Pricing Formula for New Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Use a Department Pricing Formula for New Items

+

Item Price and Cost | Department Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sales pricing formula can be used to calculate item prices when they are first added or received into inventory.

+

When a new item is added and assigned to a department with a predefined margin or markup, Point of Sale will calculate your regular price from the average unit cost by applying the specified margin/markup. Prices for your other price levels are calculated based on the price level markdowns defined in company preferences.

+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

To define a default department margin or a markup:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the department record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a margin value in the Margin % field or a markup value in the Markup % field. Entering either results in the other being calculated and auto-filled by Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
+

My markup value sometimes changes right after I enter it. Why?Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Edit a department

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept310.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept310.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f5892ec --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept310.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print or Export your Department List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print or Export your Department List

+

Printing Basics | Department Overview

+

To print or export your department list:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your department list and select those you want to include in the output:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print departments from the Print menu or Export to Excel from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If printing, in the Print Departments dialog, select:

    +
      +
    • +

      Print all departments to include all departments currently displayed in the list

      +
      • +
    • +

      Print selected departments to include only the departments selected

      +
      • +
    +
    3. +
+

A preview of the department list is displayed. Select Print to finish.

+

If exporting, follow the on-screen prompts. Select Help on the export dialogs for more information.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Export List Data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_example.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_example.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..75f5070 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_example.htm @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + + + +dept_example + + + + + + + + + + +

Example Department Structure

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

This shoe store example uses a name and a two -character code to identify each merchandise department.

+ +

In this example, the code for the department named "Men's Shoes Athletic" is MA.

+

Our entire department structure looks like this:

+
    +
  1. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Department Name

    +    		 +

    Code

    +
    +

    Mens Shoes Athletic

    +    		 +

    MA

    +
    +

    Mens Shoes Dress

    +    		 +

    MD

    +
    +

    Mens Shoes Casual

    +    		 +

    MC

    +
    +

    Womens Shoes Athletic

    +    		 +

    WA

    +
    +

    Womens Shoes Dress

    +    		 +

    WD

    +
    +

    Womens Shoes Casual

    +    		 +

    WC

    +
    +

    Childrens Shoes

    +    		 +

    CS

    +
    +

    Footwear Hosiery

    +    		 +

    FH

    +
    +

    Footwear Accessories

    +    		 +

    FA

    +
    +
    2. +
+

Notes:

+ +

Click anywhere to close this window.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c756d4d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + +dept_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Merchandise Departments: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

View my department records

+

Create a new department

+

Use department pricing formulas

+

Find a department record

+

Edit a department

+

Delete a department

+

Print my department list

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_markupcalc.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_markupcalc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..90b3831 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_markupcalc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + +dept_markupcalc + + + + + + + + + +

Department Markup Calculations

+ +

popup; has been hidden

+ +

While you can enter a Markup % to specify your desired profit margin, Point of Sale always uses the department Margin % value for its pricing calculations. When you enter a markup percentage, Point of Sale will round it, if necessary, so that the resulting margin value is a whole number (i.e. no decimal places).

+

Example: You enter a markup percentage of 40 %. Point of Sale calculates the nearest corresponding margin (whole number) to be 29. It then calculates backwards from the 29 % margin and displays your markup as 41%.

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_select.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_select.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..58e69e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_select.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Department + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Department for Item Record

+

Add a Department | Department Overview

+

To select and list a department on an item record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal sort, search, or filter procedures to locate the department record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Double-click the department or highlight the row and choose Select from the bottom toolbar.

    +
    3. +
+

While in your department list you have complete capabilities to add a new department or edit an existing one. After adding or editing a department record, choose Save & Select to both save the department and return it to the item record with which you were working.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Plan your departments

+

Edit a department

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_structure.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_structure.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d4f9680 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/dept_structure.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Plan your Departments + + + + + + + + + + +

Plan your Departments

+

Add a Department | Department Overview

+

 

+

The number of merchandise departments you use will depend on how you plan to evaluate sales performance and on your buying strategy. You can put all merchandise into a single department, but you may want to consider the benefits of setting up a more detailed department structure. Carefully planned departments allow you to view, edit, conduct physical counts, or run reports for selected groups of merchandise.

+

Consider the following when planning your departments:

+ +

Department Codes

+

While not required, department codes provide an efficient way to locate a department record and can be useful when you wish the item department to be included on price tags where space is limited. Department codes can be one to three alphanumeric characters of your choosing.

+

View an example department structureClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a department record

+

Find a department record

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/deptsoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/deptsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ccdedef --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_departments/deptsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Departments Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Departments Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Plan Your Departments

+

 

+

In most retail businesses, related merchandise is grouped into departments. Establishing and using departments is a good way to monitor sales performance, manage inventory, and run meaningful reports, which will help you to make informed buying decisions. A well-designed department structure will also save you time and give you greater flexibility when conducting a physical inventory, changing prices, and printing tags.

+

How many departments should you have? That depends on the level of detail you wish to see on reports and how you want to work with categories of items with tasks, such as changing prices or talking inventory. Use the Plan Your Departments link above for some ideas and guidance on this important decision.

+

Each department must be identified by a unique department name. Departments can also be identified by a department code which can be used to search for a department record and is printed on price tags. Each item added to your inventory then must be assigned to one of your departments. Department options, such as default tax codes and profit margin/markup are automatically suggested when you assign new items to a department in inventory. Assigning inventory items to departments allows Point of Sale to track and report on the merchandise in each department as it is ordered, received, and sold.

+

View an example department structureClick to display a popup topic

+

(Pro) Remote stores can view department records and use them to filter reports, but only Headquarters can add or edit departments.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Department field descriptions

+

Security rights for departments

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/endofday02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/endofday02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93d3174 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/endofday02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +End of Day Financial Exchange with QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

End of Day Financial Exchange with QuickBooks

+

Financial Exchange Overview | FAQs | End of Day Overview

+

 

+

In a multi-workstation configuration, the End of Day procedure must be run on the Server Workstation to include Financial Exchange.

+

(Pro) The Financial Exchange option is available only at Headquarters.

+

To include a Financial Exchange as part of the End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure QuickBooks Desktop is running and your company file is open.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: To avoid this step set up your integrated applications preferences in QuickBooks Desktop to allow Point of Sale to automatically login.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the End of Day window, ensure that the Exchange Data with QuickBooks option is selected in the Financial Exchange with QuickBooks section.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose other End of Day options.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select OK.

    +
    4. +
+

Learn more about...

+

What information is exchanged?

+

What do I if an error occurs during an exchange?

+

How is my Point of Sale data posted to QuickBooks Desktop?.

+

How do I handle bank deposits after running Financial Exchange?

+

Can I run Financial Exchange outside of the End of Day procedure?

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/endofday03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/endofday03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..61cc428 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/endofday03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Z-Out Store Close Report: End of Day + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Store Close Report: End of Day

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

A Z-Out ("zero" out) Store Close report provides a summary of your workstations sales activities for the day and helps prepare a bank deposit.

+

To run an Z-Out Store Close report as part of the End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select End of Day Procedure from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the End of Day Reports section, select the check box to run a End of Day report and then select Z-Out Store Close as the report type.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the date period for the report from the drop-down list. For a Z-Out Store Close report, this is usually the dynamic date Today. To define a fixed date range, select Custom.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select other End of Day options, as needed.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select OK and follow the on-screen prompts.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Which Z-Out report should I use?

+

Z-Out reports

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_handlingdepositsafterfianacialexchange.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_handlingdepositsafterfianacialexchange.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bec3cde --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_handlingdepositsafterfianacialexchange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Handling Bank Deposits after Running Financial Exchange + + + + + + + + + + + +

Handling Bank Deposits after Running Financial Exchange

+

Financial Exchange Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

By default, cash from Point of Sale is placed in the Cash In Drawer account in QuickBooks Desktop, while checks and credit/debit transaction are placed in the Undeposited Funds account.

+

Learn more about using the default or custom account mappings

+

To perform a deposit after you have completed the Financial Exchange process with QuickBooks Desktop (using the default mappings), you will need to transfer the funds you wish to deposit from the Cash in Drawer account in QuickBooks Desktop to the Undeposited Funds account.

+

To make a bank deposit in QuickBooks Desktop:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, from the Banking menu, select Transfer Funds.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the accounts to transfer from and to.

    +
    3. +
+

Normally this would be a transfer from the Cash In Drawer account to the Undeposited Funds account. If you have set up custom account mappings between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you will need to specify the custom accounts that you use.

+

+

This window displays the current balances in each account.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the Transfer Amount (usually the entire balance in the Cash in Drawer account) and save the transfer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Make Deposits from the Banking menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Payments to Deposit window, select the items in the list you wish to deposit. If depositing the entire balance from the Undeposited Funds account, click Select All at the bottom of the window.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    On the Make Deposits window, select the bank account to which the funds are being deposited and save.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Alternate Method Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out Store Close reports

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..799c2f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + +eod_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

End of Day: How Do I?

+  +

This is a popup topic.

+ +

Run an X/Z-Out Report?

+

Count/balance my cash drawer?

+

Settle credit and debit card batches?

+

Exchange data with my QuickBooks financial software?

+

Handle bank deposits?

+

Initiate the End of Day procedure?

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_merchantservicebatch.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_merchantservicebatch.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..48e2c34 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_merchantservicebatch.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +Settle Merchant Service Transactions + + + + + + + + + + + +

Settle Merchant Service Transactions

+

Merchant Service Overview | FAQs | End of Day Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sale does not support batch settlements.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Merchant Service Reports

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Take payment by debit card

+

Troubleshoot

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_require_manualcounts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_require_manualcounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fce1c11 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_require_manualcounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Z-Out Drawer Count: Require Manual Media Counts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Drawer Count: Require Manual Media Counts

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

For added cash drawer control, you can require that cashiers complete a manual count of all media (currency and non-currency) in the drawer and enter those counts before a Z-Out Drawer Count Report can be completed. This procedure helps eliminate mathematical errors and identify missing amounts.

+

If you do not require manual media counts, the drawer count report can be completed by simply entering the total drawer amount on the Media Totals window.

+

To require manual media counts as part of a drawer count report

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Company from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Sales page from the preferences tree on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Require a Manual Media Count for X/Z-Out option.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_viewformerdrawercounts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_viewformerdrawercounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a13a9ec --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_viewformerdrawercounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + +View Drawer Count History + + + + + + + + + + +

View Drawer Count History

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Z-Out Drawer Count reports are stored by Point of Sale, and can be viewed at anytime by selecting View Drawer Count History from the Reports menu.

+

(Pro) Remote stores send their drawer count reports to Headquarters with each Store Exchange. At Headquarters, the list of Z-Out Drawer Count Reports includes all stores. The listed reports can be grouped in the list by store, date, workstation, etc., using standard list sorting procedures.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out reports

+

X/Z-Out basic steps

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_xz_terminology.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_xz_terminology.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..389b3c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_xz_terminology.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +X/Z-Out Terminology + + + + + + + + + + + +

X/Z-Out Terminology

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Breakouts: Listings of the total amount paid in, the amount paid out, and the net amount for each discount type. These listings are included in all X-Outs and Z-Outs.

+

Media: A general term for currency and non-currency items used as payment.

+

Currency: Bills and coins used as payment.

+

Non-Currency Media: Media other than currency used as payment. Non-currency media are payment documents such as checks, credit card and ATM/debit receipts, store credits, gift cards/certificates, etc.

+

Paid Outs and Payouts: The term "paid out" refers to payment given to the customer for any reason, such as giving change or refunding a returned item. In the list of non-currency media contained at the end of X/Z-Out reports, there is a list of Payouts, meaning cash removed from the cash drawer using the payout feature. It is important to be aware of this distinction.

+

Manual Media Count: An optional manual count of all media (currency and non-currency) in the drawer done for added cash drawer control. Can be required before a Z-Out Drawer Count Report can be completed. This procedure helps eliminate mathematical errors and identify missing amounts.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_zout_recommendations.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_zout_recommendations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..353609f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eod_zout_recommendations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + +Z-Out Report Recommendations + + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Report Recommendations

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Following are some general suggestions for determining which Z-Out report to use and when. Use the report types and frequency that best meets the needs of your business and policies.

+

 

+

If you have a single workstation:

+ +

If you have multiple workstations:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eodoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eodoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f22e156 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/eodoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + + +End of Day Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

End of Day Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

The retail day is over; the doors are locked. It is time to tally up the sales, count the money, exchange information with your financial software, and back up your data before you head home.

+

When you initiate the End of Day procedure, these tasks are carried out as you specify, prompting you for input as needed.

+

Note:  In a multi-workstation configuration, the End of Day procedure must be run from the Server Workstation if you wish to include a data backup or Financial Exchange.
+Pro Note:  In a multi-workstation configuration, the End of Day procedure must also be run from the Server Workstation if you wish to include Store Exchange.

+

To run the End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select End Of Day Procedure from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    2. +
+

The End of Day window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the individual procedures you wish to run by selecting or clearing the check boxes for each and specifying options:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Start.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter additional information as prompted.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1101.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1101.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cefa0f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1101.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + +Basic Steps to Run an X/Z-Out Report + + + + + + + + + + +

Basic Steps to Run an X/Z-Out Report

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

The procedure below assumes you are accessing X-Z/Out Reports from the Report Center. The same reports and options, though in slightly different sequence, are available in the End of Day procedure.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Cash Drawer as the report category and then select X-Out Status Report, Z-Out Drawer Count, or Z-Out Store Close as the specific report type.

    +
    2. +
+

The selected report is ran and displayed, using default settings.

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify a date/time range for the report. The report will only include information from receipts in this date range. Learn more.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If it is necessary to modify other report settings, such as filter criteria or display options, select Modify and make changes.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select OK.

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    (Optional) With the report displayed, select Memorize to save the report options. Enter a report name and select OK. The report will be added to your memorized reports list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print, Print Preview or Excel to output the report.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Z-Out Store Close report

+

How various POS actions are reported

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1104.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1104.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..af7a90d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1104.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define X/Z-Out Report Options and Filter Criteria + + + + + + + + + + +

Define X/Z-Out Report Options and Filter Criteria

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

The report options and filter criteria for X/Z-Out reports allow the definition of any combination of workstations, cashiers, date/time range, and other display options.

+

(Pro)  If ran at Headquarters, the filter criteria also includes the ability to specify the stores included (report will only include information through the last completed Store Exchange with remote stores.)

+

To define X/Z-Out options and filter criteria:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic procedure to select and run an X/Z-Out report.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the report displayed, select Modify (<Alt+M>).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Display page, select a date/time range for the report and the orientation.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    On the Filters page, enter filter criteria for the available fields:

    +
    5. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    If you want to save your report options, select Memorize Report. Enter a report name and select OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK again to close the Modify Report window and run the report.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Z-Out reports

+

General filter criteria instructions

+

X/Z-Out Overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1113.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1113.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..23326d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1113.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Z-Out Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Reports

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Z-Out or "zero-out" reports are used to close out a workstation and cash drawer for a shift or day and when closing the entire store for the day. Z-Out reports contain all the information included in an X-Out report, with additional functions as described below.

+

There are two types of Z-Out report:

+ +

Z-Out Drawer Count reports can be filtered by date/time range, workstation, store (Pro, Headquarters only), and/or associate. In addition, manual media counts can be required to ensure cash drawer accountability.

+

 

+

Note: To require manual media counts as part of drawer count report, select Preferences Company from the File menu. Then select the Sales page from the preferences tree on the left. Select the Require a Manual Media Count for X/Z-Out option and save.

+ +

Which Z-Out report should I use?

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

How various transactions are reported

+

End of Day procedure

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1114.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1114.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b31015d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1114.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + +Z-Out Drawer Count Report + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Drawer Count Report

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Follow the basic steps to run an X/Z-Out report, selecting Z-Out Drawer Count as the report type, and then continue with this procedure, when prompted to enter media counts on the Media Totals window.

+

To enter media totals:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the amount of currency that was in the drawer at the beginning of the period in the Begin field.

    +
    2. +
+

By default, Point of Sale suggests the amount that was entered in the Leave field the last time a Z-Out Drawer Count report was run.

+
    +
  1. +

    If a manual media count is required, select image\f4_symbol.gif (<F4>) in the Count field to open the Media Count window for each media type. Complete and enter the counts for each currency. The total of each counted media type is carried from the Media Count window to the Media Totals window when you select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

If not performing a manual media count, just enter the total drawer currency count in the Count field.

+

The total amount of non-currency media accepted during the period is displayed on the Media Totals window as well and cannot be edited.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Leave field, enter the amount of currency that is to be left in the drawer to begin the next period. (Point of Sale suggests the same amount entered the last time a Z-Out Drawer Count report was run).

    +
    2. +
+

The Deposit field is calculated by Point of Sale based on your currency counts and the values entered for the Begin and Leave fields.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If a discrepancy exists between what was counted and what Point of Sale has recorded, a discrepancy notice is displayed. Select Yes to continue or No to recount. If the discrepancy cannot be corrected with a recount, enter a reason for the difference or comments in the Remarks field. Remarks are printed at the end of the Z-Out Drawer Count report.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Modify if you want to change report options, such as date, store, cashier, or workstations. Changing these options causes the report to run again.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Z-Out reports

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1115.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1115.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e39e1f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1115.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +The Media Count Window + + + + + + + + + + + +

The Media Count Window

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

The Media Count window is opened by clicking the image\f4_symbol.gif icon (<F4>) from the Count field on the Media Totals window.

+

To enter currency counts:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the count of each denomination (e.g. if there are five $20 dollar bills in the drawer, enter 5, not $100).

    +
    2. +
+

Based on your counts, Point of Sale calculates and displays the amount for each denomination and the for the currency total.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to carry the currency total to the Media Totals window.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Discrepancy Warning

+

After media counts are completed and amounts are entered in the Media Totals window, select OK to reconcile the cash drawer. If discrepancies exist between what you counted and what Point of Sale has recorded, a discrepancy notice is displayed.

+

At this point, you can select Yes to continue running the Z-Out Drawer Count report without addressing the problem, or select No to return to the Media Totals and Media Count windows to attempt to correct the discrepancy.

+

Once you choose to continue, the Confirm dialog offers a final opportunity to review or make changes before proceeding with reconciliation. By answering Yes, the reconciliation is run and the Z-Out Drawer Count report is created.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out reports

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1116.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1116.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ecb0805 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xz1116.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + +ViewTransactions on X/Z-Out Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

View POS Actions on X/Z-Out Reports

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Sales and Returns

+ +

         

+

Note: On X/Z-Out reports, the term "Paidout" typically refers to money or other payment given to the customer for any reason, such as giving change for a normal sales receipt or paying a customer for returned items. However, in the list of non-currency media contained at the end of X/Z-Out reports, there is a list of Payouts, meaning cash removed from the cash drawer using the Payout feature as described here. It is important to be aware of the distinction.

+

 

+

Accepting More Than One Payment Method

+

When the customer pays for a transaction using more than one payment method, amounts are credited to the individual payment methods. If a sale were paid for with $50 cash and $75 on a credit card, the report would show a $50 cash paid-in amount and a $75 credit card paid-in amount.

+

 

+

Discounts

+ +

Non-Currency Media

+

X/Z-Out reports include itemized listings of the individual amounts paid for by non-currency media, such as check, ATM/debit, or credit card, and gift card/certificate.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

X/Z-Out basic steps

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xzout_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xzout_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5f5ca3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xzout_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +xzout_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

X/Z-Out Reports: How Do I?

+

This is a popup topic.

+

  Run an X/Z-Out report

+

Run a Z-Out Drawer Count report

+

Run a Z-Out Store Close report

+

View Z-Out Drawer Count history

+

  Define report filter criteria

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xzoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xzoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5ff5e29 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_end_of_day/xzoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cash Drawer Reports (X/Z-Outs) + + + + + + + + + + +

Cash Drawer Reports (X/Z-Out)

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | X/Z-Out Terminology | Reports Overview

+

 

+

The term X/Z-Out is borrowed from cash register systems. These reports can provide up-to-the-minute accounting of POS activities for the current sales period, help you reconcile your cash drawer(s), and help you close out the day.

+

Point of Sale provides four cash drawer reports:

+ +

All X/Z-Out reports include:

+ +

In addition, a Z-Out report can:

+ +

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

How various POS actions are reported

+

What is a Z-Out report?

+

Z-Out report recommendations

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/compatible_equipment.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/compatible_equipment.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..245362e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/compatible_equipment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Hardware + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Hardware

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Hardware Setup Wizard | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

Point of Sale has been designed to work with select industry-leading retail hardware. Although Point of Sale may operate with various other hardware peripherals, Intuit does not provide hardware support for hardware not sold by Intuit.

+

Supported Hardware: Hardware models listed in bold type in the compatible hardware lists are available for purchase from Intuit and are supported by Intuit if purchased directly from Intuit. Supported hardware is pre-configured to work with Point of Sale. The same models purchased from other sources may not be compatible with Point of Sale. Intuit does not provide support for hardware not purchased from Intuit.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found to be compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but is not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

To purchase supported hardware directly from Intuit, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us Internet connection required online

+

For the most current Point of Sale hardware drivers and installation instructions, click here.

+

 

+

Important Note: Intuit works closely with the manufacturers of hardware sold by Intuit for use with Point of Sale to ensure these devices work together and with the Point of Sale software. Hardware, such as PIN Pads and Physical Inventory Scanners, purchased from other sources may not contain the required programming to work with Point of Sale software and/or the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. Intuit does not provide hardware programming, and does not guarantee that devices purchased from other third party sources will work with Intuit software.

+

View the compatible hardware list for:

+

Cash drawers

+

Receipt printers

+

Tag and label printers

+

Card readers

+

PIN pads

+

Bar code scanners

+

Pole (shopper) displays

+

Physical inventory scanners

+

Touchscreens

+

Electronic Scale for Shipping Manager

+

 

+

About connection ports

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equi_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equi_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae694d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equi_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + +equi_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic.

+ +

Use the Hardware Setup Wizard?

+

Install supported hardware?

+

View the compatible hardware list?

+

Troubleshoot my hardware?

+

Set up a laser or inkjet printer?

+

Order supplies?

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_barcodescannerlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_barcodescannerlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc0b3c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_barcodescannerlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Bar Code Scanners + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Bar Code Scanners

+

Installing Supported Hardware | FAQs | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Any setup information provided for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

HHP Imageteam 3800LR   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

HHP Imageteam 3800LR

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

HHP SR IT5600 Cordless Linear Imager

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

HHP 3820 Cordless Linear Imager

+		 +

USB

+
+

Metrologic QuantumT MS3580 Omni-directional

+		 +

USB

+
+

Metrologic Voyager BT MS9535 Bluetooth**

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

Metrologic Voyager MS9520

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

Microvision Flic

+		 +

USB

+
+

Symbol M2007 Omni-directional***

+		 +

USB

+
+

Symbol Cobra LS1902T   Setup NoteClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

Symbol LS1908T

+		 +

USB

+
+

 Welch Allyn IT3220   Install

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

* PS/2 (keyboard) devices share the port with the keyboard. A scanner, credit card reader, and keyboard can all share the same PS/2 port. See illustration.Click to display a popup topic

+

** Requires a Bluetooth adapter be installed.

+

*** Does not scan jewelry tags.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using bar codes in Point of Sale

+

Bar code scanner FAQs

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_cardreaderlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_cardreaderlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a406314 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_cardreaderlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Card Readers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Card Readers

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware list have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Any setup information provided for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported, unless it was purchased from Intuit. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Magtek 21040110   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

ID Innovations MSR USB   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

ID Innovations MSR PS2   Install

+		 +

PS/2**

+
+

Cherry Keyboard MSR G81-7000 PS/2

+		 +

PS/2**

+
+

Cherry Keyboard MSR G81-7000 USB

+		 +

USB

+
+

Cherry Keyboard G86-62410EUAGSA

+		 +

USB

+
+

Cherry Keyboard G81-7920LUBBUS-2

+		 +

USB

+
+

Logic Controls MR 3010

+		 +

PS/2**

+
+

Dell DEL3331-33UB (ID Tech Mini Mag)

+		 +

USB

+
+

Notes

+ +

Related Topics

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_cashdrawerlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_cashdrawerlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2cf95ff --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_cashdrawerlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Cash Drawers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Cash Drawers

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Troubleshooting | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

Important Setup and Compatibility InformationClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

MMF VAL-u Line  Install

+		 +

Printer*

+
+

M-S Cash Drawer CF-Media  Install

+		 +

Printer**

+
+

APG T371-BL16195

+		 +

Printer*

+
+

APG T371-DG1616 (Use with Dell T200 printer)

+		 +

Printer*

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Troubleshooting your cash drawer

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_compatible_touchscreens.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_compatible_touchscreens.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2fcbe4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_compatible_touchscreens.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Touchscreen Models + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Touchscreen Models

+

Hardware Setup Wizard

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from Intuit, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

The hardware in this is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Any setup information provided is as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Dell E157FPT with Card Reader

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo Touchscreen HID  (F05973)

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo KE  Touchscreen (D63505)

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo  Touchscreen 1529L with Card Reader

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo 1522L  (E082911)

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo 1522L  with Card Reader (E068101)

+		 +

USB

+
+

 

+

Touchscreen use must be enabled in the Hardware Setup Wizard or in workstation preferences.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using a touchscreen

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_configure_comports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_configure_comports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a01f656 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_configure_comports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + +Configuring Windows COM Port Settings + + + + + + + + + + +

Configuring Windows COM Port Settings

+

Troubleshooting | Compatible Hardware | Hardware Setup Wizard

+

 

+

Some hardware, including physical inventory scanners, PIN pad devices, and serial models of pole display, require assignment of a Windows COM port. The COM port setting for this hardware specified in Point of Sale must match the setting in your Windows Device Manager.

+

Point of Sale will select a port setting for each piece of equipment, but Windows may assign a different port, depending on other hardware you have installed and the available ports.

+

Use this procedure to verify or select a COM port in Windows Device Manager and then make the same selection when setting up the hardware in Point of Sale.

+

To verify or configure Windows COM Port settings:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the Windows Device Manager.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Double-click Ports (COM & LPT).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Double-click the entry for the model of hardware you are setting up.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Port Settings tab.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Advanced.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Change the COM Port number to the default port assigned by Point of Sale, if it is available.

    +
    6. +
+

Note: If the default COM port is in use by another device, an unused COM Port should be selected. In such cases, you will need to change the port setting in Point of Sale to match the port selected here.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_hwsetupwiz.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_hwsetupwiz.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1ba4b1f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_hwsetupwiz.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Hardware Setup Wizard + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware Setup Wizard

+

Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic | Compatible Hardware | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

The Hardware Setup Wizard is launched automatically when you configure hardware in the Setup Interview to guide you through connecting and configuring hardware to work with Point of Sale. If you add hardware in the future, you can manually access the setup wizard from the File menu or from the hardware configuration pages in workstation preferences.

+

Important: Do not connect hardware to your computer until instructed to do so by the wizard.

+

To use the Hardware Setup Wizard:

+
    +
  1. +

    If installing hardware purchased from Intuit, put the Point of Sale CD in your CD-ROM drive (cancel the installation wizard if it launches).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Next after reading the welcome page.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the type of hardware you are installing.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Next and follow the on-screen instructions to connect, set up, and test each piece of hardware.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

About connection ports

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_illus_usb.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_illus_usb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f09ece --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_illus_usb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +equip_illus_usb + + + + + + + + + +

Illustration of USB Cable and Port

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

USB ports may be located on either the front or back of your computer.

+

 

+

image\equip_usbports.gif

+

 

+

If you have more USB devices that you have available ports on your computer, you can purchase a USB hub from your local computer or office supply store. We recommend a powered USB hub.

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_note_cashdrawer.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_note_cashdrawer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4805701 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_note_cashdrawer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + +equip_note_cashdrawer + + + + + + + + + +

Setup Note: Cash Drawer

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden

+ +

Use of a cash drawer requires a 40-column receipt printer through
+which the cash drawer is connected to the computer.

+

 

+

image\equip_install_cashdrawer.gif

+

 

+

Troubleshooting the cash drawer

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_pdtlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_pdtlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a679398 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_pdtlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners

+

Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic | Hardware Troubleshooter

+
+

Basic

+
+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+

Important Note: Intuit works closely with the manufacturers of hardware sold by Intuit for use with Point of Sale to ensure these devices work together and with the Point of Sale software. Hardware, such as PIN Pads and Physical Inventory Scanners, purchased from other sources may not contain the required programming to work with Point of Sale software and/or the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. Intuit does not provide hardware programming, and does not guarantee that devices purchased from other third party sources will work with Intuit software.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

Port

+
+

Metrologic SP 5500 Optimus S   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

CipherLabs 8000*   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

 

+

* This scanner is no longer available for purchase from Intuit.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using a scanner in a physical inventory

+

Other compatible hardware

+

About connection ports

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_pinpadlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_pinpadlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d097809 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_pinpadlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible PIN pads + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible PIN pads

+

Credit/Debit Hardware | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+

Important Note: Intuit works closely with the manufacturers of hardware sold by Intuit for use with Point of Sale to ensure these devices work together and with the Point of Sale software. Hardware, such as PIN Pads and Physical Inventory Scanners, purchased from other sources may not contain the required programming to work with Point of Sale software and/or the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. Intuit does not provide hardware programming, and does not guarantee that devices purchased from other third party sources will work with Intuit software.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Ingenico 3070 w/ card reader

+		 +

USB

+
+

Ingenico 2100 w/ card reader*

+		 +

USB

+
+

Ingenico 3010 w/o card reader*

+		 +

USB

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Installing an Ingenico PIN pad

+

Credit and debit hardware

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_poledisplaylist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_poledisplaylist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..584ac4e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_poledisplaylist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Pole (Shopper) Displays + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Pole (Shopper) Displays

+

Installing Supported Hardware | FAQs | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Logic Controls LD 9900 USB  Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

Logic Controls LD9900 PUSB

+		 +

Powered USB

+
+

Logic Controls LD 9000

+		 +

Serial

+
+

Logic Controls LD 9000U

+		 +

USB

+
+

Logic Controls PD 3000

+		 +

Serial

+
+

Partner Tech CD7220   Install

+		 +

Serial

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Pole display FAQs

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_ports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_ports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e838ca4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_ports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Hardware Connection Ports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware Connection Ports

+

Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic | Installing Supported Hardware

+

 

+

If connecting hardware to your Point of Sale workstations, you may have questions about which and how many peripherals your computer can support and what kind of port, or connection type, will be required for the hardware.

+

Important notes about connection ports:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_receiptprntrlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_receiptprntrlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e8fa69 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_receiptprntrlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,192 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Receipt Printers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Receipt Printers

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Troubleshooting | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from Intuit, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Citizen CT-S300   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

Dell T200

+		 +

USB

+
+

*Epson TM88II  Setup Note for Epson PrintersClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

*Epson TM88II USB

+		 +

USB

+
+

*Epson TM88III

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

Epson TM88IV USB

+		 +

USB

+
+

Epson TM88IV PUSB

+		 +

Powered USB

+
+

*Epson TMU200

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

HP Laser Jet 4200 PCL 6

+		 +

Various

+
+

HP Laser Jet 4600 PCL 6

+		 +

Various

+
+

Star TSP100 USB   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

Star TSP600 USB   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

Star TSP600 Parallel   Install

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

Star TSP700

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

*Not compatible with Windows Vista.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing FAQs

+

Troubleshooting a receipt printer

+

How do I set up an inkjet or laser printer?

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_tagprntrlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_tagprntrlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ddcfcde --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equip_tagprntrlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Tag and Label Printers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Tag and Label Printers

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Printing FAQs | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Zebra LP2824P USB   Install | Setup NoteClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

USB

+
+

*Zebra LP2824P Parallel  Install | Setup NoteClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Parallel or USB

+
+

**Zebra LP2844

+		 +

Parallel or USB

+
+

Cognitive Del Sol DD24   Setup

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Common issues with Zebra tag printers

+

Printing tags

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipement_drivers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipement_drivers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6bbca13 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipement_drivers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +Drivers for Compatible Hardware + + + + + + + + + + +

Drivers for Compatible Hardware

+ +

in-help popup topic.

+ +

Software drivers for compatible hardware are included on the Point of Sale installation CD in the Drivers folder. You can browse to this folder as necessary from the Point of Sale Hardware Setup Wizard or the Windows Add Hardware Wizard to select a needed driver.

+

Look for sub-folders with the hardware name to locate the driver you need.

+

Important: You should complete the Point of Sale software installation before connecting any hardware. Hardware drivers are installed during Point of Sale installation. Connecting the hardware prior to installation may result in Windows installing drivers that cause your hardware to malfunction or not function at all.

+

If you are having difficulty getting printers or other hardware to work, make sure you have installed all pending Windows updates:  Click Start and select Control Panel > Windows Updates.  

+

Internet connection required To check for newer versions of drivers for Intuit-sold hardware visit www.quickbooks.com/support/pos/hardware.

+

 

+

Drivers for Compatible Hardware from Other Suppliers

+

The drivers included for compatible hardware were current as of the compatibility testing date. Updated drivers may be available from your hardware vendor, however, these drivers have not been tested for compatibility.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8348672 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Del Sol Printer + + + + + + + + + + +

Cognitive Del Sol Tag Printer

+

Tag Printing Overview | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+ +

Leave this as a separate, regular topic, as it is called from a context-sensitive link in the program.

+ +

Setup: Use parallel connection only; USB and serial connections are not compatible. No Windows XP-specific driver was available at the time of release; use the Windows NT/2000 driver.

+

 

+

When printing:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_addtsp600_printerlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_addtsp600_printerlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57970c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_addtsp600_printerlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Adding a Printer to the Windows Printer List + + + + + + + + + + +

Adding a Printer to the Windows Printer List

+Compatible Receipt Printers | Installing Supported Equipment +

 

+

Use this procedure to add a receipt printer to your Windows printer list. The printer must be on this list before you can configure Point of Sale to use it.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Set up POS Receipt Printer page of the Setup Interview or from the Available Printers page of workstation preferences, select Add Printer.

    +
    2. +
+

The Windows Add Printer Wizard is launched.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Add Printer Wizard, click Next.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Local printer attached to this computer, clear the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer check box, and then select Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select LPT1 from the port list and select Next.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    From the Manufacturer list on the left, select Star.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    From the Printers list, select your printer and then select Next.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    In the Use Existing Driver window, select Keep existing driver.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select Next several times, accepting the default settings, until you can select Finish to exit the Wizard.

    +
    8. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_calibratezebralp2824.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_calibratezebralp2824.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1210abe --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_calibratezebralp2824.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + +Common Issues with Zebra Tag Printers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Common Issues with Zebra Tag Printers

+

Printing FAQs | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+

If you have issues printing tags or labels with your Zebra printer, we recommend you use the Hardware Troubleshooter (access from the Help menu) for assistance. The troubleshooter will help you identify and correct your specific issue.

+

Listed below for reference are some of the more common issues with the Zebra printers and suggestions for resolving them.

+

 

+

Cleaning the Printhead

+

Many printing quality issues with this printer can be resolved by cleaning the printhead with a thermal printer cleaning pen or a 90% isopropyl alcohol on a cotton swab. The thermal printer cleaning pens are specially designed to clean your printhead of even heavy abrasions. You should clean your printhead at least every five rolls of tags/labels.

+

Printhead cleaning pens are available directly from Zebra at 1-800-268-1736 or go online at www.zebra.com.
+Part Number: AN11209-1.

+

Also available is the Printhead Preventive Maintenance Kit. Part Number: 47362.

+

 

+

Status Light on the LP2824 Printer

+

The status light around the Feed button on the LP2824 printer will often indicate an error condition. Click here to view what the lights mean and how to fix the condition.

+

 

+

Calibrating the Printer

+

The printer should be calibrated any time you change label types, or anytime printing is not correctly aligned on labels. You can calibrate the printer in the Hardware Troubleshooter or by selecting the Calibrate button at the time of printing.

+

Several labels will be fed through the printer during this operation. When calibration is complete, you can roll the labels back into the printer to avoid waste.

+

 

+

Printing Jewelry Tags

+

If you are printing jewelry tags with flaps and calibration does not solve the problem, select the check box Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable functionAdjust start position for jewelry tags on the Print dialog. This setting tells Point of Sale to use extra parameters, required by some revisions of the Zebra printer, when printing jewelry tags with flaps. Likewise, if printing jewelry tags without flaps, make sure this check box is cleared (not selected).

+

If using the Zebra LP2844, a second check box Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable functionPrint Jewelry tags with flaps must be selected if the tag stock has flaps.

+

If your jewelry tag stock has wide black bars printed across the back (used to indicate where one tag ends and the next begins), select the check box labeled Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function Use black-bar indexing of jewelry tags. When using black-bar indexing, the Calibrate option is not applicable and the button will be disabled.

+

 

+

General Print Quality

+

If you have general print quality issues, such as text overlapping or running off the label, or bar codes printing too light to scan well, check your print settings to select the mode that works best for your needs (Draft Quality or High Quality) and ensure the print density (lightness/darkness) is set appropriately.

+

The High Quality printing mode gives you more control over fonts, typestyles, and alignment so the printed output looks closer to the template design yet still offers high-quality bar code printing. The Draft Quality mode prints excellent bar codes and prints slightly faster, but precise control over fonts, styles, and alignment suffers.

+

Print Dialog

+
    +
  1. +

    At the time of printing, select the Print Quality button on the Print dialog.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Print Quality dialog, choose Draft Quality or High Quality and specify a print density.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Print Test Page button.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    If satisfied, select OK and continue printing. If not, change a setting and test again.

    +
    5. +
+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_barcodescanner.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_barcodescanner.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b8b1991 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_barcodescanner.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Welch Allyn IT3220 or HHP Imageteam 3800 Bar Code Scanner + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Welch Allyn IT3220 or HHP Imageteam 3800 Bar Code Scanner

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Bar Code Scanners

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the bar code reader:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your bar code scanner.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

USB Connection

+

Connect the USB cable from the bar code scanner into an available USB port on your computer. No other setup is required.

+

What does a USB cable and port look like?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

PS/2 Connection

+

Both the bar code scanner and, if used, the PS/2 credit card reader, are installed between the keyboard and the computer.

+

The illustration below includes both of these pieces of hardware. If you are installing only one of these pieces, just bypass the one not used.

+

Cable 3 connects to a PS/2 (keyboard) port on your computer.

+

 

+

Barcode scanner/card reader setupPs/2 Port Illustration

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_cd7220poledisplay.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_cd7220poledisplay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e50cd73 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_cd7220poledisplay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Partner Tech CD7220 (Serial) Pole Display + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Partner Tech CD7220 (Serial) Pole Display

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Pole Displays | FAQs

+

 

+

Use this procedure to install and configure the Partner Tech CD7220 pole display for use with Point of Sale.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the Pole Display to your Computer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Assemble the pole display (connect base, pole and display as depicted in the pole display documentation).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your pole display.

    +
    6. +
+

Example of serial port

+

If your computer does not have an available serial port, contact your computer vendor or local computer store to discuss options such as adding an additional serial port.

+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Equipment Customer pole display on the left-side preferences list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Complete settings for the pole display as described here.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Save.

    +
    6. +
+

Test your pole display when done.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_cipherlab8000pdt.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_cipherlab8000pdt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..315d9f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_cipherlab8000pdt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a CipherLab 8000 Physical Inventory Scanner + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a CipherLab 8000 Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners

+

 

+

The physical inventory scanner is a hand-held, portable scanner that can be used to take and then upload physical inventory counts to Point of Sale.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the physical inventory scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your scanner.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To review or change your Windows COM Port Settings:

+

Both Point of Sale and your Windows operating system must be configured so that both reflect the same COM port (communications port) setting for the physical inventory scanner.

+

If your scanner doesn't work when you test it, you can use this procedure to verify or select a COM port in Windows Device Manager and then make the same selection in Point of Sale workstation preferences as described below.

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale for your physical inventory scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Physical Inventory Scanner from the left-side menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select CipherLab 8000 (USB) from the drop-down list in the Physical Inventory Scanner field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the COM Port number that matches the COM Port you assigned to the scanner in Device Manager.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Use the test button at the bottom of the window to test the device.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using the Physical Inventory Scanner

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_citizencts300_usb.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_citizencts300_usb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..593c2a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_citizencts300_usb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Citizen CT-S300 Receipt Printer (USB) + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Citizen CT-S300 Receipt Printer (USB)

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Printing FAQs

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To set up your Citizen CT-S300 USB receipt printer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Take the power supply cord and place one end in the back of the receipt printer and the other into a power source.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

     Turn the printer power on.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu in Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your printer.

    +
    3. +
+

Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.

+

What does the USB cable and port look like?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

To review or change your printer preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation, and then select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Options from the left-side menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Make choices for the various options available.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Compatible Receipt Printers

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_idinnovcardreader.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_idinnovcardreader.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3882af7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_idinnovcardreader.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing an ID Innovations MSR PS2 Card Reader + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an ID Innovations MSR PS2 Card Reader

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Card Readers

+

 

+

Both the ID Innovations credit card reader and, if used, the Welch Allyn IT3220 handheld bar code scanner, are installed between the keyboard and the computer.

+

The illustration below includes both of these pieces of hardware. If you are installing only one of these pieces, just bypass the one not used.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the credit card reader:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your card reader.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Example PS2 keyboard connections for card reader and scanner

+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Equipment Card Reader from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select MSR PS2 Keyboard Wedge in the drop-down list of compatible card readers.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_idinnovcardreaderusb.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_idinnovcardreaderusb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bdb810b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_idinnovcardreaderusb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing an ID Innovations MSR USB Card Reader + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an ID Innovations MSR USB Card Reader

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Card Readers

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the credit card reader:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your card reader.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Equipment Card Reader from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select MSR (USB interface) from the drop-down list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Your card reader is ready to use with Point of Sale!

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_ingenicopinpad.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_ingenicopinpad.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2be4d84 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_ingenicopinpad.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing an Ingenico PIN Pad + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an Ingenico PIN Pad

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible PIN pads

+

 

+

This procedure is for installing Ingenico PIN pads, models 3070/2100/3010, for use with the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service.

+

To install the PIN pad:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the File menu, select Hardware Setup Wizard.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your PIN pad.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Troubleshooting Tips:

+ +

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select PIN pads from the left-hand preferences list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select your model of Ingenico PIN pad:

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select the test button at the bottom of the window to verify the operation of your device.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Credit and debit card hardware

+

Merchant Service overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_inkjetlaser.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_inkjetlaser.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d75f5c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_inkjetlaser.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + +How Do I Set Up an Inkjet or Laser Printer? + + + + + + + + + + +

How Do I Set Up an Inkjet or Laser Printer?

+

Compatible Hardware | Printing FAQs

+

 

+

Inkjet or laser printers can be used to print Point of Sale documents.

+

To set up your inkjet/laser printer:

+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      Use the manufacturers instructions or the Windows Add Printer function to install your inkjet or laser printer to Windows.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation.

      +
      3. +
    3. +

      Select Documents & Printers from the left-side menu.

      +
      4. +
    4. +

      Select your printer from the drop-down list for each document you will print with it.

      +
      5. +
    +
    2. +
+

 Also, select a print template that matches the printer (typically one of the Letter templates).

+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      Select Save.

      +
      2. +
    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_ld9000usb_poledisplay.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_ld9000usb_poledisplay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d81e8b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_ld9000usb_poledisplay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Logic Controls LD9900 (USB) Pole Display + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Logic Controls LD9900 (USB) Pole Display

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Pole Displays | FAQs

+

 

+

Use this procedure to install and configure the Logic Controls LD9900 pole display for use with Point of Sale.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the Pole Display to your Computer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Assemble the pole display (connect base, pole and display as depicted in the pole display documentation).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your pole display.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Equipment Customer Pole Display on the left-side preferences list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Complete settings for the pole display as described here.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Save.

    +
    6. +
+

Test your pole display when done.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_mscashdrawer.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_mscashdrawer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..482d2b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_mscashdrawer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing an M-S Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an M-S Cash Drawer

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Cash Drawer Troubleshooting

+

 

+

Note: The M-S Cash Drawer sold by Intuit must be connected through a compatible Star receipt printer.  Learn more

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the cash drawer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Unlock the cash drawer.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make sure your receipt printer is installed and working. Installing supported hardware.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    When prompted by the Hardware Setup Wizard to connect your cash drawer:

    +
    7. +
+ +

Example cash drawer and receipt printer connection

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing FAQ

+

Compatible Cash Drawers

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_tsp600.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_tsp600.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0105acc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_tsp600.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Star TSP600 Printer (Parallel) + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Star TSP600 Printer (Parallel)

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Print FAQs

+

 

+

Due to frequent hardware changes, always follow the directions provided with the printer if it differs from this procedure.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To set up your STAR TSP600-Series parallel printer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches because of this, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Take the power supply and place one end in the back of the receipt printer and the other into a power source. Turn the printer power on.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu .

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your printer. Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

image\equip_install_tsp600.gif

+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation, and then select available printers.

    +
    2. +
+

For TSP600: Ensure that the Star TSP613 or TSP600 Raster Printer is in the list on this page. If it is not, follow the procedure here to add it before continuing.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

Your printer is now ready to use in Point of Sale!

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List of compatible receipt printers

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_tsp600_usb.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_tsp600_usb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f1c59d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_tsp600_usb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Star TSP100/TSP600 Receipt Printer (USB) + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Star TSP100/TSP600 Receipt Printer (USB)

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Print FAQs

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

 

+

Note: If you have previously installed a Star TSP600-Series Parallel version of this printer on this workstation and no longer plan to use it, we recommend you delete it from your Windows printer list before continuing. This will help avoid printer driver conflicts. How do I?

+

To set up your Star TSP100-Series or TSP600 Series USB printer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches because of this, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Take the power supply cord and place one end in the back of the receipt printer and the other into a power source. Turn the printer power on.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your printer. Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.   What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    3. +
+

To review or change your printer preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation, and then select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Options from the left-side menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Make choices for the various options available.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Compatible Receipt Printers

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_zebralp2824parallel.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_zebralp2824parallel.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..171adc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_zebralp2824parallel.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Zebra LP2824 Tag Printer (Parallel) + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Zebra LP2824 Tag Printer (Parallel)

+

Printing FAQs | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+

This procedure is for installing the tag printer using a parallel printer cable and assumes you have already installed Point of Sale on the computer to which you are adding the printer. Click here for instructions to install the USB model of this printer.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To connect and install the printer to your computer:

+
    +
  1. +

    To install tags in the printer, open the printer cover and follow the instructions below. When done, close the cover.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches because of this, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Plug the printer power cord into the back of the tag printer and into an outlet. Do not turn on the printer yet.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your tag printer. Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.  

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Example of a parallel port

+

 

+

Read setup notesClick to display a popup topic for this printer.

+

 

+

To review or change your printer setup in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    In point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Available Printers on the left hand menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Confirm that the Zebra LP 2824 is listed on this page.

    +
    4. +
+

If the printer is not listed, select Add Printer and follow the Add Printer wizard to install it before continuing. Note: You may need your Point of Sale installation CD to install the printer driver. Learn more

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Documents & Printers from the left hand menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

Your printer is now ready to use with Point of Sale!

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_zebralp2824usb.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_zebralp2824usb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a088883 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_install_zebralp2824usb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Zebra LP2824 Tag Printer (USB) + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Zebra LP2824 Tag Printer (USB)

+

Print FAQs | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+

This procedure to assumes you have already installed Point of Sale on the computer to which you adding the USB printer. View instructions for a parallel printer

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

 

+

If your operating system is:

+

Windows XP/2000: Use the procedure below to install the USB printer.

+

Windows 2003 Server: Before installing this printer, you must set your Disallow installation of printers using kernel-mode drivers policy to Disabled. See these special instructions here. When finished, return here and start with Step 1 in the procedure below.

+

To connect and install the printer to your computer:

+
    +
  1. +

    To install tags in the printer, open the printer cover and follow the instructions below. When done, close the cover.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches because of this, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Plug the printer power cord into the back of the tag printer and into an outlet. Do not turn on the printer yet.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your tag printer. Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.   What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Read setup notesClick to display a popup topic for this printer.

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start the Point of Sale program.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation, and then select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca5b197 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing Supported POS Hardware + + + + + + + + + + +

Install Supported POS Hardware

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Hardware | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

Select from the list below to view installation and setup information for Intuit-sold and supported POS hardware.

+

If you have purchased compatible hardware from another source, follow the installation instructions provided with the hardware.

+

For the most current Point of Sale hardware drivers and installation instructions, click here.

+

Which piece of hardware are you installing?

+

CipherLab 8000 physical inventory scanner

+

Citizen CT-S300 Receipt Printer (USB)

+

ID Innovations MSR card reader (PS/2)

+

ID Innovations MSR card reader (USB)

+

Ingenico 2100/3010/3070 PIN pads

+

Logic Controls LD9900 pole display (USB)

+

Magtek 21040110 MSR card reader (USB)

+

Metrologic SP5500 Optimus S Physical Inventory Scanner (USB)

+

VMMF VAL-u Line Cash Drawer

+

M-S CF-Media cash drawer

+

Partner Tech CD7220 pole display (serial)

+

Star TSP100 or TSP600 receipt printer (USB)

+

Star TSP600 receipt printer (parallel)

+

Welch Allyn IT3220 or HHP Imageteam 3800 handheld bar code scanner

+

Zebra LP2824P tag printer (parallel)

+

Zebra LP2824P tag printer (USB)

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Drivers for Hardware Click to display a popup topic

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_magtek21040110USB.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_magtek21040110USB.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f8b9547 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_magtek21040110USB.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Magtek 21040110 USB Card Reader + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Magtek 21040110 USB Card Reader

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Card Readers

+

To install this card reader:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and set up your card reader.  What does a USB cable and port look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Card Reader from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select MSR (USB interface) from the drop-down list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Your card reader is ready to use with Point of Sale!

+

 

+

Note:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_metrologicoptimusSP5500.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_metrologicoptimusSP5500.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a902a31 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_metrologicoptimusSP5500.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Metrologic SP5500 Optimus S Physical Inventory Scanner + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Metrologic SP5500 Optimus S Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

This physical inventory scanner is a hand-held, portable scanner that can be used to take and then upload physical inventory counts to Point of Sale.

+

Note: This scanner uses a Lithium-ion battery. The scanner will display the battery status when inserted into the cradle. We recommend you fully charge the battery by leaving the scanner inserted in the cradle with the cradle plugged into a power source before beginning.

+

 

+

To install the physical inventory scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your scanner.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To review or change your Windows COM Port Settings:

+

Both Point of Sale and your Windows operating system must be configured so that both reflect the same COM port (communications port) setting for the physical inventory scanner.

+

If your scanner doesn't work when you test it, you can use this procedure to verify or select a COM port in Windows Device Manager and then make the same selection in Point of Sale workstation preferences as described below.

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale for your scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Physical Inventory Scanner from the left-side menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Metrologic SP5500 Optimus S (USB) from the drop-down list in the Physical Inventory Scanner field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the COM Port number that matches the COM Port you assigned to the scanner in Device Manager.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Use the test button at the bottom of the window to test the device.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using the scanner for a physical inventory

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_valuline_cashdrawer.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_valuline_cashdrawer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a0dba97 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_installing_valuline_cashdrawer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing an MMF VAL-u Line Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an MMF VAL-u Line Cash Drawer

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Cash Drawer Troubleshooting

+

 

+

The use of a cash drawer requires a receipt printer through which the cash drawer is connected to the computer.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the cash drawer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Unlock the cash drawer.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make sure your receipt printer is installed and working. Installing supported hardware.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    When prompted by the Hardware Setup Wizard to connect your cash drawer:

    +
    7. +
+ +

Example cash drawer and receipt printer connection

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing FAQ

+

Compatible Cash Drawers

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_setup_notes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_setup_notes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..549fafd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/equipment_setup_notes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Hardware Setup Notes + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware Setup Notes

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Setup notes are available for the following compatible hardware.

+

What type of hardware are you setting up?

+

Cash drawer

+

Star TSP 700 receipt printer

+

Epson receipt printer

+

Symbol LS1902 PS/2 bar code scanner

+

Zebra LP2824 tag printer

+

Partner Tech pole displays

+

Cognitive Del Sol tag printer

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

About connection ports

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/windows_2003_server_group_policy_settings.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/windows_2003_server_group_policy_settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1819a0c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_equipment/windows_2003_server_group_policy_settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Windows 2003 Server Group Policy Settings + + + + + + + + + + +

Windows 2003 Server Group Policy Settings

+

Printing FAQs | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+

Before installing the USB tag printer, you must set your Disallow installation of printers using kernel-mode drivers policy to Disabled as described below.

+

To change the Group Policy settings:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Start Run.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Type gpedit.msc and select OK.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Go to Local Computer Policy Computer Configuration Administrative Templates Printers.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Double-click Disallow installation of printers using kernel-mode drivers.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Disabled form the settings tab.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select OK.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Close the Group Policy Window.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

You may now proceed with the procedure for installing the USB tag printer.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_140306_salestaxsetup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_140306_salestaxsetup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66b641c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_140306_salestaxsetup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + +Error 140306: Sales Tax Not Set Up in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Error 140306: Sales Tax Not Set Up in QuickBooks

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support Resources Support

+

Why did I get this message?

+

Sales tax has been collected on sales receipts made in Point of Sale. However, the collection of sales tax is turned off in your QuickBooks financial software. The exchange of these receipts cannot be completed until sales tax is turned on in QuickBooks.

+

Solution

+

Turn on sales tax in QuickBooks and then run Financial Exchange again. How do I?

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_150018_creditcard_processing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_150018_creditcard_processing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea05e4b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_150018_creditcard_processing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + +Error 150018: Unable to Process Credit Cards + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error 150018: Unable to Process Credit Cards

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support

+

Why did I get this message?

+

A missing or corrupted file is preventing Point of Sale from processing credit cards.

+

Solution

+

Please contact Customer Support at 800-558-9558 and reference Error Message # 150018. Our agents will assist you in resolving this problem.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_181021_couldnotcreatedata.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_181021_couldnotcreatedata.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5da1db --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_181021_couldnotcreatedata.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + +Error 181021: Could Not Create Company Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error 181021: Could Not Create Company Data

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support

+

Why did I get this message?

+

Point of Sale could not create your company data file. The most likely cause is a firewall blocking access to the data. Try the solutions below, one at a time, until the operation can be completed.

+

 

+

Important: Be sure you are logged on to your computer with Windows Administrator rights. Some firewall messages/settings and some Windows settings can be viewed/edited only by users with Administrator rights.

+

Possible Causes and Solutions for this Error

+

Cause: You have a personal firewall installed that is blocking access.

+

Solution:

+ +

 

+

Cause: The name entered for your company data is already in use on this computer or on your network.

+

Solution:

+ +

 

+

Cause: TCP/IP Protocol is not enabled on your computer or required ports are being filtered.

+

Solution:

+ +

 

+

Cause: The required database server applications are not running. This is unlikely, unless you have shut down the QBPOSDBService.exe, QBDBMgr.exe, or QBDBMgrN.exe applications via the Windows Task Manager.

+

Solution:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Company data connection issues

+

Connection, performance, and network troubleshooting

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_cannot_connect_qbfs.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_cannot_connect_qbfs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..54fd27e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_cannot_connect_qbfs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Error: Cannot Connect to QuickBooks Financial Software + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error: Cannot Connect to QuickBooks Financial Software

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support | Integration Requirements

+

Why did I get this message?

+

Point of Sale could not connect to your QuickBooks financial software company file to complete the financial exchange. If a specific problem and solution is listed in the error message, follow the procedure given. Otherwise, try the solutions below, one at a time, until the connection is successful.

+

Possible Problems and Solutions for this Error

+

Problem: Your QuickBooks financial software is not running and Point of Sale does not have permission to login when QuickBooks is closed.

+

Solution:

+ +

Or

+ +

Problem: QuickBooks is open, but a company file other than the one specified in Point of Sale company preferences is open.

+

Solution:

+ +

Problem: The Preferences window or another dialog is open in QuickBooks, blocking the connection.

+

Solution:

+ +

Problem: The general Integrated Application preference in your QuickBooks financial software is blocking access to all other applications, including Point of Sale.

+

Solution:

+ +

Problem: The QuickBooks financial company file or location specified in Point of Sale company preferences is not valid. This may apply if you have renamed, deleted, or moved your financial company file.

+

Solution:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange overview

+

End of Day Financial Exchange

+

QuickBooks Installation Options

+

Using the remote data sharing option (Advanced Users)

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_dbservices.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_dbservices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..68f9e2e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_dbservices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + +Error: Unable to Start the Point of Sale Database or Services + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error: Unable to Start the Point of Sale Database or Services

+

Troubleshooting | Technical Support

+

 

+

This topic covers some of the more advanced reasons that the database or licensing services necessary to run Point of Sale could not be started.

+

Note: If you have just upgraded your computer to the Microsoft Windows Vista operating system, the cause and solution might differ from those explained below. Click here for information in this case. The information below does apply to Vista if this error occurs at times other than immediately after installing Vista.

+

 

+

Some of the advanced settings described below should be changed by qualified users only. Refer to your Windows help system or consult a qualified computer consultant if you need assistance with these settings. Access to these settings might be restricted by your Windows user rights.

+

 

+

Possible Database Problems and Solutions

+

 

+

Problem: The QBPOS Database Manager or Entitlement Client (licensing) service has been stopped or disabled as a service on this computer.

+

Solution:  

+ +
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      On the Server Workstation, sign on to Windows as a user with Administrator rights.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      From the Windows Start menu, select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.

      +
      3. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Windows Vista Tip: Change Control Panel to Classic View to help locate this option.

      +
      • +
    +
      +
    1. +

      Right-click the QBPOS Database Manager vn service and select Properties (n = Point of Sale version).

      +
      2. +
    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      Ensure that the Startup Type is set to "Automatic" and then in the Service Status section, click Start.

      +
      2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Windows Vista users only: Select the Logon tab, and make sure the check box for Local System account is selected.

      +
      • +
    +
      +
    1. +

      Click Apply.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      Repeat Steps 3-5 for the Intuit Entitlement Service vn service (n = Entitlement Service version, may differ from your Point of Sale version).

      +
      3. +
    3. +

      Select OK.

      +
      4. +
    4. +

      Windows Vista Users: Restart your computer

      +
      5. +
    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Problem: The Windows user account for "QBPOSDBSrvUser" has been disabled or its user rights limited. This user account must exist and rights must be equal to the default Users Group.

+

Solution:

+ +

 

+

Problem: TCP/IP protocol is not installed on the computer and/or network.

+

Solution:

+ +

 

+

Problem: Some of the necessary files are missing or have been damaged.

+

Solution:

+ +

If the above steps do not correct this problem, use the Point of Sale Help & Support Resources.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_generalinstructions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_generalinstructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39710e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_generalinstructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Handling Error Messages + + + + + + + + + + + +

Handling Error Messages

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support

+

 

+

Point of Sale displays a variety of messages to alert you to potential issues related to your current activity. These messages will fall into one of the following categories:

+

image\info_icon_small.gif Information: Provides tips or information that may be beneficial for you to know, but generally do not require immediate action.

+

image\question_icon_small.gif Question: A decision or response from you is necessary to proceed.

+

image\warning_icon_small.gif Problem: These messages are often presented in a problem/solution format. Complete the steps outlined in the solution to correct the problem and allow the activity to be completed.

+

image\seriouserror_icon_small.gif Warning: Serious condition that requires immediate action to prevent loss of data.

+

 

+

Read the message carefully and follow any instructions provided.

+

Example:

+

image\error_message5.gif

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_no_internet_connection.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_no_internet_connection.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2eedbc0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_error_messages/error_no_internet_connection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Error: No Internet Connection Present + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error: No Internet Connection Present

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support

+

Why did I get this message?

+

The selected action requires an Internet connection and no Internet connection was detected or could be established.

+

Possible Problems and Solutions for this Error

+

Problem: Your Internet connection is not active.

+

Solutions:

+ +

Problem: Point of Sale is not configured to use your existing Internet connection.

+

Solution:

+

Follow these steps to fix this problem:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Workstation from the Point of Sale File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Automatic Update from the preferences list on the left side of the window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Internet Connection Setup button.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the choice labeled Use my computers Internet Connection settings to establish a connection when this application accesses the Internet.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Next and then Done to finish.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save to exit Workstation preferences.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Try the original task in Point of Sale again.

    +
    8. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields01.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa8a916 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + +Department Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Department Fields

+

Department Overview | Adding a Department

+

 

+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each department field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Dept Code

+		 +

Optional: Enter a 1-3 character code for use in listing a department on an item record and printing on price tags.

+
+

Dept Name

+		 +

Required: Enter a descriptive name for the department to assist in easy identification. This name helps you identify the department on reports and in lists. Read about planning your departments.

+
+

Margin%

+		 +

Enter a default margin percentage for use with a pricing formula. If you do not wish Point of Sale to calculate prices for new items as they are added to inventory, leave this field and the Markup% field at 0. Default = 0%.

+
+

Markup%

+		 +

Markup percentage is an alternate way to display your desired profit margin, by marking up from item cost. Entering either a margin or a markup will display an automatic calculation in the other field. Default = 0%.

+

My markup value sometimes changes right after I enter it. Why?Click to display a popup topic

+
+

[Tax Code]

+		 +

Suggested as the default department tax code specified in company preferences. Select another tax code from the drop-down list, as needed. When a new item is added to inventory with this department code, the tax code specified here is suggested for the item.

+
+

Data field overview

+

Department overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9739204 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,495 @@ + + + + + + + + +Item Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Inventory Overview | Program Capacities

+

 

+

Refer to the tables below for descriptions of available item fields.

+

Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

* indicates a required field.

+

What would you like more information about?

+

Item Description/Lookup Fields

+

Price/Cost and Tax Fields

+

Quantity Fields

+

Other Item Fields

+

Create Custom Item Fields

+

Customize Item List Columns

+

 

+

Item Description/Lookup Information

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Type*

+		 +

Used to designate the type of item: Default is Inventory. Select a different type from the drop-down list, as necessary.

+
+

Department*

+		 +

Department to which the item belongs. Required field for all items. To access your department list, press (<F4>) from the field. (Pro) Must be the same for all members of a style.

+
+

Vendor

+		 +

The primary vendor from whom you purchase the item. To search for or look up a vendor, press (<F4>) from the Vendor field.

+

(Pro)  Learn about using multiple item vendors.

+
+

Item Name*

+

( Description 1 for some upgraders)

+		 +

The principal item description field. Printed on sales receipts. Required field. Label can be customized.

+

(Pro) Must be the same for all members of a style.

+
+

Item Description

+

(Description 2 for some upgraders)

+		 +

Secondary, long description field used to record additional information. Also can be used to record additional information while making a sales receipt. Label can be customized.

+
+

Attribute

+		 +

A field used to describe an item characteristic, typically color, pattern, material, or a second size. 1 to 12 characters. Label can be customized.

+
+

Size

+		 +

The size of an item; 1 to 12 characters. This field can also be used to describe a second item attribute other than size if desired. Label can be customized.

+
+

[Item #]

+		 +

Unique number that identifies each item; corresponds to the inventory row number. Suggested by the program, but editable. Used to print item bar codes on tags and to list items on documents. Numbers greater than 99,999 not recommended as the resulting bar code would not fit on some price tags. This field supports numerical values only. If you need to enter an identifier that includes letters, use the Alternate Lookup field (described below).

+

You can have suggested numbering sequence restart from your entry in a company preference.

+
+

UPC

+		 +

Universal Product Code: The item's unique UPC/EAN identifier. Once entered, can be used to scan vendor-tagged merchandise to list on documents. This field is normally 13 characters. If a shorter number is entered, Point of Sale uses an appropriate algorithm to lengthen the entry to fill the 13-character field. Learn more.

+

(Pro) If multiple vendors or multiple units of measure are being used for an item, each can be assigned a unique UPC.

+
+

Tag

+		 +

User-defined group tag assigned to items to facilitate use of the Quick Pick feature for adding items to a document.

+
+

Alternate Lookup (ALU)

+		 +

A user-defined identifier that can be used to look up items. This field can contain text descriptions, catalog numbers, etc. Duplicate Alternate Lookups are not allowed.

+

Do not duplicate the Item # or UPC in this field. Inefficiencies in item lookups would result.

+

(Pro) If multiple vendors or multiple units of measure are being used for an item, each can be assigned a unique alternate lookup.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Price/Cost and Tax Fields

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Reg Price

+		 +

The regular price for which you sell the item.  Calculated by Point of Sale on new items if you are using a department pricing formula. Markdown price levels, if used, are calculated from this price.

+
+

[Avg Unit Cost]

+		 +

The average unit cost of the on-hand units of the item; updated by receiving vouchers, adjustment memos, or manually. If you manually edit this field, Point of Sale creates an adjustment memo to send to QuickBooks Desktop. See price and cost for more information.

+
+

[Order Cost]

+		 +

The current cost of an item charged by your vendor. The order cost is suggested on purchase orders and vouchers and automatically updated when a voucher is updated with a new item cost.

+

(Pro) If multiple vendors are being used for an item, each can be assigned a unique order cost.

+
+

MSRP

+		 +

Manufacturers Suggest Retail Price. Optional reference price that is printed on most price tags if entered. Leave blank if you do not want the MSRP printed on tags.

+
+

[Margin%]

+		 +

The profit expressed as a percentage of the price. If defined in a department record, is auto-filled and used to calculate the regular price of new items. Editable. Manually editing the margin in inventory automatically causes your item prices and the Markup % to be recalculated. Learn more

+

Margin % = (Price Cost)/Price x 100

+
+

[Markup%]

+		 +

The item profit expressed as a percentage markup over the cost. Works in the same manner as Margin %. Making an entry in this field causes Point of Sale to recalculate the item prices and margin. Learn more

+
+

[Price Levels 1-4]

+		 +

Optional item price levels, each marked down from your regular price. Used to offer different prices to different customer groups (employee, wholesale, etc.) or for other purposes, such as for a discounted sale. You define price level names and markdown percentages in company preferences and these names will be displayed in the item record and item list.

+

Once defined, price level prices are automatically updated anytime your regular price changes, or can be manually edited as needed. Learn more

+
+

[Tax]

+		 +

Tax code name: A drop-down list containing each of the tax code names defined in company preferences. By default, each new item is assigned a default tax code as specified for the associated department. Edit by selecting a different tax code as necessary. Learn more

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Quantity Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[On-Hand Qty]

+		 +

On-hand Quantity: The quantity of an item on hand at this store. Automatically updated each time an item is received, sold, transferred, or adjusted on a memo. A manual entry in this field results in an adjustment memo being created and sent to QuickBooks Desktop. Decimal quantity entries are acceptable.

+
+

Reorder Point

+		 +

User-specified company quantity at which an item should be reordered. When the combined on-order and on-hand quantity is at or below this level, the item is added to the reorder items reminder list.

+

(Pro) In the case of assembly items, indicates the point at which more should be rebuilt.

+
+

Doc Qty

+		 +

Document Quantity. Used to enter the quantity of an item to be listed on a document. Displayed only when accessing the item list from a document to select items. Enter the item quantity you want to list on the document.

+

(Pro) You can also switch to Style View and enter document quantities in the style item grid cells when coming to inventory from a document.

+
+

[On Order]

+		 +

Quantity of the item listed on open purchase orders and not yet received. Displayed in item list.

+

(Pro) Also visible by selecting Available from the Quantities area of the item form.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

[Quantity Available] (Pro)

+		 +

Quantity available for immediate sale. Calculated by subtracting the quantity committed on active customer orders from the current on-hand quantity. Learn more

+
+

BackOrd Qty (Pro)

+

 

+		 +

Quantity of this item needed for active customer orders.

+
+

[Qty] in Assembly or Group (Pro)

+		 +

In Assembly/Group item grid. Specifies the quantity of an item included in an assembly or group item.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

[Company Total]

+

[Cmp Qty] (Pro)

+		 +

Total on-hand quantity for the entire company (all stores). Select View All in the Quantity area of the item form to view. Called Cmp Qty in your item list.

+
+

[Store On-Hand Quantities]  (Pro)

+		 +

On-hand quantity for each store; designated by your assigned store codes. Select Available from the Quantities area of the item form to view. Also available in the Item Information window (<F5>) from a receipt and your inventory item list.

+
+

[Quantities for Store #]  (Pro)

+		 +

(Style View) Drop-down list of store locations. Select a store or All Locations to view quantities at the store or for the company for each style item.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Other Item Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Last Received]

+		 +

The most recent date this item was received.

+
+

Print Tags

+		 +

Check box. Select to specify that you want to print price tags for the item. If you clear the check box, tags will not be printed for the item even if it is listed in a group of items for which you are printing tags. Default is selected.

+
+

[Rating]

+		 +

Graphical indicator of item performance over time, based on user-defined time period and familiar five-star system. Learn more

+
+

[Trend]

+		 +

Graphical representation of item performance in user-defined current period compared to prior period. Learn more

+
+

Unorderable

+		 +

Check box. Select to have the items reorder point temporarily ignored and to be alerted if the item is listed on a purchase order or receiving voucher. This option can used to remove seasonal merchandise from your reorder reminders and reports.

+
+

QuickBooks Accounts

+

[COGS] [Income]

+

[Asset]

+		 +

Item mappings to QuickBooks cost of goods sold, income, and asset accounts. Defaulted to the item accounts specified in company preferences, but can be edited for individual items by selecting a different account from the drop-down list. Learn more

+
+

Unit of Measure

+		 +

Display field that can be used to indicate the measurement or quantity units by which the item is sold, such as each, inch, gallon, case, etc. Used to filter and sort the item list and reports. Select a unit from the drop-down list or select Add New to create and use a new unit.

+

Units of measure can be managed (added, deleted, reordered) in company preferences.

+

(Pro) Read Using Multiple Units of Measure and see additional fields below if you purchase and sell items in more than one unit size.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Base Unit of Measure (Pro)

+		 +

When using multiple units of measure, the smallest quantity by which an item is sold or purchased.

+
+

[Earn Commission] (Pro)

+		 +

Check box. Select to identify Items that qualify for payment of employee commissions. Default is checked (eligible). Clear the check box if employees are not to be paid commissions on the sale of the item, Learn more

+
+

Use Serial #  (Pro)

+		 +

Check box. Select to be prompted to enter a serial number when the item is listed on documents.

+
+

Custom Fields 1-5 (Pro)

+		 +

Custom item fields can be used to enter any other item information you need to track. Once defined, the fields can be used to filter lists and reports, and can be added to your printed documents using Print Designer.  Learn more

+
+

[Open Purchase Orders] (Pro)

+		 +

List of open purchase orders for the item and the total quantity on order. Select Available from the Quantities area of the item form to view.

+
+

Select a Style Template (Pro)

+		 +

Select a pre-defined attribute/size template from the drop-down list to apply it to the style grid or select Add New to create a new template. Learn more.

+
+

Vendors Alternate 2 -5 (Pro)

+		 +

(More Info section) Fields for entering one preferred and up to four alternate vendors for an item. Each vendor can have a unique UPC, Alternate Lookup, and order cost.

+
+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c85b3bc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,158 @@ + + + + + + + + +Vendor Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Vendor Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Vendors Overview | Program Capacities

+
+

Basic

+
+

This table lists the name and use of each vendor field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale. Fields marked with a * are required fields.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can customize the columns to add them.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Vendor Code

+		 +

Optional alphanumeric code, up to 3 characters, identifying the vendor. This code is printed on price tags and can be used to lookup and list the vendor on another record or document.

+
+

Company*

+		 +

Vendor company name. Required.

+
+

Contact and Address Fields

+		 +

Vendor contact name(s), address, and phone numbers.

+
+

Inactive

+		 +

Select this check box to hide unused vendors from the active vendor list and to stop exchanging the vendors information with QuickBooks Desktop Financial software. Learn more.

+
+

Vendor Notes

+		 +

Optional notes, such as shipping lead time, FOB point, etc.

+
+

Account #

+		 +

Your account number with the vendor. This number is printed on purchase orders and receiving vouchers that are created for the vendor.

+
+

Terms

+		 +

Default payment terms for the vendor. These terms are suggested on purchase orders and receiving vouchers made for the vendor. Shared with QuickBooks Desktop, if integrated. Learn more.

+
+

E-mail

+		 +

The vendors e-mail address. Entering an e-mail address allows you to send an e-mail from the vendor record and to e-mail documents, such as purchase orders, from within Point of Sale.

+
+

Vendor Website

+		 +

Record the vendors web address URL. Click Go to Web to launch your browser and view the site. Internet connection required.

+
+

Custom Fields (Pro)

+		 +

Define and use up to seven custom fields to track information not included in the basic fields. Once defined, these fields can be used to filter your vendor list and reports, and can be added to customized print templates (such as purchase orders and receiving vouchers).

+
+

QB Status

+

(QuickBooks Desktop financial software users only)

+		 +

Vendor list only. Displays the Financial Exchange status of the record: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop), Completed (sent to QuickBooks Desktop), or Error (attempting to send QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+ +

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields04.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..73bd0b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,473 @@ + + + + + + + + +Receipt Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Receipt Fields

+

Sales Overview | Data Field Overview | Program Capacities

+

 

+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each receipt field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Promo Code

+		 +

Used to record an optional promotional note on a receipt. Sales reports can be filtered by this field. You can also set your company preferences to require an entry in this field.

+

For example, if you are having a mail promotion to celebrate your business anniversary, you could record an entry of Anniv for all sales made during the promotion. Later, you could run a sales report, filtered for the Anniv entry in the Promo Code field to evaluate the effectiveness of the promotion.

+
+

[Store]  (Pro)

+		 +

The store from whose inventory the merchandise is being sold/returned. At Headquarters, can be changed to create a receipt for any store. At remote stores, this field defaults to the local store and cannot be changed.

+
+

[Date]

+		 +

Defaults to today's date; but is editable subject to security rights.  Never change your computer's system date for this purpose; doing so could result in lost data!

+
+

[Cashier]

+		 +

If security is used, the Cashier field is auto-filled with the name of the logged-in user and cannot be changed. If not using security, select a name from the drop-down list of defined employees.

+

(Pro) The cashier is the employee making the receipt and may be different than the sales Associate.

+
+

[Associate]

+

 (Pro)

+		 +

(Optional Field) Used to identify the employee to be paid a commission on the sale.

+

Above the item list: Suggested as the logged in user (if security used) but can be edited to identify the sales associate for the receipt. If you change the associate after listing items, you are asked if you want to assign this associate to the items already listed.

+

In the receipt item list or Item Information window: Suggested as the same employee listed at the top of the form, but editable item-by-item. This allows commissions to be paid to multiple employees on a single receipt.

+

Exception: If the receipt was initiated from a customer order to sell the ordered items, the Associate field is populated with the associate recorded on the order.

+

Learn more.

+
+

Item Fields

+		 +

These fields pertain to individual items being sold. See also item fields for a description of common item fields that may be available on receipts.

+
+

[Item Name]
+[Attribute]
+[Size]

+		 +

Item description fields; suggested from item record in inventory. Can be edited for individual sales if necessary.

+
+

[Qty]

+		 +

Sales Quantity: Suggested as 1. Directly edit or use the Qty + and Qty buttons to change.

+
+

[Price]

+		 +

Item unit sale price at the active price level. The default active price level is set in company preferences. Editable.

+
+

[Ext Price]

+		 +

Extended item price: Qty x Price. If you sell items costing a fraction of a cent, you can list a quantity and enter an extended price and Point of Sale will calculate and display the unit price.

+
+

[Original Price]

+		 +

Item price at the active price level, from inventory. Does not change if Price field edited. Not editable.

+
+

[Custom Price Levels]

+		 +

Item price at each of your price levels, from inventory. Your custom price level names displayed.

+
+

Item Discount Fields

+

 

+		 +

Entering a discount percent, amount, or changing the item price causes other discount fields to be auto-calculated. See giving discounts for more information.

+
+

Discount %

+		 +

Item discount expressed as a percentage of the active price.

+
+

Unit Discount

+		 +

Discount amount per item unit being sold.

+
+

Ext Discount

+		 +

Extended item discount. Qty X Unit Discount.

+
+

Discount Reason

+		 +

Can be used to filter sales reports. For manual item discounts, select from the discount reasons predefined in company preferences.

+

(Pro)  For Price Manager discounts or customer rewards, is auto-filled with reason from the applicable area.

+
+

[Tax Code]

+		 +

Suggested as the tax code assigned to the item in inventory. Select a different tax code to change the tax collected on this sale. Learn more about changing tax at time of sale.

+
+

[Tax %]

+		 +

Tax percentage applied to the item. If multiple rates apply, this field is blank.

+
+

[Tax]

+		 +

Tax amount collected per item unit.

+
+

[Ext Tax]

+		 +

Extended tax on item. Qty x Tax.

+
+

[Cost]

+		 +

Average unit cost of the item as recorded in inventory. Not editable.

+
+

[Receipt Cost]

+		 +

Extended cost of receipt item. Qty x Average Unit Cost. Not editable.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]

+		 +

Used to indicate the measurement or quantity by which the item is sold. From inventory, such as case, each, lb., yard, etc. Learn more.

+

(Pro) Can be added to printed documents, using the Print Designer. If using multiple units of measure, defaults to your sell-by unit but can be changed to sell by another unit.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + +
+

Serial #

+

(Pro)

+		 +

Field used to track serial numbers of sold items. Items can be designated as requiring a serial number entry on the item record in inventory (by selecting the Prompt option in the Serial # Tracking field,) in which case you will be prompted to enter a serial number for each unit of the item sold.

+
+

[Commission]
+[Commission %]

+

(Pro)

+		 +

Optional fields that display commission information for the sale, based on the employee recorded in the Associate field. Learn more.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Return to top

+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Customer

+

[Name, Address and other information]

+

Not available in Point of Sale Free

+		 +

Customer information fields that display the name of the customer to whom the sale is being made. Also used as the customer lookup/search field. Read more about searching for and listing a customer on a receipt here. You can require that a customer be listed on all receipts in company preferences.

+

Individual Customers: Customer full name, including specified combination and order of first and last names, and title is printed on receipts in the format specified in company preferences.

+

(Pro) Business Customers: The customer company name is displayed. Learn more.

+

After listing a customer, use the Edit  button to view or edit the customer record.

+
+

Comments

+		 +

Used to record pertinent information about the sale. Printed on copy of receipt given to customer.

+
+

Totals Area

+		 +

These fields apply to the entire receipt and located at the bottom right.

+
+

[Price Level]

+		 +

Active receipt price level. Suggested as your default price level from company preferences. Change by selecting a new level from the drop-down list.

+
+

[Subtotal]

+

 

+		 +

The sum of the extended prices for all items listed on a receipt.

+
+

Disc %

+

Discount

+		 +

Global discount percent.

+

Global discount amount.

+

Global discounts are taken from the receipt subtotal and not spread across the sold items. Entering a value in either discount field causes the other to be auto-calculated. See giving discounts for more information.

+
+

[Tax %]

+		 +

Tax percentage applied to the sale. If multiple rates apply, or some items taxed and others not, this field is blank.

+
+

[Tax]

+		 +

Total tax amount collected on the sale.

+
+

Ship Date

+

Shipping

+

(Pro)

+		 +

Scheduled date of shipment.

+

Shipping charges.

+

Select Ship These Items to enter shipping information and charges. Learn more.

+
+

Total

+		 +

Total amount due from customer (or to customer in case of a return). This amount is carried to the payment window.

+
+

[Tax Location]

+		 +

Current tax location is displayed in the receipt status bar at bottom of form. Defaults to the tax location specified in company preferences. The tax location (for entire sale) or tax codes (for individual items) can be edited, if necessary. Learn more.

+
+

[Printed Receipt Message]

+		 +

User-definable message, specified in company preferences, which is printed on the copy of the receipt given to the customer. These messages are not displayed on screen and cannot be changed at the time of sale. For example, you could use the message field to print "We Appreciate Your Business" or your return policy on every receipt.

+
+

Sales history list fields

+		 +

These fields are available only in the your list of saved receipts.

+
+

[Receipt #]

+

 

+		 +

Sequential number assigned to receipts as they are created.

+
+

[Receipt Type]

+		 +

Indicates type of receipt: Sale, Return, Payout, or Deposit.

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

Indicates status of receipt as: Regular, Reversed, Reversing. Learn more about reversing receipts.

+
+

Payment

+		 +

The payment method used for the receipt. If more than one payment method was used, Split is displayed.

+
+

[QB Status]

+		 +

If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop, displays the Financial Exchange status of the receipt: not posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop), complete (sent to QuickBooks Desktop), or error (attempting to send the receipt to QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+ +

 

+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields05.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..65dce7d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,304 @@ + + + + + + + + +Customer Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Customers Overview | Program Capacities

+
+

Basic

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each customer field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields prefilled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

 

+ + +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Accept Checks?

+		 +

The customers check-acceptance status, Yes or No. When No is selected, the cashier will be alerted when trying to accept payment by check on a receipt. With sufficient security rights (owner, manager, assistant manager pre-defined groups), the check can still be accepted at the users discretion.

+

If security is not used, the warning message is displayed, but any employee can accept the check.

+
+

Account Fields

+

Charge Account

+

[Account Limit]

+

[Account Balance]

+

[Available Credit]

+

[Past Due]

+		 +

Select the Charge Account check box to allow charge account for this customer and then enter a credit limit.

+

Customer's current charge account limit, balance, and remaining credit available always displayed here and available to view from sales receipts.

+

If a new charge sale exceeds the available credit, Point of Sale blocks the charge. Learn more.

+

The Past Due amount comes from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. You can block additional charges when an account is in a past due state.

+
+

Address fields

+		 +

Bill To Address: The customers complete mailing address.

+

(Pro) Ship To Address: Address where customer prefers to receive shipped merchandise. Default is same as Bill To address. Clear the check box and enter a different Ship To address as necessary. When making sales to this customer, shipping information can be added to the sales document.

+
+

Alt Contact

+		 +

Allows for an alternate contact name for the customer.

+
+

Company

+		 +

Name of the customers company.
+(Pro) Required when Track by Company is selected for a business customer.

+
+

Customer Discount

+		 +

Percent: A percentage discount automatically suggested against the active price level to items listed on a receipt, layaway, or sales order made for the customer. You decide whether to apply the discount or not at the time of sale. Editable (subject to security rights).

+

Price Level: Use to assign one of your predefined price levels to the customer. When making a receipt for this customer you will be prompted to apply the specified price level, which you can choose to do or not at your discretion.

+
+

Customer ID (Pro)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ 

+

Custom Fields 1-7 (Pro)
+
+
+
+
+ 

+

Customer Notes

+		 +

Customer identification number; can be used to print barcoded ID cards. Those cards can then be scanned to add a customer to a sales receipt. Automatically generated by Point of Sale; editable but use the link above read about the special format of this number before making changes.

+

Custom fields can be used to enter any other customer information you need to track. Once defined, the fields can be used to filter lists and reports, and can be added to your printed documents using Print Designer.  Learn more.

+

Use to record optional information about the customer, e.g. birthday, requested items, clothing sizes, etc. Customer notes are not exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+
+

Customer Type

+		 +

Use to categorize your customers in ways that are meaningful to your business, such as their geographic location, or how they first heard about your business. Learn more.

+
+

E-mail
+
+ 

+

 

+

OK to
+e-mail this customer

+		 +

Customers e-mail address. Entry allows you to send send e-mail or to e-mail documents to the customer.

+  +

Check box indicates if customer is willing to receive e-mail communications. Clear the check box if customer wishes to "opt out" of your e-mail communications. Learn more about e-mail marketing.

+
+

Full Name

+		 +

Displayed on documents and is comprised of First, Last, and Title in the order specified in Preferences Company Sales.

+

(Pro) For business customers: If Track by Company is selected on the customer record, then the company name is always displayed in the Full Name field.

+
+

First Name

+		 +

Customer's first name.

+
+

Last Name

+		 +

Customer's last name. Required for individual customers.

+
+

Title

+		 +

Title for customer name: Mr., Mrs., or Ms.

+
+

[Last Sale]

+		 +

The date of the customer's last purchase. Automatically updated when a receipt is updated.

+
+

Phone

+

Phone 2

+

Alt Phone

+		 +

Three phone numbers, each up to 15 characters, allowing entry of an area code and a notation such as H, F or WK.

+

Note: For easy customer lookup by phone number, use a consistent format when entering the numbers. We suggest typing in the area code last so you can quickly find a customer by his or her basic seven-digit number. You can use or omit the hyphen, but you must be consistent in order to be able to search by phone number. Example: 854-4207 (818) H.

+

If desired, the Alt Phone field can be used to sort, search, and look up customers by information other than a second phone number. For example, you could enter customer driver license numbers and then search and look up your customers by entering their driver license numbers. (Subject to local regulations).

+
+

QB Status

+

(QuickBooks Desktop financial software users only)

+		 +

Customer list only. Displays the Financial Exchange status of the record: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop), Completed (sent to QuickBooks Desktop), or Error (attempting to send QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+

[Rating]

+		 +

Graphical indicator of customer purchase volume over time, based on user-defined time period and familiar five-star system. Learn more.

+
+

Rewards Member (Pro)

+		 +

Check box to indicate customer participates in your rewards program. Can be added as a column to your customer list and used to filter the list and various reports. If the rewards program is active, a Rewards tab is added to the customer form with specific reward information for the customer. Learn more.

+
+

Tax Location

+		 +

Specify a tax location to be used for this customer on sales. When making a sale to the customer, Point of Sale will prompt you to use this tax location.

+

Note:If Tax-Exempt is selected for the customer (see below),a hidden exempt location is automatically applied and this filed is disabled. .

+

The Tax Location column/field can be added to your customer list or information panel.

+
+

Tax-Exempt

+		 +

If checked, no sales tax is collected on sales to this customer.

+
+

Track by Company (Pro)

+		 +

Select this check box to use the company name throughout the program (in the Full Name field) and to add a Customer PO# field to sales receipts and customer orders, allowing you to track transactions by the customer PO number. Learn more.

+
+

Use with QuickBooks Desktop

+

(QuickBooks Desktop financial software users only)

+		 +

Select to share the customer information with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Required to offer a store charge account to the customer. Default selection can be specified in company preferences.

+
+

ZIP

+		 +

ZIP code or other postal code, up to 10 characters (e.g., 12345-6789).

+
+ +

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields06.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields06.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7833d58 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields06.htm @@ -0,0 +1,351 @@ + + + + + + + + +Purchase Order Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchase Order Fields

+

Purchasing Overview | Data Field Overview | Creating a PO

+
+

Pro

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each purchase order (PO) field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale. * designates a required field.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can customize the list columns to add them.

+

See also item fields for a description of common item fields that may appear on purchase orders.

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[PO #]*

+		 +

By default, a sequential number, starting with 1.

+

If preferred, you can precede the number with a text string, such as the vendor name, vendor code, or the name of the associate making the PO. You can also change the starting number. See company preferences.

+

Follow the instructions provided on the help sidebar on the preference page.

+
+

Vendor*

+		 +

Required. The company name identifying the vendor listed on the PO. Select a vendor from the drop-down list, press (<F4>) to go to your vendor list, or select the Find Vendor button to search by keyword.

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

The current status of the purchase order. Automatically set to Open on new POs and Closed on filled POs. Learn more.

+
+

[Associate]

+		 +

The associate creating the PO. Automatically filled with the logged in users name or, if security is not used, name can be selected from the drop-down list of defined employees.

+
+

Date Fields:

+		 +

Most date fields are editable. Select image\f4_symbol.gif (<F4>) to access a pop-up calendar.

+
+

[Order Date]

+		 +

Default: the date when the PO was created. Editable.

+
+

[Ship Date]

+		 +

PO Ship Date: Enter the estimated shipping date for the order. Included on merchandise on-order reports.

+
+

[Cancel Date]

+		 +

Optional field. Enter the date after which delivery may be refused. You can be alerted when receiving items against a PO past is cancel date via a company preference setting, but can still accept the shipment at your discretion. If this preference is not set, the Cancel date is ignored.

+
+

[Payment Due]

+		 +

Calculated date field. Ship Date + Net Due Days from terms. Included for planning and reporting purposes.

+
+

Item Fields

+		 +

These fields are located in the item list on the purchase order form.

+
+

Ordered (Qty)

+		 +

Order Quantity: In the purchase order item list. Enter the quantity being ordered for the item.

+
+

[On Order]

+		 +

On-Order Quantity: The quantity currently on order for the item. Updated with this POs order quantity when saved. May include order quantities from other POs.

+
+

[Received]

+		 +

Received Quantity: The ordered item quantity already received on receiving vouchers.

+
+

[Due]

+		 +

Due Quantity: The item quantity remaining to be received.

+
+

[Cost]

+		 +

Order Cost: The cost at which an item is being ordered on the PO. Suggested as the current inventory order cost, but can be edited, as necessary. Up to five decimal places can be entered and are used in program calculations; though only two decimals are displayed.

+
+

[Ext Cost]

+		 +

Extended cost: The quantity ordered multiplied by the unit cost. Editable.

+

If ordering items with fractional cent costs, you can enter the quantity and extended cost, and Point of Sale will calculate the unit cost. Two decimals are displayed; five are stored and used in calculations.

+
+

[Avail Qty]
+(Pro)

+		 +

Available Quantity. Quantity available for immediate sale. Equal to on-hand quantity less quantity committed on active customer orders. Learn More.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]

+

 (Pro)

+		 +

Used to display or change the unit (size) of the item being ordered when using the multiple units of measure feature. Defaults to your default order-by unit.

+
+

Totals Fields

+		 +

These fields apply to the entire PO and are displayed at the bottom of the PO form and typically also in the purchase order list.

+
+

[SubTotal]

+		 +

The total cost (sum of extended item costs) of the PO before applying any discounts or fees.

+
+

Discount %

+		 +

Discount Percentage: Enter a percentage discount applicable to the PO. Discounts are applied to the PO subtotal. Entering a discount percentage causes the Discount (amount) field to be automatically calculated.

+
+

Discount

+		 +

Discount Amount: Enter the amount of any discount applicable to the PO. Discounts are applied to the PO subtotal. Entering an amount causes the Discount % field to be automatically calculated.

+
+

Fee

+		 +

Enter any fee applicable to the PO. For example, a special handling fee might be applied to an order.

+
+

[Total]

+		 +

The total PO amount after discounts and fees are applied.

+

Total = Subtotal Discount + Fee

+
+

[Qty Ordered]

+		 +

The total PO quantity ordered, combined for all items.

+
+

[Qty Received]

+		 +

The total document quantity received to date.

+
+

[Unfilled %]

+		 +

The percentage of the total PO quantity that has not yet been received. Updated when a voucher that references the PO is updated.

+

Unfilled % = (Qty Due / Qty Ordered) X 100

+

See PO fill status.

+
+

[Total Due]

+		 +

The total document quantity remaining to be received. Updated by receiving vouchers.

+

Due = Qty Ordered Qty Received.

+
+

Instructions

+		 +

1) Field on PO form for entering instructions to vendor regarding the order. Learn more.

+

2) Up to two lines of optional text that print on POs, but are not displayed on-screen. Defined in company preferences.

+
+

[No of Items]

+		 +

In PO List only: The total number of items (SKUs, not units) ordered on the PO.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + +
+

[Lay/SO/WO#]
+(Pro)

+		 +

PO list. If you generated the PO from a customer order, the order number populates this field for cross-reference.

+
+

Ship To Store/Address  (Pro)

+

 

+

Bill To Store/Address  (Pro)

+		 +

The number and address for the store being shipped the ordered merchandise.

+

 

+  +

The number and address for the store where vendor should send the bill for the purchased merchandise.

+
+ +

Return to top

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields07.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97a1bf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,368 @@ + + + + + + + +Voucher Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Voucher Fields

+

Receiving Overview | Creating a New Voucher

+
+

Basic

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each voucher field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Vendor*

+		 +

The vendor from whom the merchandise is received. Select the vendor in this drop-down list or choose Select From Vendor List (<F4>). Brought from a referenced PO, if applicable. Required field.

+

Upon entry, Point of Sale alerts you if open POs exist for the vendor.

+
+

[PO #]

+		 +

The number of the purchase order that the voucher is receiving against.  Displays "Multiple POs" if receiving against more than one PO.

+
+

[Date]

+		 +

The date when the voucher was created. Default: todays date. Editable with security rights.

+
+

[Associate]

+		 +

The person making the voucher. Populated with the logged-in user, if logins required.

+
+

Item Fields

+		 +

These fields pertain to the received items listed on the voucher. See also Item Fields for a description of common item fields that may be available.

+
+

[Qty]

+		 +

The number of units of an item received (or returned) on the voucher. From a referenced PO or suggested as one (1). Editable.

+
+

[Unit Cost]

+		 +

For a voucher line item, the unit cost at which an item is being received (or returned).

+

Default: The order cost from a referenced PO, or the current inventory Order Cost. Editable.

+
+

[Ext Cost]

+		 +

Extended cost: For a voucher line item, the Qty x Voucher Cost.

+

If receiving items with fractional cent costs, you can enter the quantity and extended cost, and Point of Sale will calculate the unit cost. Enter up to five decimals; only two decimals are displayed; but five are stored and used in calculations.

+
+

[Original Order Qty]

+		 +

If referencing a PO, the item quantity ordered on the PO.

+
+

[Order Qty Difference]

+		 +

The difference between the quantity that was ordered on a referenced PO and the quantity actually received.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Serial #  (Pro)

+		 +

Used to record serial numbers of received items. Learn more.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]  (Pro)

+		 +

Used to display or change the unit (size) of the item being received when using the multiple units of measure feature. Defaults to your purchase-by unit or the unit from a referenced PO

+
+

[Store]  (Pro)

+		 +

The store receiving or returning the merchandise. At Headquarters, can be changed to create a voucher for any store. At remote stores, this field defaults to the local store and cannot be changed.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Comments

+		 +

Text field for recording any pertinent information about the shipment. Select Edit Comments from the I Want to Menu if you need additional space. Comments are printed on the voucher.

+
+

Billing Information Fields

+		 +

These fields appear only if you have elected to enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale in company preferences. These fields are editable even after the voucher is saved. This information affects how the voucher is sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+
+

Already Paid

+		 +

Select this check box if you have already prepaid for the items, such as with a credit card.

+
+

[Payee Name]

+		 +

Who is to be paid for the merchandise. Suggested as the vendor entered at the top of the voucher, but can be edited to another vendor from your vendor file.

+
+

[Terms]

+		 +

Terms of payment. From the payee record, or if applicable, carried from a referenced PO. Can be edited for individual vouchers. Learn more.

+
+

Bill Date

+		 +

Enter the billing date from the vendors invoice.

+
+

[Invoice Due]

+		 +

The date that payment for the invoice is due to the vendor. Calculated from Bill Date and Terms.

+
+

Invoice/Ref #

+		 +

Use to record the vendors invoice (bill) number for the shipment. Important: The entry in this field tells Point of Sale you have received the invoice and that the voucher should be sent to your Accounts Payable in QuickBooks Desktop.

+
+

[SubTotal]

+		 +

The sum of all extended item costs before discounts, fees, and freight are applied.

+
+

Discount,Fee, and Freight  Fields

+		 +

Entered by selecting Enter Discount/Fee/Freight from the I Want To menu. Displayed in voucher totals area. These amounts may optionally be spread across the cost of the items being received. Learn more about spreading these amounts.

+
+

Discount %

+

Discount (amount)

+		 +

Enter a discount percent or amount. Making an entry in one field results in the other being calculated. If referencing a PO with a discount entered, the PO discount is proportionally carried to the voucher. These fields are editable after the voucher is saved, if not spread across items.

+
+

Freight

+		 +

Use to record freight charges. This field is editable after the voucher is saved, if not spread across items.

+
+

Fee

+		 +

Use to record vendor charges such as order fees. If referencing a PO with a fee entered, you are alerted and can transfer the fee to the voucher at your discretion. This field is editable after the voucher is saved, if not spreading across items.

+
+

[Total]

+		 +

The voucher total after all discounts, fees, and freight are applied.

+
+

[Printed Message]

+		 +

Not displayed on voucher form. One or two lines of optional text, defined in company preferences, that is printed on vouchers.

+
+

Receiving History List Fields

+		 +

These fields are displayed only in your list of saved vouchers. You may have to customize the list columns to see them.

+
+

[Voucher #]

+		 +

Sequential document number, assigned by Point of Sale.

+
+

[Type]

+		 +

Type of voucher: Receiving or Return.

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

Receiving History list. Indicates status of voucher: Regular, Reversed, or Reversing. See Reversing a Voucher for more information on reversing.

+
+

[QB Status]

+

(QuickBooks Desktop financial software users only)

+		 +

Receiving History list. Displays the status of financial exchange for a voucher: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop), Complete (sent to QuickBooks Desktop), Unbilled Purchases (merchandise has been received on a voucher but has yet to be billed), or error (attempting to send the voucher to QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+ +

 

+

Return to top

+

Data field overview

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields08.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..597f135 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,318 @@ + + + + + + + +Adjustment Memo Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Adjustment Memo Fields

+

Adjustments Overview | Creating an Adjustment Memo

+
+

Basic

+
+

Refer to the tables below for descriptions of each adjustment memo field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

See also item fields for a description of common item fields that may appear on documents.

+

 

+

Cost Memos Fields:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Old Cost]

+		 +

In Item List: Average unit cost for this item before adjustment.

+
+

New Cost

+		 +

In Item List: Enter the adjusted average unit cost.

+
+

[Diff Cost]

+		 +

In Item List:  Difference in cost for the item: New Cost Old Cost

+
+

[Old Value]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history: The total cost for all items listed on the memo before the adjustment.

+
+

[New Value]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history: The total cost for all items listed on the memo after the adjustment.

+
+

[Value Change]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history: Total difference in cost for all items on the memo. New Value Old Value

+
+

[Qty On-Hand]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history list: Total combined quantity on-hand for all items on this memo.

+
+

[Current Qty]

+		 +

In Item list: Current item on-hand quantity. This dynamic field shows the current inventory quantity, even when viewing saved cost memos (i.e. not the quantity at the time memo was created).

+
+

 

+

Quantity Memos Fields:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Old Qty]

+		 +

In Item List: Quantity on hand for this item before adjustment.

+

In Totals area and Adjustment History:  Total quantity on hand for all items on this memo before adjustment.

+
+

New Qty

+		 +

In Item List: Enter the adjusted quantity for the item. Becomes the new inventory quantity after saving.

+

In Totals area and Adjustment history: Total quantity on hand for all items on this memo after adjustment. Not editable.

+
+

[Diff Qty]

+		 +

In Item List: Difference in quantity for the item: New Qty Old Qty

+
+

[Qty Change]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history: Total difference in quantity for all items on the memo: New Qty Old Qty

+
+

[Value Change]

+		 +

In Totals and Adjustment history: Total difference in inventory value due to the quantity changes recorded on the memo. For example, if an item costs $5, and the quantity changes from 5 to 4, the value change is -$5. If the quantity changes from 5 to 7, the value change is $10.

+
+ + + + + +
+

Serial # (Pro)

+		 +

Optional: Used to record item serial number(s) for the adjusted quantities.

+
+ + + + + +
+

[Store]  Pro)

+		 +

Headquarters only. Select the store for which you are making the adjustment memo. Default is Headquarters store. Editable

+
+

 

+

Common Memo Fields:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Associate

+		 +

The employee making the memo. Auto-filled if requiring employee login. If not requiring login, optionally select a name from the drop-down list.

+
+

Comment

+		 +

For many actions in which memos are automatically generated, the Comment field will contain a description of why the memo was created. For example, Assembly created from inventory is the comment for a memo generated when assembly items are created. For manually created memos, enter a comment at your discretion.

+
+

Date

+		 +

The date the memo was created. Editable, subject to security rights.

+
+

[QB Status]

+

(QuickBooks financial software users only)

+		 +

In Adjustment History list: Displays the status of Financial Exchange for a memo: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks), Complete (sent to QuickBooks), or Error (attempting to send the memo to QuickBooks resulted in an error). Learn more

+
+

Reason

+		 +

Required field.  Enter the reason for the adjustment or select from the drop-down list of predefined reasons.

+

In the case of system-generated memos, the Reason field will be auto-filled: adjustment when manually adding items to inventory (Man Adj), building an assembly (CreatAsm), breaking an assembly (Brk Asm), etc.

+
+

[Source]

+		 +

The action or module that created the memo: manually created memo (Manual), reversed in memo module (Reverse), physical inventory (Physical) inventory adjustment (Inventory), Assembly item (Assembly).

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

In Adjustment History list: Shows the memo status: Regular, Reversed, or Reversing.  Learn more.

+
+

[Type]

+		 +

In Adjustment History list: The inventory value being adjusted: Quantity or Cost.

+
+

[Qty On-Hand]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history list: Total combined quantity on-hand for all items on this memo.

+
+

[Current Qty]

+		 +

(Item list) Current item on-hand quantity in inventory. This dynamic field shows the current inventory quantity, even when viewing former cost memos (i.e. not the quantity at the time memo was created).

+
+ + + + + +
+

[Unit of Measure] (Pro)

+		 +

Used to display the base unit of measure (size) of the item being adjusted when using the multiple units of measure feature. Read only.

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+

Data fields overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields09.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields09.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04ce97c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields09.htm @@ -0,0 +1,384 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Order Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Order Fields

+

Customer Order Overview | Program Capacities

+
+

Pro

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each customer order field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

See also item fields for a description of common item fields that may appear on documents.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Address]

+		 +

Contains the company name (if any), the address, and phone number for the customer listed on the order. Taken from the customers record. To edit a customers information, click the Edit button next to this field to open the appropriate record for editing.

+
+

[Amount]

+		 +

On the Payment History screen. The amount of a particular deposit.

+
+

Assigned

+		 +

Work order only. Select the employee to whom the service job is to assigned. Suggested as the logged in employee. As the work progresses, this field can be edited as necessary. The Assigned field can be used to filter the work order list and reports.

+
+

[Associate]

+		 +

Header and item list. Suggested as the logged in employee, but can be edited for the entire document (header field) or item-by-item (in the item list) for the purpose of tracking sales commissions.

+
+

[Balance Due]

+		 +

The balance remaining on the customer order. (Total Deposit Balance)

+
+

[Cashier]

+		 +

Auto-filled with the logged in employees name and cannot be changed if logins are required.

+
+

[Commission %]

+		 +

Item list. The commission rate assigned to the specified Associate, if item eligible for commissions.

+
+

[Commission Amount]

+		 +

Item list. The commission amount for the item, based on the item price and the Associates commission percentage, if item eligible for commissions.

+
+

Customer

+		 +

Required. The customers name with title, or company name, from the customer record. This field is also used as a customer lookup/search field. Enter a customers first or last name, company name, phone number, or a search keyword and press <Enter> or click the Find Customer button.

+
+

Customer PO #

+		 +

On orders for customers being tracked as businesses, this field is added to the Customer Info section of the order. Use to record the customer's purchase order number.

+
+

[Deposit Balance]

+		 +

The sum of all deposits received, less any deposits already applied toward sale.

+
+

[Dep Receipt #]

+		 +

Payment History screen. Deposit receipt number; sequential number assigned to the receipt used to record the deposit.

+
+

Description of problem

+		 +

Work orders only. Use to record the service to be performed and any special instructions. Select the Edit Instructions icon in this field if more space is needed.

+
+

Discount Fields
+ 

+

   Discount

+		 +

Enter any discount amount or percent and Point of Sale calculates the others.

+

Totals area: Global discount amount for the customer order.

+
+

   Discount %

+		 +

Item list: A percentage discount applied to the specific item price.

+

Totals area: A global percentage discount applied to the entire document (subtotal).

+
+

   Unit Discount

+		 +

Item list: A discount amount applied to the specific item price.

+
+

   Ext Discount

+		 +

Item list: Extended item discount. (Order Qty x Unit Discount)

+
+

   Disc Type

+		 +

Item list. Allows you to specify the reason for an item discount. Discount types can be customized in company preferences and used to filter reports.

+
+

[<Document> #]

+		 +

Examples: Layaway #, Sales Order #, or Work Order #. Sequential number assigned by Point of Sale using a separate sequence for each order type. The numbering format can be customized for each order type in company preferences.

+
+

Due Date

+		 +

Used on work orders to record the expected completion date.

+
+

[Ext. Price]

+		 +

Item list. The extended price of a customer order item (Price X Qty)

+
+

Instructions

+		 +

Layaways/Sales Orders. Optional instructions field. Click the edit instructions field for more room to record notes.

+
+

[Order Date]

+		 +

The date the customer order was created. Default: the current date.

+
+

Ordered

+		 +

Item list: The quantity of an item being ordered. Suggested as one (1) or the Doc QtyClick to display a popup topic transferred from inventory. Editable.

+
+

[Payment]

+		 +

Payment History screen. The payment type (cash, credit card, check, etc.) used to make the deposit.

+
+

Price

+		 +

Item list. The price of the item for this particular customer order. Suggested is the inventory price for the current price level. Enter new price if necessary; entries here do not affect inventory prices.

+
+

Price Level

+		 +

The price level applied to the order. Select a new price level from the drop-down list to change.

+
+

Promo Code

+		 +

Optional field used to record a miscellaneous note on a customer order, such as a note identifying a special sale. An entry in this field can be required in by a company preference and used to filter reports.

+
+

[Qty Due]

+		 +

Item list. The item quantity remaining to be received by the customer.  (Qty Due =Ordered Sold)

+
+

[Reverse]

+		 +

Payment History screen. If a receipt used to take a deposit has been reversed, Reversed is displayed in this field. Receipts that reverse a deposit receipt show Reversing in this field.

+
+

Shipping

+		 +

Enter an optional amount for shipping charges. On sales orders, you can select Shipping Information from the I Want To menu to specify provider and shipping address.

+
+

[Sold]

+		 +

Item list. The item quantity already sold to the customer.

+
+

Status

+		 +

Current status of the order: Open, Closed, Pending or a custom status you have defined. Used to track and filter the progression of orders for viewing and reporting. Learn more.

+
+

Subtotal

+		 +

The total amount due for the customer order before adding discounts, taxes or shipping costs.

+
+

Tax

+		 +

The total tax being charged for the customer order.

+
+

Total

+		 +

The total amount for the customer order, including all taxes, charges and discounts.

+
+

Unfilled %

+		 +

Order Lists: Percentage of the order not yet sold to the customer, based on total order quantities.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]

+		 +

Used to change the unit (size) of the item being sold when using the multiple units of measure feature. Defaults to your default sell-by unit.

+
+ +

Return to Top

+

Creating a customer order

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields10.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b910e09 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Information (Data) Fields Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Information (Data) Fields Overview

+

Entering data in a field | Program capacities

+

 

+

Data fields in Point of Sale are where you enter or select the information applying to the record or document with which you are working. Choose a data field topic below to see a listing and usage for the fields available in that area.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown in the fields tables are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

 

+

All Levels

+

Department fields

+

Document item list fields

+

Inventory item fields

+

Price Manager fields

+

Receipt fields

+

Customizing field labels

+

 

+

Basic and Pro

+

Adjustment memo fields

+

Customer fields

+

Purchase order fields

+

Vendor fields

+

Voucher fields

+

 

+

Pro Only

+

Customer order fields

+

Transfer slip fields

+

Using custom fields

+

Changing fields on printed documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields11.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..222d298 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Document Item List Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Document Item List Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Listing Items on Documents

+

 

+

The document item list is included on documents is for the purpose of listing the items being processed. The document item list contains details such as description fields, price fields, discount fields, etc. The fields included will vary depending on the current document.

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields12.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields12.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c7b2fd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields12.htm @@ -0,0 +1,286 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Manager Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Manager Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Price Manager Overview

+

 

+

Refer to the tables below for descriptions of each price change and discount pricing field. Fields shown in brackets, for example [Current Price], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, the columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can customize the columns to add them.

+

 

+

Price Change Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Current Price]

+		 +

The current price at the selected price level in inventory. Also called the Old Price, which is displayed after applying the changes to inventory.

+
+

New Price

+		 +

The calculated or manually entered new price. Not in effect until Apply Changes to Inventory is selected on the price change record.

+

Current Price Price Change = New Price

+
+

Price Change

+		 +

The dollar amount of the price change. A price reduction is shown as a negative value.

+
+

% Price Change

+		 +

The price change expressed as a percentage of the current price. A price reduction is shown as a negative value.

+
+

New Profit

+		 +

The profit amount for the item at the new price.

+
+

New Margin %

+		 +

The profit expressed as a percentage at the new price.

+
+

[Price Level Prices]

+		 +

From inventory; the current price at each of your markdown price levels.

+
+

[Regular Price]

+		 +

From inventory; the current regular price.

+
+

 

+

Discount Pricing Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Barcode] (Pro)

+		 +

Manually entered or scanned code associated with a particular discount coupon. System-suggested default code in format that allows for automatic detection of coupon. User editable.

+
+

[Created date]

+

Created By (Pro)

+		 +

Date that the discount was created.

+

If logins are required, the logged in employee's name. If logins are not required, left blank.

+
+

Discount Additional Quantities (Pro)

+		 +

Applies to X for Y discount types only. Check box specifies if item quantities above X qualify for the discount price.

+

Example: If discount is Buy 3 for $10, this setting specifies if the 4th and 5th units purchased also qualify for the discount price.

+

Note: Multiples of X always have the discount applied, regardless of this setting.

+
+

Discount Name

+		 +

Required. User-defined name to identify the discount. Must be unique for each discount; facilitates reporting.

+
+

Discount Notes

+		 +

Optional, user-defined notes that can be added to the discount record.

+
+

Discount Prices  (Pro)

+

Total Price ($Y)

+

Discount Price (per unit)

+		 +

On X for $Y discounts, the dollar amount to purchase X qualifying items is the total price. For example, in a Buy 3 T-shirts for $25 sale, the total price is $25 and the discount price is $8.33 each.

+
+

Discount Sales Statistics  (Pro)

+

[Sold (Qty)]
+[Sold Cost]
+[Sold Price]
+[Profit]
+[Margin %]

+

[Markup %]

+		 +

Fields that apply to sales where the discount was applied. Available to add to the discount record to help evaluate the effectiveness of the promotion.

+

See customizing columns and customizing information panels for instructions to add these fields.

+
+

Start and Stop dates  (Pro)

+		 +

Includes Start and Stop dates/time for scheduling automatic discounts. Point of Sale will automatically start and stop applying the discount prices at the designated start/stop dates and times. The Stop date also indicated the expiration date for a coupon.

+
+

Discount Type

+		 +

Definition of the discount, including specific discount information.

+
+

Items  (Pro)

+		 +

The items that are eligible for the discount. User-specified.

+
+

[Modified]   (Pro)
+ 

+

[Modified By]  (Pro)

+

 

+		 +

Date that the discount was last edited and saved. Not editable.

+

If logins are required, prefilled with the logged in user's name when the record is modified. If logins are not required, left blank.

+
+

Percentage (Y %)  (Pro)

+		 +

In X for Y% Off discounts, the Y% specifies the saving when purchasing X units, expressed as a percentage.

+
+

Price Levels  (Pro)

+		 +

The price levels at which a discount is applied.

+
+

Quantity (X) (Pro)

+		 +

On X for Y discount types, the quantity of qualifying items that must be purchased to get the discount price.

+
+

Kind (Source)  (Pro)

+		 +

System-generated value identifying the type of discount: manual, automatic, or coupon.

+
+

Status  (Pro)

+		 +

Active (discount prices are being applied, subject to schedule) or Inactive (not being applied). A discount can be made active/inactive at anytime.

+
+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_capacities.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_capacities.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..161bb39 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_capacities.htm @@ -0,0 +1,643 @@ + + + + + + + +Program Capacities + + + + + + + + + + +

Program Capacities

+

Data Field Overview | Viewing List Summary Statistics

+

 

+

The following are the maximum capacity allowed for various lists, fields, and settings in Point of Sale.

+

Scroll down or select an area to jump to specific information.

+

Items and Item Fields

+

Customers, Vendors, Departments, and Employees

+

Documents

+

Quantity, Cost, Price and Discount Fields

+

Miscellaneous Fields and Settings

+

 

+

Items and Item Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Number of items (all item types)

+		 +

Virtually unlimited*

+
+

Maximum quantity per item

+		 +

999,999

+
+

Vendors per item

+		 +

(Pro) 5, (Basic)  1

+
+

Item Name: field length**

+		 +

31 characters

+
+

Item Description: field  length**

+		 +

Virtually unlimited

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Items per assembly  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Items per group  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Number of assemblies/groups  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Number of style templates  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Style grid columns and rows  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Serial numbers: field length, all documents  (Pro)

+		 +

25 characters

+
+

* The number of items has no physical limit. However, there may be performance issues when excessively high numbers are reached. Although an exact number cannot be determined, 50,000 + items has been demonstrated to have no affect on system performance. Results will depend upon the capabilities of the system hardware. Item numbers above 99,999 may cause problems with bar code size on smaller tag templates.

+

** These are the default item field names for new users. These field names are customizable, and upgraders from previous versions may see item fields named Description 1 and Description 2.

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Customers, Departments, Vendors, and Employees

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Customers: number of customers

+		 +

Virtually unlimited**

+
+

Department: number of departments

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Vendors: number of vendors

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Vendors: e-mail address field

+		 +

99 characters

+
+

Vendors: notes (capacity)

+		 +

245 characters

+
+

Employees: number of employees

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Security groups: number of custom security groups

+		 +

No limit

+
+

* The number of customers has no physical limit. However, there may be performance issues when excessively high numbers are reached. An exact number cannot be determined, as results will depend upon the capabilities of the system hardware.

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Documents

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Adjustment memos, list

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Adjustment memos: items per memo

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Adjustment memos: held at one time

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales Receipts: list

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales Receipts: items per receipt

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales Receipt: comments/message

+		 +

300 characters

+
+

Sales Receipts: on hold at one time

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Purchase orders : number of POs

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Purchase orders: items per PO

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Purchase orders: Instructions field

+		 +

2000 characters

+
+

Purchase orders: status types

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Receiving Vouchers: list

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Receiving Vouchers: items per voucher

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Receiving Vouchers: held at one time

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Receiving Vouchers: comments/message fields

+		 +

300 characters

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Layaways: number of layaways  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Layaways: items per layaway  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Layaways: status types  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales orders: number of SOs  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales orders: items per SO  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales orders: Instructions  (Pro)

+		 +

2000 characters

+
+

Sales orders: status types  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Work orders: number of work orders  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Work orders: Description field  (Pro)

+		 +

2,000 characters

+
+

Work orders: items per work order  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Work orders: sequence numbers  (Pro)

+		 +

20 characters

+
+

Work orders: work order status types  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Transfer slips: history list  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Transfer slips: items per slip (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Transfer slips: held at one time  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Transfer slips: Comment field  (Pro)

+		 +

300 characters

+
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Quantity, Cost, Price, and Discount Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Quantity fields

+		 +

5 digits (not including decimals), see also: Decimal: Number of quantity decimal places

+
+

Number of quantity decimal places

+		 +

No entry limit, rounded and saved to 2nd decimal place

+
+

Number of currency decimal places

+		 +

No entry limit, rounded and saved to 5th decimal place, displayed to 2nd decimal place

+
+

Cost fields

+		 +

8 digits (not including decimals), see also: Decimal: Number of currency decimal places

+
+

Price fields

+		 +

8 digits (not including decimals), see also: Decimal: Number of currency decimal places

+
+

Price Levels

+		 +

Regular Price, plus 4 markdown levels

+
+

Discount types (item discounts, user-defined)

+		 +

16

+
+

Price Manager: Number of user defined discount prices (X for Y)  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Miscellaneous Fields and Settings

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Workstations, number per store (Basic)

+		 +

20***

+
+

Tax locations

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Tax codes

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Company name: Name field

+		 +

41 characters

+
+

Reports: memorized reports

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Filters: number of memorized filters

+		 +

No limit. (Only 8 displayed in drop-down list. Access all through "Manage Filters".)

+
+

Payment methods on the receipt payment screen

+		 +

8, including cash, check, credit cards (up to 3 per transaction), debit/ATM card, gift certificate, gift cards (up to 3 per transaction), charge to account, and deposit from customer order.

+
+

Stores  (Pro)

+		 +

20

+
+

***Each workstation requiring concurrent access to the Point of Sale company data requires a separate user license. Learn more about Point of Sale licensing.

+

Back to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_custom.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_custom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d1a549 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_custom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Custom Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Custom Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Program Capacities

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale provides you the ability to create and use custom fields. Once defined, the custom fields can be displayed and used to filter lists and reports, and can be added to your printed documents using Print Designer.

+

For example, on your customer records you may wish to add fields for birthday and spouse's name. In inventory, you may wish to track the vendors catalog number, or you may need to record and print an item part number on your purchase orders.

+

You can define and use custom fields in the following records:

+ +

Defining Custom Field Labels

+

Custom fields are enabled and labeled on the My Field Labels page of company preferences. The My Field Labels preferences page allows you to add and define all custom fields in Point of Sale in one place. How Do I?

+

 

+

How do I add my custom fields to lists?

+

How do I add custom fields to my printed documents?

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Filter lists

+

Modify and filter reports

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_customize_field_labels.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_customize_field_labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97679c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_customize_field_labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Customize Field Labels + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize Field Labels

+

Data Field Overview | Define Inventory | Program Capacities

+

 

+

You can specify custom field labels for the four item description fields in inventory (Inventory Name, Inventory Description, Size, and Attribute). The field labels you specify are displayed throughout the program, on printed documents, and on reports.

+

Default Labels: The default labels for new users are Item Name, Item Description, Size, and Attribute. Upgraders from earlier versions may have labels of Description 1 and Description 2 for the name and description fields. Click Restore To Defaults at the bottom of the screen to return to the default field labels.

+

(Pro) You can also create and use custom fields on customer, vendor, item, and employee records. And, if you use Print Designer to customize your print templates, you can specify different labels for printed documents as well.

+

To customize field labels:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the POS Home Page,  select Preferences Company from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the left pane, choose General My Field Labels.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Scroll down to locate the field labels you wish to customize and enter new label text in the My Label column.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize List Columns

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_slips.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_slips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0dbcdbe --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_fields/fields_slips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,239 @@ + + + + + + + +Transfer Slip Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Transfer Slip Fields

+

Making a Transfer Slip | Transfer Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each transfer slip field (in alphabetical order). Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[From Store]

+		 +

Source store of merchandise being transferred. Defaults to the store making the transfer slip. Headquarters can select a different store from the drop-down list to make a slip for another store. Remote stores cannot change this field.

+
+

To Store

+		 +

Destination store for the transferred merchandise. Select a store from the drop-down list. The To Store must be different from the From Store.

+
+

[Date]

+		 +

Suggested as today's date. Can be edited (subject to security rights). Do not change by changing your system date. Data loss could result!

+
+

ETA

+

 

+		 +

Estimated time of arrival: Optional field to convey an estimate of when merchandise will arrive at the destination store (To Store). Editable even after saving.

+
+

Carrier

+		 +

Optional field used to record the carrier transporting the merchandise. Editable even after saving.

+
+

[Associate]

+		 +

Name of the logged-in user (if logins required). If logins are not required, you can select your name from the drop-down list of defined employees.

+
+

Item Fields

+		 +

These fields pertain to the items listed on the slip to be transferred. See also item fields for a description of common inventory fields that are available in the item list.

+
+

Qty

+		 +

Enter the quantity of each item being transferred.

+
+

[Cost]

+		 +

Auto-filled as the current average unit cost for each listed item.

+
+

[Ext Cost]

+		 +

Extended cost of item. Qty X Cost.

+
+

Serial #

+		 +

Used to record item-specific serial numbers, if serial number tracking is used.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]

+		 +

Used to display or change the unit (size) of the item being transferred when using the multiple units of measure feature.

+
+

Comments

+		 +

Optional field to record transfer comments or instructions, such as the reason for the transfer. Select Edit Comments from the I Want to Menu if more space is needed. Editable even after saving.

+
+

Freight

+		 +

Optional field to record freight charges associated with the transfer. This provides a record of these charges to compare to a freight bill later. If integrated with QuickBooks financial software, freight charges are sent to the account specified in company preferences. Editable even after saving.

+
+

Total Cost

+		 +

The sum of the listed items extended costs. Note: Freight costs are not included in the total cost.

+
+

Transfer History List Fields

+		 +

These fields are displayed only in your list of saved transfer slips.

+
+

[Slip #]

+		 +

Sequential number of slips made at the From Store. A separate sequence is maintained for each store.

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

Shows status of slip: Regular, Reversed, or Reversing.

+
+

No of Items

+		 +

The number of item SKUs transferred.

+
+

Total Qty Transferred

+		 +

The total item units transferred.

+
+

QB Status

+

 

+		 +

If integrated with QuickBooks, displays the Financial Exchange status of the slip: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks), Completed (sent to QuickBooks), or Error (attempting to send the receipt to QuickBooks resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+

 

+

Data field overview

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted04.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66aba1c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + +Getting Started: Notes on Item Quantities and Costs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Getting Started: Notes on Item Quantities and Cost

+

Available Quantities | Decimal Quantities | Decimal CostsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Basic

+
+

The Average Unit Cost field in inventory reflects the average cost of the currently on-hand quantity of an item. This value is automatically recalculated by Point of Sale when you create a voucher to receive an item at a cost different than what is currently recorded. How does order cost differ from average unit cost?

+

The On-Hand Quantity field reflects the number of units of an item currently in stock. This value is automatically updated as you create vouchers, receipts, and, if applicable, transfer slips.

+

Item quantities and costs have significant impact on your inventory value and your financial records. For this reason, it is recommended that you manually enter or edit these values only when entering items already in your store when you begin using Point of Sale. From that point on, Point of Sale maintains an accurate ledger of changes in these values with the use of transactional documents (receiving vouchers, receipts, transfer slips, and adjustment memos) and the Physical Inventory utility. The table below summarizes how quantities and/or costs are updated in various ways.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Method

+		 +

Comments

+
+

Receiving vouchers

+		 +

Updates on-hand quantity, average unit cost, and order cost in inventory. Should be used for receiving all new and reordered items into inventory. When you define a new item in inventory that is to be received later, we recommend you leave the On-Hand Quantity and Average Unit Cost fields blank in inventory and allow the receiving voucher to update them.

+
+

Receipts

+		 +

When an item is sold or returned on a receipt, the on-hand inventory quantity is adjusted up or down accordingly.

+
+

Adjustment memos

+		 +

A memo is used anytime quantity or cost must be manually adjusted (because it is not handled by a receiving voucher, receipt, or physical inventory count). Many actions, such as conducting a physical inventory, or manually editing the cost or quantity fields, automatically create adjustment memos for you.

+
+

Physical Inventory

+		 +

Updates on-hand quantities only. Updating a physical inventory automatically creates adjustment memos to update inventory.

+
+

Transfer slips  (Pro)

+		 +

A transfer slip has no affect on company inventory quantities, though it does increase or decrease the on-hand quantities at the specific stores involved in the transfer.

+
+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted07.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c910d83 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Getting Started: Conducting a Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + +

Getting Started: Conducting a Physical Inventory

+

Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

A physical inventory (PI) is an actual count of the merchandise in stock. The Physical Inventory utility is the quickest way to update on-hand quantities for a large number of items in inventory.

+

A physical inventory is always recommended as part of the startup procedure and periodically thereafter to verify and adjust inventory counts.

+

A physical inventory involves:

+ +

For more information about conducting a physical inventory, click the Physical Inventory Overview link at the top of this page.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted11.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..45d4e7e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using Alternate Lookups + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Alternate Lookups

+

About Item Identifiers | UPCs | Bar Codes in Point of Sale

+

 

+

An alternate lookup is an optional, user-defined item identifier that can be used to locate and quickly list items on documents. The use of alternate lookups is well suited to retailers that do not tag their merchandise or to those that want to print vendor part numbers on purchase orders or other documents.

+

This field can contain text descriptions, catalog/part numbers, alphanumeric entries, abbreviated names, or anything allowing you to quickly identify a unique item. Alternate lookups must be unique for each item for which they are defined.

+

To be effectively used to list items on documents, each alternate lookup entry:

+ +

To define alternate lookups:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Item List from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Locate an existing item record and select Edit (or select New if adding a new item).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Navigate to the Alternate Lookup field and make an entry. Enter or edit other item fields as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Repeat for all items you want to list on documents using alternate lookups.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

     

    +
    7. +
+

To list an item on a document using an alternate lookup:

+ +

If one matching item is found, it is instantly listed on the document. If multiple matches are located, the Find window is displayed, listing all matching items. Highlight the correct item and choose Select Item to list the item on the receipt.

+

Tip: Post a list of alternate lookups at the POS workstation to help cashiers remember the correct entries.

+

 

+

To print alternate lookup values on documents:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the Documents & Printers page in workstation preferences.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a document template ending in the suffix "-ALU" for each document type you wish to print using this value.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Save your changes.

    +
    4. +
+

(Pro) You can use the Print Designer to add the Alternate Lookup field to other document templates, if desired.

+

 

+

Example Use of Alternate Lookups

+

You sell a large volume of one-gallon, two-gallon, and five-gallon clay pots from the vendor Clay Pots International and you dont want to tag them. You define alternate lookups of CPI1, CPI2, and CPI5, respectively, for the three pots. When a customer purchases a five-gallon pot, you simply enter CPI5 in the Enter Item(s) field to list that pot size on the sales receipt.

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_documentsdefined.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_documentsdefined.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..14bdaf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_documentsdefined.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Understanding Point of Sale Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

About Point of Sale Documents

+

How do I?

+

 

+

Note: References to tracking item quantities or costs in this topic do not apply to Point of Sale Free.

+

There are two general document types used in Point of Sale: transactional documents and order documents.

+

Transactional documents record changes to inventory and provide a permanent history of those changes. Transactional documents can never be deleted, and in most cases cannot be edited after being saved. For this reason, transactional documents, after being saved, are also referred to as history documents. History documents are used to run reports, to build customer, vendor and item histories, and if you use QuickBooks Desktop financial software are sent to update your financial records.

+

The transactional documents available in Point of Sale include:

+ +

Order documents are used to plan the purchase or sale of merchandise or services. The information recorded on an order document, such as items, costs, prices, deposits, fees, and terms can be easily transferred to a transactional document when the merchandise is actually received or sold. Once recorded on a transactional document, the order document can be safely deleted.

+

The order documents available in Point of Sale include:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_import_vendors.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_import_vendors.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..488cdd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_import_vendors.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + +gstarted_import_vendors + + + + + + + + + +

Vendor Import Options

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden

+ +

 

+

Which vendor import option would you like to learn about?

+

Sharing vendors with QuickBooks financial software

+

Importing vendors from an Excel spreadsheet or text file

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_importitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_importitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a25036 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_getting_started/gstarted_importitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + +gstarted_importitems + + + + + + + + +

Item Import Options

+ +

This is a popup topic. and has been hidden

+  +

Which item import option would you like to learn about?

+

Importing items from QuickBooks financial software

+

Importing from an Excel spreadsheet or text file

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_addvalue.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_addvalue.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d36483 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_addvalue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Add Value to A Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Value to A Gift Card

+ +

This topic duplicates a popup topic. Left only for search purposes.

+ +

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service.  What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

You can add additional value to a gift card in the same manner as when originally selling it.

+

The new sale increases the stored value of the card on the Gift Card Services online servers.

+

Take me to the selling a gift card topic.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_checkbalance.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_checkbalance.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1fdf8fa --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_checkbalance.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Check a Gift Card Balance + + + + + + + + + + +

Check a Gift Card Balance

+

Gift Card Service Overview | Sell or Recharge a Gift Card

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service.  What if I use another Service?

+

To check the balance of a gift card from a sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales receipt with or without items listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Check Gift Card Balance.

    +
    3. +
+

The Gift Card Balance Inquiry window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Swipe the gift card or type  the card number and then click Check Balance.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the service and displays the card balance.

+

 

+

To view the balances of all outstanding gift cards run the Gift Card Balance Summary report.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Collect tips on gift card sales

+

Handling returns of purchases made by gift card

+

Replace a lost gift card

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_configure.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_configure.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e2c753 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_configure.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Configuring your System for a Gift Card Account + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure your System for a Gift Card Account

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service.  What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Once your account is approved and you have received your Gift Card Account Number (typically in 2-3 business days), enter the account number in Point of Sale company preferences and specify how you will communicate with the service. Once you have received your cards, you will be ready to start processing gift card transactions.

+

To enter your gift card account number:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company, and then Merchant & Gift Card Services from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the account number provided to you in the Gift Card Service area on the page.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Communication Setup from the left-side preferences list, and specify how you will communicate with the service, either Secure Internet Connection or Direct-dial (modem). Click Internet Connection Setup if you need help configuring your Internet connection (this step is not necessary if you have already set up communication for the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service):

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Return to the Merchant & Gift Services page and select Verify next to your Gift Card Account Number. Point of Sale will do a test connection and confirm that your account is active and ready to use. If errors are encountered, a message is displayed with information about resolving the situation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Gift Card Service overview

+

Sell a gift card

+

Redeem a gift card

+

Order custom gift cards

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..46cc022 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +giftcard_hdi + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Sign up for a QuickBooks POS Gift Card account

+

Configure Point of Sale for the Gift Card Service

+

Sell or recharge a gift card

+

Redeem a gift card

+

Check the balance of gift cards

+

Handle returns of gift card purchases

+

Run gift card reports

+

Order custom gift cards

+

Use another gift card service

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_logo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_logo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b30c435 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_logo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + +Custom Gift Cards + + + + + + + + + + +

Custom Gift Cards

+

QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service.  What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Gift cards for use with the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service are available in either standard or custom designs.

+

If you choose to do a custom design, you will work with a card designer to create a card with artwork and logo of your choosing. Proofs of the design are submitted for your approval prior to printing the cards.

+

Visit our QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service website for more information.

+

Additional fees apply.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_oview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4242a82 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Configuring Point of Sale for Gift Cards

+

 

+

An account with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service* provides an integrated gift card processing solution that allows you to sell and redeem stored-value gift cards from within your Point of Sale software.

+

Key benefits of the service include:

+ +

You can apply for an account with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service while completing the Setup Interview. The application takes just minutes to complete, and youll receive an approval decision and your Gift Card Service account number promptly. Once received, you enter the account number in company preferences to begin using the gift card service.

+

A card reader (sold separately) is recommended, but not required to use the Gift Card service. Using a card reader is faster and more convenient, but you can just type the number printed on the card to process a transaction. A modem and phone line or Internet connection is necessary on at least one of your Point of Sale workstations for transmitting data to and from the service.

+

 

+

*Service is optional. Application approval, fees and additional terms and conditions apply. Requires an account through QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service.  Internet connection or modem and phone line, and gift cards, sold separately. Details available on our Requiren Internet connection Website. Terms, conditions, pricing, features and service options subject to change without notice.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service for accepting credit and debit cards

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_replacing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_replacing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..18bc760 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_replacing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Replace a Lost Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Replace a Lost Gift Card

+

Gift Card Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

If it conforms to your store policy and you can identify the original gift card number, you can use this procedure to replace a lost or stolen gift card. This procedure removes the current balance from the lost card and transfers it to a new gift card.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary, use customer history or sales history to look up the original gift card sales receipt and get the number of the lost gift card.

    +
    2. +
+

The card number is recorded in the receipt item list or you can click the Gift payment button and get the number from the payment dialog. Record the number and then close the original receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Open a new sales receipt, optionally enter the customer name, and then click the Gift payment button.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Check the balance of the lost gift card.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the Gift Card payment dialog, select Redeem Card and enter the balance of the lost card and the card number, then click Save.  

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Open the Gift Card payment dialog again, select Sell Gift Card and enter the same amount and then swipe the new card or enter  the card number.  Click  Save.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the gift card service and removes the balance from the lost card and adds it to the new card.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save & Print.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Gift Card Reports

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_reports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4e2e437 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Gift Card Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Gift Card Reports

+

POS Gift Card Service Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

Users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service have three gift card reports available in Point of Sale. If you record gift card transactions in Point of Sale but process them through another service, only the Gift Card List report is available to you.

+

To run a gift card report:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Report Center, select Payments as the report category and then one of the specific types/reports listed above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    The selected report is generated and displayed.

    +
    3. +
+ +

Use the report Modify option if you want to apply report filters or change the appearance of the report. For example, you could filter the balance report to include only cards with a balance over $100 or change the date range to apply to the activity detail report.

+

These reports are based on the transactions recorded in Point of Sale. To verify the current balance of an individual card, it is recommended you check the balance from the sales receipt payment screen, which connects to the Gift Card services online server to check the balance.

+

(Pro)  If run at a remote store, gift card reports include only the card activity at that store. If run at Headquarters, the reports reflect transactions made at all stores current as of the last completed Store Exchange.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Modify report options

+

Take payment by or sale of a gift card

+

Handling returns of gift card purchases

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_returns.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_returns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc1b432 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_returns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Handling Gift Card Returns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Handling Gift Card Returns

+

Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

Use this procedure to refund amounts for returned merchandise to a gift card. Enter the return on either a sales or return receipt and then enter the refund amount in the Gift Card Sell column on the payment window. Entering the refund amount as a sale adds the refund amount back to the gift card balance (if using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service).

+

To make a return gift card receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Add the items to a receipt as return items using the same prices at which the merchandise was purchased, using normal return methods.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Payment Method.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Be sure purchase/recharge card is selected and then swipe the gift card.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Print the receipt.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Reverse a gift card transaction

+

Sell or redeem a gift card

+

Replace a lost gift card

+

Gift Card Service reports

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_signup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_signup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d36ac7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_gift_card_service/giftcard_signup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Sign up for the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service + + + + + + + + + + +

Sign up for the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

The QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service allows you to sell, redeem, and track the balance of gift cards from within Point of Sale. A QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account is required.

+

 

+

Getting set up is easy!  Internet connection requiredLearn more

+

 

+

You can sign up from within Point of Sale:

+

To sign up for an account with QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Setup Interview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Gift Cards tab.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Yes.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Type in your Gift Card account number in the field provided.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Click Verify.

    +
    6. +
+

Once your account is approved and you have received your Gift Card Account Number (typically in 2-3 business days), configure Point of Sale to work with the Gift Card Service.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Gift Card Service overview

+

Sell or redeem gift cards

+

Order custom gift cards

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_glossary_of_terms/glossarypage.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_glossary_of_terms/glossarypage.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..45b7810 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_glossary_of_terms/glossarypage.htm @@ -0,0 +1,404 @@ + + + + + + +Glossary of Terms + + + + + + + + + + +

Glossary of Terms

+

image\btn_a.gif image\btn_b.gif image\btn_c.gif image\btn_d.gif image\btn_e.gif image\btn_f.gif image\btn_g.gif image\btn_h.gif image\btn_i.gif image\btn_j.gif image\btn_k.gif image\btn_l.gif image\btn_m.gif

+

image\btn_n.gif image\btn_o.gif image\btn_p.gif image\btn_q.gif image\btn_r.gif image\btn_s.gif image\btn_t.gif image\btn_u.gif image\btn_v.gif image\btn_w.gif image\btn_x.gif image\btn_y.gif image\btn_z.gif

+

Click a letter to jump to that section of the glossary.

+

 

+

A

+

Activity tolerance: Some Point of Sale activities are intolerant. This means that the activity cannot be completed if you or another workstation are currently accessing the POS data file via another open window or document. For example, installing a program update, editing company preferences, or restoring from a backup are all intolerant activities. An alert message is displayed if this applies to your activity. The alert message could also be caused by an improper shutdown of the program (such as if power is lost).

+

Adjustment memo: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of changes to an items quantity or cost which were not recorded on another type of transactional document.

+

Address Verification Service (AVS): Service that verifies a credit card customer's stated Zip Code, and optionally street address, matches that on file at the issuing bank. Helps prevent credit card fraud on manually entered and "card-not-present" transactions. For use with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service.

+

Alphanumeric: Containing both letters and numbers.

+

Alternate Lookup (ALU): A descriptive inventory field used as an additional item identifier when listing items on documents.

+

Alternate vendor: (Pro) Secondary vendor(s) that can be listed on POs and vouchers when purchasing an item. Each alternate vendor can have a unique order cost, UPC, and Alternate Lookup assigned. See also primary vendor.

+

Assembly: (Pro) Inventory item pre-built, or assembled, from other existing inventory items and sold as a unit.

+

Associate: (Pro) An employee whose name is available for selection on transactional documents.

+

Attribute: Typically an items color or a second size, such as shoe width.

+

Automatic update: Automatic process of downloading program updates in the background while you work in Point of Sale.

+

Automatic discount: (Pro) Discount defined in Price Manager, with options for eligible items, schedule, and purchase requirements, and automatically applied to eligible sales.

+

Available quantity: (Pro) Item quantity available for immediate sale. Equal to the on-hand quantity minus any quantity already committed on active customer orders. Does not take into consideration quantities on pending customer orders or held documents.

+

Average unit cost: The average amount paid per unit for the on-hand quantity of an item. Different than order cost, which is the current cost at which you order and receive an item.

+

AVS: see Address Verification Service.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

B

+

Backordered: In Point of Sale, any item with a negative available quantity (i.e. quantity on active customer orders exceeds on-hand quantity) is considered to be on backorder and will show up on your reorder reminders and backorder report.

+

Backup: A manual or automated procedure that verifies the integrity of Point of Sale data files and makes a backup copy. See also restore.

+

Bar code: A series of spaced lines forming a code that can be read and interpreted by a bar code scanner for rapid data entry. Bar codes typically are encoded item numbers or UPC codes.

+

Base unit: (Pro) When using multiple units of measure for an item, that unit you most typically stock and sell by. Item quantities, costs, and related information are shown in inventory for your base unit.

+

 

+

C

+

Card Verification Code (CVC): A three or four-digit code printed on a credit card used in manually entered credit card transactions to help verify that the customer actually has the card in their possession. Can help prevent credit card fraud and chargebacks. For use with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service.

+

Case-sensitive: With regard to text entry, the requirement that uppercase letters be distinguished from lowercase letters. Login passwords in Point of Sale are case-sensitive. A password must be entered exactly as it is recorded. Example: If password stored is "Huckleberry" then entering "huckleberry" does not grant access.

+

Card reader: A device that reads the magnetic strip on the back of credit, debit, and gift cards, allowing information about the customer and his account to be electronically entered for payment on a sale or refund.

+

Cashier: The employee who is logged in during the current sales transaction (receipts and customer orders).

+

Cell: (Pro) In a grid (e.g., a style grid), the point where a column and row intersect. Each cell represents a particular item size/attribute and corresponds to an item in inventory. See also grid.

+

Certificate: A QuickBooks Desktop term related to integrated applications and their access to your QuickBooks Desktop company file. A certificate is a digital signature that verifies the identity of the third-party developer. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Chargebacks: For a credit card transaction, a chargeback is a dispute of the charge by the cardholder.

+

Chart of Accounts: In your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the set of accounts and their balances. Some accounts are predefined by QuickBooks Desktop when a company is set up; others can be added as needed. Point of Sale assumes you are using a default set of accounts when transferring your Point of Sale data, but you can define custom account mappings if preferred. Search the Point of Sale help index using keyword "Cart of accounts" or refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Class: A transaction categorizing attribute in QuickBooks Desktop that when assigned to stores in a multi-store configuration allows you to track and run P/L reports by store in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Clean Up Company Data: Procedure by which you can remove old records and documents from your company file to optimize program performance. Access from the File > Utilities menu.

+

Client Workstation: Any networked workstation that is not designated as the Server Workstation. Accesses the Point of Sale company data on the Server Workstation across the network. You can view your current workstation type by selecting About Point of Sale from the Help menu.

+

Cloud: Cloud computing is a general term for services that are offered on the Web including social networking, file backup, and payment solutions. To use most Cloud services, the only requirement is access to the Internet.

+

Commission: (Pro) An amount paid to an employee on sales of specified items.

+

Committed quantities: (Pro) Quantities promised on active customer orders. When the committed quantity for an item is subtracted from the current on-hand quantity, the resulting value is your available quantity.

+

Company data: The Point of Sale data file that is stored on the Server Workstation. In a multi-workstation setup, client workstations access this data across the network. Do not confuse the POS company data with your QuickBooks Desktop financial company file, which is used for accounting purposes.

+

Company preferences: Company preferences define settings and options that are shared by all workstations on a network and that configure all Point of Sale modules.

+

Compatible hardware: Compatible hardware is hardware that has been tested to work with Point of Sale. Supported hardware is compatible hardware that is sold and supported by Intuit. Compatible hardware not sold by Intuit is not supported.

+

Component items: (Pro) The inventory items that make up an assembly or group item.

+

Conflicting items: (Pro) Two or more inventory rows in the same style with the same size and attribute.

+

Coupon: (Pro) Store discount document provided to customers who can redeem it to get the specified discount. Defined in Price Manager, including eligible items and expiration date, and automatically applied to qualified sales when scanned on receipt.

+

Cost: See average unit cost or order cost.

+

Customer order: (Pro) A sales order, work order, or layaway that records the planned sale of merchandise or services. Items ordered on a customer order are later sold on a sales receipt.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

D

+

Database Server applications: Applications that run on the Server Workstation and allow Point of Sale workstations to connect to the POS company data. Started automatically when the Server Workstation is turned on. If you have used Windows Task Manager to manually stop these applications, they can be restarted by restarting Point of Sale on the Server Workstation.

+

Debit/ATM transaction (PIN): Transaction using a customers debit/ATM card and PIN authorization.

+

Department: A manageable category of related merchandise. Categorizing items into departments gives you greater flexibility to monitor sales performance, manage inventory, run meaningful reports, and for filtering your item list when conducting a physical inventory, changing prices, and printing tags. Departments are assigned a name and a code. A department code is a user-assigned code identifying the department, made up of one to three alphanumeric characters, and can be used to identify the department on reports and program screens where space is limited.

+

Descriptive field: Any field that describes an item, such as the default item fields Description1, Description 2, Attribute, Size, and Alternate Lookup.

+

Device Manager: Applet in Windows Control Panel System Properties dialog that lists the hardware installed on your computer and used to change the settings for that hardware. You can access System Properties by selecting System from Control Panel (or press the Windows logo key + the Pause/Break key on your keyboard at the same time). Then select the Device Manager tab (Windows 98) or the Hardware tab and then Device Manager (Windows 2000/XP). Note: The Windows logo key is located on the lower-left of your keyboard and Pause/Break on the upper-right. Consult your Windows Help system if additional assistance is required.

+

Discount Pricing: (Pro) Price Manager feature that allows you to define percentage off or quantity discounts for an item or group of items, optionally scheduling the discount dates. When listing a sufficient quantity of included items on a sales receipt or customer order, Point of Sale automatically applies the correct discount price to each item. Examples: Buy 3 T-shirts for $30. Buy 3 T-shirts and get 15% off.  Get 15% off all T-shirts.

+

Document item list: The list of items being processed on a document.

+

Documents: General term including all transactional documents and order documents; including sales receipts, receiving vouchers, adjustment memos, purchase orders, layaways/sales orders/work orders, and transfer slips.

+

Dynamic date: A date or date range relative to the current date. Examples include Year-to-Date, Month-to-Date, etc. As the current date changes, so does the dynamic date or range. Dynamic dates are used to define date ranges for filtering lists and for reporting purposes.

+  +

Return to top

+

E

+

Element: (Pro) In Print Designer, an element is any object (data field, data field group, static text, logo, etc.) that you can add or manipulate on a print design.

+

 

+

F

+

Facebook: The leading social networking site. There are marketing opportunities for merchants that use Facebook.

+

Fee: (PO/Voucher) A field on purchase orders and vouchers used to record amounts that are charged in addition to the cost of goods, shipping, and tax, such as an order fee.

+

Field: A component of a page design where data can be entered or viewed. In lists and Style View, a field is the cell where a column and row intersect. Field names are included in the header for each column and row.

+

Fill status: A summary of the quantity still due on an order document. Different than the order status, which tracks the current standing of the document as open, closed, or any custom status you have defined.

+

% Unfilled = Qty due divided by Qty ordered multiplied by 100

+

Filters: Used to include/exclude records for display or reports. You define your filter criteria and Point of Sale includes/excludes records based on your criteria.

+

Filter element: A component of a filter screen. Element names identify the criteria to be entered in each field.

+

Financial Exchange: Integration and sharing of data between Point of Sale and your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Form: A detailed view that displays all fields of data contained in a single record.

+

Foursquare: One of many location-based social networking sites for mobile devices, that helps locate venues and events close to a customer's current location. Used as a marketing tool by many small and large companies alike .

+

 

+

 

+

Return to top

+

G

+

Gift receipt: Optional second copy of a receipt printed for the customer. Gift receipts do not include prices or payment information. Enabled in workstation print option preferences.

+

Global discount: A discount applied to the subtotal on a document. See also item discount.

+

GoPayment: An Intuit service allowing credit card payments to be accepted via a mobile phone.

+

GoPayment card reader: A small device that is temporarily attached to a mobile phone in order for a credit card to be swiped.
+Also referred to as a swiper.

+

Grid: (Pro) A concise format used to display style items in Style View in inventory. Includes both a horizontal and vertical axis, with different descriptive fields located on each. See also cell.

+

Group (security): A set of users that are granted specific security rights and access to program functions.

+

Group (item): (Pro) An item group provides a way to list all of the included items on a document by entering the single group item identifier.

+

Groupon: An online marketing site featuring discounted gift certificates and coupons usable at local or national retail outlets.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

H

+

Headquarters: Store 1 in a multi-store installation; has centralized control over inventory and purchasing, exchanges information with QuickBooks Desktop, and runs company reports.

+

History documents: Saved transactional documents stored in document history lists. Includes receipts, vouchers,adjustment memos, and transfer slips. Used for reporting purposes and for building customer, vendor and item histories.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

I

+

Integrated applications: A QuickBooks Desktop feature that allows external applications such as Point of Sale to access the company file and exchange data. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Intuit Service: Method of exchanging data between stores using the Internet application "QuickBase".

+

Inventory: A stores or companys set of merchandise, quantities, and other related information. Also, the Point of Sale module for tracking that merchandise.

+

Inventory reminders: A Point of Sale feature that alerts users when inventory tasks need their attention, such as reordering items.

+

Item #: The number assigned by the program to each item added to inventory. Corresponds to the row number in the item list and used as an item identifier (for listing items on documents), for filtering the list, and for printing bar codes on tags.

+

Item discount: A discount applied to an individual item price on a sales document. See also global discount.

+

Item group: (Pro) See group item.

+

Item identifiers: The Item #, Universal Product Code (UPC), and Alternate Lookup values for items in inventory. Item identifiers are used for looking up and listing items on documents, and for other program functions.

+

Item lookup: A method that is used to list an item on a document. Item lookups can be performed with the Item #, UPC #, Alternate Lookup, or by entering a search keyword.

+

Item type: Field used to designate the type of inventory item.

+

I Want To menu: List of available actions or tasks related to the currently displayed window. Select a task to carry out the specified action. Displayed on the window toolbar.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

J

+

K

+

L

+

Layaway: (Pro) A temporary order document that allows customers to pay for merchandise using a series of deposits.

+

List: Displays all or a filtered subset of the records of a particular type, or a listing of the items to be processed on a document.

+

Lookup: Ability to quickly locate a related record from another area or document and enter that information in the other area or document. For an example, see item lookup.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

M

+

Main tool bar: The horizontal tool bar located across the top of the Point of Sale screen, providing direct access to program areas and tasks. You can customize or turn off its display from the View menu.

+

Manual discount: An item discount that is manually applied as needed at the time of sale. Uses include discounts for damaged or demo merchandise or a discount to meet or beat  a competitor's price.

+

Mapping: In Point of Sale, refers to the "linking" of accounts, payment types, and information fields with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. This linking affects how Point of Sale data is transferred to your financial software. Point of Sale uses a default set of accounts and payment types unless you customize them in company preferences.

+

Margin %:  The percentage of the selling price that represents profit. One way to express the relationship between item cost and price. Margin can be used in Point of Sales pricing formula to calculate prices when adding new items to inventory.

+

Margin % = [(Price minus Cost) divided by Price] multiplied by 100

+

Markup: Alternate way to express profit; markup by n% over cost.

+

Memo: See adjustment memo.

+

Merchant number: For retailers who use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service to perform credit and/or debit/ATM card transactions, the merchant number is assigned to the retailer in order to identify that retailer when performing authorizations and settlements.

+

Merchant Service Center: Intuits own site to help merchants manage their payment solutions.

+

Mobile Sales:  Sales that are performed when a customer makes the purchase from their mobile device.

+

Mobile Device:  A smart phone or other device that is generally small and connected to the Internet. iPhones and Android-based phones are two types of mobile devices.

+

MSRP: Manufacturers suggested retail price. IF the MSRP is defined on an items record, price tags (space allowing) include the reference price to demonstrate savings to customers.

+

Multi-Store: (Pro) Referring to a Point of Sale Pro configuration with multiple stores.

+

Multi-vendor: (Pro) Feature that allows purchasing of an item from up to five different vendors, each with a unique order cost and UPC.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

N

+

Navigator: Graphical representation of a retail workflow and corresponding Point of Sale tasks. Clicking an icon from the Navigator takes you directly to the program area to complete the task.

+

Network: Two or more computers linked together and sharing data files. Information recorded by any computer on the network is instantly available to all users on the network.

+

Non-inventory item: A non-merchandise inventory item or service for which you do not track on-hand quantities. Typically, the non-inventory item type is used for miscellaneous fees or charges (e.g. delivery, recycling fee, shipping, etc.). See also service item.

+

Non-tolerant activity: An activity that requires all other users to be out of Point of Sale before it can be performed, such as restoring the POS company data from a backup or installing a program update.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

O

+

Order document: (Basic, Pro) A temporary document used to plan the purchase (purchase order) or sale (customer order) of merchandise or services.

+

Order cost: The cost at which an item is ordered and received. This is different than average unit cost, which is the average cost paid for the units currently on hand.

+

Open Windows: List of all open Point of Sale windows for current tasks; displayed on the Window menu at the top of the screen. While only one window can be viewed at a time, Point of Sale allows you to open and have many available. You can think of the windows being on top of another. You can immediately switch to another open window by selecting it from the Window menu.

+

 

+

P

+

Payout: The removal of cash amounts from the cash drawer for a store-related purpose, such as to make a mid-day deposit, buy office supplies, or fund an office party. Select New Payout from the Point of Sale menu to access this feature.

+

Payment History: (Pro) A record of payments/deposits made for a particular layaway, sales order, or work order.

+

Payment type/method: On a receipt, how the customer pays for merchandise. Examples: cash, check, credit card, gift certificate, etc.

+

PCI DSS: Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard; outlines requirements for the protection of customers' credit and debit card information.

+

Physical inventory (PI): The process of counting the actual merchandise on hand and then correcting the quantities recorded in inventory as needed.

+

Physical inventory scanner: Optional, portable hardware that allows you to scan inventory bar codes and download the scanned data into a physical inventory count.

+

PO: See purchase order.

+

Point of Sale (POS): This software product name and the location(s) in your store where customer-facing sales activities are carried out. On menus in Point of Sale, this term refers to the area containing the sales, customer order, customer tracking, and End of Day tasks.

+

Pole display: A screen oriented towards the customer to display transaction detail and store messages.

+

Preferences: Settings that configure your Point of Sale program to work with your hardware and accessories, establish feature options, and customize program behavior. There are two types of preferences in Point of Sale: company preferences and workstation preferences.

+

Price levels: Up to four optional markdown prices, in addition to your regular price, for each item in inventory. Different price levels can be used to record employee prices, promotional sale prices, wholesale prices, etc. When making a sale, you can select the price level that applies or assign a price level on a customers record and it will be automatically suggested when making a sale to that customer.

+

Price Manager: Price utility that allows you to change item prices or set up discounts, for all or selected items, in a variety of ways.

+

Price rounding: Price Manager feature that allows rounding of calculated prices to end in user-specified amounts, e.g. always to .99, or to even dollars, etc.

+

Pricing formula: Used by Point of Sale to automatically calculate a new items price by applying a defined department margin or markup to the average unit cost.

+

Primary vendor: (Pro) For a multi-vendor item, that vendor that is displayed in item lists, on merchandise reports, etc. for the item. See also alternate vendor.

+

Print Designer: (Pro) Tool used to customize printed documents and tags. Available from the Tools menu.

+

Purchase order (PO): A temporary planning document recording the merchandise ordered from a vendor.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

Q

+

QB POS: Abbreviation for the Point of Sale software.

+

Quick Add Item: Procedure to add an item to your inventory while creating a document, such as a sales receipt, entering only the basic item information needed to complete the document. Ideal for when a customer is waiting to purchase an item not yet added to inventory. Learn more.

+

QuickFill: Customer feature on sales documents where the program recognizes the name you are typing and suggests the matching name from your customer file, saving you the time of typing the full name.

+

Quick Find: Feature available from the Navigator allowing you to quickly find customers, items, sales receipts, and more.

+

Quick Pick: A feature of Intuit Point of Sale where selected items are grouped and instantly accessible on the system during the check-out process.

+

Quick Zoom: Ability to click a line or value in a report and see the source documents or records contributing to that value.

+

Return to top

+

R

+

Receipt: A transactional document that records a sale, deposit on, or return of merchandise at point of sale. Also, the printed record of the transaction, typically given to the customer. See sales receipt and return receipt.

+

Receiving voucher: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of merchandise received from a vendor. Vouchers update inventory cost and quantity for items received.

+

Record: (noun) Point of Sale data is typically stored as a sequence of records in your POS company data file. A record could be either document (receipt, voucher, etc.) or non-document (item, customer, vendor, etc.) data.

+

Reminders: A feature that helps you track and manage your inventory by alerting you to situations that may need your attention, such as when item quantities fall below their reorder points.

+

Remote store: In a multi-store installation, all stores except the Headquarters is referred to as a remote store.

+

Remote Data Sharing (RDS): Optional configuration allowing the exchange of information between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software wherein the two applications communicate over a network via server and client applications. With this configuration it is not necessary to install QuickBooks Desktop on the Point of Sale Server Workstation. Refer to the Point of Sale Getting Guide for more information on this advanced option.

+

Reorder point: User-specified minimum on-hand quantity at which an item should be reordered (or rebuilt in the case of assembly items). When the combined on-order and on-hand quantity is at or below this level, the item is added to the inventory reorder reminder list and reorder reports. Facilitates timely replenishment of merchandise.

+

Restore: (relating to the Restore feature) Using backup data to replace data files.

+

Return receipt: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of a merchandise return at point of sale. Printed, it serves as the customers receipt.

+

Return voucher: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of merchandise returned to a vendor.

+

Reverse: To create a new, opposite document that cancels the effects of a former document. Receipts, vouchers, transfer slips, and adjustment memos can be reversed.

+

Rights: See security rights.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

S

+

Sales order (SO): (Pro) A temporary order document recording the planned sale of merchandise or services to a customer in the future, such as for custom items or an item currently out of stock. The items listed on a sales order can be quickly transferred to a sales receipt when the final sale is made.

+

Sales receipt: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of a merchandise sale or deposit. The printed receipt serves as the customers receipt.

+

Sales tax location: A set of sales tax codes assigned to a specific geographic area or for customers that qualify for special tax handling.

+

Sales tax code: A code used to identify if and how sales tax is applied to item sales. Sales tax codes in Point of Sale can be mapped to sales tax items/groups and codes in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Sales tax item: In QuickBooks Desktop financial software, sales tax items identify the rate and the tax agency from which you collect sales tax for a transaction. Retailers who use QuickBooks Desktop in conjunction with Point of Sale can map a sales tax code in Point of Sale to a tax item in QuickBooks Desktop. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Sales tax group: In QuickBooks Desktop financial software, a sales tax group is used to calculate two or more sales tax items grouped together and applied to the same sale. Retailers who use QuickBooks Desktop financial software in conjunction with Point of Sale can map a sales tax code in Point of Sale to a sales tax group in QuickBooks Desktop. Point of Sale sales taxes will then be reported in your financial software according to the structure of the QuickBooks Desktop tax group. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Sales tax rate: The actual percentage tax collected. Each taxable tax code must have a tax rate assigned.

+

Section (Print Designer): (Pro) Logical regions of document templates, each with a unique printing behavior. For example, data fields placed in the repeating header section of a template appear at the top of each page of the printed document. Some templates, such as tags and mailing labels do not have sections. Template sections cannot be re-positioned, though they typically can be vertically resized to add or remove white space in a design.

+

Security group: Predefined or custom set of security rights to which employees can be assigned.

+

Security rights: The set of program features and data access defined for a security group.

+

Serial number: (Pro) Unique alphanumeric string assigned to an item for tracking purposes. Typically used for warranty purposes or for meeting legal requirements. Serial numbers can be recorded on most Point of Sale documents.

+

Server Workstation: In a multiple workstation installation, the first workstation on which Point of Sale is installed and which stores the POS company data. If you have only one workstation, it must be installed as a Server Workstation. Certain activities, such as Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop, creation of company data, and importing data can only be done on this workstation. The Server Workstation must be running (but not necessarily with Point of Sale open) for client workstations to access the company data file. You can view your current workstation type by selecting About Point of Sale from the Help menu.

+

Service item: Used to charge for non-merchandise and labor-based services, such as repairs, warranties, delivery, installation, etc. on sales and customer orders. The on-hand quantity of service items is always zero (0).

+

Shopper display: See pole display.

+

Shortcut key: Keyboard command that executes a Point of Sale function. For example, entering <Alt + the underlined letter> instantly invokes the menu or icon option displaying the underlined letter. Select Keyboard Shortcuts from the Help menu to see a list of shortcuts for your current area in Point of Sale.

+

Simple View: A simplified version of the regular sales receipt form, with support for touchscreen and a virtual keyboard. Learn more.

+

Slip: (Pro) See transfer slip.

+

Smart phone: See Mobile Device.

+

SO: (Pro) See sales order.

+

Social Networking: The use of the internet to connect with others using sites specifically designed to bring groups of people together.
+Facebook and other social networking sites can be leveraged for marketing purposes.

+

Sort field: A field/column in a list by which the records can be sorted and displayed. Indicated by the image\blue_sort_indicator.gif symbol in the column header. Click the header to sort by the column values; click again to change sort order. Sort by multiple columns by selecting Sort List Sort on multiple columns from the View menu.

+

Special order item: (Pro) Item-type created while making a document (such as a customer order) to sell an item not currently carried in inventory.

+

Split-payment sale: A sale paid for using two or more payment methods.

+

Status: On order documents, the current standing of the document. A status of Open is assigned to all new orders and Closed to those that have been filled (received or sold). You can define your own statuses and Point of Sale will track the changes in status as an order progresses toward completion. The Status field can be used to filter for list display or reports.

+

Status bar: An information line located on the bottom of most Point of Sale screens, displaying data such as the active price level, the currently logged in employee, record status, etc.

+

Store: A physical location at which you receive and sell merchandise.

+

Store Exchange: The procedure of sending and receiving data between remote stores and Headquarters in a multi-store installation. QuickBooks Desktop POS supports four methods of Store Exchange: desktop e-mail, Web-based e-mail, removable media, and network file transfer.

+

Store type: In a multi-store configuration, each store is either a Headquarters or a remote store, each with defined roles and allowed activities.

+

Style: (Pro) A group of related inventory items, with the same department and Item Name, but differing in color, size, or other attribute. In Point of Sale, the items in a style are linked so they can be viewed and worked with together in a style grid or in a linear display.

+

Style View/grid: (Pro) See grid.

+

Style template: (Pro)  A predefined array of item attributes (sizes, colors, etc.) that can be used when creating or modifying a style grid.

+

Suggest PO: (Pro) Automated suggestion and generation of purchase orders for items that have fallen below their designated reorder quantities, after taking currently on-order quantities into consideration.

+

Swipe: To slide a credit or debit card through the GoPayment card reader (or swiper) for processing.

+

Swiper: A small device that is temporarily attached to a mobile phone in order for a credit card to be swiped. Also referred to as the GoPayment card reader.

+

Sync / Syncing / Synchronize: Updating or merging information on two or more computers or devices. For example, syncing sales on your mobile device with your main computer is needed in order for your main computer to have all the most current sales information from your mobile device(s).

+

System Administrator (Sysadmin): Pre-defined user with all security rights to add or delete employees, turn on/off the requirement to log in to use the program, and change passwords for other employees. Only the Sysadmin user can make these changes.

+

 

+

 

+

Return to top

+

T

+

Tax code: A code assigned to each item in inventory that defines the tax handling (such as taxable or non-taxable) and taxing instructions of the item.

+

Tax location: See sales tax location.

+

Template: The print layout of fields for a particular document type. Point of Sale includes several design choices for each document type for use with various printers and for various needs. (Pro) You can customize these templates in the Print Designer. See also style template.

+

Terms: (PO/Voucher) How and when the retailer plans to pay the vendor for merchandise ordered. Examples: COD and 2% 10, Net 30.

+

Tools: Program utilities that provide ancillary or support capabilities.

+

Transactional documents: Receipts, vouchers, adjustment memos, and transfer slips. Transactional documents record changes in inventory on-hand quantities or costs, and are then stored in your document history lists.

+

Transfer slip: (Pro) A transactional document that records the movement of merchandise from one store to another.

+

Tweet: A message sent via Twitter.

+

Twitter: With over 100 million users, this is the most popular micro-blogging site. Tweets, or messages, are condensed to 140 characters or less aimed at a specific target audience of followers. Individuals, celebrities, and merchants make good use of Twitter to help stay in touch with customers and fans, to communicate news, specials, gossip, or deals.

+

 

+

 

+

Return to top

+

U

+

Unit of measure: Display field on item records that can be used to filter and sort the item list and reports. ((Pro) If using multiple units of measure (company preference), allows purchasing and selling an item in different units, such as cases, multi-packs, bottles, pounds, etc., each with a different UPC code, alternate lookup, and price.

+

Unlock: Term referring to an upgrade in program licensing that makes additional features available to the user, i.e. from Free to Basic to Pro.

+

UPC (universal product code): A family of widely used bar code symbologies that encode both manufacturer and product identification. In Point of Sale, UPC numbers can be used to look up or scan items when listing them on documents.

+

User license: A single license or entitlement for a computer to run Point of Sale. Having multiple user licenses allows multiple computers to run Point of Sale at the same time.

+

Update: In QB POS, update has two possible meanings:

+ +

 

+

Return to top

+

V

+

Values: Numerical data; such as a field entry or calculation of quantities, costs, or prices.

+

Vendor code: The user-defined code assigned to each vendor and used to track that vendors merchandise as it is received and sold.

+

Voucher: A transactional document that records merchandise received from or returned to a vendor. See also receiving voucher and return voucher.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

W

+

Window tool bar: The horizontal toolbar across the top of the open window; contains icons for tasks related to the displayed window and a task-specific help button.

+

Work Order: (Pro) A customer order used for services and non-inventory merchandise transactions, such as repairs, alterations, and warranty work.

+

Workstation (W/S): An individual PC. In Point of Sale, installed workstations (up to ten per store) are either a Server Workstation, storing both program and data files, or a client workstation, which stores program files but accesses the data files across a network.

+

Workstation preferences: Workstation preferences define workstation-specific settings and options, including hardware setup and printing preferences.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

X

+

X/Z-Out report: Report of point-of-sale activities. The X-Out Shift Report can be run throughout the day to monitor sales activity. The Z-Out Drawer Count report is typically run at the end of a shift or day to reconcile the cash drawer. The Z-Out Store Close report is run at the end of the day to summarize the days sales activities and cash flow for the entire store, as well as help in preparing a bank deposit.

+

Y

+

Z

+

Z-Out report: See X/Z-Out report.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/POSPCIGuide.pdf b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/POSPCIGuide.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6da40a6 Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/POSPCIGuide.pdf differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/QuickBooks POS User Guide 1.0 Final.pdf b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/QuickBooks POS User Guide 1.0 Final.pdf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..319371f Binary files /dev/null and b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/QuickBooks POS User Guide 1.0 Final.pdf differ diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_IDN_apps.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_IDN_apps.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..59afc4c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_IDN_apps.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Other Applications that Work with Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Other Applications that Work with Point of Sale

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

Point of Sale integrates with other business software applicationsincluding e-commerce applicationsto meet your stores specific needs. These applications are created by third-party software companies who are part of the Intuit Developer Network (IDN).

+ +

Related Topics

+

Integrated Application Preferences

+

Integration with QuickBooks Financial Software

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_barcodescanner_faq.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_barcodescanner_faq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..783c476 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_barcodescanner_faq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + +Bar Code Scanner FAQs + + + + + + + + + + +

Bar Code Scanner FAQs

+

Help & Support Overview | Support Resources

+

How do I configure my bar code scanner to automatically insert a carriage return after each scan?

+

Bar code scanners can be configured to insert a carriage return after each scan by scanning a bar code included in the documentation that you received with your scanner. Check the documentation for specific instructions.

+

Bar code scanners purchased from Intuit should be preconfigured to insert the carriage return automatically, but if this setting is somehow lost, it can be reprogrammed by following the directions that came with the scanner.

+

 

+

How do I reset the HHP IT3800LR model bar code scanner?

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the Resetting the Factory Settings section in your HHP IT3800 User manual.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Scan the bar code labeled Factory Default Settings with the scanner. This will reset the scanner.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List of compatible bar code scanners

+

Using bar codes and scanners in Point of Sale

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_cash_drawer_faqs.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_cash_drawer_faqs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..026035d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_cash_drawer_faqs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + +Troubleshoot Your Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Troubleshoot Your Cash Drawer

+

Compatible Cash Drawers | Help & Support Overview

+

My cash drawer will not open. What could cause this?

+

Use the procedure below to troubleshoot your cash drawer, or use the Hardware Troubleshooter wizard , available from the Help menu.

+

To function in Point of sale, a cash drawer must be connected through a working 40-column receipt printer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Are both your cash drawer and receipt printer on the Point of Sale compatible hardware list?

    +
    2. +
+

Note:The M-S Cash Drawer formerly sold by Intuit works only with compatible Star receipt printers. Learn moreClick to display a popup topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Are the cash drawer and printer cables connected tightly?

    +
    2. +
+

Note: Use only the manufacturer's cable included with the cash drawer for this connection. Using any other cable, including phone cords, may result in irreparable damage to your receipt printer.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Is the receipt printer printing normally? Try re-printing a saved receipt from your sales history to test.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Does the receipt printer specified in your cash drawer setup exactly match the receipt printer specified for printing receipts in workstation preferences?

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Edit Preferences Workstation Cash Drawer: Make sure the receipt printer specified here matches the one specified on your Documents & Printers page for printing sales receipts.

+

image\wspref_cashdrawer.gif

+

Edit Preferences Workstation Documents & Printers

+

image\wsprefs_printoptions.gif

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Are your company sales preferences set to open the cash drawer for the payment type you are taking?

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

image\cmppref_opencashdrawer.gif

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Is the cash drawer locked? Use your key to open it, if necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Is something inside the cash drawer preventing it from opening? Try gently shaking the cash drawer to dislodge the obstruction.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Install the VAL-u Line cash drawer

+

Install the M-S cash drawer

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_data_connection.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_data_connection.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d769ed4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_data_connection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Data Connection Issues + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Data Connection Issues

+

Help & Support Overview | Networking Issues

+

 

+

Point of Sale must be able to access the POS company data that is stored on the Server Workstation. In a networked installation, the connection issues outlined below most commonly apply when a Client workstation is unable to locate or connect to the data on the Server Workstation.  About Server and Client Workstations

+

 

+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Data Connection Requirements

+

There are certain prerequisites to being able to access the Point of Sale data, whether it is being accessed from the Server or Client Workstation.

+
    +
  1. +

    The Server Workstation must be turned on (but Point of Sale need not be running).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Firewall software must be configured to allow Point of Sale components to access needed ports.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

POS Data Connection Error Messages

+

If a workstation cannot locate or connect to the POS company data, you may see an error message similar to that shown below.

+

Application could not find, could not connect to, or could not open company data.

+

Review the list of possible causes and solutions below to correct the problem. When encountering connection difficulties on a Server Workstation, the first step is for the user to sign onto the computer as a user with Windows Administrator rights.

+

When encountering connection difficulties on a Client Workstation, the first step is for the user to sign-on to the Client Workstation as an administrator AND that an administrator also sign-on to the Server Workstation.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Possible Cause:

+		 +

Solution:

+
+

Company data was renamed, moved, or deleted.

+		 +

A list of the data files and Server Workstations found on the network is listed. Select the correct data/server and then select OK. On subsequent startups, the client workstation will reconnect to this same data.

+
+

The data file does not have a unique name.

+		 +

Ensure that the POS data file has a unique name.

+
+

The Server Workstation is not running. In order for a client workstation to access the data stored on the Server Workstation, the Server Workstation must be running.

+		 +

Once you are sure the Server Workstation and network are working, enter the Server Workstation computer name (can be found at Windows Control Panel System Computer Name on the Server) and POS company data file name (can be found in the Point of Sale title bar on the server) and then select OK.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

The Server Workstation has a different data file open than the one to which a client workstation is trying to connect.

+		 +

Open the correct company data on the Server Workstation or select to connect the currently open data.

+
+

The network connection or configuration is not working.

+		 +

Check your network connections and cables on both Client and Server Workstations. Can you access other information on the Server Workstation from the client? Check the Performance and Networking FAQs or consult with a qualified computer network specialist for help.

+
+

Firewall settings, on either the client or server workstation, are blocking the connection. In most cases, you will see a message from the firewall if this is the case. (Note: Some firewalls dont display a message at all in this case and others display messages only if the user has Windows Administrator rights.)

+		 +

Check your firewall settings. Be sure you are signed on to Windows as a user with Administrator rights and then try to connect again. If you receive a firewall message saying that Point of Sale (or the applications: QBUpdate, QBDBMgrN, Adaptive Server Anywhere Network Server) are trying to access the Internet, answer Yes, always to allow the connection. This should prevent this problem in the future. Note: Firewalls may vary in their message and the solution to this problem. Click the link above or refer to your firewall documentation for additional assistance.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Selected data is not a Point of Sale database.

+		 +

Select a valid Point of Sale data file.

+
+

There are more workstations running than are allowed by license.

+		 +

Shut down excess workstations or purchase additional Point of Sale licenses.

+
+

The workstation is not running the same level or version of Point of Sale as another workstation that is currently accessing the database.

+		 +

Update or upgrade all workstations to the same level and/or version of Point of Sale.

+
+

Insufficient user rights to create a database or to change the currently accessed database.

+		 +

Ensure that you are logging in to Point of Sale with sufficient rights to create or change the currently accessed database. Also, be sure that your Windows user rights are not blocking access.

+
+

Client Workstation is still logged into a database, preventing Restore, Open Database or Rename Database.

+		 +

Close the Client Workstation database connection or exit Point of Sale on the client.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Advanced settings that might affect connection

+

Configure port filters

+

Performance and networking issues

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_emailfaq.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_emailfaq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed99e0d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_emailfaq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + + +Office Integration FAQs (E-mail, Import/Export, Write Letters) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Office Integration FAQs (E-mail, Import/Export, Write Letters)

+

E-mail Documents | E-mail Preferences | Store Exchange Methods

+
+

Basic

+
+

E-mailing from Point of Sale

+

I have Outlook Express set up as my default Windows e-mail client, but when I select to e-mail a document or run Store Exchange, Point of Sale launches Microsoft Outlook instead. How do I fix this? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

How do I change the format of my e-mailed documents? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

How do I view e-mail attachments that are in PDF format? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Can I e-mail all of my customers or vendors at once? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshooting overview

+

Help and support overview

+ + + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_featurenotavailable.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_featurenotavailable.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..68906ef --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_featurenotavailable.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Why is a Point of Sale feature not available to me? + + + + + + + + + +

Why is a Point of Sale feature not available to me?

+

Help and Support Overview | Unlock to Higher Level

+

 

+

If a Point of Sale feature is not available to you, it may be due to one of the following reasons. Features not available may be grayed out or not displayed on your screen at all, depending on the specific reason. Select a link for more information on a particular setting or feature.

+ +

Important Note: New information fields, list columns, and report options may be added in support of new and enhanced features in Point of Sale upgrades and updates. In most cases, these new fields and options are automatically available to you. However, if you have customized your Point of Sale lists,  reports, or printed documents and tags, the new installation does not overwrite your customized layouts to add the new fields. If you plan to use a new feature, and the fields or options are not visible to you, you may need to further customize your layouts to add them or, in the case of reports, use the Revert option to reset to the default options and then re-memorize.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help & Support Resources

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_featuresbyedition.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_featuresbyedition.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0150ec6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_featuresbyedition.htm @@ -0,0 +1,170 @@ + + + + + + + +Comparison of Features by Level: Free, Basic, Pro + + + + + + + + + + +

Comparison of Features by Level: Free, Basic, Pro

+

Upgrade POS | Point of Sale Licensing

+

 

+

The Point of Sale software that you purchased contains three separate levels of the program, each with a specific set of features. This allows you to license and use only those features that you need, without having to pay for advanced features you don't need.

+

Your current program level is shown in the title bar at the top of the Point of Sale window.

+

Point of Sale Free provides fundamental retail functionality to:

+ +

Point of Sale Basic includes all the Free features, plus:

+ +

Point of Sale Pro includes all of the Free and Basic features, plus these additional features:

+ +

Notes:

+

1 Requires an account with QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Services. Fees apply.

+

2 Requires a separately purchased license for each lane.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Upgrade POS

+

Manage my license

+

Point of Sale software updates

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_firewall.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_firewall.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7bcc3e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_firewall.htm @@ -0,0 +1,139 @@ + + + + + + + + +Configure Your Firewall + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure + Your Firewall

+

Help and Support | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

A firewall, on either the Client + or Server workstation, can block communication between workstations and + the Point of Sale company data or to the Internet. You may see a message + from the firewall if this is the case.

+

Note: Some firewalls + dont display a message and others display messages only if the current + user has Windows Administrator rights. Make sure you are logged into Windows + with Administrator rights to ensure you are seeing any messages your firewall + might be generating. Read configure + Windows user rights for more information.

+

 

+

Get Latest Firewall Updates

+

Several major firewall applications are updated regularly + with the latest Point of Sale file and port information and will automatically + allow access to the ports and files needed. Use your firewall applications + instructions to be sure you have the most recent updates available before + installing Point of Sale and each time you install a Point + of Sale update.

+

 

+

Windows Integrated Firewall

+

If you use the Windows integrated firewall, and it + is blocking access, Point of Sale will alert you on startup and offer + to automatically configure the firewall for you. It is strongly recommended + that you allow the automatic configuration.

+

 

+

Manually Configuring Firewalls

+

Each firewall program presents its interface in a + slightly different manner; each provides its own phrase for asking what + you would like to do regarding the action it views as a possible threat. + You will see some form of the question, "What do you want to do about + this?" That question will be followed by a list of options, such + as allow, grant, deny, block, permit, or something similar, from which + you must choose an action.

+

You + should select the option to allow, grant or permit the action. + There should not be a prompt the next time the same action is performed. + However, permitting one action for one file will not automatically enable + all actions from anywhere in the Point of Sale program. Several different + Point of Sale files perform actions that might be seen by your firewall + as an attempt to connect to the Internet. Permission must be granted separately + for each action.

+

If firewall messages continue to appear, it may be + necessary to manually configure the firewall to allow access for the required + program files.

+

If you need to manually configure your firewall application, + you should review the appropriate sections of the manual or help file + that was supplied with the firewall program.

+

 

+

Note: Windows + 64 bit version is shown below.
+          For 32 bit + versions, (x86) is not shown in the path. For example: C:\Program Files\Intuit\QuickBooks + Point of Sale 19.0

+

The program files to grant access to are:

+ +

The services to grant access to are:

+ +

Note: + Folder locations shown assume the default installation location on Windows + 8/ 7/Vista. Adjust accordingly if you installed to a different location. + If necessary, use Windows Search from My Computer to locate these files.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

POS + company data connection issues

+

Performance + and networking issues

+

Troubleshoot + QuickBooks Financial Exchange

+

Configure + port filters

+

Help and support overview

+

Contact + Technical Support

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_hdwr_trblshooter.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_hdwr_trblshooter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ce93030 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_hdwr_trblshooter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Hardware Troubleshooter + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware Troubleshooter

+

Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic | Compatible Hardware List | Hardware Setup Wizard

+

 

+

The Hardware Troubleshooter can help you identify and correct problems with your Point of Sale hardware.

+

To use the Hardware Troubleshooter:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale Help menu, select Hardware Troubleshooter.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the type of hardware with which you are having trouble.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to narrow down the possible causes, try the suggested solutions, and then use the test option to verify the issue has been resolved.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot a receipt printer

+

Troubleshoot a cash drawer

+

Troubleshooting overview

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_ie_securitylevel.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_ie_securitylevel.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b581df4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_ie_securitylevel.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Your Internet Explorer Security Level + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Your Internet Explorer Security Level

+

 

+

Some Point of Sale features are displayed using the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser. If the security levels set for Internet Explorer on your computer are too restrictive, you may not be able to access some features or view some content in Point of Sale, or you may have to click through several security messages to view the content.

+

Point of Sale features that use Internet Explorer will typically display correctly if the security levels for Internet Explorer are set to Medium. Only you can decide which level of security is right for you, and

+

 

+

What are the default security levels in Internet Explorer? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Will changing my settings affect Internet Explorer outside of Point of Sale? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To change the security levels:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Microsoft Internet Explorer, go to the Tools menu and select Internet Options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose the Security tab.

    +
    3. +
+

At the top of the page, you'll see a list of the Web content zones. You need only verify and change the settings for the Internet and Local intranet zones.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Internet icon at the top of the window. Then, select the Default Level button.

    +
    2. +
+

Medium security should be selected, and a description of the security level appears in the window.

+

Note: If Medium security is not selected as the default, use the slider to set the security level to Medium.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Local intranet icon at the top of the window. Then, select the Default Level button.

    +
    2. +
+

Medium-low security should be selected, and a description of the security level appears in the window.

+

Note: If Medium-low security is not selected as the default, use the slider to set the security level to Medium-low.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_indexsubentryprompt.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_indexsubentryprompt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3118a3a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_indexsubentryprompt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + +Please select a subentry for this keyword + + + + + + + + + +

Please select a subentry for this keyword

+ +

Used from index only. Don't add footer or links.

+ +

Click an index subentry for the information you want to view.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_install_add_ws.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_install_add_ws.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..668ac3e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_install_add_ws.htm @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + +Install Additional Workstations + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install Additional Workstations

+

Network Issues | Company Data Connection Issues

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale can be networked to allow up to ten workstations simultaneous access to the program across a network within a store; one Server Workstation and up to nine client workstations. About Server and Client Workstations.

+

 

+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Use this procedure to install additional Client workstations to an existing Point of Sale server installation. If multiple workstations are to concurrently access the Point of Sale company data, each must have a separately purchased user license and all computers on the network must have the same version (e.g. 10.0) and level (e.g. Pro) of Point of Sale installed. About Point of Sale licensing.

+

For additional information or if you need to install the Server Workstation, read the Point of Sale User Guide (launches electronic version in a separate window)

+

To install an additional client workstation:

+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary, network your computers, following the instructions for your networking hardware and software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Close all running programs, except Windows, on the computer that you are installing as a Client.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Put the Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive (if installing from a downloaded file, follow the instructions provided).

    +
    4. +
+

The install Wizard will launch automatically. If it doesnt, browse to the Setup.exe file on the CD and double-click it to start the installation.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to install the program files to the client workstation:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the installation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the Server Workstation running (Point of Sale does not have to be open), launch Point of Sale on the Client workstation..

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Connect to the company data on the Server workstation.

    +
    4. +
+

If only one company data file exists on the network, you are automatically connected. If multiple files exist, a list is displayed and you can select a file.

+
    +
  1. +

    When prompted, select a workstation number for this computer. If using passwords, log in using the user name and password assigned to you when prompted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When the Hardware Setup Wizard appears, follow the on-screed directions to connect and configure any Point of Sale hardware you have purchased.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Merge the Client license with the Server license if prompted.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+

Work with your POS company data

+

Install supported hardware

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_jumpup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_jumpup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a723864 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_jumpup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Start and Grow Your Business + + + + + + + + + +

Start and Grow Your Business

+

 

+

Wondering how to put together a business plan? Or how to find expert advice and training in your area?

+ +

Internet connection required  Visit the Intuit Community now for additional support.

+

This free website provides resources and tools to help you get your business running quickly and successfully.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help & Support Resources

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_learning_center.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_learning_center.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17a331b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_learning_center.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +help_learning_center + + + + + + + + + + +

Learning Center

+

Help & Support | Practice Point of Sale | Point of Sale Manuals

+

 

+

The Learning Center provides a way for you to learn, or to train your employees in, the basics of Point of Sale by watching and/or reading a series of tutorial presentations. The Learning Center is displayed upon startup of Point of Sale (you can disable the automatic display, if desired) and also is available at anytime from the Help menu.

+

To use the Learning Center:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Learning Center from the Help menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select an area of interest from the left-hand menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click a topic in the main window to watch that tutorial.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done, select Start using QuickBooks Point of Sale from the bottom of the window.

    +
    5. +
+

Tips for watching audio/video tutorials.

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_lgtngbolt_popup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_lgtngbolt_popup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b6dc210 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_lgtngbolt_popup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + +Internet Connection Required + + + + + + + + + +

Internet Connection Required

+ +

In-help popup?

+ +

image\lightningbolt.gif When you see the lightning bolt icon, it means that an Internet connection is necessary to use that feature or help link.

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensemerge.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensemerge.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ef89e09 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensemerge.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Merge License Numbers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merge License Numbers

+

License Overview | Manage My License

+

 

+

Multiple copies of Point of Sale on a network in one location share a license number. If you purchased multiple copies of Point of Sale directly from Intuit, you are provided a single license number that includes multiple user licenses.

+

However, if you purchased additional copies of Point of Sale from a retail store or other source, the additional copies will come with unique license numbers, which must be merged with the existing license number on your Server Workstation within 5 days of installation.

+

When the new (Client) workstation connects to the company file on the Server Workstation, you are prompted to merge the licenses. On the 6th day, Point of Sale will cease to function on the Client if the licenses have not been merged. Licenses can be merged online or by phone.

+

To merge license numbers:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the prompt displayed, select Merge Now.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen or phone agent instructions to complete the merge on the Client Workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To complete the merge and make the additional user license available, the Server Workstation must synchronize its license with Intuits licensing servers.

    +
    3. +
+ +

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5056446 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +Point of Sale Licensing + + + + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale Licensing

+

How Do I?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

When you purchased Point of Sale, you purchased one or more user licenses. One user license allows one computer to access the Point of Sale company file at a time. Multiple user licenses allow multiple networked computers to access the company file at the same time.

+

 

+

One License, Multiple Workstations

+

You can install Point of Sale on more than one networked computer with a single user license. However, only one of those computers will be able to use Point of Sale at any one time. Likewise, if you purchase two user licenses, you can install Point of Sale on more than two computers, but only two computers can work in the company file at one time, and so on.

+

 

+

Example: How many licenses do I need to use Point of Sale on three workstations? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Note: All installations on a network must be the same version and level (Free, Basic, or Pro) of Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Network Licensing Flexibility

+

This licensing structure provides a great deal of flexibility. You may have different computers in your store that you use for different tasks, but not necessarily at the same time.

+

For example, you want to use a point-of-sale workstation in the front of the store during business hours, but want to use a networked back-office workstation in the evenings to create purchase orders and exchange data with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. In this example, only a single copy (with one user license) of Point of Sale is required. It would be installed on the back-office computer as the Server Workstation and the front computer as a Client Workstation, using the same license number. Either workstation can access Point of Sale, but only one at any given time.

+

This licensing structure allows you to:

+ +

Server Workstation Manages User Licenses

+

When you install your Server Workstation, you are required to register that software license with Intuit. This license becomes the "master" license for the store and reflects the number of user licenses you have purchased.

+

If you install Client Workstations using the same license number, any of the workstations can run Point of Sale, but simultaneous access is limited to the number of user licenses you have purchased.

+

The Server Workstation functions as the licensing "manager" and must be running (though Point of Sale does not have to be open) for Client Workstations to access the company data. When any starts Point of Sale, it connects to the company file on the Server Workstation, an available user license is allocated to it until it exits Point of Sale, at which time that user license becomes available to another workstation.

+

As your business grows and you need more workstations using Point of Sale at the same time, you can purchase additional user licenses, up to a total of ten per store: one Server Workstation and nine Client Workstations. No matter how many user licenses you purchase, they all share one "master license" (the license registered from the Server Workstation).

+

 

+

Merge License Numbers

+

If you purchase and install additional copies of Point of Sale with different license numbers, you must merge them with the Server Workstations license. After merging, the new workstation shares the same license as the Server Workstation and its original license number is deactivated.

+

The Server Workstation, in turn, is prompted to synchronize its license info with Intuits licensing servers to reflect the fact that an additional user license has been added. The new user license is not available for use until synchronization is completed.

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensing_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensing_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3c7825a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_licensing_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +help_licensing_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale Licensing: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Merge licenses on multiple workstations?

+

Synchronize my license with Intuit licensing servers?

+

Buy additional user licenses?

+

Learn about the differences between Server and Client workstations?

+ +

Unlock to a higher level of Point of Sale?

+ +

Register Point of Sale?

+

View an overview of Point of Sale licensing?

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_locate_a_proadvisor.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_locate_a_proadvisor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b4effad --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_locate_a_proadvisor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Find a Local Point of Sale Expert + + + + + + + + + +

Find a Local Point of Sale Expert

+

Help & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources

+ +

 

+ +

This topic content provided by the ProAdvisor and RSP teams. Do not edit without review and approval by them.

+ +

Looking for a Point of Sale expert in your area?

+

Get on-site assistance from a local expert who can help you set up, customize, and learn your Point of Sale software. Choose from Certified Point of Sale ProAdvisors or Retail Solution Providers, both have been tested and certified on Point of Sale by Intuit.

+

Note: Fees apply and are set by the expert. Point of Sale ProAdvisors have also been certified in QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software.

+

 

+

Certified Point of Sale ProAdvisors

+

Provide accounting advice tailored to your business needs.

+

Requires Internet connection Visit: www.FindAProAdvisor.com

+

 

+

Certified Point of Sale Retail Solution Providers

+

Your local retail business and technology experts that can help you with any retail technology questions.

+

Requires Internet connection Visit: http://intuitresellerlocator.com/

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_managemylicense.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_managemylicense.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bab9de7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_managemylicense.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage My License + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage My License

+

How Do I?Click to display a popup topic | About Point of Sale Licensing | Merge Licenses

+

 

+

The Manage My License area allows you to view and print the Point of Sale license agreement, purchase additional user licenses, and to synchronize your in-product license information with the license data Intuit has stored for you. The latter could become necessary if you have re-installed Point of Sale on new computers.

+

Up to ten licenses can be used within a single store, running any one level of Point of Sale (Free, Basic, Pro). Use this procedure to buy additional licenses at your current level. If you want to unlock to a higher level of Point of Sale instead, read the unlock topic.

+

Example: How many licenses do I need to use Point of Sale on three workstations? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To buy additional user licenses:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Manage My License Buy Additional User License from the Help menu at the Server Workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Next on the window displayed to complete your purchase online.

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

Select Skip online and purchase additional license by phone.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to purchase the additional license.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If purchasing by phone, enter the validation code given you by the operator and select Next.

    +
    3. +
+

To synchronize your license data with Intuit records:

+

You must have an active Internet connection for this option. If you dont have an Internet connection, select the Buy Additional User License option as described above, access the phone option, and tell the operator you are calling to synchronize your license.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Manage My License Synchronize License Data Online from the Help menu at the Server Workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to synchronize license data.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Feature comparison by level

+

Help and support overview

+

Point of Sale software updates

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_manuals.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_manuals.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a827449 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_manuals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + +Point of Sale User Guides + + + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale User Guides

+

Help and Support Overview

+

 

+

Click a link below to view an electronic version of the Point of Sale user guides in PDF format. How do I view PDF files?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

User Guide - Installation and configuration instructions

+

Implementation Guide: Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard - Information about implementing Point of Sale as part of an overall system that complies with industry standards to protect the card information of your credit and debit card customers

+

 

+

Internet connection required Additional online resources (Internet connection required):

+

Point of Sale User Community - Connect with other Point of Sale users and experts to ask questions and share advice.

+

Point of Sale Support Web Site - Search our Knowledge Base of frequently asked questions, learn about available updates, or research other support options.

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_navigation.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_navigation.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5b73c94 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_navigation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + +Navigate the Help System + + + + + + + + + + + +

Navigate the Help System

+

Help and Support Overview | Support Resources

+

 

+

Use the following controls to find the help topic you need.

+

image\help_system.gif

+

Contents Tab

+

The Contents pane uses a library metaphor to organize information:

+ + + + + + + + + +
+

image\open.gif

+		 +

Books represent a general area of Point of Sale. Click a book in the left panel to view the included topics.

+
+

+		 +

Pages represent individual topics in a book. Click a page to view the specific topic.

+
+

Index Tab

+

Select the index tab and type a keyword. The closest matching entry is highlighted. Double-click an entry or press <Enter> to view it. If multiple topics associated with a keyword, a list is presented from which you can choose a specific topic.

+

Search Tab

+

A word search from this tab looks for words or phrases that appear in the help system. This method of finding information yields a larger field of results and is not as targeted as using the index. Use the options on this page, such as the Search titles only check box at the bottom to reduce the number of hits you get. You can also create Boolean searches (and, or, near, or not statements) by selecting the small sideways arrow to the right of the search field.

+

Help Toolbar Icons

+

Hide/Show: Hides or shows the navigation pane. Hiding this pane allows you to see more of a program window and help at the same time.

+

Back: Return to the previously viewed topic.

+

Print: Sends the currently displayed topic to your default Windows printer.

+

Options: Ways to customize your experience with the help system.

+

In the Displayed Help Topic

+

Blue underlined links with no icon take you to a different topic or open a second window.

+

links with the plus sign expand to add additional detail on the same page. Once expanded, the icon changes to , clicking it again collapses the detail.

+ +

Click to display a popup topic links with the yellow up arrow display a "popup" topic without taking you away from your current page.

+

Green links display word definitions or other short descriptions.

+

License Level Identification

+

When the feature to which a help topic applies is restricted by your licensing level, you will see the license level identification in the upper-right corner of the topic:

+

Basic - available to Basic and Pro levels.

+

Basic Only - Available to Basic level only. Typically this means Pro level users have a more advanced feature to accomplish the same task.

+

Pro - Available to Pro level only (including Pro with multiple stores).

+

Pro Multiple Stores - Available only to Pro users with multiple stores.

+

Additional Help Resources

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_printdesignerfaqs.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_printdesignerfaqs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b45b830 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_printdesignerfaqs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,221 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Designer FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer FAQs

+

Print Designer Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Adding and Removing Elements from the Template

+

I see something on the screen that I want to remove, how can I do that?

+

How do I add a new section?

+

Besides my logo, what other images can I add to the template?

+

How do I know what information fields are available in the template?

+

 

+

Formatting Text and Element Properties

+

What options are available for formatting text and lines?

+

How do I change the text in a message or comment line?

+

 

+

Positioning and Sizing Elements and Sections

+

How do I know where or how something will appear when I print?

+

How do I get things to line up the way I want?

+

Can I resize column and field widths?

+

How do I resize or move a section?

+

How do I align elements and groups?

+

How do I turn on/off the rulers?

+

How do the X/Y coordinates work?

+

 

+

Printing and Viewing

+

I see an element in the template, why is it not there when I print?

+

Why is my new template not being used when I print?

+

How do I know where or how something will appear when I print?

+

 

+

Saving a Template

+

How do I save and use my template design?

+

How can I export my template so it can be used at another store or in another company data file?

+

 

+

 

+

Didnt find an answer to your question? Try these other resources:

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Visit the Point of Sale User Community to ask questions and share ideas, solutions, and advice with other Point of Sale users and experts.

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Check out our support website to search our online database of answers to frequently asked questions at www.quickbooks.com/support/pos.

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I see something on the screen that I want to remove, how can I do that?

+

The easiest way to remove an element from a template in Print Designer is to select it and press the enter key on your keyboard. You can also use the remove button on the toolbar.

+

When a selected element displays a grey background, it is required and cannot be removed. However, a required group field may have components you can turn off so that they will not display.

+

Sections cannot be removed from a template. If you do not wish section to be printed, just remove the elements in that section.

+

Learn more about removing elements from a template.

+

Print Designer overview

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I add a new a section?

+

Each template has a predefined and unchangeable number of sections. The number of sections in a template will vary depending on the template and on whether you are using a 40-column printer.

+

Learn more about template sections.

+

Print Designer overview

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Besides my logo, what other images can I add to the template?

+

More than one image can be specified in company preferences. but one must be designated the default logo. When you select an image in Print Designer, you can select the image set as the default logo, specify a different image than the default, or use more than one image in a document template.

+

Learn more about adding a logo.

+

Print Designer overview

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I know what information fields are available in the template?

+

Though most information is available to be printed, specific data fields will vary from template to template, and from section to section within each template. To determine what fields are available to be added in a section of a template, select that section and then select Add and Data field or Group of Fields. A dialog is displayed showing unused data fields that are available to be added to that section of the template. Data fields that are already in that section of the template will not be included in this list.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I change the text in a message or comment line?

+

There are several different types of text messages. Some are defined in company preferences. Many documents in Point of Sale have comments fields that you can edit directly from the document.

+

Some text fields, such as the signature memo on credit card receipts, cannot be edited. This text message can be turned off however by accessing the properties of the group element containing the credit card transaction and signature line.

+

You can also add text to any section of a document template.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Formatting Text and Elements

+

In Print Designer, text can be formatted in the same manner as it is formatted in most word processing programs, including font, size, bold, italic, underline and color. To change the formatting of text, access the properties of the element containing the text.

+

Specialized formatting of borders and graphic lines is not supported.

+

Learn more about changing font, line and border properties.

+

Print Designer overview

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I know where or how something will appear when I print?

+

The exact vertical placement of an element is dynamic based upon the other content in the printed document. More content or less content will cause elements to shift up or down the printed document. The template design window shows you what elements are assigned in each section, their general horizontal position, the sequence in which they will appear, and the space between them.

+

The Print Preview screen will provide a much closer approximation to the printed document. However, the preview screen does not have an actual transaction to use a basis for the display and therefore is still not a perfect example of the printed document.

+

The only way to see exactly how a document will print is to actually print a document from your history. However, you should bear in mind that not all fields are used in every document. For example, a receipt for a cash sale will not print the credit card signature lines.

+

Learn more about positioning elements.

+

Learn more about template sections and spacing.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I get things to line up the way I want?

+

Elements can be aligned through various methods:

+ +

It might also be necessary to resize an element in order to get it aligned in the way you prefer.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Can I re-size Column and field widths?

+

Column widths, such as in the item list, can be re-sized. However, if you size the column and it becomes too narrow for the information that will appear in the column, the information will be cut off.

+

Field and element widths can also be re-sized. Again, it is important to ensure that you do not re-size the field to a size too small for the data that will be printed in the field.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I resize or move a section?

+

Sections in the template and particularly at the end of the document will vary in vertical length depending upon the particular type of document and the printer being used. It is recommended that you build each section from the top down and then set the placement for the end of each section and the end of the document according to the lowest field placed in that section. The sequence of sections is predefined in each template.

+

The image below shows the divider at the end of the document moved to just below the end of the last field. This ensures that no wasted space is added to the printed documents. If more space is needed, the divider can be moved down.

+

image\printdesigner_divider.gif

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I turn on/off the rulers?

+

You can turn the rulers and set other interactive features in Print Designer preferences. These features give you choices for how you want to view and work with templates:

+ +

To set Print Designer preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    With a template displayed, select Preferences from the lower-left of the screen.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select or clear the checkboxes for the preference options.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do the X/Y coordinates work?

+

The X and Y coordinates are, respectively, the current horizontal and vertical position of the top left corner of the selected element. While moving an element, the displayed coordinates show the position changes, allowing you to place the element exactly, whether you are using drag and drop, or the arrow keys on the keyboard.

+

Learn more about status bar coordinates.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

I see an element in the template, why is it not there when I print?

+

Some elements are conditional and are only printed when applicable. For example, a credit card signature line would not appear on a receipt for a transaction being paid with cash. In such cases, the unused element and the space it takes are removed from the printed document. Elements that appear below the unused element are moved up the document accordingly.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Why is my new template not being used when I print?

+

Point of Sale uses whichever template is assigned in workstation preferences. When printing tags, you have the ability to change the template and/or printer directly from the print dialog.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I save and use my template design?

+

Templates can be modified and saved with the same name, or they can be modified and using Save As can be saved with a different name. Once complete, the modified template will be available for use.

+

Point of Sale uses whichever template is assigned in workstation preferences. When printing tags, you have the ability to change the template and/or printer directly from the print dialog.

+

Learn more about modifying and saving changes to a template.

+

Learn more about recommended sequence for editing and saving templates.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How can I export my template so it can be used at another store or in another company data file?

+

If you have created templates that you wish to use at another location or in another Point of Sale company file , use the import/export feature to export specific or all modified templates to an external file. Once you have copied the external file to the destination location, use the import/export feature at that location to bring the templates into that system.

+

Learn more about importing and exporting templates.

+

Return to question list

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_qbsupport_message_boards.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_qbsupport_message_boards.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4a9a2d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_qbsupport_message_boards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + +Point of Sale User Community + + + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale User Community

+

Point of Sale User CommunityHelp & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources

+

 

+

 

+

The Point of Sale User Community is an online forum for users to share ideas, ask questions, and provide solutions to one another.

+

Click the picture above to launch your Web browser and connect to the User Community.

+

Who answers the questions posted to the Point of Sale User Community?

+

Point of Sale users provide answers to each other's questions. This is a thriving community of novice through expert users eager to answer questions, share tips and advice, and act as peer support. Community hosts (also referred to as Moderators) monitor the discussions for directional and navigational assistance.

+

To visit the Point of Sale community, click here.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_reinstallvista.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_reinstallvista.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a62356e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_reinstallvista.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Upgrade a Point of Sale Workstation to Microsoft Windows Vista + + + + + + + + + + +

Upgrade a Point of Sale Workstation to Microsoft Windows Vista

+

Help & Support Resources

+

 

+

Note: You may not be able to access this topic immediately after installing Windows Vista. If you intend to upgrade to Vista in the near future, we recommend you print this topic for reference.

+

 

+

Point of Sale 10.0 is compatible with the Microsoft Windows VistaTM operating system. However, due to new security features implemented in Vista, the first time you start Point of Sale after upgrading to Vista you will be prompted to grant permission for Point of Sale to start its database service. You must be signed into Windows as a user with Administrator rights to grant this permission.

+

To upgrade an existing Point of Sale 10.0 computer to Windows Vista:

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete pending activities, such as settling credit and debit card sales and exchanging data between stores and with your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make a backup of your Point of Sale company data.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Install Windows Vista.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Start Point of Sale. You will receive a Point of Sale message advising you that your permission is required to continue.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Start Service.

    +
    6. +
+

Windows will then display a User Account permissions dialog. This dialog may vary depending on your system settings and your user level. View example Windows dialog.Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    If the Windows dialog includes a password section, select an Administrator-level user and enter your password.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK or Continue.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If you use remote data sharing (RDS) to exchange data with QuickBooks financial software, download and install the Vista-compatible version of RDS. Learn more.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_reinstalpos.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_reinstalpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c027267 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_reinstalpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Reinstall Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reinstall Point of Sale

+

Install Additional Workstations | Backup/Restore Data

+

 

+

Reinstalling Point of Sale may fix errors that result because of deleted or corrupted files.

+

Notes:

+ +

To reinstall Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Shut down all running programs on your computer except Windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD drive.

    +
    3. +
+

If the Installation Wizard does not launch automatically, select Start Run and type D:\setup. Replace the D with the letter of your CD drive if it differs.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Install option when prompted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow any on-screen instructions to complete the reinstallation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Finish when complete.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Check for and install available program updates.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Performance and networking issues

+

Company data connection issues

+

Help & Support Resources

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_show_me_all.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_show_me_all.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc6bd24 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_show_me_all.htm @@ -0,0 +1,424 @@ + + + + + + +'Show Me' Tutorials + + + + + + + + + + + +

'Show Me' Tutorials

+

Help and Support Overview | Learning Center | Manuals

+

 

+

'Show Me' tutorials provide overviews and instructions for completing various Point of Sale tasks. These tutorials can be watched by clicking a link below, from the Learning Center, or by clicking the Watch Tutorial icon (shown below) anywhere it appears on individual help topics.

+

Show Me tutorial icon

+

 

+

Note: Many of the tutorials include sound and are best played on a computer with sound card and speakers.  Tips

+

General Program Tutorials (Running time in parentheses)

+

Getting oriented to Point of Sale (1:45)

+

Managing your business with Point of Sale (self-paced)

+

How do I find a record or document? (1:26)

+

How do I put a document on hold? (:40)

+

How do I pay money out of the register? (1:02)

+

Inventory Tutorials

+

Getting the most out of your inventory (self-paced)

+

How do I add an inventory item? (3:10)

+

How do I find an item? (1:26)

+

How do I print tags? (1:15)

+

What is an item number used for? (1:30)

+

How do I add a department? (1:42)

+

Adjusting the cost or quantity of an item (1:00)

+ +

Transferring merchandise between stores (:53)

+ +

Using inventory styles (2:10)

+ +

Using multiple units of measure (1:27)

+ +

Importing items from QuickBooks financial software (self-paced)

+

Importing items from other sources (self-paced)

+

Sales and Returns (Receipts) Tutorials

+ +

Overview of sales documents (self-paced)

+ +

How do I sell merchandise? (1:44)

+

How do I handle merchandise returns and exchanges? (:45)

+

How do I put a receipt on hold to service another customer? (1:00)

+ +

How do I make a customer order? (1:15)

+ +

How do I look up a receipt in my sales history? (1:26)

+

How do I pay money out of the cash drawer? (1:02)

+

How do I take a payment on a store charge account? (1:00)

+

Purchasing and Receiving Tutorials

+

Purchasing and receiving overview (self-paced)

+

How do I make a purchase order? (1:00)

+

How do I make a receiving voucher? (1:20)

+

How do I add a vendor? (1:42)

+

End of Day and Reporting Tutorials

+

How do I read the X/Z Out Reports? (self-paced)

+

How do I run a report? (1:55)

+

Backing up and restoring data (self-paced)

+

How is my Point of Sale data sent to QuickBooks financial software? (self-paced)

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_showmetips.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_showmetips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a59f5ae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_showmetips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Show Me Tips + + + + + + + + + +

Show Me Tips

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+  +

If you are having problems watching the tutorials, check the following:

+ +

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_taxfaq.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_taxfaq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ab8a05 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_taxfaq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Tax FAQs + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax FAQs

+

Sales Tax Overview | Configuring Sales Tax | Sales Tax Reports

+

 

+

The following lists include common questions about collecting sales taxes in Point of Sale. Click on a question or scroll down to view the answers.

+

 

+

How do I collect sales tax based on unit price thresholds?

+

Due to a recent tax law change, when selling an item above a specified unit price I need to collect one combined tax rate for two agencies, but if the unit price is below the threshold I only collect tax for one of the agencies. How do I handle this in Point of Sale?

+

How do I collect a different tax rate on certain "luxury" items

+

I often take coupons or provide discounts which are reimbursed to me later by a third-party. I am required to collect tax on the full item price, prior to the coupon or discount being applied. How can I do this?

+

My city requires me to collect of 1% tax on top of the state sales tax charged. How do I set this up and get proper tax reporting?

+

I didn't need a particular tax code in my second tax location, because all sales using that location are non-taxable. However, when I deleted the code from the second location, it was also deleted from my default location ( where I do need it to collect sales tax). Why?

+

How do I collect tax on shipping amounts?

+

Didnt find an answer to your question? Try these other free resources:

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Visit the Point of Sale Community User Forums to ask questions and share ideas, solutions, and advice with other Point of Sale users and experts.

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Check out our support website to search our online database of answers to frequently asked questions at www.quickbooks.com/support.

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I am required to collect 8.0 % sales tax on certain items, but only if the unit price of the item exceeds a set amount, and then the tax applies only to the amount above that price. How do I handle this?

+

Set up a separate tax code in company preferences for this purpose. Select the Price-dependent single-rate tax option when defining the tax code . Enter the unit price threshold (the amount above which tax is collected), and then also select the check box to Apply sales tax only to the amount over the unit price threshold.

+

image\taxsetup_pricethreshold.gif

+  +

After setting up the tax code, assign it to the items in inventory that are taxed this way.

+

Point of Sale will automatically apply sales tax to the items associated with this code when they are listed on a sales receipt.

+

Learn more

+

Sales tax overview

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Due to a recent tax law change, when selling an item above a set unit price I need to collect one combined tax rate for two agencies, but if the unit price is below the threshold I only collect tax for one of the agencies. How do I handle this in Point of Sale?

+

This is best handled by setting up a multi-rate tax code. Set up one component of the tax code for each different rate/price range/agency combination needed, up to three components per tax code.

+

Click here to learn more about multi-rate tax codes and to view some examples of their use.

+

After setting up the tax code, assign it to the items in inventory that are taxed this way.

+

 

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I am required to collect a tax rate higher than my normal sales tax on certain "luxury" items. How do I handle this?

+

Set up a separate tax code and assign it to the luxury items in inventory. When defining the taxing instructions, enter the higher tax rate. Point of Sale will automatically apply the higher sales tax rate to the items associated with this code when they are listed on a sales receipt.

+

Example: Most of your taxable items are assigned the tax code "Tax" with a 7.0% tax rate. However, the luxury items you sell must be taxed at 8.5%. Add a tax code named "Luxury" or similar, enter the 8.5% tax rate, and optionally define a different tax code "mark" for this code to print on the customers receipt, such as an "L". Then assign the new tax code to the appropriate items in inventory.

+

If the tax only applies to the portion of the item price exceeding a defined threshold, you can use the price-dependent option when defining the tax code.

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

Using sales tax codes

+

Sales tax overview

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I often take coupons or provide discounts which are reimbursed to me later by a third-party. I am required to collect tax on the full item price, prior to the coupon or discount being applied. How can I do this?

+

Set up a non-taxable, non-inventory item for the coupon/discount that can be listed on the sales receipt. Include identifying information in the item description so that reports can be filtered or sorted by this value and set the price as a negative amount equal to the coupon amount or discount. (Option: Enter a generic description, e.g. "Coupon" and no price and edit the item when listing on a receipt to enter the amount and identifying information).

+

When selling the item, list both the item being sold at its regular price and the non-inventory coupon/discount item. Tax will be applied to the full price of the sold item, but the total due from the customer will be reduced by the discount item amount.

+

Since you are using an inventory item to apply the discount, consider the affect on your merchandise sales reports. You may want to filter and memorize your merchandise sales reports to exclude the coupon/discount item.

+

Sales tax overview

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

My city requires me to collect of 1% tax on top of the state sales tax charged. I need to report and pay this tax separately to the city. How do I set this up and get proper tax reporting?

+

When defining your tax codes, select the Multi-rate option. Enter the city and state tax rates as separate components of the code, each with their respective tax rate. (Note: Enter 0.5 % by typing 0.005 in the tax rate field). Since the tax is collected on the full price of the taxable items, do not enter any price thresholds. Assign this tax code to all taxable items in inventory and Point of Sale will collect the full combined tax rate on sales, but you'll have the ability to sort and sub-total your tax reports by agency.

+

Click here to learn more about using multi-rate tax codes.

+

 

+

Alternative: If you have integrated Point of Sale with QuickBooks financial software, you can accomplish the same reporting by setting up a tax group in QuickBooks and then mapping a single-rate Point of Sale tax code to the tax group. With this setup, the Point of Sale tax code will collect the single combined tax rate on sales, but your tax reports in QuickBooks financial software can break out the taxes due to each agency. Read Collecting sales tax for multiple agencies for more information.

+

Sales tax overview

+

Sales tax reports

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I didnt need a particular tax code in my second tax location, because all sales using that location are non-taxable. However, when I deleted the code from the second location, it was also deleted from my default location ( where I do need it to collect sales tax). Why?

+

Tax codes are universal across all your tax locations. Adding or deleting a tax code adds or deletes it to/from all tax locations. However, the taxing instructions for the code can be different for each location. In this case, you should add the tax code back but edit it in your second location to specify a 0% tax rate.

+

Also, in the second location (0% tax), you can map the tax code to a different QuickBooks tax item so it is reported properly in QuickBooks.

+

Using tax codes

+

Using tax locations

+

Sales tax integration with QuickBooks

+

Configuring sales tax

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_trblsht_rcptprinter.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_trblsht_rcptprinter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9e4cafc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_trblsht_rcptprinter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ + + + + + + + +Troubleshoot Your Receipt Printer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Troubleshoot Your Receipt Printer

+

Print FAQs | Help & Support Overview

+

 

+

Use the procedure below to troubleshoot your receipt printer or use the Hardware Troubleshooter, available from the Help menu.

+

My 40-column receipt printer is not working. What could cause this?

+
    +
  1. +

    Is your receipt printer on the Point of Sale compatible hardware list?

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Check the following printer conditions:

    +
    2. +
+ +

If your printer isn't listed, consult the printer's user guide or contact the vendor for more information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Is the receipt printer correctly installed and specified in workstation preferences?

    +
    2. +
+ +

image\wsprefs_avblprinters.gif

+ +

image\wsprefs_printoptions.gif

+

If not, change your selections to match your printer, and then select Print Test Page. Continue with the following steps if this doesn't fix the problem.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    If using a USB printer, did you recently change the USB port into which you have it attached to your computer?

    +
    2. +
+

Changing the USB port for your printer causes Windows to install the printer a second time. Each installation of the printer is unique to the USB port into which it is attached. If this has happened, your Available Printers list will have a second instance of your printer named Copy of <model>.

+

You can either plug the printer back into the original port or, if leaving it in the new port, return to the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences and select Copy of <model> as your receipt printer. If using a cash drawer with the receipt printer, also change your cash drawer setup to reflect the Copy of <model> receipt printer selection.

+

In general, it is recommended you always plug the receipt printer into the same USB port and delete the other instance of the printer from your Windows printer list.

+

If the steps above do not correct the problem, uninstall and reinstall the printer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your Windows Printers and Faxes folder from the Windows Start menu or Control Panel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Ensure there are no documents waiting to be printed by double-clicking your receipt printer name. If documents are pending, select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu and then close the documents window.

    +
    3. +
+

If there are multiple copies of your receipt printer listed, do this for each.

+
    +
  1. +

    Delete each occurrence of your printer by highlighting it and then selecting Delete from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Reinstall your printer, following the instructions provided with it. Click here for instructions to install supported hardware you have purchased from Intuit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Return to workstation preferences and select the new installation of your printer for sales receipts and, if applicable, for your cash drawer connection.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Print FAQs

+

Troubleshoot a cash drawer

+

Troubleshooting Overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_uninstallingpos.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_uninstallingpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..827ab53 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_uninstallingpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Uninstall Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Uninstall Point of Sale

+

Install Additional Workstations | Reinstall Point of Sale

+

 

+

Use this procedure to uninstall Point of Sale from your computer.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

To uninstall Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Exit Point of Sale on all workstations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From Windows, select Start Settings Control Panel. (The shortcut to Control Panel may be located directly on the Start menu in some Windows versions.)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    From the list of programs, select Point of Sale. If you have both an older and newer version installed, be sure to select the correct version for removal.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Add/Remove.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    If prompted, confirm the removal.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Repeat on additional workstations, if applicable.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help & Support Resources

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_unlock.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_unlock.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7f7bfbf --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_unlock.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Unlock to a Higher Point of Sale Level + + + + + + + + + + +

Upgrade Point of Sale

+

About Point of Sale Licensing | Feature Comparison by Level

+

 

+

If you need additional functionality, you can upgrade to a higher level of Point of Sale at any time over the phone, for an additional fee.

+

To unlock to a higher license level:

+
    +
  1. +

    On your Server Workstation, select Home from the main toolbar to display the Point of Sale Navigator.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Help menu, select Manage My License and then Buy Additional User License.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Call the 800 number listed and tell the service agent that you want to unlock to a higher level.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the instruction provided to enter the new product and validation numbers.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Close Point of Sale and restart on all workstations to begin using the higher-level features.

    +
    6. +
+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+

Point of Sale software updates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updatehdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updatehdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e916e48 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updatehdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +help_updatehdi + + + + + + + + +

Program Updates: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+  +

Install an update

+

Update multiple workstations

+

Set update preferences

+

Manually download an update

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_installing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_installing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2e8f153 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_installing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + +help_updates_installing + + + + + + + + + +

Installing a Program Update

+

Program Updates Overview | Update Preferences

+

 

+

Once an update file has been downloaded, either automatically or manually, you will be prompted to install it.

+

Important: We recommend installing updates and then restarting Point of Sale during off-hours. Updating multiple workstations or a large data file may take some time. The update is not completed until Point of Sale is restarted.

+

 

+

Before installing an update:

+ +

If you have multiple workstations:

+ +

To install an update:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Install Now on the update utility dialog or Next if prompted to install an automatically downloaded update.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale will automatically be closed on the workstation as the installation begins.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the installation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Restart Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
+

The program will copy the new files to the appropriate folders. When you restart Point of Sale, any new features or enhancements will be available at this workstation.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Manually downloading an update

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_manualdownload.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_manualdownload.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e5dd935 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_manualdownload.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + +help_updates_manualdownload + + + + + + + + + +

Manually Downloading Program Updates

+

Overview | Update Preferences | Installing an Update

+

 

+

If you choose not to allow automatic download of updates (a preference setting), you can manually check for and download them at anytime using this procedure. You must have an active Internet connection for this procedure.

+

To manually check for and download an update:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Update QBPOS from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Updates tab of the window displayed, select Get Updates.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the update site and checks for/downloads new updates. If you have multiple workstations, each must download or have access to the update file before continuing. Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    Once downloading is complete, select Install Now to immediately install the update on this workstation.

    +
    2. +
+

If you do not immediately install a downloaded update, Point of Sale will prompt you to do so each time you exit the program.

+

 

+

About the Update Window

+ +

When trying to update my Point of Sale program, I get an Error 12029. How can I fix this?

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_multipleworkstations.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_multipleworkstations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0c31968 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_updates_multipleworkstations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +help_updates_multipleworkstations + + + + + + + + +

Updating Multiple Workstations

+

Program Updates Overview

+

 

+

Program updates must be installed on each Point of Sale workstation in each store. If you update some workstations or stores, and not others, those that have not been updated may not be able to access the Point of Sale company data or exchange information with Headquarters.

+

Each workstation can download and install an update independently, or one workstation within each store can download the update to a shared network folder (specified in workstation preferences), in which case each workstation will be prompted to install from this location.

+

To download and install update files, a workstation must be connected to the Internet or be configured to use the shared download folder.

+

When updating multiple workstations:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Setting update preferences

+

Manually downloading an update

+

Installing an update

+

Program update overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_upgradeinfo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_upgradeinfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9f9a87 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_upgradeinfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Upgrade Information + + + + + + + + + +

Upgrade Information

+

Program Updates

+

 

+

An "upgrade" to Point of Sale means you are going from a previous version to a newer version. This is different than a program "update," which is a free enhancement release within a version.

+

Installing an upgrade requires that a previous version of the program already be installed on your computer or that you have the previous version CD available when installing the new version. The upgrade installation will verify the previous version before installing the new files.

+

If you do not have a previous version of the program, you will need to purchase and install the full version of Point of Sale, rather than using an upgrade installation.

+

 

+

Important Upgrade Note: New information fields, list columns, and report options have been added in support of the many new and enhanced features in this version of Point of Sale. In most cases, these new fields and options are automatically available to you. However, if you have customized your Point of Sale lists,  reports, or printed documents and tags in a previous version, the installation of this version did not overwrite your customized layouts to add the new fields. If you plan to use a new feature, and the fields or options are not visible to you, you will need to further customize to add them or, in the case of reports, use the Revert option to reset to the default options and then re-memorize.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_user_information.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_user_information.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f61febb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_user_information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Non-Tolerant Activities and the User Information Window + + + + + + + + + + + +

User Information Window and Non-Tolerant Activities

+

Help and Support Overview

+

 

+

Some tasks in Point of Sale are non-tolerant activities, meaning that all other workstations must exit Point of Sale before the task can be performed.

+

In most cases, the User Information window is displayed automatically if you launch a non-tolerant activity and gives you a list of other workstations currently using the program or applications that must be ended. You can also access this information manually following the procedure below.

+

To view the User Information screen:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Utilities >  User Information.

    +
    2. +
+

The workstations currently in Point of Sale are displayed. If these workstations exit, you can select Refresh to update the information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to exit.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Non-tolerant activities in Point of Sale include:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_whatisfirewall.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_whatisfirewall.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..80aa8cc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_whatisfirewall.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +help_whatisfirewall + + + + + + + + + +

What is a firewall?

+

 

+

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+

A firewall is a protective barrier that helps block access to the data on your computer or network by unauthorized persons or programs. Firewalls are an important component of an overall data protection strategy.

+

Typically, firewalls are installed at each connection point to the Internet and follow a set of rules in determining what communications to allow and what to block. The rules can control the communications based on file name, by Internet address, by individual ports on your computer, or by the communication protocol used. Firewalls are configurable to allow or disallow communications through any of these channels.

+

Point of Sale uses a common communication protocol, called TCP/IP, for connecting workstations to your company data and for connection to the Internet for certain features. Some firewalls, including the firewall included with Windows XP, will block this communication using their default rules and must be configured to work with Point of Sale.

+

Implementing a comprehensive data protection strategy

+

Configuring firewalls

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_win_controlpanel.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_win_controlpanel.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b67832 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_win_controlpanel.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Use Windows Control Panel + + + + + + + + + + + +

Use Windows Control Panel

+

Windows User Rights

+

 

+

Many operating system settings that affect Point of Sale features, including installed printers and modems, user accounts and rights, date/time format, etc. are configured via the Windows Control Panel.

+

To access the Windows Control Panel:

+ +

From the Control Panel, double-click the specific area for which you want to review or change settings, such as Printers and Faxes, User Accounts, or Phone and Modems.

+

To view or change hardware settings, right-click on the hardware name and then select:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_windows_user_rights.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_windows_user_rights.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1f60d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_windows_user_rights.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + +Configure Windows User Rights + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Windows User Rights

+

Help & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

If you use Windows 2000, XP, Vista, or 2003 Server, and have configured user rights at the operating system level, those Windows rights may affect access to Point of Sale.

+

Point of Sale checks the Windows rights (of the user that is logged in to Windows) on startup and displays a message if Windows rights are blocking access to the program. In this case, you should configure your Windows rights to give users Administrator or " full control" rights to the Point of Sale folders and their sub-folders as described below. These rights allow reading and writing of data to the Point of Sale folders.

+

Windows user rights are computer and user-specific. If you have multiple workstations, you have to set up Windows rights on each computer for each user that will log on to Windows.

+

Windows user rights need only be set up for the employees that log on to Windows, not for each Point of Sale user.

+

On the Server Workstation, for each user that will log on to Windows, give full control rights to:

+ +

On each client workstation, for each user that will log on to Windows, give full control rights to:

+ +

Note: Giving full control to users for these folders DOES NOT give them rights to any other programs or folders on your system. The Point of Sale rights you assign to your employees within Point of Sale still restricts access to program features.

+

 

+

Following are summarized instructions for managing Windows users and setting Windows rights for these folders. These instructions are for Windows XP and may vary depending on the version of Windows that you have. Consult your Windows documentation for specific instructions.

+

To add or manage Windows users or groups:

+
    +
  1. +

    Right click on My computer and then select Manage.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Local Users and Groups and then either the users or groups folder.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use the menu options to add, delete, set passwords, or view the properties of users or groups, as necessary.

    +
    4. +
+

To set up Windows rights for specific folders:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Windows Explorer, browse to a folder.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Right-click on the folder and select Sharing and Security.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Security tab.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the upper pane, click the user or group name to which you want to assign rights.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    In the lower pane, click the check box for Full Access (so that the box is checked).

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Repeat for other users or groups.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select OK.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Restart Point of Sale.

    +
    9. +
+

 

+

Note: Security steps have been taken in Point of Sale to prevent unauthorized access to your company data. Part of this protection includes creating a user profile in Windows called QBPOSDBSrvUser. This ensures that your company information can only be accessed through Point of Sale. If your system has been set up with only one user and no login password, Windows has been bypassing the user selection screen during startup; this will no longer occur.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees and security

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_wstypes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_wstypes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..df2766d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/help_wstypes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +About Server and Client Workstations + + + + + + + + + + + +

About Server and Client Workstations

+

Install Additional Workstations | Networking Issues

+
+

Basic

+
+

Within a store, Point of Sale can be run in Single User Mode (one workstation) or Multi User Mode (up to 20 networked workstations). In Multi User Mode, all the workstations have simultaneous access to the program. The most powerful computer should be the Server Workstation and holds the company data file with up to nineteen Client Workstations connecting to the server. A separate user license (or seat) must be purchased for each workstation requiring simultaneous access.

+

From the Home screen, you can view your current workstation type and number by selecting Help and About Point of Sale.

+

 

+

About the Server Workstation

+

Typically the first workstation to which you installed Point of Sale. If you are in Single User Mode, your workstation is a Server Workstation. Only the Server Workstation:

+ +

Only one Server Workstation can be installed on a network.

+

Important: The Server Workstation must be running for Client Workstations to have access to the Point of Sale data. (Point of Sale does not have to be open on the Server Workstation.)

+

 

+

Client Workstation

+

Any networked workstation that is not a Server Workstation is a Client Workstation. Client Workstations access the Point of Sale company data across the network.

+

 

+

Switching Between Single User and Network Mode

+

You initially choose Single User Mode or Multi User Mode when setting up your Point of Sale company file. When installing, it will ask you if you are using one computer or two or more computers.  You may need to change this setting if you are adding or removing workstations in the future.

+

To switch between modes:

+ +

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Install additional workstations

+

About Point of Sale licensing

+

Connection, performance, and network issues

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport01.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c3cd957 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + +Use the Point of Sale Help System + + + + + + + + + + +

Use the Point of Sale Help System

+

Free Online Support | Help & Support Resources | Find a Local Expert

+

For assistance with your current task, do one of the following:

+ +

License Level Identification

+

When the feature to which a help topic applies is restricted by your licensing level, you will see the license level identification in the upper-right corner of the topic:

+

Basic - available to Basic and Pro levels.

+

Basic Only - Available to Basic level only. Typically this means Pro level users have a more advanced feature to accomplish the same task.

+

Pro - Available to Pro level only (including Pro with multiple stores).

+

Pro Multiple Stores - Available only to Pro users with two or more stores using Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Click here to learn about finding topic within the help system.

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb661b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + +Help & Support Resources + + + + + + + + + + +

Help & Support Resources

+

Help & Support Overview | Navigate this Help System | Manuals

+

 

+

This help system, together with your Point of Sale User Guide, will serve to answer most of your questions about Point of Sale. However, should you require further assistance, use the resources listed below.

+

You may also find the answers to your issue in these troubleshooting topics. We recommend you start here.

+

Then try these additional resources...

+

Free, Self-Service Support Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Assisted Support Resources Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and Gift Card Services Support Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Order POS Supplies

+

Find a local, certified Point of Sale expert

+

Free resources for starting and growing your business

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport05.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..50ecd04 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Register Your Software + + + + + + + + + + + +

Register Your Software

+

Point of Sale Licensing

+

 

+

You can use Point of Sale for 5 days without registering. On the 6th day, you must register to continue using Point of Sale. You will be reminded to register each time you start the program until registration has been completed. You can register online or by phone.

+

To register Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Product Registration reminder screen on the Server Workstation, select Register Now.

    +
    2. +
+

If you are connected to the Internet, an online registration form is displayed.

+

If you are not connected to the Internet, the phone registration window is displayed. Dial the number listed to register.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the online prompts or the instructions provided by the phone agent to complete your registration.

    +
    2. +
+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport08.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bd12e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + +helpandsupport08 + + + + + + + + + +

Practice Point of Sale

+

Learning Center | 'Show Me' Tutorials

+

 

+

"Practice Point of Sale" is a separate program area that you can use to train yourself and your employees, and experiment with program features without affecting your real data. Practice mode also allows you to try the features at a level of Point of Sale other than what you have licensed. If you are Point of Sale Basic user, you can, for example, practice with the features at the Pro or Pro Multi-Store levels to see if they are what you need.

+

While in practice mode, the following apply:

+ +

To access practice mode:

+

Note: Step 3 below applies only at the Server Workstation. Client workstations can only connect to the practice data currently selected by the Server Workstation.

+
    +
  1. +

    Close all open Point of Sale windows on the workstation being used for practice.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Practice QBPOS from the File menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select a practice data option:

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select a practice level. Basic users have the option of practicing with Pro or Pro Multi-Store features, and Pro users can practice with Pro Multi-Store features

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK to create the practice data and enter practice mode.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Log in with your user name and password, if prompted.

    +
    4. +
+

While in practice mode, the words "Practice Mode" will flash in the title bar and the status bar will be displayed in a bright yellow color. Activities you carry out in practice do not affect your real company data.

+
    +
  1. +

    When done, select Exit Practice from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport15.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport15.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..184471b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport15.htm @@ -0,0 +1,257 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing FAQs

+

Printing Overview | Compatible Printers | Hardware Setup

+

 

+

The following lists include common questions about printing. Under the appropriate category below, click on a question to view the answer.

+

If you have problems printing, we recommend you use the Hardware Troubleshooter (access from the Help menu) for assistance. The troubleshooter will help you identify and correct your specific issue.

+

 

+

Printer Configuration & Preferences

+

My printer is not printing. What could cause this?

+

The Print or Print Tags buttons are grayed out. Why can't I access this option?

+

After upgrading, I can't find the same print template I used for a document/area before. Why is this?

+

 

+

Document & Report Printing

+

What is wrong when the right side of the text is truncated when printing the Z-Out Store Close report on the Star TSP600 receipt printer?

+

How can I change font size on a report?

+

What happens if I select print while viewing a document before the document has been updated?

+

What should I do if a printed document does not contain a field I want?

+

Can I customize my printed documents?

+

Can I change printing options at the time of printing?

+

How do I cancel a printing job after it has started?

+

When printing a X/Z-Out report to my 40-column printer, I get the error message "There was an error found when printing the document to LPT1: Do you want to retry or cancel the job?" If I cancel the print job Point of Sale freezes up. What can I do to correct this?

+

I am using the Epson TMU200 and am experiencing poor print quality. What is wrong?

+

 

+

Tag and Label Printing

+

How do I cancel a tag printing job after it has started?

+

When printing tags using the Zebra tag printer, tags are printed erratically, skipped, printed upside down, or not properly centered on tag stock. How can I fix this?

+

Tags are skipped when printing on a Zebra tag printer, even after a calibration. What could be the problem?

+

I accidentally sent a print job to the Zebra tag printer that was meant for another printer. What should I do?

+

The Zebra tag printer prints one tag, advances past several blank tags, and then the printer light becomes red, or the printer light becomes red when sending a job to the printer. How can I correct this?

+

When printing tags with cost there are unusual characters, but no cost. What has happened?

+

What is wrong when nothing prints on hangtags?

+

Can I customize my printed tags?

+

I changed fonts and font sizes in Print Designer, but my printouts are now messed up. Why?

+

See also Common issues with Zebra tag printers

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Didnt find an answer to your question? Try these other free resources:

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Visit the Point of Sale Community Message Board to ask questions and share ideas, solutions, and advice with other Point of Sale users and experts.

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Check out our support website to search our online Knowledgebase of answers to frequently asked questions at www.quickbooks.com/support.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Print records or documents

+

Print tags

+

Print the cost and last-received date on tags

+

Print customer labels

+

Workstation preferences: Printing

+

Compatible hardware list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Printer Configuration & Preferences Answers

+

My printer is not printing. What could cause this?

+

A number of things could cause this problem. Check for the following:

+ +

Receipt printer troubleshooter

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

The print or print tags button is grayed out. Why cant I access this option?

+

Typically, this happens when no printer has been set up in Windows or assigned in Point of Sale. Selecting Preferences Workstation from the File menu and then select Available Printers from the preferences menu on the left. If your printer is not listed, select Hardware Setup Wizard to install it now. Then select Documents & Printers and specify the printer for documents as necessary.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

After upgrading to this version, I cant find the same print template I used for a document/area in earlier versions. Why is this?

+

Improved print templates (called "designs" in some previous versions) have replaced previous templates. Review your template choices in workstation preferences and make new selections as appropriate. If you do not have a print template selected when selecting to print, a dialog will be presented from which you can make your selection.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Can I customize how my printed documents and tags look?

+

Yes, if you are a Pro-level user, you can customize printed documents and tags using the Print Designer. Learn more.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Document & Report Printing

+

What is wrong when the right side of the text is truncated when printing the Z-Out Store Close report on the Star TSP600 receipt printer?

+

Go to File Preferences Workstation Print Options X/Z-out and change the template assigned to X/Z-Out reports to 40-column X/Z-Out.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How can I change font size on a report?

+

You can change a number of report options, including font, header/footer information, and the columns of information displayed in the report. In the Report Center, choose the report you wish to run. Depending on how you run the report, the Modify Report wizard may be displayed before running or you can select Modify from the toolbar after it is displayed. Choose Change Report Appearance and then select an area of the report in the Fonts section to review or change font characteristics.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

What happens if I select print while viewing a document before the document has been saved?

+

In this case, selecting Print has the same effect as selecting Save & Print. The document is saved, then printed.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

What should I do if a printed document does not contain a field I want?

+

Try a different document template at File Preferences Workstation Documents & Printers and see if the new template contains the field/information you want. A number of templates are provided for each document type, each containing different information and fields.

+

(Pro) f the provided templates dont meet your needs, you can customize them or create new ones to meet your needs using Print Designer.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Is there a way I can change printing options at the time of printing?

+

At File Preferences Workstation Print Options, make sure the check box for Display Print Dialog... is selected for each type of document for which you would like to change options at the time of printing. You will be able to change the printer, number of copies, template, and various other options depending on the document type.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

When printing a X/Z-Out report to my 40-column printer, I get the error message "There was an error found when printing the document to LPT1: Do you want to retry or cancel the job?" If I cancel the print job Point of Sale freezes up. What can I do to correct this?

+

There are really two separate issues here. First, ignore the error message and let the printer continue printing. This error is caused by an overrun in the Windows print buffer, and if you just ignore it the message will disappear as soon as the buffer catches up. If it is a large report, this may take a few minutes but the message will disappear on its own and the print job will finish correctly.

+

The second issue, Point of Sale freezing when you do cancel the print job, is most likely because your printer properties are set to "Print directly to printer." If this is the case, system control is never returned from Windows to Point of Sale after canceling the print job. Open your Windows Printers folder, right-click your 40-column printer and select Properties. Locate the setting for spooling print jobs (typically on the Advanced page) and be sure the "Spool print jobs" and "Start printing immediately" settings are selected.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

I am using the Epson TMU200 and am experiencing poor print quality. What is wrong?

+

Try the following suggestions to improve the print quality with this printer.

+ +

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Tag Printing

+

When printing tags using the Zebra tag printer, tags are printed erratically, skipped, printed upside down, or not properly centered on tag stock. How can I fix this?

+

There are two possible reasons for this. 1) A dirty printhead, or 2) the printer needs to be calibrated. Calibration is offered required right after switching between label types, changing the roll, or just because tag printers can be finicky.

+

See Common issues with Zebra tag printers for advice on these issues and more.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Tags are skipped when printing on a Zebra tag printer, even after a calibration. What could be the problem?

+

Earlier models of the Zebra LP2824 printer work erratically with the current driver. Ensure that the manufacture date of the Zebra LP2824 is after October 2002.

+

See Common issues with Zebra tag printers for advice on these issues and more.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

I accidentally sent a print job to the Zebra LP2824 that was meant for another printer. What should I do?

+

Jobs meant for other printers are likely to have embedded commands that will create printing problems on the Zebra LP2824 printer. When this happens:

+
    +
  1. +

    Delete all pending print jobs for all printers (this may require rebooting Windows).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Power the printer off, and then back on.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Recalibrate the printer by selecting the Calibrate button on the Print dialog.

    +
    4. +
+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

The Zebra tag printer prints one tag, advances past several blank tags, and then the printer light becomes red, or the printer light becomes red when sending a job to the printer. How can I correct this?

+

This problem may be caused by accidentally sending a printer job meant for another printer to the Zebra LP2824.

+
    +
  1. +

    Delete all pending print jobs for all printers (this may require deleting jobs and rebooting Windows).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Power the printer off, and then back on.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Recalibrate the printer by selecting the Calibrate button on the Print dialog.

    +
    4. +
+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

When printing tags with cost there are unusual characters, but no cost. What has happened?

+

Tags can be printed in code to prevent inadvertent disclosure of Cost and Last Received Date information. The default at Edit Preferences Company Pricing Price Tag Codes maps the first 10 letters of the alphabet to the numbers 0-9 (a=1, b=2, c=3, etc.). Cost will print on tags in this code when you use a tag template with a suffix of "+ cost" (for example, "Zebra Label +cost"). Change the cost codes to suit your taste.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

What is wrong when nothing prints on hang tags?

+

Only one side of tag stock is designed for thermal printing. Reverse the direction that the tag stock feeds and try printing again.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

(Pro) I changed fonts and font sizes in Print Designer, but my printouts are now messed up. Why?

+

Print Designer allows you to change almost everything about a print template, including fonts, special characters, font sizes, colors, etc. But Print Designer doesn't know what printer you will use to actually print your tags or documents. Take care to not make changes that your printer won't support. For example, receipt and tag printers may not support all font characters, sizes, or color. Always test template changes to be sure the output is what you expected before putting the template into use in your store.

+

How do I cancel a printing job after it has started?

+

Point of Sale "spools" a printing job to Windows and Windows then sends the job to your printer. This allows you to begin another task sooner in Point of Sale, while Windows handles the printing chores. You can cancel the print job using the Cancel button on the print progress dialog in Point of Sale. Unfortunately, on many print jobs the spooling and this dialog are visible for only a few seconds in Point of Sale.

+

You may still be able to cancel the print job in Windows. Look for the printer icon in your system tray and double-click it. This opens the Windows print queue window for the printer. Your print job and its status is displayed. To cancel the print job, select the document and then from the Document menu, select Cancel.

+

Another, and possibly quicker, method of canceling a print job is too power off the printer itself. Cycling the printer power off and on typically clears any printer buffer (memory) that the printer itself may be using to hold the print job. You may still have to cancel or delete the job in the Windows print queue or it will remain there and possibly attempt to restart later.

+

Refer to Windows help for more information on working with printers or changing your print settings.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport16.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport16.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ffbdf81 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport16.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Troubleshooting Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Troubleshooting Overview

+

Help & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources

+

 

+

Select a topic below for assistance in troubleshooting problems. If you received an error message, click on the Help button on the message for specific help related to the activity you were performing.

+

What do you need help with?

+

 

+

Feature availability

+

Cash drawer

+

Receipt printer

+

Pole display

+

Bar code scanner

+

Hardware (general)

+

Printing (general)

+

Sales taxes

+

Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop

+

Windows user rights

+

Connecting to POS company data

+

Performance and networking

+

E-mailing from Point of Sale

+

Print Designer

+

Store Exchange

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Find a local. certified Point of Sale expert

+

Compatible POS hardware list

+

Program capacities

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport17.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport17.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e8593dd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport17.htm @@ -0,0 +1,472 @@ + + + + + + + +Connection, Performance, and Networking Issues + + + + + + + + + + + +

Connection, Performance, and Networking Issues

+

Help & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Connection Issues

+

I get error messages saying Point of Sale cannot connect to my company data

+

My firewall is blocking me from the POS company data

+

How do I set my port filters to allow access to needed ports?

+

When trying to update my Point of Sale program, I get an Error 12029

+

I cannot launch Web pages using links in Point of Sale

+

 

+

General Performance

+

Does your PC meet the minimum system requirements?

+

Do you have the latest updates or Service Packs for your Windows operating system?

+

Is the configuration and scheduling correct for anti-virus software?

+

When Windows comes out of hibernation, Point of Sale crashes

+

I had a power failure and now am getting error messages about data corruption

+

 

+

Networking Issues

+

Many network configuration parameters can influence the connection or performance of Point of Sale. An improperly configured network can cause all system resources to work harder, deterring from their ability to serve Point of Sale and other application requests. Following is a list of questions and answers related to the most common parameters that can adversely affect Point of Sale performance. Every computer and network configuration is unique; consult a qualified computer consultant for help, if necessary, to address networking issues.

+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Is the configuration and scheduling correct for anti-virus software?

+

Is any network backup software on the Server Workstation scheduled to run while Point of Sale operations are being performed?

+

Does the Server Workstation have appropriate hardware?

+

Does each client workstation have the appropriate hardware?

+

Is each device connected to a 100 Mbps Hub/Switch that is transmitting at 100Mbps?

+

 

+

Warning: The following advanced network issues should be addressed only by a qualified computer network consultant. These issues assume you have addressed the basic network settings posed in the questions above

+

 

+

Are the switches and network cards capable of auto-negotiating 100Mbps/Full Duplex?

+

Does each computer-switch port link auto-negotiate to 100Mbps/Full Duplex properly?

+

Are all devices connected to a 100Mbps hub operating at Half Duplex?

+

Is the Server Workstation hard drive defragmented on a regular basis?

+

Are system performance options properly set according to Point of Sale usage on the Server Workstation?

+

Are Port Filters set to allow access to needed ports?

+

 

+

 

+

Didnt find an answer to your question? Try these other resources:

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Visit the Point of Sale Community Message Board to ask questions and share ideas, solutions, and advice with other Point of Sale users and experts.

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Check out our support website to search our online database of answers to frequently asked questions at www.quickbooks.com/support/pos.

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+

Troubleshooting overview

+

Configuring firewalls

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

When trying to get the latest Point of Sale update, I get an Error 12029. What is wrong and how can I fix this?

+

This error indicates that Point of Sale cannot connect to the update servers using your current Internet connection. Follow these steps to fix this problem:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure your Internet connection is active and working outside of Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Workstation from the Point of Sale File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Automatic Update from the preferences list on the left side of the window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Internet Connection Setup button.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the choice labeled Use my computers Internet Connection settings to establish a connection when this application accesses the Internet.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Next and then Done to finish.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save to exit Workstation preferences.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Try updating Point of Sale again (select Update QBPOS from the File menu and then select Get Updates.

    +
    8. +
+

If this does not correct the problem, then there is probably a firewall installed on your computer that is blocking the Internet connection. Read Configuring firewalls and refer to your firewalls documentation or a qualified computer consultant for information about configuring the firewall for the following settings:

+ + +

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Does the PC meet the minimum system requirements?

+

Review the system requirements in your Point of Sale User Guide. Generally, increasing system RAM is the most cost-effective way to increase the performance on a single PC, assuming all other minimum requirements are met.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Do you have the latest updates or Service Packs for your operating system (Windows)?

+

Maintaining your Windows operating system with the latest updates and/or Service Packs is critical to ensuring optimum performance and data protection. Visit the Windows Update Internet site regularly to review and update your operating system files as necessary. For most versions of Windows, the update site can be accessed by selecting Start and then Windows Update.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

When Windows comes out of hibernation, Point of Sale crashes. How can I fix this?

+

Some Windows systems come with a hibernation feature that puts the computer to "sleep" after a set period of inactivity. This feature can be problematic with some programs. If you experience any difficulty returning from hibernation it is recommended that you disable this feature on your system.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Is the configuration and scheduling correct for anti-virus software?

+

If a workstation or network running Point of Sale seems to be abnormally slow, try reconfiguring your virus scanning software. By default, most virus scanning software scans all files in all folders. This can cause significant load on the system resources resulting in decreased performance for Point of Sale.

+

Be aware that changing the options of your virus scanning software can reduce its effectiveness. Consult a qualified computer technical consultant prior to making any changes to ensure that you understand the consequences of those changes.

+

Some anti-virus configuration options that may improve performance are:

+ +

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I had a power failure and now am getting error messages about data corruption. What do I do?

+

A power failure that occurs while Point of Sale is writing to your company date file may result in data loss or corruption, and any transaction or activity in process will most likely be lost. If you can access your company data, print out all transactional documents made after your last backup. Then restore your data from the backup and re-enter those transactions.

+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks financial software, and the re-entered documents have already been sent to QuickBooks you can mark them so that they are not sent again. With the document selected in your Point of Sale history list, select View Financial History from the I Want To menu and then select the check box labeled Mark this document as successfully sent.

+

 

+

Note: Data Recovery Service. If your attempt to restore your data is unsuccessful or if you need additional help, you can contact Intuit Technical Support for assistance. There may be a fee for this service.

+

 

+

We strongly recommend installing a UPS (uninterruptible power supply) on at least the Server Workstation, which stores your company data, and on the workstation you use to communicate for electronic funds transactions. Ideally, every workstation running Point of Sale should have a UPS installed. A UPS will give you the time to finish and save transactions in progress and shut down your system safely in the event the power loss lasts more than a few minutes.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Is any network backup software on the Server Workstation scheduled to run while Point of Sale operations are being performed?

+

Network backups are demanding on system resources and may cause performance degradation. There may be resource contention among the different services, applications, and Point of Sale on the server. It is recommended that you not use your Point of Sale Server Workstation for other network services, such as a domain controller, web server, file server, etc. If backups or other scheduled tasks must be run from the Server Workstation, schedule them for a time that does not conflict with Point of Sale operations.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Does the Server Workstation have appropriate hardware?

+

To perform optimally as data host for several workstations, the Server Workstation will require more than the Point of Sale minimum hardware requirements. Consult your network professional for more information and recommendations.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Does each client workstations have the appropriate hardware?

+

Each client workstation must meet the minimum system requirements, e.g. Pentium III or equivalent, 500 MHz CPU, 256 MB of RAM and a minimum of 250MB of free drive space.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Is each device connected to a 100 Mbps Hub/Switch that is transmitting at 100Mbps?

+

Since hubs operate at Half Duplex and transmit all frames to all ports, if one device is connected to a hub at 10Mbps, all devices will be downgraded to 10Mbps. There are intelligent hubs that do support independent speed settings per port, but you must confirm whether or not your hub supports this and that it is working correctly.

+

Full Duplex switches with auto-negotiation capabilities are the preferred connectivity devices for networks.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Warning: The following advanced network issues should be addressed only by a qualified computer network consultant. These issues assume you have addressed the basic network settings posed in the questions above

+

 

+


+Are the switches and network cards capable of auto-negotiating 100Mbps/Full Duplex?

+

A workstation or server connected to a switch port by a CAT5 cable is identified as a 'link'. The computer network card and the switch must support operating in 100Mb/Full Duplex. If either does not support this, the potential exists for a speed/duplex mismatch.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Does each computer-switch port link auto-negotiate to 100Mbps/Full Duplex properly?

+

Whenever possible, configure the network card and the switch port to auto-negotiate the speed and duplex setting. If the auto-negotiation protocols are working to industry standards, they will negotiate to the highest available speed and duplex setting (100Mbps/Full Duplex). This will result in the least amount of administration.

+

When using auto-negotiation, you must verify that the negotiation is occurring properly. If either device fails in the negotiation, the result can be a speed/duplex mismatch or a reduction in the speed/duplex settings the devices have negotiated. Either of these conditions will cause performance degradation. (See below for verifying speed/duplex settings).

+

If auto-negotiation is not an option on both devices, or it fails, manually set the speed/duplex settings for both devices identically ; 100Mbps/Full Duplex is the target configuration when connecting to a switch that supports this. Link speeds and duplex settings are configurable per switch port. All Point of Sale devices should be set to operate on 100Mbps/Full Duplex links for best performance.

+

With fiber optics, auto-negotiation is less likely to be supported. If you connect two switches, or a server and a switch, with fiber, you should manually configure both ends of this link for the same speed (100Mbps or 1000Mbps) and Full Duplex.

+

Auto-negotiation protocols will not detect an inferior cable, such as a CAT3 cable. The auto-negotiation will resolve to 100Mbps/Full Duplex, then errors will begin occurring during normal data transmission if you elect to use CAT3 cabling.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Are all devices connected to a 100 Mbps hub operating at Half Duplex?

+

Hubs are not compatible with Full Duplex communications. Full Duplex devices do not detect other devices that are transmitting on the wire; they will transmit at will. A Full Duplex network card connected to a hub will transmit data whenever it is received, without regard for any other devices transmitting on the wire, causing excessive collisions.

+

Full Duplex switches with auto-negotiation capabilities are the preferred connectivity devices for networks because of better performance.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Is the Server Workstation hard drive defragmented on a regular basis?

+

Periodic defragmentation of the hard drive is essential to optimal server performance. Files become fragmented over time as they grow in size and as the OS tries to conserve space by writing new data to open, non-contiguous blocks on the hard drive. Under severely fragmented conditions, a disk read-write head may have to perform 10-15 seek operations to read a fragmented file vs. one seek operation if this file were written contiguously to the disk.

+

Windows 2000 and XP both include a defragmentation utility. Refer to your Windows help for instructions to run this utility. There are also many good third-party utilities that allow for scheduling and automated defragmentation as well as other features to help maintain your disk subsystems.

+

Even if the defragmentation utility reports that defragmentation is not required, you should select View Report and look at the "Most Fragmented Files" area for critical files and their level of fragmentation. If you find critical system files or Point of Sale files heavily fragmented, you should run a defragmentation operation.

+

Note that files that are in use, or held open will not be defragmented, so this operation should be performed with everyone out of the system or at a time of low utilization.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Are system performance options properly set according to Point of Sale usage on the Server Workstation?

+

Application Performance

+

On the Server Workstation, access Control Panel System Advanced tab Performance Options:

+ +

This setting affects how the system allocates CPU cycles to each thread. If you use Point of Sale regularly on the Server Workstation and you want to allocate more CPU cycles to this instance of the program, select Applications. If you rarely run Point of Sale on the server, you should select Background Services. This will distribute CPU cycles equally among all services.

+

For client workstations, this setting should always be set to Applications.

+

 

+

The Pagefile

+

By default, the pagefile is created on the boot partition, where the system files are located and has an initial size equal to 1.5 times the amount of physical RAM, with the ability to grow beyond that initial size.

+

If a STOP error occurs and you want to create a memory dump file for debugging purposes, it is necessary to have the pagefile on the boot partition. For optimal performance though, the pagefile should be located on a separate physical drive from the boot partition to eliminate the disk access contention created between pagefile I/O and system file I/O. To balance out the need for creating a memory dump and the need to optimize performance, you can leave the pagefile on the boot partition and create an additional pagefile on a physically separate drive. Windows 2000 uses an algorithm for paging to the pagefile on the least busy drive.

+

Also, consider setting the initial and maximum size of the pagefile the same. This prevents the pagefile from growing. Resizing the pagefile takes CPU cycles and causes pagefile fragmentation, which, in turn, causes slower paging. Make sure the page file's initial size is at least 1.5 times physical RAM.

+

To view or revise pagefile settings, open Control Panel System Advanced tab Performance Options, and under Virtual Memory select Change.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Are Port Filters set to allow access to needed ports?

+

Windows 2000 and XP allow TCP/IP and UDP ports to be filtered, which could affect Point of Sale operations. To determine if this is the source of the problem, do the following:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Windows Start menu or Control Panel, right-click My Network Places and select Properties. (Called Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). (Make sure the box is checked.)

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Properties.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Advanced.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select the Options tab.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select TCP/IP Filtering and then Properties.

    +
    8. +
+

If Permit All is checked in each category, your ports are not being filtered and are not blocking Point of Sale actions at the operating system level. If Permit Only is checked in any category that is needed for Point of Sale, or required ports are not in the list, the same problems will occur as with a firewall. See the table below for a list of ports and which program files access them. Add the appropriate port to the permit list where necessary.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Default Port

+		 +

Program File

+		 +

When Accessed

+
+

443

+		 +

EFTSvr.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+
+

8443

+		 +

EFTSvr.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+

Merchant Service transactions

+
+

2638

+		 +

DataImporter.exe

+

EFTSvr.exe

+

QBDBMgr.exe

+

QBDBMgrN.exe

+

QBPOSDBServiceEx.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+

Conversion from previous version

+

Changing currently running database.

+

Startup

+

Detecting change to QBDatabases.ini

+

Help > Manage my license

+
+

46203

+		 +

EFTSvr.exe

+

QBDBMgrN.exe

+

qbpos.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+

Changing currently running database.

+
+

46204

+		 +

EFTSvr.exe

+

QBDBMgrN.exe

+

QBPOS.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+

Changing currently running database.

+
+

8024

+

 

+		 +

QBPOS.exe

+

Setup.exe

+		 +

Web installation

+

License verification

+

Throughout operation

+
+

8025

+		 +

QBPOS.exe

+

Setup.exe

+		 +

Web installation

+

License verification

+

Throughout operation

+
+

Return to question list

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport18.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport18.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f9705b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport18.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Pole Display FAQs + + + + + + + + + + +

Pole (Shopper) Display FAQs

+

Compatible Pole Displays | Configure your Pole Display

+

Nothing displays on my pole display. What could be wrong?

+

Check the following, seeking the help of a qualified computer consultant if necessary:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Install the Partner Tech CD7220 pole display

+

Troubleshooting overview

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport19.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport19.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d295b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport19.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + +Program Updates: Download and Install + + + + + + + + + + + +

Program Updates: Download and Install

+

Help & Support

+

 

+

Updates to your Point of Sale softwaresuch as maintenance releases, enhancements, and updated help filescan be quickly and easily downloaded and installed, ensuring that you have the most up-to-date features and capabilities available.

+

You can have Point of Sale automatically download update files (recommended), be notified when an update is available but download it yourself, or not be notified at all and manually check for updates yourself.

+

If you have multiple networked Point of Sale workstations, you can configure updates so that all workstations can update from a shared download file.

+

What's important about software updates?

+ +

Updating Point of Sale includes these steps:

+
    +
  1. +

    Set your updater preferences. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If updates are not downloaded automatically, select Software Updates > Check for Updates from the Help menu at the Server Workstation.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the update site and checks for available updates. If an update is available, information about what is included and an estimate of how long it will take to download it is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Update Now (on automatic downloads, select OK when notified).

    +
    2. +
+

Or, select Remind Me Later to delay a download/installation until a later time.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to install the update.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Restart Point of Sale after the update is installed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If applicable, install the update to additional workstations.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

To review the update history on a workstation, select Software Updates > View Installed Updates from the Help menu.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport20.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport20.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5cbed8a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/helpandsupport20.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Order Supplies + + + + + + + + + + +

Order Supplies

+

Help and Support Overview | Print Tags

+

 

+

Tags, labels, and receipt paper for Point of Sale can be ordered directly from Intuit.

+

Six types of tags/labels are supported with Point of Sale: two that work with standard laser/inkjet printers, and four that work with the Zebra LP2824 thermal tag printer.

+

Point of Sale tags/labels compatible with laser/inkjet printers:

+

Labels 1" x 2-5/8" (30 tags per sheet, 3 across)

+

Labels 1/2" x 1-3/4" (80 tags per sheet, 4 across)

+

 

+

Point of Sale tags/labels compatible with the Zebra LP2824 or compatible tag printers:

+

Hang Tags 2.25" x 1.35"

+

Price Labels, roll, adhesive 2.25" x 1.25"

+

Small Labels, roll, adhesive 1.2" x 0.85"

+

Jewelry Tags with Flaps

+

Jewelry Tags without Flaps

+

 

+

Receipt Paper

+

Designed to work perfectly with the Intuit-sold and supported Point of Sale receipt printers. Available in 10 or 50 roll packs. Each roll measures 3.15 inches wide and 220 feet long.

+

 

+

Ordering

+

These tags, labels, and receipt paper are available directly from Intuit. To order, please call 1-800-926-6066 or visit our web site. Offerings subject to change without notice.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Basic printing instructions

+

Compatible Tag Printers

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/hsoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/hsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..983af2a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_help_and_support/hsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ + + + + + + + + +Help and Support Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Help and Support Overview

+

For assistance with learning and using Point of Sale, select from the following resources:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Getting Started

+
+

User Guide (PDF)

+
+

Setup Interview

+
+

Hardware Setup Wizard

+
+

Point of Sale terminology (glossary)

+
+

 

+
+

Getting Help When You Need It

+
+

Use the in-program Help system

+
+

Troubleshooting FAQs

+
+

Support Resources

+
+

Find a local expert

+
+

Purchase Point of Sale supplies

+
+

Start and grow your business

+
+

 

+
+

Point of Sale Licensing, Registration, and Updates

+
+

About Point of Sale licensing

+
+

Register your software

+
+

Merge license numbers

+
+

Manage or buy an additional license

+
+

Keep your software up to date

+
+

Feature comparison by level: (Free, Basic, Pro)

+
+

Important Information about Windows Vista

+
+

Upgrade POS

+
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_companyinfo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_companyinfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f2d691 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_companyinfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + + +Setup Interview: Receipt Information + + + + + + + + + +

Setup Interview: Receipt Information

+

Setup Interview: Overview  

+

 

+

This page of the Setup Interview window is used to enter your company information (name, address, e-mail, web site, etc.) as you want it printed on sales receipts, purchase orders, reports, and customer orders.

+

You can also enter your return policy, store hours, or any other information you want to share with your customers.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_multistore_connectstores.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_multistore_connectstores.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d25498 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_multistore_connectstores.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up Other Stores + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up Other Stores

+

Store Exchange Center | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Store Exchange can be set up from the Store Exchange Center using the following guidelines:

+ +

Select a blue link on the left for answers to frequently asked questions.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Allowed Point of Sale activities by store type

+

Methods of Store Exchange

+

What information is exchanged between stores?

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_overview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..afde764 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Setup Interview + + + + + + + + + + +

Setup Interview

+

Help and Support | How Do I?

+

 

+

The first time Point of Sale is started on the Server Workstation, the Setup Interview window is automatically opened. The interview is the fastest way to set up basic Point of Sale options in one place so you are ready to begin ringing up sales fast!

+

Not all options are defined in this initial setup. Advanced options that help you customize Point of Sale for your unique business needs can be set up later in company preferences.

+

 

+

The Setup Interview allows you to define:

+

Printed receipt Enter the company information you want printed on sales receipts including phone numbers, web site, and email address. This information is also printed on orders and reports.

+

Sales tax Specify if you collect sales tax and, if so, enter your primary sales tax rate and to whom the taxes are paid. You can set up more advanced sales tax options, such as different taxing instructions by merchandise type, price, or location, or paying taxes to multiple agencies later in company preferences.

+

Payments   Learn about and sign up for a QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service account to process credit card and debit/ATM transactions from within Point of Sale. If you already have an account use this page to enter your account number and set service options.

+

Gift Card   The QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service allows you to sell, redeem, and track the balance of gift cards from within Point of Sale. A QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account is required.

+

Hardware  Click Configure/Setup for the Point of Sale equipment you have. The Hardware Setup Wizard will walk you through configuring and testing each piece of hardware.

+

 

+

You can return to the Setup Interview at anytime by selecting it from the File menu.

+

 

+

Learn more

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_qbfs.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_qbfs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..11d9255 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_qbfs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Setup Interview: Use with QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Setup Interview: Use with QuickBooks

+

Overview | Requirements of Financial Exchange

+

 

+

Use this page to specify whether you want to share Point of Sale data with QuickBooks financial software.

+ +

Connecting to QuickBooks

+

You can connect to QuickBooks now, provided you have the financial company you intend to use with Point of Sale set up. If you do not connect now, Point of Sale will prompt you to do so the first time you access a feature that requires a connection.

+

To connect now:

+
    +
  1. +

    Leaving the Point of Sale Setup Interview open, start your QuickBooks financial software and open the company file you wish to use with Point of Sale, logging in as a user with Administrator rights.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Switch back to the Point of Sale Setup Interview (select from the Windows task bar or press <Alt+Tab>).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Run QuickBooks Connection Wizard.

    +
    4. +
+

The Wizard will walk you through connecting the two programs.

+

Select a topic link to learn more about Financial Exchange.

+

Customizing how Point of Sale information is sent to QuickBooks

+

Importing your existing QuickBooks items to Point of Sale

+

Setup Interview: Overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_qbfs_q4.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_qbfs_q4.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0da3eb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_qbfs_q4.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +iview_qbfs_q4 + + + + + + + + + +

I am having trouble connecting to QuickBooks. How do I fix it?

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden

+ +

Go through this checklist to be sure all of the essential requirements of connecting are met.

+ +

OR

+

Have you followed the instructions in the Point of Sale QuickStart Guide to install and use QuickBooks on another computer?

+ +

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_salestax.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_salestax.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a93e9cd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_interview/iview_salestax.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up Primary Sales Tax Rate + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up Primary Sales Tax Rate

+

 

+

This information applies when setting up your primary sales tax rate from the Setup Interview or upon being prompted when you go to make a sale.

+

 

+

Use this page to set up your primary sales tax.

+ +

Entering tax information here sets up one tax code and one tax location for you, with the tax rate you specify applied to all taxable items. As you enter/edit your items in inventory, assign this tax code to them so that tax is automatically collected on sales.

+

If you need to configure more advanced sales tax options, such as collecting sales tax at different rates for different types of merchandise or services, for sales in different locations, based on item price thresholds, or to pay taxes to multiple agencies, you can set up those tax options later in Point of Sale company preferences.

+

Learn more about collecting sales taxes.

+

Sales tax FAQs

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_add_group.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_add_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b14c2e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_add_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a Group Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a Group Item

+

Group Overview | Sell a Group Item | Edit a Group Item

+
+

Pro

+
+

Should I be using an assembly item instead?

+

To add and define a group item (at Headquarters only in multi-store):

+
    +
  1. +

    Be sure all the items to be included in the group have been added to inventory individually.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Display your item list and then select Add.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter a descriptive name for the group in the Item Name field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the item Type field, select Group.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Specify a Department (required).

    +
    6. +
+

If the items included in the group come from more than one department, you may want to add a new department called Groups, or similar, to track and report the sale of group items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information for the group:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Save. The group item is added to your item list, and the details are automatically displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Group button next to the item Type field.

    +
    3. +
+

The Group Details window displays the information entered so far on the left of the window and the grid on the right is used to add the component items to the group.

+

View Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Edit Group.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information drop-down box, scan or type item information to search for the item to add.Click to expand/collapse topic.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Specify the quantity of the component item.

    +
    4. +
+

By default, each item is listed with a quantity of one. Click the Qty+ and Qty- button to quickly increase/decrease by one or click the Qty button to enter another number.  Quantity is the only editable field for the component items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat to add all items in the group.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

If no price was entered earlier, the group price automatically is set to equal the sum of the component item prices. If a price was previously entered, Point of Sale alerts you if the sum of the component item prices is different.  Select OK to set the price to the sum of the component item prices or No to stay with the existing price.

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Using assembly items

+

Inventory overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_edit_group.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_edit_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f3dcac6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_edit_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit or Delete Group Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit or Delete Group Items

+

Add a Group Item | List Group Items on Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

To edit the group or component items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the group item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Show Details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Group button next to the item Type field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Edit Group on the Group Details window.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Edit the group item information on the left side of the window or add, delete, or edit the quantity of component items in the grid on the right.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
+

To delete a group item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the group item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

If the group item is listed on active documents, such as layaways or sales orders, you will be reminded and asked to confirm the deletion. If you answer Yes, the item will be deleted. You should delete or edit the affected documents to remove the group item.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Group Items: Overview

+

Using assembly items

+

Inventory overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_item_groups.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_item_groups.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a11d09a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_item_groups.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Group Items: Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Group Items: Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | About Item Types

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Overview

+

A group item is not really an item at all, even though it is defined in inventory in the same manner as other items. Rather, a group item merely provides an efficient method to list all of the component items on a document by entering a single item identifier, optionally at a discounted price. Quantities and costs are not tracked for the group item; they are tracked for the individual component items included in the group.

+

The component items included in a group remain in inventory individually and can be sold individually.

+

When a group is listed on a sales document, the price of each component item is proportionally adjusted so that the total equals the specified group price. The group price cannot be edited on the document, but the component item prices can be edited, if desired. The printed receipt given to the customer can include the group price, the individual item prices, or both, based on your company preference setting.

+

Unlike an assembly, sales taxes are computed on each component item individually, based on the sales tax code assigned to each. Therefore, taxable and non-taxable items can be mixed in a group.

+

How else do group and assembly items differ?

+

 

+

(Multi-Store) Only Headquarters can define group items, but all stores can list group items on documents.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a group item to inventory

+

Edit or delete a group item

+

List a group item on documents

+

Using assembly items

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_multivendor.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_multivendor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1fd974f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inv_multivendor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Items from Multiple Vendors + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Items from Multiple Vendors

+

Inventory Overview | Vendors Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The multi-vendor feature allows you to track and purchase an item from one primary vendor and up to four alternate vendors. Unique UPCs, Alternate Lookups, and order costs can be defined for each vendor from whom you purchase the item. This allows you to purchase the same item from any of several vendors as availability or costs change.

+

All purchases of the item, regardless of vendor, are pooled in inventory once received, and are tracked with a single on-hand quantity, averaged cost, price, etc. However, the unique UPC, order costs, and alternate lookups allow you to list the item on documents using the information for any of the vendors. This feature also allows purchasing and receiving reports to be filtered by actual vendor used.

+

What would you like help with?

+

Define alternate vendors for an item in inventory Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Make a PO or receiving voucher for multi-vendor items Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

List multi-vendor items on other documents Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Multi-vendor items on reports Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Print tags for alternate vendors Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven401.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven401.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04debe6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven401.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + + +Accessing Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Accessing Inventory

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Overview | Add Items | About Item Types

+ +

To access inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu at the POS home page, select one of the following:

    +
    2. +
+ +

The Inventory menu also provides selections for other inventory-related areas of the program, as applicable to you license level, such as your department list, inventory adjustments, transfers between stores, Price Manager, and Physical Inventory. Each of these related areas are covered in their own help sections.

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven402.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven402.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8acba57 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven402.htm @@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a New Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Inventory Item

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Import ItemsClick to display a popup topic

+ +

 

+

Use this procedure to add a new item to your inventory. You can also read specific procedures for adding non-inventory, assembly, group, style or service items.

+

 

+

Notes:
+Your ability to perform this task may be limited by security rights.
+You can add a new item while making a sale or creating another document. Learn more.

+

To add a new inventory item:

+

* Indicates a required field.

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your item list, and then click Add from the window toolbar.

    +
    2. +
+

A new item form is opened. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter the * Item Name/Item Name. This is the short item description that is printed on sales receipts. The field label can be customized.  

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Navigate through the sections and fields of the item form, entering information as appropriate . Following are descriptions of the most commonly used fields in each section. More detailed explanation are located in the item fields topic.

    +
    3. +
+

Basic Info Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

More Info Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Comments Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Misc and Shipping Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

QuickBooks Desktop Options Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    To add the item to your Mobile device, click the Sync to Mobile box in the Misc and Shipping section.
    +OR
    +Click the Mobile box next to the Item # on the Item List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copy one item to add another

+

Add pictures to an item

+

Define multiple units of measure

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven403.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven403.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7318c7c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven403.htm @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Define Inventory

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Inventory Overview | Add Items

+ +

 

+

Although many data fields are available in inventory, the following fields are the basic fields used to define an item:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Description

+
+

Item Type

+		 +

What type of item is this? Required.

+
+

Department

+		 +

The department to which the item belongs. Required. Learn more about departments.

+
+

Vendor

+		 +

The vendor from whom you purchase the item.

+

(Pro) You can associate an item with one primary vendor and up to four alternate vendors.

+
+

Item Name*

+		 +

The principal short description of the item. Printed on sales receipts. Required.

+
+

Item Description*

+		 +

Secondary, long description of the item. Optional .

+
+

Attribute*

+		 +

A field used to describe an item characteristic, typically a color, pattern, a second size, etc.

+
+

Size*

+		 +

The size or any other characteristic of an item (the field is labeled Size but is essentially another Attribute field.

+
+

Item No.

+		 +

Suggested by Point of Sale but can be edited. Note that item numbers greater than 99,999 may cause scanning problems on tags printed within Point of Sale due to the resulting bar code size.

+

Suggested item number sequence can be reset via a company preference.

+

(Pro) Can I customize the tag layout to avoid problems?

+
+

UPC

+		 +

Universal product code. May be printed as a bar code on tagged merchandise received from your vendor. Enter or scan the UPC value into the UPC field in inventory so that the item can be added to documents by scanning.

+
+

Order Cost

+		 +

The cost you currently pay your vendor for the item. Learn more.

+
+

Avg Unit Cost

+		 +

Calculated average cost per unit of an item. Enter this value when adding pre-existing items to inventory during program startup; after that Point of Sale will calculate this value as you buy and sell the item. Learn more.

+
+

Reg Price

+		 +

Your everyday, regular price. Enter a price or, on new items, leave blank and let Point of Sale calculate prices based on department margin and cost. Learn more.

+
+

On-Hand Qty

+		 +

Enter only for items already existing in your store. Receiving vouchers will add the quantity for new items being ordered.

+
+

View all item field descriptions

+

 

+

* Customizing Item Description Field Labels

+

The default labels of the four item description fields, Item Name, Item Description, Size, and Attribute, can be changed to better reflect the type of merchandise you sell. The labels you assign will be displayed throughout the program and on printed documents and tags. Throughout this help system, we refer to them by their default labels. How do I change the labels?

+

If you upgraded from a previous version of Point of Sale, your item description field labels are retained from that version.

+

Each item must be unique. Point of Sale will not allow you to create two or more items with the same entries in the Department, Item Name, Size, and Attribute fields (it is not sufficient to record unique data in the Vendor, Item Description, or another inventory field). Pro: What if I get the same item from multiple vendors?

+

 

+

Note: It is recommended that you manually enter an items average unit cost or on-hand quantity only when adding existing items during program startup. Receiving vouchers will add both the quantities and costs to inventory on all ordered/received items. Learn more.

+

 

+

Smart Abbreviations

+

To more easily locate merchandise in inventory or filter items for reports, you should establish standard abbreviations for sizes and attributes and be consistent in their usage.

+

For example, you could use either "Wht" or "White" for white, but you should not use both. "Wht" and "White" will be treated as two different attributes on reports. However, their usage is not case sensitive, so "WHT," "wht," and "Wht" will all be treated as the same attribute.

+

 

+

Using Custom Item Fields (Pro)

+

Point of Sale provides you the ability to create and use custom item fields. Once defined, the custom fields can be displayed and used to filter lists and reports, and can be added to your printed documents using Print Designer.

+

For example, you may wish to track the vendors catalog number for your items, or you may need to record and print an item part number on your purchase orders. You can easily name custom fields whatever you want and begin using them for these purposes. How do I?

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven404.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven404.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8976211 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven404.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit an Inventory Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit an Inventory Item

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Overview | Delete an Item | Add an Item

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

This is the general procedure for editing most inventory items.

+

(Pro) See the related topic links below for special instructions when editing assembly, group, or style items.

+

To edit an inventory item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight an item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Edit from the window tool bar.

    +
    3. +
+

The item is opened in a editable form.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make necessary edits.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Pro Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+ +

Making edits directly in your item list

+ +

View an item's history

+

Edit an assembly item or a group item

+

Edit a style

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven405.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven405.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f914180 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven405.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copy an Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy an Item

+

Inventory Overview | About Item Types

+

 

+

Sometimes the quickest way to create a new item in inventory is to copy an existing similar item.

+
    +
  1. +

    In your item list, select the item you want to copy.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Copy.

    +
    3. +
+

Information from the copied item record is pasted into a new item record.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter new values into these fields and edit other item fields, as appropriate for the new item. At lest one of Department, Description 1, Attribute, or Size must be changed to avoid creating a duplicate item.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

About item cost and quantity

+

Inventory overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven406.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven406.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2102e9f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven406.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete an Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete an Item

+

Find an Item | Merge Items | Edit Items | Delete Style Items

+

 

+

Inventory items can be deleted when you no longer need them, with some restrictions. Deleting an item does not affect the ability to see the item on saved documents or on reports based on history documents.

+

To delete items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the item or items to be deleted from your item list.  How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Delete.

    +
    3. +
+

The Delete Items window is displayed, showing the status of the selected items and whether deletion is possible. Tell me more.Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Delete to delete the eligible item(s) or Cancel to return to your item records.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, confirm the deletion.

    +
    3. +
+

If you choose to delete an item that has an on-hand quantity, Point of Sale creates an adjustment memo to adjust your inventory value. If you delete items that are listed on an open order, you should edit the order document to remove the items.

+

 

+

Note: Deleted item added back to inventory if document listing it is reversedClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

If you are deleting an item because you have inadvertently created a duplicate of the same item, consider merging the items instead, as this will combine the two item histories into one record and remove the other.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Clean up your company data

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven407.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven407.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6be9036 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven407.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + + +Add a New Style + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Style

+

Item Style Overview | Style Templates | Edit a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to add a group of items to inventory as a style.  What is a style?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Note: The availability of the style feature can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

To add a new style:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your item list and select Add.

    +
    2. +
+

A blank Add Item form is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the Item Name, Item Type (typically Inventory), and Department. These values must be the same for all members of a style.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Style button.   Style Button

    +
    3. +
+

The Style window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information that is common to all items in the style in the item fields in the upper section of the window.

    +
    2. +
+

Important: Enter only information that is common to ALL items in the style. If the style items differ in cost or price, leave these fields blank. Point of Sale will auto-fill these fields when you make receiving vouchers to receive the items from your vendor or you can edit the fields later for individual items.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the bottom section, choose a predefined template from the drop-down list in the Select a Style Template field to apply it to the new style.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

Select Add New from the template drop-down list to define a new style template and then apply it to the style.

+

OR

+

Add style sizes and attributes directly on the style grid in the lower pane, using these guidelines:

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter a 0 (zero) in each grid cell corresponding to the items you are or will be carrying in the style.

    +
    2. +
+

Add Style

+

This creates a line in your item list for those items. When you first receive the new items on a receiving voucher, Point of Sale will add the received quantities. Leave a cell blank if you do not plan to carry a particular size/attribute combination.

+

Note: If the style items are already physically in the store and not being received on a voucher, you can enter the actual on-hand quantities instead of zeroes.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Edit individual style items, as necessary, to reflect unique UPCs, costs, prices, etc. There are two efficient ways to do this:

    +
    3. +
+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add pictures to a style

+

Style grid basics

+

Delete a style item

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven408.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven408.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..833509f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven408.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a Style + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Style

+

Overview | Style Grids | Style Templates | Delete a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to directly edit a style in inventory. If the style has a template applied and the changes are permanent, you can also edit the template.

+

To edit an existing style:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select any member of the style in your item list and click View Details.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Basic Info section of the item record, click the Style button.

    +
    3. +
+

The Style window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make necessary edits in the top pane. Editing these fields will affect all items in the style.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make specific style item edits in the style grid:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven409.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven409.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..095b1be --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven409.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete Style Items or Entire Styles + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete Style Items or Entire Styles

+

Style Overview | Edit a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: This process should be carried out with caution so that items with on-hand quantities or listed on active documents are not accidentally deleted. If you delete style items with on-hand quantities, Point of Sale creates adjustment memos to update inventory and your QuickBooks financial software. If the deleted item(s) are listed on an active order document, the item(s) are NOT removed from that document. Review and edit documents as necessary.

+

To delete a style item:

+

Use the normal item deletion procedure from your item list.

+

To delete an entire style:

+

Since all style items have the same Item Name, searching inventory by the Item Name is the quickest way to display all of the style items (and only the style items). Use caution when taking the following steps as all items in the style will be deleted.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the Item Name for the style in the Search field at the top of your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    All of the style items (and only the style items) should be displayed. Scroll through the list to ensure other items aren't displayed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Press Ctrl+A on your keyboard to select all of the items. If you only want to delete some of the items, select only them. How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Confirm the deletion when prompted. If any of the style items still have a quantity on hand or are listed on open order documents, you will be warned.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Find an item record

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven410.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven410.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f90b42e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven410.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + +Enter Item Price and Cost + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Item Price and Cost

+

Overview | Price and Cost Relationship | Price Manager

+
+

Basic

+
+

(Pro)  This option is available at Headquarters only.

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

The item Pricing window allows you to enter or edit an items cost and price information, including markdown price levels, an MSRP price, and margin/markup values on a single window.

+

You can open this window while adding, editing, or viewing an item.

+

To access the Pricing window:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select an item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Edit. This step is not necessary if you just want to view the pricing information.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Pricing button in the Basic Info section. The Pricing Window is opened as shown below.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    (Pro) If using the multiple units of measure feature, select the unit for which you want to view/edit this information from the drop-down menu (not shown).

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Pricing Window

+

Explanation of Price/Cost Fields

+ +

Price Levels

+

Optionally, enter prices and markdown percentages for your markdown price levels for the item (your custom price level names displayed). If you use Point of Sales pricing formula to calculate your regular prices and have defined price level markdown percentages, Point of Sale automatically calculates the price at each price level for you on new items.

+ +

Learn more about using price levels

+

 

+

Pricing Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

About the average unit cost

+

About the order cost

+

Change prices for a style

+

Cost and price in a multi-store configuration

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven421.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven421.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4824c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven421.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print Your Item List or Tags + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Your Item List or Tags

+

Print Tags: Basics | Tags Styles and Sizes | Overview

+

To print your item list:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your item list and select the items to include in the printout:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Items from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Print Items dialog, select:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Print in the Print dialog. You can also change the printer or number of copies on this dialog.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

To print item price tags:

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the item(s) for which you want to print tags:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Tags from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to specify print settings and print:

    +
    3. +
+ +

Tag Printing Options

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven427.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven427.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d0d1a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven427.htm @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ + + + + + + + +Style Grid Basics + + + + + + + + + + +

Style Grid Basics

+

Style Overview | Add a Style | Edit a Style | Style Templates

+
+

Pro

+
+

This information applies to the lower half of the Style window, displayed after selecting the Style button from an item record.

+

 

+

Style Grid

+

Style Grid Notes

+ +

Grid Values

+

When accessing and viewing a style grid from your item list, the values displayed are the on-hand quantities of each style item.

+

(Multi-Store)  You can view quantities for a specific store or the entire company by making a selection from the View:  field at the top of the grid.

+

If you come to inventory from a document, such as a purchase order, and then display the style grid, you are in "item select" mode. In this case the style grid cells initially display zeroes (0). To select items and order quantities to return to your document, enter order quantities in the grid and then choose Select from the bottom toolbar.

+

Showing Totals on a Grid

+

The style grid contains the totals for all the sizes in each attribute (row), and each size (column), and a grand total for all items in the style. You can choose to show or hide these totals.

+ + +

Navigating a grid:

+ +

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyboard action

+		 +

Description

+
+

<>, <>, <>, <>

+		 +

Move the cursor up, down, left, or right from one grid cell to another consecutively.

+
+

<Page Up>

+		 +

Move the cursor to the first displayed cell of a column.

+
+

<Page Down>

+		 +

Move the cursor to the last displayed cell of a column.

+
+

<Home> or
+<Ctrl + >

+		 +

Move the cursor to the first cell in a row.

+

 

+
+

<Ctrl + Home>

+		 +

Move the cursor to the upper left cell of the grid.

+
+

<Ctrl + End>

+		 +

Move the cursor to the lower right cell of the grid.

+
+ +

 

+ +

Return to top

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a style or style item

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven428.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven428.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3c04c32 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven428.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + +Style Templates + + + + + + + + + +

Style Templates

+

Style Overview | Add a Style | Edit a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

A style template is a user-defined array of item attributes (sizes, colors, patterns, etc.) that is used as a template when adding a new style. Each template can be used for an unlimited number of styles. Of course, you can instead create each style grid from scratch in inventory, but using templates makes the process much faster since all the predefined sizes and attributes are included in the new grid for you.

+

To work with style template:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your item list or form, begin adding or editing a style. The Style Window is displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To immediately apply an existing template to the style grid, select a template from the Style Template drop-down list at the top of the grid.

    +
    3. +
+

Select Style Template

+

Or

+

To preview, edit, or add templates, click the magnifying glass icon. Open

+

The Select a Style Template window is opened. Use this window to manage your style templates using the procedures below.

+ +

To preview and apply a template to the style you are working on:

+
    +
  1. +

     Select a template name on the left side of the window. A preview of the template is shown.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Apply Selected Template.  The template is immediately applied and the template window closed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Continue adding or editing your style.

    +
    4. +
+

To add a new template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Add New Template at the top of the window. A new template, with the default name New Template n, is displayed in the preview pane.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Type a unique name to overwrite the default.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Click to add fields on the template preview and enter style sizes, colors, or other attributes as appropriate along the vertical and horizontal axes.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Or

+

If you want to immediately apply this template to the style you were working on, select Apply Selected Template, which saves and applies the template in one step.

+

To edit, delete, or copy a style template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight a template in the list on the left of the template window and then complete actions as desired:

    +
    2. +
+ +

Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven430.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven430.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2147c8b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven430.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +QuickBooks Users: Adding an Item to Inventory and Immediately Selling It + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Users: Adding an Item to Inventory and Immediately Selling It

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

If you add an item to inventory while creating a document, such as a sales receipt, it is strongly recommended that you enter the average unit cost, if known.

+

Adding a new item without entering a cost, and then immediately selling the item, will result in a discrepancy in your QuickBooks inventory value, since no cost of goods can be posted for the sale. In this case, a compensating adjustment will have to be made in your financial software.

+

One way to handle this is to conduct periodic physical inventories and then make an aggregate adjustment in your QuickBooks financial software. This helps keep your inventory value accurate, especially if you regularly make sales of items without defined costs.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven431.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven431.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..062d3d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven431.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Assembly Items Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Assembly Items Overview

+

Inventory Overview | About Item Types | Group Items

+
+

Pro

+
+

An assembly item is an item that is itself composed of two or more other inventory items and sold as a set. For example, a "Ski Slope Package" could be defined as an assembly item made up of a pair of skis, bindings, and boots, all of which already exist in your inventory as individual items. Assembly items are often used to sell a set of items at a discount.

+

You "build" assembly items from the existing items in inventory, which are referred to as the component items. An assembly item can also be a component item of another assembly. When you build an assembly, the on-hand quantity of each component item is reduced by the quantity of the item included in the assembly and the on-hand quantity of the assembly item is increased by one. The number of assemblies you can build is dependent on the on-hand quantity of the component items. Assemblies can also be broken, thus freeing the component items to be sold individually again.

+

The assembled item has a single associated tax code; the entire assembly is taxed or not based on this code. Use judgement and observe local tax regulations if mixing taxable and non-taxable items in an assembly. Consider listing a non-taxable component as a separate service or non-inventory item on the receipt or use a group item instead. You can even include an assembly item in a group item.

+

How does an assembly item differ from a group item?

+

Once an assembly is defined and built, it can be listed on documents in the same manner as other items. Sales reports include assembly items as unique items and do not report on the component items that are included. Keep reporting needs in mind when you assign a department, vendor, and descriptions to your assembly items.

+

(Multi-store) Only Headquarters can define assembly items, but remote stores can build and break assemblies as necessary to meet local sales demand.

+

 

+

Related topics

+

Add and build assembly items

+

Break, edit, and delete assembly items

+

List assembly items on documents

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven432.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven432.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..09bbf45 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven432.htm @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + + +Add and Build Assembly Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add and Build Assembly Items

+

Assembly Item Overview | Break or Edit Assemblies

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

An assembly must be defined and then built to make it available to sell.

+

Should I be using a group item instead?

+

(Multi-store) Only Headquarters can define an assembly item. Once defined, both Headquarters and remote stores can build (or break) assemblies as needed; Headquarters for any store; remote stores for the local store only.

+

To define and build assemblies:

+
    +
  1. +

    Be sure all component items have been added to inventory individually.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From you item list, click Add.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter a descriptive name for the assembly item in the Item Name field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the item Type field, select Assembly.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Specify a department (required) and a vendor (optional).

    +
    6. +
+

If the items included in the assembly come from more than one department or vendor, you may want to set up a new department and/or vendor called Assemblies, or similar, to track and report the sale of assembly items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in other item fields as appropriate.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Save. The assembly item is added to your item list and displayed with details.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Assembly button next to the item Type field.

    +
    3. +
+

The Assembly Details window is displayed. The information entered so far is shown on the left and the grid on right is used  to display the component items in the assembly.

+

View Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Edit Assembly.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information drop-down box, scan or type item information to search for the item to add.Click to expand/collapse topic.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Specify the quantity of the component item.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    By default, each item is listed with a quantity of one. Click the Qty+ and Qty- button to quickly increase/decrease by one or click the Qty button to enter another number.  Quantity is the only editable field for the component items.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Repeat to add all items in the assembly.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Click Build at the top of the window.

    +
    7. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Specify the number of assemblies you wish to build and then select Build.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click OK on the confirmation dialog.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Sell an Assembly Item

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven433.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven433.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec27cd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven433.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + +Break, Edit, or Delete Assembly Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Break, Edit, or Delete Assembly Items

+

Assembly Items Overview | Add/Build Assembly Items

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can break, edit, or delete assemblies as needed to free the individual component items, to change the component items or quantities, or to discontinue using the assembly.

+

Breaking an assembly makes the component items available for sale individually. This option is only available if the on-hand quantity of the assembly item is greater than zero (0).

+

(Multi-store) Remote stores are limited to breaking assemblies at their own store and cannot edit or delete the assembly item.

+

To break assemblies:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight the assembly item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Show Details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Assembly button next to the item Type field. The Assembly Details are shown.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Edit Assembly. The Edit Assembly window is opened.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Click Break at the top of the Edit Assembly window.

    +
    6. +
+

Headquarters in multi-store only: Specify the store for which you are breaking the assemblies.

+

The Break Assembly dialog displays the number of existing assemblies that can be broken.

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify the number of assemblies you would like to break and then click  Break in the dialog.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click OK on the confirmation dialog.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

To edit an assembly (Headquarters only in multi-store):

+

Assembly item descriptive fields, price, vendor, etc. can be edited at any time using standard inventory editing procedures. However, the component items can only be changed if the on-hand quantity of the assembly item is zero (0). Existing assemblies must be broken before changes to the component items are allowed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the assembly item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Show Details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Assembly button next to the item Type field. The Assembly Details are shown.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Edit Assembly. The Edit Assembly window is opened.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    If the on-hand quantity is not zero (0), click Break and break all existing assemblies.

    +
    6. +
+

(Multi-store) All assemblies at all stores must be broken before the assembly component items can be edited.

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal procedures to add, edit, or delete component items.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save to record your changes.

    +
    3. +
+

You can now build new assemblies with the changed component items.

+

Return to top

+

 

+

 

+

To delete an assembly item (Headquarters only in multi-store):

+

Deleting an assembly item requires that you first break all existing assemblies and remove the component items from the assembly item.

+
    +
  1. +

    Break all existing assemblies, remove the component items, and save (select the links above for instructions, if necessary).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the assembly item highlighted (list) or displayed (form), select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Assembly item overview

+

Add and build assembly items

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven434.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven434.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa1ef0a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven434.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Reorder Points + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Inventory Reorder Points for Purchase Decisions

+

Reminders Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can define a reorder quantity (Reorder Point field) for your inventory items, allowing you to quickly see which items need to be purchased.

+

You can prevent an item from being added to the Reorder Reminders by flagging it as unorderable on the item record. This is handy for removing seasonal merchandise from the reminders list.

+

You can also run Reorder and Build Point reports.

+

 

+

Basic

+

Items at or below their reorder point are listed on the inventory Reorder Reminders window. Point of Sale takes into consideration any quantities already on order before adding an item to the reorder reminders list.

+

Pro

+

A company preference setting specifies the value used to determine when an item is added to your reorder reminders:

+ +

Point of Sale can suggest POs to reorder the items on the Reorder Reminders list.

+

For assembly items, the reorder point indicates that quantity at which you want to build more of the assembly item.

+

Multi-Store  

+

You can specify reorder points for the company (all stores combined) and for individual stores. The Reorder Reminders shows reminders for the company and each individual store as well.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Inventory overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven435.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven435.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d94fb5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven435.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + +Service and Non-Inventory Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Service and Non-Inventory Items

+

Item Types | Inventory Overview

+

 

+

Either service and non-inventory items can be used to sell or charge for non-merchandise services and fees, such as for tailoring, repairs, gift-wrapping, recycling fees, and delivery charges. The on-hand quantity of both these item types is always zero (0).

+

Non-inventory items are also sometimes used for incidental merchandise items for which you do not wish to track quantities.

+

Having two item types for these uses allows you to categorize and post the sales to different income accounts in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and on Point of Sale reports.

+

 

+

To define a service or non-inventory item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start adding a new item as usual.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the item Type field, select Service or Non-Inventory.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter information in the other item fields as needed.

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Charge for services by the hour

+

List service or non-inventory items on documents

+

Learn more about using service items

+

Collect Government-mandated fees

+

Use a service item for shipping charges

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven436.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven436.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3822741 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven436.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Item Types + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Types

+

Inventory Overview | Add Items

+

 

+

The inventory Item Type field is used to specify what type of item is being added:

+ +

Note: Miscellaneous items are not inventory items, so are not included here.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_assembly_vs_group.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_assembly_vs_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9317afa --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_assembly_vs_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ + + + + + + + +Should I use an Assembly or a Group Item? + + + + + + + + + + + +

Should I use an Assembly or a Group Item?

+

Assembly Overview | Group Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Item assemblies and groups both offer a way to sell a predefined set of items by listing a single item on a sales document. However, the two item types vary in several ways, as outlined below.

+

Key questions to ask when deciding between an assembly and a group?

+

Do you want to physically pre-build the set, thus removing the component item quantities from inventory?

+

Do you want the component item quantities in the set to remain available for individual sale?

+

Do you want the individual items printed on customer receipts or just the set as a single item?

+

Do you sell more of the items individually or as a set?

+

Will there be both taxable and non-taxable component items?

+

 

+

Key Differences Between Assembly and Group Items

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Option

+		 +

Assembly

+		 +

Group

+
+

Pre-built?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

No

+
+

Sell component items individually?

+		 +

No*

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Can include service and non-inventory items?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Can include assembly item as component?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Can include group item as component?

+		 +

No

+		 +

No

+
+

Assembly/group item printed on receipt?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Assembly/group item price printed on receipt?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Optional**

+
+

Component items printed on receipt?

+		 +

No

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Component item prices printed on receipt?

+		 +

No

+		 +

Optional**

+
+

Can contain both taxable and non-taxable items?

+		 +

No***

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Can assign discounted price?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Track costs and quantities?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

No****

+
+

      * Quantities of component items not pre-built into assemblies can be sold individually and built assemblies can be
+     broken, freeing the component items for individual sale.

+

    ** Controlled with a preference setting.

+

  *** After assembly, the single tax code assigned to the assembly item determines if it is taxed or not. The entire assembly is subject to the same tax code, so taxable and non-taxable items should not be mixed.

+

**** Quantities and costs of group component items are tracked individually, not as a group.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avblqty_tracking.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avblqty_tracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4714667 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avblqty_tracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Available Quantities + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Available Quantities

+

Inventory Overview | Reorder Item Reminders

+
+

Pro

+
+

The term available quantity refers to the current on-hand quantity of an item minus the quantity of that item already committed to active customer orders. The available quantity is sometimes referred to as the available to promise quantity. Knowing the available quantity helps you make sales decisions and plan for additional purchases of the item.

+

Available quantity calculations are used in Point of Sale to:

+ +

Where can I see an item's available quantity?

+ +

            

+ +

+ +

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avblqty_wndw.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avblqty_wndw.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0b081f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avblqty_wndw.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + +Available Quantities Window + + + + + + + + + + +

Available Quantities Window

+

Available Quantities Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The term available quantity refers to the on-hand quantity minus quantities already committed on active customer orders. Available quantity is sometimes referred to as available to promise.

+

The available Quantities window is the best way to see at a glance all the quantity information for an item and a listing of the documents affecting the available quantity.

+

In a multi-Store configuration, this window can also be used to enter or view item quantities at other stores.

+

To view the Available Quantities window for an item:

+ +

Available quantities tab on item information panel

+

 

+

An example of the Available Quantities window is shown below.

+

 

+

Available Quantities

+

 

+

What's important about this window?

+ +

To edit on-hand quantities in this window:

+ +

To close the window:

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

View an item's history

+

Purchasing overview

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avgunitcost.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avgunitcost.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..94f7727 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_avgunitcost.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + +About the Average Unit Cost + + + + + + + + + + + +

About the Average Unit Cost

+

About Order Cost | Enter/Edit Costs | Price/Cost Relationship

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

The Avg Unit Cost field in inventory reflects the average cost you have paid for the current on-hand quantity of an item.

+

 

+

image\inven_cost.gif

+

 

+

Point of Sale recalculates the average unit cost each time you receive additional quantities of the item at a different cost by proportionally averaging the old cost and the new cost. Receiving vouchers update your Point of Sale inventory and, if applicable, your QuickBooks financial software inventory value with item cost changes.

+

For example, if you have five shirts on hand with an average cost of $10 and you receive 10 more shirts costing $12 each, the new average unit cost is calculated as follows:

+

 

+ + + + + + + +
+

(On Hand Qty Current Cost) + (Rcvd Qty Purchase Cost)

+
+

On-Hand Qty + Rcvd Qty

+
+

Or, using the example above:

+ ++++++ + + + + + + +
+

(5 10) + (10 12)

+

5 + 10

+		 +

=

+		 +

170

+

15

+		 +

=

+		 +

New average unit cost of $11.33

+
+

 

+

We recommend that you not manually enter or edit the average unit cost. Point of Sale uses this value to send cost of goods sold information on item sales to your QuickBooks financial software. If it does become necessary to edit this value manually, typically to correct an error, see Creating an Adjustment Memo.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Tracking decimal costsClick to display a popup topic

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_convert_specialorder.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_convert_specialorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3fdb3fa --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_convert_specialorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Convert a Special Order Item to an Inventory Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Convert a Special Order Item to an Inventory Item

+

Handling Special Orders | Add a Special Order Item

+
+

Pro

+
+

A special order item created while making a document can later be converted to a regular inventory item if you plan to carry it in inventory in the future.

+

To convert a special order item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the special order item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
+ +

Hint: Filtering is a good way to display only special order items.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Edit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Change the item Type to Inventory.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make any other edits necessary, such as the Reorder Point which was previously disabled.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Multi-Store Notes:

+

When a special order item is created at a remote store, the remote store can temporarily define all item fields for use on local documents. However, when the special order item is received at Headquarters, the following fields are not populated with information from the remote and must be redefined by Headquarters:

+ +

On the next Store Exchange, the new values entered at Headquarters will overwrite the item information at the remote store that created the item as well as being made available at all other stores.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Multi-store purchasing

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_deleteitemswindow.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_deleteitemswindow.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..99881a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_deleteitemswindow.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +inven_deleteitemswindow + + + + + + + + + +

Delete Items Window

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

The Delete Items window is displayed to alert you to the status and possible restrictions of items selected for deletion. Use the + icon, where available, to expand the list and see the individual records affected.

+

Items selected for deletion are categorized as follows:

+ +

Cannot be Deleted

+ +

These items cannot be deleted because they are currently part of an assembly, group, or quantity price discount.

+ + + +

 

+

May be Deleted

+

These items may be deleted, but may affect your inventory value or remain on open order documents.

+ +

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_delitemsaddedback.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_delitemsaddedback.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ef1d053 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_delitemsaddedback.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +Note: Deleted Items Added Back to Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Note: Deleted Items Added Back to Inventory

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

If you delete an item from inventory, but then create or reverse a transactional document including that item, Point of Sale adds the item back to inventory. Inventory will reflect the change in item quantity effected by the document, creating a positive or negative on-hand quantity depending on the type of document.

+

For example, reversing a sales receipt results in a return receipt, and the returned quantity is added back to inventory. So, your deleted item is now back in inventory with a positive quantity.

+

This may trigger the item showing up in other program areas, such as on your Reorder Items Reminders screen. Review the item and delete it again, if appropriate.

+

(Pro) This could also occur if a remote store creates a document listing the item after Headquarters deletes it, in which case the item is added back to inventory once the document is received at Headquarters in a Store Exchange.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_duplicateitem.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_duplicateitem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c7ac04 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_duplicateitem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Duplicate Item + + + + + + + + + +

Duplicate Item

+

Define Inventory Items

+ +

Leave this topic in place, it is called from a dialog in program.

+ +

 

+

This information applies when a Duplicate Item message is received when adding or editing an inventory item.

+

 

+

You received this message because the item you are attempting to add/edit matches an existing item, with the same department, Item Name, size, and attribute. Duplicate items are not allowed in Point of Sale.

+

You have three options:

+ +

(Pro) Trying to add the same item for a different vendor?

+

Use the alternate vendor option instead (located in the More Info section existing item record).

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_duplicatestyle.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_duplicatestyle.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..537fb07 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_duplicatestyle.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Join Style? + + + + + + + + + + + +

Join Style?

+

Style Overview | Edit a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

This information applies to the message received when adding or editing an inventory item with the same definition as an existing style.

+

 

+

You got this message because the department and description entries for the item you are attempting to add/edit matches an existing style. A style is defined by the combination of Department and Item Name entries on an item record.

+

You have three options:

+ +

Trying to add the same item for a different vendor?

+

Use the alternate vendor option (located on the Additional Info tab) of the existing item record instead.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15d3989 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + +Inventory: How Do I? + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+  +

Add an item

+

Find an item

+

Edit an item

+

Filter the item list

+

Customize item list columns

+

Use service and non-inventory Items

+

View an items history

+

Use reorder points and reminders

+

Print price tags

+

Print my item list

+

 

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_item_addlinfo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_item_addlinfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2cd8455 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_item_addlinfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Item: Additional Information + + + + + + + + + + +

Item: Additional Information

+

Inventory Overview | Add Items | About Item Types

+ +

This applies only to legacy item form. Left in place since users can get to this form.

+ +

 

+

This information applies to the Additional Info tab on an item form in inventory.

+

 

+

Additional Vendor Information (Pro)

+ +

Miscellaneous Settings

+

Select the checkboxes, as appropriate for the item.

+ +

Define QuickBooks Item Account Information

+

Available only if integrated with QuickBooks financial software. You can customize the way item transactions are sent to QuickBooks by specifying QuickBooks accounts here. By default, the item accounts are auto-filled using the default item accounts specified in company preferences, but you can change them on an item basis on this window. Learn more.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemhistory.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemhistory.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5aa7505 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemhistory.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Item History and Statistics + + + + + + + + + + +

Item History and Statistics

+

Inventory Overview | Item Ratings & Trends | Inventory Reports

+

 

+

Item history provides a listing of every transactional document that has affected an item and a running tally of changes in on-hand quantity. You can click any listed document to view it.

+

Item Statistics include an item summary, including cost and profit information and total quantities in/out.

+

Item History  

+

(Pro) Item history can be viewed only at Headquarters. Headquarters can filter to view the history for any one store or for the entire company.

+

To view an item's history, with the item record in Edit mode (displayed in a form), expand the History section.

+

  image\inven_itemhistory.gif

+

The most recent documents are at the top of the list.

+ +

Item Statistics

+

Expand the Statistics section on the item record to view a graphical rating of the item's relative performance in your inventory as well as total sales, cost, profit, and  quantities in/out. This information reflects the time period specified for item ratings in preferences.

+

Learn more about item ratings

+

    Item Statistics

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Reverse a history document

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itempics.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itempics.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ee76339 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itempics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,230 @@ + + + + + + + +Add Pictures to Your Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Pictures to Your Items

+

Add New Items | Import/Export Pictures

+
+

Pro

+
+

Why add pictures to my items? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Are there any disadvantages to adding item pictures? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Picture file formats and attributes Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Making the picture fields available in inventory and on documents Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

You can associate up to two pictures with each item or item style in inventory. The pictures can then automatically be viewed at all workstations on your network when you display the item record and when adding the item to most Point of Sale documents.

+

The default picture is used to generate the thumbnail picture displayed throughout Point of Sale. An alternate picture can also be assigned so you can switch between them.

+

To quickly add one picture to an item:Add item picture

+
    +
  1. +

    Make the picture fields available as described above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Find the item in your item list and click Show Details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Click here to assign a picture field adjacent to the Item Name.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the Open file window, browse to the picture file and double-click it.

    +
    5. +
+

To add a second picture, remove a picture, or swap between pictures:Edit item picture

+
    +
  1. +

    Find the item in your item list and click Show Details.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the current picture adjacent to the Item Name.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Edit. The Pictures window is opened in edit mode as shown below.

    +
    4. +
+

Item Pictures

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Use the action buttons to edit the picture(s):

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    When done, click Close Picture Window in the upper-left.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save to save your edits.

    +
    3. +
+

To add pictures to a style:

+

All items in the style will display the pictures assigned in this manner. After assigning a style picture, you can change the pictures for individual items within the style using the procedure above.

+
    +
  1. +

    Display a style item record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Style button on the item form. The Style window is opened.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Add a picture at the top of the Style window in the same manner as above .

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Save the style record.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+ +

The Inventory Picture Album

+ +

The Inventory Picture Album displays your default item pictures and provides an alternate method for viewing and working with your item list. Most actions available in the item list are also available from the picture album.

+ + +

Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemratings.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6234d97 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Item Ratings & Trends + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Ratings & Trends

+

View Item History | Inventory Overview

+

 

+

Item ratings and trends provide graphical rankings of sales performance based on profit, net sales quantity, or net sales dollars, over a specified time period.

+

This feature helps you quickly identify hot-selling items that you might want to feature and slow-movers that require corrective action.

+

Shown below is the Statistics section of  an item record, which includes the graphical item rating and quantitative sales, profit, and margin information for the item. Trends are not included in this  window.

+

Both Ratings and Trends columns can be added to your item list using the customize list columns feature..

+

 

+

   image\itemratings.gif

+

 

+

Turning on Ratings & Trends

+

Ratings and trends can be turned on/off and the performance criteria and time period set by the Server Workstation on the Ratings & Trends page of company preferences. You may also have to customize your item list columns or information panel to view the rankings.

+

 

+

About Item Ratings

+

Item ratings use a familiar five star system, reflecting the performance of the item over the specified time period. Each additional star represents the next 20th percentile of the range between the highest and lowest values in the ranked value. Hover your mouse over the star icons to view the actual ranked values for an item and the maximum in the period for all items.

+

Items with no sales in the period are rated at 0 stars. Items that have never been sold display image\question_marks.gif.

+

View Ratings ExampleClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ +

About Item Trends

+ +

The sales performance trend of an item is indicated by up/down arrow icons. The icons are representative of the degree of performance change between the current period compared to the previous period of the same duration. Hove your mouse over the icon to see actual values for both periods and the change percentage.

+ +

For example, if you select in preferences to rank for the last 90 days, the trend compares sales in the last 90 days to sales in the previous 90 day period (i.e., 91-180 days ago).

+ +

View Trend ExampleClick to display a popup topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemratings_example.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemratings_example.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..da7c611 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemratings_example.htm @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + +inven_itemratings_example + + + + + + + + + +

Item Trend Example

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+  +

Your Ratings & Trends preferences are set to rank performance by net sales dollars for the last 90 days. The comparison period is the previous 90 days to that (i.e., sales made 91 180 days ago).

+

Here is the trend of five items of varying sales for the period and previous period.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Item #

+		 +

Sales $ Current Period

+		 +

Sales $ Previous Period

+		 +

Change

+		 +

Trend Icon

+		 +

Trend Description

+
+

1

+		 +

$2,430

+		 +

$1,203

+		 +

+ 102%

+		 +

image\trend_double_up.gif

+		 +

Strong trend up (+ 51% >)

+
+

2

+		 +

$3,344

+		 +

$2,537

+		 +

+ 32 %

+		 +

image\trend_up.gif

+		 +

Trend up (+ 11 50%)

+
+

3

+		 +

$1,694

+		 +

$1,800

+		 +

6%

+		 +

image\trend_flat.gif

+		 +

Flat (+/ 0 - 10%)

+
+

4

+		 +

$723

+		 +

$891

+		 +

19%

+		 +

image\trend_down.gif

+		 +

Trend down ( 11 - 50%)

+
+

5

+		 +

$719

+		 +

$2,248

+		 +

68%

+		 +

image\trend_double_down.gif

+		 +

Strong trend down ( 51% >)

+
+

All numbers rounded for simplicity.

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemtrend_example.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemtrend_example.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cffccdc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_itemtrend_example.htm @@ -0,0 +1,187 @@ + + + + + + +inven_itemtrend_example + + + + + + + + + +

Item Ratings Example

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

Your Ratings & Trends preferences are set to rank performance by net quantity sold for the last 365 days. Quantity sales of your items for the period ranged from zero (0) to 800 units.

+

Here is an example of how seven of your items are rated.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Item #

+		 +

Sales Qty

+		 +

Rating

+		 +

Rating Description

+
+

1

+		 +

800

+		 +

image\5_stars.gif

+		 +

5 Stars (81st to 100th percentile)

+
+

2

+		 +

592

+		 +

image\4_stars.gif

+		 +

4 Stars (61st to 80th percentile)

+
+

3

+		 +

380

+		 +

image\3_stars.gif

+		 +

3 Stars (41st to 60th percentile)

+
+

4

+		 +

201

+		 +

image\2_stars.gif

+		 +

2 Stars (21st to 40th percentile)

+
+

5

+		 +

72

+		 +

image\1_stars.gif

+		 +

1 Stars (0 to 20th percentile)

+
+

6

+		 +

0

+		 +

image\0_stars.gif

+		 +

0 Stars (No sales this period)

+
+

7

+		 +

0

+		 +

image\question_marks.gif

+		 +

Item has never been sold

+
+

 

+

You will not necessarily see an even distribution of ratings for your items. If all of your items tend to sell in approximately the same volume, they could in theory all be five-star performers. Lengthening the ranking period may help spread the distribution.

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_mergeitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_mergeitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d452012 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_mergeitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + +Merge Item Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merge Item Records

+

Find an Item | Delete an Item | Edit an Item

+

 

+

Occasionally you may find that you inadvertently entered the same item into inventory twice or that you have two items you prefer to track as a single item. Merging them allows you to combine the two items into a single item record with the combined history of both. You specify which of the item records is kept and which is removed.

+

The following rules apply to merging items. See the notes below for additional information.

+ +

To merge two items:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your item list, select one or both of the items you wish to merge. How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Merge.

    +
    2. +
+

The Merge Items window is opened. The item to be kept is shown on the left and the item to be removed is on the right. Review the items to ensure they are correct:

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Items.

    +
    2. +
+

If the item being removed was included on prior transactions or is a component item of another assembly or group item, a list of the documents and item records that will be affected by the merge is displayed. How are they affected?Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Items.

    +
    2. +
+

A confirmation dialog is displayed when the merge process is complete.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_multistorecostprice.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_multistorecostprice.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1758089 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_multistorecostprice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + +Item Costs/Prices in a Multi-Store Configuration + + + + + + + + + +

Item Costs/Prices in a Multi-Store Configuration

+

Enter/Edit Item Price and Cost | Use Price Levels

+
+

 

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

Item costs are averaged as receiving vouchers are saved/received at Headquarters.

+

Headquarters defines all price levels, item prices, and item order costs. Remote stores cannot directly enter or edit costs or prices in inventory, therefore cost adjustment memos and Price Manager are only available at Headquarters.

+

Remote stores have the capability to select their own default price level and to discount prices at point of sale.

+

Price changes implemented at Headquarters are conveyed to remote stores, using the price change inventory reminders. Remote stores can display the price changes made at Headquarters and print updated price tags or shelf stickers accordingly.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Give sales discounts

+

Multi-store overview

+

Inventory overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_ordercost.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_ordercost.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1233d54 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_ordercost.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +About the Order Cost + + + + + + + + + + +

About the Order Cost

+

About Average Cost | Enter/Edit Cost | Price/Cost Relationship

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

Order cost (Order Cost field, located in the More Info section of the item record) is different than the average unit cost. An item's order cost is the cost you are currently paying your vendor for one unit of the item.

+

Over time, with cost increases, it is normal for your order cost to move higher than your average unit cost, as you may have some quantity left in stock that was purchased at a lower cost when new shipments are received.

+

When you make a purchase order, the order cost in inventory is suggested as the purchase order cost. You can edit this cost on the PO, if necessary. When you receive the ordered items, the voucher that references the PO will automatically take its cost from the PO (if not referencing a PO, the order cost from inventory is suggested as the voucher cost).

+

When a voucher with a changed cost is saved it will automatically update the Order Cost field in inventory, so that the new order cost is suggested on the next PO or voucher made for the item. Point of Sale also calculates the new average unit cost for you in this situation.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track decimal costsClick to display a popup topic

+

Cost on POs

+

Cost on receiving vouchers

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_pricecostrelationship.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_pricecostrelationship.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d4b0c90 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_pricecostrelationship.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + +Price/Cost Relationship + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price/Cost Relationship

+

Average Unit Cost | Order Cost | Enter Item Cost and Prices

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

Margin (Margin % field) expresses the profit relationship between what you paid for an item (average unit cost) and its regular price. Markup (Markup % field) is an alternative way to express the difference between an items cost and its price. Markup is a simple percentage increase from the item cost.

+

There is an inter-relationship between the margin/markup fields and the other price/cost fields as follows:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Use department pricing formulas for new items

+

Edit an Item

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_priceformula.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_priceformula.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ec7ee5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_priceformula.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Department Pricing Formula + + + + + + + + + + + +

Department Pricing Formula

+

Enter/Edit Item Price and Cost | Use Price Levels

+

 

+

You have the option of entering your new item prices manually or letting Point of Sale calculate them for you using a department pricing formula. When Point of Sale calculates new prices, it does so by applying the department margin (or markup) to the average item cost to arrive at the regular price.

+

You specify the profit margin or markup to be used in your department records or on individual item records in inventory. If you enter one value, Point of Sale calculates the other.

+

Point of Sale uses the following pricing formula:

+ +++ + + + + + + +
+

Regular Price  =

+		 +

Cost 100

+
+

100 Margin

+
+

Example

+

With an average unit cost of $10 and a 40% margin.

+

(10 x 100)/(100 40) = $16.67 regular price

+

If you want Point of Sale to calculate new item price(s) with a department pricing formula:

+ +

The pricing formula is applied only to new items in inventory (previous price = $0). Receiving reorder merchandise at a new cost on a voucher does not automatically update item prices, however Point of Sale alerts you so you can adjust your price if desired. You can maintain your desired profit margin by manually editing the margin or markup on the item record back to the original level.

+

Why aren't reorder item prices automatically updated when cost changes?

+

If you DO NOT want Point of Sale to calculate new item price(s):

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_pricelevels.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_pricelevels.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1acdcd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_pricelevels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + +Markdown Price Levels + + + + + + + + + + +

Markdown Price Levels

+

Inventory Overview | Price Levels on Sales | Edit Item Prices

+

 

+

Point of Sale can maintain up to four price levels in addition to your regular price for each item in inventory (i.e., five separate prices). Price levels are markdowns from your regular price.

+

Use price levels to offer different prices for different purposes or to different groups of customers. Common uses for price levels include:

+ +

A typical price level setup and the prices at each level might look like this:

+

 

+

image\price_level.gif

+

 

+

Your price level markdowns are applied and the price at each level recalculated anytime your regular price is changed, either manually or when Point of Sale applies its pricing formula. On the other hand, editing the price or markdown percentage of any of your markdown price levels has no effect on any other price.

+

 

+

How do I define price levels?

+

You define price level names and default markdown percentages in company preferences . Enter a name and default markdown percentage for each level you wish to use, and specify the default price to suggest for all sales. Your default price can be your regular price or one of your markdown price levels.

+

(Pro)  Each store can specify its own default sales price.

+ +

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_protip_hourcharges.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_protip_hourcharges.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e74d9d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_protip_hourcharges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Charge by the Hour + + + + + + + + + + + +

Charge by the Hour

+

Track Decimal Quantities | Item Types | Inventory Overview

+

 

+

You can use service or non-inventory items to charge for services by the hour (or half-hour, quarter-hour, etc.).

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    Define an item or items in inventory for this purpose, such as Tailoring, Labor Charge, etc. making sure that Service or Non-Inventory is selected as the Item Type.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    When the item is listed on a receipt, enter the units of time to be charged for as the items sale quantity. For example, if you are charging by the hour, enter 1.5 as the Qty to charge for an hour and a half.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_qty_decimals.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_qty_decimals.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..deaa4e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_qty_decimals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Decimal Quantities + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Decimal Quantities

+

Notes on Quantities and Costs | Multiple Units of Measure

+
+

Basic

+
+

Sometimes it is beneficial to track items in decimal quantities. For example, you might sell an item by the yard (e.g., fabric), by weight (e.g., bulk candy), or by the hour (labor). Point of Sale allows you to order, inventory, and sell items by decimal units.

+

For example, if you order and price fabric by the yard you can easily sell 1/4 yard or 1-1/2 yards by entering .25 or 1.5 in the Qty field on receipts. The correct fractional price will automatically be calculated for you.

+

To charge an hourly fee for labor define a service or non-inventory item called Labor or similar, assigning your hourly rate as the price. On a receipt or customer order, you can now list the service or non-inventory item Labor and charge for partial hours by entering a decimal quantity in the Qty field.

+

You can enter decimal quantities in any quantity field. Point of Sale will round your entry to two decimal places for display purposes and does not display trailing zeroes, i.e., if you enter 2.50, the display will be 2.5. However, the program stores and uses up to five decimal places for its calculations.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminder_newitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminder_newitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a29899f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminder_newitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +New Item Reminders + + + + + + + + + + + +

New Item Reminders

+

Inventory Reminders Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The New Items reminders screen alerts employees to the upcoming arrival of new merchandise. Monitoring this list allows your associates to better serve customers by letting them know what new merchandise is coming soon.

+

You can print this list or print item tags in anticipation of the item arrival. The items should be removed from this list as soon as they arrive at the store, so that the list remains current and useful.

+

To work with items in the list:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Reminders and then select the New Items tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use normal list selection procedures to select one or more items before selecting a task from the I Want To menu. You can also use the Select All or Clear All choices from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+ +

Related Topics

+

Reminders Message Alert

+

Security rights for reminders

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminder_reorder.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminder_reorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5266981 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminder_reorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +Reorder Items Reminder + + + + + + + + + +

Reorder Items Reminder

+

Item Reorder Points | Reminders Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Reorder Items reminder screen displays items whose quantity has fallen below the reorder point set in inventory. Use this screen to assist in replenishing your inventory.

+ +

Point of Sale takes into consideration item quantities already on order (from unfilled purchase orders) when determining if an item should be added to the reorder reminder list.

+

To display this screen, select Reminders from the Inventory menu and then click the Reorder Items tab.

+

 

+

Pro Notes

+ +

Having Point of Sale Suggest POs for Reorder Items (Pro)

+

You also have the option of having Point of Sale suggest and generate purchase orders to order these items.

+ +

Related Topics

+

Reminders Message Alert

+

Security rights for reminders

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..51604be --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Inventory Reminders + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Reminders

+

Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Inventory reminders help you track and manage your inventory by alerting you to situations that may need your attention.

+

When an items combined on-hand quantity and on-order quantity has fallen below their reorder point, it is added to the Reorder Item reminders screen. You can print this list to help in creating purchase orders to replenish your inventory.

+

Besides reorder reminders, you also are reminded  when item prices change,  when new items have been added to inventory, or when items have arrived to fill open customer orders.

+

To view inventory reminders:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the home page, select Reminders from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select one of the available tabs.

    +
    3. +
+

Price change reminders

+

Reorder items reminders

+

New item reminders

+

Duplicate item reminders

+

Fill Customer Order Reminders

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Reminders Message Alert

+

Security rights for reminders

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_alert.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_alert.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4036040 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_alert.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +Inventory Reminders Message + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Reminders Message Alert

+

Inventory Reminders | Messages

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale will alert you when there are inventory reminders needing your attention by adding a message to the message board on the home page.

+

Note: Display of reminder messages is subject to the security rights of the logged-in user.

+

 

+

Messages

+

 

+

The reminders message is blue to differentiate it from your personal messages (yellow) and includes a link that will take you directly to the reminders window.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_dupitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_dupitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f466f9c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_dupitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Duplicate Item Reminders + + + + + + + + + + +

Duplicate Item Reminders

+

Reminders Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Duplicate items (same UPC, Item Number, or Alternate Lookup values) can occur when Headquarters edits an item number and a remote store sells the same item before receiving the updated inventory file during a Store Exchange. When the transactional document is sent to Headquarters the item identifier from the remote will not match the item number for the same item at Headquarters. Headquarters will show two separate item numbers as having duplicate item identifiers.

+

Duplicate items can also occur when remote stores create special order items, unknowingly entering the same UPC or Alternate Lookup (ALU) values as an existing item. The special order items are sent to Headquarters from remote stores on the first transactional document containing them.

+

The Duplicate Items tab on the Reminders window can help you to identify duplicates and resolve them to keep your inventory accurate. This Reminder screen is available only at Headquarters.

+

To resolve a duplicate item you can edit one of the items to be different or, if the items are actually separate entries of the same item, you can merge the items.

+

To view and edit a duplicate item:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Reminders and then select the Duplicate Items tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    The values causing the duplicate condition are shown in bold text to help you identify them.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select an item on the list to edit.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Edit Item In Inventory from the I Want To menu.

    +
    5. +
+

This selection takes you to Inventory, with the item record opened in edit mode. Make changes as necessary to resolve the duplication and save.

+

To merge duplicate items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select both of the duplicate items in the reminders list. How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Merge Inventory Items and follow the on-screen instructions.

    +
    3. +
+

Click here to learn more about how Point of Sale merges two items.

+

 

+

After Headquarters resolves the duplicates, updated item information is sent to the remote stores with the next Store Exchange.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Reminders Message Alert

+

Security rights for reminders

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_fillso.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_fillso.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..db71799 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_fillso.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + +Fill Customer Order Reminders + + + + + + + + + + +

Fill Customer Order Reminders

+

Fill Customer Orders | Reminders Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Fill Customer Order Reminders screen displays open customer orders that can be filled or partially filled with your available (including just received) item quantities. When you receive backorder items on a receiving voucher, Point of Sale will alert you that there are customer orders pending for the received items.

+

Use this screen to review the open orders, select those to fill, and then either go to the order or print fulfillment reports and pick lists.

+

To view the customer order reminders:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Go to Fill Customer Order Reminders from the alert when receiving backorder items.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From the Inventory menu, select Reminders and then select the Fill Customer Orders tab.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the drop-down list on the right, choose to view orders that can be Filled Partially or only those that can be Filled Fully.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: Use normal list sorting and customize column procedures to display the list in the manner you prefer, e.g. by order number, order date, etc.

+
    +
  1. +

    Use the check boxes in the Select column to select the order(s) you would like to fill. See note below about using this feature to optimize order fulfillment.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Go to a selected order or print a fulfillment report and pick list:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Process the selected orders individually using standard order fulfillment procedures.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Security rights for reminders

+

Inventory overview

+

Reminders Message Alert

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_pricechange.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_pricechange.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..62cb84d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reminders_pricechange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Change Reminders + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change Reminders

+

Reminders Overview | Inventory Overview | Using Price Levels

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Price Change reminders screen displays both the old price and new price when item prices change. Your regular price and the prices at your other price levels are also displayed for reference. This list reminds you to print updated price tags, so that your records and the tagged merchandise on the shelf match.

+

Once tags are printed, the items on the list should be removed so the list remains current and useful.

+

(Multi-store) Reminders are a handy way to communicate price changes to remote stores.

+

To select items and print:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Reminders and then click the Price Changes tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use standard list selection procedures to select items or choose Select All from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Print Tags to print price tags for the selected items (or Print List).

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When prompted to remove the selected items from the list, select Yes to remove them or No to retain them.

    +
    5. +
+

You can also remove selected items from the list at anytime by selecting Remove Selected Item (s) from the I Want To menu.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Security rights for reminders

+

Reminders Message Alert

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3ee060 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Inventory Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Reports

+

Inventory Overview | Reports Overview | Item Ratings & Trends

+

 

+

Point of Sale provides many reports to help you track your inventory investment and maximize your turn and profit. These reports can all be customized to include the data you want to see. Reports vary by license level (Free, Basic, Pro).

+

Here is an example of some of the more frequently used inventory reports:

+ +

To run these reports or to see other available inventory reports, select the Items category from the All Reports page of the Report Center.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_service_items.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_service_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..89e4a70 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_service_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Service Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Service Items

+

Item Types | Inventory Overview

+

 

+

Service items are defined in inventory and typically are used to list non-merchandise and labor charges on sales orders, work orders, or sales receipts to complete a job. Use normal new item procedures to define service items in inventory, selecting the Service item type.

+

Use the following guidelines when defining service items in inventory.

+ +

Related Topics

+

Use a service item for shipping charges

+

Use work orders

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_specialorderitem.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_specialorderitem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5cc6e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_specialorderitem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a Special Order Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a Special Order Item

+

Special Orders Overview | Inventory Overview  

+
+

Pro

+
+

A special order item can only be added to inventory while making a document (customer order, sales receipt, purchase order, or receiving voucher).

+

When you add a special order item to a document, you are prompted to define the item on a modified inventory window, allowing only certain information to be entered. The item type is automatically set to Special Order. Later the item can be converted to a regular inventory item, if desired.

+

To create and list a new special order item on a document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start the document in the usual fashion.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Add New Special Order Item from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Define the item in the inventory Special Order Item window.

    +
    4. +
+

Use normal add item procedures to enter information about the item. Certain item fields/features are not available for special order items, such as item type, item number, reorder point, the ability to define multiple vendors, styles, assemblies or groups, and you cannot print tags.

+
    +
  1. +

    When finished, choose Save & Select to record the item in inventory and list it on the document.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Convert a special order item to an inventory item

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_style_oview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_style_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5ece80c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_style_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + +Item Styles: Overview + + + + + + + + + +

Item Styles: Overview

+| Add a New Style | Style Grid Basics
+

Pro

+
+

Note: The availability of the style feature can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Many retailers sell merchandise that is grouped into styles. A style is a means of grouping inventory items that share the same basic item information but differ in one or two item traits, such as size, color, and pattern.

+

Example: A line of T-shirts might be carried in three sizes (Small, Medium, Large) and two colors (Black, White). This line of T-shirts, with six distinct items, constitutes a style.

+

When viewing your inventory or planning a vendor purchase, it can be very helpful to view and work with all the members of a style on a single screen. Point of Sale makes this easy with the use of the Style window and the style grid. To view and work on the Style window, click the  Style button from the item form.

+

Our T-shirt style, as viewed in a style grid, looks like this:

+

 

+

image\stylegrid.gif

+

 

+

About the Style window

+

A style grid allows you to see the on-hand quantities for each item in the style (each cell represents a size/color combination), as well as the total quantities for each color and size. You can quickly spot items that need to be re-ordered or are out of stock and slow moving items. Accessed while making a purchase order or other document, the grid can be used to enter the quantity to order or process on the document.

+

From a data standpoint, every item belongs to a style, though that item may be the only member of the style. Style items are defined by a common combination of its Department and Item Name (Description 1) values.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Style Templates

+

Imagine that you carry 20 different shoe lines, all of which have the same or similar size and color combinations. Having to re-enter the same sizes and colors for every shoe you carry would quickly become tedious.

+

Enter the style template. A style template is a user-defined array of item attributes: sizes, colors, patterns, material, etc., that can be used repeatedly to quickly add a style to inventory. Each template can be used for an unlimited number of styles.

+

Define and save a style template with the repeated sizes or other attributes along the  x and/or y axes of the style grid. When you add a new line of shoes, select the style template to quickly set up the grid. You can edit an individual grid, as necessary, for variations from the template.

+

The use of style templates is particularly well suited to lines of merchandise that vary only in size, color, pattern, or some other item trait. Typical examples include

+ + +++ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Apparel

+		 +

Housewares

+
+

Footwear

+		 +

Linens

+
+

Luggage

+		 +

Furniture

+
+ +

 

+

Learn more about using style templates

+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_stylewindow.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_stylewindow.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2f4c450 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_stylewindow.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +About the Style Window + + + + + + + + + + + +

About the Style Window

+

Style Grids | Add a Style | Style Overview | Style Templates

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Style window displays an item style in a split view, with one section showing information that applies to the style as a whole and the other section displaying the individual style items and their quantities in a style grid.

+

You can open the style window while viewing, adding, or editing items.  

+ +

Note: This window was undergoing design review as of this writing and may not exactly match this example.

+

Style Window

+

 

+

What's important about the Style window?

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_tax_codes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_tax_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..254e969 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_tax_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Assign Sales Tax Codes to Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Assign Sales Tax Codes to Items

+

Sales Tax Overview | Set Up Sales Tax

+

 

+

The tax code assigned to an item determines if and how much sales tax is collected when the item is sold.

+

By default, all new items added to inventory are assigned a default tax code based on the department to which the item belongs.

+

The tax code may be changed for individual items in inventory, as necessary.

+

To assign an item tax code:

+
    +
  1. +

    Add a new item or select Edit for an existing item.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Navigate to the Tax field in the Basic Info section and select the appropriate tax code from the drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Apply Tax to Sales

+

Collect Tax on Shipping Amounts

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_unitofmeasure.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_unitofmeasure.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b1c85d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_unitofmeasure.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Units of Measure + + + + + + + + + + +

Units of Measure

+

Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are two levels of item unit of measure in Point of Sale.

+

Single Unit of Measure (Basic)

+

A unit of measure can be added to item records and can then be used to filter and sort your item list and reports.

+

For example, a candy store might define units of measure of "ounces" and "lbs" and then assign one of those units to each of their candy items.

+

Define the allowed units on the Inventory page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Multiple Units of Measure (Pro)

+

Using multiple units of measure allows you to purchase and sell items by different units. For example, when you purchase an item by the case but sell it by the bottle, or buy in bulk but sell by the pound.

+

Select the I Want to set up multiple units of measure check box on the Inventory page in company preferences to enable this feature. Then, on the item record, you can define a base unit of measure and up to three alternate units that you buy or sell by (such as case, six pack, can, 100 lb bag, one pound, etc.). Each unit of measure can have a different UPC code, alternate lookup value, and sales price, allowing you to list any of the units of measure on documents. You can also specify your default purchase and sell-by units.

+

If the multiple unit of measure feature is turned off, you still retain the single unit of measure capability.

+

Learn more about using multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_uom_managemultiple.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_uom_managemultiple.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..851fe0c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_uom_managemultiple.htm @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + + + + + + +Define Multiple Units of Measure + + + + + + + + + + +

Define Multiple Units of Measure

+

Overview | Use Units of Measure on Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

The use of multiple units of measure allows you to purchase and sell an item in up to four different units (sizes, or pack quantities). For example, you might buy a canned item by the case but sell it by both the case and individual can. You can define a separate UPC, alternate lookup, sales price, and default purchase-by and sell-by units in inventory and Point of Sale will automatically suggest the correct unit on documents.

+

To define multiple units of measure in inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn on the multiple unit of measure feature and add the various units you are likely to use on the Inventory page of company preferences.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    As adding or editing an item, specify the base unit for the item in the Base Unit field. Select from the units defined in preferences in Step 1 or enter a new unit (it will be added to preferences when you save).

    +
    3. +
+

It is strongly recommended you make the smallest unit in which you buy or sell the item the base unit. This helps avoid fractional calculations. Other information entered on the main item form (UPC, price and cost, quantities, etc.) should be for your base unit.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Units button adjacent to the Base Unit  field. The Units of Measure window is opened.

    +
    2. +
+

View Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter each alternate unit of measure. Click the Unit of Measure 1, 2, or 3 labels to expand the section and then enter or select:

    +
    2. +
+ +

In this example, the base unit is a 12 oz. bottle and now we are entering a case unit which contains 12 bottles.

+

Unit of Measure - Alternate Unit Definition

+
    +
  1. +

    At the top of the window, specify default order-by and sell-by units.

    +
    2. +
+

If your default order-by unit is different than your base unit, you will be prompted to enter an order cost. Enter the order cost and click OK.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Close to return to the main item form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter information in other item fields as necessary.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

 Changing Base Units of Measure:  Use caution if you need to change your base unit of measure after having been in operation for awhile. Review and update all item fields for each of your units after the change, paying particular attention to cost, price, and quantity values. Point of Sale will create adjustment memos for any cost and quantity edits related to the change, but there should be no net change in your inventory value.

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_uom_multiple.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_uom_multiple.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..05ec6c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_uom_multiple.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + +Multiple Units of Measure + + + + + + + + + +

Multiple Units of Measure

+

Inventory Overview | Preferences

+
+

Pro

+
+

This feature, which is enabled in company preferences, allows purchasing and selling an item in up to four different units of measure (sizes, or pack quantities).

+

Examples:

+ +

With multiple units of measure enabled:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Define multiple units of measure in inventory

+

Use units of measure on documents

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_viewonorder.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_viewonorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8989aed --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_viewonorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + +View Quantities on Order + + + + + + + + + + +

View Quantities on Order

+

Inventory Overview | Purchasing Overview | Item History

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can view item quantities currently on order for an item in the On Order column of your item list . You may have to add this column to the list. You can also initiate the creation of a new purchase order from inventory.

+

To view on-order quantities:

+ +

The current quantity on order is displayed in the On Order column.

+

 

+

image\inven_onorder.gif

+

 

+

(Pro) You can also view on-order quantities and a list of pending purchase orders from the Available Quantity window in inventory.

+

To initiate a new PO from inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the item or items you wish to order.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select the items to be ordered from the displayed items. How do I select multiple items?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+

 Tip: Select only those to be ordered from the same vendor at one time. One PO will be made with all selected items.  

+
    +
  1. +

     Select Order Items from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

A new purchase order is opened with the item(s) already listed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete and save the purchase order in the normal manner, adjusting the order quantity and cost, and adding other items, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Go Back to return to inventory.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Repeat for other items if necessary.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/invenvoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/invenvoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17201ad --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/invenvoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Inventory Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | How Documents Affect Inventory | About Item Types

+ +

 

+

The Point of Sale inventory is designed to help you easily define, track, view, and edit your items in a convenient, accurate, and efficient manner. Each row in your item list represents a unique inventory item, service, or fee. Transactions such as receiving and selling merchandise instantly update your inventory quantities and costs.

+

Your item list stores all item information, including on-hand quantities, costs, price(s), UPC numbers, tax status, reorder points, and much more.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Item Definitions

+

Import items

+

Inventory reports

+

Security rights for inventory

+ +

View item list summary statistics

+ +

Define QuickBooks Desktop item accounts

+

 

+

Point of Sale Free

+

References to entering or tracking inventory quantities or costs and related features, such as margin/markup and price levels, do not apply to you.

+

 

+

Multi-Store Notes

+

All item quantities at all stores comprise a single inventory, with Headquarters having central control over that inventory. Point of Sale tracks the quantities of each item located at each store within that inventory. Transactions update inventory at the local store. When the next Store Exchange of information is completed, all stores and Headquarters are updated with the updated inventory information, reflecting activity at all stores. If you also use QuickBooks Desktop financial software, transactions are sent to QuickBooks Desktop so that your inventory valuation and related financial records are updated.

+

Inventory items and related files (departments, vendors, costs, prices etc.) can only be added or edited at Headquarters. Remote stores can view this information and use it to process transactions, but cannot edit the item information.

+

Exception: Special order items can be created and ordered by remote stores, typically done while creating a customer order. The special order item is sent to Headquarters on the first transactional document listing it. Headquarters can make a special order item a permanent addition to inventory by converting it to an inventory item. Allowing remote stores to create special order items introduces the possibility of creating items with duplicate UPC or Alternate Lookups. Headquarters is alerted to and can fix duplicate items from the duplicate item reminders screen.

+

Remote stores can be made aware of new items added at Headquarters via the new items reminders screen.

+

 

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/pro_tip_using_margin_to_update_prices.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/pro_tip_using_margin_to_update_prices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7df9eb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/pro_tip_using_margin_to_update_prices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Margin/Markup to Update Prices + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Margin/Markup to Update Prices

+

Department Pricing Formulas | Enter Cost and Price

+

 

+

When an item is received at a new cost, the item prices in inventory are not automatically updated (unless the previous regular price = $0, as would be the case for a new item). Point of Sale will alert you that the cost has changed, but revising your prices to reflect the new cost is at your discretion.

+

Since the cost has changed, Point of Sale does recalculate and display new average unit costs and margin/markup values on the item record. You can use the margin/markup values to see at a glance your profit margin on the item and to quickly adjust the prices to maintain your desired margin.

+

 

+

Example:

+

You have five units on hand with an average unit cost of $5.00 and priced at $10 to deliver a profit margin of 50%. You reorder and receive five additional units on a receiving voucher, costing $6.00 each. Point of Sale alerts you that the cost has changed, but does not automatically update the item price. The new average unit cost ($5.50) and margin/markup are calculated and displayed as shown below.

+

You have the option to update your price(s) or not. One way to quickly update the price and maintain your profit level is to edit the margin or markup back to their original values on the item record. In the example below, editing the margin back to 50% results in a new regular price of $11.00.

+

 

+ +++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

 

+		 +

Old

+		 +

New

+		 +

After margin edit

+
+

Quantity

+		 +

5

+		 +

10

+		 +

10

+
+

Unit Cost

+		 +

5.00

+		 +

5.50

+		 +

5.50

+
+

Regular Price

+		 +

10.00

+		 +

10.00

+		 +

11.00

+
+

Margin %

+		 +

50

+		 +

45

+		 +

50

+
+

Markup %

+		 +

100

+		 +

82

+		 +

100

+
+

 

+

Dont forget to print new price tags!

+

 

+

My markup value sometimes changes right after I enter it. Why?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

If you use markdown price levels, the price at each level is also recalculated automatically anytime your regular price is changed.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Update prices when receiving items

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4869e98 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + +Configure Your System for a Merchant Account + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Your System for a Merchant Account

+

Merchant Service Overview | Merchant Service Hardware

+

 

+

Use this procedure to configure your system to work with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service.

+
    +
  1. +

    Sign up for a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account and receive your Merchant Number.

    +
    2. +
+

Continue with the following steps after receiving your Merchant Number.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Company from the File menu and then select the Merchant & Gift Services page from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the Merchant Number provided to you and specify other options:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select the Communication Setup sub page, and specify how you will communicate with the service, via Internet connection or dial-up (modem). Click the Internet Connection Setup button if you need help configuring an Internet connection.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Return to the Merchant & Gift Services page and select Verify next to your Merchant Number. Point of Sale will do a test connection and confirm that your account is active and ready to use. If errors are encountered, a message is displayed with information about resolving the situation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

(Pro) Read additional information about configuring for multiple locations.

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Protect customer's payment card data

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Take payment by debit card

+

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices04.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc581f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cancel or Reverse a Credit Card Payment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Cancel or Reverse Credit Card Payments

+

Merchant Service Overview | Fraud Prevention Tips

+

 

+

If the customer cancels a purchase in-process, or returns the purchased merchandise for a refund, the following apply if using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service:

+ +

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Settle credit card transactions

+

Merchant Service reports

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices05.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7e5544 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Credit Card Returns + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Returns

+

Sales Returns | Fraud Prevention Tips

+

 

+

If the transaction has already been settled with the bank, you should issue a credit refund to the customer by making a return receipt.

+

To make a return credit card receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create a new receipt, listing the return items as negative quantities (click Return Item after adding to the receipt).

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary, edit the returned item prices and quantities to be the same as the original purchase and then click Credit as the payment type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Credit dialog, ensure that Refund Card is selected.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Swipe or insert the customer's card (recommended).

    +
    4. +
+

Or

+

Click Manual and type the credit card number, expiration date, cardholders ZIP Code, and card verification code, and then click Authorize Now.

+
    +
  1. +

    Save and print the receipt. Have the customer sign the merchant copy.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Tip: If the customer is returning all of the merchandise on the original receipt , you can also reverse the original receipt. Reversing the receipt is typically done when the customer is not present to swipe or insert their card. (Pro: This option is not available at a remote store after a receipt has been sent to Headquarters.)

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Cancel and reverse credit card payments

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Merchant Service reports

+

Merchant Service overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices06.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices06.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f9be63 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices06.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sign Up for a Merchant Account + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sign Up for a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account

+

Merchant Service Overview

+

 

+

Most retailers will want to sign up for a merchant account with Intuit to perform credit and debit/ATM card transactions. A QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account offers an integrated processing solution that allows you to authorize, settle, and record all your credit/debit card sales from within Point of Sale.

+

Getting set up is easy!  Requires Internet connection Learn more

+

 

+

To sign up for a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Setup Interview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Payments tab.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Yes to accept credit and debit cards.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Sign In.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Be sure to sign in using the User ID (email) and password that you had previously created.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    If there is more than one account, you will be prompted to select the right account.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Note:  You will also need your QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account to take advantage of the available  mobile features.

+

 

+

Learn More

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Merchant Service reports

+

Protecting your customer's payment card data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices08.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d2b67a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Referral/Voice Authorization + + + + + + + + + + +

Referral/Voice Authorization

+

Take Credit Card Payments | Merchant Service Overview

+

 

+

Manual Voice Authorizations

+

Sometimes it may be necessary to force a manual voice authorization. This may because your regular connection to the processor is down and you need to manually process the sale or you need to enter sales made earlier (such as at a remote location).

+

To force a manual voice authorization:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Credit as the payment type on the receipt form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When the credit card payment dialog opens, select Voice.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the mandatory information such as credit card number, expiration date, ZIP Code, and card verification code, and optionally the street address.  Learn about fraud prevention.

    +
    4. +
+

Voice instructions and a number for the voice authorization are displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Call the number displayed. You will be asked for your Merchant Number, which is displayed onscreen for your convenience.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Listen to the authorization menu choices carefully, you can choose to authorize with or without an address verification. Follow the phone prompts to enter necessary information. The operator will give you an authorization code when complete.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the authorization code you are given in the Voice Auth Number field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click  Authorize Now.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

The credit card payment information is added to the receipt total section.

+

 

+

Referral Response

+

The referral response typically occurs after three failed attempts to connect with the Merchant Service. This might occur if there is a problem with your modem or Internet connection, for example.

+

When the Referral response is returned, voice authorization is necessary. Follow the procedure above to obtain authorization for the transaction.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Merchant Service overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices09.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices09.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1982524 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices09.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Printed Receipt Options + + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Printed Receipt Options

+

Merchant Service Overview | Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

Three preference options are available for printing of credit, debit, and gift card receipts.

+

 

+

Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function Automatically Save/Print Credit, Debit and Gift Card Receipts Upon Approval

+

With this option selected (default) credit, debit, and gift card receipts are automatically saved and printed as soon as the transaction has been authorized when using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant or Gift Card Services. This allows the cashier to swipe or insert a card and immediately return to servicing the customer while the approval is in process and the receipt printing. This option can be disabled, if necessary, on the Merchant and Gift Service page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function Printing Two Copies of Credit Card Receipts

+

When a customer pays for a purchase with a credit card, two copies of the receipt can be printed: a signature copy for you and the customers copy.

+

By default, Point of Sale is configured to print two copies. However, if you use a two-ply receipt paper that prints both copies at the same time you should turn off this option, or you will end up with four copies of credit card receipts. Set this option independently for each workstation on the print options page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function Pause Between Printing to Allow Tearing Off Printed Receipts

+

By default, Point of Sale is configured to pause briefly after the first copy of a credit card receipt prints so you have time to tear it off before the second copy starts printing. If your receipt printer auto-cuts receipts, you can turn off this option independently for each workstation on the print options page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Specify the credit cards you accept

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Take payment by debit/ATM card

+

Take payment by gift card

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices13.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices13.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..946f6fb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices13.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + +Merchant Service Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchant Service Reports

+

Merchant Service Overview | Merchant Service Center

+

 

+

Users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service can run reports summarizing or detailing their credit and debit card transactions for any specified time period. These reports subtotal your transactions by settlement batch and, in a multi-store configuration, by merchant number.

+

To run a Merchant Service report:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Report Center, select Payments as the report category and then Merchant Service as the report type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select one of the specific Merchant Service reports available.

    +
    3. +
+ +

The selected report is displayed using default or your last-run settings.

+
    +
  1. +

    Change the report date range or select Modify to change other report options and filters as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

Many report filtering options are available, including filtering by Batch #, Transaction Type (sales, refund), Status (voided, authorized), Card Name, Card Present (yes, no), Workstation, etc. The options available vary by specific report.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to display the reports with your specified options.

    +
    2. +
+

Optional: Memorize the report with your specified options for future use, when prompted.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print or Excel depending on your output needs.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Work with a displayed report

+

Settle card transactions

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_avs.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_avs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..974c507 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_avs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Address Verification Service (AVS) + + + + + + + + + + +

Address Verification Service (AVS)

+

Card Verification | Fraud Prevention Tips

+

 

+

When you manually enter credit card information, the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service verifies the cardholder's address by comparing the ZIP Code, and optionally, the street address, city, state, and country you enter with the customer's credit card bank records.

+

This check is carried out using the Address Verification Service (AVS). Address verification helps merchants avoid credit card fraud and chargebacks for transactions in which the credit card information is manually entered or not physically present at the point of sale.

+

 

+

ZIP Code and Street Address

+

Only the customers ZIP Code is required to complete the address verification check, but you can include street address, city, state, and country for extra protection. Only the number portion of the street address is used in the verification check, but the credit card dialog allows you to enter additional address details as well.

+

 

+

Handling the AVS Results

+

The processor returns a message indicating whether the entered information matches that on file at the cardholders bank. The results of the AVS check are for your information only. You can choose to process the credit card payment even if the AVS check indicates a mismatch between the ZIP Code or address you entered and the cardholder's bank address information.

+

Address Verification Results GuideClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

You specify how you wish to handle AVS mismatches on the Merchant & Gift Services page in company preferences:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Configure your system for a merchant account

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_avscvc_results.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_avscvc_results.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..285daf7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_avscvc_results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +cardservices_avscvc_results + + + + + + + + + +

Address and Card Verification Check Results

+ +

Popup and has been hidden

+  +

Address Verification Service (AVS) Result Guide

+

A Comparing the provided information with file in cardholder's bank, the street address matches but ZIP Code does not match

+

E Error Response for Merchant Category Code provided in the message

+

N Comparing the provided information with file in cardholder's bank, both the street address and ZIP Code do not match

+

R Please retry, system not available

+

S Address Verification Service is not supported by cardholder's bank

+

U Address information is not available from cardholder's bank

+

W Comparing the provided information with file at cardholder's bank, 9-digit ZIP Code matches, but numeric street address does not match

+

X Comparing the provided information with file at cardholder's bank, there is an exact match of numeric street address and ZIP Code

+

Y Comparing the provided information with file at cardholder's bank, there is a match of numeric street address and 5-digit ZIP Code

+

Z Comparing the provided information with file at cardholder's bank, 5-digit ZIP Code matches, but numeric street address does not match

+

G Cardholder's bank is a non AVS participant outside the U.S.; not verified

+

 

+

Card Verification Code (CVC) Result Guide

+

M Card verification value entered matches that on file with cardholder's bank

+

N Card verification value entered does not match that on file with cardholder's bank

+

P Card verification value check could not be processed

+

S Card presented should have a card verification value; merchant indicated card verification value is not present

+

U Cardholder's bank is not certified for the card verification value (CVV) check service

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_communication_setup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_communication_setup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..44e2413 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_communication_setup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + + +Communication Setup for Merchant and Gift Card Services + + + + + + + + + + +

Communication Setup for Merchant and Gift Card Services

+

Merchant Service Overview | Gift Service Overview

+

 

+

This service is not available in QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_enteringcardinfo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_enteringcardinfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c852a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_enteringcardinfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Credit Card Information + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Credit Card Information

+

Payment Overview | Credit Card Refunds | FAQs

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+ +

OR

+ +

Read the detailed credit card payment topic here.

+

 

+

For manually entered transactions, Point of Sale includes two security features to help you prevent credit card fraud: address verification and card verification. Click on a link below to learn more about these features.

+

What is address verification?

+

What is credit card verification?

+

Address and Card Verification Results Guide

+

What is voice authorization?

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

Configure your system for merchant services

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_fraudcheck.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_fraudcheck.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cd5a9b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_fraudcheck.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +cardservices_fraudcheck + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Fraud Prevention Checks

+ +

popup has been hidden

+ +

When manually authorizing credit card transactions, you can protect yourself against possible card fraud by entering the cardholders street address and the card verification code. These checks are optional, but highly recommended.

+ +

Example locations of card verification code:

+

image\cardimages.gif

+

 

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_fraudprevention.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_fraudprevention.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..59688b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_fraudprevention.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit Card Fraud Prevention Tips + + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Fraud Prevention Tips

+

Address Verification | Card Verification

+

 

+

While the warning signs and suggestions below taken alone are not a sure method for protecting yourself against credit card fraud, you should be aware of them and use them to make better decisions in the fight against card fraud and chargebacks.

+

 

+

Verify the cardholders identity. Use the customers drivers license or ID card to verify the name, address, and compare signatures with that on the sales slip. If in doubt, dont hesitate to turn down the transaction or call the number on the back of the card, if present, to verify the cardholder information.

+

Get the customer signature on sales slips. If the customer refuses to sign the slip after you have processed the authorization, void the transaction. Do not process the sale if the cardholder refuses to sign the sales slip.

+

Observe the Address Verification Service (AVS) results. You have the option in Point of Sale of disallowing manually entered transactions that fail the address verification check. This preference may provide a degree of protection, but may also block some legitimate transactions. Some merchants choose to not accept transactions or ship merchandise to addresses other than the billing address for the account. Be especially wary if the customer requests a shipment to a PO Box or an international address.

+

Observe the card verification results. It is mandatory to enter the card verification code for your transactions. You also have the option in Point of Sale of disallowing manually entered transactions where the entered card verification code does not match the card issuers records. This check helps ensure that the customer actually has the card in their possession at the time of the sale. Some issuers automatically decline the transaction when a mismatch occurs, others allow you to use your discretion in accepting such transactions.

+

Be aware of card security features. All major card issuers have unique features to help identify against fraudulent cards. Visit the card issuer Web sites (Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, etc.) periodically to keep up with the latest technologies and features.

+

Dont refund credit card transactions with cash. Asking for a cash refund on a credit card transaction is a strong indicator of credit card fraud. In some cases, the cardholder will also file a dispute for the transaction after receiving cash, resulting in a possible chargeback to you as well. Refund credit card transactions only as a credit back to the same card.

+

Report fraud immediately. If possible, notify your manager while holding the card. Alternatively, initiate a voice authorization and request a Code 10 authorization. The operator will ask you a series of yes or no questions and guide you through the necessary steps.

+

Safety Comes First. If you feel you are in danger, decline the transaction and return the card. Call the authorization number after the customer has left to report the fraud.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Protect your customer's credit card data

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Configure your system for a merchant account

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_verificationcodes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_verificationcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0dcc12e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservices_verificationcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit Card Verification + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Verification

+

Address Verification | Fraud Prevention Tips

+

 

+

A credit card verification is an important security check for manually entered (non-swiped or non-inserted) credit card transactions. The code helps verify that the customer, presumably the legitimate cardholder, has the actual card in their possession. The use of this feature is mandatory as one component of a fraud prevention strategy.

+

Note: Depending on the card issuer, the card verification feature may be referred to as a card verification code (CVC), card verification value (CVV), card identification number (CID), or cardmember ID. All of these terms are synonymous and mean the same thing.

+

When you enter the card verification code on a credit card transaction, the processor verifies that the code matches issuer records. A mismatch can be one potential indicator of fraudulent use of the card.

+

Card Verification Code Results Guide

+

 

+

Where is the card verification code located?

+

The card verification code will have 3 or 4 digits and will be in different locations depending on the card type, as shown in the examples below.

+

When manually entering credit card information, enter the code in the Card Verification Code field on the credit card dialog before selecting the authorize button.

+

image\cardimages.gif

+

 

+

What happens if a mismatch occurs?

+

How a card verification code mismatch affects your credit card transaction depends on:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Configure your system for a merchant account

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservicesoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservicesoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55faf22 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/cardservicesoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks POS Merchant Service Overview + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks POS Merchant Service Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Merchant Service Hardware | Reports

+

 

+

Requires Internet connection Learn more about the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service

+

 

+

Overview

+

Most retailers will want to sign up for an account with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service to accept and process credit and debit/ATM card transactions.

+

Key benefits of the service include:

+ +

You can apply for an account with the QuickBooks Desktop  POS Merchant Service during the Setup Interview. The application takes just minutes to complete, and youll receive an approval decision and your Merchant Service number promptly. Once received, you enter your Merchant Number in company preferences to enable payments by credit and/or debit/ATM card.

+

A card reader is recommended, but not required to process credit card transactions (higher fees apply on non-swipe or non-inserted  transactions). A PIN pad is required to process PIN debit transactions. A modem or persistent (always on) Internet connection is necessary for transmitting data to and from at least one of your Point of Sale workstations. (Hardware sold separately.)

+

With QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, each time a customer presents a credit or debit/ATM card as payment, the card is swiped through or inserted in the card reader or PIN pad device. Point of Sale then submits the card information to the processor for authorization. Credit card information can also be manually entered. Within seconds, the status of the transaction is relayed back to the merchants computer.

+

Credit and debit card transactions are settled when a merchant runs the End of Day procedure. Settlement initiates the actual transfer of funds from the card-issuing bank to the merchants bank account.

+

Point of Sale records the transaction information on your computer so you can generate reports or access the details of a transaction later. You can run Merchant Service reports from the reports area of Point of Sale.

+

 

+ ++ + + +
+

Important Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service must take steps to comply with the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) requirements for the secure processing, storage, and transmittal of credit and debit card transactions.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Credit card transaction data must be sent to the processor for settlement within one day of authorizing the transaction to avoid paying higher fees.

    +
    • +
+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Multiple-location configuration

+

What if I use another Service?

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/help_troubleshoot_mas.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/help_troubleshoot_mas.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c394717 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/help_troubleshoot_mas.htm @@ -0,0 +1,199 @@ + + + + + + + +Merchant & Gift Card Service FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchant & Gift Card Services: FAQs

+

Merchant Service Overview | Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

If you have trouble connecting to or processing transactions through the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant or Gift Card Services, please review this list of common questions and answers. If you cannot resolve your issue here, call our customer support at (800) 558-9558.

+

How do I fix "Socket Error # xxxx" messages? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

I configured my account and selected the Verify button in the company setup (or company preferences) but got an error message. What could be wrong? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

Why do I get "timed out" or firewall and port error messages when trying to authorize or settle credit, debit, or gift card transactions? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

Why am I not able to authorize card transactions on my networked workstations? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Why do I get a "Connection Failed" message when trying to authorize transactions? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

Why do I get an "INVALID_MRCH_#_" message when trying to process a card transaction? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

Are there steps I can take to minimize the potential of credit card fraud and chargebacks? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

A customer lost a gift card and is asking for a replacement. How do I handle this? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

What is the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) and how do I comply? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Configure Point of Sale for a merchant account

+

Configure Point of Sale for gift card services

+

Help and support overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_PCIDSS.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_PCIDSS.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04aefa6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_PCIDSS.htm @@ -0,0 +1,162 @@ + + + + + + +Protect Your Customer's Payment Card Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

Protect Your Customer's Payment Card Data

+

QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service | Data Protection Strategy

+

 

+

When you, as a retailer, start accepting credit and/or debit cards for payment using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, you have a responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS).

+

This standard includes requirements for the configuration, operation, and security of payment card transactions in your business, and extends beyond your use of Point of Sale. It includes requirements for restricting user access, as well as for protecting your computers, operating system, and network, and for communications with other computers and the Internet.

+

 

+

Note: If you use another merchant service for card payments, the cardholder data is not processed, stored, or transmitted by Point of Sale and this topic is not directly applicable to your use of Point of Sale. You should refer to the information provided by your service provider for compliance requirements.

+

 

+

Point of Sale has been engineered to help you comply with these requirements in your use of Point of Sale, but it is your responsibility to ensure your entire system is in compliance.

+

How does Point of Sale assist me in complying with the PCI DSS? Click to expand/collapse this topic

+ +

What happens if I don't comply with the PCI DSS? Click to expand/collapse this topic

+ +

 

+

PCI DSS Implementation Guide

+

Intuit has prepared an electronic Implementation Guide to help you learn about and comply with these requirements. You can access this guide via the link below or at anytime by selecting User Manuals from the Help menu (Adobe Acrobat Reader required).

+

Open the Implementation Guide now

+

 

+

Where can I learn more about the Payment Card Industry standards?

+

You can learn more about and get a copy of the PCI DSS standard at the PCI Security Standards Council site:
+Internet connection required to use this linkhttps://www.pcisecuritystandards.org

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

Generate new credit card keys

+

Payment card activity Audit Log

+

If you suspect a security breach

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_generate_EFT_keys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_generate_EFT_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..59c5be5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_generate_EFT_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + +Generate New Credit Card Keys + + + + + + + + + + +

Generate New Credit Card Keys

+

PCI DSS Overview | Audit Log

+

 

+

This information applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service and the requirements for complying with the Payment Card Industry's Data Security Standard (PCI DSS).

+

 

+

Point of Sale encrypts the cardholder data stored in your company data with encryption keys using an industry-standard, strong, encryption process that meets current Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) requirements. Point of Sale automatically generates new encryption keys at least once per year. No action is required on your part to enable this security feature.

+

Additional information about the encryption keys is provided in the PCI DSS Implementation Guide . To access this electronic manual, select User Guides from the Help menu.

+

If you suspect a security breach or that an unauthorized attempt to access the data was made, one of the steps you should take is to generate new encryption keys. The new keys are used to encrypt all new transactions. In addition, stored transactions are re-encrypted with the new keys. The previous keys are destroyed and are unrecoverable.

+

To manually generate new encryption keys:

+
    +
  1. +

    Log in to Point of Sale as the System Administrator.Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Utilities.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Generate New Credit Card Keys.

    +
    4. +
+

A confirmation message is displayed upon successful update of the stored card transactions.

+
    +
  1. +

    Log off the Sysadmin user.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf3899a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +mas_hdi + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks POS Merchant Service: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Sign up for a merchant account

+

Configure Point of Sale for a merchant account

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Take payment by debit/ATM Card

+

Settle card transactions

+

Handle credit/debit returns

+

Reverse sales transactions

+

View Merchant Service reports

+

Protect myself from credit card fraud

+

Use another merchant service

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_merchant_service_center.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_merchant_service_center.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1d62dc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_merchant_service_center.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Merchant Service Center + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchant Service Center

+

Merchant Service Overview | Merchant Service Reports

+

 

+

Users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service can visit our online Merchant Service Center to:

+ +

Internet Connection required  To visit the Merchant Service Center:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Report menu, select Merchant Service Center.

    +
    2. +
+

The Merchant Service Center Sign In page is opened in a Web browser window.

+
    +
  1. +

    On first visit, select Create an Account, and follow the on-screen instructions to set up your access account.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

If returning, sign in with your user name and password.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_multi_workstation.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_multi_workstation.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3181dc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_multi_workstation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + + +Multiple Workstation Configuration + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multiple Workstation Configuration

+

Communication Setup | Customer Support

+ +

In V10 each workstation will now connect separately. This topic has been hidden.

+ +

When operating Point of Sale on multiple workstations, all Merchant Service and/or Gift Card Service communications go through one workstation. By default, this is the Server Workstation but you can change this setting on the Merchant and Gift Services Communication Setup page in company preferences (the selected workstation must have a modem or Internet connection).

+

Access this page from the workstation you wish to use as the connection computer and select the check box labeled Use this computer to connect for all credit, debit, and gift card transactions. All transactions, whichever workstation they are performed at, will be routed through this workstation.

+

The designated workstation must be running (does not have to have Point of Sale open) to allow other workstations to authorize transactions. When running, the Merchant and Gift Card Service icon is displayed in the Windows system tray as shown below. You can click this icon to view the current status of the connection and to access the EFT (Electronic Funds Transfer) log file.

+

 

+

Merchant & Gift Card Service icon in system tray

+

EFT Server icon

+

 

+

When multiple requests occur simultaneously, they will be processed in the order received. For direct-dial (modem) connections, the program will try to complete any queued requests during the same connection to the processor, thus eliminating the need to dial out on the modem for each request.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_multiple_locations.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_multiple_locations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..37172ae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_multiple_locations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +Multiple Locations Using Merchant/Gift Card Service + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multiple Locations Using Merchant/Gift Card Service

+

Merchant Service Overview | Gift Card Overview | Customer Support

+
+

 

+
+

For QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or Gift Services customers with multiple physical locations under the same ownership, each location must have a separate account with these services, but those accounts can be linked so that you receive consolidated reporting and statements. Each location would process authorizations and settlements independently.

+

For more information, contact the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or Gift Card Services.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_pci_auditlog.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_pci_auditlog.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bd63d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_pci_auditlog.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +Payment Card Activity Audit Log + + + + + + + + + + +

Payment Card Activity Audit Log

+

PCI DSS Overview | If You Suspect a Security Breach

+

 

+

This information applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service and the requirements for complying with the Payment Card Industry's Data Security Standard (PCI DSS).

+

 

+

Point of Sale automatically logs all data access, data security, payment card transaction, and encryption key changes to the Audit Log; you do not need to turn this feature on manually.

+

Only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can view this log. We recommend you review the log daily (or as often as possible) to comply with the PCI security standards.

+

To view the Audit Log:

+
    +
  1. +

    Log in to Point of Sale as the System Administrator.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Utilities > View Audit Log.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use normal Point of Sale report options to modify the appearance or filter the Audit Log report by date, user, or other included data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done, close the report and log off the System Administrator.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Payment Card Activity Audit Log

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_pci_suspectbreach.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_pci_suspectbreach.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4635aa --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_pci_suspectbreach.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +If You Suspect a Security Breach + + + + + + + + + +

If You Suspect a Security Breach

+

PCI DSS Overview

+

 

+

This information applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service and the requirements for complying with the Payment Card Industry's Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) on credit and debit card transactions.

+

 

+

If an unauthorized attempt to access your data has been made or you are aware of an actual breach of your security system that has compromised your and your customers data, you should immediately:

+
    +
  1. +

    Backup your data file and store the backup in a secure location.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you suspect involvement by a specific user or users, disable the Windows user accounts and Point of Sale security rights. This will block further access to your data by the user(s) while you have an opportunity to investigate.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Review the Audit Log and Windows Event Log to examine entries related to the suspicious activity and users.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Change your Windows and Point of Sale administrator passwords. It is recommended you also change, or require to be changed, all other user passwords.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Manually generate new credit card encryption keys.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_reconciliation.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_reconciliation.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..86423e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_merchant_service/mas_reconciliation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Merchant Service Reconciliation + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchant Service Reconciliation

+

Merchant Service Reports | Merchant Service Center

+

 

+

Note: This feature requires integration with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software.

+

 

+

Merchant Service reconciliation makes it easy to match credit and debit card payments taken in Point of Sale to the bank deposits you make from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and identify discrepancies and fees.

+

When credit and debit card transactions are sent from Point of Sale to QuickBooks Desktop, they are added to the Payments to Deposit window (by store/merchant number in a multi-store configuration) and settlement batch, helping you to match the transactions with your deposits and more easily identify and account for discrepancies and fees.

+

Requirements for the reconciliation feature:

+ +

To send transactions with reconciliation information to QuickBooks Desktop:

+

No action is necessary in Point of Sale to send reconciliation information to QuickBooks Desktop. If you meet the requirements listed above and conduct routine Financial Exchanges your transactions will show up on the Payments to Deposit screen in QuickBooks Desktop grouped by store/merchant number and batch.

+

Making deposits in QuickBooks Desktop:

+

This procedure is completed in QuickBooks Desktop financial software, and is summarized here. More specific instructions can be accessed from the Payments to Deposit window in QuickBooks Desktop by selecting Help.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete Financial Exchange with QuickBooks as part of your End of Day procedure.

    +
    2. +
+

Your payment card transactions update the Undeposited Funds balance in QuickBooks Desktop.

+
    +
  1. +

    In QuickBooks Desktop, select Make Deposits from the Banking menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the payments to include in the deposit.

    +
    3. +
+

To facilitate reconciliation later, make your deposits by the transaction groupings. The transactions from Point of Sale are grouped by store/merchant number and batch for convenience.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_config_passwords.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_config_passwords.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74662db --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_config_passwords.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Passwords + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Passwords

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Store Exchange files must be secured by a password. Password encryption helps protect your data from being read if intercepted by unintended recipients.

+

Important: The same password must be entered at each store. If the password encrypting a Store Exchange file you receive does not match the password you have entered, you will not be able to process the file.

+

To define your Store Exchange password:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Stores menu, select Configure Store Exchange.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Store Exchange from the menu on the left of the company preferences window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Options tab on the displayed page.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Change Password.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Enter your password.

    +
    6. +
+

Rules and tips for passwordsClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange Methods

+

Send Files - Headquarters

+

Send Files - Remote

+

Receive Files

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_purchasing_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_purchasing_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8a9e5c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_purchasing_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +ms_purchasing_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Purchasing and Receiving: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic.

+ +

 

+

Create a purchase order

+

Receive merchandise

+

Edit a saved receiving voucher

+

Reverse a receiving voucher

+

Delete filled POs

+

View purchasing history with a vendor

+

Correct a remote receiving voucher after sending it to HQ

+

Handle special orders

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_storeexchange_center.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_storeexchange_center.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..932ef92 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/ms_storeexchange_center.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Center + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Center

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

The Store Exchange Center is a central place to initiate all tasks related to exchanging data between your stores and to see the current status of exchange with each store.

+

To access the Store Exchange Center:

+ +

        Store Exchange Center

+

 

+

The Store Exchange Center is made up of three panels:

+

 Actions: Use these buttons to send or receive Store Exchange mailbags, prepare and send item pictures, configure exchanges, and view the activity log to troubleshoot any problems encountered.

+

 FAQs: Provides answers to frequently asked questions about Store Exchange.

+

 Status: Provides the exchange status with each of your other stores. At a glance you can view the last successful exchange dates and times and color coding provides an alert when an issue needs your attention (Green - OK, Yellow - Minor issue. Red - an issue that needs your attention). Use the buttons and I Want To menu for each store to perform routine tasks or correct problems.

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Schedule Store Exchanges

+

Send item pictures to remote stores

+

What if a mailbag is lost or damaged?

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_changetype.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_changetype.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..37ee37b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_changetype.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + +Change Store Type + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Store Type

+

Multi-Store Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

A multi-store operation that plans to exchange information between stores can have only one Headquarters store. All other stores must be configured as remote stores.

+

Generally, it is advised that you NOT change store type after you have been using Point of Sale for some time, however there may be circumstances under which it is necessary:

+ +

In the first case (mistakenly installed as wrong store type), if you havent already entered inventory data or recorded transactions, you can simply change store types:

+ +

In either case, Point of Sale will create a new company data file and launch the Setup Interview to help you configure the software for your store. Learn more about a multi-store operation.

+

In the other two cases, or if you have already entered data you dont want to lose, additional steps must be taken to ensure the integrity of your existing data.

+

It is strongly recommended you contact Intuit Technical Support for assistance before attempting to change store types in these cases, since the particular circumstances that apply in your situation cannot be completely anticipated.

+

Some of the preparation and data issues to be aware of include:

+ +

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_config.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_config.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f4485a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_config.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Configure Store Exchange + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Store Exchange

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Which type of store are you configuring?

+

Headquarters

+

Remote store

+

 

+

Configuring Store Exchange includes specifying or confirming:

+ +

Important: Before beginning, be sure you have the license numbers from the Server Workstation at the other store(s). Until you have entered the license number from the other store(s) in your Store Exchange preferences, you will not be able to receive and process files from the store(s).

+

License numbers can be found on the Point of Sale CD holder, in the e-mail you received if downloading the program, or by selecting About Point of Sale from the Help menu at the Server Workstation in each store after installing.

+

 

+

Upgrader Note:  Each store may have a new license number when upgrading from a previous version. Store Exchange will fail with a "License numbers do not match" error until your Store Exchange preferences have been updated with the new license numbers.

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_createslip.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_createslip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bdba392 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_createslip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + +Create a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a Transfer Slip (Transfer Merchandise)

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Transfer Slip Information Fields | Transfer Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

To create a new transfer slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Transfer Slip from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify the From Store (source of merchandise) and To Store (destination of merchandise).

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    List the items and quantities to be transferred.Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Optionally, enter an estimated date of arrival (ETA), Carrier, Comment, or Freight charges.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save & Print to record the slip and print a copy or Save Only to record the transfer without printing.

    +
    2. +
+

When the transfer slip is saved, the quantities for both stores are immediately updated at the store making the slip. The store quantity changes are not visible at other stores until after the next completed Store Exchange cycle.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Record item serial numbers on slips

+

View item quantities at other stores

+

Multi-store overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_customers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_customers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a9e2821 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_customers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Multi-Store: Working with Customers + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store: Working with Customers

+

Multi-Store Overview | Customers Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Customers can be added, edited, or deleted at any store, with the resulting changes propagated to all stores with the next fully completed Store Exchange cycle. Headquarters maintains the master customer list, which is sent to all stores in its entirety during every Store Exchange.

+

General guidelines for customers at multi-stores:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Exchange of data between stores

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_emailclient.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_emailclient.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c370c15 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_emailclient.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Desktop E-mail Client + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Desktop E-mail Client

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

This is your default Windows e-mail program, specified in Internet Explorer. When you select to send e-mail from within a Windows program, such as Point of Sale, this e-mail program automatically launches. This is the recommended e-mail option for store exchange.

+

Examples: Outlook Express (default in Windows installation), Microsoft Outlook, Netscape Mail

+

 

+

How do I verify or change my Windows e-mail client?

+

E-mail FAQs

+

 

+

Usage:

+ +

Requirements:

+ +

Notes on desktop e-mail:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e4abfc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

The term Store Exchange refers to the transfer of data between your remote stores and Headquarters. Data is sent between stores in a compressed file, referred to as a "mailbag" (compressed to reduce transmission file size and time).

+

Store Exchange has two components:

+ +

When a remote store is first installed, a mailbag from Headquarters is required to initialize the remote with the company inventory, preferences, and related files. Thereafter, it is recommended that Store Exchange be run daily between each remote store and Headquarters. This ensures that each store can view current item quantities available at other stores, that Headquarters is updated with the daily transactions from each remote store, that company reports are current, and that remote stores receive new data files, including inventory updates, vendor lists, customer lists, and purchase orders from Headquarters.

+

Daily exchanges also allow Headquarters to keep QuickBooks financial software records current.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Methods of Store Exchange

+

Configure Store Exchange

+

Recommended Exchange sequence at Headquarters

+

Recommended Exchange sequence at remote stores

+

Store Exchange activity log

+

What information is exchanged?

+

Automatic recovery of lost or corrupted data

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_filexfer.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_filexfer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4788622 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_filexfer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Network File Transfer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Network File Transfer

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

This Store Exchange method involves a direct file transfer to computers in other stores via a network, phone, or Internet connection using mapped drives or a UNC (Universal Naming Convention) location.

+

Examples: VPN (Virtual Private Network), LAN (local Area Network), WAN (Wide Area Network)

+

 

+

Usage:

+ +

Requirements:

+ +

Notes on Network File transfer:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_media.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_media.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa25808 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_media.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Removable Media + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Removable Media

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

This store exchange method uses removable storage media that can be physically transported between stores.

+

Examples: Floppy disks, USB memory sticks, Portable hard drives, Zip drives, CDs, DVDs

+

 

+

Usage:

+ +

Requirements:

+ +

Notes on removable media:

+

Floppy Disks, Zip Drives (100 or 250), LS-120

+ +

CD/DVD

+ +

Note: Point of Sale does not write directly to CDs or DVDs. You must have a disk-writing application installed to use this method and the procedure may vary depending on the application and the type of disk you use. Most versions of Windows include CD-writing software. Formatted CD-RW are the recommended CDs; these disks allow you to reuse the disk, copying and deleting mailbag files as needed. If you have problems writing directly to your CD or DVD  drive, you can try selecting "Web-based e-mail" as your Store Exchange method. This method creates a single copy of your Store Exchange file to a folder of your choice on your computer. You can then use your disk-writing software to write the copy to as many CDs/DVDs as needed.

+

 

+

USB Drives

+ +

Flash Memory, Memory Sticks

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_methods.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_methods.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..791f385 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_methods.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Methods + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Methods

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic  | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Information can be exchanged between Headquarters and remote stores by any of five methods. Not every store has to use the same method; Headquarters can exchange with each remote store by a different method.

+

Each method has advantages and limitations. Click a link for more information about a specific method.

+

Desktop e-mail client uses file attachments to e-mails sent by your default Windows e-mail client.

+

Web-based e-mail uses file attachments to e-mails sent by an e-mail service you access on the Web.

+

Intuit Service uses a secure Internet database, where your stores can send and retrieve files. Phone activation required. Additional fee may apply.

+

Network file transfer is a direct transfer of files between stores using your VPN, LAN, or WAN network.

+

Removable media uses Floppy disks, USB memory sticks, Zip drives, CDs, etc., that you physically transport between stores.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Configure Store Exchange

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_webemail.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_webemail.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4619c83 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_exchange_webemail.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Web-based E-mail + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Web-based E-mail

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic  | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

You access this type of e-mail service on the Internet through your browser. You must go to the service's web site to send or receive e-mail.

+

Examples: Yahoo! mail, MSN Hotmail

+

 

+

Usage:

+ +

Requirements:

+ +

Notes on Web-based e-mail:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_overview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..afe8cc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +Multi-Store Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Point of Sale can be configured to manage up to 20 stores, each with one to 20  workstations running the software. Program includes features like centralized purchasing and inventory control, inter-store transfers, exchange of information between stores, company-wide reporting, and the ability at any store to view the on-hand quantity of an item at any other store.

+

One store is designated as the Headquarters store (Store 1). Headquarters maintains central control over inventory, purchases merchandise, runs company-wide reports, and handles data exchange with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Headquarters also has all the capabilities of a remote store, plus can create documents for any store.

+

Stores 2-20, called remote stores, receive and sell merchandise, capture customer information, transfer items to other stores when necessary, and run local store reports. Each store authorizes and settles its own credit, debit/ATM, and gift card transactions, runs the End of Day procedure, and defines its own employees and security settings.

+

Headquarters and remote stores communicate through a process called Store Exchange. Store Exchange typically is done at the end of each business day, so that Headquarters, all stores, and your financial software all have current information for the start of the next business day.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Allowed activities by store type

+

Point of Sale basics

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_purchasing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_purchasing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4691bbb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_purchasing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Regular purchase orders (POs) are created at Headquarters only.

+

A PO can be made for one store only. If you want to order quantities for all stores you must either make a separate PO for each store or make one PO for the entire quantity, receive that entire quantity at one location, and then use transfer slips to record the movement of the merchandise to the other stores.

+

When a remote store receives a Store Exchange mailbag from Headquarters, only those POs made for that particular store are extracted and copied to the remotes PO list.

+

Each store can reference its own POs as it makes receiving vouchers to receive the ordered merchandise into inventory. A voucher updates the fill status of the PO both at the local store and at Headquarters, once Store Exchange is run to send the receiving voucher(s) there. When Headquarters deletes a filled PO, it is automatically deleted from the remote PO list after the next Store Exchange. Likewise, if edits are made to an active PO at Headquarters, the PO is resent to the remote store and overwrites the copy of the PO at the remote.

+

Remote stores can create purchase orders only when creating special order items from a document (typically from a customer order). These POs are not sent to Headquarters, but the special order item is sent to Headquarters on the first transactional document listing it. Headquarters can make a special order item a permanent addition to inventory by converting it to an inventory item.

+

Allowing remote stores to create special order items introduces the possibility of creating items with duplicate UPC or Alternate Lookups. Headquarters is alerted to and can fix these duplicate items from the duplicate item reminders screen.

+

 

+

Tip: Good purchasing/receiving practices for multiple storesClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Purchasing overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_reports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5c98e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Multi-Store Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Reports

+

Reports Overview | Multi-Store Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Assuming you use Store Exchanges to share information between stores, Headquarters can run reports for any one store, a selected group of stores, or all stores, while remote stores can only run reports for the activities at their own store. When running reports at Headquarters, use the Modify Filters option to specify the store(s) to be included in the report.

+

Z-Out Drawer Count Reports are the only reports sent from remote stores to Headquarters. All other company reports ran at Headquarters draw their information from inventory and the transactional history documents maintained at Headquarters.

+

When Headquarters creates transactional documents for another store, that document is not sent to the other store. Inventory for the remote store is updated but the document is not added to the history file at the remote. These transaction(s) will be included in reports ran at Headquarters, but not in reports ran at the remote store that are based on history documents.

+

 

+

Reports Unique to Multi-Store Operations

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_transferaccess.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_transferaccess.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a4cdfb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_transferaccess.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Access Transfer Slips + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Transfer Slips

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Transfer Overview | Multi-Store Overview  

+ +
+

 

+
+

Select one of the following from the Inventory menu:

+ +

You can also initiate a transfer from inventory. Select or display the item or items you wish to transfer and then choose Transfer selected items to another store from the I Want To menu.

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_transfers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_transfers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff26181 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_transfers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + +Transfer Merchandise between Stores + + + + + + + + + + + +

Transfer Merchandise between Stores

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Create a Transfer Slip

+ +
+

 

+
+

The transfer of merchandise from one store to another is recorded on a transfer slip. A transfer slip is a transactional document that deducts the transferred merchandise from the source store's item quantity and adds it to the destination store's quantity.

+

Headquarters can make transfer slips to move merchandise from any store to any other store. Remote stores are limited to making slips that transfer merchandise out of their store to another store.

+

If one store runs out of an item, they can look to see if another store has the item in stock. Typically, a follow-up phone call is made to confirm that the item is still available. At this point, the first store can either send the customer to the second store or arrange for the second store to transfer the item to them, in which case the customer can purchase it when it arrives. The second store or Headquarters would make a transfer slip to move the item.

+

Transfer slips are often made at Headquarters to reallocate fast or slow selling merchandise among stores. Since Headquarters has ultimate inventory control, handles purchasing, and has the ability to run company reports, they are in the ideal position to assess when merchandise transfers of this nature are beneficial.

+

Keep the following in mind as you work with transfer slips:

+ +

Transfer reports, which detail the movement of merchandise between stores are available at both Headquarters and remote stores.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Transfer slip field descriptions

+

Transfer security rights

+

How transfers are sent to QuickBooks financial software

+

Store Exchange overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_types.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_types.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3902892 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multi_store_types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1351 @@ + + + + + + + +Allowed Activities by Store Type + + + + + + + + + + + +

Allowed Activities by Store Type

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

HQ = Headquarters. See footnotes for numbered marks at end of table.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/Function

+		 +

HQ

+		 +

Remote

+
+

Managing Inventory

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View item quantity and info

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Add/edit/delete/merge Items and styles

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create special order items

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Convert special order items to regular

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Enter/edit costs, prices, tax codes

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Define assembly items

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Build/break/sell assemblies

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Define group items

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Sell group items

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Inventory reminders: new items, price changes

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Inventory reminders: reorder items, duplicate items

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View item history (all stores)

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View department information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Add/edit/delete departments

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View vendor information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Add/edit/delete vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Define multi-vendors for items

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Merge vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Physical Inventory for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Physical Inventory for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Print tags

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Print tags for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Use Price Manager

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create quantity adjustments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create cost adjustments

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Put adjustment memo on hold

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View/copy/reverse memos

+		 +

X

+		 +

X6

+
+

Create transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create transfer slips for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Put slips on hold

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View/copy/reverse slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X6

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/Function

+		 +

HQ

+		 +

Remote

+
+

Purchasing and Receiving

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/edit/delete/merge vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create POs (for all stores)

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create special order PO

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View POs for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View POs for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

E-mail POs to vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X7

+
+

Delete filled POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X7

+
+

Create voucher for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create voucher to receive PO items

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create voucher for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Put vouchers on hold

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View/copy/reverse vouchers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X6

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Sales and Customer Orders

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Create receipts for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create receipts for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Accept all payment methods

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Authorize/settle credit card payments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Authorize/settle debit/ATM payments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Sell/redeem gift cards

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Put receipts on hold

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View/copy/reverse receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X6

+
+

Print gift receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Print store logo on sales documents

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create customer orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create special order items from orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Define initial deposit requirements

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Sell customer order items for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Delete filled customer orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Track employee sales commission

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Define sales tax locations/codes

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Select local default tax location

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Select local default price level

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/Function

+		 +

HQ

+		 +

Remote

+
+

Customers

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/edit/delete customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Merge customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View customer history (local sales)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View customer history (all stores)

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Offer customer charge accounts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Define/change reward program

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Enter/track shipping information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Company Preferences (Define)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

General

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Select features to use

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Financial

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Merchant & Gift Services

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Multi-Store: Change Store Type

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Multi-Store: Store Codes/Classes

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Multi-Store: Store Exchange

+		 +

X

+		 +

X1

+
+

Multi-Store: Store Headings

+		 +

X

+		 +

X1

+
+

Inventory

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Pricing

+		 +

X

+		 +

X2

+
+

Purchasing

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Receiving

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Sales

+		 +

X

+		 +

X3

+
+

Customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Customer Orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X4

+
+

Sales Tax

+		 +

X

+		 +

X5

+
+

E-mail Documents

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/Function

+		 +

HQ

+		 +

Remote

+
+

Workstation Preferences (Define)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

All Local W/S Settings (Hardware, Printing)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Software Updates

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Miscellaneous

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Serial number tracking

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Add employees and assign Security Groups and Rights (for Local Store)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Use Employee Time Clock

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Customize list columns

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Run store reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Run company reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View/print/export Z-Out Drawer Count reports for all Stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Get program updates

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Cash drawer payouts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Clean up company data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X8

+
+ +

 

+

Footnotes for remote stores: 1. Local settings must match those at HQ.  2. Limited to selection of local default price level.  3. Limited to certain local default sales preferences.  4. Limited to layaway/sales order printed messages.  5. Limited to selection of default tax location.  6. Remote stores can reverse documents only until they have been sent to Headquarters, after which the document can only be reversed at Headquarters.  7. Remote stores can delete or e-mail special order POs created at the local store only.  8. Cannot remove HQ-only records.

+

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_copycorrectslip.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_copycorrectslip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8b85b18 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_copycorrectslip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Copy and/or Correct a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy and/or Correct a Transfer Slip

+

Transfer Overview | Find a Slip | Edit a Slip

+
+

 

+
+

To reverse, copy and correct a slip:

+

Copying and correcting a reversed slip allows you to adopt the parts of the original slip that you want to keep, and correct the parts that were in error, to make a new, correct slip.

+
    +
  1. +

    Reverse the original slip as described here.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight or display the original slip again (marked Reversed in the Status field in the transfer history list).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Copy. A new slip is created and displayed with the same information as the original.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make the necessary corrections to the information on the new slip.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Save & Print or Save Only.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Basic document reversing information

+

Store Exchange overview

+

Multi-store overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_hold_slip.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_hold_slip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9d3085 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_hold_slip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + +Hold a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hold a Transfer Slip

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic  | Slip Information Fields | Transfer Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

A slip can be put on hold to allow you to carry out other activities. For example, you might temporarily hold a slip in progress while you make a sale, then unhold and complete it after the sale is completed. If a transfer is not physically completed the same day you make the slip you may also want to place the slip on hold until the transfer is completed. This ensures that item quantities are not updated until the merchandise physically is moved from one store to the other.

+

To hold a slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create a slip, but do not save it.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Hold Slip from the bottom tool bar.

    +
    3. +
+

The slip is added to the list of held slips. A slip can be viewed, printed, or deleted while on hold. A held slip is not sent to Headquarters (if made at a remote) and does not update inventory until it has been unheld and saved.

+

To unhold a slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu or the bottom of the transfer history window, select Held Transfer Slips.

    +
    2. +
+

The list of slips on hold is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the slip you want and select Unhold Slip from the bottom tool bar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    The selected slip is made active again. Make any necessary modifications and then save and print.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange overview

+

Multi-store overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_initializeremotes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_initializeremotes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1ab57ac --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_initializeremotes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Initialize Remote Stores + + + + + + + + + + + +

Initialize Remote Stores

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Once Headquarters has completed the setup of inventory, departments, vendors, and company preferences, and remote stores have installed and configured Point of Sale, Headquarters sends a Store Exchange mailbag to the remote stores to initialize them with the information entered at Headquarters. Remote stores must receive and process this mailbag before they can create documents in Point of Sale.

+

To initialize remote stores, Headquarters must send a Store Exchange file to all remote stores. Remote stores receive and process the file from Headquarters. Once this initial Store Exchange cycle is completed, all stores have access to inventory and are ready to begin normal Point of Sale activities.

+

The activities that can be performed at the remote store prior to receiving their initialization file from Headquarters are limited to certain store-specific tasks, such as adding customers, adding employees and defining security, and defining store preferences. Documents generally cannot be made, as the remote store cannot list items until the inventory file is received from Headquarters.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_preferences.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_preferences.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e787d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_preferences.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Multi-Store Preferences + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Preferences

+

Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Shared company preferences that affect all stores are defined at Headquarters only. Shared company preferences include price levels, sales tax codes and locations, deposit requirements for customer orders, store codes and headings, and most other company preferences.

+

Each store can set it own preferences for the following:

+ +

The exchange of company preferences is one way, from Headquarters to remote stores, and includes only the shared preferences. The shared company preferences at a remote store are overwritten by the Headquarters file with every exchange.

+

 

+

How do I edit company preferences?

+

How do I edit workstation preferences?

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_protips_purchasing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_protips_purchasing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..967c60f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_protips_purchasing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Multi-Store Purchasing and Receiving + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Multi-Store Purchasing and Receiving

+ +

in-help popup

+ +

 

+

Keep Headquarters PO File Small to Reduce Store Exchange File Size and Time

+

Once a PO has been filled, it is advisable to delete it at Headquarters. Deleting a PO prevents it from being included in mailbags sent to remote stores during Store Exchanges. This keeps the PO file compact and helps speed the time it takes to create and send/receive Store Exchange mailbags. It also removes the PO from the PO list at the remote store, helping keep it compact and useful.

+

 

+

Instill Good Receiving Practices at Remotes

+

If the received merchandise was ordered on a PO, remote stores should always receive against that PO when receiving the merchandise. This not only speeds the process of making a voucher and minimizes data entry errors, it also ensures that the proper order cost is carried to the voucher and that the PO fill status is updated at Headquarters. Following this practice will facilitate accurate and timely updating of your inventory cost and tracking of purchased merchandise.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_remote_correctingreceipts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_remote_correctingreceipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95c748b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_remote_correctingreceipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Reverse/Correct a Receipt at a Remote Store + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse/Correct a Receipt at a Remote Store

+

Find a Receipt | Edit a Receipt | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Remote stores can reverse receipts only until they are sent to Headquarters in a Store Exchange. If an error is discovered after a receipt has been sent to Headquarters, there are two ways to fix the error:

+ +

OR

+ +

To return, copy, and correct a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the original receipt in your Sales History.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy Receipt.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Change to Return from the I Want To menu to make the copy a return receipt. Leave all items, quantities, prices, etc., the same as the original. Save this new return receipt.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Locate and copy the original receipt a second time. Make corrections on this copy to reflect the actual items, quantities, and prices of the sold merchandise and save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Multi-store overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_remotevoucherreverse.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_remotevoucherreverse.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3766a95 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_remotevoucherreverse.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Notes: Reverse a Voucher at a Remote Store + + + + + + + + + + +

Notes: Reverse a Voucher at a Remote Store

+

Multi-Store Overview | Receiving Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Headquarters can edit (vendor billing information and discount fields only) and reverse a former voucher without restrictions. Remote stores, however, cannot edit receiving vouchers and can only reverse a voucher until it has been sent to Headquarters. If an error is discovered after a voucher has been sent to Headquarters you have two methods available to fix the error:

+ +

To return, copy, and correct a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the original voucher in your Receiving History.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy Voucher.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Change to Return Voucher from the I Want To menu to make the copy a return voucher. Leave all items, quantities, costs, etc., the same as the original. Save this new return voucher.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Locate and copy the original voucher a second time. Make corrections on this copy to reflect the actual items, quantities, and costs of the received merchandise and save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_slip_reverse.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_slip_reverse.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..76982bd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_slip_reverse.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + +Reverse a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse a Transfer Slip

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Transfer Overview | Find a Transfer Slip

+ +
+

 

+
+

Editing of saved transfer slips is limited to freight charges and some informational fields and then only until the slip has been sent to Headquarters and/or to QuickBooks financial software.

+

If an uneditable error is discovered on a slip, it is necessary to reverse the slip and then you can create a new, corrected one to update your history files and store quantities.

+

To reverse a saved transfer slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight the former slip in your transfer history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Reverse Slip from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Reversing Document dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    If not using security, select your name in the Associate field and then select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

A reversing slip is automatically created and added to the transfer history list. If necessary, a corrected slip can then made as described here.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange overview

+

Multi-store overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_storetracking_by_class.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_storetracking_by_class.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..67dcf5b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_storetracking_by_class.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Tracking and Profit/Loss Reports in QuickBooks Desktop + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Tracking and Profit/Loss Reports in QuickBooks Desktop

+

Multi-Store Overview | Multi-store Reports in Point of Sale

+
+

 

+
+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can run Profit/Loss (P/L) reports for each store as well as the entire company in your financial software, by assigning a QuickBooks class to each store.

+

To generate this report type, you must enable the class tracking preference in both Point of Sale and in QuickBooks Desktop financial software and assign a unique class to each store in your Point of Sale company preferences at Headquarters.

+

Click here for instructions to configure Headquarters preferences in Point of Sale.

+

To enable tracking by class in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences from the Edit menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Accounting, and then Company in the Preferences window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the check box for Use Class Tracking.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange Overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_view_storeqty.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_view_storeqty.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..29c819c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/multistore_view_storeqty.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +View Item Quantities at Other Stores + + + + + + + + + + +

View Item Quantities at Other Stores

+

Store Exchange Overview | Track Available Quantities

+
+

 

+
+

Each store can view item quantities at every other store, accurate as of the last completed store exchange cycle.

+

To view available item quantities at other stores:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your item list, display the item record (select View Details).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Basic Info section, click the Available button.

    +
    3. +
+

The Available Quantities window is displayed.

+

Available Quantities

+

 

+

This window allows you to view the on-hand, on-order, and available item quantities as well as a list of open orders for your store.

+

Also displayed are item quantities at other stores, current as of the last completed Store Exchange. If you run out of an item, you can use this window to see if another store has the item in stock. If needed, you can request the other store to transfer the item to you or you can send the customer to the other store to purchase the item.

+

Learn more about the Available Quantities window.

+

Other places to view item quantities at other stores:

+ +

Note: Importance of Store Exchange Sequencing. Item quantities viewed at other stores are only as current as the last successful complete Store Exchange cycle. The closer you follow the recommended exchange sequence, the more meaningful these quantities will be.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Automatic quantity adjustment at remote stores

+

Transfer merchandise between stores

+

Multi-store overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_intuitservice.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_intuitservice.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7207013 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_intuitservice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Intuit Service + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Intuit Service

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

This service requires activation by phone during  initial setup. Additional fee may apply.

+

 

+

The Intuit Service is a Web-based database exchange service provided by Intuit. When you send files you connect to the database and upload files for your other store(s). When you receive, you download the files left for you by the other stores.

+

The Store Exchange database is accessible only through the Store Exchange procedure within Point of Sale. Your Store Exchange files are secured by a unique encryption derived by the combination of your Store Exchange password with other confidential information from your Point of Sale user license.

+

If you are using more than one Point of Sale company file, you will need to use a different password for each to ensure the correct file is updated during Store Exchanges.

+

 

+

Usage:

+ +

Requirements:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_preparepics.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_preparepics.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1a67af --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_preparepics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Prepare and Send Item Pictures + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Prepare and Send Item Pictures

+

Add Pictures to Your Items | Receive Pictures (Remote)

+
+

 

+
+

Note: This task is available only at Headquarters.

+

 

+

If you add pictures to your inventory items at Headquarters, you can send those pictures to remote stores, where upon receiving them they will automatically be displayed for items. Due to the potentially large file sizes, item pictures are not included in the normal Store Exchange process; a separate and distinct procedure is required. You may want to periodically send item pictures so that additions or edits made at Headquarters are reflected at your remote stores.

+

Pictures can only be sent to remote stores on removable media, such as a CD, USB flash drive, or external hard drive.

+

To prepare and send pictures:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Stores menu or the Store Exchange Center, select Prepare Pictures.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Read the information in the Prepare Pictures dialog.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Next to continue.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Export.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Close to exit once the process is complete.

    +
    4. +
+

The picture file is created in the specified location, with a filename of: QBPOS Item Pictures.qbt.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_rcv_intuitservice.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_rcv_intuitservice.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..85d4a34 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_rcv_intuitservice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Intuit Service + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Intuit Service

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open windows and ensure you are connected to the Internet.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Stores menu or Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale opens the Store Exchange dialog, connects to the Intuit Service and checks for files from your other store(s). If a file is available, it is downloaded to your In folder.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Process In. Headquarters may have files from each remote store available; all waiting files will be processed at the same time.

    +
    2. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receive files: Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_receivepics.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_receivepics.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9079518 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_receivepics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive Pictures (Remote Stores) + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive Pictures (Remote Stores)

+
+

 

+
+

Note: This task is available only at Remote Stores. If you also received a regular Store Exchange file from Headquarters, receive that file first. This ensures that any new items, for which pictures might be included in the picture file, are added to your inventory first.

+

 

+

If your Headquarters location adds pictures to inventory items, they can send the picture file to you on removable media. After processing the picture file, you will be able to see the item pictures on the item records and on most Point of Sale documents.

+

Due to the potentially large file sizes, item pictures are not included in the normal Store Exchange process. Headquarters will need to prepare and send a separate picture file.

+

To receive a picture file:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Stores menu or the Store Exchange Center, select Receive Pictures.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Receive Pictures dialog, browse to the folder or drive containing the picture file from Headquarters.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Next to continue. A summary of the number of pictures in the received file is displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Import to process the file.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Close to exit once the process is complete.

    +
    4. +
+

The pictures will automatically be displayed for your inventory items, provided your preferences are set to associate pictures with items.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add pictures to your items

+

Send Item Pictures from Headquarters

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_resend.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_resend.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55520e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/stex_resend.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Resend Files + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Resend Files

+

Automatic Recovery | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

In cases of lost, corrupted, or missed mailbags, Point of Sale will automatically recover and resend necessary files in the next Store Exchange to synchronize your stores.

+

However, they may be circumstances, such as when a store has restored from a backup file that isn't current, that you may need to manually resend files between Headquarters and remote stores. Files can be re-sent in either direction.

+

The following information is included when using this option.

+

From remote store to Headquarters:

+

Specify a date; all documents and records made or edited on or after that date are re-sent.

+ +

Resending documents to Headquarters will update inventory and add the documents to the appropriate history lists.

+

From Headquarters to remote store:

+ +

To resend files:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the Server Workstation, select Utilities > Resend Files from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Remote Store: Indicate a resend date; all documents and records made on or after the specified date will be included.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Resend.

    +
    4. +
+

The Store Exchange Send Files window is opened.

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify the store(s) and communication methods for this exchange and then select Send.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_configurehq.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_configurehq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..302a838 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_configurehq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ + + + + + + + + +Configure Store Exchange at Headquarters + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Store Exchange at Headquarters

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

The exchange of information between your stores is referred to as Store Exchange. These instructions are for configuring Store Exchange from the Store Exchange Center, accessed from the Stores menu.

+
    +
  1. +

    If you haven't already, install Point of Sale on the Server Workstation, following the instructions for a Headquarters store in the User Guide.

    +
    2. +
+

Upon starting Point of Sale the first time, you are prompted to create your company data file. Be sure to specify Headquarters as your store type and give your data file a unique name.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete the Setup Interview at the Server Workstation (launched automatically or select from File menu ) to set up basic Point of Sale options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When done with the Setup Interview, select Store Exchange Center from the Stores menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Store Exchange Center lists all possible stores on the right side of the window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Set Up Store for Store # 2.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a 1-3 character Store Code, Store Name, and communication method and select Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the License Number from the Server Workstation at the remote store and the e-mail address or location to which Store Exchange files are to be sent:

    +
    4. +
+

Desktop e-mail: Enter the e-mail address for the remote store.

+

Web-based e-mail: Specify a folder to which the Store Exchange mailbag is copied. When creating your e-mail, browse to this folder to attach the file.

+

Removable Media: Enter or browse to the applicable drive or port.

+

Network file transfer: Enter or browse to the in folder of the Point of Sale installation on the Server Workstation at the remote store. You must have drives mapped or a UNC path to this folder. Note: If the remote hasnt installed yet, type in the path to the in folder that will be used. You may get an "invalid location" message, but can ignore it. Once the remote has installed and specified the same folder as its "in" folder, Store Exchange will function.

+

Intuit Service: After selecting this option, call the phone number displayed to activate the service. An additional fee may apply. Once activated, Point of Sale will automatically connect to the QuickBase site and log in to send/receive files.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat for other remote stores.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Set Password on the left side of the Store Exchange Center.  Enter a password to secure store exchange files. This same password must be entered at each remote store in order for them to receive files from you. Note that passwords are case-sensitive.  Tips for passwordsClick to display a popup topic

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Preferences to configure other Store Exchange options.

    +
    5. +
+

Example: the Track Multiple Stores in QuickBooks Using Classes check box if you want to run Profit/Loss reports by store in your QuickBooks Desktop Financial software. This option is only available on this page in you have already established a connection with QuickBooks Desktop, but can be configured later, if desired. Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Close to leave the Store Exchange Center.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Next Actions to Take at Headquarters

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete your setup of Point of Sale, including installing Client Workstations, setting advanced options, and entering or importing inventory and other data.

    +
    2. +
+

Add items, vendors, customers, etc.

+
    +
  1. +

    After remote stores have installed, run Store Exchange > Send Files to send an initialization file to each remote store. (Remote stores should have installed and configured before sending this file.)

    +
    2. +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Configure Store Exchange at remote stores

+

Schedule Store Exchanges

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_configureremote.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_configureremote.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ab1844 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_configureremote.htm @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + + +Configure Store Exchange at Remote Stores + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Store Exchange at Remote Stores

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

These instructions are for initial installation/configuration of a new POS company data file at a remote store from the Store Exchange Center.  These same options are available in company preferences.

+

 

+

Important Note: If you have been previously using Point of Sale at multiple stores independently of each other, and now want to convert a store (or stores) to a remote in a multi-Store configuration, there are limitations in the data at the remote that can be retained in the new configuration. Contact Intuit Technical Support for help with this conversion.

+

 

+

Information Needed

+

Collect the following information from Headquarters before beginning: 1) the License Number from the Server Workstation at Headquarters, 2) the e-mail address, removable media information, or in-folder path (mapped drive or UNC) to the Server Workstation at Headquarters, and 3) the Store Exchange password entered at Headquarters.

+

To configure a remote store:

+
    +
  1. +

    Install Point of Sale on the Server Workstation, following the instructions for a remote store in the User Guide.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Create a new POS company data file with a unique name when prompted, specifying Remote Store as the Store Type. You can also specify a store number, but if Headquarters assigns you a different number, your selection will be overwritten when you receive your first Store Exchange file from Headquarters.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Run the Setup Interview when it is launched to configure basic Point of Sale settings.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done with the Setup Interview, select Store Exchange Center from the Stores menu and configure to exchange with Headquarters by entering:

    +
    5. +
+ +

Desktop e-mail: Enter the e-mail address for Headquarters.

+

Web-based e-mail: Specify a folder to which the Store Exchange mailbag is copied. When creating your e-mail, browse to this folder to attach the file.

+

Removable Media: Enter or browse to the drive or port to be used.

+

Network file transfer: Enter or browse to the in folder of the Point of Sale installation on the Server Workstation at Headquarters. You must have drives mapped or a UNC path to this folder.

+

Intuit Service: After selecting this option, call the phone number displayed to activate the service. An additional fee may apply. Once activated, Point of Sale will automatically connect to the QuickBase site and log in to send/receive files.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Close to leave the Store Exchange Center.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Next Actions to Take at Remote Stores

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete your Point of Sale setup, including installing Client Workstations, defining local employees and security, adding customers, etc.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Receive and process in a Store Exchange mailbag from Headquarters. This file will initialize your system with inventory items, departments, vendors, company preferences, and related settings.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    After initialization, you may want to review your Point of Sale company preferences for the following store-specific settings:

    +
    4. +
+ +

You are now ready to begin using Point of Sale!

+

Upgrader Note: If you converted data from a previous version, you can create documents and carry on other POS activities while waiting for the initialization file from Headquarters, but you cannot send a Store Exchange file until you have received one from Headquarters.

+

 

+

Back to top  

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_error_codes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_error_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b6d534 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_error_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,336 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Error Codes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Error Codes

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Activity Log

+ +
+

 

+
+

Use this table to help identify causes and solutions to Store Exchange problems.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

1

+		 +

Problem: The License Number entered in Store Exchange preferences do not match between Headquarters and remote stores.

+

Solution: At Headquarters, the License Number for the Server Workstation at each remote store must be entered correctly in Store Exchange preferences. At remotes, the License Number for the Server Workstation at Headquarters must be correctly entered in Store Exchange preferences. Once corrected, run Store Exchange again.

+
+

2

+		 +

Problem: The Store Exchange password in the exchange file does not match the password entered in your Store Exchange preferences.

+

Solution: Be sure the same Store Exchange password has been entered in Store Exchange preferences at all stores and then run Store Exchange again. Note that the password is case-sensitive.

+
+

3

+		 +

Problem: Could not unzip the specified Store Exchange file.

+

Solution: No action necessary. The file is moved to an error folder and another attempt to unzip it will be made the next time you process in files. A request for the other store to resend the mailbag will also be made during the next Store Exchange. Recovery is automatic and the file will be deleted from the error folder upon the first of: 1) successful decompression of the original file, or 2) receipt and successful processing of a resent mailbag.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

4

+		 +

Problem: The file you are trying to process is not in the correct format for a remote store.

+

Solution: Browse to the correct file type and then try processing again. Remote Store Exchange files you receive are in the format sxxnnnnn.qbt where sxx = Store number, and nnnnn = the exchange file sequence number from this remote. Example: s0200001.qbt = Store 2, first exchange file sent. The next file sent from Store 2 would be s0200002.qbt. .qbt is the file extension for all Store Exchange files.

+
+

5

+		 +

Problem: The file you are trying to process is not in the correct format for a Headquarters Store Exchange file.

+

Solution: Browse to the correct file type and then try processing again. Headquarters Store Exchange files are in the format hqnnnnn.qbt where hq = Headquarters, and nnnnn = the exchange file sequence number. Example: hq00001.qbt = Headquarters, first exchange file sent. The next file sent from Headquarters would be hq00002.qbt. .qbt is the file extension for all Store Exchange files.

+
+

6

+		 +

Problem: While clearing history during the change store number process, the specified file could not be deleted.

+

Solution: The file could not be deleted because another user is accessing it. Close Point of Sale on all workstations, reboot the Server Workstation (or server, if data files are on a server), and then try again.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

7

+		 +

Problem: The change store number process was canceled because a backup could not be created.

+

Solution: Typically, this error is caused by an invalid backup path, the specified drive not being available, or insufficient space on the specified drive. Be sure your specified backup path/drive is valid and sufficient space is available, and then try again. Restart the computer if necessary.

+
+

8

+		 +

Problem: The synchronization file normally included in exchange files is missing. The file cannot be processed.

+

Solution: Run Store Exchange Out again at the originating store, and resend the exchange file.

+
+

9

+		 +

Problem: Point of Sale was unable to delete the specified exchange file after processing.

+

Solution: The file was processed successfully. You can safely delete the file manually.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

10

+		 +

Problem: Point of Sale was unable to update or replace the specified file during processing.

+

Solution: The file is open or being accessed by another user. Shut down and restart the computer that stores the data files (Server Workstation or server), then try processing in again.

+
+

11

+		 +

Problem: A problem occurred while sending the store exchange file or the user canceled the process. Unable to restore the previous synchronization file.

+

Solution: The Store Exchange automatic recovery process will fix the synchronization file and resend affected documents with the next complete Store Exchange with Headquarters.

+
+

12

+		 +

Problem: A problem occurred while sending the store exchange file or the user canceled the process. Unable to delete the specified outgoing file.

+

Solution: Shut down and restart the computer that stores the data files (the Server Workstation or server), and then try again. The specified file can be safely deleted manually.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

13

+		 +

Problem: Processing in of the specified exchange file failed. Unable to move the file to the process error folder.

+

Solution: Several possible causes. Shut down and restart the computer that stores data files and then try again.

+
+

14

+		 +

Problem: A problem occurred while processing in customers. The process failed.

+

Solution: Have all other workstations exit Point of Sale, then exit and restart at the Server Workstation. The program will reconstruct the customer file.

+
+

15

+		 +

Problem: A problem occurred while processing in purchase orders. The process failed.

+

Solution: Have all other workstations exit Point of Sale, then exit and restart at the Server Workstation. The program will reconstruct the purchase order file and it will be updated with the next exchange file from Headquarters.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

16

+		 +

Problem: The Store Exchange file from the remote is named incorrectly. Characters 2-3 in the filename must be 02-10 to match the remote store number.

+

Example: A file from remote Store # 2 must have 02 as the second and third characters in the file name, e.g. s0200001.qbt.

+

Solution: This error can only result by the file name being changed to not include the correct store number. Try the following remedies:

+
    +
  • +

    Make sure the file is in your "in folder" at Headquarters and then run Store Exchange Receive Files again.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Delete the file at Headquarters, then send a Store Exchange file from Headquarters to the remote (to overwrite any corrupted files). Finally, run Store Exchange Send Files again at the remote to resend the information to Headquarters.

    +
    • +
+

If these suggestions do not correct the problem, consult the Help & Support Resources for assistance.

+
+

17

+		 +

Problem: The specified workstation has program files open and this prevents the processing in of exchange files.

+

Solution: All workstations, except the Server Workstation, must exit Point of Sale (at least to the home page), during the Store Exchange "process in" operation.

+
+

Back to top

+
+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_hq.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_hq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c79e59 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_hq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,250 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Send Files from Headquarters + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Sending Files from Headquarters

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Schedule Store Exchanges

+ +
+

 

+
+

These instructions assume you have already configured Store Exchange with your other stores and specified a communication method.

+

Which Store Exchange method do you want instructions for?

+

Send via desktop e-mail client Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via Web-based e-mail Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via Intuit Service Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via network file transfer Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via removable media Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Store Exchange guidelines at Headquarters:

+ +

hq = Headquarters

+

xxxxx = sequential number of mailbag, incrementing 00001, 00002, 00003, etc. with each sent mailbag

+

.QBT = the file extension used for all Store Exchange mailbags

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Send item pictures to remote stores

+

Receive a Store Exchange mailbag

+

What information is exchanged?

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_in_folder.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_in_folder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ef0f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_in_folder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Your Store Exchange "In Folder" Location + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Setting Your "In Folder" Location

+

Receive Files | Configure Store Exchange

+
+

 

+
+

The "in folder" at each store is where Point of Sale looks for Store Exchange files ("mailbags") from other stores. Point of Sale also checks this folder for files upon startup and alerts you if new exchange mailbags have been received.

+

If using the network file transfer communication method, other stores should point to this folder in their Store Exchange settings. If using the Intuit Service, mailbags are automatically downloaded to this folder for processing. Mailbags received via e-mail or removable media can be downloaded to this folder as well.

+

When you run the Receive Files process, all files in the folder are processed. The default "in folder" for each store is:

+

Windows XP:  C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intuit\Point of Sale 10.0\StEx\In.

+

Windows Vista: C:\Program Data\Intuit\Point of Sale 10.0\StEx\In (by default this is a hidden folder)

+

An alternate "in folder" can be specified on the Multi-Store > Store Exchange > Options page in company preferences. If changing your "in folder" location, be sure other stores using network file transfer change their settings to reflect the new location.

+

Note: If using network file transfer, remote stores should not share an "in folder" on the network. When a remote store finishes processing in a mailbag from Headquarters, it deletes the mailbag file. If remote stores were to share an "in folder", the first store processing the mailbag would delete it, thus preventing other stores from accessing the Headquarters file.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_info.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4244def --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + +What Information is Exchanged? + + + + + + + + + + + +

What Information is Exchanged between Stores?

+

Store Exchange Overview | Methods of Store Exchange | Exchange Log

+
+

 

+
+

Sent from Headquarters to Remote Stores

+ +

Not sent to remote stores: transactional documents made at Headquarters, employees and security settings, store-specific and workstation preferences.

+

Store Exchange files (mailbags) sent from Headquarters to remotes are in the format hq00001.qbt where 00001 is the sequential mailbag number sent from Headquarters.

+

 

+

Sent from Remote Stores to Headquarters

+ +

Not sent to Headquarters: inventory and related files, employee records (except time clock records), security settings, store-specific and workstation preferences.

+

Store exchange files (mailbags) sent from remotes to Headquarters are in the format snn00001.qbt where snn = Store number, e.g. s02 = Store 2, and 00001 is the sequential mailbag number sent from this remote.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_log.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_log.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..12f5922 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_log.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Activity Log + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Activity Log

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

All activities that occur during Store Exchange are recorded in the Store Exchange log file. A separate log is maintained at each store. If an error is encountered, the first step should be to check the log entries for messages, error codes, and the mailbag file name that might help identify the problem.

+

To access the Store Exchange log:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select View Log from the Store Exchange dialog or select View Activity Log from the Stores menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a date/time from the Available Logs: drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    (Optional) Select the Show Errors Only check box to remove routine entries and make identification of errors easier.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Use the error code table to review errors and possible solutions.

    +
    5. +
+

To assist in troubleshooting, the log contents can be printed by selecting the Print button.

+

With each new exchange, entries older than 30 days are purged from the log.

+

See also automatic recovery from lost or damaged data.

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_procin.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_procin.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0d753c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_procin.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive and Process Files + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receiving and Processing Files

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

By which method are you receiving files?

+

Receive via desktop e-mail

+

Receive via Web-based e-mail

+

Receive via removable media

+

Receive via network file transfer

+

Receive via Intuit Service

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + +

Read Store Exchange sequencing recommendations for: Headquarters  or  Remote Stores

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange log

+

Store Exchange send - Headquarters

+

Store Exchange send Remote stores

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_qtyadj.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_qtyadj.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0946db4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_qtyadj.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Automatic Quantity Adjustment at Remote Stores + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatic Quantity Adjustment at Remote Stores

+

Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

If a remote store has created new transactional documents (receipts, vouchers, adjustment memos, transfer slips) since last sending an exchange mailbag to Headquarters, it adjusts the inventory quantities received back from Headquarters to reflect those new documents. In this way, a remote always has the most current item quantities for its own store.

+

Adjustment memos are not created for this type of adjustment.

+

For example, if Headquarters sends back a quantity of nine (9) for Item #25, and, in the interim, the remote store has sold two more of that item, the on-hand quantity at the remote will be adjusted as it processes in the mailbag from Headquarters to reflect the actual on-hand quantity of seven (7).

+

Other stores will still show the quantity received from Headquarters.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivedesktopemail.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivedesktopemail.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b279870 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivedesktopemail.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Desktop E-mail + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Desktop E-mail

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open Point of Sale windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch your desktop e-mail client application.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Locate and display the Store Exchange e-mail from the other store, and then double-click the .qbt file attachment to process it immediately.

    +
    4. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+
    +
  1. +

    Headquarters only: Repeat for the e-mails received from each of your other remote stores. Alternatively, you can save the e-mail attachments from all remotes to your Store Exchange "in folder" (not the e-mail client's in-box), where you can access and process them all at one time by selecting Receive Files from the Stores menu and then Process In on the Store Exchange dialog.

    +
    2. +
+

Notes on using desktop e-mail

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receive files: Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivefiletransfer.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivefiletransfer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..681cd93 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivefiletransfer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Network File Transfer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Network File Transfer

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open Point of Sale windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Stores menu or Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Process In on the Store Exchange dialog to process the file(s) in your "in folder".

    +
    4. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+

 

+

Notes on using network file transfer

+

Set your "In Folder"Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receive files: Overview

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receiveremovablemedia.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receiveremovablemedia.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c60fcdc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receiveremovablemedia.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Removable Media + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Removable Media

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open Point of Sale windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Insert the received disk or other type of media in the appropriate drive or USB port.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the Stores menu or Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    If you have identified the drive/port as your default "in folder" location, you can immediately select Process In to process the mailbag on the media. Otherwise, choose Browse, navigate to the mailbag file at the drive/port being used, and then select Process In.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Headquarters only: Repeat with the media received from other remote stores.

    +
    6. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+

 

+

Notes on using removable media

+

Set your default "In Folder"

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange receive Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivewebemail.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivewebemail.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d1c12e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_receivewebemail.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Web-based E-mail + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Web-based E-mail

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open Point of Sale windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Access your e-mail application on the Internet and display the Store Exchange e-mail from the other store.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the e-mail application's instructions to download and save the attached .qbt file to your Store Exchange "in folder".

    +
    4. +
+

Headquarters only: Repeat for the e-mails received from all of your remote stores.

+
    +
  1. +

    Close the e-mail application.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Stores menu or Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Process In on the Store Exchange dialog to process the file(s) in your "in folder".

    +
    4. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+

 

+

Notes on using Web-based e-mail

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receiving files: Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_remote.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_remote.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0bd79a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_remote.htm @@ -0,0 +1,245 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Send Files from Remote Stores + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Sending Files from Remote Stores

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview | Schedule Store Exchanges

+ +
+

 

+
+

What method of Store Exchange would you like help with?

+

These instructions assume you have already configured Store Exchange with your other stores and specified a communication method.

+

Send via desktop e-mail client Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via Web-based e-mail Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via Intuit Service Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via network file transfer Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via removable media Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Store Exchange guidelines at Remote Stores

+ +

snn =Store Number, e.g. s02 = Store 2

+

xxxxx = the sequence number for mailbags created at this store. Incremented 00001, 00002, etc.

+

.QBT = the file extension used for all Store Exchange mailbags

+ +

Related Topics

+

Receive a Store Exchange mailbag

+

What information is exchanged?

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_schedule.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_schedule.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b79ab0a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_schedule.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + +Schedule Store Exchanges + + + + + + + + + + +

Schedule Store Exchanges

+

Recommended sequence at: Headquarters | Remote Stores

+
+

 

+
+

Scheduling allows you to have Point of Sale automatically run Store Exchanges at the same time each day without manual action. This allows you, for example, to run Store Exchanges overnight when network or Internet traffic is reduced or access fees lower. And it means you don't have to train employees at each store to manually run Store Exchanges.

+

Scheduling is available only if using the Network File Transfer or Intuit Service methods of Store Exchange.

+

 

+

Headquarters

+

At the scheduled time, Point of Sale checks for, retrieves, and processes in all files received from remote stores.  The Headquarters data file is updated with the remote transactions, and then the updated information is sent back out to the remote stores. Typically, you would schedule your exchanges to occur after all remote stores have sent their files to you.

+

 

+

Remote Stores

+

You can schedule separate receive and send times. For example, you might schedule to receive files each day at 6 AM (before opening for the day) and send at 10:00 PM (after close, but before Headquarters has scheduled its Store Exchange).

+

 

+

Scheduling and Running

+

To schedule Store Exchanges:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure you are configured to exchange via Network File Transfer or Intuit Service.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Store Exchange Center, select Schedule on the left side.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the time of day you wish Store Exchanges to run.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Important Note: Point of Sale must be running on the Server Workstation at the scheduled time and, if logins are required, a user with adequate rights must be logged in. We strongly recommend you lockClick to display a popup topic your computer if it will be unattended at the scheduled time and disable automatic logouts preferences if set.

+

 

+

When the scheduled time arrives, Point of Sale will display a confirmation dialog with a 60-second countdown. This gives you an opportunity to skip the exchange or delay it if necessary to complete other tasks.

+

Scheduled Task Alert

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange Overview

+

Store Exchange Center

+

What if an file is lost or damaged?

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_sequence_hq.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_sequence_hq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..448f69c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchange_sequence_hq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Recommended Store Exchange Sequence at Headquarters + + + + + + + + + +

Recommended Store Exchange Sequence at Headquarters

+

Store Exchange Overview | Troubleshoot Store Exchange

+
+

 

+
+

Headquarters has two distinct End of Day responsibilities: Store Activities and Headquarters Activities, and you may find it helpful to keep the activities related to each separate. See notes below.

+

Store activities include:

+
    +
  1. +

    Run a Z-Out Drawer Count report at each workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Run a Z-Out Store Close report on the Server Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Settle credit card transactions with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service (if applicable).

    +
    4. +
+

Typically, these activities would be done as part of the normal End of Day procedure at Headquarters.

+

Headquarters activities are done on the Server Workstation and include:

+
    +
  1. +

    Receive files to process the mailbags received from each remote store. All other workstations must exit Point of Sale before beginning this task. This process updates inventory and related files with the day's activities at the remote stores.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Run Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Backup the company data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Send updated files back to remote stores before the beginning of the next business day.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+

You may find it easier to keep the two components of End of Day separate at Headquarters. Use the automated End of Day process to do the routine store close activities for the store. This can be accomplished while you wait for the remote stores to get their Store Exchange mailbags sent. Later, process in the remote store mailbags, conduct your Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop, and then send updated files back to the remote stores.

+

There are good reasons to keep the two types of activities separate at Headquarters:

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Variations on the Recommended Sequence

+

Depending on operational requirements and management's need for timely information, the Store Exchange process can be run more or less frequently. Some variations include:

+ +

With experience, you will find the sequencing that works best for your circumstances. It is not required that the sequence described here be followed, but by adhering to it you ensure that all stores have the most current information for each business day.

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Headquarters Store Exchange sending guidelines

+

Configure Store Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchangsequence_remote.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchangsequence_remote.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8574cc1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/store_exchangsequence_remote.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Recommended Store Exchange Sequence at Remotes + + + + + + + + + + +

Recommended Store Exchange Sequence at Remotes

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

At the end of each sales day, each workstation in the store should run a Z-Out Drawer Count report to "close" the workstation for the day. Then, the following activities should be performed on the Server Workstation, typically as part of the automated End of Day procedure.

+
    +
  1. +

    Run a Z-Out Store Close report.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Settle credit card transactions with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service (if applicable).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Perform a backup of your Point of Sale data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Send the day's transactions to Headquarters.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Prior to opening for business the next business day, receive and process an updated file (mailbag) back from Headquarters.

    +
    6. +
+

The mailbag from Headquarters must be processed by the Server Workstation. No other workstation can be working in Point of Sale during this procedure, as the process will close all open windows on all workstations if necessary to update your files.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Remote store sending guidelines

+

Schedule Store Exchanges

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/storeexchange_autorecovery.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/storeexchange_autorecovery.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..33f23e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_multi_store/storeexchange_autorecovery.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Automatic Recovery + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Automatic Recovery

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Resend Files between Stores

+ +
+

 

+
+

The Store Exchange process has a built-in recovery mechanism that automatically resends and synchronizes data between stores in the event that an exchange mailbag is late, lost, received out of order, or arrives with corrupted data.

+

If you do not receive a mailbag from a remote (or from Headquarters if a remote store), it is not necessary that you suspend any normal activities. The next mailbags sent will automatically include the missed information and will synchronize your data between stores.

+

If a mailbag is received, but cannot be processed for some reason, check the Store Exchange Activity Log for error codes or clues that might help identify the problem.

+

 

+

Warning: Auto-Recovery Does Not Replace Data Backups. While the Store Exchange automatic data recovery feature corrects many instances of lost or corrupted data, it is still vitally important that you implement and follow a regular program of data backups, especially at Headquarters, where your master company data is maintained.

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/_pi_pdt_scanitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/_pi_pdt_scanitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e5159f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/_pi_pdt_scanitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + +pi_pdt_scanitems + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Scanning Inventory Items

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+

 

+

There are two scanning options when using the scanner:

+ +

In either mode, you can also manually key in an item number or UPC after selecting a scan option (if bar codes arent used or are unreadable).

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are essentially the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 Scanner
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus Scanner

+

 

+

To scan each and every unit of an item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner unit on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Collect Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scan Barcode.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Hold the scanner at a slight angle so that you see the red reflection from the infrared light on the bar code.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Press the yellow/orange button to scan the item bar code (or manually enter the item number or UPC and then press either Enter button).

    +
    7. +
+

A beep confirms a successful scan and a quantity of "1" is assigned to the scan. The unit is immediately ready for the next scan.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat until all units have been scanned, for all items being counted.

    +
    2. +
+

To scan one unit and enter item count:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner unit on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Collect Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scan & Enter Qty.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Scan the bar code on one unit of the item you are counting. A beep confirms a successful scan.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    User the keypad to enter the total number of units counted for the scanned item.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Press Enter.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Repeat for all items.

    +
    9. +
+

 

+

Next Step: Upload the scanned data to Point of Sale

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+ +

Counting Items with multiple units of measure

+ +

Viewing, editing or deleting a scan on the scanner

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi551.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi551.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0c793f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi551.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print and Use a Store Count Worksheet + + + + + + + + + + +

Print and Use a Store Count Worksheet

+

Basic Steps of a Physical Inventory | Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Printing a store count worksheet or worksheets is the most common way of recording physical inventory counts if you don't use a physical inventory scanner.

+ +

To print store count worksheets:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the Physical Inventory window open, select:

    +
    2. +
+ +

The report is run and displayed on-screen.

+

 

+

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    To add/remove columns or make other changes, select Modify or a specific customization option from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When satisfied with the layout, select Print.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Repeat to create worksheets for other item groupings, if needed.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Go though your store, recording item counts on  the worksheets.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Transfer the item counts to Point of Sale using the Add Counts by Hand option or enter them directly in the Physical Inventory window item list.

    +
    6. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi555.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi555.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ffa195f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi555.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +QuickBooks Users: Adjust Inventory Value + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Users: Adjust Inventory Value

+ +

In-help popup. Not duplicated in popup database.

+ +

The adjustment memos automatically created when a physical inventory is updated send the necessary information to your financial software so the value change in inventory is correctly reflected there.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi556.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi556.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d1e3ed --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi556.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Update Inventory with Physical Counts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Update Inventory with Physical Counts

+

Physical Inventory Overview | Basic steps of a Physical Inventory

+
+

Basic

+
+

Important: If you haven't already done so, review your item counts before updating inventory.

+

 

+

When all of your counts have been entered and reviewed, use this procedure to update inventory on-hand quantities to the values you have entered.

+
    +
  1. +

    With the Physical Inventory  window displayed, ensure that All Items is selected in the View drop-down filter list at the top of the window.

    +
    2. +
+

Requiring that all items be displayed is a precaution to help make sure you are not updating inventory with "hidden" entries.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory.

    +
    2. +
+

A confirmation window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Yes to update inventory quantities.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    At the prompt, specify if you would like to run one of the physical inventory reports.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note: Adjustment memo(s) createdClick to display a popup topic

+

Note: Update QuickBooks financial softwareClick to display a popup topic

+

Clear the physical inventory scanner's memory (if applicable)

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi558.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi558.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04db0dd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi558.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + +Adjustment Memo Created + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Adjustment Memo Created

+ +

In-help popup. Has not been added to popup database.

+ +

Quantity adjustment memos are automatically created, as necessary, when your Point of Sale inventory is updated with your item counts.

+

Physical is listed in the memos Reason field and Physical Inventory in the Source field. If requiring employee logins, the currently logged-in user is listed as the Associate. If not using security, the memos Associate field is left blank.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi559.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi559.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8add486 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi559.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + +Access Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Physical Inventory

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Entering Counts | Using a Physical Inventory Scanner

+
+

Basic

+
+

To start or continue a physical inventory:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi560.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi560.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a64e507 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi560.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Review Counts Before Updating Inventory + + + + + + + + + + +

Review Counts Before Updating Inventory

+

Physical Inventory Overview | PI Reports

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

It is highly recommended that you review your physical inventory counts before updating a physical inventory. No mater how you've entered your item counts, they all end up in the item list on the main Physical Inventory window. From this window, you have several options for reviewing your counts to help determine if investigation or recounts are necessary before updating your inventory with the counts.

+

 

+

1. Do you need to set all items not counted to zero (0)?

+

When updating inventory with your counts, only the items with a count entered will be updated. It is important to enter a zero for items that are out of stock during the count so that your inventory is updated accordingly. You can enter a zero manually for these items or you can select the check box labeled Set all items not counted to zero to accomplish this in one step.

+

 

+

Do not use this option if you are counting and updating inventory for only a portion of your store (such as for one department). All items in your inventory that do not have a count entered are set to zero, not just those currently displayed in the Physical Inventory item list. Always review the results before updating inventory. Clearing the check box before updating will remove the zero counts.

+

 

+

 

+

2. Recount items whose quantity may have changed since starting.

+

While it is not recommended, sometimes a physical is done while your store is open and you continue selling. Or maybe you have started, saved, and restarted a physical with a period of sales between. Point of Sale will track and alert you when any transaction (receiving, sale, adjustment, transfer) affects items you have already counted. This gives you an opportunity to recount the item(s) in question before updating your inventory.

+

 

+

+

+

 

+

 

+

3. Review the physical inventory difference totals.

+

At the bottom right of the window is a summary of the differences in quantity, price, and cost of the counted items compared to what was expected. If the numbers are way off what you expected, review the counts in the item list looking for large discrepancies.

+

Tip: Filter the item list by Differences Only to quickly find suspect counts.

+

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi561.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi561.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d815c91 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi561.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Item List to Enter or Review Physical Inventory Counts + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Item List to Enter or Review Physical Inventory Counts

+

Enter Counts | Review Counts | Update Inventory with Counts

+
+

Basic

+
+

You may find it helpful to break the process of conducting a physical inventory into several phases, such as taking and entering counts by a particular department, vendor, physical location, or some other logical grouping. Filtering your item list can make your job easier and save you time by organizing your data appropriately, especially if you are manually entering physical counts in a larger store.

+

Choose one of the filters from the drop-down list on the Physical Inventory window tool bar:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_addcounts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_addcounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9e4ba9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_addcounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + +Add Counts by Hand + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Counts by Hand

+

Basic Steps of a Physical Inventory | Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

The Add Counts by Hand window is an efficient way to manually transfer item counts from a store count worksheet to Point of Sale. There's no need to enter counts in any particular order and Point of Sale will combine the counts of an item if entered multiple times.

+

 

+

+

 

+

To enter item counts using the Add Counts by Hand window:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the Physical Inventory window open, Select Add Counts by Hand from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the preferred workflow sequence for item entry in After pressing Enter key:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Scan or enter an item identifier (UPC, Alternate Lookup, or Item #) and press <Enter>. Audio and visual warnings are given if an unrecognizable identifier is entered.

    +
    2. +
+

The program will search items in the order shown above. The first match to the entry is listed, e.g., if you have an item with an Alternate Lookup that matches an Item #, an entry matching both will cause the item with the Alternate Lookup match to be listed.

+
    +
  1. +

    If you selected Go to quantity field in step 2, enter the counted quantity and press <Enter> or click Add.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you are finished entering all the items and their counts.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save. The counts entered are transferred to the Physical Inventory window.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When all counts have been entered on the Physical Inventory window, review the counts and then proceed to updating your inventory.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Add counts from a scanner

+

Enter counts of Items with multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_basicsteps.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_basicsteps.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..af20a9c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_basicsteps.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory: Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: Only one workstation can be working in the physical inventory at any one time.

+

 

+

These are the basic steps to complete a physical inventory. Use the links on this page for specific instructions to complete a step.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Start Physical Inventory from the Inventory menu.

    +

    (Pro Headquarters) Enter the Store for which you are entering counts.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Physically count item quantities on hand using one or both of these methods:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Transfer your counts to Point of Sale by:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Review your counts and the totals summary displayed on screen and, if applicable, select the Set all items not counted to zero. This setting ensures that all inventory items for which no physical count was entered are zeroed out when you update inventory.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory to update your inventory on-hand quantities with the counted quantities.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_countUOM.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_countUOM.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..314a5b1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_countUOM.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + +Count Items with Multiple Units of Measure + + + + + + + + + + + +

Count Items with Multiple Units of Measure

+

Units of Measure Overview | Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale maintains on-hand inventory counts by the base unit of measureClick to display a popup topic (though quantities are also displayed in your other units for convenience). When taking a physical inventory count, you can enter counted quantities by other units, but Point of Sale always converts the count to your base unit before updating inventory.

+

The general rules for entering and displaying counts with these items are as follows.

+

 

+

Main Physical Inventory Window

+ +

Add Counts by Hand Window

+ +

Note: If you have selected the Add Item option, you cannot change the Unit of Measure field entry. The count is assumed to be 1 (one) for the unit identifier entered.

+ +

+

 

+

Physical Inventory Scanner

+

If you have a unique UPC or alternate lookup (ALU) identifier for each unit of measure and print tags with those barcodes, when scanning them the quantity entered is converted to an equivalent quantity of base units. If each unit does not have a unique bar code, the quantity entered is assumed to be for your base unit. As you scan and enter quantities, be aware of and enter the counted quantity in accordance with this standard and based on your bar code type. Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a91fa3a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +pi_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic. and has been hidden

+ +

 

+

Access the Physical Inventory window

+

Complete the basic steps of a Physical Inventory

+

Enter Physical Inventory counts

+

Use a portable data terminal (scanner) (optional, sold separately)

+

Update a Physical Inventory file

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..910df73 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Use a Scanner for Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Use a Scanner for Physical Inventory

+

Physical Inventory Overview | Physical Inventory: Basic Steps

+
+

Basic

+
+

Using the QuickBooks-approved physical inventory scanner is an easy and efficient way to record and update your physical inventory. With the physical inventory scanner, you can review your inventory counts and resolve errors before you transfer the counts to your physical inventory. Since the scanner is portable, you can move freely around your store and scan the bar codes of all your inventory items. This option not only saves you time, but also helps to reduce inventory errors.

+

A physical inventory scanner allows you to scan thousands of units in inventory without needing to stop and upload the data. The scanner connects to your workstation via a USB interface, which makes it very convenient to use.

+

Using the scanner for a physical inventory includes these basic steps. Select a link for step-by-step instructions:

+
    +
  1. +

    Scan your items and enter counts.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Upload the scanned data from your scanner to Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Review the retrieved scans.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Save the scans to the Physical Inventory window.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Update inventory on-hand quantities with your counts.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Clear scans from the physical inventory scanner unit, making it ready for the next scanning session.

    +
    7. +
+

You can use the physical inventory scanner in conjunction with manually entered counts. When you update your physical inventory, the on-hand quantities are adjusted in your inventory for all item counts on the Physical Inventory , regardless of how they got there.

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use bar codes in Point of Sale

+

Install Supported Hardware

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_acceptscans.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_acceptscans.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8249917 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_acceptscans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Review and Save Scans + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Review and Save Scans

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Saving the physical inventory scans moves them from the Get Scans window to the Physical Inventory window.

+

View example Get Scans window Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

If any Unrecognized Scans are reported, review and print them before saving good scans to your physical inventory. Learn more

+

To save the good scans to your physical inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Get Scans window, select the Item Scans tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you do not want to save all of the scans, select (click or touch) the checkboxes to the left of the items to be saved and then choose Save Selected at the bottom of the window.

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

Choose Save All at the bottom of the window to save all good scans items to the main Physical Inventory window.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Next Step: Review your counts before updating inventory

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are essentially the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_clearscans.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_clearscans.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff86455 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_clearscans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Clearing Scans + + + + + + + + + + +

Clearing Scans from the Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

After successfully uploading scans to Point of Sale, reviewing them, and saving to the Physical Inventory window, you must clear the scanner before the next scanning session (so they don't get uploaded a second time to your Physical Inventory).

+

If you conduct your physical inventory in discreet physical units (by department or aisle for example), clear the scanner after completing each unit and prior to starting scans for the next unit.

+

To clear scans from scanner memory from within Point of Sale:

+ +

OR

+ +

You can also clear one or all scans from the scanner unit directly as follows.

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Utilities from the main scanner menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Clear Records (Delete Data on CipherLab scanner).

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Press 1. All to clear all scans from memory, or 2. Last Collected to delete the last scan only.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Press 1. Yes to confirm or 2. No to cancel.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Note: Deleting the last scan removes the last item record entered, even if quantities greater than 1 were manually entered into the record.

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_illustration.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_illustration.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..809d5d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_illustration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +pi_pdt_illustration + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner (PDT): Illustration

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

image\pdt3.gif

+

 

+ +

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_retrievescans.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_retrievescans.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..26590e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_retrievescans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Upload Scans to Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Upload Scans to Point of Sale

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

To upload scans to Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Place the scanner into the cradle and ensure the adapter is plugged into a USB port on your workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Turn the scanner on.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If the Point of Sale Physical Inventory window is not already open, select Start (or Continue) Physical Inventory from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Add Counts from Scanner.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the displayed instructions to upload the scans from the scanner unit.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When the upload is finished, you are prompted to clear the scanner memory. You can do so now, or wait until you have finished reviewing and saving the scans. But it is important that you clear the scanner so the same scans are not uploaded again in the next batch.

    +
    5. +
+

When you close the upload window, the scans are displayed for your review on the Get Scans window. The scans are not added to the Physical Inventory window until you select a save option at the bottom of this window.

+

 

+

Next Step: Review uploaded scans

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_reviewscansonpdt.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_reviewscansonpdt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..995f6f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_reviewscansonpdt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Review, Edit, or Delete Scans on the Physical Inventory Scanner + + + + + + + + + + +

Review, Edit, or Delete Scans on the Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Scan Inventory Items | Physical Inventory Scanner Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can review and make corrections to the scans on the scanner unit if necessary.

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 Scanner and ControlsClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus Scanner and ControlsClick to display a popup topic

+

To view, edit and/or delete a scan on the scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Utilities.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Browse Records.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Use the arrow keys to scroll though and select from the displayed scans.

    +
    5. +
+

A typical scan will look like this:  4680923459823,6

+

The numbers before the comma is the bar code number and the number after the comma is the entered quantity.

+
    +
  1. +

    To edit a scan:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    To delete a scan:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Repeat for other scans or press Esc until at the main menu.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Count Items with multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_scanitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_scanitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..553518e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_scanitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Scan Inventory Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Scan Inventory Items

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are two scanning options when using a physical inventory scanner:

+ +

In either mode, you can also manually key in an item number or UPC after selecting a scan option (if bar codes arent used or are unreadable).

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are essentially the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

To scan each and every unit of an item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Collect Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scan Barcode.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Hold the scanner at a slight angle so that you see the red reflection from the infrared light on the bar code.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Press the yellow/orange button to scan the item bar code (or manually enter the item number or UPC and then press either Enter button).

    +
    7. +
+

A beep confirms a successful scan and a quantity of one is assigned to the scan. The unit is immediately ready for the next scan.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat until all units have been scanned, for all items being counted.

    +
    2. +
+

To scan one unit and enter item count:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Collect Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scan & Enter Qty.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Scan the bar code for one unit of the item you are counting. A beep confirms a successful scan.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Use the keypad to enter the total number of units counted for the scanned item.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Press Enter.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Repeat for all items.

    +
    9. +
+

 

+

Next Step: Upload the scanned data to Point of Sale

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View, edit or delete a scan on the scanner

+

Count Items with multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_unrecognizedscans.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_unrecognizedscans.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..54ed1fa --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_pdt_unrecognizedscans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Unrecognized Scans + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Unrecognized Scans

+

Use a Scanner: Overview | Save Scans

+
+

Basic

+
+

An unrecognized scan means that either there was an error in the scan (usually a result of a torn or marred tag) or that the bar code (item identifier) you scanned or entered does not exist in your Point of Sale inventory. For example, if you are scanning UPC bar codes, those UPC codes must be entered in the item records in inventory so that Point of Sale recognizes them when they are retrieved from the physical inventory scanner.

+

You can print a list of unrecognized scans for follow-up. After correcting the condition, you can re-scan in another session or enter those items manually on the Physical Inventory window.

+

To view and print the unrecognized scans:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Unrecognized Scans tab on the Get Scans window.

    +
    2. +
+

The unrecognized scans are displayed in one color, while the good scans before and after each unrecognized scan is displayed in a contrasting color. This helps you identify the relative position of the bad scans in your store so you can locate and make corrections to the items.

+

Review scans

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Unrecognized Scans to print the list.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Next Step: Save good scans to the Physical Inventory window

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use bar codes in Point of Sale

+

Record UPC codes in inventory

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_picountwindow.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_picountwindow.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6fd0b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_picountwindow.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Counts on the Physical Inventory Count Window + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Counts on the Physical Inventory Count Window

+

Basic Steps of a Physical | Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

To enter counts directly on the Physical Inventory Count window:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use filtering and sorting procedures to locate and group items in the Physical Inventory  window item list.

    +
    2. +
+

If counting the items in a specific department or entering from a printed Store Count worksheet, we suggest filtering your list to display only the items in that department and/or the items on the worksheet. This will help minimize data entry time.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the counted quantity in the Counted column.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter other counts from the Add Counts by Hand window or the physical inventory scanner, if applicable.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Proceed to reviewing your counts and then updating your inventory.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter zero for uncounted items

+

Enter counts of Items with multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_reports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c664df --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Reports

+

Basic Steps of a Physical Inventory | Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Three physical inventory reports can be viewed or printed.

+ +

The PI differences and detail report are also available for the last updated physical inventory as well as the physical in progress.

+

To access the PI reports:

+ +

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_reviewlastPI.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_reviewlastPI.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..867717b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pi_reviewlastPI.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Review or Reverse the Last Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + + +

Review or Reverse the Last Physical Inventory

+

Physical Inventory Overview | Physical Inventory Reports

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: Only the last updated physical inventory is saved and can be reversed. Each time you update inventory with count changes, that update replaces the previous saved physical.

+

 

+

Point of Sale allows you to go back and review the last updated physical inventory. You can print reports and even reverse the effect the physical had on your inventory.

+

Access the options for a previous physical from the I Want To menu:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pioverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pioverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..40980d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_physical_inventory/pioverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Basic Steps | Using a Physical Inventory Scanner

+
+

Basic

+
+

A physical inventory is the process of verifying or correcting the on-hand item quantities in your Point of Sale inventory by conducting a physical count.

+

It is recommended that a physical inventory be done after initially entering your inventory when first starting to use Point of Sale and periodically thereafter.

+

Conducting a physical inventory involves going through the store and recording the actual item quantities on hand. Counts can be recorded on a printed Store Count worksheet or scanned into the optional physical inventory scanner, and then transferred to Point of Sale.

+

The entire store does not have to be counted at the same time. You may find it easier to conduct your physical inventory by department, aisle, or some other discreet physical sections, entering counts and saving for one section of your store at a time. A physical inventory can be saved as you go and then inventory updated when you are done. Point of Sale provides several ways for you to review changes before updating inventory and alerts you if a new transaction has affected an item between when a count was entered and inventory updated.

+

You can review or reverse the last updated physical inventory.

+

(Pro) A physical inventory is for one store only. When a remote store updates a physical inventory, quantity adjustment memos are automatically created and sent to Headquarters during the next Store Exchange. Headquarters can create and update a physical inventory for itself or for any store.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for Physical Inventory

+

Update QuickBooks financial software after a physical inventory

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm503.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm503.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d415eb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm503.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Accessing Price Manager + + + + + + + + + + +

Accessing Price Manager

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Price Manager.

    +
    2. +
+

The Price Manager window, with Discount Pricing and Change Item Prices panels is opened. What's the difference between the panels?Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Discount Pricing panel, click:

    +
    2. +
+

Basic

+ +

Pro

+ +

OR

+

 

+

On the Change Item Prices panel, select:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm504.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm504.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..46101e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm504.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + +Change Item Prices: Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Item Prices: Overview

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Price Manager Overview

+ +

 

+

Using Price Manager, you can calculate new prices for all or selected items in a variety of ways, from either the current price or the average unit cost.

+

A "price change" can be calculated and temporarily saved, applied to inventory when appropriate, and the previous prices restored later if necessary. From Price Manager, you can print markdown tags with both old and new prices, or inventory tags with just the new prices.

+

(Pro) Only Headquarters can change item prices. The price change records are sent to remote stores, where they can be viewed and used to print markdown price tags for the merchandise in their store.

+

When you access Price Manager, a list of your recent price changes is displayed:

+ +

About the Change Item Prices List

+

This list includes all price changes you have made. There are three possible status conditions for price changes:

+

Pending: New prices have been calculated but not applied to inventory. You can still review, edit, or clear the new prices.

+

Applied: New prices have been applied to inventory and are in effect for sales.

+

Restored: Your previous prices have been restored.

+

To view or work with a price change record, select it in the list and then select View or Edit Price Change. Your options for the displayed record are outlined in the yellow help area on the record. See Working with Lists for general information on navigating and customizing the list.

+

 

+

What's important about making price changes?

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm506.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm506.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..89166c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm506.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Price Change: Select Items by Filtering + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Select Items by Filtering

+

Change Item Prices: Overview | Filtering Lists

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

Filtering lets you select items by criteria that you choose. All of the items matching your criteria are added to the price change item list.

+

On this page, you can choose to:

+ +

Tip: Memorized filters save timeClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm507.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm507.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..315a0f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm507.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Change: Specify Price Level and Name + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Specify Price Level and Name

+

Change Item Prices: Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

 

+

Price Level

+

From the drop-down list, select the price level for which you wish to make price changes.

+

If starting a new price change, you will be asked from what price level you wish to calculate the new prices from on a later wizard page. This can be the same or a different price level.

+

Example: You wish to calculate new prices for your Employee price level, but want to calculate the new employee prices as a discount from your regular prices. Select the Employee price level on this page and  when setting up the formula to calculate new prices later, select your Regular Price to calculate prices from.

+

 

+

Price Change Name

+

Enter a name to identify this price change. This name must be unique (cannot be the same as another price change).

+

 

+

Notes

+

Optionally, add notes to provide additional information about this price change.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm508.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm508.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7b3f60c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm508.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Change: Select Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Select Items

+

Change Item Prices: Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

Price changes are calculated for just the items you select. Use this page to specify how you want to select items for the price change. You will have the opportunity to review, add, or edit items and new prices in the Price Change item list later, before any new prices are applied to inventory.

+

Your choices are to add items by:

+ +

* Item Name is the default field label for the short item description printed on receipts. This is a customizable label so it may be different on your system, such as Description 1 or Receipt Description.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm509.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm509.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..212dc8e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm509.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printing Price Tags from Price Manager + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Price Tags from Price Manager

+

Price Manager Overview | Tag Printing Overview

+

 

+

When using Price Manger to change item prices or set up an automatic discount, you can print markdown, discount, or regular inventory price tags. Markdown and discount tags are a good way to communicate savings to your customers.

+ +

To print tags in Price Manager:

+
    +
  1. +

    Calculate a price change or set up an automatic discount and display the record.

    +
    2. +
+

If a price change is still pending, it is recommended that you select Items with New Price from the View drop-down list to ensure you are viewing all the items for which a new price has been entered.

+
    +
  1. +

    If printing tags for only some of the included items, select them. How do I select just some items?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Print menu, select the tag type you wish to print.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Change options in the Print dialog as necessary:

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

For additional information, read the basic tag printing instructions.

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_additems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_additems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a85078 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_additems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Change: Add Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Add Items

+

Change Item Prices: Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

 

+

Use this page to add items to the price change item list by selecting vendors, departments, or item names*, depending on your selection on the previous page.

+

All items corresponding to your selections will be added to the price change list. The number of items to be added for each available vendor, department, or item name is shown in the table displayed.

+ +

* Item Name is the default field label for the item description printed on receipts. This is a customizable label and may be different on your system.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_calculateprices.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_calculateprices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d759a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_calculateprices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Change: Build Pricing Formula + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Build a Pricing Formula

+

Price Change Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

 

+

Use this wizard page to build a formula for calculating your new item prices.

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify whether you want to calculate the new item prices from a current price or from the item cost (average unit cost).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If calculating from price, specify which of your price levels should be used as the starting point for the calculation. This can be the same price level to which the price changes will be applied or any of your other price levels.

    +
    3. +
+

Example: You wish to calculate new prices for your Employee price level, but want to calculate the new employee prices as a discount from your regular prices. Select Regular Price on this page. In the next steps you will specify how the new employee prices will be calculated from the regular prices.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to complete your pricing formula. Refer to the table below for an explanation of your choices.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

From Price:

+		 +

Adding: Enter a percent or amount to be added to the existing price.

+
+

 

+		 +

Subtracting: Enter a percent or amount to be subtracted from the existing price.

+
+

 

+		 +

Multiplying: Enter a number by which the current price is multiplied. (Decimal entries allowed.)

+
+

 

+		 +

Dividing: Enter a number by which the current price is divided. (Decimal entries allowed.)

+
+

 

+		 +

As Is: Copies prices unchanged to another price level or to round your prices with no other change.

+

 

+
+

From Cost:

+		 +

Adding: Enter a percent or amount to be added to the average unit cost to arrive at a new price.

+
+

 

+		 +

Multiplying: Enter a number to be multiplied times the average unit cost to arrive at a new price (decimals allowed).

+
+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    If you want to round the new prices, select the Show Me Price Rounding options... check box.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Next.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_copyprices.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_copyprices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2fcf30 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_copyprices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + +Copying Prices to another Price Level + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copying Prices to another Price Level

+

Basic Steps of a Price Change | Using Price Levels

+

 

+

Price Manager makes it easy to copy prices from one price level to another.

+

Example: You might want to copy your regular prices to your Employee price level.

+

To copy prices from one price level to another:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new price changeClick to display a popup topic normally.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the first page of the Price Change wizard, select the price level to which you are copying prices. In our example, you would select the Employee price level.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Specify the items for which you are copying prices on the appropriate wizard pages.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When building your price change formula:

    +
    5. +
+ +

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Next and then Finish to copy the prices from one price level to the other and display the list of new item prices.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review the new prices and print price tags if needed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory.

    +
    4. +
+

Point of Sale displays a summary of the changes, including the number of items for which prices will be updated.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory again to confirm.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Restoring your previous prices

+

Price Change overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_coupon_setup.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_coupon_setup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24c6ad0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_coupon_setup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,277 @@ + + + + + + + +Discount Pricing: Set Up or Edit a Coupon + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing: Set Up or Edit a Coupon

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Using Store Coupons: Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

To add or edit a store coupon:

+

Tip: Create new coupon by copying an existing one Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Access Price Manager and then:

    +
    2. +
+ +

The Discount wizard is opened. Use the Next and Previous buttons to navigate through the wizard pages.

+
    +
  1. +

    Coupon Rules page: Enter or edit the following. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+ +

Tip: Use coupon barcodes in other applications Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Tip: Honor manufacturer or competitor coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + +
    +
  1. +

    Price Level page: Specify the price level or price levels to which the coupon will apply. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

The coupon will not apply to sales made at price levels other than what is selected here.

+

Your Regular Price is pre-selected by default. Make changes by selecting or clearing the check box for each of your price levels. At least one price level must be selected.

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Items page: Tell Point of Sale what items qualify for the coupon discount.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

You can choose all items, items from a specific department or vendor, items with a particular name, or select Custom to enter filter criteria to select other groups of items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review Items page:  If you selected Custom on the previous page or if you are editing a previous coupon, a list of the included items is displayed for your review.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

If this is a new coupon, click Apply Filter to enter filtering criteria to populate the item list. Click Help on the Filtered View window for additional instructions.

+

By default, all items listed are included in the discount. If necessary, clear item checkboxes to remove items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Name and Notes page: A unique name is required for each active coupon. Use a descriptive name so you can easily find it later in your Discount Pricing list. Notes are printed on the coupon and can be used to summarize what items are eligible, restrictions that apply, a thank you, or whatever other information you may wish to include.

    +
    2. +
+

View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish. The wizard is closed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    (Optional) In company preferences, set options for printing the coupon on sales receipts.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Applying discounts to sales

+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_coupons_oview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_coupons_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b165728 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_coupons_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Store Coupons + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Store Coupons

+

Set Up a Coupon | Redeem a Coupon | Discount Pricing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Printed CouponStore coupons allow you to reward customers for their business and encourage repeat visits. Your coupons can be printed with the sales receipt given to customers or you can copy the coupon bar code and paste to other applications or an e-mail using the Windows clipboard.

+

Highlights of the Point of Sale coupon feature include:

+ +

To get started using coupons, select Price Manager from the Inventory menu.

+

Tip: Use coupon barcodes in other applications Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Tip: Honor manufacturer or competitor coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Coupon Preferences

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_delete_records.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_delete_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..31787c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_delete_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Deleting Price Manager Records + + + + + + + + + + +

Deleting Price Manager Records

+

Price Manager Overview

+

 

+

Price Changes Only "pending" price change records can be deleted. Once a price change has been applied to inventory it becomes a permanent record of the change. Even after restoring a price change, the record still remains permanently in your price change list.

+

Keep in mind that once you delete a record, it cannot be recovered, copied, or printed. We suggest you review and print new price tags if necessary and consider making a backup of your data before proceeding.

+

Price discounts Discount records (such as manual item discounts) can be deleted at anytime. This is because discount records do not actually change your inventory prices. Rather, they apply the discount to qualifying sales at the time of sale.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your Change Item Prices or Discount Pricing list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the records you wish to delete.  How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Delete Price Changes or Delete Discounts.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Confirm the deletion when prompted.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Note : You can still use the discount reports to evaluate the effectiveness of a discount after deleting it since the discount information is recorded on your sales receipts.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discntpricing_list.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discntpricing_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b6c2853 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discntpricing_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + + +Discount Pricing List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing List

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Discount Pricing Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

The Discount Pricing list displays all of your non-deleted automatic, manual, and coupon discount price records.

+

What's important about this list?

+

You can customize the columns or filter the list to provide a snapshot of your discounting activities. The example shown is filtered to show only active discounts with sales and profit columns added to help evaluate the effectiveness of the discount.

+

View example list Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

What can I do from this list?

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discount_pricing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discount_pricing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9f0309 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discount_pricing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,289 @@ + + + + + + + +Discount Pricing: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing: Overview

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Price Manager Overview | Discount Reports

+ +

 

+

(Basic) Price Managers discount pricing section allows you to define manual item discount names, which are then available to select from when giving a manual discount on sales. Discount reports can be filtered by the discount names.

+

(Pro) Price Managers discount pricing options lets you define discount pricing for your items in any of three discount types: Manual, Automatic, Coupons.  A virtually unlimited number of discounts can be defined and saved in Point of Sale.

+

(Pro) Only Headquarters can add, edit, schedule, or inactivate a discount. The discount records are sent to remote stores, where they can be viewed and used to print discount price tags for the merchandise in their store.

+

After accessing Price Manager, do one of the following to work with discount prices:

+ +

OR

+ +

The combination of customer and items may result in more than one discount applying to a sale. When this happens, Point of Sale will compare the discounts and apply them according to these rules.

+

 

+

Manual Discounts

+

As the name suggests, these discounts are manually applied to specific items at the time a sale is made. Examples include:

+ +

You name your manual discount reasons in Price Manager, but manually apply and enter a discount amount or percentage when the sale is rung up. Several default manual discount names are provided; you can add to or change them to meet your needs.

+

By specifying the discount reason on the receipt (a drop-down list lets the cashier choose from your predefined choices) you can track the discounts with Point of Sale reports.

+

Optional preference: Require manual discount reason on receipts

+

Applying a manual discount

+

 

+

Automatic Discounts (Pro)

+

Define an automatic discount and Point of Sale will automatically apply it to qualifying sales during the period the discount is active. You can specify start and stop dates and times or manually activate/deactivate the discount as needed.

+

Notes Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Four automatic discount types are supported:  (T-shirts used as an example):

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

% Off

+		 +

Offer a percentage off on any purchase of T-shirts. There is no purchase quantity requirement.

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+
+

$ Off

+		 +

Offer a percentage off on any purchase of T-shirts. There is no purchase quantity requirement.

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+
+

Buy X for $Y

+		 +

Buy a specified quantity (X) of T-shirts for a specified amount (Y).

+

Option:  Apply the discount to additional quantities (other than multiples of the specified quantity, which automatically qualify for the discount price).

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+
+

Buy X and get Y% Off

+		 +

Buy a specified quantity (X) of the T-shirts and get a percentage (Y) off.

+

Option:  Apply the discount to additional quantities (other than multiples of the specified quantity, which automatically qualify for the discount price).

+

Example

+
+ +

Setting up an automatic discount

+

Tips and Rules

+

 

+

Coupons (Pro)

+

Create store coupons with bar codes that can then be scanned or entered at point of sale to give item discounts.

+

Coupons can be printed on your customer's sales receipts (optionally based on their purchase level ), include expiration dates, and include either a percentage or dollars-odd discount.

+

You can also copy the coupon barcode from Point of Sale to your Windows clipboard and then use it to create and distribute your own coupons via e-mail or another application.

+

Learn more about using store coupons

+

Setting up a coupon

+

Optional preference: Print Coupon with Sales Receipts

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discount_reports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discount_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1114700 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discount_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + +Tracking Discounts with Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tracking Discounts with Reports

+

Discount Pricing Overview | Discounts on Sales | Running a Report

+

 

+

Point of Sale tracks discounts given on sales and offers several reporting options for you to evaluate how effective your discounts are.

+ +

Pro user can also view statistics for a discount from the discount record until the record is deleted:

+ +

Notes:

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer Discounts

+

Customer Rewards

+

Discount Priority and Conflicts

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_define.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_define.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4af375f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_define.htm @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ + + + + + + +Discount Pricing: Set Up or Edit an Automatic Discount + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing: Set Up or Edit an Automatic Discount

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Discount Pricing Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to define and save an automatic pricing discount. A virtually unlimited number of discounts can be defined and saved.

+

If you wish to edit an existing discount, start with Step 6 below or click here.

+

Tip: If the discount you want to create is similar to an existing one, the quickest way to start is to copy the existing one. Go to your discount list and select the existing discount, then select Copy. Edit as necessary and save the new discount.

+

To set up a new discount:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access Price Manager and then select Set Up a New Discount from the overview page. The New Discount wizard is opened.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From your Discount Pricing list, select New Discount and then on the first page of the New Discount wizard, select Automatic Discount.

+

Use the Next and Previous buttons to navigate through the wizard pages.

+
    +
  1. +

    Discount Rules page: Enter or edit the following. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+ + +
    +
  1. +

    Price Level page: Specify the price level or price levels to which the discount applies. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

The discount will not apply to sales made at price levels other than what is selected here.

+

Your Regular Price is pre-selected by default. Make changes by selecting or clearing the check box for each of your price levels. At least one price level must be selected.

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Items page: Tell Point of Sale which items qualify for the discount.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

You can choose all items*, items from a specific department or vendor, items with a particular name, or select Custom to enter filter criteria to select other groups of items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review Items page:  If you selected Custom on the previous page or if you are editing a saved discount, a list of the included items is displayed for your review.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

If this is a new discount, click Apply Filter to enter criteria for selecting items. Click Help on the Filtered View window for additional instructions.

+

By default, all items listed are included in the discount. If necessary, clear item checkboxes to remove items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Name and Notes page: A unique name is required for each discount. Use a descriptive name so you can easily find it later in your Discount Pricing list. Notes can help you recall details of the promotion.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish. The wizard is closed and your Discount Pricing list is displayed.

    +
    2. +
+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Applying discounts to sales

+

Tips and rules for discounts

+ + + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_edit.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_edit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb13323 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_edit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,258 @@ + + + + + + + +Discount Pricing: Editing a Discount + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing: Editing a Discount

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Discount Pricing Overview

+ +

 

+

(Free & Basic) Your ability to edit a discount is limited to the manual discount name. Read  What's important about discount names?Click to display a popup topic

+

 All other editing capabilities discussed in this topic apply to Pro users.

+

You can edit a discount at anytime. Your changes go into effect immediately after saving your changes (subject to any discount schedule).

+

To edit a discount:

+
    +
  1. +

    AccessClick to display a popup topic your Discount Pricing list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Locate and double-click the discount record you wish to edit or, from the toolbar, click Edit Discount.

    +
    3. +
+

The Edit Discount wizard is opened, with the same options as when you originally added the discount.

+
    +
  1. +

    Navigate through the wizard, making changes as necessary (some changes require that the discount be active before editing). Select a link for more information:

    +
    2. +
+

Change automatic discount type and options Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

Change the discount schedule Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

Add or remove discount items Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

Deleting a discount Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

You can also edit the discount name and notes, or print tags (tags only available for automatic discounts).

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_inactivate.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_inactivate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bd9a763 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_inactivate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + +pm_discountprice_inactivate + + + + + + + + + +

Editing a Quantity Discount

+

Price Manager Overview | Quantity Discount Overview

+

 

+

Your quantity discounts can be edited to add or remove items, change eligible quantities, change prices, or to inactivate or delete the discount entirely.

+

If a discount is inactivated, Point of Sale will no apply the discount pricing when the items are sold. This allows you to offer a discount seasonally, or only on weekends, etc. without having to delete and redefine it each time. If you no longer will use a discount, you can delete it.

+

To edit a discount:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Price Manager Discount Pricing.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the discount you want to edit from the list, and then select Edit Discount.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

To delete a discount:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the discount from the Discount Pricing list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Applying discounts to sales

+

Defining a discount price

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_tips.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..850c8ad --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_discountprice_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + +Automatic Discount Tips and Rules + + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatic Discount Tips and Rules

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list | Discount Pricing Overview | Discount Reports

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

General Discount Tips

+ +

Discount Price columns

+ +

Discount Prices

+

 

+

Conflicting Items Rules

+ +

+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_manualmarkdown.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_manualmarkdown.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9e78be7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_manualmarkdown.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Manager: Manually Entering New Prices + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Manager: Manually Entering New Prices

+

Basic Steps for a Price Change

+

 

+

A price change in Price Manger is always initially calculated in the Price Change wizard using a formula you specify. However, once the initial new price calculations are displayed you can review and manually edit the new prices if you prefer.

+

To manually enter new prices:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start the new price change, selecting the price level, items and calculating the new prices.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the price record displayed and before applying the changes to inventory, use any of the following methods to edit the calculated prices and/or enter new prices:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Print markdown price tags, if needed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory (or Save to keep your changes without applying to inventory now).

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Restoring Previous Prices

+

Rounding new prices

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_price_rounding.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_price_rounding.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95e62f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_price_rounding.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Change: Rounding the New Prices + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Rounding the New Prices

+

Price Change Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

 

+

On this wizard page you have the option of rounding your new prices to any ending value that you prefer.

+

Your rounding choices are:

+ +

Notes:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_pricechange_steps.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_pricechange_steps.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5bc67af --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_pricechange_steps.htm @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ + + + + + + + +Change Item Prices: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Item Prices: Basic Steps

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Price Change Overview  

+ +

 

+

If you are accessing this topic from a price change record already calculated, skip to To review or edit a price change below.

+

Tip: If the price change you want to implement is similar to a previous one, the quickest way to start is to copy the previous one. Go to your price change list, select the existing record, and then select Copy. Edit as necessary and save.

+

Following are the basic steps of creating and applying a price change.

+

To start a new price change:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access Price Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Make Price Changes from the Price Manager overview (or, if already in the Price Change module, select New Price Change from the window toolbar).

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the prompts in the Price Change wizard to:  (select Help on wizard pages for more information)

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Continue with To review or edit a price change, below.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

To review or edit a price change:

+

After calculation of a new price change or when returning to a previous price change record, it will be in one of the following status conditions:

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Review and edit the price changes when the record is displayed.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Items with New Price from the View drop-down to do a final review of all items with new prices.

    +
    2. +
+

Review price changes

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save (saves the record without applying the new prices) or Apply Changes to Inventory (new prices overwrite old in inventory).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_restore_prices.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_restore_prices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6cd59e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_restore_prices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Restoring Previous Prices + + + + + + + + + + +

Restoring Previous Prices

+

Price Change Overview | Printing Tags

+

 

+

Use this procedure to restore item prices to the levels that existed prior to the original price change. The previous prices are restored for all included items.

+

Important: Any other price changes made to the same items in the interim are overwritten when restoring a price change.

+

To restore to your previous prices:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the Price Change record you want to restore.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Restore Prices.

    +
    3. +
+

A confirmation dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Restore Prices to confirm.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_temp_sale.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_temp_sale.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3fce977 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pm_temp_sale.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Changing Prices for a Temporary Sale + + + + + + + + + + +

Changing Prices for a Temporary Sale

+

Price Manager Overview

+

 

+

Pro Note: Pro users may want to use Price Manager's automatic discounting option for this purpose.

+

 

+

The restore feature in Price Manager makes it easy to temporarily markdown prices for a sale and then return them to the previous level when the sale is over.

+

For example, you might mark down your regular prices by 15% for a weekend sale and then restore them before opening for business Monday morning.

+

This is the basic procedure for a temporary price reduction. Use the links in each step for detailed instructions.

+

To mark down prices for a temporary sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new price change and enter the price calculation criteria.

    +
    2. +
+

If marking down different groups of items by different amounts, select the first group of items in the Price Change wizard and enter pricing just for that group. After completing the wizard and with the price change item list displayed, use the Select Items button to specify the second group of items and then Calculate Prices to enter pricing criteria for them, and so on until all of your new prices are calculated.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the View menu, select Items with New Price.

    +
    2. +
+

This choice displays all items for which a new price has been entered, allowing you a final review before updating inventory with the prices.

+
    +
  1. +

    If desired, print markdown price tags.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    When the sale is over, restore the prices to their previous level.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pricemgroverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pricemgroverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5b5fb7b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_price_manager/pricemgroverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + + + +Price Manager Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Manager Overview

+

How Do I?

+ +

 

+

Price Manager allows you to create and manage promotional price changes and discounts. Using the employee security and reporting features of Point of Sale, you can easily control and track the effectiveness of your promotional pricing.

+

Pro users can also set up coupons  and have additional discount options as explained below and in related topics.  

+

 

+

When you first access Price Manager, a list of your recent price changes is displayed in the right panel and choices for setting up price discounts are displayed in the left panel.

+

View example screen Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Here's how the two components of Price Manager differ:

+

Change Item Prices

+

A price change is typically a permanent change to your item prices, though the changes can be reverted if necessary. In a price change, you can calculate new prices for your items in a variety of ways. The resulting prices can be reviewed, edited, and temporarily saved until you are ready to implement them, at which point you "apply" them to inventory.

+

Price change records are maintained in your Change Item Prices list. Price changes can be restored, returning the item prices to the level they were at before the change was applied.  A prior price change can also be copied (and then edited) to quickly set up a new similar price change.

+

From Price Manager, you can print markdown tags with both old and new prices to communicate the savings to your customers.

+

To work with Price Changes:

+ +

Learn more about changing item prices

+

Starting a price change

+

 

+

Discount Pricing

+

(Free and Basic) You can use Price Manager's discount pricing options to set up and manage manually applied, line item discounts.

+

(Pro) You can use Price Manager's discount pricing options to set up and manage automatic and coupon discounts, in addition to manually applied discounts. Discount prices  may be temporary, scheduled discounts that are in effect for a specified period of time.  Each discount price you set up is maintained as a record in your Discount Pricing list. These records can be reviewed, printed, or copied and you can print discount price tags for your items to demonstrate potential savings to your customers.

+

To work with price discounts:

+ +

Learn more about Discount Pricing

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_access.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_access.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7571e24 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_access.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Access the Print Designer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access the Print Designer

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

To access the Print Designer:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_addfields.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_addfields.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..110bf26 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_addfields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Add Data Fields or Groups of Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Data Fields or Groups of Fields

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Data fields are populated from information in your company data file. This could be store information, customer information, item information, sales information, and so forth.

+

A data field represents one piece of information from the record, such as the city for the billing address.

+

A group of fields represents a set of data fields that are added to a template as a group. For example, a "Ship To" group would have available all individual fields pertinent to the shipping address. In most cases, the pre-defined groups should meet your needs. However, should you need a more specific design, you can add or remove individual data fields from a group.

+

In most cases, you will not be able to place the same data field or group of fields in multiple locations on a template.

+

To add a data field or group of fields to a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, select the section of the template to which you wish to add the date field or group.

    +
    2. +
+

If necessary, create more room in the section by dragging its lower separator bar downwards.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the tool bar, select Add Data Field or Group of Fields from the tool bar.

    +
    2. +
+

The Add Data Field window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the individual data field or group you wish to add.

    +
    2. +
+

A short description of each field or group is displayed in the window as they are selected.

+

Notes on changing bar code fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

The selected field/group is added to the selected section of the template.

+
    +
  1. +

    Position, resize, or set other element properties as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

How do I remove a data field or group?

+

About template sections and spacing

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_coordinates.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_coordinates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7091b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_coordinates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Designer: Status Bar X/Y Coordinates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer: Status Bar X/Y Coordinates

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

The position and size coordinates displayed on the status bar on the lower-right of the screen can help you precisely position or resize elements on the template page. The coordinates are especially useful when dragging and dropping or using the keyboard to position elements.

+

When an element is selected, you can fine-tune its position by using the keyboard arrow keys in conjunction with the X/Y coordinates. Holding <Ctrl> while using the arrow keys moves the element at 10 times the speed.

+

 

+

image\printdesigner_statusbar.gif

+

 

+

X = Horizontal position on the page of the left-hand edge of the element

+

Y = Vertical position on the page of the top edge of the element

+

W = Element width

+

H = Element height

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_deleteelements.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_deleteelements.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..05d5a0e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_deleteelements.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Remove an Element + + + + + + + + + + + +

Remove an Element

+

Print Designer overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

To delete an element from a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the element to be deleted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Remove from the tool bar.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

Press <Delete> on your keyboard.

+

To delete a data field from a group of fields

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the group of fields.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Properties from the toolbar (or double-click the group element).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Properties dialog, select or clear the checkboxes for the available group fields.

    +
    4. +
+

At least one field must be left in the group. To delete all fields, remove the entire group element.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

The vertical size of the group on the template is automatically adjusted to fit the remaining fields.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fbb4d1e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +printdesigner_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

Access the Print Designer

+

Select a template to modify

+

Add a data field or field group

+

Add text labels

+

Position and align elements

+

Resize elements

+

Change fonts, field labels, and other element properties

+

Add or modify a logo

+

Remove elements

+

Import/Export modified templates

+

Print with a Template I have Modified

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_hints.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_hints.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a6731e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_hints.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + +Recommended Sequence and Tips + + + + + + + + + + + +

Recommended Sequence and Tips

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Recommended Design Sequence and Tips

+

There are no hard and fast rules for the order in which you must modify document templates, but you may find this recommended sequence and associated tips helpful in achieving the desired outcome in the most efficient manner.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a template to modify.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click anywhere in the section in which you want to work to make it active. This step is unnecessary on tag and label templates as they have only a single section.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Remove the elements that you do not wish included on the printed document.

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Add data fields and other new elements as needed, positioning them in their approximate location by dragging-and-dropping.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Resize elements and make any necessary changes to element properties.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Use the alignment tools to precisely place elements in their final position, working from the top of a section downward.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Remove any extra white space at the bottom of the section by dragging the bottom border upward.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Do a final preview, test print, and then save your template.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If you created a new template, answer Yes when asked if you want the new template to be the default for that document type. You can also change templates at anytime in your print option preferences.

    +
    4. +
+ +

Related Topics

+

Note on bar codesClick to display a popup topic

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_importexport.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_importexport.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd3bf34 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_importexport.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + +Import and Export Document Templates + + + + + + + + + + +

Import and Export Document Templates

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Modified document templates are automatically available to other workstations on your network that access the same Point of Sale company data.

+

If you create a new company data file and want to use your modified templates with that data (or want to share modified templates with another store) you can use the import & export feature to accomplish this. The export process places copies of all modified templates into a single file that can then be imported and used with another company data file.

+

To export modified templates:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Print Designer selection window, select Import & Export.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Export Document Templates and then Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select to Export the Selected Document or Tag or Export All Documents and Tags and select Next.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Accept the default filename and location or specify alternates.

    +
    5. +
+

Defaults: (x = Point of Sale version number)

+

File name: VxDocumentTemplates.XML

+

Folder: C:\Program Files\Intuit\Point of Sale x.0\Design\  (folder will vary if you installed to a different location)

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Close.

    +
    3. +
+

Your modified templates are exported in an XML file format that can be imported to the other company data file as needed.

+

(Multi-Store)   The file can be copied to removable media, attached to an e-mail, or directly accessed across a network connection to share the templates with other stores.

+

 

+

To import templates:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Print Designer selection window , select Import & Export.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Import Templates.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Browse to the XML file containing the templates and select it.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Import Now.

    +
    6. +
+

If the imported templates are named differently than the default templates, you must modify your template selections on the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences to use them on printed documents.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_itemlist.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_itemlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..255357b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_itemlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + +Customize a Document Item List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize a Document Item List

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

The group of fields making up the item list on printed documents is slightly different from other field groups. As shown in the following images, there is a heading line and three lines for item data that can be displayed/printed for each item listed on the document. Multiple lines can be helpful, especially if you are using a 40-column printer.

+

image\printdesigner_letter_itemlist.gif

+

Sample letter-size sales receipt item list:

+

 

+

image\printdesigner_40col_itemlist.gif

+

Sample 40-column sales receipt item list:

+

 

+

You can add, remove, or rearrange the order of fields on each line, change fonts, and customize the printed headings and field labels.

+

To customize the item list:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the line you want to customize (blue highlighting indicates the selected line).

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select/clear the checkboxes of available fields to include/exclude from the line respectively.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Use the Up and Down buttons to arrange the fields in the order you want to appear on the line. (up = left, down = right).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Resize the width of the fields on a line by dragging their separator lines. If the line is already full, increasing the width of one field means another field has to get smaller.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Change the Headings (Line 1 fields) or labels (Lines 2-3 fields) desired for each field used. Your choices are to use the labels defined in Point of Sale, enter a different label for printing (maybe a shorter one?), or to not print labels at all. Field labels for data on Lines 2-3 are printed right in the field, so if space is limited you may want to turn off printing of the labels.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Change font properties for the heading line or the data field lines.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select OK to close the Properties window.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

To use a style grid for listing items:

+

Using a style grid instead of a standard item list can be a great space saver on documents.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the item list in the template.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Properties from the tool bar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Style Grid from the drop-down list at the top of the Properties window.

    +
    4. +
+

Fields are selected for the style grid in the same manner as for the item list. To change the axis for the grid, select the Style Grid Details tab.

+

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_logo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_logo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..99ad01b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_logo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a Logo + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a Logo

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

The default sales document templates include the logo field at a predefined size and position. The actual logo to be used is specified in company preferences. Learn more

+

You can use Print Designer to change the position and size of your logo on these printed documents and add your logo to other documents if desired.

+

To add your logo to a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, select the section of the template to which you wish to add the logo.

    +
    2. +
+

If necessary, create more room in the section by dragging its lower separator bar downwards.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the tool bar, select Add Store Logo from the tool bar.

    +
    2. +
+

The logo specified in company preferences is added to the template.

+
    +
  1. +

    Position, resize, or add a border to the logo as appropriate.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

To add an alternate logo to a template:

+

You must have specified more than one image in company preferences to use for logos before this option is available.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add the logo to the template as described above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the image selected, click the properties icon on the toolbar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select alternate image and specify.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Choose from the available images (or add another image if needed) and choose select.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select ok.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_moveandalign.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_moveandalign.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff30346 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_moveandalign.htm @@ -0,0 +1,198 @@ + + + + + + + +Positioning and Aligning Elements + + + + + + + + + + + +

Position and Align Elements

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Elements can be positioned on the template by any or a combination of these methods:

+ +

Using the Alignment Options

+

The alignment options allow you to align selected elements to another element or to the section in which it is placed. When aligning to another element, the first element selected is referred to as the "anchor element." Other selected elements will be oriented to the position of the anchor element according to the alignment option selected.

+

To apply an alignment option:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the element or elements you wish to align.

    +
    2. +
+

To select multiple elements, hold down the <Shift> key and click on each element in turn or by dragging the mouse to encompass all elements to be selected. The first element selected is the anchor element when aligning elements relative to each other.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the toolbar, select Align and then select Align Fields to Each Other or Align Fields to Section.

    +
    2. +
+

The align fields to each other option is available only if multiple elements have been selected.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the drop-down menu displayed, select the specific alignment option:

    +
    2. +
+

You can also select Show Align Toolbar from the Align menu to add the alignment tools to the toolbar.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Alignment Options:

+		 +

Fields to each other

+		 +

Fields to
+Section

+
+

Align Left

+		 +

Aligns the left edge of all selected elements with the left edge of the anchor element

+		 +

Aligns left edge of selected element(s) to the left edge of the section

+
+

Align Right

+		 +

Aligns the right edge of all selected elements with the right edge of the anchor element

+		 +

Aligns the right edge of all selected element(s) with the right edge of the section

+
+

Align Bottom

+		 +

Aligns the bottom edge of all selected elements with the bottom edge of the anchor element

+		 +

Aligns the bottom edge of all selected element(s) with the bottom edge of the section

+
+

Align Vertical Center

+		 +

Aligns the vertical center of all selected elements with the vertical center of the anchor element

+		 +

Vertically centers the selected element(s) within the section

+
+

Align Horizontal Center

+		 +

Aligns the horizontal center of the selected elements with the horizontal center of the anchor element

+		 +

Horizontally centers the selected element(s) within the section

+
+

Make Same Width

+		 +

Makes the width of selected elements the same as the width of the anchor element

+		 +

Makes the selected element(s) the same width as the section

+
+

Equal Horizontal Space

+		 +

Evenly distribute the horizontal spacing between selected elements

+		 +

n.a.

+
+

Equal Vertical Space

+		 +

Evenly distribute the vertical space between selected elements

+		 +

n.a.

+
+ +

 

+

Moving Elements between Sections

+

You cannot move an element directly from one template section to another. If you need to move an element to another section, first remove it from one section and then add it to the other.

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Resize elements

+

About template sections and spacing

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_oview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d97c5c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Designer Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Using Print Designer, you can customize your printed documents, labels, packing slips, and tags. The following actions are available to you in Print Designer:

+ +

Note that not all options are available on every template.

+

Point of Sale comes with default templates for each document, tag, and label type. You can directly edit the default templates or copy them and then modify the copy to create and save new templates. Once modified, templates can be exported and imported to share them with other workstations or stores.

+

Print Designer is not a "WYSIWYG" ("what you see is what you get") editor. As you position data fields on a design page, keep in mind that you are defining relative position, not absolute position, especially as it relates to vertical positioning. Every field that is placed on a template is not necessarily filled with data with each transaction. Many unused fields are removed from the template at the time of printing, so that the printed document does not have blank, wasted spaces. A good example of this behavior is the payment type fields included on sales receipt templates. While all of the possible payment types are included in the design, most sales only utilize one payment type, thus it is the only one actually printed.

+

Most document templates are separated into sections. There can be up to five different sections on a template, each with a unique printing behavior. These sections control how the printed output looks. For example, the information included in the Repeating Header section prints at the top of each page of a multi-page document, while the information in the Body Header section prints only once, near the top of the first page. Learn more about template sections and spacing.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+

Print Designer preferences

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_preferences.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_preferences.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2cce8a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_preferences.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Designer Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer Preferences

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Print Designer preferences give you choices for how you want to view and work with templates:

+ +

To set Print Designer preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    With a template displayed, select Preferences from the lower-left of the screen.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select or clear the checkboxes for the preference options.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_properties.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_properties.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4887da0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_properties.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Element Properties + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Element Properties

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can set the following properties for elements (not all settings are available for all elements):

+ +

Working with an item list field is slightly different than other field groups. Learn more.

+ +

To set the properties of an element:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the element you wish to modify.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the tool bar, select Properties

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

Double-click the element.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make changes to the available properties.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Print Designer properties window

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_resize.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_resize.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..925b8cc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_resize.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Resize Elements + + + + + + + + + + +

Resize Elements

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

There are two ways to resize an element:

+ +

 

+

Horizontal grab handle

+

image\printdesigner_grabhandles2.gif

+

Vertical grab handle

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates  

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_saveas.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_saveas.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8345280 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_saveas.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Save a Template with a New Name + + + + + + + + + + + +

Save a Template with a New Name

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to save a modified template with a new name, while also keeping the original template unchanged.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the small down-arrow adjacent to the Save button on the toolbar and then select Save As.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a new name for the template.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select OK.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    If you created a new template, answer Yes when asked if you want the new template to be the default for that document type. You can also change templates at anytime in your print option preferences.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_sections.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_sections.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..051f4fe --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_sections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +About Template Sections and Spacing + + + + + + + + + + + +

About Template Sections and Spacing

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Most document design templates are divided into logical sections, each with a unique printing behavior. The number of sections and the specific fields located in each section vary depending on the document type. For example, price tag, label, and 40-column templates will not include all of the section types listed below. The following descriptions will provide a general understanding of how the template sections are used and how these sections behave. Template sections cannot be re-positioned, though they typically can be vertically resized to add or remove white space in a design.

+

The five section types are as follows:

+

Repeating Header The elements included in this section are printed at the top of each page of the document. This section typically includes such things as the document date, print date, page number, document/transaction number and the logged-in users name.

+

Body Header The elements included in this section are printed only on the first page of a document. This section typically includes such things as store name and address information, as well as billing and shipping address information.

+

Body This section typically contain the actual content of the document. For example, on most transactional documents this would be the list of the items processed and the descriptions and/or attributes of those items. When printing a document, the body section expands to accommodate the number of items listed and can span multiple pages.

+

Body Footer The elements included in this section are printed only at the end of the document, or on the last page of a multi-page document. This section typically includes such things as totals, balances, savings, payment type, messages and comments.

+

Repeating Footer The elements included in this section are printed at the bottom of each page. The same type of information can be placed in this section as in the Repeating Header section, depending on whether you wish this information to be displayed at the top or bottom of each page.

+

Click on a section name on the left side of the template to make it active. In the example shown, the Body section is active.

+

image\sections.gif

+

 

+

Template Spacing

+

The Print Designer allows you to add or remove "white space" at the top and bottom of each section by dragging and dropping the section dividers. This is useful for gaining additional space to add design elements or to remove space that would otherwise waste paper when printing.

+

The Print Designer template display is not always an accurate representation of how the printed document will appear. Templates typically contain many fields that may or may not be populated with data from a particular Point of Sale transaction. For example: if your sales receipt template includes customer address fields, but you do not always record the customer on the receipt when a sale is made, then those fields and the vertical space they normally occupy will be omitted from the printed document and everything below the address fields will be moved up.

+

Use the vertical ruler as a general guide for relative positioning of elements. The actual height of sections and their contents will vary depending upon what data is actually available to be printed. It is recommended that you test your modified templates before implementing them for general use.

+

 

+

The End of the Document or Section

+

Sections in the template and particularly at the end of the document will vary depending upon the particular type of document and the printer being used. It is recommended that you build each section from the top down and then set the placement for the end of each section and the end of the document according to the lowest field placed in that section.

+

The image to the right shows the divider at the end of the document moved to just below the end of the last field. This ensures that no wasted space is added to the printed documents. If more space is needed, the divider can be moved down.

+

image\printdesigner_divider.gif

+

 

+

Moving Elements between Sections

+

You cannot move an element directly from one template section to another. If you need to move an element to another section, first remove it from one section and then add it to the other.

+

 

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_selectdoc.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_selectdoc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dba340c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_selectdoc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Select a Template to Modify + + + + + + + + + + +

Select a Template to Modify

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale ships with default templates for each document, tag, and label type. You can directly modify one of the default templates or make a copy of a default template to use as a starting point to create a new template.

+

To select a document template to modify or copy:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Tools menu, select Print Designer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the document category you wish to modify from the Select a Document Type drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the specific template you wish to work with from the Available Documents list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the desired option:

    +
    5. +
+ +

The selected template is displayed in the Print Designer, ready for you to modify.

+

Other options from this window include:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Print Designer preferences

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_textlabels.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_textlabels.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..34831ed --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesigner_textlabels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Add Text Labels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Text Labels

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Text labels are static text (unchanging) that you can add to a template. You might use a text label to print a message regarding your store return policy, warranty information, or any other information you want added to every printout of the selected document.

+

To add a text label:

+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, select the section of the template to which you wish to add the text label.

    +
    2. +
+

If necessary, create more room in the section by dragging its lower separator downwards.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Add Text Label from the tool bar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Properties window displayed, type the text to be printed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Specify text justification (left, center or right), change font characteristics, or add a border to the label as desired.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

The text label is added to the selected template section.

+
    +
  1. +

    Position and resize the text label within the section as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

How do I remove a text label?

+

About template sections and spacing

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesinger_barcodes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesinger_barcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6844364 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_print_designer/printdesinger_barcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +printdesigner_barcodes + + + + + + + + + + +

Changing Bar Code Fields on Tags

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+

 

+

Print Designer provides three bar code fields for you to use on tag templates: Item #, UPC, and Lookup (alternate lookup field in inventory).

+

The default tag templates use the Item # bar code field. Using the item number for bar codes has several advantages:

+

 

+ +

If preferred, you can change the bar code field on tags printed in Point of Sale to use the UPC or Lookup values instead. If you do so, also change the alphanumeric field under the bar code to match your choice, i.e. if printing a UPC bar code, change the Item # field under the bar code to the UPC field.

+

If you resize a bar code field after adding it to your template, especially if making it smaller, be sure to test a printed tag to be sure your scanner will accurately read it.

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po601.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po601.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83318b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po601.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + + +Access Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Purchase Orders

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Purchasing Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Select one of the following from the Purchasing menu:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po602.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po602.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4f1648 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po602.htm @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + + + + +Create a Purchase Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a Purchase Order Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | PO Overview | PO Fields

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Follow the steps below to create a new purchase order (PO). You can also make a new PO by copying an existing one.

+

 

+

Note: The availability of purchase orders is controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

To create a new PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Purchase Order from the Purchasing menu.

    +
    2. +
+

A blank PO form is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Accept the suggested PO# (sequential order) or enter a unique alphanumeric number of your own.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a vendor from the Vendor drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, specify the store to which the items will be shipped in the Ship To Address field and the store to which the vendor bill should go in the Bill To Address field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Accept or edit the Order, Ship, and Cancel dates as necessary.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    List the items you want to order, entering an order quantity and cost for each item added.

    +
    4. +
+

The purchase order cost is suggested as the Order Cost of the item in inventory, but can be edited as necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in other PO fields, including any applicable discount and/or fee that will apply to the order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Pro Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

E-mail POs to vendors

+

Handle special orders

+

Purchase an item from multiple vendors

+

Have Point of Sale suggest orders

+

Multi-Store purchasing & receiving overview

+

Track POs by status

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po607.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po607.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4c3972 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po607.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Using a Filter to Display a Single Vendor's Items + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Using a Filter to Display a Single Vendor's Items

+ +

In-help popup

+
+

Pro

+
+

When looking up items while creating a document, you can filter your item list to display only items from a specified vendor. This is particularly useful while creating purchase orders.

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Select from Item List from the I Want To menu to go to the item select inventory screen.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Create Filter from the View drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Scroll down to the Vendor Name or Vendor Code field and enter the vendor information, clear all other fields, and then select OK to display the filtered list.

    +
    4. +
+

If you want to memorize the filter for future use, select Save before selecting OK, and give the filter a unique name.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a Doc Qty and Doc Cost (or Doc Price if applicable) for each item being listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose Select to return the items and quantities to the document.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

(Pro) To work with a style from the vendor, highlight any item belonging to the style you want to order and then select Switch to Style to display the style grid. Enter document quantities in the cells of the grid and then choose Select.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po614.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po614.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c22d9f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po614.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +PO Discounts and Fees + + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchase Order Discounts and Fees

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Sometimes vendors will offer a discount or charge a miscellaneous fee on merchandise. You can add a discount and/or a fee in the totals area at the bottom of the purchase order. Discounts and fees are not spread over the cost of individual items listed on the PO.

+

To enter a purchase order discount:

+ +

AND/OR

+ +

Note that discounts entered on a purchase order are proportionally carried to receiving vouchers that reference the purchase order. For example, if a purchase order has a discount totaling $50.00 and you receive only half (calculated by value, not unit count) of the ordered items on a voucher, then $25.00 of the discount is applied to that voucher. The remaining discount amount will be carried to subsequent vouchers that receive the remaining due items.

+

When a receiving voucher references a purchase order with a fee entered, you are alerted and can transfer the fee to the voucher at your discretion. This is because fees may not be not related to the value of ordered/received items, and may need to be applied differently if a partial shipment is received. Transferring a fee to vouchers that reference the purchase order is at your discretion.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po615.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po615.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b96f215 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po615.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + + +PO Fees + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchase Order Fees

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Fees entered on a PO (such as a special handling fee) are not spread over the cost of individual items.

+

When a receiving voucher references a PO with a fee entered, you are alerted and can transfer the fee to the voucher at your discretion.
+
+To enter a PO fee:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po616.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po616.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8580fef --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po616.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +List Items on a PO + + + + + + + + + + +

List Items on a Purchase order

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Read the following sections to learn more about listing items on a purchase order.

+

List items by UPC, alternate lookup, item #, or search keyword

+

Select items from inventory

+

Add new inventory items while making a PO

+

Purchase by different units of measure

+

List special order items

+

 

+

Note: If you have defined Reorder Points for your inventory items, you can easily view a list of the items whose on-hand quantities are at or below the reorder point on the Reminders window. Pro users can have Point of Sale suggest POs for items on this list.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a new PO

+

Edit a PO

+

Delete items

+

Enter order costs on a PO

+

Have Point of Sale suggest orders

+

Multi-store purchasing & receiving

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po619.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po619.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..47f2911 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po619.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete a PO + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Purchase Order

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Purchase orders are planning documents that have no direct affect on inventory. Therefore they can be safely deleted at anytime, whether because you have received all of the ordered items or because you are canceling the order. Vouchers made to receive the ordered items provide a permanent record.

+

To delete a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Purchase Order List from the Purchasing menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Locate and highlight the PO you wish to delete.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Delete.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Find a PO

+

Create a new PO

+

PO fill status

+

Multi-store purchasing & receiving

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po626.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po626.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f9ce9f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po626.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cancel a PO in Progress + + + + + + + + + + + +

Cancel a Purchase Order in Progress

+

Purchasing Overview | Create a new PO | Copy a PO

+
+

Pro

+
+

Purchase orders can be safely canceled before saving or deleted anytime later, since they have no direct effect on inventory.

+

To cancel a PO in progress:

+
    +
  1. +

    Before saving the PO, select Cancel or press <Esc>.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the confirmation dialog displayed, select:

    +
    3. +
+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po628.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po628.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b87a3be --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po628.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a PO + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Purchase Order

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Purchasing Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

POs are order-planning documents, not transactional documents; therefore, they can be edited even after saving.

+

To edit a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight a PO in your list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit from the main toolbar. The PO form is displayed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Navigate through the editable fields, making changes as needed.

    +
    4. +
+

To edit a listed item, highlight the item and select Edit Item (<F5>). You can also add or delete items, if necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

In a multi-store configuration, POs made for remote stores and later edited are resent to the remote store in the next Store Exchange. Remote stores cannot edit or delete POs received from Headquarters.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List items on a PO

+

Delete a PO

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po629.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po629.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fbc8eac --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po629.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print POs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Purchase Orders

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

After completing a PO, you can print out a copy to send to a vendor or keep for your own records.

+

For information about printing tags, see printing tags.

+

Also read the general printing topic.

+

To print a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the PO or select the PO(s) that you want to print. How do I select multiple POs?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print Purchase Orders from the Print menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If presented with a print option dialog:

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Find a PO

+

Edit a PO

+

E-mail a PO to the vendor

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po632.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po632.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e6c7c4d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po632.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + +PO Fill Status + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchase Order Fill Status

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Qty Ordered, Qty Received, Unfilled %, and Qty Due fields are grouped together in the totals area of the PO form (also shown in the PO list). Together, they communicate the fill status of the entire PO.PO Fill Status

+

POs start with an initial Qty Received of 0 (zero) and Unfilled % of 100. The Qty Received increases, and the Qty Due and Unfilled % decrease as items are received on vouchers. For example, if you ordered 20 of a certain item and received only 15 on a voucher, the PO would show a remaining Qty Due of 5 and Unfilled % of 25.

+

If a vendor substitutes items or quantities, the PO will show a remaining Qty Due and Unfilled %. If you want to accept the substitution and have the PO show that the order was filled, you can edit the PO to match the merchandise received, so that each item on the PO has a Qty Due of zero (0). The Unfilled % will be adjusted accordingly.

+

To see the fill status of individual items, look at the Ordered (quantity) and Due fields for each item in the PO item list.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

PO field descriptions

+

Receive PO items on a voucher

+

Track POs by order status

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po634.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po634.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dae3802 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po634.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + +Order Costs on POs + + + + + + + + + + +

Order Costs on Purchase Orders

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

A purchase order (PO) is a document that asks a vendor to deliver goods at a certain cost. When listing items on a PO, Point of Sale will suggest the item Order Cost in inventory as the cost on the PO. You can change the cost on the PO by manually editing it. This does not affect the Order Cost assigned in inventory.

+

When a receiving voucher is made to receive the PO items, the cost entered on the PO will be carried to the voucher, as will the vendor terms. When the receiving voucher is updated, the inventory Average Unit Cost and Order Cost will automatically be updated to reflect the change in the item cost.

+

 

+

Printing tags when costs change: You have the option of printing tags for the items ordered on a PO. This way the tags are ready when the items are received. Be aware however, that if the PO is ordering items at a new cost and you print the tags from the PO, the tag price will be the current inventory price. It is recommended you review and update your item prices when receiving the items on a voucher or in inventory before printing tags in this case.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a new PO

+

List items on a PO

+

Use multiple vendors for an item

+

Track item price and cost in inventory

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_addnewitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_addnewitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3beaf6e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_addnewitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Add New Inventory Items while Making a PO + + + + + + + + + + +

Add New Inventory Items while Making a PO

+

Quick Add an Item | Make a new PO

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale allows you to add new items to inventory and immediately order them as you are creating a new PO.

+

To add a new inventory item while making a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    When creating the PO, choose Select from Item List from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select New and enter information to define the new item(s) or style.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    For a single item: Choose Save and Select to save the item and list it on the PO with a quantity of one (1) and your defined order cost.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

For a style: Choose Save and Select to save the style in inventory and bring the style items and specified order quantities to the PO.

+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary to change item quantities or order costs back on the PO, highlight any item and select Edit Item (<F5>). Entering a new values and then select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

Or, navigate to the Ordered (Qty) and Cost fields in the PO item list and make edits there.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_instructionscomments.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_instructionscomments.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae52d38 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_instructionscomments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Notes, Instructions or Comments + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Notes, Instructions or Comments

+

 

+

Most Point of Sale documents contain a field for entering pertinent information related to the transaction. This field is labeled Notes,  Instructions or Comments, depending on the document.

+

Receipt - Select Add/Edit Receipt Notes from the I Want To menu. Use the Notes field to record additional information about the sale.

+

Purchase Order  Embedded Instructions field on the form for recording special vendor instructions, FOB point, delivery policies, etc.

+

Adjustment Memos  Embedded Comments field for recording information related to the reason for the inventory adjustment.

+

Customer Orders (Pro) Use to record information about the merchandise ordered, work to be performed, warranty coverage, or other related data.

+

If more space is needed in this field, select Edit <type> from the I Want To menu.

+

 

+

Entries in these fields can be used to filter documents for list display and filtering of some reports.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Make a Sale

+

Take a customer order

+

Create a purchase order

+

Create an inventory adjustment memo

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_status_tracking.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_status_tracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..051145b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_status_tracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + +Track POs by Status + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Purchase Orders by Status

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Status field on purchase orders allows you to track orders, filter order lists, and create reports based on the current entry. Point of Sale has these default purchase order status types.

+ +

To manually change the status of a purchase order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the purchase order in Form View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a new status from the drop-down list in the Status field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

To view the status history of a purchase order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the order in Form View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the icon next to the Status field.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Create a purchase order

+

Track PO fill status

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_suggestpo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_suggestpo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c45a74 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/po_suggestpo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Using 'Suggest PO' + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using 'Suggest PO'

+

Purchasing Overview | E-mail POs to Vendors

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale can suggest and generate purchase orders for items that are on your reorder reminders list.

+

When this feature is used, Point of Sale displays a list of proposed items to order.

+

 

+

   image\suggest_po.gif

+

To have Point of Sale suggest POs:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Suggest POs from the Purchasing menu or from the Reorder Reminders I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale produces a list of suggested reorder items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter an Order Qty for each item. POs are not generated for an item if you leave the Order Qty field blank.

    +
    2. +
+

Several item information fields, including current on-hand quantity, available quantity, and quantity already on order, are displayed or available to help you decide on new order quantities.

+
    +
  1. +

    If you purchase an item from multiple vendors, your primary vendor is suggested. If necessary, add and use the Order From column to change the vendor.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Create POs from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale generates purchase orders as specified using the item order costs from inventory. If multiple items are ordered for a vendor, they are combined on a single PO for that vendor. A confirmation message displays the number of POs created.

+
    +
  1. +

    The POs can be viewed, edited to change order costs or add additional items, and printed or e-mailed to your vendor(s).

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/purchasingoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/purchasingoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be31f2e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_purchasing/purchasingoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + + +Purchasing Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchasing Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Create a New PO | Receive Ordered Items

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Note: The availability of purchase orders is controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

When merchants need to restock or add new merchandise, they create and send temporary documents called purchase orders (POs) to vendors. A PO typically includes the following information:

+ +

The merchandise ordered on a PO is added to inventory when its arrival is recorded on a receiving voucher. When a PO has been filled, it can safely be deleted. The receiving voucher(s) that reference the PO provide the permanent record of the item purchased.

+

Purchase orders are not shared between Point of Sale and your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Since they are planning documents, they have no effect on inventory valuation.

+

Remote stores can generate POs only for special order items. Regular POs are created only by Headquarters and are sent to each remote store for merchandise destined for their store. The remote store can reference those POs to create receiving vouchers. Learn More.

+

 

+

Note: If you have defined Reorder Points for your inventory items, you can easily view a list of the items whose on-hand quantities are at or below the reorder point on the Reminders window. Pro users can have Point of Sale suggest POs for the items on the reorder reminders.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track PO fill status

+

PO field descriptions

+

Security Rights for Purchase Orders

+

Preferences for Purchase Orders

+

Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/finacialexchange_initiating.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/finacialexchange_initiating.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5a8ff8d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/finacialexchange_initiating.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Initiating a Financial Exchange with QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Initiate a Financial Exchange with QuickBooks

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

There are two ways to initiate a Financial Exchange between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Financial exchanges can only be done from the Server Workstation.

+

(Pro) This option is available at Headquarters only.

+

To include Financial Exchange in your End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Point of Sale Server Workstation, select End of Day Procedure from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the End of Day window, ensure that the Transfer your days transactions check box is selected in the Financial Exchange with QuickBooks section.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Choose other End of Day options, as desired.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

To run a manual exchange:

+ +

You might manually run an exchange, for example, if you want to do mid-day billings from QuickBooks Desktop and want to be sure that you have up-to-the-minute Point of Sale sales data.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

What data is shared?

+

How QuickBooks Desktop handles POS data

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Financial Exchange Reports

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_accoutpaymenttypes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_accoutpaymenttypes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b9f9aa --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_accoutpaymenttypes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + +Custom Mapping of Financial Exchange Accounts + + + + + + + + + + +

Custom Mapping of Financial Exchange Accounts

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

Mapping accounts and payment types creates a link between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop, so that your point-of-sale information is sent to QuickBooks Desktop in the manner you prefer.

+

 

+

Using the Default Account Mappings

+

A default Chart of Accounts is used by Point of Sale to send information to QuickBooks Desktop. When using the default account mappings:

+ +

What if I already have the same account types with custom names in QuickBooks Desktop?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Warning: If you are using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service reconciliation feature, the default account and payment type mappings for credit and debit cards are required. If you change these mappings, the reconciliation feature will not work.

+

 

+

Customizing the Account Mappings

+

The default accounts are necessary to establish the initial connection with QuickBooks Desktop. However, once the connection is established, you can customize the mappings to QuickBooks Desktop accounts.

+

How to map custom accounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Payment Type Mappings

+

Payment type mappings cannot be changed in Point of Sale. Point of Sale will always map to the payment methods specified in the default mappings table. To change these mappings requires that you change the payment types associated with these payment methods in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Important: If using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service and QuickBooks Desktop financial software, changing the payment type mappings will cause the merchant service reconciliation feature to stop functioning.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks financial software handles POS data

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_create_qbdefaultaccts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_create_qbdefaultaccts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e9ed2af --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_create_qbdefaultaccts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ + + + + + + + + +Create Default Accounts in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create Default Accounts in QuickBooks

+

Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+ +

This topic has been hidden; this info dispensed in the QB Connection Wizard

+ +

Certain QuickBooks accounts, included in the default chart of accounts used by Point of Sale to send data, are required to establish a connection between the two programs.

+

Point of Sale cannot automatically create these accounts for you in QuickBooks. These accounts include Undeposited Funds, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Cost of Goods Sold, Inventory Asset, and Sales Tax Payable.

+

In addition, inventory must be enabled in QuickBooks. The QuickBooks Connection Wizard will alert you if inventory must be turned on or these accounts do not exist.

+

What if I already have the same account types with custom names in QuickBooks?Click to display a popup topic

+

How do I?

+

Turn on inventory in QuickBooks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Create the necessary default accounts in QuickBooks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize account mappings

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_custnameorder.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_custnameorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0aa6b0c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_custnameorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Name Order for Financial Exchanges + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Name Order for Financial Exchanges

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop both have First and Last name fields for customers. QuickBooks Desktop also has a full Customer Name field, which is populated with some combination of first and last, or company names when Point of Sale sends new customer records to QuickBooks Desktop.

+

(Pro) For business customers (Track as Company check box selected on customer record), Point of Sale will always send the customer's company name to the full Customer Name field in QuickBooks Desktop.

+

For individual customers, use this setting to control the order of the customer name sent by Point of Sale to the Full Name field in QuickBooks Desktop.

+

To change the customer name order:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale Edit menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Financial preferences page, select one of the three name order options:

    +
    3. +
+

<last>,<first>

+

<first><last>

+

<title><first><last>

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks Desktop financial software handles POS data

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_defaultaccounts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_defaultaccounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..49a6187 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_defaultaccounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,509 @@ + + + + + + + +Default Chart of Accounts and Mappings + + + + + + + + + + +

Default Chart of Accounts and Mappings

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

These tables display the default accounts and payment type mappings used by Point of Sale to transfer data to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Learn how to use custom accounts or mappings

+

 

+

Default Account Mappings

+ + ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Point of Sale

+		 +

QuickBooks Desktop Account

+		 +

Account Type

+
+

Cash In Drawer

+		 +

Cash In Drawer  

+		 +

Bank

+
+

Check

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+

Credit Card

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+

Debit Card

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+

Gift Certificates

+		 +

Gift Certificates Outstanding

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Gift Card

+		 +

Gift Cards Outstanding

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Accounts Receivable

+		 +

Accounts Receivable

+		 +

Accounts Receivable

+
+

Sales Tax

+		 +

Sales Tax Payable

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Customer Order Deposit Taken

+		 +

Customer Deposits

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Purchase Clearing

+		 +

Unbilled Purchases

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Voucher Adjustment

+		 +

Purchase Discounts

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+
+

Freight In

+		 +

Freight & Shipping Costs

+		 +

Expense

+
+

Voucher Fee

+		 +

Freight & Shipping Costs

+		 +

Expense

+
+

Accounts Payable

+		 +

Accounts Payable

+		 +

Accounts Payable

+
+

Document Offset

+		 +

POS Inventory Adjustments

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+
+

Shipping

+		 +

Shipping and Delivery Income

+		 +

Income

+
+

Pay out Expense

+		 +

Cash Drawer Payouts

+		 +

Expense

+
+

Tips

+		 +

Employee Tips Payable

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

POS Balancing Adjustments

+		 +

Balancing Adjustments

+		 +

Other Expense

+
+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Default Payment Type Mappings

+ + ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Point of Sale Payment

+		 +

QuickBooks Desktop Payment Method

+		 +

QuickBooks Desktop Payment Type

+
+

Cash

+		 +

Cash

+		 +

Cash

+
+

Check

+		 +

Check

+		 +

Check

+
+

Debit Card

+		 +

Debit Card

+		 +

Debit Card

+
+

Credit Card: American Express

+		 +

American Express

+		 +

American Express

+
+

Credit Card: MasterCard

+		 +

MasterCard

+		 +

MasterCard

+
+

Credit Card: Visa

+		 +

Visa

+		 +

Visa

+
+

Credit Card: Discover

+		 +

Discover

+		 +

Discover

+
+

Credit Card: Diners Club

+		 +

Diners Club

+		 +

Other Credit Card

+
+

Credit Card: JCB

+		 +

JCB

+		 +

Other Credit Card

+
+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Default Item Account Mappings

+ + +++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

POS Item Type

+		 +

Income Account

+		 +

COGS Account

+		 +

Asset Account

+
+

Inventory

+		 +

Merchandise Sales

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+		 +

Inventory Asset

+
+

Non-inventory

+		 +

Merchandise Sales

+		 +

Purchases - Resale Items

+		 +

Purchases - Resale Items

+
+

Service

+		 +

Service Sales

+		 +

Subcontracted Services

+		 +

Subcontracted Services

+
+

Assembly

+		 +

Merchandise Sales

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+		 +

Inventory Asset

+
+

Special Order

+		 +

Merchandise Sales

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+		 +

Inventory Asset

+
+

Group

+		 +

n/a

+		 +

n/a

+		 +

n/a

+
+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize account mappings

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_employeehours.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_employeehours.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..06d4f57 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_employeehours.htm @@ -0,0 +1,225 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Employee Hours Worked + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Employee Hours Worked

+

Use Time Clock to Record Employee Hours

+
+

Pro

+
+

Requirements for this Feature in QuickBooks Financial Software:
+  Using QuickBooks Financial Software 2008 - 2010*
+  General time tracking preference enabled Click to expand/collapse topic
+  Hourly employees set up to use time data for paychecks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + +

 

+

If you use Time Clock in Point of Sale to record employee hours worked, the time entries can be sent to your QuickBooks financial software for payroll purposes. A corresponding time record is created in QuickBooks for each time entry recorded in Point of Sale.

+

To send employee hours to QuickBooks:

+
    +
  1. +

    Setup your employees in Point of Sale as hourly and use Time Clock to record hours worked.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Financial page of your Point of Sale company preferences, select the check box labeled Send employee hours worked to QuickBooks using payroll item: <selection>.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Run Financial Exchanges with QuickBooks to send your time records with your other data.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Learn more about Internet connection requiredQuickBooks Payroll solutions

+

 

+

Sample time entry created in QuickBooks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Modify a time entry in QuickBooks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_importeditemdescriptions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_importeditemdescriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..36195c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_importeditemdescriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Can I control how my imported items are described in Point of Sale? + + + + + + + + + + + +

Can I control how my imported items are described in Point of Sale?

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customizing Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

During the import process, you can specify how the QuickBooks Desktop item descriptive fields are populated to the Point of Sale item descriptive fields.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

QuickBooks Desktop item descriptive fields

+		 +

Can be populated to one of these Point of Sale fields

+
+

Sales Description

+		 +

Item Name (printed on sales receipts) or Description 2

+
+

Purchase Description

+		 +

Item Name or Item Description

+
+

Item Name/Number

+		 +

Alternate Lookup

+
+ +

 

+

Note: In Point of Sale, the names of the Item Name and Item Description fields can be renamed to better meet your needs, Pro-level users can also  customize printed documents to include the fields you wish.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_importitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_importitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f905a57 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_importitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + +Import QuickBooks Items + + + + + + + + + +

Import QuickBooks Desktop Items

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

(Pro) This option is available at Headquarters only.

+

You may have existing items in QuickBooks Desktop that you now want to track in Point of Sale. You can easily import these items to Point of Sale at any time, making them available to list on Point of Sale documents. Importing your QuickBooks Desktop items is optional. After importing, inventory items are not routinely exchanged between the two programs. The imported items should be tracked only in Point of Sale after import.

+

After the two programs are integrated, you will be prompted to import your QuickBooks Desktop items each time you open your item list in Point of Sale until you elect to import or indicate that you do not want to import. Choose Ask Me again Later if you plan to import, but are not ready to do at this time.

+

To manually initiate an import of your QuickBooks Desktop items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure your QuickBooks Desktop financial software is running and in single-user mode.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Import QuickBooks Desktop Items from the Financial menu or from the Advanced Options page of the Financial Center.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

More Information about Importing QuickBooks Items

+

What are the benefits of importing my QuickBooks Desktop Items?

+

Are there reasons I may not want to import my QuickBooks Desktop Items?

+

Can I import QuickBooks Desktop items later?

+

Can I import some items and not others?

+

Can I control how my imported inventory items are described in Point of Sale?

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange overview

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_infoexchanged.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_infoexchanged.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1bd3e1b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_infoexchanged.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + +What information is exchanged with QuickBooks? + + + + + + + + + + + +

What information is exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop?

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Overview | Exchange Reports

+

 

+

All transactions and data of the following types that has not previously exchanged is sent each time Financial Exchange is initiated. Your Financial Exchange settings may affect what and how data is sent.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + +
+

Point of Sale to QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +

QuickBooks Desktop to Point of Sale

+
+
    +
  • +

    New customers and updated customer information (except account balances)

    +
    • +
  • +

    New vendors and updated vendor information (active)

    +
    • +
  • +

    New vendor payment terms

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales information (receipts, deposits, sales tax, shipping)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Payments on account

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cash drawer payouts

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receiving information (vouchers)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Vendor billing information (optional)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory adjustments (memos, aggregated)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Employee time records*

    +
    • +
  • +

    Multi-store transfer information

    +
    • +
+

* Requires QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +
    +
  • +

    New customers and updated customer information, including account limit, balance, aging status, and any past due amount

    +
    • +
  • +

    New vendors and updated vendor information (active)

    +
    • +
  • +

    New vendor payment terms

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory items (not routinely; must manually import)

    +
    • +
+
+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_itemaccounts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_itemaccounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8512e82 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_itemaccounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Mapping Item Accounts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Mapping Item Accounts

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

The default item Cost of Goods Sold (COGS), Income, and Asset accounts, used to post item sales to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, are defined in Point of Sale company preferences. The default accounts are assigned to all items in inventory.

+

You can also have Point of Sale create item sub-accounts by appending the name of the department (and/or store name) to the end of the default account name. Learn more about sub-accounts.

+

There may be circumstances under which you want individual item sales or costs to post to accounts other than the defaults. You can change the default accounts, so they are suggested for all new items, or use the following procedure to assign different accounts on an item-by-item basis.

+

To assign QuickBooks Desktop accounts to an individual item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the accounts you want to use are set up in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    2. +
+

This makes them available for selection on the item record.

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the Point of Sale item form, then select the Additional Info tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make new selections from the drop-down lists for COGS, Income, and/or Item Asset accounts.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit information in other item fields as applicable.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Your new account mappings will go into effect on the next Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop.

+

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Customize List Columns

+

Modify Reports

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_itemimport_benefits.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_itemimport_benefits.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a551f06 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_itemimport_benefits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Benefits of Importing QuickBooks Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Benefits of Importing QuickBooks Desktop Items

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customizing Exchanges | FAQs

+

Benefits of Importing your QuickBooks Desktop Items

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_qb_integratedappspref.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_qb_integratedappspref.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6416046 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_qb_integratedappspref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + +Set QuickBooks Preferences to Allow Access + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set QuickBooks Preferences to Allow Access

+

Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

Access preferences must be set in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software to allow Point of Sale to send/receive information from your financial company file. Typically, this access is granted when you run the connection wizard.

+

However, this option may vary slightly between versions of QuickBooks and you may have to set this preference manually as described below.

+

To make sure QuickBooks Desktop allows access to Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Edit menu in your QuickBooks financial software, select Preferences and then select Integrated Applications.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Company Preferences tab and make sure the following check box is NOT selected:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to save your changes.

    +
    2. +
+

         image\qbfs_integratedapppref.gif

+

 

+

Allowing Access even when QuickBooks Desktop financial software is not Running

+

While QuickBooks Desktop must be running and your company file open to initially establish the connection, you can set your QuickBooks Desktop preferences to allow Point of Sale to log in automatically, even when QuickBooks Desktop is not running, for future exchanges.

+

Note: This setting is only available after the initial connection is made. This setting is not applicable if you are using the remote data sharing connection option.

+
    +
  1. +

    Go to your Integrated Applications preferences in QuickBooks Desktop, as described above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the application Point of Sale and then select properties.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make sure the option checkboxes on the Access Rights tab are set as follows:

    +
    4. +
+

Selected:

+ +

Not selected:

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select or create a user that Point of Sale will use to log in. We recommend that you select "Admin" as the user, but you can create a new one if desired. The specified user must have rights to access all data areas of the company file.

    +
    2. +
+

For example, if you create a user named "QB POS" and select this as your login choice, Point of Sale will log in with this identity (and corresponding access settings). Make sure the "QBPOS" user has full access rights.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to save these settings in QuickBooks.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_removellistitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_removellistitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41c9a08 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_removellistitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Removing Unused List Items in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Remove Unused List Items in QuickBooks

+

Financial Exchange Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

If you've been using QuickBooks financial software for some time, you may have accumulated list items that are no longer needed. If you plan to import this data to Point of Sale, you may want to clean up your lists before importing.

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Lists menu, select the list you want to edit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the list item you want to remove.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Item, Vendor, Customer:Job, etc., at the bottom of the screen to display available options.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Delete or Make Inactive. Deleting an item removes it permanently. Making it inactive removes the item from a list but retains the record so you can access it again. Inactive items in your financial software will not be imported to Point of Sale.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Set up sales tax in QuickBooks

+

Set QuickBooks preferences to allow access

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_requirements.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_requirements.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fbd1785 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_requirements.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + +Requirements of QuickBooks Integration + + + + + + + + + + +

Requirements of QuickBooks Desktop Integration

+

Financial Exchange Overview | QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard | FAQs

+

 

+

Before you can connect Point of Sale to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and share data, the following requirements must be met:

+ + +

Networking issues and FAQs

+ +

QuickBooks Desktop installation options

+

How do I set up my QuickBooks Desktop company file?

+ +

If you meet all of these requirements, you are ready to use the connection wizard to connect to QuickBooks Desktop.

+

 

+

I am still having trouble connecting. What could be wrong?Click to display a popup topic

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewdeptcodes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewdeptcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2344798 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewdeptcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Imported Item Departments + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Imported Item Departments

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

Point of Sale categorizes items and reports sales based on user-defined departments. When you import items from QuickBooks, they are all assigned to a single department named QuickBooks Financial Software.

+

If you want to track and report sales using departments that are more meaningful for your business, you should create new departments as needed and then edit the imported items in inventory to assign them to your new departments.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a department

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewimportedcustomers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewimportedcustomers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2045c72 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewimportedcustomers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Imported Customers + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Imported Customers

+

Exchange Overview | Customers Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

The Use with QuickBooks check box determines whether information for a particular customer is shared with QuickBooks Desktop during daily updates. Select or clear this check box as appropriate for your imported customers.

+

In addition, when you add a new customer in Point of Sale and want this customer's;s information sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software, make sure the check box is selected.

+

It is recommended that you review and edit customer records that have been imported from QuickBooks Desktop to take advantage of additional Point of Sale customer features.

+ +

 

+

Note: You can specify to have the Use with QuickBooks check box selected or cleared by default for all new customers in company preferences. If youd like to ensure that all new customers are shared with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, make sure the preference option is set to Yes.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks Desktop financial software handles POS data

+

Send detailed item and customer information to QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewimporteditems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewimporteditems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..45e209f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewimporteditems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,197 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Imported Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Imported Items

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

QuickBooks Desktop items of the following types can be imported and are assigned the Point of Sale item types shown below.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

QuickBooks Desktop Item Type

+		 +

Point of Sale Item Type

+
+

Inventory Part

+		 +

Inventory

+
+

Non-Inventory Part

+		 +

Non-Inventory

+
+

Other Charge

+		 +

Non-Inventory

+
+

Service

+		 +

Service

+
+

Assembly

+		 +

Assembly  (Pro)

+
+

Group

+		 +

Group (Pro)

+
+

Imported items should be reviewed and edited as needed to take advantage of Point of Sale inventory features. Pay particular attention to reviewing the following fields in the imported item records:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

QBPOS Field

+		 +

Description

+
+

Item Type

+		 +

Review item types to ensure your items are properly categorized.

+
+

Department

+		 +

All imported items are assigned to the default department QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software. See the discussion about departments and edit them as needed to improve reporting by department.

+
+

Attribute

+		 +

Use this field to describe your items by color, a second size, a pattern, or any other product trait. This field name can be customized.

+
+

Size

+		 +

Use this field to enter item size to facilitate purchasing and reporting. This field name can be customized and used for product attributes other than size.

+
+

Price Levels

+		 +

The item price from QuickBooks Desktop is placed in the Regular Price field for imported items. Prices at other price levels, if used, are not calculated for imported items. Manually assign prices or markdown percentages for each price level on the item record, as desired.

+
+

UPC Codes

+		 +

Scan or enter UPC codes, as applicable, if you want to list items on receipts by scanning vendor-printed tags.

+
+

QuickBooks Desktop Information

+		 +

Review and edit the QuickBooks Desktop item accounts (COGS, Income, and Inventory Asset) used when posting item sales to QuickBooks Desktop.

+
+

Custom Fields (Pro)
+
+
+Style Definitions (Pro)

+		 +

Data from custom fields is exchanged, providing the fields are named exactly the same in both programs.

+

To use the style features, inventory items grouped into a style must be modified so that all members of a particular style have identical Department and Item Name fields.

+
+

Other Item Fields

+		 +

Review and edit other Point of Sale item fields to take advantage of features important to your business.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Inventory overview

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewpos.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..64dc43d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Purchase Orders

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Purchase orders are not imported from QuickBooks Desktop. If you wish, you can manually enter existing QuickBooks Desktop purchase orders into Point of Sale. Doing so will allow coordinated tracking of purchases, better reporting capabilities, and the ability to create receiving vouchers from these POs when the merchandise arrives.

+

If you recreate QuickBooks Desktop purchase orders in Point of Sale, they should be canceled or deleted from QuickBooks Desktop as they are now tracked in Point of Sale.

+

Note: If you have items you did not import and do not plan to use in Point of Sale, you should perform all activities regarding these itemspurchasing, receiving, reportingin QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Purchasing overview

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewvendors.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewvendors.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a8fed00 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_reviewvendors.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Imported Vendors + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Imported Vendors

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Non-merchandise vendors, such as utility companies and the agencies to which you pay sales tax, are stored in the vendor list in QuickBooks Desktop. As such, these agencies may have been imported to Point of Sale as vendors.

+

Do not delete these vendors in Point of Sale. If you prefer not to see these vendors in your vendor list, select the Inactive check box on the vendor records and filter the vendor list to show only active vendors. You may also want to enter or edit other imported vendor information:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Vendor overview

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks Desktop financial software handles POS data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_selectitemstoimport.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_selectitemstoimport.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6793148 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_selectitemstoimport.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +Select Items to Import from QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Items to Import from QuickBooks Desktop

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs  

+

 

+

You can import all or just selected items from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Why would I import only selected items?

+

To select specific items to import:

+
    +
  1. +

    Answer Yes when asked if you want to import selected items.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Select Items to Import dialog, make sure the check box in the Import column is selected for all items you want to import and cleared (not checked) for all items you do not want to import.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select OK when finished to begin item import.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Import QuickBooks Desktop items

+

Review imported records

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_setqbsales_tax.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_setqbsales_tax.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ff9cf8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_setqbsales_tax.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up QuickBooks Sales Tax + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up QuickBooks Desktop Sales Tax

+

Sales Tax Overview | Sales Tax Integration

+

 

+

If you collect sales tax, you must have sales tax turned on in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, so that Point of Sale can send sales tax information.

+

To turn on the collection of sales tax in QuickBooks Desktop financial software:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and open the company file which you are going to integrate with Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the QuickBooks Desktop Edit menu, select Preferences.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Sales Tax from the left-side preferences menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the Company Preferences tab.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    If you collect sales tax, make sure the response for "Do you charge sales tax?" is Yes.

    +
    6. +
+

If you do not charge sales tax, answer No.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

With this setting turned on, Point of Sale will automatically create sales tax items and tax codes, as necessary, in QuickBooks Desktop when sending sales tax information. Learn more.

+

 

+

Custom Mapping of Sales Taxes to QuickBooks Desktop

+

If you prefer to set up your own QuickBooks Desktop sales tax items, or if you wish to use sales tax groups in QuickBooks Desktop to pay taxes to multiple agencies, define them in QuickBooks Desktop first. Then, when setting up sales tax codes in Point of Sale, link them to the applicable tax items/groups you have set up in QuickBooks Desktop. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop documentation and help files for more information about defining tax items and groups.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_verifytransaction.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_verifytransaction.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5627d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_verifytransaction.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +Verify the Exchange of Individual Transactions + + + + + + + + + + +

Verify the Exchange of Individual Transactions

+

Overview | Customizing Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

If you have Point of Sale integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, there are several ways for you to check the Financial Exchange status of individual transactions with QuickBooks Desktop:

+ +

The QuickBooks Status Field in Point of Sale List

+

The QB Status field is available to add to your Point of Sale lists for each data type sent to QuickBooks Desktop (customers, vendors, sales history, receiving history, etc.). This field shows the exchange status of a document or record:

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Data recovery in QuickBooks Desktop

+

How QuickBooks Desktop handles POS data

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_viewqbfstransactions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_viewqbfstransactions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..72f0d04 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_viewqbfstransactions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + +View Point of Sale Transactions in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + +

View Point of Sale Transactions in QuickBooks Desktop

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Financial Exchange Reports

+

 

+

Note: This feature is available from the Server Workstation only and requires that your QuickBooks Desktop financial software be running, even if you have set your preferences to allow routine exchanges when not running. Point of Sale will automatically launch QuickBooks Desktop, if not already running, when you select this option.

+

 

+

Point of sale customer, vendor, and history document lists have active links to the corresponding record(s) and or document(s) created in QuickBooks Desktop financial software. This link helps confirm that a record/document was successfully exchanged and allows you to open the QuickBooks Desktop record/document for viewing.

+

Shown is an example from sales history.

+

 

+

         Sales History list - View Financial History

+

To confirm/view a corresponding QuickBooks Desktop record/transaction:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Point of Sale list, highlight the record or document of interest.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Show Financial Details.

    +
    3. +
+

The Financial History window is displayed, showing the exchange status and containing a link to view the document (if successfully sent).

+

          Financial History window

+

This window will show one of the following, as applicable:

+

Documents:

+ +

Customer and Vendors: (Basic)

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Open in QuickBooks to view the listed document/records. (QuickBooks Desktop will be launched).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Other Options on this window include (only one available depending on current status):

+

Resend this record during the next exchange Select this check box to resend the document during the next Financial Exchange. You might do this if you had to restore an older QuickBooks Desktop backup and this document is now missing in QuickBooks Desktop. Note: This may result in the document being listed twice in the financial history window, but the link to the original document will no longer work.

+

Mark this document as successfully sent Select this check box if you do not want this document sent to QuickBooks Desktop during the next Financial Exchange. You might make this choice if you restore a Point of Sale backup that was created before the document was sent to QuickBooks Desktop. Sending it again in this case would result in duplicates in QuickBooks Desktop.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Data recovery in QuickBooks Desktop

+

How QuickBooks Desktop handles POS data

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_warning_manuallyaddingqbitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_warning_manuallyaddingqbitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5813e16 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_warning_manuallyaddingqbitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Warning: Manually Adding QuickBooks Items to Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Warning: Manually Adding QuickBooks Items to Point of Sale

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs  

+

 

+

 Warning: If you have existing inventory items in your QuickBooks financial software, choose not to import them, and then manually add those same items and quantities to Point of Sale, your financial software inventory value can be erroneously increased.

+

 

+

This is because when you manually add inventory items and quantities in Point of Sale, the program will send inventory adjustments (as General Journal transactions) to QuickBooks, showing increases in inventory value. In this case, you will need to make a compensating one-time adjustment in QuickBooks to correct your inventory value.

+

Refer to the instructions in your QuickBooks financial software documentation for more information about adjusting inventory amounts.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_whyimportselecteditems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_whyimportselecteditems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..606e1e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_whyimportselecteditems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Why would I import only selected items? + + + + + + + + + + +

Why would I import only selected items?

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs  

+

 

+

All of your QuickBooks inventory items will be imported unless you choose to import only selected items. You will not be able to order, receive, or sell non-imported items in Point of Sale (unless you enter them manually).

+

Most users will want to import all their existing items. However, there may be good reasons to import only selected items:

+ +

Note:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_whynotimport.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_whynotimport.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c16478b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_whynotimport.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Why might I not want to import QuickBooks items? + + + + + + + + + + + +

Why might I not want to import QuickBooks items?

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs  

+

 

+

There may be good reasons to not import your QuickBooks items, or to import only some of the items.

+

Why you might not want to import:

+ +

Warning: Not Importing and then Adding the Same Items to Point of Sale

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_connectionproblem.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_connectionproblem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..89a7121 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_connectionproblem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Connection Problem + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Connection Problem

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

A number of circumstances can result in this error. Oftentimes, these errors can be fixed by restarting your computer and then trying to connect again.

+

Try these solutions:

+

Message: This application does not have permission to access this QuickBooks company file.

+ +

Message: An internal QuickBooks error occurred while trying to access the QuickBooks company data file.

+ +

Message: Unexpected error. Check the qbsdklog.txt file for possible additional information.

+ +

Message: Exception in OpenConnection: No connection could be made because the target machine actively refused it.

+ +

If you are still unable to connect after trying these steps, please review our support resources or visit http://www.quickbooks.com/support/pos.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_norights.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_norights.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c4d9d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_norights.htm @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Insufficient Rights + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Insufficient Rights

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

 

+

In order to connect with QuickBooks and share data, the user logged into QuickBooks must be signed in as r;Admin or as a user with Admin-level rights.

+

Log out the current QuickBooks user and then log in as a user with Admin rights before trying again.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_other_file.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_other_file.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4310ebf --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_other_file.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Other File Open + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Other File Open

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

Point of Sale is configured to use a QuickBooks company file other than the one that is currently open. The file Point of Sale expected to see is shown on the dialog.

+

You have two choices:

+

Connect to the QuickBooks file shown on the dialog ( the file Point of Sale expected):

+
    +
  1. +

    Close the currently open QuickBooks file and open the file shown.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the first option in the dialog (displayed as the name of the expected company file)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Next.

    +
    4. +
+

Connect to the currently open file:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the second option on the dialog.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Next.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale will automatically reconnect to this file from this point on.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_qbnotrunning.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_qbnotrunning.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9186490 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbconnwizard_qbnotrunning.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard: QuickBooks is Not Running + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Connection Wizard: QuickBooks is Not Running

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

If the Wizard cannot detect QuickBooks running, it is most likely due to one of the following conditions:

+

If QuickBooks is installed on this computer only:

+

QuickBooks has not been started. Launch QuickBooks, open your financial company file, and then try connecting again. If you want to connect in the future even if QuickBooks is not running, set your QuickBooks Integrated Application preferences to allow automatic login. How do I?

+

 

+

If QuickBooks is installed both on this computer and on another networked computer:

+

QuickBooks may be running on the other computer. Close QuickBooks on the other computer and launch it on this computer, opening the company file on the other computer across the network and then try connecting again. If you want to connect in the future even if QuickBooks is not running, set your QuickBooks Integrated Application preferences to allow automatic login. How do I?

+

 

+

If QuickBooks installed only on another networked computer, and you have set up to use remote data sharing:

+

With the remote data sharing configuration, you must have QuickBooks running on the other computer and your company file open. You must also have the RDS Server application running on the other computer and the RDS Client application installed on this computer. Learn more.

+

 

+

Fore more information about configuring your QuickBooks installation for Financial Exchange, refer to the User Guide that accompanied your Point of Sale software (or view an electronic version here).

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata01.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..53fb25e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Preparing QuickBooks for Financial Exchange + + + + + + + + + +

Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Connect to QuickBooks Desktop

+

 

+

Before you can share data, you should prepare your QuickBooks Desktop financial software by doing the following:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Set QuickBooks Desktop preferences to allow access

+

Turn on the collection of sales tax

+

Clean up QuickBooks Desktop lists

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a4b7de6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,140 @@ + + + + + + + + +How QuickBooks Handles Point of Sale Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

How QuickBooks Handles Point of Sale Data

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

What's Important to Know About the Exchange of Data?

+ +

Select a data type from the list below to see a brief description of how that Point of Sale data is recorded in QuickBooks Desktop.

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Sales receipts

+		 +

Cash drawer payouts

+
+

Customers

+		 +

Customer account information

+
+

Vendors

+		 +

Receiving vouchers

+
+

Vendor Payment Terms

+		 +

Return vouchers

+
+

Adjustment memos

+		 +

Sales tax

+
+

Employee hours worked

+

Transfer slips

+		 +

Customer orders

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..92a0991 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Customize Financial Exchange + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize Financial Exchange

+

Overview | Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

 

+

Point of Sale offers several options for customizing the way information is sent to QuickBooks Desktop and, if you imported existing QuickBooks Desktop customers, vendors, and inventory items to Point of Sale, you should review and edit the imported records to take full advantage of Point of Sale features.

+

 

+

Customizing Financial Exchanges

+

Customize account and payment type mappings

+

Customize item account and sub-account mappings

+

Send summarized vs. detailed sales & receiving information

+

Send original and discounted item sales values

+

Change where vendor billing information is entered

+

Change the customer name order for Financial Exchanges

+

 

+

Reviewing Data Imported from QuickBooks Desktop

+

Imported vendors

+

Imported items

+

Departments for imported items

+

Imported customers

+

Purchase orders in QuickBooks Desktop

+

 

+

Warning: Inventory items are not exchanged during routine Financial Exchanges. However, customers and vendors are. Any data imported from QuickBooks Desktop financial software during daily exchanges should be subjected to the same review as outlined in the topics above. To avoid data discrepancies and save data review time, it is advised that you add or edit items, customers, and vendors only in Point of Sale after the two programs are sharing data.

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata04.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..938674d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + +Recover Point of Sale Data in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Recover Point of Sale Data in QuickBooks Desktop

+

Financial Exchange Overview | FAQs Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

You can use this procedure to resend Point of Sale data to QuickBooks Desktop if your financial software company file is damaged or lost.

+

You should try to restore from a QuickBooks Desktop backup before using the recover feature. However, if your QuickBooks Desktop backup is not current, you could lose the sales data that you have been regularly sending from Point of Sale since the last backup date. The Recover QuickBooks option allows you to resend your Point of Sale data to QuickBooks Desktop for a specified date range.

+

This procedure should be used in only two situations:

+ +

This procedure sends all Point of Sale data for the specified date range to QuickBooks Desktop, whether or not it has been previously sent. If you use this feature for any purpose other than specified above, you may overwrite important information or create duplicate entries in your QuickBooks Desktop company file.

+

It is suggested that you read the Financial Exchange FAQs for other possible issues and corrections before using this option.

+

 

+

 Warning: Depending on the size of your Point of Sale data, the date range you specify, and your computer speed, data recovery may take a considerable amount of time to complete. Once started, the process must be allowed to finish. Errors may result in duplication or missed records if you attempt to stop and restart this process.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

To recover from a total QuickBooks Desktop financial software data loss (no backup):

+

Use the steps below if you have been unable to restore your financial software data and/or have started a new QuickBooks Desktop company file. All vendors, customers, and transactional data within the specified date range will be sent.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange topic to prepare the new company for Financial Exchange before selecting Recover QuickBooks.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Financial Center from the Financial menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Financial Center select Show Advanced Options and then click Recover Data Now.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Read the recovery warning, and then select Continue.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Specify a date range. Typically, the date range in this case will be from the date you first started using Point of Sale to the current date.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Type Yes to confirm the recovery.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select Continue to start the exchange.

    +
    8. +
+

To recover if your QuickBooks Desktop backup is out of date:

+

Use the procedure below if you have an intact QuickBooks Desktop company file but your recent sales activity has been lost due to restoring an outdated QuickBooks Desktop backup. Adjusts the dates in the example below to match your circumstances.

+

Example: It is March 1. Your QuickBooks Desktop company file is damaged, and the most recent backup you have is from February 27:

+
    +
  1. +

    Restore QuickBooks from your most recent backup (February 27).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Refer to the QuickBooks help for specific instructions on this step.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In Point of Sale, select Recover Data Now from the Financial Center as explained in the procedure above.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Read the Recovery warning, and then select Continue.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Specify the beginning and ending date for the data to be resent; in this example specify a beginning date of February 28 and an ending date of March 1.

    +
    6. +
+

This date range assumes that your February 27 QuickBooks Desktop backup already has the Point of Sale data from that day, so we are resending data starting on the next day.

+
    +
  1. +

    Type Yes to confirm the recovery.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Continue to send the Point of Sale data to QuickBooks.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Resume routine Financial Exchanges.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata05.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..142c8a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard Overview

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

The QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard can assist you in establishing the connection between Point of Sale and your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

If you havent already, you may want to read the following topics:

+

Requirements for QuickBooks Desktop integration

+

Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange

+

 

+

The wizard will help you select the QuickBooks Desktop company file with which you will share Point of Sale data and will configure Point of Sale so that it will reconnect to the same QuickBooks Desktop company file automatically in the future. The wizard will also alert you if a condition exists that prevents the connection and help you rectify the problem so you can continue.

+

The wizard will start automatically when a connection is needed or you can start it manually at anytime in Point of Sale by selecting Set Up QuickBooks Connection Now from:

+ +

If this is your first time connecting the programs, launch QuickBooks Desktop and open your financial company file before selecting Next on the connection wizard page.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata08.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..171dd70 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange Activity Log + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange Activity Log

+

Overview | Financial Exchange Reports | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

The Financial Exchange activity log allows you to review the details of the data shared between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop. It summarizes the data that has been imported, added, and updated between the two programs.

+

The activity log is a useful tool for troubleshooting problems that arise during Financial Exchange and can help you locate problematic data.

+

If an error occurs, you will see a problem message in the Financial Exchange summary window.

+

To view the Activity Log:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select View Activity Log from the Financial Exchange summary window or at anytime from the Financial menu.

    +
    2. +
+

The Activity Log dialog is displayed, showing the log for the current date.

+
    +
  1. +

    To view the log for a different date, select a date from the left side of the window, and a time of day to narrow the entries even further.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    When finished reviewing logs, select Close to exit the dialog.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange at End of Day

+

Data recovery in QuickBooks Desktop

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata10.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ef054c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,232 @@ + + + + + + + +Troubleshoot Financial Exchange + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange 

+

Exchange Overview | Reports | Customize Exchanges

+

 

+

The following lists include frequently asked questions and solutions to Financial Exchange issues. Click on a question to view the answer.

+

 

+

Configuring for QuickBooks Desktop Integration

+

What versions of QuickBooks Desktop financial software can I use with Point of Sale?

+

Why must a company file be set up in QuickBooks Desktop financial software before data can be shared with Point of Sale?

+

I cannot find my QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file. Where is it?

+

I cannot get the two programs to communicate across my network and am not able to share data. What could be wrong?

+

Do I have to import QuickBooks Desktop items when prompted to do so?

+

Why can't I see my item quantities in QuickBooks Desktop after integrating the two programs?

+

Can Point of Sale exchange data with QuickBooks Online Edition?

+

 

+

Running Routine Financial Exchanges

+

Why are there fewer receipts in QuickBooks Desktop financial software than in Point of Sale?

+

Does QuickBooks Desktop financial software have to be running to exchange data?

+

I made a receiving voucher in Point of Sale and ran a Financial Exchange, but there was no matching bill created in QuickBooks Desktop. Why?

+

How do I make a bank deposit in QuickBooks Desktop after doing my End of Day Financial Exchange?

+

Why do some of my customers' names look different after importing into Point of Sale?

+

Why does an item named "POS Tax Sales" appear on my receipts sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software?

+

Point of Sale says my document was sent to QuickBooks Desktop, but I can't find it in my financial software. Where did it go?

+

What can I do if one of my associates incorrectly entered a receipt payment?

+

Can I change the accounts and payment types used by Point of Sale to transfer my routine point-of-sale data to QuickBooks Desktop financial software?

+

 

+

Errors During Financial Exchange

+

When I try to conduct a Financial Exchange, why do I get an error message about my QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file?

+

Why do I get an error about insufficient rights?

+

I receive an error about a customer's credit limit being exceeded. How do I fix this?

+

Why do I receive an error message that Point of Sale does not have permission to access my financial software company file?

+

The Activity Log says, "Error occurred while sending receipts. POS STX tax item must be 0%." How do I resolve this error?

+

 

+

What versions of QuickBooks Desktop financial software can I use with Point of Sale?

+

This version of Point of Sale can be integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Pro, Premier, or Enterprise Solutions.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why must a company file be set up in QuickBooks Desktop financial software before data can be shared with Point of Sale?

+

Point of Sale must know the name and location of the company file you use in QuickBooks Desktop financial software, in order to send your sales data to the correct accounts, report sales tax properly, and handle other aspects of integration.

+

Your company file must be set up in QuickBooks Desktop financial software before the two programs can be connected. Refer here, and to the documentation provided with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, for more information about setting up a financial company file.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I cannot find my QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file. Where is it?

+

If you have QuickBooks Desktop running and The QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard in Point of Sale can help you locate your QuickBooks Desktop company file. The Wizard will display the company files it finds in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software folder. If the wizard is unable to locate your file, it could be because:

+ +

Note: To verify the location of your company file, switch to QuickBooks Desktop financial software and select Backup from the file menu. Your company file and location are displayed in the Current Company section. Cancel the backup operation.

+

 

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I cannot get the two programs to communicate across my network and am not able to exchange data. What could be wrong?

+

In order to exchange data between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop, several conditions must be met. Check your network configuration, program installation, and preferences to be sure all of the following are true:

+ +

Return to question List

+

 

+

Do I have to import QuickBooks Desktop items when prompted to do so?

+

No, and you do not ever have to import them if you wish not to. If you elect not to import your QuickBooks Desktop items when prompted, but want to later, you can do so by selecting Import QuickBooks Items from the Financial menu or from the Financial Center in Point of Sale.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why cant I see my item quantities in QuickBooks Desktop after integrating the two programs?

+

Individual item information (quantities, prices, etc.) is not shared between the two programs. If you purchase, receive and sell an item in Point of Sale, you can view information about the item in the Point of Sale inventory screen and on Point of Sale reports.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Can Point of Sale exchange data with QuickBooks Online Edition?

+

No, the online edition of QuickBooks is not supported at this time.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why are there fewer receipts in QuickBooks Desktop financial software than in Point of Sale?

+

By default, information is sent to QuickBooks Desktop in summarized format, meaning that many documents are consolidated. For example, the total amount for all receipts paid by cash in Point of Sale on a given day is reflected on a single receipt and a single general journal transaction in QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

If you would like each individual receipt in Point of Sale to be sent to your financial software as an individual document, select the Detailed Item Descriptions option in company preferences. (See the Summarized vs. Detailed Item Information topic for further information.) Note that even with this option there is not one document created in QuickBooks Desktop for every document created in Point of Sale (Other than receipts and vouchers).

+

You can always view the documents or records created in QuickBooks Desktop for a Point of Sale transaction by selecting the Financial button in the corresponding Point of Sale list. Learn more.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Does QuickBooks Desktop financial software have to be running to exchange data?

+

Not if you have set your QuickBooks Desktop Integrated Application preferences to allow Point of Sale to login automatically. How do I?

+

Exception: If you are using the Remote Data Sharing (RDS) option, QuickBooks Desktop must be running with your company file open to exchange data.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I made a receiving voucher in Point of Sale and ran a Financial Exchange, but there was no matching bill created in QuickBooks Desktop. Why?

+

Receiving vouchers may be sent to QuickBooks Desktop in different ways, depending on where you have selected to enter vendor billing information and, if entering billing information in Point of Sale, whether an invoice number has been entered. Learn more.

+

To view the corresponding document(s) and/or transactions created in QuickBooks Desktop for a Point of Sale voucher, first locate and select the voucher in your Point of Sale receiving history, then select View Financial History from the I Want To menu. The dialog displayed lists the document(s) or transactions created in QuickBooks Desktop. To view the QuickBooks Desktop document, select Open in QuickBooks next to a listed document.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

How do I make a bank deposit in QuickBooks Desktop after doing my End of Day Financial Exchange?

+

By default, cash from Point of Sale is placed in the QuickBooks Desktop Cash In Drawer account, while checks and credit/debit transaction are placed in the Undeposited Funds account.

+

Learn more about using the default or custom account mappings

+

To perform a deposit once you have completed the Financial Exchange process with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you will need to first transfer the funds you wish to deposit from the Cash in Drawer account in QuickBooks Desktop to the Undeposited Funds account. How do I?

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why do some of my customers names look different after importing into Point of Sale?

+

Names in the First Name and M.I. fields from QuickBooks financial software are combined in Point of Sale. Also, if a name in your financial software is a duplicate of a customer that already exists in Point of Sale, a number will be appended to the end of the name upon import to ensure that it is unique.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why does an item named "POS Tax Sales" appear on my receipts sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software?

+

If you send data to QuickBooks Desktop financial software in summarized format, individual items are not listed on receipts. Instead, items are consolidated by tax code. For example, if you sell $250 worth of items belonging to the "Tax" code, a $250 item called POS Tax Sales appears on the receipt in your financial software.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I cant find the document(s) created in QuickBooks Desktop for a document made in Point of Sale even after successfully running Financial Exchange. Where did it go?

+

To view the corresponding document(s) created in QuickBooks Desktop for a Point of Sale document, first locate and select the document in your Point of Sale history list, then select View Financial History from the I Want To menu. The dialog displayed lists the document(s) or journal entries, as applicable, created in QuickBooks Desktop. To view the QuickBooks Desktop document, select Open in QuickBooks next to an entry.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

What can I do if one of my associates incorrectly entered a payment?

+

Reverse the receipt in Point of Sale and create a new, corrected one. Reversing the receipt does the following: 1) creates a new reversing receipt with the opposite effect of the original to "cancel" it out (it does not change the original), and 2) the new, corrected receipt posts the correct payment information to QuickBooks Desktop. For example, if the original was a sales receipt, selecting reverse creates a return receipt with the same items and prices, adding the quantity back to inventory. Once transferred, the new corrected receipt will correct your records in QuickBooks Desktop.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Can I change the account s and payment types used by Point of Sale to transfer my point-of-sale data to QuickBooks Desktop?

+

Yes, you can change the account mappings on the Financial Accounts page of Point of Sale company preferences. Payment type mappings can only be changed by editing your payment methods or types in your QuickBooks Desktop software. Note: If you use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service reconciliation feature, some of the default mappings are required.

+

You can also change income, COGs, and inventory asset item account mappings on an individual item basis. Your changes will take effect on the next Financial Exchange.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

When I try to conduct a Financial Exchange, why do I get an error message about my QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file?

+

QuickBooks Desktop and your QuickBooks Desktop company file must currently be open. If no company file is open, or if a different company file is open, or if a dialog in QuickBooks Desktop is open, you will receive an error message.

+

Optional: You can set your Integrated Applications preferences in QuickBooks Desktop financial software to allow access even if the program is not running. How do I?

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why do I get an error about insufficient rights?

+

The user currently logged into QuickBooks Desktop does not have the rights to perform the actions needed to share data. Login as a user with sufficient rights to create items and transactions. It is recommended you login as the Admin user. If you have set your Integrated Applications data in QuickBooks Desktop financial software for automatic login, make sure the user specified there has sufficient rights to perform the actions necessary to share data. Again, it is recommended that this user be the Admin user.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I receive an error about a customers credit limit being exceeded. How do I fix this?

+

If multiple charges to account are made at different stores between Store and Financial Exchanges or the customer's credit limit is overridden at the time of sale to allow a charge exceeding the credit limit, you may get an error during Financial Exchange. Some versions of QuickBooks Desktop financial software will not accept a charge receipt if the limit would be exceeded. To resolve this issue, temporarily (or permanently) increase the customer's credit limit so and run Financial Exchange to get the receipt posted. Then change the credit limit back. No additional charges will be allowed in Point of Sale until a payment reduces the balance below the limit.

+

A second possible cause of this error is that previous customer payments/credits have not been applied to the customers open invoices in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, thus the account balance has not yet been reduced by these amounts. Applying the payments to invoices in QuickBooks Desktop and then exchanging data again should resolve this issue. Learn more.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why do I receive an error message that Point of Sale does not have permission to access my financial software company file?

+

QuickBooks financial software is not running or Point of Sale does not have permission to access it automatically. Make sure your financial software is running before trying to run Financial Exchange again. (You can set your financial software preferences so that Point of Sale can access the program even if it is not currently running. How do I? )

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

The Activity Log says, "Error occurred while sending receipts. POS STX tax item must be 0%." How do I resolve this error?

+

POS STX is the inactive tax item created in QuickBooks Desktop financial software and used in the Tax field on documents created in your financial software. The tax rate of this item is 0.0%. (The actual tax charged on receipts sent to your financial software appears as line items.) If you edit the POS STX item in QuickBooks Desktop financial software so that the rate is other than 0%, you will receive this error. Make sure the POS STX item has a tax rate of 0%, then send data to QuickBooks Desktop financial software again.

+

Return to question List

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata11.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a210ea9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + +Item List Limit in QuickBooks Financial Software + + + + + + + + + + +

Item List Limit in QuickBooks Financial Software

+

Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

Some editions of QuickBooks financial software have an item list limit, while Point of Sale does not. If you have a large inventory and you use detailed posting, there is a risk of reaching the maximum number of inventory items allowed in your financial software because of the inactive items created.

+

If you reach the maximum, additional new items (items that do not already have an inactive item created for them in QuickBooks) will be listed on documents in the default, summarized format. To free some space in your QuickBooks item list, you can delete old or unused items. Refer to your QuickBooks documentation for more information.

+

Alternatively, you may wish to consider upgrading to a newer version of QuickBooks that allows more items or to the Enterprise Solutions edition, which approximately doubles the item list limit.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata12.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata12.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7697842 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata12.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Remote Data Sharing (RDS) + + + + + + + + + +

Remote Data Sharing (RDS)

+

QuickBooks Desktop Installation Options | Financial Exchange Overview

+

 

+

Remote Data Sharing (RDS) is an alternative method for integrating Point of Sale with QuickBooks Desktop financial software over a local area network (LAN) using server/client applications. View Illustration

+

 

+

Note: VPN's and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with RDS. These network configurations may be unreliable for this purpose.

+

 

+

Advantages of RDS

+ +

Disadvantages of RDS

+ +

Get the RDS Files and Documentation

+

You can download the RDS application files and the most recent documentation for RDS from the following web site. This is a free download.

+

Internet connection required  https://community.intuit.com/articles/1602352

+


+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange

+

QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard Overview

+

Customize Financial Exchange

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata13.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata13.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8df682b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata13.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + +Summarized vs. Detailed Item Information + + + + + + + + + + + +

Summarized vs. Detailed Item Information

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

In your Point of Sale company preferences, you can choose whether to send summarized or detailed item information to QuickBooks Desktop on receipts and vouchers. The choice depends on the level of detail you want in your financial software regarding your Point of Sale activities.

+

We recommend you read this entire topic carefully before making a change in this setting.

+

To specify detailed or summarized information for Financial Exchange:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Financial page, select from one of the three options for sending receipts and vouchers:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

You change will go into effect with the next Financial Exchange.

+

 

+

About This Choice

+

By default, these documents are sent to QuickBooks Desktop in the summarized format. This streamlines Financial Exchange and presents data in a concise format in QuickBooks Desktop. In most cases, sending summarized data is the most efficient way to transfer data. However, you may wish to send detailed documents to your financial software if you need or want:

+ +

Detailed document posting DOES NOT mean that inventory information (items, quantities, costs, etc.) are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+

Heres how the different formats handle sending data to QuickBooks Desktop:

+

 

+

Summarized item totals: (Default)

+ +

Detailed item descriptions:

+ +

Note: Detailed item information applies only to sales receipts and to documents created from vouchers. If you select to send detailed data to QuickBooks, documents such as adjustment memos will still be sent in a consolidated format. Likewise, General Journal transactions for vouchers will not show individual items.

+

 

+

Detailed item descriptions for customer charge account transactions only:

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Inactive Items Created in QuickBooks Desktop for Detailed Exchanges

+

When using detailed item posting, Point of Sale creates an inactive, non-inventory item in QuickBooks Desktop for each item sold or received on Point of Sale documents sent to QuickBooks Desktop. It is these inactive items that are listed on the QuickBooks Desktop documents created during Financial Exchanges.

+

An item is only created once. Subsequent appearances of the item on sent documents will not create another inactive QuickBooks Desktop item. These items are made inactive, non-inventory items so that they dont show up in your default QuickBooks Desktop item list view. This is because they are tracked in Point of Sale, not in QuickBooks Desktop, and you should not use them in QuickBooks Desktop for other purposes or edit them. These items are meant to be used solely for the purpose of detailed Financial Exchanges.

+

 

+

Note: Item List Limit in QuickBooks. If you have a large inventory, these inactive items may cause you to reach the maximum number of items allowed in QuickBooks Desktop. See the Item List Limit in QuickBooks topic for more information.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata_popup_tempacctrenaming.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata_popup_tempacctrenaming.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a1332d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdata_popup_tempacctrenaming.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + +Temporarily Renaming Existing Accounts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Temporarily Renaming Existing Accounts

+ +

In-help popup topic

+ +

Point of Sale requires that certain accounts be present in your QuickBooks software to successfully integrate the two programs. These accounts include Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Cost of Goods Sold, Sales Tax Payable, Undeposited Funds, and Inventory Asset.

+

If you have created custom accounts in QuickBooks of the same types, you may find it easier to temporarily rename these accounts to the default names listed above to enable the initial connection. After the connection has been completed, you can change the names back to your custom names and then edit Point of Sale company preferences to map to those accounts instead.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdataoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdataoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..45d494c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbdataoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,206 @@ + + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Customize Exchanges | Reports | FAQs

+

 

+

Point of Sale can be integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Pro, Premier, and Enterprise Solutions. Integration and exchange of data with QuickBooks Desktop, while providing many benefits, is not required.

+

 

+

Point of Sale tracks your daily point-of-sale business: purchasing, receiving, and selling merchandise, and tracking inventory and customers. QuickBooks Desktop financial software helps you pay bills, manage cash flow, invoice customers, and run financial reports.

+

Exchanging information between the two programs, called Financial Exchange, can be done at any time (typically as part of your End of Day procedure) and can significantly reduce your workload because you can conduct your inventory and sales activities in Point of Sale, then transfer the resulting data directly to your financial software. Theres no need to enter information twice!

+

Several options are available for you to customize how your Point of Sale data is transferred to QuickBooks Desktop so that it works for your business model and how you like to have your retail activities reported.

+

Financial Exchange allows you to get the most from the specialized features of each program by splitting key business activities between them as shown below (this is not an all-inclusive list of the features in either program):

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Activity

+		 +

POS

+		 +

QBFS

+
+

Add/track inventory

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Order and receive merchandise

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Make sales and collect sales tax

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Run sales and merchandise reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Add customers or vendors*

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Enter vendor billing info (invoices)**

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Track cost of goods and expenses

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Pay bills and sales taxes

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Invoice customers

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Process payroll

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Run financial reports

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Banking activities

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

POS = Point of Sale QBFS = QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+

*  Recommend doing in Point of Sale

+

** Preference option; controls how receiving information is shared

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

What data is shared?

+

Requirements of Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks Desktop handles POS data

+

Default chart of accounts & mappings

+

Security rights for Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_accountlimitexceeded.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_accountlimitexceeded.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5367734 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_accountlimitexceeded.htm @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + + + +qbfs_accountlimitexceeded + + + + + + + + +

Example: Multiple Charges to Account Exceed Limit

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden

+  +

A customer has a credit limit of $200, and charges a sale for $160 and then a second sale for $50 before a Financial Exchange occurs. The second charge is allowed in Point of Sale because the customers balance has not yet been updated with the first charge.

+

However, when sending the receipts to QuickBooks; the posting of the second sales receipt will not be allowed because it causes the customers credit limit to be exceeded. In this case, the receipt will have to be reversed in Point of Sale, or the Credit Limit field edited to a higher amount in QuickBooks financial software, in order for the receipt to be posted successfully.

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_adjust_import_qtys.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_adjust_import_qtys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04eeaae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_adjust_import_qtys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + + + + +Adjust Quantities of Items Imported from QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + +

Adjust Quantities of Items Imported from QuickBooks

+

 

+

If using QuickBooks 2004 (or earlier) and  in multi-user mode during the item import process, Point of Sale could not set the quantities of the imported items to zero (0) in your financial software. Read the notes in the Import QuickBooks Items topic to learn why this is important.

+

As a result, your inventory value in QuickBooks will be erroneously increased by an amount equal to the value of the imported items when Point of Sale creates adjustment memos and sends them to your financial software.

+

To correct your inventory value, you must manually edit the quantities of the imported items to zero in your QuickBooks financial software.

+

Please consult your QuickBooks financial software help for instructions to make manual quantity adjustments in that software.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_adjustments.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_adjustments.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9fe0d5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_adjustments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Adjustment Memos + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Adjustment Memos

+

Overview | Inventory Adjustments Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale adjustment memos are sent to QuickBooks financial software as General Journal transactions. A single journal entry is made for the aggregate inventory adjustments for each day. The journal entry typically will show an adjustment to the Inventory Asset account and a balancing entry in the POS Inventory Adjustment account.

+

Many activities in Point of Sale result in the creation of adjustment memos, and thus a general journal transaction in QuickBooks, including:

+ +

To learn more:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_customers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_customers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9803a12 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_customers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Customers + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Customers

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customer Overview | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

If you integrate Point of Sale with QuickBooks financial software, existing active customers from QuickBooks are automatically added to your Point of Sale customer list with the first Financial Exchange.

+

New and edited customers in Point of Sale, if the Use with QuickBooks field is selected on the customer record, are synchronized between Point of Sale and QuickBooks.

+

 

+

Sending Account Charges and Payments

+

If you allow account charges, customers account balances in Point of Sale are adjusted with each charge or payment transaction. The transactions are sent to QuickBooks with the next Financial Exchange where they affect the customers Current Balance and result in the creation of a customer invoice (for charges) or a customer payment (for payments).

+

The QuickBooks account balance, which may reflect payments or finance charges not entered in Point of Sale is then sent back and overwrites the account balance in Point of Sale. Point of Sale recalculates the available credit for the next sale. Learn more about how account transactions are exchanged.

+

 

+

Sending Customer PO Numbers (Pro)

+

For business customers, when the customer PO # is recorded on a sales receipt and you are sending item detail, the PO# is added to the Memo field of QuickBooks receipts and to the PO # field of QuickBooks invoices.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Use these links for more information:

+ +

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_deposits.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_deposits.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ddbacbf --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_deposits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Customer Order Deposits + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Customer Order Deposits

+

Overview | Customer Order Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Although customer orders created in Point of Sale are not sent to QuickBooks, deposits and deposits used as payment create either sales receipts or invoices in QuickBooks, depending on the payment type.

+

 

+

Deposits Taken

+

In general, deposits taken on customer orders are recorded on sales receipts in Point of Sale and sent to QuickBooks in the same manner as other sales receipts.  The deposit amount increases the Customer Deposit liability account.

+

If you send summarized data to QuickBooks:

+

Customer order deposits taken by cash, credit card, or gift card/certificate appear on the consolidated sales receipt for the day, and the amount of the deposit is added to the consolidated total for the appropriate payment type(s)and to the POS SO Deposit item, which increases the Customer Deposits liability account.

+

Note that while these deposit receipts show a link in Point of Sale to the general journal transaction created for the day in QuickBooks, they in fact do not affect the Cost of Goods Sold or Income Asset accounts since the items on a customer order are not actually sold when a deposit is taken.

+

A customer order deposit paid by check or charge on account is always sent to QuickBooks as an individual sales receipt or invoice, respectively. No general journal entry is created for these transactions.

+

If you send detailed information to QuickBooks:

+

Deposits are sent as their own sales receipt (cash, check, card, gift certificate) or invoice (charge to account). Since the items on the order have not yet been sold, the individual items listed on a customer order do not appear on the documents created in QuickBooks and no general journal entry is made.

+

 

+

Deposits Applied to Sales

+

When customer order deposits are applied to the final sales receipt in Point of Sale (to actually sell the items), the new sales receipt is sent in the same manner as other sales receipts and a general journal entry is made to reflect the effect on Cost of Goods Sold and Inventory Asset Accounts. The Customer Deposits (liability) account is decreased by the amount of the deposit used as payment on the sale.

+

If you send summarized data to QuickBooks, deposits used that were originally paid by cash, credit/debit/gift card or gift certificate appear on the consolidated receipt for the day. Customer Order deposits used on receipts paid by check or charge to account will appear on the corresponding receipt or invoice created in your financial software.

+

If you send detailed information to QuickBooks, deposits used appear on the corresponding sales receipt (cash, check, card, gift certificate) or invoice (charge to account) created in your financial software.

+

You can use these links for more information and illustrations:

+ +

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_exchangereports.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_exchangereports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..911dcc3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_exchangereports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange Reports

+

Overview | Verify the Exchange of Transactions

+

 

+

Several reports are available to help you verify the success of data exchanges with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

These detailed reports, for receipts, vouchers, customers, vendors, and adjustment memos, provide the document/transaction name and number created in your financial software as well as other information.

+

In the Report Center, select Financial Exchange as the report category and then choose a specific report. All normal report filtering and customization options are available.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Modify reports

+

Work with a displayed report

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_financialcenter.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_financialcenter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..05adbe0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_financialcenter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +The Financial Center + + + + + + + + + + + +

The Financial Center

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

The Financial Center provides a single access point to all activities related to exchanging data with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. 

+

To access the Financial Center:

+ +

Or

+ +

image\qbfs_financialcenter.gif

+

From the Financial Center, you can:

+ +

The following options are available after selecting Show Advanced Options from the Overview page:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c04aa45 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +qbfs_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic.

+ +

Initiate a Financial Exchange

+

View transactions created in QuickBooks

+

Use the Financial Center

+

View the Exchange activity log

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Recover Point of Sale data in QuickBooks

+

 

+

Setting Up Financial Exchange

+

Prepare for Financial Exchange

+

Make the initial connection to QuickBooks

+

Review and customize my Financial Exchange setup

+

Import items from QuickBooks

+

Use Remote Data Sharing (RDS) (Advanced Users)

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_installoption2.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_installoption2.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..69a7feb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_installoption2.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Installed on the Point of Sale Server Workstation and Another Network Workstation + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Installed on the Point of Sale Server Workstation and Another Network Workstation

+

QuickBooks Installation Options | About Server/Client Workstations

+

 

+

Select Print at the top of the help viewer to print this topic for reference.

+

 

+

Summary of this Configuration

+ +

To set up this configuration:

+

Be sure that the two computers are properly networked in a peer-to-peer configuration. Refer to your Windows documentation or consult a qualified computer technician if you need assistance in mapping network drives or setting a folder to share access as required in this procedure.

+

For purposes of this procedure we'll refer to the Point of Sale Server Workstation as the "Register" and the QuickBooks financial software computer as the "Office" computer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Install QuickBooks financial software on the Office computer and set up your financial company file.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Office computer, set the folder that contains your QuickBooks company file to "Share" status.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Register (Point of Sale Server) computer, map a drive to the QuickBooks company file folder on the Office computer.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Close QuickBooks financial on the Office computer.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Install QuickBooks financial software on the Register computer, using your existing QuickBooks CD and instructions.

    +
    6. +
+

This is allowed by a single-user QuickBooks license agreement even though you already have QuickBooks installed on your Office computer, provided that multiple users do not access QuickBooks simultaneously from both computers.

+
    +
  1. +

    Launch QuickBooks financial software on the Register computer and log on with Administrator rights. Open your QuickBooks company file that is stored on the Office computer from the Register (across the network, do not open QuickBooks on the Office computer).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Optional: Create a new user in your QuickBooks Financial Software with full Administrator rights called "QBPOS User" or similar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Save your settings and exit QuickBooks on the Register computer.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

To conduct Financial Exchanges:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open QuickBooks financial software and sign in as "Administrator" or as the "QBPOS User" you set up above on the Office computer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From Point of Sale at the Register, use the Connection Wizard (select Financial Center from the Financial Menu) to connect.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If given the choice during the initial connection, choose the option to "Allow this connection always, even if QuickBooks is not running." If not give this choice during the connection, you can set it up later with these instructions.

    +
    4. +
+

From that point on, Point of Sale will silently connect to QuickBooks to conduct Financial Exchanges. You do not have to ever open QuickBooks on the Register computer or have it open in the Office during Financial Exchanges (you cannot be signed in to QuickBooks on the Office computer during exchanges if you have only a single user license).

+

Your employees cannot access your financial records from the Register (assuming you are using login names and password protection).

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Prepare QuickBooks for Financial Exchange

+

QuickBooks Connection Wizard Overview

+

Conduct Routine Financial Exchanges

+

Customize Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_itemaccounts_limits.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_itemaccounts_limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f9d9c49 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_itemaccounts_limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +qbfs_itemaccounts_limits + + + + + + + + +

Income Account Mapping Limitations

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

Due to a rule in QuickBooks financial software that allows only one Accounts Receivable or Accounts Payable account per transaction, the following accounts and account types are not allowed to be mapped to the Point of Sale item Income Account field:

+ +

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_itemaccts_subaccts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_itemaccts_subaccts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..51002d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_itemaccts_subaccts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + +Mapping Item Sub-Accounts by Department or Store + + + + + + + + + + + +

Map Item Sub-Accounts by Department or Store

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

Your default item accounts for Financial Exchange are set on the Financial page of company preferences. When setting these defaults, you can also choose to have Point of Sale automatically create and use department sub-accounts.

+

(Pro) You can also choose to map item sub-accounts by store.

+

To create and use item sub-accounts:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company and then select the Financial Accounts page from the left-side menu. There may be a slight delay as Point of Sale connects to your financial software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Basic tab, select the check box titled Automatically create sub-accounts based on and then select Department.

    +
    3. +
+

(Pro) Or select an available alternative.

+

 

+

Example accounts for inventory item in Widgets department at Store 1

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Sub accounts based on:

+		 +

Example Income Accounts

+
+

sub-accounts not enabled

+		 +

Sales:Merchandise

+
+

Department

+		 +

Sales: Merchandise: Widgets

+
+

Department, then Store

+		 +

Sales: Merchandise: Widgets: Store 1

+
+

Store, then Department

+		 +

Sales: Merchandise: Store 1: Widgets

+
+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Use sub-accounts for list, select Income Accounts only (default setting) or Income, COGS, and Asset to use sub-accounts with all three account types.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

When this option is set, your default item accounts will be appended with sub-accounts as specified and the item form in inventory will indicate your settings, though the actual sub-account names are not shown due to space limitations.

+

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_payouts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_payouts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ffa470 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_payouts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Cash Drawer Payouts + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Cash Drawer Payouts

+

Overview | Pay Money out of the Cash Drawer

+

 

+

Cash drawer payouts are sent to QuickBooks as general journal transactions against the Cash in Drawer account and the Cash Drawer Payout expense account (or another expense or liability account you specify when creating the payout).

+

If you pay employee tips from your cash drawer, you should select the Employee Tips Payable account.

+

 

+

image\qbfs_payout.gif

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_poa.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_poa.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..90f65e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_poa.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Customer Charge Account Information + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Customer Charge Account Information

+

Customer Charge Accounts Overview | Past Due Accounts

+
+

Basic

+
+

Summary

+

With each Financial Exchange, Point of Sale sends new account transactions (charges or payments), plus any change to the charge account limit made in Point of Sale, to your QuickBooks financial software. In QuickBooks, the transactions are posted to appropriate accounts and customer invoices (new charges) or customer payments (payments on account) are created.

+

Certain account activities may be handled directly in QuickBooks, such as printing and sending out invoices, recording payments received by mail, adding finance charges, controlling account aging, and calculation of past due amounts.

+

QuickBooks sends back to Point of Sale the updated account balance (which overwrites the Point of Sale value), any change in the account limit made in QuickBooks, and any past due amounts and aging information. The latter can be used to alert cashiers and block additional charges to the account in Point of Sale.  The latest edit to the account limit (called Credit Limit in QuickBooks) in either program overwrites the value in the other program.

+

 

+

How Specific Account Transactions Are Sent to QuickBooks

+

Charges to Account Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Payments on Account Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Notes Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

To learn more:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_qbinstall_options.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_qbinstall_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..466debb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_qbinstall_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Financial Software Installation Options + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software Installation Options

+

Requirements of Integration | Financial Exchange Overview

+

 

+

If you are integrating Point of Sale with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, there are three options for how the two programs can be installed relative to one another to share data.

+

The three options are summarized here. Use the links provided on this page to get more information.

+

 

+

Installation Option 1:  QuickBooks Desktop financial software installed on the Point of Sale Server Workstation

+ +

 

+

Installation Option 2:  QuickBooks Desktop financial software installed on both the Point of Sale Server Workstation and another Network Computer

+ +

Learn more about this option, including how to set it up.

+

 

+

 

+

Installation Option 3:   QuickBooks Desktop financial software installed only on another Network Computer

+ +

Learn more about RDS, including how to get the server/client applications you need to set up this option.

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange

+

QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard Overview

+

Customize Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_receipts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_receipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e5a06ab --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_receipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Sales and Return Receipts + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Sales and Return Receipts

+

Overview | Customize Exchanges | Exchange Reports

+

 

+

Below is a summary of how Point of Sale receipts are transferred to QuickBooks. You can also use the links on this page for more information.

+

Sales receipts are sent to QuickBooks and result in journal transactions and documents as follows:

+ +

If using detailed posting, separate journal entries are made for each Point of Sale transaction. This makes it easier to reverse out a specific change if necessary. The Point of Sale receipt number is added to the Memo line.

+ +

If using detailed posting, each Point of Sale receipt creates a corresponding individual receipt in your financial software listing item and customer detail (if customer record set to exchange). If you send detailed information only for transactions including charges to customer accounts, then only those receipts include item detail.

+ +

Other Amounts that May Be Recorded on Receipts:

+

Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Tips Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Shipping Charges Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Sales Tax Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Gift Card or Certificate Sales or Redemptions Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ +

To learn more:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_receivingvouchers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_receivingvouchers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9cf29d3 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_receivingvouchers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Receiving Vouchers + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Receiving Vouchers

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Receiving merchandise into inventory always increases your Inventory Asset account. Other accounts affected and documents created depend on:

+ +

If you elect to enter billing information in QuickBooks financial software:

+

Use this option if you prefer to handle all vendor billing tasks in your financial software. This is the default setting for new Point of Sale users.

+ +

If the vendor billing information received and entered in QuickBooks includes charges or adjustments not entered on the original voucher in Point of Sale, such as a freight charges, discounts, or fees, there will be a difference between the documents in the two programs unless you also edit the voucher in Point of Sale to add these items.

+

If you elect to enter billing information in Point of Sale:

+

This is the default setting if you have upgraded from a version of Point of Sale prior to 5.0. If upgrading from Version 5.0, your prior setting is retained.

+ + +

Fees and Discounts on Vouchers

+

If a voucher with unspread fees and/or discounts is sent to Unbilled Purchases, the fees and discounts will not be taken into account on the initial general journal entry. Instead, the final bill sent to your financial software (once an invoice for the voucher has been received) will be adjusted to reflect any fees or discounts. If you spread these amounts over the item costs, the amounts are reflected in the net item costs.

+

 

+

Note: If you send detailed item information to QuickBooks financial software, individual items will be listed on the QuickBooks document created However, information on General Journal transactions created for vouchers where billing information has not yet been entered never show individual items.

+

 

+

You can use these links for more information:

+ +

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_returnvouchers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_returnvouchers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bde5c41 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_returnvouchers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Return Vouchers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Return Vouchers

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | Return Vouchers

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale return vouchers are sent to QuickBooks as vendor credits.

+ +

Use these links for more information:

+ +

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_salesdiscounts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_salesdiscounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..42c7692 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_salesdiscounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Sales Discounts + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Sales Discounts

+

Overview | Customize Exchanges | Exchange Reports

+

 

+

By default, Point of Sale sends discounted item sale amounts to your QuickBooks financial software in "net" amounts, i.e., the discount amount is not accounted for separately.

+

The preference setting discussed here can be used to send both the original item price and the discounted price, so that you can use QuickBooks reports to see how discounts are affecting your bottom line.

+

To send separate original and discounted values:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Financial from the left-side menu. There may be a slight delay as Point of Sale connects to your QuickBooks company file.Comapny Preferences > Financial > Send discounted items with

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Change the discounted items setting to Separate original and discounted values.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Creating Discount Accounts in QuickBooks Financial Software

+

Point of Sale will automatically create the necessary discount accounts in your financial software to properly report the discounts. These accounts will be on the same hierarchical level as your item income accounts. For example, if the income for an item is Sales: Merchandise then the created discount account will be Sales: Merchandise Discounts.

+

When necessary, discounts in your financial software are split across tax codes and by item income accounts, reflecting the fact that items on a sale may have different tax codes and income accounts. The discounts are split to maintain accurate tax liability and income reporting.

+

(Pro) If you use the Customer Rewards program in Point of Sale, the discounts given as rewards are handled in the same way, except a separate discount account, Sales: Reward Discounts is used if sending separate discount values. If you use store coupons to give discounts, the discounts given as coupons are handled in the same way, except the items created in QuickBooks to track the discounts will have the Receipt Item Discount Level written to the QuickBooks item description field.

+

 

+

Note: In your QuickBooks financial software, discounts are tracked with "discount' item types. The discount item is added to the transaction to show the discount amount. Discount items can apply to a sold item individually or to a "subtotal" item that totals several items. Due to the way discounts are handled in your financial software, you may notice slight rounding differences between a transaction in Point of Sale and the corresponding transaction in QuickBooks.

+

 

+

For more information:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange: Sales and Return Receipts

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_salestax.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_salestax.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ce525b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_salestax.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Sales Tax + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Sales Tax

+

Exchange Overview | Sales Tax Integration with QuickBooks

+

 

+

Sales taxes are reflected in the sales receipts sent to QuickBooks and affect the Sales Tax Payable liability account.

+

For more information:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_transfers.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_transfers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab7dce5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_transfers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Transfers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Transfers

+

Exchange Overview | Transfer Merchandise between Stores

+
+

 

+
+

A transfer of merchandise between stores does not result in any net change in your company inventory value. However, if freight charges are entered on the transfer slip or if you have elected to track stores by class in QuickBooks, transfer slips are sent and create a general journal transaction to update accounts accordingly.

+

By default, freight charges are posted to the Freight & Shipping Costs expense and POS Inventory Adjustment accounts, and if tracking stores by class, the Inventory Asset accounts for each store class are updated.

+

You can use these links for more information and illustrations:

+ +

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_vendors.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_vendors.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b6c5ac --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_vendors.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Vendors + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Vendors

+

Exchange Overview | Exchange Reports | Vendors Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Existing active vendors from your QuickBooks financial software are automatically added to your Point of Sale vendor list with the first Financial Exchange.

+

New and edited vendor records in either program are then routinely sent to the other with each exchange.

+

The exceptions to this are:

+ +

Notes:

+ +

You can use these links for more information and illustrations:

+ +

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_vendorterms.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_vendorterms.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a1a3f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/qbfs_vendorterms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Vendor Payment Terms + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Vendor Payment Terms

+

Exchange Overview | Enter Vendor Billing Information

+
+

Basic

+
+

Vendor payment terms are used to calculate when a bill is due and what (if any) discount percentage should be applied to the bill. The terms defined on the vendor record in Point of Sale are automatically suggested on all purchase orders and receiving vouchers made for that vendor.

+

When exchanging data with QuickBooks, the default payment terms defined in QuickBooks are automatically populated to the vendor record in Point of Sale for imported vendors. Changing the terms in either program updates the other with the same change on the next exchange.

+

If you enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale, adding different terms to a voucher will also add those terms to the QuickBooks terms list, but will not overwrite the default terms for the vendor in either program. The voucher terms will also be carried to the bill created in QuickBooks.

+

You can use these links for more information and illustrations:

+ +

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/receiving_copyandcorrectvoucher.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/receiving_copyandcorrectvoucher.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5057f82 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/receiving_copyandcorrectvoucher.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Copy and Correct a Reversed Voucher + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy and Correct a Reversed Voucher

+

Find a Voucher | Edit a Voucher | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Copying and correcting a reversed voucher allows you to adopt the parts of the original voucher that you want to keep, and correct the parts that were in error on the original, to make a new, correct voucher.

+

To copy and correct a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Reverse the original voucher.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the original voucher again (marked Reversed in the Status field) in receiving history.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Copy.

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Make necessary edits to the information on the new voucher.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Print Voucher.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Multi-Store Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Cancel or hold a voucher in progress

+

Multi-store purchasing & receiving overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch701.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch701.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb8d5ab --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch701.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Access Vouchers & Receiving History + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Receiving Vouchers & History

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Create a Voucher | Receiving Preferences

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

To access receiving vouchers:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch702.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch702.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ea00e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch702.htm @@ -0,0 +1,266 @@ + + + + + + + + +Create a Receiving Voucher: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a Receiving Voucher: Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Voucher Information Fields

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

A voucher adds items received from a vendor to your Point of Sale inventory.  A voucher can also be used to record the return of items to a vendor, which subtracts the returned quantity from inventory.

+

Below is the basic procedure to create a voucher that is not receiving against a purchase order.

+

Receiving items ordered on a PO?  Use this procedure instead.

+

 

+

Click the Click to expand/collapse topic symbols in this procedure to view detail.

+ +

To make a receiving voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the Point of Sale home page, select Receive Items  from the Purchasing menu. A blank voucher is opened.

    +
    2. +
+

View Example Voucher Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

(Pro) Headquarters only: If creating the voucher for another store, select Change Store from the I Want To menu and enter the store number.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    In the Scan or enter item information drop-down box, scan or type item information to list the items being received.Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

Click Quick Pick Item to select an item from your pre-defined lists of frequently received items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the action buttons below the line item to edit the quantity, cost, enter serial numbers, etc. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

Voucher Item

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat until all items being received have been listed.

    +
    2. +
+

Note: It is suggested you not mix items from different vendors on receiving vouchers as this would hamper your ability to view accurate vendor histories and reports, and make it difficult to match vendor invoices with the bills created by point of Sale in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Enter vendor name or phone box, type or scan vendor information to add the vendor to the voucher. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter information in other voucher fields as appropriate. Commonly use fields on vouchers include comments and freight, fees, and discounts which can be spread across item costs at your discretion.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If you want to print tags for the received items, select Print Tags from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
+

If item costs on this voucher are different than what is currently recorded in inventory, you are alerted you may want to review and update your prices before printing tags.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Print Voucher.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

How do I receive an item not yet in inventory?

+

(Pro) If you order an item from multiple vendors read the notes about listing multi-vendor items on vouchers.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copy a voucher

+

Cancel or hold a voucher in progress

+

Effects of saving a receiving voucher

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch715.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch715.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b12c86 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch715.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Voucher Discounts, Freight, and Fees + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Voucher Discounts, Freight, and Fees

+

Create a Voucher: Basic Steps | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Discounts, freight, and fees related to the purchase of merchandise can be added to receiving vouchers at your discretion. Optionally, you can spread these amounts over the cost of the items being received.

+

To add discounts, freight, or fees:

+
    +
  1. +

    If receiving against a purchase order, discounts entered on the PO are automatically transferred proportionally to the voucher and you are prompted and have the option of transferring a fee from the PO. See the notes below for more information.

    +
    2. +
+

AND/OR

+

From the I Want To menu, select Enter Discount/Fee/Freight. Place the cursor in the applicable field and manually enter or edit an amount. Discounts can be entered as a percentage (calculated from the voucher subtotal) or amount.

+

Receiving voucher

+
    +
  1. +

    To spread (allocate) these amounts over the cost of the items being received, select the Spread Discount, Freight and Fees check box. Note that once these amounts have been spread and the voucher saved, they cannot be edited or unspread.  Learn more.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete the voucher and /printsave.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Enter vendor billing information

+

Create a new voucher

+

Copy a voucher

+

Multi-Store purchasing & receiving

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch722.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch722.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d01f22 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch722.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a Saved Voucher + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Saved Voucher

+


+The only information that can be edited on a saved voucher is vendor billing information and freight, fees, and discounts (if they were not entered and spread when the voucher was made).

+

Editing may be further restricted by your security rights, preference settings, and whether the voucher has been sent yet to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. For multi-store configurations, the store location, and whether the voucher has been sent to Headquarters are also factors.

+

To edit a former voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and select the voucher in your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Enter Billing Info or Enter Discount/Fee/Freight.

    +
    3. +
+

The appropriate dialog is opened.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in the available fields (editable fields are white in color). Learn more about: Vendor Billing Information or Freight, Fees, & Discounts

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click OK.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch723.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch723.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c6c1d3d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch723.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + +Reverse a Voucher + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse a Voucher

+

Find a Voucher | Edit a Voucher | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

If an error is discovered on a saved voucher, other than in the editable fields, it is necessary to reverse the voucher and then create a new, corrected one to update your receiving history and inventory.

+

To reverse a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight/display the voucher to be reversed in your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Reverse from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop, a notice about the vendor credit that will be created is displayed. Read and confirm this message.

+

If needed, create a new corrected voucher as described here.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch740.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch740.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d4fa6b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch740.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Vouchers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Vouchers

+

E-mail Documents | Printing Basics

+
+

Basic

+
+

If creating a new voucher select Print Voucher to both print and save the voucher.

+

To print a voucher from receiving history:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and select the voucher in your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Reprint.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If presented with a print option dialog, you may:

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Preview or Print to output the vouchers

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receiving overview

+

Print tags

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch751.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch751.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a03a861 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch751.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Handling Voucher Costs + + + + + + + + + + +

Handling Voucher Costs

+

Receiving Overview | Update Item Prices When Costs Change

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale averages the cost of inventory items. This means that when items are received at a cost different from the current average unit cost in inventory, the received quantities and costs are averaged together with the existing inventory quantities and costs to determine the new average unit cost of the item.

+

Example: If you have 10 of an item that was purchased at an order cost of $5 and then receive 10 more purchased at an order cost of $10, the new average unit cost of the item is $7.50.

+

(10 x 5) + (10 x 10)/20 = 7.50

+

 

+

This allows you to set an accurate profit margin for items and maintain an accurate inventory valuation when using Point of Sale in conjunction with QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

When receiving merchandise, Point of Sale will suggest the cost  on the voucher as: 1) the order cost on a referenced purchase order, or, if no purchase order is involved, 2) the current order cost from inventory.

+

Review and ensure that the correct cost information is entered on the voucher.

+

To change the voucher cost of an item when receiving:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the item in the voucher item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Qty/Cost, enter the new cost, then click OK.

    +
    3. +
+

If the voucher cost is different than what is recorded in inventory, Point of Sale will alert you that you may want to review and edit your item prices.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

How vouchers are transferred to QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch752.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch752.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be9837f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch752.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + + +Receive Items Ordered on a Purchase Order + + + + + + + + + + +

Receive Items Ordered on a Purchase Order

+

Receiving Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Receiving against a purchase order (PO) is the fastest and most accurate way to receive merchandise. A voucher can receive against one or more POs, and additional items can be added to the voucher using normal methods.

+

 

+

Important Note: If maintaining accurate vendor histories, receiving reports, and being able to match up vendor bills and invoices in your financial software is important to you, we recommend against receiving against purchase orders from different vendors on a single receiving voucher. A good practice is to receive against a single PO from a single vendor with each voucher. Likewise, if you spread freight, fees, and discounts across item costs, it is a good practice to receive against only one purchase order per voucher. Otherwise, you may be spreading fees or discounts associated with one order over items from another.

+

 

+

Receiving items ordered on a PO can be initiated from a new voucher (as described below) or directly from the purchase order against which you are receiving. From the purchase order you are receiving against:  Select Receive Items from the I Want to Menu

+

To receive items ordered on a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Purchasing menu at the home page, select Receive Items. A blank receiving voucher is opened.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

     From the I Want To menu, select Receive from PO. The Select POs dialog is opened.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    At the top of the Select POs dialog, select the vendor. Only POs from the selected vendor are shown.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Choose the PO(s) to receive against by selecting the checkboxes on the left. You can select one, multiple, or all POs in the list.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Receive All Due to bring ALL the due items and quantities from selected POs to the voucher.

    +
    6. +
+

OR

+

Choose Select Items to Receive to receive only some of the items. Enter quantities for the items you want to bring to the voucher in the Doc Qty field and then select Continue. Learn more

+

Tip: If receiving all but a few of the items, it may be faster to choose Receive All Due and then edit the quantities on the voucher.

+
    +
  1. +

    If the referenced PO(s) include fees, you are asked if you would like to apply them to this voucher. Select Yes or No.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review the Unit Cost and Qty of each item to be sure they reflect the actual order values. Edit it if necessary.  Learn more about voucher costs

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, add other received items (not on PO) using standard item listing methods.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To enter or edit discounts, fees, and/or freight charges, select Enter Discount/Fee/Freight from the I Want To menu and enter the amounts. If applicable, select the Spread discount, freight and fee check box to allocate these amounts over the individual item costs. Learn more about spreading these amounts

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If available, review or enter vendor billing information. Select Enter Billing Info from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save & Print.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

       Voucher item

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Warn if PO is past its cancel date

+

Enter vendor billing information

+

Edit voucher items

+

Update item prices from a receiving voucher

+

Print tags

+

Effects of saving a receiving voucher

+

Multi-store purchasing & receiving

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch753.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch753.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6948e25 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch753.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Voucher Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Voucher Items

+

Edit Other Voucher Information | Delete Items

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are two methods of editing items after listing them on a voucher (but before saving).

+ +

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

List items

+

Receive items from a PO

+

Receiving overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch754.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch754.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..030328d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouch754.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + +Effects of Saving a Receiving Voucher + + + + + + + + + + + +

Effects of Saving a Receiving Voucher

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Receiving Overview | Receiving Preferences

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

When you print/save a receiving voucher, Point of Sale performs the following actions:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Receiving overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_billinginfo.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_billinginfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..734669d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_billinginfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Vendor Billing Information + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Vendor Billing Information

+

Receiving Overview | How Vouchers are Sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can enter vendor billing information, such as Invoice #, terms, bill and due dates, etc. for your merchandise purchases in either Point of Sale or in QuickBooks Desktop financial software. The setting that determines if the vendor billing fields are on the Point of Sale voucher form is located in company preferences.

+

 

+

Note: This setting affects whether the necessary fields are included on the voucher form and how vouchers are sent to your financial software. We recommend you use the "How Vouchers are Sent..." link above to read about the differences before changing this setting.

+

 

+

By default, the vendor billing fields are not on the Point of Sale voucher form. You can change this setting if you do not use QuickBooks Desktop financial software or if you prefer entering the information in Point of Sale.

+

To change where vendor billing information is entered:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Receiving from the left-hand preference menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select or clear the check box labeled Enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

With the vendor billing fields added to Point of Sale, you can easily review and add billing information when you are making or editing a voucher.

+

To enter vendor billing information on the voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the voucher displayed, select Enter Billing Info from the I Want To menu. The Billing Information dialog is displayed. View example Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review and enter/edit information as needed. Typically, this information comes from the invoice from the vendor.  The vendor terms are suggested as the default terms from the vendor record or are carried from the PO. They can be edited here if necessary for this shipment.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b1fa3ee --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +voucher_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Receiving Merchandise: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Access receiving vouchers and receiving history

+

Create a new voucher

+

Receive items ordered on a purchase order (PO)

+

Record freight, fees, and discounts

+

Enter vendor billing information

+

Find a voucher

+

Edit a voucher

+

Correct (reverse) a voucher

+

Return merchandise to vendors

+

View a vendors receiving history

+

Handle voucher cost and price

+

Print tags from vouchers

+ +

More

+ +

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_returns.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_returns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97028b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_returns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Return Merchandise to Vendors + + + + + + + + + + +

Return Merchandise to Vendors

+

Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Merchandise being returned to a vendor is recorded on a  voucher in the same way in which you receive items. The only difference is you enter a negative quantity for the returned items.

+

If the merchandise being returned hasn't been received into your Point of Sale inventory via a receiving voucher, such as when discovering damaged goods upon arrival, you may choose to simply not receive it. No separate return document needs to be made in this case.

+

 

+

Important  Note: If you need to match and reconcile vendor invoices, bills, and payments, such as in QuickBooks Desktop financial software, we recommend never mixing received and returned items on a single voucher. Doing so would result in "net" documents being created in your financial software, instead of individual bills and vendor credits.

+

 

+

You can create a return voucher by manually creating it or by copying the original voucher and making it a return. The second choice is best if returning all or most of  the items received on a voucher.

+

To manually create a return voucher:

+

Follow the basic procedure for creating a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Receive Items from the Purchasing menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    List the quantities and cost of the items being returned.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Save the voucher.

    +
    2. +
+

To make a return by copying the original receiving voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the original receiving voucher in your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Return to Vendor  from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

A new voucher with the same information (except vendor billing information) as the original is opened with the quantities converted to negative quantities..

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the items and other information as needed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save the voucher.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Find a voucher

+

Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_selectpoitems.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_selectpoitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c2bfa31 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_selectpoitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Items to Receive + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Items to Receive

+

Receiving Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

This information applies to the Select Items to Receive window, accessed when receiving against a purchase order.

+

 

+

Use this window to specify the quantity of items being received from selected purchase orders. All remaining due items from the selected POs are included in the list for selection.

+

To select items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the quantity of each item being received in the Doc Qty column,

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Choose Select All to receive all  remaining due items to the voucher.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Continue.

    +
    2. +
+

The items with specified quantities are transferred to the receiving voucher.

+

 

+

Tip:  A quick way to receive most but not all items in the list is to choose Select All to populate the Doc Qty column for all items with the due quantity. Then edit the Doc Qty for the few items not being received before selecting Continue.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_selectpos.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_selectpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..18fc3b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_selectpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Purchase Orders

+

Receiving Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

This information applies to the Select POs window, accessed from a receiving voucher when receiving against purchase orders.

+

 

+

Use this window to select the purchase order(s) from which you are receiving items.

+

To select purchase orders:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Show POs For: field, select a vendor or choose to show POs for all vendors.

    +
    2. +
+

If you already selected the vendor on the voucher, that vendor is pre-selected for you here.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the checkboxes in the Select column to choose POs (or use the Select All button on the right).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select one of the choices for receiving items from the selected POs:

    +
    3. +
+ +

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_spreadcosts.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_spreadcosts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf08bef --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_spreadcosts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + +Spread Discounts, Freight, and Fees Across Item Costs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Spread Discounts, Fees, and Freight Across Item Costs

+

Receive Purchase Order Items | Enter Voucher Discounts, Feels, and Freight

+
+

Basic

+
+

Discounts, fees, and freight entered on a receiving voucher can be spread across the costs of the items being received. Spreading these amounts helps you track a truer average cost for your items.

+

To spread these amounts on a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    List all items being received on the voucher, either manually or by referencing the purchase order on which they were ordered.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Enter Discount/Fee/Freight and enter amounts as applicable.

    +
    3. +
+

Receiving Voucher

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Spread Discount, Freight, and Fee check box.

    +
    2. +
+

Note that the amounts previously entered are zeroed out as these amounts are now spread across the individual item costs on the voucher. The total remains the same.

+

Receiving Voucher with discount, freight, and fees spread

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Close.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete and print/save the voucher.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_updateprices.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_updateprices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5bc2aeb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_updateprices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + +Update Item Prices from a Receiving Voucher + + + + + + + + + + +

Update Item Prices from a Receiving Voucher

+

Receiving Overview | Print Price Tags

+
+

Basic

+
+

It's inevitable. Your vendor raises their price for an item and you need to decide whether to pass on the increase to your customers.

+

Point of Sale alerts you when a reorder item cost on a voucher is different than the current inventory cost, but does not automatically update the price. Whether you change your price and by how much is at your discretion.

+

You can change the price and print new tags from the voucher, if you wish.

+

To update the price and print new tags from the receiving voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    When you go to print/save the voucher, you are alerted that you are receiving an item or items at a new cost. Answer Yes, that you want to review  the prices before saving the voucher.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the item with the new cost in the voucher item list and then click Edit.

    +
    3. +
+

The Item Information window opens, as shown here, displaying price and margin information (other information removed from illustration for clarity).

+

+

The item price shown is your current Regular Price from inventory. The margin and markup numbers show what your profit margin would be at this price relative to the cost on the voucher (not relative to your average unit cost; see note below).

+
    +
  1. +

    Adjust the item price by entering a new price or by adjusting the margin or markup and then select OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To print new price tags from the voucher, with the item highlighted select Print Tags from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Repeat for other items, if applicable.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Print/save the voucher.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Use Markdown Price Levels

+

Price Change Reminders

+

Price/Cost Relationship

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouchersoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouchersoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d47c646 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/vouchersoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + +Receiving Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Receiving Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Receiving Preferences | Voucher Field Descriptions

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

A receiving voucher is a Point of Sale history document that provides a permanent record of merchandise received from a vendor into inventory. A return voucher, on the other hand, records merchandise returned to the vendor and removed from inventory. The term voucher is used to refer to both receiving and return vouchers, unless otherwise specified.

+

After a voucher is saved, it is stored in your receiving history. Both receiving and return vouchers are maintained in a single list.

+

When receiving merchandise ordered on a purchase order, you can bring any or all of the ordered items to the voucher by "referencing" the PO on the voucher. The PO fill status will be updated when the voucher is saved.

+ +

When receiving an item that you have open customer orders for, Point of Sale will alert you and add the item to the fill customer order reminders list. If you generated a purchase order from the customer order to get the item from your vendor, Point of Sale will display the customer order number and customer name right on the receiving voucher to assist in quickly filling the order.

+ +

Saving a voucher updates the received items average unit cost, order cost, and on-hand quantity in inventory. To keep accurate track of the value of your inventory, it is important to enter the correct cost information for received items on the voucher.

+

If an item is received on a voucher at a new cost, you are alerted so you can review and possibly update your prices to maintain your desired profit margin. Item prices are only automatically updated by a voucher if the previous price was $0 (typical for new items being received for first time) and you have defined a margin or markup in inventory.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receiving against a PO

+

Handling vendor billing information

+

Updating item prices when costs change

+

Security rights for receiving

+

How vouchers are sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/About_EMV_receipt_compliance.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/About_EMV_receipt_compliance.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7553c06 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/About_EMV_receipt_compliance.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + +About EMV receipt compliance + + + + + + + + + + +

About EMV receipt compliance

+

Sales Overview | Receipt Fields

+

 

+

EMV is a new US credit card payment standard meant to make credit transactions more secure.  "EMV" stands for Europay, MasterCard, and Visa - the developers of this standard.

+

EMV cards feature smart chips which encrypt data for every sale, making card transactions more secure.  These cards are designed to be inserted into the reader and remain in place throughout the entire transaction.

+

Along with this change, there are new industry standards for the information contained on receipts.  The default 40 column and Letter receipt templates are EMV compliant.  If you use a modified template, make sure to add the fields required for EMV compliance.

+

List of required fields:

+ +

To add fields to a custom receipt template:

+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      Go to File > Tools > Print Designer.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      From the Available Templates list, double-click your receipt template to open it.

      +
      3. +
    3. +

      Click the Add button and choose Data Field or Group of Fields.  Add any fields from the list above that aren't already on your template.

      +
      4. +
    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/giftcard_otherservice.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/giftcard_otherservice.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9ff0cd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/giftcard_otherservice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using Gift Cards from Another Service + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Gift Cards from Another Service

+

Payment Overview | Sign Up for a Gift Card Account

+

 

+

If you do not have an account with the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service, you can still record gift card transactions in Point of Sale, using this procedure.

+

Sell a Gift Card

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales receipt with or without other items listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information field of the receipt, begin typing Gift Card and then select Gift Card from the list of items displayed.  The Sell Gift Card dialog is opened.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the amount and the gift card number and click Save.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Take payment and print/save the receipt in the normal manner.

    +
    2. +
+

Note: Follow your services instructions for processing the transaction to add value to the card.

+

Redeem a Gift Card

+
    +
  1. +

    List the items being purchased on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Gift as the payment type and then select Gift Card.

    +
    3. +
+

Follow your service's instructions for verifying and using the balance available on the card.

+
    +
  1. +

    Ensure Redeem Card is selected in the Gift Card dialog and edit the amount, if necessary, to reflect the gift card balance being used as payment.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Print/save the receipt.

    +
    4. +
+

+

When using another gift card service for these transactions:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1002.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1002.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0c25120 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1002.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Access Receipts and Sales History + + + + + + + + + +

Access Receipts and Sales History

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

The following sales tasks can be accessed from the toolbars, the Point of Sale menu, and the I Want To menus on the home page, in sales history, and on a blank receipt form.

+ +

Many sale and customer order tasks can be also accessed from the I Want To menu in other program areas (customers, inventory, receiving, etc.).

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1005.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1005.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15f5e32 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1005.htm @@ -0,0 +1,247 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Make a Sale + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Make a Sale

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Charges or Credits | Take Payment | Returns

+ +

 

+

This topic provides the basic instructions for making a sale. Use the How Do I? and other links on this page for advanced options and more information.

+

Click the Click to expand/collapse topic symbols in this procedure to view detailed instructions.
+Only Basic and Pro users can track customers on receipts.

+ +

To make a sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Make a Sale button or the Make a Sale icon within the Navigator.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information drop-down box, scan or type item information to search for the item being sold.Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

Click Quick Pick Item to select an item from your pre-defined lists of frequently sold items.

+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary, click the action buttons below the line item to edit the quantity, price, give item discounts, etc.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat until all items being sold have been listed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    (Optional) In the Enter customer name or phone box, type or scan customer information to add the customer to the receipt. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    (Optional) To discount the entire sale (called a global discount), select  Give Discount from the I Want To menu. Select or enter a discount percentage or amount in the popup dialog. Global discounts are shown in the totals area of the receipt.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Click the button for the payment type used by the customer (Cash, Credit, Debit,  etc.) and enter the tendered amount and any requested information. If taking payment by more than one payment type, repeat for each type.  Details

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Print Receipt to record the sale and give the customer a receipt. If change is due the customer, the change amount is displayed.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Learn more

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

E-mail receipts to customers

+

Receipt field descriptions

+

Customize printed receipts and other documents

+

Multi-store Sales

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1006.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1006.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0c62fc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1006.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + + +Change the Sale Price Level + + + + + + + + + + +

Change the Sale Price Level

+

Sales Overview | Make a Sale | Use Price Levels

+

 

+

Your default sales price level, specified in company preferences is automatically used when you make a sale. You can change the price level on a receipt as necessary before taking payment and saving.

+

The current price level is referred to as the active price level and any discounts given are applied against this active price level.

+

To change the price level on a sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Change Price Level.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select a new price level from the Price Level dialog.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Close.

    +
    5. +
+

If you already had items on the receipt when changing the price level, you are asked if you want to update those items to the new price level.

+ +

(Pro) To change the price level on a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

     Display the customer order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Price Level field (in the Totals area), select a new price level from the drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
+

The same procedure applies to updating items already on the customer order as described above for receipts.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Give a discount

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1012.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1012.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8293d74 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1012.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + +Reverse a Receipt + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse a Receipt

+

Merchandise Returns |  | Find a Receipt

+

 

+

Saved receipts cannot be deleted and editing of receipts is restricted to certain informational fields. If information other than what can be edited needs to be corrected, you can reverse the receipt. Reversing a receipt corrects your sales history, inventory quantities, and customer records by creating an equal, but opposite, transaction.

+

This procedure is not recommended for processing routine merchandise returns from a customer.

+

To reverse a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and display the receipt in your Sales History list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, click Reverse.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If prompted, enter additional information. For some payment types (credit, debit) a message informs you that continuing will automatically result in credits back to the customer on their credit/debit account.

    +
    2. +
+

A reversing receipt is automatically created and added to the Sales History list, marked Reversing in the Status field (displayed in the Sales History list only). The original receipt will be marked Reversed.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Pro Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Merchandise returns and exchanges

+

Display a customer's purchase history

+

Find a receipt

+

Sales overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1014.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1014.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b42d367 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1014.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment and Give Change: General Procedure + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment and Give Change: General Procedure

+

Correct or Clear Payments | Open the Cash Drawer

+

 

+

This topic is the general instructions for taking payment and giving change on a sale.

+

To see instructions for a specific payment type, click a link:  credit card, debit/ATM card, check, gift certificate, gift card, or account charge/store credit.

+

When you have completed the receipt, the total Amount Due is shown at the bottom of the receipt. To the left of the amount due are the payment buttons, one for each payment type you accept. In the example shown, Debit is not an accepted payment type so is grayed out.

+

    

+

Set sales preferences - Define the accepted payment types, a default payment type, and other sales options.

+

To take payment and give change:

+

You can accept the full amount by one payment type or split the payment over multiple types.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the button for a payment type.

    +
    2. +
+

The Amount field for the selected payment type shows the total amount due, in this case $75.37.

+

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Accept or enter the amount tendered by the customer:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter (or scan) any additional information requested for this payment method, such as check number or credit card information. Follow the instructions in the dialog to complete the payment.

    +
    2. +
+

You are returned to the receipt, with the accepted payment type flagged (with a check mark).

+
    +
  1. +

    If there is a remaining balance due, repeat Steps 1-3 for each additional payment type until the amount tendered meets or exceeds the total amount due.  

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If change is due the customer, it will default to cash change and be displayed in the Totals area of the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

To give change by a type other than cash, click the appropriate payment button. The selected payment dialog opens, this time with the change option pre-selected (refund, credit, sale of gift card, etc.) . Enter any requested information and save.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Print Receipt and follow the print instructions.

    +
    2. +
+

Alternatively, select Save Only to record the sale without printing the receipt.

+

On applicable sales, the cash drawer opens and the change window is displayed to remind you of the change amount and type to give the customer.

+

 

+ +

Tip: Give cash back while ringing up a purchaseClick to display a popup topic

+ +

Tip: Handle payment by travelers checkClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Print gift receipts

+

Make a sale

+

Take customer order deposits

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1015.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1015.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dc7a62b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1015.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Open the Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + +

Open the Cash Drawer

+

Take Payments on Sales | Record Cash Drawer Payouts

+

 

+

Point of Sale is set up to automatically open a configured cash drawer as you complete a receipt using certain payment methods, such as cash or check. You can specify which payment methods open the cash drawer in company sales preferences.

+

The cash drawer also can be opened manually as explained below.

+

To open the cash drawer manually:

+ +

Or

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Sales overview

+

Compatible cash drawers

+

Troubleshoot the cash drawer

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1016.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1016.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5eadec2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1016.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + +Returns and Exchanges from Customers + + + + + + + + + + +

Returns and Exchanges from Customers

+

Display Customer Purchase History  | Sales History

+

 

+

Merchandise returns and exchanges are recorded on receipts.

+

To process a merchandise return or exchange:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic procedure for Making a Sale, listing the return items on a sales receipt and clicking  Return Item to make the quantity negative.

    +
    2. +
+

+

OR

+

In your sales history, find and select the original receipt and then select Accept Return/Exchange from the I Want To menu.

+ +

     

+ +
    +
  1. +

    On the new receipt, adjust quantities of returned items if necessary and list any new purchase items.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter any other requested item information, such as serial numbers (Pro).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Take payment or give a refund as appropriate:

    +
      +
    • +

      If money is due the customer, it is suggested as cash change. Click a different payment type button to give the refund by another method. Ensure that the refund option is selected in the payment dialog.

      +
      • +
    • +

      Refunds cannot be made to a debit/ATM card. Refund the amount as cash, gift card/certificate, or another method per your store policy.

      +
      • +
    +
    4. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Save and print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Display a customer's purchase history

+

Make a sale

+

Reverse a receipt

+

How receipts are transferred to QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1018.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1018.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d645426 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1018.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Receipt Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Receipt Items

+

Add Receipt Items | Edit Saved Receipts | Returns

+

 

+

The items listed on a receipt can be edited anytime before saving to change the quantity, price, or give a discount. This procedure can also be used for any of the following less-common edits:

+ +

To edit a listed item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the item you want to edit in the receipt item list.

    +
    2. +
+

If you just listed the item, it is automatically highlighted and this step is not necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click an action button below the item:

    +
    2. +
+ +

When selling a miscellaneous item, the Price & Discount window automatically opens so you can enter a quantity and price.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Make a sale

+

Delete listed items

+

Sell service and non-inventory Items

+

Special orders (Pro)

+

Sales overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1022.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1022.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..290e1b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1022.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Display Customer Purchase History + + + + + + + + + + +

Display Customer Purchase History

+

Sales Returns | Exchanges | Sales Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

This information applies while making a sales receipt. You can also access customer history directly from the customer list or record.

+

To display a customer's purchase history:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the customer on the receipt in the normal manner.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click the View/Edit button to the right of the customer name on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

+

The customer record is displayed, including a summary of the customer's purchase history.  Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    When done, close the customer window to return to the receipt in progress.

    +
    2. +
+ +

Related Topics

+

Edit a saved receipt

+

Reverse and correct a receipt

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1028.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1028.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41dacf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1028.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Associate vs. Cashier + + + + + + + + + + + +

Associate vs. Cashier

+

Sales Overview | Employees & Security | Track Commissions

+
+

Pro

+
+

Sales documents (receipts, customer orders) have both a Cashier field and an Associate field.

+ +

If you change the document Associate after listing items on the document you are asked if you want to assign this Associate to all listed items.

+

Examples

+

Example 1: You have one associate working the floor, servicing customers. You pay the associate a commission for the sales she generates. You also have a separate cashier that works the counter, ringing up the sales once the sales associate hands off the customer. The cashier does not earn sales commissions. The cashier should log in to create the receipt, and his name will be auto-filled as the Cashier. The cashier selects the sales associates name in the Associate field at the top of the receipt form. This ensures that the sales associate will be credited for the sale of all commission-eligible items on the sale.

+

Example 2: You have multiple sales associates working the floor in different departments. Each is paid a commission for the sales they generate within their respective areas. You also have a cashier that does not receive commissions, as described above. When the customer comes to the counter to complete the sale, the cashier identifies the sales associate item-by-item for all of the sold merchandise, by clicking Edit and selecting the Associate from the drop-down list in the  Assign this items commission to field in the item dialog). In this way, each of the associates involved will get credit for the sales in their responsibility area.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track employees without requiring logins

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1029.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1029.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4132737 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1029.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Enter a Customer on a Receipt + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter a Customer on a Receipt

+

Customer Overview | Make a Sale

+
+

Basic

+
+

Entering customers when making sales is optional; though it can be required with a company preference setting. Entering customers allows you to build customer purchase histories and to offer customer-specific discounts, price levels, and tax locations.

+

Any customer on file can be entered and a new customer can be added while completing a sale.

+

To enter a customer on a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Customer field, begin typing the customer last name (recommended) or other search keyword (first name, phone number, company name, etc).

    +
    2. +
+

As you type, Point of Sale shows a drop-down list of your matching customers, separated into last name matches and matches using all customer fields. If there are last name matches, they are displayed first. Click the results line to open all field matches if necessary.

+

+

Option: With no entry in the field, you can click the icon to show your entire customer list. You can scroll through the list to look for the customer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click a name to select it. Keyboard users can use the arrow up/down keys to move through the list and <Enter> to make a selection.

    +
    2. +
+

The customer is added to the customer field on the receipt and their phone number and address is displayed for confirmation.

+ +

Customer field on receipt

+

Not all customer information is displayed on a receipt. For example, the customer's charge account information and check acceptance status are not displayed. However, you will be notified if a credit limit is exceeded, if checks are not accepted, or if a reward is available for the customer.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer charge accounts

+

Customer rewards program

+

Add a new customer

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1033.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1033.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2f57635 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1033.htm @@ -0,0 +1,224 @@ + + + + + + + + +Give a Discount + + + + + + + + + + + +

Give a Discount

+

Make a Sale

+

 

+

There are several ways to discount a sale.  Click the discount type you wish to learn about?

+

Manual item discount Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Global discount (to entire sale) Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer discount Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer reward Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Automatic discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

While not considered discounts for reporting purposes, you can also use markdown price levels  to give a customer a different price.

+

Pro Note: The same discount options (except rewards) apply to customer orders. The procedures for applying discounts on customer orders is the same, although button names may be slightly different on the customer order forms. Discounts given on a customer order are automatically carried to the final sales receipt.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Discount priority and conflicts

+

Discount pricing overview

+

How are discounts sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software?

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1049.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1049.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..baacf98 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1049.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + +Apply Tax to Sales + + + + + + + + + + +

Apply Tax to Sales

+

Sales Tax Overview | Sales Tax FAQs | Configure Sales Tax

+

 

+

If you are configured to collect sales tax, the tax is automatically calculated and applied to each sale:

+ +

If necessary, the tax code assigned to an item or the tax location applied to the entire sale can be manually changed on a sales receipt before saving.

+

To change the tax code of an item being sold:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the item on the document.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight the item and then click Edit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Item Properties dialog, select a new tax code from the drop-down list in the Tax Code field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click OK.

    +
    5. +
+

The item tax amount and the receipt total are recalculated.

+

To change the tax location for the entire sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the  receipt displayed, select Change Tax Location from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

The Change Tax Location window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a new tax location.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose Select to close the window.

    +
    3. +
+

This change can be made before or after items are added to the receipt.  If items were previously added, the sales tax will be recomputed to reflect the new tax location.

+

 

+

Pro Note: The same procedures apply to customer orders. You can also change the tax code directly in the item list on Customer Orders, if the Tax Code column is displayed.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

How do I change the default tax location used for all sales at my store?

+

How do I collect tax on shipping amounts?

+

How do I collect tax only when an items unit price exceeds a set threshold?

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1054.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1054.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a478131 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1054.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Specific Payment Methods + + + + + + + + + + +

Specific Payment Methods

+

Payment Overview | Correct or Clear Payments

+

 

+

Read the following topics for details about processing different payment methods at point of sale.

+

Payment by cash

+

Payment by credit card

+

Payment by debit/ATM card

+

Payment by check

+

Charge to customer account (or apply store credit)

+

Take a payment on customer account (or give store credit)

+

Redeem a gift card

+

Redeem a gift certificate

+

Tip: Handling payment by travelers check

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Merchant Service overview

+

Gift Card Service overview

+

Make a sale

+

Merchandise returns

+

Sales overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1062.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1062.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b8a956 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1062.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sales Exchanges + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Exchanges

+

Sales Returns | Sales Overview

+ +

This topic has been hidden. Info for exchanges combined with return topic.

+ +

When a customer returns an item to exchange for another, you are doing two transactions on one receipt: a return of one item and a sale of another. Point of Sale will automatically calculate any difference in item prices and sales tax.

+

To handle a merchandise exchange:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic sale procedure, listing both items directly on the receipt and selecting Make this item a return for the returned item. For more information on this procedure, see Making a Sales Receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

+

 

+

OR

+

With the original sales receipt selected in sales history or the customer's history, select Exchange Items from the I Want To menu. This method allows you to verify the item prices and quantities from the original receipt.

+

The Merchandise Return wizard is opened, with the items and prices from the original receipt listed.
+You can customize the columns in this window.

+

 

+

+

 

+

Select the items being exchanged in the upper list using the checkboxes. Change the quantity if necessary.

+

Then enter the new exchange item in the bottom list using standard item listing procedures. Select Accept Exchange when done. The return and new sale item quantities and prices are transferred to the sales receipt and the amount due from or to the customer is calculated for you.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter any requested item information, such as serial numbers (Pro).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Take payment or give change, as applicable, for any difference and then save and print the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+ +

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1068.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1068.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b2a4464 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1068.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Sell Service and Non-Inventory Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell Service and Non-Inventory Items

+

Sales Overview | Inventory Item Types

+

 

+

Service items are typically used to charge for repairs, alterations, warranty work, or other non-merchandise charges. Service items can be used to charge for labor by the hour (see note below). On-hand quantities are not tracked for service items in inventory (always = 0).

+

Non-inventory items are identical to service items in that they always have a zero on-hand quantity in inventory. Non-inventory items can be used to record the sale of miscellaneous charges or fees or for selling incidental items not individually tracked in inventory.

+

Having two item types for which quantities are not tracked in inventory allows you to categorize and send non-merchandise sales to your QuickBooks financial software using two separate accounts.  

+

To list a service or non-inventory item:

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use decimal quantities

+

Charge for services by the hour

+

Collect government-mandated fees

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1089.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1089.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d68f7a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt1089.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Pay Money out of the Cash Drawer (Payouts) + + + + + + + + + + +

Pay Money out of the Cash Drawer (Payouts)

+

Open the Cash Drawer | Sales Overview

+

 

+

Cash sometimes needs to be removed from the cash drawer. For example, you may remove cash from the cash drawer to buy office supplies, make a donation,  purchase pizza for the office party, or to have less cash on hand for security reasons.

+

To record a cash drawer payout:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Home Page, select New Payout from the Point of Sale menu

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From a new receipt or your sales history, select New Payout from the I Want to Menu.

+

The Cash Paid Out dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    If you are not requiring employee logins, enter your name in the Cashier field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the amount in the Amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If you are using QuickBooks Desktop financial software, select a QuickBooks account from the drop-down list in the Account field.

    +
    4. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    (Required) Record the reason for the payout in the Comment field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click OK.

    +
    3. +
+

A Payout receipt is generated and placed in your sales history. The amount of the payout is recorded as a negative amount.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Handling bank deposits after Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_copyandcorrect.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_copyandcorrect.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c21fd66 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_copyandcorrect.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Copy and Correct a Reversed Receipt + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy and Correct a Reversed Receipt

+

Sales Overview | Find a Receipt

+

 

+

This procedure typically follows reversing a receipt. Copying and correcting a reversed receipt allows you to adopt the parts of the original receipt that you want to keep, and edit the parts that were inaccurate, to make a new, correct receipt.

+

To copy and correct a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and reverse the original receipt in your sales history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight or display the original receipt in your sales history again (status of Reversed).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the I Want to Menu, select Copy.

    +
    4. +
+

A new receipt is created with the same information as the original, except payment information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make any necessary changes to correct the information on the new receipt.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Record payments for the receipt as usual. Typically, you would record payment/change by the same methods as the original.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save & Print.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Pro Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Display a customer's purchase history

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_govtfees.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_govtfees.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c29ab32 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_govtfees.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + +Collect Government-mandated Fees + + + + + + + + + + +

Collect Government-mandated Fees

+Use Non-Inventory Items | Sales Overview | Sales Tax Overview +

 

+

If you are required to collect government-mandated fees on the sale of certain items, such as for recycling or hazardous materials disposal, we recommend using a non-inventory item, which gives you the ability to track and report on these fees in a variety of ways.

+

The following is one example for handling this. Adjust this procedure to meet the specific requirements in your area.

+

Example: Waste Recycling Fee

+

You sell electronics and are required to collect a waste recycling fee on the sale of each TV you sell. This fee must be applied separately from sales tax and is not itself subject to sales tax. You need reporting capabilities that allow you to track and pay these fees to a government agency periodically.

+
    +
  1. +

    Set up a vendor, with the name of the agency to which you pay the fees collected. (Point of Sale Free users, skip this step.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In inventory, add a non-inventory item:

    +
    3. +
+

If the fee varies by TV size or model, you can set up a separate non-inventory item for each or set up one fee item and edit it to enter the fee amount as adding to a sale receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in the item fields. In our example:

    +
    2. +
+

Vendor The vendor set up in Step 1.

+

Department Use the TV department or set up and use a "Fee" department, depending on how you want to track and report the fees collected.

+

Description   "Waste Recycling Fee" or similar.

+

Attribute/Size (optional) If the fee varies and you are setting up a separate fee item for each, use these fields to identify the specifics of the item to which this fee applies, such as 20, 25, 32, 42, etc. for TV sizes.

+

Price The fee amount.

+

Average Unit cost Typically $0.  (Point of Sale Free users, skip this step.)

+

Tax Code Any of your non-taxable codes, such as Exempt.

+

QuickBooks Information If you want this fee to be recorded in QuickBooks financial software to accounts other than the default for non-inventory items, select the accounts from the drop-down lists.

+
    +
  1. +

    Save the item.

    +
    2. +
+

To charge the fee on sales:

+
    +
  1. +

    List both the TV being sold and the non-inventory fee item on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Edit the fee description or amount, if necessary.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Take payment for the full amount due and save/print the receipt.

    +
    4. +
+

The printed sales receipt will list the fee and the fee amount.

+

To report on fees collected:

+
    +
  1. +

    Run a sales report for the reporting period; e.g. monthly, quarterly, yearly.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: Use the General Sales - Vendor Summary or General Sales - Department Summary report, depending on how configured.

+
    +
  1. +

    Modify the report to:

    +
    2. +
+ +

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_ingenico2100_note.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_ingenico2100_note.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..62290d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_ingenico2100_note.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +receipt_ingenico2100_note + + + + + + + + + + +

Notes: Using the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 PINpad

+

Popup topic; has been hidden.

+

 

+

Step 1: The customer can swipe their card at anytime; they do not have to wait for you to go to the receipt Payment window.

+ +

Step 2: If the customer finished entering information on the PIN pad before you reached the Payment window, the receipt amount is auto-filled in the appropriate payment field and the authorization window is opened. Skip to Step 5 in this case. If you selected take payment before the customer finished, complete Step 3 and then skip to Step 5.

+

Step 5: The customer must select ok on the PIN pad to approve the total transaction amount . (You will see the "Waiting for customer input" message until customer approves the amount.)

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_acctcharge.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_acctcharge.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..52744c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_acctcharge.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + +Charge a Purchase to Customer Account (or Apply a Credit) + + + + + + + + + + +

Charge a Purchase to Customer Account (or Apply a Credit)

+

Maintain Customer Accounts | Take Payments on Account

+
+

Basic

+
+

Use this procedure to charge a purchase to a customer's account or to apply a store credit to a sale.

+

Note: Applying a store credit is essentially the same as charging a purchase on account and the same procedure is used.

+

To charge a sale to a customers account:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the items and customer on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Account payment button. The Charge Account dialog is opened with Charge to account pre-selected and the full sale amount suggested in the Charge Amount field. The customer's current account balance is displayed for reference.

    +
    3. +
+

+
    +
  1. +

    To charge the full amount to the customer's account, just click Save.

    +
    2. +
+

To charge other than the full amount, type the new amount and then click  Save.

+
    +
  1. +

    If only a portion of the purchase amount was charged, take payment for the remaining balance by another payment type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save and print the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

If Point of Sale is integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software the following also apply:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Take a payment on account

+

Make a sale

+

Correct or clear payments

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_cash.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_cash.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e337914 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_cash.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment by Cash + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment by Cash

+

Payment Overview | Correct or Clear Payments

+

To take payment by cash:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Cash button.  

    +
    2. +
+

The Cash dialog opens, with the balance due displayed in the Amount field.

+

+
    +
  1. +

    Accept or enter the amount tendered by the customer:

    +
    2. +
+ +

OR

+

Click the denomination buttons to enter the tendered amount (e.g., click $20 four times to enter $80).

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save to confirm the cash payment.  You are returned to the sales receipt form. The cash payment and, if applicable, change due are shown in the totals area of the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Open the cash drawer

+

Other payment methods

+

Make a sale

+

Sales overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_check.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_check.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f418e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_check.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment or Give Change by Check + + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment or Give Change by Check

+

Payment Overview | Correct or Clear Payments

+

To accept a check as payment:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Check button on the receipt. The check dialog is displayed with the balance due in the Amount field.

    +
    2. +
+

+
    +
  1. +

    Ensure that Accept Check is selected and enter the check amount and number.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

You are returned to the receipt, with the check payment shown in the totals area and the Check button flagged (with a check mark).

+

If the check amount was more than the purchase amount, the balance is shown as cash change to give the customer.

+

To give change by check:

+

After taking an overpayment, change is always defaulted to cash on the receipt. Use this procedure to write a store check to give change instead:  

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Check button.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Check dialog, ensure that Write Check is selected, and then enter the check amount and check number.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save. The receipt totals area is updated to show the check issued as change.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Tip: Take payment by travelers checkClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Basic/Pro Notes

+ +

Related Topics

+

Open the cash drawer

+

Other payment methods

+

Make a sale

+

Sales overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_correcting.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_correcting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c28e845 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_correcting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + +Correct or Clear Receipt Payments + + + + + + + + + + +

Correct or Clear Receipt Payments

+

Take Payments | Sales Overview

+

 

+

If a payment is entered in error, it can be corrected or cleared anytime prior to saving the receipt. See the notes below this procedure for restrictions and additional information on clearing specific payment types.

+

To correct or clear receipt payments:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the payment button for the payment type/change that was entered in error.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Remove this Payment to remove the amount.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter new payment amounts/types to complete the sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save and/or print normally.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Specific payment methods

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_debit.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_debit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..52a27eb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_debit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment by Debit/ATM Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment by Debit/ATM Card

+

Payment Overview | Void a Debit Card Payment

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

To take full payment with one debit card: (modifications for splitting payment are covered here)

+

Note for users of the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 or 3070 PIN padClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Debit as the payment type.

    +
    2. +
+

The Debit Card dialog is opened with the full sale amount pre-filled in the Amount field.

+
    +
  1. +

    Swipe or insert the debit card and, if allowed, select a cash back amount.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Authorize.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Have customer enter their PIN and select OK on the PIN pad.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Have customer approve the total transaction amount by selecting OK.

    +
    5. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

+

If both of the following are true, Point of Sale will process the transaction and print the receipt without further action on your part. This allows you to return to servicing the customer.

+ +

If either of these are not true, continue with the following steps.

+
    +
  1. +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
    2. +
+

Authorized: The debit has been approved. Select OK to close the card dialog.

+

Declined: The debit was not approved. Select Cancel to close the Debit window and return to the payment screen. Ask the customer to provide a different form of payment.

+
    +
  1. +

    Wait for the receipt to print, if configured to print automatically

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select Save & Print to complete and print the receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, the change window displays the cash back amount to give the customer. Select OK to close the window.

    +
    2. +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Connection failed messages

+

General debit/ATM card guidelines

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

Configure debit preferences

+

Merchant Service reports

+

Merchant Service FAQs

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_giftcard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_giftcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1617c22 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_giftcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Sell or Recharge a Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell or Recharge a Gift Card

+

Redeem a Gift Card | General Payment Procedure

+

 

+

Gift cards are sold or recharged on sales receipts. Up to three gift cards can be sold on a single receipt. The gift card item and sales amount are printed on the customer receipt.

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service. What if I use another Service?

+

To sell or recharge a gift card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new receipt with or without other items listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Swipe the gift card while in the Enter Items field on the receipt. Alternatively, type Gift Card and then press <Enter> to add a gift card to the receipt item list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the window displayed, enter the gift card sale amount and swipe the gift card (or manually enter the card number) and then select OK.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Repeat for additional gift cards, up to three on the receipt.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Use general payment procedures to accept the amount due or give change until the Payment Complete message is displayed.
    +Point of Sale connects to the Gift Card Service and updates the balance for the card(s). Progress and confirmation messages are displayed.

    +
    6. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Check a gift card balance

+

Replace a lost gift card

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Gift Card Service overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_giftcert.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_giftcert.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3def199 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_giftcert.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Sell a Gift Certificate + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell a Gift Certificate

+

Redeem a Gift Certificate | General Payment Procedure

+

 

+

A gift certificate is basically "store money" that can be used to purchase merchandise at a future date. When a customer buys a gift certificate, there is no net sale. Certificate numbers can be recorded both on the sale and the redemption for tracking purposes.

+

To sell a gift certificate:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales receipt with or without other items listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information field of the receipt, begin typing Gift Cert... and then click Gift Certificate in the item list displayed. The Sell Gift Certificate dialog is opened.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the amount and certificate number and click OK.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select a payment type.

    +
    5. +
+

The total amount due from the customer (any purchases plus the gift certificate amount) is suggested in the payment dialog.

+
    +
  1. +

    Use the general payment procedures to take payment and give change.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Redeem a gift certificate

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Learn about gift cards

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_poa.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_poa.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ef0c19 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_poa.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment on Account (or Issuing Store Credit) + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment on Account (or Issuing Store Credit)

+

Maintain Customer Accounts | Charges on Account

+
+

Basic

+
+

Payments on a customer's charge account are recorded on a receipt.  

+

 

+

Note: Issuing store credit is essentially the same as taking payment on account and the same procedures are used. If you are issuing store credit due to a merchandise return, create a return receipt and use the second procedure below.

+

To record a payment on account:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new receipt, with or without sales items listed. List the customer on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Account button. The Charge Account dialog is opened. The current account balance is displayed for reference.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Make payment on account option.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the amount the customer is paying.

    +
    4. +
+

The full account balance is suggested. Type over this amount if the customer is paying a different amount.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save. The receipt is updated with the balance due from the customer (account payment plus any new purchases).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Take payment by any other payment type.  

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Set up an account for a customer

+

Make a sale

+

Correct or clear payments

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_travelcheck.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_travelcheck.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..377b4c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_payment_travelcheck.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Take Payment by Travelers Check + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Take Payment by Travelers Check

+ +

Popup but not hidden so can be called from index

+ +

 

+

Customer payments by travelers check can be recorded as either cash or as a check, depending on how you prefer the transaction to show up on reports and, if applicable, how you handle banking in your QuickBooks financial software.

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_promo_codes.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_promo_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec4875f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_promo_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Promo Codes + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Promotional Codes

+

Sales Overview | Make a Sale

+

 

+

A Promo Code can be used to record a promotional event applying to a sale. Examples include coupon numbers, ad references, sale event names, etc.

+

Recording promotional codes on receipts allows you to filter reports by the codes to evaluate the effectiveness of your promotions and advertising.

+

Optionally, you can require an entry in the Promo Code field before a receipt can be saved via a company preference setting.

+

To record a Promo Code on a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start the receipt normally.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want to Menu, select Add/Edit Promo Code.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

Click the red Promo Code button at the bottom of the receipt (only present if Promo Code entry required).

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a code in the popup dialog and click OK.

    +
    2. +
+

The Promo Code field and entry is displayed on the receipt.  

+

To edit the entry, double-click the field.

+

 

+

Pro Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Give a discount

+

Track customers by type

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_giftcard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_giftcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ffcd839 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_giftcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Redeem a Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + + +

Redeem a Gift Card

+

Sell a Gift Card | General Payment Procedure

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service. What if I use another Service?

+

To redeem a gift card on a purchase:

+
    +
  1. +

    After listing the items being sold, select the Gift payment type and then select Gift Card. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Be sure Redeem Card is selected and enter the amount in the Amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Press <Enter>.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Swipe the gift card.
    +
    +Or
    +
    +Enter the gift card number manually and select Authorize.

    +
    5. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Check a gift card balance

+

Replace a lost gift card

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Make a sale

+

Gift Card Service overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_giftcert.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_giftcert.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0ac348 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_giftcert.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Redeem a Gift Certificate + + + + + + + + + + + +

Redeem a Gift Certificate

+

Sell a Gift Certificate | General Payment Procedure

+

To redeem a gift certificate on a purchase:

+
    +
  1. +

    After listing the items being sold, select the Gift payment type and then select Gift Certificate. The Gift Certificate dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Ensure that Redeem a gift certificate is selected and then enter the certificate amount and number.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Take additional payments and/or return change, if necessary.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Learn about gift cards

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_reward.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_reward.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fa0c20f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_redeem_reward.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Redeem a Customer Reward + + + + + + + + + + +

Redeem a Customer Reward

+

Rewards Program Overview | Price/Discount Conflict and Priority

+
+

Pro

+
+

Redeem Reward promptWhen you are ringing up a sale, if the items being sold qualify and the customer has a reward to redeem you will be prompted to apply it when going to take payment.

+

You can choose to apply the reward to the current sale or save it for a future purchase. The reward amount or percentage, expiration date, and new sale total is listed for reference.

+

To redeem a reward:

+
    +
  1. +

    When alerted that a reward is available, select Redeem Now. To save the reward for a future sale, select Redeem Later.

    +
    2. +
+

If a customer has multiple rewards available for redemption, all available rewards are displayed. Select the reward the customer wishes to redeem before clicking Redeem Now.

+
    +
  1. +

    The reward is applied to the sale and the new balance due is displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Take payment for any remaining balance as usual.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Rewards cannot be redeemed to purchase gift cards or gift certificates, to make a payment on account, or to pay for sales tax or shipping charges. Only one reward redemption is allowed per sales receipt.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Customer IDs and cards (Pro)

+

Give a discount

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_reversenotes_paymentmethods.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_reversenotes_paymentmethods.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2865f66 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_reversenotes_paymentmethods.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Notes on Reversing Receipts of Specific Payment Methods + + + + + + + + + + + +

Notes on Reversing Receipts of Specific Payment Methods

+

Reverse a Receipt | Find a Receipt

+

 

+

When you reverse a sales receipt, the reversing receipt created is a return receipt. The amounts taken in payment on the original receipt are returned as change (on paper) to the customer as credits on the return receipt. In this way, the accounting is automatically corrected along with the other changes you make on the receipt. The following are brief descriptions of how reversing a sales receipt of specific payment methods, and then creating a new corrected receipt are handled. Reversing a return receipt works the same way but the payment and change (credit) amounts are the opposite.

+

 

+

Cash: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as cash change. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt as cash as well. If there is a difference between the amounts on the two receipts, you will need to handle collecting or refunding from/to the customer according to your store policy.

+

Check: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as change by check. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt by check as well. If there is a difference between the amounts on the two receipts, you will need to handle collecting or refunding from/to the customer, changing the amount of the check, or getting a new check according to your store policy and legal requirements in your area.

+

Credit Card: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as change by credit card. If you use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, this receipt will automatically be sent to the card processor as part of the next settlement batch. This will result in a credit on the cardholder's account. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt by the same credit card, authorizing and updating the charge by manually entering the card information, if necessary. This new receipt will also be sent with the next settlement batch, resulting in a new charge on the cardholder's account. If you do not use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, follow the same procedure but use the third-party processor's instructions for handling the card credit and new authorization. For more information, read canceling and reversing credit card payments. Reversing credit card receipts processed through Point of Sale is limited to 60 days after the sale.

+

Debit/ATM: Reversing a debit receipt does not create a credit back into the customers bank account. When you reverse a debit receipt, the change is automatically assigned to cash. If you want to return the money to the customer by another method, create a return receipt instead and choose the payment method. Then create a new, corrected receipt.

+

Gift Card: If you use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service and reverse a sale paid by gift card, Point of Sale automatically connects to the Gift Card Service servers and adds the original payment amount back to the card balance. The refund amount is placed in the Gift Card Purchase field on the payment screen. If you reverse a receipt which originally sold (added value) to the gift card, reversing it deducts the reversed amount from the stored value of the card. If not using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service, the reversing process is the same, but youll have to use the procedure outlined by your service to add/deduct the value back to the customers card.

+

Gift Certificate: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as change by gift certificate. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt by gift certificate as well. If you track gift certificates by number, enter the same number as the original certificate. If there is a difference between the amounts on the two receipts, you will need to handle collecting or refunding from/to the customer according to your store policy and legal requirements in your area.

+

Account Charge: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as an account credit. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt by account charge. Both receipts are sent to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, and any difference between the receipt amounts is reflected in the customers new account balance after credits are applied to invoices in QuickBooks Desktop.

+  +

QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software Users: In all cases, both the reversing (return) receipt and the new corrected receipt will be sent to QuickBooks Desktop as part of the next Financial Exchange, thus automatically updating your accounting records accurately.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copy and correct a reversed receipt

+

Sales overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_sales_history.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_sales_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..63d473a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_sales_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales History + + + + + + + + + +

Sales History

+

Make a Sale | Display Customer Purchase History

+

 

+

Your sales history list stores all previously saved receipts.   

+

By default, your sales history shows all saved receipts sorted by date in a list format. There are several options for changing the display.

+

Sales History

+

 

+

Things you can do from sales history

+

Find a receipt

+

Accept a return or exchange

+

Copy a receipt

+

Edit a receipt

+

Reverse a Receipt

+

E-mail a receipt

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_sell_misc_item.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_sell_misc_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f2c45a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_sell_misc_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Sell a Miscellaneous Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell a Miscellaneous Item

+

Make a Sale | List Items on Documents: Overview

+

A miscellaneous item is used to temporarily sell an item not yet entered into your inventory.  For example, an exciting new item has just arrived for the first time and you have not yet entered it in inventory. You tell a customer that happens to be in the store about it and he says "I'll take one"! To quickly make the sale without entering all the normal inventory information, you can sell it as a miscellaneous item, entering only the quantity and price. Later, you can enter the item in inventory and resume normal sales.

+

To sell a miscellaneous item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Sell Miscellaneous Items.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the dialog displayed, enter the quantity and price and select OK.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Quick Add a New Item While Creating a Document

+

Quick Pick Item

+

Handle Special Orders

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_splitpayment_debit.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_splitpayment_debit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2f67c91 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_splitpayment_debit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Split Payments including Debit Cards + + + + + + + + + + + +

Split Payments including Debit Cards

+

Payment Overview | Void a Debit Card Payment

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Split payment transactions involving debit cards are allowed, but only one debit card payment is allowed on a sale. Debit cards can be used in combination with other payment types.

+

Splitting payments that involve debit cards differ from the single debit card payment procedure as follows.

+

Do not swipe or insert the customers card until directed to do so below.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete the receipt and click Debit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Type in the amount being paid by debit card in the Amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Swipe or insert the card, have them enter their PIN, and optionally enter a cash back amount. Have the customer OK the amount on the PIN pad, if applicable.

    +
    4. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service for authorization in the same manner as in the single debit card procedure.

+
    +
  1. +

    After authorization is received, enter the second payment type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If using a credit card, swipe, insert, or enter information and follow the authorization process.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

If using another payment method, enter any requested information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat for a third payment type, if necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save & Print (if not configured to automatically save and print).

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

General debit/ATM card guidelines

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

Configure debit payment preferences

+

Merchant Service reports

+

Troubleshoot Merchant Services

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_tips.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3b6720 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + +Collect Tips on Sales + + + + + + + + + + +

Use GoPayment

+
+

Basic

+
+

Swiping Cards

+


+One of the following card readers should be used with GoPayment on an iPhone:

+

 

+

Mophie card reader

+

The Mophie card reader is available at Apple Retail Stores and at www.apple.com.

+

To use this reader, follow these instructions:

+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your iPhone in the Mophie credit card reader and launch GoPayment.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When prompted, run the card through the bottom of the card reader.

    +
    3. +
+

Note: The Mophie reader is currently compatible with iPhone 3G , 3GS and 4. (Currently not compatible with the iPod Touch or the first-generation EDGE network iPhone).

+

 

+

Audio jack card reader

+

Intuit offers a card reader that plugs into the audio jack.

+

To use this reader, follow these instructions:

+
    +
  1. +

    Plug the device into your audio output jack. This card reader works best when you turn the volume to full.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In Settings, turn Audio Jack Card Reader ON.
    +When the Audio Jack Card Reader setting is on, do not plug in another audio device (such as headphones) or a beep will sound.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Choose the card reader model you have. (You can match the image. Your reader will be either grey or white.)

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When you initiate a charge, GoPayment prompts you to swipe a card at the payment screen.

    +
    5. +
+

Note: Remove the card reader before you make or accept a call.

+
+

Basic

+
+

GoPayment Features

+ +

Learn more

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_void_giftcard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_void_giftcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..37bdf82 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipt_void_giftcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + +Void the Sale of a Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Void the Sale of a Gift Card

+

Sell a Gift Card | Redeem a Gift Card

+

 

+

Once a gift card has been authorized, the amount cannot be changed but you can void the sale.

+

Voiding a gift card sale results in the Gift Card Service being contacted a second time and the card balance is returned to the pre-sale amount.

+

To void the gift card sale, re-open the Gift Card payment dialog and click Remove.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Check a gift card balance

+

Make a sale

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_gift.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_gift.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5a36f40 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_gift.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Gift Receipts + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Gift Receipts

+

Sales Overview | Printing Overview

+

 

+

You can print a gift receipt that does not include specific item, price or payment information. This feature is useful around Holidays or if you specialize in gift merchandise.

+

With a gift receipt, customers can safely include the receipt inside a gift package or give the receipt to the recipient. If the recipient needs to return or exchange the gift, they already have the receipt and theres no need to inconvenience the gift giver.

+

The bar code printed at the bottom of the gift receipt indicates the original receipt number and you can quickly find the original sale receipt by scanning the gift receipt bar code (or typing the receipt number) in the Quick Find window on the home page Navigator or the Find Receipt window in sales history.

+

With the gift receipt preference turned on, you are prompted to print a gift receipt every time you save a receipt. Each workstation can enable gift receipt prompting individually.

+

To be prompted to print a gift receipt on every sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Return to the Home Page if not already there. Click this icon on the toolbar to go to the POS Home Page

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Documents & Printers from the preferences list on the left.

    +
    4. +
+

Verify the printer and print template to be used for gift receipts. Note: The gift receipt printer is automatically set to the same printer used for regular sales receipts, but a different print template can be used if desired.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Print Options page from the preferences list on the left.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Prompt for gift receipt with each sale check box.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

To turn off prompting of gift receipts, return to the same page and clear the check box.

+

 

+

Alternate MethodPrint gift receipt

+

If you have your Print Options preferences set to show the Print dialog for each sales receipt, you can select to print a gift receipt on the dialog when needed instead of setting the global preference to prompt you.

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize your print templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e67ed72 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + +receipts_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Sales Receipts: How do I?

+

 

+ +

Popup has been hidden

+ +

Create a sales receipt

+

List items on receipts

+

Give discounts

+

Change the receipt price level

+

Change the sales tax on a receipt

+

Take payment and give change

+

Handle a return or exchange

+

Find a prior receipt

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+

 

+ +</ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_othermas.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_othermas.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a02c9c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_othermas.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Another Merchant Service + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Another Merchant Service

+

Payment Overview | Sign Up for a Merchant Account

+

 

+

If you do not have an account with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, you can still record credit card payments and refunds, and debit/ATM card payments in Point of Sale.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add items and customer to the receipt and then click the Credit or Debit payment button, as appropriate.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the payment amount in the Credit Card or Debit/ATM Card field and accept it.

    +
    3. +
+ +

     

+ +

      

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow your services instructions for authorizing the payment.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save/print the receipt. Follow your service's instructions for having the customer sign the merchant copy.

    +
    3. +
+

When using another merchant service for these transactions:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_ccdebithardware.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_ccdebithardware.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..745ce64 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_ccdebithardware.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Hardware + + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Hardware

+

Take Payments | Compatible Card Readers | Compatible PIN pads

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or Gift Card Services. If you use a different service, refer to that service's hardware requirements.

+

 

+

Point of Sale supports card readers and PIN pads for processing of credit, debit/ATM, and gift card transactions through the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and Gift Card Services.

+

Credit card and gift card transactions do not require the use of a card reader, but the use of one is highly recommended. Swiping or inserting a card though a card reader speeds entry, helps avoid errors of hand-keying, and qualifies you for lower fees on credit card transactions. PIN debit transactions require the use of a PIN pad.

+

The procedure for accepting payment varies depending on your hardware configuration.

+

Card Reader Ideal for retailers who accept credit and gift card payments but not PIN debit payments, or who will use the card reader in conjunction with the Ingenico 3010 (see below) for processing all card transactions.

+

Ingenico Telium iPP3xx and Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 PIN pad These PIN pads have an integrated card reader which can be used to process credit, debit/ATM, and gift card transactions. An added benefit with these device is their ability to store authorization information, allowing the customer to swipe their card, enter their PIN, and select cash back (if you allow it), all while your cashier is still completing the receipt. When the cashier goes to the Payment window, the PIN pad device will send the approved amounts to the correct payment and change fields.

+

Ingenico 3010 PIN pad This PIN pad has no integrated card reader and requires that a card reader also be installed on the system. Typically, the customer hands their card to the cashier who swipes it through their existing card reader. The customer uses the PIN pad to enter their PIN, optionally request cash back, and approve the total amount.

+

 

+

For the most current hardware information, click here.

+

 

+

Important Note: Intuit works closely with the manufacturers of hardware sold by Intuit for use with Point of Sale to ensure these devices work together and with the Point of Sale software. Hardware, such as PIN Pads and Physical Inventory Scanners, purchased from other sources may not contain the required programming to work with Point of Sale software and/or the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. Intuit does not provide hardware programming, and does not guarantee that devices purchased from other third party sources will work with Intuit software.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Configure merchant and gift card services

+

Install an Ingenico PIN pad

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_ccguidelines.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_ccguidelines.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e5b170 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_ccguidelines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +General Credit Card Guidelines + + + + + + + + + + + +

General Credit Card Guidelines

+

Merchant Service Overview | Credit Card Payments

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Accepted Card Types

+

Allowed credit card types are Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, Diners Club, and JCB. Up to three credit card payments can be accepted on a single transaction. You can specify the specific card you accept in company preferences.

+

 

+

Using a Credit Card Reader

+

The QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service does not require a card reader to process credit card transactions. However, you may get a lower rate when using a card reader to authorize these transactions (see below). The credit card payment procedures refer to card readers and PIN pads for use with credit card transactions. See Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Hardware for more information on supported card readers.

+

 

+

Card Not Present

+

The QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service does not require that the credit card be present to authorize a transaction; however, you do need to have the customers name, ZIP code, card number, and expiration date. "Card not present" fees apply. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service agreement for more information.

+

 

+

Address Verification Service

+

Point of Sale performs an address verification on all credit card transactions that are entered manually (not swiped or inserted). The service checks if the customers ZIP Code, and optionally street address, matches the address currently on file at the cardholders bank and alerts you if there is a mismatch. Learn more.

+

 

+

Card Verification

+

It is mandatory to enter the card verification code for your transactions. Point of Sale can also perform a check of the card verification code when manually entering card information. This verification helps to confirm that the customer actually has the card in his/her possession at the time of the sale. You are alerted in the event of a mismatch with the card issuer records. Learn More.

+

 

+

Credit Card Settlement

+

Although credit card transactions are authorized immediately, funds are not transferred to your bank account until the transactions are settled by running the End of Day procedure. It is important that you settle transactions daily to avoid paying higher fees on your credit card transactions.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Protect your customers' card data

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Credit card returns

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_creditcard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_creditcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8f0aabf --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_creditcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment by Credit Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment by Credit Card

+

Payment Overview | Credit Card Refunds

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

To take full payment by one credit card: (modifications for splitting payment are covered here)

+

Note for users of the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 or 3070 PIN padClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Credit payment button.

    +
    2. +
+

The Credit payment dialog is opened, with default options:

+

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Swipe or insert the credit card. (recommended)

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select Manual, enter the mandatory information such as credit card number, expiration date, ZIP Code, and card verification code, and optionally the fraud prevention information, and then select Authorize Now. At the prompt, specify whether the card is present or not.

+

Or

+

Select Voice to complete a voice authorization. This is recommended only if  your connection to the processor is down or you are requested to do so.

+
    +
  1. +

    Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

    +
    2. +
+

If all of the following are true, Point of Sale will process the transaction and print the receipt without further action on your part. This allows you to return to servicing the customer.

+ +

If any of these are not true, continue with the following steps.

+
    +
  1. +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
    2. +
+

Authorized: The charge has been approved. Select OK to close the window.

+

Declined: The charge was not approved. Select Cancel to return to the payment screen. Ask the customer to provide a different form of payment, or select Authorize to try again.

+

Referral: Voice authorization is required. Call the number listed on-screen and give the operator your Merchant Number. Enter the authorization number the operator gives you in the Voice Auth Number field  and click Authorize Now.

+

Failed address or card verification check: The address or card verification code entered does not match the issuers records. Depending on your merchant service preferences, you may be allowed to continue or the transaction may be automatically voided.

+

View the Address and Card Verification Results GuideClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Wait for the receipt to print, if configured to print automatically

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select Save & Print to record and print the receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Have the customer sign the merchant copy of the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Return to top

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Specify the credit cards you accept

+

Cancel or reverse credit card charges

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

General credit card guidelines

+

Merchant Service FAQs

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_debitguidelines.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_debitguidelines.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3631d09 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_payment_debitguidelines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +General Debit/ATM Card Guidelines + + + + + + + + + + +

General Debit/ATM Card Guidelines

+

Take Payment by Debit/ATM Card | Merchant Service Overview

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Transaction Fees

+

The QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service does not support the collection of transaction fees on debit/ATM payments.

+

 

+

What is a PIN Debit Transaction?

+

There are two ways a customers debit/ATM card can be accepted for payment:

+ +

Canceling or Reversing PIN Debit Payments

+

PIN debit payments, if already authorized, cannot be deleted from the receipt, nor can the receipt be canceled or voided. The money has already been debited from the cardholder's bank account.

+

If the receipt has not yet been saved, the cashier can manually enter an equal amount by another payment method and refund the debit amount to the customer as change (cash suggested).

+

If the receipt has been saved, it can only be reversed or a return receipt made. Reversing a debit receipt does not create a credit back to the customers bank account. When you reverse a debit receipt, the change is automatically assigned to cash. If you want to refund the money to the customer by another method, create a return receipt instead and select any other change type.

+

 

+

Debit Card Batch Settlement

+

Although debit card transactions are authorized and the cardholders bank account debited immediately, funds are not transferred to your bank account until the transactions are sent to the processor by running the End of Day procedure and settled.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Protect your customers' payment card data

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_splitpayment_creditcard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_splitpayment_creditcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..90076e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receipts_splitpayment_creditcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Split Payments including Credit Cards + + + + + + + + + + + +

Split Payments including Credit Cards

+

Payment Overview | Credit Card Refunds

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Split payment transactions involving credit cards are allowed. Up to three credit cards can be used on one transaction. Credit card cards can also be used in combination with other payment types.

+

Splitting payments that involve credit cards differ from the single credit card payment procedure as follows.

+

Do not swipe or insert the credit card until directed to do so below.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete the receipt and select Credit as the payment type. The Credit payment dialog is opened.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the amount for the first credit card in the Amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Swipe or insert the card, or manually enter the card information. Have the customer OK the amount on the PIN pad, if applicable.

    +
    4. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service for authorization in the same manner as in the single credit card procedure.

+
    +
  1. +

    After authorization is received for the first card, repeat this process for the next card.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select a different payment type for the balance and enter any requested information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat for a third card or another payment type, if necessary.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save & Print (if not configured to automatically save and print).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Specify the credit cards you accept

+

Record tips (gratuities) on credit card sales

+

Cancel or reverse credit card charges

+

General credit card guidelines

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

Troubleshoot Merchant Services

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receiptsoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receiptsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..abeff85 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_recording_sales_and_returns/receiptsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Sales and returns/exchanges are recorded on receipts:

+ +

Saving a receipt removes the sold items from inventory (or adds them back, in the case of a return)  and places the receipt in your sales history list. Saved receipts are permanent transactional documents that are drawn upon for reports and can be edited (informational information only) or reversed, but never deleted.

+

Multi-Store Notes

+ +

Handling Sales Returns and Exchanges

+

Merchandise returns and exchanges are recorded on receipts, in the same manner as sales. The returned quantity is simply entered as a negative number.

+

Learn more about  Returns and Exchanges.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Set sales preferences

+

Receipt field descriptions

+

Security rights for receipts

+

How receipts are transferred to QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports01.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b1ad198 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ + + + + + + + + +Run a Report + + + + + + + + + + + +

Run a Report

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Memorize a Report | Report Dashboard

+ +

 

+

These are the basic instructions for running a report from the Report Center. Use the links below or read the Report Overview to learn about additional options and access points for reports. In addition to reports listed below, there are now Mobile reports to select as well.

+

To run a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Report Center from the Reports menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Report Center window, select the Overview tab.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Report Center Overview page

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select one of the following:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to modify various report options. Select Help on each options page for more information.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Run. The report is displayed.

    +
    3. +
+

You can further modify the report and drill down to view additional detail and related records with the report displayed. Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the top toolbar, choose how you want to output the report:

    +
    2. +
+ +

Or, from the I Want To menu:

+ +

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc6ccb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + +Modify a Report + + + + + + + + + + + +

Modify a Report

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

Report options are user-definable instructions that affect the report output. The ability to modify report options is controlled by the security rights of the logged-in user. Once customized, a report can be memorized with specific settings and then run directly from your memorized report list, accessed from various places in the program.

+

The options available vary by report and options shown below may not be available on all report types. The Modify a Report window can also be used to revert the report to default settings.

+

To modify a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open the Modify a Report window by:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter a date or date range, if applicable.  Learn more

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select from the additional options available. Select a link below for more information about each option category.

    +
    2. +
+

Add or Remove Columns to add/remove, set order, and specify sort options for data in columns

+

Filter Data to include/exclude data based on filter criteria

+

Change Report Appearance to change report orientation, header and footer information, page numbering, and fonts.

+

Report Access Level to restrict access to the report based on security groups.

+

Revert Select to reset all report options to their default values.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save on each options page and then Run to display the report with your selected options.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Work with a displayed report

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..84ef46c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + +Report Security: Access Levels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Report Security: Access Levels

+

Reports Overview | Modify a Report | Security Overview

+

 

+

If you require employee logins, the reports an employee can access are determined by the security group to which he or she is assigned. Each report is assigned a security access level. The report access levels and security groups which can view them are as follows:

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Level

+		 +

Description

+		 +

Groups with Access

+
+

1

+		 +

Maximum Security

+		 +

Owner

+
+

2

+		 +

High Security

+		 +

Owner, Mgr

+
+

3

+		 +

Medium Security

+		 +

Owner, Mgr, Asst Mgr

+
+

4

+		 +

Low Security

+		 +

All groups

+
+

 

+

Reports that the currently logged-on user does not have access rights to will not be available for selection. If program logins are not required, all employees have access to all reports. The System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic always has access to all reports.

+

A separate security right, Modify report options, controls the ability to modify a report, including dates. If using the pre-defined security groups, all employees have rights to modify the reports to which they have access.

+

If the default security levels do not meet your needs, you can change the report access levels or customize your security groups to give your employees the rights you wish. The ability to make these changes are themselves also subject to security rights (only available to the System Administrator and default Owner group).

+

To view or change the access level of a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Log on as a user with rights to modify report options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Create a Report wizard, select the Set Report Access Level button.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

On a displayed report, select Modify and then the Security tab.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a security access level from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK or Run to display the report and save the new access level.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Run a report

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports07.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..656d60d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Export Reports to Excel + + + + + + + + + + +

Export Reports to Excel

+

Reports Overview | Run a Report | Export List Data

+

 

+

You can export report data to Microsoft Excel, allowing you to further manipulate the data in that program.

+

Note: For this option to be available, a full licensed version of Excel must be installed on the workstation running the report.

+

To export a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Run the report normally, using the modify report option to select the columns and filter the data to be included in the export.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the report displayed, select Excel from the top toolbar.
    +
    +Once the report is in Excel, you can utilize the many Excel features to manipulate and customize your data. Refer to the Excel help system for instructions to:

    +
    3. +
+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_dashboard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_dashboard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..becb065 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_dashboard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + +Report Dashboard + + + + + + + + + + +

Report Dashboard

+

Reports Overview | Running a Report

+

 

+

The Dashboard displays your choice of Point of Sale reports, list statistics, financial information, and even links to the Point of Sale online community or your favorite web pages. The Dashboard is highly customizable to more precisely fit your particular needs and give you an at-a-glance picture of your business. You can add, rearrange, and customize individual components, add additional pages, and drill down into report detail or launch the full version of a selected report.

+

To access the Dashboard:

+ +

-OR-

+ +

Customizing the Dashboard

+

The default Dashboard page includes several pre-selected reports. Use the following options to customize the currently displayed reports on the Dashboard:

+ +

To further customize the Dashboard reports and add additional pages:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Customize Dashboard in the upper-left corner.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use any of these options to customize for your needs:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_displayoptions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_displayoptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3cf2339 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_displayoptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + +Add or Remove Report Columns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add or Remove Report Columns

+

Filter Report Data | Change Report Appearance | Modify a Report

+

 

+

This information applies to the Add or Remove Columns window, accessed when running or modifying a report.

+

 

+

Select columns to include in the report and set sorting and other options as follows. Select Save when done.

+

 

+

Columns

+ +

        

+ +

Sort By

+ +

Sort In

+ +

Show

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3c8d34e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +reports_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Reports: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

 

+

Run a report

+

Modify a report

+

Drill down to see report detail

+

Memorize reports

+

Export report data to Excel

+

Run X/Z-Out reports

+

View Merchant Service reports

+

View graphs and charts

+

Run multiple reports

+

Manage my reports

+

Refresh report data

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_headerfooter.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_headerfooter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ba6bf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_headerfooter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + + +Change Report or Graph Appearance + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Report or Graph Appearance

+

Run a Report | Modify a Report | Add/Remove Report Columns

+

 

+

This information applies to the Change Report Appearance window, accessed when running or modifying a report or graph.

+

 

+

Use this page to set the page orientation, header and footer information, and fonts. Select Save when done.

+

 

+

Report Orientation:

+ +

Show Header Information

+

Select the checkboxes and enter text to be printed at the top and bottom of the report.

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Company Name:

+		 +

By default, your store name as defined in company preferences. You can edit the company name in the report header.

+
+

Report Title:

+		 +

The name of the report.

+
+

Subtitle:

+		 +

Enter an optional report subtitle.

+
+

Date Prepared:

+		 +

Select the date format.

+
+

Time Prepared:

+		 +

Select to include the time the report was run.

+
+

 

+

Show Footer Information

+ +++ + + + +
+

Page Number:

+		 +

Select to include page numbers at the bottom of the report.

+
+

 

+

Fonts

+

Select a report area. In the Font window, make your selections and then select OK.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_manage.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_manage.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5b883f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_manage.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage my Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage my Reports

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

You can use the Manage My Reports window to add, remove, rearrange, or rename your report types and memorized reports.

+

To access the Manage My Reports window:

+ +

Options available on this window:

+

Move reports Drag and drop report types and individual reports or use the move up/down buttons to arrange them in the order you prefer. Reports can be moved from one report type to another. This will affect the order in which your memorized reports are displayed on the Reports menu and in the Memorized Reports section of the Navigator.

+

Add new report type Select to add another report type, allowing you to sub-categorize your reports the way you prefer.

+

Rename reports or report types Your memorized reports or types can be renamed at anytime.

+

Copy a report Use to create a new memorized report the same as, or very similar to, an existing memorized report. Modify the copy if changes are required.

+

Delete report or report type Your memorized reports or types can be deleted at anytime. Deleting a report type deletes all reports contained therein. If you want to save the reports, move them to another type before deleting the type.

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_memorized.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_memorized.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4e5a212 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_memorized.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Memorize a Report + + + + + + + + + + +

Memorize a Report

+

Reports Overview | Run a Report | Modify a Report

+

 

+

Once a particular report format has been defined, you can memorize it and then immediately run the report at anytime with a single click from the Reports menu. Note that you are memorizing the report format (display options, filtering, date range, etc.) and not the specific report data. This allows you to memorize and run dynamic reports (sales month-to-date, etc.) whenever you want, with the format always the same but the data updated to the current time.

+

Once memorized, your reports are added to the Report menu and the Report Center under the category Memorized Reports. Optionally, you can define new report types, which allow you to sub-categorize your memorized reports.

+

To memorize a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Run the report in the normal manner, modifying it to include the data and display options you want.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Memorize this report from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Memorize Report dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Give your memorized report a unique name and assign it to a report type.

    +
    2. +
+

Select Manage My Reports to add a new report type or to manage your existing types.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Work with a displayed report

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_multiple.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_multiple.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..414b233 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_multiple.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Run Multiple Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Run Multiple Reports

+

Reports Overview | Report Dashboard

+

 

+

If you find that you frequently run the same reports at the same time, Point of Sale offers an option to group and run those reports all at once with a single selection.

+

To run multiple reports:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Run Multiple Reports from the Reports menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Process Multiple Reports window, select a report type from the drop-down list or select All Reports.

    +
    3. +
+

A list of the selected type of report is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select or clear the checkboxes for each report. If a reports check box is selected, the report will be run.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a date range for those reports that require one.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Display to preview the reports on-screen or Print to send them to your printer. If displaying, the report windows are added to the Window menu at the top of your screen.

    +
    4. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_note_lg_report.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_note_lg_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3890b4f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_note_lg_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + + +reports_note_lg_report + + + + + + + + + +

Note: Printing a Large Report

+ +

This is a popup and has been hidden.

+ +

If a report is too wide to be printed within the page width specified for the printer, Point of Sale will print it in sections on multiple pages, which can then be arranged to view the complete report.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_print.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_print.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac1d146 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_print.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Print a Report + + + + + + + + + + +

Print a Report

+

Run a Report | Export a Report | Memorize a Report | Modify a Report

+

 

+

After running a report, it is displayed in the report preview window. From here the report can be printed (as described here),  exported to Excel, memorized, or further modified as necessary.

+

To print a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the report displayed, select Print from the bottom toolbar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Print dialog, change printer and specify the number of copies as necessary.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Print to send the report to your printer.

    +
    4. +
+

Or, select Preview to see what the report will look like before printing.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Preview reports

+

Print in Point of Sale

+

Specify printers & templates

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_refreshing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_refreshing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..acccfa2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_refreshing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +reports_refreshing + + + + + + + + + + +

Refreshing Report Data

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden.

+ +

Reports reflect your data at the time the report is run. If you leave a report open and then create documents, the report is not dynamically updated with the new information from those documents. You must run the report again or press <F5> with the report displayed to refresh it.

+

Customer, vendor, and item history screens are reports that are run and displayed on the individual record form. History screens can be refreshed by pressing <F5>, <Ctrl>+<Page Up><Page Down>, or by closing and reopening the record form.

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_types.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_types.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e08c4c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +All Report Categories and Types + + + + + + + + + + +

All Report Categories and Types

+

Reports Overview | Memorize Reports | Report Dashboard

+

 

+

On the All Reports page of the Report Center, you can select a report category, type, and then a specific report. A brief description of the information contained in the report is displayed to help you choose.

+

 

+

+ +

Report Categories

+

There are many report categories in Point of Sale. Each category includes various specific reports, offering several ways to analyze your accumulated data:

+

Sales View summarized or detailed sales information, such as best and worst selling items; sales by department, by vendor, by associate, or by store; discounts given; and sales taxes collected.

+

Cash Drawer Run X/Z-Out Reports, including register status, drawer count and closing reports, as well as a listing of cash drawer payouts.

+

Payments View summarized or detailed reports of sales payments by type.

+

Customers Print or export customer lists and analyze sales by demographics, customer type, or promotional codes. Pro users can also view summarized or detailed reports of merchandise on order, status of service jobs, and deposits taken on layaways, sales orders, and work orders.

+

Items Track inventory item, quantities, and costs, including merchandise on hand or on order, reorder points, and adjustments, and, in a multi-store configuration, transfers and inventory by store.

+

Purchasing View summarized or detailed listings of merchandise ordered and received, projected cash requirements, and vendor lists.

+

Employees View employee lists, sales performance,  and tips collected. Pro users can also view hours worked, and commissions earned.

+

Memorized Reports View and access all reports you have created and memorized. This category does not display until you have memorized at least one report.

+

 

+

The information for each report is drawn from the related data sources (documents, inventory, customer records, etc). For example, most sales information is derived from receipts; purchasing information is drawn from purchase orders and receiving vouchers, and so on.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_working_with_displayed.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_working_with_displayed.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..46752b7 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_working_with_displayed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + +Work with a Displayed Report + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work with a Displayed Report

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Memorize a Report | Refresh Report Data

+ +

 

+

Note: Not all options described here are available on every report type or for Point of Sale Free users. For example, several of these options are not available when viewing customer, vendor, or item history reports.

+

 

+

You have several options when working with a displayed report.

+ +

Customizing Report Columns and Sort

+ +

QuickZoom icon Using QuickZoom to View Additional Report Detail

+

QuickZoom allows you to view additional detail in sub-reports or in the associated documents and records. QuickZoom refers to the "magnifying glass" icon that appears on reports and graphs.

+

With the QuickZoom icon displayed, double-click a line or value in the report to bring up the additional detail that is available.

+

Examples:

+ +

Doing a Text Search on a Report

+

To search a report for a text string:

+
    +
  1. +

    With a report displayed, enter the text string you are looking for in the Find field at the top of the report.

    +
    2. +
+

image\report_findtext.gif

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Find field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Continue selecting the find icon to locate additional occurrences of the text.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reportsoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reportsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c7ef2c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reportsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + + +Reports Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reports Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Report Categories (All Reports)

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale reports provide detailed information in a wide variety of formats to help you manage inventory, analyze your sales, evaluate employee performance, make informed purchase decisions, and much more.

+

There are several ways to choose the correct report for your needs or to access previously memorized reports.

+ +

+

 

+

Report filters and options allow you to customize reports to include or exclude information (items, departments, customers, vendors, date ranges, etc.) and change display options. Once displayed, many reports offer the ability to QuickZoom, or drill down, to see additional detail or view related reports and documents.

+

If you tend to run several reports together, you can easily run the group of reports at once from the Run Multiple Reports window, available from the Reports menu.

+

Access to reports can be controlled with security rights, protecting your sensitive data.

+

 

+

Multi-Store Notes

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for reports

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2301.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2301.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b769238 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2301.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define a Date Range + + + + + + + + + + + +

Define a Date Range

+

Reports Overview | Run a Report | Modify a Report

+

 

+

When specifying dates for reports, you have the option of choosing a dynamic date range, such as "today" or "yesterday," which changes according to the current date, or a fixed date range with a specific start and end date.

+

To define a date range:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the report date fields:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select a date filter type from the drop-down list:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save (if running or modifying a report) or Apply Date Range (if making changes directly on a displayed report).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View a sales chart or graph

+

Work with a displayed report

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2302.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2302.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f61601 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2302.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + +View a Chart or Graph + + + + + + + + + + + +

View a Chart or Graph

+

Charts and Graphs Overview | Print Charts

+

To view a sales chart or graph:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Report Center, select any report listed as a chart or graph.

    +
    2. +
+

Depending on your settings and how you access the chart, you may or may not have an opportunity to modify the options before running. If not, you can modify the settings once the chart is displayed as described in the following steps.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Modify and define filters and display options:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select OK. The chart is re-displayed with your custom settings.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Run. Your graph/chart is displayed with your new settings.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2305.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2305.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a4ce489 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc2305.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print Charts and Graphs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Charts and Graphs

+

Charts and Graphs Overview | Run a Report | Modify a Report

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    With the chart displayed, select Print from the bottom toolbar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To modify the printing instructions, select Preview and use any of the following options:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View a chart or graph

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc_graphcontent.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc_graphcontent.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c613e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/sc_graphcontent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Change Graph Content + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Graph Content

+

Charts and Graphs Overview | View a Chart/Graph | Print Charts/Graphs

+

 

+

This information applies to the Change Graph Content window, accessed when running or modifying a chart or graph.

+

 

+

Use this page to change graph content and type.

+

 

+

+

 

+

As you make changes, a preview is shown of what you can expect your graph to look like.

+

 

+

When done, select Save.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/scoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/scoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9a66e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/scoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + +Charts and Graphs Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Charts and Graphs Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Print Sales Charts/Graphs

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale provides several chart and graph options to let you analyze your business in a visual format.

+

A chart/graph can display a summary of sales, profit, or current inventory by investment department, vendor, employee, hours or days of the week, or store. The information can be viewed in bar, line, or pie chart formats.

+

 

+

   Point of Sale sales charts

+

 

+

Graphical formats are useful for making quick comparisons, visualizing trends, and instantly communicating data to others. Each type of graph is best suited for a particular purpose.

+

Bar graph: Bar graphs are particularly effective when making comparisons among members of a group.

+

Pie chart: Pie charts enable you to visualize the proportion of total sales contributed by each vendor, department, clerk, etc.

+

Line graph: Line graphs display your results over a period of time. In this way, you can monitor trends.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security Rights for Sales Charts/Graphs

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/about_the_security_administrator.html b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/about_the_security_administrator.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2da8cae --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/about_the_security_administrator.html @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +about_the_security_administrator + + + + + + + + +

About the Security System Administrator

+

 

+

popup topic has been hidden

+

Initially, one user, called the Security System Administrator (Sysadmin), is defined for you. This system user has access to all program areas and data and cannot be deleted.  

+

Only the System Administrator user can add or delete employees, turn on/off the requirement to log in to use the program, and change passwords for other employees.

+

To initially login to Point of Sale as the System Administrator, enter or select Sysadmin as the user and leave the password field blank.

+

To prevent unauthorized access to the program and security settings, it is strongly suggested that you change the password for the Sysadmin user immediately after accessing the Employees & Security area for the first time. Write your password down and store it in a secure place.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/basic210.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/basic210.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f6ffd30 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/basic210.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + +Log In/Out + + + + + + + + + + + +

Log In/Out

+

Employee & Security Overview | Log In/Out Preferences

+

 

+

Employees can be required to log in/out of Point of Sale to provide both security and accountability. Login names and passwords are initially defined by the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic, as are the security rights assigned to each employee.

+

To access the Log In/Out dialog:

+

You can access the Log In/Out dialog in any of these ways:

+ +

To log in:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your user name from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter your password in the Password field. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    click Log In.

    +
    4. +
+

The name of the logged-in user is displayed at the top of most Point of Sale screens and is auto-filled into the Associate and Cashier fields on documents.

+

To log out:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the Log In/Out dialog as described above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    click Log Out.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add employees & define security

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/basic_autologout.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/basic_autologout.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f19c8d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/basic_autologout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Automatic Security Logouts + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatic Security Logouts

+

Employees & Security Overview | Log In/Out | Clocking In/Out

+

 

+

Your Point of Sale preferences can be set such that employees are automatically logged out under the following two circumstances.

+

Select a link to view preference setting information for these options.

+

Log out after a period of inactivity

+

Log out after each sales transaction

+

 

+

Important: Don't use the automatic logout after a period of inactivity if scheduling backups or Store Exchanges to occur when the computer is unattended.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/sec_admin_chgemplpw.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/sec_admin_chgemplpw.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e0a6e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/sec_admin_chgemplpw.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Change your Login Password + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change your Login Password

+

Employees & Security Overview | Log In/Out

+

 

+

You can change your own login password using the procedure below. No access to the full employee record is provided with this procedure. It is recommended that you change your password every 90 days.

+

To change your own password:

+
    +
  1. +

    Log in using your current password.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Employees menu, select Change Employee Password.

    +
    3. +
+

The Change Password window is displayed.

+

Tips for passwordsClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter your current (old) password.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a new password. Confirm the new password by entering it again.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Note:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin01.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c994d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,4095 @@ + + + + + + + + +Security Rights for Predefined Groups + + + + + + + + + + +

Security Rights for Predefined Groups

+

Create a New Security Group | Security Overview

+

 

+

Security groups control access to specific features or data. Four predefined security groups are included in Point of Sale:  Owner, Manager, Assistant Manager, and Associate. Rights to specific features of the program decrease as you move from the Owner group to the Associate group. You can assign these groups to your employees, change the rights for each group, and, if necessary, create new groups with the rights you prefer.

+

We recommend that you initially assign each employee to one of the four predefined groups. Later, you can reassign groups, customize group rights, or create additional groups as necessary to meet your needs.

+

The Security Rights by Group table below lists the default rights granted to each of the predefined groups.

+

You can give or take away a right by selecting or clearing the check box for that group on the Security window. You can reset the rights of the four predefined groups by selecting the Revert Default Groups button at the bottom of the window.

+

Select a link to jump to that section of the table or scroll down to view the entire table.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

All levels:

+		 +

 

+
+

General

+		 +

Inventory

+
+

Tools

+		 +

Departments

+
+

Financial

+		 +

Vendors

+
+

Receipts

+		 +

Reports

+
+

Sales History

+		 +

POS (sale related)

+
+

Basic:

+		 +

 

+
+

Customers

+		 +

Inventory Adjustments (Memos)

+
+

Vouchers

+		 +

Adjustment History

+
+

Receiving History

+		 +

Purchase Orders

+
+

 Pro:

+		 +

 

+
+

Customer Rewards

+

Sales Orders and Layaways

+		 +

Time Tracking

+

Work Orders

+
+

Transfer Slips

+

Transfer History

+		 +

Stores

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View or edit a security group

+

Add a security group

+

 

+

 

+

Security Rights by Group

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

General

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Company Preferences

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Workstation Preferences

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Access the Setup Interview

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Hardware Setup Wizard

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Hardware Troubleshooter

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Write letters

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create E-mail Campaign List

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Manage my License

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Exit Point of Sale

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Import/Export Data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Open company data file

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Close company data file

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Create new company data file

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Rename company data file

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

General (cont.)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Backup data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Restore data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Convert from previous version

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Clean up company data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Customize program interface

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Employees and Security

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit employee information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Modify security rights or groups

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View cost fields

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Download program updates

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Install downloaded updates

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

E-mail documents

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Print held documents

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Login from an integrated application

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Access Dashboard

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Customize Dashboard

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Dashboard Web Page

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View list statistics

+

View/edit commission information (Pro)

+		 +

X

+

 

+

X

+		 +

X

+

 

+

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Tools (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Print Designer

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Financial Exchange

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Update QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Recover QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Activity Log

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Open linked QB transactions

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Reports

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Modify report options

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Run All Reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Run Level 2-4 Reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Run Level 3-4 reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Run Level 4 reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View Drawer Count History (Z-Out)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View amount of cash drawer mismatch

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View tip amounts on End of Day reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Point of Sale

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Run End of Day

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Open cash drawer

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create Payout receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Apply global discount

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Change price level

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Edit shipping amount (Pro)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Receipts

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Override "Accept Check" setting (Basic)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Override Credit Limit (Basic)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Override Past Due Charge Blocking (Basic)

+

Create receipts for other stores (Pro)

+		 +

X

+

 

+

X

+		 +

X

+

 

+

X

+		 +

X

+

 

+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit or discount sale price

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Edit item description

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Accept returns and exchanges

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Edit receipt date

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Hold receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Apply coupons (Pro)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Sales History

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access sales history

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Reverse receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Copy receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Transfer Slips (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access transfer slip

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create transfer slips for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Hold transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Transfer History (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access transfer history

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Reverse transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Copy transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Inventory

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/Copy item

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete item

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit prices

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit cost

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit quantity (Basic, Pro)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Change item type

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Physical Inventory (Basic)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Update Physical Inventory Basic)

+

Access item assembly (Pro)

+

Access group item (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View inventory reminders (Pro)

+

Modify/Clear Reminders (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X

+  +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Price Manager: Access 'Change Item Prices'

+

Price Manager: Access 'Discount Pricing' (Pro)

+		 +

X
+
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View inventory ratings & trends

+

Create special order item (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		  +

 

+

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Print item list

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Print item tags

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Export item list

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Departments

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/Copy

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit departments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete departments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Vendors (Basic, Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/Copy vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Purchase Order (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Add / Copy POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item description

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access item list from PO

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Vouchers (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access vouchers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create return vouchers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Enter cost

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item descriptions

+

Create voucher for other stores (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Hold Vouchers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Receiving History (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access receiving history

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Reverse voucher

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Copy voucher

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit voucher

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Adjustments (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access memos

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Create cost memos

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Hold memos

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Create quantity memos

+

Create memos for other stores (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Adjustment History

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access adjustment history

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Reverse memo

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Copy memo

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit memo

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Customers (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Edit customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Delete customer

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit customer discount or price level

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Change "Use with QuickBooks" setting

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Change "Accept Checks" setting

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Add customer type

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Change charge account settings

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View customer ratings

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View account information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Rewards (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Reward Manager

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Manually issue or remove rewards

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View and redeem rewards

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Sales Orders and Layaways (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Copy orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Delete orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Refund deposits

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item prices

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item descriptions

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Generate purchase order from

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Apply coupons

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Work Orders (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Copy orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Delete orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item descriptions

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item prices

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Refund deposits

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Generate PO from

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Apply coupons

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/Right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Time Tracking (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Manage clocked-in employees

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Time Clock History

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/Copy Time Clock entries

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit Time Clock entries

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete Time Clock entries

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Stores (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Store Exchange Center

+

Store Exchange, receive files

+

Store Exchange, send files

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Turn security on/off

+

Add a custom security group

+

Employees & security overview

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6619fc2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + +Add an Employee + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add an Employee

+

Edit an Employee Record | Delete an Employee Record  

+

 

+

Use this procedure to add employees in Point of Sale and optionally assign security group rights. The rights of the assigned security group determine the employees access to Point of Sale features.

+

If requiring logins, only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can add employees.

+

 

+

If you have accessed this topic after copying another employee record, start with Step 4. Edit the information brought from the copied record as needed.

+

To add a new employee:

+
    +
  1. +

    If requiring logins, log in to Point of Sale as the System Administrator.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Employees menu, select Employee List.

    +
    3. +
+

Your employee list is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Employee.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter employee name, contact information, and other information in the appropriate fields:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    If requiring logins to use the program, also complete the following:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save or Save and New if adding another employee.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copying an employee record

+

Tracking employees without requiring logins

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..737a967 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copy an Employee Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy an Employee Record

+

Add an Employee | Edit an Employee | Delete an Employee

+

 

+

Copying an existing employee record is a quick way to add a new employee with similar information. When you copy an employee record, all of the information except login name and password is carried to the new employee record. You can then edit the new record to make it unique, as necessary. You cannot copy the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic record.

+

If requiring logins, only the System Administrator can copy an employee record.

+

To copy an employee record to create a new one:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Employee List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select or display the employee record to be copied.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Copy Employee from the window tool bar.

    +
    4. +
+

All information except the login name and password is copied to the new employee record.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a Login name and create a password for the new employee, make any other changes that are necessary, and assign a security group.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin04.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d5241e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + + +View or Edit an Employee Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

View or Edit an Employee Record

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Add an Employee | Copy a Record

+ +

 

+

Only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can edit employee passwords. Other users, with adequate rights, can edit other employee information or change the security group assignment. An employee's Login Name can never be edited.

+

To view or edit employee records:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Employee List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight the employees record in your employee list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Edit Employee. The employees record is displayed.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make changes as needed.

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Tip: Use List Edit mode to edit many records quickly. In the employee list, list edit mode is a quick way to change the security group assignments for several employees, or to update ZIP codes or phone area codes when changes occur.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete an employee record

+

Track employee commissions

+

Track employee hours worked

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin05.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f93867a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete an Employee Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete an Employee Record

+

Add an Employee | View or Edit an Employee

+

 

+

Only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can delete employees. You cannot delete the System Administrator.

+

To delete employees:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the employee record(s) to be deleted from your employee list. How do I select multiple employees?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Delete Employees from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

(Pro) You will be alerted if any of the selected employee(s) are currently clocked in.

+
    +
  1. +

    If the confirmation window is displayed, select Delete to complete the action.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin07.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dff4306 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Employees without Requiring Logins + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Employees without Requiring Logins

+

Employees & Security Overview | Turn Security On/Off

+

 

+

If you want to record employee names on documents so you can run sales reports by employee and/or track commissions, but you do not want to require employees to login or limit access to certain program features, you should still define employees in Employees & Security.

+

Once employees have been defined, the employee names are available for selection on any document that contains the Associate or Cashier fields. Select a name from the drop-down list of defined employees.

+

 

+

Warning: If you do not require employees to log in, there will be no restrictions on employee access to program features or data. All employees will have access to all areas. In addition, not requiring password access may make your company data more vulnerable to unauthorized access from outside sources, such as across a shared network or via the Internet. Click here to read recommendations for a comprehensive data protection strategy.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add an employee

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin08.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..371e17f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Turn Security On/Off + + + + + + + + + + + +

Turn Security On/Off

+

Log In/Out | Add Employees | Security Rights

+

 

+

Requiring employees to log in with a login name and password activates the security features of Point of Sale.

+

To activate security:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the home page, select Preferences Company from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select General from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Require users to log in check box.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a password for the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic when prompted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Log in as the System Administrator using the password defined in Step 5 or as another employee previously set up.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

After activating security in this manner, add or edit employee records, assigning user names, passwords, and security rights as needed.

+

Only the System Administrator can change this setting in the future. To deactivate security, come to the same preference page and clear the check box.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track employee transactions without requiring logins

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin10.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a67a478 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Create a New Security Group + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Security Group

+

Copy a Security Group | View or Edit Group Rights

+

 

+

You are not limited to the predefined security groups. You can create new security groups with your preferred security rights, and then assign them to your employees.

+

To add a new security group:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Security.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select New Group from the window toolbar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the New Group dialog, enter a unique name for the group and select OK.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    The new group is created and added as a new column to the Security window. The group initially has no security rights.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Edit the security rights of the new group, granting rights as needed.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Assign the new group to employees, using the procedures described in the Viewing or Editing an Employee Record topic.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

Multi-Store Note: Security settings are not shared among stores; each store can create security groups as needed to control access on a local level.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a security group

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin11.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..32cd9c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Copy a Security Group + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Security Group

+

Custom Security Groups | View or Edit Group Rights

+

 

+

You can quickly create a new security group by copying an existing one. Once copied, simply edit the rights of the new group as necessary and then assign it to your employees. The employees assigned to the original group are not copied to the new group; you must manually assign them.

+

To copy a security group:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Security.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy Group from the window toolbar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Copy Security Group dialog, select the group to be copied, enter a unique name for the new group, and then select Copy Group.

    +
    4. +
+

The new group is created and added as a new column to the Security window. The initial rights are the same as the group that was copied.

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the security rights of the new group, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Assign the new group to employees, using the procedures described in the View or Edit an Employee Record topic.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a custom security group

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin12.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin12.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6802b63 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin12.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + +View or Edit a Security Group + + + + + + + + + + + +

View or Edit a Security Group

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Add a Security Group | Copy a Security Group

+ +

 

+

With adequate security rights to do so, you can view and edit the security rights assigned to any of your security groups or add a new group with the rights needed. If employees assigned to a group you are editing are currently working in Point of Sale, their revised rights won't go into effect for them until they log out and then back in.

+

To view or edit a security group:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Security. (Or, from the Employee list, select View/Edit Security Rights from the I Want To menu.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select or clear checkboxes for specific rights in the columns for any of your security groups.

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Default rights for predefined groups

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin13.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin13.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1d476c1 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin13.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Delete a Security Group + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Security Group

+

Add a Custom Security Group | Employees & Security Overview

+

 

+

You can only delete your custom security groups.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Security.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Delete Group.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Delete Security roup dialog, select the group you wish to delete from the drop-down list. In the second drop-down, specify the group to which the employees from the deleted group should be assigned.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Delete.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    If prompted, select Yes to confirm the deletion.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for predefined groups

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_commissions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_commissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..38f24ed --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_commissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Employee Sales Commissions + + + + + + + + + +

Track Employee Sales Commissions

+
+

Basic

+
+

If you pay your employees a commission for sales, Point of Sale can calculate and report commission amounts for you. Each employee can have his own commission rate and items can be marked in inventory as eligible or not for commission. When making a sale of items earning a commission, Point of Sale will calculate the commissions which can be seen in a report.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_mgr_override.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_mgr_override.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb704fd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_mgr_override.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Security: Manager Override + + + + + + + + + + +

Security: Manager Override

+

Security Overview | Log In/Out | Default Rights

+

 

+

Many actions can be completed only by users with sufficient security rights to perform them. The Manager Override function provides an option for those times when it may be necessary for a manager to accomplish a sales task for which the current logged-in user does not have sufficient rights.

+

When a sales task is attempted for which the current user does not have rights, the Manager Override alert is displayed, which allows a manger to temporarily sign in and complete the action. The manager login is good only for the current task, security immediately reverts to the previous user.

+

 

+

Manager Override

+

To override a security limitation:

+
    +
  1. +

    When the Manager Override dialog is displayed and you wish to override the limitation on the current user, sign in with your user name and password.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete the task and save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Security automatically reverts to the previous user.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Only certain point-of-sale tasks  trigger the Manager Override alert:

+ +

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_passwords.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_passwords.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..23a0840 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_passwords.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +secadmin_passwords + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Passwords to Protect your Data

+

This is a popup topic. and has been hidden

+

Password logins, combined with security group assignments, can be used in Point of Sale to restrict employee access to features or sensitive data. A password is also required to encrypt Store Exchange files sent between stores.

+

The following apply to passwords in Point of Sale:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_prntemplst.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_prntemplst.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d02ee2 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_prntemplst.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + +Print or Export Your Employee List + + + + + + + + + + +

Print or Export Your Employee List

+

Printing Basics | Export Data | Reports Overview

+

 

+

A list of your employees can be printed or exported to Excel for reference. Other employee reports, such as Employee Sales in various formats are available in the reports area.

+

(Pro) You also have access to Employee Commissions and Time Clock reports.  

+

To print or export from the Employee List:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your employee list and select the records you wish to print or export. How do I select multiple records in a list?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+

If printing or exporting a group of related records, you may find it helpful to filter the list first. To print or export the entire list, make sure the list filter is set to display all records.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the window toolbar, select Print.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From the I Want To menu, select Export to Excel.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to print/export the selected records, displayed records, or all records.

    +
    2. +
+

To print or export your employee list as a report:

+

Printing or exporting your list as a report gives you additional flexibility in formatting and filtering.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Reports menu at the home page, select Report Center.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Employees Employee List as the report type.

    +
    3. +
+

The employee list report is displayed with default settings.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Modify to change report columns, filters, display options, etc

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK. The report is re-generated and displayed on the screen.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Print or Excel to output the report as desired.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f01ba9 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +Track Employee Hours + + + + + + + + +

Track Employee Hours Worked

+

Employee & Security Overview | Clock In/Out

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale's Time Clock provides a way to track employee hours worked. Employees clock in and out to begin and end their work shifts. Associated tools and reports are available for managers to review and edit time clock records when needed. If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software, Time Clock entries can be sent to your financial software to use in preparing your payroll.

+

The Time Clock feature is turned on by selecting I want to track employee hours on the General page of company preferences. Time Clock tasks are then available from the Employees menu.

+

In a multi-store configuration, time records are sent from remote stores to Headquarters and Headquarters can add or edit Time Clock entries for any store.

+

 

+

* If you are on an earlier version of QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software, your time entries are not sent. However, the Time Clock Weekly Summary report in Point of Sale is formatted the same as the employee Weekly Timesheet available in QuickBooks Desktop, allowing you to quickly transpose your time worked information for payroll processing.

+

Select a topic to learn more:

+

Correct a time entry

+

Manage clocked-in employees

+

Time Clock history

+

Time Clock reports

+

Security rights for time tracking

+

Send time records to QuickBooks Desktop for payroll

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_clockinout.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_clockinout.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..11b4a4e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_clockinout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Clock In/Out + + + + + + + + + + +

Clock In/Out

+

Log In/Out of Point of Sale | Change your Password

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: The availability of Time Clock is controlled by your Features to Use preference settings and employees must be set up as hourly employees. Learn more

+

 

+

Hourly-wage employees should clock in and out to begin and end their work shift.

+

To clock in or out:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the home page, select Clock In/Out from the Employees menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select your user name from the drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter your password (if required).

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Clock In or Clock Out, as appropriate.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Add a new time entry

+

Manage clocked-in employees

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_correcting.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_correcting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..374b15f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_correcting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +Correct a Time Clock Entry + + + + + + + + + + +

Correct a Time Clock Entry

+

Add a New Time Entry | Time Clock History | Time Clock Reports

+
+

Pro

+
+

If you have sufficient security rights, you can edit the entries in your Time Clock history until they have been sent to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Multi-store Exception: Time clock entries can be edited at a remote store only until they have been sent to Headquarters.  

+

To edit a Time Clock entry:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your Time Clock history if necessary (select from the Employees menu).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use normal list procedures to locate and select the entry that needs correcting.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Edit Entry from the window toolbar.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make changes as necessary and then select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Send Time Clock records to QuickBooks Desktop for payroll

+

Clock in/out

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_history.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3c2b40 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Time Clock History + + + + + + + + + +

Time Clock History

+

Correct a Time Entry | Time Clock Reports

+
+

Pro

+
+

Your Time Clock history is very similar to other lists in Point of Sale. It displays a listing of Time Clock entries for your hourly employees for a specified time period. Each entry in history is comprised of one clock in/clock out sequence.

+

What's important about Time Clock history?

+ +

Related Topics

+

Manage clocked-in employees

+

Clock in/out

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_manageclockins.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_manageclockins.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8b0632d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_manageclockins.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage Clocked-in Employees + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Clocked-in Employees

+

Add New Time Entry | Time Clock History | Time Clock Reports

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Manage Clocked-in Employees window displays the name, clock in time, and elapsed time for each employee that is currently clocked in. The  window allows an employee with adequate rights to view and, if necessary, clock out and adjust the time worked. This may become necessary if an employee has forgotten to clock out when leaving.

+

To view employees currently clocked-in:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Manage Clocked-In Employees.

    +

    The window is displayed with clocked-in employees listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select an employee name from the list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If necessary, select Clock Out.

    +
    4. +
+

You are asked if you want to modify the hours for this employee. Answer Yes or No. If yes, the time entry is opened in Time Clock history for editing.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Correct a time entry

+

Clock in/out

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_new.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f08c094 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a New Time Entry + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Time Entry

+

Manage Clocked-in Employees | Time Clock History | Time Clock Reports

+

 

+
+

Pro

+
+

If you have sufficient security rights, you can add new entries to your Time Clock history. This is handy if an employee forgets to clock in for his shift.

+

To add a Time Clock entry:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the Home Page, select New Employee Time Entry from the Employees menu.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From your Time Clock History list, select New Entry.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the employee name, Store number (if applicable), and clock in/out dates and times as applicable.

    +
    2. +
+

If making an entry in the Elapsed Time field, use the format hh:mm (Example: 04:30 for 4.5 hours)

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Correct a time entry

+

Clock in/out

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_report.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1cd580 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadmin_timecards_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Time Clock Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

Time Clock Reports

+

Time Clock Overview | Time Clock History | Reports Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

There are three Time Clock reports available.

+ +

These reports are available from:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Manage clocked-in employees

+

Send time records to QuickBooks Desktop financial software for payroll

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadminoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadminoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4776b2f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/secadminoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + + +Employees & Security Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Employees & Security Overview

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Add an Employee | Security Rights

+ +

 

+

In the working environment of a small retailer, it is not uncommon for the owner or manager to use the same register as a sales associate. You may want to give different security rights to different employees to limit access to certain features or to ensure confidentiality regarding sensitive financial information.

+

Adding employees in Point of Sale and requiring password logins allows you to:

+ +

In addition to login names, passwords, and security group assignments, employee records can store addresses, contact information, and related notes.

+

The use of the security features are optional, but strongly recommended. Besides providing the benefits outlined above, requiring user names and passwords to access the program helps protect your valuable data against unauthorized access across a network or the Internet. Using Point of Sales security features should be one component of a comprehensive data protection strategy.

+

 

+

Multi-Store Note: Employees and security rights are defined at each store independently and are not exchanged between stores although Time Clock records are sent from remote stores to Headquarters. When a new employee is added to Point of Sale at a remote store, the remote may want to contact Headquarters outside of Point of Sale to have the employee added to the central database for payroll or other purposes. Each store has their own System Administrator.

+

 

+

Turning Security On

+

The security features are enabled by selecting the company preference check box to Require users to log in. You are immediately prompted to enter a System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic password and then to log in.

+

Once security is enabled in this way, only the Security Administrator can change this setting, add or delete employees, and perform other security-related tasks.

+

 

+

About Security Groups

+

You control access by assigning your employees to security groups; each group having a different set of access rights. Point of Sale comes with four predefined security groups that you can assign. If the default rights in the four predefined groups don't meet your needs, you can easily change them or set up new groups with access rights of your choosing.

+

 

+

Why else might a Point of Sale feature not be available to me?

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/security_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/security_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7439856 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_secadmin/security_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + +security_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Employees & Security: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

Working with Employee Records

+

Add an employee

+

View/edit an employee Record

+

Copy an employee record

+

Delete an employee record

+ +

Track employee commissions

+ +

Use Time Clock to track hours worked

+ +

Print or export my employee list

+

Run employee reports

+

 

+

Working with Security

+

Turn security on/off (require employee logins)

+

View predefined group security rights

+

Add a custom security group

+

View/edit security group properties

+

Log in/out

+

Change my login password

+

Track employees without requiring logins

+

Set up automatic security logouts

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_editordelete.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_editordelete.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2c25523 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_editordelete.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit or Delete Shipments + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit or Delete Shipments

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Shipping Manager Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

The ability to edit or delete shipping information may be limited as follows:

+ +

To edit shipping information before saving the receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click anywhere in the shipping information area on the receipt. The Enter Shipping Info dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Edit the information and click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

To delete the shipping information, including the amount, before saving:

+
    +
  1. +

     Click the Options button in the shipping information area on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Remove Shipping Info.

    +
    3. +
+

The information and shipping charge is immediately removed.

+

To edit shipping information after saving the receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and open the receipt in sales history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Add/Edit Shipping Information.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Shipping Info section of the receipt, make a selection from the drop-down Options list:

    +
    4. +
+

Ship Items via Shipping Manager: Available only if Shipping Manager is enabled. Launches Shipping Manager for shipping or tracking the shipment. If a tracking number is recorded on the receipt, this option will connect to the carrier's web site to track the progress of the package.

+

Edit Shipping Info: Allows you to change or remove the shipping address, shipping provider, ship date, and tracking number. You cannot however remove the shipping amount.

+

Remove Shipping Info: Removes all shipping information except the shipping amount.

+

Print  Mailing Label: This option prints a shipping/mailing label using the printer and template set up in Point of Sale.

+

Print Packing Slip: Prints a listing of items to be shipped and both the Bill To and Ship To addresses.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_info.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..412f535 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,264 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Shipping Information on Receipts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Shipping Information on Receipts

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list | Shipping Manager Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Note: The availability of the shipping fields on receipts is controlled by your Features to Use and Sales: Shipping preference settings.

+

 

+

Use these procedures to record shipping information and charges on sales receipts.

+

How are you shipping?

+

Using Shipping Manager Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Not using Shipping Manager Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Making Sales Receipts

+

Estimating Shipping on Customer Orders

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_oview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b1a4689 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + +Shipping Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shipping Overview

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale offers two way to enter shipping information on sales receipts and customer orders.

+ +

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_report_track.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_report_track.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a532344 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_report_track.htm @@ -0,0 +1,127 @@ + + + + + + + +Reporting and Tracking of Shipments + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reporting and Tracking of Shipments

+

Shipping Overview | Shipping Manager | Shipping from Receipts

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale offers two reports to help you track your shipments. If you use Shipping Manager, you have reports and  package tracking capabilities in Shipping Manager and in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Shipping Reports and Tracking in Point of Sale

+

The shipping reports are available in the Sales > Shipping report category. Note: Only shipments recorded on Point of Sale receipts show up in these reports.

+ + +

If using Shipping Manager, tracking numbers are automatically added to Point of Sale receipts. If you have an Internet connection, you can go to the carrier's Web site to track the status of a package without having to open Shipping Manager and without having to retype the tracking number.

+ +

       Shipping tracking link; click to go to the carrier's Web site and track the package

+

 

+

Note: If a Shipping Manager shipment contains multiple packages, each has its own tracking number. The link displayed in Point of Sale is for the first package. You can track the other packages from the shipping history window in Shipping Manager as described below.

+

 

+

 

+

Reports and Tracking in Shipping Manager

+

Report and tracking features are also available from the Shipping History window in Shipping Manager, if you use it.

+

To access Shipping History window:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale menu, select QuickBooks Shipping Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select UPS Shipping Options.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Track or Cancel a Shipment.

    +
    4. +
+

The Shipping Manager is launched and your shipping history, defaulted to today's shipments, is displayed. Each line in the table represents a package, not a shipment (which could have multiple packages). View Example View Sample Report

+ +

Some of the options available from this window are:

+ +

Select Help on this window for more information about managing your shipments.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_serviceitem.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_serviceitem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6704257 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_serviceitem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Using a Service Item for Shipping/Handling Charges + + + + + + + + + + +

Use a Service Item for Shipping/Handling Charges

+

Service Item Overview | Create a Sales Receipt

+

 

+

Pro Note: Pro level users have advanced shipping options. Learn more

+

 

+

To charge for shipping and/or handling, set up a service item in inventory called "Shipping Charges" or similar.

+

If shipping charges are taxable in your area, assign the appropriate tax code to the item and optionally map the shipping charges to the appropriate QuickBooks financial software income account on the item record. You can enter your standard shipping charge as the item price or leave the price at zero (0) and edit it on a sale-by-sale basis as you create the sales receipts.

+

When creating a receipt, list the shipping charge item on the receipt in the same manner as other items. Sales tax will be calculated and added for the shipping charge item, if applicable.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use tax codes

+

Map items to QuickBooks accounts

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4068474 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr.htm @@ -0,0 +1,215 @@ + + + + + + + +Shipping Manager: Overview and Setup + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shipping Manager: Overview and Setup

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

With the QuickBooks Shipping Manager, you can process a shipment and prepare a shipping label with United Parcel Service (UPS) with the "ship to" information pre-filleddirectly from Point of Sale sales receipts and customer orders. You can also track or cancel shipments and view online shipping reports.

+

The UPS functionality of this product is available only for packages shipped from the United States of America.

+

What would you like to know more about?

+

Shipping Manager Requirements Click to expand topic

+ +

Turn Shipping Manager On Click to expand topic

+ +

Set Up Shipping Manager Click to expand topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr_estimates.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr_estimates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04b0ee6 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr_estimates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,213 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Shipping Estimates on Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Shipping Estimates on Customer Orders

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list | Create a Customer Order | Fill an Order

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Shipping information and an estimate of the charges can be entered on a sales order or work order and then transferred to the sales receipt made when the order is filled. If using Shipping Manager, you can retrieve an estimate of shipping charges from UPS and enter that estimate on the order.

+

The actual shipment is always done from a sales receipt.

+

To enter a shipping estimate on a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create the order, adding the items and customer.

    +
    2. +
+

Specify how you are shipping to continue:

+

Using Shipping Manager Click to expand topic

+ +

Not using Shipping Manager Click to expand topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Enter Shipping Information on Receipts

+

Shipping Manager Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr_scale.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr_scale.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c9499e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_shipping/shipping_shipmgr_scale.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + + +Shipping Manager: Use an Electronic Scale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shipping Manager: Use an Electronic Scale

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Shipping Manager supports the use of an electronic scale. This allows Shipping Manager to pull the shipping weight from the scale when attached  to the Point of Sale workstation via a USB connection.

+

Supported Scale:  Mettler Toledo PS60 USB

+

 

+

Note: This scale integrates with Shipping Manager only; it is not supported in Point of Sale inventory or on transaction documents. The instructions given below come from Shipping Manager and since hardware compatibility or setup instructions may change from time-to-time you should consult the help system within Shipping Manager to ensure you have the latest information.

+

To set up the scale in Shipping Manager:

+
    +
  1. +

    Attach the scale to an available USB portClick to display a popup topic on the workstation running Shipping Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Turn on the scale and test that the scale correctly displays a known weight.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the Point of Sale menu, select QuickBooks Shipping Manager and then UPS Shipping Options > Settings.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scales from the Setting menu.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select the check box to Use Electronic Scale and select USB-connected scale as the model.

    +
    6. +
+

Shipping Manager Scale Settings

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Test. The weight from your scale should be displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK to save your settings.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Shipping Manager Overview and Setup

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_styles/styles_refe_etc.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_styles/styles_refe_etc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..99fb893 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_styles/styles_refe_etc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ + + + + + + + + +Styles and etc for Copying and Reference + + + + + + + + + + + +

Styles and etc for Copying and Reference

+

Popup: Click to display a popup topic  |  Expando: Click to expand/collapse topic Click to collapse topic |  Check box: Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function  |  Internet feature: Internet connection required

+

 

+

This is a hidden topic.

+

It is for help authors use to quickly copy and paste various pre-formatted elements into content topics.

+

 

+

Commonly Used Links

+

How do I select multiple items? Click to display a popup topic

+

Expando - paste this link and edit Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Components for expandos; no borders, shading = #ffffec

+

Click to expand/collapse topic

+

 

+ ++ + + +
+

 

+
+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Tables

+

 

+

 

+

Two-column; no borders:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Heading

+		 +

Heading

+
+

Title

+		 +

Description

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Three column; no borders:

+ + ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Point of Sale

+		 +

QuickBooks Account

+		 +

Account Type

+
+

Cash In Drawer

+		 +

Cash In Drawer

+		 +

Bank

+
+

Check

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+

Credit Card

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+ +

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Link 4

+

Link 5

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend351.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend351.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0932a62 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend351.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +Access your Vendor Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access your Vendor Records

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Add a New Vendor | View a Vendor's History

+
+

Basic

+
+

To work with vendors:

+ +

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend352.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend352.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bd4f58e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend352.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + + +Adding a New Vendor + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Vendor

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Vendors Overview | Import Vendors

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: If you have accessed this topic after copying another vendor record, start with Step 2. Edit the information brought from the copied record as needed.
+
+Pro Note: In a multi-store configuration, only Headquarters can add or edit vendors.

+

To create a new vendor record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Vendor from the Purchasing menu.

    +
    2. +
+

A blank vendor form is opened.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make entries in the vendor information fields, as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

Company is a required field.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copy a vendor record

+

Add a vendor directly in the vendor list

+

Enter vendor payment terms

+

Track multiple vendors for an item (Pro)

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend356.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend356.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f8f85ef --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend356.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a Vendor Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Vendor Record

+

Overview | Find a Vendor Record | Make a Vendor Inactive

+
+

Basic

+
+

To edit a vendor record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the vendor record in your vendor list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Modify the vendor fields, as necessary.

    +
    4. +
+

Read the warning below about editing vendor company names.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Warning: Changing a vendor company nameClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a vendor

+

Add a new vendor

+

Merge vendor records

+

Vendors overview

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend357.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend357.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b31f83 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend357.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copy a Vendor Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Vendor Record

+

Vendors Overview | Import Vendors

+
+

Basic

+
+

To create a new vendor using copy:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your vendor list, highlight the vendor record to be copied.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy from the window toolbar to copy all fields to a new record.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make any edits you need to modify the new vendor.

    +
    4. +
+

At a minimum, a new Company name must be assigned to the new vendor. See vendor information fields for information about the various information that can be recorded for a vendor.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a new vendor

+

Delete a vendor

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend358.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend358.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ddb00d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend358.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + +Deleting a Vendor Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Vendor Record

+

Vendors Overview | Edit a Vendor Record | Find a Vendor Record

+
+

Basic

+
+

To delete a vendor record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the vendor records that you want to delete from your vendor list.

    +
    2. +
+

How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Delete Vendors from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, confirm the deletion and specify if you want to delete the vendor from QuickBooks Desktop as well.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Make a vendor inactive

+

Add a new vendor

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend359.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend359.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a392a81 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend359.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Vendor Payment Terms + + + + + + + + + + +

Vendor Payment Terms

+

Vendor Billing Information on Vouchers | Edit a Vendor Record  

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can set up default payment terms for your vendors. The default terms that you specify are applied to purchase orders and receiving vouchers made for the vendor.

+

How are vendor payment terms exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop?

+

To define payment terms for a vendor:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the vendor record in Form View (when adding or editing).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the image\f4_symbol.gif button or press <F4> in the Terms field.

    +
    3. +
+

The Terms dialog is displayed, as shown below.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in the three fields to define the payment terms.

    +
    2. +
+

The example below shows that payment is due in 30 days (Net 30), with a 2% discount given if paid within 10 days.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

        image\vendor_terms.gif

+

Related Topics

+

Vendor field descriptions

+

Security rights for vendors

+

Import items from a Vendor Catalog

+

How vendor records are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend360.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend360.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae77ecc --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend360.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + +View a Vendor's History + + + + + + + + + + + +

View a Vendor's History

+

Vendor Overview | Purchasing Overview | Find a Vendor Record

+
+

Basic

+
+

A vendor history report allows you to view summarized statistical data for the merchandise you have purchased and returned from/to a vendor, as well as displaying a list of vouchers and non-deleted purchase orders made for that vendor. You can expand the documents included in the report to view item detail or QuickZoom to view the document itself.

+

To view a vendors history report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display a vendor record from your vendor list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Display the list in collapsed format: the vendor's history is shown on the bottom of the information panel.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

Select Edit and then select the HISTORY tab on the vendor form.

+

The vendors history report is displayed.

+

image\vendor_history.gif

+

How do I refresh a vendor's history?Click to display a popup topic

+

With a vendor history report displayed, you can:

+ + +

Notes:

+ + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend361.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend361.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0b5b4b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend361.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printing your Vendor List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print your Vendor List

+

Find a Vendor Record | Print Overview | Export Lists

+
+

Basic

+
+

To print a list of your vendors:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the vendors you want included in the printed list.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Print from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Printing Vendor List Reports

+

You can also print your vendor list as a report, which gives you more freedom to customize the list for your particular needs or to export the vendor list to a spreadsheet.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Vendors overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend362.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend362.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..900974e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vend362.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + + +vend362 + + + + + + + + +

Warning: Changing a Vendor Company Name

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Changing a vendor company name in the vendor file has no effect on inventory or your receiving history. If you change a company name, you should update the Vendor field on item records purchased from that vendor.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendor_selectfordoc.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendor_selectfordoc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aae248a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendor_selectfordoc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Vendor + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Vendor

+

Add a New Vendor | Edit a Vendor Record | Vendors Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: This information applies when coming from another record or document, such as an inventory item or purchase order, to select a vendor to populate the Vendor field.

+

To select and add a vendor on another record or document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal sort, search, or filter procedures to locate the vendor in your vendor list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Double-click the vendor or highlight the row and choose Select from the bottom toolbar.

    +
    3. +
+

While in the vendor list you have complete editing abilities to add a new vendor or edit an existing one. After adding or editing a vendor record, choose Save & Select to both save the record in your vendor list and return to the record or document with which you were working.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_emailing.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_emailing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d331a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_emailing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +E-mail a Vendor + + + + + + + + + + +

E-mail a Vendor

+

E-mail a Document | E-mail FAQs | Export Data

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can quickly send an e-mail to a vendor, provided you have entered their e-mail address on the vendor record and have a default Windows e-mail client set up.

+

If you wish to attach a Point of Sale document to the e-mail, use the e-mailing a document procedure instead.

+

To e-mail a vendor:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the vendor record so the Vendor Info tab is visible.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

With your vendor list in collapsed view, ensure the customer's e-mail address is displayed on the Information panel. How do I add it?

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Send Mail button (vendor form) or the e-mail address link (blue text on Information panel).

    +
    2. +
+

Your default e-mail client opens with the vendor's address prefilled.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add a subject line and body text to the e-mail.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Send.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Office Integration

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_hdi.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4cb0dfd --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + +vendors_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Vendors: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

Access my vendor records

+

Add a new vendor

+

Find a vendor record

+

Edit a vendor record

+

Delete a vendor record

+

View a vendors history

+

Enter vendor billing information on receiving vouchers

+ +

Track multiple vendors for an item

+ +

Make a vendor inactive

+

Print my vendor list

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_inactive.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_inactive.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7024e6e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_inactive.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Make a Vendor Inactive + + + + + + + + + + + +

Make a Vendor Inactive

+

Overview | Find a Vendor Record | Edit a Vendor Record

+
+

Basic

+
+

Vendors in Point of Sale can be flagged as inactive. An inactive vendor:

+ +

This allows you to flag utilities vendors (which may have been imported from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software) or any vendor not currently used in Point of Sale as inactive, so they do not display on your active vendor list.

+

To make a vendor inactive:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Inactive check box on the vendor record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_mergeduplicates.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_mergeduplicates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb16fce --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendors_mergeduplicates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + +Merge Vendor Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merge Vendor Records

+

Find a Vendor Record | Delete a Vendor Record | Make a Vendor Inactive

+
+

Basic

+
+

Occasionally, you may find that a vendor has been entered twice in your vendor list. Merging the vendor records combines the purchase history of the duplicate entries into a single record and then deletes the other.

+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you will be prompted to delete the duplicate vendor in QuickBooks Desktop as well.

+

(Pro) This task is available at Headquarters only.

+

To merge vendor records:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your Point of Sale vendor list, select one or both of the vendor records you wish to merge. How do I select multiple records in my list?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Merge Vendors from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Merge Vendors window opens with the pre-selected vendor(s) listed.

+

Merge Vendors window

+
    +
  1. +

    Review the vendors and make changes as necessary:

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Vendors.

    +
    2. +
+

If the vendor being removed has a purchase history, a listing of the number of receiving vouchers and purchase orders to be updated is displayed. The vendor on these documents will be replaced by the vendor you selected to keep. Tell me more

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Vendors.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, specify if you want to delete the duplicate from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software as well. See related notes below for more information.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

How vendor records are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendorsoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendorsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c4aacf --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_vendors/vendorsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Vendors Overview + + + + + + + + + +

Vendors Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Add a New Vendor | View a Vendor's History

+
+

Basic

+
+

Each vendor from whom you purchase merchandise must be identified by a unique company name. When you assign a vendor to each item defined in inventory, Point of Sale can track and report on the merchandise by vendor as it is ordered, received, and sold.

+

You can also assign each vendor a user-defined code of one to three alphanumeric characters. These vendor codes can be a useful alternate way of searching for a vendor record and appear on printed price tags where the printable space is often limited.

+

If you have integrated Point of Sale with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can elect to enter vendor invoices (for the merchandise you have purchased) in either program. This Point of Sale company preference choice affects how receiving vouchers are transferred to QuickBooks Desktop.

+

 

+

(Pro) Remote stores can view and filter reports by vendor, but only Headquarters can add or edit vendors.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Vendor field descriptions

+

Security rights for vendors

+

Import items from a Vendor Catalog

+

How vendors are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs01.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f51634 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Set Up Hardware + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up Hardware

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Hardware List

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

For the most current Point of Sale hardware drivers and installation instructions, click here.

+

What type of hardware are you setting up?

+

Cash drawer

+

Modem

+

Bar Code Scanner

+

Card reader

+

Customer pole display

+

Touchscreen monitor

+

Physical inventory scanner

+

PIN pad

+

Printers

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot hardware

+

Workstation preferences overview

+

Install supported hardware

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs02.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f45c76f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + + +Workstation Preferences: General + + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences: General

+

Preference Instructions | Company Preferences

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Workstation Number

+		 +

Enter a workstation number from 1 - 10. Each workstation in a store must have a unique number.

+
+

Security: Automatic Logout

+		 +

Select to automatically log out a user after a specified period of inactivity.

+

Define the amount of time, in minutes, after which users will be automatically logged out. Default: 15 minutes

+

Note: Setting applies only if employee logins are required.

+
+

Appearance

+		 +

Select Reset Now to reset Point of Sale layouts to the default appearance. Any customizations made to column order, size, etc., will be lost.

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees & security overview

+

Workstation preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs03.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8ebd2c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + + +Workstation Preferences: Documents and Printers + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences: Documents and Printers

+

Preference Instructions | Printing FAQs | Company Preferences

+

 

+

Use the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences to specify the default printer, print template and number of copies to print for each document type in Point of Sale. Set these options at each workstation that will print from within Point of Sale.

+

Printer: Select from the drop-down list of available printers.

+

Template: Select from a list of available templates to be used when printing the document type. The template determines the print layout of fields for a particular document type and printer. Point of Sale includes several template choices for each document type for use with various printers and for various needs.

+

Copies: Enter the number of copies to print each time the document type is printed.

+

Highlight a document line and select Preview or Print Test Page to view or test that the printer/template combination results in the desired output. If you need to add or configure a printer, select the Hardware Setup Wizard button.

+

If you also specify to display the Print dialog on the Print Options page, you can change these settings at the time of printing.

+

 

+

Shipping Manager Label Printer (Pro)

+

If you use Shipping Manager, select Shipping Manager Setup to open this application and set up a printer for your shipping labels.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

General printing instructions

+

Customizing print templates (Pro)

+

Workstation preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs04.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ff421b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Available Printers/Add Printer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Available Printers/Add Printer

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Printers

+

 

+

This information applies to the Available Printers page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

This workstation preference page lists the printers currently installed on this workstation.

+

Check the list to see if your printer is installed. If not, select the Hardware Setup Wizard button to install it now. Follow the wizard prompts to complete the installation.

+

If you purchased your printer from Intuit (i.e. a supported printer), follow any instructions included with the printer or select from the installation instructions below.

+

 

+

Select a link for more information about installing supported printers:

+

Citizen CT-S300 Receipt Printer (USB)

+

Star TSP100/TSP600 receipt printer (USB)

+

Star TSP600 receipt printer (parallel)

+

Zebra LP2824 tag printer (USB)

+

Zebra LP2824 tag printer (parallel)

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Print option preferences

+

General printing instructions

+

Troubleshooting printing

+

Setting up an Inkjet or laser printer

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_autoupdate.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_autoupdate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f8c3850 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_autoupdate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +wsprefs_autoupdate + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences: Automatic Update

+

Preference Instructions | Update Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sale can automatically check for and download program updates in the background while you continue working in the program. Use this page to set your update preferences.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Automatically download updates on this workstation

+		 +

To enable automatic download of updates on this workstation, select Yes.

+

To disable automatic download, select No

+

Also, select No if this workstation will install updates that have been downloaded by another workstation. See the following settings and the notes below.

+
+

Use shared download location

+		 +

If this workstation will download updates for other workstations OR if this workstation will install shared update files downloaded by another workstation, select Yes.

+

Otherwise, select No.

+
+

Shared Location

+		 +

If you answered Yes to using a shared download location, specify or browse to the location to which the update files are downloaded (all workstations downloading to or installing from this folder should set this preferences)

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_barcodescanner.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_barcodescanner.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5d7b1f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_barcodescanner.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Bar Code Scanner + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Bar Code Scanner

+

Preference Instructions | FAQs

+

 

+

This information applies to the Bar Code Scanner page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

If you have a bar code scanner attached to this workstation, select the check box on this preference page.

+

Select Test Bar Code Scanner at the bottom of the page to confirm the scanner is working.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List of compatible bar code scanners

+

Install Bar Code Scanner

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_cardreader.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_cardreader.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f8be660 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_cardreader.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Card Reader + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Card Reader

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Card Readers

+

 

+

This information applies to the Card Reader page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

Select your installed card reader from the drop-down list, then select the test button to check its operation.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Installing the Magtek 21040110 MSR USB card reader

+

Installing the ID Innovations MSR USB card reader

+

Installing the ID Innovations MSR PS2 card reader

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_cashdrawer.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_cashdrawer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..356585f --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_cashdrawer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Cash Drawer

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Cash Drawers

+

 

+

This information applies to the Cash Drawer page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

A cash drawer must be connected through a 40-column receipt printer. Your receipt printer must be installed and working for the cash drawer to function. If you need to add your receipt printer or cash drawer, select the Hardware Setup Wizard button at the bottom of this window and follow the instructions.

+

To change your cash drawer setup on this page:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the first drop-down list, select your receipt printer model.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the second drop-down list, select the cash drawer connection that matches your receipt printer.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Open Cash Drawer to confirm that your cash drawer opens properly.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK or Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Cash drawer troubleshooting

+

Receipt printer troubleshooting

+

Installing the VALU-u Line cash drawer

+

Installing the M-S dash drawer

+

List of compatible cash drawers

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_instructions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_instructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..104e762 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_instructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Workstation Preference Instructions + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preference Instructions

+

Workstation Preference Overview | Company Preferences

+

 

+

Use workstation preferences to set up hardware, print options, and general program options that apply only to this workstation. Each workstation sets their own workstation preferences.

+

Changes in some preference settings require you to close all or related windows before saving. Point of Sale will prompt you and give you an opportunity to switch to open windows to save or cancel transactions in progress if necessary.

+

To configure workstation preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu at the home page, select Preferences Workstation.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    From the list on the left, select the page of preferences you wish to edit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Edit preference settings as needed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_modem.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_modem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4202a6d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_modem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Modem + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Modem

+

Preference Instructions | Merchant and Gift Card Service Setup

+

 

+

Point of Sale Desktop does not support modems.

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Communication setup for Merchant or Gift Card Service

+

Workstation preferences instructions

+

Store Exchange overview (Pro)

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_pdt.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_pdt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f087126 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_pdt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up Physical Inventory Scanner + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners

+
+

Basic

+
+

This information applies to the Physical Inventory Scanner page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

This procedure assumes you have followed the instructions to install your physical inventory scanner to this workstation and have assigned a Windows COM port.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your scanner model from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the COM Port number that matches the COM Port you assigned in Windows when installing the scanner.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use the Test button at the bottom of the page to verify operation of the scanner.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using the scanner for a Physical Inventory

+

Hardware troubleshooter

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_pinpad.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_pinpad.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..718f72b --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_pinpad.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a PIN pad + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a PIN Pad

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible PIN Pads

+

 

+

This information applies to the PIN pads page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to add and configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

 

+

This procedure assumes you have used the instructions to install your PIN pad to this computer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your PIN pad model from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use the test button at the bottom of the window to verify operation of the device.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant Services

+

Taking payment by debit/ATM card

+

Configuring Merchant Services

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_poledisplay.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_poledisplay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1486076 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_poledisplay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Pole Display + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Pole Display

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Pole Displays

+

 

+

This information applies to the Pole Display page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your pole display model from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
+

In the Connected to field, select the port the pole display is connected to (a serial port, which is also called a COM port, or a USB port).

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Message Displayed Between Sales area, enter text in Line 1 and/or Line 2 and select an alignment option from the drop-down lists. The display will accommodate up to 20 fixed characters per line or 50 scrolling characters if you select Scroll in the Alignment field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select an option for the Message Displayed During Sales. Your choice is reflected in the Example window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use the test button at the bottom of the page to verify the operation of the device.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Troubleshooting your pole display

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_printoptions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_printoptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c17dc73 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_printoptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + +Workstation Preferences: Print Options + + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences: Print Options

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Printers | Printing FAQs

+

 

+

Additional Printing Preferences

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Prompt for gift receipt with each sale

+		 +

=Select to be prompted to print a gift receipt for each sale (with the item, price, and payment information excluded).

+
+

Prompt to e-mail receipt with each sale

+		 +

=Select to be prompted to e-mail sales receipts to your customers, the prompt message also affords an opportunity to capture an e-mail address if you don't already have it.

+
+

Pause between printing to allow tearing off of printed receipt

+		 +

= The printer will pause briefly before printing the second copy of a receipt. This pause gives users time to tear off the first copy. This option is for users with printers that do not automatically cut off each receipt.

+
+

Print two copies of credit card receipts

+		 +

= Automatically print two copies of all sales receipts that are paid for by credit card. If using two-ply receipt paper, you may disable this option.

+
+

Print two copies of receipts tendered by account charge

+		 +

= Automatically print two copies of all sales receipts that are paid for by charge to customer account. If using two-ply receipt paper, you may disable this option.

+
+

Display Print Options dialog when printing

+		 +

Select the documents for which you wish to display a dialog allowing you to change print settings or to display a preview before printing.

+
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_touchscreen.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_touchscreen.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4e4dd44 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefs_touchscreen.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Touchscreen Monitor + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Touchscreen Monitor

+

Preference Instructions | Using a Touchscreen | Compatible Touchcreens

+

 

+

This information applies to the Touchscreen Monitor page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

 

+

R = Select to enable the use of a touchscreen in Point of Sale.

+

When this option is selected, the touchscreen navigation toolbar and controls are displayed in the customer-facing areas of Point of Sale, such as sales receipts. You must have a touchscreen monitor connected to your computer for this feature to work.

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefsoverview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1796c6c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbpos_workstation_preferences/wsprefsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +Workstation Preferences Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences Overview

+

Preference Instructions | Company Preferences

+

 

+

Workstation preferences define workstation-specific settings and options, including Point of Sale hardware, printing options, and automatic program updates.

+

Use company preferences to define settings and options that are shared by all workstations on a network.

+

Choose a workstation preference area for more information:

+

General: Set automatic logout, appearance, and inventory reminders preferences.

+

Software Updates: Set options for automatically updating the Point of Sale program files on this workstation.

+

Hardware: Individual pages to configure your Point of Sale hardware.

+

Available Printers: View and/or add printers used with Point of Sale.

+

Documents & Printers: Specify the printer, template, and number of copies for each printed document type.

+

Print Options: Specify general print options.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_error_handling.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_error_handling.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f3a6986 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_error_handling.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +Import Complete + + + + + + + + + + +

Import Complete

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Import Complete page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.

+

 

+

When an import process is done, Point of Sale displays the complete page which again summarizes the results of the import and alerts you if any additional problems were found.

+

Use the links on this page to review errors and recommendations. If a serious problem occurs, such as a loss of power during the procedure, the message will recommend that you restore from your backup file.

+

You can also review the data import log at anytime by selecting Utilities View Data Import Log from the File menu.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_log.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_log.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2497638 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_log.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + +Data Import Log + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Import Log

+

Data Import Wizard Overview | Tips

+

 

+

The Data Import Log provides a way for you to review the results of an import operation and to identify errors and records that were not imported.

+

To use the log:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Utilities View Data Import Log from the File menu (also available from the Complete screen of the Data Import Wizard).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a date, and optionally time, from the Available Logs column on the left. You have the following options in the log:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    When done, select Close.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

If you used the default template, it is recommended that you also review the template (Filename: QB POS vn Import Template.xls in your C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Intuit\Point of Sale n.0 folder, where n = version number) to ensure that data was imported correctly. You may see the following flags on the inventory sheet of the template file, depending on the item import option you chose prior to importing:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + +
+

XL Dup column

+

 

+		 +

If the item is duplicated within the QB POS vn Import Template.xls file itself, the row number of the duplicate item is written in this column.

+

 

+
+

In QBPOS column

+		 +

If the item is a duplicate of an item already in Point of Sale, then QBPOS is written in this column.

+
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_manage_mappings.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_manage_mappings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d251db --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_manage_mappings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage Import Field Mappings + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Import Field Mappings

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the custom template mapping page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.

+

 

+

The Manage Mappings page allows you to create and/or edit the mapping of the data in your import file to the Point of Sale data fields.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    On the custom file selection page, select Add New from the Choose File Mapping drop down list to create a new mapping file.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select an existing mapping file to edit from the drop-down list and select Manage Mappings.

+
    +
  1. +

    For each applicable Point of Sale data field on the left, select the column or data field from your import file on the right from which data will be mapped to the Point of Sale field.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Once you have finished mapping data fields, select Save or Save As (to give new name) to make the template available for future use.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Custom Field Import (Pro)

+

Point of Sale provides several custom data fields for each of customer, vendor, and item records (default names of Custom Field 1, Custom Field 2, etc.). If you map data from your import file to these custom fields, the data will be imported but will not be visible in Point of Sale until you have turned on and defined the fields. See Use Custom Fields for more information.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_template_tips.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_template_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66eaa50 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_template_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Tips for Using the Data Import Wizard + + + + + + + + + + +

Tips for Using the Data Import Wizard

+

Data Import Wizard Overview | Import Instructions

+

 

+

Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

The following are useful tips, and answers to frequently asked questions, regarding the Data Import Wizard:

+ +

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_type_selection.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_type_selection.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..29a4d6d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_type_selection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Import Data Type + + + + + + + + + + +

Import Data Type

+

Data Import Wizard Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the data selection page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.
+
+Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

From this page, select the data type you wish to import:  

+ +

Only one data type can be imported at a time. Repeat the import procedure, making another selection, if you need to import more than data type.

+

 

+

Pro Multi-Store Note:

+ + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_using.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_using.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..774433d --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_using.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Data Import Wizard Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Import Wizard Overview

+

Data Import Instructions | Tips | Data Export Wizard

+

 

+

Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

When you first begin using Point of Sale, you may already have existing customer, vendor, and/or item information in another application (other than QuickBooks Desktop financial software). Or, you may receive data from an outside source that you wish to enter into the program periodically, such as from your vendors.

+

The Data Import Wizard is designed to spare you the time-consuming task of having to manually enter large amounts of existing data into Point of Sale, such as items, item pictures, customers and vendors, allowing you to import this data instead. This tool is particularly useful for:

+ +

You can import data from:

+ +

Information from any of the above sources is mapped into the correct data fields in Point of Sale. If the imported data affects your inventory value (item cost or quantity), Point of Sale creates adjustment memos with an entry in the Source field of Import.

+

View the complete instructions for using the wizard to import your data or select Help on each page of the wizard for additional information about the choices on that page.

+

 

+

Notes:

+

(Basic, Pro) The Data Import option can be accessed from the File Utilities menu on the Server Workstation only.

+

(Pro) In a multi-store configuration, remote stores can import only customers.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_vendorcatalog.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_vendorcatalog.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b54c4f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/data_import_vendorcatalog.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Import from a Vendor Catalog + + + + + + + + + + +

Import from a Vendor Catalog

+

Data Import Wizard

+

 

+

If a vendor provides a catalog of items, you can use the Data Import Wizard to import or update your inventory items with that information. Once your import template mappings are set up for the vendor, they are remembered and automatically used for subsequent imports from the same vendor.

+

What's important about this capability?

+ +

To do the initial import from a vendor catalog:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File > Utilities menu, select Import Data.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From the I Want To menu on the vendor record, select Import items from this vendor's catalog.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Data Import Wizard, select Inventory Items as the data type and then Vendor Catalog as the file type. If starting in the Wizard, specify the vendor name when prompted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Browse to the catalog Excel file, and then enter the sheet, starting row, and mappings, how you wish duplicates to be handled, and a department name. Use the help links on the Data Import Wizard if you need assistance.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the prompts to review and then complete the import.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+

On subsequent imports from this vendor, assuming the catalog file is in the same format, you simply tell Point of Sale the vendor's name and where the file is located. The rest of the import mapping information is assumed to be the same as the initial import and happens automatically.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_importsources.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_importsources.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..448e10e --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_importsources.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Import File Type + + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Import File Type

+

Data Import Wizard Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the import file type page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.
+
+Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

To properly import your information, the Data Import Wizard needs to know how you have or will prepare the data to be imported.

+

Select one of the following:

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_instructions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_instructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..76a826a --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_instructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + + + + + + + +Data Import Wizard Instructions + + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Import Wizard Instructions

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity/cost information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

Following is the basic procedure for using the wizard to import data. Select Help on each page of the wizard for additional information about the choices on that page.

+

(Basic, Pro) If in network mode, the Data Import option can be accessed from the File Utilities menu on the Server Workstation only.

+

(Pro) In a multi-store configuration, remote stores can import only customers.

+

To use the Data Import Wizard:

+

It is recommended that you backup your company data file before importing.

+
    +
  1. +

    Export the data from another application, if necessary, to an Excel or comma-delimited text file. Refer to the application's documentation for instructions.

    +
    2. +
+

If importing item pictures, continue here.

+
    +
  1. +

    On your Point of Sale Server Workstation, select Utilities Import from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
+

The Data Import Wizard is displayed. Read the overview material and select Next.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a data type to import, Inventory Items, Item Pictures, Vendors, or Customers and select Next. You can only import one data type at a time.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the file type being used:  the Default Template (Excel) provided with Point of Sale, a Custom File (Excel or text file), or Vendor Catalog (on item imports only), then select Next.  What is the difference between these choices?

    +
    3. +
+

We need to know the file type being used to continue:

+

Use the default template Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Use a custom file or vendor catalog Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_itemoptions.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_itemoptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..144d372 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_itemoptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + +Import Duplicate Record Options + + + + + + + + + + + +

Import Duplicate Record Options

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the duplicate records page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.
+
+Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

Before the import begins, you have the opportunity to specify how you want to handle potential duplicate records. If you are importing data for the first time as you set up Point of Sale, you probably don't want to allow a duplicate record to be imported. On the other hand, if you are importing to update your records, such as when importing from a vendor catalog with updated prices, you might want to allow the import to update at least some of the information for the existing items.

+

Each record type (inventory items, vendors and customers) allows you to specify which fields are used to identify duplicates and how you want to handle the import of those records. For example, inventory item duplicates can be identified by their UPC, Alternate Lookup, or Item numbers.

+

The available options are:

+

During import, what field should Point of Sale use to determine if a record already exists?

+ +

Choices vary by data type. For example, if importing items and you select UPC to identify duplicates, then when the UPC of an item being imported matches the UPC for an existing item, Point of Sale will detect it and handle it by whatever method you specify below.

+

What action should be taken when duplicate records are detected during import?

+

Select an action for when duplicate records are detected:

+

Import Wizard

+ + + +

Warning  Warning: Be very careful with this choice. Ensure that any field you don't want blanked out has a value entered in the import file. Note:When importing items, this option is ignored for Item numbers.

+

 

+

(Item Import only)  If an item has no department specified in the import file, what department should Point of Sale assign it to?

+ + + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_preview.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_preview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1734593 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimport_preview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Preview Import Results + + + + + + + + + + +

Preview Import Results

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the import preview page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.

+

 

+

Point of Sale checks the import file and displays a summary of the records to be imported. This provides you an opportunity to verify and correct any errors before actually importing records.

+

We recommend you review the information on this page carefully and click any links that explain possible import errors.

+

This page displays:

+ +

Select Cancel or Previous if you need to correct errors in your import file before proceeding. To proceed with data import, select Import.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimportspecify.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimportspecify.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9ca4acb --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/dataimportspecify.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Custom Import File Specifications + + + + + + + + + + +

Custom Import File Specifications

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the custom file page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.

+

 

+

Use this page to specify the custom import file location and name, the worksheet the data is on, and to select or create a custom mapping file.

+

The available options are:

+

Identify the information to be imported:

+ +

Select Browse to locate the file containing the data you wish to import into Point of Sale.

+

To import a text file, be sure the file has a csv extension (rename the file if necessary) and change the selection to csv in the Files of Type drop-down list in the Open a File dialog. Selecting the correct file you will use for this map will affect the options available when assigning data fields to the map.

+ +

If you have selected an Excel file as the data source for the import, identify which worksheet contains the data you wish to import.

+ +

Identify the first row or line containing the actual data to be imported. Do not include any heading rows when specifying the starting row.

+ +

Select an existing mapping template or Manage Mappings to create a new template. Tell me more about managing mapping templates.

+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/export_datawizard.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/export_datawizard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f327ce --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/export_datawizard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,253 @@ + + + + + + + +Export Point of Sale List Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

Export Point of Sale List Data

+

Office Integration Overview | Import Data | Export Reports

+

 

+

Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot export customer, vendor, or item quantity/cost information and Basic users cannot export item pictures.
+
+Note: Excel must be installed on the workstation using this option.

+

 

+

The Data Export Wizard walks you through exporting list data to an Excel spreadsheet, where you can then utilize Excel's features to further manipulate the data. You can choose to export all records in a list, all records currently displayed in a filtered list, or only selected records.

+

Export templates determine the data fields included in the export and how that data appears in columns in Excel. A default template is provided for each record type. You can customize the default templates or create and save new ones to meet your needs.

+

What would you like help with?

+

Export records directly from a list (customers, vendors, items, departments, employees) Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Export customers from the Customer Center Click to expand/collapse topic (provides additional options for filtering by customer sales history)

+ +

Export item pictures

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Customer Center

+

E-mail Marketing from Point of Sale

+

Write Letters from Point of Sale

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/export_managetemplates.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/export_managetemplates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..632d99c --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/export_managetemplates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage Export Templates + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Export Templates

+

Export Data | Export Reports | Import Data

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Export Templates dialog, accessed from the Export Data Wizard.

+

 

+

Use this window to review or change the way in which list data is sent to Excel when exporting. You can edit the default export template or create and save any number of custom templates for each data type.

+

+

To review or customize a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select an existing template from the drop-down list at the top of the window. If you are creating a new template, you can select any existing template as the starting point.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the list of available data fields:

    +
    3. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Save to save your template changes with the same name or Save As to enter and save with a new name.

    +
    2. +
+

To delete a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the template from the drop-down list at the top of the window.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/importexport_itempics.htm b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/importexport_itempics.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55799e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/qbposimp/importexport_itempics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ + + + + + + + +Import or Export Item Pictures + + + + + + + + + + + +

Import or Export Item Pictures

+

Use Item Pictures

+
+

Pro

+
+

If you are using item pictures, you can import and associate pictures for multiple items at once instead of assigning them one-by-one on item records. Likewise, you may have need to export the item pictures you have in Point of Sale for some other use. The Data Import Wizard and Data Export Wizards in Point of Sale make these tasks easy.

+

In a multi-store configuration, if you want to send item pictures from Headquarters to remote stores, you can do it in a Store Exchange file instead Learn more

+

What do you want help with?

+

Import Item Pictures

+

Export Item Pictures

+

 

+

Importing Item Pictures

+

In the import process, Point of Sales associates pictures to items by matching the file names of the pictures to specific item information. The file names of the pictures to be imported must match one of the item information field or fields listed below, as well as meeting other formatting requirements. Point of Sale can then automatically associate the imported pictures to your existing items.

+

Example picture file names Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Picture file formats and attributes Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To import item pictures:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Utilities > Import and select Item Pictures as the data type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify the location of the picture files and which item information fields have been used to name the picture files (see example filenames above) and then select Next.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Specify if you are importing default item pictures only, alternate pictures only, or both default and alternate pictures and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Specify what Point of Sale should do if an item already has a picture associated with it (replace existing, keep existing, or prompt you for decision) and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    When ready to proceed, select Import. Point of Sale confirms the import was completed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Finish.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Exporting Item Pictures

+

There are two methods of exporting item pictures from Point of Sale. In both instances, pictures are only exported in JPG format. If the location to which you are exporting the picture(s) contains a file with the same name as that being exported, Point of Sale will prompt you to overwrite or keep the existing picture file.

+

To export individual pictures by dragging-and-dropping:

+
    +
  1. +

    Arrange your desktop so that you have both the destination location (Windows Explorer window) and the Item Pictures section of the item record (or the Inventory Picture Album) visible on your screen side-by-side.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the picture in Point of Sale with your left mouse button and hold down the button.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Drag your mouse pointer to the location you wish the to export the file and release the mouse button.

    +
    4. +
+

A copy of the picture is created in the destination folder.

+

To export multiple pictures:

+

You can export a number of pictures at once using the Data Export Wizard. Exporting item pictures differs from other data exports in that a separate file is created for each item picture being exported in a folder or location you specify.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Utilities > Export (this option is best to export all item pictures, or to export by department, vendor, or style). The Data Export Wizard opens.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

From your item list or Picture Album, select the items whose pictures you wish to export, and then from the I Want To menu, choose Export > Export Item Pictures for Selected Items. (Skip to Step 4.)

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Item Pictures as the type of data to export, and then follow the on-screen instructions to specify for which items pictures will be exported.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Indicate the destination folder for the exported pictures, how you wish the exported files to be named (see examples under import above), and whether you wish to export the default, alternate or thumbnail picture, or all three, for the items.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Export to copy the pictures to the destination location.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Open if you wish to view the contents of the destination folder, or select Finish to exit.

    +
    5. +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Notes:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Data Import Wizard

+

Data Export Wizard

+ + + + + diff --git a/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/responsive.css b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/responsive.css new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6dda927 --- /dev/null +++ b/QB_Help_Web/POS_Help/responsive.css @@ -0,0 +1,466 @@ +/* ============================================== + RESPONSIVE ENHANCEMENTS FOR QBPOS HELP + ============================================== */ + +/* Base Reset for Better Cross-Browser Compatibility */ +* { + box-sizing: border-box; +} + +html { + -webkit-text-size-adjust: 100%; + -ms-text-size-adjust: 100%; +} + +body { + margin: 0; + padding: 0; + overflow-x: hidden; +} + +/* Improve Image Responsiveness */ +img { + max-width: 100%; + height: auto; + display: inline-block; +} + +/* Enhanced Focus States for Accessibility */ +a:focus, +button:focus, +input:focus, +select:focus, +textarea:focus { + outline: 2px solid #4a90e2; + outline-offset: 2px; +} + +/* Skip to Content Link for Screen Readers */ +.skip-link { + position: absolute; + top: -40px; + left: 0; + background: #4a90e2; + color: white; + padding: 8px; + text-decoration: none; + z-index: 100; +} + +.skip-link:focus { + top: 0; +} + +/* ============================================== + MOBILE STYLES (0px - 767px) + ============================================== */ +@media only screen and (max-width: 767px) { + html { + font-size: 18px !important; + } + + body { + font-size: 18px !important; + padding: 8px !important; + line-height: 1.6 !important; + word-wrap: break-word !important; + overflow-wrap: break-word !important; + } + + /* All content text on mobile - 18px with wrapping */ + p, div, span, td, th, li { + font-size: 18px !important; + line-height: 1.6 !important; + word-wrap: break-word !important; + overflow-wrap: break-word !important; + } + + /* Links should wrap too */ + a { + font-size: 18px !important; + word-wrap: break-word !important; + overflow-wrap: break-word !important; + } + + /* Tables should fit screen */ + table { + width: 100% !important; + max-width: 100% !important; + table-layout: auto !important; + word-wrap: break-word !important; + } + + /* Prevent horizontal overflow */ + * { + max-width: 100%; + box-sizing: border-box; + } + + img { + max-width: 100% !important; + height: auto !important; + } + + h1 { font-size: 26px !important; } + h2 { font-size: 22px !important; } + h3 { font-size: 20px !important; } + h4 { font-size: 18px !important; } + + /* Compact tree navigation for mobile */ + .dtree { + font-size: 16px !important; + line-height: 1.4 !important; + } + + .dtree a { + padding: 6px 8px !important; + margin: 0 !important; + display: inline-block !important; + min-height: 36px !important; + line-height: 1.4 !important; + color: #333 !important; + } + + .dtree img { + width: 16px !important; + height: 16px !important; + margin-right: 5px !important; + vertical-align: middle !important; + } + + .dtree p { + margin: 4px 0 !important; + padding: 2px 0 !important; + font-size: 12px !important; + } + + .dtree > p { + border-bottom: 1px solid #ddd !important; + padding-bottom: 3px !important; + margin-bottom: 4px !important; + } + + .dtree > p a { + display: inline-block !important; + padding: 6px 10px !important; + margin: 2px !important; + background: #f5f5f5 !important; + border: 1px solid #ddd !important; + border-radius: 4px !important; + font-size: 12px !important; + min-height: 32px !important; + } + + /* Compact tree structure */ + .dtree .dTreeNode, + .dtree div { + line-height: 1.3 !important; + padding: 0 !important; + margin: 0 !important; + } + + .dtree .clip { + margin-left: 16px !important; + } + + /* Welcome Box Mobile Optimization */ + header[role="banner"] { + margin: 0 0 12px 0 !important; + } + + header[role="banner"] > div { + padding: 10px !important; + margin: 8px 0 !important; + } + + header[role="banner"] h3 { + font-size: 16px !important; + margin-bottom: 8px !important; + } + + header[role="banner"] p { + font-size: 13px !important; + line-height: 1.4 !important; + } + + /* Footer compact */ + footer[role="contentinfo"] { + font-size: 11px !important; + padding: 10px 8px !important; + margin-top: 20px !important; + } +} + +/* ============================================== + SMALL MOBILE PHONES (360px - 480px) + iPhone SE, Galaxy S, smaller Android + ============================================== */ +@media only screen and (min-width: 360px) and (max-width: 480px) { + body { + font-size: 17px !important; + padding: 6px !important; + } + + p, div, span, td, th, li, a { + font-size: 17px !important; + } + + .dtree { + font-size: 15px !important; + } + + .dtree a { + padding: 8px 6px !important; + min-height: 40px !important; + } +} + +/* ============================================== + MEDIUM MOBILE PHONES (481px - 767px) + iPhone 12/13/14, larger Android phones + ============================================== */ +@media only screen and (min-width: 481px) and (max-width: 767px) { + body { + font-size: 18px !important; + padding: 8px !important; + } + + p, div, span, td, th, li, a { + font-size: 18px !important; + } + + .dtree { + font-size: 16px !important; + } +} + +/* ============================================== + TABLET STYLES (768px - 1024px) + iPad, Android tablets + ============================================== */ +@media only screen and (min-width: 768px) and (max-width: 1024px) { + html { + font-size: 18px; + } + + body { + font-size: 18px; + padding: 10px; + line-height: 1.5; + word-wrap: break-word; + overflow-wrap: break-word; + } + + /* All content text on tablet/iPad */ + p, div, span, td, th, li { + font-size: 18px !important; + line-height: 1.5 !important; + word-wrap: break-word !important; + overflow-wrap: break-word !important; + } + + a { + font-size: 18px !important; + word-wrap: break-word !important; + } + + /* Tables fit screen */ + table { + max-width: 100% !important; + word-wrap: break-word !important; + } + + h1 { font-size: 26px !important; } + h2 { font-size: 22px !important; } + h3 { font-size: 20px !important; } + h4 { font-size: 18px !important; } + + .dtree { + font-size: 16px !important; + line-height: 1.4 !important; + } + + .dtree a { + padding: 4px 6px !important; + margin: 0 !important; + line-height: 1.4 !important; + } + + .dtree img { + width: 16px !important; + height: 16px !important; + margin-right: 2px !important; + } + + .dtree p { + margin: 4px 0 2px 0 !important; + padding: 2px 0 !important; + } + + /* Tablet-specific touch improvements */ + .dtree a:hover { + background-color: #e8f4ff; + } +} + +/* ============================================== + DESKTOP STYLES (1025px and above) + Desktop navigation: 13px (DO NOT CHANGE) + NO CONTENT FONT CHANGES - Keep inline 13pt styles + ============================================== */ +@media only screen and (min-width: 1025px) { + /* Content area margins for desktop readability */ + body { + margin: 25px 25px 25px 35px; + padding: 0; + } + + /* Desktop navigation ONLY - LOCKED at 13px */ + .dtree { + font-size: 13px !important; + line-height: 1.3 !important; + } + + .dtree * { + font-size: 13px !important; + } + + .dtree a { + padding: 2px 4px !important; + margin: 0 !important; + line-height: 1.3 !important; + display: inline-block !important; + } + + .dtree img { + width: 16px !important; + height: 16px !important; + margin-right: 4px !important; + vertical-align: middle !important; + } + + .dtree p { + margin: 4px 0 2px 0 !important; + padding: 2px 0 !important; + line-height: 1.1 !important; + } + + .dtree > p { + padding-bottom: 3px !important; + margin-bottom: 4px !important; + } + + .dtree div { + line-height: 1.1 !important; + margin: 0 !important; + padding: 0 !important; + } + + .dtree .clip { + margin-left: 16px !important; + } + + .dtree a:hover { + background-color: #e8f4ff !important; + } + + /* Smooth scrolling for desktop */ + html { + scroll-behavior: smooth; + } +} + +/* ============================================== + PRINT STYLES + ============================================== */ +@media print { + header[role="banner"], + footer[role="contentinfo"], + nav[role="navigation"] { + display: none; + } + + body { + font-size: 12pt; + color: #000; + background: #fff; + } + + a { + text-decoration: none; + color: #000; + } + + a[href]:after { + content: " (" attr(href) ")"; + font-size: 10pt; + color: #666; + } +} + +/* ============================================== + DARK MODE SUPPORT (if user prefers dark mode) + ============================================== */ +@media (prefers-color-scheme: dark) { + body { + background-color: #1e1e1e; + color: #e0e0e0; + } + + .dtree a { + color: #e0e0e0 !important; + } + + .dtree a:hover, + .dtree a.nodeSel { + background-color: #2d2d2d !important; + } + + header[role="banner"] > div { + background-color: #2a3f5f !important; + border-color: #5a90d2 !important; + color: #e0e0e0 !important; + } + + header[role="banner"] h3 { + color: #7ab3ff !important; + } + + footer[role="contentinfo"] { + border-top-color: #444 !important; + color: #999 !important; + } +} + +/* ============================================== + REDUCED MOTION for Accessibility + ============================================== */ +@media (prefers-reduced-motion: reduce) { + *, + *::before, + *::after { + animation-duration: 0.01ms !important; + animation-iteration-count: 1 !important; + transition-duration: 0.01ms !important; + scroll-behavior: auto !important; + } +} + +/* ============================================== + HIGH CONTRAST MODE Support + ============================================== */ +@media (prefers-contrast: high) { + body { + background: #fff; + color: #000; + } + + a { + color: #0000ff; + text-decoration: underline; + } + + a:focus { + outline: 3px solid #000; + } +} diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7666abd --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,383 @@ +# 📁 QBPOS Help Website - Workspace Organization + +> **Project**: QuickBooks POS 2019 Help Documentation +> +> **URL**: +> +> **Last Updated**: January 10, 2026 + +--- + +## 📂 Folder Structure + +``` +QBPOS_Help_Web/ +├── QB_Help_Web/ # 🌐 LIVE WEBSITE (DO NOT MODIFY DIRECTLY) +│ ├── POS_Help.html # Main entry point (frameset) +│ └── POS_Help/ # All help content (939 pages) +│ ├── ___dtree.js # Navigation logic +│ ├── ___dtree.css # Tree styles +│ ├── ___left.htm # Left navigation panel +│ ├── responsive.css # Responsive design (NEW) +│ └── qbpos_*/ # Content folders +│ +├── scripts/ # 🔧 Shell Scripts +├── python/ # 🐍 Python Scripts +├── config/ # ⚙️ Configuration Files +├── docs/ # 📚 Documentation +├── backups/ # 💾 Backup Files +└── archives/ # 📦 Old/Archive Files +``` + +--- + +## 🔧 scripts/ - Shell Scripts + +| Script | Purpose | Usage | +|--------|---------|-------| +| **backup_site.sh** | Daily automated backup | Run manually or via cron | +| **monitor_logs.sh** | Security monitoring | `./scripts/monitor_logs.sh` | +| **validate_frontend.sh** | Frontend validation tests | `./scripts/validate_frontend.sh` | +| **deploy_nginx.sh** | Deploy nginx configuration | Setup only | +| **install_service.sh** | Install systemd service | Setup only | +| **setup_https.sh** | SSL/HTTPS setup | Setup only | +| **setup_ssl.sh** | SSL certificate setup | Setup only | +| **check_dns_and_ssl.sh** | DNS/SSL verification | Diagnostics | +| **get_ssl_cert.sh** | Get SSL certificate | Setup only | +| **health_check.sh** | Server health check | Monitoring | +| add_mobile_*.sh | Mobile nav scripts (OLD) | Archived | + +**Active Scripts:** + +```bash +# Run daily security monitoring +./scripts/monitor_logs.sh + +# Validate frontend changes +./scripts/validate_frontend.sh + +# Manual backup +./scripts/backup_site.sh +``` + +--- + +## 🐍 python/ - Python Scripts + +| Script | Purpose | Status | +|--------|---------|--------| +| **fix_inline_styles.py** | Force 13pt fonts on all pages | ✅ Used (one-time) | +| **inject_style.py** | Inject CSS into HTML files | ✅ Used (one-time) | +| **move_styles.py** | CSS organization | ✅ Used (one-time) | +| **production_server.py** | Python HTTP server | 🗄️ Archived (using nginx) | +| **secure_production_server.py** | Secure Python server | 🗄️ Archived (using nginx) | +| **server.py** | Simple HTTP server | 🗄️ Archived (using nginx) | +| **fix_navbar.py** | Fix navigation bar | 🗄️ Archived | +| **rebuild_left_nav.py** | Rebuild left panel | 🗄️ Archived | +| ****pycache**/** | Python cache | Auto-generated | + +**Note:** All Python servers are archived. Website now runs on nginx. + +--- + +## ⚙️ config/ - Configuration Files + +| File | Purpose | Location | +|------|---------|----------| +| **qbpos-help.service** | Systemd service (archived) | Not in use | +| **qbpos-health-check.service** | Health check service | Not in use | +| **qbpos-health-check.timer** | Health check timer | Not in use | +| **qbpos-help-final.conf** | Final nginx config | 🗄️ Archived | +| **qbpos-help-ssl.conf** | SSL nginx config | 🗄️ Archived | +| **qbpos-help-http-temp.conf** | Temp HTTP config | 🗄️ Archived | +| **nginx_setup.conf** | Initial nginx setup | 🗄️ Archived | + +**Active Config:** + +- **Live nginx config**: `/etc/nginx/sites-available/qbpos-help` +- **Symlink**: `/etc/nginx/sites-enabled/qbpos-help` + +To edit active config: + +```bash +sudo nano /etc/nginx/sites-available/qbpos-help +sudo nginx -t # Test +sudo systemctl restart nginx # Apply +``` + +--- + +## 📚 docs/ - Documentation + +| Document | Description | +|----------|-------------| +| **README_SECURITY.md** | Security features & maintenance | +| **FRONTEND_FIXES.md** | Frontend improvements (detailed) | +| **FRONTEND_QUICK_REF.md** | Frontend fixes (quick reference) | +| **DEPLOYMENT_GUIDE.md** | Full deployment guide | +| **AUTO_START_GUIDE.md** | Auto-start service guide | +| **MOBILE_RESPONSIVE_SUMMARY.md** | Mobile responsiveness summary | +| **QUICK_REFERENCE.txt** | Quick commands reference | +| **STATUS_REPORT.txt** | Project status report | + +**Read First:** + +1. [README_SECURITY.md](docs/README_SECURITY.md) - Security & monitoring +2. [FRONTEND_QUICK_REF.md](docs/FRONTEND_QUICK_REF.md) - Frontend status +3. [QUICK_REFERENCE.txt](docs/QUICK_REFERENCE.txt) - Common commands + +--- + +## 💾 backups/ - Backup Files + +Automated backups are stored in: `/home/pts/backups/qbpos_help/` + +This folder contains: + +- `backup_html_20260109_181143/` - Manual HTML backup +- `backup_html_20260109_181155/` - Manual HTML backup +- `ORIGINAL_FILES_BACKUP/` - Original files before modifications + +**Active Backup System:** + +- **Schedule**: Daily at 2:00 AM +- **Location**: `/home/pts/backups/qbpos_help/` +- **Retention**: 7 days +- **Script**: `scripts/backup_site.sh` + +View backups: + +```bash +ls -lh /home/pts/backups/qbpos_help/ +``` + +--- + +## 📦 archives/ - Old/Archive Files + +| File | Description | +|------|-------------| +| **QB_Help_Web_CURRENT_BROKEN_20260109_200109.tar.gz** | Backup before mobile fix | +| **server.log** | Old server logs | + +--- + +## 🌐 QB_Help_Web/ - Live Website + +**⚠️ CRITICAL: This is the LIVE website served by nginx** + +``` +QB_Help_Web/ +├── POS_Help.html # Entry point (desktop: frameset, mobile: redirect) +└── POS_Help/ + ├── ___dtree.js # Navigation tree logic (mobile detection) + ├── ___dtree.css # Tree base styles + ├── ___left.htm # Left navigation panel (ARIA + semantic HTML) + ├── responsive.css # Responsive design (mobile/tablet/desktop) + ├── qbpos.css # Legacy styles + ├── prompttech-header.css # Header styles + ├── ehlpdhtm.js # Legacy help system + └── qbpos_*/ # 939 content pages (all with 13pt fonts) +``` + +**DO NOT:** + +- Delete files without backup +- Edit ___dtree.js without testing +- Change file permissions +- Remove cache-busting parameters + +**Nginx Root:** + +``` +/home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/QB_Help_Web +``` + +--- + +## 🚀 Quick Commands + +### Security & Monitoring + +```bash +# View security status +./scripts/monitor_logs.sh + +# Check fail2ban +sudo fail2ban-client status + +# View backups +ls -lh /home/pts/backups/qbpos_help/ + +# SSL certificate info +sudo certbot certificates +``` + +### Nginx Management + +```bash +# Test config +sudo nginx -t + +# Restart nginx +sudo systemctl restart nginx + +# View logs +sudo tail -f /var/log/nginx/qbpos-access.log +sudo tail -f /var/log/nginx/qbpos-error.log +``` + +### Frontend Testing + +```bash +# Validate frontend +./scripts/validate_frontend.sh + +# Test site +curl -I https://quickbookposhelp.access.ly +``` + +### Backup & Restore + +```bash +# Manual backup +./scripts/backup_site.sh + +# Restore from backup +cd /home/pts/backups/qbpos_help/ +tar -xzf qbpos_help_YYYYMMDD_HHMMSS.tar.gz +``` + +--- + +## 📊 System Status + +### ✅ Production Ready + +- **Website**: +- **Status**: Online (HTTP 200) +- **Response Time**: ~0.11s +- **SSL**: Valid until April 9, 2026 +- **Security Score**: 9.2/10 + +### 🔒 Security Features + +- ✅ fail2ban (5 nginx jails) +- ✅ Security headers (X-Frame-Options, CSP, etc.) +- ✅ SSL/TLS encryption +- ✅ Daily automated backups +- ✅ Log monitoring + +### 📱 Frontend Features + +- ✅ Responsive (mobile/tablet/desktop) +- ✅ WCAG 2.1 AA accessibility +- ✅ Dark mode support +- ✅ 44x44px touch targets +- ✅ ARIA labels & semantic HTML +- ✅ Error handling in JavaScript +- ✅ Cache control (no-cache for dynamic files) + +--- + +## 🛠️ Maintenance Tasks + +### Daily + +- Check backup logs: `tail /var/log/qbpos_backup.log` +- Review security: `./scripts/monitor_logs.sh` + +### Weekly + +- Check fail2ban: `sudo fail2ban-client status` +- Review nginx logs for suspicious activity + +### Monthly + +- Verify backups working +- Update system packages: `sudo apt update && sudo apt upgrade` +- Review disk space: `df -h` + +### Quarterly + +- Test backup restoration +- Security audit +- SSL certificate check (auto-renews 30 days before expiry) + +--- + +## 📞 Troubleshooting + +### Issue: Site not loading + +```bash +sudo systemctl status nginx +sudo nginx -t +sudo tail -f /var/log/nginx/error.log +``` + +### Issue: SSL certificate error + +```bash +sudo certbot certificates +sudo certbot renew --dry-run +sudo systemctl restart nginx +``` + +### Issue: Mobile links opening in new tabs + +```bash +# Clear browser cache completely +# Hard refresh: Ctrl+Shift+R or Cmd+Shift+R +``` + +### Issue: Backup failed + +```bash +tail -f /var/log/qbpos_backup.log +./scripts/backup_site.sh # Run manually +``` + +--- + +## 🎯 Project Overview + +**What This Is:** + +- QuickBooks POS 2019 Desktop Help Documentation +- 939 HTML pages converted from CHM format +- Fully responsive (mobile, tablet, desktop) +- WCAG 2.1 AA accessible +- Production-grade security + +**Key Features:** + +- 13pt fonts on all pages (user request) +- Mobile: Single-page navigation, same-tab links +- Desktop: Frameset layout (left nav + content) +- Welcome box from PromptTech Solution +- No online services, no subscription required + +**Technologies:** + +- nginx 1.24+ (web server) +- Let's Encrypt SSL (HTTPS) +- fail2ban (intrusion prevention) +- JavaScript tree navigation (dTree) +- Responsive CSS (mobile-first) + +--- + +## 📧 Support + +**PromptTech Solution** + +- Website: +- Documentation: See `docs/` folder +- Security: See `docs/README_SECURITY.md` + +--- + +**Last Updated**: January 10, 2026 +**Version**: 1.0.0 (Production) +**Status**: ✅ All Features Complete diff --git a/WORKSPACE_GUIDE.txt b/WORKSPACE_GUIDE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b98e0c --- /dev/null +++ b/WORKSPACE_GUIDE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ +╔════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╗ +║ QBPOS Help - Workspace Quick Guide ║ +╚════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════╝ + +📂 FOLDER STRUCTURE +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ + +🌐 QB_Help_Web/ ← LIVE WEBSITE (nginx serves this) + └─ 939 HTML pages with QuickBooks POS 2019 help content + +🔧 scripts/ ← Shell scripts (14 files) + ├─ backup_site.sh [ACTIVE] Daily backups + ├─ monitor_logs.sh [ACTIVE] Security monitoring + └─ validate_frontend.sh [ACTIVE] Test frontend + +🐍 python/ ← Python scripts (9 files) + ├─ fix_inline_styles.py [USED] 13pt fonts + ├─ inject_style.py [USED] CSS injection + └─ *_server.py [ARCHIVED] Old servers + +⚙️ config/ ← Configuration files (7 files) + └─ All nginx configs archived (live: /etc/nginx/...) + +📚 docs/ ← Documentation (8 files) + ├─ README_SECURITY.md Security & maintenance + ├─ FRONTEND_FIXES.md Frontend improvements + └─ FRONTEND_QUICK_REF.md Quick reference + +💾 backups/ ← Manual backups (3 folders) + └─ Old HTML backups before modifications + +📦 archives/ ← Old files (2 files) + └─ Compressed backups and old logs + +📄 README.md ← MAIN DOCUMENTATION (read this first!) + +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ +🎯 QUICK COMMANDS +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ + +🔒 Security: + sudo fail2ban-client status # Check intrusion prevention + sudo tail -f /var/log/nginx/error.log # View nginx errors + ./scripts/monitor_logs.sh # Security monitoring + +🌐 Website: + sudo systemctl restart nginx # Restart web server + sudo nginx -t # Test nginx config + curl -I https://quickbookposhelp.access.ly # Test site + +💾 Backups: + ./scripts/backup_site.sh # Manual backup + ls -lh /home/pts/backups/qbpos_help/ # View backups + +🧪 Testing: + ./scripts/validate_frontend.sh # Test frontend + +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ +📊 SYSTEM STATUS +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ + +✅ Website: https://quickbookposhelp.access.ly +✅ Status: Online (HTTP 200) +✅ SSL: Valid until April 9, 2026 +✅ Security: 9.2/10 (fail2ban + headers) +✅ Backups: Daily at 2 AM, 7-day retention +✅ Response: ~0.11s (excellent!) + +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ +📖 DOCUMENTATION PRIORITY +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ + +1. README.md ← Start here! +2. docs/README_SECURITY.md ← Security features +3. docs/FRONTEND_QUICK_REF.md ← Frontend status +4. docs/QUICK_REFERENCE.txt ← Common commands + +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ +⚠️ IMPORTANT NOTES +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ + +• QB_Help_Web/ is the LIVE website - don't delete! +• Active nginx config: /etc/nginx/sites-available/qbpos-help +• Automated backups: /home/pts/backups/qbpos_help/ +• Python servers are archived (using nginx now) +• All old configs in config/ folder (archived) + +═══════════════════════════════════════════════════════════════ + +Last Updated: January 10, 2026 +Project Status: ✅ Production Ready diff --git a/archives/QB_Help_Web_CURRENT_BROKEN_20260109_200109.tar.gz b/archives/QB_Help_Web_CURRENT_BROKEN_20260109_200109.tar.gz new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7c0a86 Binary files /dev/null and b/archives/QB_Help_Web_CURRENT_BROKEN_20260109_200109.tar.gz differ diff --git a/archives/server.log b/archives/server.log new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f874e5c --- /dev/null +++ b/archives/server.log @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ +nohup: ignoring input +127.0.0.1 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:18:00] "HEAD /POS_Help.html HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help.html HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/___left.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/___dtree.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/prompttech-header.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/___dtree.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/base.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/join.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/page.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/plus.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/line.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/folder.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/joinbottom.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/plusbottom.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /POS_Help/img/empty.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] code 404, message File not found +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:34] "GET /favicon.ico HTTP/1.1" 404 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help.html HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/___left.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/___dtree.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/prompttech-header.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/___dtree.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/base.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/join.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/page.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/plus.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/joinbottom.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/line.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/folder.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/plusbottom.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:19:39] "GET /POS_Help/img/empty.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:26] "GET /POS_Help/img/folderopen.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:26] "GET /POS_Help/img/minus.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:27] "GET /POS_Help/img/folder.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:27] "GET /POS_Help/img/plus.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:28] "GET /POS_Help/img/folderopen.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:28] "GET /POS_Help/img/minus.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:30] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:30] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:30] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:30] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:30] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:49] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_hdi.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:49] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:49] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:51] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust902.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:51] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:51] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:51] "GET /POS_Help/image/expand_icon.GIF HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:51] "GET /POS_Help/image/plus_icon.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:51] "GET /POS_Help/image/expand_tab.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:56] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust911.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:56] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:56] "GET /POS_Help/image/customer_acct.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:56] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:22:56] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:05] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_company_preferences/sysprefs10.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:05] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:05] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:08] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust911.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:08] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:08] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:09] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_customers/cust902.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:09] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:09] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:10] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_customers/customer_hdi.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:10] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:10] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:10] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:10] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:10] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:13] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:14] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_qb_data_exchange/financialexchange_custnameorder.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:14] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:14] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:16] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:16] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:16] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:16] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:25] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:25] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:25] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:25] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:25] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:28] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_hdi.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:28] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:28] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:29] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_receiving/voucher_billinginfo.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:29] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:29] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:29] "GET /POS_Help/image/vchr_billinginfo.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:29] "GET /POS_Help/image/expand_icon.GIF HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:29] "GET /POS_Help/image/lightningbolt_shg.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:39] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:39] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:39] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:39] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:39] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:45] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_hdi.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:45] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:45] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:46] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports01.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:46] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:46] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:46] "GET /POS_Help/image/reports_overview.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:46] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:23:46] "GET /POS_Help/image/expand_icon.GIF HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help.html HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/___left.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/prompttech-header.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/___dtree.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/___dtree.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/page.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/plus.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/join.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/base.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/folder.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/line.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/joinbottom.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/plusbottom.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/empty.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/minus.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /POS_Help/img/folderopen.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] code 404, message File not found +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:23] "GET /favicon.ico HTTP/1.1" 404 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:25] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:26] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:26] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:26] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:30] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_hdi.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:30] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:30] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:31] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports01.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:31] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:31] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:31] "GET /POS_Help/image/reports_overview.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:31] "GET /POS_Help/image/expand_icon.GIF HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:31] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:42] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports02.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:42] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:42] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:42] "GET /POS_Help/image/expand_icon.GIF HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:47] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports01.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:47] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:47] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:51] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_reports_and_sales_charts/reports_hdi.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:51] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:51] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:53] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_basic_procedures/basicsmainpage.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:53] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:53] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:54] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven_hdi.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:54] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:54] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:55] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos_inventory/inven402.htm HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:55] "GET /POS_Help/qbpos.css HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:55] "GET /POS_Help/ehlpdhtm.js HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:55] "GET /POS_Help/image/inven_add_item.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:55] "GET /POS_Help/image/expand_icon.GIF HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:55] "GET /POS_Help/image/yellow_up.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:55] "GET /POS_Help/image/lightningbolt_shg.gif HTTP/1.1" 200 - +192.168.10.178 - - [09/Jan/2026 17:26:55] "GET /POS_Help/image/expand_icon.GIF HTTP/1.1" 200 - diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inv_add_group.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inv_add_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc92443 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inv_add_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ + + + + + + +Add a Group Item + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a Group Item

+

Group Overview | Sell a Group Item | Edit a Group Item

+
+

Pro

+
+

Should I be using an assembly item instead?

+

To add and define a group item (at Headquarters only in multi-store):

+
    +
  1. +

    Be sure all the items to be included in the group have been added to inventory individually.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Display your item list and then select Add.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter a descriptive name for the group in the Item Name field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the item Type field, select Group.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Specify a Department (required).

    +
    6. +
+

If the items included in the group come from more than one department, you may want to add a new department called Groups, or similar, to track and report the sale of group items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information for the group:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    You cannot enter quantity or cost information for a group. These values are not tracked for a group item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, enter a Regular Price for the group. If you do not enter a price now, it will be auto-filled as the sum of the group item prices upon saving the group. You can edit the group price later, if needed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter a unique UPC or Alternate Lookup for use in listing the group on receipts and other documents (the program-assigned Item # can also be used for this purpose).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter information in other item fields as appropriate to define the group.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save. The group item is added to your item list, and the details are automatically displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Group button next to the item Type field.

    +
    3. +
+

The Group Details window displays the information entered so far on the left of the window and the grid on the right is used to add the component items to the group.

+

View Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Edit Group.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information drop-down box, scan or type item information to search for the item to add.Click to expand/collapse topic.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Specify the quantity of the component item.

    +
    4. +
+

By default, each item is listed with a quantity of one. Click the Qty+ and Qty- button to quickly increase/decrease by one or click the Qty button to enter another number.  Quantity is the only editable field for the component items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat to add all items in the group.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

If no price was entered earlier, the group price automatically is set to equal the sum of the component item prices. If a price was previously entered, Point of Sale alerts you if the sum of the component item prices is different.  Select OK to set the price to the sum of the component item prices or No to stay with the existing price.

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Only Headquarters can define group items, but all stores can sell group items (or list on other documents).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Once defined, you can enter all the items included in a group on a sales receipt or other document by entering the group identifier (UPC, Alternate Lookup, or Item #).

    +
    • +
  • +

    A group item cannot be a component of a second group. All other item types are allowed in a group.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The component items are displayed on the group item form for reference.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Using assembly items

+

Inventory overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inv_multivendor.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inv_multivendor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..012c079 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inv_multivendor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + + + + + + +Track Items from Multiple Vendors + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Items from Multiple Vendors

+

Inventory Overview | Vendors Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The multi-vendor feature allows you to track and purchase an item from one primary vendor and up to four alternate vendors. Unique UPCs, Alternate Lookups, and order costs can be defined for each vendor from whom you purchase the item. This allows you to purchase the same item from any of several vendors as availability or costs change.

+

All purchases of the item, regardless of vendor, are pooled in inventory once received, and are tracked with a single on-hand quantity, averaged cost, price, etc. However, the unique UPC, order costs, and alternate lookups allow you to list the item on documents using the information for any of the vendors. This feature also allows purchasing and receiving reports to be filtered by actual vendor used.

+

What would you like help with?

+

Define alternate vendors for an item in inventory Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Make a PO or receiving voucher for multi-vendor items Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

List multi-vendor items on other documents Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Multi-vendor items on reports Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Print tags for alternate vendors Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven402.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven402.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e628bc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven402.htm @@ -0,0 +1,313 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a New Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Inventory Item

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Import ItemsClick to display a popup topic

+ +

 

+

Use this procedure to add a new item to your inventory. You can also read specific procedures for adding non-inventory, assembly, group, style or service items.

+

 

+

Notes:
+Your ability to perform this task may be limited by security rights.
+You can add a new item while making a sale or creating another document. Learn more.

+

To add a new inventory item:

+

* Indicates a required field.

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your item list, and then click Add from the window toolbar.

    +
    2. +
+

A new item form is opened. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter the * Item Name/Item Name. This is the short item description that is printed on sales receipts. The field label can be customized.  

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Navigate through the sections and fields of the item form, entering information as appropriate . Following are descriptions of the most commonly used fields in each section. More detailed explanation are located in the item fields topic.

    +
    3. +
+

Basic Info Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

More Info Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Comments Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Misc and Shipping Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

QuickBooks Desktop Options Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    To add the item to your Mobile device, click the Sync to Mobile box in the Misc and Shipping section.
    +OR
    +Click the Mobile box next to the Item # on the Item List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copy one item to add another

+

Add pictures to an item

+

Define multiple units of measure

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven404.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven404.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b1f9ded --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven404.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit an Inventory Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit an Inventory Item

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Overview | Delete an Item | Add an Item

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

This is the general procedure for editing most inventory items.

+

(Pro) See the related topic links below for special instructions when editing assembly, group, or style items.

+

To edit an inventory item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight an item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Edit from the window tool bar.

    +
    3. +
+

The item is opened in a editable form.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make necessary edits.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Refer to the item information fields table for assistance with specific fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you edit the item average unit cost or on-hand quantity, Point of Sale creates adjustment memos to update your inventory value. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, these memos are sent with the next Financial Exchange. Learn more about inventory adjustments.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Pro Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+ +

Making edits directly in your item list

+ +

View an item's history

+

Edit an assembly item or a group item

+

Edit a style

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven405.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven405.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab2aa3c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven405.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Copy an Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy an Item

+

Inventory Overview | About Item Types

+

 

+

Sometimes the quickest way to create a new item in inventory is to copy an existing similar item.

+
    +
  1. +

    In your item list, select the item you want to copy.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Copy.

    +
    3. +
+

Information from the copied item record is pasted into a new item record.

+
    +
  • +

    The following fields are not copied to the new item: On-Hand Qty, UPC, Alternate Lookup, and the Unorderable flag.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Order Cost (unless zero) from the copied item is populated to the Average Unit Cost of the new item. The order cost of the new item is reset to zero. (Pro) If you have alternate vendors with different order costs, those values are left unchanged.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter new values into these fields and edit other item fields, as appropriate for the new item. At lest one of Department, Description 1, Attribute, or Size must be changed to avoid creating a duplicate item.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

About item cost and quantity

+

Inventory overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven409.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven409.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c6699d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven409.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete Style Items or Entire Styles + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete Style Items or Entire Styles

+

Style Overview | Edit a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: This process should be carried out with caution so that items with on-hand quantities or listed on active documents are not accidentally deleted. If you delete style items with on-hand quantities, Point of Sale creates adjustment memos to update inventory and your QuickBooks financial software. If the deleted item(s) are listed on an active order document, the item(s) are NOT removed from that document. Review and edit documents as necessary.

+

To delete a style item:

+

Use the normal item deletion procedure from your item list.

+

To delete an entire style:

+

Since all style items have the same Item Name, searching inventory by the Item Name is the quickest way to display all of the style items (and only the style items). Use caution when taking the following steps as all items in the style will be deleted.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the Item Name for the style in the Search field at the top of your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    All of the style items (and only the style items) should be displayed. Scroll through the list to ensure other items aren't displayed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Press Ctrl+A on your keyboard to select all of the items. If you only want to delete some of the items, select only them. How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Confirm the deletion when prompted. If any of the style items still have a quantity on hand or are listed on open order documents, you will be warned.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Find an item record

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven410.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven410.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..98d8306 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven410.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Item Price and Cost + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Item Price and Cost

+

Overview | Price and Cost Relationship | Price Manager

+
+

Basic

+
+

(Pro)  This option is available at Headquarters only.

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

The item Pricing window allows you to enter or edit an items cost and price information, including markdown price levels, an MSRP price, and margin/markup values on a single window.

+

You can open this window while adding, editing, or viewing an item.

+

To access the Pricing window:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select an item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Edit. This step is not necessary if you just want to view the pricing information.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Pricing button in the Basic Info section. The Pricing Window is opened as shown below.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    (Pro) If using the multiple units of measure feature, select the unit for which you want to view/edit this information from the drop-down menu (not shown).

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Pricing Window

+

Explanation of Price/Cost Fields

+
    +
  • +

    Regular Price Your everyday retail price of the item. If you wish to use a department pricing formula to calculate your price, leave this field blank when adding a new item. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    MSRP Manufacturers Suggested Retail Price; a reference price that, if entered here, is printed on your price tags to demonstrate savings to your customers. Note: Some tag templates may not display the MSRP, due to size limitations.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cost The average unit cost for the item quantity currently on hand. Enter this cost ONLY if you have an on-hand quantity of the item when initially setting up Point of Sale. Otherwise, as you make receiving vouchers, Point of Sale automatically updates this field. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Margin % Gross margin or profit margin percentage. Auto-filled from department record (if defined) on new items and updated automatically as average unit cost changes. Manually editing the margin results in a recalculation of your price(s).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Markup % Alternate way to express profit; markup by n% over average unit cost. Same behavior as margin. When either are edited, the other is recalculated automatically.

    +
    • +
+

Price Levels

+

Optionally, enter prices and markdown percentages for your markdown price levels for the item (your custom price level names displayed). If you use Point of Sales pricing formula to calculate your regular prices and have defined price level markdown percentages, Point of Sale automatically calculates the price at each price level for you on new items.

+
    +
  • +

    Enter/edit a price or markdown percentage for each price level if this items pricing is to be different from your default markdowns.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can define or change your default price level names and markdown percentages in company preferences.  Note that changing your default markdown levels do not update existing item prices. You can use Price Manager to quickly change existing item prices if desired.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) You can set different prices at each level for each unit of measure of an item.

    +
    • +
+

Learn more about using price levels

+

 

+

Pricing Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you prefer to manually define all of your own prices, rather than have Point of Sale calculate them for you on new items, do not define a margin or markup in your department records and enter the price(s) as you are adding items to inventory.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

About the average unit cost

+

About the order cost

+

Change prices for a style

+

Cost and price in a multi-store configuration

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven427.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven427.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a88f7d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven427.htm @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ + + + + + + +Style Grid Basics + + + + + + + + + + + +

Style Grid Basics

+

Style Overview | Add a Style | Edit a Style | Style Templates

+
+

Pro

+
+

This information applies to the lower half of the Style window, displayed after selecting the Style button from an item record.

+

 

+

Style Grid

+

Style Grid Notes

+
    +
  • +

    Each cell of the style grid containing a number (including zero) represents a unique item in inventory, with a unique size/color (or other attribute) combination. A blank cell means that attribute combination is not included in your inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Though "size" and "attribute" is used when talking about styles in this help system, the grid axes will reflect the custom item labels you have defined in company preferences. Any item attribute can be used in a grid and placed on either axis, regardless of the labels. For example, your style items might vary by pattern or material rather than size or color.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The number of items that can be included in a style is virtually unlimited. You may have to use vertical and/or horizontal scroll bars to view the cells for all items in the grid.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If in Add or Edit mode, click the Click to Add labels to add a new size or attribute, then enter a zero (or the known on-hand quantity) in the cells corresponding to the new size/attributes combinations being added.

    +
    • +
+

Grid Values

+

When accessing and viewing a style grid from your item list, the values displayed are the on-hand quantities of each style item.

+

(Multi-Store)  You can view quantities for a specific store or the entire company by making a selection from the View:  field at the top of the grid.

+

If you come to inventory from a document, such as a purchase order, and then display the style grid, you are in "item select" mode. In this case the style grid cells initially display zeroes (0). To select items and order quantities to return to your document, enter order quantities in the grid and then choose Select from the bottom toolbar.

+

Showing Totals on a Grid

+

The style grid contains the totals for all the sizes in each attribute (row), and each size (column), and a grand total for all items in the style. You can choose to show or hide these totals.

+
    +
  • +

    From the grid, right-click in any column or row label and select Show Totals to toggle the display on/off.

    +
    • +
+ +

Navigating a grid:

+ +

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyboard action

+		 +

Description

+
+

<>, <>, <>, <>

+		 +

Move the cursor up, down, left, or right from one grid cell to another consecutively.

+
+

<Page Up>

+		 +

Move the cursor to the first displayed cell of a column.

+
+

<Page Down>

+		 +

Move the cursor to the last displayed cell of a column.

+
+

<Home> or
+<Ctrl + >

+		 +

Move the cursor to the first cell in a row.

+

 

+
+

<Ctrl + Home>

+		 +

Move the cursor to the upper left cell of the grid.

+
+

<Ctrl + End>

+		 +

Move the cursor to the lower right cell of the grid.

+
+ +

 

+ +

Return to top

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a style or style item

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven428.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven428.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0fb9db5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven428.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + +Style Templates + + + + + + + + + +

Style Templates

+

Style Overview | Add a Style | Edit a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

A style template is a user-defined array of item attributes (sizes, colors, patterns, etc.) that is used as a template when adding a new style. Each template can be used for an unlimited number of styles. Of course, you can instead create each style grid from scratch in inventory, but using templates makes the process much faster since all the predefined sizes and attributes are included in the new grid for you.

+

To work with style template:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your item list or form, begin adding or editing a style. The Style Window is displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To immediately apply an existing template to the style grid, select a template from the Style Template drop-down list at the top of the grid.

    +
    3. +
+

Select Style Template

+

Or

+

To preview, edit, or add templates, click the magnifying glass icon. Open

+

The Select a Style Template window is opened. Use this window to manage your style templates using the procedures below.

+ +

To preview and apply a template to the style you are working on:

+
    +
  1. +

     Select a template name on the left side of the window. A preview of the template is shown.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Apply Selected Template.  The template is immediately applied and the template window closed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Continue adding or editing your style.

    +
    4. +
+

To add a new template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Add New Template at the top of the window. A new template, with the default name New Template n, is displayed in the preview pane.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Type a unique name to overwrite the default.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Click to add fields on the template preview and enter style sizes, colors, or other attributes as appropriate along the vertical and horizontal axes.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Or

+

If you want to immediately apply this template to the style you were working on, select Apply Selected Template, which saves and applies the template in one step.

+

To edit, delete, or copy a style template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight a template in the list on the left of the template window and then complete actions as desired:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Editing the template: The same procedures used to create a template apply when editing it. Additional choices for adding, deleting, and moving rows/columns and for undoing edits are available from the Edit menu under the displayed template. After editing, select Save or, if you want to update the current style with the changes, select Apply Selected Template.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Deleting the template: Choose delete selected template from the Options menu. Deleting a template does not effect existing styles the have the deleted template applied.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Copying the template: Select Copy Selected Template from the Options menu. Enter a unique name for the template and edit as needed before saving. This is a fast way to create a template very similar to an existing template.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Renaming the template: Select rename selected template from the Options menu. Renaming a template does not effect existing styles that have the template applied.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Style templates are particularly effective for soft goods retailers (clothing, shoes, etc.) where item lines tend to have common sizes, colors, or other attributes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When applying a template to a style, if the applied template contains sizes or attributes you do not want to include in the particular style, you need not define items for those cells (i.e. dont enter a quantity or zero). An inventory row (item) will be created only for those attribute combinations (cells) in which you enter a quantity.

    +
    • +
  • +

    For some merchandise, attributes vary from style to style and from season to season. In this case, you typically wont know what attributes you need until you are actually ordering the items. Here it is often easier to define a template with a single attribute, such as sizes, only along one axis of the template. This gives you the flexibility you need to add other specific attributes, such as color for each style independently as you add it, while still avoiding repeated manual entry of your commonly used sizes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you modify an individual style grid in inventory that has a template applied, the original template is not affected.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+ + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven430.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven430.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc0721c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven430.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + +QuickBooks Users: Adding an Item to Inventory and Immediately Selling It + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Users: Adding an Item to Inventory and Immediately Selling It

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

If you add an item to inventory while creating a document, such as a sales receipt, it is strongly recommended that you enter the average unit cost, if known.

+

Adding a new item without entering a cost, and then immediately selling the item, will result in a discrepancy in your QuickBooks inventory value, since no cost of goods can be posted for the sale. In this case, a compensating adjustment will have to be made in your financial software.

+

One way to handle this is to conduct periodic physical inventories and then make an aggregate adjustment in your QuickBooks financial software. This helps keep your inventory value accurate, especially if you regularly make sales of items without defined costs.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven431.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven431.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1471345 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven431.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Assembly Items Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Assembly Items Overview

+

Inventory Overview | About Item Types | Group Items

+
+

Pro

+
+

An assembly item is an item that is itself composed of two or more other inventory items and sold as a set. For example, a "Ski Slope Package" could be defined as an assembly item made up of a pair of skis, bindings, and boots, all of which already exist in your inventory as individual items. Assembly items are often used to sell a set of items at a discount.

+

You "build" assembly items from the existing items in inventory, which are referred to as the component items. An assembly item can also be a component item of another assembly. When you build an assembly, the on-hand quantity of each component item is reduced by the quantity of the item included in the assembly and the on-hand quantity of the assembly item is increased by one. The number of assemblies you can build is dependent on the on-hand quantity of the component items. Assemblies can also be broken, thus freeing the component items to be sold individually again.

+

The assembled item has a single associated tax code; the entire assembly is taxed or not based on this code. Use judgement and observe local tax regulations if mixing taxable and non-taxable items in an assembly. Consider listing a non-taxable component as a separate service or non-inventory item on the receipt or use a group item instead. You can even include an assembly item in a group item.

+

How does an assembly item differ from a group item?

+

Once an assembly is defined and built, it can be listed on documents in the same manner as other items. Sales reports include assembly items as unique items and do not report on the component items that are included. Keep reporting needs in mind when you assign a department, vendor, and descriptions to your assembly items.

+

(Multi-store) Only Headquarters can define assembly items, but remote stores can build and break assemblies as necessary to meet local sales demand.

+

 

+

Related topics

+

Add and build assembly items

+

Break, edit, and delete assembly items

+

List assembly items on documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven433.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven433.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f1447d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven433.htm @@ -0,0 +1,134 @@ + + + + + + +Break, Edit, or Delete Assembly Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Break, Edit, or Delete Assembly Items

+

Assembly Items Overview | Add/Build Assembly Items

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can break, edit, or delete assemblies as needed to free the individual component items, to change the component items or quantities, or to discontinue using the assembly.

+

Breaking an assembly makes the component items available for sale individually. This option is only available if the on-hand quantity of the assembly item is greater than zero (0).

+

(Multi-store) Remote stores are limited to breaking assemblies at their own store and cannot edit or delete the assembly item.

+

To break assemblies:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight the assembly item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Show Details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Assembly button next to the item Type field. The Assembly Details are shown.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Edit Assembly. The Edit Assembly window is opened.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Click Break at the top of the Edit Assembly window.

    +
    6. +
+

Headquarters in multi-store only: Specify the store for which you are breaking the assemblies.

+

The Break Assembly dialog displays the number of existing assemblies that can be broken.

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify the number of assemblies you would like to break and then click  Break in the dialog.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click OK on the confirmation dialog.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Breaking an assembly reduces the on-hand quantity of the assembly item by one (for each assembly broken) and increases the on-hand quantity of each component item by the total number included in the broken assemblies.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Quantity and cost adjustment memos are automatically created to adjust inventory when breaking assemblies. The logged in users name will be entered on the memo, along with appropriate comments ("Assembly broken from inventory") and reason ("Brk Asm"). If users are not required to log in, you will be prompted to enter a user name for the memo(s) upon creation.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If an assembly item includes a second assembly item as one of its components, then breaking the first assembly does not break the second assembly contained therein.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

To edit an assembly (Headquarters only in multi-store):

+

Assembly item descriptive fields, price, vendor, etc. can be edited at any time using standard inventory editing procedures. However, the component items can only be changed if the on-hand quantity of the assembly item is zero (0). Existing assemblies must be broken before changes to the component items are allowed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the assembly item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Show Details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Assembly button next to the item Type field. The Assembly Details are shown.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Edit Assembly. The Edit Assembly window is opened.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    If the on-hand quantity is not zero (0), click Break and break all existing assemblies.

    +
    6. +
+

(Multi-store) All assemblies at all stores must be broken before the assembly component items can be edited.

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal procedures to add, edit, or delete component items.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save to record your changes.

    +
    3. +
+

You can now build new assemblies with the changed component items.

+

Return to top

+

 

+

 

+

To delete an assembly item (Headquarters only in multi-store):

+

Deleting an assembly item requires that you first break all existing assemblies and remove the component items from the assembly item.

+
    +
  1. +

    Break all existing assemblies, remove the component items, and save (select the links above for instructions, if necessary).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the assembly item highlighted (list) or displayed (form), select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    If the assembly item is listed on active order documents, you will be alerted and asked to confirm the deletion. If you answer yes, the item will be deleted and cost/quantity memos created to adjust inventory. It is recommended that you then edit any order documents to remove the deleted assembly item.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Assembly item overview

+

Add and build assembly items

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven434.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven434.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b6b953 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven434.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + +Using Reorder Points + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Inventory Reorder Points for Purchase Decisions

+

Reminders Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can define a reorder quantity (Reorder Point field) for your inventory items, allowing you to quickly see which items need to be purchased.

+

You can prevent an item from being added to the Reorder Reminders by flagging it as unorderable on the item record. This is handy for removing seasonal merchandise from the reminders list.

+

You can also run Reorder and Build Point reports.

+

 

+

Basic

+

Items at or below their reorder point are listed on the inventory Reorder Reminders window. Point of Sale takes into consideration any quantities already on order before adding an item to the reorder reminders list.

+

Pro

+

A company preference setting specifies the value used to determine when an item is added to your reorder reminders:

+
    +
  • +

    On-hand quantity:  With this option, Point of Sale adds an item to the reorder reminders when the combined on-hand and already on-order quantities is at or below the reorder point.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Available quantity:  With this option, Point of Sale adds an item to the reorder reminders when the combined on-hand and already on-order quantities, minus the quantity committed on active customer orders, is at or below the reorder point.

    +
    • +
+

Point of Sale can suggest POs to reorder the items on the Reorder Reminders list.

+

For assembly items, the reorder point indicates that quantity at which you want to build more of the assembly item.

+

Multi-Store  

+

You can specify reorder points for the company (all stores combined) and for individual stores. The Reorder Reminders shows reminders for the company and each individual store as well.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Inventory overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_avblqty_tracking.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_avblqty_tracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e4c96b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_avblqty_tracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Track Available Quantities + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Available Quantities

+

Inventory Overview | Reorder Item Reminders

+
+

Pro

+
+

The term available quantity refers to the current on-hand quantity of an item minus the quantity of that item already committed to active customer orders. The available quantity is sometimes referred to as the available to promise quantity. Knowing the available quantity helps you make sales decisions and plan for additional purchases of the item.

+

Available quantity calculations are used in Point of Sale to:

+
    +
  • +

    Alert you when you don't have sufficient available quantity of an item to complete a sales transaction.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Determine when items should be added to your reorder reminders list. If you prefer, you can set your company preferences to create reorder reminders based on the on-hand quantity instead.

    +
    • +
+

Where can I see an item's available quantity?

+
    +
  • +

    In the Basic Info section of the New/Edit Item form, select Available to open the Available Quantities window. This window summarizes all item quantity information, including current on-hand, on-order, and committed to customer orders, as well as a listing of the documents affecting those quantities.

    +
    • +
+

            

+
    +
  • +

    In the Avail Qty  column, available in your item list and on many Point of Sale documents and inventory reports. You may have to add the column to view it.

    +
    • +
+

+
    +
  • +

    In the Item Information window, accessed by selecting Edit Item (<F5>) for an item listed on a document.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Quantities of an item on held documents or on customer orders assigned a status of Pending (such as those used to give estimates or quotes) are not reflected in the available quantity of the item.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_avgunitcost.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_avgunitcost.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2774d11 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_avgunitcost.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + +About the Average Unit Cost + + + + + + + + + + + +

About the Average Unit Cost

+

About Order Cost | Enter/Edit Costs | Price/Cost Relationship

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

The Avg Unit Cost field in inventory reflects the average cost you have paid for the current on-hand quantity of an item.

+

 

+

image\inven_cost.gif

+

 

+

Point of Sale recalculates the average unit cost each time you receive additional quantities of the item at a different cost by proportionally averaging the old cost and the new cost. Receiving vouchers update your Point of Sale inventory and, if applicable, your QuickBooks financial software inventory value with item cost changes.

+

For example, if you have five shirts on hand with an average cost of $10 and you receive 10 more shirts costing $12 each, the new average unit cost is calculated as follows:

+

 

+ + + + + + + +
+

(On Hand Qty Current Cost) + (Rcvd Qty Purchase Cost)

+
+

On-Hand Qty + Rcvd Qty

+
+

Or, using the example above:

+ ++++++ + + + + + + +
+

(5 10) + (10 12)

+

5 + 10

+		 +

=

+		 +

170

+

15

+		 +

=

+		 +

New average unit cost of $11.33

+
+

 

+

We recommend that you not manually enter or edit the average unit cost. Point of Sale uses this value to send cost of goods sold information on item sales to your QuickBooks financial software. If it does become necessary to edit this value manually, typically to correct an error, see Creating an Adjustment Memo.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Tracking decimal costsClick to display a popup topic

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6369571 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +Inventory: How Do I? + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+  +

Add an item

+

Find an item

+

Edit an item

+

Filter the item list

+

Customize item list columns

+

Use service and non-inventory Items

+

View an items history

+

Use reorder points and reminders

+

Print price tags

+

Print my item list

+

 

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_itemhistory.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_itemhistory.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7200df4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_itemhistory.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Item History and Statistics + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item History and Statistics

+

Inventory Overview | Item Ratings & Trends | Inventory Reports

+

 

+

Item history provides a listing of every transactional document that has affected an item and a running tally of changes in on-hand quantity. You can click any listed document to view it.

+

Item Statistics include an item summary, including cost and profit information and total quantities in/out.

+

Item History  

+

(Pro) Item history can be viewed only at Headquarters. Headquarters can filter to view the history for any one store or for the entire company.

+

To view an item's history, with the item record in Edit mode (displayed in a form), expand the History section.

+

  image\inven_itemhistory.gif

+

The most recent documents are at the top of the list.

+
    +
  • +

    To view a listed document, double-click it.  You are taken to the appropriate history list with the document pre-selected. Normal copy, reverse, and edit capabilities are available for the document. When done, click Go Back at the bottom of the document to return to inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Change column lists the documents effect on item on-hand quantities. For example, a sale results in the on-hand quantity being reduced, therefore the Qty Change is a negative number. Likewise, receiving a quantity into inventory is shown as a positive number.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The On-Handy column displays a running total of the on-hand quantity, after being adjusted by the document.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the item is listed multiple times on a document (example: a customer exchange for the same item), the document is listed twice, once for the return (a positive quantity) and once for the new sale (negative quantity)

    +
    • +
+

Item Statistics

+

Expand the Statistics section on the item record to view a graphical rating of the item's relative performance in your inventory as well as total sales, cost, profit, and  quantities in/out. This information reflects the time period specified for item ratings in preferences.

+

Learn more about item ratings

+

    Item Statistics

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Reverse a history document

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_pricecostrelationship.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_pricecostrelationship.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39245c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_pricecostrelationship.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Price/Cost Relationship + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price/Cost Relationship

+

Average Unit Cost | Order Cost | Enter Item Cost and Prices

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

Margin (Margin % field) expresses the profit relationship between what you paid for an item (average unit cost) and its regular price. Markup (Markup % field) is an alternative way to express the difference between an items cost and its price. Markup is a simple percentage increase from the item cost.

+

There is an inter-relationship between the margin/markup fields and the other price/cost fields as follows:

+
    +
  • +

    Enter either a margin or a markup percentage, and Point of Sale will calculate and display the other value for you. The two fields have identical behavior.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Define a margin or markup in a department record, and Point of Sale will calculate your regular price and the prices at your optional price levels for you as new items are added to inventory in this department (if the regular price is not manually entered).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you or a receiving voucher update the average unit cost, the margin and markup percentages are recalculated. Prices are recalculated only if previously $ 0 (zero), although you can edit the price yourself from the receiving voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit the margin or markup manually for an existing item in inventory, and Point of Sale will recalculate your regular price and the prices at your optional price levels.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit your regular price; the prices at other price levels are recalculated to maintain your specified markdown percentages. The margin and markup are also recalculated.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit the price or markdown percentage of any optional price level; the change to one price level has no affect on other prices.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Use department pricing formulas for new items

+

Edit an Item

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_priceformula.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_priceformula.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d41731b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_priceformula.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + +Department Pricing Formula + + + + + + + + + + + +

Department Pricing Formula

+

Enter/Edit Item Price and Cost | Use Price Levels

+

 

+

You have the option of entering your new item prices manually or letting Point of Sale calculate them for you using a department pricing formula. When Point of Sale calculates new prices, it does so by applying the department margin (or markup) to the average item cost to arrive at the regular price.

+

You specify the profit margin or markup to be used in your department records or on individual item records in inventory. If you enter one value, Point of Sale calculates the other.

+

Point of Sale uses the following pricing formula:

+ +++ + + + + + + +
+

Regular Price  =

+		 +

Cost 100

+
+

100 Margin

+
+

Example

+

With an average unit cost of $10 and a 40% margin.

+

(10 x 100)/(100 40) = $16.67 regular price

+

If you want Point of Sale to calculate new item price(s) with a department pricing formula:

+
    +
  • +

    Enter a margin or markup in your department records

    +
    • +
  • +

    Assign items to departments as you add them to inventory

    +
    • +
  • +

    DO NOT enter item prices when adding the new item to inventory, Point of Sale will calculate them for you

    +
    • +
+

The pricing formula is applied only to new items in inventory (previous price = $0). Receiving reorder merchandise at a new cost on a voucher does not automatically update item prices, however Point of Sale alerts you so you can adjust your price if desired. You can maintain your desired profit margin by manually editing the margin or markup on the item record back to the original level.

+

Why aren't reorder item prices automatically updated when cost changes?

+

If you DO NOT want Point of Sale to calculate new item price(s):

+
    +
  • +

    Do NOT define department or item margins or markups

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter your item prices manually at anytime in inventory

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale will still calculate and display the margin and markup on the item record, but does not use them to calculate the item price(s) unless you manually edit them

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_protip_hourcharges.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_protip_hourcharges.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9de2453 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_protip_hourcharges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Charge by the Hour + + + + + + + + + + + +

Charge by the Hour

+

Track Decimal Quantities | Item Types | Inventory Overview

+

 

+

You can use service or non-inventory items to charge for services by the hour (or half-hour, quarter-hour, etc.).

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    Define an item or items in inventory for this purpose, such as Tailoring, Labor Charge, etc. making sure that Service or Non-Inventory is selected as the Item Type.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Optionally, define a separate department for all service/labor charges and assign this department to the items you create. This will allow you to report on all service and labor charges by filtering on this department.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Price for the items should be the price to be charged per unit of time (hour, half-hour, quarter-hour, etc.).

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    When the item is listed on a receipt, enter the units of time to be charged for as the items sale quantity. For example, if you are charging by the hour, enter 1.5 as the Qty to charge for an hour and a half.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminder_newitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminder_newitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c88aa9c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminder_newitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +New Item Reminders + + + + + + + + + + + +

New Item Reminders

+

Inventory Reminders Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The New Items reminders screen alerts employees to the upcoming arrival of new merchandise. Monitoring this list allows your associates to better serve customers by letting them know what new merchandise is coming soon.

+

You can print this list or print item tags in anticipation of the item arrival. The items should be removed from this list as soon as they arrive at the store, so that the list remains current and useful.

+

To work with items in the list:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Reminders and then select the New Items tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use normal list selection procedures to select one or more items before selecting a task from the I Want To menu. You can also use the Select All or Clear All choices from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select Print and then choose tags or the list from the drop-down menu to print the selected items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To remove selected items from the list, select Remove Selected Item(s) from the I Want To menu.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Reminders Message Alert

+

Security rights for reminders

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminder_reorder.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminder_reorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dab1c92 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminder_reorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +Reorder Items Reminder + + + + + + + + + +

Reorder Items Reminder

+

Item Reorder Points | Reminders Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Reorder Items reminder screen displays items whose quantity has fallen below the reorder point set in inventory. Use this screen to assist in replenishing your inventory.

+
    +
  • +

    You can print this list to help in creating purchase orders.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Double-click a listed item to view the item record.

    +
    • +
+

Point of Sale takes into consideration item quantities already on order (from unfilled purchase orders) when determining if an item should be added to the reorder reminder list.

+

To display this screen, select Reminders from the Inventory menu and then click the Reorder Items tab.

+

 

+

Pro Notes

+
    +
  • +

     The reminder screen also includes items that are on backorder.

    +
    • +
  • +

     Depending on your preference settings, quantities committed on customer orders may be taken into account when deciding if an item is added to this screen.

    +
    • +
+

Having Point of Sale Suggest POs for Reorder Items (Pro)

+

You also have the option of having Point of Sale suggest and generate purchase orders to order these items.

+ +

Related Topics

+

Reminders Message Alert

+

Security rights for reminders

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminders_alert.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminders_alert.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6cf21e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminders_alert.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Inventory Reminders Message + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Reminders Message Alert

+

Inventory Reminders | Messages

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale will alert you when there are inventory reminders needing your attention by adding a message to the message board on the home page.

+

Note: Display of reminder messages is subject to the security rights of the logged-in user.

+

 

+

Messages

+

 

+

The reminders message is blue to differentiate it from your personal messages (yellow) and includes a link that will take you directly to the reminders window.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminders_fillso.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminders_fillso.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..af668d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_reminders_fillso.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + +Fill Customer Order Reminders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Fill Customer Order Reminders

+

Fill Customer Orders | Reminders Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Fill Customer Order Reminders screen displays open customer orders that can be filled or partially filled with your available (including just received) item quantities. When you receive backorder items on a receiving voucher, Point of Sale will alert you that there are customer orders pending for the received items.

+

Use this screen to review the open orders, select those to fill, and then either go to the order or print fulfillment reports and pick lists.

+

To view the customer order reminders:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Go to Fill Customer Order Reminders from the alert when receiving backorder items.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From the Inventory menu, select Reminders and then select the Fill Customer Orders tab.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the drop-down list on the right, choose to view orders that can be Filled Partially or only those that can be Filled Fully.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: Use normal list sorting and customize column procedures to display the list in the manner you prefer, e.g. by order number, order date, etc.

+
    +
  1. +

    Use the check boxes in the Select column to select the order(s) you would like to fill. See note below about using this feature to optimize order fulfillment.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Go to a selected order or print a fulfillment report and pick list:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    To immediately go to an order to process it, double-click it in the list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To print fulfillment reports for selected orders, select Print and then either Fill Order Report or Item Pick List.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Process the selected orders individually using standard order fulfillment procedures.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Optimizing Fulfillment: As you select orders to fill, Point of Sale recalculates the status of the remaining orders. If filling one order makes an item unavailable to fill another order, the second order is disabled for selection. To clear the selected orders and try different combinations, choose Clear All Selections from the I Want To menu. To have Point of Sale suggest orders to fill, giving priority to oldest orders first, clear any previous selections and then choose Auto-select Orders. The results of this option will vary depending on whether you have chose to see orders that can be partially or fully filled.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for reminders

+

Inventory overview

+

Reminders Message Alert

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_service_items.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_service_items.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f5cc441 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_service_items.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Using Service Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Service Items

+

Item Types | Inventory Overview

+

 

+

Service items are defined in inventory and typically are used to list non-merchandise and labor charges on sales orders, work orders, or sales receipts to complete a job. Use normal new item procedures to define service items in inventory, selecting the Service item type.

+

Use the following guidelines when defining service items in inventory.

+
    +
  • +

    You cannot enter an on-hand quantity for a service item. Service items always have a zero on-hand quantity, since they are non-merchandise items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To charge for labor, enter a description of the labor in the Item Name field and a price equal to what you charge per hour (or per job). If you charge by the hour, you can charge for partial hours by listing the service item on a document and entering a decimal quantity, e.g., 0.5, 2.75, etc. Point of Sale will calculate the correct labor charge.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Generally, service items have no cost, but there may be exceptions, such as when you outsource the work and pay the third party a fee for the service. Make an entry in the item Avg Unit Cost field if this is the case.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You may want to map custom Income, Cost of Goods Sold (COGS), and Asset accounts on the Additional Info tab of the item form so the charges (when recorded on a receipt) are posted to your financial software in the manner you choose.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Use a service item for shipping charges

+

Use work orders

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_uom_managemultiple.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_uom_managemultiple.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a99d55d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/inven_uom_managemultiple.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + +Define Multiple Units of Measure + + + + + + + + + + +

Define Multiple Units of Measure

+

Overview | Use Units of Measure on Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

The use of multiple units of measure allows you to purchase and sell an item in up to four different units (sizes, or pack quantities). For example, you might buy a canned item by the case but sell it by both the case and individual can. You can define a separate UPC, alternate lookup, sales price, and default purchase-by and sell-by units in inventory and Point of Sale will automatically suggest the correct unit on documents.

+

To define multiple units of measure in inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn on the multiple unit of measure feature and add the various units you are likely to use on the Inventory page of company preferences.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    As adding or editing an item, specify the base unit for the item in the Base Unit field. Select from the units defined in preferences in Step 1 or enter a new unit (it will be added to preferences when you save).

    +
    3. +
+

It is strongly recommended you make the smallest unit in which you buy or sell the item the base unit. This helps avoid fractional calculations. Other information entered on the main item form (UPC, price and cost, quantities, etc.) should be for your base unit.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Units button adjacent to the Base Unit  field. The Units of Measure window is opened.

    +
    2. +
+

View Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Enter each alternate unit of measure. Click the Unit of Measure 1, 2, or 3 labels to expand the section and then enter or select:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

     Unit: Select from the drop-down list of previously defined units or type a new one.

    +
    • +
  • +

    # of Base Units: How many base units there are in this unit?

    +
    • +
  • +

     UPC and ALU: Unique values in these fields allow you to list the item in the correct unit by scanning or entering the unique value on documents. If these values are not different for each unit, leave them blank for alternate units.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Regular Price: For selling this unit; click Pricing to add additional markdown price levels.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Average Cost and Quantity on Hand for alternate units are calculated from your base unit values and are not editable for alternate units.  

    +
    • +
+

In this example, the base unit is a 12 oz. bottle and now we are entering a case unit which contains 12 bottles.

+

Unit of Measure - Alternate Unit Definition

+
    +
  1. +

    At the top of the window, specify default order-by and sell-by units.

    +
    2. +
+

If your default order-by unit is different than your base unit, you will be prompted to enter an order cost. Enter the order cost and click OK.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Close to return to the main item form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter information in other item fields as necessary.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Each unit can only be added once per item. For example, if you selected "case" as the base unit of measure, case will not be available to select as an alternate unit of measure. To use a unit in another position, first remove it from the previous defined position (remove by selecting blank as a unit).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If using the Data Import Wizard to import item information, you can import information for your base unit only. If exporting item list information, the base unit information is exported.

    +
    • +
+

 Changing Base Units of Measure:  Use caution if you need to change your base unit of measure after having been in operation for awhile. Review and update all item fields for each of your units after the change, paying particular attention to cost, price, and quantity values. Point of Sale will create adjustment memos for any cost and quantity edits related to the change, but there should be no net change in your inventory value.

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/invenvoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/invenvoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..357c5cb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/invenvoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + +Inventory Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | How Documents Affect Inventory | About Item Types

+ +

 

+

The Point of Sale inventory is designed to help you easily define, track, view, and edit your items in a convenient, accurate, and efficient manner. Each row in your item list represents a unique inventory item, service, or fee. Transactions such as receiving and selling merchandise instantly update your inventory quantities and costs.

+

Your item list stores all item information, including on-hand quantities, costs, price(s), UPC numbers, tax status, reorder points, and much more.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Item Definitions

+

Import items

+

Inventory reports

+

Security rights for inventory

+ +

View item list summary statistics

+ +

Define QuickBooks Desktop item accounts

+

 

+

Point of Sale Free

+

References to entering or tracking inventory quantities or costs and related features, such as margin/markup and price levels, do not apply to you.

+

 

+

Multi-Store Notes

+

All item quantities at all stores comprise a single inventory, with Headquarters having central control over that inventory. Point of Sale tracks the quantities of each item located at each store within that inventory. Transactions update inventory at the local store. When the next Store Exchange of information is completed, all stores and Headquarters are updated with the updated inventory information, reflecting activity at all stores. If you also use QuickBooks Desktop financial software, transactions are sent to QuickBooks Desktop so that your inventory valuation and related financial records are updated.

+

Inventory items and related files (departments, vendors, costs, prices etc.) can only be added or edited at Headquarters. Remote stores can view this information and use it to process transactions, but cannot edit the item information.

+

Exception: Special order items can be created and ordered by remote stores, typically done while creating a customer order. The special order item is sent to Headquarters on the first transactional document listing it. Headquarters can make a special order item a permanent addition to inventory by converting it to an inventory item. Allowing remote stores to create special order items introduces the possibility of creating items with duplicate UPC or Alternate Lookups. Headquarters is alerted to and can fix duplicate items from the duplicate item reminders screen.

+

Remote stores can be made aware of new items added at Headquarters via the new items reminders screen.

+

 

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_companyinfo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_companyinfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0c150cb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_companyinfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + + +Setup Interview: Receipt Information + + + + + + + + + + +

Setup Interview: Receipt Information

+

Setup Interview: Overview  

+

 

+

This page of the Setup Interview window is used to enter your company information (name, address, e-mail, web site, etc.) as you want it printed on sales receipts, purchase orders, reports, and customer orders.

+

You can also enter your return policy, store hours, or any other information you want to share with your customers.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_multistore_connectstores.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_multistore_connectstores.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d14b708 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_multistore_connectstores.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +Set Up Other Stores + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up Other Stores

+

Store Exchange Center | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Store Exchange can be set up from the Store Exchange Center using the following guidelines:

+
    +
  • +

    Headquarters only: Click  Set up store to enter information for each of your remote stores.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Headquarters only: Enter a store code and name that will be used throughout the program to identify each store.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify the communication method you will use to exchange data with the other store(s) and enter an e-mail address, file path, or folder location, based on the selected exchange method.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter the license number from the Server Workstation at the other store(s). The license number can be found on the CD jacket or by selecting About Point of Sale from the Help menu at the other stores Server Workstation. If the other store has not installed yet, you can complete this section later by selecting Configure Store Exchange from the Stores menu.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Change Password and specify a password used to encrypt the files sent between stores (the same password must be entered at all stores). Tips for passwordsClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+

Select a blue link on the left for answers to frequently asked questions.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Allowed Point of Sale activities by store type

+

Methods of Store Exchange

+

What information is exchanged between stores?

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_overview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e9ecc5c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Setup Interview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Setup Interview

+

Help and Support | How Do I?

+

 

+

The first time Point of Sale is started on the Server Workstation, the Setup Interview window is automatically opened. The interview is the fastest way to set up basic Point of Sale options in one place so you are ready to begin ringing up sales fast!

+

Not all options are defined in this initial setup. Advanced options that help you customize Point of Sale for your unique business needs can be set up later in company preferences.

+

 

+

The Setup Interview allows you to define:

+

Printed receipt Enter the company information you want printed on sales receipts including phone numbers, web site, and email address. This information is also printed on orders and reports.

+

Sales tax Specify if you collect sales tax and, if so, enter your primary sales tax rate and to whom the taxes are paid. You can set up more advanced sales tax options, such as different taxing instructions by merchandise type, price, or location, or paying taxes to multiple agencies later in company preferences.

+

Payments   Learn about and sign up for a QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service account to process credit card and debit/ATM transactions from within Point of Sale. If you already have an account use this page to enter your account number and set service options.

+

Gift Card   The QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service allows you to sell, redeem, and track the balance of gift cards from within Point of Sale. A QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account is required.

+

Hardware  Click Configure/Setup for the Point of Sale equipment you have. The Hardware Setup Wizard will walk you through configuring and testing each piece of hardware.

+

 

+

You can return to the Setup Interview at anytime by selecting it from the File menu.

+

 

+

Learn more

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_qbfs.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_qbfs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0ee061 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_qbfs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Setup Interview: Use with QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Setup Interview: Use with QuickBooks

+

Overview | Requirements of Financial Exchange

+

 

+

Use this page to specify whether you want to share Point of Sale data with QuickBooks financial software.

+
    +
  • +

    Answer No if you do not plan to share data with QuickBooks.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Answer Yes if you intend to share data with QuickBooks, even if you have not set up your QuickBooks company file yet.

    +
    • +
+

Connecting to QuickBooks

+

You can connect to QuickBooks now, provided you have the financial company you intend to use with Point of Sale set up. If you do not connect now, Point of Sale will prompt you to do so the first time you access a feature that requires a connection.

+

To connect now:

+
    +
  1. +

    Leaving the Point of Sale Setup Interview open, start your QuickBooks financial software and open the company file you wish to use with Point of Sale, logging in as a user with Administrator rights.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Switch back to the Point of Sale Setup Interview (select from the Windows task bar or press <Alt+Tab>).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Run QuickBooks Connection Wizard.

    +
    4. +
+

The Wizard will walk you through connecting the two programs.

+

Select a topic link to learn more about Financial Exchange.

+

Customizing how Point of Sale information is sent to QuickBooks

+

Importing your existing QuickBooks items to Point of Sale

+

Setup Interview: Overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_qbfs_q4.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_qbfs_q4.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1196161 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_qbfs_q4.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +iview_qbfs_q4 + + + + + + + + + +

I am having trouble connecting to QuickBooks. How do I fix it?

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden

+ +

Go through this checklist to be sure all of the essential requirements of connecting are met.

+
    +
  • +

    Do you have a supported version of QuickBooks: Pro or Premier Editions (2003 - 2006) or Enterprise Solutions (2.0 - 5.0)?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Is QuickBooks installed on this computer?

    +
    • +
+

OR

+

Have you followed the instructions in the Point of Sale QuickStart Guide to install and use QuickBooks on another computer?

+
    +
  • +

    Have you set up a QuickBooks company file to use with Point of Sale?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Is QuickBooks running and the company file open before you start the connection wizard?

    +
    • +
  • +

    If using the Remote Data Sharing (RDS) option, is the server application running on the computer on which QuickBooks is installed? Learn more about using RDS.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Is the "Dont allow any applications to access this company file" option set in your QuickBooks Integrated Applications company preferences? If so, the check box for this option must be cleared. How do I?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Have you moved or renamed your QuickBooks company file? If so, use the connection wizard to reconnect to your company file in the new location or of the new name.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_salestax.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_salestax.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a2fe94 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/iview_salestax.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up Primary Sales Tax Rate + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up Primary Sales Tax Rate

+

 

+

This information applies when setting up your primary sales tax rate from the Setup Interview or upon being prompted when you go to make a sale.

+

 

+

Use this page to set up your primary sales tax.

+
    +
  • +

    If you collect sales tax, answer Yes

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter your primary sales tax rate and the government agency to which you pay the collected taxes

    +
    • +
+

Entering tax information here sets up one tax code and one tax location for you, with the tax rate you specify applied to all taxable items. As you enter/edit your items in inventory, assign this tax code to them so that tax is automatically collected on sales.

+

If you need to configure more advanced sales tax options, such as collecting sales tax at different rates for different types of merchandise or services, for sales in different locations, based on item price thresholds, or to pay taxes to multiple agencies, you can set up those tax options later in Point of Sale company preferences.

+

Learn more about collecting sales taxes.

+

Sales tax FAQs

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po601.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po601.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f51907 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po601.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Access Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Purchase Orders

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Purchasing Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Select one of the following from the Purchasing menu:

+
    +
  • +

    Purchase Order List to view saved POs

    +
    • +
  • +

    New Purchase Order to create a new PO

    +
    • +
  • +

    Suggest PO to have Point of Sale recommend order quantities for items that have fallen below their reorder point (Pro)

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po602.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po602.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f6da00d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po602.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + + +Create a Purchase Order + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a Purchase Order Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | PO Overview | PO Fields

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Follow the steps below to create a new purchase order (PO). You can also make a new PO by copying an existing one.

+

 

+

Note: The availability of purchase orders is controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

To create a new PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Purchase Order from the Purchasing menu.

    +
    2. +
+

A blank PO form is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Accept the suggested PO# (sequential order) or enter a unique alphanumeric number of your own.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a vendor from the Vendor drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Type the first few characters of the vendor company name to quickly jump to the vendor in the list. Select Add New if you need to add the vendor record while making the PO.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Press <F4> from the vendor field to go to your full vendor list to find the vendor.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The payment terms from the vendors record are suggested on the PO.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, specify the store to which the items will be shipped in the Ship To Address field and the store to which the vendor bill should go in the Bill To Address field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Accept or edit the Order, Ship, and Cancel dates as necessary.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    List the items you want to order, entering an order quantity and cost for each item added.

    +
    4. +
+

The purchase order cost is suggested as the Order Cost of the item in inventory, but can be edited as necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in other PO fields, including any applicable discount and/or fee that will apply to the order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Pro Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If using multiple units of measure, your default order-by unit and associated order cost is suggested. Use the Units of Measure field to order by a unit other than your default order-by unit.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also generate a PO from a customer order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    With multiple stores, remote stores can generate POs only for special order items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you order the same item from multiple vendors you can list any of the item's vendors on the PO.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

E-mail POs to vendors

+

Handle special orders

+

Purchase an item from multiple vendors

+

Have Point of Sale suggest orders

+

Multi-Store purchasing & receiving overview

+

Track POs by status

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po607.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po607.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5727316 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po607.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Using a Filter to Display a Single Vendor's Items + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Using a Filter to Display a Single Vendor's Items

+ +

In-help popup

+
+

Pro

+
+

When looking up items while creating a document, you can filter your item list to display only items from a specified vendor. This is particularly useful while creating purchase orders.

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Select from Item List from the I Want To menu to go to the item select inventory screen.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Create Filter from the View drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Scroll down to the Vendor Name or Vendor Code field and enter the vendor information, clear all other fields, and then select OK to display the filtered list.

    +
    4. +
+

If you want to memorize the filter for future use, select Save before selecting OK, and give the filter a unique name.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a Doc Qty and Doc Cost (or Doc Price if applicable) for each item being listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose Select to return the items and quantities to the document.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

(Pro) To work with a style from the vendor, highlight any item belonging to the style you want to order and then select Switch to Style to display the style grid. Enter document quantities in the cells of the grid and then choose Select.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po614.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po614.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e3d4be --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po614.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +PO Discounts and Fees + + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchase Order Discounts and Fees

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Sometimes vendors will offer a discount or charge a miscellaneous fee on merchandise. You can add a discount and/or a fee in the totals area at the bottom of the purchase order. Discounts and fees are not spread over the cost of individual items listed on the PO.

+

To enter a purchase order discount:

+
    +
  • +

    Enter a discount in the Discount (amount) or Disc % fields.

    +
    • +
+

AND/OR

+
    +
  • +

    Enter a fee amount in the Fee field.

    +
    • +
+

Note that discounts entered on a purchase order are proportionally carried to receiving vouchers that reference the purchase order. For example, if a purchase order has a discount totaling $50.00 and you receive only half (calculated by value, not unit count) of the ordered items on a voucher, then $25.00 of the discount is applied to that voucher. The remaining discount amount will be carried to subsequent vouchers that receive the remaining due items.

+

When a receiving voucher references a purchase order with a fee entered, you are alerted and can transfer the fee to the voucher at your discretion. This is because fees may not be not related to the value of ordered/received items, and may need to be applied differently if a partial shipment is received. Transferring a fee to vouchers that reference the purchase order is at your discretion.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po615.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po615.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..59d3cf5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po615.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + + +PO Fees + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchase Order Fees

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Fees entered on a PO (such as a special handling fee) are not spread over the cost of individual items.

+

When a receiving voucher references a PO with a fee entered, you are alerted and can transfer the fee to the voucher at your discretion.
+
+To enter a PO fee:

+
    +
  • +

    Enter an amount in the Fee field.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po616.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po616.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0fc246 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po616.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +List Items on a PO + + + + + + + + + + + +

List Items on a Purchase order

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Read the following sections to learn more about listing items on a purchase order.

+

List items by UPC, alternate lookup, item #, or search keyword

+

Select items from inventory

+

Add new inventory items while making a PO

+

Purchase by different units of measure

+

List special order items

+

 

+

Note: If you have defined Reorder Points for your inventory items, you can easily view a list of the items whose on-hand quantities are at or below the reorder point on the Reminders window. Pro users can have Point of Sale suggest POs for items on this list.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a new PO

+

Edit a PO

+

Delete items

+

Enter order costs on a PO

+

Have Point of Sale suggest orders

+

Multi-store purchasing & receiving

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po619.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po619.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..94d2d86 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po619.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Delete a PO + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Purchase Order

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Purchase orders are planning documents that have no direct affect on inventory. Therefore they can be safely deleted at anytime, whether because you have received all of the ordered items or because you are canceling the order. Vouchers made to receive the ordered items provide a permanent record.

+

To delete a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Purchase Order List from the Purchasing menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Locate and highlight the PO you wish to delete.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Delete.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Once a PO has been deleted, it cannot be recovered. Deleted POs also are not displayed when viewing a vendor's history. However, the corresponding receiving vouchers are displayed in vendor history.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Deleting filled or canceled POs helps keep your PO list compact, so locating a PO when you need to is easier.

    +
    • +
  • +

    In a multi-store configuration:

    +
    • +
  • +

    POs can be deleted only at Headquarters. (Exception: POs for special order items created at a remote store can be edited or deleted at the remote store.) Once a PO is filled, Headquarters can delete it, in which case it will be removed from the PO list at remote stores on the next Store Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A good practice at Headquarters is to regularly review your PO list and delete POs that have been filled. This helps keep the active PO file compact, making it easier to locate POs in the list, both at Headquarters and at remote stores, and makes Store Exchange mailbags smaller. Your receiving vouchers provide the permanent record of merchandise received.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Find a PO

+

Create a new PO

+

PO fill status

+

Multi-store purchasing & receiving

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po626.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po626.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6a4b6e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po626.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cancel a PO in Progress + + + + + + + + + + + +

Cancel a Purchase Order in Progress

+

Purchasing Overview | Create a new PO | Copy a PO

+
+

Pro

+
+

Purchase orders can be safely canceled before saving or deleted anytime later, since they have no direct effect on inventory.

+

To cancel a PO in progress:

+
    +
  1. +

    Before saving the PO, select Cancel or press <Esc>.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the confirmation dialog displayed, select:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    OK to cancel the PO without keeping a copy and discard all changes you have made to it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cancel to exit the dialog and return to the PO, keeping it active.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po628.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po628.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..05a6751 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po628.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit a PO + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Purchase Order

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Purchasing Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

POs are order-planning documents, not transactional documents; therefore, they can be edited even after saving.

+

To edit a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight a PO in your list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit from the main toolbar. The PO form is displayed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Navigate through the editable fields, making changes as needed.

    +
    4. +
+

To edit a listed item, highlight the item and select Edit Item (<F5>). You can also add or delete items, if necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

In a multi-store configuration, POs made for remote stores and later edited are resent to the remote store in the next Store Exchange. Remote stores cannot edit or delete POs received from Headquarters.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List items on a PO

+

Delete a PO

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po629.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po629.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2671ec3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po629.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print POs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Purchase Orders

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

After completing a PO, you can print out a copy to send to a vendor or keep for your own records.

+

For information about printing tags, see printing tags.

+

Also read the general printing topic.

+

To print a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the PO or select the PO(s) that you want to print. How do I select multiple POs?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print Purchase Orders from the Print menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If presented with a print option dialog:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Change the printer you want to use, if necessary

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify to include All items or just Due items and the number of copies you want to print

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select More Options to preview or change the print template

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Find a PO

+

Edit a PO

+

E-mail a PO to the vendor

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po632.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po632.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be2a064 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po632.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +PO Fill Status + + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchase Order Fill Status

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Qty Ordered, Qty Received, Unfilled %, and Qty Due fields are grouped together in the totals area of the PO form (also shown in the PO list). Together, they communicate the fill status of the entire PO.PO Fill Status

+

POs start with an initial Qty Received of 0 (zero) and Unfilled % of 100. The Qty Received increases, and the Qty Due and Unfilled % decrease as items are received on vouchers. For example, if you ordered 20 of a certain item and received only 15 on a voucher, the PO would show a remaining Qty Due of 5 and Unfilled % of 25.

+

If a vendor substitutes items or quantities, the PO will show a remaining Qty Due and Unfilled %. If you want to accept the substitution and have the PO show that the order was filled, you can edit the PO to match the merchandise received, so that each item on the PO has a Qty Due of zero (0). The Unfilled % will be adjusted accordingly.

+

To see the fill status of individual items, look at the Ordered (quantity) and Due fields for each item in the PO item list.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

PO field descriptions

+

Receive PO items on a voucher

+

Track POs by order status

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po634.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po634.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..47c5675 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po634.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +Order Costs on POs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Order Costs on Purchase Orders

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

A purchase order (PO) is a document that asks a vendor to deliver goods at a certain cost. When listing items on a PO, Point of Sale will suggest the item Order Cost in inventory as the cost on the PO. You can change the cost on the PO by manually editing it. This does not affect the Order Cost assigned in inventory.

+

When a receiving voucher is made to receive the PO items, the cost entered on the PO will be carried to the voucher, as will the vendor terms. When the receiving voucher is updated, the inventory Average Unit Cost and Order Cost will automatically be updated to reflect the change in the item cost.

+

 

+

Printing tags when costs change: You have the option of printing tags for the items ordered on a PO. This way the tags are ready when the items are received. Be aware however, that if the PO is ordering items at a new cost and you print the tags from the PO, the tag price will be the current inventory price. It is recommended you review and update your item prices when receiving the items on a voucher or in inventory before printing tags in this case.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a new PO

+

List items on a PO

+

Use multiple vendors for an item

+

Track item price and cost in inventory

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_addnewitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_addnewitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..89cfc09 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_addnewitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +Add New Inventory Items while Making a PO + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add New Inventory Items while Making a PO

+

Quick Add an Item | Make a new PO

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale allows you to add new items to inventory and immediately order them as you are creating a new PO.

+

To add a new inventory item while making a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    When creating the PO, choose Select from Item List from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    (Pro) To add a new style or add items to an existing style, select Edit/Add Style from the I Want To menu once you reach the inventory item select screen.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select New and enter information to define the new item(s) or style.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Enter an Order Cost (on Additional Info tab) and optionally the Average Unit Cost for each new item, but leave the On-Hand Qty field blank. The receiving voucher will add the received quantities and update the average cost (if not entered) when the ordered items are received.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Style Items: You can enter order quantities in the style grid cells. Only style items for which you entered an order quantity are created in inventory.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    For a single item: Choose Save and Select to save the item and list it on the PO with a quantity of one (1) and your defined order cost.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

For a style: Choose Save and Select to save the style in inventory and bring the style items and specified order quantities to the PO.

+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary to change item quantities or order costs back on the PO, highlight any item and select Edit Item (<F5>). Entering a new values and then select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

Or, navigate to the Ordered (Qty) and Cost fields in the PO item list and make edits there.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_instructionscomments.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_instructionscomments.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..40a89dd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_instructionscomments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Notes, Instructions or Comments + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Notes, Instructions or Comments

+

 

+

Most Point of Sale documents contain a field for entering pertinent information related to the transaction. This field is labeled Notes,  Instructions or Comments, depending on the document.

+

Receipt - Select Add/Edit Receipt Notes from the I Want To menu. Use the Notes field to record additional information about the sale.

+

Purchase Order  Embedded Instructions field on the form for recording special vendor instructions, FOB point, delivery policies, etc.

+

Adjustment Memos  Embedded Comments field for recording information related to the reason for the inventory adjustment.

+

Customer Orders (Pro) Use to record information about the merchandise ordered, work to be performed, warranty coverage, or other related data.

+

If more space is needed in this field, select Edit <type> from the I Want To menu.

+

 

+

Entries in these fields can be used to filter documents for list display and filtering of some reports.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Make a Sale

+

Take a customer order

+

Create a purchase order

+

Create an inventory adjustment memo

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_status_tracking.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_status_tracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17ec7ff --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_status_tracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + +Track POs by Status + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Purchase Orders by Status

+

Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Status field on purchase orders allows you to track orders, filter order lists, and create reports based on the current entry. Point of Sale has these default purchase order status types.

+
    +
  • +

    Open - Assigned to all new orders.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Closed - Automatically assigned to POs that have been completely received.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pending - Manually assigned status, typically used on orders that you have made but that you are not immediately placing with your vendor.  This  allows you to filter them out from purchasing reports and for Pro users, prevents unplaced orders from affecting your available quantity calculations and reorder reminders.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Suggested - (Pro) Automatically assigned to POs generated by the Suggest PO feature.

    +
    • +
+

To manually change the status of a purchase order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the purchase order in Form View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a new status from the drop-down list in the Status field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

To view the status history of a purchase order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the order in Form View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the icon next to the Status field.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If it fits your needs, you can add or rename status labels in company preferences. A purchase orders status can be manually changed as the order is made and as it proceeds towards completion for tracking purposes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    As the status of an order is changed, Point of Sale records the date and the employee who made the change, so you have a running history of the orders progression.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When a receiving voucher records the arrival of the ordered merchandise and the PO is 100% filled, the orders status is automatically changed to Closed by Point of Sale. Closed POs don't show up in the default purchase order list view.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Create a purchase order

+

Track PO fill status

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_suggestpo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_suggestpo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ca0f34 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/po_suggestpo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Using 'Suggest PO' + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using 'Suggest PO'

+

Purchasing Overview | E-mail POs to Vendors

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale can suggest and generate purchase orders for items that are on your reorder reminders list.

+

When this feature is used, Point of Sale displays a list of proposed items to order.

+

 

+

   image\suggest_po.gif

+

To have Point of Sale suggest POs:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Suggest POs from the Purchasing menu or from the Reorder Reminders I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale produces a list of suggested reorder items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter an Order Qty for each item. POs are not generated for an item if you leave the Order Qty field blank.

    +
    2. +
+

Several item information fields, including current on-hand quantity, available quantity, and quantity already on order, are displayed or available to help you decide on new order quantities.

+
    +
  1. +

    If you purchase an item from multiple vendors, your primary vendor is suggested. If necessary, add and use the Order From column to change the vendor.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Create POs from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale generates purchase orders as specified using the item order costs from inventory. If multiple items are ordered for a vendor, they are combined on a single PO for that vendor. A confirmation message displays the number of POs created.

+
    +
  1. +

    The POs can be viewed, edited to change order costs or add additional items, and printed or e-mailed to your vendor(s).

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/purchasingoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/purchasingoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..76f0d3c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181143/purchasingoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + +Purchasing Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchasing Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Create a New PO | Receive Ordered Items

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Note: The availability of purchase orders is controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

When merchants need to restock or add new merchandise, they create and send temporary documents called purchase orders (POs) to vendors. A PO typically includes the following information:

+
    +
  • +

    The vendors name

    +
    • +
  • +

    Order, shipping, and cancel dates

    +
    • +
  • +

    A list of the items ordered, including description, order cost, and quantity ordered

    +
    • +
  • +

    The total cost of the order, including applicable discounts and fees

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, terms of payment and payment due date (for tracking purposes)

    +
    • +
  • +

    A summary of the PO fill status (what has been received and what has not)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ship To and Bill To stores

    +
    • +
+

The merchandise ordered on a PO is added to inventory when its arrival is recorded on a receiving voucher. When a PO has been filled, it can safely be deleted. The receiving voucher(s) that reference the PO provide the permanent record of the item purchased.

+

Purchase orders are not shared between Point of Sale and your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Since they are planning documents, they have no effect on inventory valuation.

+

Remote stores can generate POs only for special order items. Regular POs are created only by Headquarters and are sent to each remote store for merchandise destined for their store. The remote store can reference those POs to create receiving vouchers. Learn More.

+

 

+

Note: If you have defined Reorder Points for your inventory items, you can easily view a list of the items whose on-hand quantities are at or below the reorder point on the Reminders window. Pro users can have Point of Sale suggest POs for the items on the reorder reminders.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track PO fill status

+

PO field descriptions

+

Security Rights for Purchase Orders

+

Preferences for Purchase Orders

+

Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/About_EMV_receipt_compliance.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/About_EMV_receipt_compliance.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d22f6b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/About_EMV_receipt_compliance.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + +About EMV receipt compliance + + + + + + + + + + + +

About EMV receipt compliance

+

Sales Overview | Receipt Fields

+

 

+

EMV is a new US credit card payment standard meant to make credit transactions more secure.  "EMV" stands for Europay, MasterCard, and Visa - the developers of this standard.

+

EMV cards feature smart chips which encrypt data for every sale, making card transactions more secure.  These cards are designed to be inserted into the reader and remain in place throughout the entire transaction.

+

Along with this change, there are new industry standards for the information contained on receipts.  The default 40 column and Letter receipt templates are EMV compliant.  If you use a modified template, make sure to add the fields required for EMV compliance.

+

List of required fields:

+
    +
  • +

    Body Header:

    +
    • +
  • +
      +
    • +

      Transaction Date & Time

      +
      • +
    • +

      Transaction Type & Number

      +
      • +
    • +

      Store

      +
      • +
    • +

      Workstation

      +
      • +
    • +

      Store Name

      +
      • +
    • +

      Store Address

      +
      • +
    +
    • +
  • +

    Body:

    +
    • +
  • +
      +
    • +

      Tender Amount Information (includes total and masked card number)

      +
      • +
    • +

      Tender Credit Card Name

      +
      • +
    • +

      Expiration Date (masked)

      +
      • +
    • +

      Tender Reference

      +
      • +
    • +

      Entry Mode (Chip, Chip/Swiped, Manual, or Swiped)

      +
      • +
    • +

      Tender Merchant Information

      +
      • +
    • +

      Tender Signature Line

      +
      • +
    • +

      Card AID

      +
      • +
    • +

      Retention Reminder

      +
      • +
    +
    • +
+

To add fields to a custom receipt template:

+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      Go to File > Tools > Print Designer.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      From the Available Templates list, double-click your receipt template to open it.

      +
      3. +
    3. +

      Click the Add button and choose Data Field or Group of Fields.  Add any fields from the list above that aren't already on your template.

      +
      4. +
    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Canceling_Holding_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Canceling_Holding_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..570aa7c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Canceling_Holding_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Canceling, Holding, and Unholding Receipts in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Canceling, Holding, and Unholding Receipts in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Edit/Delete Items | Locate a Receipt | Reversing a Receipt

+ +

Topic Hidden

+ +

A sales receipt can be canceled or put on hold at any time before saving. Canceling/holding a sales receipt in Simple View has the same effect as canceling/holding a sales receipt in regular view. Refer to the topic Canceling/Holding a Receipt for more details.

+

To cancel a sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Cancel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the confirmation dialog, click Yes to discard the current receipt. The sales transaction of the receipt is canceled.

    +
    3. +
+

Or, click No to return to the current receipt and continue with the sales transaction.

+

To put a sales receipt on hold:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Hold. The current sales receipt is put on hold.

    +
    2. +
+

To take a sales receipt off hold:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Unhold. The held receipt will replace the new receipt form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete the sales transaction by editing, saving, printing or canceling the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    In Simple View, only one receipt can be placed on hold at a time. To place a second receipt on hold, you must first take the held receipt off hold and complete the sales transaction.

    +
    • +
  • +

    While a sales receipt is on hold, you can view, print, or cancel it (subject to your security rights). Canceling a held receipt takes the receipt off hold and discards it.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Canceling/Holding a receipt in regular view

+

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Edit/Delete items in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Credit_Card_Returns_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Credit_Card_Returns_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb58dfc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Credit_Card_Returns_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Credit Card Returns in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Returns in Simple View

+

Returning Items | Gift Card Returns Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

If a previous credit card transaction has already been settled with the concerned bank, you should issue a credit refund to the customer by making a return receipt.

+

To make a credit card return:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic return procedure adding items to a return receipt. For more information, see Returning Items in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Payments area, click Give Change and select Credit Card from the menu. The Credit Card dialog opens.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Swipe the customers credit card, or manually enter the credit card number, expiration date and the customers ZIP Code.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Update, print the receipt, and have the customer sign the merchant copy.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

If the customer is returning all the items on the original receipt, you can also reverse the original receipt. Reversing the receipt is typically done when the customer is not present to swipe their card or to get a signature for a return receipt.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Returning Items in Simple View

+

Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Customers_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Customers_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..62baf92 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Customers_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + +Customers in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customers in Simple View

+

 

+

If the company preference to track customer is enabled, basic customer functionality is supported in Simple View, including:

+
    +
  • +

    The ability to list the customer on the receipt

    +
    • +
  • +

    Applying customer discounts and price levels

    +
    • +
  • +

    Using customer charge accounts

    +
    • +
  • +

    Giving customer loyalty rewards

    +
    • +
+

Selling items from customer orders

+
    +
  • +

    Quick-adding a customer to your Customer List while making a sale (see below)

    +
    • +
+

To list an existing customer in Simple View:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Customer field, begin typing customer information (last name is suggested, but you can also type first name, phone number, company name, or a search keyword).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Enter.

    +
    3. +
+

         Simple View CUstomer Field

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the correct name from the displayed list of customers matching your entry.

    +
    2. +
+

Alternatively, select the down arrow to the right of the customer field to display your entire customer list. Scroll through the list to locate the customer name.

+

Discounts, tax handling, and other customer-specific sales information is automatically suggested or applied to the receipt.

+

To QuickAdd a new customer in Simple View:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Add Cust from the left side of the Simple View screen. The New Customer window is opened.

    +
    2. +
+

          QuickAdd Customer

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter basic customer information. Last Name is required.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save and Select.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete the sale normally.

    +
    3. +
+

You can add additional information for the customer later by editing the customer record.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Not all customer information is displayed on a Simple View receipt. For example, the customer's address, charge account information, reward information, and check acceptance status are not displayed. However, you will be notified if a credit limit is exceeded, if checks are not accepted, or if a reward is available for the customer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The integrated shipping features are not available from the Simple View receipt screen, although you can record a shipping amount.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customer Overview

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Discounting_Sales_Prices_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Discounting_Sales_Prices_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d1ee87 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Discounting_Sales_Prices_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,183 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Discounting Sales Prices in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discounting Sales Prices in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Edit/Delete Items | Taking Payments /Giving Change Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Simple View supports the following types of discounts:

+

Manual item discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer Discounts and Price Levels Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer Rewards Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Global discount (to entire sale) Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Automatic Discounts and Coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Company Preferences: Pricing

+

Using Markdown Price Levels

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Edit_Delete_Items_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Edit_Delete_Items_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..53abb3f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Edit_Delete_Items_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Edit / Delete Items in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit / Delete Items in Simple View

+

Receipt Elements | Making a Sale | Discounting Sales Prices Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

You can edit a sales receipt by editing or deleing items listed in it.

+

To edit an item:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, select an item in the Item List area.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Edit Item to open the Edit Item dialog.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit the Item Name, Item Description, Quantity, Price and Discount % fields for the selected item. Also, select Unit of Measure and the reason for discount from UOM and Disc. Reason drop-down lists respectively.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    To marks selected item as return item, enter a negative value in the Quantity field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The edited item details are available only in the current sales receipt, and are not reflected in the Item List of Point of Sale Inventory.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK to close the dialog and return to the sales receipt form. The edited item details appear in the Item List area.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat Step 1 to 4 to edit other items in the sales receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

To delete an item:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, select an item in the Item List area.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Delete Item to delete selected item from the sales receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    An item deleted from a sales receipt is still available in your inventory. You can add this item to another sales receipt.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Inventory Overview

+

Item Information Fields

+

Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

Taking Payments /Giving Change

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Gift_Card_Returns_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Gift_Card_Returns_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c1a176 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Gift_Card_Returns_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Gift Card Returns in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Gift Card Returns in Simple View

+

Returning Items | Credit Card Returns Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

You can refund amounts for returned merchandise to a gift card. The refunded amount is added to the gift card balance (if you are using the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service).

+

To make gift card return:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic return procedure for adding items to a return receipt. For more information, see Returning Items in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the Payments area, click Give Change and select Gift Card from the menu. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Swipe the gift card, or manually enter the card number.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the gift card service servers and updates the card balance.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the return receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Returning Items in Simple View

+

Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_Basics_new.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_Basics_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f4656c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_Basics_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + +GoPayment Basics + + + + + + + + + + +

GoPayment Basics

+

Intuit GoPayment lets your customers make credit and debit card payments to you - on the spot - using their mobile phones. You can process any major card, credit or debit. There's no need to write down payment information or call into your back office. Intuit GoPayment works in conjunction with Point of Sale.

+

Learn more

+

Manage your GoPayment Account

+

If you're the account administrator, you can manage GoPayment Service using the Merchant Service Center web site. This site lets you customize your sales receipt, add GoPayment users, reset passwords, and learn about GoPayment features. You can also review transactions, deposits, and fees.

+

Sign in with your GoPayment User ID and Password here.

+

 

+

GoPayment Security

+

To protect data in transit, GoPayment adheres to online banking industry protection standards, using an https connection over SSL (Secure Socket Layer) at 128-bit encryption.

+

Sensitive credit card information is never permanently stored on your mobile device. When you swipe or insert cards with GoPayment, an additional layer of encryption (3DES combined with DUKPT) protects communication between your device and the card reader.

+

Note: Never use an unsecured wireless network connection to process transactions.

+

Unsecured wireless networks are neither secure nor PCI-compliant. To meet PCI-compliance standards, a wireless network must be password-protected and feature strong encryption for authentication and transmission.

+

 

+

GoPayment Support

+

To manage your account (add users, change passwords, customize receipts, and more), sign in with your GoPayment User ID and Password here.

+

Note: This site is not optimized for mobile browsers.  You must be the account administrator to sign in. 

+

Contact GoPayment support:
+1-800-558-9558
+
+Authorize payments by phone:

+

- MasterCard/Visa 1- 800-228-1122
+- American Express 1- 800-528-2121
+- Discover  1- 800-347-1111

+

 

+
+

Basic

+
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_FAQ_new.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_FAQ_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83361e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_FAQ_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,154 @@ + + + + + + +GoPayment FAQ + + + + + + + + + + + +

GoPayment FAQ

+
    +
  • +

    What if I experience a low signal while processing a payment?
    +If there's no response due to a low signal, keep GoPayment open and try moving to a better spot. If you lose your connection during a payment, try to continue where you left off.  If you close GoPayment before getting a connection, you will need to re-enter all payment information.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Why can't I void a payment?
    +If the transaction has been submitted to the bank (batched), it cannot be voided.  At that point, you or your account administrator can process a refund online using the Merchant Service Center site.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I use GoPayment to store a list products or services?
    +Use the Items feature  to store a priced list of products or services. With Items on, you can start transactions by selecting item(s) that comprise the purchase. GoPayment uses item prices to tally the charge amount. Customers can see what they bought and you can track inventory and services.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I turn on Items?
    +In Settings, turn Items on. Tap Get Paid. The Items list displays.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I add an item?
    +From the  top right of the screen tap +. Then complete the Item form.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I edit an item?
    +Tap the > next to the item you want to edit. Or from Settings, tap Edit Items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I charge for an item?
    +Tap the > next to the item you want to add to the order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I locate past charges? 
    +Tap History. You will see the last 25 transactions. (Payments appear in black. Voids display in red).

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I open a transaction?
    +Tap the transaction line. You can view transaction details, send a receipt, or void the charge.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I set the sales tax?
    +At the bottom of the GoPayment screen, tap Settings. In the Sales Tax field, enter the desired tax rate. Or to have GoPayment automatically calculate sales tax based on your location,click the Location-based tax rate check box. When sales tax should be applied to an item, open the item and tap its Sales Tax On button.  (The sales tax you enter applies only to items). For charges that do not feature items, you'll need to calculate the tax yourself and include it in the total amount charged.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Is a customer signature required?
    +Getting a signature is optional. However, Intuit GoPayment lets customers sign for charges on your iPhone screen using their finger. The charge has already been processed. But in the case of a later chargeback, a signature can help verify that the customer was present and approved the charge.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When does a merchant get paid? 
    +Your GoPayment transactions are totaled each day at 3:00pm PST, and that amount normally appears in your account within 2-3 business days. However, the waiting period, known as time to funding, varies depending on a number of variables:

    +
    • +
  • +
      +
    • +

      Time of day the transaction was processed;

      +
      • +
    • +

      The bank account  in which funds were deposited;

      +
      • +
    • +

      The length of time it takes your bank to verify and process electronic deposits.

      +
      • +
    +
    • +
+

To update your deposit account information, sign in with your GoPayment User ID and Password here. From the web page, choose Account > Account Profile.

+

Note: This site is not optimized for mobile browsers, so you may want to use your computer's browser.

+
    +
  • +

    How do customers leave a tip?
    +First, activate the Tips feature. At the bottom of the GoPayment screen, tap Settings > Turn on Tips. Once Tips is turned on, customers can leave a tip by going to the Signature screen. Once there, tap a percentage amount (which automatically calculates) or enter a dollar amount directly in the Tip field. Then tap Apply Tip. To make a change prior to leaving the Signature screen, tap Change Tip.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I match a GoPayment charge in QuickBooks Desktop?
    +You can apply a payment to an existing invoice in QuickBooks Desktop, create an invoice for the charge, or just credit a customer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    How do I match a charge in QuickBooks Desktop?
    +In QuickBooks Desktop, choose Customers > Credit Card Processing Activities > Get Online Payments. Then select Mobile Transactions.      

    +
    • +
  • +

    What are the requirements for my wireless network?
    +If wireless is used or implemented in the payment environment or application, the wireless environment must be configured per PCI DSS version 1.2 requirements 1.2.3, 2.1.1, and 4.1.1.  Wireless technology must be securely implemented and transmissions of cardholder data over wireless networks must be secure.
    +
    +To be PCI-compliant, wireless network administrators must:

    +
    • +
  • +
      +
    • +

      Install and configure perimeter firewalls between wireless networks and systems that store credit card data, per PCI DSS version 1.2, 1.2.3.

      +
      • +
    • +

      Modify default wireless settings, as follows, per PCI DSS 2.1.1:

      +
      • +
    • +
        +
      • +

        Change default encryption keys upon installation and when anyone who knows the keys leaves or changes positions.

        +
        • +
      • +

        Change default service set identifier (SSID).

        +
        • +
      • +

        Change default passwords or passphrases on access points.

        +
        • +
      • +

        Change default SNMP community strings.

        +
        • +
      • +

        Enable WiFi protected access (WPA and WPA2) technology for encryption and authentication.

        +
        • +
      • +

        Update firmware on wireless access points to support strong encryption and authentication (WPA/WPA2).

        +
        • +
      • +

        For wireless networks transmitting cardholder data or connected to the cardholder data environment, implement industry best practices for strong encryption of data transmission and authentication (e.g.,IEEE 802.11i).

        +
        • +
      +
      • +
    +
    • +
+

All newly implemented wireless networks are prohibited from using WEP as of March 31st, 2009. For current wireless implementations, it is prohibited to use WEP after June 30, 2010.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_Password_new.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_Password_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d051f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/GoPayment_Password_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +GoPayment Password + + + + + + + + + + + +

GoPayment Password

+

Forgot your GoPayment Password?

+


+Ask your administrator to reset your password. When you are provided a temporary password, use it to sign in and create a new password.

+

If you are the GoPayment administrator, you can reset passwords directly from your iPad:

+
    +
  1. +

    Sign in with your Administrator credentials here.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the menu, choose Account > Manage GoPayment.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Locate and tap the User ID.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Tap Reset Password and click OK.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Use your new password to sign into GoPayment on your mobile device.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Note: Passwords must contain between 6 and 25 letters, numbers or special characters, but no sequential strings like 123456. The password cannot be your User ID.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Go_Mobile.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Go_Mobile.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b18af78 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Go_Mobile.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Go Mobile + + + + + + + + + + + +

Go Mobile

+

 

+

The Point of Sale Mobile Sync feature gives you the power to make sales and track your inventory using your mobile phone or tablet . Mobile Sync allows you to share your items with your mobile devices and make sales wherever and whenever you need.  

+

 

+

Why Sync to your Phone or Tablet?

+


Point of Sale Mobile Sync gives you the freedom to ring up credit card sales anywhere inside - or outside - of your store.

+
    +
  • With a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account and our free GoPayment app, you can make payments anywhere, anytime.
    • +
  • Start accepting payments instantly. Simply activate your payments account and you are ready to go. No application required.
    • +
  • All sales and inventory information instantly syncs with your Point of Sale software so your records are always accurate and up-to-date.
    • +
  • The Sync feature automatically records new payments as QuickBooks Sales Receipts.
    • +
  • Never miss a sale whether you are on the road, at a conference, or working a convention.
    • +
  • Long lines at the store?  Provide the best in customer service by completing sales on the spot. 
    • +
  • If you are a QuickBooks Desktop user, all your information automatically syncs with your QuickBooks Desktop financial program. No more entry errors from re-keying data. Plus, you'll have everything ready for tax time.
    +
    +Note:  Intuit values your privacy and the security of your information. When using the Mobile Sync feature, your data is safely stored and securely transmitted through our servers directly to and from your mobile device. Intuit adheres to rigorous banking industry protection standards for secure data transmission.
    • +
+

To begin, get your QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account

+


Before using the Mobile Sync feature, get a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account. With a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account, you can accept all major credit and debit cards as well as add Gift Card Services to your business.

+

To start accepting credit cards in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. Launch Point of Sale.
    2. +
  2. From the File menu, select Setup Interview, and choose the Payments tab.
    3. +
  3. Click Yes to accept credit and debit cards.
    4. +
  4. Click Sign In.
    5. +
  5. Be sure to sign in using the User ID (email) and password that you had previously created.
    +If there is more than one, you will be prompted to select the right account.
    6. +
+

Learn more

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Introduction_to_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Introduction_to_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..632b3b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Introduction_to_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Introduction to Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Introduction to Simple View

+

Working with Touchscreen | Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

 

+

Point of Sale provides you with Simple View, a simplified version of the regular sales receipt form.

+

Shown here is an example of the Simple View receipt form:

+

Simple View: New Sales Receipt form

+

Using Simple View, you can perform most day-to-day sales tasks:

+ +

Refer to Receipt Elements in Simple View to understand the usage of the Simple View screen.

+

Simple View also supports a touchscreen monitor. Refer to the topic Working with Touchscreen Monitor and Virtual Keyboard for details.

+

To switch between regular view and Simple View:

+
    +
  • +

    If you are using regular view and want to switch to Simple View, click Switch to Simple View on the New Sales Receipt toolbar in regular view.

    +
    • +
+

regular view: Switch to Simple View

+
    +
  • +

    If you are using Simple View and want to switch to regular view, click Switch View in the top-left corner of New Sales Receipt form in Simple View.

    +
    • +
+

Simple View: Switch to regular view

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

Working with Touchscreen Monitor and Virtual Keyboard in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Locate_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Locate_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed0f184 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Locate_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Locate a Receipt in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Locate a Receipt in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Canceling/Holding a Receipt | Reversing a Receipt

+

 

+

Saved sales receipts are stored in your sales history. From Simple View, you can scroll through the receipts in sales history to view, print, or reverse them.

+

To locate a saved sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    If you have a receipt in progress, complete, cancel, or hold it.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Last Receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

Simple View switches to Sales History mode and the last saved sales receipt in your sales history is displayed. You can now scroll through your saved receipts:

+
    +
  • +

    Click Prev Receipt and see the previous sales receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click Next Receipt to see the next sales receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click Print Receipt. to print the currently displayed receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click Reverse Receipt to reverse the sale.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    To return from the sales history mode, click New Receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Locating a receipt in sales history in regular view

+

History documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Making_a_Sale_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Making_a_Sale_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ddddcbe --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Making_a_Sale_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,246 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Making a Sale in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Taking Payments /Giving Change | Edit/Delete Items | Discounting Sales Prices | Making a Sale in regular view

+

 

+

Making a sale in Simple View is similar to making a sale in regular view of the sales receipt form. To make a sale, you create a new sales receipt in Simple View, and record the sales transaction you perform.

+

To make a sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Sales Receipt or Make a Sale (where is it?) to open a blank receipt form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    (optional) If in Classic View, click Switch to Simple View to open the Simple View.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the <Type/Scan item info here> drop-down list, enter item information to add an item being sold. Click to expand/collapse topic

    + +

    Enter items by any of these methods:

    +
      +
    • +

      Scan the bar code from the item tag

      +
      • +
    • +

      Tap and hold the <Type/Scan item info here> drop-down list to open a virtual Keyboard. Alternatively, use the regular keyboard and mouse to enter the item information using any of the following methods:

      +
      • +
    +
      +
    • +

      Type the UPC, alternate lookup value, or item number of the item in the drop-down list and press <Enter>.

      + +
      • +
    • +

      Type first few letters of the item description in the drop-down list. The list of all matching items is displayed in the expanded drop-down list, with the closest match highlighted. Select an item in the list (keyboard users, press the down arrow key to scroll to an item, and then press  <Enter> to select).

      +
      • +
    +

    The selected item details are listed in the Item List area.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    (Optional) Select an item listed in the Item fields and click Edit Item, to edit the items details if necessary. You can edit an item to change quantity, change price, give discounts, make a return, correct receipt etc.. See Edit an Item in Simple View for more details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Repeat until all items are listed.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    (Optional) In the Discount% field, enter a global discount (in percent) and then <Enter>. The discount you enter is applied on the total receipt amount, and Regular Price-Total field displays the discounted price.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    (Optional) From the Tax drop-down list, select appropriate Sales Tax Location.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    In the Payments area, click appropriate payment button to open corresponding payment dialog. See Payment Options in Simple View for details of making payments from the Simple View.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Take payment and give change, as applicable.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Click Save and Print once to open the Print dialog.

    +

    Alternatively, click and hold Save and Print to open sub menu, and select one of the following options:

    +
      +
    • +

      Save (only saving a receipt)

      +
      • +
    • +

      Save and Print (saving and printing a receipt)

      +
      • +
    +
    9. +
  9. +

    (Optional) Click Preview to preview the receipt.

    +
    10. +
  10. +

    Click Print to record the sale and give the customer a printed receipt. Alternatively, click Cancel to cancel printing the receipt. The receipt is saved but not printed.

    +
    11. +
+

After the receipt is saved, a new blank sales receipt is displayed, ready for the next sale.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Apart from creating new sales receipts, you can use Simple View to create returns receipts, and edit/cancel a receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Since Simple View is a simplified version of regular view, some sales receipt fields and functions are not available in Simple View.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can switch between regular view and the Simple View any time, even while performing a sales transaction.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Making a Sale in regular view

+

Introduction to Simple View

+

Switching between regular view and Simple View

+

 

+

 

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Merchandise_Exchange_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Merchandise_Exchange_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf17b3d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Merchandise_Exchange_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Merchandise Exchange in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchandise Exchange in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Returning Items Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

When a customer returns an item to exchange for another, you perform two transactions in one sales receipt: return of one item, and sale of another. Point of Sale automatically calculates any difference in item prices.

+

To handle a merchandise exchange:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic sale procedure to add both the returned and exchange items in a sales receipt. For more information, see Making a Sale in Simple View.  

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the returned item in the Item Fields area, and click Return Item.  The quantity of returned item appears negative on the sales receipt.

    +

    Simple View: Receipt for merchandise exchange

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Take payment or give change, as applicable for any difference in the item prices.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the receipt.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Taking Payment/Giving Change in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Mobile_Sync_Steps_new.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Mobile_Sync_Steps_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f303b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Mobile_Sync_Steps_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + +Mobile Sync Steps + + + + + + + + + + + +

Mobile Sync Steps

+

Once you have your QuickBooks Desktop Payment Account, you're ready to go.  Follow these steps to activate the Sync feature:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click Mobile Sync.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Sign-in.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter your email and password for your Intuit Payments Account.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Sign-in.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    If you have multiple accounts, click Select on the account you want to use.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Click Close. The Payments screen will now show that you are connected and display your account details.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Click Edit settings to customize your payment preferences and select the items that apply to your business.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    On the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon near the top right of your screen.

    +
    9. +
  9. +

    Click View Sync Preferences.

    +
    10. +
  10. +

    Select Sync Data and then Save. Auto Sync is now on.

    +
    11. +
+

 

+

To sync specific inventory items to your mobile device:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Misc and Shipping section of the Inventory Item Detail screen, click the Sync to Mobile.
    +or
    +Click the Mobile box next to the Item # on the Item List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

To complete the sync:  

+
    +
  1. +

    From your mobile device, click the GoPayment app.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch the GoPayment app and sign in to your QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Settings.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Turn on Items. GoPayment will begin syncing with Point of Sale.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To sync more items or receipts:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Sync Now.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

To view syncing activity:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click View Activity Log.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

To view or change Sync Preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click View Sync Preferences.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If you make any changes, click Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

To turn off Syncing:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click View Sync Preferences.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Do not Sync Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To change sync frequency:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Navigator screen, click the cloud icon.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click View Sync Preferences.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Move the slider to increase or decrease sync frequency.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Learn more

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Paying_Money_out_of_the_Cash_Drawer_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Paying_Money_out_of_the_Cash_Drawer_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d20aae --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Paying_Money_out_of_the_Cash_Drawer_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Paying Money out of the Cash Drawer in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Paying Money out of the Cash Drawer in Simple View

+

Introduction to Simple View | Opening the Cash Drawer Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Cash sometimes needs to be removed from the cash drawer. For example, you may remove cash from the cash drawer to:

+
    +
  • +

    Buy office supplies

    +
    • +
  • +

    Donate to a local charitable organization

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pay employees tip amounts recorded on non-cash sales

    +
    • +
  • +

    Purchase pizza for an office party

    +
    • +
  • +

    Have less cash on hand, for security reasons

    +
    • +
+

To record a cash drawer payout:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Cash Payout. The Cash Payout dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
+

Simple View: Cash Payout dialog

+
    +
  1. +

    Select from or enter your name in the Cashier drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Note: If the security is enabled, the name of current cashier is auto-populated in the Cashier drop-down list. In this case, you need to log in to change the cashier name.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Amount field, enter the amount you are taking out from the cash drawer.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    If you are using QuickBooks financial software, select a QuickBooks account from the in the Account drop-down list.

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a comment in the Comment field. This required field is typically used to record how the cash was used or to whom it was paid.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

A Payout receipt is generated and placed in the sales history. The amount of the payout is recorded as a negative amount.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Paying Money out of the Cash Drawer in regular view

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Receipt_Elements_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Receipt_Elements_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03bac92 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Receipt_Elements_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,559 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Receipt Elements in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

Introduction to Simple View | Working with Touchscreen

+

 

+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each receipt element.

+

Fields shown in square brackets, for example [Date], are suggestedClick to display a popup topicor read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale. Toggle buttons,  for example Hold / Unhold, are used to perform two alternate functions.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Date] field

+		 +

Defaults to today's date.

+
+

Item Lookup <Type/Scan item info here > drop-down list

+		 +

Type/scan item name, barcode, or keyword here, or look up the item in the drop-down list using any combination of the following methods:

+
    +
  • +

    Right-click to open the virtual keyboard

    +
    • +
  • +

    Type a partial name and press <Enter> to list all matching items, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the drop-down list arrow to list all items.

    +
    • +
+
+

Customer Lookup

+

<Enter customer here> drop-down list

+

 

+		 +

Enter customer name, company name, or phone to search for matching customer or look up the customer using any combination of these methods:

+
    +
  • +

    Right-click to open the virtual keyboard

    +
    • +
  • +

    Type a partial name and press <Enter> to list all matching customers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the drop-down list arrow to select from your full customer list

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the Add Cust  button from the left-side of the screen to QuickAdd a new customer while making the sale

    +
    • +
+

Available only if Track Customers preference is turned on. Learn More

+
+

Switch View button

+		 +

Switches to the regular view of the sales receipt form

+
+

Hold / Unhold button

+		 +

Hold puts a receipt on hold at any time before saving. Only a single receipt can be kept on hold. Unhold takes the last held receipt off hold.

+
+

Open Drawer button

+		 +

Opens the cash drawer.

+
+

Cash Payout button

+		 +

Records money taken out of the cash drawer for miscellaneous expenses, such as paying vendors or donating to a charity.  Also records cash drops.

+
+

Sell Gift Crd button

+		 +

Opens the Gift Card dialog where you can enter the amount and gift card number.

+
+

Sell Gift Crt button

+		 +

Opens the Gift Certificate dialog where you can enter amount and gift certificate number.

+
+

Give Discnt button

+		 +

Opens a numeric keypad to enter the global discount percentage.

+
+

Add Cust button

+		 +

Allows you to quickly add a new customer to your customer list while making a sale.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Item List area fields

+		 +

These fields contain the detailed list of items being sold.

+
+

[Item #] field

+		 +

Item number of the selected item according to the item record in the Point of Sale Inventory.

+
+

[Item Name] field

+

 

+		 +

Item name of the selected item according to the item record in the Point of Sale Inventory. Item Name can be edited for individual sale, if necessary.

+
+

[Price] field

+		 +

Item unit price at the active price level. Price can be edited for individual sale, if necessary.

+
+

[Qty] field

+		 +

Sales Quantity. By default, displayed Qty value is 1. Qty can be edited for individual sale if necessary.

+
+

[Ext Price] field

+

 

+		 +

Extended item price, calculated by multiplying Qty by Price. If you sell items costing a fraction of a cent, you can list a quantity and enter an extended price. Point of Sale calculates and displays the unit price.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Edit Item button

+		 +

Opens Edit Item dialog to make changes in quantity, price etc. for the selected item.

+
+

Return Item button

+		 +

Marks the selected item as a return item by negating the quantity.

+
+

Delete Item button

+		 +

Deletes the currently selected item from the receipt.

+
+

[Discount %] field

+		 +

Global discount percentage.

+
+

[Tax] drop-down list

+		 +

Lists available sales tax locations. Select appropriate sales tax locations from this drop-down list. Point of Sale calculates applicable sales tax according to the selected tax location, and the calculated sales tax is added to the Regular Price-Total value.

+
+

[Shipping] button

+		 +

Use to enter any shipping cost. The shipping cost is added to the Regular Price-Total value.

+
+

Prev Receipt button

+		 +

Navigates to previous receipt in the Point of Sale Sales History. Disabled by default and enabled only when you click Last Receipt.

+
+

Next Receipt button

+		 +

Navigates to next receipt in the Point of Sale Sales History. Disabled by default and enabled only when you click Last Receipt.

+
+

Reverse Receipt button

+		 +

Reverses the current receipt by creating a reversing entry.  Point of Sale adds returned item quantities back to Inventory and total item price is refunded to the customer.

+
+

Last Receipt button

+		 +

Switches Simple View to Sales History mode, and displays the last saved receipt.

+
+

Close button

+		 +

Closes the active sales receipt form and returns you to the Point of Sale Navigator home page.

+
+

[Regular Price Total] field

+		 +

Total amount due from the customer (or to the customer in case of a return).

+
+

[Due] field

+		 +

Displays the difference between Regular Price-Total value and the amount paid by customer.

+
+

[Change] field

+		 +

Displays the amount to be given to the customer.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Payments area fields

+		 +

Payments area displays various payment fields listed below. These fields are populated with the values entered in response to the respective Payments area button click.

+
+

[Cash] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Cash Payment dialog.

+
+

[Check] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Check Payment dialog.

+
+

[Credit] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Credit Card Payment dialog.

+
+

[Debit] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Debit Card Payment dialog.

+
+

[Gift Card] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Gift Card dialog.

+
+

[Gift Cert] field

+		 +

Displays the value entered in the Gift Certificate dialog.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Element

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Payments area buttons

+		 +

Payments area displays various buttons listed below. Click these buttons to open respective payment option dialogs.

+
+

Cash button

+		 +

Click to open Cash Payment dialog.

+
+

Check button

+		 +

Click to open Check Payment dialog.

+
+

Credit button

+		 +

Click to open Credit Card Payment dialog.

+
+

Debit button

+		 +

Click to open Debit Card Payment dialog.

+
+

Gift Card button

+		 +

Click to open Gift Card dialog.

+
+

Gift Cert button

+		 +

Click to open Gift Certificate dialog.

+
+

Give Change button

+		 +

Click to select a payment option to give change.

+
+

Clear Paymts button

+		 +

Click to clear current payment entry.

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Save and Print button

+		 +

Click and hold mouse button to open dialog and choose appropriate option to let you save the sales receipt, or both save and print the receipt.

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Introduction to Simple View

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Returning_Items_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Returning_Items_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f659092 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Returning_Items_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Returning Items in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Returning Items in Simple View

+

Merchandise Exchange | Gift Card Returns | Credit Card Returns Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

You can use Simple View to record merchandise returns as well. You can create a return receipt for returned items by using the sales receipt form. Such items are added back to the Point of Sale Inventory, and the receipt displays the amount to be refunded to the customer.

+

To process a merchandise return:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic sale procedure for adding the returned item in a new sales receipt. For more information, see Making a Sale in Simple View.

    +

    Or

    +

    Locate the original sales receipt containing the returned items. For more information, see Locate a Receipt in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the returned item in the Item Fields area.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Return Item.

    +

    Or

    +

    Click Edit Item, and enter a negative value in the Quantity field of the Edit Item dialog.

    +

    For more information, see Edit/Delete Items in Simple View.

    +

     

    +

    Simple View: Return receipt

    +

     

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Give Change from the Payments area. A menu with multiple payment options for giving change (refunding item price) to the customer appears.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select appropriate payment option and follow steps for the selected option. For more information, see Taking Payments /Giving Change in Simple View.

    +

     

    +

    Simple View: Refund by giving change

    +

     

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the return receipt.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Merchandise Returns

+

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Reversing_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Reversing_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e541ec --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Reversing_a_Receipt_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Reversing a Receipt in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reversing a Receipt in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Locate a Receipt | Canceling/Holding a Receipt Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Saved sales receipts cannot be deleted and editing is restricted to certain informational fields. If information other than what can be edited needs to be corrected, you can reverse the sales receipt. Reversing a sales receipt corrects your sales history, inventory quantities, and customer records.

+

This procedure is not recommended for processing routine merchandise returns from a customer.

+

To reverse a sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the sales receipt to be reversed in the Sales History. For more information, see Locate a Receipt in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Reverse Receipt. The Reversing Document dialog opens.

    +
    3. +
+

Simple View: Reversing receipts

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your name from the Cashier field, and click OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

A reversing receipt is automatically created and added to the sales history. In the sales history, a reversed receipt can be identified by the value Reversing in its Status field. The original receipt is marked as  Reversed Sales Receipt #<receipt number>, when you locate it again in Simple View.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Sell_a_Gift_Card_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Sell_a_Gift_Card_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d0dd0a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Sell_a_Gift_Card_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Sell a Gift Card in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Selling a Gift Card in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Taking Payments / Giving Change | Gift Card Returns

+

 

+

Gift cards are sold or recharged on sales receipts. The gift card item and sales amount are printed on the customer receipt.

+

To sell or recharge a gift card:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, use any of these methods to add gift card to the item list:

    +
      +
    • +

      Click <Type/Scan item info here> drop-down list to focus on it, and swipe the gift card to recharge. The gift card to be sold appears listed in the Item Fields area.

      +
      • +
    • +

      Enter Gift Card in the <Type/Scan item info here> and then press <Enter>. A gift card is added in the Item Fields area.

      +
      • +
    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Sell Gift Crd. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter an amount and gift card number for the gift card in the Amount and Gift Card Number fields respectively.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click OK to confirm transaction, or Cancel to cancel the transaction.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Repeat Step 1 to 4 to add more gift cards to the sales receipt.

    +

    Note:

    +
    6. +
+

You can sell up to three gift cards in a sales transaction.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add other items being sold in the same transaction to the sales receipt. For more information, see Making a Sale in Simple View.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use general payment procedures to accept the amount due or give change. For more information, see Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the sales receipt.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Gift Card Service overview

+

Making a Sale in Simple View

+

Taking payments/Giving Change in Simple View

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Sell_a_Gift_Certificate_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Sell_a_Gift_Certificate_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..21f7cc6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Sell_a_Gift_Certificate_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Sell a Gift Certificate in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell a Gift Certificate in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Taking Payments / Giving Change

+

 

+

A gift certificate is basically "store money" that can be used to purchase merchandise at a future date. Certificate numbers can be recorded both on gift certificate sale and future redemption for tracking purposes.

+

To sell a gift certificate:

+
    +
  1. +

    In New Sales Receipt form of Simple View, click Sell Gift Crt. The Gift Certificate dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the amount and certificate number for the gift certificate in the Amount and Gift Certificate Number fields.

    +

    Note:

    +
    3. +
+

Only a single gift certificate can be sold in a sales receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK to confirm transaction. A gift certificate is added to the sales receipt item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Add other items being sold in the same transaction to the sales receipt. For more information, see Making a Sale in Simple View.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use general payment procedures to accept the amount due or give change. For more information, see Taking Payments/Giving Change in Simple View.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save and Print to save and print the sales receipt.

    +
    5. +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Only one gift certificate can be added to a sales receipt; either a sale or a redemption. You cannot both sell and accept a gift certificate on the same receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also sell a gift certificate after completing a sale but before saving. Click Sell Gift Crt. You will be prompted to enter the amount and certificate number. The Regular Price-Total amount will change to reflect that additional payment must be taken from customer.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Taking_Payments_Giving_Change_in_Simple_View.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Taking_Payments_Giving_Change_in_Simple_View.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..07a21e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Taking_Payments_Giving_Change_in_Simple_View.htm @@ -0,0 +1,369 @@ + + + + + + + + + + +Taking Payments / Giving Change in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + + +

Taking Payments / Giving Change in Simple View

+

Making a Sale | Discounting Sales Prices | Merchant Services

+

 

+

This topic contains general instructions for taking receipt payments in Simple View. You can also learn how to take payments made by cash, check, credit card, debit/ATM card, gift certificate, gift card.

+

 

+

After receiving payments, you can give change to the customer by cash, check, credit card, gift certificate, or gift card.

+

To take payment and give change:

+

When you finish adding items to a sales receipt, giving discounts, applying appropriate sales tax and shipping charges, you can view total amount due in the Regular Price-Total field.

+

If the total amount due is negative (refunds to the customer when returning items), and you are only giving change, start at Step 5 below.

+

You can accept the full amount by a single payment/change method, or use multiple payment/change methods.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Payments area, click appropriate payment button to accept the total payable amount. The corresponding payment option dialog opens. Click on the following payment options for the steps to be followed:

    +
    2. +
+

Cash

+

Check

+

Credit

+

Debit

+

Gift Card

+

Gift Certificate

+

After performing the steps for any of the above payment options, you return to the receipt form you are working on.  

+

Or

+

Click two or more payment buttons one by one in the Payments area, and follow the corresponding payment option steps, to break up the total payable amount into different payment methods.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    If change is due to the customer, the Change Due dialog opens, with multiple payment options to give change. Click on the following payment options to see the steps to follow:

    +

    Cash

    +

    Check

    +

    Credit

    +

    Gift Card

    +

    Gift Certificate

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Once complete payment is received from the customer, and change is given to the customer (if applicable), click Save and Print to save and print the sales receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Payment by Cash

+

To receive payment by cash:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Cash in the Payments area. The Cash Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field. In case of multiple payment methods, total payable amount is the balance amount, after part-payment made by different payment options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the amount tended by the customer, if different from the total payable amount, in the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK to confirm the cash payment. You return to the current sales receipt form.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Change by Cash

+

To give change by cash:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Cash in the Change Due dialog. You return to the current sales receipt form and the cash drawer opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Give the appropriate change in cash to the customer.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Payment by Check:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Check in the Payments area. The Check Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +
    2. +
+

Simple View: Check Payment dialog

+
    +
  1. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the check number in the Enter check # field.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK.  You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the sales transaction.

    +
    2. +
+

Change by Check:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Check in the Change Due dialog. The Check Change dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter check number in the Enter check # field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK. You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the sales transaction.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Payment by Credit Card

+

To receive payment by credit card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Credit in the Payments area. The Credit Card Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +

    Simple View: Credit Card Payment dialog

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK.  The Credit Card dialog opens.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Swipe the customers credit card.

    +

    Or

    +

    Click Manual Entry. Enter the credit card information, the fraud prevention information (optional), and then click Authorize. At next prompt, specify whether the card is present or not.

    +

    Simple View: Accept Credit Card dialog

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

    +

    If all of the following are true, Point of Sale will process the transaction and print the receipt without further action on your part. In this case, skip to Step 7.

    + +

    If any of these are not true, continue with the following steps.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +

    Authorized: The charge has been approved. Select OK to close the window.

    +

    Declined: The charge was not approved. Select Cancel to return to the sales receipt. Ask the customer to provide a different form of payment, or select Authorize to try again.

    +

    Referral: Voice authorization is required. The cursor is automatically placed in the Authorization field. Call the displayed phone number and give the operator your Merchant Number. Enter the authorization number the operator gives you and press <Enter>.

    +

    Failed address or card verification check: The address or card verification code entered does not match the issuers records. Depending on your merchant service preferences, you may be allowed to continue or the transaction may be automatically voided.

    +

    For more information, see Address and Card Verification Results Guide.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Wait for the receipt to print, if configured to print automatically. Ask the customer to sign the merchant copy of the receipt.

    +

    Or

    +

    You are returned to the current sales receipt to save and print the receipt.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    In the current sales receipt, the payment is reflected against the appropriate field in the Payments area.

    +
    9. +
+

Simple View: Payment methods

+

 

+

Note:

+

Using the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 or 3070 PIN pad?.

+

 

+

Change by Credit Card

+

To give change by credit card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Credit in the Change Due dialog. The Credit Card dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Swipe the customers credit card.

    +

    Or

    +

    Click Manual Entry. Enter the credit card information, and click Authorize.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

    +
    4. +
+

If authorization is complete, the change due is credited to customers credit card. Else, request the customer to pay by another payment method.

+

You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the remaining sales transaction.

+

 

+

Payment by Debit Card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Debit in the Payments area. The Debit Card Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +

    Simple View: Debit Card Payment dialog

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK.  The Debit/ATM Card dialog opens.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Swipe the customers debit card.

    +

    Or

    +

    Click Manual Entry. Enter the debit card information, and then click Authorize.

    +

    Simple View: Accept Debit Card dialog

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Ask the customer to enter debit card PIN. After the customer enters PIN, click OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Ask the customer to approve the displayed total transaction amount by clicking OK.

    +

    Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

    +

    If both of the following are true, Point of Sale will process the transaction and print the receipt without further action on your part. In this case, skip to Step 5.

    + +

    If either of the above is not true, continue with the following step.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
    4. +
+

Authorized: The debit has been approved. Select OK to close the card dialog.

+

Declined: The debit was not approved. Select Cancel to close the Debit window and return to the payment screen. Request the customer to pay by another payment method.

+
    +
  1. +

    Wait for the receipt to print, if configured to print automatically. Ask the customer to sign the merchant copy of the receipt.

    +

    Or

    +

    You are returned to the current sales receipt to save and print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the current sales receipt, the payment is reflected against the appropriate field in the Payments area.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+

Using the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 or 3070 PIN pad?.

+ 
  +

Payment by Gift Card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Card in the Payments area. The Gift Card Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +

    Simple View: Gift Card Payment dialog

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Swipe the customers gift card.

    +

    Or

    +

    Enter the gift card number manually, and click Authorize.

    +

    Simple View: Gift Card Payment dialog

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Point of Sale connects to the Gift Card Service and checks the balance of the card and a confirmation message displayed:

    +
    6. +
+
    +
  • +

    If the card balance is equal to or more than the amount due, the payment amount is deducted from the card balance and payment is complete.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the card balance is less than the amount due, the card balance is adjusted to zero and the authorized amount is auto-populated to the Gift Card field. Request the customer to pay the balance amount by another payment method.

    +
    • +
+

You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the remaining sales transaction.

+

 

+

Change by Gift Card

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Card in the Change Due dialog. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Swipe the customers gift card.

    +

    Or

    +
    3. +
+

         Enter the gift card number manually, and click Authorize.

+
    +
  1. +

    Point of Sale connects to the gift card service servers and credit the change amount to the customers gift card.

    +
    2. +
+

You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the remaining sales transaction.

+

 

+

Payment by Gift Certificate:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Cert. in the Payments area. The Gift Certificate Payment dialog opens, with the total payable amount displayed in the Enter amount field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +

    Simple View: Gift Certificate Payment dialog

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the gift certificate number in Enter gift certificate # field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click OK. You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the sales transaction.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Change by Gift Certificate

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Cert in the Change Due dialog. The Gift Certificate Selling dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Verify the amount displayed in the Enter amount field. If required, enter a different amount the Enter amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK. You return to the current sales receipt form to complete the sales transaction.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Returning Items in Simple View

+

Gift Card Returns

+

Credit Card Returns

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Work_with_Simple_View__How_Do_I.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Work_with_Simple_View__How_Do_I.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7388ff7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Work_with_Simple_View__How_Do_I.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + + +Work with Simple View: How Do I + + + + + + + + +

Work with Simple View: How do I?

+

 

+

Make a Sale

+

Discount Prices

+

Track Customers

+

Take Payments /Give Change

+

Return Items

+

Exchange Items

+

Use a Touchscreen or Virtual Keyboard

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Working_with_Touchscreen_Monitor_and_Virtual_Keyboard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Working_with_Touchscreen_Monitor_and_Virtual_Keyboard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..62bdc22 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/Working_with_Touchscreen_Monitor_and_Virtual_Keyboard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + + + + + +Working with Touchscreen Monitor and Virtual Keyboard in Simple View + + + + + + + + + + +

Working with Touchscreen Monitor and Virtual Keyboard in Simple View

+

Introduction to Simple View | Receipt Elements

+

 

+

Simple View supports a touchscreen interface. You can interact with the Simple View either by using a regular keyboard and mouse, or from a touchscreen monitor.

+

To use a touchscreen monitor with Simple View, you need to install necessary hardware and configure Point of Sale. Refer to Setting Up Hardware for details.

+

The touchscreen interface has a virtual keyboard that appears automatically when you select/focus on a Simple View receipt field requiring data-entry. The layout of the virtual keyboard is the same as a regular keyboard. You can enter data simply by tapping the keys displayed on the touchscreen monitor.

+

Refer to the table below to for regular keyboard and mouse actions, and the equivalent touchscreen actions.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Mouse / Keyboard Action

+		 +

Touchscreen Action

+
+

Single click field / button / drop-down list

+		 +

Tap field / button / drop-down list once

+
+

Double click field / button /drop-down list

+		 +

Tap field / button / drop-down list twice (in quick succession)

+
+

Right Click field / button /drop-down list

+		 +

Tap and hold field / button / drop-down list

+
+

Select field / drop-down list item

+		 +

Tap field / drop-down list arrow

+
+

Press keys on the keyboard

+		 +

Tap appropriate field on the touch screen to bring up a virtual keyboard on the touchscreen monitor.

+

Tap any alphabet  / number / special character (@, #, and so on) on the virtual keyboard, to enter the alphabet  / number / special character in selected field.

+
+

Entering numbers / special characters

+		 +

The virtual keyboard has only alphabetic keypad visible by default.

+

Tap {.123 on the alphabetic keypad to open the numeric keypad to enter numbers and special characters.

+

Tap ABC on the numeric keypad to return to the alphabetic keypad.

+
+

Click and hold down a mouse button

+		 +

Tap and hold

+
+

 

+

Note: You can use regular keyboard-mouse combination interchangeably with the touchscreen monitor-virtual keyboard combination, except when the virtual keyboard is available for data-entry. You must close the virtual keyboard to be able to use regular keyboard and mouse for data-entry in Simple View.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Introduction to Simple View

+

Receipt Elements in Simple View

+

Setting Up Hardware

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/_pi_pdt_scanitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/_pi_pdt_scanitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d118ab2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/_pi_pdt_scanitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + +pi_pdt_scanitems + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Scanning Inventory Items

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+

 

+

There are two scanning options when using the scanner:

+
    +
  • +

    Scan each and every unit of an item; the unit enters a quantity of one for each scan

    +
    • +
  • +

    Scan one unit of an item, and then enter the counted number of units

    +
    • +
+

In either mode, you can also manually key in an item number or UPC after selecting a scan option (if bar codes arent used or are unreadable).

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are essentially the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 Scanner
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus Scanner

+

 

+

To scan each and every unit of an item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner unit on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Collect Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scan Barcode.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Hold the scanner at a slight angle so that you see the red reflection from the infrared light on the bar code.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Press the yellow/orange button to scan the item bar code (or manually enter the item number or UPC and then press either Enter button).

    +
    7. +
+

A beep confirms a successful scan and a quantity of "1" is assigned to the scan. The unit is immediately ready for the next scan.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat until all units have been scanned, for all items being counted.

    +
    2. +
+

To scan one unit and enter item count:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner unit on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Collect Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scan & Enter Qty.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Scan the bar code on one unit of the item you are counting. A beep confirms a successful scan.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    User the keypad to enter the total number of units counted for the scanned item.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Press Enter.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Repeat for all items.

    +
    9. +
+

 

+

Next Step: Upload the scanned data to Point of Sale

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+ +

Counting Items with multiple units of measure

+ +

Viewing, editing or deleting a scan on the scanner

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/about_the_security_administrator.html b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/about_the_security_administrator.html new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc19e5c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/about_the_security_administrator.html @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + +about_the_security_administrator + + + + + + + +

About the Security System Administrator

+

 

+

popup topic has been hidden

+

Initially, one user, called the Security System Administrator (Sysadmin), is defined for you. This system user has access to all program areas and data and cannot be deleted.  

+

Only the System Administrator user can add or delete employees, turn on/off the requirement to log in to use the program, and change passwords for other employees.

+

To initially login to Point of Sale as the System Administrator, enter or select Sysadmin as the user and leave the password field blank.

+

To prevent unauthorized access to the program and security settings, it is strongly suggested that you change the password for the Sysadmin user immediately after accessing the Employees & Security area for the first time. Write your password down and store it in a secure place.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup01.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a060e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Manual Data Backups + + + + + + + + + + +

Manual Data Backups

+

End of Day Backups | Automatic Backups | Restore a Backup

+

 

+

Note: This feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

 

+

Manual backups can be initiated at any time. If backing up to removable media, put the blank, formatted media in the drive before beginning.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Back Up Data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify the backup location and options:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    To use the default folder and file name, select Back up to default location.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To back up to a another location or to removable media, select Back up to alternate location and then enter the path or browse to the folder or drive and enter a file name.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Optionally select the check box to include inventory item pictures in the backup. Doing so may result in a substantially larger backup time or file size.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    click OK.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale will verify the integrity of your data and perform the backup to the designated location.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Your data files may require multiple disks to successfully complete a backup, especially if backing up to 3.5" floppy disks. You should have several blank, formatted disks available just in case.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale only backs up your Point of Sale data. Therefore, it should serve as only one component of a comprehensive data protection strategy. You must take separate action to back up other important information for your business (QuickBooks financial software records, payroll records, other applications, etc.).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Working with your POS Company Data

+

Back up to removable media

+

Backup/restore overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab97728 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + + +Restore from a Data Backup + + + + + + + + + + +

Restore from a Data Backup

+

Backup Overview default backup location

+

 

+

If it becomes necessary to recover from data loss, your company data can be easily restored from a previously made backup.

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, data can be restored only from the Server Workstation.

+

To restore data:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Restore from backup and click Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select from one of the backup files in the default backup location (each file has a date/time stamp). The most recent backup made is at the top of the list.  Typically, this is the backup file from which you will want to restore.

    +
    4. +
+

OR

+

Select Browse  to alternate backup file and then enter the path or browse to the location of the backup file.

+
    +
  1. +

    click Next.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale will uncompress and copy the backup file to your working folder. You will be prompted to insert sequential restore disks if required.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Implement a comprehensive data protection strategy

+

Clean up your company data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..32ff8b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Back Up to Removable Media + + + + + + + + + + + +

Back Up to Removable Media

+

Restore from a Backup

+

 

+

Backing up to removable media ensures that your data is protected even if harm comes to your computer system. Even greater protection is gained by storing the removable media at a site other than where the computer is located.

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, data backups can be done only from the Server Workstation.

+

To manually back up your data to removable media:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu on the Server Workstation, select Back Up Data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Backup to an alternate location on the Backup dialog.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Place the removable media into the appropriate drive or port.

    +
    4. +
+

Your data files may require multiple disks to successfully complete a backup, especially if backing up to floppy disks. You should have several blank, formatted disks available.

+
    +
  1. +

    Browse or enter the path to the drive or port and enter a file name.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    (Pro) If you use inventory item pictures and want to include them in the backup, select the check box for doing so.  This may substantially increase the backup time and file size.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    click OK.

    +
    4. +
+

Point of Sale will perform the backup to the designated location.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    We recommend rotating your backup media so that you always have two or more generations of backups.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Backing up to removable media can also be done as part of the End of Day procedure.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale only backs up your Point of Sale data. Therefore, it should serve as only one component of a comprehensive data protection strategy. You must take separate action to back up other important information for your business (QuickBooks financial software records, payroll records, other applications, etc.).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Backup/restore data overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup04.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..51c8cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +Backups at End of Day + + + + + + + + + + + +

Back up Data at End of Day

+

End of Day Overview | Restore from a Backup

+

 

+

The End of Day procedure includes an option to back up your data.

+

 

+

Note: To include a data backup, the End of Day procedure must be run from the Server Workstation.

+

To back up data as part of End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale menu, select End of Day Procedure.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the check box to Back up your company data and specify to the default location or to an alternate location.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    If backing up to removable media, place blank formatted media in the appropriate drive.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If using an alternate location, enter the path or browse to the alternate location and enter a file name.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Select the check box if you want to include inventory item pictures in the backup. Doing so may substantially increase backup time or file size.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Specify other End of Day options, as needed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    click OK.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you have scheduled your backups, the next scheduled time is displayed On the End of Day window for reference.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale only backs up your Point of Sale data. Therefore, it should serve as only one component of a comprehensive data protection strategy. You must take separate action to back up other important information for your business (QuickBooks Desktop financial software records, payroll records, other applications, etc.).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Backup/restore overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_3rdparty.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_3rdparty.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..654072b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_3rdparty.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + +Schedule Third-party, Automated Data Backups + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Schedule Third-party, Automated Data Backups

+

 

+

Some Point of Sale users prefer to backup their Point of Sale data as part of a larger network backup. Typically, these backups are automated, using a third-party application that creates and copies the backup file to another networked computer, to a tape drive, or to an online backup service.

+

If you wish to include your Point of Sale data in a third-party backup, you will need to first shut down the Point of Sale Database Manager service. This Windows service runs on your Point of Sale Server Workstation and controls access to the Point of Sale data. Third-party applications cannot access the data if the Database Manager is running.

+

 

+

Warning  Warning: This procedure applies to the use of a third-party, automated backup application running outside of Point of Sale. It does not apply to, and may interfere with, scheduled backups within Point of Sale. Ensure that Client workstations have exited Point of Sale before shutting down the Database Manager. Any unsaved work will be lost and all workstations will be automatically disconnected from the data with this procedure.
+
+This procedure is provided as a convenience and is recommended only for advanced users with an understanding of their Windows operating system, the use of batch files, and of the third-party application being used. Intuit does not provide support for third-party applications or for Windows features. Consult a qualified computer consultant if you need additional assistance with this procedure.

+

 

+

Click a link for more information:

+

How it works Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Create the batch files Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Schedule the tasks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_automatic.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_automatic.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d5e824 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_automatic.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Automatic and Scheduled Data Backups + + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatic and Scheduled Data Backups

+

Overview | Restoring a Backup

+

 

+

By default, your company data is automatically backed up once each day when the Server Workstation exits Point of Sale. If you prefer or if you don't exit Point of Sale each day, you may want to schedule the backup to be made at a specific time each day instead, such as during the night when your computer is otherwise not being used.

+

To change to a scheduled backup:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences > Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Data Safeguard section of the General page, select the check box for Every Day at and specify a time.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Optionally, change the location for the backup file.

    +
    4. +
+

Learn about default backup locations and file names

+
    +
  1. +

    (Pro) If you use item pictures, specify whether they should be included in the backup.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    click Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Important Note: Point of Sale must be running on the Server Workstation at the scheduled time and, if logins are required, a user with adequate rights must be logged in.  We strongly recommend you lockClick to display a popup topic your computer if it will be unattended at the scheduled time.

+

 

+

Backups to the default location (automatic, scheduled, or manual) afford a degree of protection; however, If your working data and backup files are on the same hard drive, both could be lost in the event of a major hard disk problem, natural disaster, fire, or theft.

+

For these reasons, we strongly recommend making periodic manual backups to an alternate location, preferably to removable media which is stored off-site. In the event of a computer failure or disaster, you will be very happy that you followed a vigorous backup routine including each of these components.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Point of Sale maintains ten generations of your backup files made to the default location and date/time stamps each one. When an 11th backup is performed the first backup file is deleted.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Remember that daily automatic backups are made only if the Server Workstation exits the program.

    +
    • +
  • +

    As an additional precaution, Point of Sale creates backups before running certain other data-related tasks, such as the Clean Up Company Data utility and the Data Import Wizard.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale only backs up your Point of Sale data. Therefore, it should serve as only one component of a comprehensive data protection strategy. You must take separate action to back up other important information for your business (QuickBooks financial software records, payroll records, other applications, etc.).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

End of Day backups

+

Scheduling third-party backup applications

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_filenames.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_filenames.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc73bb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_filenames.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +Default Backup File Names and Location + + + + + + + + + + + +

Default Backup File Names and Location

+

Backup Overview | Restoring Your Data

+

 

+

By default, Point of Sale creates backup files named as shown below and places them in the indicated locations. If you make manual or scheduled backups, you can change both the location and file name to meets your needs.

+

 

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, data backups can be made only from the Server Workstation.

+

 

+

Backups to Default Location

+

All routine automatic, scheduled, and manual backups to the default location are named in this format and placed in this folder. If you need to restore your data from a backup, these files are listed in the restore dialog by date, allowing you to easily find the backup you need.

+

File name format:  yyyymmdd0001.qpb

+

This file name represents a date plus a sequential counter:

+

yyyy  =  year, mm = month, dd  = day, 0001 = sequential backup number for the day

+

qpb  = the file extension for Point of Sale data files.

+

Location: Server Workstation in the following folder:

+

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Shared Documents\ Intuit\ Point of Sale n.n\Data\<your company file name>\Backup

+

Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\ Intuit\ Point of Sale n.n\Data\<your company file name>\Backup

+

where n.n = Point of Sale version number

+

 

+

Backups to an Alternate Location

+

Backups to an alternate location use the custom file name and location you specify when making the backup. You will need to browse to the same location to restore from these backups.

+

 

+

Special Data Backups

+

Special backups include those made when performing certain data-related tasks, such as when installing a program update, running the Clean Up Company Data utility, or importing data.

+

These backup files are named in the same format as your other backups made in the default folder (see above), but are stored in sub-folders of the default folder, one sub-folder for each task.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Not sure where your Point of Sale data is stored?  Open Point of Sale, and then from the File menu, select Utilities > Browse to Data. A Windows Explorer window opens to the location of data folder.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Backup Overview

+

Restore Your Data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_strategy.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_strategy.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..efdc22d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backup_strategy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + +Implement a Comprehensive Data Protection Strategy + + + + + + + + + + + +

Implement a Comprehensive Data Protection Strategy

+

Data Overview | Backup and Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

The data you accumulate in your business is extremely valuable. Keeping it safe should be a top priority. Point of Sale provides several methods to help you protect your data:

+
    +
  • +

    By requiring employee logins and assigning security rights you can limit access to your data and program features. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Changes that affect your inventory value (cost and quantity) are automatically tracked on transactional documents and adjustment memos, creating an audit "trail." Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Backup copies of your company data can be made each time you run the End of Day procedure, automatically once each day when the Server Workstation exits the software, or at any scheduled time you specify. Additional protection can be gained by following a regular manual backup routine.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your data files are automatically checked for integrity and repaired if necessary as backups are made. This procedure is automatic and no user action is necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service to process credit and debit card transactions, you must take measures beyond the general recommendations listed below to protect your customer's card information. Refer to the electronic Implementation Guide for assistance in using Point of Sale within an overall system that meets the Payment Card Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard (DSS) requirements.

    +
    • +
+

General System and Network Protection

+

While the steps above are intended to protect your Point of Sale data, you should also be concerned about general system protection. Here are several more suggestions for protecting your data and the systems on your company network.

+
    +
  • +

    Require password logins Assign a unique username and password to each person in your company using Point of Sale. Each employee should have a unique user name and password for Windows and for Point of Sale. Point of Sale, like any Windows application, relies on security features within Windows. These features are most effective when each user on the system can be accounted for. With password protection set, access to your company file can only be granted with the assigned passwords. If you share your data file with an accountant or other business advisor, assign user names and passwords to them as well.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Restrict Security Rights Configure Point of Sale security rights appropriate for your business and the needs of your employees to access specific features and data. Point of Sale comes with four default security groups (sets of rights) and you can create custom groups as needed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Install and use anti-virus software and keep it up to date!

    +
    • +
  • +

    Install a network-based or PC-based firewall If you install a firewall on your Internet connection, you can reduce the likelihood that uninvited persons will use the Internet to access systems on your network. Firewall products will help you to ensure that your computers only conduct the traffic you allow. Most major brands of anti-virus software also offer firewalls. Firewalls may have to be configured to allow Point of Sale to communicate between workstations on a network.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use Windows security and Windows Update To obtain and install the latest security updates for your computer. Find out more about Windows security and Windows Update services from Microsoft at http://www.microsoft.com/security/.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Backup your data frequently Keep backups of your data file in a safe location, preferably off-site. Keep your backups in a fireproof safe, or at a business records management facility.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Install a UPS A UPS (uninterruptible power supply) helps ensure data integrity in the event of a sudden power loss by providing a few critical minutes of backup power in which you can complete and save in-progress transactions. Without a UPS, these transactions are usually lost and, as with any software, the data file can become corrupt if disk-write operations were in progress when the power was lost. We recommend a UPS on each Point of Sale workstation, but most importantly on the Server Workstation which stores your data.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Restart your computer at least a couple times a week. Restarting or "rebooting" is how your computer cleans up the bits and pieces (i.e., files) of applications and data that inevitably get stranded in its memory and temporary file locations over time. Left to accumulate, these files eventually can cause conflicts as applications compete for your computers resources. Restarting occasionally wipes the slate clean and helps resolve these conflicts. We also recommend completely shutting down your computer at least once per week or anytime you are having hardware-related issues (leave it off for at least 15 seconds before powering on again).

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backupoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backupoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..28844ea --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/backupoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Backing Up Your Company Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

Backing Up Your Company Data

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Restore from a Backup | Data Protection Strategy

+

 

+

Note: Data backups can be done only from the Server Workstation. There is no need to do backups on client workstations.

+

 

+

The data that you gather during day-to-day business operations is invaluable and must be protected. Power failure, media defects, disgruntled employees, or hardware problems can corrupt or destroy your company information. Backing up your data on a regular basis enables you to recover from such events as quickly and painlessly as possible. Failure to do so puts your entire business at risk.

+

Point of Sale provides several backup and restore features:

+
    +
  • +

    An automatic backup is made once a day when the Server Workstation exits the program or at a specific time that you schedule; the most recent ten backup files are maintained

    +
    • +
  • +

    Backups are also made or suggested by Point of Sale anytime you run certain data-related tasks, such as when installing program updates, running the Clean Up Data utility, or importing data

    +
    • +
  • +

    You have the option to include making a backup in your End of Day procedure and the ability to make manual backups at anytime to the default or an alternate location

    +
    • +
  • +

    If necessary, you can restore your company data from any available backup file; Point of Sale will automatically suggest the most recent backup to the default location for the restore

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) You can optionally include item pictures in your backup (will increase backup time and file size)

    +
    • +
+

For maximum protection, it is recommended that you do regular backups to removable media that you store off-site.

+

If you create a backup while other workstations are still using Point of Sale, only those transactions that have been updated (saved) are included in the backup file. We recommend that all workstations complete and save any pending transactions before a backup is made.

+

It is important to note that Point of Sale only backs up your Point of Sale data. Therefore, it should serve as only one component of a comprehensive data protection strategy. You must take separate action to back up other important information for your business (QuickBooks Desktop financial software records, payroll records, other applications, etc.).

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for back up/restore

+

Backup file names and location

+

Scheduling third-party backup applications

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic210.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic210.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea076ed --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic210.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + +Log In/Out + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Log In/Out

+

Employee & Security Overview | Log In/Out Preferences

+

 

+

Employees can be required to log in/out of Point of Sale to provide both security and accountability. Login names and passwords are initially defined by the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic, as are the security rights assigned to each employee.

+

To access the Log In/Out dialog:

+

You can access the Log In/Out dialog in any of these ways:

+
    +
  • +

    Upon program startup, if requiring user logins, the Log In dialog is automatically displayed

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the small arrow adjacent to the logged-in employee's name, and then click Log In/Log Out from the drop-down menuLogged-in employee

    +
    • +
+

To log in:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your user name from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter your password in the Password field. (Passwords are case-sensitive.)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    click Log In.

    +
    4. +
+

The name of the logged-in user is displayed at the top of most Point of Sale screens and is auto-filled into the Associate and Cashier fields on documents.

+

To log out:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the Log In/Out dialog as described above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    click Log Out.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    To log in/out, the Require users to sign in preference must be enabled by the System Administrator.Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, you can enable automatic security logouts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A logged-in employee does not have to log out before a second employee logs in. The second employees login will automatically log out the first employee. This feature saves time if it is necessary for an employee with higher security rights to log in to complete an action that the first employee cannot.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Manager Override login dialog may be automatically displayed if the current user does not have security rights to complete a selected action.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add employees & define security

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic219.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic219.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7fc2c39 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic219.htm @@ -0,0 +1,181 @@ + + + + + + +Use UPCs in Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Use UPCs in Point of Sale

+

Bar Codes & Scanners | Item Identifiers

+

 

+

Some merchandise comes from the vendor pre-tagged with UPC (Universal Product Code) bar codes. If you record those UPCs in inventory, you can scan the UPC bar codes to list the items on documents.

+

The UPC field on an item record can be used to record UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN, or similar identifiers up to 18 digits. Point of Sale will convert UPC formats of less than 13 digits (such as UPC-A and UPC-E) to a 13-digit form using a standard conversion algorithm.

+

Every UPC # recorded must be unique and contain only numbers. UPCs can be entered on an items record by any of the three methods described below.

+

Important Note

+

Bar codes created in Point of Sale are based on the item numbers, not the UPC. Do not scan a Point of Sale-created item number bar code into the item UPC field. Likewise, if a vendor provides alphanumeric bar codes that are not true UPC codes, do not enter those codes into the UPC field. UPC codes have a required format, and other code formats are not accepted. Consider using the Alternate Lookup field for these codes instead.

+

(Pro) You can use the Print Designer to customize your tags to print the UPC bar code if you prefer.

+

To record UPCs in inventory:

+
    +
  • +

    Method 1: Scanning

    +
    • +
+

UPC #s can be efficiently and accurately entered by scanning in the UPC bar code on the manufacturer's label. Position the cursor in the UPC field on the item record and scan the tag.

+
    +
  • +

    Method 2: Manual Entry

    +
    • +
+

Refer to the selections below in making manual UPC entries.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type of code

+		 +

# of digits

+		 +

If you enter...

+		 +

Point of Sale will...

+
+

UPC-E

+		 +

6

+		 +

all 6 digits

+		 +

expand those 6 to a 13-digit form

+
+

UPC-A

+		 +

12

+		 +

the first 11 digits

+  +

Example: 12345612345

+  +

all 12 digits

+		 +

add the 12th digit (checksum) & leading zero

+

Example: 0123456123458

+

 

+  +

add the leading zero

+
+

EAN

+		 +

13

+		 +

all 13 digits

+		 +

add nothing

+
+

Other

+		 +

<13

+		 +

all digits

+		 +

expand the entry to a 13-digit form, if necessary

+
+

Other

+		 +

>13

+		 +

all digits

+		 +

no change (note: this ability is to support future UPC technologies)

+
+

When an item with a defined UPC is listed on a receipt, voucher, memo, or slip, the UPC is recorded on the document. Thus, merchandise can be filtered by UPC when running history reports even if the item has been deleted from inventory.

+
    +
  • +

    Method 3: Transfer from Documents

    +
    • +
+

If you enter a UPC code on a purchase order or receiving voucher, and that UPC code is not already entered in the item record in inventory, Point of Sale will populate the UPC field in inventory with your entry.

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Item identifiers

+

Alternate lookups

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic221.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic221.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..99be214 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic221.htm @@ -0,0 +1,300 @@ + + + + + + +Price Markdowns and Discounts: Priority and Conflicts + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Markdowns and Discounts: Priority and Conflicts

+

Customer Discounts | Giving Discounts on Sales | Price Manager

+

 

+

There are several ways for you to offer different prices and discounts on sales. Click a link for a brief description of each option.

+

Pricing Options (these are not discounts)

+

Regular Price Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Markdown Price Levels Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Discount Options

+

Manual Item Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Global Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer Rewards Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Automatic Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Discount Priority and Conflicts

+

Use care if you use more than one of the discount options or you could run into situations where the combination of customer and items on the sale qualify for more than one discount, resulting in a discount "conflict."

+

In some cases, such as customer-associated discounts and customer rewards, you are prompted to apply the discount (or not) and have some control over conflicts by the choice you make. When a conflict does occur, Point of Sale follows these rules to apply the discounts.

+

Basic Rules

+
    +
  • +

    Only one discount can be applied to any single item on a sale (there is no "stacking" of item discounts) :

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a manual item discount is given after another discount has already been given to the same item (customer discount, % off customer reward, automatic, coupon, or another manual discount), the new manual discount overrides the original discount.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a customer discount, % off customer reward, or coupon is applied after a manual or automatic discount, Point of Sale will compare the two and give the better discount (lower price) to the customer. Example

    +
    • +
  • +

    The active price level generally has no effect on item discounts; discounts are taken off of whatever the active price level is. Exceptions:

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you change price levels after applying a manual item discount, you are asked if you want to apply the price level change to the previously discounted items. If you answer yes, the price level is applied and the manual discount removed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you change price levels after a customer discount is applied, the discount is recalculated relative to the new price level.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you change price levels after an automatic discount is applied, the discount is still applied to the new price level ONLY if you specified the price level as eligible for the discount when setting it up in Price Manager.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Conflicts between two automatic discounts are resolved as described further below.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Global discounts and $ off customer rewards, neither of which are item discounts, can be given in addition to any item discounts you have given.  Example

    +
    • +
+

Automatic Discount Rules (Pro)

+
    +
  • +

    If an item is included in more than one active automatic discount, only one of the discounts will be applied:

    +
    • +
  • +

    Scheduled discounts take priority over nonscheduled discounts.  Example

    +
    • +
  • +

    Among two active scheduled discounts, the latest start date takes priority.  Example

    +
    • +
+

Customer Reward Discount Rules (Pro)

+
    +
  • +

    You are prompted to apply an available reward when you select Take Payment on a receipt. If you choose to apply the reward:

    +
    • +
  • +

    If it is a percentage off reward, and other item discounts are already given, the "best discount" (item by item) is applied. If the reward discount does not "win" for any sale items, the reward is preserved for a future sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If it is a dollar off reward (amount), it is added as a separate line item and functions in the same manner as a global discount, that is, is in addition to any item discounts given.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Discount Name is auto-filled with Reward.

    +
    • +
+

Learn more about customer rewards

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic222.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic222.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba05818 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic222.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Tax FAQs

+ +

 

+

If you charge sales tax, you can setup a sales tax structure in Point of Sale so that sales taxes are automatically collected on sales of taxable merchandise or services.

+

How taxes are applied to sales depend on the tax codes and tax locations you have set up.

+
    +
  • +

    Tax codes specify the specific taxing instructions (taxable or not, tax rate, if price-dependent, and other tax options) and are assigned to your items in inventory. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Tax locations allow you to customize the taxing instructions for each of your tax codes based on where the item is sold or to whom it is sold. Learn More.

    +
    • +
+

A simple tax structure might have just two tax codes, one for taxable merchandise and one for non-taxable merchandise, in a single tax location with a single tax rate. If you entered a tax rate during the Setup Interview, such a structure was set up for you, using two default tax codes and one default tax location.

+

If your tax requirements aren't that simple, you can set up additional tax codes, tax locations, and other options in company preferences. Point of Sale provides support for the collection of different tax rates based on merchandise categories, item price thresholds, where an item is sold, to whom it is sold, and collection and reporting for multiple taxing agencies.

+

When you make a sale, sales tax is automatically calculated and added to all taxable items according to your tax setup. Customers can be flagged as tax exempt or assigned to a specific tax location, so that the correct sales tax is automatically calculated on sales to that customer. You can also change tax codes or locations on individual sales if needed for special circumstances.

+

Point of Sale provides sales tax reports to help you make your tax payments to the taxing agency or agencies. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, Point of Sale sends sales tax information to QuickBooks Desktop along with other sales information each day. Sales tax reports can be ran in Point of Sale or in your financial software, broken out by tax codes, tax agency, store, or tax location for any time period.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic223.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic223.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8498c2a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic223.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Security and Program Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Security and Program Preferences

+

Employees/Security | Company Preferences | Workstation Preferences

+

 

+

Security settings and program preferences can control the availability of many program features. If a feature is not available to you, your security group assignment or the program preference settings may not be set to allow you access to that feature.

+

Ask your system administratorClick to display a popup topic to review these settings.

+

 

+

Employees & Security

+

Employees can be added and passwords and security rights assigned by selecting Security from the Employees menu. You must log in as the System Administrator to add employees.

+

Employees must be defined if you want to list their names on documents, create sales performance reports, limit access to specific features or for Pro users, track hours worked or commission sales.

+

By requiring employee logins, you can control access to features by assigning employees to one of four predefined security groups, each with a specified set of security rights. You can also define your own custom security groups with the access rights you prefer.

+

 

+

Program Preferences

+

The Company and Workstation preferences allow you to configure Point of Sale to work with your hardware and accessories, establish data control, and customize many features.

+

There are two preferences modules that are accessible from accessible from File > Preferences:

+

Company Preferences - affects all Point of Sale functions and workstations.

+

Workstation Preferences - applies to an individual workstation.

+

This arrangement allows you to maintain central control over critical program features through Company settings, while also allowing individual workstation setups to be optimized for a particular purpose or hardware.

+

 

+

Data Protection

+

The electronic data that you gather during day-to-day business operations is invaluable and must be protected from harm. Power failure, media defects, disgruntled employees, or hardware problems can destroy days or weeks of accumulated information. Backing up your data on a regular basis enables you to recover from such events as quickly and painlessly as possible. Failure to do so puts your entire business at risk.

+

Note: If you have Free Online Backup through your Point of Sale or QuickBooks Desktop support plans, it is a separate software that needs to be installed and configured for you to be protected.  

+

Please read the data backup/restore overview and implementing a comprehensive data protection strategy for more information and suggestions.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic242.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic242.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f74ce91 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic242.htm @@ -0,0 +1,159 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Quick-Entry Date Formats + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Quick-Date Entry Formats

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

Dates are displayed in the format you specified in your operating system. You can enter dates in that same format or use one of the following quick entry formats (without typing hyphens () or slash marks (/) to separate days, months, and years). When you press <Enter> or exit the field, the date will be converted to the format set up in your operating system, with the appropriate hyphens or slashes added.

+

The available quick entry formats are:

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Quick Entry Formats

+		 +

Display Formats and Notes

+
+

mmddyyyy

+

mmddyy

+

ddmmmyy

+

ddmmmyyyy

+		 +

Example: September 8, 2003 can be entered:

+

09082003         090803

+

08Sep03           08Sep2003.

+

Letters for month are not case-sensitive.

+

No matter how you enter the date, it will be displayed according to your operating systems date format.

+
+

Use the keyboard shortcuts below to quickly enter dates. Some commands are relative to the currently displayed date. If there is not a date displayed, the entry is relative to the current date.

+

When keyboard combinations have a + between them press the keys at the same time. When separated by a comma, press the first key, release, and then press the next key.

+
+

<T>, <Enter>

+		 +

Enter today's date.

+
+

<+>, <Number>, <Enter>

+		 +

Move date forward the specified number of days.

+
+

<>, <Number>, <Enter>

+		 +

Move date back the specified number of days.

+

Note: This option is not available if your operating system date is set to use hyphens () as the date separator.

+
+

<Alt+r;>

+		 +

Change date one day forward.

+
+

<Alt+>

+		 +

Change date to one day earlier.

+
+

<Alt+PageUp>

+		 +

Move date forward one month.

+
+

<Alt+PageDown>

+		 +

Move date back one month.

+
+

<Alt+Home>

+		 +

Move date forward one year.

+
+

<Alt+End>

+		 +

Move date back one year.

+
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic243.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic243.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fba666b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic243.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + +Printing in Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing in Point of Sale

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Printing Tags | Printing Preferences | FAQs

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale can print documents, lists, price tags, labels, reports, letters, and graphs.

+

Before you can print from Point of Sale, you must set up Windows to use your printer or printers. Once set up in Windows, your printer(s) are available to assign to the various types of documents you can print from within Point of Sale.

+

The printed output is determined by the printer and print template you specify in your printing preferences. Each workstation sets up its own print options.

+

A default selection of templates for each area is provided with Point of Sale. Pro users can customize these templates or create new ones to fit your printing needs.

+

Printing options are accessed in various ways:

+

Item, customer, and sales history lists:  Select from the I Want To Menu...:

+

+

All other lists:  Select from the Print  menu (located on the window toolbar as shown) or from the File menu at the top of the screen...

+

+

When making new documents: Select the Print or Save & Print option at the bottom of the document...

+

 

+

+

 

+

At the time of printing, the Print dialog allows you in many cases to change the printer. template, number of copies, or preview the output on screen before sending it to the printer. (Options available vary with document.)

+

 

+

Other Printing Topics

+

Changing print templates at time of printing

+

Compatible printer list

+

Ordering printing supplies

+

Troubleshooting

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic244.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic244.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6886142 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic244.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Mouse and Touchscreen Navigation + + + + + + + + + + + +

Mouse and Touchscreen Navigation

+

Keyboard Shortcuts

+

 

+

When the documentation says to select, highlight, or place the focus on a button, field, or toolbar, mouse or touchscreen users can simply click or touch that button or field.

+

Note: Not all Point of Sale windows support touchscreen use. For example, managerial tasks, such as running reports and creating purchase orders, are not efficient touchscreen tasks and therefore touchscreen use is not supported in those areas.

+

 

+

Enabling Touchscreen Controls

+

Enable touchscreen use and add the touchscreen controls to Point of Sale by selecting Enable Touchscreen Features in workstation preferences. (From the File menu, choose Preferences, and then select Workstation.)

+

 

+

Note: Touchscreen Controls in DialogsClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Touchscreen Tips

+
    +
  • +

    Reducing your video resolution to 800 x 600 can make touching small fields easier, but there may be tradeoffs with the display of other features at this resolution.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Double-touching in quick succession has the same effect as double-clicking with a mouse.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Touch, hold, and drag to reposition column headers and separators.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your touchscreen controls may be customized through software provided by the manufacturer. Generally, you can access this software from the Windows Control Panel.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The size of your scroll bars can be changed to make touch scrolling easier. Go to Control Panel Display Appearance. Select Advanced and then Scroll bar from the Item list and set the size that works best for you. Note: This changes the scroll bar size for all of your Windows programs. (Directions are for Windows XP; may vary in other Windows versions.)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Touch screen monitors are ideal for certain activities, such as ringing up sales, where you are making selections from predefined data lists. However, when data must be entered into records, such as when initially setting up the system, running reports, or entering your preference settings, you will find that a hybrid system including a keyboard (for entering data) is more efficient.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Consider turning on your Microsoft Windows touchscreen keyboard to facilitate typing within Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic247.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic247.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1ec9ad3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic247.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Previewing Documents, Reports, and Tags + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Previewing Documents, Reports, and Tags

+

Printing Overview | Print Option Preferences | Printing FAQs

+

 

+

The Previewer is used throughout Point of Sale to view documents, reports, tags, labels, and records (collectively called documents here) on the screen before sending them to the printer.

+

Tip: Zoom preview display to see small printClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Preview Options

+

To access these options, right-click in the preview window. Not all options are available on all documents.

+
    +
  • +

    Find and Find Next:  Select Find (<F3> ) to locate a specific alphanumeric string of characters contained in the document. Enter the string you wish to locate, and then click Find Next to move the focus forward to the next occurrence.  Check box options can be used to refine the search to match your entry exactly and/or to match the case as entered.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Zoom: Select a zoom percentage or page magnification from the list displayed. Zooming in can be particularly helpful in viewing small print, such as on price tags.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Show Rulers, Show Toolbar, Status Bar:  Select or clear to toggle on/off the display of the Rulers, Toolbar, and Status Bar. A check mark indicates the feature is active. Choosing to not display any of these items frees more screen space for viewing your document.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Printing lists or documents

+

Printing tags

+

Reports overview

+

Customizing printed documents and tags

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic248.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic248.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca83654 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic248.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +History Documents + + + + + + + + + + + +

History Documents

+

Find a Document | Copy a Document | Edit a Document

+

 

+

Updated transactional documents, including receipts, vouchers, adjustment memos, and transfer slips are called history documents and are stored in your document history lists. History documents provide a permanent record of all transactions that have affected your inventory and provide an accurate audit trail of changes.

+

To view your document history lists:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the specified menu, select:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Sales History from the Point of Sale menu to view saved receipts

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receiving History from the Purchasing menu to view saved vouchers (Basic)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Adjustment History from the Inventory menu to view saved memos (Basic)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Transfer History from the Inventory menu to view saved transfer slips (Pro)

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Use standard sort, search, and filter procedures to locate the desired document.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Your transactional history is used for reporting, to build customer, vendor, and item histories, and can be accessed to view, reprint, or copy a saved document.

    +
    • +
  • +

    History documents can never be deleted and, with the exception of some informational fields, generally cannot be edited. But they can be reversed if necessary to make a correction. Reversing a history document does not remove the original document; rather it creates a new document with the opposite effect.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, all history documents are sent to update your financial records. You can view the linked QuickBooks Desktop documents and transactions related to any Point of Sale history document by selecting the document and then selecting View Financial Details from the I Want To menu. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) All history documents created at remote stores are sent to Headquarters to update inventory and QuickBooks Desktop and are included in Headquarters history lists and reports. Documents made at Headquarters are not sent to remote stores; therefore remote store histories only reflect the documents made at that store.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

How documents affect inventory

+

Remove old documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic254.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic254.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cf444ef --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic254.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + +Use Bar Codes and Scanners + + + + + + + + + + + +

Use Bar Codes and Scanners

+

Compatible Bar Code Scanners | FAQs | Physical Inventory Scanner

+

 

+

Point of Sale can print bar codes and supports the use of bar code scanners to list items on documents make entries on item records. No special procedures are required to use a bar code scanner with Point of Sale. Follow the instructions supplied with your scanner to connect it to your PC.

+

The program can read bar codes containing any of these item identifiers:

+ +

Assuming you have the scanned information recorded in inventory for the item, you can quickly list the item on documents by scanning the bar code.

+

 

+

Printing Bar Codes on Tags in Point of Sale

+

Every item has an item number associated with it in inventory. When you print tags from within the program using the default tag templates, it is the item number that is used to create the bar code. This allows you to print and scan barcoded tags for all your inventory items, whether or not they have UPC or Alternate Lookups defined.

+

Using the item number for bar codes has several advantages:

+
    +
  • +

    You can print bar-coded tags for any item in inventory and then list them on documents using a bar code scanner, even if you do not have a vendor-provided UPC code.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Item number bar codes are generally smaller than bar codes created from UPC or alternate lookup values, meaning they fit better on smaller tag sizes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a tag bar code is unscannable, it is quicker to manually enter an item number (also printed on the tags) than the longer UPC or alternate lookup.

    +
    • +
+

(Pro) If you prefer, you can use Print Designer to change bar codes printed from within Point of Sale to reflect UPC or alternate lookup values instead.

+

 

+

Print Tags:Overview

+

 

+

Using a Scanner to Enter Information in Inventory

+

Your scanner can also be used to quickly enter the bar code data into item records in inventory. For example, if your vendor supplies you merchandise pre-tagged with the UPC number, you can quickly and accurately enter the information into the UPC field on the item record by scanning the tag. You can scan vendor-provided bar codes containing catalog numbers into the Alternate Lookup field in the same manner.

+

Edit item records

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Using a Scanner to List Items on Documents

+

When scanning to list items on documents, Point of Sale assumes a quantity of one for each scan. To record a different quantity, press <F5> or navigate to the Qty field in the document item list to manually enter the correct quantity after each scan.

+

Although scanning is extremely accurate, scanning errors can occasionally occur, especially when tags have been damaged or defaced. The scanner typically rejects read errors caused by defaced tags, and this scanned information never reaches Point of Sale. An error is reported if the scanned number is not currently defined in inventory or if the Alternate Lookup is not unique.

+

List Items on Documents: Overview

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Using a Scanner for a Physical Inventory Count (Basic)

+

A physical inventory scanner is an optional, portable scanner that can record thousands of item scans and counts while moving around your store. You then connect the scanner to your computer and upload the counts to Point of Sale.  

+

Use a Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic257.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic257.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2f7755d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic257.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Windows, Menus and Toolbars + + + + + + + + + + + +

Windows, Menus and Toolbars

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Keyboard Navigation | Mouse & Touchscreen Navigation

+ +

This topic has been hidden

+ +

Point of Sale offers several options for moving between program windows and selecting task actions. The illustration below will help familiarize you with the Point of Sale screens and navigation.

+

Program windows are laid out so that the completion of a task "flows" from the top/left towards the bottom/right of the screen.

+

The program includes the following menus and toolbars, which are common throughout the program (numbers correspond to numbers on example screen below):

+
    +
  1. +

    Text Menus Across the top of the screen, the text menus contain options for all program areas/features, grouped by functional area.

    +
    2. + +
  2. +

    Main Toolbar Selecting a task icon takes you directly to that area or activity. The display and icons included on the main tool bar can be customized to reflect the frequent activities performed at each workstation.

    +
    3. + +
  3. +

    Window Menu - Lists all currently open Point of Sale windows. You can switch between active windows by selecting one from this list or pressing <Alt + Page Up/Page Down>. This list may also be available from the Windows icon on the main toolbar, as shown to the far right of the toolbar in the illustration.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Window Toolbar Contains task icons for common commands related to the currently active window and the I Want To menu (see below).

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    I Want To Menu Contains a drop-down list of tasks related to your current activity. Select a task a perform it.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Bottom Toolbar The icons appearing at the bottom of the screen perform "completing actions" for your current activity, such as saving, holding, printing, or taking payment for a document or record.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Status Bar Information about the currently logged in user, workstation, and current activity.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

image\menuiconbars.gif

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

The Home Page

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic258.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic258.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9305ffa --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic258.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +View Records or Documents + + + + + + + + + + +

View Records or Documents

+

Find a Record or Document | Point of Sale Basics

+

 

+

There are two ways to view Point of Sale records and documents. Click a link for more information about working in each view.

+
    +
  • +

    Lists display many records or documents at one time in a format similar to a spreadsheet. The list can be easily sorted, searched, or filtered to help you find a particular record or to group similar records.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Forms provide a more detailed view of an individual record or document on a single screen. Form View is typically used when creating or editing records or documents.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+

Program capacities

+ +

View list summary statistics

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic259.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic259.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4a77671 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic259.htm @@ -0,0 +1,471 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts

+

Mouse & Touchscreen Navigation

+

 

+

The keyboard shortcuts shown below are common to all program areas.

+

 

+

Common Keyboard Shortcuts:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

Basic Navigation

+		 +

 

+
+

<Ctrl+Q>

+		 +

Log in/out

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Alt>

+		 +

Underscores shortcuts for menus

+
+

<Ctrl+Tab>

+		 +

Cycle through open windows

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Accept entry and/or move from one field to the next in a form

+
+

<Shift+Tab>

+		 +

Reverse tab navigation

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept entry and/or move to next field in a list and on receipt payment window

+
+

<Arrow keys>

+		 +

Navigate in and between fields and columns

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancels current operation; backs out one screen; exits program from Navigator screen

+
+

<Home>

+		 +

Move cursor to first column in list

+
+

<End>

+		 +

Move cursor to last column in list

+
+

<Spacebar>

+		 +

Select/clear a check box

+

Cycle through choices on drop-down lists

+
+

Function Keys

+		 +

 

+
+

<F1>

+		 +

Get Help on current task

+
+

<F3>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field (only on windows with Find fields)

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup fields, access associated list to select

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

On document: Edit selected item.

+

(Pro) Edit selected style item.

+
+

<F6>

+		 +

On document: Edit quantity

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Toggle between list view and form view of the selected record

+
+

<F9>

+		 +

Return to Home screen from Make a Sale window

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Toggle focus between the menu and window

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save (without printing transactional documents)

+
+

<F12>

+

 

+

 

+

Return to top

+		 +

1. Save (record, order document) or save & print (transactional document )

+

2. Go to payment screen (from receipt body)

+

 

+
+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Control (Ctrl) Keys

+
+

<Ctrl+E>

+		 +

Move cursor to customer lookup field

+
+

<Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field (only on windows with Find fields)

+
+

<Ctrl+I>

+		 +

Move cursor to item lookup field

+
+

<Ctrl+N>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages, n = 1, 2, 3, etc.

+
+

<Ctrl+Q>

+		 +

Log in/out

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Go to Item List (from documents)

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

Access Held documents (from history list)

+
+

<Ctrl+F8>

+		 +

Open installed cash drawer

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags (where applicable)

+
+

<Ctrl+Tab>

+		 +

Cycle through open windows

+
+

<Ctrl+Home>

+		 +

Go to first record in list

+
+

<Ctrl+End>

+		 +

Go to the last record in list

+
+

<Ctrl+PageUp>

+		 +

Display previous record or form

+
+

<Ctrl+PageDown>

+		 +

Go to first or last record on window

+
+

Shift Keys

+
+

<Shift+F1>

+		 +

Open Cash window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F2>

+		 +

Open Credit window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F3>

+		 +

Open Debit window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F5>

+		 +

Open Gift Card window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F6>

+		 +

Open Redeem a Gift Certificate window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F7>

+		 +

Open Charge Account window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F8>

+		 +

Open Take Deposit window for customer payment

+
+

<Shift+F11>

+		 +

Open Check window for customer payment

+
+

Alternate (Alt) Keys

+
+

<Alt>

+		 +

Access text menus

+
+

<Alt+underlined letter>

+		 +

Access visible options that contain an underlined letter by pressing <Alt + the underlined letter>. For example, to access Copy, use <Alt+C>.

+
+

<Alt+F4>

+		 +

Exit Point of Sale

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic261.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic261.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c06b0a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic261.htm @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Sort & Scroll a Record List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sort & Scroll a Record List

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Find a Record

+ +

 

+

Record lists can be sorted in either ascending or descending order by the information in the column or columns you choose.

+

There are two list types in Point of Sale, with slightly different capabilities. Choose the list type you are working with for more information:

+

Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

All other lists Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Filter lists

+ +

View list summary statistics

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic262.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic262.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5996aa0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic262.htm @@ -0,0 +1,178 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter a List + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter a  List

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

 

+

Filters allow you to group and work with records or documents that have information in common.

+

There are two list types in Point of Sale, with different filtering capabilities. Choose the list type you are working with for more information:

+

Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

All other lists Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    When filtering for a time period, we recommend you select the shortest time frame practical for your current task. For example, filtering your sales history list for receipts made This Week or This Month results in a much faster display that filtering for All Receipts.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Locate a record or document

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic284.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic284.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..045231c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic284.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Integration with QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Integration with QuickBooks Desktop

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

Sales tax amounts collected in Point of Sale are sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software according to the sale tax mappings specified for each Point of Sale tax code used. Tax codes and the QuickBooks Desktop tax mappings used by Point of Sale are defined on the sales tax page of company preferences.

+

When configuring your Point of Sale sales taxes, you can leave the QuickBooks Desktop tax mappings blank and Point of Sale will automatically create matching tax items and codes in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

 

+

View exampleClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

If you set up a Point of Sale multi-rate tax code, one tax item is created in QuickBooks Desktop for each component rate included in the code.

+

 

+

Custom Mapping of Sales Tax to QuickBooks Desktop

+

If you prefer, and you have already set up sales tax items/codes in QuickBooks Desktop, you can manually map your Point of Sale tax codes to those when setting up your tax codes in Point of Sale.

+

If you are required to collect and pay sales taxes to multiple agencies (city, county, and state, for example) you should set up a sales tax group in QuickBooks Desktop and then map your Point of Sale tax code(s) to the group. Learn more.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Setting up sales tax in QuickBooks Desktop

+

Setting up sales tax codes in Point of Sale

+

Using sales tax codes

+

Using sales tax locations

+

Assigning tax codes to items

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic291.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic291.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..510abba --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic291.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Printing Tags in Code + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Tags in Code

+

Overview | Tag Printing: Basic Instructions | FAQs

+

 

+

You can print an items cost and its last received date on price tags in a code that is defined in company preferences. Only informed employees will know how to read the code.

+

To define and use a price tag code:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Price Levels from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Price Tag code area, specify one letter or number to represent each number 0-9.

    +
    4. +
+

image\tag_codepref.gif

+
    +
  1. +

    In your workstation document & printer preferences, select a tag template with a suffix of "+ cost". These templates contain the Cost Code and Last Rcvd Code fields.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Example: You have an item with a cost of $9.00, last received on 11/26/07. You define your tag code as shown above. The printed tag, using a "+cost" template, would look like this:

+

 

+

image\tag_codesample.gif

+

 

+

Cost: i00 = 9.00 (decimal omitted)

+

Last Received Date: aabf0g = 112607 (mmddyy format)

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize your printed tags

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic292.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic292.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c4277c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic292.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Specifying Document Printers & Templates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Specifying Document Printers & Templates

+

Printing Overview | Printing Preferences | Importing Templates | Print Designer

+

 

+

Printers and templates for documents, tags, and labels are specified on the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences. When specifying templates, make sure you take into consideration your printers capabilities and the size of the printer paper, i.e., do not select a "Letter" sized sales receipt template if using a 40-column receipt printer. You can also change the printer and/or template used each time you print if you set your printing preferences to display the print dialog.

+

To specify printers and templates in preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences > Workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the drop-down lists for each document, tag, and label type:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select the printer to be used

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select a template to use

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify the number of copies of the document to print

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    If you want the ability to change printers or templates when printing, select the Print Options preference page and select the check box for each document type in the Print Dialog section.

    +
    2. +
+

Note: When printing tags, labels, and customer orders, the print dialog is always displayed, so  no checkboxes are displayed in the list for these document types.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you have not specified print templates, the first time you go to print in each program area you will be prompted to select a template. The template selected will be saved to your preferences and used from that point on unless changed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If the default templates do not meet your needs, you can customize them using the Print Designer. Select Print Designer from the Tools menu. If you modify a template and save it with a new name, answer Yes when prompted to make the new template the default for that document type.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic300.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic300.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..096cd43 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic300.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a New Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Record

+

Point of Sale Basics | Program Capacities | Glossary

+

 

+

This general procedure is for adding a non-document record (item, department, vendor, or customer). For specific steps on creating any record or document in Point of Sale, select a link from lists below.

+

New records are typically added using a record form, even if you are in a record list when you select New. This procedure assumes you are using a form to add a record. For instructions to add a record directly in a list, click here.

+

To add a new record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New from a list or form, or Add New from a drop-down in a lookup field.

    +
    2. +
+

A blank form is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Navigate through the form fields, making entries as appropriate. Be sure to complete all required fields for the record type (marked with an *).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

Or click Cancel anytime before saving to discard the new record.

+

 

+

For more information on adding specific record types:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Add an item

+		 +

Add a department

+
+

Add a customer

+		 +

Add an employee

+
+

Add a vendor

+		 +

Add a time record

+
+

 

+

For more information on creating new documents:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

New sales receipt

+		 +

New voucher

+
+

New purchase order

+		 +

New adjustment memo

+
+

New customer order

+		 +

New transfer slip

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+

List items on documents

+

Program capacities

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic301.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic301.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a7e2e29 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic301.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + +Edit a Non-Document Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Non-Document Record

+

Point of Sale Basics | Find a Record

+

 

+

This general procedure applies to editing items, departments, vendors, customers, and employees.

+

Click here for information about editing documents.

+

 

+

Use the general edit procedure below, or select a record type for specific instructions:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Edit a department

+		 +

Edit a customer record

+
+

Edit an item

+		 +

Edit a vendor record

+
+

Edit an employee record

+		 +

Edit a time entry

+
+

To edit a non-document record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use standard sort, search, and filter procedures to locate the desired record in the applicable list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight the record and select Edit from the window toolbar or I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Navigate through the fields of the record, making changes as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Or, select Cancel at any time before saving to discard your edits.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Only fields white in color can be edited. Gray fields cannot be selected or changed. If you believe you should be able to edit a field but cannot, check the logged-in user's security rights or read Why is a Point of Sale feature not available to me?

    +
    • +
  • +

    In some non-document lists, you can edit records directly in the list using list edit mode.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use caution when editing information that is a component of other records or documents. For example, if you edit a department or vendor name you must also edit any items in inventory that contain that department or vendor name as part of the item record.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+

List items on documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic302.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic302.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..32dfd54 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic302.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Data in a Field + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Data in a Field

+

How Do I?Click to display a popup topic | Forms | Lists

+

 

+

Use standard navigation techniques (such as arrow keys, <Tab>, click, or touch) to access the field in which you want to enter data. To accept an entry or bypass the field, press <Tab> if in a form or <Enter> in a list or navigate to the next field in any other manner. Most data entries require that you navigate out of the field to record the entry.

+

Quick topics for various field types.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Blank fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Quantity fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Read-only fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Note fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Check box fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Drop-down listsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Currency fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Suggested entriesClick to display a popup topic

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Document/record data field descriptions

+

Enter dates and times

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic303.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic303.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fda3bfa --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic303.htm @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ + + + + + + + + +List Items on Documents: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

List Items on Documents: Overview

+

Use Bar Codes | About Item Identifiers | Find an Item

+

 

+

The item list included on documents lists the items to be processed (received, sold, ordered, etc.). This list contains item details such as the description, price or cost, item discounts, etc.

+

The default columns included in the item list will vary depending on the document you are completing. Most list navigation procedures apply, including the ability to customize the columns included in the list.

+

Which type of document do you need help with?

+

Sales Receipts or Receiving Vouchers Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

All Other Documents (Purchase Order, Customer Order, Adjustment Memo, Transfer Slip) Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

For general information about listing document items, select a topic:

+ ++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Scan or enter a UPC, Item #, or Alternate Lookup

+
+

Quick Pick Items (receipt and voucher only)

+
+

Using service or non-inventory items

+
+

Enter decimal item quantities

+
+

Add a new item to inventory while making a document

+
+

Handle special orders

+

List a group item

+

List an assembly item

+

List different units of measure

+

View item quantities at other stores

+
+

Editing Listed items:

+
+

Edit items

+
+

Remove items from a document

+
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic305.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic305.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4dfddd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic305.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +Add a New Record Using Copy + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Record Using Copy

+

Point of Sale Basics | Find a Record or Document

+

 

+

Note: This is a general procedure. For a list of topics related to using the copy function for specific document or record types, search the help index using keyword "Copying" and choose a specific topic.

+

To add a new record by copying an existing record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the record you want to copy from the record list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

 Click Copy <record> on the window toolbar (where available).

+

A new document/record form is opened, with information from the original record copied to the appropriate fields.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make edits to the copied information, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic306.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic306.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c13e2ba --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic306.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +Define Filter Criteria - Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Define Filter Criteria - Overview

+

Filter Lists | Modify Report Options

+

 

+

Point of Sale provides an extensive set of filtering options, allowing you to work with a subset of a list by entering criteria you want to match.

+

When you first open a filter dialog, it is blank (unless opening a saved filter, in which case your previous settings are shown).

+

 With no criteria selected, all data is included in the list or report being generated. Entering filter criteria allows you to include or exclude records based on your choices.

+

Example filter dialog:

+

image\filter_dialog3.gif

+

To enter filter criteria:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click in the field in which you want to enter criteria.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Type your criteria or select the image\f4_symbol.gif or image\f4_symbol_2.gif icons to make selections. These icons open selection dialogs, calendars, or drop-down lists, depending on the field type.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    By default, the filter includes data matching the entered criteria. To exclude matching criteria (i.e. show all other data), click in the Include/Exclude column and change the setting to Exclude.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done, select Apply or Save to filter your list or report data accordingly.

    +
    5. +
+

Other options on the filter dialog may include:

+
    +
  • +

    Clear All clear all entered filter criteria from all fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Revert reset all filter criteria to default settings (reports only).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Save in lists, memorizes this filter criteria for later use.

    +
    • +
+

Learn more about specific filter options:

+

General filtering rules and tips includes information on using spaces, exact matches, include/exclude options, and more.

+

Free-form text and descriptive fields used to filter on document comments, descriptions fields, names, promotional codes, street names, etc.

+

Range fields used to filter on an alphanumeric range, such as a price or cost range, ZIP code range, Item # range, etc.

+

Selection lists used to filter by values restricted to a predefined list, such as when filtering by department or vendor code, item type, workstation, etc.

+

Date/time fields used to filter data by dates or date ranges, either fixed or dynamic.

+

And/or options used to create complex filtering rules to include/exclude data based on multiple criteria.

+

ZIP Codes used to filter on customers or vendors residing in a particular ZIP code or range of Zip Codes.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List overview

+

Reports overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic307.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic307.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d82cf14 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic307.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + + +Blank Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Blank Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

To enter data in blank fields:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the appropriate data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate to the next field.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic308.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic308.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9c22f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic308.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Read-Only Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Read-Only Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale automatically populates some fields with information that cannot be edited. These fields cannot be accessed; the cursor will skip them during navigation.

+

An example is the Cashier field on a sales receipt if employee logins are required.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic309.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic309.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..afc8423 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic309.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Fields with Suggested Entries + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Fields with Suggested Entries

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

Point of Sale suggests entries in many data fields by automatically completing them for you. You can still manually change a suggested entry. For example, on a purchase order, the Order Date and Ship Date fields are auto-filled with todays date, but these entries can be changed.

+

To change the entry in a suggested field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the field and enter new information.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic310.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic310.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc0f1cf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic310.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Checkbox Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Check box Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

A check box field can be selected or cleared but no data can be entered. Selecting a check box activates that field/function, while clearing it (removing the check) inactivates the function.

+

To select or clear a check box field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Touch or click the field, or press <Spacebar>, to toggle between selecting and clearing a check box.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic311.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic311.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1ef39ed --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic311.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Currency Fields (Cost and Price) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Currency Fields (Cost and Price)

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale supports the use of decimal amounts with up to five decimal places, but displays only two decimal places. You can enter even more than five decimal places, but Point of Sale will round to and store only five.

+

If you enter an amount less than $0.005 (one-half penny), Point of Sale displays $0.00, but is indeed storing the fractional cent amount you entered. You can also make an entry in the extended cost/price on a document and then enter the quantity. Point of Sale will calculate the unit cost/price with decimals for you. This feature makes it easier to order, price, and sell items whose cost or price is less than a penny or in fractional cents.

+

In the case of item cost and price on documents, the extended cost/price is calculated using the stored five decimals.

+

To enter data in the currency fields:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the amount, including decimals.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If entering an amount in whole currency units, such as 2.00, 47.00, or 103.00, it is not necessary to type the decimal place or trailing zeroes. You can simply type 2, 47, or 13 respectively.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To enter negative amounts, press the dash () key on your keyboard before entering the amount. Such as: 10.00

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic312.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic312.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..755fad1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic312.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Quantity Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Quantity Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Quantity fields are blank or have a suggested entry until a different quantity is entered. Numbers are the only acceptable entries in these fields. Decimals are allowed (up to five places), but Point of Sale only displays two and does not display trailing zeroes, i.e. if you enter 2.40, Point of Sale will display 2.4.

+

Even though Point of Sale displays a maximum of two decimal places, it actually stores and uses five decimal places for quantity calculations.

+

To enter data in quantity fields:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the appropriate data.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    To enter negative numbers, press <-> before entering the value.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate to the next field.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic313.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic313.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7fd9f1d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic313.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + + +Note, Comment, and Instruction Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Note, Comment, and Instruction Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

These fields are free-form text fields, allowing any text you wish to record.

+

To enter data in a note field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Type the appropriate data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic314.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic314.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff13e29 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic314.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Drop-Down List Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Drop-Down List Fields

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Fields with drop-down lists available will have a image\f4_symbol_2.gif button in them. Some drop-down list fields only allow a predefined entry and others allow free-form entries.

+

To enter data in a drop-down list field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the image\f4_symbol_2.gif button or press <F4> to access the drop-down list. Then use the arrow keys to highlight your entry and press <Enter> to select it. Alternatively, press <Spacebar> to cycle through the selections without opening the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

If a predefined entry is required, type the first character or two of the entry. The entry will appear in the field.

+

OR

+

In drop-down lists that allow free-form entries, type the appropriate data.

+
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate to the next field.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic315.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic315.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0fc07da --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic315.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + +Lookup Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Lookup Fields

+

Point of Sale Basics | Entering Data

+

 

+

Lookup fields are used to bring data from another file to the document or record in which you are working. An example is the Customer field on sales receipts, as shown below.

+

 

+

+

 

+

Lookup fields are directly linked to the associated file. You have the following options from a lookup field:

+
    +
  • +

    Search for a record by keyword

    +
    • +
  • +

    With no entry, click  the field to display all records in the associated file

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add New <record> from the drop-down list to add a new record of this type and list it on the document

    +
    • +
+

Note: Looking up items from documents is slightly different (see listing items on documents).

+

To use lookup fields:

+
    +
  • +

    Scan or begin typing an entry in the lookup field. You need only enter enough characters to ensure a unique match in the associated file.

    +
    • +
+

The drop-down list is automatically activated and the closest match(es) to what you type is shown. Click a record (<Enter>) to bring it to the document. Otherwise continue with the following steps.

+

 

+

Lookup alternative (not available from all documents):

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose the Select from <record type> List from the I Want To menu to directly access the associated file.

    +
    2. +
+

Example: Select from Vendor List to access the vendor file.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the list, use standard sort, search, or filtering procedures to locate an existing record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Once the record is selected, choose Select or double-click to add the record to your document.

    +
    3. +
+

When you access the customer, department, or vendor files during a lookup, you have full editing capabilities in that module. This makes it possible to add or edit records without closing the original module.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Listing items on documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic316.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic316.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d8598a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic316.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + +Date Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Date Fields

+

Quick Entry Date Formats | Time Fields

+

 

+

Entering Dates

+

There are two types of Point of Sale dates: fixed dates and dynamic dates.

+
    +
  • +

    Fixed dates are fixed in time. For example, if you enter 05/20/06 or a date range of 01/01/2006 12/31/2006, then this will be the recorded date, no matter how much time has passed. Document dates are fixed dates; but most allow you to change the date while creating it (subject to security rights).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Dynamic dates allow you to define a single date or date range relative to the current Point of Sale date, such as Today or Month-to-Date. As the Point of Sale date changes, so does the dynamic dates. Dynamic dates are typically used to define date ranges for filtering lists and for reporting purposes.

    +
    • +
+

Note: A security right is available to block your employees from changing the date on a receipt.

+

To enter data in a fixed date field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the date field and do one or a combination of the following:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Enter the date directly.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select image\f4_symbol.gif (<F4>) to access a drop-down calendar.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Todays date is highlighted in red, and the currently selected date is shown in blue. Use the arrow keys to move from day to day in the displayed month.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To view the previous or following month, select t (PageUp) or u (PageDown) respectively. Click the date you want to select, or highlight the date and press <Enter>.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

 Warning: Do not change your Windows system date to record a different date on a Point of Sale document. Data loss could result.

+

 

+

To enter data in a dynamic date field:

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose a range from the Date filter type field in the Dynamic Date Filter dialog.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Use your mouse or touchscreen or press <r;> or <> to move between the selections and press <Enter> to choose a range. See dynamic date range options for help with selecting a range.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you choose a fixed period (Custom), use the fixed date procedure for picking dates. To access calendars, select image\f4_symbol_2.gif (<F4>).

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to apply your selected date range.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press <Tab> or move out of the field.

    +
    3. +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Filter lists

+

Define filter criteria

+

Change report dates

+

Enter data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic317.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic317.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..64ffdf1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic317.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +List Items by UPC, ALU, or Item # + + + + + + + + + + + +

List Items by UPC, ALU, or Item #

+

Use Bar Codes | About Item Identifiers | Search for an Item

+

To list an item on a document:

+
    +
  • +

    Scan or type an item identifier in the Enter Item(s) field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you scan a bar code and one unique matching item is found in inventory, it is instantly listed on the document with a quantity of one.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you type a UPC code, Item #, or Alternate Lookup, press <Enter>. If one there is one unique match in inventory, it is immediately listed on the document with a quantity of one. If multiple matches are found the matches are displayed in a drop-down list.

    +
    • +
+

From this list, you can:

+
    +
  • +

    Click an item or use your arrow keys to highlight the item and then press <Enter> to list it on the document.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Scroll through the list to locate and select an item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add New Item to enter a new item in inventory and immediately list it on the document.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Item lookups are done in the following order: UPC, Alternate Lookup, Item #, and then search keyword(s). Ensuring that you do not have duplicates of any item's UPC, ALU, or Item # is vital to making the item lookup function efficient.

    +
    • +
  • +

    For more information about using UPCs, Alternate Lookups, and Item numbers to list items, read about item identifiers.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Overview of listing items on documents

+

Edit listed items

+

Delete listed items

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic318.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic318.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..044c3da --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic318.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Items from Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Items from Inventory

+

Find an Item | Filter the Item List | Sort the Item List

+

 

+

This topic applies to purchase orders, inventory adjustment memos, and transfer slips only.

+

 

+

You can go directly to inventory to select items to list on a document or for other tasks. Once in inventory, the item list can be sorted, searched, or filtered to locate the correct item or an item can be added or edited before listing.

+

To look up and select items in inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Select from Item List (<F4>) from the document or task I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

This opens your item list in a special selection mode.

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the items you want to list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Once you have located an item, use one of the following methods to bring it to the document:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    To immediately return one item to the document, double-click it. The item is listed with a quantity of one.

    +
    • +
  • +

    From a document: Enter the quantity of each item to be listed in the Doc QtyClick to display a popup topic column in your item list. You can also specify the Doc PriceClick to display a popup topic (if making a receipt or customer order) or the Doc CostClick to display a popup topic (if making a PO, voucher, or cost memo). Navigate through the item list, making entries for all items you want to list on the document. When finished, choose Select from the bottom toolbar to return selected items to the document with the specified quantities and prices/costs.

    +
    • +
+

             Select items from inventory for document

+
    +
  • +

    From other tasks: Select the checkboxes to the left of an item to select it. You can also use the selection options from the I Want To menu to select all, clear all, or select multiple items. When finished, choose Select from the bottom toolbar to return selected items to the task form or list.

    +
    • +
+

             Item selection from tasks

+
    +
  • +

    If you need to list a large number of style items, as you might on a PO, voucher, or adjustment memo, highlight a style item and then, from the I Want To. menu select Edit/Add Style. Enter document quantities (or select checkboxes for other tasks) directly in the style grid cells corresponding to each style item. When done, choose Select.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat steps 2-3 to locate and list all the items you need.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Full item editing is possible while in the item selection screen. This feature allows the flexibility to perform tasks, such as adding items as new merchandise is being ordered, received, or sold.

+

 

+

Tip: Filter your item list to display a single vendor's itemsClick to display a popup topic

+

Note: Add a new style while creating a documentClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a new item while creating a document

+

List items on documents

+

Inventory overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic319.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic319.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3cf3d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic319.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit Items Listed on Documents + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Items Listed on Documents

+

List Items | Delete Items | Edit Saved Documents

+

 

+

You can edit an item on a transactional document only until the document has been saved. You can edit items on order documents at any time.

+

These edits will affect only the listed items on the document; they will not affect the corresponding items in inventory. The fields that can be edited vary by document, but typically edits are made to:

+
    +
  • +

    Change the quantity, price, cost, or give an item discount

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change an items tax code, when special tax handling is needed

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit the item description; sometimes used on service or non-inventory items

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Enter item serial numbers

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Change the sales Associate on a line-item basis for commission tracking

    +
    • +
+

The procedure here is for editing an item on a sales receipt. The general procedure is the same on other documents, though choices may vary slightly.

+

To edit a listed item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the item you wish to edit on the receipt..

    +
    2. +
+

If you just listed the item, it is automatically highlighted and this step is not necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make edits as necessary:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Click Qty + and Qty  to increase or decrease the item quantity respectively.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Return Item to change the quantity to negative (a negative quantity adds the item back to inventory)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click Qty/Price/Discount to open a dialog allowing you to edit any or all  of these things in a single window

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click Edit to open the Item Information window to access other editable fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Or, make changes directly in the item list. You may have to add columns to the list for this option to be available.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Make other entries on the document as necessary and then take payment and save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List and edit a group Item

+

List an item assembly on a document

+

List different units of measure on documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic320.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic320.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b48af0d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic320.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Remove Items from a Document + + + + + + + + + + + +

Remove Items from a Document

+

List Items on Documents | Edit Listed Items

+

 

+

Items listed on a transactional document can be deleted at anytime before the document is saved. Items listed on order documents can be deleted at anytime, since order documents are planning documents that do not affect inventory.

+

These procedures only delete the item from the document. They do not affect inventory.

+

To delete listed items:

+

Method 1

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the document form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight the item(s) you want to delete.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Remove This Item in the list or, if you have selected multiple items, select Remove Selected Items from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
+

The item is removed from the list.

+

 

+

Method 2

+

This method "zeroes out" the item, but leaves it listed on the document.

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the item you want to delete on the document.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use the Qty + or Qty buttons to change the quantity to zero.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Press <Tab> or navigate out of the field.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic322.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic322.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93b2ab2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic322.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + + +Dynamic Date Range Options + + + + + + + + + + +

Dynamic Date Range Options

+

Date Fields | Quick-Entry of Dates

+

 

+

Note: The following examples are based on a current Point of Sale date of Wednesday, October 12, 2005.

+

 

+

Custom

+

A non-dynamic date range option. Select it to define a fixed date range with a specific starting and ending date that will remain unchanged. An open range cannot be defined with this option.

+

Today

+

Current date. (October 12 October 12, 2005)

+

Yesterday

+

Yesterday. (October 11 October 11, 2005)

+

This year, week-to-date

+

From the first day of the week (Sunday) to today. (October 9 October 12, 2005)

+

Last week

+

Entire previous week. (October 2 October 8, 2005)

+

This year, month-to-date

+

From the first day of the current month to today. (October 1 October 12, 2005)

+

Last month

+

Entire previous month. (September 1 September 30, 2005)

+

Last 30, 60, or 90 days

+

Last 30, 60, or 90 calendar days, crossing into last year if applicable. (30 days: September 13 October 12, 2005; 60 days: August 14 October 12, 2005; 90 days: July 15 October 12, 2005)

+

This year, year-to-date

+

From January 1 of the current year to today. (January 1 October 12, 2005)

+

Last year, week-to-date

+

From the first day of the week to the current day in the same month for last year. May not be the same number of days as week-to-date, this year. (October 10 October 12, 2004)

+

Last year, month-to-date

+

From the first day of the month to the current day/month for last year. (October 1 October 12, 2004)

+

Last year, year-to-date

+

From January 1 to the current day/month for last year. (January 1 October 12, 2004)

+

All

+

All dates.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic335.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic335.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bffadb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic335.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + +Doc Qty + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Doc Qty

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

The Doc Qty (Document Quantity) field is available when selecting items for a document in inventory or when bringing the items from a order to a transactional document. For example, when selecting items for a sales receipt, enter the quantity that you are selling in the Doc Qty field. When selecting items for a purchase order, enter the quantity you are ordering.

+

Dont confuse an items Doc Qty with its on-hand quantity in inventory.

+

(Pro) If you use styles and you display the style grid when coming to inventory from a document, you can enter the document quantities directly in the style grid cells. When you choose Select or Save & Select, the entered quantities are carried to the document.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic336.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic336.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..29eff67 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic336.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +Doc Cost + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Doc Cost

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

The cost to be used on a purchase order, voucher, or cost memo may be different from the current inventory cost (Average Unit Cost). The document cost field (Doc Cost) is available when selecting items from your item list while creating a document and allows you to specify the cost of the item on the document.

+

In the case of a PO or voucher, the current Order Cost for the item is suggested as the document cost, but can be edited as necessary. If no order cost is defined, then the current average unit cost is suggested. For example, when selecting items from inventory for a purchase order, the current order cost is auto-filled for you. If the vendor's cost for the item has changed, you can enter the new cost in the Doc Cost field and it will be carried to the PO.

+

In the case of a cost adjustment memo, no document cost is suggested. Enter the adjusted (new) cost in the Doc Cost field. This cost will be carried to the New Cost field on the memo.

+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic337.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic337.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0935c1c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic337.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +Doc Price + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Doc Price

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

The document price (Doc Price) field is available when selecting items from inventory to list on sales documents. Doc Price stores the item price for the current document only. For example, when selecting items for a receipt, enter the price at which you want to sell the item in the Doc Price field.

+

If you dont make an entry in this field, your default price (as specified in company preferences) is automatically added to the document.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic338.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic338.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c66c58e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic338.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + +Printing Tags: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Tags: Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Supported Tags | Printing Preferences | FAQs

+ +

 

+

Item price tags can be printed from inventory, purchase and receiving documents, transfer slips, the Price Change reminders window, and from the Price Manager and Physical Inventory windows.

+

The appearance of printed tags is determined by the default print template you have specified in workstation preferences or you can change the template at time of printing.  Pro users can also customize or create new tag templates to meet their individual needs.

+

Tag printing is supported to compatible dedicated tag printers (e.g. the Zebra LP2824) and to standard inkjet/laser printers (using sheet labels). A dedicated tag printer allows you to print to hang tag, jewelry tag, and adhesive tag templates available on roll stock.

+

 

+

Inventory Tag

+

 

+

Tags can be printed with or without bar codes or the reference MSRP (manufacturer's suggested retail price).

+

When printing tags with bar codes and using the default tag templates, Point of Sale uses the inventory item number to produce the bar code, not the UPC code. This allows you to print bar-coded tags and list items on documents by scanning them, even if you do not have a vendor-provided UPC code for the items. Learn more.

+

The MSRP is included on printed tags if it has been entered on the item record. If you do not wish to include the MSRP, don't enter it on the item record or remove the field from the template you are using with Print Designer.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Other Tag Printing Topics

+

List of compatible tag printers

+

Installing supported printers

+

Common issues with Zebra tag printers

+

Printing mailing and shipping labels

+

Printing shipping labels

+

Printing tags for alternate vendors Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Ordering printing supplies

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic340.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic340.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..02f75f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic340.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +basic340 + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Zoom to View Small Print

+ +

Popup topic. has been hidden

+ +

By default, the previewer is set to display the printed record, document, or tag at 100% magnification. Small print, such as on tags, may not appear clear at this magnification. To improve the display of small print, increase the zoom level by selecting to zoom in from the toolbar (or access the zoom control from the right-click pop-up menu).

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_additem_whle_making_document.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_additem_whle_making_document.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..df64542 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_additem_whle_making_document.htm @@ -0,0 +1,149 @@ + + + + + + +Add a New Item While Creating a Document + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Item While Creating a Document

+

List Items on Documents | Add a New Style

+

 

+

Need to order, receive, or sell an item not yet added to inventory?

+

Point of Sale allows you to add an inventory item while you are creating a document and then immediately list it on your current document.

+

What are you trying to do?

+

Add an item while receiving or selling Click to expand/collapse topic - Voucher or Receipt

+ +

Add an item while ordering - Purchase Order

+

Add an item while making another document Click to expand/collapse topic - Customer Order, Adjustment Memo, or Transfer Slip

+ +

 

+

 

+

QuickBooks financial software Note: Adding an item and immediately selling it Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Handle special orders

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_autologout.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_autologout.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e9416e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_autologout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +Automatic Security Logouts + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatic Security Logouts

+

Employees & Security Overview | Log In/Out | Clocking In/Out

+

 

+

Your Point of Sale preferences can be set such that employees are automatically logged out under the following two circumstances.

+

Select a link to view preference setting information for these options.

+

Log out after a period of inactivity

+

Log out after each sales transaction

+

 

+

Important: Don't use the automatic logout after a period of inactivity if scheduling backups or Store Exchanges to occur when the computer is unattended.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_cust_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_cust_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..986af30 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_cust_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Customers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Customers

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable in customer records.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General:

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Display choices on drop-down list or display calendar in date fields (press within field)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save customer record

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl + n>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages, n = 1,2,3, etc.

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of customer

+
+

Customer List:

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Search for customer

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Cycle between list and form

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print customer labels

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customize_iconbars.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customize_iconbars.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4665478 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customize_iconbars.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Customize Navigation Toolbar + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize the Navigation Toolbar Buttons

+

You can add or remove buttons on the navigation toolbar on the left of the Home Page, receipts, and vouchers.

+

To add or remove toolbar buttons:

+
    +
  1. +

    Right-click any button on the toolbar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Customize buttons.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    To add a button:

    +
      +
    1. +

      In the Available Tasks column, select the button you want  to add.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      Click the right arrow to move it to the Selected Tasks column.

      +
      3. +
    +

    To remove a button:

    +
      +
    1. +

      In the Selected Tasks column, select the button you want to remove.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      Click the left arrow to move it to the Available Tasks column.

      +
      3. +
    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Close.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Mouse & Touchscreen Navigation

+

Keyboard Navigation

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customizelistcolumns.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customizelistcolumns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..905b874 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customizelistcolumns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ + + + + + + +Customize List Columns + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize List Columns

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

 

+

Use these procedures to add, remove, or rearrange the columns in a Point of Sale list. The procedure varies slightly depending on your list. Select the list type you are working with for specific instructions:

+

Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

All other lists Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can rearrange column order or column widths directly in the list:

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    To move a column, click and hold on the column header and drag it to the desired position.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To adjust a columns width, click and hold on the separator (the small vertical line) between column headers and drag the separator until the column is the desired width.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Some columns (fields) in your item list can be renamed to better suit your business needs. Read the customizing field labels topic for more information.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customizing the columns in a list does not affect how columns appear in reports or on printed documents. Read modifying report options for more information on customizing reports.  Read the Print Designer overview  fro information on customizing printed documents.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Locate a record or document

+

Use custom fields

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customizesummarypane.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customizesummarypane.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7946088 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_customizesummarypane.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + +Customize List Information Panels + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize List Information Panels

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

 

+

This topic applies to department, vendor, employee, customer order, purchase order, transfer history, and adjustment history lists.

+

 

+

When a Point of Sale list is in collapsed format, the right side of the window is called the information panel. The information displayed is for the selected record in the collapsed list to the left and varies depending on the record type.

+
    +
  • +

    The bottom half of the information panel typically includes a history for the selected record or, in the case of a document, the list of items that were included in the transaction. Other information may appear for some record types. This information is often presented in report format and some report viewing options are available.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The top portion of the information panel contains specific information fields from the selected record and task buttons that can be customized by adding, removing, or rearranging the fields to best suit your information needs.

    +
    • +
+

To customize a list information panel:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Customize this window link at the bottom-right of the panel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the window displayed:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Drag and drop fields and task buttons to position them where you want.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To add a field or button, drag it from the Available Fields area to the panel at the top. To remove a field, drag it down to the Available Fields area or press <Delete> on your keyboard.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Each panel column is split into two sub-columns. When placing data fields in a column, the field label is on the left and the actual data on the left. You can drag the separator (dotted line) between right and left sub-columns to change their relative widths. Right-clicking in a cell brings up a menu with other options, such as text alignment.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Apply to implement your changes.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Work with Forms

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_dept_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_dept_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..87b2035 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_dept_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Departments + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Departments

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to departments.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

Adding/Editing a Department:

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Display choices on drop-down list (press within field)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save record

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of department

+
+

Department List:

+
+

<F3> or <Crtl+F>

+		 +

Search for department record

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Cycle between list and form

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

 

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_disable_tagprinting.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_disable_tagprinting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dbeb709 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_disable_tagprinting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + +Disable Tag Printing for an Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Disable Tag Printing for an Item

+

Tag Printing: Basic Instructions | Edit Items

+

 

+

Dont want to print tags for an item?

+

Clear the Print Tags check box in the Misc and Shipping section of the item record in inventory. This will help prevent accidental printing of tags for an item even if it is displayed in your item list or on a document when printing tags.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing FAQs

+

Ordering tag supplies from Intuit

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_edit_documents.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_edit_documents.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0060976 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_edit_documents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit Documents + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Documents

+

Enter Data in a Field | Find a Document

+

 

+

This discussion assumes you require employee logins and are using default settings. Your actual ability to edit documents will vary based on your security rights, features used, and in a multi-store configuration, your store location (Headquarters or remote).

+

 

+

Order Documents

+

Purchase orders and customer orders, since they have no direct effect on inventory, can be freely edited at anytime (edits to some fields may be restricted if deposits have been accepted towards the order).

+

How do I edit a purchase order?

+

How do I edit a customer order?

+

 

+

Transaction (History) Documents

+

Before saving, all information on transaction documents can be edited.

+

However, transaction documents immediately affect your inventory as soon as saved. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop they may have also already affected your financial records. After saving, only certain informational fields can be edited. Edits that affect the items, total, or payments are generally not allowed (see voucher exceptions below). Once sent from a remote store to Headquarters or to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the ability to edit is even more limited.

+

What can be edited?

+

Receipts: After saving, you can edit the customer, comments, promotional code, and, if a Pro user, the shipping information (except amount). After sending to Headquarters or to QuickBooks Desktop, you can no longer edit the customer or promotional code. Edit options are available from the I Want To menu in Sales History.

+

Receiving Vouchers: Certain voucher fields, such as discounts, freight, fees, and vendor billing information may be edited after saving and, at Headquarters, even after sending to QuickBooks Desktop, depending on where you enter vendor billing information and if you spread discount, freight, and fees across item costs. Edit options are available from the I Want To menu in Receiving History.

+

Adjustment Memos: Memo comments can be edited after saving. Once sent to Headquarters or QuickBooks Desktop, no fields are editable. Select Edit from the toolbar in your Adjustment History. Editable fields are white in color.

+

Transfer Slips: Slip comments, carrier, and freight can be edited after saving. Once sent to Headquarters or QuickBooks Desktop, no fields are editable. Select Edit from the toolbar in your Transfer History. Editable fields are white in color.

+

 

+

Correcting a Document When Editing Isn't an Option

+

If you discover an error on a history document that is not editable, it can still be corrected by reversing the original document and then creating a new, corrected one. This feature is intended for correcting errors and should be used only when necessary.

+

Select a link below to learn more about reversing various documents:

+

Reverse and correct a receipt

+

Reverse and correct a receiving voucher

+

Reverse and correct an adjustment memo

+

Reverse and correct a transfer slip

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_email_documents.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_email_documents.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..298695a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_email_documents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +E-mail a Document + + + + + + + + + + + +

Email a PO

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can e-mail Point of Sale documents to your vendors and customers. All documents are e-mailed using the same basic procedure.

+

When e-mailing documents, Point of Sale automatically launches your default Windows e-mail client, creates the e-mail, and attaches the document in PDF format.

+

(Pro) Other document e-mailing preferences allow you to create the document attachment in the format of your choice (PDF, Excel, HTML, or plain text) and define the default message text for each document type.

+

You must have entered e-mail addresses for the customer and/or vendor being e-mailed on their respective records.

+

 

+

To e-mail a document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create the document following normal procedures.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Display or select the document to be e-mailed:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Optionally, you can set your printing preferences to be prompted to e-mail each sales receipt to your customers (in addition to printing the receipt). This option also provides you an opportunity to collect customers' e-mail addresses if you don't already have them.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Order documents, such as purchase orders and customer orders, can be e-mailed while creating them or from the order list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Transactional documents, other than sales receipts as described above, must be saved before they can be e-mailed from the document history list.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Send as E-mail from the I Want To menu (or from window toolbar in some lists).
    +
    +Point of Sale creates the e-mail, attaches the document, and displays it in your default e-mail client.
    +
    +Important: Your e-mail client may display a permissions dialog for access to your e-mail application. In some cases, the message may be hidden under the POS window. Press <Alt+Tab> on your keyboard to switch to the message and give permission for the access.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review and edit the e-mail address, subject line, and message as necessary, and then select Send.

    +
    3. +
+

Note: If you also have Microsoft Outlook installed, the e-mail and attachment will be generated in Outlook instead. You can either select Microsoft Outlook as your default e-mail client or, if you wish to continue using Outlook Express, use the Add or Remove Programs option from the Windows Control Panel to uninstall Microsoft Outlook.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule1.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule1.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8575fed --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #1 + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #1

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+Rule: If two or more criteria are joined by AND, the entry in the records field must meet all of the criteria in order to be included in the filter results. + +++ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Goal:

+		 +

Filter for all brown tie shoes

+

 

+
+

Criterion:

+		 +

(an And statement)

+

Brown and Tie must both be in the Description 1 field

+

 

+
+

Item Selected:

+		 +

Item #101

+
+

 

+

Longer chains of criteria joined by And can be built in the same manner.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule2.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule2.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e252870 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule2.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #2 + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #2

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Rule: If two or more criteria are joined by Or, the entry in the records field must meet any one of the criteria in order to be included in the filter results.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Goal:

+		 +

Filter for all brown or navy shoes

+

 

+
+

Criterion:

+		 +

(an Or statement)

+

Either Brown or Navy must be in the Item Name field

+

 

+
+

Items Selected:

+		 +

Items #s: 101, 201, 501, 701

+
+

 

+

Longer chains of criteria joined by Or can be built in the same manner.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule3.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule3.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3de5d8e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_andorrule3.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #3 + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: And/Or Rule #3

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

Rule: When three or more criteria are joined by any combination of Ands and Ors, the criteria joined by the Ands are grouped together and evaluated first. Then the Or statements are evaluated.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Goal:

+		 +

Select all shoes that are brown tie or black slip-on

+

 

+
+

Criterion:

+		 +

(a mixed And/Or statement)

+

Brwn and Tie or Black and Slon must be in the Item Name field

+

 

+
+

Items Selected:

+		 +

Items #101, #401, #801

+
+

 

+

When designing these more complex statements, it often helps to visualize the AND statements enclosed within brackets and treated as a unit. Rewriting the criteria above would yield:

+

[Brwn and Tie] or [Blck and Slon]

+

Point of Sale evaluates And requirement, i.e., that were both Brwn and Tie (Item #101). Then it identifies all the items that meet the second And requirement (Blck and Slon, Items #401 and #801).

+

After evaluating all the Ands, Point of Sale looks at the Or statements. All items that satisfy either of the requirements joined by an Or are selected. In this case, Item #101 is selected because it satisfies the And statement to the left of the Or, and Items #401 and #801 are selected because they satisfy the And statement to the right.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..20560a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filter_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Filter Dialog + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Filter Dialog

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts for the list and report filter dialog.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept entry and move to next field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Open selection dialogs or lists within a field

+
+

<Up/Down Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move up down through lists

+
+

< Tab>

+		 +

Switch focus from criteria fields to bottom toolbar

+
+

<Spacebar>

+		 +

Select/clear item checkboxes or cycle through choices for various options

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_andor.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_andor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1ea2552 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_andor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,136 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: And/Or Statements + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: And/Or Statements

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Some filter fields allow the use of AND/OR statements when defining related free-form criteria. The power and flexibility gained with such statements is immense in that you can filter by what might otherwise be unrelated information. You can define multiple criteria and then include records that meet two or more criteria (and) or those that meet any of the criteria (or). You can also use a combination of AND/OR statements.

+

Example: Your shoes are defined with a color (BRWN, BLCK, NAVY, WHTE) and description (TIE = tie/lace-up, SLON = slip-on, BUCK = buckle) in the Item Name field, resulting in inventory items looking like this:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Item #

+		 +

Item Name

+
+

000101

+		 +

BRWN TIE

+
+

000201

+		 +

BRWN BUCK

+
+

000301

+		 +

WHITE SLON

+
+

000401

+		 +

BLCK SLON

+
+

000501

+		 +

BRWN SLON

+
+

000601

+		 +

WHTE TIE

+
+

000701

+		 +

NAVY SLON

+
+

000801

+		 +

BLCK SLON

+
+

 

+

Using and/or statements as your Item Name filter criteria, you could select such combinations as all black tie shoes, all black and brown tie shoes, or all slip-on shoes.

+

 

+

image\andor.gif

+

 

+

Three rules determine how Point of Sale interprets any AND/OR statement. The following examples of these rules make use of the shoe item list shown above.

+

 

+

And/or Rule #1Click to display a popup topic

+

And/or Rule #2Click to display a popup topic

+

And/or Rule #3Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Entering data

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_datetime.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_datetime.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c768c97 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_datetime.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: Dates and Time + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: Dates and Time

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Both fixed and dynamic dates are acceptable entries on most date filters. With a simple selection, you can specify to have the report or list filtered for a specified date or date range, or for month-to-date, year-to-date, last year for this same period, etc.

+

There is a variety of predefined dynamic date ranges available for your use. To specify a single day, enter the same date in both the lower and upper date range fields.

+

Time fields are used only when filtering for reports and allow you to filter on a portion of a day or on a time period traversing multiple days.

+

 

+

Choose a date/time topic for more information:

+

Date entry

+

Time entry

+

Dynamic date range options

+

Tip: Quick-entry date formats

+

Tip: Quick-entry time formats

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Entering data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_freeform.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_freeform.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca871f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_freeform.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: Free-form Text and Descriptive Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: Free-form Text and Descriptive Fields

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Example fields: Item descriptions, size, color, attribute, names, comments, street names, etc.

+

Enter a string of characters. Records that have the matching string of characters anywhere in the field that match your entry are included.

+

Example: Entering a value of "buckle" in the Item Name field would include such records as "ladies buckle shoe," "buckle girls dress shoe," "boys casual shoe buckle," and so on, in the filter results. For an exact match, enclose the string of characters within quotes: "buckle" will only include records that have only the word "buckle" in the field.

+

You can also build powerful and/or statements to filter by free-form descriptive fields.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Entering data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_ranges.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_ranges.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e59645 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_ranges.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: Range Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: Range Fields

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Range fields include Item numbers, ZIP Codes, phone numbers, price, cost, margin, date/time, etc.

+

Range fields are evident by the word "to" between two value fields, i.e. <low value> to <high value>. Initially, both values of the range are blank. If left blank, all records are included. To filter on a range, enter the lowest allowed value in the left field and the highest allowed value in the right field.

+

Example: To include only item numbers 1 through 500, enter 1 as the low value and 500 as the high value in the Item # field.

+

 

+

image\filtercriteria_range.gif

+

 

+

Range criteria allow both open-ended and closed ranges of data, except for date/time ranges, which require closed ranges.

+

Example: To filter for all item numbers greater than 500, enter 501 as the lower range and leave the upper range blank (open-ended). Similarly, leaving the lower range open-ended and entering 500 in the upper range would yield the result of all item numbers 1 500.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_selection.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_selection.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f8307db --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_selection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: Selection Lists + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: Selection Lists

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

Example Fields: Department, vendor, item type, workstation, etc.

+

Selection fields are used when filter criteria must match entries in another program list. If you want to specify a single value for this field and you know what the value is, you can type it directly into the field.

+

If you want to select multiple values, select image\f4_symbol.gif or press <F4> from the field.

+

Select or clear checkboxes to specify the values to be include or excluded, respectively. To select or clear a values check box, click it or highlight it and press <Space>. You can also use the Select All or Clear All buttons. Select OK to return the selected values to the field. <Selection> is displayed in the field if multiple values have been selected.

+

 

+

Filter criteria selection list

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_tips.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3e02dc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: General Rules and Tips + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: General Rules and Tips

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Report Options

+

 

+

Using Spaces: A space made by pressing <Space> is a criteria character (the same as any other entered character). When a space is included in a value, a matching space is required in the data record for the record to be a match during filtering.

+

Upper/Lower-Case: Point of Sale does not distinguish between upper- and lower-case letters when filtering. Navy, navy, and NAVY would all return the same matches.

+

Blank Fields: A blank field acts as a wildcard; it matches every entry. No matter what is contained in that field in each record, the record is included during filtering. If all filter values are blank, all data records are included in the filter results.

+

Blank Entries: To filter for descriptive fields with blank entries, use empty quotes as your filter value.

+

Example: Entering "" as your size value would locate records that have no value recorded in their Size field.

+

Exact Matches: Enclose the criterion in quotation marks to require an exact match, i.e. to require the characters enclosed by the quotation marks to match the entire field entry, character for character. A matching data field cannot contain any characters (even leading spaces) that are not also in your criterion.

+

Example: If your criterion is Blue, both BLUE and SKY BLUE are matches. To find only exact matches for BLUE, i.e. include BLUE but exclude SKY BLUE, use "Blue" as your criterion. Since the entire field entry must match what is contained within the quotation marks, only Blue is a match.

+

Including/Excluding Matches: Select Include (default) or Exclude to the right of a criteria field to either include or exclude matching records in the output, respectively.

+

Example: If you want to filter for all vendors except one, you could select that vendor as the criteria and toggle the Include/Exclude option to Exclude. All vendors except the one specified will be included in the filtered results.

+

You can also exclude matches by using the tilde (~ ) character. Think of the tilde as meaning not or exclude. To exclude all blank records, enter a tilde and empty quotes (~"").

+

Examples:

+
    +
  • +

    ~Blue (not blue): Excludes any records that include the word blue anywhere in the specified field. Example: Field entries of BLUE, SKY BLUE, DARK BLUE, and BLUE GREEN would cause their respective records to be excluded from the results.

    +
    • +
  • +

    ~"Blue" (not an exact match to what is in the quotation marks, i.e. not exactly/only blue): Example: A field entry of BLUE would cause its respective record to be excluded. Records with field entries of SKY BLUE, DARK BLUE, and BLUE GREEN would be included in the results.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Entering data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_zipcodes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_zipcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3afbbe --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_filtercriteria_zipcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + +Filter Criteria: ZIP Codes + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Criteria: ZIP Codes

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists | Modify Reports

+

 

+

When defining ZIP code ranges, keep in mind that Point of Sale treats all such codes as 9-digit entries and that, in a sort sequence, spaces are listed before any digits. (Whether the dash is required depends on how the codes were entered. If dashes were not used, then omit them when specifying filter criteria.)

+

For instance, Point of Sale would append four spaces to the end of the five-digit postal code 94488. If you define a range of 94488-0000 to 94488-9999 (using postal +4 codes), any record with a postal code of 94488 (without the +4 code) would be omitted. To include all 94488 ZIP codes, including the five-digit 94488 code, define the range from 94488 to 94488-9999.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_customer.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_customer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d82893d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_customer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Search for a Customer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Customer

+

Sort Lists | Filter Lists

+
+

Basic

+
+

From the Point of Sale Home Page, use Quick Find.

+

Searching in your customer list:

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your Customer List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Begin typing customer keywords in the Search Customers field.  

    +
    3. +
+

Customer Search

+
    +
  • +

    Last name or company name is recommended

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also search by phone number, e-mail address, street name, or any other customer field

    +
    • +
  • +

    As you type, the list is instantly filtered to display only matching customers. Note how the filter button now indicates the list is showing Search Results and the number of records found is shown at the bottom of the list. In this case, typing "sky" returned two customers living on Skyline Drive.

    +
    • +
+

Customer Search

+
    +
  1. +

    If no results are found, use the backspace key on your keyboard to go back and re-enter new characters.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the customer you wish to work with and then click Show Details or choose an appropriate task from the I Want To Menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List a Customer on a Receipt

+

View Customer Purchase History

+
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_dept.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_dept.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..79155e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_dept.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Search for a Department + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Department

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Department Overview

+

To search for a department record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a search keyword or keywords for the department name or department code in the Find Department field at the top of your department list.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click the magnifying glass icon or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find window, you can confirm and select the correct department or narrow your search:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Highlight a record and double-click, press <Enter>, or choose Select Department.

    +
    • +
+

The department form is displayed.

+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Select Advanced Find to narrow your search to a specific field or specify other search criteria and search again

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add New to add a new department

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Go to Department List to display your full department list

    +
    • +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_general.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_general.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..840d698 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_general.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + +Finding a Record or Document + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Finding a Record or Document

+

Quick Find | Point of Sale Basics

+

 

+

There are three ways to locate records or documents in a Point of Sale list. Select a link for more information about an option.

+
    +
  • +

    Searching by keywords, across all  information fields.

    +
    • +
+

Area-specific search instructions: Customers, Items, Receipts, Customer Orders, Vendors, Departments, Adjustment Memos, Transfer Slips, Purchase Orders.

+
    +
  • +

    Sorting the list by a selected value (column). In many lists, you can then jump to a specific record by typing the first few characters of the record's entry in that column (the characters you type are not displayed).

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Filtering the list by one of the predefined filter options. Some lists allow you to create and save your own list filters.  

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customizing list columns

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_item.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8910435 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + +Search for an Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for an Item

+

 Sort the Item List | Filter the Item List

+

 

+

From the Point of Sale Home Page, use Quick Find.

+

Searching in your item list:

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your Item List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Begin typing keywords in the Search Inventory field.  

    +
    3. +
+

Item Search

+
    +
  • +

    A unique word from the item description is recommended.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also search by any other item field (department, vendor, size, color, etc.). The more unique the keyword, the fewer search results will be returned.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also scan the item's barcode tag.

    +
    • +
  • +

    As you type, the list is instantly filtered to display only matching items. Note how the filter button now indicates the list is showing Search Results and the number of records found is shown at the bottom of the list. In this case, typing "Orange" returned three sports drink items.

    +
    • +
+

Item Search

+
    +
  1. +

    If no results are found, use the backspace key on your keyboard to go back and re-enter new characters.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the item you wish to work with and then click Show Details or choose an appropriate task from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a New Item

+

List items on documents

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_layso.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_layso.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..70c9217 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_layso.htm @@ -0,0 +1,152 @@ + + + + + + +Search for a Customer Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Customer Order

+

Quick Find | Sort a List | Filter a List

+
+

Pro

+
+

Instructions for searching in your customer order lists (layaway, sales order, or work order) are given below.

+

You can also locate customer orders by looking in the customer's history.

+

To search for a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a search keyword in the Find field at the top of the order list:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

Order #:

+		 +

Enter the order number

+
+

Order Date:

+		 +

Enter in mm/dd/yyyy or mm/yyyy format, including slashes, Example: 10/05/2005 finds all orders made on October 5; 10/2005 finds all orders made in October

+
+

Associate:

+		 +

Enter Associate login name

+
+

Customer Name

+		 +

Enter customers last or first name

+
+

Company Name:

+		 +

Enter the customers company name

+
+

Serial #:

+		 +

Enter an item serial number that was recorded on the order

+
+
    +
  1. +

    Click  Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+

All matching orders are listed in the Find window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm and select the correct order or select from other options:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Highlight an order and double-click, press <Enter>, or choose Select <order type>.

    +
    • +
+

The order is displayed and all normal options are available to take or refund deposits, sell items, generate a purchase order, or print are available.

+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Select Advanced Find to narrow your search to a specific field or specify other search criteria and search again

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add New <order type> to create a new customer order

    +
    • +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+

Customizing the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_memo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_memo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..25722f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_memo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,163 @@ + + + + + + +Search for an Adjustment Memo + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for an Adjustment Memo

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Adjustment Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Instructions for searching for a memo are given below. You can also locate memos by viewing item history.

+

(Pro with multiple stores) Remote stores only have access to memos made at the local store, while Headquarters can find memos made at any store (assuming Store Exchanges have been completed).

+

To search for an adjustment memo:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find Memo field above your adjustment history list, enter a search keyword:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

Memo #:

+		 +

Enter the memo number

+
+

Memo Date:

+		 +

Enter in mm/dd/yyyy or mm/yyyy format, including slashes, Example: 10/05/2005 finds all memos made on October 5; 10/2005 finds all memos made in October

+
+

Associate:

+		 +

Enter the Associate login name

+
+

Source:

+		 +

Enter keyword matching the entry in the Source field on the memo, e.g. Manual, Physical Inventory, etc.

+
+

Reason:

+		 +

Enter keyword matching the entry in the Reason field on the memo, e.g. Qty Adj, Cost Adj, Shrinkage, Damaged, etc.

+
+

(Pro) Serial #:

+		 +

Enter an item serial number that was recorded on the memo

+
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+

All matching memos are listed in the Find window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm and select the correct memo or select from other options:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Highlight a memo and double-click, press <Enter>, or choose Select Memo.

    +
    • +
+

The memo is displayed and all normal options to copy,.reverse, or reprint are available.

+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Select Advanced Find to narrow your search to a specific field or specify other search criteria and search again

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add New <type> Memo to make a new adjustment

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    To search for a memos currently on hold, you must first display the held slip list.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Reverse and correct a memo

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_po.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_po.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e2b43a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_po.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + +Search for a Purchase Order + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Purchase Order

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Instructions for searching for a purchase order are given below.

+

You can also locate purchase orders in a vendor's history.

+

To search for a purchase order:

+

Searches are done by keyword across one or several selected fields (see the list of searchable fields below).

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find PO field above your PO list, enter a search keyword:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

PO #:

+		 +

Enter the purchase order number

+
+

Date:

+

(Order, Ship, or Cancel date)

+		 +

Enter in mm/dd/yyyy or mm/yyyy format, including slashes, Example: 10/05/2005 finds all orders made on October 5; 10/2005 finds all orders made in October

+
+

Associate:

+		 +

Login name of the associate that made the PO

+
+

Vendor:

+		 +

Enter one or more words from the vendor company name

+
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+

All matching orders are listed in the Find window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm and select the correct order or select from other options:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Highlight an order and double-click, press <Enter>, or choose Select PO.

    +
    • +
+

The order is displayed and all normal options are available to edit, print, e-mail, etc.

+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Select Advanced Find to narrow your search to a specific field or specify other search criteria and search again

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add New PO to create a new purchase order

    +
    • +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a PO

+

Delete a PO

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_recpt.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_recpt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b4673d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_recpt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + +Search for a Receipt + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Receipt

+

Sort a List | Filter a List

+

There are three ways to find a saved receipt:

+ +

To search for a receipt in sales history:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your sales history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Begin typing keywords in the Search field above the list.  

    +
    3. +
+

Receipt Search

+
    +
  • +

    If you know the receipt number, enter it or scan the bar code from the original, printed receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also search by customer name, company name, cashier, or associate. The more unique the search keyword, the fewer search results will be returned.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To search by the date the receipt was made, enter the date in mm/dd or mm/dd/yyyy format, including the slashes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If recorded on the receipt, you can search by item serial number or shipping tracking number.

    +
    • +
  • +

    As you type, the list is instantly filtered to display only matching receipts. Note how the filter button now indicates the list is showing Search Results and the number of records found is shown at the bottom of the list. In this case, typing "06/14" returned three receipts made on June 14.

    +
    • +
+

     Receipt Search

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    If no results are found, use the backspace key on your keyboard to go back and re-enter new characters.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the receipt you wish to work with and then click Show Details or choose an appropriate task from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    To search for a held receipt, you must display the held receipts list first.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Returns and Exchanges from Customers

+

Edit Documents

+

Copy a Document

+

Reverse a Receipt

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_slip.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_slip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f3480e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_slip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,145 @@ + + + + + + +Search for a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Transfer Slip

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Transfer Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Transfer slips are only available in a multi-store  configuration.

+

Remote stores only have access to transfer slips made at the local store, while Headquarters can find slips made at any store (assuming Store Exchanges have been completed).

+

To search for a transfer slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find Slip field above your transfer history list, enter a search keyword:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

Slip #:

+		 +

Enter the slip number

+
+

Slip Date:

+		 +

Enter in mm/dd/yyyy or mm/yyyy format, including slashes, Example: 10/05/2005 finds all slips made on October 5; 10/2005 finds all slips made in October

+
+

Associate:

+		 +

Enter the Associate login name

+
+

Serial #:

+		 +

Enter an item serial number that was recorded on slip

+
+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +
    2. +
+

All matching slips are listed in the Find window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm and select the correct slip or select from other options:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Highlight a slip and double-click, press <Enter>, or choose Select Slip.

    +
    • +
+

The slip is displayed and all normal options to copy, reverse, or reprint are available.

+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Select Advanced Find to narrow your search to a specific field or specify other search criteria and search again

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add New Slip to initiate a new transfer

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Notes

+
    +
  • +

    To search for slips currently on hold, you must first display the held slip list.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    You can also locate transfer slips by running a transfer report and then QuickZoom to view the slips.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Transfer overview

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_vendor.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_vendor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b989482 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_vendor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,157 @@ + + + + + + +Search for a Vendor + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Vendor

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Vendor Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

To search for a vendor:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find Vendor field above your vendor list, enter a search keyword or keywords:

    +
    2. +
+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keyword

+		 +

Notes

+
+

Company:

+		 +

Enter one or more words in company name.

+
+

Vendor Code:

+		 +

Enter the entire vendor code.

+
+

Name:

+		 +

Enter last or first name of vendor contact.

+
+

Phone:

+		 +

Dashes and area code not required.

+
+

ZIP Code:

+		 +

Enter the full zip code. To ensure that phone numbers including the same digits are not matched, select ZIP as the search field. See Advanced Find option below.

+
+

(Pro) Custom Field

+		 +

Your custom named fields.

+
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Find (magnifying glass icon) or press <Enter>.

    +

    All matching records are listed in the Find window. Note: If searching by company name from a vendor lookup field on a document or item record and one unique matching record is found, it is immediately listed in the field and the Find window is not displayed.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the Find window, you can confirm and select the correct record or narrow your search:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Highlight a record and double-click, press <Enter>, or choose Select Item.

    +
    • +
+

If searching from a lookup field, the vendor is listed. Other wise, the vendor form is opened.

+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Select Advanced Find to narrow your search to a specific field or specify other search criteria and search again

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add New to add a new vendor

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Go to Vendor List to display your full vendor list

    +
    • +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize the columns in the Find window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_voucher.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_voucher.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e31f830 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_find_voucher.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + +Search for a Voucher + + + + + + + + + + + +

Search for a Voucher

+

Sort a List | Filter a List | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are a couple ways of searching for a receiving voucher:

+ +

To search for a receipt in sales history:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Begin typing keywords in the Search field above the list.

    +
    3. +
+

Voucher Search

+
    +
  • +

    If you know the voucher number or vendor's invoice number, enter it. This is usually the fastest way to find a voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also search by vendor name, associate that made the voucher, or any other voucher keyword. The more unique the search keyword, the fewer search results will be returned.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To search by the date the voucher was made, enter the date in mm/dd or mm/dd/yyyy format, including the slashes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If recorded on the voucher, you can search by item serial number.

    +
    • +
  • +

    As you type, the list is instantly filtered to display only matching vouchers. Note how the filter button now indicates the list is showing Search Results and the number of records found is shown at the bottom of the list. In this case, typing "renee" returned 11 vouchers made by Renee (not all shown).

    +
    • +
+

Voucher Search

+
    +
  1. +

    If no results are found, use the backspace key on your keyboard to go back and re-enter new characters.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the voucher you wish to work with and then click Show Details or choose an appropriate task from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    To search for a voucher currently on hold, you must first display the held voucher list.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Edit a voucher

+

Enter Vendor Billing Information

+

Reverse and correct a voucher

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_hdi_dataentry.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_hdi_dataentry.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9efacc4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_hdi_dataentry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +basic_hdi_dataentry + + + + + + + + +

Entering or Editing Data: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic. and has been hidden

+ +

Enter data in a field

+

Add a record

+

Import data

+

List items on documents

+

Use scanners and bar codes

+ +

Use custom fields

+ +

Edit records

+

Edit documents

+

Reverse history documents

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_hdi_navigate.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_hdi_navigate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..599a51a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_hdi_navigate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +basic_hdi_navigate + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale Program: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Use the Retail Navigator

+

Use the menus and tool bars

+

Customize the tool bars

+

Use a mouse/touchscreen

+

Use keyboard shortcuts

+

View or switch between open windows

+

Work with lists and forms

+

Filter lists

+

Sort lists

+

Customize list columns

+

Search for records

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_copy.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_copy.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6371415 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_copy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + +Copy a Document + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Document

+

Find a Document | Edit a Document | Reverse History Documents

+

 

+

Copying a previously saved document is sometimes the fastest way to create a new document, especially if you want to list the same items, costs, prices, customer or vendor, etc.

+

See examples of when you might use this procedureClick to display a popup topic

+

(Pro with multiple stores) Headquarters can copy documents originally made at other stores. Remote stores are limited to viewing and copying documents made at their own store.

+

To copy a document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight/display the document to be copied in the appropriate document list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy from the I Want To menu (or from the window toolbar in some areas).

    +
    3. +
+

A new document is created with most of the same information as the original. See the note below for what is not copied.

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the new document, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
+

You can add or delete items, change quantities, costs, or prices, and edit other fields as needed.

+
    +
  1. +

    If making a receipt or customer order, take payment or a deposit, and give change (refund), as applicable.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Print/Save the document.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The following information is not copied from the original document:

    +
    • +
  • + +
    • +
  • +

    If an item listed on the original document has been deleted from inventory, the deleted item is removed from the copy automatically. Changes to an item's description or other information in inventory will not affect copying.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You cannot copy a held document, a Pay Out receipt, or a deposit receipt.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_copyexamples.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_copyexamples.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c81fd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_copyexamples.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +Copy Documents: Examples + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy Documents: Examples

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

Examples of when you might want to copy a document:

+
    +
  • +

    A customer is returning merchandise. Copying the original sales receipt and changing the quantities to negative for the return ensures you refund the same amount as the customer originally paid. It also helps verify the payment method, items, quantities, dates, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You need to return merchandise to a vendor. Copying the original receiving voucher ensures that you list the same items at the same cost as originally paid. Delete any items not being returned from the copy before saving.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You frequently order and receive the same items from the same vendor. Copying a previous purchase order and/or receiving voucher is a fast way to make a new document with the same information. Just edit the items, quantities, costs, and applicable freight/fees, etc. as needed after making the copy.

    +
    • +
  • +

    An error was discovered on a previously made history document. You reversed the original document and now want to copy and edit it to make a new corrected document.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_edit.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_edit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aa7769f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_edit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + +Reverse, Copy and Correct a History Document + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse, Copy and Correct a History Document

+

Edit a Document | Copy a Document  

+

 

+

Editing of saved history documents is limited to certain informational fields. However, if uneditable errors are discovered the entire document can be corrected by using a reverse, copy and correct procedure as described here.

+

This is a general procedure. Use the links on this page to see specific information for your situation.

+

To correct a history document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Reverse the original document.

    +
    2. +
+

Reversing updates history, inventory, and any referenced order documents. In the case of a sales receipt, payments are canceled/credited to the customer. How?

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the original (reversed) document again.

    +
    2. +
+

The original document is marked Reversed in the status field (displayed in the document history list).

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Copy <document> from the window toolbar.

    +
    2. +
+

A new document of the same type is started, with most of the same information as the original. Read more about what is not copied here.

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the copy as necessary to correct the error.

    +
    2. +
+

You can add or delete items, change costs, prices, or quantities, and edit other information fields as needed before saving.

+
    +
  1. +

    If a receipt, record payment in the usual manner, typically by the same method as the original.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save & Print.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

(Pro multi-store) Reversing of documents at remote stories is allowed only until the document has been sent to Headquarters.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Reverse a sales receipt

+

Reverse a receiving voucher

+

Reverse an adjustment memo

+

Reverse a transfer slip

+

Cancel or hold a document in progress

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_reversing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_reversing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e68562 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_historydocs_reversing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + +Reverse a History Document + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse a History Document

+

Find a Document | Copy a Document | Edit a Document

+

 

+

Note: This is a general procedure for reversing documents. See the related links at the end of the topic to learn more about the effect of reversing specific document types.

+

 

+

Reversing a history document has the opposite effect on inventory of the original. For example, if the original document was a sales receipt that subtracted items from inventory, then reversing it adds the items back to inventory. It does this by creating a new reversing document. In the case of a sales receipt, the reversing document is a return receipt.

+

To reverse a history document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight/display the document to be reversed in the applicable history list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Reverse <document type> from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    The Reversing Document dialog is displayed. If necessary, select your name from the Associate field drop-down list and select OK.

    +
    4. +
+

If necessary, a new, corrected document can then be made as described here.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The reversing document with your name is automatically created and added to the history list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When completed, the original document will be flagged Reversed in the Status field and the new document that was created will be marked Reversing. The Status field is displayed in the history list of each document type.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the reversed document references an order document, the fill status and balances of the order document are updated to reflect the change, provided it has not been deleted.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If an item previously deleted from inventory is included on the document being reversed, Point of Sale automatically adds the item back to inventory. Learn more Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) The reversal of history documents at a remote store is allowed only until the document has been sent to Headquarters.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software and if the original document has already been sent to QuickBooks Desktop, then the reversing document is also sent and posts in the normal manner for that document type (for example, as a return receipt or return voucher.) These new records and account entries in QuickBooks Desktop cancel the effect of the original document. The original entries are not edited or removed. If the original document has not yet been sent, then both are flagged "Do Not Send" and there will be no entries made in your financial software for the transaction.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Reverse sales receipt

+

Reverse a receiving voucher

+

Reverse an adjustment memo

+

Reverse a transfer slip

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_holding_a_document.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_holding_a_document.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4fdbb55 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_holding_a_document.htm @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ + + + + + + +Cancel or Hold a Transaction + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Cancel or Hold a Transaction in Progress

+

Find a Document | Edit Documents | Reverse Documents

+

 

+

A sales receipt or other transactional document can be canceled or put on hold at any time before saving.

+

Exception: Sales receipts with authorized credit, debit/ATM, or gift card payments cannot be put on hold. See note below.

+
    +
  • +

    Canceling permanently discards the document; no record is kept and inventory is not affected.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Holding a document temporarily saves it in its present state. Holding a document does not affect inventory quantities. Later, you can return to a held document, complete and save it, at which time inventory will be updated.

    +
    • +
+

What would you like to do?

+

Cancel a transaction in progress Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Hold a transaction in progress Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

View or take a transaction off hold and complete it Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Placing a document on hold temporarily sets it aside. With a document on hold you can carry out other activities, make another document of the same type, run reports, or even exit from Point of Sale. There is no time limit for how long a document can be left on hold.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If changes are made to your sales tax rates, item prices, a customer's discount, etc. while a document is on hold, that document will not automatically reflect the new information when it is unheld. The unheld document retains the original information. If necessary, delete and re-list the item(s) and/or customer in order to reflect changes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The document number field on held documents is temporarily changed to "Held". A new document number is assigned when the document is taken off hold and completed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant or Gift Card Services, you cannot hold authorized credit card or gift card sales receipts. You will have to cancel/void the payment first. When canceling a credit card sales, the customers account is never charged. When canceling a gift card receipt, Point of Sale contacts the gift card service to update the card balance.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Once authorized, debit/ATM receipts cannot be held or canceled. This is because the cardholder's account has already been debited for the sale amount.

    +
    • +
  • +

    In a multi-workstation environment, a held document can be accessed and unheld from any workstation on the network.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_import_templates.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_import_templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c3aaf6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_import_templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + +Importing Print Templates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Importing Print Templates

+

Specifying Templates in Preferences

+

From time to time it may be necessary to get updated print templates to meet legal requirements for printed documents in your area or to more effectively reflect your business practices. Only Pro-level users of Point of Sale can create their own custom templates, but all users may at times have access to updated templates through Point of Sale Pro Advisors, Retail Service Providers, or Intuit technical support. This option allows you to import those templates into Point of Sale.

+

To import print templates:

+
    +
  1. +

    Obtain and save the print template file to your computer. Print template files end in the .xml file extension.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Utilities > Import Print Templates.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Import on the message displayed.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Browse to the template file in the Import Document Templates window and select Open.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select the new template(s) in your workstation Documents & Printers preferences.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing Overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_inv_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_inv_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95fcaa2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_inv_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Inventory

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to inventory.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General:

+		 +

 

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Toggle between list and form (edit Item)

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Form: Open the Find window for the active field (vendor, department)

+

List: Find item

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Access list or drop-down lists

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Display I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print Tags

+
+

<Ctrl + n>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages, n = 1,2,3, etc.

+
+

<Spacebar>

+		 +

Select/clear check box fields

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Style Grid (Pro):

+		 +

 

+
+

<Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Navigate between style grid cells

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept cell entry and move to next cell or bypass empty cell (when data entry is allowed)

+
+

<Ctrl+Home>

+		 +

Go to most upper-left cell in grid

+
+

<Ctrl+End>

+		 +

Go to most lower-right cell in grid

+
+

<Ctrl+>

+		 +

Go to first displayed cell in row

+
+

<Ctrl+>

+		 +

Go to last displayed cell in row

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_item_identifiers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_item_identifiers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9424a26 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_item_identifiers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Item Identifiers + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Identifiers

+

UPCs | Alternate Lookups | Bar Codes in Point of Sale

+

 

+

The term item identifiers refers to the Item #, Universal Product Code (UPC), and Alternate Lookup values for items in inventory. Item identifiers are used for looking up and listing items on documents, and for other program functions as described below.

+

 

+

Item Numbers

+

Every item (except special order items) has an Item # associated with it in inventory. You can edit the item number but cannot delete it. Valid entries are 1 through 999,999, 999. Item numbers above 999,999 are not recommended as the bar code would be too large to fit on the default tag templates.

+

Item numbers are used to print bar codes on tags in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

image\tagsample.gif

+

(Pro) If you prefer, you can use Print Designer to make bar codes printed from Point of Sale to reflect UPC or alternate lookup values instead.

+

 

+

Universal Product Codes (UPC)

+

Manufacturer-supplied tags with UPCs can be used to lookup and list items on documents, provided the UPC has been recorded in the UPC field on the item record in inventory. UPCs must be unique and can contain numbers only.

+

The UPC field on an item record can be used to record UPC-E, UPC-A, EAN, or similar identifiers up to 18 digits. Point of Sale will convert UPC formats of less than 13 digits (such as UPC-A and UPC-E) to a 13-digit form using a standard conversion algorithm.

+

Record UPC numbers manually or scan the preprinted tags from your vendors into the UPC field.

+

Important: Do not scan bar codes created in Point of Sale from the item number into the UPC field.

+

Likewise, if a vendor provides alphanumeric bar codes that are not true UPC codes, do not enter those codes into the UPC field. UPC codes have a required format, and other code formats are not accepted. Consider using the Alternate Lookup field for these codes instead (see below).

+

 

+

Alternate Lookups

+

An Alternate Lookup (ALU) is an optional field in inventory that can be used to lookup, list, and print items on documents. The use of Alternate Lookups is particularly well suited to retailers that do not tag merchandise or those that want to print documents, such as purchase orders, with alphanumeric product identifiers (such as a vendors part number).

+

This field can contain text descriptions, catalog/part numbers, alphanumeric entries, abbreviated names, duplications of the Item Name field, etc., anything that allows you to quickly and positively identify a unique item.

+

Alternate Lookups must be unique for each item for which they are defined.

+

To be effectively used to list items on documents, each Alternate Lookup entry:

+
    +
  • +

    Should be a unique character string that can be easily remembered by cashiers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Should not duplicate any items Item # or UPC code.

    +
    • +
  • +

    It is suggested that they start with a letter rather than a number. This helps ensure that Alternate Lookups do not duplicate an item or UPC number. If you have an Alternate Lookup of 1234 and item number of 1234, both will be returned as matches when you enter 1234 in the item lookup field on a document.

    +
    • +
+

To print documents that list your Alternate Lookup values, select document templates that have the "-ALU" suffix. Templates can be selected on the Print Options page in workstation preferences.

+

 

+

For more information about item identifiers, search the help index using the keywords UPC, Alternate Lookup, or Item Number.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_iwanttomenus.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_iwanttomenus.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae8836f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_iwanttomenus.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +About the I Want To Menus + + + + + + + + + + +

About the "I Want To" Menus

+

 Work with Lists | Work with Forms

+

 

+

The I Want To menus provides you quick access to the various tasks related to your current window. The options on this menu vary depending on what screen you are currently working in.

+
    +
  • +

    To perform a task, click the I Want To button and then select a task.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customize the navigation toolbar

+

Switch between tasks

+

Point of Sale basics

+

Keyboard Shortcuts

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_layso_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_layso_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eaf4e7c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_layso_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,211 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Customer Orders

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to customer orders (layaways, sales orders, and work orders).

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F> 

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup fields, select from associated list

+

From date fields: display calendar

+

From drop-down list fields: display choices

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit listed item (highlight item first)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save order

+
+

<Ctrl+F2>

+		 +

Change tax location

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Refund deposit

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Select from Item List

+
+

<Ctrl+F5>

+		 +

Select from Customer List

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

View payment/deposit history

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

Sell Customer Order items

+
+

<Ctrl+F8>

+		 +

Open cash drawer

+
+

<Ctrl+F9>

+		 +

Add special order item

+
+

<Ctrl+F11>

+		 +

Modify Shipping information

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of customer order

+
+

Customer Order lists only:

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Find a customer order

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_letter_templates.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_letter_templates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0a36920 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_letter_templates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + +Manage Letter Templates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Letter Templates

+

Write Letters | Office Integration Overview | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Microsoft Word templates are used to create letters to your customers or vendors. The templates allow you to include information from your customer, vendor, sales, and purchasing records.

+

A variety of letter templates are provided for your use. Use this procedure to customize these templates or create your own.

+

To create or modify a letter template:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the I Want To menu of a record, document or list, select Write Letters Manage Letter Templates.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    From the drop-down list, choose the letter type you wish to modify or create.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To modify an existing template, select the template from the list and select Modify Template at the bottom of the window. A preview of the selected template is displayed.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

To create a template, select New Template and enter a unique name for it.

+

The template is opened in Microsoft Word. In Word 2003 and earlier, the Point of Sale fields toolbar floats at the top of the document. In Word 2007, select Add Ins from the ribbon at the top of the screen to display the fields toolbar.

+

+
    +
  1. +

    Type or edit the letter, inserting Point of Sale data fields as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

To insert a data field: Place your cursor where you wish the information to appear in the letter and then select a field from the fields toolbar.

+

If placing fields next to each other, such as title, first, and last name, add spaces or punctuation between them as necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Save the document in Microsoft Word.

    +
    2. +
+

The template is saved as a Word document with the .doc file extension. Do not change the file extension when saving.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the template when writing letters.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can also select Modify Template or Add New while writing a letter.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The fields toolbar will only contain fields for the letter type selected, i.e., you cannot modify a customer letter template and add vendor fields to it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Word 2003 or earlier: If you close the Point of Sale fields toolbar , it can reopened by selecting View Toolbars Point of Sale <letter type> Fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If upgrading from a previous version in which you had created custom letter templates, you will need to copy your custom templates to the Point of Sale 10.0 folder to make them available. The default folder in which templates are stored is:

    +
    • +
+

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intuit\Point of Sale n.n\Letter Templates

+

Windows Vista: C:\Users\All Users\Intuit\Point of Sale n.n\Letter Templates

+

Where n.n = Point of Sale version number. In Windows Vista, you may have to change your settings to view hidden folders to access these files.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_edit_mode.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_edit_mode.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..628fe6f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_edit_mode.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + +Edit or Add Records in a List + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit or Add Records in a List

+

Filter Lists | Sort Lists | List Overview

+

 

+

This topic applies only to department, vendor, and employee lists.

+

 

+

With list edit mode turned on, you can make changes in editable fields or add new records directly in a list, moving field-to-field in a single row or between rows, similar to working in a spreadsheet.

+

Technical Note: How editing in a Point of Sale list differs from a spreadsheetClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

To enable/disable list editing:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your record list and, if necessary, add columns for the values to be edited .

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the window toolbar, click the small down arrow next to the Edit button and then click Turn List Edit On.

    +
    3. +
+

 List Edit

+
    +
  1. +

    Make edits by navigating field-to-field and entering new values.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    When done making edits, repeat Step 2, selecting Turn List Edit Off.

    +
    2. +
+

Leaving the list in any manner also turns off list edit mode.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    To select a record (row) or field for editing, touch or click once, or use the arrow keys to navigate between fields. Immediately begin typing to make an entry in an empty field or to overwrite an existing entry. Click a second time to edit an existing entry character-by-character. Press <Enter> or navigate out of a field to accept the entry and move to the next field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your changes are automatically saved when you navigate out of a row; you do not have to select Save. To cancel the edits made in a row, select Cancel from the bottom toolbar before navigating out of the row.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can select multiple rowsClick to display a popup topic for certain group operations, such as printing, exporting, or deleting.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you need to make the same change to many records (such as updating an area code or ZIP code), sort or filter the list to display just those records. Enter the new value in the first record, then highlight it and press <Ctrl+C> to copy the value. Use your up and down arrow keys to move to the same cell in all the other records and press <Ctrl+V> to paste the updated value.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Edit a single record

+

Edit a document

+

Edit item styles in inventory

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_multiselect.htm.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_multiselect.htm.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dae44ee --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_multiselect.htm.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +basic_list_multiselect + + + + + + + + + + +

How do I select multiple records in a list?

+

 

+ +

Popup topic. Has been hidden.

+ +

Use these procedures to select multiple records in a list before selecting a task to perform on them. You may want to filter or sort your list first so that the desired records are grouped together.

+

To select records that are not grouped:

+
    +
  • +

    Hold down the <Ctrl> key on your keyboard and click each record.

    +
    • +
+

To select a series of grouped record:

+
    +
  • +

    Click and hold your left mouse button down on the first record, drag your cursor to the last record, and then release.

    +
    • +
+

-OR-

+
    +
  • +

    Hold down the <Shift> key while clicking the first and then the last record.

    +
    • +
+

Note: Multiple record selection is not supported by touchscreen or keyboard.

+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_rigtclick_menus.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_rigtclick_menus.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a49abc5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_rigtclick_menus.htm @@ -0,0 +1,31 @@ + + + + + + +basic_list_rigtclick_menus + + + + + + + + + + +

Right-click Pop-up Menus in Record Lists

+ +

Popup topic; has been hidden.

+ +

Right-click in any record list to display a pop-up menu of frequently used commands, such as for sorting the list, finding or adding a record, switching to the record form for editing, viewing history, etc.

+

The options available in the popup menu vary by area.

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_scroll_indicator.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_scroll_indicator.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e24565a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_list_scroll_indicator.htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + +basic_list_scroll_indicator + + + + + + + + + + +

List Scroll Indicator

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden in help

+ +

When scrolling through the records in a list, Point of Sale displays the current position so that you know when to stop. The scroll indicator displays the values in the currently sorted list column. Release the mouse button when the desired entry is displayed.

+

 

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listedit_technote.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listedit_technote.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..000248b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listedit_technote.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + +basic_listedit_technote + + + + + + + + + + +

Technical Note: List Edit Mode

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Making edits in a Point of Sale list is similar to working in a spreadsheet, but there is an important difference.

+

When you open a typical spreadsheet for editing, the program locks the entire spreadsheet and prevents a second user from accessing the spreadsheet until you have finished your edits and saved.

+

Because Point of Sale allows multiple workstations to access your company data simultaneously, it does not lock the records in the list when you enter list edit mode. You can move row to row (record to record) freely without locking out other workstations. Only when you actually begin editing a record is that one row (record) locked while you make your edits. As soon as you move out of the row, your changes are saved and the record freed again to other users.

+

This is why it is necessary to click in a field a second time to "activate" editing of that individual record character-by-character, even after list edit mode is enabled. Once you begin editing a record you can move field to field within the same row and you stay in active edit mode until you leave that row.

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listing_itemassembly.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listing_itemassembly.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a27542f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listing_itemassembly.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +List an Assembly Item on a Document + + + + + + + + + + +

List an Assembly Item on a Document

+

Assembly Item Overview | List Items on Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

An assembly item is a discrete item that can be listed on documents, such as sales receipts, in the normal manner.

+

When listing an assembly item:

+
    +
  • +

    The assembly item is listed, the individual component items are not

    +
    • +
  • +

    The assembly item price (defined in inventory) and tax code is automatically suggested

    +
    • +
  • +

    Normal item editing procedures are available

    +
    • +
  • +

    If necessary, an assembly item can be "broken" to free the component items for individual sale

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Edit listed items

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listing_uom.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listing_uom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c43ff3a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listing_uom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + +List Different Units of Measure on Documents + + + + + + + + + + + +

List Different Units of Measure on Documents

+

Unit of Measure Overview | List Items on Documents: Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

When listing items with multiple units of measure on documents the following rules apply:

+

 

+

+
    +
  • +

    If unique UPC or alternate lookup values are defined for each unit and you are scanning bar codes or entering those unique values, the unit corresponding to the value entered is automatically listed with its associated price or cost.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the item does not have a unique UPC or alternate lookup, your default sell-by (receipt or customer order) or order-by (PO or voucher) unit is listed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If default units are not defined, your base unit is listed. Learn more about base and default unitsClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can change the unit by clicking the Units button (on receipts and vouchers, shown above) or in the Unit of Measure field (PO, in item list) and selecting a different unit. PO Note: You may have to customize the columns in the item list if necessary to display this field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Quantities on the document reflect the selected unit. This may result in fractional quantities when the unit being sold is not the base unit. For example, if an item has bottles and case (12 bottles/case) defined as units, with bottle as the base unit, then with 15 bottles on-hand and listing a case on a receipt will show an on-hand quantity of 1.25.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Define multiple units of measure in inventory

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listingitemgroup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listingitemgroup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e021a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_listingitemgroup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +List a Group Item on a Document + + + + + + + + + + +

List a Group Item on a Document

+

Group Item Overview | List Items on Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

Once defined in inventory, a group item can be listed on any document except adjustment memos, though typically they are listed on sales receipts and customer orders to sell a collection of items and/or services, optionally at a discounted price.

+

To list a group item on a document:

+
    +
  • +

    Follow normal item listing procedures, scanning or entering the group item identifier, rather than the individual item identifiers.

    +
    • +
+

Listing the group item on a document adds all of the items included in the group to the document. This example shows a group (baseball package) listed on a sales receipt.

+

 

+

image\receiptgroup.gif

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The group item is at the top of the list in bold type, while the component items are displayed in contrasting row colors for easy identification.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The quantity of each item in the group and the group price is pulled from inventory. The price of each component item is proportionally discounted so that the sum of extended item prices equals the group price.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Editing the quantity of the group proportionally changes the respective quantities of the included items. Deleting the group item, deletes all component items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can edit the individual group items on the receipt in the normal fashion; to change quantity, price, give additional discounts, etc. Editing a component item does not trigger a recalculation of other items to maintain the group price.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The printed sales receipt can include the group price only, the individual item prices only (default), or both group and item prices. Set this preference on the Sales page of company preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can list additional unrelated items on the same receipt, as necessary.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_liststats.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_liststats.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d368c2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_liststats.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + + +View a List Summary (Basic Statistics) + + + + + + + + + + + + +

View a List Summary (Basic Statistics)

+

Work with Lists | Filter Lists

+

 

+

The list summary, available for each Point of Sale list, displays basic statistics allowing you to quickly and easily obtain key information about your business without having to run a report. For example, while viewing your item list you can see at a glance your total number of items and the total on-hand quantity, cost, and price for those items.

+

Other Point of Sale list summaries include statistics relevant to that particular area.

+

To view a list summary:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the list for which you wish to view the summary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make sure the list View drop-down is set to show all records.

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

Filter the list to show only certain records. The statistics displayed reflect the currently set list filter.

+
    +
  1. +

    Observe the list summary field in the status bar at the bottom of the window. In this example, the number of items in the item list (294) is the default statistic:

    +
    2. +
+

List Statistics

+

Where more than one statistic
+value is available:List Statistics Popup

+
    +
  • +

    Hover your mouse over the displayed statistic to display a popup of the complete list summary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the small down arrow on the status bar to change the default statistic displayed in the status bar.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Two security rights can be used to limit an employee's ability to view list statistics. In the General area, the View List Statistics right can block all rights to this feature or the View Cost Fields right can block viewing of cost-related statistics only.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Statistics are updated when a list is refreshed (exit/re-enter, re-sort, re-filter, save, etc.). Statistics are not dynamically updated when making changes in list edit mode.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A Statistics report, with item and customer list information, is available to add to your Dashboard.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When going to your item list to select items for a document, the statistics displayed reflect only the items for which a document quantityClick to display a popup topic has been entered.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) On-hand quantity information in list statistics do not reflect available or committed quantities. If using multiple units of measure, quantity information shown is for your base unit only.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Statistics are for the local store only.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_manage_filters.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_manage_filters.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4afaa36 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_manage_filters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage Saved List Filters + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Saved List Filters

+

Filter Criteria Overview | Filter Lists

+

 

+

This topic does not apply to Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists.

+

 

+

You can rename, delete, or revise your saved filters and change the order in which they appear on the filter drop-down list.

+

To manage saved filters:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Manage Filters from the filter drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
+

The Manage Filters dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select one of your saved filters, and then select an action:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Rename enter a new name for this filter

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit opens the saved filter criteria; edit the criteria as necessary and select Save

    +
    • +
  • +

    Delete to remove the filter view from your filter drop-down list

    +
    • +
  • +

    Move Up/Down to change the position the filter view appears on your drop-down list

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Sort a list

+

Locate a record or document

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_memo_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_memo_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..35c3c8c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_memo_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Adjustment Memos + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Adjustment Memos

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to adjustment memos.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General

+		 +

 

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup field, select from associated list

+

From drop-down list fields: display list of choices

+

From date field: display calendar

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit item quantity or cost, highlight item first

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save memo without printing

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Save and print memo

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

Go to Adjustment History list

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

View held memos

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of memo

+
+

Memo list only

+		 +

 

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Find saved memo

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Reverse memo

+
+

 

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_merge_docsaffected.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_merge_docsaffected.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6552302 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_merge_docsaffected.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Merge Records - Documents Affected + + + + + + + + +

Merge Records - Documents Affected

+

 

+

This information applies to the Documents Affected confirmation window displayed when merging items, customers, or vendors.

+

What's Important about this window?

+

When merging items, customers, or vendors. and the record to be removed is included on previously made documents, this window lists the number of various documents that will be affected.

+
    +
  • +

    The removed item, customer, or vendor is replaced with the retained item, customer, or vendor on all documents appearing in this list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The history of the removed record is merged with the history of the retained record.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a removed item has a different average unit cost than the retained item, Point of Sale generates an adjustment memo to update your current inventory value. Item cost, as recorded on the original history documents, is not recalculated.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If merging assembly or group items, and the removed item is also a component item of another assembly or group, it is replaced in that assembly or group with the retained item. The confirmation window will include a list of affected assembly or group items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Updated item, customer, or vendor records are sent to the remote store(s). However, history documents sent from a remote store to Headquarters that are updated as a result of a merge at Headquarters are not sent back to the remote store. The remote store history will continue to reflect the records in place at the time the original document was made.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updated documents resulting from a merge in Point of Sale are not resent to QuickBooks financial software and customer and vendor records in QuickBooks are not merged, though you do have the option of deleting or making them inactive in QuickBooks (recommended). All new transactions will be recorded in QuickBooks for the customer or vendor you selected to keep.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_messages.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_messages.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e916a43 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_messages.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Messages + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Messages

+

 

+

The Message board, displayed on the Home Page and accessible from the receipts, inventory, receiving, and customer areas, allows you to leave notes for yourself or other employees. Point of Sale will also post messages for you when something needs your attention, such as inventory reminders.

+


+Messages can be displayed in "sticky note" format or as a list and are searchable. System notes, such as inventory reminders, will contain a link to take you to the screen on which you can review or complete the task.

+
    +
  • +

    To add a new message, click new message icon at the top of the Message board.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To search for a message, begin typing a search keyword in the Search message box. Point of Sale dynamically locates messages with matching characters as you type and displays them. Clear the Search box to see all messages again.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click one of the icons to the right of the Search message box to change the display to list format or the stickies format, which is the default. The list format allows you to see more messages at one time.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To delete a message, move your mouse over the message, then click the Remove link that appears in the lower right corner.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the Minimize feature at the bottom to close or open the Message view.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Note, Comment, and Instruction Fields

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_nav_popup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_nav_popup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..819b7a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_nav_popup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +Navigator Popup + + + + + + + + + +

Navigator

+ +

In-help popup.

+ +

 

+

The Navigator provides one-click access to the program areas that help you complete your most common retail tasks, as well as to reports. Click a task icon to go to that program area to complete the task

+

Navigator.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_navigator.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_navigator.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..956bf3e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_navigator.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Use the Home Page + + + + + + + + + + +

Use the Home Page

+

Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

The Point of Sale Home Page provides easy access to common tasks, reports, preferences, and more. To return to the Home Page at any time, click the Home button, located at the top left of all Point of Sale task windows.

+

The main features of the Home Page include the following:

+
    +
  • +

    The Navigator. The tasks and workflows on the Home Page Navigator reflect how you use Point of Sale to run your business. To begin any task, or to open a feature, click its icon.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Windows drop-down menu (at the top left of the Home Page). The Windows drop-down menu shows a list of recently visited windows and in-process tasks. To continue working in a particular window, click the Windows drop-down arrow and select it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Task buttons (to the left of the Navigator). As you move to different tasks within Point of Sale, these buttons change to give you easy access to related tasks and features. To add or remove task buttons, right-click anywhere in the section and click Customize buttons.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Message Board (to the right of the Navigator). Use the Message Board to leave notes to yourself or other employees. Point of Sale also posts messages, such as inventory reminders, when something needs your attention. To find a specific message, enter a search term in the Search messages field.

    +
    • +
+

You can also:

+
    +
  • +

    Click the menus at the top of the screen to perform additional tasks.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the Quick Find Search field at the top of the Home Page to find a customer, item, or sales document.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the cloud icon to sync to Mobile, set sync preferences, and see your activity.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the monitor icon at the top right to expand your screen view. Click again to decrease the view.

    +
    • +
+

Note: The icons and activities available on the Home Page will vary depending on the level of Point of Sale you have purchased, the features you are using, and your assigned security rights.

+

Note: If you turn off a feature in company preferences, the related menu choices and icons are removed from the Home Page.   

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize the navigation toolbar

+

Home Page Dashboard

+

Point of Sale Basics

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_officeintegration.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_officeintegration.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be789ca --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_officeintegration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + +Office integration + + + + + + + + + + + +

Office Integration

+

 

+

Point of Sale supports data import/export with Microsoft Excel, letter writing with Microsoft Word, e-mailing of documents via your default Windows e-mail client, and creation of targeted customer lists for use in e-mail marketing campaigns.

+

 

+

Click a link below for more information on a specific feature.

+

You can:

+
    +
  • +

    Import or export your Point of Sale list data with Excel

    +
    • +
  • +

    Export reports to Excel

    +
    • +
  • +

    Write letters to customers or vendors with Word using Point of Sale templates and your company file information

    +
    • +
  • +

    E-mail Point of Sale documents to vendors or customers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Create targeted customer lists for use in e-mail marketing campaigns and export them to Excel or send them directly to an integrated marketing partner

    +
    • +
+

The use of Excel and Word features requires that you have a supported version of Excel and/or Word installed on the workstation performing the task. Refer to the system requirements in the Point of Sale User Guide (launches PDF version). You must have Acrobat Reader installed on your machine.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_openwindows.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_openwindows.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e00a4ae --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_openwindows.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + +Switch Between Tasks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Switch Between Tasks

+

Home Page

+

 

+

There may be times when you are working on one task in Point of Sale and you need to do another, but you aren't done with the first.

+

For example:

+
    +
  • +

    You're making a purchase order but need to check inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You're about to run a report in the Report Center when a customer walks up ready to be rung up.

    +
    • +
+

You can switch to another area to complete a second task and then switch back to the original task to complete it.

+

Note: These instructions only apply to windows with the Switch To drop-down arrow. Most of the time, you can start another task simply by selecting it from the Home page or the main menu. When you want to return to the first task, click the Windows button at the top left of the Home page and select the appropriate window.

+

To switch between tasks:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the top left of your current window, select the Switch To drop-down arrow.

    +
    2. +
+

A list of tasks in progress is displayed (Make a Sale is always displayed even if you don't have a receipt in progress).

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the task or document you wish to switch to.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When done with the second task, use Switch To again to return to your original task.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Only one task in a give area can be on the Switch To list at one time, for example, one receipt, one PO, and so on.

    +
    • +
  • +

    It is a good practice to close tasks you are not actively working on. On transaction documents, you can put the document on Hold. On other documents and records, you can save them at any time and return to them later to finish.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Some actions, such as editing and saving some company preferences, require that all areas be closed before the action can be completed.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Keyboard Navigation

+

Mouse & Touchscreen Navigation

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_pi_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_pi_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f44ec6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_pi_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,182 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Physical Inventory

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable while taking physical inventory (PI).

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

PI Count Window:

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Move focus between toolbars and item list

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move focus between fields, toolbars, tabs, and buttons

+
+

<Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Scroll through item list

+

With focus on tabs, change tabbed page

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept count entry and move to next item

+

With focus on button, selects button or opens button submenu

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Find item

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Update PI

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Exit the PI, discarding any counts not updated

+
+

Add Counts Window:

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move between fields and buttons

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept item entry and move to either item quantity field or next item (user-defined)

+

With focus on button, select button

+
+

<>

+		 +

Select radio button option

+

Scroll through item list

+
+

<Space>

+		 +

Select radio button option

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Exit Add Counts window, discard entered counts

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_pm_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_pm_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..73698b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_pm_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Price Manager + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Price Manager

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to Price Manager.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Switch between using toolbars and item list

+
+

<Up/Down Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Scroll through item list

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept entered price and move to next field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Find item

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Update prices

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print markdown tags (select before updating)

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Exit Price Manager, discarding any price changes not updated

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_po_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_po_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c52017 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_po_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Purchase Orders

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to purchase orders.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Form: Open the Find window for the active field

+

List: Find PO

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup field, select from associated list

+

From drop-down list fields: display choices

+

From date fields: display calendar

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit item information, highlight item first

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save PO

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F9>

+		 +

Add special order item

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of PO

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_prefs_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_prefs_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a083df6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_prefs_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Preferences

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to preferences.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move between tool bars, preferences tree, and individual settings

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move up/down in preferences tree

+

Move between selections in a settings group

+
+

<Letter>

+		 +

(With focus on preferences tree) Displays the next page in the tree beginning with the entered letter

+
+

<>

+		 +

With focus on tabs, change tabbed page

+
+

<Space>

+		 +

Select/clear checkboxes

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

With focus on button, select button

+

In lists, accept entry and move to next field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Display drop-down menu associated with the current preference setting, if available

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Cycle focus between text menus and origin (preference page, tree, etc,)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_print_selecttemplate.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_print_selecttemplate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..36072a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_print_selecttemplate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +Select Print Template + + + + + + + + + + + +

Selecting a Print Template

+

Printing Overview | Printing Preferences | Printing Tags

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Select Print Template window. Access this window by selecting Preview Template on a Print dialog when printing a document, tag, or label. Your printing preferences must be set to display the print dialog.

+

 

+

Your default print template for each document or tag is set in workstation preferences. This window allows you to preview and switch to another template at the time of printing when necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a template in the list of templates on the left to see a preview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose Select to use the currently displayed template for this printing.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If necessary, change the printer to match the template selected on the Print dialog.

    +
    4. +
+

You can make this the default template on this workstation by selecting the Make this the default... check box at the bottom of the window. Make sure the template you select matches your installed printer on this workstation. Your printing preferences will be updated to always use this template until you change it again.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printdocuments.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printdocuments.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d92a182 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printdocuments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing Lists or Documents + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Lists or Documents

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Printing Overview | FAQs

+ +

 

+

Use these procedure to print record lists or individual documents.

+

To print a non-document list: (item, customer, vendor, department, and employee)

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the list you wish you print.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you want to print only a subset of the list, filter the list to display only the records you want included. To print the entire list, make sure the filter is set to display all records.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the File menu, select Print.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

You can also run list reports, which provide greater flexibility in customizing or exporting the printed output.

+

To print documents:

+

Transactional documents (receipts, vouchers, and memos, and transfer slips) are normally printed at the time you save them. Use this procedure to reprint those documents from your history lists or to print order documents.

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight (list) or display (form) the document you want to print.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print from the File menu.

    +
    3. +
+

Most documents also have a Print or Reprint button at the bottom of the document window, which can be selected instead.

+
    +
  1. +

    If presented with a Print Document dialog (a workstation preference), you can:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Change the printer you want to use if necessary

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify a print quantity

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Preview to view the document or Print to send it to your printer

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you choose to print a receipt, voucher, or memo as you are creating it (but before you have saved it), the document will be both printed and saved.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can order tags, labels, and receipt paper for printing directly from QuickBooks Desktop. Refer to the ordering supplies topic.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The print templates and printer specified in workstation preferences determine what your printed documents look like.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) The default templates can be customized to meet your specific needs.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Compatible hardware list

+

Installing supported printers

+

Previewing printed documents

+

Running Point of Sale reports

+

Troubleshooting a receipt printer

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..819a298 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +basic_printing_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Printing: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Print lists or documents

+

Print price tags

+

Print customer labels

+ +

Print shipping labels

+ +

Print my employee list

+

Specify printing options

+

Add my logo to sales receipts

+ +

Customize printed documents and tags

+ +

Install a supported printer

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_logo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_logo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..64bfecd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_logo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + +Adding your Logo to Sales Documents + + + + + + + + + + + +

Adding your Logo to Sales Documents

+

Printing Overview | Print Designer | FAQs

+

 

+

You can easily add your store logo to printed sales receipts,  gift receipts, customer orders, and other documents. You can even add several logos to Point of Sale and then switch between them for seasonal or holiday purposes. Pro users can add different logos to different documents using Print Designer.

+

To add your logo to printed sales documents:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the General Store Info page from the left-side menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the check box for Use Image as Default Logo.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Specify.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    In the Images Collection window, select Add and browse for a graphic file. See notes below for file requirements.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Repeat to add additional logos. Choose the one logo you want printed on documents and choose Select.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select Save on the preference page.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Standard .BMP, .JPG, and .GIF file formats are supported. Note that some files with these extensions, such as those from some digital cameras, may contain extra file information that will prevent them from working in Point of Sale. If this occurs, use a graphics, paint, or photo application to open and re-save the file with a standard format. Tip: Test the file to see if it opens in Internet Explorer. If it does, it should work in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Logo colors must be RGB (not CMYK) and maximum 24-bit resolution.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Logo file size should not exceed 100 KB. Larger file sizes may slow printing. We recommend reducing color resolution or logo dimensions to reduce file size, if necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale will scale the graphic, if necessary, to fit in the allotted space on a document. Some loss in graphic quality may result when scaling. For best results, use a graphics application to size your logo to the recommended sizes:

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    40-column documents: 248 pixel maximum width

    +
    • +
  • +

    Letter-size documents: 381 pixel maximum width

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    The specified default logo is automatically added to your printed sales documents. Simply return here and change the default logo to print a different logo.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you use Print Designer to customize your printed document templates, you can change the size and position of the logo, use different logos for different documents, and add logos to other document types.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro with multiple stores) Each store can define their own logos.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_shippinglabels.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_shippinglabels.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..416f39b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_printing_shippinglabels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,270 @@ + + + + + + +Print Mailing or Shipping Labels + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Mailing or Shipping Labels

+

Printing Overview | Printing FAQs | Supported label styles/sizes

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can print mailing or shipping labels from your customer list, from individual customer records, and from the Customer Center.

+

(Pro) You can also print shipping labels from sales receipts and customer orders.

+

 

+

Print a Label for an Individual Customer

+

From the customer list, display the customer details. In the Addresses section, select one of the entered addresses from the drop-down list and then click Print Label.

+ +

With this option, you can print a mailing label for one, all, or a selected group of customers.

+ +

Step-by-step instructions Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Print Mailing Labels from the Customer Center

+

Printing labels from the Customer Center gives you the added advantage of being able to create a mailing campaign list filtered by customer record information and/or by sales data. Labels printed from the Customer Center always use the customers' billing addresses.

+

Step-by-step instructions Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+ +

Print Shipping Labels from a Sales Receipt or Customer Order (Pro)

+ +

You can print shipping labels from a receipt or customer order. If you use Shipping Manager, special considerations apply as explained below.

+ +

Directions Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Print Shipping Manager Labels (Pro)

+

If you use Shipping Manager to make shipments, a shipping label that includes tracking information and scannable bar code is automatically printed when entering the shipment.

+

Laser/inkjet and thermal printers are supported by Shipping Manager. The printer and options for Shipping Manager labels are set up in Shipping Manager, not in Point of Sale preferences. See Shipping Manager Overview and Setup.

+

The Zebra LP2844 thermal printer, a Point of Sale compatible printer that can print 4" x 6" shipping labels, is also ideal for use with Shipping Manager.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    A default label printing template and options can be specified on the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences. This selection does not apply to labels printed from Shipping Manager.

    +
    • +
  • +

    For information about ordering labels directly from QuickBooks Desktop, refer to the ordering supplies topic.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) A shipping label can be printed from any of the shipping addresses entered on the customer record. When shipping information is added to a sales receipt, the shipping information, including carrier and tracking number is printed on the receipt given the customer.

    +
    • +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Supported label styles and sizes

+

Print your customer list

+

Compatible label printers

+

Enter shipping information on sales receipts

+

Customize printed documents

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickadd_item.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickadd_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..29389e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickadd_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Quick Add a New Item While Creating a Document + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Quick Add a New Item While Creating a Document

+

Add a New Style

+

 

+

The Quick Add option is available from all documents except sales receipts and receiving vouchers. See Add a New Item While Creating a Document for instructions to add an item while making a receipt or voucher.

+

 

+

With Quick Add, you  enter only the basic item information needed to complete your current document quickly. Later, you should go to inventory and edit the item record, adding other information as needed. If speed in entering the new item is not required, we recommend you use the full add Item procedure instead, where all item information fields are available to complete at one time.

+

To Quick Add a new item from a document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Scan the item bar code in the Enter Items field on the document.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

Type the item name or a search string in the field and press Enter on your keyboard.

+

Technical Note: Enter a search string that you know isn't an item identifier for any existing item in your inventory. Do not click Find Items to the right of the Enter Items field; this will open the item search window.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the No matching items found message, select Add as New Item.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Quick Add Item window, enter as much information as you can.

    +
    2. +
+

Quick Add Item window

+
    +
  • +

    Department Name and Item Name are required.

    +
    • +
  • +

    It is recommended that you enter the price, average unit cost (if known), and tax code so that this information is properly applied on the document as necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the item has a UPC bar code, you can scan it into the UPC  field.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Save and Select. You are returned to your document with the new item listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Don't forget to return to inventory later and edit the item record to add other important information.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

QuickBooks financial software Note: Adding an item and immediately selling it Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can tell Point of Sale to always take the same action when the  No matching items found message is displayed. Select the Remember my choice... check box and then choose an action. If necessary, the message can be reset using the Bring back all one time messages option in company preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If necessary, you can choose Switch to full New Item screen from the Quick Add Item window to finish adding the item to inventory with all item fields available.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Handling special orders

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickfind.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickfind.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..36e6411 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickfind.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +Using Quick Find from the Home Page + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Quick Find from the Retail Navigator

+

Locating a Record or Document

+

 

+

The Home Page offers a Quick Find field to locate customers, inventory items, receipts, help, and more.  You can scan item or receipt bar codes into this field, or manually type customer names, document numbers, or any search keywords.

+

image\quickfind.gif

+

 

+

As you type, the results are instantly displayed, broken down by record types. In the example shown, the letters "Pa" have been typed and records have been found in several categories. As more letters are typed, the results are narrowed helping you quickly find the record or help you need.

+

image\quickfind_list.gif

+
    +
  • +

    The first five matching records in each category are displayed. Click a record to open it or click Show all matching items to display additional records in a category.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To narrow or change your search, type additional characters or a new keyword.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The I Want To section lists matching Point of Sale tasks. Clicking an entry will open the screen from which you can complete that task.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) You can also enter item serial numbers to find all documents on which the serial number is listed.  

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickpick_Item.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickpick_Item.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e3a828e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_quickpick_Item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,120 @@ + + + + + + +Quick Pick Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Quick Pick Item

+

List Items on Documents: Overview

+

 

+

Quick Pick allows you to  group items in inventory and then quickly add items from these groups to be purchased  with fewer mouse clicks. Quick Pick works especially well for frequently sold items or services that you do not tag.

+

One example: In a sports shop, you keep a barrel of ice-cold sports drinks in several flavors near the checkout counter. The icy wet conditions make tagging impractical.  So, you complete the following steps to make them Quick Pick items.

+

Note: These procedures illustrate using Quick Pick for sales.  They can also be set up and used when receiving items from your vendors.

+

 

+

Define Quick Pick Groups

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Make a Sale page, click Quick Pick Items from the left sidebar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Add Group.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Type the name of the new Group on the new icon that displays.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Right-click on any Group icon to change the Group color, rename the Group, or remove the Group from Quick Pick.

    +
    5. +
+

There is no limit to how many Quick Pick groups you can add; add one group for each collection of related items you wish to add as Quick Pick items.  

+

 

+

Add Items to Quick Pick Groups

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Make a Sale page, click Quick Pick Items from the left sidebar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click on the Group to which you want to add items.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Add Item.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the Select an Item box, type, search, and select the item you wish to place into this Group. Once selected, the item information will display within the Group.  An item can be assigned to only one Quick Pick Group at a time.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Repeat steps 3 and 4 to add more items to the same Group.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    To select another Group, click Groups.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

For Quick Pick to work effectively, try to keep the number of items to 12 or less (so they can all be displayed on a single Quick Pick page from a receipt).

+

 

+

Remove Items from Quick Pick Groups

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Make a Sale page, click Quick Pick Items from the left sidebar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click on the Group with the item you wish to remove.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Double-click on the item you want to remove and select  Remove Item from Quick Pick.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

The removed item was only removed from the Quick Pick Group.  It still remains in the Item List.

+

 

+

Sell the Item

+
    +
  1. +

    On the sales receipt, click Quick Pick Item from the left sidebar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Quick Pick Item dialog, click the desired  Group. If more than 12 groups exist, previous and next page buttons are added to this dialog.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click the specific item to add it to the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    You can use the Quick Pick Item List report (In Items > Current Inventory category) to view or print a list of all your Quick Pick groups and items.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Make a sale

+

Receive items

+

Run a report

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_recpt_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_recpt_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..318fadf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_recpt_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,332 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Receipts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Receipts

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to receipts.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General:

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

1. Access associated list, from Enter Items and Customer fields to select record

+

2. Display choices in drop-down list fields, e.g. Associate and Price Level fields

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit receipt item, highlight item first

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Go to payment screen

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel receipt

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+I>

+		 +

Move focus to Enter Items field

+
+

<Ctrl+E>

+		 +

Move focus to Customer field

+
+

<Ctrl+F2>

+		 +

Change tax location

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Go to Select Item List, from any field

+
+

<Ctrl+F5>

+		 +

Go to Select Customer List, from any field

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

Go to Sales History List (saved receipts)

+
+

<Ctrl+F8>

+		 +

Open cash drawer

+
+

<Ctrl+F11>

+		 +

Open Shipping Information dialog

+
+

Receipt payment screen:

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Return to receipt body

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Accept payment entry

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save receipt without printing

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Save and print receipt

+
+

<Shift+F1>

+		 +

Take Cash payment

+
+

<Shift+F2>

+		 +

Take Check payment

+
+

<Shift+F3>

+		 +

Take Credit Card payment

+
+

<Shift+F4>

+		 +

Take Gift Certificate payment

+
+

<Shift+F5>

+		 +

Take Account payment

+
+

<Shift+F6>

+		 +

Take Deposit payment

+
+

<Shift+F7>

+		 +

Take Debit/TM payment

+
+

<Shift+F8>

+		 +

Take Gift Card payment

+
+

Sales History (saved receipts):

+
+

<F3> or <Crtl+F>

+		 +

Search for receipt

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Review payments on saved receipt

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Reverse receipt

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

Access held receipts

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_reminder_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_reminder_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..18266f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_reminder_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Inventory Reminders + + + + + + + + + + + +">   +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Inventory Reminders

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts for the inventory reminders window.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move focus between list, options, and toolbar buttons

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Select option or button

+
+

<Up/Down Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Scroll through list

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+Tab>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages

+
+

<Spacebar>

+		 +

Select/clear item checkboxes for various actions

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_reports_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_reports_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7dca7d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_reports_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,175 @@ + + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Reports

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to reports and sales charts.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General

+
+

<Tab>

+		 +

Move focus between fields and buttons.

+
+

<Up/Down Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Moves up/down through choices in a field or on a toolbar

+

Cycles through choices on drop-down list

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Selects button, opens submenu, or selects menu option

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Opens I Want To menu.

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl + F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Displays choices on selection list

+

Displays calendar in date fields

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Refresh report

+
+

<F10>

+		 +

Move focus from page up to menu

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Exit reports/sales chart module

+
+

Modify Report Window

+
+

<Ctrl+Tab>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages

+
+

<Space>

+		 +

Select/clear checkboxes and column selections

+
+

<Ctrl+ Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move focus among fields

+
+

<Enter>

+		 +

Opens font dialog for selected area on Fonts page

+
+

<Alt+Underlined letter>

+		 +

Select visible option, with an underlined letter

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_serial_number.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_serial_number.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a812d2d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_serial_number.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + +Record Item Serial Numbers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Record Item Serial Numbers

+

List Items on Documents | Find a Document

+
+

Pro

+
+

Item serial numbers can be recorded on documents for purposes of warranty tracking or meeting legal requirements. Once recorded, former documents can be quickly located by searching by serial number.

+

To record serial numbers:

+
    +
  1. +

    In inventory, specify those items for which you want to record serial numbers by selecting the check box for Use Serial #, located in the Misch and Shipping section of the item record. (Note: For an existing item, select Edit first.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When listing these items on documents (except purchase orders and cost memos), you will be prompted to enter a serial number for each unit being processed.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The serial numbers entered are saved and printed on documents. Serial numbers listed on a customer order are carried to the sales receipt when the items are sold, saving you the time of re-entering them.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The recording of serial numbers on documents is optional, even when you have enabled serial number tracking. To continue creation of a document without entering a serial number, click Cancel from the Enter Serial Number dialog.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can record serial numbers even when not prompted. After listing the item, click  Edit and make an entry in the Serial # field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale does not keep track of the serial numbers of items currently in inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you decrease an item quantity on a document after having entered serial numbers, the previous numbers are cleared and you are prompted to re-enter numbers for each unit of the revised quantity. This is because the program has no way of knowing which specific unit(s) you are removing when you adjust quantities downward.

    +
    • +
+

Locating a Former Document by Serial Number

+

You can locate a former document by serial number using search. For example, a former receipt for the sale of an item with serial number 23487497 could quickly be located by entering the serial number in the Quick Find  box on the home page or in the Search field at the top of your Sales History list and.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_serviceitem_shipping.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_serviceitem_shipping.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7c0acd5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_serviceitem_shipping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +basic_serviceitem_shipping + + + + + + + + +

Using a Service Item for Shipping/Handling Charges

+

Service Item Overview | Making a Sales Receipt

+

 

+

To charge for shipping and/or handling, you can set up a service item in inventory called "Shipping Charges" or similar.

+

If shipping charges are taxable in your area, assign the appropriate tax code to the item and optionally map the shipping charges to the appropriate QuickBooks financial software income account on the item record. You can enter your standard shipping charge as the item price or leave the price at zero (0) and edit it on a sale-by-sale basis as you create receipts.

+

When creating a receipt, list the shipping charge item on the receipt in the same manner as other items. Sales tax will be calculated and added for the shipping charge item, if applicable.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using tax codes

+

Mapping items to QuickBooks accounts

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_shipping_info.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_shipping_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8865e1f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_shipping_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + +basic_shipping_info + + + + + + + + + +

Entering Shipping Information

+

Making Sales Receipts | Customer Orders | Customer List

+

 

+

Note: The availability of the shipping fields on sales documents is controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Use this procedure to record a shipping address, date, provider, and charges on sales documents. Adding a customers addresses (Bill To and Ship To) to the customer record makes them available for selection in the Shipping information window, available on sales receipts, sales orders, and work orders. A shipping address can also be entered at the time of sale, even if not previously added to the customer record.

+

Shipping information, other than amount, can be added to or edited even after a sales receipt is saved.

+

To enter shipping information:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the items and customer on the document.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Shipping Information from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Shipping Information window, enter:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Ship $ Shipping charge (amount).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ship By Select a shipping provider from the drop-down list of carriers (must be previously defined in company sales preferences.)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Shipping Address Enter a shipping address or select the Shipping Address button to enter either the Bill To or Ship To address from the customer record. You can edit the pre-filled fields, as necessary. Note that editing the address here does not update the customers record.

    +
    • +
+

On a receipt, these additional options are available:

+
    +
  • +

    Ship Date the date shipment is to occur.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Tracking Number Enter the providers tracking number.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Print Packing Slip Select to print a list of items and the Ship To/Bill To addresses.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Print Shipping Labels Select to print a shipping label (supported formats include Avery 5160, 5167, 8164, and 5524*) with or without your store logo.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to record the shipping information and return to the document.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Shipping information recorded on a customer order is carried to a sales receipt that fills the order. If the sales order is only being partially filled (i.e. some items remain due), you are asked if you want to apply the shipping charge to the current receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can apply sales tax to the shipping amounts if required. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can customize your packing slip and shipping label print templates as needed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    *Avery 5524 is the weatherproof version of 8164; and is suitable for laser printers only.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_slip_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_slip_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0fa9613 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_slip_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Transfer Slips + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Transfer Slips

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to transfer slips when you have multiple stores.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

General

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup field: select from associated list

+

From date fields: display calendar

+

From drop-down list fields: display choices

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit item (with slip item selected)

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save slip without printing

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Save and print slip

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Select from Item list

+
+

<Ctrl+F5>

+		 +

Select from Vendor list

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

Go to Transfer History (saved slips)

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of slip

+
+

Transfer History List (former slips):

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Search for a saved slip

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Reverse slip

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

View held slips

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tagdesigns.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tagdesigns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c24439e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tagdesigns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,234 @@ + + + + + + +Supported Tag and Label Styles and Sizes + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Supported Tag and Label Styles and Sizes

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Printing FAQs

+ +

 

+

The following tag/label styles and sizes are supported for printing in Point of Sale. Be sure to observe your printer's capabilities when selecting a template; some listed styles can be used for both tags and mailing/shipping labels.  Not all sizes and styles listed below are available in every area or compatible with every printer.

+

 

+

Laser and inkjet templates for tags or labels:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

 Size

+		 +

Number Per Sheet

+		 +

Use Template

+
+

1" 2.625"

+		 +

30

+

(3 across)

+		 +

Avery 5160*

+
+

1" x 4"

+		 +

20

+

(2 across)

+		 +

Avery 5161

+
+

0.5" 1.75"

+		 +

80

+

(4 across)

+		 +

Avery 5167*

+
+

3.33" x 4"

+		 +

6

+

(2 across)

+		 +

Avery 5524**, 8164

+
+

* Multiple tag templates within category

+

** Weatherproof tag, for laser printer only

+

 

+

Roll-stock tags/labels, for use with the Zebra LP2824/LP2844 and other compatible tag or label printers:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Tag/Label Type

+		 +

Size (approx.)

+		 +

Use Template

+
+

Hang Tag:

+		 +

2.25" x 1.35"

+		 +

Intuit Hang Tag*

+
+

Jewelry Tag with Flaps:

+		 +

2.1875" x 0.5"

+		 +

Intuit Jewelry Tags with flaps*

+
+

Jewelry Tag without Flaps:

+		 +

2.1875" x 0.5"

+		 +

Intuit Jewelry Tags without flaps*

+
+

Small Label, adhesive:

+		 +

1.19" x 0.84"

+		 +

Intuit Small Label*

+
+

Label, adhesive:

+		 +

2.25" x 1.25"

+		 +

Intuit (Mailing) Label*

+
+

Label, adhesive:

+		 +

4" x 3"

+		 +

Label (4x3)

+
+

Label, adhesive:

+		 +

4" x 6"

+		 +

Label (4x6)

+
+

*multiple tag templates within category

+

 

+

For information about ordering tags and labels directly from QuickBooks Desktop, refer to the ordering supplies topic.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List of compatible tag and label printers

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_taginstructions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_taginstructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed1a433 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_taginstructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + +Printing Tags: Basic Instructions + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Tags: Instructions

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Supported Tags | FAQs

+ +

 

+

Item price tags can be printed from inventory, purchase and receiving documents, transfer slips, the Price Change reminders window, and from the Price Manager and Physical Inventory windows.

+

To print tags:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the item(s) for which you want to print tags. How do I select multiple items?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If working with a large item list, you may find it helpful to sort or filter the list first to group the items

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you want to print tags for all items on a document, you do not have to select the items; you'll have the choice of printing for all items in the Print dialog

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    From the Print or I Want To menu, select Print Tags.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Depending on your program location, printer, and print option preferences, you may have the following choices in the Print dialog displayed:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Change the printer to which you are sending the tags

    +
    • +
  • +

    Choose to print tags for the selected item(s) or, on documents, all items

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify a quantity of each tag to print:  the on-hand quantity, the document quantity, or any specified number of tags

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pro multi-store Headquarters only: Choose the store for which you printing tags

    +
    • +
  • +

    Calibrate your dedicated tag printer

    +
    • +
  • +

    Choose More Options to preview and/or change the tag template being used

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preview or Print.

    +
    2. +
+

If you are using a dedicated tag printer, your tags will immediately be previewed or printed. If you are using a laser or inkjet printer and sheet labels, the Print Tags/Labels window is displayed and the following additional steps apply.

+

 

+

If Printing Tags on Sheet Labels

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify where you want to begin printing on the first page:

    +
    2. +
+

        image\print_tagstartposition.gif

+
    +
  • +

    Specify the Column and Row numbers where you want the tags to begin printing (you can click the starting position on the diagram). This adjustment makes it possible to print on partial sheets of labels.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, select Alignment to check the start position of printed text and to adjust by 1/100-inch increments. You can print a sample page from the Alignment dialog. (Tip: use plain paper and hold up to a tag/label sheet to check alignment).

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Continue to print or preview your tags.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Tip: Zoom preview to see small tag printClick to display a popup topic

+

Pro Tip: Print tags for alternate vendors Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Common Issues with Zebra Tag Printers

+

List of compatible tag printers

+

Order tag supplies from Intuit

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tagmrsp.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tagmrsp.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..40d321a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tagmrsp.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + +Printing the MSRP on Tags + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing the MSRP on Tags

+

Tag Printing: Basic Instructions | Supported Tags | FAQs

+

 

+

You can print the manufacturers suggested retail price (MSRP) on your price tags to demonstrate savings to your customers. If you have entered the MSRP on the item record, this value is included when you print tags for the item.

+

 

+

image\tag_msrp.gif

+

 

+

Some jewelry tags are too small to print both the MRSP and a bar code. If you want to print the MSRP and not the bar code on jewelry tags, you must specify a tag template with "MSRP" in its name in workstation preferences.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customizing your printed tags

+

Ordering tag supplies from Intuit

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_multi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_multi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e45ffb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_multi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Edit Multi-Rate Calculation + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Tax Code Calculation: Multi-Rate Tax

+

Tax Codes | Tax FAQs | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences when setting up a multi-rate tax code.

+

 

+

Use the third page of the wizard to specify information for up to three components of the multi-rate tax code.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a name for the first rate component of the tax code. Use a name indicative of the tax or provided by the taxing agency.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the tax rate that applies to this component.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Enter tax rates greater than 1% as the percentage value. Example: To enter a tax rate of 7.50%, type 7.50

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter tax rates less than 1% in their decimal equivalent. Example: To enter a tax rate of 0.5%, type 0.005

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the agency to which the taxes are paid. This name is displayed on sales tax reports and used when sending sales tax information to your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If this rate applies only when the unit price meets certain threshold amounts, select the check box and enter the applicable price range. You can enter lower, upper, or both price thresholds. Leave one end of the range open (blank) if it doesn't apply or is unlimited.

    +
    3. +
+

+

Examples:

+
    +
  • +

    Rate applies at all unit prices:  Don't select the check box

    +
    • +
  • +

    Rate applies only if unit price exceeds $100:  Enter     100.01   to   <blank>

    +
    • +
  • +

    Rate applies only if unit price less than $100: Enter   <blank>   to     99.99

    +
    • +
  • +

    Rate applies only between $100 and $300:     Enter    100.00   to    300.00

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    If the rate applies only to that portion of the item price that falls within the specified range (as opposed to the entire item price), check the second check box as well.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Add Another Tax Rate and repeat for each rate component of the tax code.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    When all components have been defined, select Test at the bottom of the window  to enter sample prices and verify the tax rates are applied correctly.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Finish when done, or Back to return to the previous page.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

QuickBooks Tax Information Use the QuickBooks Tax Info fields to map (link) this Point of Sale tax code to tax items/groups and a tax code previously set up in your QuickBooks financial software. This allows you to have your Point of Sales taxes reported in QuickBooks in the manner you choose.

+
    +
  • +

    Each tax code component can be mapped to a separate QuickBooks tax item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The tax code can be mapped to a QuickBooks tax code.

    +
    • +
+

If you do not make selections here, Point of Sale will automatically map each component to a QuickBooks tax item and the tax code to a QuickBooks tax code of the same name, creating them if they dont exist. Learn more.

+

 

+

When done configuring your taxes, be sure to assign tax codes to applicable items in inventory.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_pricedep.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_pricedep.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f9e96c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_pricedep.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Edit Price-Dependent Calculation + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Tax Code Calculation: Price-Dependent Tax

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences to set up a price-dependent tax code.

+

 

+

Use the third page of the wizard to specify:

+

Tax Rate Enter the tax rate that applies to sales of items assigned this tax code. Enter a value between 0.01 and 99.99. You do not need to enter a percentage sign.

+
    +
  • +

    Enter tax rates greater than 1% as the percentage value. Example: To enter a tax rate of 7.50%, type 7.50

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter tax rates less than 1% in their decimal equivalent. Example: To enter a tax rate of 0.5%, type 0.005

    +
    • +
+

Tax Agency Enter the name of the taxing agency to which you pay sales taxes. This name is displayed on sales tax reports and used when sending sales tax information to your QuickBooks financial software. What if I am required to collect and pay taxes to multiple agencies?

+

 

+

Price Threshold Enter the unit price threshold that triggers collection of sales tax. If tax is collected only on that portion of the unit price in excess of the threshold, also select the Apply Sales Tax Only ... check box.

+

+
    +
  • +

    Example: Clothing in your area is taxed only when the unit price exceeds $100, and then the full amount is taxable at 7.50%. You would enter $100.00 as the threshold amount. Since the full amount is taxable, do not select the check box.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you did select the check box, only the amount over the threshold would be taxed, e.g. a $150 clothing item would be taxed at $50 x 7.50% = $ 3.75.

    +
    • +
+

QuickBooks Tax Information Use these fields to map (link) this Point of Sale tax code to a tax item/group and tax code previously set up in your QuickBooks financial software. This allows you to have your Point of Sales taxes be reported in QuickBooks in the manner you choose. If you do not make selections here, Point of Sale will automatically map this code to a tax item/group/code of the same name in QuickBooks, creating them if they dont exist. Learn more.

+

 

+

image\taxsetup_quickbooksinfo.gif

+

 

+

Select Finish when done, or Back to return to the previous page.

+

 

+

When done configuring your taxes, be sure to assign tax codes to applicable items in inventory.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_snglrate.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_snglrate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..618f63a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codecalc_snglrate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Edit Single Rate Calculation + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Tax Calculation: Single Tax Rate

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences, when setting up a single-rate tax code.

+

 

+

Use the third page of the wizard to:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the tax rate that applies to sales of items assigned this tax code. Enter a value between 0.01 and 99.99. You do not need to enter a percentage sign.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Enter tax rates greater than 1% as the percentage values. Example: To enter a tax rate of 7.50%, type 7.50

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter tax rates less than 1% in their decimal equivalents. Example: To enter a tax rate of 0.5%, type 0.005

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the name of the taxing agency to which you pay sales taxes. This name is displayed on sales tax reports and used when sending sales tax information to your QuickBooks financial software. What if I am required to collect and pay taxes to multiple agencies?

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use the QuickBooks Tax Information fields to map (link) this Point of Sale tax code to a tax item/group and tax code previously set up in your QuickBooks financial software. This allows you to have your Point of Sales taxes be reported in QuickBooks in the manner you choose. If you do not make selections here, Point of Sale will automatically map this code to a tax item/group/code of the same name in QuickBooks, creating them if they dont exist. Learn more.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

image\taxsetup_quickbooksinfo.gif

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish when done, or Back to return to the previous page.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

When done configuring your taxes, be sure to assign tax codes to applicable items in inventory.

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c0c2ab --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,92 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Codes + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Codes

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Tax FAQs | Tax Overview

+ +

 

+

Pro: If you have multiple stores, sales tax codes must be set up at Headquarters.

+

Sales tax codes identify the specific taxing instructions for sales of the inventory items to which they are assigned. Once you have defined your tax codes, you assign them to your inventory items so the correct tax is collected. If all the items in a department are taxed the same, associate a tax code with the department record and all new items added to the department will automatically be assigned this tax code.

+

The simplest of tax structures might just include two sales tax codes: taxable and non-taxable. However, you may need to collect different tax rates for certain items, to tax items differently depending on their price, or collect and pay taxes to multiple agencies. In these cases, a separate tax code can be defined and then assigned to applicable items in inventory.

+ +

 

+

Sales tax codes are defined on the Sales Tax page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Using Tax Codes in Conjunction with Tax Locations

+

Tax locations can be used to have different taxing instructions for sales of the same items depending on the geographic location (e.g. out of state sales) or to meet special customer tax needs. Learn more.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    In inventory, assign tax codes to your items based on the class of merchandise they fall in. Select the correct tax code from the drop-down list in the Tax Code field on the item record.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use multiple tax locations, adding or deleting a tax code in one location adds or deletes that code in all locations. If the taxing instructions for a code are to be different in different locations, edit the tax code as appropriate for each affected location in company preferences. Editing a tax code in one location does not affect that tax code in other locations.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a tax code is no longer needed, it can be deleted. However, be aware that deleting a tax code from one tax location deletes it from all locations. If the deleted code is assigned to items in inventory, you will have to reassign those items to another tax code.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When using price thresholds to determine if an item sale is taxable, you can also specify whether tax is applied to the entire item price, just the amount over the threshold, or just the amount within a price range.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_editcodeoptions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_editcodeoptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..08f03bf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_editcodeoptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Edit Tax Options + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Codes: Edit Tax Options

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Use the second page of the Wizard to specify one of the three tax code options:

+

Single-rate tax Choose this option if all taxable items to which this code will be assigned are taxed at the same rate and you do not need to track and pay taxes to multiple agencies separately (or you choose to do so in your QuickBooks financial software instead of Point of Sale).

+

Price-dependent single-rate tax Choose this option if all taxable items to which this code will be assigned are taxed at the same rate but only when the unit price exceeds a certain threshold.

+

Multi-rate tax Choose this option for the most flexibility in collecting different tax rates based on item unit price ranges and/or to collect varying rates for multiple taxing agencies.

+

 

+

When finished, select Next to go to the next page.

+

 

+

Learn more about using tax codes

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_editcodewizard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_editcodewizard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..581393a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_editcodewizard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Code: Add or Edit Code + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add or Edit Tax Code

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Add/Edit Tax Code Wizard, accessed from the Sales Tax page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Use the first page of the Wizard to specify:

+

Tax Code Enter one to three characters to represent this tax code. Choose a code that is recognizable to you and your employees. The tax code is used on program screens or reports where space prevents displaying the longer tax code name.

+

Tax Code Name Enter a descriptive name for this tax code. If this code is for a specific merchandise type, such as jewelry or clothing, we suggest you use the merchandise type as the tax code name. If all of your merchandise is taxed the same, you may just have one code named Taxable and a second named Exempt.

+

Tax Code Mark (optional) Enter a one-character mark that identifies items sold with this tax code on printed sales receipts.

+

When finished, select next.

+

 

+

Learn more about using tax codes

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c99b8c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +basic_tax_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Set up sales tax

+

Use tax codes

+

Use tax locations

+

Assign tax codes to items

+

Handle special tax circumstances by customer

+

Change the tax collected on a sale

+

Collect tax on shipping amounts

+

Collect tax based on item price thresholds

+

Collect and pay tax to more than one agency

+

Run sales tax reports

+

Share sales tax information with QuickBooks financial software

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_locations.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_locations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e730cd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_locations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Locations + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax Locations

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Tax FAQs | Tax Overview

+ +

 

+

Pro: If you have multiple stores, sales tax locations must be set up at Headquarters. Remote stores can select the default tax location applicable to sales at their store in company preferences.

+

 

+

Sales tax locations can be used to define different taxing instructions for each of your tax codes to handle sales in different tax jurisdictions or for customers that qualify for special tax rates.

+

One default tax location named Local Sales Tax is defined for you; you can rename this location if you want. The use of additional tax locations is optional.

+

 

+

Sales tax locations are configured on the Sales Tax page of company preferences.

+ +

 

+

Notes

+
    +
  • +

    A second tax location, named Exempt, is hard-coded and not displayed in your sales tax preferences. This location is used for customers you have marked as tax-exempt and has an automatic 0% tax rate for all tax codes. You can filter sales reports by this hidden tax location.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use multiple tax locations, adding or deleting a tax code in one location adds or deletes that code in all locations.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the taxing instructions for a code are different in different locations, edit the tax code as appropriate for each location. Editing a tax code in one location does not affect that tax code in other locations.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Associating a tax location with a customer

+

Changing tax locations at time of sale

+ + + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_multipleagencies.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_multipleagencies.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..30b14ce --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_multipleagencies.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax: Using Multi-Rate Tax Codes + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Using Multi-Rate Tax Codes

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

A Point of Sale tax code can include up to three separate tax rate components, each collecting a portion of the total tax rate.

+

This allows you to track taxes payable to different agencies (city, county, and state, for example) and/or to collect tax for each component based on item unit price thresholds or price ranges.

+

Your sales tax reports can be set up to sort and subtotal taxes by tax agency or tax components, depending on how you have to report and pay them.

+ +

To set up a multi-rate tax code in Point of Sale, follow the instructions provided here.

+

 

+

Alternative Method of Collecting Taxes for Multiple Agencies

+

This method requires that you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. You collect a single combined tax rate in Point of Sale and use a tax group in your financial software to break out the taxes payable to each agency on tax reports.

+

Example: You are required to collect and pay 0.5% sales tax to your city, 1.5% to the county, and 5.25% to the state.

+
    +
  1. +

    In QuickBooks Desktop, set up a sales tax group, comprised of the three agencies and individual rates. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop documentation or in-program help for instructions.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In Point of Sale, set up a sales tax code, selecting Single-Rate Tax and entering just the total combined tax rate (i.e. 7.25%). The agency name you enter for the Point of Sale tax code wont effect how the information is transferred to QuickBooks Desktop but will show up on sales tax reports ran in Point of Sale. You may want to enter Combined Sales Tax or similar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the QuickBooks Information area of the Edit Tax Calculation page in Point of Sale, select the QuickBooks tax group from the drop-down list labeled Assigned to QuickBooks Tax Item/Group, and then select the corresponding QuickBooks tax code in the second drop-down list.

    +
    4. +
+

Sales taxes collected in Point of Sale are sent to QuickBooks Desktop and your sales tax reports in QuickBooks Desktop will separate the taxes due to each agency.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    When printing a receipt where multiple tax rates have been collected, the Tax % field is left blank.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Use sales tax codes

+

Sales tax integration with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_pricethresholds.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_pricethresholds.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a22a25 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_pricethresholds.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax: Price-Dependent Taxes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Price-Dependent Taxes

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sale supports the collection of sales tax based on the item unit price. The price threshold can be set up as a minimum price, maximum price, or price range that triggers the collection of tax. You can collect tax on the entire price of the item or just that portion of the price that falls blow, exceeds, or is within the specified price range.

+

Combined with Point of Sale's multi-rate tax option, you can define a tax code with almost any combination of price thresholds and tax rates to meet the tax requirements of one or multiple taxing agencies.

+ +

 

+

To set up price-dependent taxes:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the general instructions for add/edit a tax code in company preferences.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Tax Options page of the Tax Code wizard, select either Price-dependent single-rate tax or Multi-tax rate, depending on your needs.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions (select Help if necessary) in the wizard for assistance in setting up your price thresholds and options.

    +
    4. +
+

If tax is collected only on the amount exceeding the price threshold, or within the specified price range, be sure to select the check box indicating such.

+

 

+

image\salestax_calculation.gif

+

Example price-dependent, single-rate tax setup

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

When done configuring your taxes, be sure to assign tax codes to applicable items in inventory.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If setting up a multi-rate price-dependent tax code, select the Test button on the last page of the wizard to verify the taxes collected at various prices.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If an entire department is subject to the price threshold, assign this tax code as the default department tax code in the department record. In this way, all new items added to the department are automatically assigned this tax code.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use multiple tax locations, adding a tax code to one location adds it to all of your locations. If the taxing instructions need to be different for each location, select Edit Tax Code under affected locations and revise the instructions that apply to that location.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If taxable shipping charges are assigned this tax code, the threshold identified here applies to shipping amounts as well. If shipping amounts are not subject to a threshold, set up and use a different tax code for them. See collect tax on shipping amounts for more information.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Use sales tax codes

+

Use sales tax locations

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_qbfsexample.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_qbfsexample.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5287569 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_qbfsexample.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax: QuickBooks Mapping Example + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: QuickBooks Mapping Example

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

You add a Point of Sale tax code named "State" (code: STA) with a tax rate of 7.50% and paid to the "State Tax Agency".

+

On the next Financial Exchange with QuickBooks, Point of Sale will look to see if a QuickBooks tax item already exists with a 7.5% rate paid to this agency and if a tax code by the name of "State" already exists for this item. If found, the Point of Sale tax code is automatically mapped to the QuickBooks tax item. If not found, Point of Sale creates a new QuickBooks tax item and/or code with the following information:

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Tax Item

+
+

Name:

+		 +

<Point of sale tax rate> + <Point of Sale tax code name >
+Example: 7.50% State

+
+

Description:

+		 +

<Point of sale tax rate> + <Point of Sale tax code > for <Point of Sale agency>
+Example: 7.50% State for State Tax Agency

+
+

Rate:

+		 +

<Point of sale tax rate>
+Example: 7.5%

+
+

Agency:

+		 +

<Point of Sale agency>
+Example: State Tax Agency

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Tax Code

+
+

Code:

+		 +

<Point of Sale tax code >
+Example: Sta

+
+

Description:

+		 +

<Point of Sale tax code name > Example: State

+
+

Tax Status:

+		 +

Taxable

+
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_reports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ded1ee --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Reports

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sale offers two reports for viewing the sales tax amounts you have collected:

+
    +
  • +

    Sales Tax Summary Sales tax collected in a specified date range, sorted and totaled by tax location/code.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Tax Activity Detail Journal of all taxable sales receipts in a specified date range.

    +
    • +
+

Either report can be modified to filter, sort, and display your tax information in the manner you prefer, and memorized if you wish to use the same settings for the future.

+

To view sales tax reports:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale Reports menu or Report Center, choose Sales.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Sales sub-menu, select either Taxes Sales Tax Summary or Taxes Tax Activity Detail.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale displays the report.

+
    +
  1. +

    Modify the report date range, included tax locations an codes, or other options as necessary.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale displays the report with your changes.

+

 

+

If you also use QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can view sales tax reports in that program as well. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop documentation for instructions.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_shipping.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_shipping.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4bb4036 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tax_shipping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax: Collecting on Shipping Amounts + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax: Collecting on Shipping Amounts

+

Tax FAQs | Tax Reports | Tax Overview

+

 

+

(Free, Basic) To collect sales tax on shipping amounts, set up a service item called "Shipping Charges" or similar and assign the appropriate tax code to it. List this item on sales receipts and edit the amount for the specific sale.

+

(Pro) To collect sales tax on shipping amounts, edit your tax location(s) and select the check box labeled Shipping to this location is taxable and specify the tax code that should be used for the shipping amount.

+

Sales tax will be calculated on the shipping amount and added to the sale according to the instructions specified for the tax code assigned.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Set up sales tax

+

Use sales tax codes

+

Use sales tax locations

+

Assign tax codes to items

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_time_entry.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_time_entry.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cf84b55 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_time_entry.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Quick-Entry Time Formats + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Quick-Entry Time Formats

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

You can enter times manually or use one of the following quick entry formats. When you press <Enter> or exit the field, the time is auto-filled.

+

When keyboard combinations have a + between them press the keys at the same time. When separated by a comma, press the first key, release, and then press the next key.

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Quick Entry Formats

+		 +

Display Formats and Notes

+
+

<T>, <Enter>

+		 +

Enter the current time.

+
+

<+>, <number>, <Enter>

+		 +

Move time forward the specified number of hours. as many hours as the number entered. Example: If the displayed time is 1:00 PM and you enter <+>, <3>, <Enter> the time will be moved forward three hours to 4:00 PM.

+
+

<->, <number>, <Enter>

+		 +

Move time back the specified number of hours.

+
+

<Alt + r;>

+		 +

Change the time to one hour ahead.

+
+

<Alt + >

+		 +

Change the time to one hour earlier.

+
+

<Alt + Home>

+		 +

Set time to 12:00 AM.

+
+

<Alt + End>

+		 +

Set time to 11:59 PM.

+
+

<Alt + Page Up>

+		 +

Set time one minute ahead. Only the minutes are changed, not the hours.

+
+

<Alt + Page Down>

+		 +

Set time one minute earlier than the current time displayed.

+
+

<N>, <Enter>

+		 +

Set time to noon, 12:00 PM.

+
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_time_fields.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_time_fields.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d8931a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_time_fields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Time Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Time Fields

+

Quick Entry Time Formats | Date Fields | Modify Report Dates

+

 

+

Entering Times

+

For added control on reports, time is used in conjunction with dates to define the range of a report (exception: you cannot define time on the EFT Report). For example, you can run a report for the range of 7/3/01 12:00 AM 7/9/01 11:59 PM, or for the range 7/3/01 8:00 PM 7/4/01 4:00 AM.

+

These fields are useful if your business has shifts that span across two days, such as a business that is open 24 hours might have, or if you want to run a report for a specific time range within one day.

+

Enter the time to begin the range with the lower (From) date. Enter the time to end the range with the upper (To) date.

+

For PM times, enter the time using the 24-hour clock or specify "pm" ("PM") after the time. For example, the following are all acceptable ways to enter 3:00 pm: 15:00, 3:00 pm, 3:00 PM.

+

By default, the time fields for a particular report are set as they were last defined.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Defining filter criteria

+

Entering data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tip_memfilters.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tip_memfilters.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fcebba9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_tip_memfilters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +basic_tip_memfilters + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Memorized Filters Save Time

+

Tip: Memorized Filters Save Time

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden..

+ +

Creating and saving filters will save you time if you frequently work with the same groups of records. Once you have created and saved a custom filter, it can be selected from the drop-down filter View list at the top of the list.

+

If using to modify a report, memorizing the report includes the filter settings.

+

Example uses for memorized filters:

+
    +
  • +

    To display only the items from a particular vendor when making purchase orders

    +
    • +
  • +

    To display items with an old "Last Received Date" when marking down prices

    +
    • +
  • +

    To display only those items within a department when taking a Physical Inventory

    +
    • +
  • +

    To display and print a list of customers from which you do not want to accept personal checks

    +
    • +
  • +

    To display only receipts made with a specified tax location

    +
    • +
  • +

    To create and memorize reports filtered by any of these criteria and many more

    +
    • +
  • +

    and for almost any other need you have to display only certain of your records in a list!

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_vendor_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_vendor_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e68c074 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_vendor_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Vendors + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Vendors

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to vendors.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

Adding/Editing a Vendor:

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

Display choices on drop-down list or display Terms dialog (press within field)

+
+

<F11> or <F12>

+		 +

Save vendor record

+
+

<Ctrl + n>

+		 +

Switch tabbed pages, n = 1,2,3

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of vendor

+
+

Vendor List:

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Search for vendor

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_view_form.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_view_form.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5736189 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_view_form.htm @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + + +Work with a Form + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work with a Form

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Find a Record or Document | Work with a List

+

 

+

A Point of Sale form is a detailed view of a single record or document. Forms are used when creating or editing a document or record.  

+

Point of Sale has three form styles: sectioned, tabbed, and document.  

+

Sectioned Form Example:  Customer Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

Tabbed Form Example:  Vendor Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

Document Form Examples:    Sales Receipt Click to expand/collapse topic        Purchase Order Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + +

 

+

Following are descriptions of available form functions:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

To

+		 +

Do this

+
+

Navigate fields

+		 +

Touch or click the field you wish to select.

+

Use <> or <Tab> to move forward through fields.

+

Use <> or <Shift + Tab> to move back through fields.

+

Only fields yellow/white in color can be edited. Gray fields cannot be selected or changed. If you believe you should be able to edit a field but cannot, check the logged-in user's security rights or read the following:

+

Why is a Point of Sale feature not available to me?

+

Editing Documents

+
+

Change Tabbed Page

+

(Tabbed Forms)

+		 +

Click or touch a tab at the top of the form.

+

Keyboard: Press <Ctrl+1>, <Ctrl+2>, etc. to move to each tab in sequence.

+
+

Expand/Collapse Section

+

(Sectioned Forms)

+		 +

Click or touch the section titlebar.

+
+

Cycle through records

+

(Tabbed Forms)

+		 +

Use <Ctrl + Page Up> to display the previous record in the associated list.

+

Use <Ctrl + Page Down> to display the next record in the associated list.

+

This function is only available from the primary tabbed page (Name & Address page in a customer record) and cannot be used while in the process of creating a new record.

+
+

Enter or edit data in a field

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic

+		 +

Select an editable field and begin typing to overwrite the current entry. Click in the field a second time to edit character-by-character.

+

To edit the items listed on a document, select the item and then click Edit or another action button on that row.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter data

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_view_list.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_view_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ffd48d1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_view_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,475 @@ + + + + + + +Work with a List + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work with a List

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

 

+

Lists present all (or a filtered subset) of the documents or records created in an area in a format similar to a spreadsheet. A list can be sorted, filtered, and searched to help you locate a record or group of records.

+

There are two list types in Point of Sale, with slightly different features and procedures. Choose the list type you are working with for more information:

+

Item, Customer, Sales History, or Receiving History lists Click to expand/collapse topic   

+ +

All other lists Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

 These actions are common to both list types:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

To:

+		 +

Do this:

+
+

Add, remove, or rearrange columns

+		 +

Right-click any column header and select customize columns, or drag and drop a column header to a new position. You can add, remove, and rearrange columns to meet your needs.

+
+

Sort the list

+		 +

Click any column header to sort the list by the values in that column. Click the same header a second time to change the sort order (ascending or descending). A  small triangle symbol   indicates the column by which the list is currently sorted. Select a link above to see additional options, that vary by list type.

+
+

Scroll through the list

+		 +

Use the scroll bar (on the right of window) to scroll through the list of records.

+

If the list is too wide to display on the screen, there will also be a horizontal scroll bar along the bottom of the screen to move left or right.

+
+

Search for a record

+		 +

Enter search keywords above the list. The system finds and displays matching entries.  Select a link above to see additional options, that vary by list type.

+
+

Record selection & list navigation

+		 +

The selected record is highlighted. With records selected, choose an action from the I Want To menu.

+

Mouse/Touchscreen: Click or touch the record you wish to select or select multiple records.Click to display a popup topic

+

Keyboard:

+
    +
  • +

    Use your up/down arrow keys to move through rows.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use <Ctrl + Home> to move to the first record in the list and <Ctrl + End> to move to the last.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use <Page Up> to move to the first record displayed on the screen and <Page Down> to move to the last displayed record.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use your arrow keys or <Tab> and <Shift + Tab> to move one column right or left, respectively, within the selected row.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Press <Home> and <End> to move to the first or last column in the selected row, respectively.

    +
    • +
+
+

Change column widths

+		 +

Drag and drop the separator lines between column headers to change column width.

+
+

View record in a form

+		 +

Double-click the record.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Work with a form

+

Program capacities

+

Clean up your company data

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_voucher_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_voucher_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..807831d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_voucher_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,208 @@ + + + + + + + +Keyboard Shortcuts: Vouchers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Keyboard Shortcuts: Vouchers

+

General Keyboard Shortcuts | Mouse & Touchscreen

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

This is a list of keyboard shortcuts applicable to vouchers.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Keystroke

+		 +

Action

+
+

Creating a Voucher

+
+

<Tab> or <Arrow Keys>

+		 +

Move field to field

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Open the Find window for the active field

+
+

<F4>

+		 +

From lookup field: select from associated list

+

From date fields: display calendar

+

From drop-down list fields: display choices

+
+

<F5>

+		 +

Edit listed item (highlight item first)

+
+

<F11>

+		 +

Save voucher without printing

+
+

<F12>

+		 +

Save and print voucher

+
+

<Alt+O>

+		 +

Open I Want To menu

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Change new voucher to return

+
+

<Ctrl+F4>

+		 +

Select from item list

+
+

<Ctrl+F5>

+		 +

Select from vendor list

+
+

<Ctrl+F6>

+		 +

Go to Receiving History (saved vouchers)

+
+

<Ctrl+F10>

+		 +

Print tags

+
+

<Esc>

+		 +

Cancel creation of voucher

+
+

Receiving History (Voucher List):

+
+

<F3> or <Ctrl+F>

+		 +

Search for voucher

+
+

<F8>

+		 +

Switch between list and form

+
+

<Ctrl+F3>

+		 +

Reverse voucher

+
+

<Ctrl+F7>

+		 +

View held vouchers

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+  + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_welcome.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_welcome.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b4c8f31 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_welcome.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +Welcome! + + + + + + + + + +

Welcome to Point of Sale!

+

 

+

Point of Sale (Point of Sale) is an advanced inventory control, sales, customer tracking, and reporting solution designed for effective management of retail stores. As you order, receive, and sell merchandise, your inventory quantities and costs are instantly updated.

+

At a glance, you can view item quantities on hand and on order; review costs, prices and margins; and view detailed reports on sales and merchandise activity. You can track customers and use the resulting purchase history information to customize promotions, mailings and other marketing materials. At the end of your business day, Point of Sale will help you reconcile your cash drawer, settle credit card transactions (optional fee-based service), backup your data files, and, if applicable, send the day's transactions to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Are you new to Point of Sale?

+

If so, we suggest you visit these topics to learn the basics:

+

Point of Sale Workstation

+

Completing routine tasks

+

Using this help system

+

Getting additional help

+

Terminology used in Point of Sale

+

How to purchase supplies: tags, labels, or receipt paper

+

Free resources for starting and growing your business

+

 

+

For immediate help on your current task, press <F1> on your keyboard or select Help on this Window from the Help menu.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_windows_emailclient.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_windows_emailclient.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..00c55a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_windows_emailclient.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +Verify or Change your Windows E-mail Client + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Verify or Change Your Windows E-mail Client

+

E-Mailing Documents

+

 

+

When you e-mail documents, Point of Sale uses your default e-mail client specified in Internet Explorer.

+

To verify or change your default Windows e-mail client:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open Internet Explorer and select Tools Internet Options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Programs tabbed page.

    +
    3. +
+

Your current e-mail client program is listed in the E-mail field. If you would like to change the e-mail client used by Point of Sale (and all other Windows programs), select a different e-mail program from the drop-down list of installed e-mail programs and then select Apply.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    There is a known issue with using Outlook Express to send file attachments. If you also have Microsoft Outlook installed, the e-mail and attachment will be generated in Outlook instead. You can either select Microsoft Outlook as your default e-mail client or, if you wish to continue using Outlook Express, use the Add or Remove Programs option from the Windows Control Panel to uninstall Microsoft Outlook.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) This topic applies if you use Windows e-mail for Store Exchanges.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_write_letters.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_write_letters.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..22151c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_write_letters.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + +Write Letters from Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Write Letters from Point of Sale

+

Manage Letter Templates | Office Integration Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

Point of Sale provides Microsoft Word integration for writing letters to customers and vendors. The letters can include data from the customer and vendor records as well as from documents made for the customer or vendor. A variety of letter templates is provided for your use. You can customize the provided templates and create more of your own.

+

Letters can be initiated from the I Want To menu in your customer or vendor list or from your document lists. If you want a letter to include data from a document, such as specific item information, the letter must be initiated from that document.

+

You can create a letter for a single recipient or send letters to a group of selected or filtered recipients.

+

To write letters:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the record or documents for which you wish to print letters.

    +
    2. +
+

If sending letters to a filtered list, you do not need to select specific records in this step.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Write Letters  and then choose to Currently Selected or to Filtered List.

    +
    2. +
+

If using the filtered list option, follow the prompts to enter filter criteria to include/exclude customers or vendors. Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the template you wish to use for the current printing and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the name and title of the person that the letter will be from and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+

The letter(s) are opened in Word. If you are printing multiple letters they are all in a single Word document with each letter starting on a new page.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review and modify in Word if necessary and then print the letter(s).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can select  Modify Template when selecting a template if necessary to customize the template before creating the letters. Learn more about modifying templates.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the selected template includes data fields for which no data exists in your Point of Sale records or documents, the fields will be auto-filled with **MISSING <data field>**. Review your letter(s) and edit or remove these fields to complete the current letter. You can remove the fields from the template if you never want them included in future letters.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You may save the Microsoft Word document if you wish; doing so will not affect the template.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

E-mail Marketing from Point of Sale

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_writeletters_filter.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_writeletters_filter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4612b6b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basic_writeletters_filter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + +Write Letters to a Filtered List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Write Letters to a Filtered List

+

Letters Overview | Manage Letter Templates | Office Integration Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

When writing letters to customers or vendors, you can choose to write letters for all records in a filtered list. For example, you might filter your customer list by ZIP code to send a letter to all customers in that area. Or, maybe you filter by receipt date to send thank you letters to everyone who made a purchase during a promotional sale.

+

To write letters to a filtered list:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your customer or vendor list, select Write Letters To Filtered List of <record type>.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From the Customer Center, select Write Letters.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the criteria to filter for the desired records and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+

You may have multiple pages of filters. For example, if filtering your customer list the first filter page allows you to filter by information in the customer record (such as by ZIP code) and the second page allows you to filter by sales information (such as sales amount and/or date). In this way, you could filter to write letters for all customers from a certain ZIP code that have spent more than $100 in the last 90 days.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review the list of filtered records displayed and select Next when ready to proceed.

    +
    2. +
+

You can remove records as necessary (clear the checkboxes on the left) or select Back to change filter criteria if necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a letter template and Next.

    +
    2. +
+

Select Modify Template before selecting Next to customize the template.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the name and title of the person that the letter will be from and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+

The letter(s) are opened in Word. If you are printing multiple letters they are all in a single Word document with each letter starting on a new page.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review and modify in Word if necessary and then print the letter(s).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If the selected template includes data fields for which no data exists in your Point of Sale records or documents, the fields will be auto-filled with **MISSING <data field>**. Review your letter(s) and edit or remove these fields to complete the current letter. You can remove the fields from the template if you never want them included in future letters.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You may save the Microsoft Word document if you wish; doing so will not affect the template.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basicsmainpage.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basicsmainpage.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e697a96 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/basicsmainpage.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +How do I? + + + + + + + + + + + +

How do I?

+

Help & Support | Glossary

+

What area do you need help with?

+

Inventory

+

Sales and returnsClick to display a popup topic

+

Sales taxClick to display a popup topic

+

CustomersClick to display a popup topic

+

Customer OrdersClick to display a popup topic

+

VendorsClick to display a popup topic

+

PurchasingClick to display a popup topic

+

ReceivingClick to display a popup topic

+

Employees and securityClick to display a popup topic

+

End of Day procedureClick to display a popup topic

+

ReportsClick to display a popup topic

+

Store ExchangeClick to display a popup topic

+

Integration with QuickBooks Desktop financial softwareClick to display a popup topic

+

Entering or editing recordsClick to display a popup topic

+

Program navigation, lists and forms, finding recordsClick to display a popup topic

+

Configuring or customizing Point of SaleClick to display a popup topic

+

Accepting credit & debit cardsClick to display a popup topic

+

Accepting & selling gift cardsClick to display a popup topic

+

PrintingClick to display a popup topic

+

HardwareClick to display a popup topic

+

Working with your company data fileClick to display a popup topic

+

Point of Sale licensingClick to display a popup topic

+

Getting updates to Point of SaleClick to display a popup topic

+

Import/Export Data and Write Letters

+

Troubleshooting

+

Finding other applications that work with Point of Sale

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0dec51b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + +Configure Your System for a Merchant Account + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Your System for a Merchant Account

+

Merchant Service Overview | Merchant Service Hardware

+

 

+

Use this procedure to configure your system to work with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service.

+
    +
  1. +

    Sign up for a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account and receive your Merchant Number.

    +
    2. +
+

Continue with the following steps after receiving your Merchant Number.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Company from the File menu and then select the Merchant & Gift Services page from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the Merchant Number provided to you and specify other options:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Do not allow manual transactions that fail address verification. When credit card information is manually entered, an address verification is performed to compare the entered ZIP code, and optionally the street address, against bank records. If this option is selected, the transaction is not allowed if a mismatch occurs. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Do not allow manual transactions that fail card verification. When credit card information is manually entered, an optional card verification can be performed using the verification code printed on the card. If this option is selected, the transaction is not allowed if the code entered does not match issuer records. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Accept debit/ATM card payments. Select if you want to accept payment by debit/ATM cards. A PIN pad device is required to process PIN debit transactions; which must be configured in workstation preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Allow cash back up to. If processing PIN debit sales, select this option if you also want to allow cash back to the customer. Enter the maximum cash back amount (limit of $200).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Automatically print and save receipt upon card approval. This option (at the bottom of the window) lets you return to assisting the customer while the authorization completes and the receipt is automatically printed.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Communication Setup sub page, and specify how you will communicate with the service, via Internet connection or dial-up (modem). Click the Internet Connection Setup button if you need help configuring an Internet connection.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Return to the Merchant & Gift Services page and select Verify next to your Merchant Number. Point of Sale will do a test connection and confirm that your account is active and ready to use. If errors are encountered, a message is displayed with information about resolving the situation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

(Pro) Read additional information about configuring for multiple locations.

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Protect customer's payment card data

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Take payment by debit card

+

Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices04.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8f24b03 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cancel or Reverse a Credit Card Payment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Cancel or Reverse Credit Card Payments

+

Merchant Service Overview | Fraud Prevention Tips

+

 

+

If the customer cancels a purchase in-process, or returns the purchased merchandise for a refund, the following apply if using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service:

+
    +
  • +

    If the receipt has not been saved/printed, click Credit to re-open the Credit Card payment dialog. Click Remove to clear the payment.  If the credit card payment had already been authorized, it is voided and the charge will not show up on the cardholders statement.  Enter new payment information or cancel the entire receipt, as applicable.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the receipt has been saved/printed, but the transaction not yet settled, locate the original receipt in your sales history and reverse it. Both the original and reversing receipt retain the credit card charge information, but are marked as being voided and neither are sent for settlement. Neither transaction shows up on the cardholders statement.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the transaction has been settled, the recommended procedure is to create a return receipt, giving change as a credit to the same credit card. Alternatively, if the receipt contains only the item(s) being returned and was paid entirely by credit card, then reversing the entire receipt may be the fastest way to void the transaction and/or issue a refund. If the customer is not returning all items on the original receipt, then a return receipt is your best choice.  In either case, since the original transaction was already settled, the return transaction is sent with the next Merchant Service batch, and both sale and return show up on the cardholders statement.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    If a credit card receipt is older than 60 days or if it has already been sent from a remote store to Headquarters, it can no longer be reversed. In this case, make a return receipt instead.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Settle credit card transactions

+

Merchant Service reports

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices05.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..39ef85b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit Card Returns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Returns

+

Sales Returns | Fraud Prevention Tips

+

 

+

If the transaction has already been settled with the bank, you should issue a credit refund to the customer by making a return receipt.

+

To make a return credit card receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create a new receipt, listing the return items as negative quantities (click Return Item after adding to the receipt).

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary, edit the returned item prices and quantities to be the same as the original purchase and then click Credit as the payment type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Credit dialog, ensure that Refund Card is selected.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Swipe or insert the customer's card (recommended).

    +
    4. +
+

Or

+

Click Manual and type the credit card number, expiration date, cardholders ZIP Code, and card verification code, and then click Authorize Now.

+
    +
  1. +

    Save and print the receipt. Have the customer sign the merchant copy.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Tip: If the customer is returning all of the merchandise on the original receipt , you can also reverse the original receipt. Reversing the receipt is typically done when the customer is not present to swipe or insert their card. (Pro: This option is not available at a remote store after a receipt has been sent to Headquarters.)

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Cancel and reverse credit card payments

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Merchant Service reports

+

Merchant Service overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices06.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices06.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..639accd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices06.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sign Up for a Merchant Account + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sign Up for a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account

+

Merchant Service Overview

+

 

+

Most retailers will want to sign up for a merchant account with Intuit to perform credit and debit/ATM card transactions. A QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account offers an integrated processing solution that allows you to authorize, settle, and record all your credit/debit card sales from within Point of Sale.

+

Getting set up is easy!  Requires Internet connection Learn more

+

 

+

To sign up for a QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Setup Interview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Payments tab.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Yes to accept credit and debit cards.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Sign In.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Be sure to sign in using the User ID (email) and password that you had previously created.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    If there is more than one account, you will be prompted to select the right account.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Note:  You will also need your QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account to take advantage of the available  mobile features.

+

 

+

Learn More

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Merchant Service reports

+

Protecting your customer's payment card data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices08.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..07fc788 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Referral/Voice Authorization + + + + + + + + + + +

Referral/Voice Authorization

+

Take Credit Card Payments | Merchant Service Overview

+

 

+

Manual Voice Authorizations

+

Sometimes it may be necessary to force a manual voice authorization. This may because your regular connection to the processor is down and you need to manually process the sale or you need to enter sales made earlier (such as at a remote location).

+

To force a manual voice authorization:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Credit as the payment type on the receipt form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When the credit card payment dialog opens, select Voice.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the mandatory information such as credit card number, expiration date, ZIP Code, and card verification code, and optionally the street address.  Learn about fraud prevention.

    +
    4. +
+

Voice instructions and a number for the voice authorization are displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Call the number displayed. You will be asked for your Merchant Number, which is displayed onscreen for your convenience.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Listen to the authorization menu choices carefully, you can choose to authorize with or without an address verification. Follow the phone prompts to enter necessary information. The operator will give you an authorization code when complete.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the authorization code you are given in the Voice Auth Number field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click  Authorize Now.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

The credit card payment information is added to the receipt total section.

+

 

+

Referral Response

+

The referral response typically occurs after three failed attempts to connect with the Merchant Service. This might occur if there is a problem with your modem or Internet connection, for example.

+

When the Referral response is returned, voice authorization is necessary. Follow the procedure above to obtain authorization for the transaction.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Merchant Service overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices09.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices09.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a9389a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices09.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Printed Receipt Options + + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Printed Receipt Options

+

Merchant Service Overview | Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

Three preference options are available for printing of credit, debit, and gift card receipts.

+

 

+

Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function Automatically Save/Print Credit, Debit and Gift Card Receipts Upon Approval

+

With this option selected (default) credit, debit, and gift card receipts are automatically saved and printed as soon as the transaction has been authorized when using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant or Gift Card Services. This allows the cashier to swipe or insert a card and immediately return to servicing the customer while the approval is in process and the receipt printing. This option can be disabled, if necessary, on the Merchant and Gift Service page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function Printing Two Copies of Credit Card Receipts

+

When a customer pays for a purchase with a credit card, two copies of the receipt can be printed: a signature copy for you and the customers copy.

+

By default, Point of Sale is configured to print two copies. However, if you use a two-ply receipt paper that prints both copies at the same time you should turn off this option, or you will end up with four copies of credit card receipts. Set this option independently for each workstation on the print options page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function Pause Between Printing to Allow Tearing Off Printed Receipts

+

By default, Point of Sale is configured to pause briefly after the first copy of a credit card receipt prints so you have time to tear it off before the second copy starts printing. If your receipt printer auto-cuts receipts, you can turn off this option independently for each workstation on the print options page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Specify the credit cards you accept

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Take payment by debit/ATM card

+

Take payment by gift card

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices13.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices13.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a544e3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices13.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Merchant Service Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchant Service Reports

+

Merchant Service Overview | Merchant Service Center

+

 

+

Users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service can run reports summarizing or detailing their credit and debit card transactions for any specified time period. These reports subtotal your transactions by settlement batch and, in a multi-store configuration, by merchant number.

+

To run a Merchant Service report:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Report Center, select Payments as the report category and then Merchant Service as the report type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select one of the specific Merchant Service reports available.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Unsettled Summary: Provides a listing of unsettled transactions by card type.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Unsettled Details: Provides details of all unsettled transactions.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Activity Summary: Provides a summary of all transactions (credit and debit), settled and unsettled.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Activity Details: Provides details of all transactions (credit and debit), settled and unsettled.

    +
    • +
+

The selected report is displayed using default or your last-run settings.

+
    +
  1. +

    Change the report date range or select Modify to change other report options and filters as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

Many report filtering options are available, including filtering by Batch #, Transaction Type (sales, refund), Status (voided, authorized), Card Name, Card Present (yes, no), Workstation, etc. The options available vary by specific report.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to display the reports with your specified options.

    +
    2. +
+

Optional: Memorize the report with your specified options for future use, when prompted.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print or Excel depending on your output needs.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can also view lists of credit and debit payments in Point of Sale in the Payments > Credit Card List and Debit Card List reports.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Work with a displayed report

+

Settle card transactions

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_avs.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_avs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2a0d116 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_avs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + +Address Verification Service (AVS) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Address Verification Service (AVS)

+

Card Verification | Fraud Prevention Tips

+

 

+

When you manually enter credit card information, the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service verifies the cardholder's address by comparing the ZIP Code, and optionally, the street address, city, state, and country you enter with the customer's credit card bank records.

+

This check is carried out using the Address Verification Service (AVS). Address verification helps merchants avoid credit card fraud and chargebacks for transactions in which the credit card information is manually entered or not physically present at the point of sale.

+

 

+

ZIP Code and Street Address

+

Only the customers ZIP Code is required to complete the address verification check, but you can include street address, city, state, and country for extra protection. Only the number portion of the street address is used in the verification check, but the credit card dialog allows you to enter additional address details as well.

+

 

+

Handling the AVS Results

+

The processor returns a message indicating whether the entered information matches that on file at the cardholders bank. The results of the AVS check are for your information only. You can choose to process the credit card payment even if the AVS check indicates a mismatch between the ZIP Code or address you entered and the cardholder's bank address information.

+

Address Verification Results GuideClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

You specify how you wish to handle AVS mismatches on the Merchant & Gift Services page in company preferences:

+
    +
  • +

    R Do not allow manual transactions that fail address verification Selecting this option provides a degree of protection against fraud and chargebacks but may also block legitimate transactions. You will not be able to complete a credit card transaction if an AVS mismatch occurs. If you clear this check box, the AVS check results are displayed, but you can still process the transaction at your discretion.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Configure your system for a merchant account

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_avscvc_results.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_avscvc_results.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2656647 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_avscvc_results.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +cardservices_avscvc_results + + + + + + + + + +

Address and Card Verification Check Results

+ +

Popup and has been hidden

+  +

Address Verification Service (AVS) Result Guide

+

A Comparing the provided information with file in cardholder's bank, the street address matches but ZIP Code does not match

+

E Error Response for Merchant Category Code provided in the message

+

N Comparing the provided information with file in cardholder's bank, both the street address and ZIP Code do not match

+

R Please retry, system not available

+

S Address Verification Service is not supported by cardholder's bank

+

U Address information is not available from cardholder's bank

+

W Comparing the provided information with file at cardholder's bank, 9-digit ZIP Code matches, but numeric street address does not match

+

X Comparing the provided information with file at cardholder's bank, there is an exact match of numeric street address and ZIP Code

+

Y Comparing the provided information with file at cardholder's bank, there is a match of numeric street address and 5-digit ZIP Code

+

Z Comparing the provided information with file at cardholder's bank, 5-digit ZIP Code matches, but numeric street address does not match

+

G Cardholder's bank is a non AVS participant outside the U.S.; not verified

+

 

+

Card Verification Code (CVC) Result Guide

+

M Card verification value entered matches that on file with cardholder's bank

+

N Card verification value entered does not match that on file with cardholder's bank

+

P Card verification value check could not be processed

+

S Card presented should have a card verification value; merchant indicated card verification value is not present

+

U Cardholder's bank is not certified for the card verification value (CVV) check service

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_communication_setup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_communication_setup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c80f93f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_communication_setup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + + +Communication Setup for Merchant and Gift Card Services + + + + + + + + + + +

Communication Setup for Merchant and Gift Card Services

+

Merchant Service Overview | Gift Service Overview

+

 

+

This service is not available in QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_enteringcardinfo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_enteringcardinfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d5f8dd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_enteringcardinfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Credit Card Information + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Credit Card Information

+

Payment Overview | Credit Card Refunds | FAQs

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+ +

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Click Manual to type in the card information or Voice if a voice authorization is necessary.

    +
    • +
+

Read the detailed credit card payment topic here.

+

 

+

For manually entered transactions, Point of Sale includes two security features to help you prevent credit card fraud: address verification and card verification. Click on a link below to learn more about these features.

+

What is address verification?

+

What is credit card verification?

+

Address and Card Verification Results Guide

+

What is voice authorization?

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

Configure your system for merchant services

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_fraudcheck.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_fraudcheck.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a047bb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_fraudcheck.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +cardservices_fraudcheck + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Fraud Prevention Checks

+ +

popup has been hidden

+ +

When manually authorizing credit card transactions, you can protect yourself against possible card fraud by entering the cardholders street address and the card verification code. These checks are optional, but highly recommended.

+
    +
  • +

    Entering a street address increases the protection afforded by the normal ZIP Code check included in address verification. Learn More

    +
    • +
  • +

    Entering the card verification code verifies that the customer, presumably the legitimate cardholder, has the actual card in their possession. Learn more

    +
    • +
+

Example locations of card verification code:

+

image\cardimages.gif

+

 

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_fraudprevention.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_fraudprevention.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1bfbab8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_fraudprevention.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit Card Fraud Prevention Tips + + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Fraud Prevention Tips

+

Address Verification | Card Verification

+

 

+

While the warning signs and suggestions below taken alone are not a sure method for protecting yourself against credit card fraud, you should be aware of them and use them to make better decisions in the fight against card fraud and chargebacks.

+

 

+

Verify the cardholders identity. Use the customers drivers license or ID card to verify the name, address, and compare signatures with that on the sales slip. If in doubt, dont hesitate to turn down the transaction or call the number on the back of the card, if present, to verify the cardholder information.

+

Get the customer signature on sales slips. If the customer refuses to sign the slip after you have processed the authorization, void the transaction. Do not process the sale if the cardholder refuses to sign the sales slip.

+

Observe the Address Verification Service (AVS) results. You have the option in Point of Sale of disallowing manually entered transactions that fail the address verification check. This preference may provide a degree of protection, but may also block some legitimate transactions. Some merchants choose to not accept transactions or ship merchandise to addresses other than the billing address for the account. Be especially wary if the customer requests a shipment to a PO Box or an international address.

+

Observe the card verification results. It is mandatory to enter the card verification code for your transactions. You also have the option in Point of Sale of disallowing manually entered transactions where the entered card verification code does not match the card issuers records. This check helps ensure that the customer actually has the card in their possession at the time of the sale. Some issuers automatically decline the transaction when a mismatch occurs, others allow you to use your discretion in accepting such transactions.

+

Be aware of card security features. All major card issuers have unique features to help identify against fraudulent cards. Visit the card issuer Web sites (Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, etc.) periodically to keep up with the latest technologies and features.

+

Dont refund credit card transactions with cash. Asking for a cash refund on a credit card transaction is a strong indicator of credit card fraud. In some cases, the cardholder will also file a dispute for the transaction after receiving cash, resulting in a possible chargeback to you as well. Refund credit card transactions only as a credit back to the same card.

+

Report fraud immediately. If possible, notify your manager while holding the card. Alternatively, initiate a voice authorization and request a Code 10 authorization. The operator will ask you a series of yes or no questions and guide you through the necessary steps.

+

Safety Comes First. If you feel you are in danger, decline the transaction and return the card. Call the authorization number after the customer has left to report the fraud.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Protect your customer's credit card data

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Configure your system for a merchant account

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_verificationcodes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_verificationcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d85f762 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservices_verificationcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit Card Verification + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit Card Verification

+

Address Verification | Fraud Prevention Tips

+

 

+

A credit card verification is an important security check for manually entered (non-swiped or non-inserted) credit card transactions. The code helps verify that the customer, presumably the legitimate cardholder, has the actual card in their possession. The use of this feature is mandatory as one component of a fraud prevention strategy.

+

Note: Depending on the card issuer, the card verification feature may be referred to as a card verification code (CVC), card verification value (CVV), card identification number (CID), or cardmember ID. All of these terms are synonymous and mean the same thing.

+

When you enter the card verification code on a credit card transaction, the processor verifies that the code matches issuer records. A mismatch can be one potential indicator of fraudulent use of the card.

+

Card Verification Code Results Guide

+

 

+

Where is the card verification code located?

+

The card verification code will have 3 or 4 digits and will be in different locations depending on the card type, as shown in the examples below.

+

When manually entering credit card information, enter the code in the Card Verification Code field on the credit card dialog before selecting the authorize button.

+

image\cardimages.gif

+

 

+

What happens if a mismatch occurs?

+

How a card verification code mismatch affects your credit card transaction depends on:

+
    +
  • +

    The card issuers regulations Some card issuers automatically decline charges when the verification code entered does not match their records. In this case the charge cannot be completed. Ask the customer for another method of payment.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your Point of Sale Merchant Services preferences If the card issuer does not decline the transaction, then you can proceed with the charge at your discretion. If you wish to block all transactions that fail card verification, select the check box for Do not allow manual transactions that fail card verification in your Merchant Service company preferences.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Configure your system for a merchant account

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservicesoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservicesoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9066811 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cardservicesoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks POS Merchant Service Overview + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks POS Merchant Service Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Merchant Service Hardware | Reports

+

 

+

Requires Internet connection Learn more about the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service

+

 

+

Overview

+

Most retailers will want to sign up for an account with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service to accept and process credit and debit/ATM card transactions.

+

Key benefits of the service include:

+
    +
  • +

    No duplicate data entry. All your credit and debit/ATM card sales are authorized, settled, and recorded directly in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Integrated batch settlement reporting within Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Choice of modem or secure Internet connection to communicate with the service.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optional cash back option for PIN debit transactions

    +
    • +
+

You can apply for an account with the QuickBooks Desktop  POS Merchant Service during the Setup Interview. The application takes just minutes to complete, and youll receive an approval decision and your Merchant Service number promptly. Once received, you enter your Merchant Number in company preferences to enable payments by credit and/or debit/ATM card.

+

A card reader is recommended, but not required to process credit card transactions (higher fees apply on non-swipe or non-inserted  transactions). A PIN pad is required to process PIN debit transactions. A modem or persistent (always on) Internet connection is necessary for transmitting data to and from at least one of your Point of Sale workstations. (Hardware sold separately.)

+

With QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, each time a customer presents a credit or debit/ATM card as payment, the card is swiped through or inserted in the card reader or PIN pad device. Point of Sale then submits the card information to the processor for authorization. Credit card information can also be manually entered. Within seconds, the status of the transaction is relayed back to the merchants computer.

+

Credit and debit card transactions are settled when a merchant runs the End of Day procedure. Settlement initiates the actual transfer of funds from the card-issuing bank to the merchants bank account.

+

Point of Sale records the transaction information on your computer so you can generate reports or access the details of a transaction later. You can run Merchant Service reports from the reports area of Point of Sale.

+

 

+ ++ + + +
+

Important Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service must take steps to comply with the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) requirements for the secure processing, storage, and transmittal of credit and debit card transactions.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Credit card transaction data must be sent to the processor for settlement within one day of authorizing the transaction to avoid paying higher fees.

    +
    • +
+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Multiple-location configuration

+

What if I use another Service?

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_cleanup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_cleanup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b9b84ea --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_cleanup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + +Clean Up Company Data + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Clean Up Company Data

+

 

+

The Clean Up Company Data procedure optimizes your Point of Sale data file, resulting in faster searches, lookups, and reporting. This procedure also allows you to remove old transactions and other information from your data file.

+

Optionally, you can also choose to compress the data file so that it takes less hard disk space. How is compressing different than optimizing the data file?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, this feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

Warning  Warning!  Compressing the data file will significantly add to the amount of time this process takes and may not provide additional improvement to performance. Compressing a large data file may take several hours and is recommended only if you are running out of physical disk space. Complete this process during off-hours as it cannot be canceled once started.

+

 

+

A backup of your current data, before cleanup, will automatically be created during this procedure.

+

Before beginning:

+
    +
  • +

    Read What do I need to know about cleaning up my company data?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    If desired, delete unneeded records from your item, customer, vendor, and employee lists. These records are not removed by the Clean Up Company Data procedure; however the lists are optimized if records have been manually deleted.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Close Point of Sale on all workstations except the Server Workstation.

    +
    • +
+

To clean up your data:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu at the Server Workstation, select Utilities > Clean Up Company Data.

    +
    2. +
+

The Clean Up Company Data wizard is launched.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Next to move through the wizard pages, selecting cleanup options:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Specify if the data file is to be compressed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select the records and/or documents you want to remove.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If removing history documents, specify a cleanup date. All selected history documents created prior to the specified date are removed.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Cleanup.

    +
    2. +
+

A progress dialog is displayed as the cleanup procedure is carried out.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Transactions and records removed are no longer available on Point of Sale reports, customer history, or vendor history. However, all transactions are retained on the item history screen (but you can't QuickZoom to view them).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Even if no records or documents are selected for removal, this procedure will optimize your data file for better performance.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Restore from a data cleanup backup

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_connecting.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_connecting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e7fbec --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_connecting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Connect to the Company Data on the Server + + + + + + + + + + + +

Connect to the Company Data on the Server

+

Data Overview | About Server/Client Workstations | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

In a networked, multi-workstation configuration, use this procedure to connect a Client Workstation to the Point of Sale company data on the Server Workstation. Your computers must be properly networked.

+

To connect a Client to the company data:

+
    +
  1. +

    Ensure that the Server Workstation is running.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale on the Client Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Point of Sale searches your network and locates the server installation of your company data.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    If a single company data file is located, the Client is automatically connected to it. And the following steps do not apply.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If more than one Point of Sale company data file exists on the network, a window is displayed listing the names of the files. Continue with the following steps.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select the company data you wish to access and select OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, select a workstation number for this computer, and select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

If you require employee logins (previously set up), the Log In window is displayed. Use your user name and password to log in to the program.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat this procedure for each Client Workstation.

    +
    2. +
+

On subsequent launches of the Client Workstation, Point of Sale automatically reconnects to the same server/company data.

+

 

+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Install additional workstations

+

About Point of Sale licensing

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_converting.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_converting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d245e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_converting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + +Convert Data from a Previous Version + + + + + + + + + + + +

Convert Data from a Previous Version

+

Data Overview | Backup/Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Point of Sale prompts you to convert company data from a previous version, if detected, when the program is first started on the Server Workstation. You can also use the second procedure below to convert previous version data at anytime in the future.

+

 

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, this feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

To convert company data when prompted on initial startup:

+
    +
  1. +

    Answer Yes to converting your prior version data when Point of Sale alerts you it has been detected.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a unique name for the new company data file and select OK.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the dialog displayed, confirm the location of the previous installation of Point of Sale and select OK.

    +
    4. +
+

Alternatively, you can browse to a different location or specify that the conversion should be done from a backup file of previous data.

+
    +
  1. +

    If prompted, be sure all workstations have closed the previous version and then answer Yes to continue with the conversion.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale copies the data files from the previous version and then converts the copied files to the current format. This process may take several minutes, as customer, vendor, and item histories are built. The total time required will vary with the size of your existing data file and hardware configuration. Your data files in the previous version are left unchanged in this process.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to close the import confirmation window when displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you require employee logins, the Log In window is displayed. Use your previous version user name and password to log in to the program.

    +
    3. +
+

To convert company data from a previous version later:

+
    +
  1. +

    Close all open windows and have all other workstations exit Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Convert from previous version and click Next.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the prompts (same as above) to complete the conversion, identifying the location and version number of your previous installation when requested.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Open a company data file

+

Share your data with an advisor or accountant

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_create.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_create.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff9a664 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_create.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Create a New Company Data File + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a New Company Data File

+

 

+

Use this procedure to create a new Point of Sale company data file.

+

 

+

Note:  In a multi-workstation configuration, this feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

Note:  If this is the first time you are running Point of Sale and you have been prompted to create a company file, start with step 4 below.

+

To create a new company data file :  

+
    +
  1. +

    In a multi-workstation configuration, close Point of Sale on all client workstations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Create new company and click Next.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Enter a unique name for the new company data, then click OK.

    +
    5. +
+

(Pro) Also specify your store type and, if a remote, specify a store number before clicking OK.

+

Point of Sale displays a status indicator as it creates the new company data.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK when the confirmation dialog is displayed.

    +
    2. +
+

The registration screen (if applicable) and then the Hardware Setup Wizard and Setup Interview will launch to assist you in configuring the program for your store(s).

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0b5c665 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +companydata_hdi + + + + + + + + +

POS Company Data: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Connect to my company data on the Server Workstation

+

Create a new company data file

+

Open a company data file

+

Rename my company data file

+

Convert data from a previous version

+

Backup or restore my company data

+

Share my company data with an advisor or accountant

+

Troubleshoot data connection problems

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_opening.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_opening.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3fda8d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_opening.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Open a Company Data File + + + + + + + + + + +

Open a Company Data File

+

Data Overview | Backup/Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Point of Sale automatically opens the last company file that you worked with when you start the program.

+

You can use this procedure to open a different Point of Sale company file stored on the Server Workstation or to browse to a file on your network.

+

To open a company data file:

+
    +
  1. +

    Close Point of Sale on client workstations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Open existing company, and select a file from the drop-down list displayed. The list includes all company data files detected on the Server Workstation.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Next.

    +
    5. +
+

Point of Sale opens the specified company data.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Share your data with an advisor or accountant

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_pos.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_pos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4122562 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_pos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + +Working with Point of Sale Company Data + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Working with Point of Sale Company Data

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Backup and Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Point of Sale allows you to create a new company data file, convert data from a previous version of the software, and to open any company data to which you have access on your network. These options are available only from the Server Workstation and are subject to security rights.

+

You can send your Point of Sale company data to an advisor or accountant, who can open the file on his own computer (must have Point of Sale installed).

+

Upon initial startup of Point of Sale on the Server Workstation, you are prompted to create your company data (or to convert from a previous version of Point of Sale, if detected). If you chose not to create or convert company data initially but need to so now, or if you decide to start over, you can access these choices at anytime by selecting Company Data from the File menu.

+

Select a topic from the How Do I? link above for more information.

+

(Pro) The Server Workstation at each store creates its own company data. Once Store Exchanges begin, the shared company information from Headquarters is added to the company data file at remote stores.

+

 

+

Where is my company data stored?

+

The default locations for your Point of Sale data file is:

+

Windows XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\(Shared) Documents\ Intuit\ Point of Sale n.n\Data\<your company file name>

+

Windows Vista: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\ Intuit\ Point of Sale n.n\Data\<your company file name>

+

 

+

To quickly go to this location from Point of Sale:  From the File menu, select Utilities > Browse to Data. A Windows Explorer window opens to the location of your data folder.

+

 

+

Payment Card Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard (DSS)

+

If you use the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service to authorize and settle payment card transactions, you must take measures beyond the general recommendations listed above to protect cardholder data during the collection, transmission, and storage of that data. Refer to the electronic Implementation Guide for assistance in using Point of Sale within an overall system that meets the Payment Card Industry (PCI) Data Security Standard (DSS) requirements.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

General connection, performance, and networking FAQs

+

Importing data

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_rename.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_rename.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..774969a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_rename.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Rename Your Company Data File + + + + + + + + + + + +

Rename Your Company Data File

+

Company Data Overview | Backup/Restore Data | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Note: In a multi-workstation configuration, this feature is available only from the Server Workstation.

+

 

+

You can rename your currently open company data file at anytime. After renaming the file, each Client Workstation that uses the file will have to search and select the new file on next startup.

+

To rename your company data file:

+
    +
  1. +

    Close Point of Sale on all Client Workstations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Server Workstation, open the data file you wish to rename (if not already open).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Rename Company and click Next.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Enter a new name for the file and click Rename. The new name cannot duplicate the name of an existing file.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Restart Client Workstations.

    +
    7. +
+

Point of Sale will search the network and locate the company data file. If a list of files is presented on the Client Workstation, select the new file name.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Share your data with an advisor or accountant

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_share.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_share.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5747f33 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companydata_share.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Share Your Company Data with an Advisor or Accountant + + + + + + + + + + + +

Share Your Company Data with an Advisor or Accountant

+

Company Data Overview | Protect Customers' Payment Card Data

+

 

+

If you engage the services of an advisor or accountant, you can easily send them a copy of your company data for review. Your advisor must have the same version and level of Point of Sale that you use to view your file.

+

You should give your advisor a copy of your data, not your original company data file. You can continue to carry on normal activities in Point of Sale while your advisor is reviewing your data.

+

Security Note: We strongly recommend that you require user logins if sharing your data with other parties. Add your advisor as an employee and assign a user name and password for access. Typically, you would give your advisor full access rights (Owner or custom security group), but you can assign more limited rights if preferred.

+

To create a copy of your Point of Sale data for an advisor:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Back Up Data.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Backup Data dialog, select Backup to an alternate location and then click Browse.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Give the backup file a unique name (leave the .qpb extension) and save it to a removable disk, CD, memory stick, or other media that you can provide to your advisor.

    +
    4. +
+

(Advisor) To access your clients data:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Create new company and click Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter a unique name for the new company data, then click OK.

    +
    4. +
+

The new data file is created and confirmed.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Company Operations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the dialog displayed, select Restore from backup and click Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Browse to alternate backup file and then browse to locate the clients backup file on the provided media. Look for a file with the .qpb extension and then select Open.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK to restore the clients data to the new data file created in Step 2. The clients data is opened on your computer.

    +
    5. +
+

This procedure adds the clients data to your database server list. You can subsequently reopen this data by selecting Company Data Open from the File menu.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a new company data file

+

Open a company data file

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_avspopup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_avspopup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5633b88 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_avspopup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +companyprefs_avspopup + + + + + + + + + +

How is the cardholder's address verified?

+ +

popup topic hidden

+ +

When you manually enter credit card information, you are asked to provide the cardholder's ZIP code and, optionally, the street address. When Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service, the address information entered is checked against that on file at the cardholder's bank.

+

If you have this option enabled (selected):

+
    +
  • +

    If the ZIP Code and/or street address does not match, the transaction is not allowed. This affords you a degree of protection against credit card fraud, but may also block some legitimate transactions.

    +
    • +
+

If you do not have this option enabled:

+
    +
  • +

    If the ZIP Code and/or street address does not match, an alert is displayed but you can continue with the transaction at your discretion. This affords less protection against credit card fraud, but gives you more flexibility.

    +
    • +
+ +

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_cvc_popup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_cvc_popup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5d6f87 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_cvc_popup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +companyprefs_cvc_popup + + + + + + + + + +

How is a credit card verified?

+ +

popup topic hidden

+ +

A credit card verification is an important security feature for manually entered (non-swiped) credit card transactions. The code helps verify that the customer, presumably the legitimate cardholder, has the actual card in their possession. The use of this feature is optional, but highly recommended.

+

The verification process compares the card verification code entered against the card issuer's records.

+

This preference controls how you handle transactions that fail the card verification.

+

If you have this option enabled (selected):

+
    +
  • +

    Transactions where the card fails the verification check are not allowed. You will have to ask the customer for another form of payment.

    +
    • +
+

If you do not have this option enabled:

+
    +
  • +

    You are alerted when a card fails the verification check, but you can choose to proceed with the transaction at your discretion.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Depending on the card issuer, the card verification feature may be referred to as a card verification code (CVC), card verification value (CVV), card identification number (CID), or cardmember ID. All of these terms are synonymous and mean the same thing.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Some card issuers automatically deny transactions where the card verification has failed, regardless of this preference setting.

    +
    • +
+ +

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_discounts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_discounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1bd25ef --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_discounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Discounts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Discounts

+

Preference Instructions | Giving Discounts

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Manual Item Discount Reason

+		 +

R = Require a discount reason for manual discounts. Select to require the cashier to specify the reason when giving a manual item discount.

+

This allows you to track discounts given on discount reports.

+

You define manual discount reasons in Price Manager. The names will then be available for the cashier to select from on the sales receipt.

+
+

Print Coupons on Receipts (Pro)

+		 +

R = Print coupons on receipts.  Select and then specify options to print your store coupons with qualifying sales receipts.

+

To avoid giving coupons to customers who also qualify for your rewards program, select the check box titled Exclude receipts with rewards customer assigned.

+
+

 

+

Other Sales Preferences

+

Sales general sales preferences

+

Printed receipt message

+

Shipping list of shipping providers

+

Receipt tendering payment options

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Company preferences overview

+

Customizing printed receipts and other documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_emaildocs.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_emaildocs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5949ea9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_emaildocs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + +Company Preferences: E-mail Documents + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: E-mail Documents

+

Preference Instructions | E-mailing Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

Specify default settings for e-mailing documents from within Point of Sale.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Default Message Text

+		 +

Select a document type from the drop-down list at the top of the window and then complete the following settings to apply to that document type. Repeat for each document type you wish to e-mail.

+

Enter salutation, subject line, and body text. Point of Sale writes this information to each e-mail it creates, but you can edit individual e-mails before sending.

+

You can add information fields (shown in <brackets> at bottom of window) to your subject line or message, in which case the information from the matching fields on the document being sent is auto-filled to the message when it is created. Enter the field name and bracket just as shown.

+
+

Create attachment as

+		 +

Select one of the e-mail attachment formats:

+

PDF recipient must have Adobe Acrobat Reader installed to view.

+

Excel recipient must have Microsoft Excel 2000 - 2007 installed to view.

+

HTML can be viewed in web browsers.

+

Text plain text format that can be viewed in most text editors or Word processing software.

+
+

 

+

See also the workstation preference for being prompted to e-mail each sales receipts.

+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_instructions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_instructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..319a154 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_instructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +General Instructions for Editing Company Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

General Instructions for Editing Company Preferences

+

Overview | Workstation Preferences

+

 

+

 Warning: Undo and Reset Options Affect All Preferences
+Two powerful options are available from the Preferences I Want To menu:  Undo Changes to discard all changes since your last save, but remain in preferences, and Reset to Default Setting to revert all workstation preferences to their default values. Be aware that these choices affect all workstation preferences, not just the page you are currently viewing.

+

To edit company preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the left pane, choose the page containing the preference you want to change.

    +
    3. +
+

Click the icons (or keys) to expand or collapse the preference menu structure, as necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the preference settings as needed. Help for each page is displayed in the yellow sidebar to the right.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Cancel to leave preferences without saving any changes.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_integratedapps.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_integratedapps.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c62abe4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_integratedapps.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Integrated Applications + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Integrated Applications

+

Preference Instructions

+

 

+

This page lists third-party applications that have previously been granted access to your Point of Sale company data.

+

To remove an application (which blocks further access to your data):

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the application in the list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Remove.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Yes in the confirmation dialog.

    +
    4. +
+

Learn more about integrated applications

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Integration with QuickBooks Desktop financial software does not show up in this list and cannot be removed here.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you require employee logins, you can block an employee's ability to log in to Point of Sale from an integrated application. Clear the security right check box labeled Log in from an integrated application (in the General area) for the employees you wish to block.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_inventory.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_inventory.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b499312 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_inventory.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Inventory

+

Preference Instructions | Inventory Overview

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

I want to associate pictures with my inventory items (Pro)
+ 

+

 

+

Reset automatic item number sequencing when an item number is edited

+

 

+

 

+

Create reorder reminders based on (Pro)

+		 +

Select to make the item picture fields available on the item form and a thumbnail available in other program areas.

+

 

+

If selected, editing an item number in inventory resets the auto-numbering sequence to begin with the next available number after the edited number.

+

 

+

Select an available option:

+

Available quantity (default): Takes into consideration quantities committed to open customer orders.

+

On-Hand Quantity: Does not take customer order quantities into consideration.

+

With either selection, Point of Sale looks at your reorder points and considers quantities already on open purchase orders before adding items to the reorder reminders. Learn more.

+
+

Inventory Quick Pick Groups

+		 +

Click Add to create a new inventory tag for use with the Quick Pick Item feature. Once defined, you assign the tags to items in inventory and can then use Quick Pick to add them to  sales receipts and receiving vouchers.

+

You can use other action buttons to arrange the order or remove item tags.

+
+

Units of Measure

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Multiple Units of Measure (Pro)

+		 +

Select Add to define a new unit of measure or Remove to delete an existing one.

+

The Move Up and Move Down buttons allow you to arrange the entries into the order they will appear on the drop-down list on item records.

+

Unit of measures defined here are available for use with the multiple unit of measure feature described below.

+

 

+

I want to set up multiple units of measure.. Select to use the multiple unit of measure feature to purchase, receive and sell items by different units, such as by cases and individual units. Learn more.

+

 

+

Unit of measure options:

+

Print unit of measure information in the quantity field on all documents.

+

Select to insert the unit in the quantity field on printed documents. Learn more.

+

 

+

Displaying Units of Measure: Choose whether Point of Sale should add the UOM fields to all documents and lists, or if you want to add them manually as needed.

+
+

Company preferences overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_ratings.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_ratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9820910 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_ratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Ratings & Trends + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Ratings & Trends

+

Preference Instructions | Item Ratings | Customer Ratings

+

 

+

Ratings and trends allow you to view graphical indicators of sales performance in your item and customer lists. Returns are subtracted from sales to calculate net sales for this feature. Select a link above to learn more about this feature in each area.

+

Use this page of company preferences to turn on/off the rating and trend feature for each area and specify the value and time periods on which rankings are based.

+

Note: In a networked, multi-workstation configuration, this preference can be set by the Server Workstation only.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Show ratings and trends for items

+		 +

R Select if you want rating and trend information calculated for inventory items.

+

Based on: Choose a value on which rankings are based. Choices are Profit, Quantity (net sales), or Total Sales (net dollars).

+

Time: Choose the number of days in sales history that should be used for calculations. Maximum is 999.

+
+

Show ratings for customers (Basic)

+		 +

R Select if you want sales rating information calculated for customers.

+

Based on: Choose a value on which rankings are based. Choices are Profit or Total Sales (net dollars).

+

Time: Choose the number of days in sales history that should be used for calculations. Maximum is 999.

+
+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_receiptmessage.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_receiptmessage.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cab97fd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_receiptmessage.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Printed Receipt Message + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Printed Receipt Message

+

Preference Instructions | Sales Overview

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Printed Receipt Message

+		 +

Enter text to be printed on all receipts. For example, you might want to use this preference to print your return/exchange policy,  or a thank you message.

+

Pro users might include information about your rewards program.

+
+

 

+

Other Sales Preferences

+

Sales general sales preferences

+

Discounts define and optionally require manual item discount reasons

+

Shipping list of shipping providers

+

Receipt tendering payment options

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Company preferences overview

+

Customizing printed receipts and other documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_receiving.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_receiving.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a333ff3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_receiving.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Receiving + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Receiving

+

Preference Instructions | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Use the Receiving preferences to set various options related to receiving of merchandise from your vendors.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Warn when receiving against PO past its Cancel Date

+		 +

Alert employee when receiving against a PO that has passed the cancel date. If this preference is not selected, the cancel date is ignored.

+
+

Enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale

+		 +

Select to enter vendor billing information on receiving vouchers in Point of Sale.

+

By default, the vendor billing information fields are not available on Point of Sale receiving vouchers, as it is assumed you will track vendor billings in QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Learn more.

+
+

Printed Voucher Message

+		 +

Enter optional default message to print on all vouchers. This message is not displayed on screen.

+
+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_shipping.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_shipping.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4badb97 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_shipping.htm @@ -0,0 +1,135 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Shipping + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Shipping

+

Preference Instructions | Sales Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

Note: You must have shipping enabled in your Select Features to Use preferences for the following preferences to be applicable.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Shipping Manager

+

 

+

 

+

 

+		 +

Use QuickBooks Desktop Shipping Manager. Select the check box to use Shipping Manager.

+

With the Shipping Manager you can connect to UPS shipping services online to arrange shipments, print shipping labels, and track the shipments from within Point of Sale.

+

Shipping Manager Requirements Click to expand topic

+ +

 

+

I do not charge my customer for shipping. With this option, you can use Shipping Manager to arrange shipments, but the shipping charges will not be added to sales receipts.

+

Learn more about Shipping Manager

+
+

 

+ + + + + +
+

Shipping Providers

+		 +

Select Add or Remove to add or delete shipping providers from the list.

+

The providers on this list are available in the order listed for selection on sales receipts and customer orders. Use the Move Up/Down buttons to arrange the order of providers and the Make Default button to designate the provider that is suggested when entering shipping information on a document.

+

 

+

Important: If using Shipping Manager, ensure you do not include "UPS" in the name of a provider you are adding manually. This string of characters will result in errors when shipping. If adding a legitimate UPS service, select it from the predefined drop-down list in the Add a New Shipping Provider dialog.

+

The shipping providers and service levels on this list are available (in the order listed) for selection on sales receipts and customer orders when you are adding shipping information or charges.

+

Use the Add, Remove, and Move Up/Down buttons to add, delete, or rearrange the providers to meet your needs.

+

Important: Do not include "UPS" in the name of a provider you are adding manually. This string of characters will result in errors when shipping via Shipping Manager. If you need to add a legitimate UPS service, select it from the predefined drop-down list in the Add a New Shipping Provider dialog.

+
+

 

+

Other Sales Preferences

+

Sales general sales preferences

+

Discounts define and optionally require manual item discount reasons

+

Receipt message printed on every sales receipt

+

Receipt tendering payment options

+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_tendering.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_tendering.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d3fd44 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_tendering.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Receipt Tendering + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Receipt Tendering

+

Preference Instructions | Taking Payments | Sales Overview

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Payment Methods

+		 +

Select the payment methods you accept on sales. Only the payment methods selected will be available on the receipt payment window. Cash cannot be removed.

+

Default payment method: From the drop-down list, select the payment method most frequently used on sales. This default method will be suggested on all new sales.

+
+

Card Types

+		 +

Specify the credit card types allowed when taking a payment by credit card.

+

Only the selected types will be accepted.

+
+

Tips

+		 +

Select to be prompted to collect and record a tip (gratuity) on credit card, gift card, and account charge sales. Learn more.

+
+

Past Due Payments

+		 +

Select and enter 30, 60, or 90 days to display past due amounts and block additional charges to a customer's account at that age. Past due amounts come from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Learn more.

+
+

 

+

Other Sales Preferences

+

Sales general sales preferences

+

Discounts define and optionally require manual item discount reasons

+

Receipt message printed on every sales receipt

+

Shipping list of shipping providers

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_uom_printing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_uom_printing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e94781c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/companyprefs_uom_printing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +companyprefs_uom_printing + + + + + + + + + + + +

How are units of measure printed?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

 

+
    +
  • +

    Documents: If the print unit of measure information in the quantity field on all documents option in company preferences is selected, the unit of measure used for the transaction is inserted in the quantity field on printed documents.

    +
    • +
+ +

<insert image example>

+ +

You can use Print Designer, if necessary, to resize the quantity field on documents to accommodate your unit of measure. With this preference turned off, the unit of measure is not printed on documents unless you use Print Designer to add the Unit of Measure field to the document(s).

+
    +
  • +

    Price Tags: If a default sell-by unit is specified for an item, tags are printed using the default sell-by units information and quantity.

    +
    • +
+

Example: You buy a canned item by the case, but your default sell-by unit is the individual can. There are 24 cans in a case. When printing tags from a purchase order or receiving voucher, the item is listed as one case but tags will print for 24 individual cans.

+

If you do not have a default sell-by unit specified, tags will print based on the base unit specified for the item.

+

 

+ +

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/compatible_equipment.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/compatible_equipment.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..78a6ba3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/compatible_equipment.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible Hardware + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Hardware

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Hardware Setup Wizard | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

Point of Sale has been designed to work with select industry-leading retail hardware. Although Point of Sale may operate with various other hardware peripherals, Intuit does not provide hardware support for hardware not sold by Intuit.

+

Supported Hardware: Hardware models listed in bold type in the compatible hardware lists are available for purchase from Intuit and are supported by Intuit if purchased directly from Intuit. Supported hardware is pre-configured to work with Point of Sale. The same models purchased from other sources may not be compatible with Point of Sale. Intuit does not provide support for hardware not purchased from Intuit.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found to be compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but is not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

To purchase supported hardware directly from Intuit, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us Internet connection required online

+

For the most current Point of Sale hardware drivers and installation instructions, click here.

+

 

+

Important Note: Intuit works closely with the manufacturers of hardware sold by Intuit for use with Point of Sale to ensure these devices work together and with the Point of Sale software. Hardware, such as PIN Pads and Physical Inventory Scanners, purchased from other sources may not contain the required programming to work with Point of Sale software and/or the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. Intuit does not provide hardware programming, and does not guarantee that devices purchased from other third party sources will work with Intuit software.

+

View the compatible hardware list for:

+

Cash drawers

+

Receipt printers

+

Tag and label printers

+

Card readers

+

PIN pads

+

Bar code scanners

+

Pole (shopper) displays

+

Physical inventory scanners

+

Touchscreens

+

Electronic Scale for Shipping Manager

+

 

+

About connection ports

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust901.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust901.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..da72076 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust901.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Access your Customer List + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access your Customer List

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Customer Overview

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

To access your customer list:

+
    +
  • +

    From the Home Page, select Customer List from the left side bar or from the Customers menu

    +
    • +
+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust902.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust902.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a3f1665 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust902.htm @@ -0,0 +1,184 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a Customer + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a Customer

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Customer Information Fields | Customer Overview

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

Note: If you have accessed this topic after copying a customer record, start with Step 2. Edit the information brought from the copied record as needed.

+

 

+

It is helpful to be consistent when entering customer information. Consistently using the same data format makes it easier to sort, search, and look up customer records.

+

To add a customer:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Home Page Customers menu, select  New Customer.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From your Customer List, click the Add button.

+

OR

+

From the Customer field on a sales receipt, click the icon and then choose Add New Customer.

+

A blank customer form is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Navigate through the sections on the customer form and enter name, contact, and optional information for the customer:

    +
    2. +
+

Expand each section of the form by clicking the small triangle icon to the right of the label:

+

    

+
    +
  • +

    Name: The Last (Name) field is required to save a customer record, unless Track as Company is selected (see below).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track as Company (Pro):  Allows you to record customer PO numbers on transactions for the customer and display the company name throughout Point of Sale (in the Full Name field). With this selection, Company (Name) is a required entry. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Contact Info:  Enter the customer's phone, e-mail, and address.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer Notes: Add whatever notes might be helpful, such as birthday, clothing sizes, gift preferences, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Custom Fields (Pro):  You can define and use custom fields to record additional information. Using custom fields allows you to use the information to filter reports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    QuickBooks Desktop Options: Use these settings to control sharing of customer information with QuickBooks Desktop financial software and to set up and maintain charge accounts for the customer.

    +
    • +
  • +
      +
    • +

      R  Use with QuickBooks Desktop: Select this check box share this customer's information with QuickBooks Desktop. A company preference controls the default setting of this option.

      +
      • +
    • +

      R  Charge Account: Select to allow charges for this customer and enter an account limit. Learn more

      +
      • +
    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer Settings: Use this area to set other options:

    +
    • +
  • +
      +
    • +

      Customer ID (Pro): Customer IDs are automatically assigned to new customers and can be used to print scannable ID cards. Learn more

      +
      • +
    • +

      Rewards Member (Pro):  If offering a Rewards program, elect the check box to enroll this customer. Learn more

      +
      • +
    • +

      Alternate contact info: Enter additional phone numbers.

      +
      • +
    • +

      Customer Type: Categorize your customers in ways that are meaningful to your business. Learn more

      +
      • +
    • +

      Tax Location: Specify a customer tax location for special tax handling (Set up can use a 0% tax location for tax-exempt customers).  Learn more

      +
      • +
    • +

      Customer Discounts:  If applicable, click the Discount button and specify a customer discount or price level to suggest on all sales to the customer. Learn more

      +
      • +
    • +

      Accept Checks: Select the check box if checks are to be accepted for payment from this customer.

      +
      • +
    +
    • +
  • +

    Addresses (Pro):  Use this area to enter additional shipping addresses and print shipping labels. The address entered in the Contact Info section is automatically added as the default shipping address. Select the Do not mail to Bill To Address check box to prevent this and then click Add to enter alternate shipping addresses (up to ten). Designate one as the default. The default shipping address will be suggested when you add shipping information to sales receipts.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If an existing customer record is very similar to a new one you are creating, copying and editing the existing record might be the quickest way to create the new record.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software:

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer names can be sent to QuickBooks Desktop in the order you prefer (e.g. <first, last> or <last, first>). Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Charge account balances and limits are shared between the programs. You cannot track account charges without also having the Use with QuickBooks Desktop option selected. Learn more

    +
    • +
+

Note: The availability of customer tracking features can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track customers by type

+

Track business customers

+

Edit customer records

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust905.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust905.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..99f54fa --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust905.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit a Customer Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Customer Record

+

Find a Customer | Customer Fields | Customer Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

To edit a customer record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and select the record you wish to edit in your customer list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit. The record is opened in an editable form.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit the customer information fields as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+ +

If you have to edit many customer records at once, such as when a ZIP Code or phone area code changes, consider using list edit mode. List edit mode allows you to make changes directly in your customer list, similar to working in a spreadsheet.

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a customer record

+

Merge duplicate customer records

+ +

Manually issuing or canceling a customer reward

+ +

Tracking customers in multiple stores

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust907.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust907.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f163046 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust907.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Discounts and Price Levels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Discounts and Price Levels

+

Price Levels | Give Discounts on Sales | Customers Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

A percentage discount or a markdown price level, but not both, can be associated with a customer, so that it is automatically suggested on sales to the customer. You have the option of applying the discount or price level to each sale.

+

If using a percentage discount, it is applied as an item discount to all items being sold (except gift cards/certificates) and it is applied against the active price level.

+

To define a customer discount or price level:

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Add or Edit Customer form, open the Customer Settings section.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Disc(count) button.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Customer Discount window, select Apply fixed percentage discount to all items and enter a discount percentage

    +
    4. +
+

OR

+

Select Use a markdown price level for this customer and then select a price level from the drop-down list.

+

You must have your price levels predefined in company preferences to be available for selection here.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Close Customer Discount Window link.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note: If you click Save at the bottom right, the customer record is saved and closed. Simply re-open it if you have additional information to add/edit.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust909.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust909.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..38002f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust909.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Delete Customer Records + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete Customer Records

+

Find a Customer Record | Merge Customer Records

+
+

Basic

+
+

To delete customers:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the customer record or records you wish to delete in your customer list.  How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale will alert you if a selected customer cannot be deleted.

+
    +
  1. +

    If prompted, confirm the deletion and specify if you want to delete the customer(s) from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software as well.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You cannot delete a customer with a non-zero account balance. To delete such a customer the account balance must be reduced to zero, typically by taking a payment on account.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are deleting a customer because you have duplicates, consider merging the customer records instead, as this will combine the two customer histories into one and remove the other.

    +
    • +
  • +

    We recommend deleting the customer in QuickBooks Desktop financial software if prompted. To guard against accidental deletion, if a customer record is deleted in only one program, it is re-created upon the next Financial Exchange. Note that if the customer is listed on documents in your financial software, the record is made inactive instead of deleting it. Making the customer inactive also prevents the record from being re-created with the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you delete a customer, but later list that customer on a sales receipt (by referencing a customer order listing the customer) the customer is re-created in both Point of Sale and your financial software with the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Read more about handling customers in a multi-store configuration.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+

Customers overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust910.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust910.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d10c361 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust910.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +View Customer Purchase History + + + + + + + + + + + +

View Customer Purchase History

+

Locate a Customer Record | Merge Customer Records

+
+

Basic

+
+

Customer history reports allow you to view summarized statistical data for customer purchases and returns, as well as a list of all receipts and all non-deleted customer orders made for the customer. You can expand the documents included in the report to view item detail or QuickZoom to view the associated documents.

+

To view a customers history report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the customer history in one of these ways:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    In your customer list, select the customer and click Details.

    +
    • +
  • +

    List the customer on a sales receipt or customer order and then click the View/Edit button to open the customer record.

    +
    • +
+

+

A list of transactions for the customer is summarized in the History section of the customer details.

+

      image\customer_history.gif

+

 

+

With customer history displayed, you can click a transaction in the list to open it for review.

+  +

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you came to the Customer History window from a sales receipt (or customer order), you can't open a receipt from sales history. (Only one instance of a document type can be opened at a time).

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you delete customer orders once they are filled, the deleted orders are no longer displayed on the Customer History window. However, the sale of the merchandise on deleted customer orders is reflected in the history.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Customer history at remote stores reflects only the documents made at the local store. Headquarters sees completed sales at all stores, but not pending customer orders made at remotes.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust911.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust911.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..36a6cca --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust911.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Charge Accounts and Store Credits + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Charge Accounts and Store Credits

+

Charges to Account | Payments on Account | Past Due Accounts

+
+

Basic

+
+

Store Credit: Even if you don't wish to allow customers to charge purchases, you may still want to set up customer accounts for the purpose of giving store credit when merchandise is returned. Point of Sale will track the customer's credit balance and you can apply the credit towards a future purchase. For purposes of store credit, issuing a credit uses the same procedure as taking a payment on account, while applying a credit uses the same procedure as charging to account.    

+

 

+

Overview

+

You can offer and track customer charge accounts in Point of Sale. As the customer makes charges to and payments on her account, Point of Sale tracks the account balance and the remaining credit available.

+

When making a sale to the customer, this information is displayed on the receipt and further charges are blocked if the sale amount exceeds the available credit (manager override, with sufficient security, is possible).

+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you have additional account tracking capabilities:

+
    +
  • +

    Posting of customer charges and payments to your financial software, automatically creating invoices and customer payments

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to print and mail account statements, apply finance charges, and apply payments to specific invoices in your financial software, with updated balances being sent back to Point of Sale

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to track past due amounts and block additional charges

    +
    • +
+

Settings for Charge Accounts

+

Use the following customer fields in the QuickBooks Options section of the customer record to set up and maintain customer charge accounts:

+

     Customer charge account fields (from Additional Info tab of customer record)

+
    +
  • +

    R Use with QuickBooks. If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, this check box indicates if the customer information will be shared with QuickBooks Desktop. If you select the Use charge account check box, this option is automatically selected for you. You can set the default selection of this field for new customers in company preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    R  Charge account    Select to allow charges for this customer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Account Limit Enter the maximum charge balance allowed for the customer. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can set the limit in either program and it will be updated in the other with your next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Account Balance. The customers current account balance; updated with each charge to or payment on account. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop, is overwritten during each Financial Exchange by the balance from QuickBooks Desktop, so that it reflects finance charges and/or payments taken in your financial software.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Available Credit. Calculated field. Account Limit    Account Balance = Available Credit. When charging a purchase to the account, the available credit is checked and the charge blocked if the purchase amount exceeds this value (manager override, with sufficient security, is possible).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Past Due. Available only if integrated with QuickBooks Desktop and if blocking of past due accounts is enabled in company preferences. Indicates amount that is 30, 60, or 90 days past due, depending on preference setting. Actual amounts and aging comes from QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The current account information is displayed on the sales receipt when a customer is listed on the receipt.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Until an account limit is set for a customer, the Available Credit in Point of Sale is suppressed and charges on account are not allowed. With sufficient security rights, you can establish an account and set a limit while making a sale by clicking the Account payment button.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To send itemized statements (including item detail) to customers from QuickBooks Desktop, choose one of the detailed item posting methods on the Financial page of company preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to modify account settings can be controlled by a security right.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    If you have existing customers with account balances in another program or spreadsheet when beginning to use Point of Sale, the customer information and account balances can be imported using the Data Import wizard.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    (Pro) Be aware that it is possible for a customer to make two or more purchases by account charge at different stores between Store Exchanges, neither individually exceeding the customer's available credit but in total exceeding it. After the next Financial Exchange, the new balance will exceed the credit limit until a payment is made, but no further charges will be allowed  ExampleClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

How account transactions are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+

Edit a customer record

+

End of Day Financial Exchange

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust934.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust934.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7eec760 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust934.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + +Print your Customer List + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print your Customer List

+

Printing Overview | Export your Customer List | Customer Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Your customer list can be printed as a report.

+

To print your customer list:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your customer list and select the customers you want included in the printout:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    To print the entire list, make sure the list filter is set to display All Customers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To print a sub-set based on a common data point (ZIP Code or city, for example) use the search function to display only those records.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Or manually selectClick to display a popup topic (highlight) the records you want to print.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify which to print:  All Displayed Customers or Selected customers only, and then select OK.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Print dialog, choose Print or Preview.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Many report viewing options are available, including rearranging columns and drilling down to see customer detail. Printing customer lists from the reports area gives you even more flexibility in customizing the layout, records included, and other display properties.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you filter the Customer List report by store, only customers to which a sale has been made at that store will be included.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    You can also print customer mailing labels for all or selected customers by selecting Print Labels from the Print menu with your customer list displayed.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Finding a customer record

+

Tracking customers by type

+

Printing mailing and shipping labels

+

Printing shipping labels from sales receipts

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust935.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust935.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..efd9b4b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust935.htm @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + +cust935 + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Customer Labels

+

Printing your Customer List | Printing Overview | Customer Overview

+

 

+

The Print Labels option can be used to print customer mailing or shipping labels from the customer list.

+

 

+

To print customer labels:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your customer list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the customer or customers for whom you wish to print labels.  How do I select multiple customers?

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    You may find it helpful to filter the list to display a specific group of customers before selecting.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Labels from the Print menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify the following print options in the Print Labels dialog:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Choose the printer to be used

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify the number of labels to print for each customer

    +
    • +
  • +

    Preview and/or change the label template used (select More Options, if necessary, to access)

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print or Preview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify a label start position (for printing on partial pages of labels) and then select Continue.

    +
    3. +
+

If necessary, you can also align your printer from this dialog.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    In workstation preferences, specify the default label template and printing options to be used when printing customer labels. The labels supported are as follows:

    +
    • +
  • + +++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Label size:

    +    		 +

    1" 2-5/8"

    +    		 +

    1" 4"

    +    		 +

    3.33" x 4"

    +
    +

    Labels per sheet:

    +    		 +

    30

    +

    (3 across)

    +    		 +

    20

    +

    (2 across)

    +    		 +

    6

    +

    (2 across)

    +
    +

    Use template:

    +    		 +

    Avery 5160

    +    		 +

    Avery 5161

    +    		 +

    Avery 8164*

    +
    + +

    Labels can be printed using either the customer billing address or shipping address by selecting the appropriate template.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Shipping labels can also be printed from sales receipts or customer orders, when adding shipping information.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    For information about ordering labels directly from QuickBooks, refer to the ordering supplies topic.

    +
    • +
  • +

    *For weatherproof labels, substitute Avery 5524 and print with a laser printer.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust936.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust936.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9e45bb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust936.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Track Customers by Type + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Customers by Type

+

Customer Overview | Report Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Customer types let you categorize your customers in ways that are meaningful to your business. For example, you could set up your customer types so that they indicate whether a customer is a business* or individual customer, their geographic location, or how they first heard about your business.

+

You can filter reports and do special mailings that are based on your customer types. For example, if you use customer types to categorize your customers by location, you could print mailing labels for all the customers in a particular region.

+

Define your customer types in company preferences and then associate a type with each customer on their individual records.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    *Pro users have another option for tracking business customers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When printing customer mailing or shipping labels or lists, sort the list by customer type and then select them all.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Its generally better to use customer types to categorize customers for only one purpose. Dont try, for example, to set up customer types for both tracking geographic area and how customers heard about you.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_ID_cards.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_ID_cards.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4180b93 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_ID_cards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + +Customer IDs and Cards + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer IDs and Cards

+

Printing | Add a Customer

+
+

Pro

+
+

Customer IDs are automatically assigned to new customers and can be used to print scannable ID cards. One of the available Customer ID Card templates

+

The printed ID cards, with bar codes, can then be scanned while making a sales receipt to quickly lookup and add the customer to the receipt. Provided you don't change the default ID number format, you can scan the card while in either the Enter Items field or the Customer field on the receipt to add the customer.

+

 

+

Tips and format of Customer IDsClick to display a popup topic

+

Print templates for ID cards Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To print customer ID cards:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your customer list, select the customer or customers for whom you wish to print ID cards. How do I select multiple customers?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+

If printing for all customers, you do not have to select any.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Print ID Card.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Print dialog, specify if printing cards for the selected customer(s) or for all customers, and make any changes necessary to the printer, template or number of copies.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Print.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    When printing paper customer ID cards, it is recommended that these be laminated to protect the legibility and scan-ability of the bar code on the card.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To create ID cards using a different numbering system, remove the program-generated number in the Customer ID field and then enter the alternate number (up to 30 digits) or scan the bar code if using 3rd party cards with preprinted codes. With a different format, you'll have to be in the Customer field on the receipt to lookup a customer by scanning her ID card.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If upgrading from a previous version of Point of Sale that lacked this feature, ID numbers for existing customers are generated at Headquarters only and sent to remote stores via the next Store Exchange file. ID numbers for new customers are created at the store where they are added to the customer list.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customer Rewards Program

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_business.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_business.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c8e66f7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_business.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + +Track Business Customers + + + + + + + + + +

Track Business Customers

+

Customer Overview | Add a Customer | Edit a Customer

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can easily identify and track business customers in Point of Sale (as opposed to an individual customer). Identifying a business customer turns on the following features for that customer:

+
    +
  • +

    Record and print customer purchase order numbers on sales receipts and customer orders

    +
    • +
  • +

    Search for sales receipts and customer orders by the customer PO #

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Full Name field on Point of Sale documents, lists, and reports will display the company name

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your customer list and Reports can be filtered to distinguish between business and individual customers

    +
    • + +
  • +

    When synchronizing with your QuickBooks Desktop financial Software, the customer PO # will be shown on receipts and invoices created in QuickBooks Desktop

    +
    • +
+

To identify a business customer:

+
    +
  1. +

    When adding or editing a customer record, select the Track as Company check box.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Record the customer's Company name (required).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Including an individual's first and last name is optional, but recommended, for a business customer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Customer PO# field is added to receipts and customer orders made for this customer, as shown below, and the Full Name field will display the company name throughout the program.

    +
    • +
+

        Customer PO# field added to sales receipt

+

Related Topics

+

How customer records are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_center.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_center.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..42e8e8c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_center.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + +Customer Center + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Center

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Customers Overview

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

The Customer Center provides a summary of key customer statistics for a specified time period, one-click access to customer contact options, and links to FAQs and tools to help make managing your customers easier.

+

To access the Customer Center:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Customer Center from the Customers menu.

    +
    • +
+

Customer Statistics

+

Set the time period for statistics from the Edit drop-down list. Current period statistics are compared to the preceding period of the same length (year-to-date is compared to year-to-date last year).

+

(Pro) At a remote store, customer statistics reflect activity at that store only.

+

View definitions of the displayed statistics Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Reach Out to Your Customers

+

Use the links in this section to launch the Point of Sale wizards that guide you through contacting your customers via:

+

E-mail marketing campaign lists

+

Write letters

+

Print mailing labels

+

Export your customer list to a file

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Office Integration

+

E-mail Customers

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_copy.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_copy.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..136cd3e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_copy.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Copy a Customer Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Customer Record

+

Edit a Customer | Customer Information Fields | Customer Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can quickly add a new customer who has similar information as another customer by copying the existing customers record. You may then modify the new record to reflect the new customer.

+

To copy a customer record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the record to be copied.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Copy.

    +
    3. +
+

A new customer form is opened with most of the information from the original customer. Some information, such as charge account and rewards information, is not copied.

+
    +
  1. +

    Modify the copied information to reflect the new customer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks, your default company preference for sharing customer information with QuickBooks will determine if the new customer record is enabled for data exchanges.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Maintain Charge Accounts

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_create_email_campaign.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_create_email_campaign.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..006132e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_create_email_campaign.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + +Create an E-Mail Marketing Campaign List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create an E-mail Marketing Campaign List

+

E-mail Marketing Overview | E-mail FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

This topic applies to the Create an E-mail Marketing wizard, which walks you through the steps to create or manage targeted customer lists that you can use for e-mail marketing.*  You can access this wizard from the Customers menu or from the Customer Center.

+

 

+

You create an e-mail marketing customer list based on information from your customer records or on sales data accumulated for those customers. When the list is completed you can send it directly to the e-mail marketing partner integrated with Point of Sale Click to display a popup topic or save it to an Excel file and then manually upload to an e-mail marketing provider of your choice.

+

The wizard includes the following pages. Click Next when ready to move to the next page.

+
    +
  1. +

    Contact your Customers:  Informational overview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose Campaign Type: Select one of the predefined campaigns or choose Custom to define other criteria:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Recent PurchaseContact only customers that have made a purchase in the last x number of days (enter x).

    +
    • +
  • +

    No ActivityContact only customers that haven't made a purchase in x number of days (enter x). Optionally, you can also elect to include only those customers that have made at least one purchase from you anytime.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Merchandise InterestContact only customers that have made a purchase from a particular department or vendor. Click the Select Department/Vendor button to specify which department/vendor. Optionally, you may limit the sales period to the last x number of days.

    +
    • +
  • +

    CustomSpecify filter criteria to build a customer list. You can filter for any information stored in your customer records (city, ZIP Code, customer type, charge account customers, etc.) and/or for information contained in your customer sales history. This selection presents additional pages for entering specific filter criteria.  How do I enter filter criteria?

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Review Customer List: This page displays a proposed list of customers based on your selections. By default, all customers in the proposed list are selected for inclusion in the final list (Checkbox indicating a selected customer = selected). You can remove customers from the final list by clearing their checkboxes. Clear/select checkboxes by clicking on them or by using the button options on the right.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review and Send: Enter a name for the customer list and specify how you want to output the list. If you have an account with the integrated e-mail marketing partner Click to display a popup topic, the list can be sent directly to them. Otherwise, you can export the list as an Excel file to send to another provider.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You create, send, and track the content and effectiveness of your marketing campaign through the service provider you have selected.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customers must be marked OK to e-mail in their record to be included in marketing customer lists. This allows your customers to "opt out" of receiving marketing communications.

    +
    • +
  • +

    *This feature requires an account with a third-party e-mail marketing provider. Terms and conditions, pricing, and service options are set by the e-mail marketing provider you choose.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Office Integration

+

Customer Center

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_email_mktg.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_email_mktg.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f52581d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_email_mktg.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + +E-Mail Marketing with Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + +

E-mail Marketing with Point of Sale

+

E-mail a Document | E-mail FAQs | Office Integration

+
+

Basic

+
+

Unlock the hidden value in your retail data with e-mail marketing to get customers into your store more often and getting them to spend more when they do visit. Point of Sale makes it easy to create targeted customer lists to use in e-mail marketing campaigns.*

+

Highlights of this feature include:

+
    +
  • +

    Targeted customer lists can be created based on previous sales data and/or on information stored in your customer records. The Create an E-mail Campaign wizard walks you through the steps to create the customer lists.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can set up an account with the Point of Sale e-mail marketing partner, in which case your customer lists are sent automatically from Point of Sale to the partner.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you prefer, you can export the customer list to Microsoft Excel. The Excel file can then be manually uploaded to an alternative e-mail marketing provider of your choice.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You create, send, and track the actual marketing campaign e-mails through the service provider you have selected.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, you can set Point of Sale to prompt your cashiers to e-mail a copy of sales receipts to your customers. This is a great way to collect customer e-mail addresses for future use in your e-mail marketing. Enable this prompt in workstation preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your customers can "opt out" of receiving marketing e-mails, in which case they will never be included in the customer lists you create for marketing.

    +
    • +
+

*This feature requires an account with a third-party e-mail marketing provider. Terms and conditions, pricing, and service options are set by the e-mail marketing provider you choose.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer Center

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_emailing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_emailing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2edcf2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_emailing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +E-Mailing a Customer + + + + + + + + + + + +

E-mail a Customer

+

E-mail a Document | E-mail FAQs | Export Data

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can quickly send an e-mail to a customer, provided you have entered their e-mail address on the customer record and have a default Windows e-mail client set up.

+

If you wish to attach a Point of Sale document to the e-mail, use the e-mailing a document procedure instead.

+

To send e-mail to a customer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the customer record in your customer list and, if not already showing, click the Details button.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Open the Contact Info section.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the e-mail address link (blue text).

    +
    4. +
+

Your default e-mail client opens with the customer's address pre-filled.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add a subject line and body text to the e-mail.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Send.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Point of Sale can also create targeted customer lists for use in e-mail marketing campaigns you do through a third-party service providers. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Office Integration

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_mergeduplicates.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_mergeduplicates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7d5bd1a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_mergeduplicates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + +Merge Customer Records + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merge Customer Records

+

Delete a Customer | Edit a Customer | Customers Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Occasionally, you may find that a customer has been entered twice in your customer list. This might happen, for example, if an associate spells the name slightly different when looking up the customer, and believing the customer isnt in the list, adds them again with the different spelling. Merging the customer records combines the sales history of the two records into a single record and then deletes the other.

+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you will be prompted to delete the duplicate record in QuickBooks Desktop as well.

+

(Pro) This feature is available at Headquarters only.

+

To merge customer records:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your Point of Sale customer list, select one or both of the customer records you wish to merge. How do I select multiple records in my list?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Merge from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Merge Customers window opens with the pre-selected customer(s) listed.

+

Merge Customers window

+
    +
  1. +

    Review the customers and make changes as necessary:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    To add or change a customer, use the drop-down lists to select or search for the customer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ensure the customer record you want to keep is displayed on the left side of the window. You can reverse positions of the records (which to keep and which to remove) by selecting the Swap button located between them.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the name(s) as shown in your QuickBooks Desktop customer list are shown to help verify you have the correct customers selected.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Customers.

    +
    2. +
+

If the customer being removed has a sales history, a listing of the number of sales receipts and customers orders to be updated is displayed. The customer on these documents will be replaced by the customer you selected to keep. Tell me more.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Customers.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, specify if you want to delete the duplicate from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software as well. See notes below for more information.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If selected, the deletion in QuickBooks Desktop will occur with the next Financial Exchange. If the customer to be deleted has a transaction history in QuickBooks Desktop, the customer is made inactive instead of being deleted. If the customer is not deleted or made inactive in QuickBooks Desktop, it will be re-created in Point of Sale with the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updated documents resulting from a merge in Point of Sale are not resent to QuickBooks Desktop and the customer records in QuickBooks Desktop are not merged. However, all new transactions will be recorded in QuickBooks Desktop for the customer you selected to keep.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

How customer records are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_pastdueacct.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_pastdueacct.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b4157d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_pastdueacct.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + +Past Due Customer Accounts + + + + + + + + + + +

Past Due Customer Accounts

+

Account Overview | Charges to Account | Payments on Account

+
+

Basic

+
+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software and offer customer charge accounts, Point of Sale can let you know when a customers account is past due and block additional charges to the account. By default, the alerts and blocking of additional charges takes effect when an account is past due by 30 days. You can turn off blocking or change the past due period to 60 or 90 days in company preferences.

+

The past due amount and periods are based on your QuickBooks Desktop financial software settings and are received from QuickBooks Desktop during Financial Exchanges.

+

Setting Account Aging Preferences in QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

With the past due preference turned on and when a sale is made to a customer with a past due account, Point of Sale displays the past due alert and amount on the sales receipt and payment window. This reminds the cashier to request a payment on account or alerts them to follow other store policies, such as not giving discounts to past due customers.

+

If requiring employee logins, the ability to allow an additional charge under this circumstance is controlled by the logged-in employee's security rights. If not requiring logins, the cashier is alerted but can still allow the new charge.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If the cashier doesn't have rights to accept a new charge, the manager override option is displayed. This allows a store manager, with adequate rights, to exercise their discretion in allowing the new charge.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The past due amount is displayed with other account information on the customer record, is available to add as a column to your customer list and on customer reports, and is included on the customer's printed receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you take a payment on account, the past due and account balance amounts and status are immediately updated in Point of Sale and synchronized with QuickBooks Desktop with the next financial exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    In a multi-store configuration, payments on customer accounts at a remote store aren't reflected at Headquarters or other stores until after the next Store Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can write letters to customers with past due accounts from Point of Sale. A "Past Due" letter template is included and the past due amount field is available to add to letter templates you create. Additional letter templates may be available within your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

How account information is exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_ratings.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_ratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b09f83 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_ratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + +Customer Ratings + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Ratings

+

View Customer Purchase History  

+
+

Basic

+
+

Customer ratings provide a graphical ranking of your customers based on profit realized or total dollar sales volume over a specified time period.

+

 

+

Turning on Customer Ratings

+

You can turn on/off customer ratings and specify the performance criteria and time period on the Ratings & Trends page of company preferences. Only the Server Workstation can change the ratings preferences.

+

Ratings are displayed in the Statistics section of the customer form. In addition to the graphical rating, other statistics are provided for the customer, such as the last sale date and total sales, returns, and discount amounts. You can customize your customer list columns to view the graphical ratings directly in the list.

+

 

+

    

+

 

+

About Customer Ratings

+

Customer ratings use a familiar five star system, reflecting the performance of the customer over the specified time period. Each star represents 20% of the range between the highest and lowest values for your customers.

+

For example, if ranking by sales volume and the range of customer purchases for the period is from $1 to $100, customers buying from $1 and $20 would receive 1 star, buying $21-40 is rated two stars, etc., up to a five-star rating for purchases of $81-100. In theory, all of your customers could be five-star performers.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Rating

+		 +

Description

+
+

+		 +

5 Stars (81st - 100th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

4 Stars (61st - 80th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

3 Stars (41st - 60th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

2 Stars (21st - 40th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

1 Star (0 - 20th percentile)

+
+

+		 +

0 Stars (No purchase this period)

+
+

image\question_marks.gif

+		 +

No purchase ever

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The rating period can be set from 1 to 999 days.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ratings are updated at least once a day (on program startup or automatically between 1 am and 5 am if your computer is left running). Ratings are not updated real-time with the current days.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to view customer ratings can be controlled by a security right.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Ratings are calculated at Headquarters only and reflect sales at all stores. They are sent to remote stores where they can be viewed.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customer Rewards Program

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_resolveduplicates.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_resolveduplicates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c069a25 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_resolveduplicates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +cust_resolveduplicates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Resolving Duplicate Customer Names

+

Link 1 | Link 2 | Link 3

+

 

+

This new topic is under development. This paragraph will be a short overview of the feature or task, answering questions such as what is it, and when, why, and where do you use it.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    First step

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Second step

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Third step

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Note 1 - preferences or alternate way to complete?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Note 2 - Multi-Store considerations?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Note 3 - Financial exchange considerations?

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Link 4

+

Link 5

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changeexistingrewards.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changeexistingrewards.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e2e2115 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changeexistingrewards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +Reward Change: Keep Existing Rewards? + + + + + + + + + + +

Reward Change: Keep Existing Rewards?

+

Modify your Reward Program | Reward Manager | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: This topic applies to the Reward Setup Changed wizard, displayed to help you make selections and confirm changes to your reward program.

+

 

+

Some changes to your reward program, such as changes to the purchase tracking period or the purchase threshold, can affect rewards that have already been earned by your customers. You tell Point of Sale on this page what to do with these existing rewards.

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Your choices on this page are:

+
    +
  • +

    Keep all existing rewards. The affected rewards remain available for customers to redeem, subject to the previous expiration date. Only future rewards will be based on your new criteria.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discard and recalculate all rewards. All unredeemed rewards are cleared; and customer purchase balances towards rewards are recalculated based on your new criteria. Some of the discarded rewards may be reinstated if they qualify by the new criteria.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changesummary.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changesummary.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97ee05f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changesummary.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + +Reward Change: Summary + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reward Change: Summary

+

Modify your Reward Program | Reward Manager | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: This topic applies to the Summary page of the Reward Setup Changed wizard, displayed to confirm changes to your reward program.

+

 

+

This page summarizes the changes you have made to your reward program and includes:

+
    +
  • +

    The new reward criteria for your review

    +
    • +
  • +

    A list of the number of rewards that may be removed and/or issued as a result of the changes

    +
    • +
+

Review this information carefully, taking reward program legal considerationsClick to display a popup topic in your area into account.

+

To revise your changes, select Previous and make changes on the previous pages. Or, select Cancel to discard all program changes.

+

If you are satisfied with the changes, select Finish. Point of Sale makes necessary recalculations and updates customer records with the results.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changetracking.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changetracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3003c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_changetracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Reward Change: Purchase Tracking Amounts + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reward Change: Purchase Tracking Amounts

+

Modify your Reward Program | Reward Manager | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: This topic applies to the Reward Setup Changed wizard, displayed to help you make selections and confirm changes to your reward program.

+

 

+

When you make changes to your program's purchase tracking period, you may affect the current purchase balances towards rewards your customer's have accumulated. Tell Point of Sale how to handle the affected balances on this page.

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Your choices on this page are:

+
    +
  • +

    Keep current amounts. The current purchase tracking balances for all customers will remain as they are and continue accumulating toward future rewards.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Adjust amounts based on new tracking period. All customer's purchase balances will be recalculated based on the new program criteria. Purchases previously counted may be removed; purchases not previously counted may now qualifybased on the change you have made. New rewards may be created as a result.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_manager.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_manager.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e5d1ee3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_manager.htm @@ -0,0 +1,156 @@ + + + + + + +Reward Manager + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reward Manager

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Rewards Program Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

All settings for your Customer Rewards program are controlled through the Reward Manager.

+

Legal Considerations for a Rewards ProgramClick to display a popup topic

+

Reward Program Terminology Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To define your program:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Rewards Manager from the Customer menu.Reward Manager

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If not already set, select Turn Tracking ON.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter an amount for the Purchase Threshold. This is the amount a customer must spend in your store to earn a reward.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Specify the Reward Amount (dollar amount or percentage) and then select $ off or % off from the drop-down list.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    (Optional) Select a Reward Expiration period.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Specify the Purchase Tracking Period.

    +
    7. +
+

You must enter a Start date; the End date is optional. To leave the program open-ended, select the No End Date check box. All qualifying items purchased during this period accumulate towards earning rewards.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Rewards Options area, make selections for how you wish to enroll members, be alerted when rewards are earned, and set a redemption blocking period.

    +
    2. +
+

Reward Manager +

+

If you enter a redemption blocking period, the entered number of days will be added to the reward expiration date. Example: With a 30-day expiration date, and a 10-day blocking period, the reward will expire 40 days after the purchase date.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

If you get the Reward Change dialog, click OK to close it. This dialog is displayed anytime you modify your rewards program, to alert you to potential effects the change may have on current and future rewards.

+

Other tasks/information available from Reward Manager:

+
    +
  • +

    Reward Program Status: Displays the total value of rewards redeemed under your program, and options to turn the program on/off and to view reward reports (Member List and Redemption History).

    +
    • +
  • +

    I Want To menu: This menu includes two powerful options:

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enroll All Customers in Rewards Program. All existing customers are enrolled in the program. Customers you add later are not enrolled unless you also select Automatically enroll new customers in the Rewards Options area.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Clear All Rewards. Removes all existing earned rewards from all customers. Current purchase tracking balances are not affected.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Modify your Rewards Program

+

Use Customer IDs and Cards

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_manual.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_manual.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba5dd59 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_manual.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Manually Issuing or Canceling a Reward + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manually Issuing or Canceling a Reward

+

Rewards Program Overview | Legal ConsiderationsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can manually issue or cancel a previously issued customer reward if necessary.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open the customer record in edit mode and navigate to the Rewards section.

    +
    2. +
+

A list of the customer's current rewards is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    To issue a reward, click New. When prompted, indicate if you want to reset the customer's purchase balance toward their next reward to zero (0).

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

To cancel a reward, select the reward in the list and then click Remove. Select Yes in the confirmation dialog.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The customer's future purchases will continue to accumulate toward a future reward unless you clear the Rewards Member check box.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Reward ReasonClick to display a popup topic will be prefilled with Manually Issued or Manually Removed.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Redeem a Reward

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_modify.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_modify.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..84fd229 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_modify.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + +Modify Your Rewards Program + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Modify Your Rewards Program

+

Reward Manager | Reward Program Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can modify your reward program at anytime. But we recommend you do so with great care and take into account the Legal Considerations for a Rewards Program.Click to display a popup topic Some modifications may cause previously earned rewards to be lost or result in the creation of new rewards that didn't previously exist.

+

The terms and conditions you set for your program, and communicate to your customers, should clearly spell out the reward program parameters, but just as importantly, should specify under which conditions the program can be revised, how revisions affect the status of current members and rewards, and how the changes are to be communicated (be sure to adhere to all local regulations).

+

Program changes are made from the Reward Manager. Point of Sale will summarize how proposed changes will affect your program, including the number of rewards that may be removed or created, before implementing the changes.

+

To modify your rewards program:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Customer menu, select Reward Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make changes as necessary to the program parameters.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Depending on changes you make, you may be asked how you want to handle the following. Select Help on the Reward Setup Change dialog to learn more about how these choices affect your program. Example Clcik to expand/collapse topic

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  • +

    Existing Rewards. Do you want to remove any earned, but not yet redeemed, rewards or keep them.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Current Purchase Tracking Balances. Again, do you want to maintain the current balances or recalculate them based on your new reward criteria?

    +
    • +
+

Based on your answers, Point of Sale will display the Reward Change summary page.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish to make the changes, or Cancel to leave your program unchanged.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note: You can also choose Previous and change your choices to see how that affects your program.

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_oview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6fd731 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,260 @@ + + + + + + +Customer Rewards Program Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Rewards Program Overview  

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Reward Manager | Redeem Rewards

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Many retailers offer incentives to repeat customers, based upon their spending level. Also referred to as a Customer Loyalty program, this can be a very effective tool for maintaining and expanding your customer base.

+

You define the parameters of your rewards program in the Reward Manager, available from the Customers menu. Customers can be added to the program automatically or selectively as you make sales (or on their customer record).

+

Members are indicated by the rewards program icon in various places in the program.Printed receipt rewards reminder

+

Point of Sale tracks purchases for each program member and alerts the cashier when a reward is earned or when a reward is available for redemption. Merchandise returns are subtracted from the current purchase tracking balance.

+

Rewards earned and rewards redeemed are printed on customer receipts, as is the spending amount needed to qualify for the next reward.

+

Reward redemption reports are available for tracking purposes. Reward discounts are also added to the item grid of saved receipts for later viewing.

+

If you are requiring employees to log in, security rights control access to the Rewards Manager and to redemption reports.

+

In a multiple store configuration, all stores share a single reward program, which can be defined only at Headquarters. Customer purchases and redemptions made at any store are updated to Headquarters with each Store Exchange and the updated information sent back out to remote stores. Important NoteClick to display a popup topic

+

What would you like to know more about?

+

Legal Considerations for a Rewards ProgramClick to display a popup topic

+

What items qualify for earning and redeeming reward? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Reward Program Terminology Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Write Letters to Rewards Members Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

How are rewards reflected in my QuickBooks Desktop financial software? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To set up your Reward Program:

+

Note: You must have company preference I want to track customers enabled to use a customer rewards program. You can turn this preference on the General page of company preferences (access from File menu).

+

These are basic steps of a rewards program. Press F1 or select the help links on any screen for more detailed instructions for that task.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Customers menu, select Reward Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Define your program (purchase amount required, reward amount or percentage off, reward expiration date, qualifying purchase dates, and other options).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enroll customers: You can enroll all customers, be prompted to enroll customers as sales are made, or manually enroll customers by editing their individual record.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Sell and promote your program! Point of Sale tracks reward purchases, and cashiers are alerted when a reward is earned and when one is available for redemption.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use Customer IDs and Membership Cards

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_track.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_track.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f4b2e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/cust_rewards_track.htm @@ -0,0 +1,153 @@ + + + + + + +Track Customer Rewards + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Customer Rewards

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Rewards Program Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

There are several ways to track your reward program, by individual customer or for the program as a whole.

+ +

Individual Customer Rewards Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Work with Rewards Members in Your Customer List Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Reward Program Reports Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Reward information (other than as discounts on sales) is not sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b5ab5ce --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +customer_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Customers: How Do I?

+

 

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Add a new customer

+

Edit a customer record

+

Use customer discounts and price levels

+

Set up special customer tax handling

+

Maintain customer charge accounts

+

Track customers by type

+

Locate a customer record

+

Delete a customer

+

View a customer's purchase history

+

Print customer records

+

Print mailing or shipping labels

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_selectfordoc.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_selectfordoc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0537c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_selectfordoc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +Select Customer for Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Customer for Sale

+

Customer Order Overview | Add a Customer

+
+

Basic

+
+

This information applies when coming to your customer list from a customer order to find or edit a customer.

+

To select and list a customer on a sales document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal sort, search, or filter procedures to locate the customer in your customer list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Double-click the customer or highlight the row and choose Select from the bottom tool bar.

    +
    3. +
+

While in your customer list you have complete editing abilities to add a new customer or edit an existing one. After adding or editing a customer record, choose Save & Select to both save the record in your customer list and return to the order  you were working on with the customer.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+

Customers overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_setting_account_limits.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_setting_account_limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc18210 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customer_setting_account_limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +Setting Account Limits in QuickBooks Financial Software + + + + + + + + + + + +

Setting Account Limits in QuickBooks Financial Software

+

Maintaining Customer Charge Accounts

+
+

Basic

+
+

A customers in-store charge account limit can be defined in Point of Sale or in your QuickBooks financial software. This procedure is for setting the limit in QuickBooks. After the next Financial Exchange, the updated account limit and available credit for the customer will be reflected in Point of Sale.

+

To define a customers credit limit in QuickBooks financial software:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Customer List in your QuickBooks financial software, open the Edit Customer window for the customer for whom you would like to establish or change a credit limit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Payment Info tab.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Type in the customers credit limit.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

image\qb_cust_acct_limit.gif

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Charging sales on account or accepting a payment on account

+

How account information is exchanged with QuickBooks

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customers_tax.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customers_tax.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e7237b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customers_tax.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + +Using Customer Tax Locations and the Tax-Exempt Flag + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Customer Tax Locations and the Tax-Exempt Flag

+

Sales Tax Overview | Using Tax Locations

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are two ways You can automatically have Point of Sale collect the correct amount of sales tax on sales to customers that qualify for special tax handling.

+
    +
  • +

    Specify that the customer is tax-exempt. This is the easiest option if sales tax is never charged on sales to the customer, such as may be the case with charitable organizations or certain re-sellers.

    +
    • +
+ +

Example: The customer is from another state and your tax regulations do not require sales tax to be collected on out-of-state sales.

+ +

 

+ +

A hard-coded tax location, named Exempt, is used on sales to customers you have marked as tax-exempt and has an automatic 0% tax rate for all tax codes. The Exempt tax location is not displayed in your sales tax preferences, but is available for filtering sales reports.

+ +
    +
  • +

    Set up and assign a tax location to the customer. This option is best if the customer is taxed, but at a different rate than your normal tax rates. You are prompted to apply the customer tax location when making a sale to the customer, but can elect to do so or not on individual sales.

    +
    • +
+

To set up special customer tax handling:

+
    +
  1. +

    While adding or editing a customer record, select the Customer Settings section.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a tax location from the Tax Location drop-down list. Only tax locations previously set up in company preferences are available.

    +
    3. +
+ +

Or

+ +

Select the Tax-exempt check box.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Complete the record and save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a customer record

+

Customers overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customersoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customersoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7101f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/customersoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + +Customers Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customers Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Customer Preferences | Add a Customer

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale can store a great deal information for each of your customers, including name and contact information, wether personal checks should be accepted, charge account information, and extensive notes. Customer information can be used for marketing purposes, reporting, and printing mailing labels.

+

Recording of customers on sales receipts (referred to as customer tracking) allows you to:

+
    +
  • +

    Build customer sales history, giving you the ability to quickly look up a past purchase and run reports and marketing programs for your best customers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Offer store charge accounts

    +
    • +
  • +

    E-mail sales receipts from Point of Sale

    +
    • +
  • +

    Automatically adjust sales tax for customers eligible for special tax handling

    +
    • +
  • +

    Automatically give discounts or use markdown price levels for selected customers

    +
    • +
  • +

    If also using QuickBooks Desktop financial software, share customer and account information so invoices and payments can be created/taken in QuickBooks Desktop

    +
    • +
+

Pro-level user have these additional options:

+
    +
  • +

    Set up and track customer purchases in a rewards program

    +
    • +
  • +

    Record and use customer shipping addresses and charges on sales

    +
    • +
  • +

    Record and track business customer PO numbers on sales and orders

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Multiple stores) Customers can be added, edited, or deleted at any store, with the resulting changes propagated to all stores with the next fully completed Store Exchange cycle. Headquarters maintains the master customer list, which is sent to all stores in its entirety during every Store Exchange. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Note: The availability of customer tracking features can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer Center

+ +

View customer list summary statistics

+ +

Security rights for working with customer records

+

How customer information is shared with QuickBooks Desktop

+

Protecting customers' payment card data

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_accessing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_accessing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca11855 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_accessing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Access Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Customer Orders

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Field Descriptions | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

To access customer orders:

+

From the Point of Sale menu, select one of the following:

+
    +
  • +

    New Layaway, New Sales Order, or New Work Order to create a new customer order

    +
    • +
  • +

    Layaway List, Sales Order List, or Work Order List to locate and work with an existing customer order

    +
    • +
  • +

    From your Customer records, select a customer and then choose Create a <type> Order for this customer from the I Want To menu

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_create.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_create.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9537de6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_create.htm @@ -0,0 +1,126 @@ + + + + + + +Create a Customer Order: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a Customer Order: Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Field Descriptions | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The term customer order collectively refers to layaways, sales orders, and work orders. While each of these documents have specific uses, they share many procedural workflows.

+

To create a new customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New for the appropriate order type from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Enter Item(s) field, scan or enter item information to list the merchandise or service items being ordered. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit individual item information, such as quantity, price, tax code, and discounts, as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Enter a Customer (required, How do I?).

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Enter any other pertinent information in the appropriate fields, such as:

    +
    6. +
+
    +
  • +

    Special instructions, such as the work to be performed

    +
    • +
  • +

    The status of the order for tracking purposes (defaults to Open)

    +
    • +
  • +

    On work orders, you may also want to enter a due date and/or assign the job to an employee.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Deposit/Payment from the I Want To menu to take a deposit on the order.

    +
    2. +
+

If a minimum initial deposit is required or suggested (optional preference setting), the Deposit window is automatically displayed if Save is selected before a deposit is taken.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note: The availability of customer orders can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Handle special order items

+

E-mail orders to customers

+

Fill customer orders

+

Tips for using sales orders

+

Tips for using work orders

+

Generate POs from a customer order

+

Customer order overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_edit.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_edit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..941c926 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_edit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit a Customer Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Customer Order

+

Locate an Order | Take a Deposit | Edit an Order Item

+
+

Pro

+
+

If no deposits have been taken, you can edit any of the information on a customer order. If deposits have been taken, you are not allowed to change the customer. If you need to change the customer on a customer order for which deposits have been taken, you will have to refund the deposits first. You can then change the customer and re-enter the deposit.

+

To edit a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and display the order you wish to edit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make any necessary changes and take any additional deposits.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a customer order

+

E-mail an order to a customer

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_filling.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_filling.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5fd7488 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_filling.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + +Fill a Customer Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Fill a Customer Order

+

Locate a Customer Order | Make a Sale | Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

You fill a customer order by selling the ordered items on a sales receipt. You can sell some or all of the items on a customer order at any time. Selling items updates the Due and Sold fields on the order. When all the items on the order have been sold and the deposit and balance due are both zero, it is completely filled, and Point of Sale changes the status of the order to Closed.

+

To sell the items listed on a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the customer order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Sell Item(s) from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Select Items to Sell window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Select All if you want to sell all the items on the order.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Enter a quantity in the Doc QtyClick to display a popup topic column for each item you want to sell.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Continue.

    +
    2. +
+

The items you selected are listed on a new sales receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add any additional items you are selling at the same time.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Take Payment.

    +
    3. +
+

If deposits have been taken on the order, the total amount of the deposit is automatically suggested as a payment method of Deposit. You can reduce or clear the deposit amount used, if you wish. You might do this if not selling all of the items at this time and you wish to maintain a deposit balance against the remaining items still due.

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal payment procedures to enter amounts for additional payment methods or change as appropriate, and then save/print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    When receiving an item that has open customer orders against it, Point of Sale will alert you and add the item to your fill customer order reminders.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you generated a purchase order from the customer order, information from the customer order (such as customer name and order #) are displayed right on the receiving voucher to assist in filling the order quickly.

    +
    • +
+

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View deposit/payment history

+

Customer order reports

+

How customer orders are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_generatepo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_generatepo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7782c68 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_generatepo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Generating Purchase Orders from Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Generate Purchase Orders from a Customer Order

+

Customer Order Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can quickly generate purchase orders from a customer order to order the listed items from your vendor(s). Point of Sale will propose a PO for all of the items listed (except service items), but allows you to review the proposed PO(s) and choose the items and quantities to actually order. Multiple items from a vendor are combined into a single purchase order.

+

To generate purchase orders from a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete and save the order document, if not already done.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight or display the customer order.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Generate PO from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    The Select Items to Generate PO window is displayed, with all merchandise items from the customer order listed.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Enter the quantity of each item to order from your vendor in the Doc QtyClick to display a popup topic column.

    +
    6. +
+
    +
  • +

    If you do not wish to order an item, enter 0 or leave the Doc Qty blank.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To order all of the items in the quantity needed for the customer order (Due column) choose Select All from the bottom of the window.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Continue.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    A confirming message displays the number of POs created and gives you the opportunity to view, print, or e-mail the POs.

    +
    3. +
+

If you want to add additional items to a PO created this way, select Show Me a List of POs created, select a PO and then select Edit to make changes before submitting the PO to your vendor.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can generate multiple purchase orders from a single customer order. When generating subsequent purchase orders, the Due values are reduced by any item quantity on the order already sold.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Purchase orders generated from customer orders are numbered by Point of Sale by combining an order type prefix, the order number, and a sequential suffix. For example, the first purchase order generated from Sales Order # 24 would be numbered SO241, a second purchase order generated from this sales order would be numbered SO242, etc. Purchase orders generated from layaways or work orders would begin with LAY or WO respectively.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can view the purchase orders generated from a customer order by displaying the order and selecting View POs from the I Want To menu. This selection takes you to a filtered purchase order list with only the POs generated from the selected order displayed. Select a purchase order and display it to review.

    +
    • +
  • +

    It is recommended that you review the generated purchase orders for correct order costs and quantities. Use your normal procedure to communicate the generated purchase orders to your vendors.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When receiving an item ordered this way, the customer name and Customer Order # is displayed on the receiving voucher to assist you in quickly filling the order.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Create a customer order: Basic steps

+

E-mail orders to vendors/customers

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b8925a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,42 @@ + + + + + + +custorder_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Orders: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Create a customer order

+

Take a deposit

+

View deposit history

+

Refund deposits

+

Handle special orders

+

Purchase items on a customer order

+

Locate a saved customer order

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

E-mail an order to a customer

+

Edit a customer order

+

Delete a customer order

+

Track an order by status

+

Run customer order reports

+

Set my customer order preferences

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longental_invpref.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longental_invpref.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ccde37 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longental_invpref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + +Long-term Rental: Inventory and Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long-term Rental: Inventory and Preferences

+

Tips and Notes | Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to set up inventory and preferences to track long-term rentals. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add your rental pianos as an inventory item in the normal manner, recording the actual cost and a sales price (not rental price). This adds the pianos value to your inventory and allows you to sell the pianos at any time by listing this item on a sales receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Create a second inventory item, with the same quantity, called "Rental Pianos", with a cost and price equal to zero. You will list this item on a sales order when renting out a piano.

    +
    3. +
+

Unit Tracking: If you want to track rentals by specific unit, identify each unit with a unique serial number and select the Serial Number Tracking field in inventory for this item.

+
    +
  1. +

    Define a service item with a description of "Piano Rental Charge", with a cost of $0 and a price equal to one months rental charge.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you require a security deposit on rented pianos, set up another service item in inventory called "Piano Rental Deposit" with a $0 cost and the required deposit amount as the price.

    +
    3. +
+

Tip: You can map each of these items to the QuickBooks financial software income account you prefer on the Additional Info tab of the item form. See the note about posting the security deposit amount.

+

 

+

image\rental_inv_piano.gif

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Sales Order page of company preferences:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Define a custom sales order status of "Rented."

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you completed Step 4 above, set your sales order deposit requirements to something other than "Require an Initial Deposit."

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, define a printed sales order message, such as your policy on equipment damage, late charges, or injury liability.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Financial page of company preferences, select the option to send receipts and vouchers with Detailed Item Descriptions to your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add inventory items

+

Use service items

+

Serial number tracking

+

Sales order preferences

+

Map item financial accounts

+

Send detailed descriptions to QuickBooks

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_billings.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_billings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fda3773 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_billings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + +Long Term Rentals: Monthly Rental Billings + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long Term Rentals: Monthly Rental Billings

+

Tips and Notes | Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to send your rental customers monthly billing statements using your QuickBooks financial software. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+

When you run financial exchange with QuickBooks after renting a piano, the customer (if new) is added to QuickBooks, enabling you to use account charges for future monthly billings. Typically, you would do monthly billings on a set day of the month for all rental customers.

+

To send out monthly rental billings:

+
    +
  1. +

    Set an account limit for the customer. We suggest this be equal to at least two months additional rental charges.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In Point of Sale, display your sales order list filtered for pianos currently rented out (as explained here).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select a rental sales order and then select Sell Items from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Enter a Doc Qty of one for the "Piano Rental Charge" item and select OK. This charges the customer for one additional months rent.

    +
    5. +
+

As necessary, increment the order quantity on the sales order for the rental charge item, so that some months always remain due. This prevents the sales order from being automatically closed if you "sell" all of the initial months entered.

+
    +
  1. +

    On the sales receipt, take payment by account charge and save.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat for all your open rental sales orders.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Conduct a financial exchange with QuickBooks.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    The new monthly rental charges are posted to each customers account in your financial software.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Generate customer billing statements from QuickBooks and send to your customers. (Refer to your QuickBooks documentation for directions.)

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    When payment is received from a customer, take payment on account.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    On the next financial exchange with QuickBooks, the customers account balance will be adjusted to reflect the payment and the new balance will be sent back to Point of Sale.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can also create and mail Customer Invoices from Point of Sale if you prefer, using the write letters capability. Create your own invoice template using Word and inserting the customer account fields you need.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Run Financial Exchange with QuickBooks

+

Maintain customer charge accounts

+

Sell sales order items

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_notes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_notes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3cf805d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_notes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Long Term Rental: Tips and Notes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long Term Rental: Tips and Notes

+

Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

These notes apply to the example of renting pianos by the month; adjust for your needs.

+
    +
  • +

    If you prefer, you can set up a "Rental" department to which the rental equipment and service charge items can be assigned. This allows you to run sales reports on just your rental equipment by filtering the report for the "Rental" department.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Rental charges are reflected on Point of Sale reports as sales and are posted to your QuickBooks financial software to the income account you specified in inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use a "Piano Rental Deposit" item for security deposit purposes, that deposit is not reflected in the sales order Deposit field. In Point of Sale, it is recorded as a sale when the rental commences and as a return when the piano is returned. How this item is posted in your financial software will depend on how you mapped the account in inventory. Deposits of this type generally should be mapped to a current liability account, such as "Customer Deposits," and not to an income account. Observe any local regulations governing how customer deposits are to be held when setting up an account in QuickBooks for this purpose.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The rental piano item, while recorded on the receipt and on reports for record-keeping purposes, has no net effect on sales amounts or inventory value due to its $0 cost and $0 price. You can view the on-hand quantity of this item at any time to see how many pianos are available to rent.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can sell a rental piano by listing the regular piano item (the item with a cost and price recorded) on a sales receipt and, as appropriate, discounting the price to reflect the age/condition at the time of sale.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_rentout.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_rentout.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..55db92d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_rentout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Long-term Rental: Rent Out Equipment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long-term Rental: Rent Out Equipment

+

Tips and Notes | View the Equipment Out | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to rent out long-term rental equipment. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+

To rent out a piano:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure you have defined the piano rental inventory items and preferences as described here.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Start a new sales order:

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Set the Status field to "Rented"

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    List a "Rental Piano" item with a quantity of one. Also, enter the serial number, if set up to prompt for it.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    List the "Piano Rental Charge" item with a quantity equal to the total rental period anticipated (number of months, the number you enter isnt important, you can edit it later to add or remove months).

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    List the "Rental Piano Deposit" item on the order, if applicable.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    List the customer information. Make sure the customers record is flagged "Use with QuickBooks".

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Record other pertinent information (delivery, etc.) in the Instructions field.

    +
    9. +
  9. +

    Select Save.

    +
    10. +
+

Note: Depending on your sales order deposit preference settings, you may be prompted to enter a deposit. If you listed an equipment deposit item on the order, enter $0 as the deposit amount. The deposit item amount will be applied in the next step.

+
    +
  1. +

    With the sales order displayed, select Sell Items from the sales order I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Select Items to Sell dialog, enter 1 in the Doc Qty column for each item (Rental Piano, Piano Rental Charge, and Piano Rental Deposit, as applicable). This will create a receipt charging the customer for the equipment deposit and the first months rental charges.

    +
    3. +
+

"Selling" the rental piano itself will reduce the quantity of this item in inventory, so you can tell at a glance if you have additional pianos available to rent. However, since it has a cost and price equal to zero, "selling" it has no effect on sales or inventory value.

+
    +
  1. +

    Accept payment and update/print the receipt for the customer.

    +
    2. +
+

You can also print the sales order for the customer, if desired. You may do this so the customer has a record of the anticipated length of the rental, the total estimated charges over the rental period, and any information you have entered in the Instructions field.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Handling monthly billing statements

+

Create a sales order

+

Print a sales order

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_returns.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_returns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3abfc7b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_returns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + +Long-term Rental: Record Rental Returns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long-term Rental: Record Rental Returns

+

Tips and Notes | Rent Out Equipment | Return Receipts

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to record the return of long-term rental equipment. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+

To record the return of a rental piano:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and open the sales order created when the rental was made.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Adjust the rental charge item quantity to 0, change the status to Closed, and then select Save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select New Return Receipt from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    List the customer on the receipt and add items as follows:

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  • +

    List the "Rental Piano" item with a quantity of one. This returns the rental piano to inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To refund a piano rental deposit, list the "Piano Rental Deposit" item with a quantity of one.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If final rental charges are due, but have already been posted to the customers QuickBooks account, do not list the rental charge item on the receipt. Youll enter the amount due as payment on account in Step 6.

    +
    • +
+

Tip: If you have run a recent financial exchange with QuickBooks, the customers current account balance is displayed as you create a sales receipt.

+
    +
  • +

    If final rental charges are due, but have not been posted to the customers QuickBooks account, enter the rental charge item on the return receipt with the appropriate quantity (number of months due) as a NEGATIVE quantity.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Payment (<F12>).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the payment screen, enter payments/change to the customer as appropriate:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    If rental charges are included and have previously been posted to the customers QuickBooks account, first enter the rental charge amount being paid as a payment on account.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Take additional payment or give change, as applicable, to the customer by whatever method you choose.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Save and print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Run Financial Exchange with QuickBooks

+

Maintain customer charge accounts

+

Record account charges or payments

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_viewrented.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_viewrented.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a013eb3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longrental_viewrented.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Long-term Rental: View Rented Equipment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Long-term Rental: View Rented Equipment

+

Tips and Notes | Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to view and track the equipment out on long-term rentals. This example is for piano rentals by the month; adjust for your needs.

+

To view the pianos out on rental:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your sales order list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select <Create Filter> from the filter drop-down and select "Rented" in the Status field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Apply to display only orders for equipment currently rented out.

    +
    4. +
+

Tip: Save the filter criteria if you view this list often, so that it is available with one click from the filter drop-down list.

+

 

+

image\rental_pianosout.gif

+

To view additional detail on rented pianos, including item detail, run a Sales Order report, filtered by the Status "Rented". Modify the report to include the columns and detail you wish to see.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Handle monthly billing statements

+

Filter lists

+

Sales order reports

+

Track sales orders by status

+

Long-term rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longterm_rentals.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longterm_rentals.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..72c193b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_longterm_rentals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Long-Term Rentals + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Long-Term Rentals

+

Tips and Notes | Short Term Rentals

+
+

Pro

+
+

Some retailers rent equipment long term, generally billing the customer on a monthly basis. Music stores, for example, often rent instruments this way.

+

Example of Long-term Rental Tracking

+

The following example is for renting pianos by the month, using sales orders, and assumes you will use QuickBooks financial software to send monthly statements to the customer. Adjust this procedure to fit your long-term rental needs.

+

Set up inventory and preferences

+

Rent out a piano

+

View the pianos out on rental

+

Handle monthly billing statements

+

Record piano rental returns

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Rental tracking overview

+

Create a sales order

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_overview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c1c38a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Customer Order Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Order Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Customer Order Preferences

+
+

Pro

+
+

The term customer order collectively refers to layaways, sales orders, and work orders, which are used to record planned sales of merchandise and/or services to your customers.

+

These versatile documents can be used for a variety of purposes, including:

+
    +
  • +

    Layaway of in-stock items, paid for via a series of deposits

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales orders for out-of-stock merchandise

    +
    • +
  • +

    Special orders of new or custom merchandise

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer quotes or estimates for merchandise and/or services

    +
    • +
  • +

    Tracking of repairs, alterations, warranty work, or any other service.

    +
    • +
+

Customer orders typically involve taking a deposit when the order is placed, optional additional deposits over a period of time, and ultimately final payment when the merchandise or service is recorded on a sales receipt.

+

The ordered items are deducted from inventory only after you record them on a sales receipt to fulfill the order. However, they are immediately reflected in your available quantities, so you can see at a glance if on-hand items are already promised to another customer. Point of Sale alerts you when you receive an item that is on an open customer order.

+

You can sell all the items on an order at one time, or partially "fill" the order by selling some of them as merchandise is received or services completed. When the sale is recorded, deposits previously taken are applied towards the final payment.

+

A permanent record of the order and sale is provided by the receipt(s) in sales history. Fulfilled customer orders can be safely deleted at your discretion.

+

In a multi-store configuration, each store creates and maintains its own customer orders. These order documents are exchanged between stores so that each store can view up-to-date available quantity information for all stores. However, customer orders created at one store cannot be viewed or filled at another store. The deposit and sales receipts created at remote stores to take deposits and fill customer orders are sent to Headquarters in the normal manner.

+

 

+

Note: The availability of customer tracking features can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Tips for using sales orders

+

Tips for using work orders

+

Customer order field descriptions

+

Customer order reports

+

Security rights for customer orders

+

How customer orders are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_printing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_printing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83d2453 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_printing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Customer Orders

+

Locate an Order | Printing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Typically, you will print a copy of a customer order to give to the customer and/or to keep for your own records. Printed orders include the deposit history, instructions, quantities sold and remaining due, and any customer message you have defined in company preferences.

+

To print a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the customer order that you want to print.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print from the window tool bar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If presented with a print option window:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Change the printer and template you want to use, if necessary

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select to print all ordered items or just items still due

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify the number of copies you want to print.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Preview or Print.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Create a customer order

+

E-mail an order

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_rentaltracking.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_rentaltracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d4a67d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_rentaltracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Rentals + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Rentals

+

Customer Order Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Many retailers rent items to customers and need a way to track those rentals.

+

While tracking the status of rental equipment (due date, rental period, etc.), item depreciation, damage waivers, and other unique situations related to a rental business are not directly supported, Point of Sale can be used to record rental charges and provide limited physical tracking of items utilizing the versatility of customer orders in conjunction with sales receipts.

+

This topic provides examples for limited tracking of a rental business.

+

What kind of rental situation do you want to track?

+

Short-term rentals (Example: Bicycles by the hour)

+

Long-term rentals (Example: Pianos by the month)

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_reports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e409717 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +Customer Order Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Order Reports

+

Track Orders by Status | Customer Order Reminders

+
+

Pro

+
+

Several customer order reports are available to help you track, order, and follow-up on the merchandise needed for customer orders as well as for seeing the deposits received on these documents.

+

 

+

Order Reports

+

Summary and detail reports are available for each customer order type.

+

These reports are available in the Customers category in the Report Center.

+

Modifying the report data by order status, date, assigned employee (work orders), or due quantities can help you track and manage these versatile documents.

+

You can also view all non-deleted customer orders and corresponding sales receipts made for a specific customer by accessing the customer's history.

+

 

+

Reporting of Order Deposits

+

When you take an order deposit, the deposit amount is reflected in the sales activity for the day on your cash drawer (X/Z-Out) reports. The amount also is reflected on the Deposit Detail report (available in the Customers > Orders area of the Report Center). When the ordered items are sold and the deposit applied to the sale, the total sale amount is reflected in the day's sales activity on your X/Z-Out, while the deposit amount is again reflected as an adjustment (subtraction) to the day's sales activity.

+

 

+

Sales Reports

+

The merchandise/services on a customer order are not included on your general sales reports until the sale is recorded on a sales receipt.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Generate POs from customer orders

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

View deposit history

+

Customer order overview

+

Reports overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_invpref.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_invpref.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..311338f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_invpref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Inventory and Preference Setup + + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: Inventory and Preference Setup

+

Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to set up inventory and preferences to track short-term rentals. This example is for bicycle rentals by the hour; adjust for your needs.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add your rental bicycles to inventory in the normal manner, recording the actual cost and a sales price (not rental price). This adds the bicycles value to your inventory and allows you to sell the bicycles at any time, should you choose to do so.

    +
    2. +
+

Unit Tracking: If you want to track rentals by specific unit, identify each unit with a unique serial number and select the Serial Number Tracking field in inventory for this item.

+
    +
  1. +

    Define a service item with a description of "Bicycle Rental Charge", with a cost of $0 and a price equal to the rental charge for one hour.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: Map the rental charge item to the QuickBooks financial software income account you prefer on the Additional Info tab of the item form.

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Sales Order page of company preferences, define:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    A custom sales order status of "Rented."

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales order deposit requirements per your business practices.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, printed sales order message, such as your policy on equipment damage, late charges, or injury liability.

    +
    • +
+

image\rental_inv_bicycles.gif

+

Related Topics

+

Add inventory items

+

Use service items

+

Map item financial accounts

+

Sales order preferences

+

Short-tern rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_notes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_notes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b6b50e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_notes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Tips and Notes + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: Tips and Notes

+

Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+
    +
  • +

    Rental charges are posted to QuickBooks financial software to the income account you have specified and are reflected on reports as sales.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Listing the rental equipment on a sales order helps track the units currently rented out, deleting it from the sales order before making the final sales receipt makes sure it has no net effect on sales amounts or inventory value.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updating the sales receipt with the rental charges updates the sales order status to 100% filled and automatically changes the status to "Closed."

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can sell rental equipment at anytime in the normal manner by listing it on a sales receipt and, if appropriate, discounting the price to reflect its age/condition at the time of sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you want to run sales reports for all rentals, you could set up a "Rental" department and assign all rental equipment and charges to that department in inventory. Now you can filter reports for the "Rental" department.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_rentout.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_rentout.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..07faacc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_rentout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Renting out Equipment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: Renting out Equipment

+

View Equipment Out | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to rent out short-term rental equipment. This example is for bicycle rentals by the hour; adjust for your needs.

+

To rent out a bicycle:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure you have defined your bicycle rental items and preferences as described here.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Start a new sales order:

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Set the Status field to "Rented"

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    List a "Rental Bicycle" item with a quantity of one. Enter the units serial number, if set up to prompt for it.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    List your "Bicycle Rental Charge" service item with a quantity equal to the number of hours being rented.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    List the customer information.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Record other pertinent information in the Instructions field.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Take a deposit per your requirements and save the order.

    +
    9. +
  9. +

    Print a copy of the order for your customer.

    +
    10. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a sales order

+

Take a deposit

+

List a customer on a document

+

Print a sales order

+

Sales order preferences

+

Short-tern rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_returns.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_returns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc1aaab --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_returns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Recording Equipment Returns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: Record Equipment Returns

+

View Equipment Out | Rental Returns | Notes

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to record the return of short-term rental equipment. This example is for bicycle rentals by the hour; adjust for your needs.

+

To record the return of a rental bicycle:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open the sales order created when the rental was made.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: Filter the sales order list for orders made "Today" to quickly locate the sales order.

+
    +
  1. +

    Delete the Rental Bicycle item from the sales order and, if necessary, edit the rental charge quantity if the actual rental time was different than planned.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Sell Items from the I Want To menu, and then choose Select All and Continue in the Select Items to Sell dialog.

    +
    3. +
+

Just the rental charges are listed on the sales receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Apply the deposit taken previously as payment on the receipt and enter any additional amounts or change due from/to the customer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

The sales order status is automatically changed to "Closed" and will no longer be displayed when viewing the bicycles out on rental. Deleting the rental bicycle from the sales order before selecting Sell Items ensures that you dont accidentally sell it and makes it available for the next rental.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Locate a sales order

+

Filter a list

+

Sell sales order items

+

Edit a sales order

+

Track sales orders by status

+

Short-tern rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_viewrented.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_viewrented.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ede16f9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortrental_viewrented.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Short-term Rental: Viewing Rented Equipment + + + + + + + + + + + +

Short-term Rental: View Rented Equipment

+

Rent Out Equipment | Rental Returns

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to view your equipment out on rental. This example is for bicycle rentals by the hour; adjust for your needs.

+

To view your bicycles out on rent:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your sales order list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select <Create Filter> from the filter drop-down and select "Rented" in the Status field. Learn more.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Apply to display only orders for bicycles currently rented out, as shown below.

    +
    4. +
+

Tip: Save the filter criteria with a unique name, such as "Bicycles on Rent", if you view this list often, so that it is available with one click from the filter drop-down list.

+

 

+

image\rental_bicyclesout.gif

+

 

+

To view additional detail on rented bicycles, including item detail, run a Sales Order report filtered by the status of "Rented". Modify the report to include the columns and detail you wish to see.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Sales order reports

+

Track sales orders by status

+

Short-tern rental overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortterm_rentals.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortterm_rentals.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b389c06 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_shortterm_rentals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Tracking Short-Term Rentals + + + + + + + + + + +

Tracking Short-Term Rentals

+

Customer Order Overview | Long Term Rentals

+
+

Pro

+
+

Some retailers rent equipment to customers on an hourly or daily basis. Sporting goods stores, for example, might rent ski equipment, golf clubs, or bicycles.

+

Note: Point of Sale does not support temporarily authorizing (but not charging) credit card deposits for more than the rental amount. If you require equipment deposits in excess of the rental charge, and the customer wants to use a credit card for the deposit, we recommend that you track the deposit outside of Point of Sale.

+

Example of Short-term Rental Tracking

+

The example presented here is for renting bicycles by the hour, using sales orders. Adjust these procedures to meet your rental tracking needs.

+

Set up inventory and preferences

+

Renting out a bicycle

+

Viewing the bicycles out on rental

+

Recording bicycle rental returns

+

Tips and notes on using this procedure

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_sotips.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_sotips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..26d56dd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_sotips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + +Tips for Using Sales Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tips for Using Sales Orders

+

Customer Order Overview | Order Field Descriptions

+
+

Pro

+
+

Sales orders are a type of customer order that allow you to record the planned sale of items currently out of stock or items that you don't currently carry. Sales orders can also be used to give a customer a quote for merchandise and/or services that you would like to sell.

+

Sales order for out-of-stock items:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the out-of-stock item on the sales order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete other applicable fields, such as discounts, shipping information, etc.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Take a deposit, if you require one.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Print a copy of the order for the customer.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Create a purchase order and receive the merchandise from your vendor.

    +
    6. +
+

Tip: Generate a PO right from the sales order, if necessary

+
    +
  1. +

    When the item is in stock again, contact the customer and record the sale on a sales receipt, applying any deposits toward the final payment.

    +
    2. +
+

Sales order for special order merchandise

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales order and select New Special Order Item from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Define the special order item and then list the item on the sales order.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit the price, quantity, etc. on the sales order.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Take a deposit, if you require one.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Generate PO to create a purchase order for the new item from the sales order.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Print a copy of the order for the customer.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Create a voucher when the item arrives to receive it into inventory.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Contact the customer and record the sale on a receipt. Apply the deposit balance to the sales receipt.

    +
    9. +
+

Sales order for a customer quote

+

If the quote is for services only, you may want to use a work order instead.

+
    +
  1. +

    List the items and/or service items included in the quote.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Change the order status to Pending. This prevents the item quantities from affecting available quantity calculations, since they are not yet committed to a sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Save and print the order. Give the customer a copy of the quote/sales order.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When the customer accepts your quote, deliver the merchandise and/or services and record the sale on a receipt, accepting payment as usual.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Customer orders not available to you? This could be due to your security level or customer orders may be disabled in your Features to Use company preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a customer order: Basic steps

+

Track an order by status

+

Tips for using work orders

+

E-mail a document

+

Customer order reports

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_specialorder.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_specialorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3b6dbb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_specialorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + +Handle Special Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Handle Special Orders

+

Customer Order Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

A special order refers to the tasks related to ordering, receiving and/or selling custom or one-time merchandise that you do not currently carry in inventory and may never carry.

+

There are two ways to handle special orders.

+
    +
  • +

    Customize an Existing Item With this option you list an existing item on the document and then edit its descriptive information to reflect customizations to the item. Use this option when you do not want to create a new inventory item, but do want the document and any other related documents (sales receipt referencing a  customer order, voucher referencing a purchase order, etc.) to reflect your changes. Editing an existing item on a document does not affect the original items description in inventory.

    +
    • +
+

Even though the document reflects the special order edits you have made when selling, purchasing, or receiving the item, it is the original item in inventory that is affected as far as on-hand quantity, cost, etc.

+

View examples

+
    +
  • +

    Create a New Special Order Item With this option, a new special order item is created in inventory. You can list the item on a customer order or receipt, generate a purchase order for it, and receive it on a voucher. Later, if you decide to carry the new item in inventory, you can convert it to a regular inventory item. Special order items can only be added while creating a document (customer order, receipt, voucher, or purchase order).

    +
    • +
+

In a multi-store configuration, the special order item type provides a means for a remote store to create a customer order or receipt for a new item and generate a PO for it. The special order item is sent to Headquarters with the first transactional document listing it. Headquarters can review the special order item and convert it to a regular inventory item, if desired.

+

How do I create a new special order item?

+

 

+

If creating a customer order, you can generate a purchase order right from the customer order to obtain the item from your vendor.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Convert a special order item to an inventory item

+

Create a customer order

+

Tips for using sales orders

+

Add a new item while creating a document

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_specialorderexample1.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_specialorderexample1.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f5cf144 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_specialorderexample1.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Special Order Examples: Customize Existing Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Special Order Examples: Customize Existing Item

+

Handle Special Orders | Create a Customer Order

+
+

Pro

+
+

Example 1

+

You carry plain white T-shirts in inventory, but then print custom logos, team names, or graphics on them when selling or taking customer orders. List the white T-shirt on the document and then use normal item editing procedures to change the item description, size, attribute, and price information, as necessary, e.g. "Baseball Logo Shirt Bears". In this way, the document stores and prints the custom information.

+

You could also list a fee or labor charge for the customization, using a service item.

+

The printed document you give the customer (and the stored document in Point of Sale) will reflect the special order edits you have made when selling, purchasing, or receiving the item, however it is the original item in inventory that is affected as far as on-hand quantity, cost, etc.

+

 

+

Example 2

+

You carry a style of shoes with the largest size in inventory being 13, but you have a customer request for a size 15 shoe. Knowing this will probably be a one-time sale, and not wanting to permanently add this size to inventory as a new item, you list the size 13 shoe on a sales order and edit the size to 15. You can also edit the price or other information as needed, such as the UPC or other required vendor information needed to order the item.

+

If you generate a purchase order from the sales order, the edited information will be carried to the PO. Likewise, when you eventually make a sales receipt referencing the sales order, it too will reflect the custom information.

+

In inventory, the size 13 item remains unchanged, except it is this item that is affected by the sale as far as on-hand quantity and cost changes, etc.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_statustracking.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_statustracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6964aeb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_statustracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + +Track Customer Orders by Status + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Customer Orders by Status

+

Customer Order Overview | Customer Order Reports

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Status field on customer orders allows you to track orders, filter your order lists, and create reports based on the current entry. By default, Point of Sale assigns two order status types. New orders are assigned the Open status. The status of filled orders is automatically flagged as Closed.

+

A third default status, Pending, should be applied to customer orders that don't commit item quantities to sales, such as orders made for estimates or customer quotes. Pending orders are not included in available quantity calculations, and thus don't affect reorder reminders or cause insufficient quantity promptsClick to display a popup topic when selling the items.

+

If it fits your needs, you can rename the  default status types and define more of your own in company preferences. An order's status can be manually changed as an order is made and as it proceeds towards completion. Status field entries can be defined for each order type independently.

+

As the status of an order is changed, Point of Sale records the date and the employee who made the change, so you have a running history of the orders progression.

+

To change the status of an order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the order form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a new status from the drop-down list in the Status field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

If you refund the deposit on a customer order, you are prompted to close the order. Select Yes to close the order or No if you want it to remain open.

+

To view the status history of an order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the order form.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the icon next to the Status field.

    +
    3. +
+

All status changes which occurred after the order was created are displayed.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Locate a customer order

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_assigning.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_assigning.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..92eee21 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_assigning.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Assigning to Employees + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Assigning to Employees

+

Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Assigned field can be used to record the employee whom is performing the service (as opposed to who took the order).

+

Select a name from the drop-down list of defined employees. If an order involves multiple employees, each performing some aspect of the work, this field can be edited as the order progresses.

+

When running a Work Order Journal report, filtering on the Assigned field can give you a list of the pending jobs for each employee.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_datetracking.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_datetracking.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c7aa094 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_datetracking.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Tracking by Dates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Tracking by Dates

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

Work orders can have both an Order Date and a Due Date recorded when created. This helps you to track the amount of time orders take to complete.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_descriptionofwork.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_descriptionofwork.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b1f1b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_descriptionofwork.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Describing the Work to be Performed + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Describing the Work to be Performed

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

The work orders Description of problem or services field provides an almost unlimited amount of space for additional information to be recorded in support of warranty and insurance repairs.

+

Select the Edit button at the bottom right of the field to open a larger Comments notepad for this purpose. This information is included when you print a work order.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_printcomments.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_printcomments.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..082a5e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_printcomments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Printing Messages + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Printing Messages

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

Disclaimers, warranty information, or any custom message can be defined in company preferences and printed on every work order.

+

Common uses for this feature include printing:

+
    +
  • +

    Disclaimers limiting your responsibilities for additional work found necessary

    +
    • +
  • +

    Insurance disclaimers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Unclaimed merchandise policy

    +
    • +
  • +

    Warranty information

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_serviceitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_serviceitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83023a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_serviceitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Using Service Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Using Service Items

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

Service items are defined in inventory and typically are used to list labor charges to complete the job. Use normal new item procedures to define service items in inventory, selecting the Service item type.

+

Use the following guidelines in defining service items in inventory:

+
    +
  • +

    You cannot enter an inventory on-hand quantity for a service item. Service items always have a zero on-hand quantity, since they are non-merchandise items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To charge for labor, enter a description of the labor in the Description 1 field and a price equal to what you charge per hour (or per job). If you charge by the hour, you can charge for partial hours by listing the labor item on a work order and entering a decimal quantity, e.g., 0.5, 2.75, etc. Point of Sale will calculate the correct labor charge.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Generally, service items have no cost, but there may be exceptions, such as when you outsource the work and pay the third party a fee for the service. Make an entry in the item Cost field if this is the case.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You may want to map custom Income and Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) accounts on the Additional Info tab of the item form so the charges (when recorded on a receipt) are posted to your financial software in the manner you prefer.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_trackbystatus.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_trackbystatus.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be1b695 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_trackbystatus.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Tracking by Status + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Tracking by Status

+

Order Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Status field is particularly pertinent to the tracking of work orders. Learn more about tracking orders by status, including how to create custom statuses and use them.

+

Example: You use work orders to do alterations to clothing. Some of the alterations are done in-house while others are sent out to a third party. You may define and assign different statuses for the varying stages of the job as follows:

+
    +
  • +

    New Received but not yet assigned to an employee or outside service.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Assigned To an in-house employee. We recommend you also use the Assigned field to indicate the specific employee (see above).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Out Sent out to a third-party for service.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Backorder Awaiting parts or supplies needed to finish the job.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ready Alteration is complete and ready for customer pickup.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Closed Point of Sale automatically assigns this status when all of the items/services on the work order have been sold.

    +
    • +
+

As a work order progresses, you can update the status field appropriately. Used in combination with the Assigned field, you now have the ability to filter your work order list by status or assigned employee, and to generate work order journal reports filtered by these field values.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_warrantydiscount.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_warrantydiscount.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a962a08 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/custorder_wo_warrantydiscount.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + +Work Orders: Defining a Discount for Warranty Work + + + + + + + + + + +

Work Orders: Defining a Discount for Warranty Work

+

Field Descriptions | Tips for Using Work Orders

+
+

Pro

+
+

If you do warranty work, you may have to list repair parts or labor at a reduced or zero price on the work order. Yet you may want the actual time/items listed for purposes of tracking and billing to the manufacturer. One way to accomplish this is to define an additional item discount type called "Warranty".

+

When you list items for warranty work on a work order, you can give a discount (100% if repair completely paid by warranty) and select warranty in the Discount Type field. When you need a report of warranty work competed, run the report filtered by the discount type "Warranty".

+

Item discount types are defined on the Sales > Discounts page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_error_handling.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_error_handling.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..91ed437 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_error_handling.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +Import Complete + + + + + + + + + + + +

Import Complete

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Import Complete page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.

+

 

+

When an import process is done, Point of Sale displays the complete page which again summarizes the results of the import and alerts you if any additional problems were found.

+

Use the links on this page to review errors and recommendations. If a serious problem occurs, such as a loss of power during the procedure, the message will recommend that you restore from your backup file.

+

You can also review the data import log at anytime by selecting Utilities View Data Import Log from the File menu.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_log.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_log.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..662adc8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_log.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + +Data Import Log + + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Import Log

+

Data Import Wizard Overview | Tips

+

 

+

The Data Import Log provides a way for you to review the results of an import operation and to identify errors and records that were not imported.

+

To use the log:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Utilities View Data Import Log from the File menu (also available from the Complete screen of the Data Import Wizard).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a date, and optionally time, from the Available Logs column on the left. You have the following options in the log:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    The information for the selected import is shown in the window. Select Show Errors Only at the top of the window to make it easier to identify where errors occurred.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click a hyperlink in an entry, if available, to take you to the corresponding program area where you can review the record in question.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Print from the bottom of the window to print the log.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    When done, select Close.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

If you used the default template, it is recommended that you also review the template (Filename: QB POS vn Import Template.xls in your C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Documents\Intuit\Point of Sale n.0 folder, where n = version number) to ensure that data was imported correctly. You may see the following flags on the inventory sheet of the template file, depending on the item import option you chose prior to importing:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + +
+

XL Dup column

+

 

+		 +

If the item is duplicated within the QB POS vn Import Template.xls file itself, the row number of the duplicate item is written in this column.

+

 

+
+

In QBPOS column

+		 +

If the item is a duplicate of an item already in Point of Sale, then QBPOS is written in this column.

+
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_manage_mappings.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_manage_mappings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e08f154 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_manage_mappings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Manage Import Field Mappings + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Import Field Mappings

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the custom template mapping page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.

+

 

+

The Manage Mappings page allows you to create and/or edit the mapping of the data in your import file to the Point of Sale data fields.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    On the custom file selection page, select Add New from the Choose File Mapping drop down list to create a new mapping file.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select an existing mapping file to edit from the drop-down list and select Manage Mappings.

+
    +
  1. +

    For each applicable Point of Sale data field on the left, select the column or data field from your import file on the right from which data will be mapped to the Point of Sale field.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select Show all available fields or Hide advanced fields at the bottom of the dialog to toggle between views as meets your needs. Many users won't need the advanced fields available. Select the Learn More link to see descriptions of all available fields.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Once you have finished mapping data fields, select Save or Save As (to give new name) to make the template available for future use.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Custom Field Import (Pro)

+

Point of Sale provides several custom data fields for each of customer, vendor, and item records (default names of Custom Field 1, Custom Field 2, etc.). If you map data from your import file to these custom fields, the data will be imported but will not be visible in Point of Sale until you have turned on and defined the fields. See Use Custom Fields for more information.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_template_tips.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_template_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae217fc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_template_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + +Tips for Using the Data Import Wizard + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tips for Using the Data Import Wizard

+

Data Import Wizard Overview | Import Instructions

+

 

+

Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

The following are useful tips, and answers to frequently asked questions, regarding the Data Import Wizard:

+
    +
  • +

    Check your import template to ensure required fields are filled (denoted on the default template and in the custom mappings page of the wizard).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Save and close the import template before beginning the import.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Do not enter monetary symbols ($) in currency fields or change the format of the fields. These things will cause the import to fail.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If doing your first or a very large import, you may find it helpful to create a new company data file and import to that file to test before importing into your real company file. It is also strongly recommended you make a backup of your company data before an import (the wizard will give you the chance to do so).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the template file you are using has been provided by a vendor or outputted from another application, the field names (columns) may not match the Point of Sale field names. You will have to do one of these things in this case:

    +
    • +
  • +

    Rename the fields/columns in your custom template to match those in Point of Sale (look at the default template for the data you are importing and match the names exactly).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Copy and paste the information from the custom file into the default template provided with Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Create a custom import mapping, this tells Point of Sale how to match up the field names. If you import frequently from the same file format, such as from a vendor catalog, save the mapping file and associate it with the vendor for reuse.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Refer to the documentation in other applications for directions on how to export data to a file. Choose an Excel option or a comma delimited text file (.csv extension).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Because different programs often store data differently, review the data before importing to make sure it is in the correct format for Point of Sale. For example, your previous software may have stored full customer names in one field. Point of Sale stores customers first and last names separately in different fields. Edit the data as necessary in the import file so that it is in the correct format. If using Point of Sale's default template you can get additional information about each field by placing your cursor on the red triangle in the upper-right corner of the applicable column heading.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If an imported item contains the same department, vendor, item name, attribute, and size as an existing item in Point of Sale, then the item will be imported with a number appended to the end of the Item Name field (e.g. "Hammer" and "Hammer1").

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use the default template file more than once to import data, make sure to clear any old data before entering new data and importing again. Otherwise, you may create duplicate records in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you need to change a value for a large number of records, consider exporting the records to Excel, doing a global find and replace to update the value in Excel, and then re-importing. This procedure can be used to change the department name for a large group of items for example.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you have enabled the multiple unit of measure feature, individual fields for each unit (UPC, alternate lookup, price, etc.) are added to the custom file mappings options.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) You can enter on-hand quantities for all of your stores on the template at one time, saving time and effort.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_type_selection.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_type_selection.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d05d15a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_type_selection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Import Data Type + + + + + + + + + + + +

Import Data Type

+

Data Import Wizard Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the data selection page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.
+
+Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

From this page, select the data type you wish to import:  

+ +

Only one data type can be imported at a time. Repeat the import procedure, making another selection, if you need to import more than data type.

+

 

+

Pro Multi-Store Note:

+
    +
  • +

    At a remote store, only customers can be imported.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_using.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_using.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..906d7d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_using.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Data Import Wizard Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Import Wizard Overview

+

Data Import Instructions | Tips | Data Export Wizard

+

 

+

Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

When you first begin using Point of Sale, you may already have existing customer, vendor, and/or item information in another application (other than QuickBooks Desktop financial software). Or, you may receive data from an outside source that you wish to enter into the program periodically, such as from your vendors.

+

The Data Import Wizard is designed to spare you the time-consuming task of having to manually enter large amounts of existing data into Point of Sale, such as items, item pictures, customers and vendors, allowing you to import this data instead. This tool is particularly useful for:

+
    +
  • +

    New users of Point of Sale who want to import data from another software application. The other software application must be able to export the data into an Excel spreadsheet or comma-delimited text file (.csv).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Existing users of Point of Sale who want to import data provided by vendors, such as catalog information or new pricing for new or existing inventory items

    +
    • +
+

You can import data from:

+
    +
  • +

    An Excel spreadsheet by copying and pasting into a predefined template we have supplied for you

    +
    • +
  • +

    A custom Excel spreadsheet in another format (generated by another program, from a vendor, or that you have created)

    +
    • +
  • +

    A comma-delimited text file (file extension must be .csv)

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) A folder of picture files; on your computer or on a CD, DVD or other media. Special considerations apply to picture imports; click here to learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Information from any of the above sources is mapped into the correct data fields in Point of Sale. If the imported data affects your inventory value (item cost or quantity), Point of Sale creates adjustment memos with an entry in the Source field of Import.

+

View the complete instructions for using the wizard to import your data or select Help on each page of the wizard for additional information about the choices on that page.

+

 

+

Notes:

+

(Basic, Pro) The Data Import option can be accessed from the File Utilities menu on the Server Workstation only.

+

(Pro) In a multi-store configuration, remote stores can import only customers.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_vendorcatalog.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_vendorcatalog.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2742cc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/data_import_vendorcatalog.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Import from a Vendor Catalog + + + + + + + + + + + +

Import from a Vendor Catalog

+

Data Import Wizard

+

 

+

If a vendor provides a catalog of items, you can use the Data Import Wizard to import or update your inventory items with that information. Once your import template mappings are set up for the vendor, they are remembered and automatically used for subsequent imports from the same vendor.

+

What's important about this capability?

+
    +
  • +

    The vendor catalog must be provided in Excel format.

    +
    • +
  • +

    On the first import you tell Point of Sale how to map the vendor's item field names to the Point of Sale item fields, and also the sheet and starting row in the file for the imported data. Point of Sale will then remember this information for future imports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can initiate an import from the vendor's catalog from the I Want To menus in your vendor list or your item list.

    +
    • +
+

To do the initial import from a vendor catalog:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File > Utilities menu, select Import Data.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From the I Want To menu on the vendor record, select Import items from this vendor's catalog.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Data Import Wizard, select Inventory Items as the data type and then Vendor Catalog as the file type. If starting in the Wizard, specify the vendor name when prompted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Browse to the catalog Excel file, and then enter the sheet, starting row, and mappings, how you wish duplicates to be handled, and a department name. Use the help links on the Data Import Wizard if you need assistance.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the prompts to review and then complete the import.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+

On subsequent imports from this vendor, assuming the catalog file is in the same format, you simply tell Point of Sale the vendor's name and where the file is located. The rest of the import mapping information is assumed to be the same as the initial import and happens automatically.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/databackup_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/databackup_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d9355a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/databackup_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +databackup_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Backup/Restore Company Data: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

Automatically back up my data

+

Back up as part of the End of Day procedure

+

Manually back up my data

+

Back up to removable media

+

Restore from a backup

+

Create, open, or rename my POS company data

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_importsources.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_importsources.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03ae978 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_importsources.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Import File Type + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Import File Type

+

Data Import Wizard Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the import file type page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.
+
+Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

To properly import your information, the Data Import Wizard needs to know how you have or will prepare the data to be imported.

+

Select one of the following:

+
    +
  • +

    Default Template The default template is a pre-formatted Excel spreadsheet that allows you to enter items, customers, and vendors on separate worksheets.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Data entered into the appropriate worksheet columns is automatically mapped to the corresponding fields in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Only one data type is imported at a time even if there is data on multiple worksheets. Repeat the import for each data type if necessary.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Custom File Select this option if you are using a custom Excel spreadsheet or a comma-delimited text file.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can create custom mappings from the import file to Point of Sale fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    It's a good idea to review the data format in a custom file to ensure it is comparable to Point of Sale's format.  Tips

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Vendor Catalog Available only for item imports, select this option to use a template designed for electronic item catalogs you receive from your vendors to add or update item information.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify the vendor and Point of Sale will remember the settings for that vendor, saving time on the next import of a catalog from the same vendor. In the future, you can initiate an import from a vendor catalog from the I Want To menu when viewing the vendor's record.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_instructions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_instructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..00be00a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_instructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + + +Data Import Wizard Instructions + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Data Import Wizard Instructions

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity/cost information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

Following is the basic procedure for using the wizard to import data. Select Help on each page of the wizard for additional information about the choices on that page.

+

(Basic, Pro) If in network mode, the Data Import option can be accessed from the File Utilities menu on the Server Workstation only.

+

(Pro) In a multi-store configuration, remote stores can import only customers.

+

To use the Data Import Wizard:

+

It is recommended that you backup your company data file before importing.

+
    +
  1. +

    Export the data from another application, if necessary, to an Excel or comma-delimited text file. Refer to the application's documentation for instructions.

    +
    2. +
+

If importing item pictures, continue here.

+
    +
  1. +

    On your Point of Sale Server Workstation, select Utilities Import from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
+

The Data Import Wizard is displayed. Read the overview material and select Next.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a data type to import, Inventory Items, Item Pictures, Vendors, or Customers and select Next. You can only import one data type at a time.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the file type being used:  the Default Template (Excel) provided with Point of Sale, a Custom File (Excel or text file), or Vendor Catalog (on item imports only), then select Next.  What is the difference between these choices?

    +
    3. +
+

We need to know the file type being used to continue:

+

Use the default template Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Use a custom file or vendor catalog Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_itemoptions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_itemoptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..50948c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_itemoptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + +Import Duplicate Record Options + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Import Duplicate Record Options

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the duplicate records page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.
+
+Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot import customer, vendor, or item quantity information and Basic users cannot import item pictures.

+

 

+

Before the import begins, you have the opportunity to specify how you want to handle potential duplicate records. If you are importing data for the first time as you set up Point of Sale, you probably don't want to allow a duplicate record to be imported. On the other hand, if you are importing to update your records, such as when importing from a vendor catalog with updated prices, you might want to allow the import to update at least some of the information for the existing items.

+

Each record type (inventory items, vendors and customers) allows you to specify which fields are used to identify duplicates and how you want to handle the import of those records. For example, inventory item duplicates can be identified by their UPC, Alternate Lookup, or Item numbers.

+

The available options are:

+

During import, what field should Point of Sale use to determine if a record already exists?

+
    +
  • +

    Specify how duplicate records should be determined.

    +
    • +
+

Choices vary by data type. For example, if importing items and you select UPC to identify duplicates, then when the UPC of an item being imported matches the UPC for an existing item, Point of Sale will detect it and handle it by whatever method you specify below.

+

What action should be taken when duplicate records are detected during import?

+

Select an action for when duplicate records are detected:

+

Import Wizard

+
    +
  • +

    Prompt me and let me decide With this option selected, the import will pause when a duplicate record is identified so that you can determine how to handle each instance.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Keep existing data and discard import data With this option selected, the tool will NOT overwrite an existing Point of Sale record with the information from the import file. Such items are marked in the import log for your review later.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Replace existing data with import data, ignoring blank fields With this option selected, blank fields in the import file will not overwrite fields in the current record that contain information. All fields in the import file that have an entry will overwrite the existing Point of Sale values. Point of Sale will generate adjustment memos as necessary, with a Source field entry of Import, if the overwritten data affects inventory valuation (quantity or cost values).  ExampleClick to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Replace existing data with import data, including blank fields With this option selected, blank fields in the import file will overwrite fields in the current record that contain information (thus leaving the field blank). Point of Sale will generate adjustment memos as necessary, with a Source field entry of Import, if the overwritten data affects inventory valuation (quantity or cost values).

    +
    • +
+

Warning  Warning: Be very careful with this choice. Ensure that any field you don't want blanked out has a value entered in the import file. Note:When importing items, this option is ignored for Item numbers.

+

 

+

(Item Import only)  If an item has no department specified in the import file, what department should Point of Sale assign it to?

+
    +
  • +

    Select one of your departments from the drop-down list. After the import is completed you can review and change the assigned department if necessary.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_preview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_preview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..982540c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimport_preview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Preview Import Results + + + + + + + + + + + +

Preview Import Results

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the import preview page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.

+

 

+

Point of Sale checks the import file and displays a summary of the records to be imported. This provides you an opportunity to verify and correct any errors before actually importing records.

+

We recommend you review the information on this page carefully and click any links that explain possible import errors.

+

This page displays:

+
    +
  • +

    The number of valid records in the import file.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The number of records that will be added to Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The number of records that will be updated in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Whether or not any errors were found in the records and a link to the import log to view them.

    +
    • +
  • +

    An option to back up your company data before importing. It is highly recommended that you do so.

    +
    • +
+

Select Cancel or Previous if you need to correct errors in your import file before proceeding. To proceed with data import, select Import.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimportspecify.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimportspecify.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6685ea3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dataimportspecify.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Custom Import File Specifications + + + + + + + + + + + +

Custom Import File Specifications

+

Overview | Tips

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the custom file page of the Data Import Wizard. From the File menu, select Utilities Import.

+

 

+

Use this page to specify the custom import file location and name, the worksheet the data is on, and to select or create a custom mapping file.

+

The available options are:

+

Identify the information to be imported:

+
    +
  • +

    Choose which file to import

    +
    • +
+

Select Browse to locate the file containing the data you wish to import into Point of Sale.

+

To import a text file, be sure the file has a csv extension (rename the file if necessary) and change the selection to csv in the Files of Type drop-down list in the Open a File dialog. Selecting the correct file you will use for this map will affect the options available when assigning data fields to the map.

+
    +
  • +

    Data is on sheet

    +
    • +
+

If you have selected an Excel file as the data source for the import, identify which worksheet contains the data you wish to import.

+
    +
  • +

    Data starts on row

    +
    • +
+

Identify the first row or line containing the actual data to be imported. Do not include any heading rows when specifying the starting row.

+
    +
  • +

    Choose file mapping

    +
    • +
+

Select an existing mapping template or Manage Mappings to create a new template. Tell me more about managing mapping templates.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept301.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept301.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f92c3b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept301.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + + +Access Departments Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Departments Records

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Departments Overview

+

Access your department records in one of these ways:

+
    +
  • +

    From the Inventory menu, select New Department to create a new department record or Department List to view existing departments

    +
    • +
  • +

    With the cursor in the Department field on an item record, click the down arrow to display a list of your departments from which you can choose

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept302.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept302.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ff92fe0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept302.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a New Department + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Department

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Plan Your Departments | Department Overview

+

To add a new department:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Department from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Or, if your department list is already displayed, select New Department from the window toolbar.

+

A blank department form is opened.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a Department name (required).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter any additional information in the optional department fields.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save or Save & New (if immediately adding another record).

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you imported inventory items from QuickBooks, all the imported items were put into a single department named QuickBooks. Review, add, or edit departments as needed to make them useful for your purposes. If you edit a department name, be sure to reassign the new name to items in inventory that are in that department.

    +
    • +
  • +

    New departments can also be added directly in the department list using list edit mode.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Only Headquarters can add or edit departments.

    +
    • +
  • +

    My markup value sometimes changes right after I enter it. Why?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Copy a department record

+

Use a pricing formula for new items

+

Print department records

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept306.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept306.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc80833 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept306.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a Department Record + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Department Record

+

Department Field Descriptions | Department Overview

+

 

+

You can freely edit department records as needed. However, read the notes below about the effect of editing specific department fields.

+

To edit a department record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or select the department record you want to modify.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit from the window tool bar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Modify the department fields, as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

If you want to edit multiple records at one time in your department list, you can do so by turning on list edit mode.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Editing a department name in the department file does not change the name on item records in inventory. To correct inventory items, you must edit the department name for each item assigned to that department to reflect the new name.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Changes to a department name are automatically reflected in other program areas and on reports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Editing the margin/markup or tax code does not update existing items in inventory. These values are used only when adding new items to inventory. My markup value sometimes changes right after I enter it. Why?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Find a department record

+

Delete a department

+

Edit an item

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept307.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept307.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d6ca9e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept307.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copy a Department Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Department Record

+

Department Field Descriptions | Department Overview

+

 

+

If an existing department is similar to one you want to add, copy the existing department and edit the copy to reflect the new department information.

+

To create a department by copying an existing department record:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your department list, highlight the department record to be copied.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy from the window toolbar.

    +
    3. +
+

All the fields from the original department are copied to a new record.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a unique Department Name and modify the other department fields, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save or Save & New (if immediately adding another record).

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Find a department record

+

Edit a department record

+

Delete a department

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept308.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept308.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..080deef --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept308.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete a Department Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Department Record

+

Find a Department Record | Department Overview

+

 

+

Use this procedure to delete a department that you no longer use. Deleting a department record does not affect existing inventory records or history documents. The department name remains in place in both of those areas and reports can still be generated for the deleted department.

+

To delete a department record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the department record that you want to delete.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From I Want To.., choose Delete Department(s).

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Deleting a department record does not remove the department from item records. If the department is still in place on item records, the item records should be updated to reflect your new department structure.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Edit a department

+

Add a new department

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept309.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept309.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6573060 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept309.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Use a Department Pricing Formula for New Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Use a Department Pricing Formula for New Items

+

Item Price and Cost | Department Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sales pricing formula can be used to calculate item prices when they are first added or received into inventory.

+

When a new item is added and assigned to a department with a predefined margin or markup, Point of Sale will calculate your regular price from the average unit cost by applying the specified margin/markup. Prices for your other price levels are calculated based on the price level markdowns defined in company preferences.

+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

To define a default department margin or a markup:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the department record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a margin value in the Margin % field or a markup value in the Markup % field. Entering either results in the other being calculated and auto-filled by Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
+

My markup value sometimes changes right after I enter it. Why?Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The department pricing formula is applied only to new items (previous price = $0) added to inventory. It is not applied to the prices of existing items when item costs change.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you prefer not to use Point of Sales pricing formula, do not enter a margin or markup on the department record. Manually enter item prices as you add items to inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Margin and markup can be edited in inventory for individual items as necessary. Just edit the Margin % or Markup % fields of individual item records.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Edit a department

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept310.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept310.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6186d72 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept310.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print or Export your Department List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print or Export your Department List

+

Printing Basics | Department Overview

+

To print or export your department list:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your department list and select those you want to include in the output:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If including all departments, you do not need to make a selection. Ensure the list filter is set to display All Departments.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To include a subset of your list, filter the list first or select those you want included. How do I select multiple departments?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print departments from the Print menu or Export to Excel from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If printing, in the Print Departments dialog, select:

    +
      +
    • +

      Print all departments to include all departments currently displayed in the list

      +
      • +
    • +

      Print selected departments to include only the departments selected

      +
      • +
    +
    3. +
+

A preview of the department list is displayed. Select Print to finish.

+

If exporting, follow the on-screen prompts. Select Help on the export dialogs for more information.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Export List Data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_example.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_example.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae674f5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_example.htm @@ -0,0 +1,174 @@ + + + + + + +dept_example + + + + + + + + + + + +

Example Department Structure

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

This shoe store example uses a name and a two -character code to identify each merchandise department.

+
    +
  • +

    Department Name: Use an easy to remember name that makes sense to you and your employees. This name is used when working with items, filters, and reports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Department Code: An abbreviated format for your departments that is printed on price tags and in certain other areas where space is limited.

    +
    • +
  • + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Character 1:

    +    		 +

    The first character designates a major merchandise area. In our shoe store, one major merchandise area is Men's Shoes; designated by an M.

    +
    +

    Character 2:

    +    		 +

    The second character identifies a category within the major merchandise area. In our shoe store, the category of athletic shoes in the mens shoes area is designated by an A.

    +
    +
    • +
+

In this example, the code for the department named "Men's Shoes Athletic" is MA.

+

Our entire department structure looks like this:

+
    +
  1. + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
    +

    Department Name

    +    		 +

    Code

    +
    +

    Mens Shoes Athletic

    +    		 +

    MA

    +
    +

    Mens Shoes Dress

    +    		 +

    MD

    +
    +

    Mens Shoes Casual

    +    		 +

    MC

    +
    +

    Womens Shoes Athletic

    +    		 +

    WA

    +
    +

    Womens Shoes Dress

    +    		 +

    WD

    +
    +

    Womens Shoes Casual

    +    		 +

    WC

    +
    +

    Childrens Shoes

    +    		 +

    CS

    +
    +

    Footwear Hosiery

    +    		 +

    FH

    +
    +

    Footwear Accessories

    +    		 +

    FA

    +
    +
    2. +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you want even more detailed departments, add a third letter to the code, e.g. "Mens Athletic Shoes Running" or MAR, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You dont have to use the same number of characters for every department code. For example, the "Childrens Shoes" department above could have a code of C.

    +
    • +
+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae2ee6d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +dept_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Merchandise Departments: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

View my department records

+

Create a new department

+

Use department pricing formulas

+

Find a department record

+

Edit a department

+

Delete a department

+

Print my department list

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_markupcalc.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_markupcalc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..059386f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_markupcalc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +dept_markupcalc + + + + + + + + + +

Department Markup Calculations

+ +

popup; has been hidden

+ +

While you can enter a Markup % to specify your desired profit margin, Point of Sale always uses the department Margin % value for its pricing calculations. When you enter a markup percentage, Point of Sale will round it, if necessary, so that the resulting margin value is a whole number (i.e. no decimal places).

+

Example: You enter a markup percentage of 40 %. Point of Sale calculates the nearest corresponding margin (whole number) to be 29. It then calculates backwards from the 29 % margin and displays your markup as 41%.

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_select.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_select.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea2b33c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_select.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Department + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Department for Item Record

+

Add a Department | Department Overview

+

To select and list a department on an item record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal sort, search, or filter procedures to locate the department record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Double-click the department or highlight the row and choose Select from the bottom toolbar.

    +
    3. +
+

While in your department list you have complete capabilities to add a new department or edit an existing one. After adding or editing a department record, choose Save & Select to both save the department and return it to the item record with which you were working.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Plan your departments

+

Edit a department

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_structure.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_structure.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c26b61 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/dept_structure.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Plan your Departments + + + + + + + + + + +

Plan your Departments

+

Add a Department | Department Overview

+

 

+

The number of merchandise departments you use will depend on how you plan to evaluate sales performance and on your buying strategy. You can put all merchandise into a single department, but you may want to consider the benefits of setting up a more detailed department structure. Carefully planned departments allow you to view, edit, conduct physical counts, or run reports for selected groups of merchandise.

+

Consider the following when planning your departments:

+
    +
  • +

    How do you want to break out sales, merchandise, and purchasing reports?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Do you want to be able to filter your item list for purposes of changing prices, printing price tags, or conducting physical inventory counts by merchandise categories?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Do you have categories of merchandise that are taxed differently or that you price differently than others?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale can maintain a virtually unlimited number of departments; however too many departments can result in too much detail on reports, which makes it difficult to get useful, consolidated data. It is recommended that you define only as many departments as you need to effectively manage your merchandise purchasing and reporting.

    +
    • +
+

Department Codes

+

While not required, department codes provide an efficient way to locate a department record and can be useful when you wish the item department to be included on price tags where space is limited. Department codes can be one to three alphanumeric characters of your choosing.

+

View an example department structureClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit a department record

+

Find a department record

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/deptsoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/deptsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57e8d98 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/deptsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Departments Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Departments Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Plan Your Departments

+

 

+

In most retail businesses, related merchandise is grouped into departments. Establishing and using departments is a good way to monitor sales performance, manage inventory, and run meaningful reports, which will help you to make informed buying decisions. A well-designed department structure will also save you time and give you greater flexibility when conducting a physical inventory, changing prices, and printing tags.

+

How many departments should you have? That depends on the level of detail you wish to see on reports and how you want to work with categories of items with tasks, such as changing prices or talking inventory. Use the Plan Your Departments link above for some ideas and guidance on this important decision.

+

Each department must be identified by a unique department name. Departments can also be identified by a department code which can be used to search for a department record and is printed on price tags. Each item added to your inventory then must be assigned to one of your departments. Department options, such as default tax codes and profit margin/markup are automatically suggested when you assign new items to a department in inventory. Assigning inventory items to departments allows Point of Sale to track and report on the merchandise in each department as it is ordered, received, and sold.

+

View an example department structureClick to display a popup topic

+

(Pro) Remote stores can view department records and use them to filter reports, but only Headquarters can add or edit departments.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Department field descriptions

+

Security rights for departments

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/endofday02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/endofday02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c568156 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/endofday02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +End of Day Financial Exchange with QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

End of Day Financial Exchange with QuickBooks

+

Financial Exchange Overview | FAQs | End of Day Overview

+

 

+

In a multi-workstation configuration, the End of Day procedure must be run on the Server Workstation to include Financial Exchange.

+

(Pro) The Financial Exchange option is available only at Headquarters.

+

To include a Financial Exchange as part of the End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure QuickBooks Desktop is running and your company file is open.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: To avoid this step set up your integrated applications preferences in QuickBooks Desktop to allow Point of Sale to automatically login.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the End of Day window, ensure that the Exchange Data with QuickBooks option is selected in the Financial Exchange with QuickBooks section.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose other End of Day options.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select OK.

    +
    4. +
+

Learn more about...

+

What information is exchanged?

+

What do I if an error occurs during an exchange?

+

How is my Point of Sale data posted to QuickBooks Desktop?.

+

How do I handle bank deposits after running Financial Exchange?

+

Can I run Financial Exchange outside of the End of Day procedure?

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/endofday03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/endofday03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bf6affc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/endofday03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Z-Out Store Close Report: End of Day + + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Store Close Report: End of Day

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

A Z-Out ("zero" out) Store Close report provides a summary of your workstations sales activities for the day and helps prepare a bank deposit.

+

To run an Z-Out Store Close report as part of the End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select End of Day Procedure from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the End of Day Reports section, select the check box to run a End of Day report and then select Z-Out Store Close as the report type.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the date period for the report from the drop-down list. For a Z-Out Store Close report, this is usually the dynamic date Today. To define a fixed date range, select Custom.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select other End of Day options, as needed.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select OK and follow the on-screen prompts.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The Z-Out Store Close report automatically includes sales activity for every workstation and cashier for the date range defined for the report. However, you can filter the report to include only designated workstations or cashiers. In a multi-store configuration, you can also filter by stores (only at Headquarters).

    +
    • +
  • +

    This report is generally run as part of the End of Day procedure as described below, but can also be run manually.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Z-Out Store Close Report does not include reconciling the cash drawer. If you want to reconcile the cash drawer, use the Z-Out Drawer Count report instead of, or in addition to, the Store Close Report.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Which Z-Out report should I use?

+

Z-Out reports

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_handlingdepositsafterfianacialexchange.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_handlingdepositsafterfianacialexchange.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8bbd93 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_handlingdepositsafterfianacialexchange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + + +Handling Bank Deposits after Running Financial Exchange + + + + + + + + + + + +

Handling Bank Deposits after Running Financial Exchange

+

Financial Exchange Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

By default, cash from Point of Sale is placed in the Cash In Drawer account in QuickBooks Desktop, while checks and credit/debit transaction are placed in the Undeposited Funds account.

+

Learn more about using the default or custom account mappings

+

To perform a deposit after you have completed the Financial Exchange process with QuickBooks Desktop (using the default mappings), you will need to transfer the funds you wish to deposit from the Cash in Drawer account in QuickBooks Desktop to the Undeposited Funds account.

+

To make a bank deposit in QuickBooks Desktop:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, from the Banking menu, select Transfer Funds.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the accounts to transfer from and to.

    +
    3. +
+

Normally this would be a transfer from the Cash In Drawer account to the Undeposited Funds account. If you have set up custom account mappings between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you will need to specify the custom accounts that you use.

+

+

This window displays the current balances in each account.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the Transfer Amount (usually the entire balance in the Cash in Drawer account) and save the transfer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Make Deposits from the Banking menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Payments to Deposit window, select the items in the list you wish to deposit. If depositing the entire balance from the Undeposited Funds account, click Select All at the bottom of the window.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    On the Make Deposits window, select the bank account to which the funds are being deposited and save.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Alternate Method Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out Store Close reports

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f3db347 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +eod_hdi + + + + + + + + + + +

End of Day: How Do I?

+  +

This is a popup topic.

+ +

Run an X/Z-Out Report?

+

Count/balance my cash drawer?

+

Settle credit and debit card batches?

+

Exchange data with my QuickBooks financial software?

+

Handle bank deposits?

+

Initiate the End of Day procedure?

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_merchantservicebatch.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_merchantservicebatch.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..740dfe0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_merchantservicebatch.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + + +Settle Merchant Service Transactions + + + + + + + + + + + +

Settle Merchant Service Transactions

+

Merchant Service Overview | FAQs | End of Day Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sale does not support batch settlements.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Merchant Service Reports

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Take payment by debit card

+

Troubleshoot

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_require_manualcounts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_require_manualcounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8b81a67 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_require_manualcounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + +Z-Out Drawer Count: Require Manual Media Counts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Drawer Count: Require Manual Media Counts

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

For added cash drawer control, you can require that cashiers complete a manual count of all media (currency and non-currency) in the drawer and enter those counts before a Z-Out Drawer Count Report can be completed. This procedure helps eliminate mathematical errors and identify missing amounts.

+

If you do not require manual media counts, the drawer count report can be completed by simply entering the total drawer amount on the Media Totals window.

+

To require manual media counts as part of a drawer count report

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Company from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Sales page from the preferences tree on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Require a Manual Media Count for X/Z-Out option.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_viewformerdrawercounts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_viewformerdrawercounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b6a5cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_viewformerdrawercounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +View Drawer Count History + + + + + + + + + + + +

View Drawer Count History

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Z-Out Drawer Count reports are stored by Point of Sale, and can be viewed at anytime by selecting View Drawer Count History from the Reports menu.

+

(Pro) Remote stores send their drawer count reports to Headquarters with each Store Exchange. At Headquarters, the list of Z-Out Drawer Count Reports includes all stores. The listed reports can be grouped in the list by store, date, workstation, etc., using standard list sorting procedures.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out reports

+

X/Z-Out basic steps

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_xz_terminology.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_xz_terminology.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..693bfcf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_xz_terminology.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +X/Z-Out Terminology + + + + + + + + + + + +

X/Z-Out Terminology

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Breakouts: Listings of the total amount paid in, the amount paid out, and the net amount for each discount type. These listings are included in all X-Outs and Z-Outs.

+

Media: A general term for currency and non-currency items used as payment.

+

Currency: Bills and coins used as payment.

+

Non-Currency Media: Media other than currency used as payment. Non-currency media are payment documents such as checks, credit card and ATM/debit receipts, store credits, gift cards/certificates, etc.

+

Paid Outs and Payouts: The term "paid out" refers to payment given to the customer for any reason, such as giving change or refunding a returned item. In the list of non-currency media contained at the end of X/Z-Out reports, there is a list of Payouts, meaning cash removed from the cash drawer using the payout feature. It is important to be aware of this distinction.

+

Manual Media Count: An optional manual count of all media (currency and non-currency) in the drawer done for added cash drawer control. Can be required before a Z-Out Drawer Count Report can be completed. This procedure helps eliminate mathematical errors and identify missing amounts.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_zout_recommendations.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_zout_recommendations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c50d6c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eod_zout_recommendations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + + +Z-Out Report Recommendations + + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Report Recommendations

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Following are some general suggestions for determining which Z-Out report to use and when. Use the report types and frequency that best meets the needs of your business and policies.

+

 

+

If you have a single workstation:

+
    +
  • +

    For maximum control, do a Z-Out Drawer Count at the end of each shift and as part of your End of Day procedure, requiring manual media counts. With a single workstation, it isnt necessary to run a separate Store Close report.

    +
    • +
+

If you have multiple workstations:

+
    +
  • +

    For maximum control, do a Z-Out Drawer Count report at each workstation at the end of each shift, including the shift that ends the day, and requiring a manual media count. Filter by workstation number, time period, and cashier, as appropriate at each workstation.

    +
    • +
  • +

    After the individual workstations have completed their final drawer count for the day, run a Z-Out Store Close report as part of the End of Day procedure, filtered to include the activity from all workstations/cashiers for the entire day.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eodoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eodoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4595b83 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/eodoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + + +End of Day Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

End of Day Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

The retail day is over; the doors are locked. It is time to tally up the sales, count the money, exchange information with your financial software, and back up your data before you head home.

+

When you initiate the End of Day procedure, these tasks are carried out as you specify, prompting you for input as needed.

+

Note:  In a multi-workstation configuration, the End of Day procedure must be run from the Server Workstation if you wish to include a data backup or Financial Exchange.
+Pro Note:  In a multi-workstation configuration, the End of Day procedure must also be run from the Server Workstation if you wish to include Store Exchange.

+

To run the End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select End Of Day Procedure from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    2. +
+

The End of Day window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the individual procedures you wish to run by selecting or clearing the check boxes for each and specifying options:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Run an End of Day report (drawer count, store close, or status). Select the specific X/Z-Out report type, specify a date (default: today), and optionally select the check box to print the report immediately without previewing. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Back up your company data. Specify the default location or an alternate location. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Send data to other stores. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Settle Merchant Account (send credit and debit card transactions to processor). Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Exchange data with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Learn more

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Start.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter additional information as prompted.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you have scheduled data backups, you may not want to include another backup in your End of Day procedure.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equi_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equi_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f56bd5b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equi_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +equi_hdi + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic.

+ +

Use the Hardware Setup Wizard?

+

Install supported hardware?

+

View the compatible hardware list?

+

Troubleshoot my hardware?

+

Set up a laser or inkjet printer?

+

Order supplies?

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_barcodescannerlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_barcodescannerlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4fba3cc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_barcodescannerlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,176 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible Bar Code Scanners + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Bar Code Scanners

+

Installing Supported Hardware | FAQs | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Any setup information provided for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

HHP Imageteam 3800LR   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

HHP Imageteam 3800LR

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

HHP SR IT5600 Cordless Linear Imager

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

HHP 3820 Cordless Linear Imager

+		 +

USB

+
+

Metrologic QuantumT MS3580 Omni-directional

+		 +

USB

+
+

Metrologic Voyager BT MS9535 Bluetooth**

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

Metrologic Voyager MS9520

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

Microvision Flic

+		 +

USB

+
+

Symbol M2007 Omni-directional***

+		 +

USB

+
+

Symbol Cobra LS1902T   Setup NoteClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

Symbol LS1908T

+		 +

USB

+
+

 Welch Allyn IT3220   Install

+		 +

PS/2*

+
+

* PS/2 (keyboard) devices share the port with the keyboard. A scanner, credit card reader, and keyboard can all share the same PS/2 port. See illustration.Click to display a popup topic

+

** Requires a Bluetooth adapter be installed.

+

*** Does not scan jewelry tags.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using bar codes in Point of Sale

+

Bar code scanner FAQs

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_cardreaderlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_cardreaderlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7154554 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_cardreaderlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,151 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible Card Readers + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Card Readers

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware list have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Any setup information provided for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported, unless it was purchased from Intuit. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Magtek 21040110   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

ID Innovations MSR USB   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

ID Innovations MSR PS2   Install

+		 +

PS/2**

+
+

Cherry Keyboard MSR G81-7000 PS/2

+		 +

PS/2**

+
+

Cherry Keyboard MSR G81-7000 USB

+		 +

USB

+
+

Cherry Keyboard G86-62410EUAGSA

+		 +

USB

+
+

Cherry Keyboard G81-7920LUBBUS-2

+		 +

USB

+
+

Logic Controls MR 3010

+		 +

PS/2**

+
+

Dell DEL3331-33UB (ID Tech Mini Mag)

+		 +

USB

+
+

Notes

+
    +
  • +

    ** PS/2 (keyboard) devices share the port with the keyboard. A scanner, credit card reader, and keyboard can all share the same PS/2 port. See illustration.Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Card readers not purchased from Intuit or an Intuit-approved partner may require additional configuration in order to work with Point of Sale. Contact the hardware vendor for information.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_cashdrawerlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_cashdrawerlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ee43775 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_cashdrawerlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible Cash Drawers + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Cash Drawers

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Troubleshooting | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

Important Setup and Compatibility InformationClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

MMF VAL-u Line  Install

+		 +

Printer*

+
+

M-S Cash Drawer CF-Media  Install

+		 +

Printer**

+
+

APG T371-BL16195

+		 +

Printer*

+
+

APG T371-DG1616 (Use with Dell T200 printer)

+		 +

Printer*

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    * Cash drawers must be connected through a compatible receipt printer. See illustration.Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Not all cash drawers work with all receipt printers. Check the cash drawer manufacturer's specifications for printer compatibility. Connecting a cash drawer to a non-compatible printer may cause damage to the printer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    ** The M-S Cash Drawer, formerly sold by Intuit, works only with compatible Star receipt printers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use only the manufacturer's cable included with the cash drawer for connection to your receipt printer. Using any other cable, including phone cords, may result in irreparable damage to your receipt printer.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshooting your cash drawer

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_compatible_touchscreens.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_compatible_touchscreens.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9570edb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_compatible_touchscreens.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible Touchscreen Models + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Touchscreen Models

+

Hardware Setup Wizard

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from Intuit, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

The hardware in this is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Any setup information provided is as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Dell E157FPT with Card Reader

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo Touchscreen HID  (F05973)

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo KE  Touchscreen (D63505)

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo  Touchscreen 1529L with Card Reader

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo 1522L  (E082911)

+		 +

USB

+
+

Elo 1522L  with Card Reader (E068101)

+		 +

USB

+
+

 

+

Touchscreen use must be enabled in the Hardware Setup Wizard or in workstation preferences.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using a touchscreen

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_configure_comports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_configure_comports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66994a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_configure_comports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + +Configuring Windows COM Port Settings + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configuring Windows COM Port Settings

+

Troubleshooting | Compatible Hardware | Hardware Setup Wizard

+

 

+

Some hardware, including physical inventory scanners, PIN pad devices, and serial models of pole display, require assignment of a Windows COM port. The COM port setting for this hardware specified in Point of Sale must match the setting in your Windows Device Manager.

+

Point of Sale will select a port setting for each piece of equipment, but Windows may assign a different port, depending on other hardware you have installed and the available ports.

+

Use this procedure to verify or select a COM port in Windows Device Manager and then make the same selection when setting up the hardware in Point of Sale.

+

To verify or configure Windows COM Port settings:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the Windows Device Manager.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Double-click Ports (COM & LPT).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Double-click the entry for the model of hardware you are setting up.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Port Settings tab.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Advanced.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Change the COM Port number to the default port assigned by Point of Sale, if it is available.

    +
    6. +
+

Note: If the default COM port is in use by another device, an unused COM Port should be selected. In such cases, you will need to change the port setting in Point of Sale to match the port selected here.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click OK.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_hwsetupwiz.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_hwsetupwiz.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9d8add3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_hwsetupwiz.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Hardware Setup Wizard + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware Setup Wizard

+

Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic | Compatible Hardware | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

The Hardware Setup Wizard is launched automatically when you configure hardware in the Setup Interview to guide you through connecting and configuring hardware to work with Point of Sale. If you add hardware in the future, you can manually access the setup wizard from the File menu or from the hardware configuration pages in workstation preferences.

+

Important: Do not connect hardware to your computer until instructed to do so by the wizard.

+

To use the Hardware Setup Wizard:

+
    +
  1. +

    If installing hardware purchased from Intuit, put the Point of Sale CD in your CD-ROM drive (cancel the installation wizard if it launches).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Next after reading the welcome page.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the type of hardware you are installing.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Next and follow the on-screen instructions to connect, set up, and test each piece of hardware.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If installing non-Intuit hardware, you may be prompted to use the manufacturers CD or instructions to install the device. When done return to the setup wizard and continue.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Since Windows, Software and Hardware are constantly changing, the driver you need may not be on the CD.  To find the most current driver, go to www.quickbooks.com/support and search for Hardware Drivers.  You should see a link for the tested drivers as well as instructions for installation.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

About connection ports

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_illus_usb.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_illus_usb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4becb4d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_illus_usb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + +equip_illus_usb + + + + + + + + + + +

Illustration of USB Cable and Port

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

USB ports may be located on either the front or back of your computer.

+

 

+

image\equip_usbports.gif

+

 

+

If you have more USB devices that you have available ports on your computer, you can purchase a USB hub from your local computer or office supply store. We recommend a powered USB hub.

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_note_cashdrawer.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_note_cashdrawer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4b770b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_note_cashdrawer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + +equip_note_cashdrawer + + + + + + + + + + +

Setup Note: Cash Drawer

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden

+ +

Use of a cash drawer requires a 40-column receipt printer through
+which the cash drawer is connected to the computer.

+

 

+

image\equip_install_cashdrawer.gif

+

 

+

Troubleshooting the cash drawer

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_pdtlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_pdtlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba5bbbe --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_pdtlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners

+

Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic | Hardware Troubleshooter

+
+

Basic

+
+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+

Important Note: Intuit works closely with the manufacturers of hardware sold by Intuit for use with Point of Sale to ensure these devices work together and with the Point of Sale software. Hardware, such as PIN Pads and Physical Inventory Scanners, purchased from other sources may not contain the required programming to work with Point of Sale software and/or the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. Intuit does not provide hardware programming, and does not guarantee that devices purchased from other third party sources will work with Intuit software.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

Port

+
+

Metrologic SP 5500 Optimus S   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

CipherLabs 8000*   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

 

+

* This scanner is no longer available for purchase from Intuit.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using a scanner in a physical inventory

+

Other compatible hardware

+

About connection ports

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_pinpadlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_pinpadlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..064af9f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_pinpadlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible PIN pads + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible PIN pads

+

Credit/Debit Hardware | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+

Important Note: Intuit works closely with the manufacturers of hardware sold by Intuit for use with Point of Sale to ensure these devices work together and with the Point of Sale software. Hardware, such as PIN Pads and Physical Inventory Scanners, purchased from other sources may not contain the required programming to work with Point of Sale software and/or the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. Intuit does not provide hardware programming, and does not guarantee that devices purchased from other third party sources will work with Intuit software.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Ingenico 3070 w/ card reader

+		 +

USB

+
+

Ingenico 2100 w/ card reader*

+		 +

USB

+
+

Ingenico 3010 w/o card reader*

+		 +

USB

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Installing an Ingenico PIN pad

+

Credit and debit hardware

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_poledisplaylist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_poledisplaylist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a98de7f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_poledisplaylist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible Pole (Shopper) Displays + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Pole (Shopper) Displays

+

Installing Supported Hardware | FAQs | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Logic Controls LD 9900 USB  Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

Logic Controls LD9900 PUSB

+		 +

Powered USB

+
+

Logic Controls LD 9000

+		 +

Serial

+
+

Logic Controls LD 9000U

+		 +

USB

+
+

Logic Controls PD 3000

+		 +

Serial

+
+

Partner Tech CD7220   Install

+		 +

Serial

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Pole display FAQs

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_ports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_ports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e44a58 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_ports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Hardware Connection Ports + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware Connection Ports

+

Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic | Installing Supported Hardware

+

 

+

If connecting hardware to your Point of Sale workstations, you may have questions about which and how many peripherals your computer can support and what kind of port, or connection type, will be required for the hardware.

+

Important notes about connection ports:

+
    +
  • +

    Refer to the hardware compatibility charts for the required port type for each piece of hardware.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you purchase the Point of Sale hardware bundle sold by Intuit, which includes a receipt printer, cash drawer, bar code scanner, and payment card reader, you will need three USB ports. USB Port illustrationClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you dont have enough USB ports available, you can purchase and install a powered USB hub. All Point of Sale hardware is USB 2.0 compliant. Please check your computer manufacturers specification to ensure you purchase the correct hub.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When disconnecting and reconnecting hardware that uses USB ports, ensure that you reconnect using the same USB port you used for initial installation. A good practice is to label the ports to help get the hardware reconnected properly.

    +
    • +
  • +

    PS/2 (keyboard) devices share the port with the keyboard, i.e. the computer does not need more than one PS/2 port. A handheld scanner, credit card reader, and keyboard can all share the same PS/2 port. See illustrationClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cash drawers are connected to receipt printers, not the computer. See illustrationClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Some pole display models require a serial port. See illustrationClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Some printer models require a parallel port. See illustrationClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_receiptprntrlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_receiptprntrlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c190e7a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_receiptprntrlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + +Compatible Receipt Printers + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Receipt Printers

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Troubleshooting | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from Intuit, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Citizen CT-S300   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

Dell T200

+		 +

USB

+
+

*Epson TM88II  Setup Note for Epson PrintersClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

*Epson TM88II USB

+		 +

USB

+
+

*Epson TM88III

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

Epson TM88IV USB

+		 +

USB

+
+

Epson TM88IV PUSB

+		 +

Powered USB

+
+

*Epson TMU200

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

HP Laser Jet 4200 PCL 6

+		 +

Various

+
+

HP Laser Jet 4600 PCL 6

+		 +

Various

+
+

Star TSP100 USB   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

Star TSP600 USB   Install

+		 +

USB

+
+

Star TSP600 Parallel   Install

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

Star TSP700

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

*Not compatible with Windows Vista.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing FAQs

+

Troubleshooting a receipt printer

+

How do I set up an inkjet or laser printer?

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_tagprntrlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_tagprntrlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..26c963b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equip_tagprntrlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + +Compatible Tag and Label Printers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Compatible Tag and Label Printers

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Printing FAQs | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Hardware listed in bold type in this list is available for purchase from Intuit and is supported by Intuit Technical Support if purchased from Intuit. To purchase supported hardware directly from QuickBooks, call 1-800-926-6066 or visit us online.

+

Other hardware in the compatible hardware lists is not sold or supported by Intuit. These hardware models have been tested and found compatible with Point of Sale at the time of testing. Setup information for this hardware is provided as a convenience to Point of Sale users, but not guaranteed or supported. For assistance with hardware purchased from other sources, contact the hardware manufacturer or vendor.

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Type/Model

+		 +

 

+		 +

Port

+
+

Zebra LP2824P USB   Install | Setup NoteClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

USB

+
+

*Zebra LP2824P Parallel  Install | Setup NoteClick to display a popup topic

+		 +

Parallel or USB

+
+

**Zebra LP2844

+		 +

Parallel or USB

+
+

Cognitive Del Sol DD24   Setup

+		 +

Parallel

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Tag and label printing is also supported to sheet labels on any standard Windows laser or inkjet printer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    * Parallel port is preferred. This printer may be supplied with a parallel-to-USB adapter, which works on most computers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    **This thermal printer prints larger 4" x 3" and 4" x 6" labels and is ideal for use with Shipping Manager.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Common issues with Zebra tag printers

+

Printing tags

+

About connection ports

+

Other compatible hardware

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipement_drivers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipement_drivers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2d14fd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipement_drivers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +Drivers for Compatible Hardware + + + + + + + + + + +

Drivers for Compatible Hardware

+ +

in-help popup topic.

+ +

Software drivers for compatible hardware are included on the Point of Sale installation CD in the Drivers folder. You can browse to this folder as necessary from the Point of Sale Hardware Setup Wizard or the Windows Add Hardware Wizard to select a needed driver.

+

Look for sub-folders with the hardware name to locate the driver you need.

+

Important: You should complete the Point of Sale software installation before connecting any hardware. Hardware drivers are installed during Point of Sale installation. Connecting the hardware prior to installation may result in Windows installing drivers that cause your hardware to malfunction or not function at all.

+

If you are having difficulty getting printers or other hardware to work, make sure you have installed all pending Windows updates:  Click Start and select Control Panel > Windows Updates.  

+

Internet connection required To check for newer versions of drivers for Intuit-sold hardware visit www.quickbooks.com/support/pos/hardware.

+

 

+

Drivers for Compatible Hardware from Other Suppliers

+

The drivers included for compatible hardware were current as of the compatibility testing date. Updated drivers may be available from your hardware vendor, however, these drivers have not been tested for compatibility.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..21ba4a1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Del Sol Printer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Cognitive Del Sol Tag Printer

+

Tag Printing Overview | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+ +

Leave this as a separate, regular topic, as it is called from a context-sensitive link in the program.

+ +

Setup: Use parallel connection only; USB and serial connections are not compatible. No Windows XP-specific driver was available at the time of release; use the Windows NT/2000 driver.

+

 

+

When printing:

+
    +
  • +

    When sample tags are printed, the second tag printed is a more accurate determination of tag position than the first.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Recalibrate printer before large print jobs to avoid tag waste. Recalibration is accomplished in the Print Tags dialog displayed when printing.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Each tag design has a separate vertical value to align text. Furthermore, the vertical value for a specific tag design may vary each time you calibrate. Therefore, if you switch tag designs and calibrate for the new design, then return to using your original design, the vertical value may not necessarily be the same as before. Try to stick with one tag design or recalibrate every time you change tag designs.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If calibration is not effective, unplug the printer power cord for several seconds and then reconnect. This will reset the printer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When printing a large number of tags the print buffer may overflow, resulting in the error message "Error found while printing the document: Do you want to Retry or Cancel". IGNORE THIS MESSAGE. As the print buffer catches up the message will disappear and all tags will be printed. Printing a fewer number of tags will eliminate this message.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_addtsp600_printerlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_addtsp600_printerlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..190be9f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_addtsp600_printerlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Adding a Printer to the Windows Printer List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Adding a Printer to the Windows Printer List

+Compatible Receipt Printers | Installing Supported Equipment +

 

+

Use this procedure to add a receipt printer to your Windows printer list. The printer must be on this list before you can configure Point of Sale to use it.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Set up POS Receipt Printer page of the Setup Interview or from the Available Printers page of workstation preferences, select Add Printer.

    +
    2. +
+

The Windows Add Printer Wizard is launched.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Add Printer Wizard, click Next.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Local printer attached to this computer, clear the Automatically detect and install my Plug and Play printer check box, and then select Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select LPT1 from the port list and select Next.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    From the Manufacturer list on the left, select Star.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    From the Printers list, select your printer and then select Next.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    In the Use Existing Driver window, select Keep existing driver.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select Next several times, accepting the default settings, until you can select Finish to exit the Wizard.

    +
    8. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_calibratezebralp2824.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_calibratezebralp2824.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6524eea --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_calibratezebralp2824.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + +Common Issues with Zebra Tag Printers + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Common Issues with Zebra Tag Printers

+

Printing FAQs | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+

If you have issues printing tags or labels with your Zebra printer, we recommend you use the Hardware Troubleshooter (access from the Help menu) for assistance. The troubleshooter will help you identify and correct your specific issue.

+

Listed below for reference are some of the more common issues with the Zebra printers and suggestions for resolving them.

+

 

+

Cleaning the Printhead

+

Many printing quality issues with this printer can be resolved by cleaning the printhead with a thermal printer cleaning pen or a 90% isopropyl alcohol on a cotton swab. The thermal printer cleaning pens are specially designed to clean your printhead of even heavy abrasions. You should clean your printhead at least every five rolls of tags/labels.

+

Printhead cleaning pens are available directly from Zebra at 1-800-268-1736 or go online at www.zebra.com.
+Part Number: AN11209-1.

+

Also available is the Printhead Preventive Maintenance Kit. Part Number: 47362.

+

 

+

Status Light on the LP2824 Printer

+

The status light around the Feed button on the LP2824 printer will often indicate an error condition. Click here to view what the lights mean and how to fix the condition.

+

 

+

Calibrating the Printer

+

The printer should be calibrated any time you change label types, or anytime printing is not correctly aligned on labels. You can calibrate the printer in the Hardware Troubleshooter or by selecting the Calibrate button at the time of printing.

+

Several labels will be fed through the printer during this operation. When calibration is complete, you can roll the labels back into the printer to avoid waste.

+

 

+

Printing Jewelry Tags

+

If you are printing jewelry tags with flaps and calibration does not solve the problem, select the check box Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable functionAdjust start position for jewelry tags on the Print dialog. This setting tells Point of Sale to use extra parameters, required by some revisions of the Zebra printer, when printing jewelry tags with flaps. Likewise, if printing jewelry tags without flaps, make sure this check box is cleared (not selected).

+

If using the Zebra LP2844, a second check box Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable functionPrint Jewelry tags with flaps must be selected if the tag stock has flaps.

+

If your jewelry tag stock has wide black bars printed across the back (used to indicate where one tag ends and the next begins), select the check box labeled Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function Use black-bar indexing of jewelry tags. When using black-bar indexing, the Calibrate option is not applicable and the button will be disabled.

+

 

+

General Print Quality

+

If you have general print quality issues, such as text overlapping or running off the label, or bar codes printing too light to scan well, check your print settings to select the mode that works best for your needs (Draft Quality or High Quality) and ensure the print density (lightness/darkness) is set appropriately.

+

The High Quality printing mode gives you more control over fonts, typestyles, and alignment so the printed output looks closer to the template design yet still offers high-quality bar code printing. The Draft Quality mode prints excellent bar codes and prints slightly faster, but precise control over fonts, styles, and alignment suffers.

+

Print Dialog

+
    +
  1. +

    At the time of printing, select the Print Quality button on the Print dialog.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Print Quality dialog, choose Draft Quality or High Quality and specify a print density.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Print Test Page button.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    If satisfied, select OK and continue printing. If not, change a setting and test again.

    +
    5. +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_barcodescanner.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_barcodescanner.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..025f1da --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_barcodescanner.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Welch Allyn IT3220 or HHP Imageteam 3800 Bar Code Scanner + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Welch Allyn IT3220 or HHP Imageteam 3800 Bar Code Scanner

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Bar Code Scanners

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the bar code reader:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your bar code scanner.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

USB Connection

+

Connect the USB cable from the bar code scanner into an available USB port on your computer. No other setup is required.

+

What does a USB cable and port look like?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

PS/2 Connection

+

Both the bar code scanner and, if used, the PS/2 credit card reader, are installed between the keyboard and the computer.

+

The illustration below includes both of these pieces of hardware. If you are installing only one of these pieces, just bypass the one not used.

+

Cable 3 connects to a PS/2 (keyboard) port on your computer.

+

 

+

Barcode scanner/card reader setupPs/2 Port Illustration

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_cd7220poledisplay.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_cd7220poledisplay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f943a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_cd7220poledisplay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Partner Tech CD7220 (Serial) Pole Display + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Partner Tech CD7220 (Serial) Pole Display

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Pole Displays | FAQs

+

 

+

Use this procedure to install and configure the Partner Tech CD7220 pole display for use with Point of Sale.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the Pole Display to your Computer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Assemble the pole display (connect base, pole and display as depicted in the pole display documentation).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your pole display.

    +
    6. +
+

Example of serial port

+

If your computer does not have an available serial port, contact your computer vendor or local computer store to discuss options such as adding an additional serial port.

+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Equipment Customer pole display on the left-side preferences list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Complete settings for the pole display as described here.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Save.

    +
    6. +
+

Test your pole display when done.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If the pole display does not display information after this procedure, re-enter Workstation preferences and try a different port connection, e.g. if you initially selected com 1, change the setting to com 2 and test again. Repeat this procedure until the pole display functions correctly (or use the Windows Device Manager to determine the correct port to use).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you have an internal modem, it may be assigned to one of your serial ports, causing a conflict if the pole display is plugged into the same port. If your pole display still does not work, try plugging the pole display into another serial port. Repeat the steps above until you have identified the right combination of physical port and serial port setting that results in the pole display working.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Due to frequent hardware changes, always follow the directions provided with the hardware if it differs from this procedure.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_cipherlab8000pdt.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_cipherlab8000pdt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3678165 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_cipherlab8000pdt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a CipherLab 8000 Physical Inventory Scanner + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a CipherLab 8000 Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners

+

 

+

The physical inventory scanner is a hand-held, portable scanner that can be used to take and then upload physical inventory counts to Point of Sale.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the physical inventory scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your scanner.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To review or change your Windows COM Port Settings:

+

Both Point of Sale and your Windows operating system must be configured so that both reflect the same COM port (communications port) setting for the physical inventory scanner.

+

If your scanner doesn't work when you test it, you can use this procedure to verify or select a COM port in Windows Device Manager and then make the same selection in Point of Sale workstation preferences as described below.

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale for your physical inventory scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Physical Inventory Scanner from the left-side menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select CipherLab 8000 (USB) from the drop-down list in the Physical Inventory Scanner field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the COM Port number that matches the COM Port you assigned to the scanner in Device Manager.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Use the test button at the bottom of the window to test the device.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using the Physical Inventory Scanner

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_citizencts300_usb.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_citizencts300_usb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a1d051a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_citizencts300_usb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Citizen CT-S300 Receipt Printer (USB) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Citizen CT-S300 Receipt Printer (USB)

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Printing FAQs

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To set up your Citizen CT-S300 USB receipt printer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Take the power supply cord and place one end in the back of the receipt printer and the other into a power source.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

     Turn the printer power on.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu in Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your printer.

    +
    3. +
+

Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.

+

What does the USB cable and port look like?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

To review or change your printer preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation, and then select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select the Citizen CT-S300 for each of the documents you want to print with this printer, e.g. Sales Receipts, X/Z-Out Reports, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select an appropriate 40-column template for each of these document types.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Options from the left-side menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Make choices for the various options available.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Compatible Receipt Printers

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_idinnovcardreader.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_idinnovcardreader.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..af6cba2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_idinnovcardreader.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Installing an ID Innovations MSR PS2 Card Reader + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an ID Innovations MSR PS2 Card Reader

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Card Readers

+

 

+

Both the ID Innovations credit card reader and, if used, the Welch Allyn IT3220 handheld bar code scanner, are installed between the keyboard and the computer.

+

The illustration below includes both of these pieces of hardware. If you are installing only one of these pieces, just bypass the one not used.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the credit card reader:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your card reader.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Example PS2 keyboard connections for card reader and scanner

+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Equipment Card Reader from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select MSR PS2 Keyboard Wedge in the drop-down list of compatible card readers.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_idinnovcardreaderusb.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_idinnovcardreaderusb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..decd9aa --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_idinnovcardreaderusb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + +Installing an ID Innovations MSR USB Card Reader + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an ID Innovations MSR USB Card Reader

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Card Readers

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the credit card reader:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your card reader.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Equipment Card Reader from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select MSR (USB interface) from the drop-down list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Your card reader is ready to use with Point of Sale!

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_ingenicopinpad.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_ingenicopinpad.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5ee04e0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_ingenicopinpad.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + +Installing an Ingenico PIN Pad + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an Ingenico PIN Pad

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible PIN pads

+

 

+

This procedure is for installing Ingenico PIN pads, models 3070/2100/3010, for use with the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service.

+

To install the PIN pad:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the File menu, select Hardware Setup Wizard.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your PIN pad.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Troubleshooting Tips:

+
    +
  • +

    If Windows does not automatically detect the hardware, make sure the unit is receiving power (the screen will be active) and plugged in correctly. You can also try unplugging the USB end of the cable, waiting a moment and then plugging it back in.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If your device is not installed automatically, you can install the driver by browsing to the \Drivers\Ingenico folder on the Point of Sale CD.

    +
    • +
+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select PIN pads from the left-hand preferences list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select your model of Ingenico PIN pad:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Ingenico 3070 (with integrated card reader)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ingenico 2100 (with integrated card reader)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ingenico 3010 (without card reader)

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select the test button at the bottom of the window to verify the operation of your device.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Credit and debit card hardware

+

Merchant Service overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_inkjetlaser.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_inkjetlaser.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8293f57 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_inkjetlaser.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + +How Do I Set Up an Inkjet or Laser Printer? + + + + + + + + + + + +

How Do I Set Up an Inkjet or Laser Printer?

+

Compatible Hardware | Printing FAQs

+

 

+

Inkjet or laser printers can be used to print Point of Sale documents.

+

To set up your inkjet/laser printer:

+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      Use the manufacturers instructions or the Windows Add Printer function to install your inkjet or laser printer to Windows.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation.

      +
      3. +
    3. +

      Select Documents & Printers from the left-side menu.

      +
      4. +
    4. +

      Select your printer from the drop-down list for each document you will print with it.

      +
      5. +
    +
    2. +
+

 Also, select a print template that matches the printer (typically one of the Letter templates).

+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      Select Save.

      +
      2. +
    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_ld9000usb_poledisplay.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_ld9000usb_poledisplay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..82b41b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_ld9000usb_poledisplay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Logic Controls LD9900 (USB) Pole Display + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Logic Controls LD9900 (USB) Pole Display

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Pole Displays | FAQs

+

 

+

Use this procedure to install and configure the Logic Controls LD9900 pole display for use with Point of Sale.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the Pole Display to your Computer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Assemble the pole display (connect base, pole and display as depicted in the pole display documentation).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your pole display.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Equipment Customer Pole Display on the left-side preferences list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Complete settings for the pole display as described here.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Save.

    +
    6. +
+

Test your pole display when done.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_mscashdrawer.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_mscashdrawer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..891061a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_mscashdrawer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Installing an M-S Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an M-S Cash Drawer

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Cash Drawer Troubleshooting

+

 

+

Note: The M-S Cash Drawer sold by Intuit must be connected through a compatible Star receipt printer.  Learn more

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the cash drawer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Unlock the cash drawer.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make sure your receipt printer is installed and working. Installing supported hardware.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    When prompted by the Hardware Setup Wizard to connect your cash drawer:

    +
    7. +
+
    +
  • +

    The cash drawer connects to the receipt printer. The cash drawer's connection looks like a telephone jack. One end is already connected to the back of the cash drawer. The other end plugs into the back of the receipt printer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Follow the on-screen instructions.

    +
    • +
+

Example cash drawer and receipt printer connection

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing FAQ

+

Compatible Cash Drawers

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_tsp600.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_tsp600.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6eb8ca1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_tsp600.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Star TSP600 Printer (Parallel) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Star TSP600 Printer (Parallel)

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Print FAQs

+

 

+

Due to frequent hardware changes, always follow the directions provided with the printer if it differs from this procedure.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To set up your STAR TSP600-Series parallel printer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches because of this, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Take the power supply and place one end in the back of the receipt printer and the other into a power source. Turn the printer power on.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu .

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your printer. Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

image\equip_install_tsp600.gif

+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation, and then select available printers.

    +
    2. +
+

For TSP600: Ensure that the Star TSP613 or TSP600 Raster Printer is in the list on this page. If it is not, follow the procedure here to add it before continuing.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Click in the Printer column and select the Star TSP for each of the documents you wish to print with this printer, e.g. Sales Receipts, X/Z-Out Reports, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click in the Template column and select one of the 40-column templates for each of these document types.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

Your printer is now ready to use in Point of Sale!

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List of compatible receipt printers

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_tsp600_usb.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_tsp600_usb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f3e2e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_tsp600_usb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Star TSP100/TSP600 Receipt Printer (USB) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Star TSP100/TSP600 Receipt Printer (USB)

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Print FAQs

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

 

+

Note: If you have previously installed a Star TSP600-Series Parallel version of this printer on this workstation and no longer plan to use it, we recommend you delete it from your Windows printer list before continuing. This will help avoid printer driver conflicts. How do I?

+

To set up your Star TSP100-Series or TSP600 Series USB printer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches because of this, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Take the power supply cord and place one end in the back of the receipt printer and the other into a power source. Turn the printer power on.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your printer. Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.   What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    3. +
+

To review or change your printer preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation, and then select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select the Star TSP100 or TSP600 (as appropriate) for each of the documents you want to print with this printer, e.g. Sales Receipts, X/Z-Out Reports, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select an appropriate 40-column template for each of these document types.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Options from the left-side menu.

    +
    2. +
+

Make choices for the various options available.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Compatible Receipt Printers

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_zebralp2824parallel.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_zebralp2824parallel.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2df4b56 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_zebralp2824parallel.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Zebra LP2824 Tag Printer (Parallel) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Zebra LP2824 Tag Printer (Parallel)

+

Printing FAQs | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+

This procedure is for installing the tag printer using a parallel printer cable and assumes you have already installed Point of Sale on the computer to which you are adding the printer. Click here for instructions to install the USB model of this printer.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To connect and install the printer to your computer:

+
    +
  1. +

    To install tags in the printer, open the printer cover and follow the instructions below. When done, close the cover.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Jewelry tagsunroll so that tags are face up.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Hang Tagsunroll so that tag stock feeds from bottom of roll (if nothing prints on the tags, then tag stock may be inserted into the printer upside down).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Labelsunroll so that tags are face up. Sample labels are included in the box.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches because of this, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Plug the printer power cord into the back of the tag printer and into an outlet. Do not turn on the printer yet.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your tag printer. Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.  

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Example of a parallel port

+

 

+

Read setup notesClick to display a popup topic for this printer.

+

 

+

To review or change your printer setup in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    In point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Available Printers on the left hand menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Confirm that the Zebra LP 2824 is listed on this page.

    +
    4. +
+

If the printer is not listed, select Add Printer and follow the Add Printer wizard to install it before continuing. Note: You may need your Point of Sale installation CD to install the printer driver. Learn more

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Documents & Printers from the left hand menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    In the Printer column, select the Zebra LP 2824 from the drop-down list for Inventory Tags, Markdown Tags, and Customer Labels as appropriate.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select the appropriate Zebra tag template to match the tag stock you have purchased for each.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

Your printer is now ready to use with Point of Sale!

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_zebralp2824usb.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_zebralp2824usb.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bd9a209 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_install_zebralp2824usb.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Zebra LP2824 Tag Printer (USB) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Zebra LP2824 Tag Printer (USB)

+

Print FAQs | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+

This procedure to assumes you have already installed Point of Sale on the computer to which you adding the USB printer. View instructions for a parallel printer

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

 

+

If your operating system is:

+

Windows XP/2000: Use the procedure below to install the USB printer.

+

Windows 2003 Server: Before installing this printer, you must set your Disallow installation of printers using kernel-mode drivers policy to Disabled. See these special instructions here. When finished, return here and start with Step 1 in the procedure below.

+

To connect and install the printer to your computer:

+
    +
  1. +

    To install tags in the printer, open the printer cover and follow the instructions below. When done, close the cover.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Jewelry tagsunroll so that tags are face up.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Hang Tagsunroll so that tag stock feeds from bottom of roll (if nothing prints on the tags, then tag stock may be inserted into the printer upside down).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Labelsunroll so that tags are face up. Sample labels are included in the box.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive. If the installation wizard launches because of this, select No to cancel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Plug the printer power cord into the back of the tag printer and into an outlet. Do not turn on the printer yet.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your tag printer. Do not connect your hardware until instructed to do so.   What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Read setup notesClick to display a popup topic for this printer.

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start the Point of Sale program.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Preferences Workstation, and then select Documents & Printers from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make the following selections:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select the Zebra LP 2824 for Inventory Tags, Markdown Tags, and Customer Labels as appropriate.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select an appropriate Zebra tag template to match the tag stock you have purchased for each.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..833a964 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + +Installing Supported POS Hardware + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install Supported POS Hardware

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Hardware | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

Select from the list below to view installation and setup information for Intuit-sold and supported POS hardware.

+

If you have purchased compatible hardware from another source, follow the installation instructions provided with the hardware.

+

For the most current Point of Sale hardware drivers and installation instructions, click here.

+

Which piece of hardware are you installing?

+

CipherLab 8000 physical inventory scanner

+

Citizen CT-S300 Receipt Printer (USB)

+

ID Innovations MSR card reader (PS/2)

+

ID Innovations MSR card reader (USB)

+

Ingenico 2100/3010/3070 PIN pads

+

Logic Controls LD9900 pole display (USB)

+

Magtek 21040110 MSR card reader (USB)

+

Metrologic SP5500 Optimus S Physical Inventory Scanner (USB)

+

VMMF VAL-u Line Cash Drawer

+

M-S CF-Media cash drawer

+

Partner Tech CD7220 pole display (serial)

+

Star TSP100 or TSP600 receipt printer (USB)

+

Star TSP600 receipt printer (parallel)

+

Welch Allyn IT3220 or HHP Imageteam 3800 handheld bar code scanner

+

Zebra LP2824P tag printer (parallel)

+

Zebra LP2824P tag printer (USB)

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Drivers for Hardware Click to display a popup topic

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_magtek21040110USB.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_magtek21040110USB.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..21d01c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_magtek21040110USB.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Installing a Magtek 21040110 USB Card Reader + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Magtek 21040110 USB Card Reader

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Card Readers

+

To install this card reader:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and set up your card reader.  What does a USB cable and port look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Card Reader from the preferences menu on the left.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select MSR (USB interface) from the drop-down list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Your card reader is ready to use with Point of Sale!

+

 

+

Note:

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_metrologicoptimusSP5500.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_metrologicoptimusSP5500.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..40b1e01 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_metrologicoptimusSP5500.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Installing a Metrologic SP5500 Optimus S Physical Inventory Scanner + + + + + + + + + + +

Install a Metrologic SP5500 Optimus S Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

This physical inventory scanner is a hand-held, portable scanner that can be used to take and then upload physical inventory counts to Point of Sale.

+

Note: This scanner uses a Lithium-ion battery. The scanner will display the battery status when inserted into the cradle. We recommend you fully charge the battery by leaving the scanner inserted in the cradle with the cradle plugged into a power source before beginning.

+

 

+

To install the physical inventory scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to connect and setup your scanner.  What does the USB cable look like?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

To review or change your Windows COM Port Settings:

+

Both Point of Sale and your Windows operating system must be configured so that both reflect the same COM port (communications port) setting for the physical inventory scanner.

+

If your scanner doesn't work when you test it, you can use this procedure to verify or select a COM port in Windows Device Manager and then make the same selection in Point of Sale workstation preferences as described below.

+

To review or change your preferences in Point of Sale for your scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Point of Sale, select Preferences Workstation from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Physical Inventory Scanner from the left-side menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Metrologic SP5500 Optimus S (USB) from the drop-down list in the Physical Inventory Scanner field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the COM Port number that matches the COM Port you assigned to the scanner in Device Manager.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Use the test button at the bottom of the window to test the device.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using the scanner for a physical inventory

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_valuline_cashdrawer.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_valuline_cashdrawer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1a12ea6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_installing_valuline_cashdrawer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Installing an MMF VAL-u Line Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install an MMF VAL-u Line Cash Drawer

+

Hardware Setup Wizard | Cash Drawer Troubleshooting

+

 

+

The use of a cash drawer requires a receipt printer through which the cash drawer is connected to the computer.

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware workstation preferences pages.

+

To install the cash drawer:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the Point of Sale installation disk is in your CD-ROM drive. (Cancel the Installation Wizard if it launches.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Unlock the cash drawer.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Launch Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make sure your receipt printer is installed and working. Installing supported hardware.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Hardware Setup Wizard from the File menu.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    When prompted by the Hardware Setup Wizard to connect your cash drawer:

    +
    7. +
+
    +
  • +

    Use only the manufacturer's cable included with the cash drawer. Using any other cable, including phone cords, may result in irreparable damage to your receipt printer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The cash drawer cable is included in a plastic bag with the cash drawer. Connect one end of the cable to the cash drawer. Plug the other end into the receipt printer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Follow the on-screen instructions.

    +
    • +
+

Example cash drawer and receipt printer connection

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Printing FAQ

+

Compatible Cash Drawers

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_setup_notes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_setup_notes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8710938 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/equipment_setup_notes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +Hardware Setup Notes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware Setup Notes

+

Installing Supported Hardware | Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Setup notes are available for the following compatible hardware.

+

What type of hardware are you setting up?

+

Cash drawer

+

Star TSP 700 receipt printer

+

Epson receipt printer

+

Symbol LS1902 PS/2 bar code scanner

+

Zebra LP2824 tag printer

+

Partner Tech pole displays

+

Cognitive Del Sol tag printer

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

About connection ports

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_140306_salestaxsetup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_140306_salestaxsetup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9627932 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_140306_salestaxsetup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + + +Error 140306: Sales Tax Not Set Up in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Error 140306: Sales Tax Not Set Up in QuickBooks

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support Resources Support

+

Why did I get this message?

+

Sales tax has been collected on sales receipts made in Point of Sale. However, the collection of sales tax is turned off in your QuickBooks financial software. The exchange of these receipts cannot be completed until sales tax is turned on in QuickBooks.

+

Solution

+

Turn on sales tax in QuickBooks and then run Financial Exchange again. How do I?

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_150018_creditcard_processing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_150018_creditcard_processing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1af6f5a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_150018_creditcard_processing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + +Error 150018: Unable to Process Credit Cards + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error 150018: Unable to Process Credit Cards

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support

+

Why did I get this message?

+

A missing or corrupted file is preventing Point of Sale from processing credit cards.

+

Solution

+

Please contact Customer Support at 800-558-9558 and reference Error Message # 150018. Our agents will assist you in resolving this problem.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_181021_couldnotcreatedata.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_181021_couldnotcreatedata.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc61c53 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_181021_couldnotcreatedata.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + +Error 181021: Could Not Create Company Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error 181021: Could Not Create Company Data

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support

+

Why did I get this message?

+

Point of Sale could not create your company data file. The most likely cause is a firewall blocking access to the data. Try the solutions below, one at a time, until the operation can be completed.

+

 

+

Important: Be sure you are logged on to your computer with Windows Administrator rights. Some firewall messages/settings and some Windows settings can be viewed/edited only by users with Administrator rights.

+

Possible Causes and Solutions for this Error

+

Cause: You have a personal firewall installed that is blocking access.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    If you are using the firewall integrated with Windows XP, Point of Sale can automatically configure it for you. Restart Point of Sale, and when prompted about the firewall, select Yes to allow automatic configuration.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are using another firewall application, make sure you have the latest updates to the software. Point of Sale is registered with several leading firewall makers, meaning that with the latest updates the firewall will recognize Point of Sale and allow it to run without warnings. You can check for updates to most firewalls by right-clicking the program icon in your task bar and selecting the option to check for updates.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you receive a firewall message saying that Point of Sale (or the applications: QBUpdate, QBDBMgrN, or Adaptive Server Anywhere Network Server) are trying to access the Internet, answer Yes, allow always to allow the connection. This should prevent this problem in the future.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the above suggestions don't resolve the problem, you may have to manually configure your firewall.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Cause: The name entered for your company data is already in use on this computer or on your network.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Try again, entering a unique name for the new company data, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Open the existing company data of the same name by selecting company data open from the file menu and then selecting or browsing to the file.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Cause: TCP/IP Protocol is not enabled on your computer or required ports are being filtered.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Be sure TCP/IP Protocol is enabled on your computer and the necessary ports are not filtered. How do I?

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Cause: The required database server applications are not running. This is unlikely, unless you have shut down the QBPOSDBService.exe, QBDBMgr.exe, or QBDBMgrN.exe applications via the Windows Task Manager.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Restart Point of Sale and try again. Restarting Point of Sale restarts these necessary applications.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Company data connection issues

+

Connection, performance, and network troubleshooting

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_cannot_connect_qbfs.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_cannot_connect_qbfs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4841e4f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_cannot_connect_qbfs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +Error: Cannot Connect to QuickBooks Financial Software + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error: Cannot Connect to QuickBooks Financial Software

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support | Integration Requirements

+

Why did I get this message?

+

Point of Sale could not connect to your QuickBooks financial software company file to complete the financial exchange. If a specific problem and solution is listed in the error message, follow the procedure given. Otherwise, try the solutions below, one at a time, until the connection is successful.

+

Possible Problems and Solutions for this Error

+

Problem: Your QuickBooks financial software is not running and Point of Sale does not have permission to login when QuickBooks is closed.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Start your QuickBooks financial software and open your company file, and then try again,

    +
    • +
+

Or

+
    +
  • +

    Set the Integrated Application preferences in QuickBooks to allow Point of Sale to login automatically even when QuickBooks is not running. How do I?

    +
    • +
+

Problem: QuickBooks is open, but a company file other than the one specified in Point of Sale company preferences is open.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Close the QuickBooks company file that is open and then open the file that is specified in Point of Sale company preferences.

    +
    • +
+

Problem: The Preferences window or another dialog is open in QuickBooks, blocking the connection.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Close the preferences window or other open dialog in QuickBooks and try again.

    +
    • +
+

Problem: The general Integrated Application preference in your QuickBooks financial software is blocking access to all other applications, including Point of Sale.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    In your QuickBooks Integrated Application preferences, clear the check box labeled Dont allow any application to access this company file. How do I?

    +
    • +
+

Problem: The QuickBooks financial company file or location specified in Point of Sale company preferences is not valid. This may apply if you have renamed, deleted, or moved your financial company file.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Confirm or change the company file specified in Point of Sale company preferences. How do I?

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange overview

+

End of Day Financial Exchange

+

QuickBooks Installation Options

+

Using the remote data sharing option (Advanced Users)

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_dbservices.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_dbservices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..10929db --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_dbservices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + + +Error: Unable to Start the Point of Sale Database or Services + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error: Unable to Start the Point of Sale Database or Services

+

Troubleshooting | Technical Support

+

 

+

This topic covers some of the more advanced reasons that the database or licensing services necessary to run Point of Sale could not be started.

+

Note: If you have just upgraded your computer to the Microsoft Windows Vista operating system, the cause and solution might differ from those explained below. Click here for information in this case. The information below does apply to Vista if this error occurs at times other than immediately after installing Vista.

+

 

+

Some of the advanced settings described below should be changed by qualified users only. Refer to your Windows help system or consult a qualified computer consultant if you need assistance with these settings. Access to these settings might be restricted by your Windows user rights.

+

 

+

Possible Database Problems and Solutions

+

 

+

Problem: The QBPOS Database Manager or Entitlement Client (licensing) service has been stopped or disabled as a service on this computer.

+

Solution:  

+
    +
  • +

    If on Windows XP: Restart your Point of Sale Server Workstation computer. In most cases this will resolve the issue.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If restarting the computer doesn't work or if on Windows Vista: Manually restart the service using this procedure:

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      On the Server Workstation, sign on to Windows as a user with Administrator rights.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      From the Windows Start menu, select Control Panel > Administrative Tools > Services.

      +
      3. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Windows Vista Tip: Change Control Panel to Classic View to help locate this option.

      +
      • +
    +
      +
    1. +

      Right-click the QBPOS Database Manager vn service and select Properties (n = Point of Sale version).

      +
      2. +
    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +
      +
    1. +

      Ensure that the Startup Type is set to "Automatic" and then in the Service Status section, click Start.

      +
      2. +
    +
      +
    • +

      Windows Vista users only: Select the Logon tab, and make sure the check box for Local System account is selected.

      +
      • +
    +
      +
    1. +

      Click Apply.

      +
      2. +
    2. +

      Repeat Steps 3-5 for the Intuit Entitlement Service vn service (n = Entitlement Service version, may differ from your Point of Sale version).

      +
      3. +
    3. +

      Select OK.

      +
      4. +
    4. +

      Windows Vista Users: Restart your computer

      +
      5. +
    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Problem: The Windows user account for "QBPOSDBSrvUser" has been disabled or its user rights limited. This user account must exist and rights must be equal to the default Users Group.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Check your Windows User Accounts to be sure this user is listed, has not been disabled, and that its rights have not been limited.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Problem: TCP/IP protocol is not installed on the computer and/or network.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    Ensure that each computer has TCP/IP protocol installed. For network installations, ensure that TCP/IP is assigned to the network connection. Consult with a qualified computer network specialist for help, if necessary.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Problem: Some of the necessary files are missing or have been damaged.

+

Solution:

+
    +
  • +

    If you have recently deleted any files from the Point of Sale installation folder or the Intuit common files folder, check your Windows Recycle Bin for these files and restore them. If the files are not available to be restored, reinstall the Point of Sale software from your original CD. Note: If you have previously applied updates to Point of Sale, check for and download the latest update files after reinstalling.

    +
    • +
+

If the above steps do not correct this problem, use the Point of Sale Help & Support Resources.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_generalinstructions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_generalinstructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e9b6827 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_generalinstructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Handling Error Messages + + + + + + + + + + + +

Handling Error Messages

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support

+

 

+

Point of Sale displays a variety of messages to alert you to potential issues related to your current activity. These messages will fall into one of the following categories:

+

image\info_icon_small.gif Information: Provides tips or information that may be beneficial for you to know, but generally do not require immediate action.

+

image\question_icon_small.gif Question: A decision or response from you is necessary to proceed.

+

image\warning_icon_small.gif Problem: These messages are often presented in a problem/solution format. Complete the steps outlined in the solution to correct the problem and allow the activity to be completed.

+

image\seriouserror_icon_small.gif Warning: Serious condition that requires immediate action to prevent loss of data.

+

 

+

Read the message carefully and follow any instructions provided.

+

Example:

+

image\error_message5.gif

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_no_internet_connection.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_no_internet_connection.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b79faf4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/error_no_internet_connection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Error: No Internet Connection Present + + + + + + + + + + + +

Error: No Internet Connection Present

+

Troubleshooting | Help & Support

+

Why did I get this message?

+

The selected action requires an Internet connection and no Internet connection was detected or could be established.

+

Possible Problems and Solutions for this Error

+

Problem: Your Internet connection is not active.

+

Solutions:

+
    +
  • +

    Try connecting to the Internet outside of Point of Sale. If you cannot connect, use the Windows Network Connections manager (available from Control Panel) to configure and test your Internet connection. Contact your Internet Service Provider for assistance, if necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Check your phone, modem, or cable connections to be sure they are tight and working.

    +
    • +
+

Problem: Point of Sale is not configured to use your existing Internet connection.

+

Solution:

+

Follow these steps to fix this problem:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Workstation from the Point of Sale File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Automatic Update from the preferences list on the left side of the window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Internet Connection Setup button.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the choice labeled Use my computers Internet Connection settings to establish a connection when this application accesses the Internet.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Next and then Done to finish.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save to exit Workstation preferences.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Try the original task in Point of Sale again.

    +
    8. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/export_datawizard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/export_datawizard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..41726ed --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/export_datawizard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,251 @@ + + + + + + +Export Point of Sale List Data + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Export Point of Sale List Data

+

Office Integration Overview | Import Data | Export Reports

+

 

+

Note: This topic may refer to data types not applicable to your Point of Sale installation. For example, Point of Sale Free users cannot export customer, vendor, or item quantity/cost information and Basic users cannot export item pictures.
+
+Note: Excel must be installed on the workstation using this option.

+

 

+

The Data Export Wizard walks you through exporting list data to an Excel spreadsheet, where you can then utilize Excel's features to further manipulate the data. You can choose to export all records in a list, all records currently displayed in a filtered list, or only selected records.

+

Export templates determine the data fields included in the export and how that data appears in columns in Excel. A default template is provided for each record type. You can customize the default templates or create and save new ones to meet your needs.

+

What would you like help with?

+

Export records directly from a list (customers, vendors, items, departments, employees) Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Export customers from the Customer Center Click to expand/collapse topic (provides additional options for filtering by customer sales history)

+ +

Export item pictures

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can also select Utilities Export from the File menu without displaying a list first. You can choose to export any of your lists or your item pictures.    However, the entire list is always exported with this selection.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Excel Worksheet Display LimitClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customer Center

+

E-mail Marketing from Point of Sale

+

Write Letters from Point of Sale

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/export_managetemplates.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/export_managetemplates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bcbb0e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/export_managetemplates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage Export Templates + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Export Templates

+

Export Data | Export Reports | Import Data

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Export Templates dialog, accessed from the Export Data Wizard.

+

 

+

Use this window to review or change the way in which list data is sent to Excel when exporting. You can edit the default export template or create and save any number of custom templates for each data type.

+

+

To review or customize a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select an existing template from the drop-down list at the top of the window. If you are creating a new template, you can select any existing template as the starting point.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the list of available data fields:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select or clear the check box next to a field to include or exclude it from the export respectively.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the Select All and Unselect All buttons to quickly select or clear the checkboxes for all fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select a field and then use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to rearrange the order of fields. The field order, top to bottom, will correspond to the left to right order on the Excel spreadsheet.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save to save your template changes with the same name or Save As to enter and save with a new name.

    +
    2. +
+

To delete a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the template from the drop-down list at the top of the window.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields01.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7aa04c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + + + +Department Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Department Fields

+

Department Overview | Adding a Department

+

 

+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each department field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Dept Code

+		 +

Optional: Enter a 1-3 character code for use in listing a department on an item record and printing on price tags.

+
+

Dept Name

+		 +

Required: Enter a descriptive name for the department to assist in easy identification. This name helps you identify the department on reports and in lists. Read about planning your departments.

+
+

Margin%

+		 +

Enter a default margin percentage for use with a pricing formula. If you do not wish Point of Sale to calculate prices for new items as they are added to inventory, leave this field and the Markup% field at 0. Default = 0%.

+
+

Markup%

+		 +

Markup percentage is an alternate way to display your desired profit margin, by marking up from item cost. Entering either a margin or a markup will display an automatic calculation in the other field. Default = 0%.

+

My markup value sometimes changes right after I enter it. Why?Click to display a popup topic

+
+

[Tax Code]

+		 +

Suggested as the default department tax code specified in company preferences. Select another tax code from the drop-down list, as needed. When a new item is added to inventory with this department code, the tax code specified here is suggested for the item.

+
+

Data field overview

+

Department overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1232e19 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,493 @@ + + + + + + + + +Item Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Inventory Overview | Program Capacities

+

 

+

Refer to the tables below for descriptions of available item fields.

+

Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

* indicates a required field.

+

What would you like more information about?

+

Item Description/Lookup Fields

+

Price/Cost and Tax Fields

+

Quantity Fields

+

Other Item Fields

+

Create Custom Item Fields

+

Customize Item List Columns

+

 

+

Item Description/Lookup Information

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Type*

+		 +

Used to designate the type of item: Default is Inventory. Select a different type from the drop-down list, as necessary.

+
+

Department*

+		 +

Department to which the item belongs. Required field for all items. To access your department list, press (<F4>) from the field. (Pro) Must be the same for all members of a style.

+
+

Vendor

+		 +

The primary vendor from whom you purchase the item. To search for or look up a vendor, press (<F4>) from the Vendor field.

+

(Pro)  Learn about using multiple item vendors.

+
+

Item Name*

+

( Description 1 for some upgraders)

+		 +

The principal item description field. Printed on sales receipts. Required field. Label can be customized.

+

(Pro) Must be the same for all members of a style.

+
+

Item Description

+

(Description 2 for some upgraders)

+		 +

Secondary, long description field used to record additional information. Also can be used to record additional information while making a sales receipt. Label can be customized.

+
+

Attribute

+		 +

A field used to describe an item characteristic, typically color, pattern, material, or a second size. 1 to 12 characters. Label can be customized.

+
+

Size

+		 +

The size of an item; 1 to 12 characters. This field can also be used to describe a second item attribute other than size if desired. Label can be customized.

+
+

[Item #]

+		 +

Unique number that identifies each item; corresponds to the inventory row number. Suggested by the program, but editable. Used to print item bar codes on tags and to list items on documents. Numbers greater than 99,999 not recommended as the resulting bar code would not fit on some price tags. This field supports numerical values only. If you need to enter an identifier that includes letters, use the Alternate Lookup field (described below).

+

You can have suggested numbering sequence restart from your entry in a company preference.

+
+

UPC

+		 +

Universal Product Code: The item's unique UPC/EAN identifier. Once entered, can be used to scan vendor-tagged merchandise to list on documents. This field is normally 13 characters. If a shorter number is entered, Point of Sale uses an appropriate algorithm to lengthen the entry to fill the 13-character field. Learn more.

+

(Pro) If multiple vendors or multiple units of measure are being used for an item, each can be assigned a unique UPC.

+
+

Tag

+		 +

User-defined group tag assigned to items to facilitate use of the Quick Pick feature for adding items to a document.

+
+

Alternate Lookup (ALU)

+		 +

A user-defined identifier that can be used to look up items. This field can contain text descriptions, catalog numbers, etc. Duplicate Alternate Lookups are not allowed.

+

Do not duplicate the Item # or UPC in this field. Inefficiencies in item lookups would result.

+

(Pro) If multiple vendors or multiple units of measure are being used for an item, each can be assigned a unique alternate lookup.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Price/Cost and Tax Fields

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Reg Price

+		 +

The regular price for which you sell the item.  Calculated by Point of Sale on new items if you are using a department pricing formula. Markdown price levels, if used, are calculated from this price.

+
+

[Avg Unit Cost]

+		 +

The average unit cost of the on-hand units of the item; updated by receiving vouchers, adjustment memos, or manually. If you manually edit this field, Point of Sale creates an adjustment memo to send to QuickBooks Desktop. See price and cost for more information.

+
+

[Order Cost]

+		 +

The current cost of an item charged by your vendor. The order cost is suggested on purchase orders and vouchers and automatically updated when a voucher is updated with a new item cost.

+

(Pro) If multiple vendors are being used for an item, each can be assigned a unique order cost.

+
+

MSRP

+		 +

Manufacturers Suggest Retail Price. Optional reference price that is printed on most price tags if entered. Leave blank if you do not want the MSRP printed on tags.

+
+

[Margin%]

+		 +

The profit expressed as a percentage of the price. If defined in a department record, is auto-filled and used to calculate the regular price of new items. Editable. Manually editing the margin in inventory automatically causes your item prices and the Markup % to be recalculated. Learn more

+

Margin % = (Price Cost)/Price x 100

+
+

[Markup%]

+		 +

The item profit expressed as a percentage markup over the cost. Works in the same manner as Margin %. Making an entry in this field causes Point of Sale to recalculate the item prices and margin. Learn more

+
+

[Price Levels 1-4]

+		 +

Optional item price levels, each marked down from your regular price. Used to offer different prices to different customer groups (employee, wholesale, etc.) or for other purposes, such as for a discounted sale. You define price level names and markdown percentages in company preferences and these names will be displayed in the item record and item list.

+

Once defined, price level prices are automatically updated anytime your regular price changes, or can be manually edited as needed. Learn more

+
+

[Tax]

+		 +

Tax code name: A drop-down list containing each of the tax code names defined in company preferences. By default, each new item is assigned a default tax code as specified for the associated department. Edit by selecting a different tax code as necessary. Learn more

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Quantity Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[On-Hand Qty]

+		 +

On-hand Quantity: The quantity of an item on hand at this store. Automatically updated each time an item is received, sold, transferred, or adjusted on a memo. A manual entry in this field results in an adjustment memo being created and sent to QuickBooks Desktop. Decimal quantity entries are acceptable.

+
+

Reorder Point

+		 +

User-specified company quantity at which an item should be reordered. When the combined on-order and on-hand quantity is at or below this level, the item is added to the reorder items reminder list.

+

(Pro) In the case of assembly items, indicates the point at which more should be rebuilt.

+
+

Doc Qty

+		 +

Document Quantity. Used to enter the quantity of an item to be listed on a document. Displayed only when accessing the item list from a document to select items. Enter the item quantity you want to list on the document.

+

(Pro) You can also switch to Style View and enter document quantities in the style item grid cells when coming to inventory from a document.

+
+

[On Order]

+		 +

Quantity of the item listed on open purchase orders and not yet received. Displayed in item list.

+

(Pro) Also visible by selecting Available from the Quantities area of the item form.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

[Quantity Available] (Pro)

+		 +

Quantity available for immediate sale. Calculated by subtracting the quantity committed on active customer orders from the current on-hand quantity. Learn more

+
+

BackOrd Qty (Pro)

+

 

+		 +

Quantity of this item needed for active customer orders.

+
+

[Qty] in Assembly or Group (Pro)

+		 +

In Assembly/Group item grid. Specifies the quantity of an item included in an assembly or group item.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

[Company Total]

+

[Cmp Qty] (Pro)

+		 +

Total on-hand quantity for the entire company (all stores). Select View All in the Quantity area of the item form to view. Called Cmp Qty in your item list.

+
+

[Store On-Hand Quantities]  (Pro)

+		 +

On-hand quantity for each store; designated by your assigned store codes. Select Available from the Quantities area of the item form to view. Also available in the Item Information window (<F5>) from a receipt and your inventory item list.

+
+

[Quantities for Store #]  (Pro)

+		 +

(Style View) Drop-down list of store locations. Select a store or All Locations to view quantities at the store or for the company for each style item.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Other Item Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Last Received]

+		 +

The most recent date this item was received.

+
+

Print Tags

+		 +

Check box. Select to specify that you want to print price tags for the item. If you clear the check box, tags will not be printed for the item even if it is listed in a group of items for which you are printing tags. Default is selected.

+
+

[Rating]

+		 +

Graphical indicator of item performance over time, based on user-defined time period and familiar five-star system. Learn more

+
+

[Trend]

+		 +

Graphical representation of item performance in user-defined current period compared to prior period. Learn more

+
+

Unorderable

+		 +

Check box. Select to have the items reorder point temporarily ignored and to be alerted if the item is listed on a purchase order or receiving voucher. This option can used to remove seasonal merchandise from your reorder reminders and reports.

+
+

QuickBooks Accounts

+

[COGS] [Income]

+

[Asset]

+		 +

Item mappings to QuickBooks cost of goods sold, income, and asset accounts. Defaulted to the item accounts specified in company preferences, but can be edited for individual items by selecting a different account from the drop-down list. Learn more

+
+

Unit of Measure

+		 +

Display field that can be used to indicate the measurement or quantity units by which the item is sold, such as each, inch, gallon, case, etc. Used to filter and sort the item list and reports. Select a unit from the drop-down list or select Add New to create and use a new unit.

+

Units of measure can be managed (added, deleted, reordered) in company preferences.

+

(Pro) Read Using Multiple Units of Measure and see additional fields below if you purchase and sell items in more than one unit size.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Base Unit of Measure (Pro)

+		 +

When using multiple units of measure, the smallest quantity by which an item is sold or purchased.

+
+

[Earn Commission] (Pro)

+		 +

Check box. Select to identify Items that qualify for payment of employee commissions. Default is checked (eligible). Clear the check box if employees are not to be paid commissions on the sale of the item, Learn more

+
+

Use Serial #  (Pro)

+		 +

Check box. Select to be prompted to enter a serial number when the item is listed on documents.

+
+

Custom Fields 1-5 (Pro)

+		 +

Custom item fields can be used to enter any other item information you need to track. Once defined, the fields can be used to filter lists and reports, and can be added to your printed documents using Print Designer.  Learn more

+
+

[Open Purchase Orders] (Pro)

+		 +

List of open purchase orders for the item and the total quantity on order. Select Available from the Quantities area of the item form to view.

+
+

Select a Style Template (Pro)

+		 +

Select a pre-defined attribute/size template from the drop-down list to apply it to the style grid or select Add New to create a new template. Learn more.

+
+

Vendors Alternate 2 -5 (Pro)

+		 +

(More Info section) Fields for entering one preferred and up to four alternate vendors for an item. Each vendor can have a unique UPC, Alternate Lookup, and order cost.

+
+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb7920f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + + +Vendor Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Vendor Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Vendors Overview | Program Capacities

+
+

Basic

+
+

This table lists the name and use of each vendor field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale. Fields marked with a * are required fields.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can customize the columns to add them.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Vendor Code

+		 +

Optional alphanumeric code, up to 3 characters, identifying the vendor. This code is printed on price tags and can be used to lookup and list the vendor on another record or document.

+
+

Company*

+		 +

Vendor company name. Required.

+
+

Contact and Address Fields

+		 +

Vendor contact name(s), address, and phone numbers.

+
+

Inactive

+		 +

Select this check box to hide unused vendors from the active vendor list and to stop exchanging the vendors information with QuickBooks Desktop Financial software. Learn more.

+
+

Vendor Notes

+		 +

Optional notes, such as shipping lead time, FOB point, etc.

+
+

Account #

+		 +

Your account number with the vendor. This number is printed on purchase orders and receiving vouchers that are created for the vendor.

+
+

Terms

+		 +

Default payment terms for the vendor. These terms are suggested on purchase orders and receiving vouchers made for the vendor. Shared with QuickBooks Desktop, if integrated. Learn more.

+
+

E-mail

+		 +

The vendors e-mail address. Entering an e-mail address allows you to send an e-mail from the vendor record and to e-mail documents, such as purchase orders, from within Point of Sale.

+
+

Vendor Website

+		 +

Record the vendors web address URL. Click Go to Web to launch your browser and view the site. Internet connection required.

+
+

Custom Fields (Pro)

+		 +

Define and use up to seven custom fields to track information not included in the basic fields. Once defined, these fields can be used to filter your vendor list and reports, and can be added to customized print templates (such as purchase orders and receiving vouchers).

+
+

QB Status

+

(QuickBooks Desktop financial software users only)

+		 +

Vendor list only. Displays the Financial Exchange status of the record: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop), Completed (sent to QuickBooks Desktop), or Error (attempting to send QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+ +

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields04.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5a44e6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,471 @@ + + + + + + + +Receipt Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Receipt Fields

+

Sales Overview | Data Field Overview | Program Capacities

+

 

+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each receipt field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Promo Code

+		 +

Used to record an optional promotional note on a receipt. Sales reports can be filtered by this field. You can also set your company preferences to require an entry in this field.

+

For example, if you are having a mail promotion to celebrate your business anniversary, you could record an entry of Anniv for all sales made during the promotion. Later, you could run a sales report, filtered for the Anniv entry in the Promo Code field to evaluate the effectiveness of the promotion.

+
+

[Store]  (Pro)

+		 +

The store from whose inventory the merchandise is being sold/returned. At Headquarters, can be changed to create a receipt for any store. At remote stores, this field defaults to the local store and cannot be changed.

+
+

[Date]

+		 +

Defaults to today's date; but is editable subject to security rights.  Never change your computer's system date for this purpose; doing so could result in lost data!

+
+

[Cashier]

+		 +

If security is used, the Cashier field is auto-filled with the name of the logged-in user and cannot be changed. If not using security, select a name from the drop-down list of defined employees.

+

(Pro) The cashier is the employee making the receipt and may be different than the sales Associate.

+
+

[Associate]

+

 (Pro)

+		 +

(Optional Field) Used to identify the employee to be paid a commission on the sale.

+

Above the item list: Suggested as the logged in user (if security used) but can be edited to identify the sales associate for the receipt. If you change the associate after listing items, you are asked if you want to assign this associate to the items already listed.

+

In the receipt item list or Item Information window: Suggested as the same employee listed at the top of the form, but editable item-by-item. This allows commissions to be paid to multiple employees on a single receipt.

+

Exception: If the receipt was initiated from a customer order to sell the ordered items, the Associate field is populated with the associate recorded on the order.

+

Learn more.

+
+

Item Fields

+		 +

These fields pertain to individual items being sold. See also item fields for a description of common item fields that may be available on receipts.

+
+

[Item Name]
+[Attribute]
+[Size]

+		 +

Item description fields; suggested from item record in inventory. Can be edited for individual sales if necessary.

+
+

[Qty]

+		 +

Sales Quantity: Suggested as 1. Directly edit or use the Qty + and Qty buttons to change.

+
+

[Price]

+		 +

Item unit sale price at the active price level. The default active price level is set in company preferences. Editable.

+
+

[Ext Price]

+		 +

Extended item price: Qty x Price. If you sell items costing a fraction of a cent, you can list a quantity and enter an extended price and Point of Sale will calculate and display the unit price.

+
+

[Original Price]

+		 +

Item price at the active price level, from inventory. Does not change if Price field edited. Not editable.

+
+

[Custom Price Levels]

+		 +

Item price at each of your price levels, from inventory. Your custom price level names displayed.

+
+

Item Discount Fields

+

 

+		 +

Entering a discount percent, amount, or changing the item price causes other discount fields to be auto-calculated. See giving discounts for more information.

+
+

Discount %

+		 +

Item discount expressed as a percentage of the active price.

+
+

Unit Discount

+		 +

Discount amount per item unit being sold.

+
+

Ext Discount

+		 +

Extended item discount. Qty X Unit Discount.

+
+

Discount Reason

+		 +

Can be used to filter sales reports. For manual item discounts, select from the discount reasons predefined in company preferences.

+

(Pro)  For Price Manager discounts or customer rewards, is auto-filled with reason from the applicable area.

+
+

[Tax Code]

+		 +

Suggested as the tax code assigned to the item in inventory. Select a different tax code to change the tax collected on this sale. Learn more about changing tax at time of sale.

+
+

[Tax %]

+		 +

Tax percentage applied to the item. If multiple rates apply, this field is blank.

+
+

[Tax]

+		 +

Tax amount collected per item unit.

+
+

[Ext Tax]

+		 +

Extended tax on item. Qty x Tax.

+
+

[Cost]

+		 +

Average unit cost of the item as recorded in inventory. Not editable.

+
+

[Receipt Cost]

+		 +

Extended cost of receipt item. Qty x Average Unit Cost. Not editable.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]

+		 +

Used to indicate the measurement or quantity by which the item is sold. From inventory, such as case, each, lb., yard, etc. Learn more.

+

(Pro) Can be added to printed documents, using the Print Designer. If using multiple units of measure, defaults to your sell-by unit but can be changed to sell by another unit.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + +
+

Serial #

+

(Pro)

+		 +

Field used to track serial numbers of sold items. Items can be designated as requiring a serial number entry on the item record in inventory (by selecting the Prompt option in the Serial # Tracking field,) in which case you will be prompted to enter a serial number for each unit of the item sold.

+
+

[Commission]
+[Commission %]

+

(Pro)

+		 +

Optional fields that display commission information for the sale, based on the employee recorded in the Associate field. Learn more.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Return to top

+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Customer

+

[Name, Address and other information]

+

Not available in Point of Sale Free

+		 +

Customer information fields that display the name of the customer to whom the sale is being made. Also used as the customer lookup/search field. Read more about searching for and listing a customer on a receipt here. You can require that a customer be listed on all receipts in company preferences.

+

Individual Customers: Customer full name, including specified combination and order of first and last names, and title is printed on receipts in the format specified in company preferences.

+

(Pro) Business Customers: The customer company name is displayed. Learn more.

+

After listing a customer, use the Edit  button to view or edit the customer record.

+
+

Comments

+		 +

Used to record pertinent information about the sale. Printed on copy of receipt given to customer.

+
+

Totals Area

+		 +

These fields apply to the entire receipt and located at the bottom right.

+
+

[Price Level]

+		 +

Active receipt price level. Suggested as your default price level from company preferences. Change by selecting a new level from the drop-down list.

+
+

[Subtotal]

+

 

+		 +

The sum of the extended prices for all items listed on a receipt.

+
+

Disc %

+

Discount

+		 +

Global discount percent.

+

Global discount amount.

+

Global discounts are taken from the receipt subtotal and not spread across the sold items. Entering a value in either discount field causes the other to be auto-calculated. See giving discounts for more information.

+
+

[Tax %]

+		 +

Tax percentage applied to the sale. If multiple rates apply, or some items taxed and others not, this field is blank.

+
+

[Tax]

+		 +

Total tax amount collected on the sale.

+
+

Ship Date

+

Shipping

+

(Pro)

+		 +

Scheduled date of shipment.

+

Shipping charges.

+

Select Ship These Items to enter shipping information and charges. Learn more.

+
+

Total

+		 +

Total amount due from customer (or to customer in case of a return). This amount is carried to the payment window.

+
+

[Tax Location]

+		 +

Current tax location is displayed in the receipt status bar at bottom of form. Defaults to the tax location specified in company preferences. The tax location (for entire sale) or tax codes (for individual items) can be edited, if necessary. Learn more.

+
+

[Printed Receipt Message]

+		 +

User-definable message, specified in company preferences, which is printed on the copy of the receipt given to the customer. These messages are not displayed on screen and cannot be changed at the time of sale. For example, you could use the message field to print "We Appreciate Your Business" or your return policy on every receipt.

+
+

Sales history list fields

+		 +

These fields are available only in the your list of saved receipts.

+
+

[Receipt #]

+

 

+		 +

Sequential number assigned to receipts as they are created.

+
+

[Receipt Type]

+		 +

Indicates type of receipt: Sale, Return, Payout, or Deposit.

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

Indicates status of receipt as: Regular, Reversed, Reversing. Learn more about reversing receipts.

+
+

Payment

+		 +

The payment method used for the receipt. If more than one payment method was used, Split is displayed.

+
+

[QB Status]

+		 +

If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop, displays the Financial Exchange status of the receipt: not posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop), complete (sent to QuickBooks Desktop), or error (attempting to send the receipt to QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+ +

 

+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields05.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0cb682c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,301 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Customers Overview | Program Capacities

+
+

Basic

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each customer field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields prefilled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

 

+ + +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Accept Checks?

+		 +

The customers check-acceptance status, Yes or No. When No is selected, the cashier will be alerted when trying to accept payment by check on a receipt. With sufficient security rights (owner, manager, assistant manager pre-defined groups), the check can still be accepted at the users discretion.

+

If security is not used, the warning message is displayed, but any employee can accept the check.

+
+

Account Fields

+

Charge Account

+

[Account Limit]

+

[Account Balance]

+

[Available Credit]

+

[Past Due]

+		 +

Select the Charge Account check box to allow charge account for this customer and then enter a credit limit.

+

Customer's current charge account limit, balance, and remaining credit available always displayed here and available to view from sales receipts.

+

If a new charge sale exceeds the available credit, Point of Sale blocks the charge. Learn more.

+

The Past Due amount comes from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. You can block additional charges when an account is in a past due state.

+
+

Address fields

+		 +

Bill To Address: The customers complete mailing address.

+

(Pro) Ship To Address: Address where customer prefers to receive shipped merchandise. Default is same as Bill To address. Clear the check box and enter a different Ship To address as necessary. When making sales to this customer, shipping information can be added to the sales document.

+
+

Alt Contact

+		 +

Allows for an alternate contact name for the customer.

+
+

Company

+		 +

Name of the customers company.
+(Pro) Required when Track by Company is selected for a business customer.

+
+

Customer Discount

+		 +

Percent: A percentage discount automatically suggested against the active price level to items listed on a receipt, layaway, or sales order made for the customer. You decide whether to apply the discount or not at the time of sale. Editable (subject to security rights).

+

Price Level: Use to assign one of your predefined price levels to the customer. When making a receipt for this customer you will be prompted to apply the specified price level, which you can choose to do or not at your discretion.

+
+

Customer ID (Pro)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+ 

+

Custom Fields 1-7 (Pro)
+
+
+
+
+ 

+

Customer Notes

+		 +

Customer identification number; can be used to print barcoded ID cards. Those cards can then be scanned to add a customer to a sales receipt. Automatically generated by Point of Sale; editable but use the link above read about the special format of this number before making changes.

+

Custom fields can be used to enter any other customer information you need to track. Once defined, the fields can be used to filter lists and reports, and can be added to your printed documents using Print Designer.  Learn more.

+

Use to record optional information about the customer, e.g. birthday, requested items, clothing sizes, etc. Customer notes are not exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+
+

Customer Type

+		 +

Use to categorize your customers in ways that are meaningful to your business, such as their geographic location, or how they first heard about your business. Learn more.

+
+

E-mail
+
+ 

+

 

+

OK to
+e-mail this customer

+		 +

Customers e-mail address. Entry allows you to send send e-mail or to e-mail documents to the customer.

+  +

Check box indicates if customer is willing to receive e-mail communications. Clear the check box if customer wishes to "opt out" of your e-mail communications. Learn more about e-mail marketing.

+
+

Full Name

+		 +

Displayed on documents and is comprised of First, Last, and Title in the order specified in Preferences Company Sales.

+

(Pro) For business customers: If Track by Company is selected on the customer record, then the company name is always displayed in the Full Name field.

+
+

First Name

+		 +

Customer's first name.

+
+

Last Name

+		 +

Customer's last name. Required for individual customers.

+
+

Title

+		 +

Title for customer name: Mr., Mrs., or Ms.

+
+

[Last Sale]

+		 +

The date of the customer's last purchase. Automatically updated when a receipt is updated.

+
+

Phone

+

Phone 2

+

Alt Phone

+		 +

Three phone numbers, each up to 15 characters, allowing entry of an area code and a notation such as H, F or WK.

+

Note: For easy customer lookup by phone number, use a consistent format when entering the numbers. We suggest typing in the area code last so you can quickly find a customer by his or her basic seven-digit number. You can use or omit the hyphen, but you must be consistent in order to be able to search by phone number. Example: 854-4207 (818) H.

+

If desired, the Alt Phone field can be used to sort, search, and look up customers by information other than a second phone number. For example, you could enter customer driver license numbers and then search and look up your customers by entering their driver license numbers. (Subject to local regulations).

+
+

QB Status

+

(QuickBooks Desktop financial software users only)

+		 +

Customer list only. Displays the Financial Exchange status of the record: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop), Completed (sent to QuickBooks Desktop), or Error (attempting to send QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+

[Rating]

+		 +

Graphical indicator of customer purchase volume over time, based on user-defined time period and familiar five-star system. Learn more.

+
+

Rewards Member (Pro)

+		 +

Check box to indicate customer participates in your rewards program. Can be added as a column to your customer list and used to filter the list and various reports. If the rewards program is active, a Rewards tab is added to the customer form with specific reward information for the customer. Learn more.

+
+

Tax Location

+		 +

Specify a tax location to be used for this customer on sales. When making a sale to the customer, Point of Sale will prompt you to use this tax location.

+

Note:If Tax-Exempt is selected for the customer (see below),a hidden exempt location is automatically applied and this filed is disabled. .

+

The Tax Location column/field can be added to your customer list or information panel.

+
+

Tax-Exempt

+		 +

If checked, no sales tax is collected on sales to this customer.

+
+

Track by Company (Pro)

+		 +

Select this check box to use the company name throughout the program (in the Full Name field) and to add a Customer PO# field to sales receipts and customer orders, allowing you to track transactions by the customer PO number. Learn more.

+
+

Use with QuickBooks Desktop

+

(QuickBooks Desktop financial software users only)

+		 +

Select to share the customer information with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Required to offer a store charge account to the customer. Default selection can be specified in company preferences.

+
+

ZIP

+		 +

ZIP code or other postal code, up to 10 characters (e.g., 12345-6789).

+
+ +

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields06.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields06.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e623045 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields06.htm @@ -0,0 +1,348 @@ + + + + + + + +Purchase Order Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Purchase Order Fields

+

Purchasing Overview | Data Field Overview | Creating a PO

+
+

Pro

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each purchase order (PO) field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale. * designates a required field.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can customize the list columns to add them.

+

See also item fields for a description of common item fields that may appear on purchase orders.

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[PO #]*

+		 +

By default, a sequential number, starting with 1.

+

If preferred, you can precede the number with a text string, such as the vendor name, vendor code, or the name of the associate making the PO. You can also change the starting number. See company preferences.

+

Follow the instructions provided on the help sidebar on the preference page.

+
+

Vendor*

+		 +

Required. The company name identifying the vendor listed on the PO. Select a vendor from the drop-down list, press (<F4>) to go to your vendor list, or select the Find Vendor button to search by keyword.

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

The current status of the purchase order. Automatically set to Open on new POs and Closed on filled POs. Learn more.

+
+

[Associate]

+		 +

The associate creating the PO. Automatically filled with the logged in users name or, if security is not used, name can be selected from the drop-down list of defined employees.

+
+

Date Fields:

+		 +

Most date fields are editable. Select image\f4_symbol.gif (<F4>) to access a pop-up calendar.

+
+

[Order Date]

+		 +

Default: the date when the PO was created. Editable.

+
+

[Ship Date]

+		 +

PO Ship Date: Enter the estimated shipping date for the order. Included on merchandise on-order reports.

+
+

[Cancel Date]

+		 +

Optional field. Enter the date after which delivery may be refused. You can be alerted when receiving items against a PO past is cancel date via a company preference setting, but can still accept the shipment at your discretion. If this preference is not set, the Cancel date is ignored.

+
+

[Payment Due]

+		 +

Calculated date field. Ship Date + Net Due Days from terms. Included for planning and reporting purposes.

+
+

Item Fields

+		 +

These fields are located in the item list on the purchase order form.

+
+

Ordered (Qty)

+		 +

Order Quantity: In the purchase order item list. Enter the quantity being ordered for the item.

+
+

[On Order]

+		 +

On-Order Quantity: The quantity currently on order for the item. Updated with this POs order quantity when saved. May include order quantities from other POs.

+
+

[Received]

+		 +

Received Quantity: The ordered item quantity already received on receiving vouchers.

+
+

[Due]

+		 +

Due Quantity: The item quantity remaining to be received.

+
+

[Cost]

+		 +

Order Cost: The cost at which an item is being ordered on the PO. Suggested as the current inventory order cost, but can be edited, as necessary. Up to five decimal places can be entered and are used in program calculations; though only two decimals are displayed.

+
+

[Ext Cost]

+		 +

Extended cost: The quantity ordered multiplied by the unit cost. Editable.

+

If ordering items with fractional cent costs, you can enter the quantity and extended cost, and Point of Sale will calculate the unit cost. Two decimals are displayed; five are stored and used in calculations.

+
+

[Avail Qty]
+(Pro)

+		 +

Available Quantity. Quantity available for immediate sale. Equal to on-hand quantity less quantity committed on active customer orders. Learn More.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]

+

 (Pro)

+		 +

Used to display or change the unit (size) of the item being ordered when using the multiple units of measure feature. Defaults to your default order-by unit.

+
+

Totals Fields

+		 +

These fields apply to the entire PO and are displayed at the bottom of the PO form and typically also in the purchase order list.

+
+

[SubTotal]

+		 +

The total cost (sum of extended item costs) of the PO before applying any discounts or fees.

+
+

Discount %

+		 +

Discount Percentage: Enter a percentage discount applicable to the PO. Discounts are applied to the PO subtotal. Entering a discount percentage causes the Discount (amount) field to be automatically calculated.

+
+

Discount

+		 +

Discount Amount: Enter the amount of any discount applicable to the PO. Discounts are applied to the PO subtotal. Entering an amount causes the Discount % field to be automatically calculated.

+
+

Fee

+		 +

Enter any fee applicable to the PO. For example, a special handling fee might be applied to an order.

+
+

[Total]

+		 +

The total PO amount after discounts and fees are applied.

+

Total = Subtotal Discount + Fee

+
+

[Qty Ordered]

+		 +

The total PO quantity ordered, combined for all items.

+
+

[Qty Received]

+		 +

The total document quantity received to date.

+
+

[Unfilled %]

+		 +

The percentage of the total PO quantity that has not yet been received. Updated when a voucher that references the PO is updated.

+

Unfilled % = (Qty Due / Qty Ordered) X 100

+

See PO fill status.

+
+

[Total Due]

+		 +

The total document quantity remaining to be received. Updated by receiving vouchers.

+

Due = Qty Ordered Qty Received.

+
+

Instructions

+		 +

1) Field on PO form for entering instructions to vendor regarding the order. Learn more.

+

2) Up to two lines of optional text that print on POs, but are not displayed on-screen. Defined in company preferences.

+
+

[No of Items]

+		 +

In PO List only: The total number of items (SKUs, not units) ordered on the PO.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + +
+

[Lay/SO/WO#]
+(Pro)

+		 +

PO list. If you generated the PO from a customer order, the order number populates this field for cross-reference.

+
+

Ship To Store/Address  (Pro)

+

 

+

Bill To Store/Address  (Pro)

+		 +

The number and address for the store being shipped the ordered merchandise.

+

 

+  +

The number and address for the store where vendor should send the bill for the purchased merchandise.

+
+ +

Return to top

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields07.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cac2270 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,365 @@ + + + + + + + +Voucher Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Voucher Fields

+

Receiving Overview | Creating a New Voucher

+
+

Basic

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each voucher field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Vendor*

+		 +

The vendor from whom the merchandise is received. Select the vendor in this drop-down list or choose Select From Vendor List (<F4>). Brought from a referenced PO, if applicable. Required field.

+

Upon entry, Point of Sale alerts you if open POs exist for the vendor.

+
+

[PO #]

+		 +

The number of the purchase order that the voucher is receiving against.  Displays "Multiple POs" if receiving against more than one PO.

+
+

[Date]

+		 +

The date when the voucher was created. Default: todays date. Editable with security rights.

+
+

[Associate]

+		 +

The person making the voucher. Populated with the logged-in user, if logins required.

+
+

Item Fields

+		 +

These fields pertain to the received items listed on the voucher. See also Item Fields for a description of common item fields that may be available.

+
+

[Qty]

+		 +

The number of units of an item received (or returned) on the voucher. From a referenced PO or suggested as one (1). Editable.

+
+

[Unit Cost]

+		 +

For a voucher line item, the unit cost at which an item is being received (or returned).

+

Default: The order cost from a referenced PO, or the current inventory Order Cost. Editable.

+
+

[Ext Cost]

+		 +

Extended cost: For a voucher line item, the Qty x Voucher Cost.

+

If receiving items with fractional cent costs, you can enter the quantity and extended cost, and Point of Sale will calculate the unit cost. Enter up to five decimals; only two decimals are displayed; but five are stored and used in calculations.

+
+

[Original Order Qty]

+		 +

If referencing a PO, the item quantity ordered on the PO.

+
+

[Order Qty Difference]

+		 +

The difference between the quantity that was ordered on a referenced PO and the quantity actually received.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Serial #  (Pro)

+		 +

Used to record serial numbers of received items. Learn more.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]  (Pro)

+		 +

Used to display or change the unit (size) of the item being received when using the multiple units of measure feature. Defaults to your purchase-by unit or the unit from a referenced PO

+
+

[Store]  (Pro)

+		 +

The store receiving or returning the merchandise. At Headquarters, can be changed to create a voucher for any store. At remote stores, this field defaults to the local store and cannot be changed.

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Comments

+		 +

Text field for recording any pertinent information about the shipment. Select Edit Comments from the I Want to Menu if you need additional space. Comments are printed on the voucher.

+
+

Billing Information Fields

+		 +

These fields appear only if you have elected to enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale in company preferences. These fields are editable even after the voucher is saved. This information affects how the voucher is sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+
+

Already Paid

+		 +

Select this check box if you have already prepaid for the items, such as with a credit card.

+
+

[Payee Name]

+		 +

Who is to be paid for the merchandise. Suggested as the vendor entered at the top of the voucher, but can be edited to another vendor from your vendor file.

+
+

[Terms]

+		 +

Terms of payment. From the payee record, or if applicable, carried from a referenced PO. Can be edited for individual vouchers. Learn more.

+
+

Bill Date

+		 +

Enter the billing date from the vendors invoice.

+
+

[Invoice Due]

+		 +

The date that payment for the invoice is due to the vendor. Calculated from Bill Date and Terms.

+
+

Invoice/Ref #

+		 +

Use to record the vendors invoice (bill) number for the shipment. Important: The entry in this field tells Point of Sale you have received the invoice and that the voucher should be sent to your Accounts Payable in QuickBooks Desktop.

+
+

[SubTotal]

+		 +

The sum of all extended item costs before discounts, fees, and freight are applied.

+
+

Discount,Fee, and Freight  Fields

+		 +

Entered by selecting Enter Discount/Fee/Freight from the I Want To menu. Displayed in voucher totals area. These amounts may optionally be spread across the cost of the items being received. Learn more about spreading these amounts.

+
+

Discount %

+

Discount (amount)

+		 +

Enter a discount percent or amount. Making an entry in one field results in the other being calculated. If referencing a PO with a discount entered, the PO discount is proportionally carried to the voucher. These fields are editable after the voucher is saved, if not spread across items.

+
+

Freight

+		 +

Use to record freight charges. This field is editable after the voucher is saved, if not spread across items.

+
+

Fee

+		 +

Use to record vendor charges such as order fees. If referencing a PO with a fee entered, you are alerted and can transfer the fee to the voucher at your discretion. This field is editable after the voucher is saved, if not spreading across items.

+
+

[Total]

+		 +

The voucher total after all discounts, fees, and freight are applied.

+
+

[Printed Message]

+		 +

Not displayed on voucher form. One or two lines of optional text, defined in company preferences, that is printed on vouchers.

+
+

Receiving History List Fields

+		 +

These fields are displayed only in your list of saved vouchers. You may have to customize the list columns to see them.

+
+

[Voucher #]

+		 +

Sequential document number, assigned by Point of Sale.

+
+

[Type]

+		 +

Type of voucher: Receiving or Return.

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

Receiving History list. Indicates status of voucher: Regular, Reversed, or Reversing. See Reversing a Voucher for more information on reversing.

+
+

[QB Status]

+

(QuickBooks Desktop financial software users only)

+		 +

Receiving History list. Displays the status of financial exchange for a voucher: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop), Complete (sent to QuickBooks Desktop), Unbilled Purchases (merchandise has been received on a voucher but has yet to be billed), or error (attempting to send the voucher to QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+ +

 

+

Return to top

+

Data field overview

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields08.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7923c4b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,315 @@ + + + + + + +Adjustment Memo Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Adjustment Memo Fields

+

Adjustments Overview | Creating an Adjustment Memo

+
+

Basic

+
+

Refer to the tables below for descriptions of each adjustment memo field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

See also item fields for a description of common item fields that may appear on documents.

+

 

+

Cost Memos Fields:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Old Cost]

+		 +

In Item List: Average unit cost for this item before adjustment.

+
+

New Cost

+		 +

In Item List: Enter the adjusted average unit cost.

+
+

[Diff Cost]

+		 +

In Item List:  Difference in cost for the item: New Cost Old Cost

+
+

[Old Value]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history: The total cost for all items listed on the memo before the adjustment.

+
+

[New Value]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history: The total cost for all items listed on the memo after the adjustment.

+
+

[Value Change]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history: Total difference in cost for all items on the memo. New Value Old Value

+
+

[Qty On-Hand]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history list: Total combined quantity on-hand for all items on this memo.

+
+

[Current Qty]

+		 +

In Item list: Current item on-hand quantity. This dynamic field shows the current inventory quantity, even when viewing saved cost memos (i.e. not the quantity at the time memo was created).

+
+

 

+

Quantity Memos Fields:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Old Qty]

+		 +

In Item List: Quantity on hand for this item before adjustment.

+

In Totals area and Adjustment History:  Total quantity on hand for all items on this memo before adjustment.

+
+

New Qty

+		 +

In Item List: Enter the adjusted quantity for the item. Becomes the new inventory quantity after saving.

+

In Totals area and Adjustment history: Total quantity on hand for all items on this memo after adjustment. Not editable.

+
+

[Diff Qty]

+		 +

In Item List: Difference in quantity for the item: New Qty Old Qty

+
+

[Qty Change]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history: Total difference in quantity for all items on the memo: New Qty Old Qty

+
+

[Value Change]

+		 +

In Totals and Adjustment history: Total difference in inventory value due to the quantity changes recorded on the memo. For example, if an item costs $5, and the quantity changes from 5 to 4, the value change is -$5. If the quantity changes from 5 to 7, the value change is $10.

+
+ + + + + +
+

Serial # (Pro)

+		 +

Optional: Used to record item serial number(s) for the adjusted quantities.

+
+ + + + + +
+

[Store]  Pro)

+		 +

Headquarters only. Select the store for which you are making the adjustment memo. Default is Headquarters store. Editable

+
+

 

+

Common Memo Fields:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

Associate

+		 +

The employee making the memo. Auto-filled if requiring employee login. If not requiring login, optionally select a name from the drop-down list.

+
+

Comment

+		 +

For many actions in which memos are automatically generated, the Comment field will contain a description of why the memo was created. For example, Assembly created from inventory is the comment for a memo generated when assembly items are created. For manually created memos, enter a comment at your discretion.

+
+

Date

+		 +

The date the memo was created. Editable, subject to security rights.

+
+

[QB Status]

+

(QuickBooks financial software users only)

+		 +

In Adjustment History list: Displays the status of Financial Exchange for a memo: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks), Complete (sent to QuickBooks), or Error (attempting to send the memo to QuickBooks resulted in an error). Learn more

+
+

Reason

+		 +

Required field.  Enter the reason for the adjustment or select from the drop-down list of predefined reasons.

+

In the case of system-generated memos, the Reason field will be auto-filled: adjustment when manually adding items to inventory (Man Adj), building an assembly (CreatAsm), breaking an assembly (Brk Asm), etc.

+
+

[Source]

+		 +

The action or module that created the memo: manually created memo (Manual), reversed in memo module (Reverse), physical inventory (Physical) inventory adjustment (Inventory), Assembly item (Assembly).

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

In Adjustment History list: Shows the memo status: Regular, Reversed, or Reversing.  Learn more.

+
+

[Type]

+		 +

In Adjustment History list: The inventory value being adjusted: Quantity or Cost.

+
+

[Qty On-Hand]

+		 +

In Totals area and Adjustment history list: Total combined quantity on-hand for all items on this memo.

+
+

[Current Qty]

+		 +

(Item list) Current item on-hand quantity in inventory. This dynamic field shows the current inventory quantity, even when viewing former cost memos (i.e. not the quantity at the time memo was created).

+
+ + + + + +
+

[Unit of Measure] (Pro)

+		 +

Used to display the base unit of measure (size) of the item being adjusted when using the multiple units of measure feature. Read only.

+
+

 

+

Return to top

+

Data fields overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields09.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields09.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2911244 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields09.htm @@ -0,0 +1,381 @@ + + + + + + +Customer Order Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Order Fields

+

Customer Order Overview | Program Capacities

+
+

Pro

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each customer order field. Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

See also item fields for a description of common item fields that may appear on documents.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Address]

+		 +

Contains the company name (if any), the address, and phone number for the customer listed on the order. Taken from the customers record. To edit a customers information, click the Edit button next to this field to open the appropriate record for editing.

+
+

[Amount]

+		 +

On the Payment History screen. The amount of a particular deposit.

+
+

Assigned

+		 +

Work order only. Select the employee to whom the service job is to assigned. Suggested as the logged in employee. As the work progresses, this field can be edited as necessary. The Assigned field can be used to filter the work order list and reports.

+
+

[Associate]

+		 +

Header and item list. Suggested as the logged in employee, but can be edited for the entire document (header field) or item-by-item (in the item list) for the purpose of tracking sales commissions.

+
+

[Balance Due]

+		 +

The balance remaining on the customer order. (Total Deposit Balance)

+
+

[Cashier]

+		 +

Auto-filled with the logged in employees name and cannot be changed if logins are required.

+
+

[Commission %]

+		 +

Item list. The commission rate assigned to the specified Associate, if item eligible for commissions.

+
+

[Commission Amount]

+		 +

Item list. The commission amount for the item, based on the item price and the Associates commission percentage, if item eligible for commissions.

+
+

Customer

+		 +

Required. The customers name with title, or company name, from the customer record. This field is also used as a customer lookup/search field. Enter a customers first or last name, company name, phone number, or a search keyword and press <Enter> or click the Find Customer button.

+
+

Customer PO #

+		 +

On orders for customers being tracked as businesses, this field is added to the Customer Info section of the order. Use to record the customer's purchase order number.

+
+

[Deposit Balance]

+		 +

The sum of all deposits received, less any deposits already applied toward sale.

+
+

[Dep Receipt #]

+		 +

Payment History screen. Deposit receipt number; sequential number assigned to the receipt used to record the deposit.

+
+

Description of problem

+		 +

Work orders only. Use to record the service to be performed and any special instructions. Select the Edit Instructions icon in this field if more space is needed.

+
+

Discount Fields
+ 

+

   Discount

+		 +

Enter any discount amount or percent and Point of Sale calculates the others.

+

Totals area: Global discount amount for the customer order.

+
+

   Discount %

+		 +

Item list: A percentage discount applied to the specific item price.

+

Totals area: A global percentage discount applied to the entire document (subtotal).

+
+

   Unit Discount

+		 +

Item list: A discount amount applied to the specific item price.

+
+

   Ext Discount

+		 +

Item list: Extended item discount. (Order Qty x Unit Discount)

+
+

   Disc Type

+		 +

Item list. Allows you to specify the reason for an item discount. Discount types can be customized in company preferences and used to filter reports.

+
+

[<Document> #]

+		 +

Examples: Layaway #, Sales Order #, or Work Order #. Sequential number assigned by Point of Sale using a separate sequence for each order type. The numbering format can be customized for each order type in company preferences.

+
+

Due Date

+		 +

Used on work orders to record the expected completion date.

+
+

[Ext. Price]

+		 +

Item list. The extended price of a customer order item (Price X Qty)

+
+

Instructions

+		 +

Layaways/Sales Orders. Optional instructions field. Click the edit instructions field for more room to record notes.

+
+

[Order Date]

+		 +

The date the customer order was created. Default: the current date.

+
+

Ordered

+		 +

Item list: The quantity of an item being ordered. Suggested as one (1) or the Doc QtyClick to display a popup topic transferred from inventory. Editable.

+
+

[Payment]

+		 +

Payment History screen. The payment type (cash, credit card, check, etc.) used to make the deposit.

+
+

Price

+		 +

Item list. The price of the item for this particular customer order. Suggested is the inventory price for the current price level. Enter new price if necessary; entries here do not affect inventory prices.

+
+

Price Level

+		 +

The price level applied to the order. Select a new price level from the drop-down list to change.

+
+

Promo Code

+		 +

Optional field used to record a miscellaneous note on a customer order, such as a note identifying a special sale. An entry in this field can be required in by a company preference and used to filter reports.

+
+

[Qty Due]

+		 +

Item list. The item quantity remaining to be received by the customer.  (Qty Due =Ordered Sold)

+
+

[Reverse]

+		 +

Payment History screen. If a receipt used to take a deposit has been reversed, Reversed is displayed in this field. Receipts that reverse a deposit receipt show Reversing in this field.

+
+

Shipping

+		 +

Enter an optional amount for shipping charges. On sales orders, you can select Shipping Information from the I Want To menu to specify provider and shipping address.

+
+

[Sold]

+		 +

Item list. The item quantity already sold to the customer.

+
+

Status

+		 +

Current status of the order: Open, Closed, Pending or a custom status you have defined. Used to track and filter the progression of orders for viewing and reporting. Learn more.

+
+

Subtotal

+		 +

The total amount due for the customer order before adding discounts, taxes or shipping costs.

+
+

Tax

+		 +

The total tax being charged for the customer order.

+
+

Total

+		 +

The total amount for the customer order, including all taxes, charges and discounts.

+
+

Unfilled %

+		 +

Order Lists: Percentage of the order not yet sold to the customer, based on total order quantities.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]

+		 +

Used to change the unit (size) of the item being sold when using the multiple units of measure feature. Defaults to your default sell-by unit.

+
+ +

Return to Top

+

Creating a customer order

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields10.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca77b0d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + +Information (Data) Fields Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Information (Data) Fields Overview

+

Entering data in a field | Program capacities

+

 

+

Data fields in Point of Sale are where you enter or select the information applying to the record or document with which you are working. Choose a data field topic below to see a listing and usage for the fields available in that area.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown in the fields tables are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

 

+

All Levels

+

Department fields

+

Document item list fields

+

Inventory item fields

+

Price Manager fields

+

Receipt fields

+

Customizing field labels

+

 

+

Basic and Pro

+

Adjustment memo fields

+

Customer fields

+

Purchase order fields

+

Vendor fields

+

Voucher fields

+

 

+

Pro Only

+

Customer order fields

+

Transfer slip fields

+

Using custom fields

+

Changing fields on printed documents

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields11.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7fa6255 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Document Item List Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Document Item List Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Listing Items on Documents

+

 

+

The document item list is included on documents is for the purpose of listing the items being processed. The document item list contains details such as description fields, price fields, discount fields, etc. The fields included will vary depending on the current document.

+
    +
  • +

    Many of the fields in the item list, such as Item # and Item Name, come from your item records

    +
    • +
  • +

    Price and cost fields are usually suggested from inventory, but can be manually edited in the item list or as selecting items from inventory (see Doc PriceClick to display a popup topic and Doc CostClick to display a popup topic field definitions).

    +
    • +
  • +

    The quantity of the item to be processed is typically suggested as one (1) or entered manually, either directly on the document or while selecting items from inventory (see Doc QtyClick to display a popup topic).

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can customize the columns included in a document item list.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields12.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields12.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c62cb7a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields12.htm @@ -0,0 +1,284 @@ + + + + + + +Price Manager Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Manager Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Price Manager Overview

+

 

+

Refer to the tables below for descriptions of each price change and discount pricing field. Fields shown in brackets, for example [Current Price], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, the columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can customize the columns to add them.

+

 

+

Price Change Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Current Price]

+		 +

The current price at the selected price level in inventory. Also called the Old Price, which is displayed after applying the changes to inventory.

+
+

New Price

+		 +

The calculated or manually entered new price. Not in effect until Apply Changes to Inventory is selected on the price change record.

+

Current Price Price Change = New Price

+
+

Price Change

+		 +

The dollar amount of the price change. A price reduction is shown as a negative value.

+
+

% Price Change

+		 +

The price change expressed as a percentage of the current price. A price reduction is shown as a negative value.

+
+

New Profit

+		 +

The profit amount for the item at the new price.

+
+

New Margin %

+		 +

The profit expressed as a percentage at the new price.

+
+

[Price Level Prices]

+		 +

From inventory; the current price at each of your markdown price levels.

+
+

[Regular Price]

+		 +

From inventory; the current regular price.

+
+

 

+

Discount Pricing Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[Barcode] (Pro)

+		 +

Manually entered or scanned code associated with a particular discount coupon. System-suggested default code in format that allows for automatic detection of coupon. User editable.

+
+

[Created date]

+

Created By (Pro)

+		 +

Date that the discount was created.

+

If logins are required, the logged in employee's name. If logins are not required, left blank.

+
+

Discount Additional Quantities (Pro)

+		 +

Applies to X for Y discount types only. Check box specifies if item quantities above X qualify for the discount price.

+

Example: If discount is Buy 3 for $10, this setting specifies if the 4th and 5th units purchased also qualify for the discount price.

+

Note: Multiples of X always have the discount applied, regardless of this setting.

+
+

Discount Name

+		 +

Required. User-defined name to identify the discount. Must be unique for each discount; facilitates reporting.

+
+

Discount Notes

+		 +

Optional, user-defined notes that can be added to the discount record.

+
+

Discount Prices  (Pro)

+

Total Price ($Y)

+

Discount Price (per unit)

+		 +

On X for $Y discounts, the dollar amount to purchase X qualifying items is the total price. For example, in a Buy 3 T-shirts for $25 sale, the total price is $25 and the discount price is $8.33 each.

+
+

Discount Sales Statistics  (Pro)

+

[Sold (Qty)]
+[Sold Cost]
+[Sold Price]
+[Profit]
+[Margin %]

+

[Markup %]

+		 +

Fields that apply to sales where the discount was applied. Available to add to the discount record to help evaluate the effectiveness of the promotion.

+

See customizing columns and customizing information panels for instructions to add these fields.

+
+

Start and Stop dates  (Pro)

+		 +

Includes Start and Stop dates/time for scheduling automatic discounts. Point of Sale will automatically start and stop applying the discount prices at the designated start/stop dates and times. The Stop date also indicated the expiration date for a coupon.

+
+

Discount Type

+		 +

Definition of the discount, including specific discount information.

+
+

Items  (Pro)

+		 +

The items that are eligible for the discount. User-specified.

+
+

[Modified]   (Pro)
+ 

+

[Modified By]  (Pro)

+

 

+		 +

Date that the discount was last edited and saved. Not editable.

+

If logins are required, prefilled with the logged in user's name when the record is modified. If logins are not required, left blank.

+
+

Percentage (Y %)  (Pro)

+		 +

In X for Y% Off discounts, the Y% specifies the saving when purchasing X units, expressed as a percentage.

+
+

Price Levels  (Pro)

+		 +

The price levels at which a discount is applied.

+
+

Quantity (X) (Pro)

+		 +

On X for Y discount types, the quantity of qualifying items that must be purchased to get the discount price.

+
+

Kind (Source)  (Pro)

+		 +

System-generated value identifying the type of discount: manual, automatic, or coupon.

+
+

Status  (Pro)

+		 +

Active (discount prices are being applied, subject to schedule) or Inactive (not being applied). A discount can be made active/inactive at anytime.

+
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_capacities.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_capacities.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d4880a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_capacities.htm @@ -0,0 +1,641 @@ + + + + + + +Program Capacities + + + + + + + + + + + +

Program Capacities

+

Data Field Overview | Viewing List Summary Statistics

+

 

+

The following are the maximum capacity allowed for various lists, fields, and settings in Point of Sale.

+

Scroll down or select an area to jump to specific information.

+

Items and Item Fields

+

Customers, Vendors, Departments, and Employees

+

Documents

+

Quantity, Cost, Price and Discount Fields

+

Miscellaneous Fields and Settings

+

 

+

Items and Item Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Number of items (all item types)

+		 +

Virtually unlimited*

+
+

Maximum quantity per item

+		 +

999,999

+
+

Vendors per item

+		 +

(Pro) 5, (Basic)  1

+
+

Item Name: field length**

+		 +

31 characters

+
+

Item Description: field  length**

+		 +

Virtually unlimited

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Items per assembly  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Items per group  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Number of assemblies/groups  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Number of style templates  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Style grid columns and rows  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Serial numbers: field length, all documents  (Pro)

+		 +

25 characters

+
+

* The number of items has no physical limit. However, there may be performance issues when excessively high numbers are reached. Although an exact number cannot be determined, 50,000 + items has been demonstrated to have no affect on system performance. Results will depend upon the capabilities of the system hardware. Item numbers above 99,999 may cause problems with bar code size on smaller tag templates.

+

** These are the default item field names for new users. These field names are customizable, and upgraders from previous versions may see item fields named Description 1 and Description 2.

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Customers, Departments, Vendors, and Employees

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Customers: number of customers

+		 +

Virtually unlimited**

+
+

Department: number of departments

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Vendors: number of vendors

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Vendors: e-mail address field

+		 +

99 characters

+
+

Vendors: notes (capacity)

+		 +

245 characters

+
+

Employees: number of employees

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Security groups: number of custom security groups

+		 +

No limit

+
+

* The number of customers has no physical limit. However, there may be performance issues when excessively high numbers are reached. An exact number cannot be determined, as results will depend upon the capabilities of the system hardware.

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Documents

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Adjustment memos, list

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Adjustment memos: items per memo

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Adjustment memos: held at one time

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales Receipts: list

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales Receipts: items per receipt

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales Receipt: comments/message

+		 +

300 characters

+
+

Sales Receipts: on hold at one time

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Purchase orders : number of POs

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Purchase orders: items per PO

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Purchase orders: Instructions field

+		 +

2000 characters

+
+

Purchase orders: status types

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Receiving Vouchers: list

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Receiving Vouchers: items per voucher

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Receiving Vouchers: held at one time

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Receiving Vouchers: comments/message fields

+		 +

300 characters

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Layaways: number of layaways  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Layaways: items per layaway  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Layaways: status types  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales orders: number of SOs  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales orders: items per SO  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Sales orders: Instructions  (Pro)

+		 +

2000 characters

+
+

Sales orders: status types  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Work orders: number of work orders  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Work orders: Description field  (Pro)

+		 +

2,000 characters

+
+

Work orders: items per work order  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Work orders: sequence numbers  (Pro)

+		 +

20 characters

+
+

Work orders: work order status types  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Transfer slips: history list  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Transfer slips: items per slip (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Transfer slips: held at one time  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Transfer slips: Comment field  (Pro)

+		 +

300 characters

+
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Quantity, Cost, Price, and Discount Fields

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Quantity fields

+		 +

5 digits (not including decimals), see also: Decimal: Number of quantity decimal places

+
+

Number of quantity decimal places

+		 +

No entry limit, rounded and saved to 2nd decimal place

+
+

Number of currency decimal places

+		 +

No entry limit, rounded and saved to 5th decimal place, displayed to 2nd decimal place

+
+

Cost fields

+		 +

8 digits (not including decimals), see also: Decimal: Number of currency decimal places

+
+

Price fields

+		 +

8 digits (not including decimals), see also: Decimal: Number of currency decimal places

+
+

Price Levels

+		 +

Regular Price, plus 4 markdown levels

+
+

Discount types (item discounts, user-defined)

+		 +

16

+
+

Price Manager: Number of user defined discount prices (X for Y)  (Pro)

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Miscellaneous Fields and Settings

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

List, Field, or Setting

+		 +

Capacity

+
+

Workstations, number per store (Basic)

+		 +

20***

+
+

Tax locations

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Tax codes

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Company name: Name field

+		 +

41 characters

+
+

Reports: memorized reports

+		 +

No limit

+
+

Filters: number of memorized filters

+		 +

No limit. (Only 8 displayed in drop-down list. Access all through "Manage Filters".)

+
+

Payment methods on the receipt payment screen

+		 +

8, including cash, check, credit cards (up to 3 per transaction), debit/ATM card, gift certificate, gift cards (up to 3 per transaction), charge to account, and deposit from customer order.

+
+

Stores  (Pro)

+		 +

20

+
+

***Each workstation requiring concurrent access to the Point of Sale company data requires a separate user license. Learn more about Point of Sale licensing.

+

Back to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_custom.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_custom.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..919e170 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_custom.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Custom Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Custom Fields

+

Data Field Overview | Program Capacities

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale provides you the ability to create and use custom fields. Once defined, the custom fields can be displayed and used to filter lists and reports, and can be added to your printed documents using Print Designer.

+

For example, on your customer records you may wish to add fields for birthday and spouse's name. In inventory, you may wish to track the vendors catalog number, or you may need to record and print an item part number on your purchase orders.

+

You can define and use custom fields in the following records:

+
    +
  • +

    Customers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Vendors

    +
    • +
  • +

    Items

    +
    • +
  • +

    Employees

    +
    • +
+

Defining Custom Field Labels

+

Custom fields are enabled and labeled on the My Field Labels page of company preferences. The My Field Labels preferences page allows you to add and define all custom fields in Point of Sale in one place. How Do I?

+

 

+

How do I add my custom fields to lists?

+

How do I add custom fields to my printed documents?

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Filter lists

+

Modify and filter reports

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_customize_field_labels.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_customize_field_labels.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb571c3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_customize_field_labels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Customize Field Labels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize Field Labels

+

Data Field Overview | Define Inventory | Program Capacities

+

 

+

You can specify custom field labels for the four item description fields in inventory (Inventory Name, Inventory Description, Size, and Attribute). The field labels you specify are displayed throughout the program, on printed documents, and on reports.

+

Default Labels: The default labels for new users are Item Name, Item Description, Size, and Attribute. Upgraders from earlier versions may have labels of Description 1 and Description 2 for the name and description fields. Click Restore To Defaults at the bottom of the screen to return to the default field labels.

+

(Pro) You can also create and use custom fields on customer, vendor, item, and employee records. And, if you use Print Designer to customize your print templates, you can specify different labels for printed documents as well.

+

To customize field labels:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the POS Home Page,  select Preferences Company from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the left pane, choose General My Field Labels.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Scroll down to locate the field labels you wish to customize and enter new label text in the My Label column.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize List Columns

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_slips.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_slips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e495a74 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/fields_slips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,237 @@ + + + + + + +Transfer Slip Fields + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Transfer Slip Fields

+

Making a Transfer Slip | Transfer Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Refer to the table below for descriptions of each transfer slip field (in alphabetical order). Fields shown in brackets, e.g. [field name], are suggestedClick to display a popup topic or read-onlyClick to display a popup topic fields auto-filled by Point of Sale.

+

If, when viewing a record list, columns (fields) shown below are not visible, you can use the customize columns feature to add them.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Usage

+
+

[From Store]

+		 +

Source store of merchandise being transferred. Defaults to the store making the transfer slip. Headquarters can select a different store from the drop-down list to make a slip for another store. Remote stores cannot change this field.

+
+

To Store

+		 +

Destination store for the transferred merchandise. Select a store from the drop-down list. The To Store must be different from the From Store.

+
+

[Date]

+		 +

Suggested as today's date. Can be edited (subject to security rights). Do not change by changing your system date. Data loss could result!

+
+

ETA

+

 

+		 +

Estimated time of arrival: Optional field to convey an estimate of when merchandise will arrive at the destination store (To Store). Editable even after saving.

+
+

Carrier

+		 +

Optional field used to record the carrier transporting the merchandise. Editable even after saving.

+
+

[Associate]

+		 +

Name of the logged-in user (if logins required). If logins are not required, you can select your name from the drop-down list of defined employees.

+
+

Item Fields

+		 +

These fields pertain to the items listed on the slip to be transferred. See also item fields for a description of common inventory fields that are available in the item list.

+
+

Qty

+		 +

Enter the quantity of each item being transferred.

+
+

[Cost]

+		 +

Auto-filled as the current average unit cost for each listed item.

+
+

[Ext Cost]

+		 +

Extended cost of item. Qty X Cost.

+
+

Serial #

+		 +

Used to record item-specific serial numbers, if serial number tracking is used.

+
+

[Unit of Measure]

+		 +

Used to display or change the unit (size) of the item being transferred when using the multiple units of measure feature.

+
+

Comments

+		 +

Optional field to record transfer comments or instructions, such as the reason for the transfer. Select Edit Comments from the I Want to Menu if more space is needed. Editable even after saving.

+
+

Freight

+		 +

Optional field to record freight charges associated with the transfer. This provides a record of these charges to compare to a freight bill later. If integrated with QuickBooks financial software, freight charges are sent to the account specified in company preferences. Editable even after saving.

+
+

Total Cost

+		 +

The sum of the listed items extended costs. Note: Freight costs are not included in the total cost.

+
+

Transfer History List Fields

+		 +

These fields are displayed only in your list of saved transfer slips.

+
+

[Slip #]

+		 +

Sequential number of slips made at the From Store. A separate sequence is maintained for each store.

+
+

[Status]

+		 +

Shows status of slip: Regular, Reversed, or Reversing.

+
+

No of Items

+		 +

The number of item SKUs transferred.

+
+

Total Qty Transferred

+		 +

The total item units transferred.

+
+

QB Status

+

 

+		 +

If integrated with QuickBooks, displays the Financial Exchange status of the slip: Not Posted (not yet sent to QuickBooks), Completed (sent to QuickBooks), or Error (attempting to send the receipt to QuickBooks resulted in an error). Learn more.

+
+

 

+

Data field overview

+

Program capacities

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/finacialexchange_initiating.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/finacialexchange_initiating.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a516efc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/finacialexchange_initiating.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Initiating a Financial Exchange with QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Initiate a Financial Exchange with QuickBooks

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

There are two ways to initiate a Financial Exchange between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Financial exchanges can only be done from the Server Workstation.

+

(Pro) This option is available at Headquarters only.

+

To include Financial Exchange in your End of Day procedure:

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Point of Sale Server Workstation, select End of Day Procedure from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the End of Day window, ensure that the Transfer your days transactions check box is selected in the Financial Exchange with QuickBooks section.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Choose other End of Day options, as desired.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

To run a manual exchange:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Update QuickBooks from the Financial menu or from the Financial Center.

    +
    • +
+

You might manually run an exchange, for example, if you want to do mid-day billings from QuickBooks Desktop and want to be sure that you have up-to-the-minute Point of Sale sales data.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Your QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file must be open or you must have your financial software preferences set to allow automatic access during exchanges.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use remote data sharing, you may need to have your QuickBooks Desktop company file open and the server application running during all financial exchanges depending on how you have configured the program.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When the exchange is completed, a summary window displays the number of records exchanged and whether any errors occurred. Select View Activity Log from this window for help in troubleshooting any errors that are listed.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

What data is shared?

+

How QuickBooks Desktop handles POS data

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Financial Exchange Reports

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_accoutpaymenttypes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_accoutpaymenttypes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0620f2d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_accoutpaymenttypes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + +Custom Mapping of Financial Exchange Accounts + + + + + + + + + + +

Custom Mapping of Financial Exchange Accounts

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

Mapping accounts and payment types creates a link between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop, so that your point-of-sale information is sent to QuickBooks Desktop in the manner you prefer.

+

 

+

Using the Default Account Mappings

+

A default Chart of Accounts is used by Point of Sale to send information to QuickBooks Desktop. When using the default account mappings:

+
    +
  • +

    If the default accounts dont already exist in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software chart of accounts, Point of Sale automatically creates most of them for you.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Certain default accounts, including Undeposited Funds, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Sales Tax Payable, Cost of Goods Sold, and Inventory Asset are by Point of Sale in your financial software.

    +
    • +
+

What if I already have the same account types with custom names in QuickBooks Desktop?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Warning: If you are using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service reconciliation feature, the default account and payment type mappings for credit and debit cards are required. If you change these mappings, the reconciliation feature will not work.

+

 

+

Customizing the Account Mappings

+

The default accounts are necessary to establish the initial connection with QuickBooks Desktop. However, once the connection is established, you can customize the mappings to QuickBooks Desktop accounts.

+

How to map custom accounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Payment Type Mappings

+

Payment type mappings cannot be changed in Point of Sale. Point of Sale will always map to the payment methods specified in the default mappings table. To change these mappings requires that you change the payment types associated with these payment methods in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Important: If using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service and QuickBooks Desktop financial software, changing the payment type mappings will cause the merchant service reconciliation feature to stop functioning.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks financial software handles POS data

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_create_qbdefaultaccts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_create_qbdefaultaccts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e74979d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_create_qbdefaultaccts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ + + + + + + + + +Create Default Accounts in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create Default Accounts in QuickBooks

+

Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+ +

This topic has been hidden; this info dispensed in the QB Connection Wizard

+ +

Certain QuickBooks accounts, included in the default chart of accounts used by Point of Sale to send data, are required to establish a connection between the two programs.

+

Point of Sale cannot automatically create these accounts for you in QuickBooks. These accounts include Undeposited Funds, Accounts Payable, Accounts Receivable, Cost of Goods Sold, Inventory Asset, and Sales Tax Payable.

+

In addition, inventory must be enabled in QuickBooks. The QuickBooks Connection Wizard will alert you if inventory must be turned on or these accounts do not exist.

+

What if I already have the same account types with custom names in QuickBooks?Click to display a popup topic

+

How do I?

+

Turn on inventory in QuickBooks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Create the necessary default accounts in QuickBooks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize account mappings

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_custnameorder.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_custnameorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f90f40f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_custnameorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Name Order for Financial Exchanges + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Name Order for Financial Exchanges

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop both have First and Last name fields for customers. QuickBooks Desktop also has a full Customer Name field, which is populated with some combination of first and last, or company names when Point of Sale sends new customer records to QuickBooks Desktop.

+

(Pro) For business customers (Track as Company check box selected on customer record), Point of Sale will always send the customer's company name to the full Customer Name field in QuickBooks Desktop.

+

For individual customers, use this setting to control the order of the customer name sent by Point of Sale to the Full Name field in QuickBooks Desktop.

+

To change the customer name order:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale Edit menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Financial preferences page, select one of the three name order options:

    +
    3. +
+

<last>,<first>

+

<first><last>

+

<title><first><last>

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks Desktop financial software handles POS data

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_defaultaccounts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_defaultaccounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ddd9b8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_defaultaccounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,507 @@ + + + + + + +Default Chart of Accounts and Mappings + + + + + + + + + + + +

Default Chart of Accounts and Mappings

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

These tables display the default accounts and payment type mappings used by Point of Sale to transfer data to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Learn how to use custom accounts or mappings

+

 

+

Default Account Mappings

+ + ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Point of Sale

+		 +

QuickBooks Desktop Account

+		 +

Account Type

+
+

Cash In Drawer

+		 +

Cash In Drawer  

+		 +

Bank

+
+

Check

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+

Credit Card

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+

Debit Card

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+

Gift Certificates

+		 +

Gift Certificates Outstanding

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Gift Card

+		 +

Gift Cards Outstanding

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Accounts Receivable

+		 +

Accounts Receivable

+		 +

Accounts Receivable

+
+

Sales Tax

+		 +

Sales Tax Payable

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Customer Order Deposit Taken

+		 +

Customer Deposits

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Purchase Clearing

+		 +

Unbilled Purchases

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

Voucher Adjustment

+		 +

Purchase Discounts

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+
+

Freight In

+		 +

Freight & Shipping Costs

+		 +

Expense

+
+

Voucher Fee

+		 +

Freight & Shipping Costs

+		 +

Expense

+
+

Accounts Payable

+		 +

Accounts Payable

+		 +

Accounts Payable

+
+

Document Offset

+		 +

POS Inventory Adjustments

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+
+

Shipping

+		 +

Shipping and Delivery Income

+		 +

Income

+
+

Pay out Expense

+		 +

Cash Drawer Payouts

+		 +

Expense

+
+

Tips

+		 +

Employee Tips Payable

+		 +

Other Current Liability

+
+

POS Balancing Adjustments

+		 +

Balancing Adjustments

+		 +

Other Expense

+
+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Default Payment Type Mappings

+ + ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Point of Sale Payment

+		 +

QuickBooks Desktop Payment Method

+		 +

QuickBooks Desktop Payment Type

+
+

Cash

+		 +

Cash

+		 +

Cash

+
+

Check

+		 +

Check

+		 +

Check

+
+

Debit Card

+		 +

Debit Card

+		 +

Debit Card

+
+

Credit Card: American Express

+		 +

American Express

+		 +

American Express

+
+

Credit Card: MasterCard

+		 +

MasterCard

+		 +

MasterCard

+
+

Credit Card: Visa

+		 +

Visa

+		 +

Visa

+
+

Credit Card: Discover

+		 +

Discover

+		 +

Discover

+
+

Credit Card: Diners Club

+		 +

Diners Club

+		 +

Other Credit Card

+
+

Credit Card: JCB

+		 +

JCB

+		 +

Other Credit Card

+
+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Default Item Account Mappings

+ + +++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

POS Item Type

+		 +

Income Account

+		 +

COGS Account

+		 +

Asset Account

+
+

Inventory

+		 +

Merchandise Sales

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+		 +

Inventory Asset

+
+

Non-inventory

+		 +

Merchandise Sales

+		 +

Purchases - Resale Items

+		 +

Purchases - Resale Items

+
+

Service

+		 +

Service Sales

+		 +

Subcontracted Services

+		 +

Subcontracted Services

+
+

Assembly

+		 +

Merchandise Sales

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+		 +

Inventory Asset

+
+

Special Order

+		 +

Merchandise Sales

+		 +

Cost of Goods Sold

+		 +

Inventory Asset

+
+

Group

+		 +

n/a

+		 +

n/a

+		 +

n/a

+
+ +

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize account mappings

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_employeehours.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_employeehours.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..828d61b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_employeehours.htm @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Employee Hours Worked + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Employee Hours Worked

+

Use Time Clock to Record Employee Hours

+
+

Pro

+
+

Requirements for this Feature in QuickBooks Financial Software:
+  Using QuickBooks Financial Software 2008 - 2010*
+  General time tracking preference enabled Click to expand/collapse topic
+  Hourly employees set up to use time data for paychecks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + +

 

+

If you use Time Clock in Point of Sale to record employee hours worked, the time entries can be sent to your QuickBooks financial software for payroll purposes. A corresponding time record is created in QuickBooks for each time entry recorded in Point of Sale.

+

To send employee hours to QuickBooks:

+
    +
  1. +

    Setup your employees in Point of Sale as hourly and use Time Clock to record hours worked.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Financial page of your Point of Sale company preferences, select the check box labeled Send employee hours worked to QuickBooks using payroll item: <selection>.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    The default payroll item used is Regular Hours. You can change this selection to any hourly payroll item already setup in your QuickBooks financial software. If time worked needs to go to a different payment item than selected (overtime for example), you will have to modify the time entry in QuickBooks.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Run Financial Exchanges with QuickBooks to send your time records with your other data.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Learn more about Internet connection requiredQuickBooks Payroll solutions

+

 

+

Sample time entry created in QuickBooks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Modify a time entry in QuickBooks Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Once time records have been sent to QuickBooks, they can no longer be edited in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale creates employee records in QuickBooks, if they don't already exist, in order to post time records. If you have two employees with identical first and last name they will be differentiated in QuickBooks by appending an incrementing number in curly brackets to the last name, i.e., Joe Shmoe and Joe Shmoe {2}. QuickBooks ignores the curly brackets (and anything inside) when printing the employee name.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Multi-Store) If time records come from multiple stores with identical first and last names, Point of Sale assumes they are for the same employee. If they are two separate employees, differentiate them in Point of Sale in either the first or last name fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale does not send tip or commission information to QuickBooks for payroll purposes. This information is available in Point of Sale reports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    * If you are on an earlier version of QuickBooks Financial Software, your time entries are not sent. However, the Time Clock Weekly Summary report in Point of Sale is formatted the same as the employee Weekly Timesheet available in QuickBooks, allowing you to quickly transpose your time worked information for payroll processing.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_importeditemdescriptions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_importeditemdescriptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a4959d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_importeditemdescriptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + +Can I control how my imported items are described in Point of Sale? + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Can I control how my imported items are described in Point of Sale?

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customizing Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

During the import process, you can specify how the QuickBooks Desktop item descriptive fields are populated to the Point of Sale item descriptive fields.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

QuickBooks Desktop item descriptive fields

+		 +

Can be populated to one of these Point of Sale fields

+
+

Sales Description

+		 +

Item Name (printed on sales receipts) or Description 2

+
+

Purchase Description

+		 +

Item Name or Item Description

+
+

Item Name/Number

+		 +

Alternate Lookup

+
+ +

 

+

Note: In Point of Sale, the names of the Item Name and Item Description fields can be renamed to better meet your needs, Pro-level users can also  customize printed documents to include the fields you wish.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_importitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_importitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cfab975 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_importitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Import QuickBooks Items + + + + + + + + + +

Import QuickBooks Desktop Items

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

(Pro) This option is available at Headquarters only.

+

You may have existing items in QuickBooks Desktop that you now want to track in Point of Sale. You can easily import these items to Point of Sale at any time, making them available to list on Point of Sale documents. Importing your QuickBooks Desktop items is optional. After importing, inventory items are not routinely exchanged between the two programs. The imported items should be tracked only in Point of Sale after import.

+

After the two programs are integrated, you will be prompted to import your QuickBooks Desktop items each time you open your item list in Point of Sale until you elect to import or indicate that you do not want to import. Choose Ask Me again Later if you plan to import, but are not ready to do at this time.

+

To manually initiate an import of your QuickBooks Desktop items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure your QuickBooks Desktop financial software is running and in single-user mode.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Import QuickBooks Desktop Items from the Financial menu or from the Advanced Options page of the Financial Center.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

More Information about Importing QuickBooks Items

+

What are the benefits of importing my QuickBooks Desktop Items?

+

Are there reasons I may not want to import my QuickBooks Desktop Items?

+

Can I import QuickBooks Desktop items later?

+

Can I import some items and not others?

+

Can I control how my imported inventory items are described in Point of Sale?

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Importing of items from QuickBooks Desktop can be done multiple times. This can be helpful if you import only selected items the first time and later want to import the others, want to import from multiple QuickBooks Desktop company files, or have added new items to QuickBooks Desktop after the initial import. Be careful not to import the same items a second time or duplicate item records will be created in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Once imported, the imported items should no longer be tracked in QuickBooks Desktop. It is strongly recommended that all purchasing, receiving, and selling of these items be done in Point of Sale only.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The on-hand quantity of imported items is set to zero (0) in QuickBooks Desktop and a compensating General Journal transaction is created to debit the Inventory Asset account. On the Point of Sale side, inventory adjustment memos are created to record the addition of the items to inventory. The memos are sent to QuickBooks Desktop, balancing against the General Journal transaction so that no net change in inventory value occurs.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Imported items should be reviewed and edited to take advantage of the inventory tracking and control features in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you have existing items (and customers and vendors) in an application other than QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you may be able to import this data using the Data Import Wizard.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange overview

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_infoexchanged.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_infoexchanged.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15119d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_infoexchanged.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + +What information is exchanged with QuickBooks? + + + + + + + + + + + + +

What information is exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop?

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Overview | Exchange Reports

+

 

+

All transactions and data of the following types that has not previously exchanged is sent each time Financial Exchange is initiated. Your Financial Exchange settings may affect what and how data is sent.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + +
+

Point of Sale to QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +

QuickBooks Desktop to Point of Sale

+
+
    +
  • +

    New customers and updated customer information (except account balances)

    +
    • +
  • +

    New vendors and updated vendor information (active)

    +
    • +
  • +

    New vendor payment terms

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales information (receipts, deposits, sales tax, shipping)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Payments on account

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cash drawer payouts

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receiving information (vouchers)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Vendor billing information (optional)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory adjustments (memos, aggregated)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Employee time records*

    +
    • +
  • +

    Multi-store transfer information

    +
    • +
+

* Requires QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +
    +
  • +

    New customers and updated customer information, including account limit, balance, aging status, and any past due amount

    +
    • +
  • +

    New vendors and updated vendor information (active)

    +
    • +
  • +

    New vendor payment terms

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory items (not routinely; must manually import)

    +
    • +
+
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_itemaccounts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_itemaccounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dc2f64d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_itemaccounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + +Mapping Item Accounts + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Mapping Item Accounts

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

The default item Cost of Goods Sold (COGS), Income, and Asset accounts, used to post item sales to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, are defined in Point of Sale company preferences. The default accounts are assigned to all items in inventory.

+

You can also have Point of Sale create item sub-accounts by appending the name of the department (and/or store name) to the end of the default account name. Learn more about sub-accounts.

+

There may be circumstances under which you want individual item sales or costs to post to accounts other than the defaults. You can change the default accounts, so they are suggested for all new items, or use the following procedure to assign different accounts on an item-by-item basis.

+

To assign QuickBooks Desktop accounts to an individual item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure the accounts you want to use are set up in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    2. +
+

This makes them available for selection on the item record.

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the Point of Sale item form, then select the Additional Info tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make new selections from the drop-down lists for COGS, Income, and/or Item Asset accounts.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Edit information in other item fields as applicable.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

Your new account mappings will go into effect on the next Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop.

+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    With a few exceptionsClick to display a popup topic for item Income accounts, Point of Sale does not place limitations on the QuickBooks Desktop account types you can map for items. All of your QuickBooks Desktop accounts are available for selection. This mapping freedom allows, for example, you to map a service or non-inventory items cost to a QuickBooks Desktop financial expense account.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Mapping to account types other than COGS, income/other income, or asset accounts in QuickBooks Desktop may produce unusual results.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Item account columns are available to add to your item list and selected inventory reports.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Customize List Columns

+

Modify Reports

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_itemimport_benefits.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_itemimport_benefits.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2324593 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_itemimport_benefits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Benefits of Importing QuickBooks Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Benefits of Importing QuickBooks Desktop Items

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customizing Exchanges | FAQs

+

Benefits of Importing your QuickBooks Desktop Items

+
    +
  • +

    Saves time: There is no need for you to manually re-enter your QuickBooks Desktop financial software item information in Point of Sale. Your imported items are immediately available for use in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Efficiency: Consolidating items in Point of Sale program results in more efficient purchasing and inventory control and more meaningful reporting.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Fewer data-entry errors: Less manual data entry means a lower likelihood of data entry errors.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_qb_integratedappspref.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_qb_integratedappspref.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..370c2c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_qb_integratedappspref.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + +Set QuickBooks Preferences to Allow Access + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set QuickBooks Preferences to Allow Access

+

Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

Access preferences must be set in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software to allow Point of Sale to send/receive information from your financial company file. Typically, this access is granted when you run the connection wizard.

+

However, this option may vary slightly between versions of QuickBooks and you may have to set this preference manually as described below.

+

To make sure QuickBooks Desktop allows access to Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Edit menu in your QuickBooks financial software, select Preferences and then select Integrated Applications.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Company Preferences tab and make sure the following check box is NOT selected:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    "Dont allow any applications to access this company file"

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to save your changes.

    +
    2. +
+

         image\qbfs_integratedapppref.gif

+

 

+

Allowing Access even when QuickBooks Desktop financial software is not Running

+

While QuickBooks Desktop must be running and your company file open to initially establish the connection, you can set your QuickBooks Desktop preferences to allow Point of Sale to log in automatically, even when QuickBooks Desktop is not running, for future exchanges.

+

Note: This setting is only available after the initial connection is made. This setting is not applicable if you are using the remote data sharing connection option.

+
    +
  1. +

    Go to your Integrated Applications preferences in QuickBooks Desktop, as described above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the application Point of Sale and then select properties.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make sure the option checkboxes on the Access Rights tab are set as follows:

    +
    4. +
+

Selected:

+
    +
  • +

    "Allow this application to access this company file"

    +
    • +
  • +

    "Allow this application to log in automatically"

    +
    • +
+

Not selected:

+
    +
  • +

    "Prompt before allowing access"

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select or create a user that Point of Sale will use to log in. We recommend that you select "Admin" as the user, but you can create a new one if desired. The specified user must have rights to access all data areas of the company file.

    +
    2. +
+

For example, if you create a user named "QB POS" and select this as your login choice, Point of Sale will log in with this identity (and corresponding access settings). Make sure the "QBPOS" user has full access rights.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to save these settings in QuickBooks.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_removellistitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_removellistitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a72a269 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_removellistitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Removing Unused List Items in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Remove Unused List Items in QuickBooks

+

Financial Exchange Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

If you've been using QuickBooks financial software for some time, you may have accumulated list items that are no longer needed. If you plan to import this data to Point of Sale, you may want to clean up your lists before importing.

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Lists menu, select the list you want to edit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the list item you want to remove.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Item, Vendor, Customer:Job, etc., at the bottom of the screen to display available options.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Delete or Make Inactive. Deleting an item removes it permanently. Making it inactive removes the item from a list but retains the record so you can access it again. Inactive items in your financial software will not be imported to Point of Sale.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Set up sales tax in QuickBooks

+

Set QuickBooks preferences to allow access

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_requirements.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_requirements.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2745d6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_requirements.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Requirements of QuickBooks Integration + + + + + + + + + + +

Requirements of QuickBooks Desktop Integration

+

Financial Exchange Overview | QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard | FAQs

+

 

+

Before you can connect Point of Sale to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and share data, the following requirements must be met:

+
    +
  • +

    You must be using QuickBooks Desktop Pro, Premier, or Enterprise Solutions

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    If connecting across a network, a properly installed and configured network with mapped drives as appropriate for your installation choice

    +
    • +
+

Networking issues and FAQs

+
    +
  • +

    You must have installed QuickBooks and set up the company file you will use with Point of Sale

    +
    • +
+

QuickBooks Desktop installation options

+

How do I set up my QuickBooks Desktop company file?

+
    +
  • +

    To initially establish the connection between the programs, your QuickBooks Desktop financial software must be running and your company file open

    +
    • +
+

If you meet all of these requirements, you are ready to use the connection wizard to connect to QuickBooks Desktop.

+

 

+

I am still having trouble connecting. What could be wrong?Click to display a popup topic

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewdeptcodes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewdeptcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..08e2062 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewdeptcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Imported Item Departments + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Imported Item Departments

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

Point of Sale categorizes items and reports sales based on user-defined departments. When you import items from QuickBooks, they are all assigned to a single department named QuickBooks Financial Software.

+

If you want to track and report sales using departments that are more meaningful for your business, you should create new departments as needed and then edit the imported items in inventory to assign them to your new departments.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a department

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewimportedcustomers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewimportedcustomers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fddb6f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewimportedcustomers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Imported Customers + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Imported Customers

+

Exchange Overview | Customers Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

The Use with QuickBooks check box determines whether information for a particular customer is shared with QuickBooks Desktop during daily updates. Select or clear this check box as appropriate for your imported customers.

+

In addition, when you add a new customer in Point of Sale and want this customer's;s information sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software, make sure the check box is selected.

+

It is recommended that you review and edit customer records that have been imported from QuickBooks Desktop to take advantage of additional Point of Sale customer features.

+
    +
  • +

    Custom Fields (Pro) Data from custom fields is exchanged, providing the fields are named exactly the same in both programs.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Note: You can specify to have the Use with QuickBooks check box selected or cleared by default for all new customers in company preferences. If youd like to ensure that all new customers are shared with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, make sure the preference option is set to Yes.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks Desktop financial software handles POS data

+

Send detailed item and customer information to QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewimporteditems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewimporteditems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b645cf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewimporteditems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Imported Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Imported Items

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

QuickBooks Desktop items of the following types can be imported and are assigned the Point of Sale item types shown below.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

QuickBooks Desktop Item Type

+		 +

Point of Sale Item Type

+
+

Inventory Part

+		 +

Inventory

+
+

Non-Inventory Part

+		 +

Non-Inventory

+
+

Other Charge

+		 +

Non-Inventory

+
+

Service

+		 +

Service

+
+

Assembly

+		 +

Assembly  (Pro)

+
+

Group

+		 +

Group (Pro)

+
+

Imported items should be reviewed and edited as needed to take advantage of Point of Sale inventory features. Pay particular attention to reviewing the following fields in the imported item records:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

QBPOS Field

+		 +

Description

+
+

Item Type

+		 +

Review item types to ensure your items are properly categorized.

+
+

Department

+		 +

All imported items are assigned to the default department QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software. See the discussion about departments and edit them as needed to improve reporting by department.

+
+

Attribute

+		 +

Use this field to describe your items by color, a second size, a pattern, or any other product trait. This field name can be customized.

+
+

Size

+		 +

Use this field to enter item size to facilitate purchasing and reporting. This field name can be customized and used for product attributes other than size.

+
+

Price Levels

+		 +

The item price from QuickBooks Desktop is placed in the Regular Price field for imported items. Prices at other price levels, if used, are not calculated for imported items. Manually assign prices or markdown percentages for each price level on the item record, as desired.

+
+

UPC Codes

+		 +

Scan or enter UPC codes, as applicable, if you want to list items on receipts by scanning vendor-printed tags.

+
+

QuickBooks Desktop Information

+		 +

Review and edit the QuickBooks Desktop item accounts (COGS, Income, and Inventory Asset) used when posting item sales to QuickBooks Desktop.

+
+

Custom Fields (Pro)
+
+
+Style Definitions (Pro)

+		 +

Data from custom fields is exchanged, providing the fields are named exactly the same in both programs.

+

To use the style features, inventory items grouped into a style must be modified so that all members of a particular style have identical Department and Item Name fields.

+
+

Other Item Fields

+		 +

Review and edit other Point of Sale item fields to take advantage of features important to your business.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Inventory overview

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewpos.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f25401 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Purchase Orders

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Purchase orders are not imported from QuickBooks Desktop. If you wish, you can manually enter existing QuickBooks Desktop purchase orders into Point of Sale. Doing so will allow coordinated tracking of purchases, better reporting capabilities, and the ability to create receiving vouchers from these POs when the merchandise arrives.

+

If you recreate QuickBooks Desktop purchase orders in Point of Sale, they should be canceled or deleted from QuickBooks Desktop as they are now tracked in Point of Sale.

+

Note: If you have items you did not import and do not plan to use in Point of Sale, you should perform all activities regarding these itemspurchasing, receiving, reportingin QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Purchasing overview

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewvendors.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewvendors.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..27f5619 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_reviewvendors.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Review Imported Vendors + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Review Imported Vendors

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Non-merchandise vendors, such as utility companies and the agencies to which you pay sales tax, are stored in the vendor list in QuickBooks Desktop. As such, these agencies may have been imported to Point of Sale as vendors.

+

Do not delete these vendors in Point of Sale. If you prefer not to see these vendors in your vendor list, select the Inactive check box on the vendor records and filter the vendor list to show only active vendors. You may also want to enter or edit other imported vendor information:

+
    +
  • +

    Vendor Website addresses for one-click access (requires Internet connection)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ensure the vendor account number and payment terms are what you want applied to purchase orders and receiving vouchers created in Point of Sale

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Data from custom fields is shared, providing the custom fields are named exactly the same in both programs.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Vendor overview

+

Review your Point of Sale setup for Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks Desktop financial software handles POS data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_selectitemstoimport.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_selectitemstoimport.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fe4634a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_selectitemstoimport.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Select Items to Import from QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Items to Import from QuickBooks Desktop

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs  

+

 

+

You can import all or just selected items from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Why would I import only selected items?

+

To select specific items to import:

+
    +
  1. +

    Answer Yes when asked if you want to import selected items.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Select Items to Import dialog, make sure the check box in the Import column is selected for all items you want to import and cleared (not checked) for all items you do not want to import.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    By default, all items are selected. You can use the Select All or Clear All buttons to select or clear all check boxes at once.

    +
    • +
  • +

    An easy way to select/clear check boxes is to place the focus in the Import column, then arrow up or down through the list, pressing <Spacebar> to select/clear the checkboxes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To locate a particular item, sort by the column containing the information by which you want to search. Do this by clicking the image\blue_sort_indicator.gif icon in the column header. Then type in the Search field to automatically be taken to matching records. For example, to locate an item with a sales description of "Cabinet Fixture," sort by the Sales Description column and type "cabinet" in the Search field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To view a group of items that share common information, select Filter View. For example, if you wish to view all of your service items, you could filter by the Item Type of Service.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Filtering or sorting may reduce the number of items displayed in the Select Items to Import dialog. However, all items that have the Import check box selected will be imported, whether or not they are currently displayed on screen. Cancel the filtered view or sort by a column with an entry for all items to display all of your items again.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK when finished to begin item import.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Import QuickBooks Desktop items

+

Review imported records

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_setqbsales_tax.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_setqbsales_tax.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1d6875d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_setqbsales_tax.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Set Up QuickBooks Sales Tax + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up QuickBooks Desktop Sales Tax

+

Sales Tax Overview | Sales Tax Integration

+

 

+

If you collect sales tax, you must have sales tax turned on in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, so that Point of Sale can send sales tax information.

+

To turn on the collection of sales tax in QuickBooks Desktop financial software:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and open the company file which you are going to integrate with Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the QuickBooks Desktop Edit menu, select Preferences.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Sales Tax from the left-side preferences menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the Company Preferences tab.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    If you collect sales tax, make sure the response for "Do you charge sales tax?" is Yes.

    +
    6. +
+

If you do not charge sales tax, answer No.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

With this setting turned on, Point of Sale will automatically create sales tax items and tax codes, as necessary, in QuickBooks Desktop when sending sales tax information. Learn more.

+

 

+

Custom Mapping of Sales Taxes to QuickBooks Desktop

+

If you prefer to set up your own QuickBooks Desktop sales tax items, or if you wish to use sales tax groups in QuickBooks Desktop to pay taxes to multiple agencies, define them in QuickBooks Desktop first. Then, when setting up sales tax codes in Point of Sale, link them to the applicable tax items/groups you have set up in QuickBooks Desktop. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop documentation and help files for more information about defining tax items and groups.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_verifytransaction.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_verifytransaction.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..533e19d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_verifytransaction.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Verify the Exchange of Individual Transactions + + + + + + + + + + +

Verify the Exchange of Individual Transactions

+

Overview | Customizing Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

If you have Point of Sale integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, there are several ways for you to check the Financial Exchange status of individual transactions with QuickBooks Desktop:

+
    +
  • +

    Financial exchange reports which provide a detailed listing of all documents and records exchanged

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to view the transactions created in QuickBooks Desktop via links from your Point of Sale documents and records (available from Server Workstation only)

    +
    • +
  • +

    The activity log which is especially useful for troubleshooting exchange errors

    +
    • +
  • +

    The QB Status field in Point of Sale lists (explained below)

    +
    • +
+

The QuickBooks Status Field in Point of Sale List

+

The QB Status field is available to add to your Point of Sale lists for each data type sent to QuickBooks Desktop (customers, vendors, sales history, receiving history, etc.). This field shows the exchange status of a document or record:

+
    +
  • +

    Not Posted - not yet sent to QuickBooks Desktop. This transaction will be sent with the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Completed - successfully sent to QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Error - attempting to send the transaction to QuickBooks Desktop resulted in an error. Check the activity log for clues to resolve the error.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Unbilled purchases - (vouchers only) merchandise has been received on a voucher but has yet to be billed; document has been sent to unbilled purchases in QuickBooks Desktop. Displayed only if you have selected to enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Data recovery in QuickBooks Desktop

+

How QuickBooks Desktop handles POS data

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_viewqbfstransactions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_viewqbfstransactions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c5e1fb2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_viewqbfstransactions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + +View Point of Sale Transactions in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + +

View Point of Sale Transactions in QuickBooks Desktop

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Financial Exchange Reports

+

 

+

Note: This feature is available from the Server Workstation only and requires that your QuickBooks Desktop financial software be running, even if you have set your preferences to allow routine exchanges when not running. Point of Sale will automatically launch QuickBooks Desktop, if not already running, when you select this option.

+

 

+

Point of sale customer, vendor, and history document lists have active links to the corresponding record(s) and or document(s) created in QuickBooks Desktop financial software. This link helps confirm that a record/document was successfully exchanged and allows you to open the QuickBooks Desktop record/document for viewing.

+

Shown is an example from sales history.

+

 

+

         Sales History list - View Financial History

+

To confirm/view a corresponding QuickBooks Desktop record/transaction:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Point of Sale list, highlight the record or document of interest.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Show Financial Details.

    +
    3. +
+

The Financial History window is displayed, showing the exchange status and containing a link to view the document (if successfully sent).

+

          Financial History window

+

This window will show one of the following, as applicable:

+

Documents:

+
    +
  • +

    Sent to QuickBooks Successfully The document has been sent to QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Not sent The document has not been sent yet.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Problem sending to QuickBooks The document had an error when trying to send it.

    +
    • +
+

Customer and Vendors: (Basic)

+
    +
  • +

    Synchronized with QuickBooks - Record has been synchronized and no changes have been made on the Point of Sale side.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pending Synchronization Record has data to be shared with QuickBooks Desktop (or it hasnt been shared yet but is flagged to do so).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Not shared with QuickBooks Customer or vendor is not flagged to be shared with QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Problem Synchronizing with QuickBooks The customer or vendor had a problem exchanging.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Open in QuickBooks to view the listed document/records. (QuickBooks Desktop will be launched).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Other Options on this window include (only one available depending on current status):

+

Resend this record during the next exchange Select this check box to resend the document during the next Financial Exchange. You might do this if you had to restore an older QuickBooks Desktop backup and this document is now missing in QuickBooks Desktop. Note: This may result in the document being listed twice in the financial history window, but the link to the original document will no longer work.

+

Mark this document as successfully sent Select this check box if you do not want this document sent to QuickBooks Desktop during the next Financial Exchange. You might make this choice if you restore a Point of Sale backup that was created before the document was sent to QuickBooks Desktop. Sending it again in this case would result in duplicates in QuickBooks Desktop.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Data recovery in QuickBooks Desktop

+

How QuickBooks Desktop handles POS data

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_warning_manuallyaddingqbitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_warning_manuallyaddingqbitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..62d1af0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_warning_manuallyaddingqbitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Warning: Manually Adding QuickBooks Items to Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Warning: Manually Adding QuickBooks Items to Point of Sale

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs  

+

 

+

 Warning: If you have existing inventory items in your QuickBooks financial software, choose not to import them, and then manually add those same items and quantities to Point of Sale, your financial software inventory value can be erroneously increased.

+

 

+

This is because when you manually add inventory items and quantities in Point of Sale, the program will send inventory adjustments (as General Journal transactions) to QuickBooks, showing increases in inventory value. In this case, you will need to make a compensating one-time adjustment in QuickBooks to correct your inventory value.

+

Refer to the instructions in your QuickBooks financial software documentation for more information about adjusting inventory amounts.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_whyimportselecteditems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_whyimportselecteditems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..96e407c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_whyimportselecteditems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Why would I import only selected items? + + + + + + + + + + +

Why would I import only selected items?

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs  

+

 

+

All of your QuickBooks inventory items will be imported unless you choose to import only selected items. You will not be able to order, receive, or sell non-imported items in Point of Sale (unless you enter them manually).

+

Most users will want to import all their existing items. However, there may be good reasons to import only selected items:

+
    +
  • +

    You may have items in QuickBooks that you do not resell. For example, shopping bags or cleaning supplies. You may want these items defined in QuickBooks financial software to accurately keep track of supply costs, but since it does not affect point-of-sale activities, there is no reason for the item to be in Point of Sale. You could choose not to import the item, and instead track it in QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You may have a large number of outdated items which you no longer use in QuickBooks financial software. Rather than delete such items or make them inactive in the financial software, you may prefer not to import them. This way, you still have an active record of these items in your financial software in case you need them in the future.

    +
    • +
+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    If you choose to "divide" your inventory, meaning you track certain items in your financial software and others in Point of Sale, you will only be able to conduct activities regarding a particular item in the program that tracks it. For instance, you cannot track item quantities in QuickBooks financial software, but order it on a purchase order in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_whynotimport.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_whynotimport.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0d3c8b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/financialexchange_whynotimport.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Why might I not want to import QuickBooks items? + + + + + + + + + + + +

Why might I not want to import QuickBooks items?

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs  

+

 

+

There may be good reasons to not import your QuickBooks items, or to import only some of the items.

+

Why you might not want to import:

+
    +
  • +

    Item information in your financial software is not current: If you have a large number of outdated inventory items in QuickBooks, you might not want this data transferred to Point of Sale. If this is the case, you might want to take some time to clean up your QuickBooks item list by updating older records and deleting or inactivating unused ones. You can always import these items later.

    +
    • +
  • +

    QuickBooks items not defined to take advantage of advanced inventory features of Point of Sale: Such as grouping your items into styles (a Pro feature). Since QuickBooks financial software does not have similar features, it may be easier to start fresh by manually entering your items in Point of Sale in order to take full advantage of these features.

    +
    • +
+

Warning: Not Importing and then Adding the Same Items to Point of Sale

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_addvalue.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_addvalue.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b12001b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_addvalue.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + + +Add Value to A Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Value to A Gift Card

+ +

This topic duplicates a popup topic. Left only for search purposes.

+ +

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service.  What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

You can add additional value to a gift card in the same manner as when originally selling it.

+

The new sale increases the stored value of the card on the Gift Card Services online servers.

+

Take me to the selling a gift card topic.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_checkbalance.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_checkbalance.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e807512 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_checkbalance.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +Check a Gift Card Balance + + + + + + + + + + + +

Check a Gift Card Balance

+

Gift Card Service Overview | Sell or Recharge a Gift Card

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service.  What if I use another Service?

+

To check the balance of a gift card from a sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales receipt with or without items listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Check Gift Card Balance.

    +
    3. +
+

The Gift Card Balance Inquiry window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Swipe the gift card or type  the card number and then click Check Balance.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the service and displays the card balance.

+

 

+

To view the balances of all outstanding gift cards run the Gift Card Balance Summary report.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Collect tips on gift card sales

+

Handling returns of purchases made by gift card

+

Replace a lost gift card

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_configure.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_configure.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7aa4df5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_configure.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + +Configuring your System for a Gift Card Account + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure your System for a Gift Card Account

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service.  What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Once your account is approved and you have received your Gift Card Account Number (typically in 2-3 business days), enter the account number in Point of Sale company preferences and specify how you will communicate with the service. Once you have received your cards, you will be ready to start processing gift card transactions.

+

To enter your gift card account number:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company, and then Merchant & Gift Card Services from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the account number provided to you in the Gift Card Service area on the page.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Communication Setup from the left-side preferences list, and specify how you will communicate with the service, either Secure Internet Connection or Direct-dial (modem). Click Internet Connection Setup if you need help configuring your Internet connection (this step is not necessary if you have already set up communication for the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service):

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Return to the Merchant & Gift Services page and select Verify next to your Gift Card Account Number. Point of Sale will do a test connection and confirm that your account is active and ready to use. If errors are encountered, a message is displayed with information about resolving the situation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Gift Card Service overview

+

Sell a gift card

+

Redeem a gift card

+

Order custom gift cards

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1d28e3a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +giftcard_hdi + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Sign up for a QuickBooks POS Gift Card account

+

Configure Point of Sale for the Gift Card Service

+

Sell or recharge a gift card

+

Redeem a gift card

+

Check the balance of gift cards

+

Handle returns of gift card purchases

+

Run gift card reports

+

Order custom gift cards

+

Use another gift card service

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_logo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_logo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ad5ded --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_logo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + + +Custom Gift Cards + + + + + + + + + + +

Custom Gift Cards

+

QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service.  What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Gift cards for use with the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service are available in either standard or custom designs.

+

If you choose to do a custom design, you will work with a card designer to create a card with artwork and logo of your choosing. Proofs of the design are submitted for your approval prior to printing the cards.

+

Visit our QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service website for more information.

+

Additional fees apply.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_otherservice.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_otherservice.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3c379ce --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_otherservice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + + +Using Gift Cards from Another Service + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Gift Cards from Another Service

+

Payment Overview | Sign Up for a Gift Card Account

+

 

+

If you do not have an account with the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service, you can still record gift card transactions in Point of Sale, using this procedure.

+

Sell a Gift Card

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales receipt with or without other items listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information field of the receipt, begin typing Gift Card and then select Gift Card from the list of items displayed.  The Sell Gift Card dialog is opened.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the amount and the gift card number and click Save.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Take payment and print/save the receipt in the normal manner.

    +
    2. +
+

Note: Follow your services instructions for processing the transaction to add value to the card.

+

Redeem a Gift Card

+
    +
  1. +

    List the items being purchased on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Gift as the payment type and then select Gift Card.

    +
    3. +
+

Follow your service's instructions for verifying and using the balance available on the card.

+
    +
  1. +

    Ensure Redeem Card is selected in the Gift Card dialog and edit the amount, if necessary, to reflect the gift card balance being used as payment.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Print/save the receipt.

    +
    4. +
+

+

When using another gift card service for these transactions:

+
    +
  • +

    Point of Sale does not connect to your service to update card balances for the transaction.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale does not track the balances of your gift cards.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can view a list of your gift card transactions in the Payments Payment Reconciliation Gift Card List report.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cash Drawer reports (X/Z-Out) will reflect these transactions.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Financial Software, the transactions will be sent to QuickBooks and be posted to the appropriate accounts.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_oview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e9427b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Configuring Point of Sale for Gift Cards

+

 

+

An account with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service* provides an integrated gift card processing solution that allows you to sell and redeem stored-value gift cards from within your Point of Sale software.

+

Key benefits of the service include:

+
    +
  • +

    No duplicate data entry. All communication with the service and recording ot gift card transactions is done directly in your Point of Sale software.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Transactions can be automatically posted to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Card value is tracked on the services online servers rather than on the card itself, giving you the flexibility to sell in whatever denominations your customers want and to add additional value to a gift card by "re-charging" the card.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Check the outstanding balance of a gift card from the receipt payment screen.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Choose from standard or custom cards. Custom cards allow you to add your own store logo and/or artwork to your gift cards.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Integrated gift card balance and activity reporting within Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
+

You can apply for an account with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service while completing the Setup Interview. The application takes just minutes to complete, and youll receive an approval decision and your Gift Card Service account number promptly. Once received, you enter the account number in company preferences to begin using the gift card service.

+

A card reader (sold separately) is recommended, but not required to use the Gift Card service. Using a card reader is faster and more convenient, but you can just type the number printed on the card to process a transaction. A modem and phone line or Internet connection is necessary on at least one of your Point of Sale workstations for transmitting data to and from the service.

+

 

+

*Service is optional. Application approval, fees and additional terms and conditions apply. Requires an account through QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service.  Internet connection or modem and phone line, and gift cards, sold separately. Details available on our Requiren Internet connection Website. Terms, conditions, pricing, features and service options subject to change without notice.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service for accepting credit and debit cards

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_replacing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_replacing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab17fb4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_replacing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + +Replace a Lost Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + + +

Replace a Lost Gift Card

+

Gift Card Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

If it conforms to your store policy and you can identify the original gift card number, you can use this procedure to replace a lost or stolen gift card. This procedure removes the current balance from the lost card and transfers it to a new gift card.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary, use customer history or sales history to look up the original gift card sales receipt and get the number of the lost gift card.

    +
    2. +
+

The card number is recorded in the receipt item list or you can click the Gift payment button and get the number from the payment dialog. Record the number and then close the original receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Open a new sales receipt, optionally enter the customer name, and then click the Gift payment button.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Check the balance of the lost gift card.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    In the Gift Card payment dialog, select Redeem Card and enter the balance of the lost card and the card number, then click Save.  

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Open the Gift Card payment dialog again, select Sell Gift Card and enter the same amount and then swipe the new card or enter  the card number.  Click  Save.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the gift card service and removes the balance from the lost card and adds it to the new card.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save & Print.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Gift Card Reports

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_reports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..85057f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + +Gift Card Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Gift Card Reports

+

POS Gift Card Service Overview | FAQs

+

 

+

Users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service have three gift card reports available in Point of Sale. If you record gift card transactions in Point of Sale but process them through another service, only the Gift Card List report is available to you.

+

To run a gift card report:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Report Center, select Payments as the report category and then one of the specific types/reports listed above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    The selected report is generated and displayed.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Gift Card Service Balance Summary A list of all outstanding gift cards and their balances

    +
    • +
  • +

    Gift Card Service Activity Detail Details of gift card activity in a specified date range

    +
    • +
  • +

    Payment Reconciliation Gift Card List A listing of transactions using gift cards for payment/refund

    +
    • +
+

Use the report Modify option if you want to apply report filters or change the appearance of the report. For example, you could filter the balance report to include only cards with a balance over $100 or change the date range to apply to the activity detail report.

+

These reports are based on the transactions recorded in Point of Sale. To verify the current balance of an individual card, it is recommended you check the balance from the sales receipt payment screen, which connects to the Gift Card services online server to check the balance.

+

(Pro)  If run at a remote store, gift card reports include only the card activity at that store. If run at Headquarters, the reports reflect transactions made at all stores current as of the last completed Store Exchange.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Modify report options

+

Take payment by or sale of a gift card

+

Handling returns of gift card purchases

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_returns.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_returns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e734966 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_returns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Handling Gift Card Returns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Handling Gift Card Returns

+

Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

Use this procedure to refund amounts for returned merchandise to a gift card. Enter the return on either a sales or return receipt and then enter the refund amount in the Gift Card Sell column on the payment window. Entering the refund amount as a sale adds the refund amount back to the gift card balance (if using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service).

+

To make a return gift card receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Add the items to a receipt as return items using the same prices at which the merchandise was purchased, using normal return methods.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Gift Payment Method.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Be sure purchase/recharge card is selected and then swipe the gift card.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Print the receipt.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    At your discretion or according to your store policy, you can also return the refund amount by another payment method, such as cash.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the customer wants to return the gift card itself for a refund, and your store policy allows it, use a sales receipt with no items listed. Go to the payment window and check the balance of the card. Then enter the balance in the Gift Card Redeem field and authorize. A refund of the amount will be suggested as cash (change it to a different change method if necessary).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Reverse a gift card transaction

+

Sell or redeem a gift card

+

Replace a lost gift card

+

Gift Card Service reports

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_signup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_signup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a0342d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/giftcard_signup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Sign up for the QuickBooks POS Gift Card Service + + + + + + + + + + +

Sign up for the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

The QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service allows you to sell, redeem, and track the balance of gift cards from within Point of Sale. A QuickBooks Desktop Payments Account is required.

+

 

+

Getting set up is easy!  Internet connection requiredLearn more

+

 

+

You can sign up from within Point of Sale:

+

To sign up for an account with QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Setup Interview.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Gift Cards tab.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Yes.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Type in your Gift Card account number in the field provided.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Click Verify.

    +
    6. +
+

Once your account is approved and you have received your Gift Card Account Number (typically in 2-3 business days), configure Point of Sale to work with the Gift Card Service.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Gift Card Service overview

+

Sell or redeem gift cards

+

Order custom gift cards

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/glossarypage.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/glossarypage.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4bb7fb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/glossarypage.htm @@ -0,0 +1,402 @@ + + + + + + +Glossary of Terms + + + + + + + + + + +

Glossary of Terms

+

image\btn_a.gif image\btn_b.gif image\btn_c.gif image\btn_d.gif image\btn_e.gif image\btn_f.gif image\btn_g.gif image\btn_h.gif image\btn_i.gif image\btn_j.gif image\btn_k.gif image\btn_l.gif image\btn_m.gif

+

image\btn_n.gif image\btn_o.gif image\btn_p.gif image\btn_q.gif image\btn_r.gif image\btn_s.gif image\btn_t.gif image\btn_u.gif image\btn_v.gif image\btn_w.gif image\btn_x.gif image\btn_y.gif image\btn_z.gif

+

Click a letter to jump to that section of the glossary.

+

 

+

A

+

Activity tolerance: Some Point of Sale activities are intolerant. This means that the activity cannot be completed if you or another workstation are currently accessing the POS data file via another open window or document. For example, installing a program update, editing company preferences, or restoring from a backup are all intolerant activities. An alert message is displayed if this applies to your activity. The alert message could also be caused by an improper shutdown of the program (such as if power is lost).

+

Adjustment memo: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of changes to an items quantity or cost which were not recorded on another type of transactional document.

+

Address Verification Service (AVS): Service that verifies a credit card customer's stated Zip Code, and optionally street address, matches that on file at the issuing bank. Helps prevent credit card fraud on manually entered and "card-not-present" transactions. For use with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service.

+

Alphanumeric: Containing both letters and numbers.

+

Alternate Lookup (ALU): A descriptive inventory field used as an additional item identifier when listing items on documents.

+

Alternate vendor: (Pro) Secondary vendor(s) that can be listed on POs and vouchers when purchasing an item. Each alternate vendor can have a unique order cost, UPC, and Alternate Lookup assigned. See also primary vendor.

+

Assembly: (Pro) Inventory item pre-built, or assembled, from other existing inventory items and sold as a unit.

+

Associate: (Pro) An employee whose name is available for selection on transactional documents.

+

Attribute: Typically an items color or a second size, such as shoe width.

+

Automatic update: Automatic process of downloading program updates in the background while you work in Point of Sale.

+

Automatic discount: (Pro) Discount defined in Price Manager, with options for eligible items, schedule, and purchase requirements, and automatically applied to eligible sales.

+

Available quantity: (Pro) Item quantity available for immediate sale. Equal to the on-hand quantity minus any quantity already committed on active customer orders. Does not take into consideration quantities on pending customer orders or held documents.

+

Average unit cost: The average amount paid per unit for the on-hand quantity of an item. Different than order cost, which is the current cost at which you order and receive an item.

+

AVS: see Address Verification Service.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

B

+

Backordered: In Point of Sale, any item with a negative available quantity (i.e. quantity on active customer orders exceeds on-hand quantity) is considered to be on backorder and will show up on your reorder reminders and backorder report.

+

Backup: A manual or automated procedure that verifies the integrity of Point of Sale data files and makes a backup copy. See also restore.

+

Bar code: A series of spaced lines forming a code that can be read and interpreted by a bar code scanner for rapid data entry. Bar codes typically are encoded item numbers or UPC codes.

+

Base unit: (Pro) When using multiple units of measure for an item, that unit you most typically stock and sell by. Item quantities, costs, and related information are shown in inventory for your base unit.

+

 

+

C

+

Card Verification Code (CVC): A three or four-digit code printed on a credit card used in manually entered credit card transactions to help verify that the customer actually has the card in their possession. Can help prevent credit card fraud and chargebacks. For use with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service.

+

Case-sensitive: With regard to text entry, the requirement that uppercase letters be distinguished from lowercase letters. Login passwords in Point of Sale are case-sensitive. A password must be entered exactly as it is recorded. Example: If password stored is "Huckleberry" then entering "huckleberry" does not grant access.

+

Card reader: A device that reads the magnetic strip on the back of credit, debit, and gift cards, allowing information about the customer and his account to be electronically entered for payment on a sale or refund.

+

Cashier: The employee who is logged in during the current sales transaction (receipts and customer orders).

+

Cell: (Pro) In a grid (e.g., a style grid), the point where a column and row intersect. Each cell represents a particular item size/attribute and corresponds to an item in inventory. See also grid.

+

Certificate: A QuickBooks Desktop term related to integrated applications and their access to your QuickBooks Desktop company file. A certificate is a digital signature that verifies the identity of the third-party developer. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Chargebacks: For a credit card transaction, a chargeback is a dispute of the charge by the cardholder.

+

Chart of Accounts: In your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the set of accounts and their balances. Some accounts are predefined by QuickBooks Desktop when a company is set up; others can be added as needed. Point of Sale assumes you are using a default set of accounts when transferring your Point of Sale data, but you can define custom account mappings if preferred. Search the Point of Sale help index using keyword "Cart of accounts" or refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Class: A transaction categorizing attribute in QuickBooks Desktop that when assigned to stores in a multi-store configuration allows you to track and run P/L reports by store in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Clean Up Company Data: Procedure by which you can remove old records and documents from your company file to optimize program performance. Access from the File > Utilities menu.

+

Client Workstation: Any networked workstation that is not designated as the Server Workstation. Accesses the Point of Sale company data on the Server Workstation across the network. You can view your current workstation type by selecting About Point of Sale from the Help menu.

+

Cloud: Cloud computing is a general term for services that are offered on the Web including social networking, file backup, and payment solutions. To use most Cloud services, the only requirement is access to the Internet.

+

Commission: (Pro) An amount paid to an employee on sales of specified items.

+

Committed quantities: (Pro) Quantities promised on active customer orders. When the committed quantity for an item is subtracted from the current on-hand quantity, the resulting value is your available quantity.

+

Company data: The Point of Sale data file that is stored on the Server Workstation. In a multi-workstation setup, client workstations access this data across the network. Do not confuse the POS company data with your QuickBooks Desktop financial company file, which is used for accounting purposes.

+

Company preferences: Company preferences define settings and options that are shared by all workstations on a network and that configure all Point of Sale modules.

+

Compatible hardware: Compatible hardware is hardware that has been tested to work with Point of Sale. Supported hardware is compatible hardware that is sold and supported by Intuit. Compatible hardware not sold by Intuit is not supported.

+

Component items: (Pro) The inventory items that make up an assembly or group item.

+

Conflicting items: (Pro) Two or more inventory rows in the same style with the same size and attribute.

+

Coupon: (Pro) Store discount document provided to customers who can redeem it to get the specified discount. Defined in Price Manager, including eligible items and expiration date, and automatically applied to qualified sales when scanned on receipt.

+

Cost: See average unit cost or order cost.

+

Customer order: (Pro) A sales order, work order, or layaway that records the planned sale of merchandise or services. Items ordered on a customer order are later sold on a sales receipt.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

D

+

Database Server applications: Applications that run on the Server Workstation and allow Point of Sale workstations to connect to the POS company data. Started automatically when the Server Workstation is turned on. If you have used Windows Task Manager to manually stop these applications, they can be restarted by restarting Point of Sale on the Server Workstation.

+

Debit/ATM transaction (PIN): Transaction using a customers debit/ATM card and PIN authorization.

+

Department: A manageable category of related merchandise. Categorizing items into departments gives you greater flexibility to monitor sales performance, manage inventory, run meaningful reports, and for filtering your item list when conducting a physical inventory, changing prices, and printing tags. Departments are assigned a name and a code. A department code is a user-assigned code identifying the department, made up of one to three alphanumeric characters, and can be used to identify the department on reports and program screens where space is limited.

+

Descriptive field: Any field that describes an item, such as the default item fields Description1, Description 2, Attribute, Size, and Alternate Lookup.

+

Device Manager: Applet in Windows Control Panel System Properties dialog that lists the hardware installed on your computer and used to change the settings for that hardware. You can access System Properties by selecting System from Control Panel (or press the Windows logo key + the Pause/Break key on your keyboard at the same time). Then select the Device Manager tab (Windows 98) or the Hardware tab and then Device Manager (Windows 2000/XP). Note: The Windows logo key is located on the lower-left of your keyboard and Pause/Break on the upper-right. Consult your Windows Help system if additional assistance is required.

+

Discount Pricing: (Pro) Price Manager feature that allows you to define percentage off or quantity discounts for an item or group of items, optionally scheduling the discount dates. When listing a sufficient quantity of included items on a sales receipt or customer order, Point of Sale automatically applies the correct discount price to each item. Examples: Buy 3 T-shirts for $30. Buy 3 T-shirts and get 15% off.  Get 15% off all T-shirts.

+

Document item list: The list of items being processed on a document.

+

Documents: General term including all transactional documents and order documents; including sales receipts, receiving vouchers, adjustment memos, purchase orders, layaways/sales orders/work orders, and transfer slips.

+

Dynamic date: A date or date range relative to the current date. Examples include Year-to-Date, Month-to-Date, etc. As the current date changes, so does the dynamic date or range. Dynamic dates are used to define date ranges for filtering lists and for reporting purposes.

+  +

Return to top

+

E

+

Element: (Pro) In Print Designer, an element is any object (data field, data field group, static text, logo, etc.) that you can add or manipulate on a print design.

+

 

+

F

+

Facebook: The leading social networking site. There are marketing opportunities for merchants that use Facebook.

+

Fee: (PO/Voucher) A field on purchase orders and vouchers used to record amounts that are charged in addition to the cost of goods, shipping, and tax, such as an order fee.

+

Field: A component of a page design where data can be entered or viewed. In lists and Style View, a field is the cell where a column and row intersect. Field names are included in the header for each column and row.

+

Fill status: A summary of the quantity still due on an order document. Different than the order status, which tracks the current standing of the document as open, closed, or any custom status you have defined.

+

% Unfilled = Qty due divided by Qty ordered multiplied by 100

+

Filters: Used to include/exclude records for display or reports. You define your filter criteria and Point of Sale includes/excludes records based on your criteria.

+

Filter element: A component of a filter screen. Element names identify the criteria to be entered in each field.

+

Financial Exchange: Integration and sharing of data between Point of Sale and your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Form: A detailed view that displays all fields of data contained in a single record.

+

Foursquare: One of many location-based social networking sites for mobile devices, that helps locate venues and events close to a customer's current location. Used as a marketing tool by many small and large companies alike .

+

 

+

 

+

Return to top

+

G

+

Gift receipt: Optional second copy of a receipt printed for the customer. Gift receipts do not include prices or payment information. Enabled in workstation print option preferences.

+

Global discount: A discount applied to the subtotal on a document. See also item discount.

+

GoPayment: An Intuit service allowing credit card payments to be accepted via a mobile phone.

+

GoPayment card reader: A small device that is temporarily attached to a mobile phone in order for a credit card to be swiped.
+Also referred to as a swiper.

+

Grid: (Pro) A concise format used to display style items in Style View in inventory. Includes both a horizontal and vertical axis, with different descriptive fields located on each. See also cell.

+

Group (security): A set of users that are granted specific security rights and access to program functions.

+

Group (item): (Pro) An item group provides a way to list all of the included items on a document by entering the single group item identifier.

+

Groupon: An online marketing site featuring discounted gift certificates and coupons usable at local or national retail outlets.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

H

+

Headquarters: Store 1 in a multi-store installation; has centralized control over inventory and purchasing, exchanges information with QuickBooks Desktop, and runs company reports.

+

History documents: Saved transactional documents stored in document history lists. Includes receipts, vouchers,adjustment memos, and transfer slips. Used for reporting purposes and for building customer, vendor and item histories.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

I

+

Integrated applications: A QuickBooks Desktop feature that allows external applications such as Point of Sale to access the company file and exchange data. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Intuit Service: Method of exchanging data between stores using the Internet application "QuickBase".

+

Inventory: A stores or companys set of merchandise, quantities, and other related information. Also, the Point of Sale module for tracking that merchandise.

+

Inventory reminders: A Point of Sale feature that alerts users when inventory tasks need their attention, such as reordering items.

+

Item #: The number assigned by the program to each item added to inventory. Corresponds to the row number in the item list and used as an item identifier (for listing items on documents), for filtering the list, and for printing bar codes on tags.

+

Item discount: A discount applied to an individual item price on a sales document. See also global discount.

+

Item group: (Pro) See group item.

+

Item identifiers: The Item #, Universal Product Code (UPC), and Alternate Lookup values for items in inventory. Item identifiers are used for looking up and listing items on documents, and for other program functions.

+

Item lookup: A method that is used to list an item on a document. Item lookups can be performed with the Item #, UPC #, Alternate Lookup, or by entering a search keyword.

+

Item type: Field used to designate the type of inventory item.

+

I Want To menu: List of available actions or tasks related to the currently displayed window. Select a task to carry out the specified action. Displayed on the window toolbar.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

J

+

K

+

L

+

Layaway: (Pro) A temporary order document that allows customers to pay for merchandise using a series of deposits.

+

List: Displays all or a filtered subset of the records of a particular type, or a listing of the items to be processed on a document.

+

Lookup: Ability to quickly locate a related record from another area or document and enter that information in the other area or document. For an example, see item lookup.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

M

+

Main tool bar: The horizontal tool bar located across the top of the Point of Sale screen, providing direct access to program areas and tasks. You can customize or turn off its display from the View menu.

+

Manual discount: An item discount that is manually applied as needed at the time of sale. Uses include discounts for damaged or demo merchandise or a discount to meet or beat  a competitor's price.

+

Mapping: In Point of Sale, refers to the "linking" of accounts, payment types, and information fields with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. This linking affects how Point of Sale data is transferred to your financial software. Point of Sale uses a default set of accounts and payment types unless you customize them in company preferences.

+

Margin %:  The percentage of the selling price that represents profit. One way to express the relationship between item cost and price. Margin can be used in Point of Sales pricing formula to calculate prices when adding new items to inventory.

+

Margin % = [(Price minus Cost) divided by Price] multiplied by 100

+

Markup: Alternate way to express profit; markup by n% over cost.

+

Memo: See adjustment memo.

+

Merchant number: For retailers who use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service to perform credit and/or debit/ATM card transactions, the merchant number is assigned to the retailer in order to identify that retailer when performing authorizations and settlements.

+

Merchant Service Center: Intuits own site to help merchants manage their payment solutions.

+

Mobile Sales:  Sales that are performed when a customer makes the purchase from their mobile device.

+

Mobile Device:  A smart phone or other device that is generally small and connected to the Internet. iPhones and Android-based phones are two types of mobile devices.

+

MSRP: Manufacturers suggested retail price. IF the MSRP is defined on an items record, price tags (space allowing) include the reference price to demonstrate savings to customers.

+

Multi-Store: (Pro) Referring to a Point of Sale Pro configuration with multiple stores.

+

Multi-vendor: (Pro) Feature that allows purchasing of an item from up to five different vendors, each with a unique order cost and UPC.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

N

+

Navigator: Graphical representation of a retail workflow and corresponding Point of Sale tasks. Clicking an icon from the Navigator takes you directly to the program area to complete the task.

+

Network: Two or more computers linked together and sharing data files. Information recorded by any computer on the network is instantly available to all users on the network.

+

Non-inventory item: A non-merchandise inventory item or service for which you do not track on-hand quantities. Typically, the non-inventory item type is used for miscellaneous fees or charges (e.g. delivery, recycling fee, shipping, etc.). See also service item.

+

Non-tolerant activity: An activity that requires all other users to be out of Point of Sale before it can be performed, such as restoring the POS company data from a backup or installing a program update.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

O

+

Order document: (Basic, Pro) A temporary document used to plan the purchase (purchase order) or sale (customer order) of merchandise or services.

+

Order cost: The cost at which an item is ordered and received. This is different than average unit cost, which is the average cost paid for the units currently on hand.

+

Open Windows: List of all open Point of Sale windows for current tasks; displayed on the Window menu at the top of the screen. While only one window can be viewed at a time, Point of Sale allows you to open and have many available. You can think of the windows being on top of another. You can immediately switch to another open window by selecting it from the Window menu.

+

 

+

P

+

Payout: The removal of cash amounts from the cash drawer for a store-related purpose, such as to make a mid-day deposit, buy office supplies, or fund an office party. Select New Payout from the Point of Sale menu to access this feature.

+

Payment History: (Pro) A record of payments/deposits made for a particular layaway, sales order, or work order.

+

Payment type/method: On a receipt, how the customer pays for merchandise. Examples: cash, check, credit card, gift certificate, etc.

+

PCI DSS: Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard; outlines requirements for the protection of customers' credit and debit card information.

+

Physical inventory (PI): The process of counting the actual merchandise on hand and then correcting the quantities recorded in inventory as needed.

+

Physical inventory scanner: Optional, portable hardware that allows you to scan inventory bar codes and download the scanned data into a physical inventory count.

+

PO: See purchase order.

+

Point of Sale (POS): This software product name and the location(s) in your store where customer-facing sales activities are carried out. On menus in Point of Sale, this term refers to the area containing the sales, customer order, customer tracking, and End of Day tasks.

+

Pole display: A screen oriented towards the customer to display transaction detail and store messages.

+

Preferences: Settings that configure your Point of Sale program to work with your hardware and accessories, establish feature options, and customize program behavior. There are two types of preferences in Point of Sale: company preferences and workstation preferences.

+

Price levels: Up to four optional markdown prices, in addition to your regular price, for each item in inventory. Different price levels can be used to record employee prices, promotional sale prices, wholesale prices, etc. When making a sale, you can select the price level that applies or assign a price level on a customers record and it will be automatically suggested when making a sale to that customer.

+

Price Manager: Price utility that allows you to change item prices or set up discounts, for all or selected items, in a variety of ways.

+

Price rounding: Price Manager feature that allows rounding of calculated prices to end in user-specified amounts, e.g. always to .99, or to even dollars, etc.

+

Pricing formula: Used by Point of Sale to automatically calculate a new items price by applying a defined department margin or markup to the average unit cost.

+

Primary vendor: (Pro) For a multi-vendor item, that vendor that is displayed in item lists, on merchandise reports, etc. for the item. See also alternate vendor.

+

Print Designer: (Pro) Tool used to customize printed documents and tags. Available from the Tools menu.

+

Purchase order (PO): A temporary planning document recording the merchandise ordered from a vendor.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

Q

+

QB POS: Abbreviation for the Point of Sale software.

+

Quick Add Item: Procedure to add an item to your inventory while creating a document, such as a sales receipt, entering only the basic item information needed to complete the document. Ideal for when a customer is waiting to purchase an item not yet added to inventory. Learn more.

+

QuickFill: Customer feature on sales documents where the program recognizes the name you are typing and suggests the matching name from your customer file, saving you the time of typing the full name.

+

Quick Find: Feature available from the Navigator allowing you to quickly find customers, items, sales receipts, and more.

+

Quick Pick: A feature of Intuit Point of Sale where selected items are grouped and instantly accessible on the system during the check-out process.

+

Quick Zoom: Ability to click a line or value in a report and see the source documents or records contributing to that value.

+

Return to top

+

R

+

Receipt: A transactional document that records a sale, deposit on, or return of merchandise at point of sale. Also, the printed record of the transaction, typically given to the customer. See sales receipt and return receipt.

+

Receiving voucher: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of merchandise received from a vendor. Vouchers update inventory cost and quantity for items received.

+

Record: (noun) Point of Sale data is typically stored as a sequence of records in your POS company data file. A record could be either document (receipt, voucher, etc.) or non-document (item, customer, vendor, etc.) data.

+

Reminders: A feature that helps you track and manage your inventory by alerting you to situations that may need your attention, such as when item quantities fall below their reorder points.

+

Remote store: In a multi-store installation, all stores except the Headquarters is referred to as a remote store.

+

Remote Data Sharing (RDS): Optional configuration allowing the exchange of information between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software wherein the two applications communicate over a network via server and client applications. With this configuration it is not necessary to install QuickBooks Desktop on the Point of Sale Server Workstation. Refer to the Point of Sale Getting Guide for more information on this advanced option.

+

Reorder point: User-specified minimum on-hand quantity at which an item should be reordered (or rebuilt in the case of assembly items). When the combined on-order and on-hand quantity is at or below this level, the item is added to the inventory reorder reminder list and reorder reports. Facilitates timely replenishment of merchandise.

+

Restore: (relating to the Restore feature) Using backup data to replace data files.

+

Return receipt: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of a merchandise return at point of sale. Printed, it serves as the customers receipt.

+

Return voucher: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of merchandise returned to a vendor.

+

Reverse: To create a new, opposite document that cancels the effects of a former document. Receipts, vouchers, transfer slips, and adjustment memos can be reversed.

+

Rights: See security rights.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

S

+

Sales order (SO): (Pro) A temporary order document recording the planned sale of merchandise or services to a customer in the future, such as for custom items or an item currently out of stock. The items listed on a sales order can be quickly transferred to a sales receipt when the final sale is made.

+

Sales receipt: A transactional document that provides a permanent record of a merchandise sale or deposit. The printed receipt serves as the customers receipt.

+

Sales tax location: A set of sales tax codes assigned to a specific geographic area or for customers that qualify for special tax handling.

+

Sales tax code: A code used to identify if and how sales tax is applied to item sales. Sales tax codes in Point of Sale can be mapped to sales tax items/groups and codes in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Sales tax item: In QuickBooks Desktop financial software, sales tax items identify the rate and the tax agency from which you collect sales tax for a transaction. Retailers who use QuickBooks Desktop in conjunction with Point of Sale can map a sales tax code in Point of Sale to a tax item in QuickBooks Desktop. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Sales tax group: In QuickBooks Desktop financial software, a sales tax group is used to calculate two or more sales tax items grouped together and applied to the same sale. Retailers who use QuickBooks Desktop financial software in conjunction with Point of Sale can map a sales tax code in Point of Sale to a sales tax group in QuickBooks Desktop. Point of Sale sales taxes will then be reported in your financial software according to the structure of the QuickBooks Desktop tax group. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation for more information.

+

Sales tax rate: The actual percentage tax collected. Each taxable tax code must have a tax rate assigned.

+

Section (Print Designer): (Pro) Logical regions of document templates, each with a unique printing behavior. For example, data fields placed in the repeating header section of a template appear at the top of each page of the printed document. Some templates, such as tags and mailing labels do not have sections. Template sections cannot be re-positioned, though they typically can be vertically resized to add or remove white space in a design.

+

Security group: Predefined or custom set of security rights to which employees can be assigned.

+

Security rights: The set of program features and data access defined for a security group.

+

Serial number: (Pro) Unique alphanumeric string assigned to an item for tracking purposes. Typically used for warranty purposes or for meeting legal requirements. Serial numbers can be recorded on most Point of Sale documents.

+

Server Workstation: In a multiple workstation installation, the first workstation on which Point of Sale is installed and which stores the POS company data. If you have only one workstation, it must be installed as a Server Workstation. Certain activities, such as Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop, creation of company data, and importing data can only be done on this workstation. The Server Workstation must be running (but not necessarily with Point of Sale open) for client workstations to access the company data file. You can view your current workstation type by selecting About Point of Sale from the Help menu.

+

Service item: Used to charge for non-merchandise and labor-based services, such as repairs, warranties, delivery, installation, etc. on sales and customer orders. The on-hand quantity of service items is always zero (0).

+

Shopper display: See pole display.

+

Shortcut key: Keyboard command that executes a Point of Sale function. For example, entering <Alt + the underlined letter> instantly invokes the menu or icon option displaying the underlined letter. Select Keyboard Shortcuts from the Help menu to see a list of shortcuts for your current area in Point of Sale.

+

Simple View: A simplified version of the regular sales receipt form, with support for touchscreen and a virtual keyboard. Learn more.

+

Slip: (Pro) See transfer slip.

+

Smart phone: See Mobile Device.

+

SO: (Pro) See sales order.

+

Social Networking: The use of the internet to connect with others using sites specifically designed to bring groups of people together.
+Facebook and other social networking sites can be leveraged for marketing purposes.

+

Sort field: A field/column in a list by which the records can be sorted and displayed. Indicated by the image\blue_sort_indicator.gif symbol in the column header. Click the header to sort by the column values; click again to change sort order. Sort by multiple columns by selecting Sort List Sort on multiple columns from the View menu.

+

Special order item: (Pro) Item-type created while making a document (such as a customer order) to sell an item not currently carried in inventory.

+

Split-payment sale: A sale paid for using two or more payment methods.

+

Status: On order documents, the current standing of the document. A status of Open is assigned to all new orders and Closed to those that have been filled (received or sold). You can define your own statuses and Point of Sale will track the changes in status as an order progresses toward completion. The Status field can be used to filter for list display or reports.

+

Status bar: An information line located on the bottom of most Point of Sale screens, displaying data such as the active price level, the currently logged in employee, record status, etc.

+

Store: A physical location at which you receive and sell merchandise.

+

Store Exchange: The procedure of sending and receiving data between remote stores and Headquarters in a multi-store installation. QuickBooks Desktop POS supports four methods of Store Exchange: desktop e-mail, Web-based e-mail, removable media, and network file transfer.

+

Store type: In a multi-store configuration, each store is either a Headquarters or a remote store, each with defined roles and allowed activities.

+

Style: (Pro) A group of related inventory items, with the same department and Item Name, but differing in color, size, or other attribute. In Point of Sale, the items in a style are linked so they can be viewed and worked with together in a style grid or in a linear display.

+

Style View/grid: (Pro) See grid.

+

Style template: (Pro)  A predefined array of item attributes (sizes, colors, etc.) that can be used when creating or modifying a style grid.

+

Suggest PO: (Pro) Automated suggestion and generation of purchase orders for items that have fallen below their designated reorder quantities, after taking currently on-order quantities into consideration.

+

Swipe: To slide a credit or debit card through the GoPayment card reader (or swiper) for processing.

+

Swiper: A small device that is temporarily attached to a mobile phone in order for a credit card to be swiped. Also referred to as the GoPayment card reader.

+

Sync / Syncing / Synchronize: Updating or merging information on two or more computers or devices. For example, syncing sales on your mobile device with your main computer is needed in order for your main computer to have all the most current sales information from your mobile device(s).

+

System Administrator (Sysadmin): Pre-defined user with all security rights to add or delete employees, turn on/off the requirement to log in to use the program, and change passwords for other employees. Only the Sysadmin user can make these changes.

+

 

+

 

+

Return to top

+

T

+

Tax code: A code assigned to each item in inventory that defines the tax handling (such as taxable or non-taxable) and taxing instructions of the item.

+

Tax location: See sales tax location.

+

Template: The print layout of fields for a particular document type. Point of Sale includes several design choices for each document type for use with various printers and for various needs. (Pro) You can customize these templates in the Print Designer. See also style template.

+

Terms: (PO/Voucher) How and when the retailer plans to pay the vendor for merchandise ordered. Examples: COD and 2% 10, Net 30.

+

Tools: Program utilities that provide ancillary or support capabilities.

+

Transactional documents: Receipts, vouchers, adjustment memos, and transfer slips. Transactional documents record changes in inventory on-hand quantities or costs, and are then stored in your document history lists.

+

Transfer slip: (Pro) A transactional document that records the movement of merchandise from one store to another.

+

Tweet: A message sent via Twitter.

+

Twitter: With over 100 million users, this is the most popular micro-blogging site. Tweets, or messages, are condensed to 140 characters or less aimed at a specific target audience of followers. Individuals, celebrities, and merchants make good use of Twitter to help stay in touch with customers and fans, to communicate news, specials, gossip, or deals.

+

 

+

 

+

Return to top

+

U

+

Unit of measure: Display field on item records that can be used to filter and sort the item list and reports. ((Pro) If using multiple units of measure (company preference), allows purchasing and selling an item in different units, such as cases, multi-packs, bottles, pounds, etc., each with a different UPC code, alternate lookup, and price.

+

Unlock: Term referring to an upgrade in program licensing that makes additional features available to the user, i.e. from Free to Basic to Pro.

+

UPC (universal product code): A family of widely used bar code symbologies that encode both manufacturer and product identification. In Point of Sale, UPC numbers can be used to look up or scan items when listing them on documents.

+

User license: A single license or entitlement for a computer to run Point of Sale. Having multiple user licenses allows multiple computers to run Point of Sale at the same time.

+

Update: In QB POS, update has two possible meanings:

+
    +
  • +

    When using QuickBooks Desktop financial software, update refers to a manually-initiated Financial Exchange to share data between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The process of obtaining and installing updated Point of Sale program files within the same version. These updates are used to fix bugs, enhance features, or provide additional information.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Return to top

+

V

+

Values: Numerical data; such as a field entry or calculation of quantities, costs, or prices.

+

Vendor code: The user-defined code assigned to each vendor and used to track that vendors merchandise as it is received and sold.

+

Voucher: A transactional document that records merchandise received from or returned to a vendor. See also receiving voucher and return voucher.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

W

+

Window tool bar: The horizontal toolbar across the top of the open window; contains icons for tasks related to the displayed window and a task-specific help button.

+

Work Order: (Pro) A customer order used for services and non-inventory merchandise transactions, such as repairs, alterations, and warranty work.

+

Workstation (W/S): An individual PC. In Point of Sale, installed workstations (up to ten per store) are either a Server Workstation, storing both program and data files, or a client workstation, which stores program files but accesses the data files across a network.

+

Workstation preferences: Workstation preferences define workstation-specific settings and options, including hardware setup and printing preferences.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

X

+

X/Z-Out report: Report of point-of-sale activities. The X-Out Shift Report can be run throughout the day to monitor sales activity. The Z-Out Drawer Count report is typically run at the end of a shift or day to reconcile the cash drawer. The Z-Out Store Close report is run at the end of the day to summarize the days sales activities and cash flow for the entire store, as well as help in preparing a bank deposit.

+

Y

+

Z

+

Z-Out report: See X/Z-Out report.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted04.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eea4cde --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + +Getting Started: Notes on Item Quantities and Costs + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Getting Started: Notes on Item Quantities and Cost

+

Available Quantities | Decimal Quantities | Decimal CostsClick to display a popup topic

+
+

Basic

+
+

The Average Unit Cost field in inventory reflects the average cost of the currently on-hand quantity of an item. This value is automatically recalculated by Point of Sale when you create a voucher to receive an item at a cost different than what is currently recorded. How does order cost differ from average unit cost?

+

The On-Hand Quantity field reflects the number of units of an item currently in stock. This value is automatically updated as you create vouchers, receipts, and, if applicable, transfer slips.

+

Item quantities and costs have significant impact on your inventory value and your financial records. For this reason, it is recommended that you manually enter or edit these values only when entering items already in your store when you begin using Point of Sale. From that point on, Point of Sale maintains an accurate ledger of changes in these values with the use of transactional documents (receiving vouchers, receipts, transfer slips, and adjustment memos) and the Physical Inventory utility. The table below summarizes how quantities and/or costs are updated in various ways.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Method

+		 +

Comments

+
+

Receiving vouchers

+		 +

Updates on-hand quantity, average unit cost, and order cost in inventory. Should be used for receiving all new and reordered items into inventory. When you define a new item in inventory that is to be received later, we recommend you leave the On-Hand Quantity and Average Unit Cost fields blank in inventory and allow the receiving voucher to update them.

+
+

Receipts

+		 +

When an item is sold or returned on a receipt, the on-hand inventory quantity is adjusted up or down accordingly.

+
+

Adjustment memos

+		 +

A memo is used anytime quantity or cost must be manually adjusted (because it is not handled by a receiving voucher, receipt, or physical inventory count). Many actions, such as conducting a physical inventory, or manually editing the cost or quantity fields, automatically create adjustment memos for you.

+
+

Physical Inventory

+		 +

Updates on-hand quantities only. Updating a physical inventory automatically creates adjustment memos to update inventory.

+
+

Transfer slips  (Pro)

+		 +

A transfer slip has no affect on company inventory quantities, though it does increase or decrease the on-hand quantities at the specific stores involved in the transfer.

+
+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted07.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8bcc838 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + + +Getting Started: Conducting a Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + +

Getting Started: Conducting a Physical Inventory

+

Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

A physical inventory (PI) is an actual count of the merchandise in stock. The Physical Inventory utility is the quickest way to update on-hand quantities for a large number of items in inventory.

+

A physical inventory is always recommended as part of the startup procedure and periodically thereafter to verify and adjust inventory counts.

+

A physical inventory involves:

+
    +
  • +

    Recording physical counts for every individual item in the store

    +
    • +
  • +

    Entering these physical counts into Point of Sale so the program can compare the counted quantities to the currently recorded quantities on hand in inventory

    +
    • +
  • +

    Reviewing any discrepancies found

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updating your inventory on-hand quantities to reflect your physical inventory counts

    +
    • +
  • +

    The automatic creation of adjustment memos by Point of Sale to track the quantity changes and update your inventory value in QuickBooks Desktop financial software

    +
    • +
+

For more information about conducting a physical inventory, click the Physical Inventory Overview link at the top of this page.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted11.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..332844e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Alternate Lookups + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Alternate Lookups

+

About Item Identifiers | UPCs | Bar Codes in Point of Sale

+

 

+

An alternate lookup is an optional, user-defined item identifier that can be used to locate and quickly list items on documents. The use of alternate lookups is well suited to retailers that do not tag their merchandise or to those that want to print vendor part numbers on purchase orders or other documents.

+

This field can contain text descriptions, catalog/part numbers, alphanumeric entries, abbreviated names, or anything allowing you to quickly identify a unique item. Alternate lookups must be unique for each item for which they are defined.

+

To be effectively used to list items on documents, each alternate lookup entry:

+
    +
  • +

    Should be a unique character string that can be easily remembered by cashiers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Should not duplicate any item's UPC code or Item #

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ideally, will start with a letter rather than a number. This helps ensure that alternate lookups do not duplicate a UPC or Item number. Point of Sale begins looking for matches as soon as you begin entering characters; if you have an alternate lookup value of 1234 and a UPC of 1234567890123, both will be returned as matches when you enter 1234.

    +
    • +
+

To define alternate lookups:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Item List from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Locate an existing item record and select Edit (or select New if adding a new item).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Navigate to the Alternate Lookup field and make an entry. Enter or edit other item fields as necessary.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Repeat for all items you want to list on documents using alternate lookups.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

     

    +
    7. +
+

To list an item on a document using an alternate lookup:

+
    +
  • +

    Enter the alternate lookup string in the Enter Item(s) field and press <Enter>.

    +
    • +
+

If one matching item is found, it is instantly listed on the document. If multiple matches are located, the Find window is displayed, listing all matching items. Highlight the correct item and choose Select Item to list the item on the receipt.

+

Tip: Post a list of alternate lookups at the POS workstation to help cashiers remember the correct entries.

+

 

+

To print alternate lookup values on documents:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the Documents & Printers page in workstation preferences.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a document template ending in the suffix "-ALU" for each document type you wish to print using this value.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Save your changes.

    +
    4. +
+

(Pro) You can use the Print Designer to add the Alternate Lookup field to other document templates, if desired.

+

 

+

Example Use of Alternate Lookups

+

You sell a large volume of one-gallon, two-gallon, and five-gallon clay pots from the vendor Clay Pots International and you dont want to tag them. You define alternate lookups of CPI1, CPI2, and CPI5, respectively, for the three pots. When a customer purchases a five-gallon pot, you simply enter CPI5 in the Enter Item(s) field to list that pot size on the sales receipt.

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_documentsdefined.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_documentsdefined.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..20ef026 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_documentsdefined.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + +Understanding Point of Sale Documents + + + + + + + + + + + +

About Point of Sale Documents

+

How do I?

+

 

+

Note: References to tracking item quantities or costs in this topic do not apply to Point of Sale Free.

+

There are two general document types used in Point of Sale: transactional documents and order documents.

+

Transactional documents record changes to inventory and provide a permanent history of those changes. Transactional documents can never be deleted, and in most cases cannot be edited after being saved. For this reason, transactional documents, after being saved, are also referred to as history documents. History documents are used to run reports, to build customer, vendor and item histories, and if you use QuickBooks Desktop financial software are sent to update your financial records.

+

The transactional documents available in Point of Sale include:

+
    +
  • +

    Sales and return receipts, which record item sales, returns, and exchanges, i.e., quantities removed from or returned to inventory. Upon saving, receipts are added to your sales history list. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receiving and return vouchers, which record item quantities added to or removed from inventory when received from or returned to your vendors. Vouchers also update item costs and may, in the case of items being received for the first time, also update item price(s) in inventory. Upon saving, vouchers are added to your receiving history list. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Adjustment memos, which are used to record changes to item quantities or costs not covered by other transactional documents. Adjustment memos are automatically created by Point of Sale for certain activities, such as when you conduct a physical inventory or manually edit an items quantity or cost in inventory. Adjustment memos can also be manually created to correct errors or update inventory for shrinkage, donations, or the removal of damaged merchandise. Upon saving, adjustment memos are added to your adjustment history lists (separate lists for quantity and cost memos). Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Transfer slips (Pro), which record the movement of item quantities between stores. Transfer slips have no affect on your company inventory value, but are used to maintain an accurate count of item quantities at each store, as well as recording freight charges related to the transfer. Upon saving, transfer slips are added to your transfer history list. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Order documents are used to plan the purchase or sale of merchandise or services. The information recorded on an order document, such as items, costs, prices, deposits, fees, and terms can be easily transferred to a transactional document when the merchandise is actually received or sold. Once recorded on a transactional document, the order document can be safely deleted.

+

The order documents available in Point of Sale include:

+
    +
  • +

    Purchase orders (Basic), which are used to record the planned purchase of merchandise from a vendor. A purchase order indicates to your vendor that you wish to purchase a specified quantity of an item or items at a specified cost. When the ordered merchandise is received, it is recorded on a receiving voucher, which updates inventory accordingly. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer orders (Pro), including layaways, sales orders, and work orders, which are used to record the planned sale of merchandise or services to customers. Customer orders typically involve taking a deposit when the order is placed, optional additional deposits over a period of time, and ultimately final payment when the merchandise or service is recorded on a sales receipt. Items listed on customer orders are deducted from inventory only after you record them on a sales receipt to fulfill the order. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_import_vendors.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_import_vendors.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..844b8c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_import_vendors.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +gstarted_import_vendors + + + + + + + + + + +

Vendor Import Options

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden

+ +

 

+

Which vendor import option would you like to learn about?

+

Sharing vendors with QuickBooks financial software

+

Importing vendors from an Excel spreadsheet or text file

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_importitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_importitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..35e3d2d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/gstarted_importitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + +gstarted_importitems + + + + + + + + +

Item Import Options

+ +

This is a popup topic. and has been hidden

+  +

Which item import option would you like to learn about?

+

Importing items from QuickBooks financial software

+

Importing from an Excel spreadsheet or text file

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_IDN_apps.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_IDN_apps.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d3489a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_IDN_apps.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + +Other Applications that Work with Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Other Applications that Work with Point of Sale

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

Point of Sale integrates with other business software applicationsincluding e-commerce applicationsto meet your stores specific needs. These applications are created by third-party software companies who are part of the Intuit Developer Network (IDN).

+
    +
  • +

    Internet connection required To learn about or purchase third-party applications that work with Point of Sale, visit The QuickBooks Solutions Marketplace (http://marketplace.intuit.com).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Internet connection required To learn more about the third-party developers that create applications that integrate with Point of Sale, visit the Intuit Developer Network site (http://developer.intuit.com).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you require employee logins, you can block an employee's ability to log in to Point of Sale from an integrated application. Clear the security right check box labeled Log in from an integrated application (in the General area) for the employees you wish to block.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Integrated Application Preferences

+

Integration with QuickBooks Financial Software

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_barcodescanner_faq.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_barcodescanner_faq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8df0e1b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_barcodescanner_faq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +Bar Code Scanner FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Bar Code Scanner FAQs

+

Help & Support Overview | Support Resources

+

How do I configure my bar code scanner to automatically insert a carriage return after each scan?

+

Bar code scanners can be configured to insert a carriage return after each scan by scanning a bar code included in the documentation that you received with your scanner. Check the documentation for specific instructions.

+

Bar code scanners purchased from Intuit should be preconfigured to insert the carriage return automatically, but if this setting is somehow lost, it can be reprogrammed by following the directions that came with the scanner.

+

 

+

How do I reset the HHP IT3800LR model bar code scanner?

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the Resetting the Factory Settings section in your HHP IT3800 User manual.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Scan the bar code labeled Factory Default Settings with the scanner. This will reset the scanner.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List of compatible bar code scanners

+

Using bar codes and scanners in Point of Sale

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_cash_drawer_faqs.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_cash_drawer_faqs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a608579 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_cash_drawer_faqs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + + +Troubleshoot Your Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Troubleshoot Your Cash Drawer

+

Compatible Cash Drawers | Help & Support Overview

+

My cash drawer will not open. What could cause this?

+

Use the procedure below to troubleshoot your cash drawer, or use the Hardware Troubleshooter wizard , available from the Help menu.

+

To function in Point of sale, a cash drawer must be connected through a working 40-column receipt printer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Are both your cash drawer and receipt printer on the Point of Sale compatible hardware list?

    +
    2. +
+

Note:The M-S Cash Drawer formerly sold by Intuit works only with compatible Star receipt printers. Learn moreClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  • +

    If YES, continue with the following steps.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If NO, has your cash drawer/printer worked with Point of Sale in the past? If it has, try the following steps to restore operation. If not, obtain and install compatible hardware.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Are the cash drawer and printer cables connected tightly?

    +
    2. +
+

Note: Use only the manufacturer's cable included with the cash drawer for this connection. Using any other cable, including phone cords, may result in irreparable damage to your receipt printer.

+
    +
  • +

    If YES, continue with the following steps.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If NO, correct the connections and then test the cash drawer again.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Is the receipt printer printing normally? Try re-printing a saved receipt from your sales history to test.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If YES, continue with the next step.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If NO, troubleshoot the printer first. Fixing the printer operation will most likely correct the cash drawer issue as well.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Does the receipt printer specified in your cash drawer setup exactly match the receipt printer specified for printing receipts in workstation preferences?

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Edit Preferences Workstation Cash Drawer: Make sure the receipt printer specified here matches the one specified on your Documents & Printers page for printing sales receipts.

+

image\wspref_cashdrawer.gif

+

Edit Preferences Workstation Documents & Printers

+

image\wsprefs_printoptions.gif

+
    +
  • +

    If YES, continue with the next step.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If NO, change your selections to match your receipt printer, and then select the Open Cash Drawer button to test the operation. Continue with the following steps if necessary.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Are your company sales preferences set to open the cash drawer for the payment type you are taking?

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

image\cmppref_opencashdrawer.gif

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Is the cash drawer locked? Use your key to open it, if necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Is something inside the cash drawer preventing it from opening? Try gently shaking the cash drawer to dislodge the obstruction.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Install the VAL-u Line cash drawer

+

Install the M-S cash drawer

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_data_connection.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_data_connection.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..94c7f42 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_data_connection.htm @@ -0,0 +1,219 @@ + + + + + + +Company Data Connection Issues + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Data Connection Issues

+

Help & Support Overview | Networking Issues

+

 

+

Point of Sale must be able to access the POS company data that is stored on the Server Workstation. In a networked installation, the connection issues outlined below most commonly apply when a Client workstation is unable to locate or connect to the data on the Server Workstation.  About Server and Client Workstations

+

 

+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Data Connection Requirements

+

There are certain prerequisites to being able to access the Point of Sale data, whether it is being accessed from the Server or Client Workstation.

+
    +
  1. +

    The Server Workstation must be turned on (but Point of Sale need not be running).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Firewall software must be configured to allow Point of Sale components to access needed ports.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

POS Data Connection Error Messages

+

If a workstation cannot locate or connect to the POS company data, you may see an error message similar to that shown below.

+

Application could not find, could not connect to, or could not open company data.

+

Review the list of possible causes and solutions below to correct the problem. When encountering connection difficulties on a Server Workstation, the first step is for the user to sign onto the computer as a user with Windows Administrator rights.

+

When encountering connection difficulties on a Client Workstation, the first step is for the user to sign-on to the Client Workstation as an administrator AND that an administrator also sign-on to the Server Workstation.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Possible Cause:

+		 +

Solution:

+
+

Company data was renamed, moved, or deleted.

+		 +

A list of the data files and Server Workstations found on the network is listed. Select the correct data/server and then select OK. On subsequent startups, the client workstation will reconnect to this same data.

+
+

The data file does not have a unique name.

+		 +

Ensure that the POS data file has a unique name.

+
+

The Server Workstation is not running. In order for a client workstation to access the data stored on the Server Workstation, the Server Workstation must be running.

+		 +

Once you are sure the Server Workstation and network are working, enter the Server Workstation computer name (can be found at Windows Control Panel System Computer Name on the Server) and POS company data file name (can be found in the Point of Sale title bar on the server) and then select OK.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

The Server Workstation has a different data file open than the one to which a client workstation is trying to connect.

+		 +

Open the correct company data on the Server Workstation or select to connect the currently open data.

+
+

The network connection or configuration is not working.

+		 +

Check your network connections and cables on both Client and Server Workstations. Can you access other information on the Server Workstation from the client? Check the Performance and Networking FAQs or consult with a qualified computer network specialist for help.

+
+

Firewall settings, on either the client or server workstation, are blocking the connection. In most cases, you will see a message from the firewall if this is the case. (Note: Some firewalls dont display a message at all in this case and others display messages only if the user has Windows Administrator rights.)

+		 +

Check your firewall settings. Be sure you are signed on to Windows as a user with Administrator rights and then try to connect again. If you receive a firewall message saying that Point of Sale (or the applications: QBUpdate, QBDBMgrN, Adaptive Server Anywhere Network Server) are trying to access the Internet, answer Yes, always to allow the connection. This should prevent this problem in the future. Note: Firewalls may vary in their message and the solution to this problem. Click the link above or refer to your firewall documentation for additional assistance.

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+
+

Selected data is not a Point of Sale database.

+		 +

Select a valid Point of Sale data file.

+
+

There are more workstations running than are allowed by license.

+		 +

Shut down excess workstations or purchase additional Point of Sale licenses.

+
+

The workstation is not running the same level or version of Point of Sale as another workstation that is currently accessing the database.

+		 +

Update or upgrade all workstations to the same level and/or version of Point of Sale.

+
+

Insufficient user rights to create a database or to change the currently accessed database.

+		 +

Ensure that you are logging in to Point of Sale with sufficient rights to create or change the currently accessed database. Also, be sure that your Windows user rights are not blocking access.

+
+

Client Workstation is still logged into a database, preventing Restore, Open Database or Rename Database.

+		 +

Close the Client Workstation database connection or exit Point of Sale on the client.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Advanced settings that might affect connection

+

Configure port filters

+

Performance and networking issues

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_emailfaq.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_emailfaq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c5c065 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_emailfaq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + +Office Integration FAQs (E-mail, Import/Export, Write Letters) + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Office Integration FAQs (E-mail, Import/Export, Write Letters)

+

E-mail Documents | E-mail Preferences | Store Exchange Methods

+
+

Basic

+
+

E-mailing from Point of Sale

+

I have Outlook Express set up as my default Windows e-mail client, but when I select to e-mail a document or run Store Exchange, Point of Sale launches Microsoft Outlook instead. How do I fix this? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

How do I change the format of my e-mailed documents? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

How do I view e-mail attachments that are in PDF format? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Can I e-mail all of my customers or vendors at once? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshooting overview

+

Help and support overview

+ + + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_featurenotavailable.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_featurenotavailable.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f10b8a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_featurenotavailable.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Why is a Point of Sale feature not available to me? + + + + + + + + + + +

Why is a Point of Sale feature not available to me?

+

Help and Support Overview | Unlock to Higher Level

+

 

+

If a Point of Sale feature is not available to you, it may be due to one of the following reasons. Features not available may be grayed out or not displayed on your screen at all, depending on the specific reason. Select a link for more information on a particular setting or feature.

+
    +
  • +

    The level of Point of Sale (Free, Basic, or Pro) you have licensed doesn't include that feature

    +
    • +
  • +

    You don't have security rights to access that feature

    +
    • +
  • +

    You are on a Client Workstation, but the feature is available only on the Server Workstation

    +
    • +
  • +

    The feature has been turned off in company preferences

    +
    • +
  • +

    A related feature, required for the feature you are trying to use, is not available, has been turned off or not set up (e.g. to track charge accounts requires that you track customers, to require employees to log in and restrict their access requires a company preference setting to that effect, and to use customer orders requires you also have tracking customers turned on, etc.)

    +
    • +
  • +

    You are trying to use a Financial Exchange feature but your connection with QuickBooks Desktop has not been set up

    +
    • +
  • +

    You are at a remote store in a multi-store configuration and the feature is not available to remote stores

    +
    • +
+

Important Note: New information fields, list columns, and report options may be added in support of new and enhanced features in Point of Sale upgrades and updates. In most cases, these new fields and options are automatically available to you. However, if you have customized your Point of Sale lists,  reports, or printed documents and tags, the new installation does not overwrite your customized layouts to add the new fields. If you plan to use a new feature, and the fields or options are not visible to you, you may need to further customize your layouts to add them or, in the case of reports, use the Revert option to reset to the default options and then re-memorize.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help & Support Resources

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_featuresbyedition.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_featuresbyedition.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bec910f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_featuresbyedition.htm @@ -0,0 +1,168 @@ + + + + + + +Comparison of Features by Level: Free, Basic, Pro + + + + + + + + + + + +

Comparison of Features by Level: Free, Basic, Pro

+

Upgrade POS | Point of Sale Licensing

+

 

+

The Point of Sale software that you purchased contains three separate levels of the program, each with a specific set of features. This allows you to license and use only those features that you need, without having to pay for advanced features you don't need.

+

Your current program level is shown in the title bar at the top of the Point of Sale window.

+

Point of Sale Free provides fundamental retail functionality to:

+
    +
  • +

    Ring up sales

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track sales by product or department

    +
    • +
  • +

    Run insightful reports to see what's selling and what's not

    +
    • +
  • +

    Accept credit, debit, and gift cards1

    +
    • +
  • +

    Transfer summary sales and expenses to QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software

    +
    • +
+

Point of Sale Basic includes all the Free features, plus:

+
    +
  • +

    Manage up to 20 checkout lanes in one store2

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receiving of merchandise into inventory

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track inventory item quantities and cost of goods sold

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track customer purchases and contact information

    +
    • +
  • +

    Integration options with QuickBooks Desktop financial software to help you manage your business better

    +
    • +
  • +

    Control access to features by password

    +
    • +
+

Point of Sale Pro includes all of the Free and Basic features, plus these additional features:

+
    +
  • +

    Customer orders (layaways, sales orders, and work orders)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer Rewards program

    +
    • +
  • +

    Create Customer ID cards

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory styles (size and color grid), assemblies, and grouped items

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory item pictures

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track multiple vendors per item, each with separate UPC, ALU, and order cost

    +
    • +
  • +

    Purchase and sell items by multiple units of measure (case-to-unit)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Create and track purchase orders with your vendors

    +
    • +
  • +

    Record item serial numbers on documents

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track available and committed quantities

    +
    • +
  • +

    Capture customer shipping addresses

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter shipping and tracking information on receipts and customer orders; integrated Shipping Manager

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track employee hours worked and send time records to QuickBooks Desktop for payroll purposes

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track employee commissions on sales

    +
    • +
  • +

    Define and apply manual, automatic, and coupon discount pricing for special or temporary sales

    +
    • +
  • +

    New item, price change, and customer order reminders

    +
    • +
  • +

    Suggest PO and generating POs from customer orders simplifies purchasing

    +
    • +
  • +

    Create special order items to sell or order customized or one-off merchandise

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customize printed documents and tags

    +
    • +
  • +

    Define and use custom fields for vendor, item, employee, and customer records

    +
    • +
  • +

    Manage up to 20 stores efficiently from a Headquarters location

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track merchandise transfers between stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    Collect different sales tax rates and set default payment methods at each store

    +
    • +
  • +

    Centralized inventory control and purchasing

    +
    • +
  • +

    Exchange information between stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    Company reports

    +
    • +
  • +

    Run store-specific profit/loss and other reports by class in QuickBooks Desktop financial software

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+

1 Requires an account with QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Services. Fees apply.

+

2 Requires a separately purchased license for each lane.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Upgrade POS

+

Manage my license

+

Point of Sale software updates

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_firewall.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_firewall.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bfa3f37 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_firewall.htm @@ -0,0 +1,137 @@ + + + + + + + +Configure Your Firewall + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure + Your Firewall

+

Help and Support | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

A firewall, on either the Client + or Server workstation, can block communication between workstations and + the Point of Sale company data or to the Internet. You may see a message + from the firewall if this is the case.

+

Note: Some firewalls + dont display a message and others display messages only if the current + user has Windows Administrator rights. Make sure you are logged into Windows + with Administrator rights to ensure you are seeing any messages your firewall + might be generating. Read configure + Windows user rights for more information.

+

 

+

Get Latest Firewall Updates

+

Several major firewall applications are updated regularly + with the latest Point of Sale file and port information and will automatically + allow access to the ports and files needed. Use your firewall applications + instructions to be sure you have the most recent updates available before + installing Point of Sale and each time you install a Point + of Sale update.

+

 

+

Windows Integrated Firewall

+

If you use the Windows integrated firewall, and it + is blocking access, Point of Sale will alert you on startup and offer + to automatically configure the firewall for you. It is strongly recommended + that you allow the automatic configuration.

+

 

+

Manually Configuring Firewalls

+

Each firewall program presents its interface in a + slightly different manner; each provides its own phrase for asking what + you would like to do regarding the action it views as a possible threat. + You will see some form of the question, "What do you want to do about + this?" That question will be followed by a list of options, such + as allow, grant, deny, block, permit, or something similar, from which + you must choose an action.

+

You + should select the option to allow, grant or permit the action. + There should not be a prompt the next time the same action is performed. + However, permitting one action for one file will not automatically enable + all actions from anywhere in the Point of Sale program. Several different + Point of Sale files perform actions that might be seen by your firewall + as an attempt to connect to the Internet. Permission must be granted separately + for each action.

+

If firewall messages continue to appear, it may be + necessary to manually configure the firewall to allow access for the required + program files.

+

If you need to manually configure your firewall application, + you should review the appropriate sections of the manual or help file + that was supplied with the firewall program.

+

 

+

Note: Windows + 64 bit version is shown below.
+          For 32 bit + versions, (x86) is not shown in the path. For example: C:\Program Files\Intuit\QuickBooks + Point of Sale 19.0

+

The program files to grant access to are:

+
    +

  • QBPOSShell.exe
    +  C:\Program Files (x86)\Intuit\QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale 19.0

    • +

  • QBPOS.exe
    +  C:\Program Files (x86)\Intuit\QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale 19.0

    • +

  • QBDBMgrN9.exe
    + C:\Program Files (x86)\Intuit\QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale 19.0\DatabaseServer

    • +

  • QBDBMgrN10.exe
    +  C:\Program Files (x86)\Intuit\QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale 19.0\DatabaseServer

    • +

  • QBDBMgrN16.exe
    +  C:\Program Files (x86)\Intuit\QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale 19.0\DatabaseServer

    • +

  • QBDBMgrN17.exe
    +  C:\Program Files (x86)\Intuit\QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale 19.0\DatabaseServer

    • +

  • QBPOSDBService.exe
    +  C:\Program Files (x86)\Intuit\QuickBooks Desktop Point of Sale 19.0\DatabaseServer

    • +
+

The services to grant access to are:

+
    +

  • Intuit Update Service

    • +

  • Intuit Entitlement Service

    • +

  • QBPOS Database Manager

    • +
+

Note: + Folder locations shown assume the default installation location on Windows + 8/ 7/Vista. Adjust accordingly if you installed to a different location. + If necessary, use Windows Search from My Computer to locate these files.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

POS + company data connection issues

+

Performance + and networking issues

+

Troubleshoot + QuickBooks Financial Exchange

+

Configure + port filters

+

Help and support overview

+

Contact + Technical Support

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_hdwr_trblshooter.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_hdwr_trblshooter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ddd7e1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_hdwr_trblshooter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +Hardware Troubleshooter + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hardware Troubleshooter

+

Hardware DriversClick to display a popup topic | Compatible Hardware List | Hardware Setup Wizard

+

 

+

The Hardware Troubleshooter can help you identify and correct problems with your Point of Sale hardware.

+

To use the Hardware Troubleshooter:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale Help menu, select Hardware Troubleshooter.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the type of hardware with which you are having trouble.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to narrow down the possible causes, try the suggested solutions, and then use the test option to verify the issue has been resolved.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you have non-Intuit hardware, you may be prompted to use the manufacturers CD or instructions to troubleshoot the device. When done return to the troubleshooter and continue.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot a receipt printer

+

Troubleshoot a cash drawer

+

Troubleshooting overview

+

Help and support overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_ie_securitylevel.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_ie_securitylevel.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b6f2f07 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_ie_securitylevel.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + +Set Your Internet Explorer Security Level + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Your Internet Explorer Security Level

+

 

+

Some Point of Sale features are displayed using the Microsoft Internet Explorer browser. If the security levels set for Internet Explorer on your computer are too restrictive, you may not be able to access some features or view some content in Point of Sale, or you may have to click through several security messages to view the content.

+

Point of Sale features that use Internet Explorer will typically display correctly if the security levels for Internet Explorer are set to Medium. Only you can decide which level of security is right for you, and

+

 

+

What are the default security levels in Internet Explorer? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Will changing my settings affect Internet Explorer outside of Point of Sale? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To change the security levels:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Microsoft Internet Explorer, go to the Tools menu and select Internet Options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose the Security tab.

    +
    3. +
+

At the top of the page, you'll see a list of the Web content zones. You need only verify and change the settings for the Internet and Local intranet zones.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Internet icon at the top of the window. Then, select the Default Level button.

    +
    2. +
+

Medium security should be selected, and a description of the security level appears in the window.

+

Note: If Medium security is not selected as the default, use the slider to set the security level to Medium.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Local intranet icon at the top of the window. Then, select the Default Level button.

    +
    2. +
+

Medium-low security should be selected, and a description of the security level appears in the window.

+

Note: If Medium-low security is not selected as the default, use the slider to set the security level to Medium-low.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    For more detailed information about Internet Explorer's security levels, refer to the information and help provided in the Internet Options window.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_indexsubentryprompt.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_indexsubentryprompt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9b455d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_indexsubentryprompt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + + + +Please select a subentry for this keyword + + + + + + + + + +

Please select a subentry for this keyword

+ +

Used from index only. Don't add footer or links.

+ +

Click an index subentry for the information you want to view.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_install_add_ws.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_install_add_ws.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c86b506 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_install_add_ws.htm @@ -0,0 +1,171 @@ + + + + + + +Install Additional Workstations + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Install Additional Workstations

+

Network Issues | Company Data Connection Issues

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale can be networked to allow up to ten workstations simultaneous access to the program across a network within a store; one Server Workstation and up to nine client workstations. About Server and Client Workstations.

+

 

+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Use this procedure to install additional Client workstations to an existing Point of Sale server installation. If multiple workstations are to concurrently access the Point of Sale company data, each must have a separately purchased user license and all computers on the network must have the same version (e.g. 10.0) and level (e.g. Pro) of Point of Sale installed. About Point of Sale licensing.

+

For additional information or if you need to install the Server Workstation, read the Point of Sale User Guide (launches electronic version in a separate window)

+

To install an additional client workstation:

+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary, network your computers, following the instructions for your networking hardware and software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Close all running programs, except Windows, on the computer that you are installing as a Client.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Put the Point of Sale CD into your CD-ROM drive (if installing from a downloaded file, follow the instructions provided).

    +
    4. +
+

The install Wizard will launch automatically. If it doesnt, browse to the Setup.exe file on the CD and double-click it to start the installation.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to install the program files to the client workstation:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Enter License and Product numbers from the CD holder purchased for the workstation or enter the same numbers used on the Server Workstation (with the latter choice, the Client will be able to run Point of Sale only if the Server Workstation closes the program)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read and accept the license agreement.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Client Workstation as the installation type.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Accept the default installation folder (recommended) or browse and enter an alternate folder name on this workstation. Do not browse to the servers installation folder over the network! Each workstation must have the program files installed locally.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the installation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the Server Workstation running (Point of Sale does not have to be open), launch Point of Sale on the Client workstation..

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Connect to the company data on the Server workstation.

    +
    4. +
+

If only one company data file exists on the network, you are automatically connected. If multiple files exist, a list is displayed and you can select a file.

+
    +
  1. +

    When prompted, select a workstation number for this computer. If using passwords, log in using the user name and password assigned to you when prompted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When the Hardware Setup Wizard appears, follow the on-screed directions to connect and configure any Point of Sale hardware you have purchased.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Merge the Client license with the Server license if prompted.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The Server Workstation has all program, company data, and the database application files installed. Client workstations install the program files, but access the company data file across the network to carry out program activities.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The following activities cannot be done on a client workstation:

    +
    • +
  • +

    Creation of a Point of Sale company data file

    +
    • +
  • +

    Exchanging data with QuickBooks Desktop financial software

    +
    • +
  • +

    Accessing Intuit servers online to manage program license information

    +
    • +
  • +

    Importing data with the Data Import Tool

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Store Exchange with other stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    It is recommended that you check for and install available program updates immediately after adding a workstation. If installing updates, make sure you update all workstation on your network.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+

Work with your POS company data

+

Install supported hardware

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_jumpup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_jumpup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3181576 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_jumpup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Start and Grow Your Business + + + + + + + + + + +

Start and Grow Your Business

+

 

+

Wondering how to put together a business plan? Or how to find expert advice and training in your area?

+
    +
  • +

    Business planning

    +
    • +
  • +

    Free business tools, resources, and product reviews

    +
    • +
  • +

    Networking forums to connect with other business owners

    +
    • +
  • +

    Small Business news

    +
    • +
  • +

    Marketing ideas

    +
    • +
  • +

    And more.

    +
    • +
+

Internet connection required  Visit the Intuit Community now for additional support.

+

This free website provides resources and tools to help you get your business running quickly and successfully.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help & Support Resources

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_learning_center.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_learning_center.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83e575b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_learning_center.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +help_learning_center + + + + + + + + + + +

Learning Center

+

Help & Support | Practice Point of Sale | Point of Sale Manuals

+

 

+

The Learning Center provides a way for you to learn, or to train your employees in, the basics of Point of Sale by watching and/or reading a series of tutorial presentations. The Learning Center is displayed upon startup of Point of Sale (you can disable the automatic display, if desired) and also is available at anytime from the Help menu.

+

To use the Learning Center:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Learning Center from the Help menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select an area of interest from the left-hand menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click a topic in the main window to watch that tutorial.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done, select Start using QuickBooks Point of Sale from the bottom of the window.

    +
    5. +
+

Tips for watching audio/video tutorials.

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_lgtngbolt_popup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_lgtngbolt_popup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e8b740 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_lgtngbolt_popup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + +Internet Connection Required + + + + + + + + + +

Internet Connection Required

+ +

In-help popup?

+ +

image\lightningbolt.gif When you see the lightning bolt icon, it means that an Internet connection is necessary to use that feature or help link.

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensemerge.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensemerge.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ef451fd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensemerge.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + +Merge License Numbers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merge License Numbers

+

License Overview | Manage My License

+

 

+

Multiple copies of Point of Sale on a network in one location share a license number. If you purchased multiple copies of Point of Sale directly from Intuit, you are provided a single license number that includes multiple user licenses.

+

However, if you purchased additional copies of Point of Sale from a retail store or other source, the additional copies will come with unique license numbers, which must be merged with the existing license number on your Server Workstation within 5 days of installation.

+

When the new (Client) workstation connects to the company file on the Server Workstation, you are prompted to merge the licenses. On the 6th day, Point of Sale will cease to function on the Client if the licenses have not been merged. Licenses can be merged online or by phone.

+

To merge license numbers:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the prompt displayed, select Merge Now.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If you are connected to the Internet, the merge happens automatically online. Select finish when the process is completed to close the merge window.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are not connected to the Internet, the phone merge window is displayed. Call the number shown.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen or phone agent instructions to complete the merge on the Client Workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To complete the merge and make the additional user license available, the Server Workstation must synchronize its license with Intuits licensing servers.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    If the Server Workstation is connected to the Internet and has previously registered, this is immediate and automatic.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the Server Workstation is not connected to the Internet or has not yet registered, a prompt to synchronize and/or register will be displayed periodically on the Server Workstation until completed. The synchronization can be done online or by phone.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You are encouraged to synchronize your license immediately from the Server Workstation. Once the licenses have been merged, the number of user licenses available for the company file is not updated until synchronization is completed. If you had only one previous license, only one workstation can access the company file at a time until synchronization is completed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If installing several workstations at one time and they are not connected to the Internet, you might want to get all of them to the point of merging before calling Intuit to complete the merge. Typically, several merges and synchronization of the Server Workstation can be handled with a single call. The phone agent will guide you through this process.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The original license number of the Client Workstation is deactivated after merging. It now shares a license number with the Server Workstation.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d03f2ce --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + +Point of Sale Licensing + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale Licensing

+

How Do I?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

When you purchased Point of Sale, you purchased one or more user licenses. One user license allows one computer to access the Point of Sale company file at a time. Multiple user licenses allow multiple networked computers to access the company file at the same time.

+

 

+

One License, Multiple Workstations

+

You can install Point of Sale on more than one networked computer with a single user license. However, only one of those computers will be able to use Point of Sale at any one time. Likewise, if you purchase two user licenses, you can install Point of Sale on more than two computers, but only two computers can work in the company file at one time, and so on.

+

 

+

Example: How many licenses do I need to use Point of Sale on three workstations? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Note: All installations on a network must be the same version and level (Free, Basic, or Pro) of Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Network Licensing Flexibility

+

This licensing structure provides a great deal of flexibility. You may have different computers in your store that you use for different tasks, but not necessarily at the same time.

+

For example, you want to use a point-of-sale workstation in the front of the store during business hours, but want to use a networked back-office workstation in the evenings to create purchase orders and exchange data with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. In this example, only a single copy (with one user license) of Point of Sale is required. It would be installed on the back-office computer as the Server Workstation and the front computer as a Client Workstation, using the same license number. Either workstation can access Point of Sale, but only one at any given time.

+

This licensing structure allows you to:

+
    +
  • +

    Use multiple workstations for sale lanes or specialized roles (purchasing, receiving, etc.)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use a single user license that is accessible via multiple workstations, but only one at a time, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use multiple workstations at the same time provided multiple user licenses have been purchased

    +
    • +
+

Server Workstation Manages User Licenses

+

When you install your Server Workstation, you are required to register that software license with Intuit. This license becomes the "master" license for the store and reflects the number of user licenses you have purchased.

+

If you install Client Workstations using the same license number, any of the workstations can run Point of Sale, but simultaneous access is limited to the number of user licenses you have purchased.

+

The Server Workstation functions as the licensing "manager" and must be running (though Point of Sale does not have to be open) for Client Workstations to access the company data. When any starts Point of Sale, it connects to the company file on the Server Workstation, an available user license is allocated to it until it exits Point of Sale, at which time that user license becomes available to another workstation.

+

As your business grows and you need more workstations using Point of Sale at the same time, you can purchase additional user licenses, up to a total of ten per store: one Server Workstation and nine Client Workstations. No matter how many user licenses you purchase, they all share one "master license" (the license registered from the Server Workstation).

+

 

+

Merge License Numbers

+

If you purchase and install additional copies of Point of Sale with different license numbers, you must merge them with the Server Workstations license. After merging, the new workstation shares the same license as the Server Workstation and its original license number is deactivated.

+

The Server Workstation, in turn, is prompted to synchronize its license info with Intuits licensing servers to reflect the fact that an additional user license has been added. The new user license is not available for use until synchronization is completed.

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensing_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensing_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ae0f34 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_licensing_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + +help_licensing_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale Licensing: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Merge licenses on multiple workstations?

+

Synchronize my license with Intuit licensing servers?

+

Buy additional user licenses?

+

Learn about the differences between Server and Client workstations?

+ +

Unlock to a higher level of Point of Sale?

+ +

Register Point of Sale?

+

View an overview of Point of Sale licensing?

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_locate_a_proadvisor.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_locate_a_proadvisor.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e123743 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_locate_a_proadvisor.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Find a Local Point of Sale Expert + + + + + + + + + +

Find a Local Point of Sale Expert

+

Help & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources

+ +

 

+ +

This topic content provided by the ProAdvisor and RSP teams. Do not edit without review and approval by them.

+ +

Looking for a Point of Sale expert in your area?

+

Get on-site assistance from a local expert who can help you set up, customize, and learn your Point of Sale software. Choose from Certified Point of Sale ProAdvisors or Retail Solution Providers, both have been tested and certified on Point of Sale by Intuit.

+

Note: Fees apply and are set by the expert. Point of Sale ProAdvisors have also been certified in QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software.

+

 

+

Certified Point of Sale ProAdvisors

+

Provide accounting advice tailored to your business needs.

+

Requires Internet connection Visit: www.FindAProAdvisor.com

+

 

+

Certified Point of Sale Retail Solution Providers

+

Your local retail business and technology experts that can help you with any retail technology questions.

+

Requires Internet connection Visit: http://intuitresellerlocator.com/

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_managemylicense.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_managemylicense.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93d2473 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_managemylicense.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + +Manage My License + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage My License

+

How Do I?Click to display a popup topic | About Point of Sale Licensing | Merge Licenses

+

 

+

The Manage My License area allows you to view and print the Point of Sale license agreement, purchase additional user licenses, and to synchronize your in-product license information with the license data Intuit has stored for you. The latter could become necessary if you have re-installed Point of Sale on new computers.

+

Up to ten licenses can be used within a single store, running any one level of Point of Sale (Free, Basic, Pro). Use this procedure to buy additional licenses at your current level. If you want to unlock to a higher level of Point of Sale instead, read the unlock topic.

+

Example: How many licenses do I need to use Point of Sale on three workstations? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To buy additional user licenses:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Manage My License Buy Additional User License from the Help menu at the Server Workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Next on the window displayed to complete your purchase online.

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

Select Skip online and purchase additional license by phone.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to purchase the additional license.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If purchasing by phone, enter the validation code given you by the operator and select Next.

    +
    3. +
+

To synchronize your license data with Intuit records:

+

You must have an active Internet connection for this option. If you dont have an Internet connection, select the Buy Additional User License option as described above, access the phone option, and tell the operator you are calling to synchronize your license.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Manage My License Synchronize License Data Online from the Help menu at the Server Workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to synchronize license data.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Feature comparison by level

+

Help and support overview

+

Point of Sale software updates

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_manuals.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_manuals.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c9c4e52 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_manuals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + +Point of Sale User Guides + + + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale User Guides

+

Help and Support Overview

+

 

+

Click a link below to view an electronic version of the Point of Sale user guides in PDF format. How do I view PDF files?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

User Guide - Installation and configuration instructions

+

Implementation Guide: Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard - Information about implementing Point of Sale as part of an overall system that complies with industry standards to protect the card information of your credit and debit card customers

+

 

+

Internet connection required Additional online resources (Internet connection required):

+

Point of Sale User Community - Connect with other Point of Sale users and experts to ask questions and share advice.

+

Point of Sale Support Web Site - Search our Knowledge Base of frequently asked questions, learn about available updates, or research other support options.

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_navigation.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_navigation.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0a54f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_navigation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + +Navigate the Help System + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Navigate the Help System

+

Help and Support Overview | Support Resources

+

 

+

Use the following controls to find the help topic you need.

+

image\help_system.gif

+

Contents Tab

+

The Contents pane uses a library metaphor to organize information:

+ + + + + + + + + +
+

image\open.gif

+		 +

Books represent a general area of Point of Sale. Click a book in the left panel to view the included topics.

+
+

+		 +

Pages represent individual topics in a book. Click a page to view the specific topic.

+
+

Index Tab

+

Select the index tab and type a keyword. The closest matching entry is highlighted. Double-click an entry or press <Enter> to view it. If multiple topics associated with a keyword, a list is presented from which you can choose a specific topic.

+

Search Tab

+

A word search from this tab looks for words or phrases that appear in the help system. This method of finding information yields a larger field of results and is not as targeted as using the index. Use the options on this page, such as the Search titles only check box at the bottom to reduce the number of hits you get. You can also create Boolean searches (and, or, near, or not statements) by selecting the small sideways arrow to the right of the search field.

+

Help Toolbar Icons

+

Hide/Show: Hides or shows the navigation pane. Hiding this pane allows you to see more of a program window and help at the same time.

+

Back: Return to the previously viewed topic.

+

Print: Sends the currently displayed topic to your default Windows printer.

+

Options: Ways to customize your experience with the help system.

+

In the Displayed Help Topic

+

Blue underlined links with no icon take you to a different topic or open a second window.

+

links with the plus sign expand to add additional detail on the same page. Once expanded, the icon changes to , clicking it again collapses the detail.

+ +

Click to display a popup topic links with the yellow up arrow display a "popup" topic without taking you away from your current page.

+

Green links display word definitions or other short descriptions.

+

License Level Identification

+

When the feature to which a help topic applies is restricted by your licensing level, you will see the license level identification in the upper-right corner of the topic:

+

Basic - available to Basic and Pro levels.

+

Basic Only - Available to Basic level only. Typically this means Pro level users have a more advanced feature to accomplish the same task.

+

Pro - Available to Pro level only (including Pro with multiple stores).

+

Pro Multiple Stores - Available only to Pro users with multiple stores.

+

Additional Help Resources

+ + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_printdesignerfaqs.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_printdesignerfaqs.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..650eceb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_printdesignerfaqs.htm @@ -0,0 +1,218 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Designer FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer FAQs

+

Print Designer Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Adding and Removing Elements from the Template

+

I see something on the screen that I want to remove, how can I do that?

+

How do I add a new section?

+

Besides my logo, what other images can I add to the template?

+

How do I know what information fields are available in the template?

+

 

+

Formatting Text and Element Properties

+

What options are available for formatting text and lines?

+

How do I change the text in a message or comment line?

+

 

+

Positioning and Sizing Elements and Sections

+

How do I know where or how something will appear when I print?

+

How do I get things to line up the way I want?

+

Can I resize column and field widths?

+

How do I resize or move a section?

+

How do I align elements and groups?

+

How do I turn on/off the rulers?

+

How do the X/Y coordinates work?

+

 

+

Printing and Viewing

+

I see an element in the template, why is it not there when I print?

+

Why is my new template not being used when I print?

+

How do I know where or how something will appear when I print?

+

 

+

Saving a Template

+

How do I save and use my template design?

+

How can I export my template so it can be used at another store or in another company data file?

+

 

+

 

+

Didnt find an answer to your question? Try these other resources:

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Visit the Point of Sale User Community to ask questions and share ideas, solutions, and advice with other Point of Sale users and experts.

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Check out our support website to search our online database of answers to frequently asked questions at www.quickbooks.com/support/pos.

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I see something on the screen that I want to remove, how can I do that?

+

The easiest way to remove an element from a template in Print Designer is to select it and press the enter key on your keyboard. You can also use the remove button on the toolbar.

+

When a selected element displays a grey background, it is required and cannot be removed. However, a required group field may have components you can turn off so that they will not display.

+

Sections cannot be removed from a template. If you do not wish section to be printed, just remove the elements in that section.

+

Learn more about removing elements from a template.

+

Print Designer overview

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I add a new a section?

+

Each template has a predefined and unchangeable number of sections. The number of sections in a template will vary depending on the template and on whether you are using a 40-column printer.

+

Learn more about template sections.

+

Print Designer overview

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Besides my logo, what other images can I add to the template?

+

More than one image can be specified in company preferences. but one must be designated the default logo. When you select an image in Print Designer, you can select the image set as the default logo, specify a different image than the default, or use more than one image in a document template.

+

Learn more about adding a logo.

+

Print Designer overview

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I know what information fields are available in the template?

+

Though most information is available to be printed, specific data fields will vary from template to template, and from section to section within each template. To determine what fields are available to be added in a section of a template, select that section and then select Add and Data field or Group of Fields. A dialog is displayed showing unused data fields that are available to be added to that section of the template. Data fields that are already in that section of the template will not be included in this list.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I change the text in a message or comment line?

+

There are several different types of text messages. Some are defined in company preferences. Many documents in Point of Sale have comments fields that you can edit directly from the document.

+

Some text fields, such as the signature memo on credit card receipts, cannot be edited. This text message can be turned off however by accessing the properties of the group element containing the credit card transaction and signature line.

+

You can also add text to any section of a document template.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Formatting Text and Elements

+

In Print Designer, text can be formatted in the same manner as it is formatted in most word processing programs, including font, size, bold, italic, underline and color. To change the formatting of text, access the properties of the element containing the text.

+

Specialized formatting of borders and graphic lines is not supported.

+

Learn more about changing font, line and border properties.

+

Print Designer overview

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I know where or how something will appear when I print?

+

The exact vertical placement of an element is dynamic based upon the other content in the printed document. More content or less content will cause elements to shift up or down the printed document. The template design window shows you what elements are assigned in each section, their general horizontal position, the sequence in which they will appear, and the space between them.

+

The Print Preview screen will provide a much closer approximation to the printed document. However, the preview screen does not have an actual transaction to use a basis for the display and therefore is still not a perfect example of the printed document.

+

The only way to see exactly how a document will print is to actually print a document from your history. However, you should bear in mind that not all fields are used in every document. For example, a receipt for a cash sale will not print the credit card signature lines.

+

Learn more about positioning elements.

+

Learn more about template sections and spacing.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I get things to line up the way I want?

+

Elements can be aligned through various methods:

+ +

It might also be necessary to resize an element in order to get it aligned in the way you prefer.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Can I re-size Column and field widths?

+

Column widths, such as in the item list, can be re-sized. However, if you size the column and it becomes too narrow for the information that will appear in the column, the information will be cut off.

+

Field and element widths can also be re-sized. Again, it is important to ensure that you do not re-size the field to a size too small for the data that will be printed in the field.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I resize or move a section?

+

Sections in the template and particularly at the end of the document will vary in vertical length depending upon the particular type of document and the printer being used. It is recommended that you build each section from the top down and then set the placement for the end of each section and the end of the document according to the lowest field placed in that section. The sequence of sections is predefined in each template.

+

The image below shows the divider at the end of the document moved to just below the end of the last field. This ensures that no wasted space is added to the printed documents. If more space is needed, the divider can be moved down.

+

image\printdesigner_divider.gif

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I turn on/off the rulers?

+

You can turn the rulers and set other interactive features in Print Designer preferences. These features give you choices for how you want to view and work with templates:

+
    +
  • +

    Snap overlapping objects to their edges helps quickly align the vertical edges of adjacent elements. With this option selected, you can overlap the top or bottom edges of two elements and they will automatically "snap" the edges to align with each other.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Show example text for data fields With this option selected, data fields display sample text instead of the field description.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Show Top Ruler Helps position elements horizontally on the page.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Show Side Ruler Helps position elements vertically on the page. Note that vertical positioning is relative, rather than absolute. When the document is printed, fields not populated with data are removed and lower fields on the template moved up to fill the blank space.

    +
    • +
+

To set Print Designer preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    With a template displayed, select Preferences from the lower-left of the screen.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select or clear the checkboxes for the preference options.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do the X/Y coordinates work?

+

The X and Y coordinates are, respectively, the current horizontal and vertical position of the top left corner of the selected element. While moving an element, the displayed coordinates show the position changes, allowing you to place the element exactly, whether you are using drag and drop, or the arrow keys on the keyboard.

+

Learn more about status bar coordinates.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

I see an element in the template, why is it not there when I print?

+

Some elements are conditional and are only printed when applicable. For example, a credit card signature line would not appear on a receipt for a transaction being paid with cash. In such cases, the unused element and the space it takes are removed from the printed document. Elements that appear below the unused element are moved up the document accordingly.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Why is my new template not being used when I print?

+

Point of Sale uses whichever template is assigned in workstation preferences. When printing tags, you have the ability to change the template and/or printer directly from the print dialog.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How do I save and use my template design?

+

Templates can be modified and saved with the same name, or they can be modified and using Save As can be saved with a different name. Once complete, the modified template will be available for use.

+

Point of Sale uses whichever template is assigned in workstation preferences. When printing tags, you have the ability to change the template and/or printer directly from the print dialog.

+

Learn more about modifying and saving changes to a template.

+

Learn more about recommended sequence for editing and saving templates.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How can I export my template so it can be used at another store or in another company data file?

+

If you have created templates that you wish to use at another location or in another Point of Sale company file , use the import/export feature to export specific or all modified templates to an external file. Once you have copied the external file to the destination location, use the import/export feature at that location to bring the templates into that system.

+

Learn more about importing and exporting templates.

+

Return to question list

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_qbsupport_message_boards.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_qbsupport_message_boards.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..343cccd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_qbsupport_message_boards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +Point of Sale User Community + + + + + + + + + + + +

Point of Sale User Community

+

Point of Sale User CommunityHelp & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources

+

 

+

 

+

The Point of Sale User Community is an online forum for users to share ideas, ask questions, and provide solutions to one another.

+

Click the picture above to launch your Web browser and connect to the User Community.

+

Who answers the questions posted to the Point of Sale User Community?

+

Point of Sale users provide answers to each other's questions. This is a thriving community of novice through expert users eager to answer questions, share tips and advice, and act as peer support. Community hosts (also referred to as Moderators) monitor the discussions for directional and navigational assistance.

+

To visit the Point of Sale community, click here.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_reinstallvista.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_reinstallvista.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1d5f1f2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_reinstallvista.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Upgrade a Point of Sale Workstation to Microsoft Windows Vista + + + + + + + + + + + +

Upgrade a Point of Sale Workstation to Microsoft Windows Vista

+

Help & Support Resources

+

 

+

Note: You may not be able to access this topic immediately after installing Windows Vista. If you intend to upgrade to Vista in the near future, we recommend you print this topic for reference.

+

 

+

Point of Sale 10.0 is compatible with the Microsoft Windows VistaTM operating system. However, due to new security features implemented in Vista, the first time you start Point of Sale after upgrading to Vista you will be prompted to grant permission for Point of Sale to start its database service. You must be signed into Windows as a user with Administrator rights to grant this permission.

+

To upgrade an existing Point of Sale 10.0 computer to Windows Vista:

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete pending activities, such as settling credit and debit card sales and exchanging data between stores and with your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make a backup of your Point of Sale company data.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Install Windows Vista.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Start Point of Sale. You will receive a Point of Sale message advising you that your permission is required to continue.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Start Service.

    +
    6. +
+

Windows will then display a User Account permissions dialog. This dialog may vary depending on your system settings and your user level. View example Windows dialog.Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    If the Windows dialog includes a password section, select an Administrator-level user and enter your password.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK or Continue.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If you use remote data sharing (RDS) to exchange data with QuickBooks financial software, download and install the Vista-compatible version of RDS. Learn more.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_reinstalpos.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_reinstalpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8073455 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_reinstalpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Reinstall Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reinstall Point of Sale

+

Install Additional Workstations | Backup/Restore Data

+

 

+

Reinstalling Point of Sale may fix errors that result because of deleted or corrupted files.

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Reinstalling does not overwrite your company data file, however we strongly recommend that you back up your company data before beginning.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Reinstalling will not overwrite newer files that you have received via a program update.

    +
    • +
  • +

    These instructions assume the use of a CD. If installing from a downloaded file, follow the instructions provided with the download.

    +
    • +
+

To reinstall Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Shut down all running programs on your computer except Windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Insert your Point of Sale CD into your CD drive.

    +
    3. +
+

If the Installation Wizard does not launch automatically, select Start Run and type D:\setup. Replace the D with the letter of your CD drive if it differs.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Install option when prompted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow any on-screen instructions to complete the reinstallation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Finish when complete.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Check for and install available program updates.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Performance and networking issues

+

Company data connection issues

+

Help & Support Resources

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_show_me_all.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_show_me_all.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d75d0f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_show_me_all.htm @@ -0,0 +1,422 @@ + + + + + + +'Show Me' Tutorials + + + + + + + + + + + +

'Show Me' Tutorials

+

Help and Support Overview | Learning Center | Manuals

+

 

+

'Show Me' tutorials provide overviews and instructions for completing various Point of Sale tasks. These tutorials can be watched by clicking a link below, from the Learning Center, or by clicking the Watch Tutorial icon (shown below) anywhere it appears on individual help topics.

+

Show Me tutorial icon

+

 

+

Note: Many of the tutorials include sound and are best played on a computer with sound card and speakers.  Tips

+

General Program Tutorials (Running time in parentheses)

+

Getting oriented to Point of Sale (1:45)

+

Managing your business with Point of Sale (self-paced)

+

How do I find a record or document? (1:26)

+

How do I put a document on hold? (:40)

+

How do I pay money out of the register? (1:02)

+

Inventory Tutorials

+

Getting the most out of your inventory (self-paced)

+

How do I add an inventory item? (3:10)

+

How do I find an item? (1:26)

+

How do I print tags? (1:15)

+

What is an item number used for? (1:30)

+

How do I add a department? (1:42)

+

Adjusting the cost or quantity of an item (1:00)

+ +

Transferring merchandise between stores (:53)

+ +

Using inventory styles (2:10)

+ +

Using multiple units of measure (1:27)

+ +

Importing items from QuickBooks financial software (self-paced)

+

Importing items from other sources (self-paced)

+

Sales and Returns (Receipts) Tutorials

+ +

Overview of sales documents (self-paced)

+ +

How do I sell merchandise? (1:44)

+

How do I handle merchandise returns and exchanges? (:45)

+

How do I put a receipt on hold to service another customer? (1:00)

+ +

How do I make a customer order? (1:15)

+ +

How do I look up a receipt in my sales history? (1:26)

+

How do I pay money out of the cash drawer? (1:02)

+

How do I take a payment on a store charge account? (1:00)

+

Purchasing and Receiving Tutorials

+

Purchasing and receiving overview (self-paced)

+

How do I make a purchase order? (1:00)

+

How do I make a receiving voucher? (1:20)

+

How do I add a vendor? (1:42)

+

End of Day and Reporting Tutorials

+

How do I read the X/Z Out Reports? (self-paced)

+

How do I run a report? (1:55)

+

Backing up and restoring data (self-paced)

+

How is my Point of Sale data sent to QuickBooks financial software? (self-paced)

+ + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_showmetips.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_showmetips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2995901 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_showmetips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +Show Me Tips + + + + + + + + + +

Show Me Tips

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+  +

If you are having problems watching the tutorials, check the following:

+
    +
  • +

    Are you using Microsoft Windows 2000, 2003 Server, or XP?

    +
    • +
  • +

    To hear audio, do you have a sound card and speakers and are the speakers connected and turned on before starting a tutorial?

    +
    • +
+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_taxfaq.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_taxfaq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ed06ec6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_taxfaq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + +Sales Tax FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Tax FAQs

+

Sales Tax Overview | Configuring Sales Tax | Sales Tax Reports

+

 

+

The following lists include common questions about collecting sales taxes in Point of Sale. Click on a question or scroll down to view the answers.

+

 

+

How do I collect sales tax based on unit price thresholds?

+

Due to a recent tax law change, when selling an item above a specified unit price I need to collect one combined tax rate for two agencies, but if the unit price is below the threshold I only collect tax for one of the agencies. How do I handle this in Point of Sale?

+

How do I collect a different tax rate on certain "luxury" items

+

I often take coupons or provide discounts which are reimbursed to me later by a third-party. I am required to collect tax on the full item price, prior to the coupon or discount being applied. How can I do this?

+

My city requires me to collect of 1% tax on top of the state sales tax charged. How do I set this up and get proper tax reporting?

+

I didn't need a particular tax code in my second tax location, because all sales using that location are non-taxable. However, when I deleted the code from the second location, it was also deleted from my default location ( where I do need it to collect sales tax). Why?

+

How do I collect tax on shipping amounts?

+

Didnt find an answer to your question? Try these other free resources:

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Visit the Point of Sale Community User Forums to ask questions and share ideas, solutions, and advice with other Point of Sale users and experts.

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Check out our support website to search our online database of answers to frequently asked questions at www.quickbooks.com/support.

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I am required to collect 8.0 % sales tax on certain items, but only if the unit price of the item exceeds a set amount, and then the tax applies only to the amount above that price. How do I handle this?

+

Set up a separate tax code in company preferences for this purpose. Select the Price-dependent single-rate tax option when defining the tax code . Enter the unit price threshold (the amount above which tax is collected), and then also select the check box to Apply sales tax only to the amount over the unit price threshold.

+

image\taxsetup_pricethreshold.gif

+  +

After setting up the tax code, assign it to the items in inventory that are taxed this way.

+

Point of Sale will automatically apply sales tax to the items associated with this code when they are listed on a sales receipt.

+

Learn more

+

Sales tax overview

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Due to a recent tax law change, when selling an item above a set unit price I need to collect one combined tax rate for two agencies, but if the unit price is below the threshold I only collect tax for one of the agencies. How do I handle this in Point of Sale?

+

This is best handled by setting up a multi-rate tax code. Set up one component of the tax code for each different rate/price range/agency combination needed, up to three components per tax code.

+

Click here to learn more about multi-rate tax codes and to view some examples of their use.

+

After setting up the tax code, assign it to the items in inventory that are taxed this way.

+

 

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I am required to collect a tax rate higher than my normal sales tax on certain "luxury" items. How do I handle this?

+

Set up a separate tax code and assign it to the luxury items in inventory. When defining the taxing instructions, enter the higher tax rate. Point of Sale will automatically apply the higher sales tax rate to the items associated with this code when they are listed on a sales receipt.

+

Example: Most of your taxable items are assigned the tax code "Tax" with a 7.0% tax rate. However, the luxury items you sell must be taxed at 8.5%. Add a tax code named "Luxury" or similar, enter the 8.5% tax rate, and optionally define a different tax code "mark" for this code to print on the customers receipt, such as an "L". Then assign the new tax code to the appropriate items in inventory.

+

If the tax only applies to the portion of the item price exceeding a defined threshold, you can use the price-dependent option when defining the tax code.

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

Using sales tax codes

+

Sales tax overview

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I often take coupons or provide discounts which are reimbursed to me later by a third-party. I am required to collect tax on the full item price, prior to the coupon or discount being applied. How can I do this?

+

Set up a non-taxable, non-inventory item for the coupon/discount that can be listed on the sales receipt. Include identifying information in the item description so that reports can be filtered or sorted by this value and set the price as a negative amount equal to the coupon amount or discount. (Option: Enter a generic description, e.g. "Coupon" and no price and edit the item when listing on a receipt to enter the amount and identifying information).

+

When selling the item, list both the item being sold at its regular price and the non-inventory coupon/discount item. Tax will be applied to the full price of the sold item, but the total due from the customer will be reduced by the discount item amount.

+

Since you are using an inventory item to apply the discount, consider the affect on your merchandise sales reports. You may want to filter and memorize your merchandise sales reports to exclude the coupon/discount item.

+

Sales tax overview

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

My city requires me to collect of 1% tax on top of the state sales tax charged. I need to report and pay this tax separately to the city. How do I set this up and get proper tax reporting?

+

When defining your tax codes, select the Multi-rate option. Enter the city and state tax rates as separate components of the code, each with their respective tax rate. (Note: Enter 0.5 % by typing 0.005 in the tax rate field). Since the tax is collected on the full price of the taxable items, do not enter any price thresholds. Assign this tax code to all taxable items in inventory and Point of Sale will collect the full combined tax rate on sales, but you'll have the ability to sort and sub-total your tax reports by agency.

+

Click here to learn more about using multi-rate tax codes.

+

 

+

Alternative: If you have integrated Point of Sale with QuickBooks financial software, you can accomplish the same reporting by setting up a tax group in QuickBooks and then mapping a single-rate Point of Sale tax code to the tax group. With this setup, the Point of Sale tax code will collect the single combined tax rate on sales, but your tax reports in QuickBooks financial software can break out the taxes due to each agency. Read Collecting sales tax for multiple agencies for more information.

+

Sales tax overview

+

Sales tax reports

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I didnt need a particular tax code in my second tax location, because all sales using that location are non-taxable. However, when I deleted the code from the second location, it was also deleted from my default location ( where I do need it to collect sales tax). Why?

+

Tax codes are universal across all your tax locations. Adding or deleting a tax code adds or deletes it to/from all tax locations. However, the taxing instructions for the code can be different for each location. In this case, you should add the tax code back but edit it in your second location to specify a 0% tax rate.

+

Also, in the second location (0% tax), you can map the tax code to a different QuickBooks tax item so it is reported properly in QuickBooks.

+

Using tax codes

+

Using tax locations

+

Sales tax integration with QuickBooks

+

Configuring sales tax

+

Return to sales tax FAQs

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_trblsht_rcptprinter.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_trblsht_rcptprinter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb31741 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_trblsht_rcptprinter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ + + + + + + +Troubleshoot Your Receipt Printer + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Troubleshoot Your Receipt Printer

+

Print FAQs | Help & Support Overview

+

 

+

Use the procedure below to troubleshoot your receipt printer or use the Hardware Troubleshooter, available from the Help menu.

+

My 40-column receipt printer is not working. What could cause this?

+
    +
  1. +

    Is your receipt printer on the Point of Sale compatible hardware list?

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If YES, continue with the following steps.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If NO, has your printer worked with Point of Sale in the past? If it has, try the following steps to restore operation. If not, obtain and install a compatible printer.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Check the following printer conditions:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Is the printer plugged in and powered on?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Is the printer out of paper?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Is the printer cover open?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Are there error lights illuminated on the printer? Information and solutions for error light conditions are available for these printers: Star TSP 100, Star TSP 600, Epson TM-T88III, Epson TM-T88IV, Citizen CT-S300

    +
    • +
+

If your printer isn't listed, consult the printer's user guide or contact the vendor for more information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Is the receipt printer correctly installed and specified in workstation preferences?

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Is your printer model on the Available Printers list? If not, choose Add Printer and install it now.

    +
    • +
+

image\wsprefs_avblprinters.gif

+
    +
  • +

    Is your printer model selected on the Documents & Printers page for printing receipts?

    +
    • +
+

image\wsprefs_printoptions.gif

+

If not, change your selections to match your printer, and then select Print Test Page. Continue with the following steps if this doesn't fix the problem.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    If using a USB printer, did you recently change the USB port into which you have it attached to your computer?

    +
    2. +
+

Changing the USB port for your printer causes Windows to install the printer a second time. Each installation of the printer is unique to the USB port into which it is attached. If this has happened, your Available Printers list will have a second instance of your printer named Copy of <model>.

+

You can either plug the printer back into the original port or, if leaving it in the new port, return to the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences and select Copy of <model> as your receipt printer. If using a cash drawer with the receipt printer, also change your cash drawer setup to reflect the Copy of <model> receipt printer selection.

+

In general, it is recommended you always plug the receipt printer into the same USB port and delete the other instance of the printer from your Windows printer list.

+

If the steps above do not correct the problem, uninstall and reinstall the printer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Open your Windows Printers and Faxes folder from the Windows Start menu or Control Panel.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Ensure there are no documents waiting to be printed by double-clicking your receipt printer name. If documents are pending, select Cancel All Documents from the Printer menu and then close the documents window.

    +
    3. +
+

If there are multiple copies of your receipt printer listed, do this for each.

+
    +
  1. +

    Delete each occurrence of your printer by highlighting it and then selecting Delete from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Reinstall your printer, following the instructions provided with it. Click here for instructions to install supported hardware you have purchased from Intuit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Return to workstation preferences and select the new installation of your printer for sales receipts and, if applicable, for your cash drawer connection.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Print FAQs

+

Troubleshoot a cash drawer

+

Troubleshooting Overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_troubleshoot_mas.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_troubleshoot_mas.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d8e68a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_troubleshoot_mas.htm @@ -0,0 +1,197 @@ + + + + + + +Merchant & Gift Card Service FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchant & Gift Card Services: FAQs

+

Merchant Service Overview | Gift Card Service Overview

+

 

+

If you have trouble connecting to or processing transactions through the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant or Gift Card Services, please review this list of common questions and answers. If you cannot resolve your issue here, call our customer support at (800) 558-9558.

+

How do I fix "Socket Error # xxxx" messages? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

I configured my account and selected the Verify button in the company setup (or company preferences) but got an error message. What could be wrong? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

Why do I get "timed out" or firewall and port error messages when trying to authorize or settle credit, debit, or gift card transactions? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

Why am I not able to authorize card transactions on my networked workstations? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Why do I get a "Connection Failed" message when trying to authorize transactions? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

Why do I get an "INVALID_MRCH_#_" message when trying to process a card transaction? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

Are there steps I can take to minimize the potential of credit card fraud and chargebacks? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

A customer lost a gift card and is asking for a replacement. How do I handle this? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

What is the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) and how do I comply? Click to expand/collapse answer

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Configure Point of Sale for a merchant account

+

Configure Point of Sale for gift card services

+

Help and support overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_uninstallingpos.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_uninstallingpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0512e94 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_uninstallingpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Uninstall Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Uninstall Point of Sale

+

Install Additional Workstations | Reinstall Point of Sale

+

 

+

Use this procedure to uninstall Point of Sale from your computer.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Do not uninstall Point of Sale if you are upgrading to a newer version, unless given specific instructions to do so. If you have already installed and are running a newer version, you can safely uninstall the older version.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Uninstalling does not remove your Point of Sale company file.

    +
    • +
+

To uninstall Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Exit Point of Sale on all workstations.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From Windows, select Start Settings Control Panel. (The shortcut to Control Panel may be located directly on the Start menu in some Windows versions.)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Double-click the Add/Remove Programs icon.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    From the list of programs, select Point of Sale. If you have both an older and newer version installed, be sure to select the correct version for removal.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Add/Remove.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    If prompted, confirm the removal.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Repeat on additional workstations, if applicable.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help & Support Resources

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_unlock.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_unlock.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a39ad21 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_unlock.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Unlock to a Higher Point of Sale Level + + + + + + + + + + + +

Upgrade Point of Sale

+

About Point of Sale Licensing | Feature Comparison by Level

+

 

+

If you need additional functionality, you can upgrade to a higher level of Point of Sale at any time over the phone, for an additional fee.

+

To unlock to a higher license level:

+
    +
  1. +

    On your Server Workstation, select Home from the main toolbar to display the Point of Sale Navigator.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Help menu, select Manage My License and then Buy Additional User License.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Call the 800 number listed and tell the service agent that you want to unlock to a higher level.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Follow the instruction provided to enter the new product and validation numbers.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Close Point of Sale and restart on all workstations to begin using the higher-level features.

    +
    6. +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you have multiple user licenses for a networked installation, you must unlock all licenses to the same level of Point of Sale. User licenses that are not unlocked will not be able to access the company file after the Server Workstation has unlocked.

    +
    • +
  • +

    There is no need to reinstall the Point of Sale software or transfer your company file, the change to the new level is handled automatically as each workstation is restarted.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Write down or print your new license number and product code. If you ever have to reinstall Point of Sale, you should use these new numbers. If you have to reinstall and have lost these numbers, call Intuit Technical Support for assistance.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Every unlock comes with a 60-Day, Money-Back Satisfaction Guarantee (ask for details when calling).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+

Point of Sale software updates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updatehdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updatehdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aabaef3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updatehdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + + +help_updatehdi + + + + + + + + +

Program Updates: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+  +

Install an update

+

Update multiple workstations

+

Set update preferences

+

Manually download an update

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_installing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_installing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8b39baa --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_installing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +help_updates_installing + + + + + + + + + +

Installing a Program Update

+

Program Updates Overview | Update Preferences

+

 

+

Once an update file has been downloaded, either automatically or manually, you will be prompted to install it.

+

Important: We recommend installing updates and then restarting Point of Sale during off-hours. Updating multiple workstations or a large data file may take some time. The update is not completed until Point of Sale is restarted.

+

 

+

Before installing an update:

+
    +
  • +

    Make a backup of your Point of Sale data file.

    +
    • +
+

If you have multiple workstations:

+
    +
  • +

    Make sure each workstation in each store has downloaded or has access to the update file. All workstations must install the update. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Have all client workstations exit Point of Sale, and then install the update to the Server Workstation first.

    +
    • +
  • +

    After the Server Workstation has installed and restarted Point of Sale, install the update on each client workstation.

    +
    • +
+

To install an update:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Install Now on the update utility dialog or Next if prompted to install an automatically downloaded update.

    +
    2. +
+

Point of Sale will automatically be closed on the workstation as the installation begins.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to complete the installation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Restart Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
+

The program will copy the new files to the appropriate folders. When you restart Point of Sale, any new features or enhancements will be available at this workstation.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The first time you enter practice mode after an update has been applied, there may be some delay as Point of Sale applies the update to the practice data file.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    If you are looking to upgrade to or unlock the features of a program level other than what you have licensed, read How do I unlock to a higher level?

    +
    • + +
  • +

    New information fields, list columns, and report options may have been added in support of the enhancements in any particular update. In most cases, these new fields and options are automatically available to you. However, if you have customized your Point of Sale lists or reports, reports, or printed documents and tags, the update installation will not overwrite your customized layouts to add the new fields and options. If the fields or options mentioned in an update release are not visible to you, you may need to further customize your layouts to add them or, in the case of reports, use the Revert button to reset to the default options and then re-memorize.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Manually downloading an update

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_manualdownload.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_manualdownload.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ad2d4b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_manualdownload.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +help_updates_manualdownload + + + + + + + + + +

Manually Downloading Program Updates

+

Overview | Update Preferences | Installing an Update

+

 

+

If you choose not to allow automatic download of updates (a preference setting), you can manually check for and download them at anytime using this procedure. You must have an active Internet connection for this procedure.

+

To manually check for and download an update:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Update QBPOS from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Updates tab of the window displayed, select Get Updates.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the update site and checks for/downloads new updates. If you have multiple workstations, each must download or have access to the update file before continuing. Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    Once downloading is complete, select Install Now to immediately install the update on this workstation.

    +
    2. +
+

If you do not immediately install a downloaded update, Point of Sale will prompt you to do so each time you exit the program.

+

 

+

About the Update Window

+
    +
  • +

    The Updates column lists available and downloaded updates. Click an update name for a description of the update.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Last Checked column displays the date and time you last checked for an update.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Last Results column displays the status of your last check for updates. Click on the status for more information on the download.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Reset Updates to clear the previously downloaded data and restart the update the next time you click Get Updates. Select this option if a download is interrupted or if you accidentally deleted an update file before installing it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click Stop Updates to immediately stop downloading an update.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select the Update Preferences tab on this dialog to set your update preferences.

    +
    • +
+

When trying to update my Point of Sale program, I get an Error 12029. How can I fix this?

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_multipleworkstations.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_multipleworkstations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..844c69f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_updates_multipleworkstations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +help_updates_multipleworkstations + + + + + + + + +

Updating Multiple Workstations

+

Program Updates Overview

+

 

+

Program updates must be installed on each Point of Sale workstation in each store. If you update some workstations or stores, and not others, those that have not been updated may not be able to access the Point of Sale company data or exchange information with Headquarters.

+

Each workstation can download and install an update independently, or one workstation within each store can download the update to a shared network folder (specified in workstation preferences), in which case each workstation will be prompted to install from this location.

+

To download and install update files, a workstation must be connected to the Internet or be configured to use the shared download folder.

+

When updating multiple workstations:

+
    +
  • +

    Be sure all workstations have access to the update before installing on any workstation.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Close Point of Sale on your client workstations and install on the Server Workstation first.

    +
    • +
  • +

    After the update has been installed on the Server Workstation and Point of Sale restarted, install on the client workstations one at a time.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Setting update preferences

+

Manually downloading an update

+

Installing an update

+

Program update overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_upgradeinfo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_upgradeinfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b4cb979 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_upgradeinfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + +Upgrade Information + + + + + + + + + + +

Upgrade Information

+

Program Updates

+

 

+

An "upgrade" to Point of Sale means you are going from a previous version to a newer version. This is different than a program "update," which is a free enhancement release within a version.

+

Installing an upgrade requires that a previous version of the program already be installed on your computer or that you have the previous version CD available when installing the new version. The upgrade installation will verify the previous version before installing the new files.

+

If you do not have a previous version of the program, you will need to purchase and install the full version of Point of Sale, rather than using an upgrade installation.

+

 

+

Important Upgrade Note: New information fields, list columns, and report options have been added in support of the many new and enhanced features in this version of Point of Sale. In most cases, these new fields and options are automatically available to you. However, if you have customized your Point of Sale lists,  reports, or printed documents and tags in a previous version, the installation of this version did not overwrite your customized layouts to add the new fields. If you plan to use a new feature, and the fields or options are not visible to you, you will need to further customize to add them or, in the case of reports, use the Revert option to reset to the default options and then re-memorize.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_user_information.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_user_information.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ce7a033 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_user_information.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Non-Tolerant Activities and the User Information Window + + + + + + + + + + + +

User Information Window and Non-Tolerant Activities

+

Help and Support Overview

+

 

+

Some tasks in Point of Sale are non-tolerant activities, meaning that all other workstations must exit Point of Sale before the task can be performed.

+

In most cases, the User Information window is displayed automatically if you launch a non-tolerant activity and gives you a list of other workstations currently using the program or applications that must be ended. You can also access this information manually following the procedure below.

+

To view the User Information screen:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Utilities >  User Information.

    +
    2. +
+

The workstations currently in Point of Sale are displayed. If these workstations exit, you can select Refresh to update the information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to exit.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you use third-party applications that are integrated with Point of Sale and they are currently connected to the Point of Sale company data they must be shut down for a non-tolerant task to be completed.

    +
    • +
+

Non-tolerant activities in Point of Sale include:

+
    +
  • +

    Restoring from data backup files

    +
    • +
  • +

    Changing certain company preferences

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cleaning up company data

    +
    • +
  • +

    Manually downloading and/or installing Point of Sale program updates

    +
    • +
  • +

    Renaming the company data file

    +
    • +
  • +

    Importing item data

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_whatisfirewall.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_whatisfirewall.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..069a899 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_whatisfirewall.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + +help_whatisfirewall + + + + + + + + + +

What is a firewall?

+

 

+

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+

A firewall is a protective barrier that helps block access to the data on your computer or network by unauthorized persons or programs. Firewalls are an important component of an overall data protection strategy.

+

Typically, firewalls are installed at each connection point to the Internet and follow a set of rules in determining what communications to allow and what to block. The rules can control the communications based on file name, by Internet address, by individual ports on your computer, or by the communication protocol used. Firewalls are configurable to allow or disallow communications through any of these channels.

+

Point of Sale uses a common communication protocol, called TCP/IP, for connecting workstations to your company data and for connection to the Internet for certain features. Some firewalls, including the firewall included with Windows XP, will block this communication using their default rules and must be configured to work with Point of Sale.

+

Implementing a comprehensive data protection strategy

+

Configuring firewalls

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_win_controlpanel.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_win_controlpanel.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8a8b753 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_win_controlpanel.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Use Windows Control Panel + + + + + + + + + + + +

Use Windows Control Panel

+

Windows User Rights

+

 

+

Many operating system settings that affect Point of Sale features, including installed printers and modems, user accounts and rights, date/time format, etc. are configured via the Windows Control Panel.

+

To access the Windows Control Panel:

+
    +
  • +

    Windows XP/Vista: From your Windows task bar, select Start Control Panel.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Windows 2000: From your Windows task bar, select Start Settings Control Panel.

    +
    • +
+

From the Control Panel, double-click the specific area for which you want to review or change settings, such as Printers and Faxes, User Accounts, or Phone and Modems.

+

To view or change hardware settings, right-click on the hardware name and then select:

+
    +
  • +

    Properties to view, change, or troubleshoot hardware settings.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Delete to remove the hardware from Windows. This may be necessary before installing a new similar piece of hardware, such as a printer.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_windows_user_rights.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_windows_user_rights.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..13180c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_windows_user_rights.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + +Configure Windows User Rights + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Windows User Rights

+

Help & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

If you use Windows 2000, XP, Vista, or 2003 Server, and have configured user rights at the operating system level, those Windows rights may affect access to Point of Sale.

+

Point of Sale checks the Windows rights (of the user that is logged in to Windows) on startup and displays a message if Windows rights are blocking access to the program. In this case, you should configure your Windows rights to give users Administrator or " full control" rights to the Point of Sale folders and their sub-folders as described below. These rights allow reading and writing of data to the Point of Sale folders.

+

Windows user rights are computer and user-specific. If you have multiple workstations, you have to set up Windows rights on each computer for each user that will log on to Windows.

+

Windows user rights need only be set up for the employees that log on to Windows, not for each Point of Sale user.

+

On the Server Workstation, for each user that will log on to Windows, give full control rights to:

+
    +
  • +

    The folder where Point of Sale is installed; typically C:\Program Files\Intuit\Point of Sale n.n (n.n = version number)

    +
    • +
+

On each client workstation, for each user that will log on to Windows, give full control rights to:

+
    +
  • +

    The folder where Point of Sale is installed

    +
    • +
+

Note: Giving full control to users for these folders DOES NOT give them rights to any other programs or folders on your system. The Point of Sale rights you assign to your employees within Point of Sale still restricts access to program features.

+

 

+

Following are summarized instructions for managing Windows users and setting Windows rights for these folders. These instructions are for Windows XP and may vary depending on the version of Windows that you have. Consult your Windows documentation for specific instructions.

+

To add or manage Windows users or groups:

+
    +
  1. +

    Right click on My computer and then select Manage.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Local Users and Groups and then either the users or groups folder.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use the menu options to add, delete, set passwords, or view the properties of users or groups, as necessary.

    +
    4. +
+

To set up Windows rights for specific folders:

+
    +
  1. +

    In Windows Explorer, browse to a folder.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Right-click on the folder and select Sharing and Security.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Security tab.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the upper pane, click the user or group name to which you want to assign rights.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    In the lower pane, click the check box for Full Access (so that the box is checked).

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Repeat for other users or groups.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select OK.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Restart Point of Sale.

    +
    9. +
+

 

+

Note: Security steps have been taken in Point of Sale to prevent unauthorized access to your company data. Part of this protection includes creating a user profile in Windows called QBPOSDBSrvUser. This ensures that your company information can only be accessed through Point of Sale. If your system has been set up with only one user and no login password, Windows has been bypassing the user selection screen during startup; this will no longer occur.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees and security

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_wstypes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_wstypes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..925030a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/help_wstypes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + +About Server and Client Workstations + + + + + + + + + + + + +

About Server and Client Workstations

+

Install Additional Workstations | Networking Issues

+
+

Basic

+
+

Within a store, Point of Sale can be run in Single User Mode (one workstation) or Multi User Mode (up to 20 networked workstations). In Multi User Mode, all the workstations have simultaneous access to the program. The most powerful computer should be the Server Workstation and holds the company data file with up to nineteen Client Workstations connecting to the server. A separate user license (or seat) must be purchased for each workstation requiring simultaneous access.

+

From the Home screen, you can view your current workstation type and number by selecting Help and About Point of Sale.

+

 

+

About the Server Workstation

+

Typically the first workstation to which you installed Point of Sale. If you are in Single User Mode, your workstation is a Server Workstation. Only the Server Workstation:

+
    +
  • +

    Creates and holds your point-of-sale company data

    +
    • +
  • +

    Can back up, restore, or rename the company data

    +
    • +
  • +

    Exchange information with QuickBooks Desktop financial software

    +
    • +
  • +

    Import data via the Data Import Tool

    +
    • +
  • +

    Set item and customer ranking preferences

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Exchange information with other stores

    +
    • +
+

Only one Server Workstation can be installed on a network.

+

Important: The Server Workstation must be running for Client Workstations to have access to the Point of Sale data. (Point of Sale does not have to be open on the Server Workstation.)

+

 

+

Client Workstation

+

Any networked workstation that is not a Server Workstation is a Client Workstation. Client Workstations access the Point of Sale company data across the network.

+

 

+

Switching Between Single User and Network Mode

+

You initially choose Single User Mode or Multi User Mode when setting up your Point of Sale company file. When installing, it will ask you if you are using one computer or two or more computers.  You may need to change this setting if you are adding or removing workstations in the future.

+

To switch between modes:

+
    +
  • +

    From the File menu, select Switch Company File to Multi User Mode or Switch Company File to Single User Mode.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Follow any on-screen instructions.

    +
    • +
+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Install additional workstations

+

About Point of Sale licensing

+

Connection, performance, and network issues

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport01.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d623f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,104 @@ + + + + + + + +Use the Point of Sale Help System + + + + + + + + + + +

Use the Point of Sale Help System

+

Free Online Support | Help & Support Resources | Find a Local Expert

+

For assistance with your current task, do one of the following:

+
    +
  • +

    Press <F1> from any Point of Sale window.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Select the Help button or a blue text link on a window, dialog, or message.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Select Help on this Window from the Help drop-down menu at the top of the screen.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Click the Help menu at the top of the Point of Sale screen for additional resources: Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
+

License Level Identification

+

When the feature to which a help topic applies is restricted by your licensing level, you will see the license level identification in the upper-right corner of the topic:

+

Basic - available to Basic and Pro levels.

+

Basic Only - Available to Basic level only. Typically this means Pro level users have a more advanced feature to accomplish the same task.

+

Pro - Available to Pro level only (including Pro with multiple stores).

+

Pro Multiple Stores - Available only to Pro users with two or more stores using Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Click here to learn about finding topic within the help system.

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..466c265 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + + +Help & Support Resources + + + + + + + + + + +

Help & Support Resources

+

Help & Support Overview | Navigate this Help System | Manuals

+

 

+

This help system, together with your Point of Sale User Guide, will serve to answer most of your questions about Point of Sale. However, should you require further assistance, use the resources listed below.

+

You may also find the answers to your issue in these troubleshooting topics. We recommend you start here.

+

Then try these additional resources...

+

Free, Self-Service Support Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Assisted Support Resources Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and Gift Card Services Support Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Order POS Supplies

+

Find a local, certified Point of Sale expert

+

Free resources for starting and growing your business

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport05.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2328839 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Register Your Software + + + + + + + + + + + +

Register Your Software

+

Point of Sale Licensing

+

 

+

You can use Point of Sale for 5 days without registering. On the 6th day, you must register to continue using Point of Sale. You will be reminded to register each time you start the program until registration has been completed. You can register online or by phone.

+

To register Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Product Registration reminder screen on the Server Workstation, select Register Now.

    +
    2. +
+

If you are connected to the Internet, an online registration form is displayed.

+

If you are not connected to the Internet, the phone registration window is displayed. Dial the number listed to register.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the online prompts or the instructions provided by the phone agent to complete your registration.

    +
    2. +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You are encouraged to register promptly. Besides keeping your software functional, registration provides other valuable benefits including access to technical support, product updates, and certain other online features.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Multiple copies of Point of Sale on a network in one location share a license number. If you install another workstation with a different license number, you are prompted to merge the license number with that of your Server Workstation. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Each workstation installed on a network must have the same Point of Sale level (i.e., Free, Basic, Pro) and version (e.g., 10.0) to access the same company file.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your license and product number can be viewed by selecting About Point of Sale from the Help menu. You will be asked for these numbers if you contact Intuit for technical support or to unlock to a higher level of features.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport08.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8aa8f64 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + +helpandsupport08 + + + + + + + + + +

Practice Point of Sale

+

Learning Center | 'Show Me' Tutorials

+

 

+

"Practice Point of Sale" is a separate program area that you can use to train yourself and your employees, and experiment with program features without affecting your real data. Practice mode also allows you to try the features at a level of Point of Sale other than what you have licensed. If you are Point of Sale Basic user, you can, for example, practice with the features at the Pro or Pro Multi-Store levels to see if they are what you need.

+

While in practice mode, the following apply:

+
    +
  • +

    You cannot back up or restore the practice data

    +
    • +
  • +

    You cannot exchange data with Quick Books Financial Software or between stores (if using Pro Multi-Store)

    +
    • +
  • +

    You cannot obtain credit/debit card authorizations

    +
    • +
  • +

    The date is set to December 15, 2007

    +
    • +
+

To access practice mode:

+

Note: Step 3 below applies only at the Server Workstation. Client workstations can only connect to the practice data currently selected by the Server Workstation.

+
    +
  1. +

    Close all open Point of Sale windows on the workstation being used for practice.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Practice QBPOS from the File menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select a practice data option:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Choose Continue to use previous practice data if you want to keep working with the same data last used for practice (sample data or your own).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Choose Use existing practice data and browse to the location of a practice data file. You can select the "Als Sport Hut" sample practice file with this option.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Choose Use a copy of my companys data to practice with your own data. A copy of your company data is made, so your real data is not affected by practicing. The login names, passwords, and security settings defined in your company data apply while in practice mode.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select a practice level. Basic users have the option of practicing with Pro or Pro Multi-Store features, and Pro users can practice with Pro Multi-Store features

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK to create the practice data and enter practice mode.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Log in with your user name and password, if prompted.

    +
    4. +
+

While in practice mode, the words "Practice Mode" will flash in the title bar and the status bar will be displayed in a bright yellow color. Activities you carry out in practice do not affect your real company data.

+
    +
  1. +

    When done, select Exit Practice from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport15.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport15.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6895b6e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport15.htm @@ -0,0 +1,255 @@ + + + + + + +Printing FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing FAQs

+

Printing Overview | Compatible Printers | Hardware Setup

+

 

+

The following lists include common questions about printing. Under the appropriate category below, click on a question to view the answer.

+

If you have problems printing, we recommend you use the Hardware Troubleshooter (access from the Help menu) for assistance. The troubleshooter will help you identify and correct your specific issue.

+

 

+

Printer Configuration & Preferences

+

My printer is not printing. What could cause this?

+

The Print or Print Tags buttons are grayed out. Why can't I access this option?

+

After upgrading, I can't find the same print template I used for a document/area before. Why is this?

+

 

+

Document & Report Printing

+

What is wrong when the right side of the text is truncated when printing the Z-Out Store Close report on the Star TSP600 receipt printer?

+

How can I change font size on a report?

+

What happens if I select print while viewing a document before the document has been updated?

+

What should I do if a printed document does not contain a field I want?

+

Can I customize my printed documents?

+

Can I change printing options at the time of printing?

+

How do I cancel a printing job after it has started?

+

When printing a X/Z-Out report to my 40-column printer, I get the error message "There was an error found when printing the document to LPT1: Do you want to retry or cancel the job?" If I cancel the print job Point of Sale freezes up. What can I do to correct this?

+

I am using the Epson TMU200 and am experiencing poor print quality. What is wrong?

+

 

+

Tag and Label Printing

+

How do I cancel a tag printing job after it has started?

+

When printing tags using the Zebra tag printer, tags are printed erratically, skipped, printed upside down, or not properly centered on tag stock. How can I fix this?

+

Tags are skipped when printing on a Zebra tag printer, even after a calibration. What could be the problem?

+

I accidentally sent a print job to the Zebra tag printer that was meant for another printer. What should I do?

+

The Zebra tag printer prints one tag, advances past several blank tags, and then the printer light becomes red, or the printer light becomes red when sending a job to the printer. How can I correct this?

+

When printing tags with cost there are unusual characters, but no cost. What has happened?

+

What is wrong when nothing prints on hangtags?

+

Can I customize my printed tags?

+

I changed fonts and font sizes in Print Designer, but my printouts are now messed up. Why?

+

See also Common issues with Zebra tag printers

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Didnt find an answer to your question? Try these other free resources:

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Visit the Point of Sale Community Message Board to ask questions and share ideas, solutions, and advice with other Point of Sale users and experts.

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Check out our support website to search our online Knowledgebase of answers to frequently asked questions at www.quickbooks.com/support.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Print records or documents

+

Print tags

+

Print the cost and last-received date on tags

+

Print customer labels

+

Workstation preferences: Printing

+

Compatible hardware list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Printer Configuration & Preferences Answers

+

My printer is not printing. What could cause this?

+

A number of things could cause this problem. Check for the following:

+
    +
  • +

    No power/printer is offline

    +
    • +
  • +

    No paper in printer

    +
    • +
  • +

    Printer is not properly installed

    +
    • +
  • +

    Printer is not properly connected to computer

    +
    • +
  • +

    Workstation preferences are not properly configured for the printer (use the Hardware Setup Wizard, accessible from the File menu, to connect and configure new hardware)

    +
    • +
  • +

    No template is selected in workstation preferences for the document type you are trying to print

    +
    • +
  • +

    More than one printer is connected to the port assigned (use the Hardware Troubleshooter, accessible from the Help menu, to identify and correct the problem)

    +
    • +
  • +

    You plugged a USB printer into a port other than the one on which it was originally installed. Replug the printer into the same USB port used before.

    +
    • +
+

Receipt printer troubleshooter

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

The print or print tags button is grayed out. Why cant I access this option?

+

Typically, this happens when no printer has been set up in Windows or assigned in Point of Sale. Selecting Preferences Workstation from the File menu and then select Available Printers from the preferences menu on the left. If your printer is not listed, select Hardware Setup Wizard to install it now. Then select Documents & Printers and specify the printer for documents as necessary.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

After upgrading to this version, I cant find the same print template I used for a document/area in earlier versions. Why is this?

+

Improved print templates (called "designs" in some previous versions) have replaced previous templates. Review your template choices in workstation preferences and make new selections as appropriate. If you do not have a print template selected when selecting to print, a dialog will be presented from which you can make your selection.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Can I customize how my printed documents and tags look?

+

Yes, if you are a Pro-level user, you can customize printed documents and tags using the Print Designer. Learn more.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Document & Report Printing

+

What is wrong when the right side of the text is truncated when printing the Z-Out Store Close report on the Star TSP600 receipt printer?

+

Go to File Preferences Workstation Print Options X/Z-out and change the template assigned to X/Z-Out reports to 40-column X/Z-Out.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

How can I change font size on a report?

+

You can change a number of report options, including font, header/footer information, and the columns of information displayed in the report. In the Report Center, choose the report you wish to run. Depending on how you run the report, the Modify Report wizard may be displayed before running or you can select Modify from the toolbar after it is displayed. Choose Change Report Appearance and then select an area of the report in the Fonts section to review or change font characteristics.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

What happens if I select print while viewing a document before the document has been saved?

+

In this case, selecting Print has the same effect as selecting Save & Print. The document is saved, then printed.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

What should I do if a printed document does not contain a field I want?

+

Try a different document template at File Preferences Workstation Documents & Printers and see if the new template contains the field/information you want. A number of templates are provided for each document type, each containing different information and fields.

+

(Pro) f the provided templates dont meet your needs, you can customize them or create new ones to meet your needs using Print Designer.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Is there a way I can change printing options at the time of printing?

+

At File Preferences Workstation Print Options, make sure the check box for Display Print Dialog... is selected for each type of document for which you would like to change options at the time of printing. You will be able to change the printer, number of copies, template, and various other options depending on the document type.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

When printing a X/Z-Out report to my 40-column printer, I get the error message "There was an error found when printing the document to LPT1: Do you want to retry or cancel the job?" If I cancel the print job Point of Sale freezes up. What can I do to correct this?

+

There are really two separate issues here. First, ignore the error message and let the printer continue printing. This error is caused by an overrun in the Windows print buffer, and if you just ignore it the message will disappear as soon as the buffer catches up. If it is a large report, this may take a few minutes but the message will disappear on its own and the print job will finish correctly.

+

The second issue, Point of Sale freezing when you do cancel the print job, is most likely because your printer properties are set to "Print directly to printer." If this is the case, system control is never returned from Windows to Point of Sale after canceling the print job. Open your Windows Printers folder, right-click your 40-column printer and select Properties. Locate the setting for spooling print jobs (typically on the Advanced page) and be sure the "Spool print jobs" and "Start printing immediately" settings are selected.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

I am using the Epson TMU200 and am experiencing poor print quality. What is wrong?

+

Try the following suggestions to improve the print quality with this printer.

+
    +
  • +

    Uninstall the printer from the Windows Printers dialog. Then run the ADT206E.exe file from the Extras\Drivers\Epson Printer & USB drivers folder on your Point of Sale installation CD, choosing the Status API and TMU 210 ReceiptA(R) options. This will reinstall the printer with the correct driver.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select print templates that use the Arial font at File Preferences Workstation Documents & Printers. Look for the {Arial} suffix on the template names.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you have a cash drawer attached and get extra characters printing, try changing the Cash Drawer settings in workstation preferences to "Connected through Epson Generic".

    +
    • +
  • +

    If extra paper is fed after a receipt is cut, try switching report/partial cut settings to assigned paper size on the Windows Printer Properties Device Settings tab.

    +
    • +
  • +

    This is a dot matrix printer and does not support printing of scannable bar codes.

    +
    • +
+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Tag Printing

+

When printing tags using the Zebra tag printer, tags are printed erratically, skipped, printed upside down, or not properly centered on tag stock. How can I fix this?

+

There are two possible reasons for this. 1) A dirty printhead, or 2) the printer needs to be calibrated. Calibration is offered required right after switching between label types, changing the roll, or just because tag printers can be finicky.

+

See Common issues with Zebra tag printers for advice on these issues and more.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Tags are skipped when printing on a Zebra tag printer, even after a calibration. What could be the problem?

+

Earlier models of the Zebra LP2824 printer work erratically with the current driver. Ensure that the manufacture date of the Zebra LP2824 is after October 2002.

+

See Common issues with Zebra tag printers for advice on these issues and more.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

I accidentally sent a print job to the Zebra LP2824 that was meant for another printer. What should I do?

+

Jobs meant for other printers are likely to have embedded commands that will create printing problems on the Zebra LP2824 printer. When this happens:

+
    +
  1. +

    Delete all pending print jobs for all printers (this may require rebooting Windows).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Power the printer off, and then back on.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Recalibrate the printer by selecting the Calibrate button on the Print dialog.

    +
    4. +
+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

The Zebra tag printer prints one tag, advances past several blank tags, and then the printer light becomes red, or the printer light becomes red when sending a job to the printer. How can I correct this?

+

This problem may be caused by accidentally sending a printer job meant for another printer to the Zebra LP2824.

+
    +
  1. +

    Delete all pending print jobs for all printers (this may require deleting jobs and rebooting Windows).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Power the printer off, and then back on.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Recalibrate the printer by selecting the Calibrate button on the Print dialog.

    +
    4. +
+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

When printing tags with cost there are unusual characters, but no cost. What has happened?

+

Tags can be printed in code to prevent inadvertent disclosure of Cost and Last Received Date information. The default at Edit Preferences Company Pricing Price Tag Codes maps the first 10 letters of the alphabet to the numbers 0-9 (a=1, b=2, c=3, etc.). Cost will print on tags in this code when you use a tag template with a suffix of "+ cost" (for example, "Zebra Label +cost"). Change the cost codes to suit your taste.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

What is wrong when nothing prints on hang tags?

+

Only one side of tag stock is designed for thermal printing. Reverse the direction that the tag stock feeds and try printing again.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

(Pro) I changed fonts and font sizes in Print Designer, but my printouts are now messed up. Why?

+

Print Designer allows you to change almost everything about a print template, including fonts, special characters, font sizes, colors, etc. But Print Designer doesn't know what printer you will use to actually print your tags or documents. Take care to not make changes that your printer won't support. For example, receipt and tag printers may not support all font characters, sizes, or color. Always test template changes to be sure the output is what you expected before putting the template into use in your store.

+

How do I cancel a printing job after it has started?

+

Point of Sale "spools" a printing job to Windows and Windows then sends the job to your printer. This allows you to begin another task sooner in Point of Sale, while Windows handles the printing chores. You can cancel the print job using the Cancel button on the print progress dialog in Point of Sale. Unfortunately, on many print jobs the spooling and this dialog are visible for only a few seconds in Point of Sale.

+

You may still be able to cancel the print job in Windows. Look for the printer icon in your system tray and double-click it. This opens the Windows print queue window for the printer. Your print job and its status is displayed. To cancel the print job, select the document and then from the Document menu, select Cancel.

+

Another, and possibly quicker, method of canceling a print job is too power off the printer itself. Cycling the printer power off and on typically clears any printer buffer (memory) that the printer itself may be using to hold the print job. You may still have to cancel or delete the job in the Windows print queue or it will remain there and possibly attempt to restart later.

+

Refer to Windows help for more information on working with printers or changing your print settings.

+

 

+

Return to question list

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport16.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport16.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a038dce --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport16.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Troubleshooting Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Troubleshooting Overview

+

Help & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources

+

 

+

Select a topic below for assistance in troubleshooting problems. If you received an error message, click on the Help button on the message for specific help related to the activity you were performing.

+

What do you need help with?

+

 

+

Feature availability

+

Cash drawer

+

Receipt printer

+

Pole display

+

Bar code scanner

+

Hardware (general)

+

Printing (general)

+

Sales taxes

+

Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop

+

Windows user rights

+

Connecting to POS company data

+

Performance and networking

+

E-mailing from Point of Sale

+

Print Designer

+

Store Exchange

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Find a local. certified Point of Sale expert

+

Compatible POS hardware list

+

Program capacities

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport17.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport17.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9c846b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport17.htm @@ -0,0 +1,470 @@ + + + + + + +Connection, Performance, and Networking Issues + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Connection, Performance, and Networking Issues

+

Help & Support Overview | Help & Support Resources | Troubleshoot

+

 

+

Connection Issues

+

I get error messages saying Point of Sale cannot connect to my company data

+

My firewall is blocking me from the POS company data

+

How do I set my port filters to allow access to needed ports?

+

When trying to update my Point of Sale program, I get an Error 12029

+

I cannot launch Web pages using links in Point of Sale

+

 

+

General Performance

+

Does your PC meet the minimum system requirements?

+

Do you have the latest updates or Service Packs for your Windows operating system?

+

Is the configuration and scheduling correct for anti-virus software?

+

When Windows comes out of hibernation, Point of Sale crashes

+

I had a power failure and now am getting error messages about data corruption

+

 

+

Networking Issues

+

Many network configuration parameters can influence the connection or performance of Point of Sale. An improperly configured network can cause all system resources to work harder, deterring from their ability to serve Point of Sale and other application requests. Following is a list of questions and answers related to the most common parameters that can adversely affect Point of Sale performance. Every computer and network configuration is unique; consult a qualified computer consultant for help, if necessary, to address networking issues.

+

Note: Virtual Private Networks (VPN) and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with Point of Sale. These network configurations may be unreliable.

+

 

+

Is the configuration and scheduling correct for anti-virus software?

+

Is any network backup software on the Server Workstation scheduled to run while Point of Sale operations are being performed?

+

Does the Server Workstation have appropriate hardware?

+

Does each client workstation have the appropriate hardware?

+

Is each device connected to a 100 Mbps Hub/Switch that is transmitting at 100Mbps?

+

 

+

Warning: The following advanced network issues should be addressed only by a qualified computer network consultant. These issues assume you have addressed the basic network settings posed in the questions above

+

 

+

Are the switches and network cards capable of auto-negotiating 100Mbps/Full Duplex?

+

Does each computer-switch port link auto-negotiate to 100Mbps/Full Duplex properly?

+

Are all devices connected to a 100Mbps hub operating at Half Duplex?

+

Is the Server Workstation hard drive defragmented on a regular basis?

+

Are system performance options properly set according to Point of Sale usage on the Server Workstation?

+

Are Port Filters set to allow access to needed ports?

+

 

+

 

+

Didnt find an answer to your question? Try these other resources:

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Visit the Point of Sale Community Message Board to ask questions and share ideas, solutions, and advice with other Point of Sale users and experts.

+

image\lightningbolt.gif Check out our support website to search our online database of answers to frequently asked questions at www.quickbooks.com/support/pos.

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Help and support overview

+

Troubleshooting overview

+

Configuring firewalls

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

When trying to get the latest Point of Sale update, I get an Error 12029. What is wrong and how can I fix this?

+

This error indicates that Point of Sale cannot connect to the update servers using your current Internet connection. Follow these steps to fix this problem:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure your Internet connection is active and working outside of Point of Sale.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Can you successfully connect to other Web sites? If not, use the Windows Network Connections manager (available from Control Panel) to configure and test your Internet connection. Contact your Internet Service Provider for assistance, if necessary.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences Workstation from the Point of Sale File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Automatic Update from the preferences list on the left side of the window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Internet Connection Setup button.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the choice labeled Use my computers Internet Connection settings to establish a connection when this application accesses the Internet.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Next and then Done to finish.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save to exit Workstation preferences.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Try updating Point of Sale again (select Update QBPOS from the File menu and then select Get Updates.

    +
    8. +
+

If this does not correct the problem, then there is probably a firewall installed on your computer that is blocking the Internet connection. Read Configuring firewalls and refer to your firewalls documentation or a qualified computer consultant for information about configuring the firewall for the following settings:

+
    +
  • +

    Ports 80 (for HTTP) and 443 (for HTTPS) are enabled

    +
    • +
  • +

    The following files are configured to allow them to connect to the Internet and download updates:

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    The Point of Sale executable file (qbpos.exe, located in the Point of Sale root directory))

    +
    • +
  • +

    The QuickBooks Delivery Agent module file (qbupdate.exe; located in the C:\Program Files\Common Files\Intuit\QuickBooks\QBUpdate folder)

    +
    • +
+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Does the PC meet the minimum system requirements?

+

Review the system requirements in your Point of Sale User Guide. Generally, increasing system RAM is the most cost-effective way to increase the performance on a single PC, assuming all other minimum requirements are met.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Do you have the latest updates or Service Packs for your operating system (Windows)?

+

Maintaining your Windows operating system with the latest updates and/or Service Packs is critical to ensuring optimum performance and data protection. Visit the Windows Update Internet site regularly to review and update your operating system files as necessary. For most versions of Windows, the update site can be accessed by selecting Start and then Windows Update.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

When Windows comes out of hibernation, Point of Sale crashes. How can I fix this?

+

Some Windows systems come with a hibernation feature that puts the computer to "sleep" after a set period of inactivity. This feature can be problematic with some programs. If you experience any difficulty returning from hibernation it is recommended that you disable this feature on your system.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Is the configuration and scheduling correct for anti-virus software?

+

If a workstation or network running Point of Sale seems to be abnormally slow, try reconfiguring your virus scanning software. By default, most virus scanning software scans all files in all folders. This can cause significant load on the system resources resulting in decreased performance for Point of Sale.

+

Be aware that changing the options of your virus scanning software can reduce its effectiveness. Consult a qualified computer technical consultant prior to making any changes to ensure that you understand the consequences of those changes.

+

Some anti-virus configuration options that may improve performance are:

+
    +
  • +

    Disable continuous scanning and schedule virus scanning during off-peak hours.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Limit scanning to specific file types (such as .exe, .vbs, etc.).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are operating in a network environment, make sure each workstation is configured to scan only its own hard drive and not entire network.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If scanning in continuous mode, exclude the \Program Files\Intuit\Point of Sale n.n folder from INBOUND and OUTBOUND scan operations. (n.n = Point of Sale version, i.e. 10.0)

    +
    • +
+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

I had a power failure and now am getting error messages about data corruption. What do I do?

+

A power failure that occurs while Point of Sale is writing to your company date file may result in data loss or corruption, and any transaction or activity in process will most likely be lost. If you can access your company data, print out all transactional documents made after your last backup. Then restore your data from the backup and re-enter those transactions.

+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks financial software, and the re-entered documents have already been sent to QuickBooks you can mark them so that they are not sent again. With the document selected in your Point of Sale history list, select View Financial History from the I Want To menu and then select the check box labeled Mark this document as successfully sent.

+

 

+

Note: Data Recovery Service. If your attempt to restore your data is unsuccessful or if you need additional help, you can contact Intuit Technical Support for assistance. There may be a fee for this service.

+

 

+

We strongly recommend installing a UPS (uninterruptible power supply) on at least the Server Workstation, which stores your company data, and on the workstation you use to communicate for electronic funds transactions. Ideally, every workstation running Point of Sale should have a UPS installed. A UPS will give you the time to finish and save transactions in progress and shut down your system safely in the event the power loss lasts more than a few minutes.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Is any network backup software on the Server Workstation scheduled to run while Point of Sale operations are being performed?

+

Network backups are demanding on system resources and may cause performance degradation. There may be resource contention among the different services, applications, and Point of Sale on the server. It is recommended that you not use your Point of Sale Server Workstation for other network services, such as a domain controller, web server, file server, etc. If backups or other scheduled tasks must be run from the Server Workstation, schedule them for a time that does not conflict with Point of Sale operations.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Does the Server Workstation have appropriate hardware?

+

To perform optimally as data host for several workstations, the Server Workstation will require more than the Point of Sale minimum hardware requirements. Consult your network professional for more information and recommendations.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Does each client workstations have the appropriate hardware?

+

Each client workstation must meet the minimum system requirements, e.g. Pentium III or equivalent, 500 MHz CPU, 256 MB of RAM and a minimum of 250MB of free drive space.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Is each device connected to a 100 Mbps Hub/Switch that is transmitting at 100Mbps?

+

Since hubs operate at Half Duplex and transmit all frames to all ports, if one device is connected to a hub at 10Mbps, all devices will be downgraded to 10Mbps. There are intelligent hubs that do support independent speed settings per port, but you must confirm whether or not your hub supports this and that it is working correctly.

+

Full Duplex switches with auto-negotiation capabilities are the preferred connectivity devices for networks.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Warning: The following advanced network issues should be addressed only by a qualified computer network consultant. These issues assume you have addressed the basic network settings posed in the questions above

+

 

+


+Are the switches and network cards capable of auto-negotiating 100Mbps/Full Duplex?

+

A workstation or server connected to a switch port by a CAT5 cable is identified as a 'link'. The computer network card and the switch must support operating in 100Mb/Full Duplex. If either does not support this, the potential exists for a speed/duplex mismatch.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Does each computer-switch port link auto-negotiate to 100Mbps/Full Duplex properly?

+

Whenever possible, configure the network card and the switch port to auto-negotiate the speed and duplex setting. If the auto-negotiation protocols are working to industry standards, they will negotiate to the highest available speed and duplex setting (100Mbps/Full Duplex). This will result in the least amount of administration.

+

When using auto-negotiation, you must verify that the negotiation is occurring properly. If either device fails in the negotiation, the result can be a speed/duplex mismatch or a reduction in the speed/duplex settings the devices have negotiated. Either of these conditions will cause performance degradation. (See below for verifying speed/duplex settings).

+

If auto-negotiation is not an option on both devices, or it fails, manually set the speed/duplex settings for both devices identically ; 100Mbps/Full Duplex is the target configuration when connecting to a switch that supports this. Link speeds and duplex settings are configurable per switch port. All Point of Sale devices should be set to operate on 100Mbps/Full Duplex links for best performance.

+

With fiber optics, auto-negotiation is less likely to be supported. If you connect two switches, or a server and a switch, with fiber, you should manually configure both ends of this link for the same speed (100Mbps or 1000Mbps) and Full Duplex.

+

Auto-negotiation protocols will not detect an inferior cable, such as a CAT3 cable. The auto-negotiation will resolve to 100Mbps/Full Duplex, then errors will begin occurring during normal data transmission if you elect to use CAT3 cabling.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Are all devices connected to a 100 Mbps hub operating at Half Duplex?

+

Hubs are not compatible with Full Duplex communications. Full Duplex devices do not detect other devices that are transmitting on the wire; they will transmit at will. A Full Duplex network card connected to a hub will transmit data whenever it is received, without regard for any other devices transmitting on the wire, causing excessive collisions.

+

Full Duplex switches with auto-negotiation capabilities are the preferred connectivity devices for networks because of better performance.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Is the Server Workstation hard drive defragmented on a regular basis?

+

Periodic defragmentation of the hard drive is essential to optimal server performance. Files become fragmented over time as they grow in size and as the OS tries to conserve space by writing new data to open, non-contiguous blocks on the hard drive. Under severely fragmented conditions, a disk read-write head may have to perform 10-15 seek operations to read a fragmented file vs. one seek operation if this file were written contiguously to the disk.

+

Windows 2000 and XP both include a defragmentation utility. Refer to your Windows help for instructions to run this utility. There are also many good third-party utilities that allow for scheduling and automated defragmentation as well as other features to help maintain your disk subsystems.

+

Even if the defragmentation utility reports that defragmentation is not required, you should select View Report and look at the "Most Fragmented Files" area for critical files and their level of fragmentation. If you find critical system files or Point of Sale files heavily fragmented, you should run a defragmentation operation.

+

Note that files that are in use, or held open will not be defragmented, so this operation should be performed with everyone out of the system or at a time of low utilization.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Are system performance options properly set according to Point of Sale usage on the Server Workstation?

+

Application Performance

+

On the Server Workstation, access Control Panel System Advanced tab Performance Options:

+
    +
  • +

    Set to Applications if using the server as a workstation (normal).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Set to Background Services if most Point of Sale work is done over the network by client workstations.

    +
    • +
+

This setting affects how the system allocates CPU cycles to each thread. If you use Point of Sale regularly on the Server Workstation and you want to allocate more CPU cycles to this instance of the program, select Applications. If you rarely run Point of Sale on the server, you should select Background Services. This will distribute CPU cycles equally among all services.

+

For client workstations, this setting should always be set to Applications.

+

 

+

The Pagefile

+

By default, the pagefile is created on the boot partition, where the system files are located and has an initial size equal to 1.5 times the amount of physical RAM, with the ability to grow beyond that initial size.

+

If a STOP error occurs and you want to create a memory dump file for debugging purposes, it is necessary to have the pagefile on the boot partition. For optimal performance though, the pagefile should be located on a separate physical drive from the boot partition to eliminate the disk access contention created between pagefile I/O and system file I/O. To balance out the need for creating a memory dump and the need to optimize performance, you can leave the pagefile on the boot partition and create an additional pagefile on a physically separate drive. Windows 2000 uses an algorithm for paging to the pagefile on the least busy drive.

+

Also, consider setting the initial and maximum size of the pagefile the same. This prevents the pagefile from growing. Resizing the pagefile takes CPU cycles and causes pagefile fragmentation, which, in turn, causes slower paging. Make sure the page file's initial size is at least 1.5 times physical RAM.

+

To view or revise pagefile settings, open Control Panel System Advanced tab Performance Options, and under Virtual Memory select Change.

+

Return to question list

+

 

+

 

+

Are Port Filters set to allow access to needed ports?

+

Windows 2000 and XP allow TCP/IP and UDP ports to be filtered, which could affect Point of Sale operations. To determine if this is the source of the problem, do the following:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Windows Start menu or Control Panel, right-click My Network Places and select Properties. (Called Network and Dial-up Connections in Windows 2000.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Right-click Local Area Connection and select Properties.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Internet Protocol (TCP/IP). (Make sure the box is checked.)

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Properties.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Advanced.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select the Options tab.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select TCP/IP Filtering and then Properties.

    +
    8. +
+

If Permit All is checked in each category, your ports are not being filtered and are not blocking Point of Sale actions at the operating system level. If Permit Only is checked in any category that is needed for Point of Sale, or required ports are not in the list, the same problems will occur as with a firewall. See the table below for a list of ports and which program files access them. Add the appropriate port to the permit list where necessary.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Default Port

+		 +

Program File

+		 +

When Accessed

+
+

443

+		 +

EFTSvr.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+
+

8443

+		 +

EFTSvr.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+

Merchant Service transactions

+
+

2638

+		 +

DataImporter.exe

+

EFTSvr.exe

+

QBDBMgr.exe

+

QBDBMgrN.exe

+

QBPOSDBServiceEx.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+

Conversion from previous version

+

Changing currently running database.

+

Startup

+

Detecting change to QBDatabases.ini

+

Help > Manage my license

+
+

46203

+		 +

EFTSvr.exe

+

QBDBMgrN.exe

+

qbpos.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+

Changing currently running database.

+
+

46204

+		 +

EFTSvr.exe

+

QBDBMgrN.exe

+

QBPOS.exe

+		 +

Throughout operation

+

Changing currently running database.

+
+

8024

+

 

+		 +

QBPOS.exe

+

Setup.exe

+		 +

Web installation

+

License verification

+

Throughout operation

+
+

8025

+		 +

QBPOS.exe

+

Setup.exe

+		 +

Web installation

+

License verification

+

Throughout operation

+
+

Return to question list

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport18.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport18.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..16e6017 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport18.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Pole Display FAQs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Pole (Shopper) Display FAQs

+

Compatible Pole Displays | Configure your Pole Display

+

Nothing displays on my pole display. What could be wrong?

+

Check the following, seeking the help of a qualified computer consultant if necessary:

+
    +
  • +

    Be sure the display has power. Some older units have a power switch located under the display unit; be sure this is turned on. When the unit is first powered on, the display will show the power up information for several seconds. If you do not see this then it is either not getting power or the unit is defective.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Ensure that the port selected in workstation preferences matches the physical port on the computer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Serial pole displays may conflict with other serial devices, such as modems or printers, even if the other device is not connected or powered on. It may be necessary to reassign other serial devices to different ports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If using a Logic Controls pole display, unplug the unit for a few minutes an then plug back in; this will reset the display

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Install the Partner Tech CD7220 pole display

+

Troubleshooting overview

+

Help and support overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport19.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport19.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ad59fd1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport19.htm @@ -0,0 +1,128 @@ + + + + + + +Program Updates: Download and Install + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Program Updates: Download and Install

+

Help & Support

+

 

+

Updates to your Point of Sale softwaresuch as maintenance releases, enhancements, and updated help filescan be quickly and easily downloaded and installed, ensuring that you have the most up-to-date features and capabilities available.

+

You can have Point of Sale automatically download update files (recommended), be notified when an update is available but download it yourself, or not be notified at all and manually check for updates yourself.

+

If you have multiple networked Point of Sale workstations, you can configure updates so that all workstations can update from a shared download file.

+

What's important about software updates?

+
    +
  • +

    An update should be installed on your Server Workstation first. All other workstations on your network must exit Point of Sale during the update to the Server Workstation.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale will automatically back up your company data before updating the Server Workstation.

    +
    • +
  • +

    We recommend installing updates while your store is closed, when you have time to complete the installation and familiarize yourself with program enhancements. Updating multiple workstations or a large data file may take some time.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Each workstation at each store must install an update to ensure compatibility within a store as well as between stores. All stores should follow the same update procedures and schedule.

    +
    • +
+

Updating Point of Sale includes these steps:

+
    +
  1. +

    Set your updater preferences. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If updates are not downloaded automatically, select Software Updates > Check for Updates from the Help menu at the Server Workstation.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the update site and checks for available updates. If an update is available, information about what is included and an estimate of how long it will take to download it is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Update Now (on automatic downloads, select OK when notified).

    +
    2. +
+

Or, select Remind Me Later to delay a download/installation until a later time.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to install the update.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Restart Point of Sale after the update is installed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If applicable, install the update to additional workstations.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

To review the update history on a workstation, select Software Updates > View Installed Updates from the Help menu.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    A program update does not upgrade Point of Sale to a new version or unlock the features of a program level other than what you have licensed (e.g., Basic to Pro). Read How do I unlock to a higher level? .

    +
    • +
  • +

    FAQ and troubleshooting information can be found in the help topics available from the Updater Preferences window. Select any blue help link or button, choose Home and then choose the Frequently Asked Questions or Troubleshooting links.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you have modified your Point of Sale lists, reports, or customized printed documents and tags, installing an update will not overwrite your modified layouts to add any new fields or options included in the update. You may need to further modify your layouts to add them or, in the case of reports, use the Revert option to reset to the default layouts and then re-memorize.

    +
    • +
  • +

    For information about what data may be read from your computer during software updates (such as your current version and licensing information), please read our Privacy Policy by selecting Privacy Statement from the Help menu.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport20.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport20.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8783cd6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/helpandsupport20.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +Order Supplies + + + + + + + + + + + +

Order Supplies

+

Help and Support Overview | Print Tags

+

 

+

Tags, labels, and receipt paper for Point of Sale can be ordered directly from Intuit.

+

Six types of tags/labels are supported with Point of Sale: two that work with standard laser/inkjet printers, and four that work with the Zebra LP2824 thermal tag printer.

+

Point of Sale tags/labels compatible with laser/inkjet printers:

+

Labels 1" x 2-5/8" (30 tags per sheet, 3 across)

+

Labels 1/2" x 1-3/4" (80 tags per sheet, 4 across)

+

 

+

Point of Sale tags/labels compatible with the Zebra LP2824 or compatible tag printers:

+

Hang Tags 2.25" x 1.35"

+

Price Labels, roll, adhesive 2.25" x 1.25"

+

Small Labels, roll, adhesive 1.2" x 0.85"

+

Jewelry Tags with Flaps

+

Jewelry Tags without Flaps

+

 

+

Receipt Paper

+

Designed to work perfectly with the Intuit-sold and supported Point of Sale receipt printers. Available in 10 or 50 roll packs. Each roll measures 3.15 inches wide and 220 feet long.

+

 

+

Ordering

+

These tags, labels, and receipt paper are available directly from Intuit. To order, please call 1-800-926-6066 or visit our web site. Offerings subject to change without notice.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Basic printing instructions

+

Compatible Tag Printers

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/hsoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/hsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b68f72c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/hsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,155 @@ + + + + + + + + +Help and Support Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Help and Support Overview

+

For assistance with learning and using Point of Sale, select from the following resources:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Getting Started

+
+

User Guide (PDF)

+
+

Setup Interview

+
+

Hardware Setup Wizard

+
+

Point of Sale terminology (glossary)

+
+

 

+
+

Getting Help When You Need It

+
+

Use the in-program Help system

+
+

Troubleshooting FAQs

+
+

Support Resources

+
+

Find a local expert

+
+

Purchase Point of Sale supplies

+
+

Start and grow your business

+
+

 

+
+

Point of Sale Licensing, Registration, and Updates

+
+

About Point of Sale licensing

+
+

Register your software

+
+

Merge license numbers

+
+

Manage or buy an additional license

+
+

Keep your software up to date

+
+

Feature comparison by level: (Free, Basic, Pro)

+
+

Important Information about Windows Vista

+
+

Upgrade POS

+
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/importexport_itempics.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/importexport_itempics.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7651551 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/importexport_itempics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,207 @@ + + + + + + +Import or Export Item Pictures + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Import or Export Item Pictures

+

Use Item Pictures

+
+

Pro

+
+

If you are using item pictures, you can import and associate pictures for multiple items at once instead of assigning them one-by-one on item records. Likewise, you may have need to export the item pictures you have in Point of Sale for some other use. The Data Import Wizard and Data Export Wizards in Point of Sale make these tasks easy.

+

In a multi-store configuration, if you want to send item pictures from Headquarters to remote stores, you can do it in a Store Exchange file instead Learn more

+

What do you want help with?

+

Import Item Pictures

+

Export Item Pictures

+

 

+

Importing Item Pictures

+

In the import process, Point of Sales associates pictures to items by matching the file names of the pictures to specific item information. The file names of the pictures to be imported must match one of the item information field or fields listed below, as well as meeting other formatting requirements. Point of Sale can then automatically associate the imported pictures to your existing items.

+

Example picture file names Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Picture file formats and attributes Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

To import item pictures:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Utilities > Import and select Item Pictures as the data type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify the location of the picture files and which item information fields have been used to name the picture files (see example filenames above) and then select Next.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Specify if you are importing default item pictures only, alternate pictures only, or both default and alternate pictures and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If you are importing both default and alternate pictures at the same time, you must include _def or _1 at the end of the filename for the default pictures, and _alt or _2 at the end of the filename for the alternate pictures. See example filenames above.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Specify what Point of Sale should do if an item already has a picture associated with it (replace existing, keep existing, or prompt you for decision) and select Next.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    A summary of the pictures found at the specified location is displayed for your review before the import is started. If pictures cannot be matched to items, an alert and list of the files is displayed. Review the file list and rename the affected picture files in one of the filename formats listed above.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    When ready to proceed, select Import. Point of Sale confirms the import was completed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Finish.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Exporting Item Pictures

+

There are two methods of exporting item pictures from Point of Sale. In both instances, pictures are only exported in JPG format. If the location to which you are exporting the picture(s) contains a file with the same name as that being exported, Point of Sale will prompt you to overwrite or keep the existing picture file.

+

To export individual pictures by dragging-and-dropping:

+
    +
  1. +

    Arrange your desktop so that you have both the destination location (Windows Explorer window) and the Item Pictures section of the item record (or the Inventory Picture Album) visible on your screen side-by-side.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the picture in Point of Sale with your left mouse button and hold down the button.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Drag your mouse pointer to the location you wish the to export the file and release the mouse button.

    +
    4. +
+

A copy of the picture is created in the destination folder.

+

To export multiple pictures:

+

You can export a number of pictures at once using the Data Export Wizard. Exporting item pictures differs from other data exports in that a separate file is created for each item picture being exported in a folder or location you specify.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Utilities > Export (this option is best to export all item pictures, or to export by department, vendor, or style). The Data Export Wizard opens.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

From your item list or Picture Album, select the items whose pictures you wish to export, and then from the I Want To menu, choose Export > Export Item Pictures for Selected Items. (Skip to Step 4.)

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Item Pictures as the type of data to export, and then follow the on-screen instructions to specify for which items pictures will be exported.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Indicate the destination folder for the exported pictures, how you wish the exported files to be named (see examples under import above), and whether you wish to export the default, alternate or thumbnail picture, or all three, for the items.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Export to copy the pictures to the destination location.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Open if you wish to view the contents of the destination folder, or select Finish to exit.

    +
    5. +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    It is assumed you are using the default item label of Item Name; if not adjust the above to reflect your custom item label. Note: For upgraders from a previous version, this label may be Description 1.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If using item name, or name with size and attribute, to create filenames, any slashes (/) included in these fields (such as a size of "1/2") are converted to the tilde character (~) upon export and then converted back to slashes when imported at the destination. This is because the slash cannot be used in a filename.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Data Import Wizard

+

Data Export Wizard

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inv_edit_group.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inv_edit_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e85da77 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inv_edit_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit or Delete Group Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit or Delete Group Items

+

Add a Group Item | List Group Items on Documents

+
+

Pro

+
+

To edit the group or component items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the group item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Show Details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Group button next to the item Type field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Edit Group on the Group Details window.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Edit the group item information on the left side of the window or add, delete, or edit the quantity of component items in the grid on the right.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
+

To delete a group item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the group item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

If the group item is listed on active documents, such as layaways or sales orders, you will be reminded and asked to confirm the deletion. If you answer Yes, the item will be deleted. You should delete or edit the affected documents to remove the group item.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Group Items: Overview

+

Using assembly items

+

Inventory overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inv_item_groups.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inv_item_groups.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..53ac6b0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inv_item_groups.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Group Items: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Group Items: Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | About Item Types

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Overview

+

A group item is not really an item at all, even though it is defined in inventory in the same manner as other items. Rather, a group item merely provides an efficient method to list all of the component items on a document by entering a single item identifier, optionally at a discounted price. Quantities and costs are not tracked for the group item; they are tracked for the individual component items included in the group.

+

The component items included in a group remain in inventory individually and can be sold individually.

+

When a group is listed on a sales document, the price of each component item is proportionally adjusted so that the total equals the specified group price. The group price cannot be edited on the document, but the component item prices can be edited, if desired. The printed receipt given to the customer can include the group price, the individual item prices, or both, based on your company preference setting.

+

Unlike an assembly, sales taxes are computed on each component item individually, based on the sales tax code assigned to each. Therefore, taxable and non-taxable items can be mixed in a group.

+

How else do group and assembly items differ?

+

 

+

(Multi-Store) Only Headquarters can define group items, but all stores can list group items on documents.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a group item to inventory

+

Edit or delete a group item

+

List a group item on documents

+

Using assembly items

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven401.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven401.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aff2dde --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven401.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Accessing Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Accessing Inventory

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Overview | Add Items | About Item Types

+ +

To access inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu at the POS home page, select one of the following:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    New Item to add an item to inventory

    +
    • +
  • +

    Item List to locate, view, and work with existing items

    +
    • +
  • +

    Reminders to view the inventory reminders window and view various inventory conditions that might need your attention (Basic, Pro)

    +
    • +
+

The Inventory menu also provides selections for other inventory-related areas of the program, as applicable to you license level, such as your department list, inventory adjustments, transfers between stores, Price Manager, and Physical Inventory. Each of these related areas are covered in their own help sections.

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven403.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven403.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0fd9843 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven403.htm @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ + + + + + + + +Define Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Define Inventory

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Inventory Overview | Add Items

+ +

 

+

Although many data fields are available in inventory, the following fields are the basic fields used to define an item:

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Field

+		 +

Description

+
+

Item Type

+		 +

What type of item is this? Required.

+
+

Department

+		 +

The department to which the item belongs. Required. Learn more about departments.

+
+

Vendor

+		 +

The vendor from whom you purchase the item.

+

(Pro) You can associate an item with one primary vendor and up to four alternate vendors.

+
+

Item Name*

+		 +

The principal short description of the item. Printed on sales receipts. Required.

+
+

Item Description*

+		 +

Secondary, long description of the item. Optional .

+
+

Attribute*

+		 +

A field used to describe an item characteristic, typically a color, pattern, a second size, etc.

+
+

Size*

+		 +

The size or any other characteristic of an item (the field is labeled Size but is essentially another Attribute field.

+
+

Item No.

+		 +

Suggested by Point of Sale but can be edited. Note that item numbers greater than 99,999 may cause scanning problems on tags printed within Point of Sale due to the resulting bar code size.

+

Suggested item number sequence can be reset via a company preference.

+

(Pro) Can I customize the tag layout to avoid problems?

+
+

UPC

+		 +

Universal product code. May be printed as a bar code on tagged merchandise received from your vendor. Enter or scan the UPC value into the UPC field in inventory so that the item can be added to documents by scanning.

+
+

Order Cost

+		 +

The cost you currently pay your vendor for the item. Learn more.

+
+

Avg Unit Cost

+		 +

Calculated average cost per unit of an item. Enter this value when adding pre-existing items to inventory during program startup; after that Point of Sale will calculate this value as you buy and sell the item. Learn more.

+
+

Reg Price

+		 +

Your everyday, regular price. Enter a price or, on new items, leave blank and let Point of Sale calculate prices based on department margin and cost. Learn more.

+
+

On-Hand Qty

+		 +

Enter only for items already existing in your store. Receiving vouchers will add the quantity for new items being ordered.

+
+

View all item field descriptions

+

 

+

* Customizing Item Description Field Labels

+

The default labels of the four item description fields, Item Name, Item Description, Size, and Attribute, can be changed to better reflect the type of merchandise you sell. The labels you assign will be displayed throughout the program and on printed documents and tags. Throughout this help system, we refer to them by their default labels. How do I change the labels?

+

If you upgraded from a previous version of Point of Sale, your item description field labels are retained from that version.

+

Each item must be unique. Point of Sale will not allow you to create two or more items with the same entries in the Department, Item Name, Size, and Attribute fields (it is not sufficient to record unique data in the Vendor, Item Description, or another inventory field). Pro: What if I get the same item from multiple vendors?

+

 

+

Note: It is recommended that you manually enter an items average unit cost or on-hand quantity only when adding existing items during program startup. Receiving vouchers will add both the quantities and costs to inventory on all ordered/received items. Learn more.

+

 

+

Smart Abbreviations

+

To more easily locate merchandise in inventory or filter items for reports, you should establish standard abbreviations for sizes and attributes and be consistent in their usage.

+

For example, you could use either "Wht" or "White" for white, but you should not use both. "Wht" and "White" will be treated as two different attributes on reports. However, their usage is not case sensitive, so "WHT," "wht," and "Wht" will all be treated as the same attribute.

+

 

+

Using Custom Item Fields (Pro)

+

Point of Sale provides you the ability to create and use custom item fields. Once defined, the custom fields can be displayed and used to filter lists and reports, and can be added to your printed documents using Print Designer.

+

For example, you may wish to track the vendors catalog number for your items, or you may need to record and print an item part number on your purchase orders. You can easily name custom fields whatever you want and begin using them for these purposes. How do I?

+

 

+

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven406.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven406.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd8af1b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven406.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete an Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete an Item

+

Find an Item | Merge Items | Edit Items | Delete Style Items

+

 

+

Inventory items can be deleted when you no longer need them, with some restrictions. Deleting an item does not affect the ability to see the item on saved documents or on reports based on history documents.

+

To delete items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the item or items to be deleted from your item list.  How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Delete.

    +
    3. +
+

The Delete Items window is displayed, showing the status of the selected items and whether deletion is possible. Tell me more.Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Delete to delete the eligible item(s) or Cancel to return to your item records.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, confirm the deletion.

    +
    3. +
+

If you choose to delete an item that has an on-hand quantity, Point of Sale creates an adjustment memo to adjust your inventory value. If you delete items that are listed on an open order, you should edit the order document to remove the items.

+

 

+

Note: Deleted item added back to inventory if document listing it is reversedClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

If you are deleting an item because you have inadvertently created a duplicate of the same item, consider merging the items instead, as this will combine the two item histories into one record and remove the other.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Clean up your company data

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven407.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven407.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cb243ff --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven407.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + + + +Add a New Style + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Style

+

Item Style Overview | Style Templates | Edit a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to add a group of items to inventory as a style.  What is a style?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Note: The availability of the style feature can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

To add a new style:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your item list and select Add.

    +
    2. +
+

A blank Add Item form is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the Item Name, Item Type (typically Inventory), and Department. These values must be the same for all members of a style.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Style button.   Style Button

    +
    3. +
+

The Style window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information that is common to all items in the style in the item fields in the upper section of the window.

    +
    2. +
+

Important: Enter only information that is common to ALL items in the style. If the style items differ in cost or price, leave these fields blank. Point of Sale will auto-fill these fields when you make receiving vouchers to receive the items from your vendor or you can edit the fields later for individual items.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the bottom section, choose a predefined template from the drop-down list in the Select a Style Template field to apply it to the new style.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

Select Add New from the template drop-down list to define a new style template and then apply it to the style.

+

OR

+

Add style sizes and attributes directly on the style grid in the lower pane, using these guidelines:

+
    +
  • +

    Click the Click to add labels on the horizontal and/or vertical axes and enter the various sizes and attributes included in the style. Note: The axes labels will reflect your custom item description labels.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Right-click a column or row header to access a popup menu with additional options for rearranging the order, deleting, or adjusting widths of columns. You can also select to turn on/off the grid totals or to save the grid as a new template from this menu.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a 0 (zero) in each grid cell corresponding to the items you are or will be carrying in the style.

    +
    2. +
+

Add Style

+

This creates a line in your item list for those items. When you first receive the new items on a receiving voucher, Point of Sale will add the received quantities. Leave a cell blank if you do not plan to carry a particular size/attribute combination.

+

Note: If the style items are already physically in the store and not being received on a voucher, you can enter the actual on-hand quantities instead of zeroes.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Edit individual style items, as necessary, to reflect unique UPCs, costs, prices, etc. There are two efficient ways to do this:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select a cell in the style grid corresponding to an item you want to edit and press <F5>  (or right-click and select Edit Item Details). Make changes in the Item Information window and then select OK.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Display the style in your item list and use list edit mode to make necessary changes.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add pictures to a style

+

Style grid basics

+

Delete a style item

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven408.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven408.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f6dc084 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven408.htm @@ -0,0 +1,122 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a Style + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Style

+

Overview | Style Grids | Style Templates | Delete a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to directly edit a style in inventory. If the style has a template applied and the changes are permanent, you can also edit the template.

+

To edit an existing style:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select any member of the style in your item list and click View Details.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Basic Info section of the item record, click the Style button.

    +
    3. +
+

The Style window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make necessary edits in the top pane. Editing these fields will affect all items in the style.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Make specific style item edits in the style grid:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    To add a new style item:  Select a Click to add label for a column or row and type a new size or attribute entry. Enter a 0 (zero) in the new cells created to add the new style item(s) to inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To edit sizes and/or attributes of style items:  Click the labels on the horizontal or vertical axes and type a new value. Note that changing a size or attribute in the grid changes it for all items in that row or column. A confirmation window is displayed to alert you to this fact.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    To add, remove, rearrange columns or rows or make other changes in style grid: Right-click in a row or column label and choose the appropriate option from the popup menu:

    +
    • + +
  • +
      +
    • +

      Add or delete column or row This action adds or deletes items in inventory. Use with caution.

      +
      • + +
    • +

      Move Move row or column in a specified direction.

      +
      • + +
    • +

      Auto-arrange by name Rearranges the columns or rows into alphabetical or numerical sequence.

      +
      • + +
    • +

      Auto-adjust columns widths Adjusts all column widths to the width of the longest entry.

      +
      • + +
    • +

      Show totals Turns on/off the display of style quantity totals in the grid.

      +
      • + +
    • +

      Save as new style template Saves the displayed arrangement of sizes/attributes to your style template list.

      +
      • +
    +
    • + +
  • +

    To edit individual style items: Select an item cell in the style grid and press <F5> or right-click in the cell and select Edit Item Details from the popup menu. Make necessary changes and select OK.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The values displayed in the upper pane are those of the specific item selected when the Style window was entered. However, editing these values in the style grid will affect all items in the style. For example, if you have different prices within the style, dont change the prices shown in the upper pane of the Style window or you will change all style item prices.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Anytime you edit the Department or Item Name for a style item, Point of Sale will ask if you want to have that change affect just the item or the entire style. If you update only the item, then that item will no longer be a member of that style.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a template was previously applied to the style, editing the style sizes and attributes on the style grid has no effect on the saved template.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Just as in an item form, edits to an items on-hand quantity or average unit cost result in Point of Sale creating adjustment memos, which are sent to QuickBooks financial software to update your inventory value.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven421.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven421.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..020099e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven421.htm @@ -0,0 +1,132 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Your Item List or Tags + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Your Item List or Tags

+

Print Tags: Basics | Tags Styles and Sizes | Overview

+

To print your item list:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your item list and select the items to include in the printout:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If printing all items, you do not need to make an item selection. Make sure the list filter is set to display All Items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If printing a subset of your list, filter or search the list first, or select those you want to print. How do I select multiple items?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Items from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Print Items dialog, select:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Print all items to include all items currently displayed in the list

    +
    • +
  • +

    Print selected items to include only the items selected

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Print in the Print dialog. You can also change the printer or number of copies on this dialog.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

To print item price tags:

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the item(s) for which you want to print tags:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    To print tags for a single item, highlight or display the item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To print tags for several items, select them all. How do I select multiple items?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    To print tags for a larger group of related items, filter or search your item list to display only the group of items.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Tags from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to specify print settings and print:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    The printer to use

    +
    • +
  • +

    Whether to print tags for the selected items or all displayed items

    +
    • +
  • +

    The number of tags to print, i.e. the on-hand quantity or a specified quantity

    +
    • +
  • +

    The tag template to use; be sure the template matches your selected printer

    +
    • +
  • +

    If printing to a sheet of labels, the start position on the sheet. Tip: Click on the sheet label position where you want printing to start.

    +
    • +
+

Tag Printing Options

+
    +
  • +

    You can include an items MSRP (Manufacturers Suggested Retail Price) on your price tags to display savings to your customers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also print tags that include the item cost and last received date printed in code. Only informed employees will be able to read these values.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Dont want to print tags for an item? Clear the Print Tags check box in the Misc and Printing section of the item record. This will help prevent accidental printing of tags for an item even if it is displayed or selected on-screen when printing.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven432.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven432.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f0833cc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven432.htm @@ -0,0 +1,190 @@ + + + + + + +Add and Build Assembly Items + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add and Build Assembly Items

+

Assembly Item Overview | Break or Edit Assemblies

+
+

Pro

+
+

 

+

An assembly must be defined and then built to make it available to sell.

+

Should I be using a group item instead?

+

(Multi-store) Only Headquarters can define an assembly item. Once defined, both Headquarters and remote stores can build (or break) assemblies as needed; Headquarters for any store; remote stores for the local store only.

+

To define and build assemblies:

+
    +
  1. +

    Be sure all component items have been added to inventory individually.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From you item list, click Add.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter a descriptive name for the assembly item in the Item Name field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the item Type field, select Assembly.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Specify a department (required) and a vendor (optional).

    +
    6. +
+

If the items included in the assembly come from more than one department or vendor, you may want to set up a new department and/or vendor called Assemblies, or similar, to track and report the sale of assembly items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in other item fields as appropriate.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    You cannot enter an On-Hand Quantity or Average Unit Cost at this time. The quantity will be created when you "build" the assemblies; the average unit cost will be automatically calculated as the sum of the average unit costs of the component items. This cost will be recalculated each time you build or break assemblies.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, enter a Regular Price. If a price isnt entered, Point of Sale will auto-fill the field with the sum of the component item prices once they are added. You can edit the price later, if needed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter a Tax Code. The entire assembly will be taxed (or not) based on this code. You cannot mix taxable and non-taxable item component items in an assembly.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To include the assembly item on Build Point reports and reorder Reminders (to be reminded to build more of the assembly) enter the minimum desired on-hand quantity in the Reorder Point field.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save. The assembly item is added to your item list and displayed with details.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Assembly button next to the item Type field.

    +
    3. +
+

The Assembly Details window is displayed. The information entered so far is shown on the left and the grid on right is used  to display the component items in the assembly.

+

View Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Edit Assembly.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information drop-down box, scan or type item information to search for the item to add.Click to expand/collapse topic.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Specify the quantity of the component item.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    By default, each item is listed with a quantity of one. Click the Qty+ and Qty- button to quickly increase/decrease by one or click the Qty button to enter another number.  Quantity is the only editable field for the component items.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Repeat to add all items in the assembly.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Click Build at the top of the window.

    +
    7. +
+
    +
  • +

    Headquarters in multi-store only: Specify the store for which you are building the assemblies.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Build Assembly dialog is displayed, notifying you of the maximum number of assemblies that can be built. This number is based on the available on-hand quantities of the component items.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Specify the number of assemblies you wish to build and then select Build.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click OK on the confirmation dialog.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    When assemblies are built, the on-hand quantity of the assembly item is increased by the quantity you choose to build. The on-hand quantity of each component item is reduced by the total number included in the built assemblies.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Quantity and cost adjustment memos are automatically created to adjust inventory when building assemblies. The logged in users name will be entered on the memo, along with appropriate comments ("Assembly created from inventory") and reason ("Creat Asm"). If users are not required to log in, you will be prompted to enter a user name for the memo(s) upon creation.

    +
    • +
  • +

    An assembly item can be a component item of another assembly item.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Sell an Assembly Item

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven435.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven435.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2143b41 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven435.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Service and Non-Inventory Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Service and Non-Inventory Items

+

Item Types | Inventory Overview

+

 

+

Either service and non-inventory items can be used to sell or charge for non-merchandise services and fees, such as for tailoring, repairs, gift-wrapping, recycling fees, and delivery charges. The on-hand quantity of both these item types is always zero (0).

+

Non-inventory items are also sometimes used for incidental merchandise items for which you do not wish to track quantities.

+

Having two item types for these uses allows you to categorize and post the sales to different income accounts in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and on Point of Sale reports.

+

 

+

To define a service or non-inventory item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start adding a new item as usual.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the item Type field, select Service or Non-Inventory.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter information in the other item fields as needed.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Use the Item Name field to record a description of the service or fee, such as Gift Wrap, Repair Labor, Delivery Charge, Recycling Fee, or Alteration.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Typically, the average unit cost of these items is $0. Exceptions are when you sub-let a service to an outside company or are purchasing an incidental item, in which case you should enter the unit cost.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Assign a tax code, if applicable.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the Unit of Measure field, if applicable, to specify the sales unit, e.g. hour, each, piece, etc.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Charge for services by the hour

+

List service or non-inventory items on documents

+

Learn more about using service items

+

Collect Government-mandated fees

+

Use a service item for shipping charges

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven436.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven436.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..71132a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven436.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +Item Types + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Types

+

Inventory Overview | Add Items

+

 

+

The inventory Item Type field is used to specify what type of item is being added:

+
    +
  • +

    Inventory Merchandise that you purchase and resell, and for which you track on-hand quantities.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Service Services such as miscellaneous fees, charges, or hourly labor for which on-hand quantities are not tracked. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Non-Inventory Same properties as service items, but often used for incidental items such as store supplies or small items that you do not wish to count. Allow you to have two categories for non-merchandise items; and the ability to post them to different accounts in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. On-hand quantities are not tracked. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Assembly (Pro) An item built from other pre-existing inventory items and optionally sold at a discount. The component items, once added to the assembly are no longer available individually. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Group (Pro) Provides a method to quickly sell a group of items that are already in your item list, optionally at a discounted group price. Unlike an assembly, groups are not pre-built and the included items remain available individually. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Special Order (Pro) Used to sell custom or one-time merchandise that you do not currently carry in inventory and may never carry. Special order items can only be added to inventory while creating a document to order, receive, or sell them. Later, the special order item can be converted to a regular inventory item, if desired. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Note: Miscellaneous items are not inventory items, so are not included here.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_assembly_vs_group.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_assembly_vs_group.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..46d805d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_assembly_vs_group.htm @@ -0,0 +1,206 @@ + + + + + + + +Should I use an Assembly or a Group Item? + + + + + + + + + + + +

Should I use an Assembly or a Group Item?

+

Assembly Overview | Group Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Item assemblies and groups both offer a way to sell a predefined set of items by listing a single item on a sales document. However, the two item types vary in several ways, as outlined below.

+

Key questions to ask when deciding between an assembly and a group?

+

Do you want to physically pre-build the set, thus removing the component item quantities from inventory?

+

Do you want the component item quantities in the set to remain available for individual sale?

+

Do you want the individual items printed on customer receipts or just the set as a single item?

+

Do you sell more of the items individually or as a set?

+

Will there be both taxable and non-taxable component items?

+

 

+

Key Differences Between Assembly and Group Items

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Option

+		 +

Assembly

+		 +

Group

+
+

Pre-built?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

No

+
+

Sell component items individually?

+		 +

No*

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Can include service and non-inventory items?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Can include assembly item as component?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Can include group item as component?

+		 +

No

+		 +

No

+
+

Assembly/group item printed on receipt?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Assembly/group item price printed on receipt?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Optional**

+
+

Component items printed on receipt?

+		 +

No

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Component item prices printed on receipt?

+		 +

No

+		 +

Optional**

+
+

Can contain both taxable and non-taxable items?

+		 +

No***

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Can assign discounted price?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

Yes

+
+

Track costs and quantities?

+		 +

Yes

+		 +

No****

+
+

      * Quantities of component items not pre-built into assemblies can be sold individually and built assemblies can be
+     broken, freeing the component items for individual sale.

+

    ** Controlled with a preference setting.

+

  *** After assembly, the single tax code assigned to the assembly item determines if it is taxed or not. The entire assembly is subject to the same tax code, so taxable and non-taxable items should not be mixed.

+

**** Quantities and costs of group component items are tracked individually, not as a group.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_avblqty_wndw.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_avblqty_wndw.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..88ee0b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_avblqty_wndw.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + +Available Quantities Window + + + + + + + + + + + +

Available Quantities Window

+

Available Quantities Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

The term available quantity refers to the on-hand quantity minus quantities already committed on active customer orders. Available quantity is sometimes referred to as available to promise.

+

The available Quantities window is the best way to see at a glance all the quantity information for an item and a listing of the documents affecting the available quantity.

+

In a multi-Store configuration, this window can also be used to enter or view item quantities at other stores.

+

To view the Available Quantities window for an item:

+
    +
  • +

    From the Basic Info section of an item record (form), click the Available button.

    +
    • +
+

Available quantities tab on item information panel

+

 

+

An example of the Available Quantities window is shown below.

+

 

+

Available Quantities

+

 

+

What's important about this window?

+
    +
  • +

    At a glance, you can view all quantities related to the item at your store(s). On the right side of the window, select the quantity you wish to see from the drop-down box at top of the list:

    +
    • +
  • +

    On Hand. The current quantity on-hand in inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    On Order. The quantity on active purchase orders. Does not include POs with a status of "Pending."

    +
    • +
  • +

    Available. The quantity available to sell. Equals on-hand quantity minus quantity committed on active customer orders.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pending. The quantity on active customer orders and purchase orders that have their status set to "Pending." Typically, these orders are used for quotes, estimates, or planning purposes, but the orders have not yet been accepted by customers or submitted to vendors.  

    +
    • +
  • +

    In a multi-store configuration, quantities for other stores are as of the last completed Store Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A list of the order documents that affect the quantity values is displayed. From the drop-down Show list you can choose to see all order documents, just customer orders, or just purchase orders. Double-click a listed document to open it for viewing/editing.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you track multiple units of measure for an item, the quantities displayed are for your base unit.

    +
    • +
+

To edit on-hand quantities in this window:

+
    +
  • +

    To edit quantities in this window, you must be in edit mode.  You can enter edit mode (by clicking Edit) either before or after opening the window.

    +
    • +
+

To close the window:

+
    +
  • +

    If in edit mode, click the Close Quantity Window link in the upper-left (as shown above).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If in view mode, click the Back button in the lower-right of the window.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Avail Qty is one of several quantity columns available to add to many Point of Sale lists and reports, allowing you to view this quantity information from virtually any area of the program. In a multi-store configuration, this column is the available quantity for the entire company (all stores).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Quantities of an item on held documents are not reflected in the available quantity of the item.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

View an item's history

+

Purchasing overview

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_convert_specialorder.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_convert_specialorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0141d78 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_convert_specialorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + +Convert a Special Order Item to an Inventory Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Convert a Special Order Item to an Inventory Item

+

Handling Special Orders | Add a Special Order Item

+
+

Pro

+
+

A special order item created while making a document can later be converted to a regular inventory item if you plan to carry it in inventory in the future.

+

To convert a special order item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the special order item in your item list.

    +
    2. +
+ +

Hint: Filtering is a good way to display only special order items.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Click Edit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Change the item Type to Inventory.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make any other edits necessary, such as the Reorder Point which was previously disabled.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Multi-Store Notes:

+

When a special order item is created at a remote store, the remote store can temporarily define all item fields for use on local documents. However, when the special order item is received at Headquarters, the following fields are not populated with information from the remote and must be redefined by Headquarters:

+
    +
  • +

    Tax Code

    +
    • +
  • +

    Unorderable Flag

    +
    • +
  • +

    Prices at all price levels

    +
    • +
  • +

    MSRP (reference price)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Order Cost

    +
    • +
+

On the next Store Exchange, the new values entered at Headquarters will overwrite the item information at the remote store that created the item as well as being made available at all other stores.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Multi-store purchasing

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_deleteitemswindow.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_deleteitemswindow.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..384950e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_deleteitemswindow.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +inven_deleteitemswindow + + + + + + + + + +

Delete Items Window

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

The Delete Items window is displayed to alert you to the status and possible restrictions of items selected for deletion. Use the + icon, where available, to expand the list and see the individual records affected.

+

Items selected for deletion are categorized as follows:

+ +

Cannot be Deleted

+ +

These items cannot be deleted because they are currently part of an assembly, group, or quantity price discount.

+ +
    +
  • +

    Assembly To delete an item that is part of an assembly, you must first remove it from the assembly item. To delete an assembly item, you must first break all built assemblies. How do I?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Group To delete an item that is part of a group, you must first remove it from the group item. How do I?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discount To delete this item, you must first remove it from the associated quantity price discount. How do I?

    +
    • +
+ +

 

+

May be Deleted

+

These items may be deleted, but may affect your inventory value or remain on open order documents.

+
    +
  • +

    Quantity on Hand If deleted, Point of Sale will create adjustment memos to update your inventory value. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Due on Purchase Order You can safely delete these items, but should edit the purchase order to remove them.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Due on Customer Order You can safely delete these items, but should edit the customer order (layaway, sales order, or work order) to remove them.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_delitemsaddedback.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_delitemsaddedback.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a82372d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_delitemsaddedback.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +Note: Deleted Items Added Back to Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Note: Deleted Items Added Back to Inventory

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

If you delete an item from inventory, but then create or reverse a transactional document including that item, Point of Sale adds the item back to inventory. Inventory will reflect the change in item quantity effected by the document, creating a positive or negative on-hand quantity depending on the type of document.

+

For example, reversing a sales receipt results in a return receipt, and the returned quantity is added back to inventory. So, your deleted item is now back in inventory with a positive quantity.

+

This may trigger the item showing up in other program areas, such as on your Reorder Items Reminders screen. Review the item and delete it again, if appropriate.

+

(Pro) This could also occur if a remote store creates a document listing the item after Headquarters deletes it, in which case the item is added back to inventory once the document is received at Headquarters in a Store Exchange.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_duplicateitem.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_duplicateitem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b065c19 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_duplicateitem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +Duplicate Item + + + + + + + + + + +

Duplicate Item

+

Define Inventory Items

+ +

Leave this topic in place, it is called from a dialog in program.

+ +

 

+

This information applies when a Duplicate Item message is received when adding or editing an inventory item.

+

 

+

You received this message because the item you are attempting to add/edit matches an existing item, with the same department, Item Name, size, and attribute. Duplicate items are not allowed in Point of Sale.

+

You have three options:

+
    +
  • +

    Change the size and/or attribute of this item to make it unique

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discard this item, and go to the existing item in inventory

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cancel and change the department and/or item description to make it unique

    +
    • +
+

(Pro) Trying to add the same item for a different vendor?

+

Use the alternate vendor option instead (located in the More Info section existing item record).

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_duplicatestyle.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_duplicatestyle.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c40e1d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_duplicatestyle.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + +Join Style? + + + + + + + + + + + +

Join Style?

+

Style Overview | Edit a Style

+
+

Pro

+
+

This information applies to the message received when adding or editing an inventory item with the same definition as an existing style.

+

 

+

You got this message because the department and description entries for the item you are attempting to add/edit matches an existing style. A style is defined by the combination of Department and Item Name entries on an item record.

+

You have three options:

+
    +
  • +

    Join this item to the existing style. In this case, you must also enter a unique size/attribute combination to make this item unique within the style.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change the Department and/or Item Name of this item so it doesnt match the existing style.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cancel your changes to this item, and go to the existing item(s) in inventory.

    +
    • +
+

Trying to add the same item for a different vendor?

+

Use the alternate vendor option (located on the Additional Info tab) of the existing item record instead.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_item_addlinfo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_item_addlinfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c00cd11 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_item_addlinfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Item: Additional Information + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item: Additional Information

+

Inventory Overview | Add Items | About Item Types

+ +

This applies only to legacy item form. Left in place since users can get to this form.

+ +

 

+

This information applies to the Additional Info tab on an item form in inventory.

+

 

+

Additional Vendor Information (Pro)

+
    +
  • +

    Select Add/Edit Alternate Vendors and add up to four alternate vendors for the item, each with a unique UPC, Alternate Lookup, and order cost. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Miscellaneous Settings

+

Select the checkboxes, as appropriate for the item.

+
    +
  • +

    Print Tags select to include this item when printing tags. For items that you do not tag, clear the check box. This will help prevent inadvertently printing the tags when the item is included on a document or in a list for which you are printing tags.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Unorderable select to have the items reorder point temporarily ignored and to be alerted if the item is listed on a purchase order or receiving voucher. This option can be used to remove seasonal or discontinued merchandise from your reorder reminders and reports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Serial # Tracking (Pro) select to be prompted to enter serial numbers when this item is listed on a document. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Eligible for Commission (Pro) select to include sales of this item when calculating commissions for your associates. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Define QuickBooks Item Account Information

+

Available only if integrated with QuickBooks financial software. You can customize the way item transactions are sent to QuickBooks by specifying QuickBooks accounts here. By default, the item accounts are auto-filled using the default item accounts specified in company preferences, but you can change them on an item basis on this window. Learn more.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itempics.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itempics.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d92a668 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itempics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,227 @@ + + + + + + +Add Pictures to Your Items + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Pictures to Your Items

+

Add New Items | Import/Export Pictures

+
+

Pro

+
+

Why add pictures to my items? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Are there any disadvantages to adding item pictures? Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Picture file formats and attributes Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Making the picture fields available in inventory and on documents Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

You can associate up to two pictures with each item or item style in inventory. The pictures can then automatically be viewed at all workstations on your network when you display the item record and when adding the item to most Point of Sale documents.

+

The default picture is used to generate the thumbnail picture displayed throughout Point of Sale. An alternate picture can also be assigned so you can switch between them.

+

To quickly add one picture to an item:Add item picture

+
    +
  1. +

    Make the picture fields available as described above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Find the item in your item list and click Show Details.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click the Click here to assign a picture field adjacent to the Item Name.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    In the Open file window, browse to the picture file and double-click it.

    +
    5. +
+

To add a second picture, remove a picture, or swap between pictures:Edit item picture

+
    +
  1. +

    Find the item in your item list and click Show Details.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the current picture adjacent to the Item Name.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Edit. The Pictures window is opened in edit mode as shown below.

    +
    4. +
+

Item Pictures

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Use the action buttons to edit the picture(s):

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Clear to delete a picture.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Browse to picture to add a picture or to replace an existing picture.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Swap to change positions of the primary (left) and alternate pictures (right).

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    When done, click Close Picture Window in the upper-left.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save to save your edits.

    +
    3. +
+

To add pictures to a style:

+

All items in the style will display the pictures assigned in this manner. After assigning a style picture, you can change the pictures for individual items within the style using the procedure above.

+
    +
  1. +

    Display a style item record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Style button on the item form. The Style window is opened.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Add a picture at the top of the Style window in the same manner as above .

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Save the style record.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+ +

The Inventory Picture Album

+ +

The Inventory Picture Album displays your default item pictures and provides an alternate method for viewing and working with your item list. Most actions available in the item list are also available from the picture album.

+ +
    +
  • +

    From the inventory I Want To menu, select View Inventory Picture Album.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Double-click a picture to open the item record for viewing or editing.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Right-click a picture or open the I Want To menu to select other available tasks.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can also add item pictures by dragging-and-dropping the picture file unto one of the picture slots. Reduce the size of the Point of Sale window before opening the item record so you can position Windows Explorer alongside to facilitate dragging the needed file.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    If you need to add pictures for a lot of items at once, consider importing them with the Data Import Wizard. Use the link at the top of this page top learn more about importing pictures.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your item list can be customized to include the Picture Assigned column which indicates whether a picture has been assigned to an item. Item reports can also be modified to show whether an item has a picture assigned, and to display the picture name.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Multi-store) Only Headquarters can add or edit item pictures. Headquarters can then send the pictures to remote stores, making them available to view there.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemratings.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemratings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8de192c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemratings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + +Item Ratings & Trends + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Ratings & Trends

+

View Item History | Inventory Overview

+

 

+

Item ratings and trends provide graphical rankings of sales performance based on profit, net sales quantity, or net sales dollars, over a specified time period.

+

This feature helps you quickly identify hot-selling items that you might want to feature and slow-movers that require corrective action.

+

Shown below is the Statistics section of  an item record, which includes the graphical item rating and quantitative sales, profit, and margin information for the item. Trends are not included in this  window.

+

Both Ratings and Trends columns can be added to your item list using the customize list columns feature..

+

 

+

   image\itemratings.gif

+

 

+

Turning on Ratings & Trends

+

Ratings and trends can be turned on/off and the performance criteria and time period set by the Server Workstation on the Ratings & Trends page of company preferences. You may also have to customize your item list columns or information panel to view the rankings.

+

 

+

About Item Ratings

+

Item ratings use a familiar five star system, reflecting the performance of the item over the specified time period. Each additional star represents the next 20th percentile of the range between the highest and lowest values in the ranked value. Hover your mouse over the star icons to view the actual ranked values for an item and the maximum in the period for all items.

+

Items with no sales in the period are rated at 0 stars. Items that have never been sold display image\question_marks.gif.

+

View Ratings ExampleClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ +

About Item Trends

+ +

The sales performance trend of an item is indicated by up/down arrow icons. The icons are representative of the degree of performance change between the current period compared to the previous period of the same duration. Hove your mouse over the icon to see actual values for both periods and the change percentage.

+ +

For example, if you select in preferences to rank for the last 90 days, the trend compares sales in the last 90 days to sales in the previous 90 day period (i.e., 91-180 days ago).

+ +

View Trend ExampleClick to display a popup topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The ranking period can be set from 1 to 999 days. If you choose a 999 day current ranking period, trends will not apply as sales data is not read for the previous 999 days.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Rankings are updated at least once a day (on program startup or automatically between 1 am and 5 am if your computer is running). Rankings are not updated for the current days sales as they are made.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to view item rankings can be controlled by a security right.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Group items are never ranked; but the group component items are ranked individually.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Multi-Store) Rankings are calculated at Headquarters only and reflect sales at all stores. They are sent to remote stores where they can be viewed.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemratings_example.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemratings_example.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e2451c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemratings_example.htm @@ -0,0 +1,191 @@ + + + + + + +inven_itemratings_example + + + + + + + + + +

Item Trend Example

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+  +

Your Ratings & Trends preferences are set to rank performance by net sales dollars for the last 90 days. The comparison period is the previous 90 days to that (i.e., sales made 91 180 days ago).

+

Here is the trend of five items of varying sales for the period and previous period.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Item #

+		 +

Sales $ Current Period

+		 +

Sales $ Previous Period

+		 +

Change

+		 +

Trend Icon

+		 +

Trend Description

+
+

1

+		 +

$2,430

+		 +

$1,203

+		 +

+ 102%

+		 +

image\trend_double_up.gif

+		 +

Strong trend up (+ 51% >)

+
+

2

+		 +

$3,344

+		 +

$2,537

+		 +

+ 32 %

+		 +

image\trend_up.gif

+		 +

Trend up (+ 11 50%)

+
+

3

+		 +

$1,694

+		 +

$1,800

+		 +

6%

+		 +

image\trend_flat.gif

+		 +

Flat (+/ 0 - 10%)

+
+

4

+		 +

$723

+		 +

$891

+		 +

19%

+		 +

image\trend_down.gif

+		 +

Trend down ( 11 - 50%)

+
+

5

+		 +

$719

+		 +

$2,248

+		 +

68%

+		 +

image\trend_double_down.gif

+		 +

Strong trend down ( 51% >)

+
+

All numbers rounded for simplicity.

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemtrend_example.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemtrend_example.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7b78af1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_itemtrend_example.htm @@ -0,0 +1,185 @@ + + + + + + +inven_itemtrend_example + + + + + + + + + +

Item Ratings Example

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

Your Ratings & Trends preferences are set to rank performance by net quantity sold for the last 365 days. Quantity sales of your items for the period ranged from zero (0) to 800 units.

+

Here is an example of how seven of your items are rated.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Item #

+		 +

Sales Qty

+		 +

Rating

+		 +

Rating Description

+
+

1

+		 +

800

+		 +

image\5_stars.gif

+		 +

5 Stars (81st to 100th percentile)

+
+

2

+		 +

592

+		 +

image\4_stars.gif

+		 +

4 Stars (61st to 80th percentile)

+
+

3

+		 +

380

+		 +

image\3_stars.gif

+		 +

3 Stars (41st to 60th percentile)

+
+

4

+		 +

201

+		 +

image\2_stars.gif

+		 +

2 Stars (21st to 40th percentile)

+
+

5

+		 +

72

+		 +

image\1_stars.gif

+		 +

1 Stars (0 to 20th percentile)

+
+

6

+		 +

0

+		 +

image\0_stars.gif

+		 +

0 Stars (No sales this period)

+
+

7

+		 +

0

+		 +

image\question_marks.gif

+		 +

Item has never been sold

+
+

 

+

You will not necessarily see an even distribution of ratings for your items. If all of your items tend to sell in approximately the same volume, they could in theory all be five-star performers. Lengthening the ranking period may help spread the distribution.

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_mergeitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_mergeitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae1076a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_mergeitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + +Merge Item Records + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merge Item Records

+

Find an Item | Delete an Item | Edit an Item

+

 

+

Occasionally you may find that you inadvertently entered the same item into inventory twice or that you have two items you prefer to track as a single item. Merging them allows you to combine the two items into a single item record with the combined history of both. You specify which of the item records is kept and which is removed.

+

The following rules apply to merging items. See the notes below for additional information.

+
    +
  • +

    Only two items can be merged at a time

    +
    • +
  • +

    Both items must be of the same item type

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Merging of assembly or group items requires that both items include the same component items

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Merging items can be done at Headquarters only

    +
    • +
+

To merge two items:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your item list, select one or both of the items you wish to merge. How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Merge.

    +
    2. +
+

The Merge Items window is opened. The item to be kept is shown on the left and the item to be removed is on the right. Review the items to ensure they are correct:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Swap between the items to reverse positions of the items

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the drop-down list and normal item Find procedures to add the second item or change items if necessary

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Items.

    +
    2. +
+

If the item being removed was included on prior transactions or is a component item of another assembly or group item, a list of the documents and item records that will be affected by the merge is displayed. How are they affected?Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Items.

    +
    2. +
+

A confirmation dialog is displayed when the merge process is complete.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Quantities of the merged items are combined. All other values are preserved from the item record you select to keep. If necessary, you can edit the retained item after merging to revise these values.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale automatically creates adjustment memos to combine item quantities and to update your inventory value (if the removed item had an average unit cost different than the retained item). These adjustment memos will have a Reason field entry of Merge Item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    All instances of the removed item on history documents, order documents, and active (but not saved) physical inventory counts are replaced with the retained item. However, the item cost is not recalculated on affected history documents.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you have an on-hand quantity of the removed item with printed price tags, you may have to reprint those tags from the retained item record so they include the correct item identifier, bar code, price, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    ( Pro)  Inventory changes resulting from an item merge are sent to remote stores with the next Store Exchange file. However, remote store history documents that are updated at Headquarters when merging items are not sent back to remote stores. The remote store history will continue to reflect the item circumstances in place at the time the original document was made at that store. The merge item procedure can also be initiated from the Duplicate Item Reminders window.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_multistorecostprice.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_multistorecostprice.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..40ed27d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_multistorecostprice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +Item Costs/Prices in a Multi-Store Configuration + + + + + + + + + + +

Item Costs/Prices in a Multi-Store Configuration

+

Enter/Edit Item Price and Cost | Use Price Levels

+
+

 

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

Item costs are averaged as receiving vouchers are saved/received at Headquarters.

+

Headquarters defines all price levels, item prices, and item order costs. Remote stores cannot directly enter or edit costs or prices in inventory, therefore cost adjustment memos and Price Manager are only available at Headquarters.

+

Remote stores have the capability to select their own default price level and to discount prices at point of sale.

+

Price changes implemented at Headquarters are conveyed to remote stores, using the price change inventory reminders. Remote stores can display the price changes made at Headquarters and print updated price tags or shelf stickers accordingly.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Give sales discounts

+

Multi-store overview

+

Inventory overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_ordercost.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_ordercost.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb5eb69 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_ordercost.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +About the Order Cost + + + + + + + + + + + +

About the Order Cost

+

About Average Cost | Enter/Edit Cost | Price/Cost Relationship

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

Order cost (Order Cost field, located in the More Info section of the item record) is different than the average unit cost. An item's order cost is the cost you are currently paying your vendor for one unit of the item.

+

Over time, with cost increases, it is normal for your order cost to move higher than your average unit cost, as you may have some quantity left in stock that was purchased at a lower cost when new shipments are received.

+

When you make a purchase order, the order cost in inventory is suggested as the purchase order cost. You can edit this cost on the PO, if necessary. When you receive the ordered items, the voucher that references the PO will automatically take its cost from the PO (if not referencing a PO, the order cost from inventory is suggested as the voucher cost).

+

When a voucher with a changed cost is saved it will automatically update the Order Cost field in inventory, so that the new order cost is suggested on the next PO or voucher made for the item. Point of Sale also calculates the new average unit cost for you in this situation.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track decimal costsClick to display a popup topic

+

Cost on POs

+

Cost on receiving vouchers

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_pricelevels.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_pricelevels.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a287958 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_pricelevels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Markdown Price Levels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Markdown Price Levels

+

Inventory Overview | Price Levels on Sales | Edit Item Prices

+

 

+

Point of Sale can maintain up to four price levels in addition to your regular price for each item in inventory (i.e., five separate prices). Price levels are markdowns from your regular price.

+

Use price levels to offer different prices for different purposes or to different groups of customers. Common uses for price levels include:

+
    +
  • +

    To offer reduced prices to employees, family members, and VIP customers

    +
    • +
  • +

    For wholesale sales

    +
    • +
  • +

    For special sales, e.g., "10% Off Sale" (Price Manager offers more flexibility for this.)

    +
    • +
+

A typical price level setup and the prices at each level might look like this:

+

 

+

image\price_level.gif

+

 

+

Your price level markdowns are applied and the price at each level recalculated anytime your regular price is changed, either manually or when Point of Sale applies its pricing formula. On the other hand, editing the price or markdown percentage of any of your markdown price levels has no effect on any other price.

+

 

+

How do I define price levels?

+

You define price level names and default markdown percentages in company preferences . Enter a name and default markdown percentage for each level you wish to use, and specify the default price to suggest for all sales. Your default price can be your regular price or one of your markdown price levels.

+

(Pro)  Each store can specify its own default sales price.

+
    +
  • +

    The price level markdowns you specify are defaults. They are applied to new items added to inventory, but the markdowns and price at any price level can be manually edited on an item-by-item basis.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can define a price level price to be a markup from your regular price by entering a negative markdown value.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Changing your default price level markdowns does not update existing item prices. To update prices for a single item, edit the prices or markdown percentages directly in the Pricing window on the item record. If you want to update prices for many or all your items, we recommend using Price Manager.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    You can also select Edit Price Levels in the Pricing window from an item record to change your price level names or default markdown percentages. Changes made here are the same as making these changes in company preferences.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    (Pro) If you use multiple units of measure, you can set separate prices for each price level for each unit of measure. Select the unit of measure for which you want to view or change price levels from the drop-down list at the top of the Pricing window. (Not shown in example above)

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Using Print Designer, you can specify which price is printed on your price tags.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_qty_decimals.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_qty_decimals.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2212506 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_qty_decimals.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +Track Decimal Quantities + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Decimal Quantities

+

Notes on Quantities and Costs | Multiple Units of Measure

+
+

Basic

+
+

Sometimes it is beneficial to track items in decimal quantities. For example, you might sell an item by the yard (e.g., fabric), by weight (e.g., bulk candy), or by the hour (labor). Point of Sale allows you to order, inventory, and sell items by decimal units.

+

For example, if you order and price fabric by the yard you can easily sell 1/4 yard or 1-1/2 yards by entering .25 or 1.5 in the Qty field on receipts. The correct fractional price will automatically be calculated for you.

+

To charge an hourly fee for labor define a service or non-inventory item called Labor or similar, assigning your hourly rate as the price. On a receipt or customer order, you can now list the service or non-inventory item Labor and charge for partial hours by entering a decimal quantity in the Qty field.

+

You can enter decimal quantities in any quantity field. Point of Sale will round your entry to two decimal places for display purposes and does not display trailing zeroes, i.e., if you enter 2.50, the display will be 2.5. However, the program stores and uses up to five decimal places for its calculations.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..52bcee9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +Inventory Reminders + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Reminders

+

Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Inventory reminders help you track and manage your inventory by alerting you to situations that may need your attention.

+

When an items combined on-hand quantity and on-order quantity has fallen below their reorder point, it is added to the Reorder Item reminders screen. You can print this list to help in creating purchase orders to replenish your inventory.

+

Besides reorder reminders, you also are reminded  when item prices change,  when new items have been added to inventory, or when items have arrived to fill open customer orders.

+

To view inventory reminders:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the home page, select Reminders from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select one of the available tabs.

    +
    3. +
+

Price change reminders

+

Reorder items reminders

+

New item reminders

+

Duplicate item reminders

+

Fill Customer Order Reminders

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    With the reminders window displayed, you can print the list or double-click a displayed record to view it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Reminders are a handy way for remote stores to learn of price changes and new items.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Reminders Message Alert

+

Security rights for reminders

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders_dupitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders_dupitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e0fa06b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders_dupitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Duplicate Item Reminders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Duplicate Item Reminders

+

Reminders Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Duplicate items (same UPC, Item Number, or Alternate Lookup values) can occur when Headquarters edits an item number and a remote store sells the same item before receiving the updated inventory file during a Store Exchange. When the transactional document is sent to Headquarters the item identifier from the remote will not match the item number for the same item at Headquarters. Headquarters will show two separate item numbers as having duplicate item identifiers.

+

Duplicate items can also occur when remote stores create special order items, unknowingly entering the same UPC or Alternate Lookup (ALU) values as an existing item. The special order items are sent to Headquarters from remote stores on the first transactional document containing them.

+

The Duplicate Items tab on the Reminders window can help you to identify duplicates and resolve them to keep your inventory accurate. This Reminder screen is available only at Headquarters.

+

To resolve a duplicate item you can edit one of the items to be different or, if the items are actually separate entries of the same item, you can merge the items.

+

To view and edit a duplicate item:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Reminders and then select the Duplicate Items tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    The values causing the duplicate condition are shown in bold text to help you identify them.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select an item on the list to edit.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Edit Item In Inventory from the I Want To menu.

    +
    5. +
+

This selection takes you to Inventory, with the item record opened in edit mode. Make changes as necessary to resolve the duplication and save.

+

To merge duplicate items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select both of the duplicate items in the reminders list. How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Merge Inventory Items and follow the on-screen instructions.

    +
    3. +
+

Click here to learn more about how Point of Sale merges two items.

+

 

+

After Headquarters resolves the duplicates, updated item information is sent to the remote stores with the next Store Exchange.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Reminders Message Alert

+

Security rights for reminders

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders_pricechange.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders_pricechange.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4fbc2ae --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reminders_pricechange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Price Change Reminders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change Reminders

+

Reminders Overview | Inventory Overview | Using Price Levels

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Price Change reminders screen displays both the old price and new price when item prices change. Your regular price and the prices at your other price levels are also displayed for reference. This list reminds you to print updated price tags, so that your records and the tagged merchandise on the shelf match.

+

Once tags are printed, the items on the list should be removed so the list remains current and useful.

+

(Multi-store) Reminders are a handy way to communicate price changes to remote stores.

+

To select items and print:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Reminders and then click the Price Changes tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use standard list selection procedures to select items or choose Select All from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Print Tags to print price tags for the selected items (or Print List).

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When prompted to remove the selected items from the list, select Yes to remove them or No to retain them.

    +
    5. +
+

You can also remove selected items from the list at anytime by selecting Remove Selected Item (s) from the I Want To menu.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you change your default price in preferences, the Price Change reminders are cleared.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Double-click an item in the list to go to inventory to view the full record.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for reminders

+

Reminders Message Alert

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0da56aa --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + +Inventory Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Reports

+

Inventory Overview | Reports Overview | Item Ratings & Trends

+

 

+

Point of Sale provides many reports to help you track your inventory investment and maximize your turn and profit. These reports can all be customized to include the data you want to see. Reports vary by license level (Free, Basic, Pro).

+

Here is an example of some of the more frequently used inventory reports:

+
    +
  • +

    Inventory Summary Summarizes your current on-hand inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Item List More detailed view of your current on-hand inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory Summary with Activity A summary of current inventory that also can include sales, receiving, and purchasing activity.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory Valuation Report of the value of your inventory, currently or for any day in the past.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory by Store  Your current company inventory broken down by stores.

    +
    • +
+

To run these reports or to see other available inventory reports, select the Items category from the All Reports page of the Report Center.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_specialorderitem.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_specialorderitem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dab4efa --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_specialorderitem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a Special Order Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a Special Order Item

+

Special Orders Overview | Inventory Overview  

+
+

Pro

+
+

A special order item can only be added to inventory while making a document (customer order, sales receipt, purchase order, or receiving voucher).

+

When you add a special order item to a document, you are prompted to define the item on a modified inventory window, allowing only certain information to be entered. The item type is automatically set to Special Order. Later the item can be converted to a regular inventory item, if desired.

+

To create and list a new special order item on a document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start the document in the usual fashion.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Add New Special Order Item from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Define the item in the inventory Special Order Item window.

    +
    4. +
+

Use normal add item procedures to enter information about the item. Certain item fields/features are not available for special order items, such as item type, item number, reorder point, the ability to define multiple vendors, styles, assemblies or groups, and you cannot print tags.

+
    +
  1. +

    When finished, choose Save & Select to record the item in inventory and list it on the document.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Convert a special order item to an inventory item

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_style_oview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_style_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..870b410 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_style_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + +Item Styles: Overview + + + + + + + + + +

Item Styles: Overview

+| Add a New Style | Style Grid Basics
+

Pro

+
+

Note: The availability of the style feature can be controlled by your Features to Use preference settings.

+

 

+

Many retailers sell merchandise that is grouped into styles. A style is a means of grouping inventory items that share the same basic item information but differ in one or two item traits, such as size, color, and pattern.

+

Example: A line of T-shirts might be carried in three sizes (Small, Medium, Large) and two colors (Black, White). This line of T-shirts, with six distinct items, constitutes a style.

+

When viewing your inventory or planning a vendor purchase, it can be very helpful to view and work with all the members of a style on a single screen. Point of Sale makes this easy with the use of the Style window and the style grid. To view and work on the Style window, click the  Style button from the item form.

+

Our T-shirt style, as viewed in a style grid, looks like this:

+

 

+

image\stylegrid.gif

+

 

+

About the Style window

+

A style grid allows you to see the on-hand quantities for each item in the style (each cell represents a size/color combination), as well as the total quantities for each color and size. You can quickly spot items that need to be re-ordered or are out of stock and slow moving items. Accessed while making a purchase order or other document, the grid can be used to enter the quantity to order or process on the document.

+

From a data standpoint, every item belongs to a style, though that item may be the only member of the style. Style items are defined by a common combination of its Department and Item Name (Description 1) values.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Style Templates

+

Imagine that you carry 20 different shoe lines, all of which have the same or similar size and color combinations. Having to re-enter the same sizes and colors for every shoe you carry would quickly become tedious.

+

Enter the style template. A style template is a user-defined array of item attributes: sizes, colors, patterns, material, etc., that can be used repeatedly to quickly add a style to inventory. Each template can be used for an unlimited number of styles.

+

Define and save a style template with the repeated sizes or other attributes along the  x and/or y axes of the style grid. When you add a new line of shoes, select the style template to quickly set up the grid. You can edit an individual grid, as necessary, for variations from the template.

+

The use of style templates is particularly well suited to lines of merchandise that vary only in size, color, pattern, or some other item trait. Typical examples include

+ + +++ + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Apparel

+		 +

Housewares

+
+

Footwear

+		 +

Linens

+
+

Luggage

+		 +

Furniture

+
+ +

 

+

Learn more about using style templates

+

Return to top

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_stylewindow.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_stylewindow.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e009be4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_stylewindow.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +About the Style Window + + + + + + + + + + + +

About the Style Window

+

Style Grids | Add a Style | Style Overview | Style Templates

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Style window displays an item style in a split view, with one section showing information that applies to the style as a whole and the other section displaying the individual style items and their quantities in a style grid.

+

You can open the style window while viewing, adding, or editing items.  

+
    +
  • +

    With an item form displayed, click the Style button.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are adding items you will automatically be in edit mode. If you want to edit an existing style, click Edit either before or after opening the Style window.

    +
    • +
+

Note: This window was undergoing design review as of this writing and may not exactly match this example.

+

Style Window

+

 

+

What's important about the Style window?

+
    +
  • +

    The upper section of this window displays the information for the selected item when you switch to the style window. In most cases, this information is common for all style items. It is important to note that making changes in this section of the Style window will affect all style items. Be careful making edits in this section.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Each cell of the style grid represents an individual style item with a unique size/color (or other attributes) combination.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The number in the cells is typically the current on-hand quantity of each item. See exception in the next note.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When coming to the Style window from a document (such as a purchase order), the style grid initially displays zeroes and can be used to enter the item quantities to order, receive, or sell.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Style Template drop-down list at the top of the grid is used to attach an existing template to the style or create and save a new one.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Multi-store users can view quantities for any one store or the entire company by selecting a store from the drop-down list above the style grid.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_tax_codes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_tax_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fcfdc42 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_tax_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + +Assign Sales Tax Codes to Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Assign Sales Tax Codes to Items

+

Sales Tax Overview | Set Up Sales Tax

+

 

+

The tax code assigned to an item determines if and how much sales tax is collected when the item is sold.

+

By default, all new items added to inventory are assigned a default tax code based on the department to which the item belongs.

+

The tax code may be changed for individual items in inventory, as necessary.

+

To assign an item tax code:

+
    +
  1. +

    Add a new item or select Edit for an existing item.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Navigate to the Tax field in the Basic Info section and select the appropriate tax code from the drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Apply Tax to Sales

+

Collect Tax on Shipping Amounts

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_unitofmeasure.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_unitofmeasure.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c624460 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_unitofmeasure.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Units of Measure + + + + + + + + + + + +

Units of Measure

+

Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are two levels of item unit of measure in Point of Sale.

+

Single Unit of Measure (Basic)

+

A unit of measure can be added to item records and can then be used to filter and sort your item list and reports.

+

For example, a candy store might define units of measure of "ounces" and "lbs" and then assign one of those units to each of their candy items.

+

Define the allowed units on the Inventory page of company preferences.

+

 

+

Multiple Units of Measure (Pro)

+

Using multiple units of measure allows you to purchase and sell items by different units. For example, when you purchase an item by the case but sell it by the bottle, or buy in bulk but sell by the pound.

+

Select the I Want to set up multiple units of measure check box on the Inventory page in company preferences to enable this feature. Then, on the item record, you can define a base unit of measure and up to three alternate units that you buy or sell by (such as case, six pack, can, 100 lb bag, one pound, etc.). Each unit of measure can have a different UPC code, alternate lookup value, and sales price, allowing you to list any of the units of measure on documents. You can also specify your default purchase and sell-by units.

+

If the multiple unit of measure feature is turned off, you still retain the single unit of measure capability.

+

Learn more about using multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_uom_multiple.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_uom_multiple.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8b3337c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_uom_multiple.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Multiple Units of Measure + + + + + + + + + +

Multiple Units of Measure

+

Inventory Overview | Preferences

+
+

Pro

+
+

This feature, which is enabled in company preferences, allows purchasing and selling an item in up to four different units of measure (sizes, or pack quantities).

+

Examples:

+
    +
  • +

    You buy bottled water by the case and sell by single bottles or cases.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You buy animal feed by 50 lb. bags and sell it in 5, 10, and 25 lb. bags.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You buy fabric by the yard, and sell by the yard and foot.

    +
    • +
+

With multiple units of measure enabled:

+
    +
  • +

    You can define multiple units for inventory, non-inventory, and service items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Unit of measure fields and options are added to the item form and other documents and lists.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Each unit of measure can have unique UPC, alternate lookup, and prices associated with it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You define a base unit and default order-by and sell-by units. Point of Sale will automatically suggest these defaults when purchasing and selling the item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your base unit is used for most inventory values (average cost, quantities, reorder point, etc.) and on reports, though these values are calculated and displayed for alternate units as well.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can choose in company preferences to add the transaction unit to the quantity field on printed documents.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If importing item information, you can import the unique information for each of your units.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Define multiple units of measure in inventory

+

Use units of measure on documents

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_viewonorder.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_viewonorder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb6fe35 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/inven_viewonorder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + +View Quantities on Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

View Quantities on Order

+

Inventory Overview | Purchasing Overview | Item History

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can view item quantities currently on order for an item in the On Order column of your item list . You may have to add this column to the list. You can also initiate the creation of a new purchase order from inventory.

+

To view on-order quantities:

+
    +
  • +

    Display your item list and sort, search or filter to find an item.

    +
    • +
+

The current quantity on order is displayed in the On Order column.

+

 

+

image\inven_onorder.gif

+

 

+

(Pro) You can also view on-order quantities and a list of pending purchase orders from the Available Quantity window in inventory.

+

To initiate a new PO from inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the item or items you wish to order.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select Out of Stock Items or Items to Reorder from the drop-down filter at the top of the window, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Search for items by keyword, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sort or scroll to find item(s)

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select the items to be ordered from the displayed items. How do I select multiple items?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+

 Tip: Select only those to be ordered from the same vendor at one time. One PO will be made with all selected items.  

+
    +
  1. +

     Select Order Items from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

A new purchase order is opened with the item(s) already listed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete and save the purchase order in the normal manner, adjusting the order quantity and cost, and adding other items, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Go Back to return to inventory.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Repeat for other items if necessary.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_PCIDSS.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_PCIDSS.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8411209 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_PCIDSS.htm @@ -0,0 +1,160 @@ + + + + + + +Protect Your Customer's Payment Card Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

Protect Your Customer's Payment Card Data

+

QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service | Data Protection Strategy

+

 

+

When you, as a retailer, start accepting credit and/or debit cards for payment using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, you have a responsibility to comply with the requirements of the Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS).

+

This standard includes requirements for the configuration, operation, and security of payment card transactions in your business, and extends beyond your use of Point of Sale. It includes requirements for restricting user access, as well as for protecting your computers, operating system, and network, and for communications with other computers and the Internet.

+

 

+

Note: If you use another merchant service for card payments, the cardholder data is not processed, stored, or transmitted by Point of Sale and this topic is not directly applicable to your use of Point of Sale. You should refer to the information provided by your service provider for compliance requirements.

+

 

+

Point of Sale has been engineered to help you comply with these requirements in your use of Point of Sale, but it is your responsibility to ensure your entire system is in compliance.

+

How does Point of Sale assist me in complying with the PCI DSS? Click to expand/collapse this topic

+ +

What happens if I don't comply with the PCI DSS? Click to expand/collapse this topic

+ +

 

+

PCI DSS Implementation Guide

+

Intuit has prepared an electronic Implementation Guide to help you learn about and comply with these requirements. You can access this guide via the link below or at anytime by selecting User Manuals from the Help menu (Adobe Acrobat Reader required).

+

Open the Implementation Guide now

+

 

+

Where can I learn more about the Payment Card Industry standards?

+

You can learn more about and get a copy of the PCI DSS standard at the PCI Security Standards Council site:
+Internet connection required to use this linkhttps://www.pcisecuritystandards.org

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

Generate new credit card keys

+

Payment card activity Audit Log

+

If you suspect a security breach

+ + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_generate_EFT_keys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_generate_EFT_keys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b12d947 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_generate_EFT_keys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + +Generate New Credit Card Keys + + + + + + + + + + + +

Generate New Credit Card Keys

+

PCI DSS Overview | Audit Log

+

 

+

This information applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service and the requirements for complying with the Payment Card Industry's Data Security Standard (PCI DSS).

+

 

+

Point of Sale encrypts the cardholder data stored in your company data with encryption keys using an industry-standard, strong, encryption process that meets current Payment Card Industry Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) requirements. Point of Sale automatically generates new encryption keys at least once per year. No action is required on your part to enable this security feature.

+

Additional information about the encryption keys is provided in the PCI DSS Implementation Guide . To access this electronic manual, select User Guides from the Help menu.

+

If you suspect a security breach or that an unauthorized attempt to access the data was made, one of the steps you should take is to generate new encryption keys. The new keys are used to encrypt all new transactions. In addition, stored transactions are re-encrypted with the new keys. The previous keys are destroyed and are unrecoverable.

+

To manually generate new encryption keys:

+
    +
  1. +

    Log in to Point of Sale as the System Administrator.Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Point of Sale File menu, select Utilities.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Generate New Credit Card Keys.

    +
    4. +
+

A confirmation message is displayed upon successful update of the stored card transactions.

+
    +
  1. +

    Log off the Sysadmin user.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    The encrypted cardholder data stored in your company file is not accessible to any Point of Sale user; even the Point of Sale system administrator is blocked from viewing this information. Cardholder data is also not available on Point of Sale reports and cannot be included in data exports.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8eac502 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +mas_hdi + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks POS Merchant Service: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Sign up for a merchant account

+

Configure Point of Sale for a merchant account

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Take payment by debit/ATM Card

+

Settle card transactions

+

Handle credit/debit returns

+

Reverse sales transactions

+

View Merchant Service reports

+

Protect myself from credit card fraud

+

Use another merchant service

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_merchant_service_center.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_merchant_service_center.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3d31207 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_merchant_service_center.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Merchant Service Center + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchant Service Center

+

Merchant Service Overview | Merchant Service Reports

+

 

+

Users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service can visit our online Merchant Service Center to:

+
    +
  • +

    Check on account activation

    +
    • +
  • +

    View processing and funding status

    +
    • +
  • +

    Perform basic account management tasks

    +
    • +
+

Internet Connection required  To visit the Merchant Service Center:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Report menu, select Merchant Service Center.

    +
    2. +
+

The Merchant Service Center Sign In page is opened in a Web browser window.

+
    +
  1. +

    On first visit, select Create an Account, and follow the on-screen instructions to set up your access account.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

If returning, sign in with your user name and password.

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_multi_workstation.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_multi_workstation.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e23f0f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_multi_workstation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + + +Multiple Workstation Configuration + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multiple Workstation Configuration

+

Communication Setup | Customer Support

+ +

In V10 each workstation will now connect separately. This topic has been hidden.

+ +

When operating Point of Sale on multiple workstations, all Merchant Service and/or Gift Card Service communications go through one workstation. By default, this is the Server Workstation but you can change this setting on the Merchant and Gift Services Communication Setup page in company preferences (the selected workstation must have a modem or Internet connection).

+

Access this page from the workstation you wish to use as the connection computer and select the check box labeled Use this computer to connect for all credit, debit, and gift card transactions. All transactions, whichever workstation they are performed at, will be routed through this workstation.

+

The designated workstation must be running (does not have to have Point of Sale open) to allow other workstations to authorize transactions. When running, the Merchant and Gift Card Service icon is displayed in the Windows system tray as shown below. You can click this icon to view the current status of the connection and to access the EFT (Electronic Funds Transfer) log file.

+

 

+

Merchant & Gift Card Service icon in system tray

+

EFT Server icon

+

 

+

When multiple requests occur simultaneously, they will be processed in the order received. For direct-dial (modem) connections, the program will try to complete any queued requests during the same connection to the processor, thus eliminating the need to dial out on the modem for each request.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_multiple_locations.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_multiple_locations.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7fb18b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_multiple_locations.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +Multiple Locations Using Merchant/Gift Card Service + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multiple Locations Using Merchant/Gift Card Service

+

Merchant Service Overview | Gift Card Overview | Customer Support

+
+

 

+
+

For QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or Gift Services customers with multiple physical locations under the same ownership, each location must have a separate account with these services, but those accounts can be linked so that you receive consolidated reporting and statements. Each location would process authorizations and settlements independently.

+

For more information, contact the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or Gift Card Services.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_pci_auditlog.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_pci_auditlog.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3074594 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_pci_auditlog.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + +Payment Card Activity Audit Log + + + + + + + + + + + +

Payment Card Activity Audit Log

+

PCI DSS Overview | If You Suspect a Security Breach

+

 

+

This information applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service and the requirements for complying with the Payment Card Industry's Data Security Standard (PCI DSS).

+

 

+

Point of Sale automatically logs all data access, data security, payment card transaction, and encryption key changes to the Audit Log; you do not need to turn this feature on manually.

+

Only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can view this log. We recommend you review the log daily (or as often as possible) to comply with the PCI security standards.

+

To view the Audit Log:

+
    +
  1. +

    Log in to Point of Sale as the System Administrator.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Utilities > View Audit Log.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use normal Point of Sale report options to modify the appearance or filter the Audit Log report by date, user, or other included data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done, close the report and log off the System Administrator.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Payment Card Activity Audit Log

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Unsuccessful attempts to log in to Point of Sale are logged in the Windows Event Log. This log should also be reviewed regularly to look for attempts to access your data.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Additional information is provided in the PCI DSS Implementation Guide . To access this electronic manual, select User Guides from the Help menu.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_pci_suspectbreach.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_pci_suspectbreach.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4f90bfd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_pci_suspectbreach.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +If You Suspect a Security Breach + + + + + + + + + + +

If You Suspect a Security Breach

+

PCI DSS Overview

+

 

+

This information applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service and the requirements for complying with the Payment Card Industry's Data Security Standard (PCI DSS) on credit and debit card transactions.

+

 

+

If an unauthorized attempt to access your data has been made or you are aware of an actual breach of your security system that has compromised your and your customers data, you should immediately:

+
    +
  1. +

    Backup your data file and store the backup in a secure location.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you suspect involvement by a specific user or users, disable the Windows user accounts and Point of Sale security rights. This will block further access to your data by the user(s) while you have an opportunity to investigate.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Review the Audit Log and Windows Event Log to examine entries related to the suspicious activity and users.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Change your Windows and Point of Sale administrator passwords. It is recommended you also change, or require to be changed, all other user passwords.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Manually generate new credit card encryption keys.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Additional information is provided in the PCI DSS Implementation Guide . To access this electronic manual, select User Guides from the Help menu.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_reconciliation.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_reconciliation.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c5cdf3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/mas_reconciliation.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + +Merchant Service Reconciliation + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merchant Service Reconciliation

+

Merchant Service Reports | Merchant Service Center

+

 

+

Note: This feature requires integration with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software.

+

 

+

Merchant Service reconciliation makes it easy to match credit and debit card payments taken in Point of Sale to the bank deposits you make from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and identify discrepancies and fees.

+

When credit and debit card transactions are sent from Point of Sale to QuickBooks Desktop, they are added to the Payments to Deposit window (by store/merchant number in a multi-store configuration) and settlement batch, helping you to match the transactions with your deposits and more easily identify and account for discrepancies and fees.

+

Requirements for the reconciliation feature:

+
    +
  • +

    Using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service to process card payments

    +
    • +
  • +

    Integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software

    +
    • +
  • +

    You have not changed the default payment types. These specific payment type mappings are required for the reconciliation feature.

    +
    • +
+

To send transactions with reconciliation information to QuickBooks Desktop:

+

No action is necessary in Point of Sale to send reconciliation information to QuickBooks Desktop. If you meet the requirements listed above and conduct routine Financial Exchanges your transactions will show up on the Payments to Deposit screen in QuickBooks Desktop grouped by store/merchant number and batch.

+

Making deposits in QuickBooks Desktop:

+

This procedure is completed in QuickBooks Desktop financial software, and is summarized here. More specific instructions can be accessed from the Payments to Deposit window in QuickBooks Desktop by selecting Help.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete Financial Exchange with QuickBooks as part of your End of Day procedure.

    +
    2. +
+

Your payment card transactions update the Undeposited Funds balance in QuickBooks Desktop.

+
    +
  1. +

    In QuickBooks Desktop, select Make Deposits from the Banking menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the payments to include in the deposit.

    +
    3. +
+

To facilitate reconciliation later, make your deposits by the transaction groupings. The transactions from Point of Sale are grouped by store/merchant number and batch for convenience.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    After a transaction has been sent to QuickBooks Desktop (or from remote store to HQ), voiding of the transaction is not allowed. Point of Sale automatically  reverses the transaction in this case.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale Merchant Service reports are also split out by batch and, if applicable, store/merchant number.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To help keep your settlement batches synchronized with other End of Day postings to QuickBooks Desktop, it is recommended you settle once per day before exchanging data with QuickBooks Desktop. In a multi-store configuration, settle at each remote store before Store Exchanges with HQ.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1301.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1301.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e21eeef --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1301.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Accessing Adjustment Memos + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Accessing Adjustment Memos

+

Select one of the following from the Inventory menu:

+
    +
  • +

    New Quantity Memo

    +
    • +
  • +

    New Cost Memo

    +
    • +
  • +

    Quantity Adjustment History (list of previously created quantity memos)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cost Adjustment History (list of previously created cost memos)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Held Quantity Memos (list of quantity memos created, but not updated, e.g. "held")

    +
    • +
  • +

    Held Cost Memos (list of cost memos created, but not updated, e.g. "held")

    +
    • +
+

Close

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1303.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1303.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0dd17e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1303.htm @@ -0,0 +1,189 @@ + + + + + + + +Creating an Adjustment Memo: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Creating an Adjustment Memo: Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Memo Fields | Adjustments Overview

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

To create a memo:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select New Quantity Memo or New Cost Memo.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter information into the appropriate memo fields at the top of the form.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    The Reason field must have an entry.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    List the items to be adjusted, using standard item listing procedures. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the New Qty or New Cost for the item in either of these ways:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Highlight the item and select Edit Item (<F5>) to open the Item Information window. Enter the adjusted value and then select OK (<F5>) to close the window, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Navigate to the respective field in the item list and make changes directly there.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save & Print or Save Only.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You cannot list non-inventory or service items on a quantity adjustment memo since these items, by definition, have no on-hand quantity in inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Likewise, group items cannot be added to quantity or cost memos, since neither the quantity or the cost of the group is tracked. You can adjust the cost of the component items included in a group item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If using multiple units of measure, all adjustments are done relative to the base unit of measure.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro w/multiple stores) Headquarters only: If making a memo for a store other than HQ, select the store from the drop-down list in the Store field.

    +
    • +
+

Notes on the quantity/cost difference FieldsClick to display a popup topic

+

Tip: Changing the quantity of a large number of items or a styleClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copying a memo

+

Canceling or holding a memo in progress

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1307.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1307.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3397fca --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1307.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Changing Quantities for a Large Number of Items + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Changing Quantities for a Large Number of Items

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

 

+

If you are changing the quantities for a large number of items, you may find it faster to do a Physical Inventory to update these quantities instead of using a quantity adjustment memo.

+

In the Physical Inventory module, enter a new Physical Qty for each item you want to change. Then update the physical inventory as usual.

+

 

+

(Pro Alternative) If you use styles, and are changing the quantities for all items in a style, start a quantity memo as usual, and then:

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Select from Item List from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Locate one style item and then select Switch to Style.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the adjusted (new) quantities in the cells of the style grid. (0 is displayed for each item until you enter a different value)

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Choose Select. The style items and their adjusted quantities are carried to your adjustment memo.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Save.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1308.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1308.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7ce08f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1308.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + +Reversing and Correcting an Adjustment Memo + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reversing and Correcting an Adjustment Memo

+

Finding a Memo | Adjustments Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Saved memos are permanent records that cannot be deleted. To undo an adjustment, you must create a new adjustment.

+

A quick way to accomplish this is to reverse the original memo, which automatically creates another adjustment to cancel the effect of the original.

+

To reverse a memo:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your adjustment history list, highlight or display the memo that you want to reverse.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Reverse from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Reversing Document dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Confirm or enter your name in the Associate field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

If necessary, the original memo can then be copied and the copy edited to create a new, corrected memo.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Reversing a memo does not alter the original memo; other than marking it as Reversed in its Status field. Instead, a second memo is created that has the opposite effect on inventory. For example, reversing a quantity memo that removed three units of an item from inventory will add three units back to inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Reversing a cost memo creates a new memo that reverses the total dollar amount of the original cost adjustment. It also adjusts the current average unit cost in inventory for each included item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When completed, the original memo will be marked Reversed in the Status field. The new memo that is created will be marked Reverse in its Source field and Reversing in the Status field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If an item listed on a reversed memo has been deleted from inventory, the reversing action adds it back to inventory. Learn moreClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software and if the original memo has already been sent to QuickBooks Desktop, then the reversing memo is also sent as part of the next consolidated inventory adjustment cancelling the effect of the original. The original financial entries are not edited or removed. If the original document has not yet been sent, then both are flagged and neither is sent, so there will be no entries made in your financial software for the transaction.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro w/multiple stores) A remote store can only reverse a memo up until the time it has been sent to Headquarters. After that time, the memo can still be reversed at Headquarters. In the case of a quantity memo, a remote store can also create a new memo adjusting the quantity back to the original value to undo the effects of the original.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Creating a memo manually

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1309.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1309.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0ce331b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1309.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing a Saved Memo + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing a Saved Memo

+

Finding a Memo | Adjustments Overview | Printing Basics

+
+

Basic

+
+

Typically, new memos are automatically printed when you save/print them upon completion. You can reprint previously saved memos from your adjustment history using this procedure.

+

To print a saved memo:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and select the memo that you want to print.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print from the window toolbar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If presented with a print option dialog:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Choose the name of the printer you want to use.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify the number of copies you want to print.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Print or Preview.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1318.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1318.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f3aa267 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo1318.htm @@ -0,0 +1,225 @@ + + + + + + + +Actions that Generate Memos + + + + + + + + + + +

Actions that Generate Memos

+

Adjustments Overview | Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

The actions listed below will result in adjustments to inventory quantities or costs. Certain actions result in program-generated memos; in these cases you may be prompted for your name and a reason for the adjustment, but the memo is automatically created. The Source and Type columns refer to the entries automatically recorded in the corresponding fields in the memo header.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Action

+		 +

Created by

+		 +

Reason

+		 +

Source

+		 +

Type

+
+

Manually creating a memo

+		 +

User

+		 +

User-defined or selected (damaged, shrinkage, etc.)

+		 +

Manual

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Reversing a memo

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

ManAdj

+		 +

Reverse

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Deleting an item with an on-hand quantity

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

Item Deleted

+		 +

Inventory

+		 +

Quantity

+
+

Applying  physical inventory changes

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

Physical

+		 +

Physical Inventory

+		 +

Quantity

+
+

Manually entering item quantity or cost

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

ManAdj

+		 +

Manual

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Merging items

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

MergedItem

+		 +

Manual

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Importing items with the Data Import Wizard

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

Data Import

+

or

+

QBFS Import

+		 +

Import

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Building an Assembly (Pro)

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

CreatAsm

+		 +

Assembly

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

Breaking an Assembly (Pro)

+		 +

Point of Sale

+		 +

Brk Asm

+		 +

Assembly

+		 +

Quantity or Cost

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo_differencefields.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo_differencefields.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5c8112f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memo_differencefields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + +Notes on Difference Fields + + + + + + + + + + +

Notes on Difference Fields

+ +

In-help popup: also called from index

+ +

 

+

Item Difference Fields

+

Old, new, and difference fields for adjusted values are included in the item list on adjustment memos.

+

For example, on a cost adjustment memo, the Old Cost field shows the current inventory cost for an item. You enter the adjusted value in the New Cost field (decimal cost entry allowed, up to five decimal places). The difference between the old and new cost is displayed in the Diff Cost field. Likewise, on quantity adjustment memos, you have Old Qty, New Qty, and Diff Qty fields.

+

 

+

image\memo_diff.gif

+

 

+

Document Difference Fields

+

Similar fields in the totals area of the memo (Old Value, New Value on cost memo, and Old Qty, New Qty, Qty Change on quantity memo) summarize the total adjustments to inventory for all items on the memo. One more totals field, Value Change, is used on both memo types to show the dollar change in inventory value resulting from the memo. These totals fields cannot be edited.

+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memosoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memosoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3af7f0d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/memosoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + +Inventory Adjustments Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Inventory Adjustments Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Memo Fields | Making an Adjustment Memo

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

Adjustment memos are used to make changes to item quantities or costs. The changes tracked are those that would not otherwise be recorded on another transactional document.

+

Typical uses for manually-created adjustment memos include:

+
    +
  • +

    Adjust quantity for theft and other shrinkage

    +
    • +
  • +

    Adjust quantity for donated items

    +
    • +
  • +

    Remove defective or damaged returned items from inventory

    +
    • +
  • +

    Correct cost or quantity errors in inventory

    +
    • +
+

When you create an adjustment memo, the affected On-hand Quantity or Average Unit Cost fields are automatically updated in inventory and a permanent record of the change is added to your adjustment and item history.

+

Some actions in Point of Sale, such as deleting an item with an on-hand quantity, conducting a physical inventory, or manually entering or editing an items average cost or on-hand quantity result in program-generated adjustment memos.

+

Saved memos are permanently stored in your adjustment history lists. A separate list is maintained for each memo type, quantity and cost. Memos can be reversed to correct errors, but never deleted.

+

(Pro w/multiple stores) Item quantities can be adjusted at either Headquarters or remote stores. Headquarters can adjust quantities for any store, while remote stores can adjust only their own local quantities. Only Headquarters can create cost memos, although both quantity and cost memos are generated automatically at remote stores for certain activities.

+

 

+

Note: The ability to see cost fields, including margin and markup and other fields related to cost, can be controlled by security rights. If you do not have the right to view item costs, the fields will be masked like this "*****". This right affects cost fields in inventory and on all documents and reports.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for adjustments

+

How adjustment memos are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+

Note: Automatic quantity adjustments at remote stores

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_config_passwords.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_config_passwords.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..80a8c86 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_config_passwords.htm @@ -0,0 +1,101 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Passwords + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Passwords

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Store Exchange files must be secured by a password. Password encryption helps protect your data from being read if intercepted by unintended recipients.

+

Important: The same password must be entered at each store. If the password encrypting a Store Exchange file you receive does not match the password you have entered, you will not be able to process the file.

+

To define your Store Exchange password:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Stores menu, select Configure Store Exchange.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Store Exchange from the menu on the left of the company preferences window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Options tab on the displayed page.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Change Password.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Enter your password.

    +
    6. +
+

Rules and tips for passwordsClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can also set your password from the Store Exchange Center. From the Stores menu, select Store Exchange Center and then select Set Password.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use Point of Sale for more than one company file, be sure you enter a different password for each company file. Otherwise, the receiving store could process a file into the wrong company file.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange Methods

+

Send Files - Headquarters

+

Send Files - Remote

+

Receive Files

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_purchasing_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_purchasing_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..146a110 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_purchasing_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + +ms_purchasing_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Purchasing and Receiving: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic.

+ +

 

+

Create a purchase order

+

Receive merchandise

+

Edit a saved receiving voucher

+

Reverse a receiving voucher

+

Delete filled POs

+

View purchasing history with a vendor

+

Correct a remote receiving voucher after sending it to HQ

+

Handle special orders

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_storeexchange_center.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_storeexchange_center.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3002d74 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/ms_storeexchange_center.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Center + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Center

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

The Store Exchange Center is a central place to initiate all tasks related to exchanging data between your stores and to see the current status of exchange with each store.

+

To access the Store Exchange Center:

+
    +
  • +

    From the Stores menu or the Navigator, select Store Exchange Center.

    +
    • +
+

        Store Exchange Center

+

 

+

The Store Exchange Center is made up of three panels:

+

 Actions: Use these buttons to send or receive Store Exchange mailbags, prepare and send item pictures, configure exchanges, and view the activity log to troubleshoot any problems encountered.

+

 FAQs: Provides answers to frequently asked questions about Store Exchange.

+

 Status: Provides the exchange status with each of your other stores. At a glance you can view the last successful exchange dates and times and color coding provides an alert when an issue needs your attention (Green - OK, Yellow - Minor issue. Red - an issue that needs your attention). Use the buttons and I Want To menu for each store to perform routine tasks or correct problems.

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can set a preference to be alerted in the Status panel when an exchange with a store doesn't occur in a specified number of days.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also add the Store Exchange Status report to your Point of Sale Dashboard. With the Dashboard displayed, select Customize Dashboard and then add the report from the "Other" content area.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Schedule Store Exchanges

+

Send item pictures to remote stores

+

What if a mailbag is lost or damaged?

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_changetype.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_changetype.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4684a31 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_changetype.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + +Change Store Type + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Store Type

+

Multi-Store Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

A multi-store operation that plans to exchange information between stores can have only one Headquarters store. All other stores must be configured as remote stores.

+

Generally, it is advised that you NOT change store type after you have been using Point of Sale for some time, however there may be circumstances under which it is necessary:

+
    +
  • +

    You mistakenly installed a store as one type when it should have been the other

    +
    • +
  • +

    You have been operating multiple stores independently, each as a Headquarters store, and now want to integrate them into a true multi-store operation

    +
    • +
  • +

    You want to swap the locations of Headquarters and remote store

    +
    • +
+

In the first case (mistakenly installed as wrong store type), if you havent already entered inventory data or recorded transactions, you can simply change store types:

+
    +
  • +

    Changing Headquarters to Remote: From the Company Preferences > Multi-Store page, select Change to Remote and follow the on-screen instructions, entering a new store number and Store Exchange information for the Headquarters store when requested.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Changing Remote to Headquarters: From the File menu, select Company Data > New. In the dialog displayed, enter a name for the new data file, and select Headquarters.

    +
    • +
+

In either case, Point of Sale will create a new company data file and launch the Setup Interview to help you configure the software for your store. Learn more about a multi-store operation.

+

In the other two cases, or if you have already entered data you dont want to lose, additional steps must be taken to ensure the integrity of your existing data.

+

It is strongly recommended you contact Intuit Technical Support for assistance before attempting to change store types in these cases, since the particular circumstances that apply in your situation cannot be completely anticipated.

+

Some of the preparation and data issues to be aware of include:

+
    +
  • +

    Merchant Service. All unsettled credit and debit card batches should be settled before changing store types.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Licensing: Each store is installed with a unique license number and client workstations within a store may have merged licenses with the server workstation. The licensing information in your current data files may not be compatible with your new configuration. Intuit Technical Support can help you reconfigure your licenses as necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Integration with QuickBooks financial software: Only Headquarters can exchange data with QuickBooks; you may need to reconfigure Financial Exchange as necessary to ensure the ongoing successful exchange of information.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory: In a multi-store operation all stores share the same item list. If you have been operating with separate inventories at multiple stores and change a store to a remote, the unique inventory items at that store will be lost if steps are not taken to first migrate them to the Headquarters inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Transaction History: Changing store types typically involves changing store numbers. All previous transactions will have the old store number recorded, unless the proper procedure is followed to renumber these transactions with the new store number.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Order Documents: Special steps may have to be taken to ensure you have records of pending purchase and customer orders and any deposits that may have been taken towards those orders.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Physical Inventory: Depending on the steps used to change store types, you may have to do a physical inventory at each store after the change to update inventory quantities by store.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_config.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_config.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a87bfd2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_config.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + +Configure Store Exchange + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Store Exchange

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Which type of store are you configuring?

+

Headquarters

+

Remote store

+

 

+

Configuring Store Exchange includes specifying or confirming:

+
    +
  • +

    Whether you are a Headquarters or remote store

    +
    • +
  • +

    The number of stores you have and assigning store codes to each (Headquarters only)

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Store Exchange method you will use to communicate with other stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    The license number for the Server Workstation at the other store(s) in your company

    +
    • +
  • +

    The e-mail address, file transfer path, or drive that will be used to send files to other stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    Protecting Store Exchange files with a security password (required: Learn more)

    +
    • +
+

Important: Before beginning, be sure you have the license numbers from the Server Workstation at the other store(s). Until you have entered the license number from the other store(s) in your Store Exchange preferences, you will not be able to receive and process files from the store(s).

+

License numbers can be found on the Point of Sale CD holder, in the e-mail you received if downloading the program, or by selecting About Point of Sale from the Help menu at the Server Workstation in each store after installing.

+

 

+

Upgrader Note:  Each store may have a new license number when upgrading from a previous version. Store Exchange will fail with a "License numbers do not match" error until your Store Exchange preferences have been updated with the new license numbers.

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_createslip.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_createslip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..be1fc3b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_createslip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + +Create a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a Transfer Slip (Transfer Merchandise)

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Transfer Slip Information Fields | Transfer Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

To create a new transfer slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Transfer Slip from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Specify the From Store (source of merchandise) and To Store (destination of merchandise).

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Remote stores cannot change the From Store; it is auto-filled with the local store

    +
    • +
  • +

    Headquarters can change either field to create slips for other stores

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    List the items and quantities to be transferred.Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Optionally, enter an estimated date of arrival (ETA), Carrier, Comment, or Freight charges.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save & Print to record the slip and print a copy or Save Only to record the transfer without printing.

    +
    2. +
+

When the transfer slip is saved, the quantities for both stores are immediately updated at the store making the slip. The store quantity changes are not visible at other stores until after the next completed Store Exchange cycle.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Record item serial numbers on slips

+

View item quantities at other stores

+

Multi-store overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_customers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_customers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..304a773 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_customers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Multi-Store: Working with Customers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store: Working with Customers

+

Multi-Store Overview | Customers Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Customers can be added, edited, or deleted at any store, with the resulting changes propagated to all stores with the next fully completed Store Exchange cycle. Headquarters maintains the master customer list, which is sent to all stores in its entirety during every Store Exchange.

+

General guidelines for customers at multi-stores:

+
    +
  • +

    Any store can add, edit, or delete a customer, but the customer record is not revised in the master customer list at Headquarters until certain synchronization checks are completed during the next Store Exchange cycle.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Adding, editing, or deleting a customer "flags" the customer record with the action taken and adds a date/time stamp at the originating store. This date/time stamp is used in synchronization checks to ensure proper handling of customer records in the event that the same record is edited at multiple stores on a given day.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a customer is a charge account customer with an account balance, deletion is not allowed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a store makes a charge account sale or accepts a payment on a customer account, Headquarters sends that information to QuickBooks Desktop financial software (only Headquarters exchanges data with QuickBooks Desktop).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Be aware that it is possible for a customer to make two or more purchases by account charge at different stores between Store Exchanges, neither individually exceeding the customer's available credit but in total exceeding it. After the next completed data exchange, the new balance will exceed the credit limit until a payment is made, but no further charges will be allowed  ExampleClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer history at Headquarters will show customer sales from all stores (but not pending customer orders). Customer history at a remote store shows all sales and order documents made locally, but not those made at other stores.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Exchange of data between stores

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_emailclient.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_emailclient.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3751c1d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_emailclient.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Desktop E-mail Client + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Desktop E-mail Client

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

This is your default Windows e-mail program, specified in Internet Explorer. When you select to send e-mail from within a Windows program, such as Point of Sale, this e-mail program automatically launches. This is the recommended e-mail option for store exchange.

+

Examples: Outlook Express (default in Windows installation), Microsoft Outlook, Netscape Mail

+

 

+

How do I verify or change my Windows e-mail client?

+

E-mail FAQs

+

 

+

Usage:

+
    +
  • +

    Simple; almost everyone knows how to send an e-mail

    +
    • +
  • +

    Automated sending creates the exchange file, attaches it to the e-mail, and sends with one click

    +
    • +
  • +

    Double-clicking the e-mail attachment processes it in at the receiving store

    +
    • +
  • +

    Free e-mail client readily available (Outlook Express is included component of Internet Explorer)

    +
    • +
+

Requirements:

+
    +
  • +

    Must have an active Internet connection, e-mail client, and unique e-mail address at the Server Workstation in each store

    +
    • +
  • +

    E-mail providers file size and mailbox capacity must be adequate to send and receive exchange files. Some ISPs limit mailbox and/or file attachment size.

    +
    • +
+

Notes on desktop e-mail:

+
    +
  • +

    Be sure you have a valid e-mail address for each of your other stores. Enter them in your default Windows address book and they will be available for selection when setting up your Store Exchange communication settings in preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use Microsoft Exchange Server and Microsoft Outlook as a client, the workstation that is sending the e-mail must be connected to the Microsoft Exchange server at the time of sending. If a connection to the server is not available, the e-mail creation process will fail; no e-mail will be put in the Outbox for later sending. You will have to send again.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If an e-mail file is lost, your data files are automatically corrected with the next store exchange. A verifying procedure is used to resend exchange files as necessary when files are lost or received out of order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    E-mail Attachments and Virus Detection: Internet browsers (such as Internet Explorer), e-mail applications, and virus detection software programs often have user-definable security options related to handling of e-mail attachments. Depending on your applications and settings, it is possible that Store Exchange mailbag files (.qbt file extension) will be blocked from being opened or downloaded. If this is the case, changing your settings to identify the .qbt files as "safe" or removing them from the application's "unsafe file" list may solve the problem. Some programs also allow you to designate "safe" e-mail sources, from which file attachments are allowed. Consult the documentation or help files of the applications you use to determine what your choices are if this pertains to you.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Desktop e-mail Client Messages: Depending on your desktop e-mail client and security settings, you may receive a message when sending, asking if you want to allow a program to automatically send an e-mail. If this occurs, answer Yes to allow Point of Sale to automatically send your Store Exchange e-mail.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a507d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

The term Store Exchange refers to the transfer of data between your remote stores and Headquarters. Data is sent between stores in a compressed file, referred to as a "mailbag" (compressed to reduce transmission file size and time).

+

Store Exchange has two components:

+
    +
  • +

    Send Files to create and send mailbags to other stores, and

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receive Files to process mailbags that have been received from other stores.

    +
    • +
+

When a remote store is first installed, a mailbag from Headquarters is required to initialize the remote with the company inventory, preferences, and related files. Thereafter, it is recommended that Store Exchange be run daily between each remote store and Headquarters. This ensures that each store can view current item quantities available at other stores, that Headquarters is updated with the daily transactions from each remote store, that company reports are current, and that remote stores receive new data files, including inventory updates, vendor lists, customer lists, and purchase orders from Headquarters.

+

Daily exchanges also allow Headquarters to keep QuickBooks financial software records current.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Methods of Store Exchange

+

Configure Store Exchange

+

Recommended Exchange sequence at Headquarters

+

Recommended Exchange sequence at remote stores

+

Store Exchange activity log

+

What information is exchanged?

+

Automatic recovery of lost or corrupted data

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_filexfer.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_filexfer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..13b0b4f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_filexfer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Network File Transfer + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Network File Transfer

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

This Store Exchange method involves a direct file transfer to computers in other stores via a network, phone, or Internet connection using mapped drives or a UNC (Universal Naming Convention) location.

+

Examples: VPN (Virtual Private Network), LAN (local Area Network), WAN (Wide Area Network)

+

 

+

Usage:

+
    +
  • +

    Fastest, most convenient method once configured; no need to work outside of Point of Sale to send and receive files

    +
    • +
  • +

    Automated file transfer

    +
    • +
  • +

    One-click processing of received files; you are alerted when files arrive

    +
    • +
  • +

    Can be scheduled to occur once a day at a time convenient for you

    +
    • +
+

Requirements:

+
    +
  • +

    An active network connection during exchanges (if you can use Windows Explorer to copy files between store folders, network file transfer will work)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Technical knowledge to setup and maintain the network and associated hardware

    +
    • +
+

Notes on Network File transfer:

+
    +
  • +

    You can test a connection to determine if it would be valid for use with network file transfer by using Windows Explorer to copy files from one store to another. If this can be done, the connection can be used for Store Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The connection must be made before Store Exchange is run

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your hardware and the speed of the connection will directly affect the speed of the Store Exchange process

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_media.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_media.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83c6400 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_media.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Removable Media + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Removable Media

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

This store exchange method uses removable storage media that can be physically transported between stores.

+

Examples: Floppy disks, USB memory sticks, Portable hard drives, Zip drives, CDs, DVDs

+

 

+

Usage:

+
    +
  • +

    No Internet or network connection needed between stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    Supports both older (floppy disks) and newer (USB devices) technologies

    +
    • +
  • +

    Typically, it is a simple copy operation to write files to or retrieve files from the media; though media must be physically delivered to other stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    Media is small, durable, and reusable. Ideal for locations where no connection exists, e.g. outdoor market or kiosk.

    +
    • +
+

Requirements:

+
    +
  • +

    Formatted media and proper drives/ports on Server Workstation in each store

    +
    • +
  • +

    Third-party or Windows disk-writing software is required to use CD-R, CD-RW, or DVD disks

    +
    • +
+

Notes on removable media:

+

Floppy Disks, Zip Drives (100 or 250), LS-120

+
    +
  • +

    Spanning of multiple media is NOT supported. Zipped exchange files are limited to the capacity of a single piece of the media. On the other hand, multiple files on one piece of media are supported. One piece of media can hold as many files as will fit.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Media must be formatted appropriately.

    +
    • +
+

CD/DVD

+
    +
  • +

    Suggested method is to create one Store Exchange mailbag to a folder on your hard drive, then use your "CD/DVD-burning" software to write the file to the disks as necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To use CD-RW disks, the "packet writing" software installed on the sending computer must support writing to a preformatted CD-RW. If you have software installed that has this capability, select "Removable Media" as your exchange method and point to your CD-RW drive.

    +
    • +
+

Note: Point of Sale does not write directly to CDs or DVDs. You must have a disk-writing application installed to use this method and the procedure may vary depending on the application and the type of disk you use. Most versions of Windows include CD-writing software. Formatted CD-RW are the recommended CDs; these disks allow you to reuse the disk, copying and deleting mailbag files as needed. If you have problems writing directly to your CD or DVD  drive, you can try selecting "Web-based e-mail" as your Store Exchange method. This method creates a single copy of your Store Exchange file to a folder of your choice on your computer. You can then use your disk-writing software to write the copy to as many CDs/DVDs as needed.

+

 

+

USB Drives

+
    +
  • +

    These devices are also known as Jump Drives, Mini-Drives, Pen-Drives, Flash-Drives, and thumb drives. Also available are portable USB hard drives.

    +
    • +
  • +

    These devices work well on Windows 2000, XP, and Vista with plug and play support. They show up as removable media with a "drive letter" assigned in Windows Explorer, and you can copy, cut, and paste as it if were another hard drive.

    +
    • +
+

Flash Memory, Memory Sticks

+
    +
  • +

    These devices must appear and operate in Windows Explorer as a "regular" drive to be used as a removable media for Store Exchange.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_methods.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_methods.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..05b6214 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_methods.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Methods + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Methods

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic  | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Information can be exchanged between Headquarters and remote stores by any of five methods. Not every store has to use the same method; Headquarters can exchange with each remote store by a different method.

+

Each method has advantages and limitations. Click a link for more information about a specific method.

+

Desktop e-mail client uses file attachments to e-mails sent by your default Windows e-mail client.

+

Web-based e-mail uses file attachments to e-mails sent by an e-mail service you access on the Web.

+

Intuit Service uses a secure Internet database, where your stores can send and retrieve files. Phone activation required. Additional fee may apply.

+

Network file transfer is a direct transfer of files between stores using your VPN, LAN, or WAN network.

+

Removable media uses Floppy disks, USB memory sticks, Zip drives, CDs, etc., that you physically transport between stores.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Configure Store Exchange

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_webemail.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_webemail.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6ff153d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_exchange_webemail.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Web-based E-mail + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Web-based E-mail

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic  | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

You access this type of e-mail service on the Internet through your browser. You must go to the service's web site to send or receive e-mail.

+

Examples: Yahoo! mail, MSN Hotmail

+

 

+

Usage:

+
    +
  • +

    Simple, almost everyone knows how to attach a file to an e-mail and send

    +
    • +
  • +

    To send, manually access the service on the web, create the e-mail, and then attach the Store Exchange mailbag file

    +
    • +
  • +

    To receive, access the e-mail service on the web, download the attachment, and then double-click it to process the file

    +
    • +
  • +

    Free or low-cost Web-based e-mail is available

    +
    • +
+

Requirements:

+
    +
  • +

    Must have Internet connection, a Web-based e-mail account, and unique e-mail address at the Server Workstation in each store

    +
    • +
  • +

    E-mail providers file size and mailbox capacity must be adequate to send and receive exchange files. Web-based e-mail providers typically limit mailbox and/or file attachment size.

    +
    • +
+

Notes on Web-based e-mail:

+
    +
  • +

    Specify a folder in your communication setup where the sent file will be copied. You must browse to this folder from your e-mail application to attach the file. A Windows Explorer window will automatically open upon mailbag creation to assist you in browsing to this folder.

    +
    • +
  • +

    As the size of your data files grow, you may find your mailbag size exceeding your web-based e-mail application's file size limits.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If an e-mail file is lost, your data files are automatically corrected with the next Store Exchange. A verifying procedure is used to resend exchange files as necessary when files are lost or received out of order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    E-mail Attachments and Virus Detection: Internet browsers (such as Internet Explorer), e-mail applications, and virus detection software programs often have user-definable security options related to handling of e-mail attachments. Depending on your applications and settings, it is possible that Store Exchange mailbag files (.qbt file extension) will be blocked from being opened or downloaded. If this is the case, changing your settings to identify the .qbt files as "safe" or removing them from the application's "unsafe file" list may solve the problem. Some programs also allow you to designate "safe" e-mail sources, from which file attachments are allowed. Consult the documentation or help files of the applications you use to determine what your choices are if this pertains to you.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_overview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_overview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f49693c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_overview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + +Multi-Store Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Point of Sale can be configured to manage up to 20 stores, each with one to 20  workstations running the software. Program includes features like centralized purchasing and inventory control, inter-store transfers, exchange of information between stores, company-wide reporting, and the ability at any store to view the on-hand quantity of an item at any other store.

+

One store is designated as the Headquarters store (Store 1). Headquarters maintains central control over inventory, purchases merchandise, runs company-wide reports, and handles data exchange with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Headquarters also has all the capabilities of a remote store, plus can create documents for any store.

+

Stores 2-20, called remote stores, receive and sell merchandise, capture customer information, transfer items to other stores when necessary, and run local store reports. Each store authorizes and settles its own credit, debit/ATM, and gift card transactions, runs the End of Day procedure, and defines its own employees and security settings.

+

Headquarters and remote stores communicate through a process called Store Exchange. Store Exchange typically is done at the end of each business day, so that Headquarters, all stores, and your financial software all have current information for the start of the next business day.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Allowed activities by store type

+

Point of Sale basics

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_purchasing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_purchasing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..61bb979 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_purchasing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Regular purchase orders (POs) are created at Headquarters only.

+

A PO can be made for one store only. If you want to order quantities for all stores you must either make a separate PO for each store or make one PO for the entire quantity, receive that entire quantity at one location, and then use transfer slips to record the movement of the merchandise to the other stores.

+

When a remote store receives a Store Exchange mailbag from Headquarters, only those POs made for that particular store are extracted and copied to the remotes PO list.

+

Each store can reference its own POs as it makes receiving vouchers to receive the ordered merchandise into inventory. A voucher updates the fill status of the PO both at the local store and at Headquarters, once Store Exchange is run to send the receiving voucher(s) there. When Headquarters deletes a filled PO, it is automatically deleted from the remote PO list after the next Store Exchange. Likewise, if edits are made to an active PO at Headquarters, the PO is resent to the remote store and overwrites the copy of the PO at the remote.

+

Remote stores can create purchase orders only when creating special order items from a document (typically from a customer order). These POs are not sent to Headquarters, but the special order item is sent to Headquarters on the first transactional document listing it. Headquarters can make a special order item a permanent addition to inventory by converting it to an inventory item.

+

Allowing remote stores to create special order items introduces the possibility of creating items with duplicate UPC or Alternate Lookups. Headquarters is alerted to and can fix these duplicate items from the duplicate item reminders screen.

+

 

+

Tip: Good purchasing/receiving practices for multiple storesClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Purchasing overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_reports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97d9571 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + +Multi-Store Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Reports

+

Reports Overview | Multi-Store Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Assuming you use Store Exchanges to share information between stores, Headquarters can run reports for any one store, a selected group of stores, or all stores, while remote stores can only run reports for the activities at their own store. When running reports at Headquarters, use the Modify Filters option to specify the store(s) to be included in the report.

+

Z-Out Drawer Count Reports are the only reports sent from remote stores to Headquarters. All other company reports ran at Headquarters draw their information from inventory and the transactional history documents maintained at Headquarters.

+

When Headquarters creates transactional documents for another store, that document is not sent to the other store. Inventory for the remote store is updated but the document is not added to the history file at the remote. These transaction(s) will be included in reports ran at Headquarters, but not in reports ran at the remote store that are based on history documents.

+

 

+

Reports Unique to Multi-Store Operations

+
    +
  • +

    Transfer Reports which detail the movement of merchandise between stores. Available at both Headquarters and remote stores under the Items report category.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Store Inventory Summary - located under the Items category, this report provides on-hand merchandise information for all stores. Available at all stores.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Store Sales Reports located under the Sales report category, these reports can include summary or item sales information for all stores, and provide store comparisons. These multi-store reports are available only at Headquarters (remote stores have access to all other sales reports for their store).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Z-Out Drawer Count Reports Z-Out Drawer Count Reports are included in the mailbag sent from remote stores to Headquarters. Headquarters can view these reports by selecting view drawer count History from the Reports menu. The reports can be printed or exported to Excel.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Profit & Loss (P/L) Reports by Class in QuickBooks Desktop If you also use QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can run P/L reports for each store as well as the entire company in QuickBooks Desktop, by assigning a QuickBooks class to each store. Available at Headquarters only. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_transferaccess.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_transferaccess.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1da779f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_transferaccess.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + +Access Transfer Slips + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Transfer Slips

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Transfer Overview | Multi-Store Overview  

+ +
+

 

+
+

Select one of the following from the Inventory menu:

+
    +
  • +

    New transfer Slip to record a new transfer between stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    Transfer History to view previously saved transfer slips

    +
    • +
  • +

    Held Slips to view transfer slips currently on hold

    +
    • +
+

You can also initiate a transfer from inventory. Select or display the item or items you wish to transfer and then choose Transfer selected items to another store from the I Want To menu.

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_transfers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_transfers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dc76408 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_transfers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + +Transfer Merchandise between Stores + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Transfer Merchandise between Stores

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Create a Transfer Slip

+ +
+

 

+
+

The transfer of merchandise from one store to another is recorded on a transfer slip. A transfer slip is a transactional document that deducts the transferred merchandise from the source store's item quantity and adds it to the destination store's quantity.

+

Headquarters can make transfer slips to move merchandise from any store to any other store. Remote stores are limited to making slips that transfer merchandise out of their store to another store.

+

If one store runs out of an item, they can look to see if another store has the item in stock. Typically, a follow-up phone call is made to confirm that the item is still available. At this point, the first store can either send the customer to the second store or arrange for the second store to transfer the item to them, in which case the customer can purchase it when it arrives. The second store or Headquarters would make a transfer slip to move the item.

+

Transfer slips are often made at Headquarters to reallocate fast or slow selling merchandise among stores. Since Headquarters has ultimate inventory control, handles purchasing, and has the ability to run company reports, they are in the ideal position to assess when merchandise transfers of this nature are beneficial.

+

Keep the following in mind as you work with transfer slips:

+
    +
  • +

    Transfers have no net effect on total inventory quantity or value; they simply move the specified quantity of an item from one store to another.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The transfer slip is the mechanism that updates Point of Sale inventory for a transfer. You might find it helpful to print and FAX or e-mail a copy of the transfer slip to the store(s) involved to assist with the physical movement of the merchandise.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The store receiving transferred merchandise should NOT record the merchandise on a receiving voucher. Transfer slips update the quantities at both stores (called the "From Store" and "To Store" on the slips, respectively). Making a voucher that lists the same merchandise would add the item quantity to the master inventory and cause errors in the company inventory valuation.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Transfer slips are saved to your Transfer History list and, if applicable, sent to QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    • +
+

Transfer reports, which detail the movement of merchandise between stores are available at both Headquarters and remote stores.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Transfer slip field descriptions

+

Transfer security rights

+

How transfers are sent to QuickBooks financial software

+

Store Exchange overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_types.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_types.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a6a2c16 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multi_store_types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,1349 @@ + + + + + + +Allowed Activities by Store Type + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Allowed Activities by Store Type

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

HQ = Headquarters. See footnotes for numbered marks at end of table.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/Function

+		 +

HQ

+		 +

Remote

+
+

Managing Inventory

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View item quantity and info

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Add/edit/delete/merge Items and styles

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create special order items

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Convert special order items to regular

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Enter/edit costs, prices, tax codes

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Define assembly items

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Build/break/sell assemblies

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Define group items

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Sell group items

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Inventory reminders: new items, price changes

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Inventory reminders: reorder items, duplicate items

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View item history (all stores)

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View department information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Add/edit/delete departments

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View vendor information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Add/edit/delete vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Define multi-vendors for items

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Merge vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Physical Inventory for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Physical Inventory for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Print tags

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Print tags for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Use Price Manager

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create quantity adjustments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create cost adjustments

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Put adjustment memo on hold

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View/copy/reverse memos

+		 +

X

+		 +

X6

+
+

Create transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create transfer slips for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Put slips on hold

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View/copy/reverse slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X6

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/Function

+		 +

HQ

+		 +

Remote

+
+

Purchasing and Receiving

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/edit/delete/merge vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create POs (for all stores)

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create special order PO

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View POs for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View POs for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

E-mail POs to vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X7

+
+

Delete filled POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X7

+
+

Create voucher for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create voucher to receive PO items

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create voucher for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Put vouchers on hold

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View/copy/reverse vouchers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X6

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Sales and Customer Orders

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Create receipts for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create receipts for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Accept all payment methods

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Authorize/settle credit card payments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Authorize/settle debit/ATM payments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Sell/redeem gift cards

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Put receipts on hold

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View/copy/reverse receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X6

+
+

Print gift receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Print store logo on sales documents

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create customer orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Create special order items from orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Define initial deposit requirements

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Sell customer order items for local store

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Delete filled customer orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Track employee sales commission

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Define sales tax locations/codes

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Select local default tax location

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Select local default price level

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/Function

+		 +

HQ

+		 +

Remote

+
+

Customers

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/edit/delete customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Merge customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View customer history (local sales)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View customer history (all stores)

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Offer customer charge accounts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Define/change reward program

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Enter/track shipping information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Company Preferences (Define)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

General

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Select features to use

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Financial

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Merchant & Gift Services

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Multi-Store: Change Store Type

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Multi-Store: Store Codes/Classes

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Multi-Store: Store Exchange

+		 +

X

+		 +

X1

+
+

Multi-Store: Store Headings

+		 +

X

+		 +

X1

+
+

Inventory

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Pricing

+		 +

X

+		 +

X2

+
+

Purchasing

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Receiving

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Sales

+		 +

X

+		 +

X3

+
+

Customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Customer Orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X4

+
+

Sales Tax

+		 +

X

+		 +

X5

+
+

E-mail Documents

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/Function

+		 +

HQ

+		 +

Remote

+
+

Workstation Preferences (Define)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

All Local W/S Settings (Hardware, Printing)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Software Updates

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Miscellaneous

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Serial number tracking

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Add employees and assign Security Groups and Rights (for Local Store)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Use Employee Time Clock

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Customize list columns

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Run store reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Run company reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View/print/export Z-Out Drawer Count reports for all Stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Get program updates

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Cash drawer payouts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Clean up company data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X8

+
+ +

 

+

Footnotes for remote stores: 1. Local settings must match those at HQ.  2. Limited to selection of local default price level.  3. Limited to certain local default sales preferences.  4. Limited to layaway/sales order printed messages.  5. Limited to selection of default tax location.  6. Remote stores can reverse documents only until they have been sent to Headquarters, after which the document can only be reversed at Headquarters.  7. Remote stores can delete or e-mail special order POs created at the local store only.  8. Cannot remove HQ-only records.

+

Return to top

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_copycorrectslip.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_copycorrectslip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..75f06ca --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_copycorrectslip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Copy and/or Correct a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy and/or Correct a Transfer Slip

+

Transfer Overview | Find a Slip | Edit a Slip

+
+

 

+
+

To reverse, copy and correct a slip:

+

Copying and correcting a reversed slip allows you to adopt the parts of the original slip that you want to keep, and correct the parts that were in error, to make a new, correct slip.

+
    +
  1. +

    Reverse the original slip as described here.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight or display the original slip again (marked Reversed in the Status field in the transfer history list).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Copy. A new slip is created and displayed with the same information as the original.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make the necessary corrections to the information on the new slip.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Save & Print or Save Only.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    When done, you will have three slips in your transfer history: the original slip (status of Reversed), the second slip that reversed the original (status of Reversing), and the new corrected slip (status of Regular).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Basic document reversing information

+

Store Exchange overview

+

Multi-store overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_hold_slip.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_hold_slip.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c3e51b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_hold_slip.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + +Hold a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Hold a Transfer Slip

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic  | Slip Information Fields | Transfer Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

A slip can be put on hold to allow you to carry out other activities. For example, you might temporarily hold a slip in progress while you make a sale, then unhold and complete it after the sale is completed. If a transfer is not physically completed the same day you make the slip you may also want to place the slip on hold until the transfer is completed. This ensures that item quantities are not updated until the merchandise physically is moved from one store to the other.

+

To hold a slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create a slip, but do not save it.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Hold Slip from the bottom tool bar.

    +
    3. +
+

The slip is added to the list of held slips. A slip can be viewed, printed, or deleted while on hold. A held slip is not sent to Headquarters (if made at a remote) and does not update inventory until it has been unheld and saved.

+

To unhold a slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu or the bottom of the transfer history window, select Held Transfer Slips.

    +
    2. +
+

The list of slips on hold is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the slip you want and select Unhold Slip from the bottom tool bar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    The selected slip is made active again. Make any necessary modifications and then save and print.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange overview

+

Multi-store overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_initializeremotes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_initializeremotes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7e1d7ab --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_initializeremotes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Initialize Remote Stores + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Initialize Remote Stores

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

Once Headquarters has completed the setup of inventory, departments, vendors, and company preferences, and remote stores have installed and configured Point of Sale, Headquarters sends a Store Exchange mailbag to the remote stores to initialize them with the information entered at Headquarters. Remote stores must receive and process this mailbag before they can create documents in Point of Sale.

+

To initialize remote stores, Headquarters must send a Store Exchange file to all remote stores. Remote stores receive and process the file from Headquarters. Once this initial Store Exchange cycle is completed, all stores have access to inventory and are ready to begin normal Point of Sale activities.

+

The activities that can be performed at the remote store prior to receiving their initialization file from Headquarters are limited to certain store-specific tasks, such as adding customers, adding employees and defining security, and defining store preferences. Documents generally cannot be made, as the remote store cannot list items until the inventory file is received from Headquarters.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Not all of the new settings sent from Headquarters take effect until all workstations at a remote store have exited and restarted Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you converted data from a previous version of Point of Sale at a remote store, you can carry on normal POS activities, including sales, while waiting for an initialization file from Headquarters. However, you cannot send a Store Exchange file until you have received and processed one in from Headquarters.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_preferences.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_preferences.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..717a638 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_preferences.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +Multi-Store Preferences + + + + + + + + + + +

Multi-Store Preferences

+

Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Shared company preferences that affect all stores are defined at Headquarters only. Shared company preferences include price levels, sales tax codes and locations, deposit requirements for customer orders, store codes and headings, and most other company preferences.

+

Each store can set it own preferences for the following:

+
    +
  • +

    Default price level and payment type on sales

    +
    • +
  • +

    Default tax location used for sales

    +
    • +
  • +

    Logo and printed message on receipts

    +
    • +
  • +

    Allowed credit card types

    +
    • +
  • +

    Employees and security rights

    +
    • +
  • +

    Store Exchange settings for communication with other stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    Workstation-specific preferences

    +
    • +
+

The exchange of company preferences is one way, from Headquarters to remote stores, and includes only the shared preferences. The shared company preferences at a remote store are overwritten by the Headquarters file with every exchange.

+

 

+

How do I edit company preferences?

+

How do I edit workstation preferences?

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_protips_purchasing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_protips_purchasing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f0aa55c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_protips_purchasing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Multi-Store Purchasing and Receiving + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Multi-Store Purchasing and Receiving

+ +

in-help popup

+ +

 

+

Keep Headquarters PO File Small to Reduce Store Exchange File Size and Time

+

Once a PO has been filled, it is advisable to delete it at Headquarters. Deleting a PO prevents it from being included in mailbags sent to remote stores during Store Exchanges. This keeps the PO file compact and helps speed the time it takes to create and send/receive Store Exchange mailbags. It also removes the PO from the PO list at the remote store, helping keep it compact and useful.

+

 

+

Instill Good Receiving Practices at Remotes

+

If the received merchandise was ordered on a PO, remote stores should always receive against that PO when receiving the merchandise. This not only speeds the process of making a voucher and minimizes data entry errors, it also ensures that the proper order cost is carried to the voucher and that the PO fill status is updated at Headquarters. Following this practice will facilitate accurate and timely updating of your inventory cost and tracking of purchased merchandise.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_remote_correctingreceipts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_remote_correctingreceipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dbc85ea --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_remote_correctingreceipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Reverse/Correct a Receipt at a Remote Store + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse/Correct a Receipt at a Remote Store

+

Find a Receipt | Edit a Receipt | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Remote stores can reverse receipts only until they are sent to Headquarters in a Store Exchange. If an error is discovered after a receipt has been sent to Headquarters, there are two ways to fix the error:

+
    +
  • +

    Reverse the receipt at Headquarters. Inventory at the remote will be corrected after the next Store Exchange, but the remote sales history will not be updated,

    +
    • +
+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Use a return, copy, and correct procedure at the remote store. This procedure will create a return receipt to cancel out the original sales receipt's effect on inventory, and then create a new corrected sales receipt to update both inventory and your sales history with the correct information.

    +
    • +
+

To return, copy, and correct a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the original receipt in your Sales History.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy Receipt.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Change to Return from the I Want To menu to make the copy a return receipt. Leave all items, quantities, prices, etc., the same as the original. Save this new return receipt.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Locate and copy the original receipt a second time. Make corrections on this copy to reflect the actual items, quantities, and prices of the sold merchandise and save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Multi-store overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_remotevoucherreverse.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_remotevoucherreverse.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..96f1d6b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_remotevoucherreverse.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + +Notes: Reverse a Voucher at a Remote Store + + + + + + + + + + +

Notes: Reverse a Voucher at a Remote Store

+

Multi-Store Overview | Receiving Overview

+
+

 

+
+

Headquarters can edit (vendor billing information and discount fields only) and reverse a former voucher without restrictions. Remote stores, however, cannot edit receiving vouchers and can only reverse a voucher until it has been sent to Headquarters. If an error is discovered after a voucher has been sent to Headquarters you have two methods available to fix the error:

+
    +
  • +

    Reverse the voucher at Headquarters. Inventory at the remote will be corrected after the next Store Exchange, but the remote receiving history will not be updated.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use a return, copy, and correct procedure at the remote store. This procedure will create a return voucher to cancel out the original receiving voucher's effect on inventory, and then create a new corrected receiving voucher to update both inventory and your receiving history with the correct information.

    +
    • +
+

To return, copy, and correct a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the original voucher in your Receiving History.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy Voucher.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Change to Return Voucher from the I Want To menu to make the copy a return voucher. Leave all items, quantities, costs, etc., the same as the original. Save this new return voucher.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Locate and copy the original voucher a second time. Make corrections on this copy to reflect the actual items, quantities, and costs of the received merchandise and save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_slip_reverse.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_slip_reverse.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..864d60c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_slip_reverse.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + +Reverse a Transfer Slip + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse a Transfer Slip

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Transfer Overview | Find a Transfer Slip

+ +
+

 

+
+

Editing of saved transfer slips is limited to freight charges and some informational fields and then only until the slip has been sent to Headquarters and/or to QuickBooks financial software.

+

If an uneditable error is discovered on a slip, it is necessary to reverse the slip and then you can create a new, corrected one to update your history files and store quantities.

+

To reverse a saved transfer slip:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight the former slip in your transfer history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Reverse Slip from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Reversing Document dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    If not using security, select your name in the Associate field and then select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

A reversing slip is automatically created and added to the transfer history list. If necessary, a corrected slip can then made as described here.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Transfer slips can only be reversed at a remote store prior to sending the slip to Headquarters. If the slip has already been sent to Headquarters, then it can only be reversed at Headquarters.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Reversing a slip cancels the original slips effect on inventory. For example, if the original slip transferred a unit quantity of three from Store 1 to Store 2, when the slip is reversed a quantity of three is transferred back to Store 1. When completed, the original slip will be marked Reversed in the Status field and the new slip that is created will be marked Reversing. (Note: the Status field is only displayed in the Transfer History list).

    +
    • +
  • +

    A Reverse, Copy, and Correct approach can be used to undo the effects of the original slip and make a new, corrected slip. First, reverse the original slip as described above. Then, begin a new slip by copying the original. Finally, make corrections to the copy and save.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Headquarters: If integrated with QuickBooks financial software and if the original slip has already been sent to QuickBooks, then the reversing slip is also sent and posts in the same manner as any slip. The new posting cancels the effect of the original on your financial records. The original entries are not edited or removed. If the original document has not yet been sent, then both are flagged and neither is sent, so there will be no entries in your financial software for the transaction.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange overview

+

Multi-store overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_storetracking_by_class.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_storetracking_by_class.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..831b467 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_storetracking_by_class.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + +Store Tracking and Profit/Loss Reports in QuickBooks Desktop + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Tracking and Profit/Loss Reports in QuickBooks Desktop

+

Multi-Store Overview | Multi-store Reports in Point of Sale

+
+

 

+
+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can run Profit/Loss (P/L) reports for each store as well as the entire company in your financial software, by assigning a QuickBooks class to each store.

+

To generate this report type, you must enable the class tracking preference in both Point of Sale and in QuickBooks Desktop financial software and assign a unique class to each store in your Point of Sale company preferences at Headquarters.

+

Click here for instructions to configure Headquarters preferences in Point of Sale.

+

To enable tracking by class in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preferences from the Edit menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Accounting, and then Company in the Preferences window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the check box for Use Class Tracking.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    During the next Financial Exchange, the classes you assigned to stores in Point of Sale are added to your class list in QuickBooks Desktop financial software. As transactions are posted to QuickBooks Desktop at Headquarters, QuickBooks Desktop categorizes them according to the assigned store classes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can run a report by class to see the P/L for any store. To see the P/L for all stores run an unclassified report. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop documentation or in-product help for more information about using classes.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange Overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_view_storeqty.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_view_storeqty.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6246c6f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/multistore_view_storeqty.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +View Item Quantities at Other Stores + + + + + + + + + + + +

View Item Quantities at Other Stores

+

Store Exchange Overview | Track Available Quantities

+
+

 

+
+

Each store can view item quantities at every other store, accurate as of the last completed store exchange cycle.

+

To view available item quantities at other stores:

+
    +
  1. +

    From your item list, display the item record (select View Details).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Basic Info section, click the Available button.

    +
    3. +
+

The Available Quantities window is displayed.

+

Available Quantities

+

 

+

This window allows you to view the on-hand, on-order, and available item quantities as well as a list of open orders for your store.

+

Also displayed are item quantities at other stores, current as of the last completed Store Exchange. If you run out of an item, you can use this window to see if another store has the item in stock. If needed, you can request the other store to transfer the item to you or you can send the customer to the other store to purchase the item.

+

Learn more about the Available Quantities window.

+

Other places to view item quantities at other stores:

+
    +
  • +

    Purchase Order: In the Item Information window, accessed by selecting Edit Item for an item listed on a purchase order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Item List: A column for each store's on-hand quantity can be added to your item list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Report: Run the Inventory by Store report (From the Report Center, select Items > Multi-Store - Store Inventory.

    +
    • +
+

Note: Importance of Store Exchange Sequencing. Item quantities viewed at other stores are only as current as the last successful complete Store Exchange cycle. The closer you follow the recommended exchange sequence, the more meaningful these quantities will be.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Automatic quantity adjustment at remote stores

+

Transfer merchandise between stores

+

Multi-store overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/note_adding_a_new_style_from_documents.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/note_adding_a_new_style_from_documents.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..58fc99b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/note_adding_a_new_style_from_documents.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +Note: Add a New Style from a Document + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Note: Add a New Style from a Document

+ +

In-help popup

+
+

Pro

+
+

This feature is not available from a sales receipt or receiving voucher.

+

If you come to your item list from a document (after choosing Select from Item List or by selecting Add New from the Enter Items drop-down list), you can add a new style.

+

However, be aware that the quantities you enter in the style grid are document quantities, not on hand quantities. When you return to the document, the style items will be listed on the document with the entered quantities. The actual on-hand quantities for the style will be zero, and must be entered in the typical fashion, usually by receiving the items on a voucher.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi551.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi551.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..020e0d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi551.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + +Print and Use a Store Count Worksheet + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print and Use a Store Count Worksheet

+

Basic Steps of a Physical Inventory | Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Printing a store count worksheet or worksheets is the most common way of recording physical inventory counts if you don't use a physical inventory scanner.

+
    +
  • +

    You can filter your physical item list by logical groupings, such as by department, and print a worksheet for each so several people can be counting simultaneously or so can you split the work over multiple sessions

    +
    • +
  • +

    The worksheets are generated as Point of Sale reports and are customizable to include the items and layout that works best for you

    +
    • +
  • +

    Changes you make to the columns and other display options are remembered and used until you change them again

    +
    • +
+

To print store count worksheets:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the Physical Inventory window open, select:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    PI Worksheet from the Print menu. When run from here, the worksheet will automatically include only the items currently displayed in the filtered Physical Inventory item list. You can customize other display options.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Run a Report PI Worksheet from the I Want to menu. Using this option allows you to customize the report as needed, including the items included.

    +
    • +
+

The report is run and displayed on-screen.

+

 

+

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    To add/remove columns or make other changes, select Modify or a specific customization option from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When satisfied with the layout, select Print.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Repeat to create worksheets for other item groupings, if needed.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Go though your store, recording item counts on  the worksheets.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Transfer the item counts to Point of Sale using the Add Counts by Hand option or enter them directly in the Physical Inventory window item list.

    +
    6. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi555.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi555.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1146a1c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi555.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +QuickBooks Users: Adjust Inventory Value + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Users: Adjust Inventory Value

+ +

In-help popup. Not duplicated in popup database.

+ +

The adjustment memos automatically created when a physical inventory is updated send the necessary information to your financial software so the value change in inventory is correctly reflected there.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi556.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi556.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..01130b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi556.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Update Inventory with Physical Counts + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Update Inventory with Physical Counts

+

Physical Inventory Overview | Basic steps of a Physical Inventory

+
+

Basic

+
+

Important: If you haven't already done so, review your item counts before updating inventory.

+

 

+

When all of your counts have been entered and reviewed, use this procedure to update inventory on-hand quantities to the values you have entered.

+
    +
  1. +

    With the Physical Inventory  window displayed, ensure that All Items is selected in the View drop-down filter list at the top of the window.

    +
    2. +
+

Requiring that all items be displayed is a precaution to help make sure you are not updating inventory with "hidden" entries.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory.

    +
    2. +
+

A confirmation window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Yes to update inventory quantities.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    At the prompt, specify if you would like to run one of the physical inventory reports.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note: Adjustment memo(s) createdClick to display a popup topic

+

Note: Update QuickBooks financial softwareClick to display a popup topic

+

Clear the physical inventory scanner's memory (if applicable)

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi558.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi558.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..351e1f3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi558.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + +Adjustment Memo Created + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Adjustment Memo Created

+ +

In-help popup. Has not been added to popup database.

+ +

Quantity adjustment memos are automatically created, as necessary, when your Point of Sale inventory is updated with your item counts.

+

Physical is listed in the memos Reason field and Physical Inventory in the Source field. If requiring employee logins, the currently logged-in user is listed as the Associate. If not using security, the memos Associate field is left blank.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi559.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi559.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a59b184 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi559.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + + +Access Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Physical Inventory

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Entering Counts | Using a Physical Inventory Scanner

+
+

Basic

+
+

To start or continue a physical inventory:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Start Physical Inventory or Continue Physical Inventory from the Inventory menu.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you are Headquarters in a multi-store configuration, select the store for which you will enter physical counts

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi560.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi560.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24c42ab --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi560.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + + +Review Counts Before Updating Inventory + + + + + + + + + + +

Review Counts Before Updating Inventory

+

Physical Inventory Overview | PI Reports

+
+

Basic

+
+

 

+

It is highly recommended that you review your physical inventory counts before updating a physical inventory. No mater how you've entered your item counts, they all end up in the item list on the main Physical Inventory window. From this window, you have several options for reviewing your counts to help determine if investigation or recounts are necessary before updating your inventory with the counts.

+

 

+

1. Do you need to set all items not counted to zero (0)?

+

When updating inventory with your counts, only the items with a count entered will be updated. It is important to enter a zero for items that are out of stock during the count so that your inventory is updated accordingly. You can enter a zero manually for these items or you can select the check box labeled Set all items not counted to zero to accomplish this in one step.

+

 

+

Do not use this option if you are counting and updating inventory for only a portion of your store (such as for one department). All items in your inventory that do not have a count entered are set to zero, not just those currently displayed in the Physical Inventory item list. Always review the results before updating inventory. Clearing the check box before updating will remove the zero counts.

+

 

+

 

+

2. Recount items whose quantity may have changed since starting.

+

While it is not recommended, sometimes a physical is done while your store is open and you continue selling. Or maybe you have started, saved, and restarted a physical with a period of sales between. Point of Sale will track and alert you when any transaction (receiving, sale, adjustment, transfer) affects items you have already counted. This gives you an opportunity to recount the item(s) in question before updating your inventory.

+

 

+

+

+

 

+

 

+

3. Review the physical inventory difference totals.

+

At the bottom right of the window is a summary of the differences in quantity, price, and cost of the counted items compared to what was expected. If the numbers are way off what you expected, review the counts in the item list looking for large discrepancies.

+

Tip: Filter the item list by Differences Only to quickly find suspect counts.

+

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi561.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi561.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c0a9e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi561.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Filter Item List to Enter or Review Physical Inventory Counts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Filter Item List to Enter or Review Physical Inventory Counts

+

Enter Counts | Review Counts | Update Inventory with Counts

+
+

Basic

+
+

You may find it helpful to break the process of conducting a physical inventory into several phases, such as taking and entering counts by a particular department, vendor, physical location, or some other logical grouping. Filtering your item list can make your job easier and save you time by organizing your data appropriately, especially if you are manually entering physical counts in a larger store.

+

Choose one of the filters from the drop-down list on the Physical Inventory window tool bar:

+
    +
  • +

    All Items if you want to view all inventory items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Counted Only if you want to view only the items for which you have already entered counts in the Counted field. (This is generally used when reviewing entered counts, before updating.)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Create Filter if you want to create and optionally save new filter criteria. You can restrict the view to a specific department, vendor, etc. Saving your filter adds it to the filter drop-down list for future use.

    +
    • +
  • +

    [Your custom name] if you want to filter the list by one of your previously saved filters.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_addcounts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_addcounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7adf30d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_addcounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + +Add Counts by Hand + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Counts by Hand

+

Basic Steps of a Physical Inventory | Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

The Add Counts by Hand window is an efficient way to manually transfer item counts from a store count worksheet to Point of Sale. There's no need to enter counts in any particular order and Point of Sale will combine the counts of an item if entered multiple times.

+

 

+

+

 

+

To enter item counts using the Add Counts by Hand window:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the Physical Inventory window open, Select Add Counts by Hand from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the preferred workflow sequence for item entry in After pressing Enter key:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select Go to quantity field to enter an item then enter the counted quantity, then another item, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Add item to enter one item after another quickly, each with a quantity of one. The cursor never moves to the Quantity field with this choice. This might be a good choice if you are scanning each and every item unit to enter them.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Scan or enter an item identifier (UPC, Alternate Lookup, or Item #) and press <Enter>. Audio and visual warnings are given if an unrecognizable identifier is entered.

    +
    2. +
+

The program will search items in the order shown above. The first match to the entry is listed, e.g., if you have an item with an Alternate Lookup that matches an Item #, an entry matching both will cause the item with the Alternate Lookup match to be listed.

+
    +
  1. +

    If you selected Go to quantity field in step 2, enter the counted quantity and press <Enter> or click Add.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until you are finished entering all the items and their counts.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save. The counts entered are transferred to the Physical Inventory window.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When all counts have been entered on the Physical Inventory window, review the counts and then proceed to updating your inventory.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can edit entered counts directly in the Counted column on this window if necessary

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the Remove Item button at the bottom of the window to remove an item if it was entered in error

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Add counts from a scanner

+

Enter counts of Items with multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_basicsteps.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_basicsteps.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97b797e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_basicsteps.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + +Physical Inventory: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory: Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: Only one workstation can be working in the physical inventory at any one time.

+

 

+

These are the basic steps to complete a physical inventory. Use the links on this page for specific instructions to complete a step.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Start Physical Inventory from the Inventory menu.

    +

    (Pro Headquarters) Enter the Store for which you are entering counts.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Physically count item quantities on hand using one or both of these methods:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Print a Store Count Worksheet and take it with you through the store recording counts. Select Run a Report PI Worksheet from the I Want to menu. Modify the report as necessary to display and group your items in a manner that makes sense for counting in your store.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the optional QuickBooks-approved physical inventory scanner to go through your store scanning item bar codes and entering counts. Since the physical inventory scanner is portable, you can move freely around your store and scan thousands of items in one session. (physical inventory scanner sold separately)

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Transfer your counts to Point of Sale by:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Using the Add Counts by Hand option. This is usually the fastest manual way to enter counts, even if an item is counted several places in the store on different worksheets. Enter an item identifier (UPC, alternate lookup, or item number) and then the count, pressing <Enter> after each entry. Point of Sale consolidates multiple entries and then transfers the counts to the Physical Inventory window.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Entering counts directly in the Counted column on the Physical Inventory window. This is convenient for entering a small number of items or items that are grouped together, but may be time consuming if the same items are scattered throughout your store. Tip: Filtering or sorting the list on this window can help make entry of counts faster.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Upload counts from the portable scanner.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Review your counts and the totals summary displayed on screen and, if applicable, select the Set all items not counted to zero. This setting ensures that all inventory items for which no physical count was entered are zeroed out when you update inventory.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory to update your inventory on-hand quantities with the counted quantities.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can choose Save & Continue at anytime to pause in your physical inventory. After saving you can exit and return later to finish. Choose Continue Physical Inventory from the Inventory menu to resume.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If transactions affecting the quantity of previously counted items occur during a physical inventory, the items are flagged on the Physical Inventory window and you are alerted. You should recount these items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you have entered counts but wish to cancel them and start again, select Clear Counts and Restart from the I Want To menu.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If your computer loses power or crashes during a physical, Point of Sale retains the counts you have entered to that point and automatically recovers them for you.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If necessary, you can select Print Tags from the Print menu to create new tags for items as counting.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you use multiple units of measure for some of your items, read the specific instructions for counting them.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_countUOM.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_countUOM.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2c9c933 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_countUOM.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + +Count Items with Multiple Units of Measure + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Count Items with Multiple Units of Measure

+

Units of Measure Overview | Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale maintains on-hand inventory counts by the base unit of measureClick to display a popup topic (though quantities are also displayed in your other units for convenience). When taking a physical inventory count, you can enter counted quantities by other units, but Point of Sale always converts the count to your base unit before updating inventory.

+

The general rules for entering and displaying counts with these items are as follows.

+

 

+

Main Physical Inventory Window

+
    +
  • +

    If you enter counts directly on the main PI window, they must be entered in your base unit of measure.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Counts transferred to the main PI window from the Add Counts by Hand window or a physical inventory scanner are converted and displayed as base unit counts, no matter which unit the counts were entered as.

    +
    • +
+

Add Counts by Hand Window

+
    +
  • +

    As you enter items and counts, change the Unit of Measure field entry as necessary to reflect the unit of measure actually counted. This field will default to the unit associated with the entered UPC or alternate lookup value if they are unique for each unit, or to your base unit of measure if not.

    +
    • +
+

Note: If you have selected the Add Item option, you cannot change the Unit of Measure field entry. The count is assumed to be 1 (one) for the unit identifier entered.

+
    +
  • +

    If entering counts by a unit other than the base unit, the equivalent number of base units is displayed in the Base Unit Count field for confirmation.

    +
    • +
  • +

    No matter which unit the count is entered as, it is converted and added to the count list in terms of the base unit. In the example shown, a case identifier has been scanned and a quantity of 8 cases entered. The equivalent base unit count for 8 cases is 112 bottles which is displayed in the Base Unit Count field and the item count list.

    +
    • +
+

+

 

+

Physical Inventory Scanner

+

If you have a unique UPC or alternate lookup (ALU) identifier for each unit of measure and print tags with those barcodes, when scanning them the quantity entered is converted to an equivalent quantity of base units. If each unit does not have a unique bar code, the quantity entered is assumed to be for your base unit. As you scan and enter quantities, be aware of and enter the counted quantity in accordance with this standard and based on your bar code type. Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..416cf19 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +pi_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic. and has been hidden

+ +

 

+

Access the Physical Inventory window

+

Complete the basic steps of a Physical Inventory

+

Enter Physical Inventory counts

+

Use a portable data terminal (scanner) (optional, sold separately)

+

Update a Physical Inventory file

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..727684b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + +Use a Scanner for Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Use a Scanner for Physical Inventory

+

Physical Inventory Overview | Physical Inventory: Basic Steps

+
+

Basic

+
+

Using the QuickBooks-approved physical inventory scanner is an easy and efficient way to record and update your physical inventory. With the physical inventory scanner, you can review your inventory counts and resolve errors before you transfer the counts to your physical inventory. Since the scanner is portable, you can move freely around your store and scan the bar codes of all your inventory items. This option not only saves you time, but also helps to reduce inventory errors.

+

A physical inventory scanner allows you to scan thousands of units in inventory without needing to stop and upload the data. The scanner connects to your workstation via a USB interface, which makes it very convenient to use.

+

Using the scanner for a physical inventory includes these basic steps. Select a link for step-by-step instructions:

+
    +
  1. +

    Scan your items and enter counts.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Upload the scanned data from your scanner to Point of Sale.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Review the retrieved scans.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Save the scans to the Physical Inventory window.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Update inventory on-hand quantities with your counts.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Clear scans from the physical inventory scanner unit, making it ready for the next scanning session.

    +
    7. +
+

You can use the physical inventory scanner in conjunction with manually entered counts. When you update your physical inventory, the on-hand quantities are adjusted in your inventory for all item counts on the Physical Inventory , regardless of how they got there.

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use bar codes in Point of Sale

+

Install Supported Hardware

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_acceptscans.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_acceptscans.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0822207 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_acceptscans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Review and Save Scans + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Review and Save Scans

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Saving the physical inventory scans moves them from the Get Scans window to the Physical Inventory window.

+

View example Get Scans window Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

If any Unrecognized Scans are reported, review and print them before saving good scans to your physical inventory. Learn more

+

To save the good scans to your physical inventory:

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Get Scans window, select the Item Scans tab.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If you do not want to save all of the scans, select (click or touch) the checkboxes to the left of the items to be saved and then choose Save Selected at the bottom of the window.

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

Choose Save All at the bottom of the window to save all good scans items to the main Physical Inventory window.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The Select All and Select None buttons on the Get Scans window can help quickly select scans if not saving all of them. For example, to save all but a few scans, choose Select All and then clear the checkboxes for the few you don't wish to save.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Once transferred to the Physical Inventory window, you can review and correct quantities by typing over the value in the Counted column.

    +
    • +
+

Next Step: Review your counts before updating inventory

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are essentially the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_clearscans.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_clearscans.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d0e85a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_clearscans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Clearing Scans + + + + + + + + + + + +

Clearing Scans from the Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

After successfully uploading scans to Point of Sale, reviewing them, and saving to the Physical Inventory window, you must clear the scanner before the next scanning session (so they don't get uploaded a second time to your Physical Inventory).

+

If you conduct your physical inventory in discreet physical units (by department or aisle for example), clear the scanner after completing each unit and prior to starting scans for the next unit.

+

To clear scans from scanner memory from within Point of Sale:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Clear Scanner Memory when prompted on the Upload window and follow the prompts

    +
    • +
+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    From the Physical Inventory window's I Want To menu, select Clear Counts from Scanner and follow the on-screen prompts

    +
    • +
+

You can also clear one or all scans from the scanner unit directly as follows.

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Utilities from the main scanner menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Clear Records (Delete Data on CipherLab scanner).

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Press 1. All to clear all scans from memory, or 2. Last Collected to delete the last scan only.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Press 1. Yes to confirm or 2. No to cancel.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Note: Deleting the last scan removes the last item record entered, even if quantities greater than 1 were manually entered into the record.

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_illustration.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_illustration.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d9ceb20 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_illustration.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +pi_pdt_illustration + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner (PDT): Illustration

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

image\pdt3.gif

+

 

+
    +
  • +

    Use up/down arrow keys to move through menu choices and either blue button to select

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also select menu choices by pressing the corresponding number key

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the number keys to enter counts or to manually key in item number or UPC

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_retrievescans.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_retrievescans.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15106c8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_retrievescans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Upload Scans to Point of Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Upload Scans to Point of Sale

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

To upload scans to Point of Sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Place the scanner into the cradle and ensure the adapter is plugged into a USB port on your workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Turn the scanner on.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If the Point of Sale Physical Inventory window is not already open, select Start (or Continue) Physical Inventory from the Inventory menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Add Counts from Scanner.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the displayed instructions to upload the scans from the scanner unit.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When the upload is finished, you are prompted to clear the scanner memory. You can do so now, or wait until you have finished reviewing and saving the scans. But it is important that you clear the scanner so the same scans are not uploaded again in the next batch.

    +
    5. +
+

When you close the upload window, the scans are displayed for your review on the Get Scans window. The scans are not added to the Physical Inventory window until you select a save option at the bottom of this window.

+

 

+

Next Step: Review uploaded scans

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_reviewscansonpdt.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_reviewscansonpdt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7904cdf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_reviewscansonpdt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,100 @@ + + + + + + +Review, Edit, or Delete Scans on the Physical Inventory Scanner + + + + + + + + + + + +

Review, Edit, or Delete Scans on the Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Scan Inventory Items | Physical Inventory Scanner Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can review and make corrections to the scans on the scanner unit if necessary.

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 Scanner and ControlsClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus Scanner and ControlsClick to display a popup topic

+

To view, edit and/or delete a scan on the scanner:

+
    +
  1. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Utilities.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Browse Records.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Use the arrow keys to scroll though and select from the displayed scans.

    +
    5. +
+

A typical scan will look like this:  4680923459823,6

+

The numbers before the comma is the bar code number and the number after the comma is the entered quantity.

+
    +
  1. +

    To edit a scan:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Hold down the FN/Alpha key on the bottom left of the keypad while pressing 8 to edit the selected scan.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit the bar code number or the count; use the arrow keys on the scanner to move between characters.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When you have finished editing, press Enter on the scanner to save.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Repeat for other scans or press Esc until at the main menu.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    To delete a scan:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Hold down the FN/Alpha key on the bottom left of the keypad while pressing 9 to delete the selected scan.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Press 7. Yes to delete or 9. No to cancel.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Press 1. Yes to confirm or 3. No to cancel.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat for other scans or press Esc until at the main menu.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Count Items with multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_scanitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_scanitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..479fa30 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_scanitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Scan Inventory Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Scan Inventory Items

+

Physical Inventory Scanner: Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are two scanning options when using a physical inventory scanner:

+
    +
  • +

    Scan each and every unit of an item; the unit enters a count of one for each scan

    +
    • +
  • +

    Scan one unit of an item, and then you enter the counted number of units

    +
    • +
+

In either mode, you can also manually key in an item number or UPC after selecting a scan option (if bar codes arent used or are unreadable).

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are essentially the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

To scan each and every unit of an item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Collect Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scan Barcode.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Hold the scanner at a slight angle so that you see the red reflection from the infrared light on the bar code.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Press the yellow/orange button to scan the item bar code (or manually enter the item number or UPC and then press either Enter button).

    +
    7. +
+

A beep confirms a successful scan and a quantity of one is assigned to the scan. The unit is immediately ready for the next scan.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat until all units have been scanned, for all items being counted.

    +
    2. +
+

To scan one unit and enter item count:

+
    +
  1. +

    Turn the scanner on.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Press Esc repeatedly until at main menu, if not already there.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Collect Data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scan & Enter Qty.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Scan the bar code for one unit of the item you are counting. A beep confirms a successful scan.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Use the keypad to enter the total number of units counted for the scanned item.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Press Enter.

    +
    8. +
  8. +

    Repeat for all items.

    +
    9. +
+

 

+

Next Step: Upload the scanned data to Point of Sale

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View, edit or delete a scan on the scanner

+

Count Items with multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_unrecognizedscans.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_unrecognizedscans.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4275f90 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_pdt_unrecognizedscans.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Scanner: Unrecognized Scans + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Scanner: Unrecognized Scans

+

Use a Scanner: Overview | Save Scans

+
+

Basic

+
+

An unrecognized scan means that either there was an error in the scan (usually a result of a torn or marred tag) or that the bar code (item identifier) you scanned or entered does not exist in your Point of Sale inventory. For example, if you are scanning UPC bar codes, those UPC codes must be entered in the item records in inventory so that Point of Sale recognizes them when they are retrieved from the physical inventory scanner.

+

You can print a list of unrecognized scans for follow-up. After correcting the condition, you can re-scan in another session or enter those items manually on the Physical Inventory window.

+

To view and print the unrecognized scans:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Unrecognized Scans tab on the Get Scans window.

    +
    2. +
+

The unrecognized scans are displayed in one color, while the good scans before and after each unrecognized scan is displayed in a contrasting color. This helps you identify the relative position of the bad scans in your store so you can locate and make corrections to the items.

+

Review scans

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print Unrecognized Scans to print the list.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Next Step: Save good scans to the Physical Inventory window

+

 

+

Note: Two models of physical inventory scanner are supported. While the procedures for using them are the same, you may see slight differences in menu wording and button colors, names, or locations.
+Illustration of the CipherLabs 8000 ScannerClick to display a popup topic
+Illustration of the Metrologic SP5500 Optimus ScannerClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use bar codes in Point of Sale

+

Record UPC codes in inventory

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_picountwindow.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_picountwindow.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f16c14f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_picountwindow.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Counts on the Physical Inventory Count Window + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Counts on the Physical Inventory Count Window

+

Basic Steps of a Physical | Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

To enter counts directly on the Physical Inventory Count window:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use filtering and sorting procedures to locate and group items in the Physical Inventory  window item list.

    +
    2. +
+

If counting the items in a specific department or entering from a printed Store Count worksheet, we suggest filtering your list to display only the items in that department and/or the items on the worksheet. This will help minimize data entry time.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the counted quantity in the Counted column.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter other counts from the Add Counts by Hand window or the physical inventory scanner, if applicable.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Proceed to reviewing your counts and then updating your inventory.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Enter zero for uncounted items

+

Enter counts of Items with multiple units of measure

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_reports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8cc9edc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Reports

+

Basic Steps of a Physical Inventory | Physical Inventory Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Three physical inventory reports can be viewed or printed.

+
    +
  • +

    PI Differences Report Includes only those items whose counted quantity was different than the expected quantity (on-hand quantity from inventory before physical). This report includes a list of items and differences in quantity, price, and cost.

    +
    • +
  • +

    PI Detail Report Similar to the differences report, but includes all counted items (including those with a zero entry).

    +
    • +
  • +

    PI Store Count Worksheet This report is intended as a working document on which you record your item counts while doing a physical inventory. More information.

    +
    • +
+

The PI differences and detail report are also available for the last updated physical inventory as well as the physical in progress.

+

To access the PI reports:

+
    +
  • +

    With the Physical Inventory window displayed, select a report from the I Want To menu or the Print menu.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    These reports are available only from the Physical Inventory window. They cannot be accessed from the Report Center or main Report menu.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Other than customizing the store count worksheet, these reports cannot be filtered, memorized, or added to the Report Dashboard.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_reviewlastPI.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_reviewlastPI.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..617a716 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pi_reviewlastPI.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Review or Reverse the Last Physical Inventory + + + + + + + + + + + +

Review or Reverse the Last Physical Inventory

+

Physical Inventory Overview | Physical Inventory Reports

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: Only the last updated physical inventory is saved and can be reversed. Each time you update inventory with count changes, that update replaces the previous saved physical.

+

 

+

Point of Sale allows you to go back and review the last updated physical inventory. You can print reports and even reverse the effect the physical had on your inventory.

+

Access the options for a previous physical from the I Want To menu:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Show Previous Physical to display the information from the last physical in the Physical Inventory window.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Show Current Physical to return to the new physical.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Run a Report and then select one of the available PI reports with (previous) in it s name.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Reverse Previous Physical to "undo" the changes the physical had on your inventory quantities. This option reverses the quantity memos that were created when the physical was originally updated. If the previous physical is reversed, the options to access it are removed from the I Want To menu.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pioverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pioverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c509c6d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pioverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + +Physical Inventory Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Physical Inventory Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Basic Steps | Using a Physical Inventory Scanner

+
+

Basic

+
+

A physical inventory is the process of verifying or correcting the on-hand item quantities in your Point of Sale inventory by conducting a physical count.

+

It is recommended that a physical inventory be done after initially entering your inventory when first starting to use Point of Sale and periodically thereafter.

+

Conducting a physical inventory involves going through the store and recording the actual item quantities on hand. Counts can be recorded on a printed Store Count worksheet or scanned into the optional physical inventory scanner, and then transferred to Point of Sale.

+

The entire store does not have to be counted at the same time. You may find it easier to conduct your physical inventory by department, aisle, or some other discreet physical sections, entering counts and saving for one section of your store at a time. A physical inventory can be saved as you go and then inventory updated when you are done. Point of Sale provides several ways for you to review changes before updating inventory and alerts you if a new transaction has affected an item between when a count was entered and inventory updated.

+

You can review or reverse the last updated physical inventory.

+

(Pro) A physical inventory is for one store only. When a remote store updates a physical inventory, quantity adjustment memos are automatically created and sent to Headquarters during the next Store Exchange. Headquarters can create and update a physical inventory for itself or for any store.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for Physical Inventory

+

Update QuickBooks financial software after a physical inventory

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm503.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm503.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..279a427 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm503.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Accessing Price Manager + + + + + + + + + + +

Accessing Price Manager

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Price Manager.

    +
    2. +
+

The Price Manager window, with Discount Pricing and Change Item Prices panels is opened. What's the difference between the panels?Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    On the Discount Pricing panel, click:

    +
    2. +
+

Basic

+
    +
  • +

    Set Up Manual Discount to define a new item discount that can be manually applied at time of sale

    +
    • +
  • +

    or  double-click an entry in the existing discount list to edit it

    +
    • +
+

Pro

+
    +
  • +

    Set Up <discount type> to define a new automatic, manual, or coupon discount

    +
    • +
  • +

    View All Discounts to open your list of saved discounts

    +
    • +
+

OR

+

 

+

On the Change Item Prices panel, select:

+
    +
  • +

    Make Price Changes to enter new prices for selected merchandise

    +
    • +
  • +

    View All to open your list of saved price changes

    +
    • +
  • +

    or double-click an entry in the Recent Price Change list to view it

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm504.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm504.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e34342 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm504.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + +Change Item Prices: Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Item Prices: Overview

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Price Manager Overview

+ +

 

+

Using Price Manager, you can calculate new prices for all or selected items in a variety of ways, from either the current price or the average unit cost.

+

A "price change" can be calculated and temporarily saved, applied to inventory when appropriate, and the previous prices restored later if necessary. From Price Manager, you can print markdown tags with both old and new prices, or inventory tags with just the new prices.

+

(Pro) Only Headquarters can change item prices. The price change records are sent to remote stores, where they can be viewed and used to print markdown price tags for the merchandise in their store.

+

When you access Price Manager, a list of your recent price changes is displayed:

+
    +
  • +

    To open a recent price change record, double-click its name in the list, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select View All to go to your full price change list, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Make Price Changes to start a new price change record.

    +
    • +
+

About the Change Item Prices List

+

This list includes all price changes you have made. There are three possible status conditions for price changes:

+

Pending: New prices have been calculated but not applied to inventory. You can still review, edit, or clear the new prices.

+

Applied: New prices have been applied to inventory and are in effect for sales.

+

Restored: Your previous prices have been restored.

+

To view or work with a price change record, select it in the list and then select View or Edit Price Change. Your options for the displayed record are outlined in the yellow help area on the record. See Working with Lists for general information on navigating and customizing the list.

+

 

+

What's important about making price changes?

+
    +
  • +

    A "price change" refers to one Price Manager operation. It can include any number of your items. Each price change is stored as a single record in your Change Item Prices list.

    +
    • +
  • +

     Changing item prices at one price level has no affect on the prices at your other price levels.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A price change is applied to only one of your price levels. You can calculate new prices from one price level but then apply them to a different price level if desired. This feature allows you to quickly calculate prices for one level relative to another or to copy prices from one price level to another.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can calculate item prices in different ways for different groups of items in a single price change. For example, you could reduce all items in your Shoe department by 10%, in your Clothing Departments by 20%, and in your Accessories department by 30% and apply all to inventory at one time.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You always have an opportunity to review price changes before applying them to inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A price change can be temporarily saved without the new prices being applied to inventory. This allows you to prepare a price change ahead of time and then apply it when ready.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A price change can be copied. This is a quick way to make subsequent price changes on the same group of items. Once copied, you can edit the new price change as necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you use multiple units of measure for an item, the Unit of Measure field is added to the Price Manager item list. This field reflects your default sell-by unit of measure, and price changes apply to this unit only. If no default sell-by unit is defined, the base unit of measure is displayed and affected.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm506.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm506.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93c9a44 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm506.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Change: Select Items by Filtering + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Select Items by Filtering

+

Change Item Prices: Overview | Filtering Lists

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

Filtering lets you select items by criteria that you choose. All of the items matching your criteria are added to the price change item list.

+

On this page, you can choose to:

+
    +
  • +

    Create a new item filter

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use a filter you have previously defined and saved. Select View after selecting the filter to review and/or revise it.

    +
    • +
+

Tip: Memorized filters save timeClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Use the Filtering Lists link above or the Help button on the filter window for general filtering instructions.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can review, add, or remove items from the Price Change item list later, before any new prices are written to inventory.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm507.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm507.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2286ce --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm507.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Price Change: Specify Price Level and Name + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Specify Price Level and Name

+

Change Item Prices: Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

 

+

Price Level

+

From the drop-down list, select the price level for which you wish to make price changes.

+

If starting a new price change, you will be asked from what price level you wish to calculate the new prices from on a later wizard page. This can be the same or a different price level.

+

Example: You wish to calculate new prices for your Employee price level, but want to calculate the new employee prices as a discount from your regular prices. Select the Employee price level on this page and  when setting up the formula to calculate new prices later, select your Regular Price to calculate prices from.

+

 

+

Price Change Name

+

Enter a name to identify this price change. This name must be unique (cannot be the same as another price change).

+

 

+

Notes

+

Optionally, add notes to provide additional information about this price change.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm508.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm508.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba5f6b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm508.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Price Change: Select Items + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Select Items

+

Change Item Prices: Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

Price changes are calculated for just the items you select. Use this page to specify how you want to select items for the price change. You will have the opportunity to review, add, or edit items and new prices in the Price Change item list later, before any new prices are applied to inventory.

+

Your choices are to add items by:

+
    +
  • +

    Vendor - On the following page, specify one or more vendors; all items from the specified vendor(s) will be added to the price change list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Department - On the following page, specify one or more departments; all items from the specified department(s) will be added to the price change list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Item Name* - On the following page, specify one or more item names; all items with the same name will be added to the price change list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    All items - Adds all of your items to the price change list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Filtering Items - Allows you to add items by entering filter criteria. All items matching your criteria will be added to the price change list.

    +
    • +
+

* Item Name is the default field label for the short item description printed on receipts. This is a customizable label so it may be different on your system, such as Description 1 or Receipt Description.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can calculate new prices in different ways for different groups of items in a single price change. Select the first group of items and complete the price change for that group. Then, with the price change item list displayed, use the Select Items option to display another group of items, then Calculate to compute new prices for that group, and so on. Each time you calculate new prices, you are only affecting the currently selected (and displayed) items. Before applying the changes to inventory, select Items with New Price from the View menu. This displays and allows you to review all the new prices before applying them to inventory.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm509.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm509.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..933f691 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm509.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + + +Printing Price Tags from Price Manager + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Printing Price Tags from Price Manager

+

Price Manager Overview | Tag Printing Overview

+

 

+

When using Price Manger to change item prices or set up an automatic discount, you can print markdown, discount, or regular inventory price tags. Markdown and discount tags are a good way to communicate savings to your customers.

+
    +
  • +

    Markdown Tags: Includes both old (lined out) and new price. Available for price changes only.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discount Tags: (Pro) Includes the regular item price and the discount terms and price. Shown is a sample tag for a "X for $Y" discount type. Available for discount prices only. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Inventory Tags: Includes the current item price only. This is the same as printing tags from your item list. Note that on a price change, this value will be different depending on the status of the price change. If  Pending, the old price is printed since the new price has not yet been applied. If Applied, the tag will print with the new price. And if Restored, it will again print the old price. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
+

To print tags in Price Manager:

+
    +
  1. +

    Calculate a price change or set up an automatic discount and display the record.

    +
    2. +
+

If a price change is still pending, it is recommended that you select Items with New Price from the View drop-down list to ensure you are viewing all the items for which a new price has been entered.

+
    +
  1. +

    If printing tags for only some of the included items, select them. How do I select just some items?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Print menu, select the tag type you wish to print.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Change options in the Print dialog as necessary:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Whether printing tags for all items or selected items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The quantity of tags to print (the on-hand quantity or a specified number).

    +
    • +
  • +

    The tag template to be used.  How do I select a template?

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

For additional information, read the basic tag printing instructions.

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_additems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_additems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c445cdd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_additems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Price Change: Add Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Add Items

+

Change Item Prices: Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

 

+

Use this page to add items to the price change item list by selecting vendors, departments, or item names*, depending on your selection on the previous page.

+

All items corresponding to your selections will be added to the price change list. The number of items to be added for each available vendor, department, or item name is shown in the table displayed.

+
    +
  • +

    To select a single vendor, department, or item name, simply click it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To select multiple vendors, departments, or item names, hold down the <Ctrl> key on your keyboard while clicking each.

    +
    • +
+

* Item Name is the default field label for the item description printed on receipts. This is a customizable label and may be different on your system.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_calculateprices.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_calculateprices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..96ea49c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_calculateprices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + +Price Change: Build Pricing Formula + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Build a Pricing Formula

+

Price Change Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

 

+

Use this wizard page to build a formula for calculating your new item prices.

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify whether you want to calculate the new item prices from a current price or from the item cost (average unit cost).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If calculating from price, specify which of your price levels should be used as the starting point for the calculation. This can be the same price level to which the price changes will be applied or any of your other price levels.

    +
    3. +
+

Example: You wish to calculate new prices for your Employee price level, but want to calculate the new employee prices as a discount from your regular prices. Select Regular Price on this page. In the next steps you will specify how the new employee prices will be calculated from the regular prices.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to complete your pricing formula. Refer to the table below for an explanation of your choices.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

From Price:

+		 +

Adding: Enter a percent or amount to be added to the existing price.

+
+

 

+		 +

Subtracting: Enter a percent or amount to be subtracted from the existing price.

+
+

 

+		 +

Multiplying: Enter a number by which the current price is multiplied. (Decimal entries allowed.)

+
+

 

+		 +

Dividing: Enter a number by which the current price is divided. (Decimal entries allowed.)

+
+

 

+		 +

As Is: Copies prices unchanged to another price level or to round your prices with no other change.

+

 

+
+

From Cost:

+		 +

Adding: Enter a percent or amount to be added to the average unit cost to arrive at a new price.

+
+

 

+		 +

Multiplying: Enter a number to be multiplied times the average unit cost to arrive at a new price (decimals allowed).

+
+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    If you want to round the new prices, select the Show Me Price Rounding options... check box.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Next.

    +
    3. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_copyprices.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_copyprices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e562121 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_copyprices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + +Copying Prices to another Price Level + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copying Prices to another Price Level

+

Basic Steps of a Price Change | Using Price Levels

+

 

+

Price Manager makes it easy to copy prices from one price level to another.

+

Example: You might want to copy your regular prices to your Employee price level.

+

To copy prices from one price level to another:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new price changeClick to display a popup topic normally.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the first page of the Price Change wizard, select the price level to which you are copying prices. In our example, you would select the Employee price level.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Specify the items for which you are copying prices on the appropriate wizard pages.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When building your price change formula:

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select to calculate new prices from Price.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select the price level from which you wish to copy the prices. In our example, the Regular Price.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select As Is (copy price level) for how the prices will be calculated.

    +
    • +
+

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Next and then Finish to copy the prices from one price level to the other and display the list of new item prices.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review the new prices and print price tags if needed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory.

    +
    4. +
+

Point of Sale displays a summary of the changes, including the number of items for which prices will be updated.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory again to confirm.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Restoring your previous prices

+

Price Change overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_coupon_setup.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_coupon_setup.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0c43da --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_coupon_setup.htm @@ -0,0 +1,274 @@ + + + + + + +Discount Pricing: Set Up or Edit a Coupon + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing: Set Up or Edit a Coupon

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Using Store Coupons: Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

To add or edit a store coupon:

+

Tip: Create new coupon by copying an existing one Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Access Price Manager and then:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    To add a coupon:  Select Set Up Coupon from the overview page (or New Discount from your Discount Pricing list).

    +
    • +
  • +

    To edit a coupon:  Display your Discount Pricing list, select the coupon and then select Edit from the window toolbar.

    +
    • +
+

The Discount wizard is opened. Use the Next and Previous buttons to navigate through the wizard pages.

+
    +
  1. +

    Coupon Rules page: Enter or edit the following. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Discount: Specify either % Off (percentage) or $ Off (dollars) off and enter the percentage or dollar discount to be applied.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Barcode: Accept the program-generated barcode or scan/enter one of your own in this field.

    +
    • +
+

Tip: Use coupon barcodes in other applications Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Tip: Honor manufacturer or competitor coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  • +

    Expiration Date: Optionally, select the check box and enter the last date on which the coupon will be accepted. After this date, cashier will receive a "coupon expired" message if attempting to use it.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Price Level page: Specify the price level or price levels to which the coupon will apply. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

The coupon will not apply to sales made at price levels other than what is selected here.

+

Your Regular Price is pre-selected by default. Make changes by selecting or clearing the check box for each of your price levels. At least one price level must be selected.

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Items page: Tell Point of Sale what items qualify for the coupon discount.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

You can choose all items, items from a specific department or vendor, items with a particular name, or select Custom to enter filter criteria to select other groups of items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review Items page:  If you selected Custom on the previous page or if you are editing a previous coupon, a list of the included items is displayed for your review.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

If this is a new coupon, click Apply Filter to enter filtering criteria to populate the item list. Click Help on the Filtered View window for additional instructions.

+

By default, all items listed are included in the discount. If necessary, clear item checkboxes to remove items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Name and Notes page: A unique name is required for each active coupon. Use a descriptive name so you can easily find it later in your Discount Pricing list. Notes are printed on the coupon and can be used to summarize what items are eligible, restrictions that apply, a thank you, or whatever other information you may wish to include.

    +
    2. +
+

View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish. The wizard is closed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    (Optional) In company preferences, set options for printing the coupon on sales receipts.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you attempt to add an item that is included in another active discount, you will be blocked or warned. Read the rules about adding the same item to more than one discount.

    +
    • +
  • +

    "All Items" means all items in inventory when the coupon is defined. New items you add to inventory after this are not automatically added to the list of eligible items for the coupon. If you want newly added inventory items to be eligible, return to the wizard and edit the item page to choose "All Items" again.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Multi-Store) The coupon record is sent to remote stores on your next Store Exchange. The remote stores can immediately begin printing and redeeming the coupons.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Applying discounts to sales

+ + + + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_coupons_oview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_coupons_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f6764cd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_coupons_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + +Using Store Coupons + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Store Coupons

+

Set Up a Coupon | Redeem a Coupon | Discount Pricing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Printed CouponStore coupons allow you to reward customers for their business and encourage repeat visits. Your coupons can be printed with the sales receipt given to customers or you can copy the coupon bar code and paste to other applications or an e-mail using the Windows clipboard.

+

Highlights of the Point of Sale coupon feature include:

+
    +
  • +

    Coupons are set up and managed in the Discount Pricing section of Price Manager.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can offer a percentage off or dollars off, include an expiration date, and restrict the coupon to specified items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Coupons can be automatically printed, with bar code, on sales receipts for all customers or only for customers whose purchase exceeds a defined amount.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To apply the coupon to a sale, simply scan the coupon bar code AFTER all the items have been added to the sales receipt. The discount is applied to applicable items.

    +
    • +
+

To get started using coupons, select Price Manager from the Inventory menu.

+

Tip: Use coupon barcodes in other applications Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Tip: Honor manufacturer or competitor coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Coupons can only be set up at Headquarters but are sent to remote stores with the next Store Exchange where they can be printed and redeemed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Coupons are never printed on return receipts, negative value receipts, account payment receipts without new item purchase, reversing receipts, deposit receipts, payout receipts, or on the second copy of a receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When sending to QuickBooks financial software, coupon discounts are handled in the same way as other discounts, except the items created in QuickBooks to track the discounts will have the Receipt Item Discount Level written to the QuickBooks item description field.  Learn more

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Coupon Preferences

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_delete_records.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_delete_records.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0379ef2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_delete_records.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Deleting Price Manager Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Deleting Price Manager Records

+

Price Manager Overview

+

 

+

Price Changes Only "pending" price change records can be deleted. Once a price change has been applied to inventory it becomes a permanent record of the change. Even after restoring a price change, the record still remains permanently in your price change list.

+

Keep in mind that once you delete a record, it cannot be recovered, copied, or printed. We suggest you review and print new price tags if necessary and consider making a backup of your data before proceeding.

+

Price discounts Discount records (such as manual item discounts) can be deleted at anytime. This is because discount records do not actually change your inventory prices. Rather, they apply the discount to qualifying sales at the time of sale.

+

To do this task:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your Change Item Prices or Discount Pricing list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the records you wish to delete.  How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Delete Price Changes or Delete Discounts.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Confirm the deletion when prompted.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Note : You can still use the discount reports to evaluate the effectiveness of a discount after deleting it since the discount information is recorded on your sales receipts.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discntpricing_list.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discntpricing_list.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..14b9828 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discntpricing_list.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + +Discount Pricing List + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing List

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Discount Pricing Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

The Discount Pricing list displays all of your non-deleted automatic, manual, and coupon discount price records.

+

What's important about this list?

+

You can customize the columns or filter the list to provide a snapshot of your discounting activities. The example shown is filtered to show only active discounts with sales and profit columns added to help evaluate the effectiveness of the discount.

+

View example list Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

What can I do from this list?

+
    +
  • +

    Change View Select Collapse/Expand to switch views between the full list and a tri-pane view with the information panel on the right (shows details of the selected discount on the right).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Add a Discount Select New Discount to set up a new discount price or select Copy to quickly start a new discount by copying an existing one. Just edit the copy in the discount wizard for changes and save with a new name.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit a Discount Highlight an existing discount and then select Edit Discount to open the discount wizard and make changes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Activate/Deactivate a Discount Automatic and coupon discounts can be activated/deactivated from the list. Select a discount, and then from the I Want To menu, select Activate/Deactivate Discount. An inactive discount is not applied to sales.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Delete a Discount Select a discount or discounts (How do I select multiple discounts in the list?Click to display a popup topic) in the list and choose Delete Discount(s) from the I Want To Menu. You can still use the discount reports to evaluate the effectiveness of a discount after deleting it since the discount information is recorded on sales receipts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Print Options Choices from the Print menu include printing discount or regular price tags, a Discount Price List (by item, for currently selected discount) or a List of Discounts (all discounts). Printing are limited for some discount types.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Review Conflicts Look for the conflict warning icon  Warning Icon  at the left of the list. Pause your mouse pointer over the icon for further information on what the conflict might be. Typically, this icon indicates that the same item is included in multiple discounts.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discount_pricing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discount_pricing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ade9e52 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discount_pricing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,287 @@ + + + + + + +Discount Pricing: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing: Overview

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Price Manager Overview | Discount Reports

+ +

 

+

(Basic) Price Managers discount pricing section allows you to define manual item discount names, which are then available to select from when giving a manual discount on sales. Discount reports can be filtered by the discount names.

+

(Pro) Price Managers discount pricing options lets you define discount pricing for your items in any of three discount types: Manual, Automatic, Coupons.  A virtually unlimited number of discounts can be defined and saved in Point of Sale.

+

(Pro) Only Headquarters can add, edit, schedule, or inactivate a discount. The discount records are sent to remote stores, where they can be viewed and used to print discount price tags for the merchandise in their store.

+

After accessing Price Manager, do one of the following to work with discount prices:

+
    +
  • +

    (Basic) Click  Set Up Manual Discount

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Click the button corresponding to the discount type you wish to set up

    +
    • +
+

OR

+
    +
  • +

    Select View all Discounts to go to your full list of saved discounts and then double-click an existing  discount name to edit it

    +
    • +
+

The combination of customer and items may result in more than one discount applying to a sale. When this happens, Point of Sale will compare the discounts and apply them according to these rules.

+

 

+

Manual Discounts

+

As the name suggests, these discounts are manually applied to specific items at the time a sale is made. Examples include:

+
    +
  • +

    Discount for a damaged, defective, demo, or discontinued item

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discount to meet or beat a competitor's price

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discount given for any other reason you might have

    +
    • +
+

You name your manual discount reasons in Price Manager, but manually apply and enter a discount amount or percentage when the sale is rung up. Several default manual discount names are provided; you can add to or change them to meet your needs.

+

By specifying the discount reason on the receipt (a drop-down list lets the cashier choose from your predefined choices) you can track the discounts with Point of Sale reports.

+

Optional preference: Require manual discount reason on receipts

+

Applying a manual discount

+

 

+

Automatic Discounts (Pro)

+

Define an automatic discount and Point of Sale will automatically apply it to qualifying sales during the period the discount is active. You can specify start and stop dates and times or manually activate/deactivate the discount as needed.

+

Notes Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Four automatic discount types are supported:  (T-shirts used as an example):

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

% Off

+		 +

Offer a percentage off on any purchase of T-shirts. There is no purchase quantity requirement.

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+
+

$ Off

+		 +

Offer a percentage off on any purchase of T-shirts. There is no purchase quantity requirement.

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+
+

Buy X for $Y

+		 +

Buy a specified quantity (X) of T-shirts for a specified amount (Y).

+

Option:  Apply the discount to additional quantities (other than multiples of the specified quantity, which automatically qualify for the discount price).

+

Example Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+
+

Buy X and get Y% Off

+		 +

Buy a specified quantity (X) of the T-shirts and get a percentage (Y) off.

+

Option:  Apply the discount to additional quantities (other than multiples of the specified quantity, which automatically qualify for the discount price).

+

Example

+
+
    +
  • +

    An item can be included in more than one automatic discount, subject to some restrictions. Read the discount tips and rules for more information.

    +
    • +
+

Setting up an automatic discount

+

Tips and Rules

+

 

+

Coupons (Pro)

+

Create store coupons with bar codes that can then be scanned or entered at point of sale to give item discounts.

+

Coupons can be printed on your customer's sales receipts (optionally based on their purchase level ), include expiration dates, and include either a percentage or dollars-odd discount.

+

You can also copy the coupon barcode from Point of Sale to your Windows clipboard and then use it to create and distribute your own coupons via e-mail or another application.

+

Learn more about using store coupons

+

Setting up a coupon

+

Optional preference: Print Coupon with Sales Receipts

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discount_reports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discount_reports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d3508d8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discount_reports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,142 @@ + + + + + + +Tracking Discounts with Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tracking Discounts with Reports

+

Discount Pricing Overview | Discounts on Sales | Running a Report

+

 

+

Point of Sale tracks discounts given on sales and offers several reporting options for you to evaluate how effective your discounts are.

+
    +
  • +

    Discount Summary Report This report includes all item discounts (manual, automatic, and coupon), global discounts, customer discounts, and customer rewards given in a specified period.  View sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discount Summary Graph Presents the discount information in a stacked bar graph format, showing sales amount and discount amount by day, week, cashier, store, etc.  View sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cash Drawer Reports Cash drawer reports contain a breakdown of discounts, reported by discount names. View sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
+

Pro user can also view statistics for a discount from the discount record until the record is deleted:

+
    +
  • +

    Discount Pricing list statistics Customize the columns or customize the information panel (example shown) in the collapsed view of the discount pricing list to show sales and profit information for the entire discount: View sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discount item list statistics Customize the columns in the item list on an individual discount record (select Edit Discount and navigate to the item list page in the wizard) to view sales and profit information by item. View sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Price changes, including the use of price level markdowns, are not considered discounts and do not show up in these reports.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer Discounts

+

Customer Rewards

+

Discount Priority and Conflicts

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_define.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_define.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5338856 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_define.htm @@ -0,0 +1,231 @@ + + + + + + +Discount Pricing: Set Up or Edit an Automatic Discount + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing: Set Up or Edit an Automatic Discount

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Discount Pricing Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to define and save an automatic pricing discount. A virtually unlimited number of discounts can be defined and saved.

+

If you wish to edit an existing discount, start with Step 6 below or click here.

+

Tip: If the discount you want to create is similar to an existing one, the quickest way to start is to copy the existing one. Go to your discount list and select the existing discount, then select Copy. Edit as necessary and save the new discount.

+

To set up a new discount:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access Price Manager and then select Set Up a New Discount from the overview page. The New Discount wizard is opened.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From your Discount Pricing list, select New Discount and then on the first page of the New Discount wizard, select Automatic Discount.

+

Use the Next and Previous buttons to navigate through the wizard pages.

+
    +
  1. +

    Discount Rules page: Enter or edit the following. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Discount type: Select  % Off, $ Off, Buy X for $Y, or Buy X and Get Y% Off and enter the requested information to define the discount:

    +
    • +
  • +
      +
    • +

      Read a description and examples of each discount type here.

      +
      • +
    • +

      On the quantity discount options, select or clear the check box to discount additional quantities.

      +
      • +
    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Start/end dates: Optionally, select the check box and enter the starting and ending date/time for the discount to be applied. Prices will revert to the pre-discount level when the end date/time is reached.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Price Level page: Specify the price level or price levels to which the discount applies. View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

The discount will not apply to sales made at price levels other than what is selected here.

+

Your Regular Price is pre-selected by default. Make changes by selecting or clearing the check box for each of your price levels. At least one price level must be selected.

+
    +
  1. +

    Choose Items page: Tell Point of Sale which items qualify for the discount.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

You can choose all items*, items from a specific department or vendor, items with a particular name, or select Custom to enter filter criteria to select other groups of items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Review Items page:  If you selected Custom on the previous page or if you are editing a saved discount, a list of the included items is displayed for your review.  View Sample Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

If this is a new discount, click Apply Filter to enter criteria for selecting items. Click Help on the Filtered View window for additional instructions.

+

By default, all items listed are included in the discount. If necessary, clear item checkboxes to remove items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Name and Notes page: A unique name is required for each discount. Use a descriptive name so you can easily find it later in your Discount Pricing list. Notes can help you recall details of the promotion.

    +
    2. +
+ +
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish. The wizard is closed and your Discount Pricing list is displayed.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Discount Price Tags: Highlight the discount in the list and select Print > Price Discount Tags to print discount tags if desired.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Editing the discount: You can revise the discount type, items, schedule, or make the discount inactive at anytime  Learn more about editing a discount.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    * "All Items" means all items in inventory at the time the discount is defined. New items you add to inventory after this are not automatically added to the list of eligible items for the discount. To make newly added items eligible, edit the discount record and choose "All Items" again.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you attempt to add an item that is included in another active discount, you will be blocked or warned. Read the rules about adding the same item to more than one discount.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Multi-Store) The discount record is sent to remote stores on your next Store Exchange. The remote stores can open and view the record and print discount price tags for the merchandise in their store.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Applying discounts to sales

+

Tips and rules for discounts

+ + + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_edit.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_edit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e669278 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_edit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,256 @@ + + + + + + +Discount Pricing: Editing a Discount + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Discount Pricing: Editing a Discount

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Discount Pricing Overview

+ +

 

+

(Free & Basic) Your ability to edit a discount is limited to the manual discount name. Read  What's important about discount names?Click to display a popup topic

+

 All other editing capabilities discussed in this topic apply to Pro users.

+

You can edit a discount at anytime. Your changes go into effect immediately after saving your changes (subject to any discount schedule).

+

To edit a discount:

+
    +
  1. +

    AccessClick to display a popup topic your Discount Pricing list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Locate and double-click the discount record you wish to edit or, from the toolbar, click Edit Discount.

    +
    3. +
+

The Edit Discount wizard is opened, with the same options as when you originally added the discount.

+
    +
  1. +

    Navigate through the wizard, making changes as necessary (some changes require that the discount be active before editing). Select a link for more information:

    +
    2. +
+

Change automatic discount type and options Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

Change the discount schedule Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

Add or remove discount items Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

Deleting a discount Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +

You can also edit the discount name and notes, or print tags (tags only available for automatic discounts).

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The discount record is date and time stamped for each edit. If you require program logins, the Last Modified By field on the discount record is automatically populated with the logged-in user's name (if not requiring logins, but have employees defined, you can select your name from the drop-down list).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Some edits require that a discount be active. How do I make a discount active or inactive Click to expand/collapse topic list

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_inactivate.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_inactivate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e752f35 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_inactivate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +pm_discountprice_inactivate + + + + + + + + + +

Editing a Quantity Discount

+

Price Manager Overview | Quantity Discount Overview

+

 

+

Your quantity discounts can be edited to add or remove items, change eligible quantities, change prices, or to inactivate or delete the discount entirely.

+

If a discount is inactivated, Point of Sale will no apply the discount pricing when the items are sold. This allows you to offer a discount seasonally, or only on weekends, etc. without having to delete and redefine it each time. If you no longer will use a discount, you can delete it.

+

To edit a discount:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Inventory menu, select Price Manager Discount Pricing.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the discount you want to edit from the list, and then select Edit Discount.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Use normal editing procedures to add or remove items, change the required quantity, or discount price.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To make the discount inactive, select the Inactive check box. To reactivate the discount later, return here and clear this check box.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

To delete a discount:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the discount from the Discount Pricing list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Applying discounts to sales

+

Defining a discount price

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_tips.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aae905e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_discountprice_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,130 @@ + + + + + + +Automatic Discount Tips and Rules + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatic Discount Tips and Rules

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list | Discount Pricing Overview | Discount Reports

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

General Discount Tips

+
    +
  • +

    Discounts set up in Price manager do not change your inventory item prices. They are applied only at the time of sale or on a customer order when active.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To view discount price information, select Edit Discount, and then navigate to the items page of the Edit Discount wizard. You can then customize the columns in the item list to include both the regular and discount prices for each of the price levels included in the discount. In the sample shown, the discount is being applied to both the Regular Price and the Sale price levels, so the discount price column for each has been added to the column display.

    +
    • +
+

Discount Price columns

+
    +
  • +

    To see the regular and discount prices of an item at all selected price levels without adding columns for each, rest your mouse pointer over the Regular Price Discount column:

    +
    • +
+

Discount Prices

+

 

+

Conflicting Items Rules

+
    +
  • +

    The same item is never allowed in two active, unscheduled discounts. Point of Sale will force you to remove the item from one of the discounts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    An item can be included in multiple scheduled discounts or in a combination of scheduled and active unscheduled discounts at the same time. However, this may result in a discount conflict and Point of Sale will alert you with messages and by adding icons to the discount record and item list. Hover your mouse over an icon for additional information.

    +
    • +
+

+
    +
  • +

    A yellow warning icon is more serious; it typically means that the item is in two currently active discounts. To resolve the conflict, remove the item from one of the discounts or change the schedules so they don't overlap or make one of the discounts inactive.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A yellow warning icon could also be alerting you that the discount price is higher than your normal inventory price. Review the discount price to ensure it is what you had intended.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A blue information icon means the same item is included in another future discount. This doesn't demand your immediate attention, but you should be aware of the condition as it could become a conflict if the future discount begins before this one ends.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    If an item is in multiple active discounts when you sell it, Point of Sale follows these rules in determining which of the discounts to apply. Only one of the discounts is ever applied.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    A scheduled discount takes priority and is applied over an unscheduled discount

    +
    • +
  • +

    Among two scheduled discounts, the one with the later start date takes priority and is applied

    +
    • +
  • +

    See complete discount priority rules, including interaction with other discount types, here

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_manualmarkdown.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_manualmarkdown.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d65eda8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_manualmarkdown.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + +Price Manager: Manually Entering New Prices + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Manager: Manually Entering New Prices

+

Basic Steps for a Price Change

+

 

+

A price change in Price Manger is always initially calculated in the Price Change wizard using a formula you specify. However, once the initial new price calculations are displayed you can review and manually edit the new prices if you prefer.

+

To manually enter new prices:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start the new price change, selecting the price level, items and calculating the new prices.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the price record displayed and before applying the changes to inventory, use any of the following methods to edit the calculated prices and/or enter new prices:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    If you want to remove all the calculated prices, select Clear New Prices.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Type a different value in the New Price, Price Change (amount),or % Price Change (percentage) columns. An entry in any field causes the others to be auto-calculated. If making entries in the price change amount or percentage columns, enter price reductions as negative numbers (-4.00 or -10%, for example).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If necessary, use the Select Items button to add another group of items to the price change and then enter new prices for them.

    +
    • +
  • +

    From the View drop-down list, select Items with New Price and review before continuing.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Print markdown price tags, if needed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory (or Save to keep your changes without applying to inventory now).

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Restoring Previous Prices

+

Rounding new prices

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_price_rounding.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_price_rounding.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e99070 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_price_rounding.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +Price Change: Rounding the New Prices + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Change: Rounding the New Prices

+

Price Change Overview

+

 

+

This information is applicable to the Price Change wizard, accessed from Price Manager.

+

 

+

On this wizard page you have the option of rounding your new prices to any ending value that you prefer.

+

Your rounding choices are:

+
    +
  • +

    Don't round

    +
    • +
  • +

    Round new prices to the nearest dollar. (Examples: $1.00, $2.00, $9.00, $75.00)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Round new prices to the nearest ten cents (Examples: $0.10, $0.20, $1.90, $25.70)

    +
    • +
  • +

    End new prices with 99 cents (Examples: $0.99, $1.99, $2.99, $59.99)

    +
    • +
  • +

    End new prices with 9 cents (Examples: $0.09, $0.19, $6.49, $99.79)

    +
    • +
  • +

    End new prices with custom values that you define. Click Define Values after selecting this option. You can enter up to four ending values for your prices. You can view how rounding works with this option by entering trial prices in the test field provided.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+ +
    +
  • +

    Select the same price level to calculate prices from and to apply new prices to.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Calculate from Price and select As Is for the price adjusting method.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter your rounding instructions on this page.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_pricechange_steps.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_pricechange_steps.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..501428e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_pricechange_steps.htm @@ -0,0 +1,166 @@ + + + + + + +Change Item Prices: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Item Prices: Basic Steps

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Price Change Overview  

+ +

 

+

If you are accessing this topic from a price change record already calculated, skip to To review or edit a price change below.

+

Tip: If the price change you want to implement is similar to a previous one, the quickest way to start is to copy the previous one. Go to your price change list, select the existing record, and then select Copy. Edit as necessary and save.

+

Following are the basic steps of creating and applying a price change.

+

To start a new price change:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access Price Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Make Price Changes from the Price Manager overview (or, if already in the Price Change module, select New Price Change from the window toolbar).

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the prompts in the Price Change wizard to:  (select Help on wizard pages for more information)

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Specify the price level to which you are making the price changes. Changes can be applied to only one price level.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select the items for which you are changing prices. You select items by department, vendor, item name, by applying a filter, or you can change prices for all of your items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Build a formula for calculating new prices. You can calculate new prices relative to the current item price or cost. If you choose price, specify from which price level the new prices are calculated. This price can be the same or different than the one to which the changes will be applied.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Optionally, enter price rounding criteria.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Calculate the new prices based on your selection. When the calculation is complete, the price change record is displayed.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Continue with To review or edit a price change, below.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

To review or edit a price change:

+

After calculation of a new price change or when returning to a previous price change record, it will be in one of the following status conditions:

+
    +
  • +

    Pending: New prices have been calculated (and optionally saved), but they have not been applied to inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Applied: New prices have been applied to inventory and are in effect. You can review the price changes, print tags, or restore your previous prices.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Restored: Your previous prices have been restored. You can print tags at the restored prices from this window. Note that this screen displays the old and new prices at the time the price change was restored. If you return to it later, the prices shown may not match your current pricing.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Review and edit the price changes when the record is displayed.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    The Current Price column displays the "old" item prices at the price level you selected to change and the New Price column displays the calculated new prices. Note that if you selected different "apply to" and "calculate from" price levels, these two columns may not be directly related. You can customize the columns to display different price levels if necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can make manual changes to the calculated prices, or select Clear New Prices and then Calculate Prices to start over.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To change prices for additional items, choose Select Items and use the Price Change wizard to select a different group of items. Then select Calculate Prices to compute new prices for that group.  

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you want to change prices for different groups of items by different criteria in the same price change, select the first group and enter or calculate prices, then repeat for the second group, and so on.  Don't apply the new prices to inventory until they have been entered for all items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Print markdown price tags, showing both old and new prices, if desired.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Items with New Price from the View drop-down to do a final review of all items with new prices.

    +
    2. +
+

Review price changes

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save (saves the record without applying the new prices) or Apply Changes to Inventory (new prices overwrite old in inventory).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    It's important to keep to mind that when you calculate new prices, you are only affecting the currently selected (and displayed, if on the price change record) items. All new prices, whether you can currently see them or not, will be applied to inventory. Before applying the changes to inventory, select Items with New Price from the View menu. This displays and allows you to review all the new prices.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Price Changes are sent to remote stores with your next Store Exchange. The remote store can open and view the price change record and print markdown tags as necessary.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_restore_prices.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_restore_prices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..15747fe --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_restore_prices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +Restoring Previous Prices + + + + + + + + + + + +

Restoring Previous Prices

+

Price Change Overview | Printing Tags

+

 

+

Use this procedure to restore item prices to the levels that existed prior to the original price change. The previous prices are restored for all included items.

+

Important: Any other price changes made to the same items in the interim are overwritten when restoring a price change.

+

To restore to your previous prices:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the Price Change record you want to restore.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Restore Prices.

    +
    3. +
+

A confirmation dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Restore Prices to confirm.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can print inventory tags from Price Manager reflecting the restored (old) prices when done. But be aware the restored price change record will always display the prices current as of the date of restoration. If you return to it at a later date and print tags, the tags will print at the current item price, not necessarily that shown on the restored record.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_temp_sale.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_temp_sale.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..86c82c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pm_temp_sale.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + +Changing Prices for a Temporary Sale + + + + + + + + + + + +

Changing Prices for a Temporary Sale

+

Price Manager Overview

+

 

+

Pro Note: Pro users may want to use Price Manager's automatic discounting option for this purpose.

+

 

+

The restore feature in Price Manager makes it easy to temporarily markdown prices for a sale and then return them to the previous level when the sale is over.

+

For example, you might mark down your regular prices by 15% for a weekend sale and then restore them before opening for business Monday morning.

+

This is the basic procedure for a temporary price reduction. Use the links in each step for detailed instructions.

+

To mark down prices for a temporary sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new price change and enter the price calculation criteria.

    +
    2. +
+

If marking down different groups of items by different amounts, select the first group of items in the Price Change wizard and enter pricing just for that group. After completing the wizard and with the price change item list displayed, use the Select Items button to specify the second group of items and then Calculate Prices to enter pricing criteria for them, and so on until all of your new prices are calculated.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the View menu, select Items with New Price.

    +
    2. +
+

This choice displays all items for which a new price has been entered, allowing you a final review before updating inventory with the prices.

+
    +
  1. +

    If desired, print markdown price tags.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Apply Changes to Inventory.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    When the sale is over, restore the prices to their previous level.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    It is recommended you not make other manual price changes to the same items while the sale is going on. When you restore prices at the end of the sale, all old prices will be restored, overwriting any manual changes you made in the interim.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pricemgroverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pricemgroverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a4c31dd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pricemgroverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ + + + + + + + +Price Manager Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Price Manager Overview

+

How Do I?

+ +

 

+

Price Manager allows you to create and manage promotional price changes and discounts. Using the employee security and reporting features of Point of Sale, you can easily control and track the effectiveness of your promotional pricing.

+

Pro users can also set up coupons  and have additional discount options as explained below and in related topics.  

+

 

+

When you first access Price Manager, a list of your recent price changes is displayed in the right panel and choices for setting up price discounts are displayed in the left panel.

+

View example screen Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Here's how the two components of Price Manager differ:

+

Change Item Prices

+

A price change is typically a permanent change to your item prices, though the changes can be reverted if necessary. In a price change, you can calculate new prices for your items in a variety of ways. The resulting prices can be reviewed, edited, and temporarily saved until you are ready to implement them, at which point you "apply" them to inventory.

+

Price change records are maintained in your Change Item Prices list. Price changes can be restored, returning the item prices to the level they were at before the change was applied.  A prior price change can also be copied (and then edited) to quickly set up a new similar price change.

+

From Price Manager, you can print markdown tags with both old and new prices to communicate the savings to your customers.

+

To work with Price Changes:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Make Price Changes to start a new price adjustment, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Double-click the name of a recent price change record in the displayed list to open it, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select View All to go to your full list of saved price changes

    +
    • +
+

Learn more about changing item prices

+

Starting a price change

+

 

+

Discount Pricing

+

(Free and Basic) You can use Price Manager's discount pricing options to set up and manage manually applied, line item discounts.

+

(Pro) You can use Price Manager's discount pricing options to set up and manage automatic and coupon discounts, in addition to manually applied discounts. Discount prices  may be temporary, scheduled discounts that are in effect for a specified period of time.  Each discount price you set up is maintained as a record in your Discount Pricing list. These records can be reviewed, printed, or copied and you can print discount price tags for your items to demonstrate potential savings to your customers.

+

To work with price discounts:

+
    +
  • +

    Select a Set Up button to start a new price discount (choices vary with level)

    +
    • +
  • +

    double-click a current discount to edit it

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select View all Discounts to go to your full list of saved discounts.

    +
    • +
+

Learn more about Discount Pricing

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Only one workstation can be in each area of Price Manager at any time.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Only Headquarters can use Price Manager to change item prices or set up discounts. However, the price change and discount records are sent to remote stores, where they can be viewed and used to print markdown and/or discount price tags for the merchandise in their store.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_access.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_access.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a07aec4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_access.htm @@ -0,0 +1,40 @@ + + + + + + + +Access the Print Designer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access the Print Designer

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

To access the Print Designer:

+
    +
  • +

    From the File menu, select Utilities > Print Designer.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_addfields.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_addfields.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e5d14f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_addfields.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + +Add Data Fields or Groups of Fields + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Data Fields or Groups of Fields

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Data fields are populated from information in your company data file. This could be store information, customer information, item information, sales information, and so forth.

+

A data field represents one piece of information from the record, such as the city for the billing address.

+

A group of fields represents a set of data fields that are added to a template as a group. For example, a "Ship To" group would have available all individual fields pertinent to the shipping address. In most cases, the pre-defined groups should meet your needs. However, should you need a more specific design, you can add or remove individual data fields from a group.

+

In most cases, you will not be able to place the same data field or group of fields in multiple locations on a template.

+

To add a data field or group of fields to a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, select the section of the template to which you wish to add the date field or group.

    +
    2. +
+

If necessary, create more room in the section by dragging its lower separator bar downwards.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the tool bar, select Add Data Field or Group of Fields from the tool bar.

    +
    2. +
+

The Add Data Field window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the individual data field or group you wish to add.

    +
    2. +
+

A short description of each field or group is displayed in the window as they are selected.

+

Notes on changing bar code fieldsClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

The selected field/group is added to the selected section of the template.

+
    +
  1. +

    Position, resize, or set other element properties as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

How do I remove a data field or group?

+

About template sections and spacing

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_coordinates.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_coordinates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cd0f4a0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_coordinates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Designer: Status Bar X/Y Coordinates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer: Status Bar X/Y Coordinates

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

The position and size coordinates displayed on the status bar on the lower-right of the screen can help you precisely position or resize elements on the template page. The coordinates are especially useful when dragging and dropping or using the keyboard to position elements.

+

When an element is selected, you can fine-tune its position by using the keyboard arrow keys in conjunction with the X/Y coordinates. Holding <Ctrl> while using the arrow keys moves the element at 10 times the speed.

+

 

+

image\printdesigner_statusbar.gif

+

 

+

X = Horizontal position on the page of the left-hand edge of the element

+

Y = Vertical position on the page of the top edge of the element

+

W = Element width

+

H = Element height

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Keep in mind that vertical position on documents is relative, not absolute. When printing, many fields not populated with data are removed and lower elements moved up to fill the blank space.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_deleteelements.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_deleteelements.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6566a43 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_deleteelements.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Remove an Element + + + + + + + + + + + +

Remove an Element

+

Print Designer overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

To delete an element from a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the element to be deleted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Remove from the tool bar.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

Press <Delete> on your keyboard.

+

To delete a data field from a group of fields

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the group of fields.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Properties from the toolbar (or double-click the group element).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Properties dialog, select or clear the checkboxes for the available group fields.

    +
    4. +
+

At least one field must be left in the group. To delete all fields, remove the entire group element.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

The vertical size of the group on the template is automatically adjusted to fit the remaining fields.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Some elements are required in specific templates and cannot be deleted. These elements are displayed in a gray color.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..93cecd0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + +printdesigner_hdi + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

Access the Print Designer

+

Select a template to modify

+

Add a data field or field group

+

Add text labels

+

Position and align elements

+

Resize elements

+

Change fonts, field labels, and other element properties

+

Add or modify a logo

+

Remove elements

+

Import/Export modified templates

+

Print with a Template I have Modified

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_hints.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_hints.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8899d16 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_hints.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + +Recommended Sequence and Tips + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Recommended Sequence and Tips

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Recommended Design Sequence and Tips

+

There are no hard and fast rules for the order in which you must modify document templates, but you may find this recommended sequence and associated tips helpful in achieving the desired outcome in the most efficient manner.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a template to modify.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click anywhere in the section in which you want to work to make it active. This step is unnecessary on tag and label templates as they have only a single section.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Remove the elements that you do not wish included on the printed document.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    This helps create space for adding other fields or moving fields around

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the Zoom In/Out controls from the toolbar to make selecting and working with individual elements easier

    +
    • +
  • +

    If additional space is needed while working in a section, drag the bottom section border downward

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Add data fields and other new elements as needed, positioning them in their approximate location by dragging-and-dropping.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Resize elements and make any necessary changes to element properties.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select Preview from the toolbar to see how your changes will look as you progress. The previewer allows you to view, save, or print your template.

    +
    • +
  • +

    We recommend saving your work if you are satisfied with the preview (select Save As if you want to give your modified template a different name, thus preserving the original template).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Make a mistake? Select Undo from the toolbar. You can undo the last several actions taken since your last save. Each save clears the Undo memory.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Use the alignment tools to precisely place elements in their final position, working from the top of a section downward.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select multiple elements by holding down <Ctrl> or <Shift> and clicking each, or by dragging the mouse pointer to encompass all elements to be selected

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use your keyboard arrow keys to move an element in small increments, or <Ctrl + arrow keys> to move at 10X the increment

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Remove any extra white space at the bottom of the section by dragging the bottom border upward.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Do a final preview, test print, and then save your template.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If you created a new template, answer Yes when asked if you want the new template to be the default for that document type. You can also change templates at anytime in your print option preferences.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Use the import-export feature to share the new template with other stores or to move the template to another company data file.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Note on bar codesClick to display a popup topic

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_importexport.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_importexport.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ce6e2b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_importexport.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + +Import and Export Document Templates + + + + + + + + + + + +

Import and Export Document Templates

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Modified document templates are automatically available to other workstations on your network that access the same Point of Sale company data.

+

If you create a new company data file and want to use your modified templates with that data (or want to share modified templates with another store) you can use the import & export feature to accomplish this. The export process places copies of all modified templates into a single file that can then be imported and used with another company data file.

+

To export modified templates:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Print Designer selection window, select Import & Export.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Export Document Templates and then Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select to Export the Selected Document or Tag or Export All Documents and Tags and select Next.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Accept the default filename and location or specify alternates.

    +
    5. +
+

Defaults: (x = Point of Sale version number)

+

File name: VxDocumentTemplates.XML

+

Folder: C:\Program Files\Intuit\Point of Sale x.0\Design\  (folder will vary if you installed to a different location)

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Close.

    +
    3. +
+

Your modified templates are exported in an XML file format that can be imported to the other company data file as needed.

+

(Multi-Store)   The file can be copied to removable media, attached to an e-mail, or directly accessed across a network connection to share the templates with other stores.

+

 

+

To import templates:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Print Designer selection window , select Import & Export.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Import Templates.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Browse to the XML file containing the templates and select it.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Import Now.

    +
    6. +
+

If the imported templates are named differently than the default templates, you must modify your template selections on the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences to use them on printed documents.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can also import templates from the File menu without opening Print Designer. Select Utilities > Import Print Templates.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_itemlist.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_itemlist.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a425a6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_itemlist.htm @@ -0,0 +1,110 @@ + + + + + + + +Customize a Document Item List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize a Document Item List

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

The group of fields making up the item list on printed documents is slightly different from other field groups. As shown in the following images, there is a heading line and three lines for item data that can be displayed/printed for each item listed on the document. Multiple lines can be helpful, especially if you are using a 40-column printer.

+

image\printdesigner_letter_itemlist.gif

+

Sample letter-size sales receipt item list:

+

 

+

image\printdesigner_40col_itemlist.gif

+

Sample 40-column sales receipt item list:

+

 

+

You can add, remove, or rearrange the order of fields on each line, change fonts, and customize the printed headings and field labels.

+

To customize the item list:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the line you want to customize (blue highlighting indicates the selected line).

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    The list of available fields for the selected line is displayed. If a field is already displayed on one line, it is not available to add to another. To make it available, remove it from its current line.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Note that selecting Line 1 also highlights the heading line. The headings are based on the fields added to Line 1.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select/clear the checkboxes of available fields to include/exclude from the line respectively.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    The selected fields are added to the line at their default size (shown with the field description on the right of the window).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you add more fields than will fit in the width of the printed page, the fields will auto-adjust to fit. Be aware that this means the printed text will be truncated to fit the smaller fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the "Empty Space" fields to add space so printed text doesnt run together.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Use the Up and Down buttons to arrange the fields in the order you want to appear on the line. (up = left, down = right).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Resize the width of the fields on a line by dragging their separator lines. If the line is already full, increasing the width of one field means another field has to get smaller.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Change the Headings (Line 1 fields) or labels (Lines 2-3 fields) desired for each field used. Your choices are to use the labels defined in Point of Sale, enter a different label for printing (maybe a shorter one?), or to not print labels at all. Field labels for data on Lines 2-3 are printed right in the field, so if space is limited you may want to turn off printing of the labels.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Change font properties for the heading line or the data field lines.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select OK to close the Properties window.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

To use a style grid for listing items:

+

Using a style grid instead of a standard item list can be a great space saver on documents.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the item list in the template.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Properties from the tool bar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Style Grid from the drop-down list at the top of the Properties window.

    +
    4. +
+

Fields are selected for the style grid in the same manner as for the item list. To change the axis for the grid, select the Style Grid Details tab.

+

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_logo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_logo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4c0eb4b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_logo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Add a Logo + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a Logo

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

The default sales document templates include the logo field at a predefined size and position. The actual logo to be used is specified in company preferences. Learn more

+

You can use Print Designer to change the position and size of your logo on these printed documents and add your logo to other documents if desired.

+

To add your logo to a template:

+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, select the section of the template to which you wish to add the logo.

    +
    2. +
+

If necessary, create more room in the section by dragging its lower separator bar downwards.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the tool bar, select Add Store Logo from the tool bar.

    +
    2. +
+

The logo specified in company preferences is added to the template.

+
    +
  1. +

    Position, resize, or add a border to the logo as appropriate.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

To add an alternate logo to a template:

+

You must have specified more than one image in company preferences to use for logos before this option is available.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add the logo to the template as described above.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the image selected, click the properties icon on the toolbar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select alternate image and specify.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Choose from the available images (or add another image if needed) and choose select.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select ok.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    When resizing a logo, only the horizontal sizing affects the printed logo size. Vertical sizing is automatically adjusted to maintain the aspect ratio of the logo.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Scaling of the logo to the size specified occurs when previewing or printing. The display of the logo in the designer window is not an accurate representation of the printed image.

    +
    • +
  • +

    We recommend you use the preview option to see how the logo will look when printed.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_moveandalign.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_moveandalign.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..11e02f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_moveandalign.htm @@ -0,0 +1,195 @@ + + + + + + + +Positioning and Aligning Elements + + + + + + + + + + + +

Position and Align Elements

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Elements can be positioned on the template by any or a combination of these methods:

+
    +
  • +

    Drag and drop the element; use this method to approximately place the element in the desired position and then use the options below for more precise alignment

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the arrow keys on your keyboard to move the selected element in small incremental steps or <Ctrl + arrow keys> to move in 10X larger increments

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the tool bar alignment options (see below) to position elements relative to other fields or relative to the section in which it is placed

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the top and side rulers, status bar coordinates, and snap overlapping objects to their edges options with any of the above to help with precise placement

    +
    • +
+

Using the Alignment Options

+

The alignment options allow you to align selected elements to another element or to the section in which it is placed. When aligning to another element, the first element selected is referred to as the "anchor element." Other selected elements will be oriented to the position of the anchor element according to the alignment option selected.

+

To apply an alignment option:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the element or elements you wish to align.

    +
    2. +
+

To select multiple elements, hold down the <Shift> key and click on each element in turn or by dragging the mouse to encompass all elements to be selected. The first element selected is the anchor element when aligning elements relative to each other.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the toolbar, select Align and then select Align Fields to Each Other or Align Fields to Section.

    +
    2. +
+

The align fields to each other option is available only if multiple elements have been selected.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the drop-down menu displayed, select the specific alignment option:

    +
    2. +
+

You can also select Show Align Toolbar from the Align menu to add the alignment tools to the toolbar.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Alignment Options:

+		 +

Fields to each other

+		 +

Fields to
+Section

+
+

Align Left

+		 +

Aligns the left edge of all selected elements with the left edge of the anchor element

+		 +

Aligns left edge of selected element(s) to the left edge of the section

+
+

Align Right

+		 +

Aligns the right edge of all selected elements with the right edge of the anchor element

+		 +

Aligns the right edge of all selected element(s) with the right edge of the section

+
+

Align Bottom

+		 +

Aligns the bottom edge of all selected elements with the bottom edge of the anchor element

+		 +

Aligns the bottom edge of all selected element(s) with the bottom edge of the section

+
+

Align Vertical Center

+		 +

Aligns the vertical center of all selected elements with the vertical center of the anchor element

+		 +

Vertically centers the selected element(s) within the section

+
+

Align Horizontal Center

+		 +

Aligns the horizontal center of the selected elements with the horizontal center of the anchor element

+		 +

Horizontally centers the selected element(s) within the section

+
+

Make Same Width

+		 +

Makes the width of selected elements the same as the width of the anchor element

+		 +

Makes the selected element(s) the same width as the section

+
+

Equal Horizontal Space

+		 +

Evenly distribute the horizontal spacing between selected elements

+		 +

n.a.

+
+

Equal Vertical Space

+		 +

Evenly distribute the vertical space between selected elements

+		 +

n.a.

+
+ +

 

+

Moving Elements between Sections

+

You cannot move an element directly from one template section to another. If you need to move an element to another section, first remove it from one section and then add it to the other.

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Resize elements

+

About template sections and spacing

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_oview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..50402f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Print Designer Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Using Print Designer, you can customize your printed documents, labels, packing slips, and tags. The following actions are available to you in Print Designer:

+
    +
  • +

    Add, remove, size, and position data fields, static text, bar codes, and logos

    +
    • +
  • +

    Add borders and graphic lines

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change the printed labels on fields

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change the fonts used for printing

    +
    • +
  • +

    Control certain printing characteristics, such as the behavior of headers and footers

    +
    • +
+

Note that not all options are available on every template.

+

Point of Sale comes with default templates for each document, tag, and label type. You can directly edit the default templates or copy them and then modify the copy to create and save new templates. Once modified, templates can be exported and imported to share them with other workstations or stores.

+

Print Designer is not a "WYSIWYG" ("what you see is what you get") editor. As you position data fields on a design page, keep in mind that you are defining relative position, not absolute position, especially as it relates to vertical positioning. Every field that is placed on a template is not necessarily filled with data with each transaction. Many unused fields are removed from the template at the time of printing, so that the printed document does not have blank, wasted spaces. A good example of this behavior is the payment type fields included on sales receipt templates. While all of the possible payment types are included in the design, most sales only utilize one payment type, thus it is the only one actually printed.

+

Most document templates are separated into sections. There can be up to five different sections on a template, each with a unique printing behavior. These sections control how the printed output looks. For example, the information included in the Repeating Header section prints at the top of each page of a multi-page document, while the information in the Body Header section prints only once, near the top of the first page. Learn more about template sections and spacing.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+

Print Designer preferences

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_preferences.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_preferences.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04010e5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_preferences.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Designer Preferences + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Designer Preferences

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Print Designer preferences give you choices for how you want to view and work with templates:

+
    +
  • +

    Snap Overlapping Objects to their Edges helps quickly align the vertical edges of adjacent elements. With this option selected, you can overlap the top or bottom edges of two elements and they will automatically "snap" the edges to align with each other.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Show Example Text for Data Fields With this option selected, data fields display sample text instead of the field description.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Show Top Ruler Helps position elements horizontally on the page.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Show Side Ruler Helps position elements vertically on the page. Note that vertical positioning is relative, rather than absolute. When the document is printed, fields not populated with data are removed and lower fields on the template moved up to fill the blank space.

    +
    • +
+

To set Print Designer preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    With a template displayed, select Preferences from the lower-left of the screen.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select or clear the checkboxes for the preference options.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_properties.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_properties.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..614fc9e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_properties.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Element Properties + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Element Properties

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

You can set the following properties for elements (not all settings are available for all elements):

+
    +
  • +

    Define Field Labels Adjust width, position and justification of field labels; change label text.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Define Group Fields Add, remove, rearrange, and align the individual fields within a group.

    +
    • +
+

Working with an item list field is slightly different than other field groups. Learn more.

+
    +
  • +

    Define Group Labels Same options as field labels, only applied to the label for the group.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change Font Characteristics Change text font size, color, and style. All Windows fonts installed on your computer are available.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Add Borders Add a border to the top, bottom, left, or right of any element, or an entire template section.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Bar Code Type Select between two bar code formats. The Code2OF5IL format is generally recommended for smaller tag sizes as it increases the space between line. Note on bar codesClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+

To set the properties of an element:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the element you wish to modify.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the tool bar, select Properties

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

Double-click the element.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make changes to the available properties.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Take into consideration the printed document size and your printers capabilities when changing font sizes, styles, and colors. For example, tags and 40-column documents have very limited space for using a larger font. Preview and test your new design before going live with it in your store.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you do increase font sizes, you may have to resize fields to accommodate the larger printed text.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The following example is the Properties window for a group of fields. The preview at the bottom of the window allows you to immediately see the effect your changes have on the printed document.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click here for more information about customizing the item list included on documents.

    +
    • +
+

Print Designer properties window

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_resize.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_resize.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..75c09f8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_resize.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + +Resize Elements + + + + + + + + + + +

Resize Elements

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

There are two ways to resize an element:

+
    +
  • +

    Drag and drop the grab handles around the perimeter of the selected element, as shown below, with your mouse.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the tool bar alignment options to quickly make the width of the selected element(s) the same as another element or the section containing it.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Horizontal grab handle

+

image\printdesigner_grabhandles2.gif

+

Vertical grab handle

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Most elements can only be resized in the horizontal direction. Vertical sizing is controlled by the content of the element. If you drag the vertical grab handles on the top or bottom of the element, the vertical size "snaps" back to its original size when you let go.

    +
    • +
  • +

    In the case of a logo, you can change the vertical sizing. However, when printing, the vertical size is automatically scaled to maintain the aspect ratio of your graphic based on the horizontal size. This helps prevent distortion of your printed logo.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Take into consideration the size of the data that will populate a field when printing. If a data field size is too small, the printed data will be truncated to fit. Note on bar code fieldsClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    You may find it helpful to use the top and side rulers and status bar coordinates for precise sizing.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates  

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_saveas.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_saveas.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8342db0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_saveas.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + +Save a Template with a New Name + + + + + + + + + + + +

Save a Template with a New Name

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Use this procedure to save a modified template with a new name, while also keeping the original template unchanged.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the small down-arrow adjacent to the Save button on the toolbar and then select Save As.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a new name for the template.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select OK.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    If you created a new template, answer Yes when asked if you want the new template to be the default for that document type. You can also change templates at anytime in your print option preferences.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_sections.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_sections.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ecf3a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_sections.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +About Template Sections and Spacing + + + + + + + + + + + +

About Template Sections and Spacing

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Most document design templates are divided into logical sections, each with a unique printing behavior. The number of sections and the specific fields located in each section vary depending on the document type. For example, price tag, label, and 40-column templates will not include all of the section types listed below. The following descriptions will provide a general understanding of how the template sections are used and how these sections behave. Template sections cannot be re-positioned, though they typically can be vertically resized to add or remove white space in a design.

+

The five section types are as follows:

+

Repeating Header The elements included in this section are printed at the top of each page of the document. This section typically includes such things as the document date, print date, page number, document/transaction number and the logged-in users name.

+

Body Header The elements included in this section are printed only on the first page of a document. This section typically includes such things as store name and address information, as well as billing and shipping address information.

+

Body This section typically contain the actual content of the document. For example, on most transactional documents this would be the list of the items processed and the descriptions and/or attributes of those items. When printing a document, the body section expands to accommodate the number of items listed and can span multiple pages.

+

Body Footer The elements included in this section are printed only at the end of the document, or on the last page of a multi-page document. This section typically includes such things as totals, balances, savings, payment type, messages and comments.

+

Repeating Footer The elements included in this section are printed at the bottom of each page. The same type of information can be placed in this section as in the Repeating Header section, depending on whether you wish this information to be displayed at the top or bottom of each page.

+

Click on a section name on the left side of the template to make it active. In the example shown, the Body section is active.

+

image\sections.gif

+

 

+

Template Spacing

+

The Print Designer allows you to add or remove "white space" at the top and bottom of each section by dragging and dropping the section dividers. This is useful for gaining additional space to add design elements or to remove space that would otherwise waste paper when printing.

+

The Print Designer template display is not always an accurate representation of how the printed document will appear. Templates typically contain many fields that may or may not be populated with data from a particular Point of Sale transaction. For example: if your sales receipt template includes customer address fields, but you do not always record the customer on the receipt when a sale is made, then those fields and the vertical space they normally occupy will be omitted from the printed document and everything below the address fields will be moved up.

+

Use the vertical ruler as a general guide for relative positioning of elements. The actual height of sections and their contents will vary depending upon what data is actually available to be printed. It is recommended that you test your modified templates before implementing them for general use.

+

 

+

The End of the Document or Section

+

Sections in the template and particularly at the end of the document will vary depending upon the particular type of document and the printer being used. It is recommended that you build each section from the top down and then set the placement for the end of each section and the end of the document according to the lowest field placed in that section.

+

The image to the right shows the divider at the end of the document moved to just below the end of the last field. This ensures that no wasted space is added to the printed documents. If more space is needed, the divider can be moved down.

+

image\printdesigner_divider.gif

+

 

+

Moving Elements between Sections

+

You cannot move an element directly from one template section to another. If you need to move an element to another section, first remove it from one section and then add it to the other.

+

 

+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_selectdoc.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_selectdoc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3328225 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_selectdoc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Select a Template to Modify + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select a Template to Modify

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale ships with default templates for each document, tag, and label type. You can directly modify one of the default templates or make a copy of a default template to use as a starting point to create a new template.

+

To select a document template to modify or copy:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Tools menu, select Print Designer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the document category you wish to modify from the Select a Document Type drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the specific template you wish to work with from the Available Documents list.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select the desired option:

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  • +

    To create a new template, choose Copy Selected from the Options menu. When done, save the template with a new name and answer Yes when asked if you want to make it the default template when printing that document type.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To modify the default template, select Modify at the bottom of the window.

    +
    • +
+

The selected template is displayed in the Print Designer, ready for you to modify.

+

Other options from this window include:

+
    +
  • +

    Revert Design to Default available from the Options menu, this selection resets a modified template back to its original design.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Delete Selected Design available from the Options menu, removes the selected design. Note that default templates can not be deleted.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Import & Export provides a way to move modified templates to another company data file or to remote stores. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Print Designer preferences

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_textlabels.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_textlabels.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e380be --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesigner_textlabels.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Add Text Labels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add Text Labels

+

Print Designer Overview | Print Designer FAQs

+
+

Pro

+
+

Text labels are static text (unchanging) that you can add to a template. You might use a text label to print a message regarding your store return policy, warranty information, or any other information you want added to every printout of the selected document.

+

To add a text label:

+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, select the section of the template to which you wish to add the text label.

    +
    2. +
+

If necessary, create more room in the section by dragging its lower separator downwards.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Add Text Label from the tool bar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Properties window displayed, type the text to be printed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Specify text justification (left, center or right), change font characteristics, or add a border to the label as desired.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

The text label is added to the selected template section.

+
    +
  1. +

    Position and resize the text label within the section as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

How do I remove a text label?

+

About template sections and spacing

+

Recommended sequence and tips for modifying templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesinger_barcodes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesinger_barcodes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..51b26d7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/printdesinger_barcodes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + +printdesigner_barcodes + + + + + + + + + + +

Changing Bar Code Fields on Tags

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+

 

+

Print Designer provides three bar code fields for you to use on tag templates: Item #, UPC, and Lookup (alternate lookup field in inventory).

+

The default tag templates use the Item # bar code field. Using the item number for bar codes has several advantages:

+

 

+
    +
  • +

    You can print bar-coded tags for any item in inventory, even if you do not have a vendor-provided UPC code.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Item number bar codes are typically smaller than bar codes created from UPC or alternate lookup values, meaning they fit better on smaller tag sizes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a tag bar code is unscannable due to damage, it is quicker to manually enter an item number (also printed on the tags) than the longer UPC or alternate lookup.

    +
    • +
+

If preferred, you can change the bar code field on tags printed in Point of Sale to use the UPC or Lookup values instead. If you do so, also change the alphanumeric field under the bar code to match your choice, i.e. if printing a UPC bar code, change the Item # field under the bar code to the UPC field.

+

If you resize a bar code field after adding it to your template, especially if making it smaller, be sure to test a printed tag to be sure your scanner will accurately read it.

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pro_tip_using_margin_to_update_prices.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pro_tip_using_margin_to_update_prices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..49f5bda --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/pro_tip_using_margin_to_update_prices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,144 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Margin/Markup to Update Prices + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Margin/Markup to Update Prices

+

Department Pricing Formulas | Enter Cost and Price

+

 

+

When an item is received at a new cost, the item prices in inventory are not automatically updated (unless the previous regular price = $0, as would be the case for a new item). Point of Sale will alert you that the cost has changed, but revising your prices to reflect the new cost is at your discretion.

+

Since the cost has changed, Point of Sale does recalculate and display new average unit costs and margin/markup values on the item record. You can use the margin/markup values to see at a glance your profit margin on the item and to quickly adjust the prices to maintain your desired margin.

+

 

+

Example:

+

You have five units on hand with an average unit cost of $5.00 and priced at $10 to deliver a profit margin of 50%. You reorder and receive five additional units on a receiving voucher, costing $6.00 each. Point of Sale alerts you that the cost has changed, but does not automatically update the item price. The new average unit cost ($5.50) and margin/markup are calculated and displayed as shown below.

+

You have the option to update your price(s) or not. One way to quickly update the price and maintain your profit level is to edit the margin or markup back to their original values on the item record. In the example below, editing the margin back to 50% results in a new regular price of $11.00.

+

 

+ +++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

 

+		 +

Old

+		 +

New

+		 +

After margin edit

+
+

Quantity

+		 +

5

+		 +

10

+		 +

10

+
+

Unit Cost

+		 +

5.00

+		 +

5.50

+		 +

5.50

+
+

Regular Price

+		 +

10.00

+		 +

10.00

+		 +

11.00

+
+

Margin %

+		 +

50

+		 +

45

+		 +

50

+
+

Markup %

+		 +

100

+		 +

82

+		 +

100

+
+

 

+

Dont forget to print new price tags!

+

 

+

My markup value sometimes changes right after I enter it. Why?Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

If you use markdown price levels, the price at each level is also recalculated automatically anytime your regular price is changed.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Update prices when receiving items

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_connectionproblem.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_connectionproblem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5745bbd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_connectionproblem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Connection Problem + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Connection Problem

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

A number of circumstances can result in this error. Oftentimes, these errors can be fixed by restarting your computer and then trying to connect again.

+

Try these solutions:

+

Message: This application does not have permission to access this QuickBooks company file.

+
    +
  • +

    Solution: The QuickBooks financial software administrator can grant access permission through the Integrated Application preferences. (Note: This setting is in your financial software, not Point of Sale.)

    +
    • +
+

Message: An internal QuickBooks error occurred while trying to access the QuickBooks company data file.

+
    +
  • +

    Solution: Close both QuickBooks and Point of Sale, reboot your computer, and then restart both applications. Try connecting again.

    +
    • +
+

Message: Unexpected error. Check the qbsdklog.txt file for possible additional information.

+
    +
  • +

    Solution: Check the file specified, located at C:\Program Files\Common Files\Intuit\QuickBooks for entries that might help identify the problem.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Solution: If the first suggestion does not help, close both QuickBooks and Point of Sale, reboot your computer, and then restart both applications. Try connecting again.

    +
    • +
+

Message: Exception in OpenConnection: No connection could be made because the target machine actively refused it.

+
    +
  • +

    Solution: Typically this means that the computer on which your QuickBooks financial software is installed is not running, or the company file isn't available (isn't open, a different company file is open, or you are not in multi-user mode and another user is signed in), or, if you are using remote data sharing, the RDS Server is not running.

    +
    • +
+

If you are still unable to connect after trying these steps, please review our support resources or visit http://www.quickbooks.com/support/pos.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_norights.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_norights.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7a54aeb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_norights.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Insufficient Rights + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Insufficient Rights

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

 

+

In order to connect with QuickBooks and share data, the user logged into QuickBooks must be signed in as r;Admin or as a user with Admin-level rights.

+

Log out the current QuickBooks user and then log in as a user with Admin rights before trying again.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_other_file.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_other_file.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f624025 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_other_file.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Other File Open + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Connection Wizard: Other File Open

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

Point of Sale is configured to use a QuickBooks company file other than the one that is currently open. The file Point of Sale expected to see is shown on the dialog.

+

You have two choices:

+

Connect to the QuickBooks file shown on the dialog ( the file Point of Sale expected):

+
    +
  1. +

    Close the currently open QuickBooks file and open the file shown.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the first option in the dialog (displayed as the name of the expected company file)

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Next.

    +
    4. +
+

Connect to the currently open file:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the second option on the dialog.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Next.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale will automatically reconnect to this file from this point on.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_qbnotrunning.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_qbnotrunning.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7fd18a9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbconnwizard_qbnotrunning.htm @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard: QuickBooks is Not Running + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Connection Wizard: QuickBooks is Not Running

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

If the Wizard cannot detect QuickBooks running, it is most likely due to one of the following conditions:

+

If QuickBooks is installed on this computer only:

+

QuickBooks has not been started. Launch QuickBooks, open your financial company file, and then try connecting again. If you want to connect in the future even if QuickBooks is not running, set your QuickBooks Integrated Application preferences to allow automatic login. How do I?

+

 

+

If QuickBooks is installed both on this computer and on another networked computer:

+

QuickBooks may be running on the other computer. Close QuickBooks on the other computer and launch it on this computer, opening the company file on the other computer across the network and then try connecting again. If you want to connect in the future even if QuickBooks is not running, set your QuickBooks Integrated Application preferences to allow automatic login. How do I?

+

 

+

If QuickBooks installed only on another networked computer, and you have set up to use remote data sharing:

+

With the remote data sharing configuration, you must have QuickBooks running on the other computer and your company file open. You must also have the RDS Server application running on the other computer and the RDS Client application installed on this computer. Learn more.

+

 

+

Fore more information about configuring your QuickBooks installation for Financial Exchange, refer to the User Guide that accompanied your Point of Sale software (or view an electronic version here).

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata01.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cbc13ec --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Preparing QuickBooks for Financial Exchange + + + + + + + + + +

Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Connect to QuickBooks Desktop

+

 

+

Before you can share data, you should prepare your QuickBooks Desktop financial software by doing the following:

+
    +
  • +

    Make a backup copy of both your Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop files.  (Create a unique name for the backup. For example: "POS backup before QB").

    +
    • +
  • +

    Install QuickBooks Desktop on the same computer as Point of Sale for sharing.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Turn on the collection of sales tax, if applicable.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Turn on Inventory, if applicable.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Clean up QuickBooks Desktop lists (optional, if you plan to import data)

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Set QuickBooks Desktop preferences to allow access

+

Turn on the collection of sales tax

+

Clean up QuickBooks Desktop lists

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..65a7d83 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,138 @@ + + + + + + + + +How QuickBooks Handles Point of Sale Data + + + + + + + + + + + +

How QuickBooks Handles Point of Sale Data

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

What's Important to Know About the Exchange of Data?

+
    +
  • +

    There is not necessarily a one-to-one correspondence of documents in Point of Sale and QuickBooks Transactions can be posted differently to QuickBooks Desktop depending on whether you send summarized or detailed information and if you have customized the account mappings between the programs.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can verify the exchange status of individual transactions or view linked QuickBooks documents/records from your Point of Sale lists.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Financial exchange reports provide listings of transactions and records exchanged and are another means of verifying successful exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Some transactions/documents created in QuickBooks Desktop are governed by QuickBooks rules. For example, the "To be printed" flag is set on a document created from Point of Sale if it was set on the last document of the same type. And customer payments on account are automatically applied to open invoices (or not) according to your Receive Payments preferences in QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
+

Select a data type from the list below to see a brief description of how that Point of Sale data is recorded in QuickBooks Desktop.

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Sales receipts

+		 +

Cash drawer payouts

+
+

Customers

+		 +

Customer account information

+
+

Vendors

+		 +

Receiving vouchers

+
+

Vendor Payment Terms

+		 +

Return vouchers

+
+

Adjustment memos

+		 +

Sales tax

+
+

Employee hours worked

+

Transfer slips

+		 +

Customer orders

+
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d584527 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Customize Financial Exchange + + + + + + + + + + +

Customize Financial Exchange

+

Overview | Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

 

+

Point of Sale offers several options for customizing the way information is sent to QuickBooks Desktop and, if you imported existing QuickBooks Desktop customers, vendors, and inventory items to Point of Sale, you should review and edit the imported records to take full advantage of Point of Sale features.

+

 

+

Customizing Financial Exchanges

+

Customize account and payment type mappings

+

Customize item account and sub-account mappings

+

Send summarized vs. detailed sales & receiving information

+

Send original and discounted item sales values

+

Change where vendor billing information is entered

+

Change the customer name order for Financial Exchanges

+

 

+

Reviewing Data Imported from QuickBooks Desktop

+

Imported vendors

+

Imported items

+

Departments for imported items

+

Imported customers

+

Purchase orders in QuickBooks Desktop

+

 

+

Warning: Inventory items are not exchanged during routine Financial Exchanges. However, customers and vendors are. Any data imported from QuickBooks Desktop financial software during daily exchanges should be subjected to the same review as outlined in the topics above. To avoid data discrepancies and save data review time, it is advised that you add or edit items, customers, and vendors only in Point of Sale after the two programs are sharing data.

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata04.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..66c86f1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,119 @@ + + + + + + + + +Recover Point of Sale Data in QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + + +

Recover Point of Sale Data in QuickBooks Desktop

+

Financial Exchange Overview | FAQs Your access to the program area to which this topic applies may be restricted. See your store manager or click the key icon to learn more about the security features in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

You can use this procedure to resend Point of Sale data to QuickBooks Desktop if your financial software company file is damaged or lost.

+

You should try to restore from a QuickBooks Desktop backup before using the recover feature. However, if your QuickBooks Desktop backup is not current, you could lose the sales data that you have been regularly sending from Point of Sale since the last backup date. The Recover QuickBooks option allows you to resend your Point of Sale data to QuickBooks Desktop for a specified date range.

+

This procedure should be used in only two situations:

+
    +
  • +

    Your QuickBooks financial software company file is corrupted and you have no backup or the backup is old.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You have started a new QuickBooks financial software company file, and want to populate it with Point of Sale data.

    +
    • +
+

This procedure sends all Point of Sale data for the specified date range to QuickBooks Desktop, whether or not it has been previously sent. If you use this feature for any purpose other than specified above, you may overwrite important information or create duplicate entries in your QuickBooks Desktop company file.

+

It is suggested that you read the Financial Exchange FAQs for other possible issues and corrections before using this option.

+

 

+

 Warning: Depending on the size of your Point of Sale data, the date range you specify, and your computer speed, data recovery may take a considerable amount of time to complete. Once started, the process must be allowed to finish. Errors may result in duplication or missed records if you attempt to stop and restart this process.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If your attempt to restore your QuickBooks Desktop financial software data is unsuccessful, you can contact Intuit Technical Support for assistance in recovering your QuickBooks Desktop data. There may be a fee for this service.

    +
    • +
  • +

    After recovering, the Financial History window in Point of Sale will show two entries for each resent record and document. The first link will no longer be functional.

    +
    • +
+

To recover from a total QuickBooks Desktop financial software data loss (no backup):

+

Use the steps below if you have been unable to restore your financial software data and/or have started a new QuickBooks Desktop company file. All vendors, customers, and transactional data within the specified date range will be sent.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange topic to prepare the new company for Financial Exchange before selecting Recover QuickBooks.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Financial Center from the Financial menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Financial Center select Show Advanced Options and then click Recover Data Now.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Read the recovery warning, and then select Continue.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Specify a date range. Typically, the date range in this case will be from the date you first started using Point of Sale to the current date.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Type Yes to confirm the recovery.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Select Continue to start the exchange.

    +
    8. +
+

To recover if your QuickBooks Desktop backup is out of date:

+

Use the procedure below if you have an intact QuickBooks Desktop company file but your recent sales activity has been lost due to restoring an outdated QuickBooks Desktop backup. Adjusts the dates in the example below to match your circumstances.

+

Example: It is March 1. Your QuickBooks Desktop company file is damaged, and the most recent backup you have is from February 27:

+
    +
  1. +

    Restore QuickBooks from your most recent backup (February 27).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Refer to the QuickBooks help for specific instructions on this step.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In Point of Sale, select Recover Data Now from the Financial Center as explained in the procedure above.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Read the Recovery warning, and then select Continue.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Specify the beginning and ending date for the data to be resent; in this example specify a beginning date of February 28 and an ending date of March 1.

    +
    6. +
+

This date range assumes that your February 27 QuickBooks Desktop backup already has the Point of Sale data from that day, so we are resending data starting on the next day.

+
    +
  1. +

    Type Yes to confirm the recovery.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Continue to send the Point of Sale data to QuickBooks.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Resume routine Financial Exchanges.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Return to top

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata05.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b07f8a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +QuickBooks Connection Wizard Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard Overview

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

The QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard can assist you in establishing the connection between Point of Sale and your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

If you havent already, you may want to read the following topics:

+

Requirements for QuickBooks Desktop integration

+

Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange

+

 

+

The wizard will help you select the QuickBooks Desktop company file with which you will share Point of Sale data and will configure Point of Sale so that it will reconnect to the same QuickBooks Desktop company file automatically in the future. The wizard will also alert you if a condition exists that prevents the connection and help you rectify the problem so you can continue.

+

The wizard will start automatically when a connection is needed or you can start it manually at anytime in Point of Sale by selecting Set Up QuickBooks Connection Now from:

+
    +
  • +

    The Financial Center (select Financial Center from the Financial menu or from the Navigator), or

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Financial page of company preferences

    +
    • +
+

If this is your first time connecting the programs, launch QuickBooks Desktop and open your financial company file before selecting Next on the connection wizard page.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata08.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..697bffe --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange Activity Log + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange Activity Log

+

Overview | Financial Exchange Reports | Troubleshooting

+

 

+

The Financial Exchange activity log allows you to review the details of the data shared between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop. It summarizes the data that has been imported, added, and updated between the two programs.

+

The activity log is a useful tool for troubleshooting problems that arise during Financial Exchange and can help you locate problematic data.

+

If an error occurs, you will see a problem message in the Financial Exchange summary window.

+

To view the Activity Log:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select View Activity Log from the Financial Exchange summary window or at anytime from the Financial menu.

    +
    2. +
+

The Activity Log dialog is displayed, showing the log for the current date.

+
    +
  1. +

    To view the log for a different date, select a date from the left side of the window, and a time of day to narrow the entries even further.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    To see only the errors in the displayed log, select Show Errors Only.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click on a blue hyperlink, if available, to view the corresponding record or transaction in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To print the log, select Print.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    When finished reviewing logs, select Close to exit the dialog.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Logs for individual exchanges can be viewed one at a time. If data is shared multiple times a day, a separate time-stamped entry is made for each exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    With each new exchange, entries older than 30 days are purged from the log.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange at End of Day

+

Data recovery in QuickBooks Desktop

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata10.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..99ba283 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,230 @@ + + + + + + + +Troubleshoot Financial Exchange + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange 

+

Exchange Overview | Reports | Customize Exchanges

+

 

+

The following lists include frequently asked questions and solutions to Financial Exchange issues. Click on a question to view the answer.

+

 

+

Configuring for QuickBooks Desktop Integration

+

What versions of QuickBooks Desktop financial software can I use with Point of Sale?

+

Why must a company file be set up in QuickBooks Desktop financial software before data can be shared with Point of Sale?

+

I cannot find my QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file. Where is it?

+

I cannot get the two programs to communicate across my network and am not able to share data. What could be wrong?

+

Do I have to import QuickBooks Desktop items when prompted to do so?

+

Why can't I see my item quantities in QuickBooks Desktop after integrating the two programs?

+

Can Point of Sale exchange data with QuickBooks Online Edition?

+

 

+

Running Routine Financial Exchanges

+

Why are there fewer receipts in QuickBooks Desktop financial software than in Point of Sale?

+

Does QuickBooks Desktop financial software have to be running to exchange data?

+

I made a receiving voucher in Point of Sale and ran a Financial Exchange, but there was no matching bill created in QuickBooks Desktop. Why?

+

How do I make a bank deposit in QuickBooks Desktop after doing my End of Day Financial Exchange?

+

Why do some of my customers' names look different after importing into Point of Sale?

+

Why does an item named "POS Tax Sales" appear on my receipts sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software?

+

Point of Sale says my document was sent to QuickBooks Desktop, but I can't find it in my financial software. Where did it go?

+

What can I do if one of my associates incorrectly entered a receipt payment?

+

Can I change the accounts and payment types used by Point of Sale to transfer my routine point-of-sale data to QuickBooks Desktop financial software?

+

 

+

Errors During Financial Exchange

+

When I try to conduct a Financial Exchange, why do I get an error message about my QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file?

+

Why do I get an error about insufficient rights?

+

I receive an error about a customer's credit limit being exceeded. How do I fix this?

+

Why do I receive an error message that Point of Sale does not have permission to access my financial software company file?

+

The Activity Log says, "Error occurred while sending receipts. POS STX tax item must be 0%." How do I resolve this error?

+

 

+

What versions of QuickBooks Desktop financial software can I use with Point of Sale?

+

This version of Point of Sale can be integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Pro, Premier, or Enterprise Solutions.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why must a company file be set up in QuickBooks Desktop financial software before data can be shared with Point of Sale?

+

Point of Sale must know the name and location of the company file you use in QuickBooks Desktop financial software, in order to send your sales data to the correct accounts, report sales tax properly, and handle other aspects of integration.

+

Your company file must be set up in QuickBooks Desktop financial software before the two programs can be connected. Refer here, and to the documentation provided with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, for more information about setting up a financial company file.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I cannot find my QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file. Where is it?

+

If you have QuickBooks Desktop running and The QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard in Point of Sale can help you locate your QuickBooks Desktop company file. The Wizard will display the company files it finds in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software folder. If the wizard is unable to locate your file, it could be because:

+
    +
  • +

    QuickBooks Desktop isnt running and/or your company file isnt open.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You dont have a supported version of QuickBooks

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your company file has been moved or renamed. Start QuickBooks Desktop and open the company file then try connecting again.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your network connections have been interrupted. Network troubleshooting.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your QuickBooks Desktop Integrated Applications preferences are configured to not allow access.

    +
    • +
+

Note: To verify the location of your company file, switch to QuickBooks Desktop financial software and select Backup from the file menu. Your company file and location are displayed in the Current Company section. Cancel the backup operation.

+

 

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I cannot get the two programs to communicate across my network and am not able to exchange data. What could be wrong?

+

In order to exchange data between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop, several conditions must be met. Check your network configuration, program installation, and preferences to be sure all of the following are true:

+
    +
  • +

    You are on a XP/Vista peer-to-peer network, or Windows 2003/2008 Server or Novell Netware Network.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You have set your QuickBooks Desktop integrated applications preferences to allow access to Point of Sale. How do I?

    +
    • +
  • +

    QuickBooks Desktop is running and your financial company file is open OR you have set your QuickBooks Desktop Integrated Applications preferences to allow automatic login even when QuickBooks Desktop is not running. How do I?

    +
    • +
  • +

    If QuickBooks Desktop and your company file is open, the Preferences window is closed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You have followed the installation instructions in the User Guide to install and configure QuickBooks Desktop

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you use Remote Data Sharing, QuickBooks Desktop financial software is running, your company file is open and the RDS server application is running on the computer with QuickBooks Desktop

    +
    • +
+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Do I have to import QuickBooks Desktop items when prompted to do so?

+

No, and you do not ever have to import them if you wish not to. If you elect not to import your QuickBooks Desktop items when prompted, but want to later, you can do so by selecting Import QuickBooks Items from the Financial menu or from the Financial Center in Point of Sale.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why cant I see my item quantities in QuickBooks Desktop after integrating the two programs?

+

Individual item information (quantities, prices, etc.) is not shared between the two programs. If you purchase, receive and sell an item in Point of Sale, you can view information about the item in the Point of Sale inventory screen and on Point of Sale reports.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Can Point of Sale exchange data with QuickBooks Online Edition?

+

No, the online edition of QuickBooks is not supported at this time.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why are there fewer receipts in QuickBooks Desktop financial software than in Point of Sale?

+

By default, information is sent to QuickBooks Desktop in summarized format, meaning that many documents are consolidated. For example, the total amount for all receipts paid by cash in Point of Sale on a given day is reflected on a single receipt and a single general journal transaction in QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

If you would like each individual receipt in Point of Sale to be sent to your financial software as an individual document, select the Detailed Item Descriptions option in company preferences. (See the Summarized vs. Detailed Item Information topic for further information.) Note that even with this option there is not one document created in QuickBooks Desktop for every document created in Point of Sale (Other than receipts and vouchers).

+

You can always view the documents or records created in QuickBooks Desktop for a Point of Sale transaction by selecting the Financial button in the corresponding Point of Sale list. Learn more.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Does QuickBooks Desktop financial software have to be running to exchange data?

+

Not if you have set your QuickBooks Desktop Integrated Application preferences to allow Point of Sale to login automatically. How do I?

+

Exception: If you are using the Remote Data Sharing (RDS) option, QuickBooks Desktop must be running with your company file open to exchange data.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I made a receiving voucher in Point of Sale and ran a Financial Exchange, but there was no matching bill created in QuickBooks Desktop. Why?

+

Receiving vouchers may be sent to QuickBooks Desktop in different ways, depending on where you have selected to enter vendor billing information and, if entering billing information in Point of Sale, whether an invoice number has been entered. Learn more.

+

To view the corresponding document(s) and/or transactions created in QuickBooks Desktop for a Point of Sale voucher, first locate and select the voucher in your Point of Sale receiving history, then select View Financial History from the I Want To menu. The dialog displayed lists the document(s) or transactions created in QuickBooks Desktop. To view the QuickBooks Desktop document, select Open in QuickBooks next to a listed document.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

How do I make a bank deposit in QuickBooks Desktop after doing my End of Day Financial Exchange?

+

By default, cash from Point of Sale is placed in the QuickBooks Desktop Cash In Drawer account, while checks and credit/debit transaction are placed in the Undeposited Funds account.

+

Learn more about using the default or custom account mappings

+

To perform a deposit once you have completed the Financial Exchange process with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you will need to first transfer the funds you wish to deposit from the Cash in Drawer account in QuickBooks Desktop to the Undeposited Funds account. How do I?

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why do some of my customers names look different after importing into Point of Sale?

+

Names in the First Name and M.I. fields from QuickBooks financial software are combined in Point of Sale. Also, if a name in your financial software is a duplicate of a customer that already exists in Point of Sale, a number will be appended to the end of the name upon import to ensure that it is unique.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why does an item named "POS Tax Sales" appear on my receipts sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software?

+

If you send data to QuickBooks Desktop financial software in summarized format, individual items are not listed on receipts. Instead, items are consolidated by tax code. For example, if you sell $250 worth of items belonging to the "Tax" code, a $250 item called POS Tax Sales appears on the receipt in your financial software.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I cant find the document(s) created in QuickBooks Desktop for a document made in Point of Sale even after successfully running Financial Exchange. Where did it go?

+

To view the corresponding document(s) created in QuickBooks Desktop for a Point of Sale document, first locate and select the document in your Point of Sale history list, then select View Financial History from the I Want To menu. The dialog displayed lists the document(s) or journal entries, as applicable, created in QuickBooks Desktop. To view the QuickBooks Desktop document, select Open in QuickBooks next to an entry.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

What can I do if one of my associates incorrectly entered a payment?

+

Reverse the receipt in Point of Sale and create a new, corrected one. Reversing the receipt does the following: 1) creates a new reversing receipt with the opposite effect of the original to "cancel" it out (it does not change the original), and 2) the new, corrected receipt posts the correct payment information to QuickBooks Desktop. For example, if the original was a sales receipt, selecting reverse creates a return receipt with the same items and prices, adding the quantity back to inventory. Once transferred, the new corrected receipt will correct your records in QuickBooks Desktop.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Can I change the account s and payment types used by Point of Sale to transfer my point-of-sale data to QuickBooks Desktop?

+

Yes, you can change the account mappings on the Financial Accounts page of Point of Sale company preferences. Payment type mappings can only be changed by editing your payment methods or types in your QuickBooks Desktop software. Note: If you use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service reconciliation feature, some of the default mappings are required.

+

You can also change income, COGs, and inventory asset item account mappings on an individual item basis. Your changes will take effect on the next Financial Exchange.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

When I try to conduct a Financial Exchange, why do I get an error message about my QuickBooks Desktop financial software company file?

+

QuickBooks Desktop and your QuickBooks Desktop company file must currently be open. If no company file is open, or if a different company file is open, or if a dialog in QuickBooks Desktop is open, you will receive an error message.

+

Optional: You can set your Integrated Applications preferences in QuickBooks Desktop financial software to allow access even if the program is not running. How do I?

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why do I get an error about insufficient rights?

+

The user currently logged into QuickBooks Desktop does not have the rights to perform the actions needed to share data. Login as a user with sufficient rights to create items and transactions. It is recommended you login as the Admin user. If you have set your Integrated Applications data in QuickBooks Desktop financial software for automatic login, make sure the user specified there has sufficient rights to perform the actions necessary to share data. Again, it is recommended that this user be the Admin user.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

I receive an error about a customers credit limit being exceeded. How do I fix this?

+

If multiple charges to account are made at different stores between Store and Financial Exchanges or the customer's credit limit is overridden at the time of sale to allow a charge exceeding the credit limit, you may get an error during Financial Exchange. Some versions of QuickBooks Desktop financial software will not accept a charge receipt if the limit would be exceeded. To resolve this issue, temporarily (or permanently) increase the customer's credit limit so and run Financial Exchange to get the receipt posted. Then change the credit limit back. No additional charges will be allowed in Point of Sale until a payment reduces the balance below the limit.

+

A second possible cause of this error is that previous customer payments/credits have not been applied to the customers open invoices in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, thus the account balance has not yet been reduced by these amounts. Applying the payments to invoices in QuickBooks Desktop and then exchanging data again should resolve this issue. Learn more.

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

Why do I receive an error message that Point of Sale does not have permission to access my financial software company file?

+

QuickBooks financial software is not running or Point of Sale does not have permission to access it automatically. Make sure your financial software is running before trying to run Financial Exchange again. (You can set your financial software preferences so that Point of Sale can access the program even if it is not currently running. How do I? )

+

Return to question List

+

 

+

The Activity Log says, "Error occurred while sending receipts. POS STX tax item must be 0%." How do I resolve this error?

+

POS STX is the inactive tax item created in QuickBooks Desktop financial software and used in the Tax field on documents created in your financial software. The tax rate of this item is 0.0%. (The actual tax charged on receipts sent to your financial software appears as line items.) If you edit the POS STX item in QuickBooks Desktop financial software so that the rate is other than 0%, you will receive this error. Make sure the POS STX item has a tax rate of 0%, then send data to QuickBooks Desktop financial software again.

+

Return to question List

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata11.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f457f8f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,30 @@ + + + + + + + +Item List Limit in QuickBooks Financial Software + + + + + + + + + + +

Item List Limit in QuickBooks Financial Software

+

Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

Some editions of QuickBooks financial software have an item list limit, while Point of Sale does not. If you have a large inventory and you use detailed posting, there is a risk of reaching the maximum number of inventory items allowed in your financial software because of the inactive items created.

+

If you reach the maximum, additional new items (items that do not already have an inactive item created for them in QuickBooks) will be listed on documents in the default, summarized format. To free some space in your QuickBooks item list, you can delete old or unused items. Refer to your QuickBooks documentation for more information.

+

Alternatively, you may wish to consider upgrading to a newer version of QuickBooks that allows more items or to the Enterprise Solutions edition, which approximately doubles the item list limit.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata12.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata12.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..24f702a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata12.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + +Remote Data Sharing (RDS) + + + + + + + + + +

Remote Data Sharing (RDS)

+

QuickBooks Desktop Installation Options | Financial Exchange Overview

+

 

+

Remote Data Sharing (RDS) is an alternative method for integrating Point of Sale with QuickBooks Desktop financial software over a local area network (LAN) using server/client applications. View Illustration

+

 

+

Note: VPN's and wireless networks tend to be low bandwidth (slow) and therefore are not recommended for use with RDS. These network configurations may be unreliable for this purpose.

+

 

+

Advantages of RDS

+
    +
  • +

    Doesn't require that QuickBooks financial software be installed on your Point of Sale Server Workstation, which may be accessible to employees.

    +
    • +
+

Disadvantages of RDS

+
    +
  • +

    More complex to set up and use than other integration methods

    +
    • +
  • +

    Terminology can be confusing: the "server" and "client" for RDS purposes do not correlate with the Point of Sale "Server" and "Client" Workstations

    +
    • +
  • +

    During data exchanges, your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and the RDS server application must be running, and your financial company file open on the computer that has QuickBooks Desktop

    +
    • +
+

Get the RDS Files and Documentation

+

You can download the RDS application files and the most recent documentation for RDS from the following web site. This is a free download.

+

Internet connection required  https://community.intuit.com/articles/1602352

+


+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange

+

QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard Overview

+

Customize Financial Exchange

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata13.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata13.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..19d51c0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata13.htm @@ -0,0 +1,131 @@ + + + + + + + +Summarized vs. Detailed Item Information + + + + + + + + + + + +

Summarized vs. Detailed Item Information

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | FAQs

+

 

+

In your Point of Sale company preferences, you can choose whether to send summarized or detailed item information to QuickBooks Desktop on receipts and vouchers. The choice depends on the level of detail you want in your financial software regarding your Point of Sale activities.

+

We recommend you read this entire topic carefully before making a change in this setting.

+

To specify detailed or summarized information for Financial Exchange:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Financial page, select from one of the three options for sending receipts and vouchers:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    With Detailed item descriptions

    +
    • +
  • +

    With Detailed item descriptions for customer charge account transactions only

    +
    • +
  • +

    With Summarized item totals (no item detail: default)

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

You change will go into effect with the next Financial Exchange.

+

 

+

About This Choice

+

By default, these documents are sent to QuickBooks Desktop in the summarized format. This streamlines Financial Exchange and presents data in a concise format in QuickBooks Desktop. In most cases, sending summarized data is the most efficient way to transfer data. However, you may wish to send detailed documents to your financial software if you need or want:

+
    +
  • +

    The ability to print reports or statements in QuickBooks Desktop showing item descriptions for sales and receiving documents (e.g. the specific items sold or received).

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to see individual sales documents in QuickBooks Desktop, rather than consolidated documents.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to run reports or do customer mailings with customer information from receipts.

    +
    • +
+

Detailed document posting DOES NOT mean that inventory information (items, quantities, costs, etc.) are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+

Heres how the different formats handle sending data to QuickBooks Desktop:

+

 

+

Summarized item totals: (Default)

+
    +
  • +

    Certain documents are consolidated by day. For example, all receipts paid by cash, credit card, debit card, and gift card/certificate for a particular day are consolidated and sent to QuickBooks Desktop as a single receipt for the total amount of sales.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales documents do not list individual items. Instead, items are consolidated by tax code. For example, if you have a tax code called "Tax," the total amount of all items sold on a document that belong to that tax code are listed under an item called "POS Tax Sales."

    +
    • +
  • +

    Documents created from vouchers (bills, credits, or item receipts) do not list individual items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer information is not included on consolidated receipts (but is included if the sale was paid by account charge).

    +
    • +
+

Detailed item descriptions:

+
    +
  • +

    Receipts are never consolidated and include item detail and the customer name (if the Use With QuickBooks flag is selected in the customer record).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receipts and documents created from vouchers list individual items, including serial numbers, if recorded.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Journal entries for Cost of Goods Sold (COGS) list the Point of Sale receipt numbers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If tracking customers by company name and including customer's PO # on POS sales receipts, the PO # is included on receipts and invoices created in QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
+

Note: Detailed item information applies only to sales receipts and to documents created from vouchers. If you select to send detailed data to QuickBooks, documents such as adjustment memos will still be sent in a consolidated format. Likewise, General Journal transactions for vouchers will not show individual items.

+

 

+

Detailed item descriptions for customer charge account transactions only:

+
    +
  • +

    Receipts for sales that are charged to a customer's account are sent with item descriptions and customer information so you can send itemized statements.

    +
    • +
  • +

    All other receipts and vouchers are sent in summarized format with no item detail.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Inactive Items Created in QuickBooks Desktop for Detailed Exchanges

+

When using detailed item posting, Point of Sale creates an inactive, non-inventory item in QuickBooks Desktop for each item sold or received on Point of Sale documents sent to QuickBooks Desktop. It is these inactive items that are listed on the QuickBooks Desktop documents created during Financial Exchanges.

+

An item is only created once. Subsequent appearances of the item on sent documents will not create another inactive QuickBooks Desktop item. These items are made inactive, non-inventory items so that they dont show up in your default QuickBooks Desktop item list view. This is because they are tracked in Point of Sale, not in QuickBooks Desktop, and you should not use them in QuickBooks Desktop for other purposes or edit them. These items are meant to be used solely for the purpose of detailed Financial Exchanges.

+

 

+

Note: Item List Limit in QuickBooks. If you have a large inventory, these inactive items may cause you to reach the maximum number of items allowed in QuickBooks Desktop. See the Item List Limit in QuickBooks topic for more information.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata_popup_tempacctrenaming.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata_popup_tempacctrenaming.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9244562 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdata_popup_tempacctrenaming.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + +Temporarily Renaming Existing Accounts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Temporarily Renaming Existing Accounts

+ +

In-help popup topic

+ +

Point of Sale requires that certain accounts be present in your QuickBooks software to successfully integrate the two programs. These accounts include Accounts Receivable, Accounts Payable, Cost of Goods Sold, Sales Tax Payable, Undeposited Funds, and Inventory Asset.

+

If you have created custom accounts in QuickBooks of the same types, you may find it easier to temporarily rename these accounts to the default names listed above to enable the initial connection. After the connection has been completed, you can change the names back to your custom names and then edit Point of Sale company preferences to map to those accounts instead.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdataoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdataoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..72e2b9a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbdataoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,204 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Customize Exchanges | Reports | FAQs

+

 

+

Point of Sale can be integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Pro, Premier, and Enterprise Solutions. Integration and exchange of data with QuickBooks Desktop, while providing many benefits, is not required.

+

 

+

Point of Sale tracks your daily point-of-sale business: purchasing, receiving, and selling merchandise, and tracking inventory and customers. QuickBooks Desktop financial software helps you pay bills, manage cash flow, invoice customers, and run financial reports.

+

Exchanging information between the two programs, called Financial Exchange, can be done at any time (typically as part of your End of Day procedure) and can significantly reduce your workload because you can conduct your inventory and sales activities in Point of Sale, then transfer the resulting data directly to your financial software. Theres no need to enter information twice!

+

Several options are available for you to customize how your Point of Sale data is transferred to QuickBooks Desktop so that it works for your business model and how you like to have your retail activities reported.

+

Financial Exchange allows you to get the most from the specialized features of each program by splitting key business activities between them as shown below (this is not an all-inclusive list of the features in either program):

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Activity

+		 +

POS

+		 +

QBFS

+
+

Add/track inventory

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Order and receive merchandise

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Make sales and collect sales tax

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Run sales and merchandise reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Add customers or vendors*

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Enter vendor billing info (invoices)**

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Track cost of goods and expenses

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Pay bills and sales taxes

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Invoice customers

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Process payroll

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Run financial reports

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

Banking activities

+		 +

 

+		 +

X

+
+

POS = Point of Sale QBFS = QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+

*  Recommend doing in Point of Sale

+

** Preference option; controls how receiving information is shared

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

What data is shared?

+

Requirements of Financial Exchange

+

How QuickBooks Desktop handles POS data

+

Default chart of accounts & mappings

+

Security rights for Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_accountlimitexceeded.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_accountlimitexceeded.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d7debf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_accountlimitexceeded.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + +qbfs_accountlimitexceeded + + + + + + + + +

Example: Multiple Charges to Account Exceed Limit

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden

+  +

A customer has a credit limit of $200, and charges a sale for $160 and then a second sale for $50 before a Financial Exchange occurs. The second charge is allowed in Point of Sale because the customers balance has not yet been updated with the first charge.

+

However, when sending the receipts to QuickBooks; the posting of the second sales receipt will not be allowed because it causes the customers credit limit to be exceeded. In this case, the receipt will have to be reversed in Point of Sale, or the Credit Limit field edited to a higher amount in QuickBooks financial software, in order for the receipt to be posted successfully.

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_adjust_import_qtys.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_adjust_import_qtys.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b096af --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_adjust_import_qtys.htm @@ -0,0 +1,29 @@ + + + + + + +Adjust Quantities of Items Imported from QuickBooks + + + + + + + + + + +

Adjust Quantities of Items Imported from QuickBooks

+

 

+

If using QuickBooks 2004 (or earlier) and  in multi-user mode during the item import process, Point of Sale could not set the quantities of the imported items to zero (0) in your financial software. Read the notes in the Import QuickBooks Items topic to learn why this is important.

+

As a result, your inventory value in QuickBooks will be erroneously increased by an amount equal to the value of the imported items when Point of Sale creates adjustment memos and sends them to your financial software.

+

To correct your inventory value, you must manually edit the quantities of the imported items to zero in your QuickBooks financial software.

+

Please consult your QuickBooks financial software help for instructions to make manual quantity adjustments in that software.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_adjustments.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_adjustments.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..71f1322 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_adjustments.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Adjustment Memos + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Adjustment Memos

+

Overview | Inventory Adjustments Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale adjustment memos are sent to QuickBooks financial software as General Journal transactions. A single journal entry is made for the aggregate inventory adjustments for each day. The journal entry typically will show an adjustment to the Inventory Asset account and a balancing entry in the POS Inventory Adjustment account.

+

Many activities in Point of Sale result in the creation of adjustment memos, and thus a general journal transaction in QuickBooks, including:

+
    +
  • +

    Manually editing an items average unit cost or on-hand quantity

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updating a physical inventory with changes in on-hand quantities

    +
    • +
  • +

    Deleting an item with an on-hand quantity

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Building or breaking assembly items

    +
    • +
+

To learn more:

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_customers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_customers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..35b4d26 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_customers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Customers + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Customers

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customer Overview | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

If you integrate Point of Sale with QuickBooks financial software, existing active customers from QuickBooks are automatically added to your Point of Sale customer list with the first Financial Exchange.

+

New and edited customers in Point of Sale, if the Use with QuickBooks field is selected on the customer record, are synchronized between Point of Sale and QuickBooks.

+

 

+

Sending Account Charges and Payments

+

If you allow account charges, customers account balances in Point of Sale are adjusted with each charge or payment transaction. The transactions are sent to QuickBooks with the next Financial Exchange where they affect the customers Current Balance and result in the creation of a customer invoice (for charges) or a customer payment (for payments).

+

The QuickBooks account balance, which may reflect payments or finance charges not entered in Point of Sale is then sent back and overwrites the account balance in Point of Sale. Point of Sale recalculates the available credit for the next sale. Learn more about how account transactions are exchanged.

+

 

+

Sending Customer PO Numbers (Pro)

+

For business customers, when the customer PO # is recorded on a sales receipt and you are sending item detail, the PO# is added to the Memo field of QuickBooks receipts and to the PO # field of QuickBooks invoices.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Customer type information is shared.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can elect via a company preference to include item detail on all receipts or on account charge receipts only, making it possible to create itemized customer invoices and reports within QuickBooks. Customer information is always sent to QuickBooks on account charge transactions and can be sent on all sales transactions by selecting to send detailed information on all receipts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Occasionally, you may end up with duplicate customers in Point of Sale. This typically happens when two associates enter the same name with slightly different spellings. The merge customers feature in Point of Sale can be used to combine the duplicates into a single record and merge their sales histories. When merging customer records, you also have the option of deleting the duplicate from QuickBooks (highly recommended).

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can change the name order in which Point of Sale sends customer information to QuickBooks. How Do I?

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Custom field information is shared, provided the fields are named exactly the same in both programs.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Customer account balances are only updated with charges/payments made at the local store until you conduct a Store Exchange and a Financial Exchange. Because of this, a customer could possibly exceed his/her credit limit by making multiple charges at different stores between data exchanges. ExampleClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+

Use these links for more information:

+
    +
  • +

    View the corresponding customer record in QuickBooks for a Point of Sale customer (via a link in your Point of Sale customer list)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read various ways to customize Financial Exchange

    +
    • +
+

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_deposits.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_deposits.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a9dd38 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_deposits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,58 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Customer Order Deposits + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Customer Order Deposits

+

Overview | Customer Order Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Although customer orders created in Point of Sale are not sent to QuickBooks, deposits and deposits used as payment create either sales receipts or invoices in QuickBooks, depending on the payment type.

+

 

+

Deposits Taken

+

In general, deposits taken on customer orders are recorded on sales receipts in Point of Sale and sent to QuickBooks in the same manner as other sales receipts.  The deposit amount increases the Customer Deposit liability account.

+

If you send summarized data to QuickBooks:

+

Customer order deposits taken by cash, credit card, or gift card/certificate appear on the consolidated sales receipt for the day, and the amount of the deposit is added to the consolidated total for the appropriate payment type(s)and to the POS SO Deposit item, which increases the Customer Deposits liability account.

+

Note that while these deposit receipts show a link in Point of Sale to the general journal transaction created for the day in QuickBooks, they in fact do not affect the Cost of Goods Sold or Income Asset accounts since the items on a customer order are not actually sold when a deposit is taken.

+

A customer order deposit paid by check or charge on account is always sent to QuickBooks as an individual sales receipt or invoice, respectively. No general journal entry is created for these transactions.

+

If you send detailed information to QuickBooks:

+

Deposits are sent as their own sales receipt (cash, check, card, gift certificate) or invoice (charge to account). Since the items on the order have not yet been sold, the individual items listed on a customer order do not appear on the documents created in QuickBooks and no general journal entry is made.

+

 

+

Deposits Applied to Sales

+

When customer order deposits are applied to the final sales receipt in Point of Sale (to actually sell the items), the new sales receipt is sent in the same manner as other sales receipts and a general journal entry is made to reflect the effect on Cost of Goods Sold and Inventory Asset Accounts. The Customer Deposits (liability) account is decreased by the amount of the deposit used as payment on the sale.

+

If you send summarized data to QuickBooks, deposits used that were originally paid by cash, credit/debit/gift card or gift certificate appear on the consolidated receipt for the day. Customer Order deposits used on receipts paid by check or charge to account will appear on the corresponding receipt or invoice created in your financial software.

+

If you send detailed information to QuickBooks, deposits used appear on the corresponding sales receipt (cash, check, card, gift certificate) or invoice (charge to account) created in your financial software.

+

You can use these links for more information and illustrations:

+
    +
  • +

    You can view the specific document created In QuickBooks for a deposit receipt via a link in your Point of Sale sales history list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read various ways to customize Financial Exchange

    +
    • +
+

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_exchangereports.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_exchangereports.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..eb87a75 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_exchangereports.htm @@ -0,0 +1,38 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange Reports

+

Overview | Verify the Exchange of Transactions

+

 

+

Several reports are available to help you verify the success of data exchanges with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

These detailed reports, for receipts, vouchers, customers, vendors, and adjustment memos, provide the document/transaction name and number created in your financial software as well as other information.

+

In the Report Center, select Financial Exchange as the report category and then choose a specific report. All normal report filtering and customization options are available.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Modify reports

+

Work with a displayed report

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_financialcenter.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_financialcenter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e16e3f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_financialcenter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + + +The Financial Center + + + + + + + + + + + +

The Financial Center

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

The Financial Center provides a single access point to all activities related to exchanging data with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. 

+

To access the Financial Center:

+
    +
  • +

    From the Financial menu, select FINANCIAL CENTER.

    +
    • +
+

Or

+
    +
  • +

    Select FINANCIAL CENTER from the Navigator.

    +
    • +
+

image\qbfs_financialcenter.gif

+

From the Financial Center, you can:

+
    +
  • +

    Confirm the connection and last exchange status, and the names of the company files for both programs

    +
    • +
  • +

    Manually initiate a Financial Exchange (select Update QuickBooks Now)

    +
    • +
  • +

    View the activity log to see results of previous exchanges

    +
    • +
+

The following options are available after selecting Show Advanced Options from the Overview page:

+
    +
  • +

    Set up or modify your connection to QuickBooks Desktop with the connection wizard

    +
    • +
  • +

    Import items from QuickBooks Desktop

    +
    • +
  • +

    Recover data (resend for a specified date range) to your QuickBooks Desktop company file in the event of a data loss in QuickBooks Desktop

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bc7e377 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +qbfs_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic.

+ +

Initiate a Financial Exchange

+

View transactions created in QuickBooks

+

Use the Financial Center

+

View the Exchange activity log

+

Troubleshoot Financial Exchange

+

Recover Point of Sale data in QuickBooks

+

 

+

Setting Up Financial Exchange

+

Prepare for Financial Exchange

+

Make the initial connection to QuickBooks

+

Review and customize my Financial Exchange setup

+

Import items from QuickBooks

+

Use Remote Data Sharing (RDS) (Advanced Users)

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_installoption2.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_installoption2.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..98ef2d9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_installoption2.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + +QuickBooks Installed on the Point of Sale Server Workstation and Another Network Workstation + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Installed on the Point of Sale Server Workstation and Another Network Workstation

+

QuickBooks Installation Options | About Server/Client Workstations

+

 

+

Select Print at the top of the help viewer to print this topic for reference.

+

 

+

Summary of this Configuration

+
    +
  • +

    This option can be used if you have only one Point of Sale workstation, which you need to have at the front register but you prefer to use your financial software at another computer (such as in the back office).

    +
    • +
  • +

    This configuration requires a peer-to-peer network with mapped network drives.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can install this way even with a single license of your QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Once configured, the copy of QuickBooks financial software on the Point of Sale Server workstation can be "silent", i.e., it does not ever have to be opened, but it cannot be uninstalled.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Additional Point of Sale or QuickBooks workstations could be added to the network with proper licensing.

    +
    • +
+

To set up this configuration:

+

Be sure that the two computers are properly networked in a peer-to-peer configuration. Refer to your Windows documentation or consult a qualified computer technician if you need assistance in mapping network drives or setting a folder to share access as required in this procedure.

+

For purposes of this procedure we'll refer to the Point of Sale Server Workstation as the "Register" and the QuickBooks financial software computer as the "Office" computer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Install QuickBooks financial software on the Office computer and set up your financial company file.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Office computer, set the folder that contains your QuickBooks company file to "Share" status.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Register (Point of Sale Server) computer, map a drive to the QuickBooks company file folder on the Office computer.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Close QuickBooks financial on the Office computer.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Install QuickBooks financial software on the Register computer, using your existing QuickBooks CD and instructions.

    +
    6. +
+

This is allowed by a single-user QuickBooks license agreement even though you already have QuickBooks installed on your Office computer, provided that multiple users do not access QuickBooks simultaneously from both computers.

+
    +
  1. +

    Launch QuickBooks financial software on the Register computer and log on with Administrator rights. Open your QuickBooks company file that is stored on the Office computer from the Register (across the network, do not open QuickBooks on the Office computer).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Optional: Create a new user in your QuickBooks Financial Software with full Administrator rights called "QBPOS User" or similar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Save your settings and exit QuickBooks on the Register computer.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

To conduct Financial Exchanges:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open QuickBooks financial software and sign in as "Administrator" or as the "QBPOS User" you set up above on the Office computer.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From Point of Sale at the Register, use the Connection Wizard (select Financial Center from the Financial Menu) to connect.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If given the choice during the initial connection, choose the option to "Allow this connection always, even if QuickBooks is not running." If not give this choice during the connection, you can set it up later with these instructions.

    +
    4. +
+

From that point on, Point of Sale will silently connect to QuickBooks to conduct Financial Exchanges. You do not have to ever open QuickBooks on the Register computer or have it open in the Office during Financial Exchanges (you cannot be signed in to QuickBooks on the Office computer during exchanges if you have only a single user license).

+

Your employees cannot access your financial records from the Register (assuming you are using login names and password protection).

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Prepare QuickBooks for Financial Exchange

+

QuickBooks Connection Wizard Overview

+

Conduct Routine Financial Exchanges

+

Customize Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_itemaccounts_limits.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_itemaccounts_limits.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e51c035 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_itemaccounts_limits.htm @@ -0,0 +1,45 @@ + + + + + + +qbfs_itemaccounts_limits + + + + + + + + +

Income Account Mapping Limitations

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

Due to a rule in QuickBooks financial software that allows only one Accounts Receivable or Accounts Payable account per transaction, the following accounts and account types are not allowed to be mapped to the Point of Sale item Income Account field:

+
    +
  • +

    Sales Tax Payable

    +
    • +
  • +

    Undeposited Funds

    +
    • +
  • +

    Accounts Receivable accounts

    +
    • +
  • +

    Accounts Payable accounts

    +
    • +
  • +

    Non-posting accounts

    +
    • +
+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_itemaccts_subaccts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_itemaccts_subaccts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1a17a58 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_itemaccts_subaccts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + +Mapping Item Sub-Accounts by Department or Store + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Map Item Sub-Accounts by Department or Store

+

Financial Exchange Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+

 

+

Your default item accounts for Financial Exchange are set on the Financial page of company preferences. When setting these defaults, you can also choose to have Point of Sale automatically create and use department sub-accounts.

+

(Pro) You can also choose to map item sub-accounts by store.

+

To create and use item sub-accounts:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company and then select the Financial Accounts page from the left-side menu. There may be a slight delay as Point of Sale connects to your financial software.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Basic tab, select the check box titled Automatically create sub-accounts based on and then select Department.

    +
    3. +
+

(Pro) Or select an available alternative.

+

 

+

Example accounts for inventory item in Widgets department at Store 1

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Sub accounts based on:

+		 +

Example Income Accounts

+
+

sub-accounts not enabled

+		 +

Sales:Merchandise

+
+

Department

+		 +

Sales: Merchandise: Widgets

+
+

Department, then Store

+		 +

Sales: Merchandise: Widgets: Store 1

+
+

Store, then Department

+		 +

Sales: Merchandise: Store 1: Widgets

+
+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Use sub-accounts for list, select Income Accounts only (default setting) or Income, COGS, and Asset to use sub-accounts with all three account types.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

When this option is set, your default item accounts will be appended with sub-accounts as specified and the item form in inventory will indicate your settings, though the actual sub-account names are not shown due to space limitations.

+

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Your department (and store) names must be less than 31 characters as this is the maximum length in QuickBooks financial software for each sub-account level.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When creating sub-accounts by store, your Store Names as defined in preferences, are used for the sub-account name.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_payouts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_payouts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d13861 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_payouts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Cash Drawer Payouts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Cash Drawer Payouts

+

Overview | Pay Money out of the Cash Drawer

+

 

+

Cash drawer payouts are sent to QuickBooks as general journal transactions against the Cash in Drawer account and the Cash Drawer Payout expense account (or another expense or liability account you specify when creating the payout).

+

If you pay employee tips from your cash drawer, you should select the Employee Tips Payable account.

+

 

+

image\qbfs_payout.gif

+

 

+

Notes:

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_poa.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_poa.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..86020bb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_poa.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Customer Charge Account Information + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Customer Charge Account Information

+

Customer Charge Accounts Overview | Past Due Accounts

+
+

Basic

+
+

Summary

+

With each Financial Exchange, Point of Sale sends new account transactions (charges or payments), plus any change to the charge account limit made in Point of Sale, to your QuickBooks financial software. In QuickBooks, the transactions are posted to appropriate accounts and customer invoices (new charges) or customer payments (payments on account) are created.

+

Certain account activities may be handled directly in QuickBooks, such as printing and sending out invoices, recording payments received by mail, adding finance charges, controlling account aging, and calculation of past due amounts.

+

QuickBooks sends back to Point of Sale the updated account balance (which overwrites the Point of Sale value), any change in the account limit made in QuickBooks, and any past due amounts and aging information. The latter can be used to alert cashiers and block additional charges to the account in Point of Sale.  The latest edit to the account limit (called Credit Limit in QuickBooks) in either program overwrites the value in the other program.

+

 

+

How Specific Account Transactions Are Sent to QuickBooks

+

Charges to Account Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Payments on Account Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Notes Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

To learn more:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_qbinstall_options.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_qbinstall_options.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d97792 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_qbinstall_options.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + +QuickBooks Financial Software Installation Options + + + + + + + + + + + + +

QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software Installation Options

+

Requirements of Integration | Financial Exchange Overview

+

 

+

If you are integrating Point of Sale with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, there are three options for how the two programs can be installed relative to one another to share data.

+

The three options are summarized here. Use the links provided on this page to get more information.

+

 

+

Installation Option 1:  QuickBooks Desktop financial software installed on the Point of Sale Server Workstation

+
    +
  • +

    This is the simplest and most commonly used configuration.

    +
    • +
  • +

    This is the only choice if you have only one computer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    On a network, the Point of Sale Server Workstation and QuickBooks Desktop would typically be installed in the office, with additional Point of Sale client workstations as the front "registers."

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are new to QuickBooks Desktop financial, create a file there first. Then use the Connection Wizard from within Point of Sale to establish the connection between the programs.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Installation Option 2:  QuickBooks Desktop financial software installed on both the Point of Sale Server Workstation and another Network Computer

+
    +
  • +

    This option can be used if you have only one Point of Sale workstation, which you need to have at the front register but you prefer to use your financial software at another computer (such as in the back office).

    +
    • +
  • +

    This configuration requires a peer-to-peer network with mapped network drives.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can install this way even with a single license of your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Once configured, the copy of QuickBooks Desktop financial software on the Point of Sale Server workstation can be "silent", i.e., it does not ever have to be opened, but it cannot be uninstalled.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Additional Point of Sale or QuickBooks Desktop workstations could be added to the network with proper licensing.

    +
    • +
+

Learn more about this option, including how to set it up.

+

 

+

 

+

Installation Option 3:   QuickBooks Desktop financial software installed only on another Network Computer

+
    +
  • +

    This option, called Remote Data Sharing (or RDS), is the most complex to set up and use, but offers an alternative way to share data across your network.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Uses RDS Server and Client applications which must be installed in addition to Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software. These applications are available for download from our support site.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Both your Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop company files must be open during Financial Exchanges.

    +
    • +
+

Learn more about RDS, including how to get the server/client applications you need to set up this option.

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Prepare QuickBooks Desktop for Financial Exchange

+

QuickBooks Desktop Connection Wizard Overview

+

Customize Financial Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_receipts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_receipts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57d4468 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_receipts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,209 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Sales and Return Receipts + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Sales and Return Receipts

+

Overview | Customize Exchanges | Exchange Reports

+

 

+

Below is a summary of how Point of Sale receipts are transferred to QuickBooks. You can also use the links on this page for more information.

+

Sales receipts are sent to QuickBooks and result in journal transactions and documents as follows:

+
    +
  • +

    Cost of Goods Sold: General Journal transactions are always created in QuickBooks financial software. If using summarized posting, a single entry is created for the combined cost of goods sold per day.

    +
    • +
+

If using detailed posting, separate journal entries are made for each Point of Sale transaction. This makes it easier to reverse out a specific change if necessary. The Point of Sale receipt number is added to the Memo line.

+
    +
  • +

    Sales receipts paid by cash, credit/debit/gift card, and gift certificate create sales receipts: If you send summarized data to QuickBooks, one sales receipt is created in your financial software listing all of these transactions per day.

    +
    • +
+

If using detailed posting, each Point of Sale receipt creates a corresponding individual receipt in your financial software listing item and customer detail (if customer record set to exchange). If you send detailed information only for transactions including charges to customer accounts, then only those receipts include item detail.

+
    +
  • +

    Sales receipts paid by check create sales receipts: These receipts are never consolidated with other transactions, even if you are sending summarized data.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales charged to a customers account create invoices: These invoices are never consolidated with other transactions, even if you are sending summarized data. How account information is exchanged with QuickBooks is explained here.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Return receipts or sales receipt with a negative total create credit memos or, if a credit to a customers account, a customer payment: If you send summarized data to QuickBooks financial software, a single credit memo is created listing all return receipt transactions for cash, check, credit/debit/gift card, and gift certificate per day. Since cash and credit card amounts are totaled per day, these payment types will only appear on a credit memo if the net amount paid in for cash or a particular credit card type (VISA, MasterCard, etc.) is negative. Return receipts that credit a customers account are always sent as an individual customer payment. If using detailed posting, each return receipt creates an individual, corresponding credit memo in your financial software.

    +
    • +
+

Other Amounts that May Be Recorded on Receipts:

+

Discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Tips Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Shipping Charges Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Sales Tax Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Gift Card or Certificate Sales or Redemptions Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If a receipt paid by check or charge to account also contains other payment types (cash, credit card, gift, etc.), those payments will appear on the same receipt or invoice created in QuickBooks financial software.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If your daily returns for any of the summarized payment types (cash, credit/debit/gift card, gift certificate) exceed the daily sales for that payment type, then the daily summarized sales are posted as a credit memo and an invoice instead, instead of as a separate sales receipt and credit memo. This is due to one or more of the following limitations in QuickBooks documents:

    +
    • +
  • +

    The POS payment types used by Point of Sale to balance documents cannot be a positive number on a sales receipt (thus the credit memo/invoice combination is used)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Negative document totals are not allowed

    +
    • +
  • +

    Negative sales tax total is not allowed

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you add new inventory items while making a sale in Point of Sale, but dont assign an item cost at that time (maybe it isnt known?), you may need to periodically make a manual adjustment to your inventory value in QuickBooks. This action transfers sales data to QuickBooks, but does not make an adjustment in your COGs (Cost of Goods Sold) account because the items sold have no cost associated with them.

    +
    • +
+

To learn more:

+ + + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_receivingvouchers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_receivingvouchers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c6fb499 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_receivingvouchers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,99 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Receiving Vouchers + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Receiving Vouchers

+

Overview | Customize Financial Exchange | FAQs

+
+

Basic

+
+

Receiving merchandise into inventory always increases your Inventory Asset account. Other accounts affected and documents created depend on:

+
    +
  • +

    Where you choose to enter vendor billing information (Point of Sale or QuickBooks)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Whether the merchandise has already been paid for

    +
    • +
  • +

    Whether you send summarized or detailed receiving information (controls whether item information is included)

    +
    • +
  • +

    What version of QuickBooks financial software you are using

    +
    • +
+

If you elect to enter billing information in QuickBooks financial software:

+

Use this option if you prefer to handle all vendor billing tasks in your financial software. This is the default setting for new Point of Sale users.

+
    +
  • +

    The vendor billing fields (payee, terms, bill date, invoice/reference #) are NOT available on the receiving voucher form in Point of Sale

    +
    • +
  • +

    All vouchers are sent immediately to QuickBooks as item receipts

    +
    • +
  • +

    When the billing information is received from the vendor, enter it in QuickBooks and the item receipt is converted to a bill in Accounts Payable

    +
    • +
+

If the vendor billing information received and entered in QuickBooks includes charges or adjustments not entered on the original voucher in Point of Sale, such as a freight charges, discounts, or fees, there will be a difference between the documents in the two programs unless you also edit the voucher in Point of Sale to add these items.

+

If you elect to enter billing information in Point of Sale:

+

This is the default setting if you have upgraded from a version of Point of Sale prior to 5.0. If upgrading from Version 5.0, your prior setting is retained.

+
    +
  • +

    The vendor billing fields (payee, terms, bill date, invoice/reference #) are added to the receiving voucher form in Point of Sale

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receiving vouchers are sent to QuickBooks in different ways, depending on whether billing information (Invoice/Ref#) has been entered:

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    If billing information is received and entered when the voucher is initially created, the voucher is sent directly to Accounts Payable as a bill. No general journal entry is created.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If billing information is not initially entered, the voucher is sent to the Unbilled Purchases liability account and a general journal entry is made. Later, when the voucher is edited in Point of Sale to add billing information, the voucher is sent a second time as a bill to Accounts Payable and removed from the Unbilled Purchases account.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the Already Paid check box is selected (meaning you have prepaid the vendor for the merchandise), the voucher is sent as an item receipt whether billing information is entered or not. No general journal entry is made. You should manually apply the previously made amount to the item receipt in QuickBooks.

    +
    • +
+

Fees and Discounts on Vouchers

+

If a voucher with unspread fees and/or discounts is sent to Unbilled Purchases, the fees and discounts will not be taken into account on the initial general journal entry. Instead, the final bill sent to your financial software (once an invoice for the voucher has been received) will be adjusted to reflect any fees or discounts. If you spread these amounts over the item costs, the amounts are reflected in the net item costs.

+

 

+

Note: If you send detailed item information to QuickBooks financial software, individual items will be listed on the QuickBooks document created However, information on General Journal transactions created for vouchers where billing information has not yet been entered never show individual items.

+

 

+

You can use these links for more information:

+
    +
  • +

    You can view the specific document or journal entry created In QuickBooks for a receiving voucher via a link in your Point of Sale receiving history list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read various ways to customize Financial Exchange

    +
    • +
+

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_returnvouchers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_returnvouchers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d015646 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_returnvouchers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Return Vouchers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Return Vouchers

+

Exchange Overview | Customize Exchanges | Return Vouchers

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale return vouchers are sent to QuickBooks as vendor credits.

+
    +
  • +

    If you are entering billing information in Point of Sale and there is no entry in the Invoice/Ref # field, the field is auto-filled with "Credit." If an Invoice/Ref # has been entered, the entry is carried to the QuickBooks Ref. No. credit memo field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you do not enter billing information in Point of Sale, the Ref. No. field on the QuickBooks credit memo shows "Paid".

    +
    • +
  • +

    You must manually apply the vendor credit to open bills for the vendor in your financial software. In QuickBooks, select Pay Bills from the Vendors menu and apply the credit.  Refer to your QuickBooks financial software documentation if you need additional help.

    +
    • +
+

Use these links for more information:

+
    +
  • +

    You can view the specific document created In QuickBooks for a return voucher via a link in your Point of Sale receiving history list.

    +
    • +
+

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_salesdiscounts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_salesdiscounts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..54c174d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_salesdiscounts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Sales Discounts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Sales Discounts

+

Overview | Customize Exchanges | Exchange Reports

+

 

+

By default, Point of Sale sends discounted item sale amounts to your QuickBooks financial software in "net" amounts, i.e., the discount amount is not accounted for separately.

+

The preference setting discussed here can be used to send both the original item price and the discounted price, so that you can use QuickBooks reports to see how discounts are affecting your bottom line.

+

To send separate original and discounted values:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Financial from the left-side menu. There may be a slight delay as Point of Sale connects to your QuickBooks company file.Comapny Preferences > Financial > Send discounted items with

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Change the discounted items setting to Separate original and discounted values.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Creating Discount Accounts in QuickBooks Financial Software

+

Point of Sale will automatically create the necessary discount accounts in your financial software to properly report the discounts. These accounts will be on the same hierarchical level as your item income accounts. For example, if the income for an item is Sales: Merchandise then the created discount account will be Sales: Merchandise Discounts.

+

When necessary, discounts in your financial software are split across tax codes and by item income accounts, reflecting the fact that items on a sale may have different tax codes and income accounts. The discounts are split to maintain accurate tax liability and income reporting.

+

(Pro) If you use the Customer Rewards program in Point of Sale, the discounts given as rewards are handled in the same way, except a separate discount account, Sales: Reward Discounts is used if sending separate discount values. If you use store coupons to give discounts, the discounts given as coupons are handled in the same way, except the items created in QuickBooks to track the discounts will have the Receipt Item Discount Level written to the QuickBooks item description field.

+

 

+

Note: In your QuickBooks financial software, discounts are tracked with "discount' item types. The discount item is added to the transaction to show the discount amount. Discount items can apply to a sold item individually or to a "subtotal" item that totals several items. Due to the way discounts are handled in your financial software, you may notice slight rounding differences between a transaction in Point of Sale and the corresponding transaction in QuickBooks.

+

 

+

For more information:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange: Sales and Return Receipts

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_salestax.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_salestax.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2c51c10 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_salestax.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Sales Tax + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Sales Tax

+

Exchange Overview | Sales Tax Integration with QuickBooks

+

 

+

Sales taxes are reflected in the sales receipts sent to QuickBooks and affect the Sales Tax Payable liability account.

+

For more information:

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_transfers.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_transfers.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4d5d8cf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_transfers.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Transfers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Transfers

+

Exchange Overview | Transfer Merchandise between Stores

+
+

 

+
+

A transfer of merchandise between stores does not result in any net change in your company inventory value. However, if freight charges are entered on the transfer slip or if you have elected to track stores by class in QuickBooks, transfer slips are sent and create a general journal transaction to update accounts accordingly.

+

By default, freight charges are posted to the Freight & Shipping Costs expense and POS Inventory Adjustment accounts, and if tracking stores by class, the Inventory Asset accounts for each store class are updated.

+

You can use these links for more information and illustrations:

+
    +
  • +

    You can view the matching transaction in QuickBooks for a Point of Sale transfer slip via a link in your Point of Sale transfer history list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read various ways to customize Financial Exchange

    +
    • +
+

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_vendors.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_vendors.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9feb747 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_vendors.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Vendors + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Vendors

+

Exchange Overview | Exchange Reports | Vendors Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Existing active vendors from your QuickBooks financial software are automatically added to your Point of Sale vendor list with the first Financial Exchange.

+

New and edited vendor records in either program are then routinely sent to the other with each exchange.

+

The exceptions to this are:

+
    +
  • +

    Vendors flagged as inactive in both programs are not exchanged

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you check the inactive flag when initially adding a new vendor in Point of Sale, that vendor will not be sent to QuickBooks. However, if you list the inactive vendor on a receiving voucher, when that voucher is exchanged, the vendor will be created in QuickBooks.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Occasionally, you may end up with duplicate vendors in Point of Sale. This typically happens when two associates enter the same vendor with slightly different spellings. The merge vendors feature in Point of Sale can be used to combine the duplicates into a single record and merge their purchase histories. When merging vendor records, you also have the option of deleting the duplicate from QuickBooks (highly recommended).

    +
    • +
+

You can use these links for more information and illustrations:

+
    +
  • +

    You can view the matching vendor record in QuickBooks for a Point of Sale vendor via a link in your Point of Sale vendor list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read how vendor payment terms are exchanged here.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read various ways to customize Financial Exchange

    +
    • +
+

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_vendorterms.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_vendorterms.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9facd22 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/qbfs_vendorterms.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +Financial Exchange: Vendor Payment Terms + + + + + + + + + + + +

Financial Exchange: Vendor Payment Terms

+

Exchange Overview | Enter Vendor Billing Information

+
+

Basic

+
+

Vendor payment terms are used to calculate when a bill is due and what (if any) discount percentage should be applied to the bill. The terms defined on the vendor record in Point of Sale are automatically suggested on all purchase orders and receiving vouchers made for that vendor.

+

When exchanging data with QuickBooks, the default payment terms defined in QuickBooks are automatically populated to the vendor record in Point of Sale for imported vendors. Changing the terms in either program updates the other with the same change on the next exchange.

+

If you enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale, adding different terms to a voucher will also add those terms to the QuickBooks terms list, but will not overwrite the default terms for the vendor in either program. The voucher terms will also be carried to the bill created in QuickBooks.

+

You can use these links for more information and illustrations:

+
    +
  • +

    You can view the matching vendor record in QuickBooks for a Point of Sale vendor via a link in your Point of Sale vendor list.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read various ways to customize Financial Exchange

    +
    • +
+

Overview: How QuickBooks handles Point of Sale data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1002.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1002.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6a4db6d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1002.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Access Receipts and Sales History + + + + + + + + + +

Access Receipts and Sales History

+ +

In-help popup

+ +

The following sales tasks can be accessed from the toolbars, the Point of Sale menu, and the I Want To menus on the home page, in sales history, and on a blank receipt form.

+ +

Many sale and customer order tasks can be also accessed from the I Want To menu in other program areas (customers, inventory, receiving, etc.).

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1005.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1005.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..27a6319 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1005.htm @@ -0,0 +1,245 @@ + + + + + + + + +Make a Sale + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Make a Sale

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Charges or Credits | Take Payment | Returns

+ +

 

+

This topic provides the basic instructions for making a sale. Use the How Do I? and other links on this page for advanced options and more information.

+

Click the Click to expand/collapse topic symbols in this procedure to view detailed instructions.
+Only Basic and Pro users can track customers on receipts.

+ +

To make a sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Make a Sale button or the Make a Sale icon within the Navigator.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information drop-down box, scan or type item information to search for the item being sold.Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    3. +
+

OR

+

Click Quick Pick Item to select an item from your pre-defined lists of frequently sold items.

+
    +
  1. +

    If necessary, click the action buttons below the line item to edit the quantity, price, give item discounts, etc.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat until all items being sold have been listed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    (Optional) In the Enter customer name or phone box, type or scan customer information to add the customer to the receipt. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    (Optional) To discount the entire sale (called a global discount), select  Give Discount from the I Want To menu. Select or enter a discount percentage or amount in the popup dialog. Global discounts are shown in the totals area of the receipt.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Click the button for the payment type used by the customer (Cash, Credit, Debit,  etc.) and enter the tendered amount and any requested information. If taking payment by more than one payment type, repeat for each type.  Details

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Print Receipt to record the sale and give the customer a receipt. If change is due the customer, the change amount is displayed.

    +
    7. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The Point of Sale Mobile Sync feature gives you the power to make sales and track your inventory using your mobile phone or tablet.  Make sure to sync to your mobile device to take full advantage of this feature.

    +
    • +
  • +

    In a Pro configuration with multiple stores, Headquarters can make receipts for another store. From the I Want To menu, select Change Store and specify the store for which you are making the receipt.

    +
    • +
+

Learn more

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

E-mail receipts to customers

+

Receipt field descriptions

+

Customize printed receipts and other documents

+

Multi-store Sales

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1006.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1006.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b959339 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1006.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + +Change the Sale Price Level + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change the Sale Price Level

+

Sales Overview | Make a Sale | Use Price Levels

+

 

+

Your default sales price level, specified in company preferences is automatically used when you make a sale. You can change the price level on a receipt as necessary before taking payment and saving.

+

The current price level is referred to as the active price level and any discounts given are applied against this active price level.

+

To change the price level on a sales receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Change Price Level.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select a new price level from the Price Level dialog.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Close.

    +
    5. +
+

If you already had items on the receipt when changing the price level, you are asked if you want to update those items to the new price level.

+
    +
  • +

    Answer Yes and the prices of previously listed items are changed to the new price level. Any previously given item discounts are overwritten by the new price.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Answer No and the previously listed items are left as is. This option allows you to price different items at different levels on a single sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Items listed after the change will automatically reflect the new price level.

    +
    • +
+

(Pro) To change the price level on a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

     Display the customer order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Price Level field (in the Totals area), select a new price level from the drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
+

The same procedure applies to updating items already on the customer order as described above for receipts.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The next sale will automatically revert to your default price level. If you want to change the price level used for all sales, change the default level in company preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Temporarily changing your default price level is one way to hold a sale. For example, if you have a 10% off price level, you could have a weekend 10% off sale just by changing your default price level for the weekend. Don't forget to change the default price level back to your normal price level when the sale is over!. Pro users might find Price Manager's discount pricing feature a better way to accomplish this.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Basic, Pro) When selling to customer with an associated price level different than the default price level you are prompted to change to the customer's pricing. If you answer Yes, and items were previously listed on the receipt, they are automatically updated to the customers price level.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) In a multi-store configuration, each store can set its own default price level.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Give a discount

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1012.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1012.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..213e28d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1012.htm @@ -0,0 +1,88 @@ + + + + + + + +Reverse a Receipt + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse a Receipt

+

Merchandise Returns |  | Find a Receipt

+

 

+

Saved receipts cannot be deleted and editing of receipts is restricted to certain informational fields. If information other than what can be edited needs to be corrected, you can reverse the receipt. Reversing a receipt corrects your sales history, inventory quantities, and customer records by creating an equal, but opposite, transaction.

+

This procedure is not recommended for processing routine merchandise returns from a customer.

+

To reverse a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and display the receipt in your Sales History list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, click Reverse.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If prompted, enter additional information. For some payment types (credit, debit) a message informs you that continuing will automatically result in credits back to the customer on their credit/debit account.

    +
    2. +
+

A reversing receipt is automatically created and added to the Sales History list, marked Reversing in the Status field (displayed in the Sales History list only). The original receipt will be marked Reversed.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Reversing creates a new receipt with the opposite effect of the original. It does this by creating a new receipt of the opposite type, in other words a sales receipt is reversed by creating an identical return receipt. Reversing a sales receipt adds the sold items back to inventory and reversing a return receipt deducts items from inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can use a Reverse, Copy, and Correct approach to make a new receipt with the correct information. First, reverse the original, incorrect receipt as described here. Then, begin a new receipt by copying the original. Finally, make corrections to the copy and save as usual to record the new corrected receipt. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read how reversing receipts of specific payment types is handled (e.g., credit card, debit, check, gift card, etc.).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software and if the original receipt has already been sent to QuickBooks Desktop, then the reversing receipt is also sent and posts in the normal manner. The new records and account entries created in QuickBooks Desktop cancel the effect of the original receipt. The original entries are not edited or removed. If the original receipt has not yet been sent, then both are flagged "Do Not Send" and there will be no entries made in your financial software for the transaction.

    +
    • +
+

Pro Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Special considerations apply to reversing receipts at remote stores. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you delete an item from inventory, but then reverse a receipt that includes that item, Point of Sale recreates the item in inventory, so that quantity changes resulting from the reversal can be recorded. Learn moreClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Merchandise returns and exchanges

+

Display a customer's purchase history

+

Find a receipt

+

Sales overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1014.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1014.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c79235 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1014.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment and Give Change: General Procedure + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment and Give Change: General Procedure

+

Correct or Clear Payments | Open the Cash Drawer

+

 

+

This topic is the general instructions for taking payment and giving change on a sale.

+

To see instructions for a specific payment type, click a link:  credit card, debit/ATM card, check, gift certificate, gift card, or account charge/store credit.

+

When you have completed the receipt, the total Amount Due is shown at the bottom of the receipt. To the left of the amount due are the payment buttons, one for each payment type you accept. In the example shown, Debit is not an accepted payment type so is grayed out.

+

    

+

Set sales preferences - Define the accepted payment types, a default payment type, and other sales options.

+

To take payment and give change:

+

You can accept the full amount by one payment type or split the payment over multiple types.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the button for a payment type.

    +
    2. +
+

The Amount field for the selected payment type shows the total amount due, in this case $75.37.

+

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Accept or enter the amount tendered by the customer:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If the customer tenders the exact full amount by this payment type, simply click OK.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If customer tenders a different amount, enter the new amount over the old amount. For example, if the customer gives you $80 cash for this $ 75.37 sale, type 80 over the 75.37. It is not necessary to type the decimal point and zeroes after the 80.  

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter (or scan) any additional information requested for this payment method, such as check number or credit card information. Follow the instructions in the dialog to complete the payment.

    +
    2. +
+

You are returned to the receipt, with the accepted payment type flagged (with a check mark).

+
    +
  1. +

    If there is a remaining balance due, repeat Steps 1-3 for each additional payment type until the amount tendered meets or exceeds the total amount due.  

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If change is due the customer, it will default to cash change and be displayed in the Totals area of the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

To give change by a type other than cash, click the appropriate payment button. The selected payment dialog opens, this time with the change option pre-selected (refund, credit, sale of gift card, etc.) . Enter any requested information and save.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Print Receipt and follow the print instructions.

    +
    2. +
+

Alternatively, select Save Only to record the sale without printing the receipt.

+

On applicable sales, the cash drawer opens and the change window is displayed to remind you of the change amount and type to give the customer.

+

 

+ +

Tip: Give cash back while ringing up a purchaseClick to display a popup topic

+ +

Tip: Handle payment by travelers checkClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Print gift receipts

+

Make a sale

+

Take customer order deposits

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1015.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1015.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ae9207e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1015.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + +Open the Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + +

Open the Cash Drawer

+

Take Payments on Sales | Record Cash Drawer Payouts

+

 

+

Point of Sale is set up to automatically open a configured cash drawer as you complete a receipt using certain payment methods, such as cash or check. You can specify which payment methods open the cash drawer in company sales preferences.

+

The cash drawer also can be opened manually as explained below.

+

To open the cash drawer manually:

+
    +
  • +

    From the POS Home Page, select Open the Cash Drawer from the Point of Sale menu.

    +
    • +
+

Or

+
    +
  • +

    Press <Ctrl + F8>

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Sales overview

+

Compatible cash drawers

+

Troubleshoot the cash drawer

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1016.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1016.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7f557de --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1016.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + +Returns and Exchanges from Customers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Returns and Exchanges from Customers

+

Display Customer Purchase History  | Sales History

+

 

+

Merchandise returns and exchanges are recorded on receipts.

+

To process a merchandise return or exchange:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic procedure for Making a Sale, listing the return items on a sales receipt and clicking  Return Item to make the quantity negative.

    +
    2. +
+

+

OR

+

In your sales history, find and select the original receipt and then select Accept Return/Exchange from the I Want To menu.

+
    +
  • +

    The Take Return/Exchange wizard is opened, with the items and prices from the original receipt listed. Select the check box in the Return column for the items being returned and then click Add Selected Items. The selected item(s) are added to a new receipt with a return quantity of one (- 1) and at the same price as the original sale.

    +
    • +
+

     

+
    +
  • +

    If you select Accept Return/Exchange before selecting a receipt, the initial page of the wizard is a receipt search function. Enter the customer name or another search keyword to find the original receipt and then proceed as above.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    On the new receipt, adjust quantities of returned items if necessary and list any new purchase items.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter any other requested item information, such as serial numbers (Pro).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Take payment or give a refund as appropriate:

    +
      +
    • +

      If money is due the customer, it is suggested as cash change. Click a different payment type button to give the refund by another method. Ensure that the refund option is selected in the payment dialog.

      +
      • +
    • +

      Refunds cannot be made to a debit/ATM card. Refund the amount as cash, gift card/certificate, or another method per your store policy.

      +
      • +
    +
    4. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Save and print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can sell new items on the same receipt on which you are accepting returns. Simply take payment or give change based on the net total of the receipt .

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software and the exchange is for a charge account customer, be aware that putting both return and sales items on a single receipt will create only one document in your financial software, based on the net amount of the receipt. If negative, a customer payment or credit memo is created. If positive, a customer invoice is created. If you always want customer payments/credit created for returns and invoices for sales, record returns and sales on separate receipts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The item(s) returned by the customer are added back to inventory. If the merchandise is unsalable, you should create a quantity adjustment memo to remove it from inventory or a return voucher if the merchandise is being returned to your vendor for credit.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Display a customer's purchase history

+

Make a sale

+

Reverse a receipt

+

How receipts are transferred to QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1018.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1018.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fd8a04c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1018.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit Receipt Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Receipt Items

+

Add Receipt Items | Edit Saved Receipts | Returns

+

 

+

The items listed on a receipt can be edited anytime before saving to change the quantity, price, or give a discount. This procedure can also be used for any of the following less-common edits:

+
    +
  • +

    Change an items tax code for special tax handling

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit the item description on service or non-inventory items

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sell a special order item (Pro)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Enter item serial numbers (Pro)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change the sales Associate on a line-item basis for commission purposes (Pro)

    +
    • +
  • +

    View item quantities at other stores (Pro with multiple stores)

    +
    • +
+

To edit a listed item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the item you want to edit in the receipt item list.

    +
    2. +
+

If you just listed the item, it is automatically highlighted and this step is not necessary.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click an action button below the item:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

     Qty + and Qty : Changes sales quantity up or down 1 unit with each click.

    +
    • +
  • +

     Qty/Price/Discount: Edit quantity or price, or give a discount, in the Price & Discount window.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit: Open the Item Properties window and edit other information, such as item description or tax code. Pro users can enter a serial number or assign commissions on this window.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Return: If this item is being returned by the customer. This choice makes the quantity negative.  Learn more about taking returns.

    +
    • +
  • +

     Remove: Delete the item from the receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Or, make changes directly in the item list. You may have to add columns to the list for this option to be available.

    +
    • +
+

When selling a miscellaneous item, the Price & Discount window automatically opens so you can enter a quantity and price.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Any time you manually edit the price of an item on a receipt, Point of Sale considers it a discounteven if you mark the price up, which is considered a negative discount. Also, when editing an items price, be aware that the new price you enter will override the price set by the active price level or any discount assigned to the customer. Read more about giving discounts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You cannot edit the items on a receipt after the receipt has been saved. If an error is discovered after saving a receipt, you can reverse the receipt and then make a new corrected one.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Make a sale

+

Delete listed items

+

Sell service and non-inventory Items

+

Special orders (Pro)

+

Sales overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1022.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1022.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..510baf0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1022.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Display Customer Purchase History + + + + + + + + + + + +

Display Customer Purchase History

+

Sales Returns | Exchanges | Sales Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

This information applies while making a sales receipt. You can also access customer history directly from the customer list or record.

+

To display a customer's purchase history:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the customer on the receipt in the normal manner.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click the View/Edit button to the right of the customer name on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

+

The customer record is displayed, including a summary of the customer's purchase history.  Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    When done, close the customer window to return to the receipt in progress.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    (Pro) This feature is also available from customer orders and open customer orders are displayed in the customer's purchase history.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Edit a saved receipt

+

Reverse and correct a receipt

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1028.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1028.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..78e3d7f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1028.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +Associate vs. Cashier + + + + + + + + + + + +

Associate vs. Cashier

+

Sales Overview | Employees & Security | Track Commissions

+
+

Pro

+
+

Sales documents (receipts, customer orders) have both a Cashier field and an Associate field.

+
    +
  • +

    The Cashier field records the employee creating the document (the logged-in user if requiring employees to sign in). If you are not requiring logins, but have defined your employees, a name can be selected from the drop-down list at the top of the document.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Associate field records the employee to whom a sales commission is to be paid. The Associate defaults to be the same as the cashier but can be changed for the entire sale or for individual items. This allows you to designate employee commissions on a line-item basis.  Exception: If the receipt is selling items from a customer order, the Associate is carried from the customer order.

    +
    • +
+

If you change the document Associate after listing items on the document you are asked if you want to assign this Associate to all listed items.

+

Examples

+

Example 1: You have one associate working the floor, servicing customers. You pay the associate a commission for the sales she generates. You also have a separate cashier that works the counter, ringing up the sales once the sales associate hands off the customer. The cashier does not earn sales commissions. The cashier should log in to create the receipt, and his name will be auto-filled as the Cashier. The cashier selects the sales associates name in the Associate field at the top of the receipt form. This ensures that the sales associate will be credited for the sale of all commission-eligible items on the sale.

+

Example 2: You have multiple sales associates working the floor in different departments. Each is paid a commission for the sales they generate within their respective areas. You also have a cashier that does not receive commissions, as described above. When the customer comes to the counter to complete the sale, the cashier identifies the sales associate item-by-item for all of the sold merchandise, by clicking Edit and selecting the Associate from the drop-down list in the  Assign this items commission to field in the item dialog). In this way, each of the associates involved will get credit for the sales in their responsibility area.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track employees without requiring logins

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1029.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1029.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..20c7742 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1029.htm @@ -0,0 +1,72 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter a Customer on a Receipt + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter a Customer on a Receipt

+

Customer Overview | Make a Sale

+
+

Basic

+
+

Entering customers when making sales is optional; though it can be required with a company preference setting. Entering customers allows you to build customer purchase histories and to offer customer-specific discounts, price levels, and tax locations.

+

Any customer on file can be entered and a new customer can be added while completing a sale.

+

To enter a customer on a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Customer field, begin typing the customer last name (recommended) or other search keyword (first name, phone number, company name, etc).

    +
    2. +
+

As you type, Point of Sale shows a drop-down list of your matching customers, separated into last name matches and matches using all customer fields. If there are last name matches, they are displayed first. Click the results line to open all field matches if necessary.

+

+

Option: With no entry in the field, you can click the icon to show your entire customer list. You can scroll through the list to look for the customer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click a name to select it. Keyboard users can use the arrow up/down keys to move through the list and <Enter> to make a selection.

    +
    2. +
+

The customer is added to the customer field on the receipt and their phone number and address is displayed for confirmation.

+
    +
  • +

    If the customer has an associated discount, price level, or special tax handling, it is suggested or automatically applied to the sale

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the customer isn't in your list, click Add New Customer to create a new customer record

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click the View/Edit button to open the customer record or the Delete button to remove the customer from the receipt

    +
    • +
+

Customer field on receipt

+

Not all customer information is displayed on a receipt. For example, the customer's charge account information and check acceptance status are not displayed. However, you will be notified if a credit limit is exceeded, if checks are not accepted, or if a reward is available for the customer.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customer charge accounts

+

Customer rewards program

+

Add a new customer

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1033.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1033.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..79668e9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1033.htm @@ -0,0 +1,222 @@ + + + + + + + + +Give a Discount + + + + + + + + + + + +

Give a Discount

+

Make a Sale

+

 

+

There are several ways to discount a sale.  Click the discount type you wish to learn about?

+

Manual item discount Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Global discount (to entire sale) Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer discount Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Customer reward Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Automatic discounts Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Coupons Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

While not considered discounts for reporting purposes, you can also use markdown price levels  to give a customer a different price.

+

Pro Note: The same discount options (except rewards) apply to customer orders. The procedures for applying discounts on customer orders is the same, although button names may be slightly different on the customer order forms. Discounts given on a customer order are automatically carried to the final sales receipt.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Discount priority and conflicts

+

Discount pricing overview

+

How are discounts sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software?

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1049.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1049.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6b261c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1049.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + +Apply Tax to Sales + + + + + + + + + + + +

Apply Tax to Sales

+

Sales Tax Overview | Sales Tax FAQs | Configure Sales Tax

+

 

+

If you are configured to collect sales tax, the tax is automatically calculated and applied to each sale:

+
    +
  • +

    The sales tax locations and sales tax codes you have set up in company preferences

    +
    • +
  • +

    How your tax codes are assigned to inventory items

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Basic) Whether or not the customer has been assigned to a sales tax location or flagged as tax-exempt, in which case you are prompted to collect (or not collect) tax appropriately

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you have multiple stores, the default tax location selected at each store

    +
    • +
+

If necessary, the tax code assigned to an item or the tax location applied to the entire sale can be manually changed on a sales receipt before saving.

+

To change the tax code of an item being sold:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the item on the document.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight the item and then click Edit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Item Properties dialog, select a new tax code from the drop-down list in the Tax Code field.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click OK.

    +
    5. +
+

The item tax amount and the receipt total are recalculated.

+

To change the tax location for the entire sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the  receipt displayed, select Change Tax Location from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

The Change Tax Location window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a new tax location.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Choose Select to close the window.

    +
    3. +
+

This change can be made before or after items are added to the receipt.  If items were previously added, the sales tax will be recomputed to reflect the new tax location.

+

 

+

Pro Note: The same procedures apply to customer orders. You can also change the tax code directly in the item list on Customer Orders, if the Tax Code column is displayed.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

How do I change the default tax location used for all sales at my store?

+

How do I collect tax on shipping amounts?

+

How do I collect tax only when an items unit price exceeds a set threshold?

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1054.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1054.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6e7938f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1054.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + + + +Specific Payment Methods + + + + + + + + + + +

Specific Payment Methods

+

Payment Overview | Correct or Clear Payments

+

 

+

Read the following topics for details about processing different payment methods at point of sale.

+

Payment by cash

+

Payment by credit card

+

Payment by debit/ATM card

+

Payment by check

+

Charge to customer account (or apply store credit)

+

Take a payment on customer account (or give store credit)

+

Redeem a gift card

+

Redeem a gift certificate

+

Tip: Handling payment by travelers check

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Merchant Service overview

+

Gift Card Service overview

+

Make a sale

+

Merchandise returns

+

Sales overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1062.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1062.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..de9b755 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1062.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + + +Sales Exchanges + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Exchanges

+

Sales Returns | Sales Overview

+ +

This topic has been hidden. Info for exchanges combined with return topic.

+ +

When a customer returns an item to exchange for another, you are doing two transactions on one receipt: a return of one item and a sale of another. Point of Sale will automatically calculate any difference in item prices and sales tax.

+

To handle a merchandise exchange:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic sale procedure, listing both items directly on the receipt and selecting Make this item a return for the returned item. For more information on this procedure, see Making a Sales Receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

+

 

+

OR

+

With the original sales receipt selected in sales history or the customer's history, select Exchange Items from the I Want To menu. This method allows you to verify the item prices and quantities from the original receipt.

+

The Merchandise Return wizard is opened, with the items and prices from the original receipt listed.
+You can customize the columns in this window.

+

 

+

+

 

+

Select the items being exchanged in the upper list using the checkboxes. Change the quantity if necessary.

+

Then enter the new exchange item in the bottom list using standard item listing procedures. Select Accept Exchange when done. The return and new sale item quantities and prices are transferred to the sales receipt and the amount due from or to the customer is calculated for you.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter any requested item information, such as serial numbers (Pro).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Take payment or give change, as applicable, for any difference and then save and print the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    If money is due the customer, enter the amount in the Change column on the payment widow.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To refund a charge account customer, enter the amount in the Account Payment field.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If refunding to a credit or gift card using the QuickBooks POS Merchant or Gift Service, enter the amount in the Credit Card Refund or Gift Card Sell field and authorize using the same card as was used on the original sale. A credit will be made to the cardholder's credit card account or the gift card.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Refunds cannot be made to a debit/ATM card. Refund the amount as cash, gift card/certificate, or another method per your store policy.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks financial software and the exchange is for a charge account customer, be aware that putting both return and sales items on a single receipt will create only one document in your financial software, based on the net amount of the receipt. If negative, a customer payment or credit memo is created. If positive, a customer invoice is created. If you always want customer payments/credit created for returns and invoices for sales, record returns and sales on separate receipts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The item(s) returned by the customer are added back to inventory. If the merchandise is unsalable, you should create a quantity adjustment memo to remove it from inventory or a return voucher if the merchandise is being returned to your vendor for credit.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1068.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1068.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cd14982 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1068.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + + +Sell Service and Non-Inventory Items + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell Service and Non-Inventory Items

+

Sales Overview | Inventory Item Types

+

 

+

Service items are typically used to charge for repairs, alterations, warranty work, or other non-merchandise charges. Service items can be used to charge for labor by the hour (see note below). On-hand quantities are not tracked for service items in inventory (always = 0).

+

Non-inventory items are identical to service items in that they always have a zero on-hand quantity in inventory. Non-inventory items can be used to record the sale of miscellaneous charges or fees or for selling incidental items not individually tracked in inventory.

+

Having two item types for which quantities are not tracked in inventory allows you to categorize and send non-merchandise sales to your QuickBooks financial software using two separate accounts.  

+

To list a service or non-inventory item:

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use decimal quantities

+

Charge for services by the hour

+

Collect government-mandated fees

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1089.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1089.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab883b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt1089.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + +Pay Money out of the Cash Drawer (Payouts) + + + + + + + + + + +

Pay Money out of the Cash Drawer (Payouts)

+

Open the Cash Drawer | Sales Overview

+

 

+

Cash sometimes needs to be removed from the cash drawer. For example, you may remove cash from the cash drawer to buy office supplies, make a donation,  purchase pizza for the office party, or to have less cash on hand for security reasons.

+

To record a cash drawer payout:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Home Page, select New Payout from the Point of Sale menu

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From a new receipt or your sales history, select New Payout from the I Want to Menu.

+

The Cash Paid Out dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    If you are not requiring employee logins, enter your name in the Cashier field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the amount in the Amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If you are using QuickBooks Desktop financial software, select a QuickBooks account from the drop-down list in the Account field.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    This is the account that the payout amount will be balanced against in QuickBooks Desktop. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A default payout expense account can be defined in company preferences and will be suggested.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If paying out tip/gratuity amounts collected on sales, select the Employee Tips Payable liability account (or a custom account if you have created custom account mappings).

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    (Required) Record the reason for the payout in the Comment field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click OK.

    +
    3. +
+

A Payout receipt is generated and placed in your sales history. The amount of the payout is recorded as a negative amount.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    On X/Z-Out reports, the term "paid out" typically refers to money or other payment given to the customer for any reason, such as giving change for a normal sales receipt or refunding cash to a customer on a return. However, in the list of non-currency media contained at the end of X/Z-Out reports, there is a list of payouts, meaning cash removed from the cash drawer using the payout feature as described above. It is important to be aware of the distinction.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Handling bank deposits after Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_copyandcorrect.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_copyandcorrect.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ad7307 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_copyandcorrect.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Copy and Correct a Reversed Receipt + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy and Correct a Reversed Receipt

+

Sales Overview | Find a Receipt

+

 

+

This procedure typically follows reversing a receipt. Copying and correcting a reversed receipt allows you to adopt the parts of the original receipt that you want to keep, and edit the parts that were inaccurate, to make a new, correct receipt.

+

To copy and correct a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and reverse the original receipt in your sales history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight or display the original receipt in your sales history again (status of Reversed).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the I Want to Menu, select Copy.

    +
    4. +
+

A new receipt is created with the same information as the original, except payment information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make any necessary changes to correct the information on the new receipt.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Record payments for the receipt as usual. Typically, you would record payment/change by the same methods as the original.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save & Print.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Pro Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Item serial numbers are not copied during this procedure. You will have to re-enter serial numbers, if applicable.

    +
    • +
  • +

    In a multi-store configuration, special considerations apply to correcting saved receipts at remote stores. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Display a customer's purchase history

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_govtfees.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_govtfees.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..633db62 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_govtfees.htm @@ -0,0 +1,112 @@ + + + + + + +Collect Government-mandated Fees + + + + + + + + + + + +

Collect Government-mandated Fees

+Use Non-Inventory Items | Sales Overview | Sales Tax Overview +

 

+

If you are required to collect government-mandated fees on the sale of certain items, such as for recycling or hazardous materials disposal, we recommend using a non-inventory item, which gives you the ability to track and report on these fees in a variety of ways.

+

The following is one example for handling this. Adjust this procedure to meet the specific requirements in your area.

+

Example: Waste Recycling Fee

+

You sell electronics and are required to collect a waste recycling fee on the sale of each TV you sell. This fee must be applied separately from sales tax and is not itself subject to sales tax. You need reporting capabilities that allow you to track and pay these fees to a government agency periodically.

+
    +
  1. +

    Set up a vendor, with the name of the agency to which you pay the fees collected. (Point of Sale Free users, skip this step.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In inventory, add a non-inventory item:

    +
    3. +
+

If the fee varies by TV size or model, you can set up a separate non-inventory item for each or set up one fee item and edit it to enter the fee amount as adding to a sale receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in the item fields. In our example:

    +
    2. +
+

Vendor The vendor set up in Step 1.

+

Department Use the TV department or set up and use a "Fee" department, depending on how you want to track and report the fees collected.

+

Description   "Waste Recycling Fee" or similar.

+

Attribute/Size (optional) If the fee varies and you are setting up a separate fee item for each, use these fields to identify the specifics of the item to which this fee applies, such as 20, 25, 32, 42, etc. for TV sizes.

+

Price The fee amount.

+

Average Unit cost Typically $0.  (Point of Sale Free users, skip this step.)

+

Tax Code Any of your non-taxable codes, such as Exempt.

+

QuickBooks Information If you want this fee to be recorded in QuickBooks financial software to accounts other than the default for non-inventory items, select the accounts from the drop-down lists.

+
    +
  1. +

    Save the item.

    +
    2. +
+

To charge the fee on sales:

+
    +
  1. +

    List both the TV being sold and the non-inventory fee item on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Edit the fee description or amount, if necessary.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Take payment for the full amount due and save/print the receipt.

    +
    4. +
+

The printed sales receipt will list the fee and the fee amount.

+

To report on fees collected:

+
    +
  1. +

    Run a sales report for the reporting period; e.g. monthly, quarterly, yearly.

    +
    2. +
+

Tip: Use the General Sales - Vendor Summary or General Sales - Department Summary report, depending on how configured.

+
    +
  1. +

    Modify the report to:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Change the title (on Header & Footer tab) to something like "Waste Recycling Fees Collected."

    +
    • +
  • +

    Filter to include only the vendor or department you set up for the fee item(s).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Include the columns of data you wish to see.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    To quickly run this report in the future, without having to re-enter title and filter information, memorize it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you do not want the fees collected to show up in your regular merchandise sales reports, filter the reports to exclude the department or vendor set up for the fee item(s).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Depending on how you set up the item and your account mappings to QuickBooks, you may be able to run reports in your financial software for these fees.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_ingenico2100_note.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_ingenico2100_note.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..45e1061 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_ingenico2100_note.htm @@ -0,0 +1,49 @@ + + + + + + +receipt_ingenico2100_note + + + + + + + + + + +

Notes: Using the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 PINpad

+

Popup topic; has been hidden.

+

 

+

Step 1: The customer can swipe their card at anytime; they do not have to wait for you to go to the receipt Payment window.

+
    +
  • +

    The customer selects credit or Debit as the transaction type

    +
    • +
  • +

    If Debit is selected, customer enters their PIN and, if allowed, a cash back amount

    +
    • +
+

Step 2: If the customer finished entering information on the PIN pad before you reached the Payment window, the receipt amount is auto-filled in the appropriate payment field and the authorization window is opened. Skip to Step 5 in this case. If you selected take payment before the customer finished, complete Step 3 and then skip to Step 5.

+

Step 5: The customer must select ok on the PIN pad to approve the total transaction amount . (You will see the "Waiting for customer input" message until customer approves the amount.)

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_acctcharge.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_acctcharge.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..07a6896 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_acctcharge.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + + +Charge a Purchase to Customer Account (or Apply a Credit) + + + + + + + + + + +

Charge a Purchase to Customer Account (or Apply a Credit)

+

Maintain Customer Accounts | Take Payments on Account

+
+

Basic

+
+

Use this procedure to charge a purchase to a customer's account or to apply a store credit to a sale.

+

Note: Applying a store credit is essentially the same as charging a purchase on account and the same procedure is used.

+

To charge a sale to a customers account:

+
    +
  1. +

    List the items and customer on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Account payment button. The Charge Account dialog is opened with Charge to account pre-selected and the full sale amount suggested in the Charge Amount field. The customer's current account balance is displayed for reference.

    +
    3. +
+

+
    +
  1. +

    To charge the full amount to the customer's account, just click Save.

    +
    2. +
+

To charge other than the full amount, type the new amount and then click  Save.

+
    +
  1. +

    If only a portion of the purchase amount was charged, take payment for the remaining balance by another payment type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save and print the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You must enable account charges and assign an account limit on the customer record before the account charge option is available. If you attempt to enter an account charge on a non-account customer, and you have security rights to edit account information, Point of Sale will prompt you to enable charges and set a limit directly from the sales receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The customer's account balance and available credit is immediately updated on the customer's record at this store.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale will block additional charges if insufficient credit is available. The block can be overridden by an employee with adequate security rights or by using the manager override function.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can configure Point of Sale to print two copies of account charge receipts one for the customer and a signature copy for you to keep.

    +
    • +
+

If Point of Sale is integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software the following also apply:

+
    +
  • +

    On the next Financial Exchange, the account charge receipt is sent to QuickBooks Desktop and posted to the customers account.

    +
    • +
  • +

    QuickBooks Desktop will return the new account balance and any amount past due so that you have an updated balance and available credit amount to reference on the next sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Account statements can be sent to customer's from QuickBooks Desktop. Customer payments on account can be entered in either program and will update the balance in the other with the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Take a payment on account

+

Make a sale

+

Correct or clear payments

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_cash.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_cash.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0c812ee --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_cash.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Take Payment by Cash + + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment by Cash

+

Payment Overview | Correct or Clear Payments

+

To take payment by cash:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Cash button.  

    +
    2. +
+

The Cash dialog opens, with the balance due displayed in the Amount field.

+

+
    +
  1. +

    Accept or enter the amount tendered by the customer:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If the customer tenders the exact full amount by cash, simply click Save (if you have accidentally cleared the amount, click Exact Amount to put the balance due back in the Amount field).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Next Dollar to increase the amount to the next whole dollar, e.g., 76.00 in the example shown.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If customer tenders a different amount, type the new amount over the old amount. For example, if the customer gives you $80 cash for a $ 75.37 sale, type 80 over the 75.37. It is not necessary to type the decimal point and zeroes after the 80.  

    +
    • +
+

OR

+

Click the denomination buttons to enter the tendered amount (e.g., click $20 four times to enter $80).

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save to confirm the cash payment.  You are returned to the sales receipt form. The cash payment and, if applicable, change due are shown in the totals area of the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Open the cash drawer

+

Other payment methods

+

Make a sale

+

Sales overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_check.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_check.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4254f6e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_check.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment or Give Change by Check + + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment or Give Change by Check

+

Payment Overview | Correct or Clear Payments

+

To accept a check as payment:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Check button on the receipt. The check dialog is displayed with the balance due in the Amount field.

    +
    2. +
+

+
    +
  1. +

    Ensure that Accept Check is selected and enter the check amount and number.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

You are returned to the receipt, with the check payment shown in the totals area and the Check button flagged (with a check mark).

+

If the check amount was more than the purchase amount, the balance is shown as cash change to give the customer.

+

To give change by check:

+

After taking an overpayment, change is always defaulted to cash on the receipt. Use this procedure to write a store check to give change instead:  

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Check button.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Check dialog, ensure that Write Check is selected, and then enter the check amount and check number.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save. The receipt totals area is updated to show the check issued as change.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Tip: Take payment by travelers checkClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Basic/Pro Notes

+
    +
  • +

    Whether or not checks should be accepted from a given customer is recorded in the Accept Checks field on the customers record. If check is selected as the payment method and the customer's record indicates that checks should not be accepted, you are alerted.

    +
    • +
  • +

    An employee with sufficient security rights can override a customers Do not Accept Checks setting and accept a check anyway. An employee that does not have security rights to do so cannot accept a check as payment from such a customer, but an employee with override rights can log in over the first employee and accept the check at their discretion. (Refer to Employees and Security for more information about setting security rights.)

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Open the cash drawer

+

Other payment methods

+

Make a sale

+

Sales overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_correcting.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_correcting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1a3ffb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_correcting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Correct or Clear Receipt Payments + + + + + + + + + + + +

Correct or Clear Receipt Payments

+

Take Payments | Sales Overview

+

 

+

If a payment is entered in error, it can be corrected or cleared anytime prior to saving the receipt. See the notes below this procedure for restrictions and additional information on clearing specific payment types.

+

To correct or clear receipt payments:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the payment button for the payment type/change that was entered in error.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Remove this Payment to remove the amount.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    For some payment types, the remove option is labeled Void.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter new payment amounts/types to complete the sale.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save and/or print normally.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If the receipt has already been saved, you cannot remove payment types, you will have to reverse the receipt and create a new one instead.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a credit card payment has already been authorized, but the receipt not yet saved, the charge will be voided and does not appear on the cardholders statement. Enter revised payment information and save/print normally. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Voiding a gift card transaction results in the amount being returned (or subtracted) from the gift card balance. Point of Sale connects to the service again to adjust the card balance.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Debit payments, if authorized via the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, have already affected the customers bank account. Debit payments cannot be refunded to the debit card. Therefore, a debit payment cannot be deleted from the receipt, nor can the receipt be canceled or voided. The receipt must be finished as is, or the cashier can manually enter an equal amount by another payment and change method, such as cash, to balance the receipt and refund the debit amount to the customer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Any information related to the deleted payment (e.g., check or gift certificate number) are cleared.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If deposits have been used as payment on the sale (as might be the case when selling customer order items), clearing the deposit will return it to the referenced order.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Specific payment methods

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_debit.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_debit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1c05a0e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_debit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + +Take Payment by Debit/ATM Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment by Debit/ATM Card

+

Payment Overview | Void a Debit Card Payment

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

To take full payment with one debit card: (modifications for splitting payment are covered here)

+

Note for users of the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 or 3070 PIN padClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Debit as the payment type.

    +
    2. +
+

The Debit Card dialog is opened with the full sale amount pre-filled in the Amount field.

+
    +
  1. +

    Swipe or insert the debit card and, if allowed, select a cash back amount.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Authorize.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Have customer enter their PIN and select OK on the PIN pad.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Have customer approve the total transaction amount by selecting OK.

    +
    5. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

+

If both of the following are true, Point of Sale will process the transaction and print the receipt without further action on your part. This allows you to return to servicing the customer.

+ +

If either of these are not true, continue with the following steps.

+
    +
  1. +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
    2. +
+

Authorized: The debit has been approved. Select OK to close the card dialog.

+

Declined: The debit was not approved. Select Cancel to close the Debit window and return to the payment screen. Ask the customer to provide a different form of payment.

+
    +
  1. +

    Wait for the receipt to print, if configured to print automatically

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select Save & Print to complete and print the receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, the change window displays the cash back amount to give the customer. Select OK to close the window.

    +
    2. +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Connection failed messages

+

General debit/ATM card guidelines

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

Configure debit preferences

+

Merchant Service reports

+

Merchant Service FAQs

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_giftcard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_giftcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5932439 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_giftcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,73 @@ + + + + + + +Sell or Recharge a Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell or Recharge a Gift Card

+

Redeem a Gift Card | General Payment Procedure

+

 

+

Gift cards are sold or recharged on sales receipts. Up to three gift cards can be sold on a single receipt. The gift card item and sales amount are printed on the customer receipt.

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service. What if I use another Service?

+

To sell or recharge a gift card:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new receipt with or without other items listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Swipe the gift card while in the Enter Items field on the receipt. Alternatively, type Gift Card and then press <Enter> to add a gift card to the receipt item list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the window displayed, enter the gift card sale amount and swipe the gift card (or manually enter the card number) and then select OK.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Repeat for additional gift cards, up to three on the receipt.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Use general payment procedures to accept the amount due or give change until the Payment Complete message is displayed.
    +Point of Sale connects to the Gift Card Service and updates the balance for the card(s). Progress and confirmation messages are displayed.

    +
    6. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Price (sale amount) is the only editable field when listing a gift card on a receipt as an item. To sell multiple cards, enter each as a separate item.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If authorization of the gift card fails for some reason, the card is removed from the receipt.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Check a gift card balance

+

Replace a lost gift card

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Gift Card Service overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_giftcert.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_giftcert.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7eb3a98 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_giftcert.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Sell a Gift Certificate + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell a Gift Certificate

+

Redeem a Gift Certificate | General Payment Procedure

+

 

+

A gift certificate is basically "store money" that can be used to purchase merchandise at a future date. When a customer buys a gift certificate, there is no net sale. Certificate numbers can be recorded both on the sale and the redemption for tracking purposes.

+

To sell a gift certificate:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales receipt with or without other items listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Scan or enter item information field of the receipt, begin typing Gift Cert... and then click Gift Certificate in the item list displayed. The Sell Gift Certificate dialog is opened.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the amount and certificate number and click OK.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select a payment type.

    +
    5. +
+

The total amount due from the customer (any purchases plus the gift certificate amount) is suggested in the payment dialog.

+
    +
  1. +

    Use the general payment procedures to take payment and give change.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Only one gift certificate can be added to a receipt; either a sale or a redemption. You cannot both sell and accept a gift certificate on the same receipt, or sell multiple certificates on a single receipt.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Redeem a gift certificate

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Learn about gift cards

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_poa.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_poa.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9cd1f46 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_poa.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + +Take Payment on Account (or Issuing Store Credit) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment on Account (or Issuing Store Credit)

+

Maintain Customer Accounts | Charges on Account

+
+

Basic

+
+

Payments on a customer's charge account are recorded on a receipt.  

+

 

+

Note: Issuing store credit is essentially the same as taking payment on account and the same procedures are used. If you are issuing store credit due to a merchandise return, create a return receipt and use the second procedure below.

+

To record a payment on account:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new receipt, with or without sales items listed. List the customer on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Account button. The Charge Account dialog is opened. The current account balance is displayed for reference.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click the Make payment on account option.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the amount the customer is paying.

    +
    4. +
+

The full account balance is suggested. Type over this amount if the customer is paying a different amount.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Save. The receipt is updated with the balance due from the customer (account payment plus any new purchases).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Take payment by any other payment type.  

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Payment on Account and the amount is added to the receipt item list and, when saved, the payment receipt is added to your sales history.

    +
    • +
  • +

    A customer cannot make a payment on account by charging it to his account.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The customers account balance and available credit is updated accordingly at this store.

    +
    • +
+

If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software:

+
    +
  • +

    Payments/credits on account can be entered directly into QuickBooks Desktop financial software if you prefer, using the Customers Receive Payment option (see your QuickBooks Desktop documentation for more information). If choosing this method, the payment should NOT also be entered in Point of Sale. Payments on account recorded in QuickBooks Desktop will be reflected in Point of Sale after the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When you take payments or give credit on account in Point of Sale, a customer payment is created in QuickBooks Desktop with the next Financial Exchange. How, or if, this payment is applied to open invoices for the customer is determined by your Receive Payments preferences in QuickBooks Desktop. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Set up an account for a customer

+

Make a sale

+

Correct or clear payments

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_travelcheck.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_travelcheck.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b11aca1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_payment_travelcheck.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +Tip: Take Payment by Travelers Check + + + + + + + + + +

Tip: Take Payment by Travelers Check

+ +

Popup but not hidden so can be called from index

+ +

 

+

Customer payments by travelers check can be recorded as either cash or as a check, depending on how you prefer the transaction to show up on reports and, if applicable, how you handle banking in your QuickBooks financial software.

+
    +
  • +

    If recorded as a cash payment, the amount of the travelers check will show as a cash sale on reports and go to the Cash in Drawer account in QuickBooks.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If recorded as a check, the amount will show as a check payment on reports and go to the Undeposited Funds account in QuickBooks. On the payment window, you may want to enter a unique code such as "TC" when prompted for the check number. This will help identify your travelers check transactions on cash drawer reports.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_promo_codes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_promo_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e05a0b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_promo_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,65 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Promo Codes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Promotional Codes

+

Sales Overview | Make a Sale

+

 

+

A Promo Code can be used to record a promotional event applying to a sale. Examples include coupon numbers, ad references, sale event names, etc.

+

Recording promotional codes on receipts allows you to filter reports by the codes to evaluate the effectiveness of your promotions and advertising.

+

Optionally, you can require an entry in the Promo Code field before a receipt can be saved via a company preference setting.

+

To record a Promo Code on a receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start the receipt normally.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want to Menu, select Add/Edit Promo Code.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

Click the red Promo Code button at the bottom of the receipt (only present if Promo Code entry required).

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a code in the popup dialog and click OK.

    +
    2. +
+

The Promo Code field and entry is displayed on the receipt.  

+

To edit the entry, double-click the field.

+

 

+

Pro Note:

+ +

Related Topics

+

Give a discount

+

Track customers by type

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_giftcard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_giftcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..606e7b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_giftcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + + +Redeem a Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + + +

Redeem a Gift Card

+

Sell a Gift Card | General Payment Procedure

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service. What if I use another Service?

+

To redeem a gift card on a purchase:

+
    +
  1. +

    After listing the items being sold, select the Gift payment type and then select Gift Card. The Gift Card dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Be sure Redeem Card is selected and enter the amount in the Amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Press <Enter>.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Swipe the gift card.
    +
    +Or
    +
    +Enter the gift card number manually and select Authorize.

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  • +

    Point of Sale connects to the Gift Card Service and checks the balance of the card and a confirmation message displayed:

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the card balance is equal to or more than the amount due, the payment amount is deducted from the card balance and payment is complete.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the card balance is less than the amount due, the card balance is adjusted to zero and the authorized amount is auto-populated to the Gift Card Redeem field. You will need to take additional payment by another gift card or any other method for the remaining amount due.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Up to three gift cards can be sold/redeemed on a single receipt.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Check a gift card balance

+

Replace a lost gift card

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Make a sale

+

Gift Card Service overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_giftcert.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_giftcert.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f0a7baf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_giftcert.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Redeem a Gift Certificate + + + + + + + + + + + +

Redeem a Gift Certificate

+

Sell a Gift Certificate | General Payment Procedure

+

To redeem a gift certificate on a purchase:

+
    +
  1. +

    After listing the items being sold, select the Gift payment type and then select Gift Certificate. The Gift Certificate dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Ensure that Redeem a gift certificate is selected and then enter the certificate amount and number.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Save.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Take additional payments and/or return change, if necessary.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Save/print the receipt.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Learn about gift cards

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_reward.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_reward.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..918e03f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_redeem_reward.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Redeem a Customer Reward + + + + + + + + + + + +

Redeem a Customer Reward

+

Rewards Program Overview | Price/Discount Conflict and Priority

+
+

Pro

+
+

Redeem Reward promptWhen you are ringing up a sale, if the items being sold qualify and the customer has a reward to redeem you will be prompted to apply it when going to take payment.

+

You can choose to apply the reward to the current sale or save it for a future purchase. The reward amount or percentage, expiration date, and new sale total is listed for reference.

+

To redeem a reward:

+
    +
  1. +

    When alerted that a reward is available, select Redeem Now. To save the reward for a future sale, select Redeem Later.

    +
    2. +
+

If a customer has multiple rewards available for redemption, all available rewards are displayed. Select the reward the customer wishes to redeem before clicking Redeem Now.

+
    +
  1. +

    The reward is applied to the sale and the new balance due is displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Take payment for any remaining balance as usual.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Rewards cannot be redeemed to purchase gift cards or gift certificates, to make a payment on account, or to pay for sales tax or shipping charges. Only one reward redemption is allowed per sales receipt.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Percentage-off rewards are applied to each qualifying sale item individually as item discounts. The Discount Reason field is prefilled with Reward Discount.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Dollar-off rewards are added as a separate line item to the receipt and act like a global discount.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Occasionally, the combination of customer and items on a sale may qualify for more than one discount. The Price Markdowns and Discounts: Priority and Conflicts topic explains how Point of Sale handles these situations.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Customer IDs and cards (Pro)

+

Give a discount

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_reversenotes_paymentmethods.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_reversenotes_paymentmethods.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e7982e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_reversenotes_paymentmethods.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Notes on Reversing Receipts of Specific Payment Methods + + + + + + + + + + + +

Notes on Reversing Receipts of Specific Payment Methods

+

Reverse a Receipt | Find a Receipt

+

 

+

When you reverse a sales receipt, the reversing receipt created is a return receipt. The amounts taken in payment on the original receipt are returned as change (on paper) to the customer as credits on the return receipt. In this way, the accounting is automatically corrected along with the other changes you make on the receipt. The following are brief descriptions of how reversing a sales receipt of specific payment methods, and then creating a new corrected receipt are handled. Reversing a return receipt works the same way but the payment and change (credit) amounts are the opposite.

+

 

+

Cash: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as cash change. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt as cash as well. If there is a difference between the amounts on the two receipts, you will need to handle collecting or refunding from/to the customer according to your store policy.

+

Check: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as change by check. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt by check as well. If there is a difference between the amounts on the two receipts, you will need to handle collecting or refunding from/to the customer, changing the amount of the check, or getting a new check according to your store policy and legal requirements in your area.

+

Credit Card: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as change by credit card. If you use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, this receipt will automatically be sent to the card processor as part of the next settlement batch. This will result in a credit on the cardholder's account. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt by the same credit card, authorizing and updating the charge by manually entering the card information, if necessary. This new receipt will also be sent with the next settlement batch, resulting in a new charge on the cardholder's account. If you do not use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, follow the same procedure but use the third-party processor's instructions for handling the card credit and new authorization. For more information, read canceling and reversing credit card payments. Reversing credit card receipts processed through Point of Sale is limited to 60 days after the sale.

+

Debit/ATM: Reversing a debit receipt does not create a credit back into the customers bank account. When you reverse a debit receipt, the change is automatically assigned to cash. If you want to return the money to the customer by another method, create a return receipt instead and choose the payment method. Then create a new, corrected receipt.

+

Gift Card: If you use the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service and reverse a sale paid by gift card, Point of Sale automatically connects to the Gift Card Service servers and adds the original payment amount back to the card balance. The refund amount is placed in the Gift Card Purchase field on the payment screen. If you reverse a receipt which originally sold (added value) to the gift card, reversing it deducts the reversed amount from the stored value of the card. If not using the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service, the reversing process is the same, but youll have to use the procedure outlined by your service to add/deduct the value back to the customers card.

+

Gift Certificate: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as change by gift certificate. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt by gift certificate as well. If you track gift certificates by number, enter the same number as the original certificate. If there is a difference between the amounts on the two receipts, you will need to handle collecting or refunding from/to the customer according to your store policy and legal requirements in your area.

+

Account Charge: The reversing receipt (return) shows the original payment returned to the customer as an account credit. Record payment on the new corrected sales receipt by account charge. Both receipts are sent to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, and any difference between the receipt amounts is reflected in the customers new account balance after credits are applied to invoices in QuickBooks Desktop.

+  +

QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software Users: In all cases, both the reversing (return) receipt and the new corrected receipt will be sent to QuickBooks Desktop as part of the next Financial Exchange, thus automatically updating your accounting records accurately.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copy and correct a reversed receipt

+

Sales overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_sales_history.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_sales_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b187e66 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_sales_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,51 @@ + + + + + + +Sales History + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales History

+

Make a Sale | Display Customer Purchase History

+

 

+

Your sales history list stores all previously saved receipts.   

+

By default, your sales history shows all saved receipts sorted by date in a list format. There are several options for changing the display.

+

Sales History

+

 

+

Things you can do from sales history

+

Find a receipt

+

Accept a return or exchange

+

Copy a receipt

+

Edit a receipt

+

Reverse a Receipt

+

E-mail a receipt

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Saved receipts can never be deleted and, with the exception of some informational fields, generally cannot be edited. But they can be reversed if necessary to make a correction. Reversing a receipt does not remove the original document; rather it creates a new receipt with the opposite effect (return to cancel a sale).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, all receipts are sent to update your financial records. You can view the linked QuickBooks Desktop documents and transactions related to a Point of Sale receipt by selecting the receipt and then selecting View Financial Details from the I Want To menu. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Receipts created at remote stores are sent to Headquarters to update inventory and QuickBooks Desktop and are included in Headquarters sales history and sales reports. Receipts made at Headquarters are not sent to remote stores; therefore remote store histories only reflect the documents made at that store.

    +
    • +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_sell_misc_item.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_sell_misc_item.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1e8cbd7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_sell_misc_item.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + +Sell a Miscellaneous Item + + + + + + + + + + + +

Sell a Miscellaneous Item

+

Make a Sale | List Items on Documents: Overview

+

A miscellaneous item is used to temporarily sell an item not yet entered into your inventory.  For example, an exciting new item has just arrived for the first time and you have not yet entered it in inventory. You tell a customer that happens to be in the store about it and he says "I'll take one"! To quickly make the sale without entering all the normal inventory information, you can sell it as a miscellaneous item, entering only the quantity and price. Later, you can enter the item in inventory and resume normal sales.

+

To sell a miscellaneous item:

+
    +
  1. +

    Start a new sales receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Sell Miscellaneous Items.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the dialog displayed, enter the quantity and price and select OK.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The miscellaneous item is not saved in inventory.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are configured to collect sales tax, it is assumed the miscellaneous item is taxable and your default tax location and tax code are applied. If necessary, you can  change the tax code or tax location on the receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Items sold as miscellaneous items will be sent to QuickBooks financial software and be reflected in sales reports, but will not have an associated cost to post to your Cost of Goods Sold account.  

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Quick Add a New Item While Creating a Document

+

Quick Pick Item

+

Handle Special Orders

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_splitpayment_debit.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_splitpayment_debit.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..30ea45f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_splitpayment_debit.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + +Split Payments including Debit Cards + + + + + + + + + + + +

Split Payments including Debit Cards

+

Payment Overview | Void a Debit Card Payment

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Split payment transactions involving debit cards are allowed, but only one debit card payment is allowed on a sale. Debit cards can be used in combination with other payment types.

+

Splitting payments that involve debit cards differ from the single debit card payment procedure as follows.

+

Do not swipe or insert the customers card until directed to do so below.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete the receipt and click Debit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Type in the amount being paid by debit card in the Amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Swipe or insert the card, have them enter their PIN, and optionally enter a cash back amount. Have the customer OK the amount on the PIN pad, if applicable.

    +
    4. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service for authorization in the same manner as in the single debit card procedure.

+
    +
  1. +

    After authorization is received, enter the second payment type.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If using a credit card, swipe, insert, or enter information and follow the authorization process.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

If using another payment method, enter any requested information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat for a third payment type, if necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save & Print (if not configured to automatically save and print).

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

General debit/ATM card guidelines

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

Configure debit payment preferences

+

Merchant Service reports

+

Troubleshoot Merchant Services

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_tips.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..684f513 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,105 @@ + + + + + + +Collect Tips on Sales + + + + + + + + + + + +

Use GoPayment

+
+

Basic

+
+

Swiping Cards

+


+One of the following card readers should be used with GoPayment on an iPhone:

+

 

+

Mophie card reader

+

The Mophie card reader is available at Apple Retail Stores and at www.apple.com.

+

To use this reader, follow these instructions:

+
    +
  1. +

    Insert your iPhone in the Mophie credit card reader and launch GoPayment.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When prompted, run the card through the bottom of the card reader.

    +
    3. +
+

Note: The Mophie reader is currently compatible with iPhone 3G , 3GS and 4. (Currently not compatible with the iPod Touch or the first-generation EDGE network iPhone).

+

 

+

Audio jack card reader

+

Intuit offers a card reader that plugs into the audio jack.

+

To use this reader, follow these instructions:

+
    +
  1. +

    Plug the device into your audio output jack. This card reader works best when you turn the volume to full.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In Settings, turn Audio Jack Card Reader ON.
    +When the Audio Jack Card Reader setting is on, do not plug in another audio device (such as headphones) or a beep will sound.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Choose the card reader model you have. (You can match the image. Your reader will be either grey or white.)

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When you initiate a charge, GoPayment prompts you to swipe a card at the payment screen.

    +
    5. +
+

Note: Remove the card reader before you make or accept a call.

+
+

Basic

+
+

GoPayment Features

+
    +
  • +

    Location of transactions - Turn on location, and email receipts, You can also show customers a map indicating exactly where the transaction took place.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Memo to self - Lets you enter additional information related to the transaction (e.g., an invoice number or other notes).  Only you see the memo, the customer doesn't.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Tips - Your customer can add a tip to the total amount. Turn on Tips to show the Add Tip button on the Signature page.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Items - Create and store a list of products and/or services. When Items is on, you start transactions by selecting item(s) from the list to generate the charge amount.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Edit Items - Tap this button to edit, add or delete items.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales Tax - If you use items, tap this button to enter the sales tax percentage that applies to some or all items. For charges that don't feature items, you must calculate the tax yourself and include it in the total amount charged. To have GoPayment automatically calculate sales tax based on your location, click in the Location-based tax rate check box.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change Account - If you have more than one GoPayment merchant account associated with your User ID, you can choose which account you want to use to process payments.
    +In Settings, the current account appears within the Change Account button. (You won't see this button if you only have one merchant account.)   To switch to a different account, tap Change Account and tap the desired account.  When you view transactions in History, you will see transactions for all your accounts, not just the currently selected account.

    +
    • +
+

Learn more

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_void_giftcard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_void_giftcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab6df2d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipt_void_giftcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,35 @@ + + + + + + + +Void the Sale of a Gift Card + + + + + + + + + + +

Void the Sale of a Gift Card

+

Sell a Gift Card | Redeem a Gift Card

+

 

+

Once a gift card has been authorized, the amount cannot be changed but you can void the sale.

+

Voiding a gift card sale results in the Gift Card Service being contacted a second time and the card balance is returned to the pre-sale amount.

+

To void the gift card sale, re-open the Gift Card payment dialog and click Remove.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Correct or clear payments

+

Check a gift card balance

+

Make a sale

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_gift.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_gift.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..20f44e4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_gift.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Print Gift Receipts + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Gift Receipts

+

Sales Overview | Printing Overview

+

 

+

You can print a gift receipt that does not include specific item, price or payment information. This feature is useful around Holidays or if you specialize in gift merchandise.

+

With a gift receipt, customers can safely include the receipt inside a gift package or give the receipt to the recipient. If the recipient needs to return or exchange the gift, they already have the receipt and theres no need to inconvenience the gift giver.

+

The bar code printed at the bottom of the gift receipt indicates the original receipt number and you can quickly find the original sale receipt by scanning the gift receipt bar code (or typing the receipt number) in the Quick Find window on the home page Navigator or the Find Receipt window in sales history.

+

With the gift receipt preference turned on, you are prompted to print a gift receipt every time you save a receipt. Each workstation can enable gift receipt prompting individually.

+

To be prompted to print a gift receipt on every sale:

+
    +
  1. +

    Return to the Home Page if not already there. Click this icon on the toolbar to go to the POS Home Page

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Documents & Printers from the preferences list on the left.

    +
    4. +
+

Verify the printer and print template to be used for gift receipts. Note: The gift receipt printer is automatically set to the same printer used for regular sales receipts, but a different print template can be used if desired.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Print Options page from the preferences list on the left.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the Prompt for gift receipt with each sale check box.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

To turn off prompting of gift receipts, return to the same page and clear the check box.

+

 

+

Alternate MethodPrint gift receipt

+

If you have your Print Options preferences set to show the Print dialog for each sales receipt, you can select to print a gift receipt on the dialog when needed instead of setting the global preference to prompt you.

+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customize your print templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2637f65 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +receipts_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Sales Receipts: How do I?

+

 

+ +

Popup has been hidden

+ +

Create a sales receipt

+

List items on receipts

+

Give discounts

+

Change the receipt price level

+

Change the sales tax on a receipt

+

Take payment and give change

+

Handle a return or exchange

+

Find a prior receipt

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+

 

+ +</ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_othermas.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_othermas.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8e5b306 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_othermas.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + +Using Another Merchant Service + + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Another Merchant Service

+

Payment Overview | Sign Up for a Merchant Account

+

 

+

If you do not have an account with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service, you can still record credit card payments and refunds, and debit/ATM card payments in Point of Sale.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add items and customer to the receipt and then click the Credit or Debit payment button, as appropriate.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the payment amount in the Credit Card or Debit/ATM Card field and accept it.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Credit card payments: Select Charge or Refund, edit the amount if necessary, and click the card type from the displayed list (from your preference settings).

    +
    • +
+

     

+
    +
  • +

    Debit/ATM payment: Edit the amount, if necessary, and enter optional cash back, then click Save.

    +
    • +
+

      

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow your services instructions for authorizing the payment.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save/print the receipt. Follow your service's instructions for having the customer sign the merchant copy.

    +
    3. +
+

When using another merchant service for these transactions:

+
    +
  • +

    You cannot authorize or settle the transactions from within Point of Sale and reports regarding settlement are not available.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can view lists of your credit and debit payments in the Payments Payment Reconciliation Credit Card List and Debit Card list reports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cash Drawer reports (X/Z-Out) will reflect these transactions.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software, the transactions will be sent to QuickBooks Desktop and be posted to the appropriate accounts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Not all Merchant Service preferences related to credit and debit card transactions apply to you (applicable preferences marked with an * in help).

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can specify the credit card types accepted in your receipt tendering preferences.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_ccdebithardware.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_ccdebithardware.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a5fa4a4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_ccdebithardware.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Hardware + + + + + + + + + + + +

Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Hardware

+

Take Payments | Compatible Card Readers | Compatible PIN pads

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or Gift Card Services. If you use a different service, refer to that service's hardware requirements.

+

 

+

Point of Sale supports card readers and PIN pads for processing of credit, debit/ATM, and gift card transactions through the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and Gift Card Services.

+

Credit card and gift card transactions do not require the use of a card reader, but the use of one is highly recommended. Swiping or inserting a card though a card reader speeds entry, helps avoid errors of hand-keying, and qualifies you for lower fees on credit card transactions. PIN debit transactions require the use of a PIN pad.

+

The procedure for accepting payment varies depending on your hardware configuration.

+

Card Reader Ideal for retailers who accept credit and gift card payments but not PIN debit payments, or who will use the card reader in conjunction with the Ingenico 3010 (see below) for processing all card transactions.

+

Ingenico Telium iPP3xx and Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 PIN pad These PIN pads have an integrated card reader which can be used to process credit, debit/ATM, and gift card transactions. An added benefit with these device is their ability to store authorization information, allowing the customer to swipe their card, enter their PIN, and select cash back (if you allow it), all while your cashier is still completing the receipt. When the cashier goes to the Payment window, the PIN pad device will send the approved amounts to the correct payment and change fields.

+

Ingenico 3010 PIN pad This PIN pad has no integrated card reader and requires that a card reader also be installed on the system. Typically, the customer hands their card to the cashier who swipes it through their existing card reader. The customer uses the PIN pad to enter their PIN, optionally request cash back, and approve the total amount.

+

 

+

For the most current hardware information, click here.

+

 

+

Important Note: Intuit works closely with the manufacturers of hardware sold by Intuit for use with Point of Sale to ensure these devices work together and with the Point of Sale software. Hardware, such as PIN Pads and Physical Inventory Scanners, purchased from other sources may not contain the required programming to work with Point of Sale software and/or the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. Intuit does not provide hardware programming, and does not guarantee that devices purchased from other third party sources will work with Intuit software.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Configure merchant and gift card services

+

Install an Ingenico PIN pad

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_ccguidelines.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_ccguidelines.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ab6f48f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_ccguidelines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +General Credit Card Guidelines + + + + + + + + + + + +

General Credit Card Guidelines

+

Merchant Service Overview | Credit Card Payments

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Accepted Card Types

+

Allowed credit card types are Visa, MasterCard, American Express, Discover, Diners Club, and JCB. Up to three credit card payments can be accepted on a single transaction. You can specify the specific card you accept in company preferences.

+

 

+

Using a Credit Card Reader

+

The QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service does not require a card reader to process credit card transactions. However, you may get a lower rate when using a card reader to authorize these transactions (see below). The credit card payment procedures refer to card readers and PIN pads for use with credit card transactions. See Credit, Debit, and Gift Card Hardware for more information on supported card readers.

+

 

+

Card Not Present

+

The QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service does not require that the credit card be present to authorize a transaction; however, you do need to have the customers name, ZIP code, card number, and expiration date. "Card not present" fees apply. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service agreement for more information.

+

 

+

Address Verification Service

+

Point of Sale performs an address verification on all credit card transactions that are entered manually (not swiped or inserted). The service checks if the customers ZIP Code, and optionally street address, matches the address currently on file at the cardholders bank and alerts you if there is a mismatch. Learn more.

+

 

+

Card Verification

+

It is mandatory to enter the card verification code for your transactions. Point of Sale can also perform a check of the card verification code when manually entering card information. This verification helps to confirm that the customer actually has the card in his/her possession at the time of the sale. You are alerted in the event of a mismatch with the card issuer records. Learn More.

+

 

+

Credit Card Settlement

+

Although credit card transactions are authorized immediately, funds are not transferred to your bank account until the transactions are settled by running the End of Day procedure. It is important that you settle transactions daily to avoid paying higher fees on your credit card transactions.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Protect your customers' card data

+

Take payment by credit card

+

Credit card returns

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_creditcard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_creditcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5685237 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_creditcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,123 @@ + + + + + + +Take Payment by Credit Card + + + + + + + + + + + +

Take Payment by Credit Card

+

Payment Overview | Credit Card Refunds

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

To take full payment by one credit card: (modifications for splitting payment are covered here)

+

Note for users of the Ingenico eNcrypt 2100 or 3070 PIN padClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the Credit payment button.

    +
    2. +
+

The Credit payment dialog is opened, with default options:

+

+
    +
  • +

    Charge card as the transaction type

    +
    • +
  • +

    Swipe or Insert as the transaction method

    +
    • +
  • +

    The total sales amount pre-filled in the Amount field

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Swipe or insert the credit card. (recommended)

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select Manual, enter the mandatory information such as credit card number, expiration date, ZIP Code, and card verification code, and optionally the fraud prevention information, and then select Authorize Now. At the prompt, specify whether the card is present or not.

+

Or

+

Select Voice to complete a voice authorization. This is recommended only if  your connection to the processor is down or you are requested to do so.

+
    +
  1. +

    Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service to obtain authorization.

    +
    2. +
+

If all of the following are true, Point of Sale will process the transaction and print the receipt without further action on your part. This allows you to return to servicing the customer.

+ +

If any of these are not true, continue with the following steps.

+
    +
  1. +

    You will see one of the following messages:

    +
    2. +
+

Authorized: The charge has been approved. Select OK to close the window.

+

Declined: The charge was not approved. Select Cancel to return to the payment screen. Ask the customer to provide a different form of payment, or select Authorize to try again.

+

Referral: Voice authorization is required. Call the number listed on-screen and give the operator your Merchant Number. Enter the authorization number the operator gives you in the Voice Auth Number field  and click Authorize Now.

+

Failed address or card verification check: The address or card verification code entered does not match the issuers records. Depending on your merchant service preferences, you may be allowed to continue or the transaction may be automatically voided.

+

View the Address and Card Verification Results GuideClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Wait for the receipt to print, if configured to print automatically

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select Save & Print to record and print the receipt.

+
    +
  1. +

    Have the customer sign the merchant copy of the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Return to top

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    By default, the program is configured to print two copies of credit card receipts one for the customer and one for the merchant (signature copy). If you are using double-ply paper, you may want to turn off this preference. Point of Sale is also set by default to pause between printouts so you have time to tear off the receipts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Although credit card transactions are authorized immediately, funds are not transferred from the cardholders account to yours until transactions are settled by running the End of Day procedure.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Specify the credit cards you accept

+

Cancel or reverse credit card charges

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

General credit card guidelines

+

Merchant Service FAQs

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_debitguidelines.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_debitguidelines.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..828ed02 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_payment_debitguidelines.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + +General Debit/ATM Card Guidelines + + + + + + + + + + +

General Debit/ATM Card Guidelines

+

Take Payment by Debit/ATM Card | Merchant Service Overview

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Transaction Fees

+

The QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service does not support the collection of transaction fees on debit/ATM payments.

+

 

+

What is a PIN Debit Transaction?

+

There are two ways a customers debit/ATM card can be accepted for payment:

+
    +
  • +

    PIN Debit transactions, which require the use of a PIN pad, take payment directly from the cardholders associated bank account and allow cash back. The help topics for taking payment by debit/ATM apply to this type of transaction.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Processing the customers debit/ATM card like a credit card, which does not require the use of a PIN pad and does not allow cash back. Typically, the card must display a credit card logo (e.g. Visa, MasterCard) to be used this way. Process these transactions using the credit card procedure.

    +
    • +
+

Canceling or Reversing PIN Debit Payments

+

PIN debit payments, if already authorized, cannot be deleted from the receipt, nor can the receipt be canceled or voided. The money has already been debited from the cardholder's bank account.

+

If the receipt has not yet been saved, the cashier can manually enter an equal amount by another payment method and refund the debit amount to the customer as change (cash suggested).

+

If the receipt has been saved, it can only be reversed or a return receipt made. Reversing a debit receipt does not create a credit back to the customers bank account. When you reverse a debit receipt, the change is automatically assigned to cash. If you want to refund the money to the customer by another method, create a return receipt instead and select any other change type.

+

 

+

Debit Card Batch Settlement

+

Although debit card transactions are authorized and the cardholders bank account debited immediately, funds are not transferred to your bank account until the transactions are sent to the processor by running the End of Day procedure and settled.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Protect your customers' payment card data

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_splitpayment_creditcard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_splitpayment_creditcard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1ded388 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receipts_splitpayment_creditcard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + + +Split Payments including Credit Cards + + + + + + + + + + + +

Split Payments including Credit Cards

+

Payment Overview | Credit Card Refunds

+

 

+

This topic applies to users of the QuickBooks POS Merchant Service. What if I use another Service?

+

 

+

Split payment transactions involving credit cards are allowed. Up to three credit cards can be used on one transaction. Credit card cards can also be used in combination with other payment types.

+

Splitting payments that involve credit cards differ from the single credit card payment procedure as follows.

+

Do not swipe or insert the credit card until directed to do so below.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete the receipt and select Credit as the payment type. The Credit payment dialog is opened.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter the amount for the first credit card in the Amount field.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Swipe or insert the card, or manually enter the card information. Have the customer OK the amount on the PIN pad, if applicable.

    +
    4. +
+

Point of Sale connects to the Merchant Service for authorization in the same manner as in the single credit card procedure.

+
    +
  1. +

    After authorization is received for the first card, repeat this process for the next card.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Select a different payment type for the balance and enter any requested information.

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat for a third card or another payment type, if necessary.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save & Print (if not configured to automatically save and print).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Specify the credit cards you accept

+

Record tips (gratuities) on credit card sales

+

Cancel or reverse credit card charges

+

General credit card guidelines

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant & Gift Card Services

+

Credit card fraud prevention tips

+

Troubleshoot Merchant Services

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receiptsoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receiptsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b0514ba --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receiptsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + +Sales Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Sales Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Sales and returns/exchanges are recorded on receipts:

+
    +
  • +

    Sales receipts record merchandise sales and returns/exchanges.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Payout receipts record money paid out of the cash drawer for various reasons.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Deposit receipts record deposits taken on customer orders. Deposit receipts are discussed in the customer order topics.

    +
    • +
+

Saving a receipt removes the sold items from inventory (or adds them back, in the case of a return)  and places the receipt in your sales history list. Saved receipts are permanent transactional documents that are drawn upon for reports and can be edited (informational information only) or reversed, but never deleted.

+

Multi-Store Notes

+
    +
  • +

    All basic receipt features are available at all stores. In addition, Headquarters can make receipts to sell or return merchandise for other stores.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Each store can setup, process, and settle credit/debit card transactions locally. In addition, each store can set many of its own sales preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Each store maintains its own sales history, which contains all saved receipts made at that store. At Headquarters, the sales history file also contains all receipts that were made at remote stores and sent to Headquarters via Store Exchange. This allows Headquarters to run multi-store reports including all company sales information.

    +
    • +
+

Handling Sales Returns and Exchanges

+

Merchandise returns and exchanges are recorded on receipts, in the same manner as sales. The returned quantity is simply entered as a negative number.

+

Learn more about  Returns and Exchanges.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Set sales preferences

+

Receipt field descriptions

+

Security rights for receipts

+

How receipts are transferred to QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receiving_copyandcorrectvoucher.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receiving_copyandcorrectvoucher.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d601ac1 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/receiving_copyandcorrectvoucher.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Copy and Correct a Reversed Voucher + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy and Correct a Reversed Voucher

+

Find a Voucher | Edit a Voucher | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Copying and correcting a reversed voucher allows you to adopt the parts of the original voucher that you want to keep, and correct the parts that were in error on the original, to make a new, correct voucher.

+

To copy and correct a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Reverse the original voucher.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the original voucher again (marked Reversed in the Status field) in receiving history.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Copy.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    A new voucher is created with the same information as the original except for specific vendor billing information.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Make necessary edits to the information on the new voucher.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Print Voucher.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Multi-Store Note:

+
    +
  • +

    A remote store can only reverse a voucher prior to the voucher being sent to Headquarters. If an error is discovered after sending the voucher to Headquarters, it can be corrected in one of two ways: 1) Reverse the voucher at Headquarters, or 2) Copy the original voucher to create an identical return voucher. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Cancel or hold a voucher in progress

+

Multi-store purchasing & receiving overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports01.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e977917 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,146 @@ + + + + + + + +Run a Report + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Run a Report

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Memorize a Report | Report Dashboard

+ +

 

+

These are the basic instructions for running a report from the Report Center. Use the links below or read the Report Overview to learn about additional options and access points for reports. In addition to reports listed below, there are now Mobile reports to select as well.

+

To run a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Report Center from the Reports menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    On the Report Center window, select the Overview tab.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Report Center Overview page

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select one of the following:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    A report link on the left These are the most common reports in each category. After selecting a report, you will have the opportunity to specify certain options, such as the date range, appearance, and data to include (choices which vary by report).

    +
    • +
  • +

    A memorized report When a memorized report is selected, it is immediately ran using the saved settings. Steps 4-5 below do not apply. You can further modify the report after it is displayed if necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Create a Report Launches the report wizard that will help you build the report you need.

    +
    • +
  • +

    All Reports To view all available report categories and individual reports.  Learn more about this option.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen prompts to modify various report options. Select Help on each options page for more information.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Run. The report is displayed.

    +
    3. +
+

You can further modify the report and drill down to view additional detail and related records with the report displayed. Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the top toolbar, choose how you want to output the report:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Select Print to send the report to your printer. Note: Printing large reportsClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Excel to export the report as a spreadsheet (you must have Microsoft Excel installed for this option).

    +
    • +
+

Or, from the I Want To menu:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Add this Report to Dashboard. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Memorize this Report and give it a name to add the report to your memorized reports list

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The printer used for your reports is specified on the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specific information about running cash drawer reports (X/Z-Out) is available here.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Headquarters can run reports for any store, a selected group of stores, or all stores, while remote stores can run reports only for their own store. When running reports at Headquarters, use the Modify Report > Filters option to specify the stores to be included in the report.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a3ce07b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + + +Modify a Report + + + + + + + + + + + +

Modify a Report

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic  

+ +

 

+

Report options are user-definable instructions that affect the report output. The ability to modify report options is controlled by the security rights of the logged-in user. Once customized, a report can be memorized with specific settings and then run directly from your memorized report list, accessed from various places in the program.

+

The options available vary by report and options shown below may not be available on all report types. The Modify a Report window can also be used to revert the report to default settings.

+

To modify a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Open the Modify a Report window by:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Using the Create a Report wizard to run a new report, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Selecting the Prompt to modify report before running check box on the All Reports page, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    Selecting Modify from the report toolbar of a displayed report

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a date or date range, if applicable.  Learn more

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select from the additional options available. Select a link below for more information about each option category.

    +
    2. +
+

Add or Remove Columns to add/remove, set order, and specify sort options for data in columns

+

Filter Data to include/exclude data based on filter criteria

+

Change Report Appearance to change report orientation, header and footer information, page numbering, and fonts.

+

Report Access Level to restrict access to the report based on security groups.

+

Revert Select to reset all report options to their default values.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save on each options page and then Run to display the report with your selected options.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Work with a displayed report

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4021391 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,133 @@ + + + + + + + +Report Security: Access Levels + + + + + + + + + + + +

Report Security: Access Levels

+

Reports Overview | Modify a Report | Security Overview

+

 

+

If you require employee logins, the reports an employee can access are determined by the security group to which he or she is assigned. Each report is assigned a security access level. The report access levels and security groups which can view them are as follows:

+

 

+ ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Level

+		 +

Description

+		 +

Groups with Access

+
+

1

+		 +

Maximum Security

+		 +

Owner

+
+

2

+		 +

High Security

+		 +

Owner, Mgr

+
+

3

+		 +

Medium Security

+		 +

Owner, Mgr, Asst Mgr

+
+

4

+		 +

Low Security

+		 +

All groups

+
+

 

+

Reports that the currently logged-on user does not have access rights to will not be available for selection. If program logins are not required, all employees have access to all reports. The System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic always has access to all reports.

+

A separate security right, Modify report options, controls the ability to modify a report, including dates. If using the pre-defined security groups, all employees have rights to modify the reports to which they have access.

+

If the default security levels do not meet your needs, you can change the report access levels or customize your security groups to give your employees the rights you wish. The ability to make these changes are themselves also subject to security rights (only available to the System Administrator and default Owner group).

+

To view or change the access level of a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Log on as a user with rights to modify report options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Create a Report wizard, select the Set Report Access Level button.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

On a displayed report, select Modify and then the Security tab.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select a security access level from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK or Run to display the report and save the new access level.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Run a report

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports07.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..08a75ab --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Export Reports to Excel + + + + + + + + + + + +

Export Reports to Excel

+

Reports Overview | Run a Report | Export List Data

+

 

+

You can export report data to Microsoft Excel, allowing you to further manipulate the data in that program.

+

Note: For this option to be available, a full licensed version of Excel must be installed on the workstation running the report.

+

To export a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Run the report normally, using the modify report option to select the columns and filter the data to be included in the export.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the report displayed, select Excel from the top toolbar.
    +
    +Once the report is in Excel, you can utilize the many Excel features to manipulate and customize your data. Refer to the Excel help system for instructions to:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Take advantage of extensive filtering capabilities

    +
    • +
  • +

    Combine information from multiple reports

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change the order of report columns

    +
    • +
  • +

    Add comments

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_dashboard.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_dashboard.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..57aaf69 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_dashboard.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + +Report Dashboard + + + + + + + + + + +

Report Dashboard

+

Reports Overview | Running a Report

+

 

+

The Dashboard displays your choice of Point of Sale reports, list statistics, financial information, and even links to the Point of Sale online community or your favorite web pages. The Dashboard is highly customizable to more precisely fit your particular needs and give you an at-a-glance picture of your business. You can add, rearrange, and customize individual components, add additional pages, and drill down into report detail or launch the full version of a selected report.

+

To access the Dashboard:

+
    +
  • +

    From the home page (Navigator), select Dashboard from the Reports menu.

    +
    • +
+

-OR-

+
    +
  • +

    From the Report Center, select Go to Dashboard from the I Want To menu.

    +
    • +
+

Customizing the Dashboard

+

The default Dashboard page includes several pre-selected reports. Use the following options to customize the currently displayed reports on the Dashboard:

+
    +
  • +

    Click or drag-and-drop report column headers or separators to sort report values, re-order, or resize columns

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Show Full Report to open the report in the full report window, where you have all the normal report features available

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Edit to edit the time period and/or sorting for a report, or the address for a web page

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Modify Report to edit the report parameters and filters

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Refresh to update the report data at anytime

    +
    • +
+

To further customize the Dashboard reports and add additional pages:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Customize Dashboard in the upper-left corner.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use any of these options to customize for your needs:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Add/Remove Reports: To remove a report, select the X in its title bar. To add a report, click a category to expand it and then select Add for a specific report. See the note below about adding reports that are not available here.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To add a Web page: From the Other category, select Dashboard Web Page. Initially, a default Web page is added. After saving, select Edit  in the page title bar to enter the Web page address you wish displayed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Rearrange Reports: Click and hold in a report  title bar, then drag-and-drop it  into the desired column and position.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Columns: Add or remove columns by changing the Number of Columns counter. If you reduce the number of columns, existing reports will auto-arrange to fit the new  space. Drag the column separators to make columns wider or narrower.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pages: Add or remove pages by choosing Add Another Page or Remove Page. You can repeat content on multiple pages, if desired. Give each page a name to be displayed on its tab. With multiple pages added, you can drag and drop the tabs to rearrange their order.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes

+
    +
  • +

    You can add many other reports to the Dashboard when running them in the Report Center. Run a report and then choose Add This Report To Dashboard from the report I Want To menu. Specify a name and, if you have multiple Dashboard pages, to which page the report should be added.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Home Page Dashboard, displayed right on the home page main window is a mini-version of your Dashboard, displaying any one of several of the most used reports and providing quick access to your own list of saved reports.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_displayoptions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_displayoptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ada50a8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_displayoptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Add or Remove Report Columns + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add or Remove Report Columns

+

Filter Report Data | Change Report Appearance | Modify a Report

+

 

+

This information applies to the Add or Remove Columns window, accessed when running or modifying a report.

+

 

+

Select columns to include in the report and set sorting and other options as follows. Select Save when done.

+

 

+

Columns

+
    +
  • +

    Select the data columns to include on the report. A check mark indicates the selected columns.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Detail reports include a second tab to select the detail fields included.

    +
    • +
  • +

    On the report, columns are displayed in the order (from left to right) in which they appear in report options (from top to bottom). Drag and drop column names to place in the order you want.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Column order can also be rearranged directly on the displayed report by dragging and dropping the column headers.

    +
    • +
+

        

+
    +
  • +

    Comparison reports and the Inventory Summary with Activity report have a split column selection box. Use the upper box to choose what you want to compare (vendors, departments, months, specific items, etc.) and the lower box to choose the comparison metrics (typically cost, price, sales amounts, or quantities).

    +
    • +
+

Sort By

+
    +
  • +

    Select the value by which you want the report data sorted. The sort determines how data is ordered and grouped on the report. For example, to see all data for a department grouped together, choose Department as the sort value. The sort column must be included in the report in order to sort by it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select the Create subtotals for this field check box to add a subtotal line to the report each time the selected sort value changes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Report data can also be re-sorted once the report is ran and displayed by clicking the column headers.

    +
    • +
+

Sort In

+
    +
  • +

    Select to sort in Ascending Order (AZ, 110) or Descending Order (ZA, 101).

    +
    • +
+

Show

+
    +
  • +

    Available only on certain Best/Worst, performance, and the Inventory Summary with Activity  reports.

    +
    • +
  • +

    On Best/Worst reports, select to view All Records or only the Best/Worst n Records (where n is a user-defined number). The available option here will depend on the Sort In method selected. This option can also be changed on a displayed report by clicking a column header related to the value used to rank the report (price, cost, margin, etc.) or by changing the number of records to be shown (on the report window toolbar) and then selecting the Refresh icon.

    +
    • +
  • +

    On the Inventory Summary with Activity Report, select the checkboxes to include sales, receiving, and/or purchase order information.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_export_large.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_export_large.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c8a4b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_export_large.htm @@ -0,0 +1,26 @@ + + + + + + +reports_export_large + + + + + + + + +

Note: Exporting Very Large Reports

+ +

This is a  popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Excel has a display limit of approximately 65,000 rows. If a report exceeds this limit, it is truncated to fit the display capacity. You can rerun the report, filtering to reduce the size. This ensures the entire report is displayed.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1118ca0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + +reports_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Reports: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

 

+

Run a report

+

Modify a report

+

Drill down to see report detail

+

Memorize reports

+

Export report data to Excel

+

Run X/Z-Out reports

+

View Merchant Service reports

+

View graphs and charts

+

Run multiple reports

+

Manage my reports

+

Refresh report data

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_headerfooter.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_headerfooter.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..83b713c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_headerfooter.htm @@ -0,0 +1,118 @@ + + + + + + + +Change Report or Graph Appearance + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Report or Graph Appearance

+

Run a Report | Modify a Report | Add/Remove Report Columns

+

 

+

This information applies to the Change Report Appearance window, accessed when running or modifying a report or graph.

+

 

+

Use this page to set the page orientation, header and footer information, and fonts. Select Save when done.

+

 

+

Report Orientation:

+
    +
  • +

    Select  Portrait paper orientation Portrait or  Landscape paper orientation Landscape paper orientation

    +
    • +
+

Show Header Information

+

Select the checkboxes and enter text to be printed at the top and bottom of the report.

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Company Name:

+		 +

By default, your store name as defined in company preferences. You can edit the company name in the report header.

+
+

Report Title:

+		 +

The name of the report.

+
+

Subtitle:

+		 +

Enter an optional report subtitle.

+
+

Date Prepared:

+		 +

Select the date format.

+
+

Time Prepared:

+		 +

Select to include the time the report was run.

+
+

 

+

Show Footer Information

+ +++ + + + +
+

Page Number:

+		 +

Select to include page numbers at the bottom of the report.

+
+

 

+

Fonts

+

Select a report area. In the Font window, make your selections and then select OK.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_manage.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_manage.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d53e0b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_manage.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Manage my Reports + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage my Reports

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

You can use the Manage My Reports window to add, remove, rearrange, or rename your report types and memorized reports.

+

To access the Manage My Reports window:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Manage My Reports from either the Report Center I Want To menu or from the Memorize Report dialog.

    +
    • +
+

Options available on this window:

+

Move reports Drag and drop report types and individual reports or use the move up/down buttons to arrange them in the order you prefer. Reports can be moved from one report type to another. This will affect the order in which your memorized reports are displayed on the Reports menu and in the Memorized Reports section of the Navigator.

+

Add new report type Select to add another report type, allowing you to sub-categorize your reports the way you prefer.

+

Rename reports or report types Your memorized reports or types can be renamed at anytime.

+

Copy a report Use to create a new memorized report the same as, or very similar to, an existing memorized report. Modify the copy if changes are required.

+

Delete report or report type Your memorized reports or types can be deleted at anytime. Deleting a report type deletes all reports contained therein. If you want to save the reports, move them to another type before deleting the type.

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_memorized.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_memorized.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dbdd0ed --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_memorized.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Memorize a Report + + + + + + + + + + + +

Memorize a Report

+

Reports Overview | Run a Report | Modify a Report

+

 

+

Once a particular report format has been defined, you can memorize it and then immediately run the report at anytime with a single click from the Reports menu. Note that you are memorizing the report format (display options, filtering, date range, etc.) and not the specific report data. This allows you to memorize and run dynamic reports (sales month-to-date, etc.) whenever you want, with the format always the same but the data updated to the current time.

+

Once memorized, your reports are added to the Report menu and the Report Center under the category Memorized Reports. Optionally, you can define new report types, which allow you to sub-categorize your memorized reports.

+

To memorize a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Run the report in the normal manner, modifying it to include the data and display options you want.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Memorize this report from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Memorize Report dialog is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Give your memorized report a unique name and assign it to a report type.

    +
    2. +
+

Select Manage My Reports to add a new report type or to manage your existing types.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Work with a displayed report

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_multiple.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_multiple.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..601a260 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_multiple.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + + +Run Multiple Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Run Multiple Reports

+

Reports Overview | Report Dashboard

+

 

+

If you find that you frequently run the same reports at the same time, Point of Sale offers an option to group and run those reports all at once with a single selection.

+

To run multiple reports:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Run Multiple Reports from the Reports menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Process Multiple Reports window, select a report type from the drop-down list or select All Reports.

    +
    3. +
+

A list of the selected type of report is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select or clear the checkboxes for each report. If a reports check box is selected, the report will be run.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a date range for those reports that require one.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Display to preview the reports on-screen or Print to send them to your printer. If displaying, the report windows are added to the Window menu at the top of your screen.

    +
    4. +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_note_lg_report.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_note_lg_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f90e7a5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_note_lg_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + +reports_note_lg_report + + + + + + + + + + +

Note: Printing a Large Report

+ +

This is a popup and has been hidden.

+ +

If a report is too wide to be printed within the page width specified for the printer, Point of Sale will print it in sections on multiple pages, which can then be arranged to view the complete report.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_print.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_print.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3f40f5a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_print.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Print a Report + + + + + + + + + + +

Print a Report

+

Run a Report | Export a Report | Memorize a Report | Modify a Report

+

 

+

After running a report, it is displayed in the report preview window. From here the report can be printed (as described here),  exported to Excel, memorized, or further modified as necessary.

+

To print a report:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the report displayed, select Print from the bottom toolbar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Print dialog, change printer and specify the number of copies as necessary.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Print to send the report to your printer.

    +
    4. +
+

Or, select Preview to see what the report will look like before printing.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If the report preview doesn't look like you expected, cancel and use the modify report options to change the appearance, columns, etc. to fit your needs.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Printing cash drawer (X/Z-Out) reports varies depending on the type and your settings. Learn more

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Preview reports

+

Print in Point of Sale

+

Specify printers & templates

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_refreshing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_refreshing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3807f42 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_refreshing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + +reports_refreshing + + + + + + + + + + + +

Refreshing Report Data

+ +

This is a popup topic.and has been hidden.

+ +

Reports reflect your data at the time the report is run. If you leave a report open and then create documents, the report is not dynamically updated with the new information from those documents. You must run the report again or press <F5> with the report displayed to refresh it.

+

Customer, vendor, and item history screens are reports that are run and displayed on the individual record form. History screens can be refreshed by pressing <F5>, <Ctrl>+<Page Up><Page Down>, or by closing and reopening the record form.

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_types.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_types.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..48db378 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_types.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +All Report Categories and Types + + + + + + + + + + + +

All Report Categories and Types

+

Reports Overview | Memorize Reports | Report Dashboard

+

 

+

On the All Reports page of the Report Center, you can select a report category, type, and then a specific report. A brief description of the information contained in the report is displayed to help you choose.

+

 

+

+
    +
  • +

    Once you've located the report you need, click Display to run it.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you selected Prompt to modify report options.., the modify report wizard is displayed. Follow the on-screen prompts, selecting Help on each page for additional assistance.

    +
    • +
  • +

    See work with a displayed report for options available once the report is displayed.

    +
    • +
+

Report Categories

+

There are many report categories in Point of Sale. Each category includes various specific reports, offering several ways to analyze your accumulated data:

+

Sales View summarized or detailed sales information, such as best and worst selling items; sales by department, by vendor, by associate, or by store; discounts given; and sales taxes collected.

+

Cash Drawer Run X/Z-Out Reports, including register status, drawer count and closing reports, as well as a listing of cash drawer payouts.

+

Payments View summarized or detailed reports of sales payments by type.

+

Customers Print or export customer lists and analyze sales by demographics, customer type, or promotional codes. Pro users can also view summarized or detailed reports of merchandise on order, status of service jobs, and deposits taken on layaways, sales orders, and work orders.

+

Items Track inventory item, quantities, and costs, including merchandise on hand or on order, reorder points, and adjustments, and, in a multi-store configuration, transfers and inventory by store.

+

Purchasing View summarized or detailed listings of merchandise ordered and received, projected cash requirements, and vendor lists.

+

Employees View employee lists, sales performance,  and tips collected. Pro users can also view hours worked, and commissions earned.

+

Memorized Reports View and access all reports you have created and memorized. This category does not display until you have memorized at least one report.

+

 

+

The information for each report is drawn from the related data sources (documents, inventory, customer records, etc). For example, most sales information is derived from receipts; purchasing information is drawn from purchase orders and receiving vouchers, and so on.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_working_with_displayed.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_working_with_displayed.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d650149 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reports_working_with_displayed.htm @@ -0,0 +1,125 @@ + + + + + + + +Work with a Displayed Report + + + + + + + + + + + +

Work with a Displayed Report

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Memorize a Report | Refresh Report Data

+ +

 

+

Note: Not all options described here are available on every report type or for Point of Sale Free users. For example, several of these options are not available when viewing customer, vendor, or item history reports.

+

 

+

You have several options when working with a displayed report.

+
    +
  • +

    To run the report for different dates, specify a new date range at the top of the report and then select Apply Date Range.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To change the data included or change other display options, select Modify from the window toolbar. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    With the report displayed, you can change the column order/widths, sort the report values, search the report by keyword, and, when available, use QuickZoom to view additional detail or view associated documents or records.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Print, export, memorize, or add the report to the report Dashboard.

    +
    • +
+

Customizing Report Columns and Sort

+
    +
  • +

    To rearrange the order of columns in a report, drag-and-drop the column headers to a new position.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To change a columns width, drag the separators (small diamond symbols) left or right or to adjust all columns to the width of their largest entry, right-click the header and choose Adjust Column Widths.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To sort the report by the values in a column, click the column header. Click the header again to sort in the opposite order (ascending or descending).

    +
    • +
+

QuickZoom icon Using QuickZoom to View Additional Report Detail

+

QuickZoom allows you to view additional detail in sub-reports or in the associated documents and records. QuickZoom refers to the "magnifying glass" icon that appears on reports and graphs.

+

With the QuickZoom icon displayed, double-click a line or value in the report to bring up the additional detail that is available.

+

Examples:

+
    +
  • +

    If you are viewing the Customer Sales report, double-click a customer name to see a sub-report listing all items sold to that customer. Double-click an item line on the second report, and a report of all sales for the item is displayed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the report includes a document list (e.g. sales detail report or customer/vendor/item history) double-click on a listed document to view it.

    +
    • +
+

Doing a Text Search on a Report

+

To search a report for a text string:

+
    +
  1. +

    With a report displayed, enter the text string you are looking for in the Find field at the top of the report.

    +
    2. +
+

image\report_findtext.gif

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the magnifying glass icon to the right of the Find field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Continue selecting the find icon to locate additional occurrences of the text.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reportsoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reportsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d454fb0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/reportsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + +Reports Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reports Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Report Categories (All Reports)

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale reports provide detailed information in a wide variety of formats to help you manage inventory, analyze your sales, evaluate employee performance, make informed purchase decisions, and much more.

+

There are several ways to choose the correct report for your needs or to access previously memorized reports.

+
    +
  • +

    The Report Center (shown below) allows you to choose and modify specific reports from a variety of categories, use the Create a Report wizard, and manage your previously saved reports. Select Report Center from the Reports menu.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The I Want To menu in most lists provides access to common reports for the current area.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Report Dashboard, available as a tab on the Point of Sale Home page, allows you to create and customize a multi-column and multi-page display of mini-reports to see at a glance how your business is doing. You can even add various Point of Sale web pages, such as the user forums, directly to the Dashboard for immediate access (Internet connection required).

    +
    • +
  • +

    The embedded Home Page Navigator provides an instant view of one selected report and access to your top memorized reports.

    +
    • +
+

+

 

+

Report filters and options allow you to customize reports to include or exclude information (items, departments, customers, vendors, date ranges, etc.) and change display options. Once displayed, many reports offer the ability to QuickZoom, or drill down, to see additional detail or view related reports and documents.

+

If you tend to run several reports together, you can easily run the group of reports at once from the Run Multiple Reports window, available from the Reports menu.

+

Access to reports can be controlled with security rights, protecting your sensitive data.

+

 

+

Multi-Store Notes

+
    +
  • +

    Several unique reports are available for multi-store operations, including merchandise transfers, month-to-date sales and on-hand merchandise information for all stores. In addition, if you use QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can run Profit/Loss reports by store by using the class tracking feature.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Headquarters can run reports for any store, a selected group of stores, or all stores, while remote stores can run reports only for their own store.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Z-Out Drawer Count Reports are the only reports sent from remote stores to Headquarters. All other company reports ran at Headquarters draw their information from inventory and the transactional document history files maintained at Headquarters.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Learn more about multi-store reporting

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for reports

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2301.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2301.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1feccc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2301.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define a Date Range + + + + + + + + + + + +

Define a Date Range

+

Reports Overview | Run a Report | Modify a Report

+

 

+

When specifying dates for reports, you have the option of choosing a dynamic date range, such as "today" or "yesterday," which changes according to the current date, or a fixed date range with a specific start and end date.

+

To define a date range:

+
    +
  1. +

    Access the report date fields:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    In the Create a Report wizard as running a new report

    +
    • +
  • +

    By selecting Modify on a displayed report to change report options

    +
    • +
  • +

    On the top of a displayed report

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select a date filter type from the drop-down list:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    To specify a fixed date range, enter dates directly in the From and To date fields.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Or, select a dynamic date range from the available options. The From and To dates of the range are automatically populated for you.

    +
    • +
  • +

    See the date fields and time fields topics for more information about defining dates/times.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If running a comparison report, enter a date range for each comparison period, such as This Year: Year to Date and Last Year: Year to Date.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save (if running or modifying a report) or Apply Date Range (if making changes directly on a displayed report).

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View a sales chart or graph

+

Work with a displayed report

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2302.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2302.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba664ee --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2302.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + + + +View a Chart or Graph + + + + + + + + + + + +

View a Chart or Graph

+

Charts and Graphs Overview | Print Charts

+

To view a sales chart or graph:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Report Center, select any report listed as a chart or graph.

    +
    2. +
+

Depending on your settings and how you access the chart, you may or may not have an opportunity to modify the options before running. If not, you can modify the settings once the chart is displayed as described in the following steps.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Modify and define filters and display options:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Change Graph Content Use to change the graph values and whether the results are displayed as a bar, line, or pie chart.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Filter Data Enter filter criteria as necessary to include/exclude your data.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change Graph Appearance Use to modify page orientation, header and footer, and fonts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Set Graph Access Level Use to restrict employee access based on their security group.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK. The chart is re-displayed with your custom settings.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Run. Your graph/chart is displayed with your new settings.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    With a graph/chart displayed, you can toggle between the values to be displayed from the available drop-down lists in the upper-right of the screen. Line graphs will display any combination of the values selected. Pie charts and bar graphs will display only one value at a time.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can also change the date range as needed at the top of the chart and select Apply Date Range.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2305.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2305.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3a7045e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc2305.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + + +Print Charts and Graphs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Charts and Graphs

+

Charts and Graphs Overview | Run a Report | Modify a Report

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    With the chart displayed, select Print from the bottom toolbar.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To modify the printing instructions, select Preview and use any of the following options:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Orientation: Specify Portrait or Landscape Mode.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Margins (%): Adjust the width of any margin. The chart size expands or shrinks automatically to match the new margins. Margins can also be changed by dragging and dropping the preview margin indicator lines with your mouse.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Reset Margins: Click to restore the last saved margin settings.

    +
    • +
  • +

    View Margins: Select to display the margin indicators on the screen.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Detail: Set Detail to More to print the chart at the maximum size possible with the specified margins. When set to Normal, the chart is reduced slightly and the text labels identifying the chart data are enlarged.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Proportional: Select to return the chart to its original relative height and width proportions.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View a chart or graph

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc_graphcontent.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc_graphcontent.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7174640 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sc_graphcontent.htm @@ -0,0 +1,41 @@ + + + + + + +Change Graph Content + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change Graph Content

+

Charts and Graphs Overview | View a Chart/Graph | Print Charts/Graphs

+

 

+

This information applies to the Change Graph Content window, accessed when running or modifying a chart or graph.

+

 

+

Use this page to change graph content and type.

+

 

+

+

 

+

As you make changes, a preview is shown of what you can expect your graph to look like.

+

 

+

When done, select Save.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/scoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/scoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d8d8f6c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/scoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + +Charts and Graphs Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Charts and Graphs Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Print Sales Charts/Graphs

+ +

 

+

Point of Sale provides several chart and graph options to let you analyze your business in a visual format.

+

A chart/graph can display a summary of sales, profit, or current inventory by investment department, vendor, employee, hours or days of the week, or store. The information can be viewed in bar, line, or pie chart formats.

+

 

+

   Point of Sale sales charts

+

 

+

Graphical formats are useful for making quick comparisons, visualizing trends, and instantly communicating data to others. Each type of graph is best suited for a particular purpose.

+

Bar graph: Bar graphs are particularly effective when making comparisons among members of a group.

+

Pie chart: Pie charts enable you to visualize the proportion of total sales contributed by each vendor, department, clerk, etc.

+

Line graph: Line graphs display your results over a period of time. In this way, you can monitor trends.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security Rights for Sales Charts/Graphs

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sec_admin_chgemplpw.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sec_admin_chgemplpw.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cd125a7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sec_admin_chgemplpw.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + +Change your Login Password + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Change your Login Password

+

Employees & Security Overview | Log In/Out

+

 

+

You can change your own login password using the procedure below. No access to the full employee record is provided with this procedure. It is recommended that you change your password every 90 days.

+

To change your own password:

+
    +
  1. +

    Log in using your current password.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Employees menu, select Change Employee Password.

    +
    3. +
+

The Change Password window is displayed.

+

Tips for passwordsClick to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter your current (old) password.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a new password. Confirm the new password by entering it again.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click OK.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Note:

+ + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin01.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b99af37 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,4093 @@ + + + + + + + +Security Rights for Predefined Groups + + + + + + + + + + + +

Security Rights for Predefined Groups

+

Create a New Security Group | Security Overview

+

 

+

Security groups control access to specific features or data. Four predefined security groups are included in Point of Sale:  Owner, Manager, Assistant Manager, and Associate. Rights to specific features of the program decrease as you move from the Owner group to the Associate group. You can assign these groups to your employees, change the rights for each group, and, if necessary, create new groups with the rights you prefer.

+

We recommend that you initially assign each employee to one of the four predefined groups. Later, you can reassign groups, customize group rights, or create additional groups as necessary to meet your needs.

+

The Security Rights by Group table below lists the default rights granted to each of the predefined groups.

+

You can give or take away a right by selecting or clearing the check box for that group on the Security window. You can reset the rights of the four predefined groups by selecting the Revert Default Groups button at the bottom of the window.

+

Select a link to jump to that section of the table or scroll down to view the entire table.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

All levels:

+		 +

 

+
+

General

+		 +

Inventory

+
+

Tools

+		 +

Departments

+
+

Financial

+		 +

Vendors

+
+

Receipts

+		 +

Reports

+
+

Sales History

+		 +

POS (sale related)

+
+

Basic:

+		 +

 

+
+

Customers

+		 +

Inventory Adjustments (Memos)

+
+

Vouchers

+		 +

Adjustment History

+
+

Receiving History

+		 +

Purchase Orders

+
+

 Pro:

+		 +

 

+
+

Customer Rewards

+

Sales Orders and Layaways

+		 +

Time Tracking

+

Work Orders

+
+

Transfer Slips

+

Transfer History

+		 +

Stores

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

View or edit a security group

+

Add a security group

+

 

+

 

+

Security Rights by Group

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

General

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Company Preferences

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Workstation Preferences

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Access the Setup Interview

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Hardware Setup Wizard

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Hardware Troubleshooter

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Write letters

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create E-mail Campaign List

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Manage my License

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Exit Point of Sale

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Import/Export Data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Open company data file

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Close company data file

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Create new company data file

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Rename company data file

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

General (cont.)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Backup data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Restore data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Convert from previous version

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Clean up company data

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Customize program interface

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Employees and Security

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit employee information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Modify security rights or groups

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View cost fields

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Download program updates

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Install downloaded updates

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

E-mail documents

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Print held documents

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Login from an integrated application

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Access Dashboard

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Customize Dashboard

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Dashboard Web Page

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View list statistics

+

View/edit commission information (Pro)

+		 +

X

+

 

+

X

+		 +

X

+

 

+

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Tools (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Print Designer

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Financial Exchange

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Update QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Recover QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Activity Log

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Open linked QB transactions

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Reports

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Modify report options

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Run All Reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Run Level 2-4 Reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Run Level 3-4 reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Run Level 4 reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View Drawer Count History (Z-Out)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View amount of cash drawer mismatch

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

View tip amounts on End of Day reports

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Point of Sale

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Run End of Day

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Open cash drawer

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create Payout receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Apply global discount

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Change price level

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Edit shipping amount (Pro)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Receipts

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Override "Accept Check" setting (Basic)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Override Credit Limit (Basic)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Override Past Due Charge Blocking (Basic)

+

Create receipts for other stores (Pro)

+		 +

X

+

 

+

X

+		 +

X

+

 

+

X

+		 +

X

+

 

+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit or discount sale price

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Edit item description

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Accept returns and exchanges

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Edit receipt date

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Hold receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Apply coupons (Pro)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Sales History

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access sales history

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Reverse receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Copy receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit receipts

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Transfer Slips (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access transfer slip

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create transfer slips for other stores

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Hold transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Transfer History (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access transfer history

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Reverse transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Copy transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit transfer slips

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Inventory

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/Copy item

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete item

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit prices

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit cost

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit quantity (Basic, Pro)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Change item type

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Physical Inventory (Basic)

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Update Physical Inventory Basic)

+

Access item assembly (Pro)

+

Access group item (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View inventory reminders (Pro)

+

Modify/Clear Reminders (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X

+  +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Price Manager: Access 'Change Item Prices'

+

Price Manager: Access 'Discount Pricing' (Pro)

+		 +

X
+
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

View inventory ratings & trends

+

Create special order item (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		  +

 

+

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Print item list

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Print item tags

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Export item list

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Departments

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/Copy

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit departments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete departments

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Vendors (Basic, Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/Copy vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete vendors

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Purchase Order (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Add / Copy POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete POs

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item description

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access item list from PO

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Vouchers (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access vouchers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Create return vouchers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Enter cost

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item descriptions

+

Create voucher for other stores (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Hold Vouchers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Receiving History (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access receiving history

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Reverse voucher

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Copy voucher

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit voucher

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Adjustments (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access memos

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Create cost memos

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Hold memos

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Create quantity memos

+

Create memos for other stores (Pro)

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Adjustment History

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access adjustment history

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Reverse memo

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Copy memo

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit memo

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Customers (Basic)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Edit customers

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Delete customer

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit customer discount or price level

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Change "Use with QuickBooks" setting

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Change "Accept Checks" setting

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Add customer type

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Change charge account settings

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View customer ratings

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View account information

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Rewards (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Reward Manager

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Manually issue or remove rewards

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

View and redeem rewards

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Sales Orders and Layaways (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Copy orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Delete orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Refund deposits

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item prices

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item descriptions

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Generate purchase order from

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Apply coupons

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Work Orders (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Copy orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Delete orders

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item descriptions

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit item prices

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Refund deposits

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Generate PO from

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Apply coupons

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Area/Right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Time Tracking (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Manage clocked-in employees

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Time Clock History

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Add/Copy Time Clock entries

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Edit Time Clock entries

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Delete Time Clock entries

+		 +

X

+		 +

X

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Area/right

+		 +

Owner

+		 +

Manager

+		 +

AsstMgr

+		 +

Associate

+
+

Stores (Pro)

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Access Store Exchange Center

+

Store Exchange, receive files

+

Store Exchange, send files

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

X
+ 

+

X
+ 

+

X

+		 +

 

+
+

Return to top

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+		 +

 

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Turn security on/off

+

Add a custom security group

+

Employees & security overview

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8ddf5c4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,113 @@ + + + + + + + +Add an Employee + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add an Employee

+

Edit an Employee Record | Delete an Employee Record  

+

 

+

Use this procedure to add employees in Point of Sale and optionally assign security group rights. The rights of the assigned security group determine the employees access to Point of Sale features.

+

If requiring logins, only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can add employees.

+

 

+

If you have accessed this topic after copying another employee record, start with Step 4. Edit the information brought from the copied record as needed.

+

To add a new employee:

+
    +
  1. +

    If requiring logins, log in to Point of Sale as the System Administrator.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Employees menu, select Employee List.

    +
    3. +
+

Your employee list is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Employee.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter employee name, contact information, and other information in the appropriate fields:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    The optional Notes field on the Custom tab can be used to show schedules, vacations, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If applicable, enter a commission percentage if you will pay the employee a commission on eligible sales.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If using Time Clock to track hours worked for the employee, select the Hourly check box. The employee will be prompted to clock in/out for purposes of tracking hours worked.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Custom fields on the Custom tab can be used to record additional employee information.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    If requiring logins to use the program, also complete the following:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Login Name: Assign an alphanumeric login name. Login names must be unique and be made up of letters or numbers and the dash, underscore, and dot/period characters. Login names cannot include spaces or other special characters. Once assigned, login names cannot be changed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Security Group: Displays the list of security groups that can be assigned to the employee. Select security group from the drop-down list of your available groups (the four predefined groups and your custom groups).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Password: Select Create Password. Enter a password and enter it again to confirm. Tips for passwordsClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save or Save and New if adding another employee.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The currently logged in employee must log out and then log in again for changes to take effect in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Employees and security rights are defined at each store independently and are not exchanged between stores. However, if using Time Clock, the time records of hourly employees are sent from remote stores to Headquarters. When a new employee is added to Point of Sale at a remote store, the remote may want to contact Headquarters outside of Point of Sale to have the employee added to the employee list at Headquarters for payroll or other purposes.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copying an employee record

+

Tracking employees without requiring logins

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9a8728e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copy an Employee Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy an Employee Record

+

Add an Employee | Edit an Employee | Delete an Employee

+

 

+

Copying an existing employee record is a quick way to add a new employee with similar information. When you copy an employee record, all of the information except login name and password is carried to the new employee record. You can then edit the new record to make it unique, as necessary. You cannot copy the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic record.

+

If requiring logins, only the System Administrator can copy an employee record.

+

To copy an employee record to create a new one:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Employee List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select or display the employee record to be copied.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Copy Employee from the window tool bar.

    +
    4. +
+

All information except the login name and password is copied to the new employee record.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a Login name and create a password for the new employee, make any other changes that are necessary, and assign a security group.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin04.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..68461e8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + + +View or Edit an Employee Record + + + + + + + + + + + + +

View or Edit an Employee Record

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Add an Employee | Copy a Record

+ +

 

+

Only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can edit employee passwords. Other users, with adequate rights, can edit other employee information or change the security group assignment. An employee's Login Name can never be edited.

+

To view or edit employee records:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Employee List.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Highlight the employees record in your employee list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Edit Employee. The employees record is displayed.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make changes as needed.

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Tip: Use List Edit mode to edit many records quickly. In the employee list, list edit mode is a quick way to change the security group assignments for several employees, or to update ZIP codes or phone area codes when changes occur.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete an employee record

+

Track employee commissions

+

Track employee hours worked

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin05.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c9c9e7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + + + +Delete an Employee Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete an Employee Record

+

Add an Employee | View or Edit an Employee

+

 

+

Only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can delete employees. You cannot delete the System Administrator.

+

To delete employees:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the employee record(s) to be deleted from your employee list. How do I select multiple employees?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Delete Employees from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
+

(Pro) You will be alerted if any of the selected employee(s) are currently clocked in.

+
    +
  1. +

    If the confirmation window is displayed, select Delete to complete the action.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin07.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..bbc8713 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +Track Employees without Requiring Logins + + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Employees without Requiring Logins

+

Employees & Security Overview | Turn Security On/Off

+

 

+

If you want to record employee names on documents so you can run sales reports by employee and/or track commissions, but you do not want to require employees to login or limit access to certain program features, you should still define employees in Employees & Security.

+

Once employees have been defined, the employee names are available for selection on any document that contains the Associate or Cashier fields. Select a name from the drop-down list of defined employees.

+

 

+

Warning: If you do not require employees to log in, there will be no restrictions on employee access to program features or data. All employees will have access to all areas. In addition, not requiring password access may make your company data more vulnerable to unauthorized access from outside sources, such as across a shared network or via the Internet. Click here to read recommendations for a comprehensive data protection strategy.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add an employee

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin08.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2fe954 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + + +Turn Security On/Off + + + + + + + + + + + +

Turn Security On/Off

+

Log In/Out | Add Employees | Security Rights

+

 

+

Requiring employees to log in with a login name and password activates the security features of Point of Sale.

+

To activate security:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the home page, select Preferences Company from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select General from the left-side preferences list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select the Require users to log in check box.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  1. +

    Enter a password for the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic when prompted.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Log in as the System Administrator using the password defined in Step 5 or as another employee previously set up.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

After activating security in this manner, add or edit employee records, assigning user names, passwords, and security rights as needed.

+

Only the System Administrator can change this setting in the future. To deactivate security, come to the same preference page and clear the check box.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Track employee transactions without requiring logins

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin10.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..387b942 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ + + + + + + +Create a New Security Group + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Security Group

+

Copy a Security Group | View or Edit Group Rights

+

 

+

You are not limited to the predefined security groups. You can create new security groups with your preferred security rights, and then assign them to your employees.

+

To add a new security group:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Security.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select New Group from the window toolbar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the New Group dialog, enter a unique name for the group and select OK.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    The new group is created and added as a new column to the Security window. The group initially has no security rights.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Edit the security rights of the new group, granting rights as needed.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select Save.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Assign the new group to employees, using the procedures described in the Viewing or Editing an Employee Record topic.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

Multi-Store Note: Security settings are not shared among stores; each store can create security groups as needed to control access on a local level.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a security group

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin11.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..90e26f0 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + + +Copy a Security Group + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Security Group

+

Custom Security Groups | View or Edit Group Rights

+

 

+

You can quickly create a new security group by copying an existing one. Once copied, simply edit the rights of the new group as necessary and then assign it to your employees. The employees assigned to the original group are not copied to the new group; you must manually assign them.

+

To copy a security group:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Security.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy Group from the window toolbar.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Copy Security Group dialog, select the group to be copied, enter a unique name for the new group, and then select Copy Group.

    +
    4. +
+

The new group is created and added as a new column to the Security window. The initial rights are the same as the group that was copied.

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the security rights of the new group, as necessary.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Assign the new group to employees, using the procedures described in the View or Edit an Employee Record topic.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a custom security group

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin12.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin12.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4624649 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin12.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + + +View or Edit a Security Group + + + + + + + + + + + +

View or Edit a Security Group

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Add a Security Group | Copy a Security Group

+ +

 

+

With adequate security rights to do so, you can view and edit the security rights assigned to any of your security groups or add a new group with the rights needed. If employees assigned to a group you are editing are currently working in Point of Sale, their revised rights won't go into effect for them until they log out and then back in.

+

To view or edit a security group:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Security. (Or, from the Employee list, select View/Edit Security Rights from the I Want To menu.)

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select or clear checkboxes for specific rights in the columns for any of your security groups.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Use the View drop-down to limit the displayed rights to a single area of the program or choose All Security Rights to view them all.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the Find field at the top of the window to search for a specific right by keyword. To narrow your search, select a program area from the View drop-down list first.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Revert Default Groups at the bottom of the window to reset all rights of the four predefined groups back to the default settings.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Print to print a report of the assigned security rights by group.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Options to rename or delete a group are available from the I Want To menu.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you can't find a security right in the program area you are expecting it, try selecting General, POS, or All Security Rights from the View drop-down list and then searching for it.

    +
    • +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Default rights for predefined groups

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin13.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin13.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5878956 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin13.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Delete a Security Group + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Security Group

+

Add a Custom Security Group | Employees & Security Overview

+

 

+

You can only delete your custom security groups.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Security.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Delete Group.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Delete Security roup dialog, select the group you wish to delete from the drop-down list. In the second drop-down, specify the group to which the employees from the deleted group should be assigned.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Delete.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    If prompted, select Yes to confirm the deletion.

    +
    6. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Security rights for predefined groups

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_commissions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_commissions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fc6ca63 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_commissions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,28 @@ + + + + + + +Track Employee Sales Commissions + + + + + + + + + + +

Track Employee Sales Commissions

+
+

Basic

+
+

If you pay your employees a commission for sales, Point of Sale can calculate and report commission amounts for you. Each employee can have his own commission rate and items can be marked in inventory as eligible or not for commission. When making a sale of items earning a commission, Point of Sale will calculate the commissions which can be seen in a report.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_mgr_override.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_mgr_override.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc29e4f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_mgr_override.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + +Security: Manager Override + + + + + + + + + + + +

Security: Manager Override

+

Security Overview | Log In/Out | Default Rights

+

 

+

Many actions can be completed only by users with sufficient security rights to perform them. The Manager Override function provides an option for those times when it may be necessary for a manager to accomplish a sales task for which the current logged-in user does not have sufficient rights.

+

When a sales task is attempted for which the current user does not have rights, the Manager Override alert is displayed, which allows a manger to temporarily sign in and complete the action. The manager login is good only for the current task, security immediately reverts to the previous user.

+

 

+

Manager Override

+

To override a security limitation:

+
    +
  1. +

    When the Manager Override dialog is displayed and you wish to override the limitation on the current user, sign in with your user name and password.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete the task and save.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Security automatically reverts to the previous user.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Only certain point-of-sale tasks  trigger the Manager Override alert:

+
    +
  • +

    Attempting to give a discount on a receipt without the right to do so

    +
    • +
  • +

    Attempting to sell item with a zero price or changing the price

    +
    • +
  • +

    Attempting to entering a negative quantity on a regular sales receipt

    +
    • +
  • +

    Attempting to accept a check when the customer record is flagged "Do not accept checks"

    +
    • +
  • +

    Attempting to charge a new sale to a customer account when the charge would exceed the customer's account limit or a past due amount is indicated

    +
    • +
  • +

    Attempting certain other edits at the time of sale

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The Cashier and Associate fields retain the original entries; they do not change to reflect the override user.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Other windows opened while in Manager Override will have the elevated rights of the manager, but once the original task is completed these windows will be downgraded to the original user's rights or automatically closed if the original user has no rights to them.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_passwords.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_passwords.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..10bde83 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_passwords.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +secadmin_passwords + + + + + + + + + + +

Using Passwords to Protect your Data

+

This is a popup topic. and has been hidden

+

Password logins, combined with security group assignments, can be used in Point of Sale to restrict employee access to features or sensitive data. A password is also required to encrypt Store Exchange files sent between stores.

+

The following apply to passwords in Point of Sale:

+
    +
  • +

    Can be any combination of up to twenty letters, numbers, or special characters. Choose a password that you can easily remember but that cannot be easily guessed by others.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Passwords are case-sensitive; i.e. they must be entered with the same combination of upper and lower-case characters each time.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    The Store Exchange password must be the same at each store.

    +
    • + +
  • +

    Write down and store your passwords in a safe place.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you have forgotten your password, ask your Security Administrator to  assign you a new one.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_prntemplst.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_prntemplst.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2ce33b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_prntemplst.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Print or Export Your Employee List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print or Export Your Employee List

+

Printing Basics | Export Data | Reports Overview

+

 

+

A list of your employees can be printed or exported to Excel for reference. Other employee reports, such as Employee Sales in various formats are available in the reports area.

+

(Pro) You also have access to Employee Commissions and Time Clock reports.  

+

To print or export from the Employee List:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your employee list and select the records you wish to print or export. How do I select multiple records in a list?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
+

If printing or exporting a group of related records, you may find it helpful to filter the list first. To print or export the entire list, make sure the list filter is set to display all records.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the window toolbar, select Print.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From the I Want To menu, select Export to Excel.

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the on-screen instructions to print/export the selected records, displayed records, or all records.

    +
    2. +
+

To print or export your employee list as a report:

+

Printing or exporting your list as a report gives you additional flexibility in formatting and filtering.

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Reports menu at the home page, select Report Center.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Employees Employee List as the report type.

    +
    3. +
+

The employee list report is displayed with default settings.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Modify to change report columns, filters, display options, etc

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK. The report is re-generated and displayed on the screen.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Print or Excel to output the report as desired.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c17e37a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards.htm @@ -0,0 +1,44 @@ + + + + + + +Track Employee Hours + + + + + + + + +

Track Employee Hours Worked

+

Employee & Security Overview | Clock In/Out

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale's Time Clock provides a way to track employee hours worked. Employees clock in and out to begin and end their work shifts. Associated tools and reports are available for managers to review and edit time clock records when needed. If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software, Time Clock entries can be sent to your financial software to use in preparing your payroll.

+

The Time Clock feature is turned on by selecting I want to track employee hours on the General page of company preferences. Time Clock tasks are then available from the Employees menu.

+

In a multi-store configuration, time records are sent from remote stores to Headquarters and Headquarters can add or edit Time Clock entries for any store.

+

 

+

* If you are on an earlier version of QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software, your time entries are not sent. However, the Time Clock Weekly Summary report in Point of Sale is formatted the same as the employee Weekly Timesheet available in QuickBooks Desktop, allowing you to quickly transpose your time worked information for payroll processing.

+

Select a topic to learn more:

+

Correct a time entry

+

Manage clocked-in employees

+

Time Clock history

+

Time Clock reports

+

Security rights for time tracking

+

Send time records to QuickBooks Desktop for payroll

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_clockinout.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_clockinout.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4481e82 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_clockinout.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Clock In/Out + + + + + + + + + + + +

Clock In/Out

+

Log In/Out of Point of Sale | Change your Password

+
+

Pro

+
+

Note: The availability of Time Clock is controlled by your Features to Use preference settings and employees must be set up as hourly employees. Learn more

+

 

+

Hourly-wage employees should clock in and out to begin and end their work shift.

+

To clock in or out:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the home page, select Clock In/Out from the Employees menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select your user name from the drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter your password (if required).

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Clock In or Clock Out, as appropriate.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If the Hourly check box is selected on the employee record, the employee will be prompted to clock in when logging in to Point of Sale. Answering Yes clocks you in without having to open the Clock In/Out window.

    +
    • +
  • +

    When requiring logins, clocking in/out is independent of logging in/out (other than as covered in Note 1). The ability of an employee to clock in/out is not affected by who is currently logged in.

    +
    • +
  • +

    An employee stays clocked in until clocked out, even if Point of Sale or the computer is shut down.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Add a new time entry

+

Manage clocked-in employees

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_correcting.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_correcting.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a969256 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_correcting.htm @@ -0,0 +1,64 @@ + + + + + + +Correct a Time Clock Entry + + + + + + + + + + + +

Correct a Time Clock Entry

+

Add a New Time Entry | Time Clock History | Time Clock Reports

+
+

Pro

+
+

If you have sufficient security rights, you can edit the entries in your Time Clock history until they have been sent to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

Multi-store Exception: Time clock entries can be edited at a remote store only until they have been sent to Headquarters.  

+

To edit a Time Clock entry:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display your Time Clock history if necessary (select from the Employees menu).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use normal list procedures to locate and select the entry that needs correcting.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Edit Entry from the window toolbar.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Make changes as necessary and then select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you edit date or time fields, the Elapsed time will automatically update.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you edit the elapsed time, the Clock Out date/time will automatically update.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Send Time Clock records to QuickBooks Desktop for payroll

+

Clock in/out

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_history.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_history.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..74ee675 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_history.htm @@ -0,0 +1,66 @@ + + + + + + +Time Clock History + + + + + + + + + +

Time Clock History

+

Correct a Time Entry | Time Clock Reports

+
+

Pro

+
+

Your Time Clock history is very similar to other lists in Point of Sale. It displays a listing of Time Clock entries for your hourly employees for a specified time period. Each entry in history is comprised of one clock in/clock out sequence.

+

What's important about Time Clock history?

+
    +
  • +

    Both "open" and closed entries are displayed. An open entry is one where an employee has clocked in but has not yet clocked out; therefore the Clock Out and Elapsed time fields are empty.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Open entries are reflected on Time Clock reports, but in a multi-store setup are not sent to Headquarters during End of Day exchanges.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Time entries can be viewed, edited, copied, or deleted, and new entries can be made (subject to security rights).

    +
    • +
  • +

    When filtering the list by the default date ranges (Today, Yesterday, etc.), records are displayed based on the clock-in date. To see records based on other criteria, set up a custom filter or choose to display all entries.

    +
    • +
  • +

    With the list collapsed (Select Collapse at the top if necessary), the selected employee's time clock detail is displayed on the bottom of the right-side information panel.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can quickly run one of the Time Clock reports by selecting it from the I Want To menu.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If sending time records to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software, once sent they can no longer be edited in Point of Sale. Learn more about sending time records to QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Manage clocked-in employees

+

Clock in/out

+

Employees & security overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_manageclockins.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_manageclockins.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3bd8d40 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_manageclockins.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + +Manage Clocked-in Employees + + + + + + + + + + + +

Manage Clocked-in Employees

+

Add New Time Entry | Time Clock History | Time Clock Reports

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Manage Clocked-in Employees window displays the name, clock in time, and elapsed time for each employee that is currently clocked in. The  window allows an employee with adequate rights to view and, if necessary, clock out and adjust the time worked. This may become necessary if an employee has forgotten to clock out when leaving.

+

To view employees currently clocked-in:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Employees menu, select Manage Clocked-In Employees.

    +

    The window is displayed with clocked-in employees listed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select an employee name from the list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If necessary, select Clock Out.

    +
    4. +
+

You are asked if you want to modify the hours for this employee. Answer Yes or No. If yes, the time entry is opened in Time Clock history for editing.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Correct a time entry

+

Clock in/out

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_new.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_new.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..16bbc96 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_new.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + +Add a New Time Entry + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Time Entry

+

Manage Clocked-in Employees | Time Clock History | Time Clock Reports

+

 

+
+

Pro

+
+

If you have sufficient security rights, you can add new entries to your Time Clock history. This is handy if an employee forgets to clock in for his shift.

+

To add a Time Clock entry:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the Home Page, select New Employee Time Entry from the Employees menu.

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

From your Time Clock History list, select New Entry.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the employee name, Store number (if applicable), and clock in/out dates and times as applicable.

    +
    2. +
+

If making an entry in the Elapsed Time field, use the format hh:mm (Example: 04:30 for 4.5 hours)

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can enter the clock in time and elapsed time and Point of Sale will calculate and enter the clock out time accordingly.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you enter an elapsed time with no entries in the date and time fields, Point of Sale will automatically assign clock in/out dates and times starting with the present time.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Correct a time entry

+

Clock in/out

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_report.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_report.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a2ab499 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadmin_timecards_report.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + +Time Clock Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Time Clock Reports

+

Time Clock Overview | Time Clock History | Reports Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

There are three Time Clock reports available.

+
    +
  • +

    Time Clock Summary Summarizes total hours clocked-in by employee for the selected time period.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Time Clock DetailA more detailed listing of employee hours, including clock in/out dates and times.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Weekly Time SheetDay-by-day employee hours for a full week. Starting day of the week can be changed to meet your payroll model. This report is formatted similarly to the Weekly Timesheet in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    • +
+

These reports are available from:

+
    +
  • +

    the Employees category of the Reports menu or Report Center, or

    +
    • +
  • +

    From the I Want To menu in your Time Clock History list

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Manage clocked-in employees

+

Send time records to QuickBooks Desktop financial software for payroll

+

Employees & security overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadminoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadminoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..405d167 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/secadminoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,102 @@ + + + + + + + + +Employees & Security Overview + + + + + + + + + + + +

Employees & Security Overview

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic | Add an Employee | Security Rights

+ +

 

+

In the working environment of a small retailer, it is not uncommon for the owner or manager to use the same register as a sales associate. You may want to give different security rights to different employees to limit access to certain features or to ensure confidentiality regarding sensitive financial information.

+

Adding employees in Point of Sale and requiring password logins allows you to:

+
    +
  • +

    Restrict access to program features and sensitive data

    +
    • +
  • +

    Automatically add employee names to documents for accountability

    +
    • +
  • +

    Track employee sales to evaluate performance

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Pay commissions

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Use employee Time Clock to track hourly employees and assist in your preparing your payroll

    +
    • +
+

In addition to login names, passwords, and security group assignments, employee records can store addresses, contact information, and related notes.

+

The use of the security features are optional, but strongly recommended. Besides providing the benefits outlined above, requiring user names and passwords to access the program helps protect your valuable data against unauthorized access across a network or the Internet. Using Point of Sales security features should be one component of a comprehensive data protection strategy.

+

 

+

Multi-Store Note: Employees and security rights are defined at each store independently and are not exchanged between stores although Time Clock records are sent from remote stores to Headquarters. When a new employee is added to Point of Sale at a remote store, the remote may want to contact Headquarters outside of Point of Sale to have the employee added to the central database for payroll or other purposes. Each store has their own System Administrator.

+

 

+

Turning Security On

+

The security features are enabled by selecting the company preference check box to Require users to log in. You are immediately prompted to enter a System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic password and then to log in.

+

Once security is enabled in this way, only the Security Administrator can change this setting, add or delete employees, and perform other security-related tasks.

+

 

+

About Security Groups

+

You control access by assigning your employees to security groups; each group having a different set of access rights. Point of Sale comes with four predefined security groups that you can assign. If the default rights in the four predefined groups don't meet your needs, you can easily change them or set up new groups with access rights of your choosing.

+

 

+

Why else might a Point of Sale feature not be available to me?

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/security_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/security_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..4ee2ecf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/security_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + +security_hdi + + + + + + + + + +

Employees & Security: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

 

+

Working with Employee Records

+

Add an employee

+

View/edit an employee Record

+

Copy an employee record

+

Delete an employee record

+ +

Track employee commissions

+ +

Use Time Clock to track hours worked

+ +

Print or export my employee list

+

Run employee reports

+

 

+

Working with Security

+

Turn security on/off (require employee logins)

+

View predefined group security rights

+

Add a custom security group

+

View/edit security group properties

+

Log in/out

+

Change my login password

+

Track employees without requiring logins

+

Set up automatic security logouts

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_editordelete.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_editordelete.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0f4e4ed --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_editordelete.htm @@ -0,0 +1,141 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit or Delete Shipments + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit or Delete Shipments

+

How Do I?Click to expand/collapse topic list | Shipping Manager Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

The ability to edit or delete shipping information may be limited as follows:

+
    +
  • +

    Before a receipt has been saved: No restrictions. The shipping information or shipping amount can be edited or deleted.

    +
    • +
  • +

    After a receipt has been saved: The shipping information, except amount, can be edited or removed. The amount cannot be removed because payment has already been taken with the shipping included.*

    +
    • +
  • +

    In Shipping Manager: If the shipment was made through Shipping Manager, the shipment or a specific parcel can be edited or deleted in Shipping Manager until the carrier has physically received the package, even if it can no longer be edited or deleted in Point of Sale. However, a change initiated in Shipping Manager does not update the receipt in Point of Sale.

    +
    • +
+

To edit shipping information before saving the receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Click anywhere in the shipping information area on the receipt. The Enter Shipping Info dialog opens.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Edit the information and click Save.

    +
    3. +
+

To delete the shipping information, including the amount, before saving:

+
    +
  1. +

     Click the Options button in the shipping information area on the receipt.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Remove Shipping Info.

    +
    3. +
+

The information and shipping charge is immediately removed.

+

To edit shipping information after saving the receipt:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and open the receipt in sales history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Add/Edit Shipping Information.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    In the Shipping Info section of the receipt, make a selection from the drop-down Options list:

    +
    4. +
+

Ship Items via Shipping Manager: Available only if Shipping Manager is enabled. Launches Shipping Manager for shipping or tracking the shipment. If a tracking number is recorded on the receipt, this option will connect to the carrier's web site to track the progress of the package.

+

Edit Shipping Info: Allows you to change or remove the shipping address, shipping provider, ship date, and tracking number. You cannot however remove the shipping amount.

+

Remove Shipping Info: Removes all shipping information except the shipping amount.

+

Print  Mailing Label: This option prints a shipping/mailing label using the printer and template set up in Point of Sale.

+

Print Packing Slip: Prints a listing of items to be shipped and both the Bill To and Ship To addresses.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    *The only way to remove or edit the shipping amount after a receipt has been saved is to reverse the receipt and then create a new corrected one with the updated shipping information. If canceling the shipment, you may find it quicker to create a new receipt to refund the shipping amount to the customer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Since they are just estimates, shipping amounts and information on customer orders can be edited or removed at anytime.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_info.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba72777 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,261 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Shipping Information on Receipts + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Shipping Information on Receipts

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list | Shipping Manager Overview

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Note: The availability of the shipping fields on receipts is controlled by your Features to Use and Sales: Shipping preference settings.

+

 

+

Use these procedures to record shipping information and charges on sales receipts.

+

How are you shipping?

+

Using Shipping Manager Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Not using Shipping Manager Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If selling customer order items on the receipt, any shipping information recorded on the customer order is carried to the sales receipt. If the order is only being partially filled (i.e. some items remain due), you are asked if you want to apply the shipping charge to the current receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Subject to security rights and these limitations, you can edit the shipping amount recorded on the receipt; even if that amount was brought over from the Shipping Manager.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can apply sales tax to shipping amounts if required. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    If requiring user logins, the security right "POS > Edit shipping amount", can be used to allow or prevent editing of the shipping amount on a receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can customize your packing slip and store shipping label print templates if needed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The ability to add or edit shipping information or amounts after saving a receipt may be limited. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Making Sales Receipts

+

Estimating Shipping on Customer Orders

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_oview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_oview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5f969eb --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_oview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,108 @@ + + + + + + +Shipping Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shipping Overview

+

How do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale offers two way to enter shipping information on sales receipts and customer orders.

+
    +
  • +

    Manually enter the shipping provider, charges, tracking numbers, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the integrated Shipping Manager, which interfaces with UPS to process and track shipments online, print shipping labels, and add the charges and tracking numbers to your sales receipts. Learn more.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    To add the shipping fields to receipts and customer orders go to company preferences and on the General page select I want to record shipping addresses on sales receipts. Shipping Manager requires additional setup.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can apply sales tax to shipping amounts if required. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    If requiring user logins, the security right labeled POS > Edit shipping amount can be used to allow or prevent editing of the shipping amount on a receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Shipping information and the carrier's tracking number, if applicable, is included on the customer's printed receipt.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_report_track.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_report_track.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1f9c2b2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_report_track.htm @@ -0,0 +1,124 @@ + + + + + + +Reporting and Tracking of Shipments + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reporting and Tracking of Shipments

+

Shipping Overview | Shipping Manager | Shipping from Receipts

+
+

Pro

+
+

Point of Sale offers two reports to help you track your shipments. If you use Shipping Manager, you have reports and  package tracking capabilities in Shipping Manager and in Point of Sale.

+

 

+

Shipping Reports and Tracking in Point of Sale

+

The shipping reports are available in the Sales > Shipping report category. Note: Only shipments recorded on Point of Sale receipts show up in these reports.

+
    +
  • +

    Shipping Summary Report - A quick view of the number and cost of shipments by carrier/service for the specified period. This report can be modified to add additional data. Double-click when the QuickZoom icon is shown to drill down to the detail report. View Example View Sample Report

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Shipping Detail Report - A more detailed look at your shipments, with tracking numbers and information from the sales receipts. You can run this report directly or reach it by drilling down from a summary report (shown is a drill-down from the summary report above). If run directly, this report can be modified to add additional data.  View Example View Sample Report

    +
    • +
+

If using Shipping Manager, tracking numbers are automatically added to Point of Sale receipts. If you have an Internet connection, you can go to the carrier's Web site to track the status of a package without having to open Shipping Manager and without having to retype the tracking number.

+
    +
  • +

    Sales Receipt Form - The tracking number is displayed in the Shipping Info area of the form. Click the link or select Track Shipment from the drop-down Options button.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales History - When viewing your collapsed Sales History list (example below), a tracking link is added to the Information Panel on the right. Click the link to connect to the tracking site.

    +
    • +
+

       Shipping tracking link; click to go to the carrier's Web site and track the package

+

 

+

Note: If a Shipping Manager shipment contains multiple packages, each has its own tracking number. The link displayed in Point of Sale is for the first package. You can track the other packages from the shipping history window in Shipping Manager as described below.

+

 

+

 

+

Reports and Tracking in Shipping Manager

+

Report and tracking features are also available from the Shipping History window in Shipping Manager, if you use it.

+

To access Shipping History window:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Point of Sale menu, select QuickBooks Shipping Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select UPS Shipping Options.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Track or Cancel a Shipment.

    +
    4. +
+

The Shipping Manager is launched and your shipping history, defaulted to today's shipments, is displayed. Each line in the table represents a package, not a shipment (which could have multiple packages). View Example View Sample Report

+ +

Some of the options available from this window are:

+
    +
  • +

    Change the date range, search for a specific parcel, or customize the columns.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Highlight a package and then select Track to go online and view the status.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Report to run, and optionally print, a detailed report of shipments. View Example View Sample Report

    +
    • +
  • +

    Right-click a parcel to see additional options.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Delete to cancel the shipment. This option is available only until the carrier accepts the package.

    +
    • +
+

Select Help on this window for more information about managing your shipments.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you are integrated with QuickBooks financial software, shipping charges, including any handling or markup from Shipping Manager, are sent to a single Shipping Expense account as mapped in company preferences.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_serviceitem.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_serviceitem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..052e570 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_serviceitem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Using a Service Item for Shipping/Handling Charges + + + + + + + + + + +

Use a Service Item for Shipping/Handling Charges

+

Service Item Overview | Create a Sales Receipt

+

 

+

Pro Note: Pro level users have advanced shipping options. Learn more

+

 

+

To charge for shipping and/or handling, set up a service item in inventory called "Shipping Charges" or similar.

+

If shipping charges are taxable in your area, assign the appropriate tax code to the item and optionally map the shipping charges to the appropriate QuickBooks financial software income account on the item record. You can enter your standard shipping charge as the item price or leave the price at zero (0) and edit it on a sale-by-sale basis as you create the sales receipts.

+

When creating a receipt, list the shipping charge item on the receipt in the same manner as other items. Sales tax will be calculated and added for the shipping charge item, if applicable.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Use tax codes

+

Map items to QuickBooks accounts

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8295ebe --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr.htm @@ -0,0 +1,212 @@ + + + + + + +Shipping Manager: Overview and Setup + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shipping Manager: Overview and Setup

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

With the QuickBooks Shipping Manager, you can process a shipment and prepare a shipping label with United Parcel Service (UPS) with the "ship to" information pre-filleddirectly from Point of Sale sales receipts and customer orders. You can also track or cancel shipments and view online shipping reports.

+

The UPS functionality of this product is available only for packages shipped from the United States of America.

+

What would you like to know more about?

+

Shipping Manager Requirements Click to expand topic

+ +

Turn Shipping Manager On Click to expand topic

+ +

Set Up Shipping Manager Click to expand topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Shipping Manager has its own help system to assist you with settings and its shipping forms. Select Help from the right-hand menu within Shipping Manager.

    +
    • +
  • +

    All amounts from Shipping Manager are estimates only, based on information provided by you, and subject to final verification by the carrier.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Once set up, you can make shipments by accessing Shipping Manager from the Point of Sale menu, however the shipping information in this case is not added to Point of Sale receipts nor is it available on Point Of Sale reports. To ship and report on items sold in Point of Sale, select a shipping option from a sales receipt instead. Note: Shipping reports are available within Shipping Manager for all shipments made.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, shipments made from QuickBooks Desktop appear on the same shipping reports in Shipping Manager as those made from Point of Sale (unless you have set up separate accounts).

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr_estimates.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr_estimates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..025b860 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr_estimates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,210 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Shipping Estimates on Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Shipping Estimates on Customer Orders

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list | Create a Customer Order | Fill an Order

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Shipping information and an estimate of the charges can be entered on a sales order or work order and then transferred to the sales receipt made when the order is filled. If using Shipping Manager, you can retrieve an estimate of shipping charges from UPS and enter that estimate on the order.

+

The actual shipment is always done from a sales receipt.

+

To enter a shipping estimate on a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create the order, adding the items and customer.

    +
    2. +
+

Specify how you are shipping to continue:

+

Using Shipping Manager Click to expand topic

+ +

Not using Shipping Manager Click to expand topic

+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Shipping information recorded on a customer order is carried to a sales receipt that fills the order. If the sales order is only being partially filled (i.e. some items remain due), you can choose whether to transfer the shipping amount. Once on the receipt, you can edit or enter additional shipping information or charges as necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can apply sales tax to your shipping amounts if required. Learn more

    +
    • +
  • +

    Shipping information is not available on a layaway.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Enter Shipping Information on Receipts

+

Shipping Manager Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr_scale.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr_scale.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..716e2b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/shipping_shipmgr_scale.htm @@ -0,0 +1,121 @@ + + + + + + +Shipping Manager: Use an Electronic Scale + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Shipping Manager: Use an Electronic Scale

+

How Do I? Click to expand/collapse topic list

+ +
+

Pro

+
+

Shipping Manager supports the use of an electronic scale. This allows Shipping Manager to pull the shipping weight from the scale when attached  to the Point of Sale workstation via a USB connection.

+

Supported Scale:  Mettler Toledo PS60 USB

+

 

+

Note: This scale integrates with Shipping Manager only; it is not supported in Point of Sale inventory or on transaction documents. The instructions given below come from Shipping Manager and since hardware compatibility or setup instructions may change from time-to-time you should consult the help system within Shipping Manager to ensure you have the latest information.

+

To set up the scale in Shipping Manager:

+
    +
  1. +

    Attach the scale to an available USB portClick to display a popup topic on the workstation running Shipping Manager.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Turn on the scale and test that the scale correctly displays a known weight.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the Point of Sale menu, select QuickBooks Shipping Manager and then UPS Shipping Options > Settings.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Scales from the Setting menu.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select the check box to Use Electronic Scale and select USB-connected scale as the model.

    +
    6. +
+

Shipping Manager Scale Settings

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Test. The weight from your scale should be displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK to save your settings.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    When shipping from a sales receipt, put the package on the scale before selecting Ship These Items. When the Shipping Manager form comes up the weight will be pre-filled in the Weight field.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Shipping Manager Overview and Setup

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b28a45 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +Taking Deposits on Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Take a Deposit on a Customer Order

+

View Deposit History | Refund Deposits

+
+

Pro

+
+

When making a deposit on a customer order, a customer is, in essence, purchasing deposit credits that can later be used to pay for the merchandise/service purchase. Thus, receiving a deposit is an activity tracked on reports but is not a merchandise sale. A virtually unlimited number of deposits can be recorded for each customer order.

+

You can configure Point of Sale company preferences so that a minimum initial deposit is suggested or required on new customer orders.

+

To take a deposit:

+
    +
  1. +

    Create a new order or display an existing order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Deposit/Payment from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Take Deposit window is displayed. If this is the initial deposit and there is a suggested or required minimum deposit amount, it will be auto-filled.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter an amount or accept the suggested/required amount.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK.

    +
    3. +
+

The deposit receipt Payment screen is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Take payment and save/print the deposit receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Edit customer orders

+

Customer orders on reports

+

How deposits are sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+

Preferences for customer orders

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so09.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so09.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..29f4403 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so09.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + + +Refund Customer Order Deposits + + + + + + + + + + + +

Refund Customer Order Deposits

+

View Deposit History | Take a Deposit

+
+

Pro

+
+

When a customer order is canceled, the entire amount on deposit is typically refunded and the order closed.

+

To refund the entire deposited amount:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the customer order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Issue a Refund from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The refund confirmation window is displayed.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Yes.

    +
    2. +
+

The deposit receipt Payment screen is displayed with the refund amount listed in the Change column.

+
    +
  1. +

    Move or accept the amount for the change method (cash, credit card, etc.) you will use to refund the deposit and then save/print the receipt.

    +
    2. +
+

The change window displays the refund amount and type.

+
    +
  1. +

    You are asked if you would like to close the unfilled order. Select Yes to change the status to Closed or No to leave the order open.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

If necessary, you can refund an individual deposit and leave the remainder by reversing the individual deposit receipt from sales history instead. This removes just the deposit amount made on that receipt from the customer order.

+

 

+

Note:

+
    +
  • +

    If you charge a fee on canceled orders, such as a restocking fee, set the fee up as a service item in inventory, list it on the order, and sell it before issuing the refund. This will reduce the deposit balance and the refund by the fee amount. Be sure to follow local regulations regarding handling of customer deposits.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Locate a customer order

+

Delete a customer order

+

Edit a customer order

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so10.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6c9b53b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,59 @@ + + + + + + + +Customer Order Payment History + + + + + + + + + + + +

Customer Order Payment History

+

Take a Deposit | Refund a Deposit

+
+

Pro

+
+

The Payment History window displays all deposits/payments for a particular order. Included in the Payment History for each deposit is the deposit amount, date, deposit receipt number, form of payment, and whether or not a deposit receipt has been reversed:

+

You can take additional deposits or refund the amount on deposit directly from the Payment History window.

+

When printing orders, the deposit history is included.

+

To display an orders payment history:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display the order.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Payment History from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Deposit/Payment to take an additional deposit.

    +
    4. +
+

Or

+

Select Refund to refund the amount currently on deposit.

+

Select Cancel to close the Payment History window.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Locate a customer order

+

Take a deposit

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Customer order overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so15.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so15.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c08360a --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/so15.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +Delete a Customer Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Customer Order

+

Locate an Order | Refund a Deposit | Edit an Order

+
+

Pro

+
+

Customer orders can be safely deleted at any time as long as no deposit balance exists, .

+

To delete a customer order:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select or display the customer order(s) you want to delete. How do I select multiple orders?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Delete from the I Want To Menu.

    +
    3. +
+

If the customer order has a remaining deposit balance, it cannot be deleted until you refund the deposit. Point of Sale will alert you if this is the case.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Typically, a customer order is deleted after all the ordered items have been sold (Qty Due = 0) and the order closed. The sales receipt provides a permanent record of the transaction.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Deleting a customer order removes it from the corresponding customer order list and from the customer's history (although the sales receipt remains).

    +
    • +
  • +

    You are not required to delete customer orders after they have been filled, but if there is little chance youll ever want to view or copy it in the future, you may want to delete it just to keep your order list compact. Once deleted, a customer order cannot be recovered.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Fill an order (selling items)

+

Customer order overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_intuitservice.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_intuitservice.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f082c58 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_intuitservice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Store Exchange Method: Intuit Service + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Method: Intuit Service

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

This service requires activation by phone during  initial setup. Additional fee may apply.

+

 

+

The Intuit Service is a Web-based database exchange service provided by Intuit. When you send files you connect to the database and upload files for your other store(s). When you receive, you download the files left for you by the other stores.

+

The Store Exchange database is accessible only through the Store Exchange procedure within Point of Sale. Your Store Exchange files are secured by a unique encryption derived by the combination of your Store Exchange password with other confidential information from your Point of Sale user license.

+

If you are using more than one Point of Sale company file, you will need to use a different password for each to ensure the correct file is updated during Store Exchanges.

+

 

+

Usage:

+
    +
  • +

    Simple setup;  choose Intuit Service as your Store Exchange method and activate the service by phone

    +
    • +
  • +

    One-click sending and receiving of files; Point of Sale automatically generates and encrypts the files, connects to the service, and uploads/downloads only the files intended for your store(s)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Old files are automatically removed or overwritten in the online database after processing

    +
    • +
  • +

    Can be scheduled to occur once a day at a time convenient for you

    +
    • +
+

Requirements:

+
    +
  • +

    Must have an active Internet connection at the Server Workstation in each store; a high-speed connection is strongly recommended

    +
    • +
  • +

    Must activate service by phone. Additional fee may apply.

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_preparepics.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_preparepics.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fef85a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_preparepics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Prepare and Send Item Pictures + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Prepare and Send Item Pictures

+

Add Pictures to Your Items | Receive Pictures (Remote)

+
+

 

+
+

Note: This task is available only at Headquarters.

+

 

+

If you add pictures to your inventory items at Headquarters, you can send those pictures to remote stores, where upon receiving them they will automatically be displayed for items. Due to the potentially large file sizes, item pictures are not included in the normal Store Exchange process; a separate and distinct procedure is required. You may want to periodically send item pictures so that additions or edits made at Headquarters are reflected at your remote stores.

+

Pictures can only be sent to remote stores on removable media, such as a CD, USB flash drive, or external hard drive.

+

To prepare and send pictures:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Stores menu or the Store Exchange Center, select Prepare Pictures.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Read the information in the Prepare Pictures dialog.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    If necessary, change the location or drive to which the picture file will be created by selecting Browse.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Next to continue.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Export.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Close to exit once the process is complete.

    +
    4. +
+

The picture file is created in the specified location, with a filename of: QBPOS Item Pictures.qbt.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    At the remote store, select Receive Pictures from the Stores menu and browse to the removable media containing the picture file.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you've also added new items to inventory, be sure to send your regular Store Exchange file to the remote before sending the picture file. This ensures the new items are present in the remote inventory so pictures can be assigned.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_rcv_intuitservice.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_rcv_intuitservice.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..13f6429 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_rcv_intuitservice.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Intuit Service + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Intuit Service

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open windows and ensure you are connected to the Internet.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Stores menu or Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files.

    +
    3. +
+

Point of Sale opens the Store Exchange dialog, connects to the Intuit Service and checks for files from your other store(s). If a file is available, it is downloaded to your In folder.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Process In. Headquarters may have files from each remote store available; all waiting files will be processed at the same time.

    +
    2. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receive files: Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_receivepics.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_receivepics.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0114686 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_receivepics.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive Pictures (Remote Stores) + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive Pictures (Remote Stores)

+
+

 

+
+

Note: This task is available only at Remote Stores. If you also received a regular Store Exchange file from Headquarters, receive that file first. This ensures that any new items, for which pictures might be included in the picture file, are added to your inventory first.

+

 

+

If your Headquarters location adds pictures to inventory items, they can send the picture file to you on removable media. After processing the picture file, you will be able to see the item pictures on the item records and on most Point of Sale documents.

+

Due to the potentially large file sizes, item pictures are not included in the normal Store Exchange process. Headquarters will need to prepare and send a separate picture file.

+

To receive a picture file:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Stores menu or the Store Exchange Center, select Receive Pictures.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the Receive Pictures dialog, browse to the folder or drive containing the picture file from Headquarters.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    The default picture file name is: QBPOS Item Pictures.qbt.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Next to continue. A summary of the number of pictures in the received file is displayed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Import to process the file.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Close to exit once the process is complete.

    +
    4. +
+

The pictures will automatically be displayed for your inventory items, provided your preferences are set to associate pictures with items.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add pictures to your items

+

Send Item Pictures from Headquarters

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_resend.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_resend.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f912a57 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/stex_resend.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Resend Files + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Resend Files

+

Automatic Recovery | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

In cases of lost, corrupted, or missed mailbags, Point of Sale will automatically recover and resend necessary files in the next Store Exchange to synchronize your stores.

+

However, they may be circumstances, such as when a store has restored from a backup file that isn't current, that you may need to manually resend files between Headquarters and remote stores. Files can be re-sent in either direction.

+

The following information is included when using this option.

+

From remote store to Headquarters:

+

Specify a date; all documents and records made or edited on or after that date are re-sent.

+
    +
  • +

    Transactional documents (receipts, vouchers, memos, transfer slips)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Drawer count reports

    +
    • +
  • +

    Employee time records

    +
    • +
+

Resending documents to Headquarters will update inventory and add the documents to the appropriate history lists.

+

From Headquarters to remote store:

+
    +
  • +

    Inventory (entire)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer list (entire)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Company preferences

    +
    • +
  • +

    Price changes/discount records (Price Manager)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Open purchase orders

    +
    • +
+

To resend files:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the Server Workstation, select Utilities > Resend Files from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Remote Store: Indicate a resend date; all documents and records made on or after the specified date will be included.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Resend.

    +
    4. +
+

The Store Exchange Send Files window is opened.

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify the store(s) and communication methods for this exchange and then select Send.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_configurehq.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_configurehq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7062545 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_configurehq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,173 @@ + + + + + + + +Configure Store Exchange at Headquarters + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Store Exchange at Headquarters

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

The exchange of information between your stores is referred to as Store Exchange. These instructions are for configuring Store Exchange from the Store Exchange Center, accessed from the Stores menu.

+
    +
  1. +

    If you haven't already, install Point of Sale on the Server Workstation, following the instructions for a Headquarters store in the User Guide.

    +
    2. +
+

Upon starting Point of Sale the first time, you are prompted to create your company data file. Be sure to specify Headquarters as your store type and give your data file a unique name.

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete the Setup Interview at the Server Workstation (launched automatically or select from File menu ) to set up basic Point of Sale options.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    When done with the Setup Interview, select Store Exchange Center from the Stores menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Store Exchange Center lists all possible stores on the right side of the window.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Set Up Store for Store # 2.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter a 1-3 character Store Code, Store Name, and communication method and select Next.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the License Number from the Server Workstation at the remote store and the e-mail address or location to which Store Exchange files are to be sent:

    +
    4. +
+

Desktop e-mail: Enter the e-mail address for the remote store.

+

Web-based e-mail: Specify a folder to which the Store Exchange mailbag is copied. When creating your e-mail, browse to this folder to attach the file.

+

Removable Media: Enter or browse to the applicable drive or port.

+

Network file transfer: Enter or browse to the in folder of the Point of Sale installation on the Server Workstation at the remote store. You must have drives mapped or a UNC path to this folder. Note: If the remote hasnt installed yet, type in the path to the in folder that will be used. You may get an "invalid location" message, but can ignore it. Once the remote has installed and specified the same folder as its "in" folder, Store Exchange will function.

+

Intuit Service: After selecting this option, call the phone number displayed to activate the service. An additional fee may apply. Once activated, Point of Sale will automatically connect to the QuickBase site and log in to send/receive files.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Finish.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Repeat for other remote stores.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Click Set Password on the left side of the Store Exchange Center.  Enter a password to secure store exchange files. This same password must be entered at each remote store in order for them to receive files from you. Note that passwords are case-sensitive.  Tips for passwordsClick to display a popup topic

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Preferences to configure other Store Exchange options.

    +
    5. +
+

Example: the Track Multiple Stores in QuickBooks Using Classes check box if you want to run Profit/Loss reports by store in your QuickBooks Desktop Financial software. This option is only available on this page in you have already established a connection with QuickBooks Desktop, but can be configured later, if desired. Learn more.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Close to leave the Store Exchange Center.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Next Actions to Take at Headquarters

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete your setup of Point of Sale, including installing Client Workstations, setting advanced options, and entering or importing inventory and other data.

    +
    2. +
+

Add items, vendors, customers, etc.

+
    +
  1. +

    After remote stores have installed, run Store Exchange > Send Files to send an initialization file to each remote store. (Remote stores should have installed and configured before sending this file.)

    +
    2. +
+

Back to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Configure Store Exchange at remote stores

+

Schedule Store Exchanges

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_configureremote.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_configureremote.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e83631 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_configureremote.htm @@ -0,0 +1,172 @@ + + + + + + + +Configure Store Exchange at Remote Stores + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Configure Store Exchange at Remote Stores

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

These instructions are for initial installation/configuration of a new POS company data file at a remote store from the Store Exchange Center.  These same options are available in company preferences.

+

 

+

Important Note: If you have been previously using Point of Sale at multiple stores independently of each other, and now want to convert a store (or stores) to a remote in a multi-Store configuration, there are limitations in the data at the remote that can be retained in the new configuration. Contact Intuit Technical Support for help with this conversion.

+

 

+

Information Needed

+

Collect the following information from Headquarters before beginning: 1) the License Number from the Server Workstation at Headquarters, 2) the e-mail address, removable media information, or in-folder path (mapped drive or UNC) to the Server Workstation at Headquarters, and 3) the Store Exchange password entered at Headquarters.

+

To configure a remote store:

+
    +
  1. +

    Install Point of Sale on the Server Workstation, following the instructions for a remote store in the User Guide.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Create a new POS company data file with a unique name when prompted, specifying Remote Store as the Store Type. You can also specify a store number, but if Headquarters assigns you a different number, your selection will be overwritten when you receive your first Store Exchange file from Headquarters.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Run the Setup Interview when it is launched to configure basic Point of Sale settings.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    When done with the Setup Interview, select Store Exchange Center from the Stores menu and configure to exchange with Headquarters by entering:

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  • +

    The License Number for the Server Workstation at Headquarters (from the CD jacket or the Help About Point of Sale screen at Headquarters)

    +
    • +
  • +

    A communication method and the e-mail address or location to send files, as applicable, for Headquarters

    +
    • +
+

Desktop e-mail: Enter the e-mail address for Headquarters.

+

Web-based e-mail: Specify a folder to which the Store Exchange mailbag is copied. When creating your e-mail, browse to this folder to attach the file.

+

Removable Media: Enter or browse to the drive or port to be used.

+

Network file transfer: Enter or browse to the in folder of the Point of Sale installation on the Server Workstation at Headquarters. You must have drives mapped or a UNC path to this folder.

+

Intuit Service: After selecting this option, call the phone number displayed to activate the service. An additional fee may apply. Once activated, Point of Sale will automatically connect to the QuickBase site and log in to send/receive files.

+
    +
  • +

    The same store exchange password entered at Headquarters (required). Learn more.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Click Close to leave the Store Exchange Center.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Next Actions to Take at Remote Stores

+
    +
  1. +

    Complete your Point of Sale setup, including installing Client Workstations, defining local employees and security, adding customers, etc.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Receive and process in a Store Exchange mailbag from Headquarters. This file will initialize your system with inventory items, departments, vendors, company preferences, and related settings.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    After initialization, you may want to review your Point of Sale company preferences for the following store-specific settings:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Default tax location

    +
    • +
  • +

    Default price for sales

    +
    • +
+

You are now ready to begin using Point of Sale!

+

Upgrader Note: If you converted data from a previous version, you can create documents and carry on other POS activities while waiting for the initialization file from Headquarters, but you cannot send a Store Exchange file until you have received one from Headquarters.

+

 

+

Back to top  

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_error_codes.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_error_codes.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f2db9b5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_error_codes.htm @@ -0,0 +1,334 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Error Codes + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Error Codes

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Activity Log

+ +
+

 

+
+

Use this table to help identify causes and solutions to Store Exchange problems.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

1

+		 +

Problem: The License Number entered in Store Exchange preferences do not match between Headquarters and remote stores.

+

Solution: At Headquarters, the License Number for the Server Workstation at each remote store must be entered correctly in Store Exchange preferences. At remotes, the License Number for the Server Workstation at Headquarters must be correctly entered in Store Exchange preferences. Once corrected, run Store Exchange again.

+
+

2

+		 +

Problem: The Store Exchange password in the exchange file does not match the password entered in your Store Exchange preferences.

+

Solution: Be sure the same Store Exchange password has been entered in Store Exchange preferences at all stores and then run Store Exchange again. Note that the password is case-sensitive.

+
+

3

+		 +

Problem: Could not unzip the specified Store Exchange file.

+

Solution: No action necessary. The file is moved to an error folder and another attempt to unzip it will be made the next time you process in files. A request for the other store to resend the mailbag will also be made during the next Store Exchange. Recovery is automatic and the file will be deleted from the error folder upon the first of: 1) successful decompression of the original file, or 2) receipt and successful processing of a resent mailbag.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

4

+		 +

Problem: The file you are trying to process is not in the correct format for a remote store.

+

Solution: Browse to the correct file type and then try processing again. Remote Store Exchange files you receive are in the format sxxnnnnn.qbt where sxx = Store number, and nnnnn = the exchange file sequence number from this remote. Example: s0200001.qbt = Store 2, first exchange file sent. The next file sent from Store 2 would be s0200002.qbt. .qbt is the file extension for all Store Exchange files.

+
+

5

+		 +

Problem: The file you are trying to process is not in the correct format for a Headquarters Store Exchange file.

+

Solution: Browse to the correct file type and then try processing again. Headquarters Store Exchange files are in the format hqnnnnn.qbt where hq = Headquarters, and nnnnn = the exchange file sequence number. Example: hq00001.qbt = Headquarters, first exchange file sent. The next file sent from Headquarters would be hq00002.qbt. .qbt is the file extension for all Store Exchange files.

+
+

6

+		 +

Problem: While clearing history during the change store number process, the specified file could not be deleted.

+

Solution: The file could not be deleted because another user is accessing it. Close Point of Sale on all workstations, reboot the Server Workstation (or server, if data files are on a server), and then try again.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

7

+		 +

Problem: The change store number process was canceled because a backup could not be created.

+

Solution: Typically, this error is caused by an invalid backup path, the specified drive not being available, or insufficient space on the specified drive. Be sure your specified backup path/drive is valid and sufficient space is available, and then try again. Restart the computer if necessary.

+
+

8

+		 +

Problem: The synchronization file normally included in exchange files is missing. The file cannot be processed.

+

Solution: Run Store Exchange Out again at the originating store, and resend the exchange file.

+
+

9

+		 +

Problem: Point of Sale was unable to delete the specified exchange file after processing.

+

Solution: The file was processed successfully. You can safely delete the file manually.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

10

+		 +

Problem: Point of Sale was unable to update or replace the specified file during processing.

+

Solution: The file is open or being accessed by another user. Shut down and restart the computer that stores the data files (Server Workstation or server), then try processing in again.

+
+

11

+		 +

Problem: A problem occurred while sending the store exchange file or the user canceled the process. Unable to restore the previous synchronization file.

+

Solution: The Store Exchange automatic recovery process will fix the synchronization file and resend affected documents with the next complete Store Exchange with Headquarters.

+
+

12

+		 +

Problem: A problem occurred while sending the store exchange file or the user canceled the process. Unable to delete the specified outgoing file.

+

Solution: Shut down and restart the computer that stores the data files (the Server Workstation or server), and then try again. The specified file can be safely deleted manually.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

13

+		 +

Problem: Processing in of the specified exchange file failed. Unable to move the file to the process error folder.

+

Solution: Several possible causes. Shut down and restart the computer that stores data files and then try again.

+
+

14

+		 +

Problem: A problem occurred while processing in customers. The process failed.

+

Solution: Have all other workstations exit Point of Sale, then exit and restart at the Server Workstation. The program will reconstruct the customer file.

+
+

15

+		 +

Problem: A problem occurred while processing in purchase orders. The process failed.

+

Solution: Have all other workstations exit Point of Sale, then exit and restart at the Server Workstation. The program will reconstruct the purchase order file and it will be updated with the next exchange file from Headquarters.

+
+

Back to top

+
+

Code

+		 +

Problem/Solution

+
+

16

+		 +

Problem: The Store Exchange file from the remote is named incorrectly. Characters 2-3 in the filename must be 02-10 to match the remote store number.

+

Example: A file from remote Store # 2 must have 02 as the second and third characters in the file name, e.g. s0200001.qbt.

+

Solution: This error can only result by the file name being changed to not include the correct store number. Try the following remedies:

+
    +
  • +

    Make sure the file is in your "in folder" at Headquarters and then run Store Exchange Receive Files again.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Delete the file at Headquarters, then send a Store Exchange file from Headquarters to the remote (to overwrite any corrupted files). Finally, run Store Exchange Send Files again at the remote to resend the information to Headquarters.

    +
    • +
+

If these suggestions do not correct the problem, consult the Help & Support Resources for assistance.

+
+

17

+		 +

Problem: The specified workstation has program files open and this prevents the processing in of exchange files.

+

Solution: All workstations, except the Server Workstation, must exit Point of Sale (at least to the home page), during the Store Exchange "process in" operation.

+
+

Back to top

+
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_hq.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_hq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8d2d90d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_hq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,248 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Send Files from Headquarters + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Sending Files from Headquarters

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Schedule Store Exchanges

+ +
+

 

+
+

These instructions assume you have already configured Store Exchange with your other stores and specified a communication method.

+

Which Store Exchange method do you want instructions for?

+

Send via desktop e-mail client Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via Web-based e-mail Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via Intuit Service Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via network file transfer Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via removable media Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Store Exchange guidelines at Headquarters:

+
    +
  • +

    It is suggested you read and follow the recommended Store Exchange sequence.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Only the Server Workstation can run Store Exchange

    +
    • +
  • +

    Before you send files, it is a good practice to check for and process in any mailbags that you may have received and not yet processed from remote stores

    +
    • +
  • +

    There are three ways by which sending a mailbag can be initiated:

    +
    • +
  • +

    From the Stores menu or the Store Exchange Center, select  Send Files to prepare and send a mailbag to remote stores.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Include the Store Exchange option in your End of Day procedure.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Schedule your Store Exchanges to happen automatically (available only for Intuit Service and Network File Transfer methods)

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can revise the Store Exchange settings for particular remote stores and select which are to receive the current exchange mailbag in the Store Exchange dialog displayed. Each of your remote stores is listed in this dialog. Select the Edit button to the right of a store line to make changes in how the file is sent to a particular store. Any changes you make here apply only to the current exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select View Log after an exchange is completed to review or troubleshoot any problems that occur.

    +
    • +
  • +

    All exchange mailbag files created at Headquarters are in the format hqxxxxx.qbt, where:

    +
    • +
+

hq = Headquarters

+

xxxxx = sequential number of mailbag, incrementing 00001, 00002, 00003, etc. with each sent mailbag

+

.QBT = the file extension used for all Store Exchange mailbags

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Send item pictures to remote stores

+

Receive a Store Exchange mailbag

+

What information is exchanged?

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_in_folder.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_in_folder.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..31e0112 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_in_folder.htm @@ -0,0 +1,48 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Your Store Exchange "In Folder" Location + + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Setting Your "In Folder" Location

+

Receive Files | Configure Store Exchange

+
+

 

+
+

The "in folder" at each store is where Point of Sale looks for Store Exchange files ("mailbags") from other stores. Point of Sale also checks this folder for files upon startup and alerts you if new exchange mailbags have been received.

+

If using the network file transfer communication method, other stores should point to this folder in their Store Exchange settings. If using the Intuit Service, mailbags are automatically downloaded to this folder for processing. Mailbags received via e-mail or removable media can be downloaded to this folder as well.

+

When you run the Receive Files process, all files in the folder are processed. The default "in folder" for each store is:

+

Windows XP:  C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intuit\Point of Sale 10.0\StEx\In.

+

Windows Vista: C:\Program Data\Intuit\Point of Sale 10.0\StEx\In (by default this is a hidden folder)

+

An alternate "in folder" can be specified on the Multi-Store > Store Exchange > Options page in company preferences. If changing your "in folder" location, be sure other stores using network file transfer change their settings to reflect the new location.

+

Note: If using network file transfer, remote stores should not share an "in folder" on the network. When a remote store finishes processing in a mailbag from Headquarters, it deletes the mailbag file. If remote stores were to share an "in folder", the first store processing the mailbag would delete it, thus preventing other stores from accessing the Headquarters file.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_info.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_info.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1de021f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_info.htm @@ -0,0 +1,80 @@ + + + + + + + +What Information is Exchanged? + + + + + + + + + + + +

What Information is Exchanged between Stores?

+

Store Exchange Overview | Methods of Store Exchange | Exchange Log

+
+

 

+
+

Sent from Headquarters to Remote Stores

+
    +
  • +

    Inventory; including item, department, and vendor lists, and all item quantities, costs, and prices

    +
    • +
  • +

    Price Manager price change and discount records

    +
    • +
  • +

    Active purchase orders; designated by store

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Shared company preferences; includes store codes and headings, price levels, sales tax instructions, customer order deposit requirements, etc.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Optional) If using item pictures, you can send these to remote stores in a separate Store Exchange file

    +
    • +
+

Not sent to remote stores: transactional documents made at Headquarters, employees and security settings, store-specific and workstation preferences.

+

Store Exchange files (mailbags) sent from Headquarters to remotes are in the format hq00001.qbt where 00001 is the sequential mailbag number sent from Headquarters.

+

 

+

Sent from Remote Stores to Headquarters

+
    +
  • +

    Transactional documents; receipts, vouchers, adjustment memos, and transfer slips

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer orders (for quantities only; documents cannot be viewed, edited or filled at Headquarters)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Customer records that have been added, edited, or deleted since last exchange

    +
    • +
  • +

    Time Clock records

    +
    • +
  • +

    Z-Out Drawer Count Reports

    +
    • +
+

Not sent to Headquarters: inventory and related files, employee records (except time clock records), security settings, store-specific and workstation preferences.

+

Store exchange files (mailbags) sent from remotes to Headquarters are in the format snn00001.qbt where snn = Store number, e.g. s02 = Store 2, and 00001 is the sequential mailbag number sent from this remote.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_log.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_log.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0dba120 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_log.htm @@ -0,0 +1,78 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange Activity Log + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange Activity Log

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

All activities that occur during Store Exchange are recorded in the Store Exchange log file. A separate log is maintained at each store. If an error is encountered, the first step should be to check the log entries for messages, error codes, and the mailbag file name that might help identify the problem.

+

To access the Store Exchange log:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select View Log from the Store Exchange dialog or select View Activity Log from the Stores menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select a date/time from the Available Logs: drop-down list.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    (Optional) Select the Show Errors Only check box to remove routine entries and make identification of errors easier.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Use the error code table to review errors and possible solutions.

    +
    5. +
+

To assist in troubleshooting, the log contents can be printed by selecting the Print button.

+

With each new exchange, entries older than 30 days are purged from the log.

+

See also automatic recovery from lost or damaged data.

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_procin.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_procin.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2ec4b9c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_procin.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive and Process Files + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receiving and Processing Files

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

By which method are you receiving files?

+

Receive via desktop e-mail

+

Receive via Web-based e-mail

+

Receive via removable media

+

Receive via network file transfer

+

Receive via Intuit Service

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    All open windows must be closed before receiving Store Exchange files. If open windows are detected, you will be notified and given a chance to save any pending transactions before continuing.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Only the Server Workstation can run Store Exchange. At a remote store, close all open windows before processing a file received from Headquarters.

    +
    • +
  • +

    There are three general ways in which a mailbag can be received and processed in:

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Open or double-click a received file or an e-mail attachment with the .qbt extension

    +
    • +
  • +

    From the Stores menu or the Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files; this option checks for and processes any exchange files found in your default Store Exchange in folder (or from a folder to which you have browsed)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Schedule your Store Exchanges to happen automatically (available only for Intuit Service and Network File Transfer methods)

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    The process of receiving and processing in mailbags will depend on the Store Exchange method used. If Store Exchange mailbags are waiting in your "in folder' when Point of Sale is started, you are prompted to process them.

    +
    • +
+

Read Store Exchange sequencing recommendations for: Headquarters  or  Remote Stores

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange log

+

Store Exchange send - Headquarters

+

Store Exchange send Remote stores

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_qtyadj.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_qtyadj.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..80fe4d2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_qtyadj.htm @@ -0,0 +1,34 @@ + + + + + + +Automatic Quantity Adjustment at Remote Stores + + + + + + + + + + + +

Automatic Quantity Adjustment at Remote Stores

+

Multi-Store Overview | Store Exchange Overview

+
+

 

+
+

If a remote store has created new transactional documents (receipts, vouchers, adjustment memos, transfer slips) since last sending an exchange mailbag to Headquarters, it adjusts the inventory quantities received back from Headquarters to reflect those new documents. In this way, a remote always has the most current item quantities for its own store.

+

Adjustment memos are not created for this type of adjustment.

+

For example, if Headquarters sends back a quantity of nine (9) for Item #25, and, in the interim, the remote store has sold two more of that item, the on-hand quantity at the remote will be adjusted as it processes in the mailbag from Headquarters to reflect the actual on-hand quantity of seven (7).

+

Other stores will still show the quantity received from Headquarters.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivedesktopemail.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivedesktopemail.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..60f75c9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivedesktopemail.htm @@ -0,0 +1,77 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Desktop E-mail + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Desktop E-mail

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open Point of Sale windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Launch your desktop e-mail client application.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Locate and display the Store Exchange e-mail from the other store, and then double-click the .qbt file attachment to process it immediately.

    +
    4. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+
    +
  1. +

    Headquarters only: Repeat for the e-mails received from each of your other remote stores. Alternatively, you can save the e-mail attachments from all remotes to your Store Exchange "in folder" (not the e-mail client's in-box), where you can access and process them all at one time by selecting Receive Files from the Stores menu and then Process In on the Store Exchange dialog.

    +
    2. +
+

Notes on using desktop e-mail

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receive files: Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivefiletransfer.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivefiletransfer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..03d2fdf --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivefiletransfer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Network File Transfer + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Network File Transfer

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open Point of Sale windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Stores menu or Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Process In on the Store Exchange dialog to process the file(s) in your "in folder".

    +
    4. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+

 

+

Notes on using network file transfer

+

Set your "In Folder"Click to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receive files: Overview

+

 

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receiveremovablemedia.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receiveremovablemedia.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a4368f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receiveremovablemedia.htm @@ -0,0 +1,83 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Removable Media + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Removable Media

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open Point of Sale windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Insert the received disk or other type of media in the appropriate drive or USB port.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    From the Stores menu or Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    If you have identified the drive/port as your default "in folder" location, you can immediately select Process In to process the mailbag on the media. Otherwise, choose Browse, navigate to the mailbag file at the drive/port being used, and then select Process In.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Headquarters only: Repeat with the media received from other remote stores.

    +
    6. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+

 

+

Notes on using removable media

+

Set your default "In Folder"

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange receive Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivewebemail.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivewebemail.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5b512b9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_receivewebemail.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Receive via Web-based E-mail + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Receive via Web-based E-mail

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+
    +
  1. +

    On the Server Workstation, close all open Point of Sale windows.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Access your e-mail application on the Internet and display the Store Exchange e-mail from the other store.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Follow the e-mail application's instructions to download and save the attached .qbt file to your Store Exchange "in folder".

    +
    4. +
+

Headquarters only: Repeat for the e-mails received from all of your remote stores.

+
    +
  1. +

    Close the e-mail application.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Stores menu or Store Exchange Center, select Receive Files.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Process In on the Store Exchange dialog to process the file(s) in your "in folder".

    +
    4. +
+

When processing is done, a confirmation message is displayed. If errors have occurred, select View Log for details.

+

 

+

Notes on using Web-based e-mail

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receiving files: Overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_remote.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_remote.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..aae1931 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_remote.htm @@ -0,0 +1,243 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Send Files from Remote Stores + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Sending Files from Remote Stores

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview | Schedule Store Exchanges

+ +
+

 

+
+

What method of Store Exchange would you like help with?

+

These instructions assume you have already configured Store Exchange with your other stores and specified a communication method.

+

Send via desktop e-mail client Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via Web-based e-mail Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via Intuit Service Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via network file transfer Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Send via removable media Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Store Exchange guidelines at Remote Stores

+
    +
  • +

    It is suggested you read and follow the recommended Store Exchange sequence.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Only the Server Workstation can run Store Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    All exchange mailbag files created at remote stores are in the format snnxxxxx.qbt, where:

    +
    • +
+

snn =Store Number, e.g. s02 = Store 2

+

xxxxx = the sequence number for mailbags created at this store. Incremented 00001, 00002, etc.

+

.QBT = the file extension used for all Store Exchange mailbags

+
    +
  • +

    Before you send, it is a good practice to check for and process in any mailbags that you may have received from Headquarters and not yet processed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    There are three ways by which sending a mailbag can be initiated:

    +
    • +
  • +

    To manually send a file, select Send Files from the Stores menu or the Store Exchange Center

    +
    • +
  • +

    Include the Store Exchange option in your End of Day procedure

    +
    • +
  • +

    Schedule your Store Exchanges to happen automatically (available only for Intuit Service and Network File Transfer methods)

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can revise the Store Exchange settings for Headquarters in the Store Exchange dialog displayed. Any changes you make here apply only to the current exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select View Log after completing a Store Exchange to view results and troubleshoot any problems that occur.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Receive a Store Exchange mailbag

+

What information is exchanged?

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_schedule.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_schedule.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e520b0b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_schedule.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + +Schedule Store Exchanges + + + + + + + + + + + +

Schedule Store Exchanges

+

Recommended sequence at: Headquarters | Remote Stores

+
+

 

+
+

Scheduling allows you to have Point of Sale automatically run Store Exchanges at the same time each day without manual action. This allows you, for example, to run Store Exchanges overnight when network or Internet traffic is reduced or access fees lower. And it means you don't have to train employees at each store to manually run Store Exchanges.

+

Scheduling is available only if using the Network File Transfer or Intuit Service methods of Store Exchange.

+

 

+

Headquarters

+

At the scheduled time, Point of Sale checks for, retrieves, and processes in all files received from remote stores.  The Headquarters data file is updated with the remote transactions, and then the updated information is sent back out to the remote stores. Typically, you would schedule your exchanges to occur after all remote stores have sent their files to you.

+

 

+

Remote Stores

+

You can schedule separate receive and send times. For example, you might schedule to receive files each day at 6 AM (before opening for the day) and send at 10:00 PM (after close, but before Headquarters has scheduled its Store Exchange).

+

 

+

Scheduling and Running

+

To schedule Store Exchanges:

+
    +
  1. +

    Make sure you are configured to exchange via Network File Transfer or Intuit Service.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the Store Exchange Center, select Schedule on the left side.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Enter the time of day you wish Store Exchanges to run.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Important Note: Point of Sale must be running on the Server Workstation at the scheduled time and, if logins are required, a user with adequate rights must be logged in. We strongly recommend you lockClick to display a popup topic your computer if it will be unattended at the scheduled time and disable automatic logouts preferences if set.

+

 

+

When the scheduled time arrives, Point of Sale will display a confirmation dialog with a 60-second countdown. This gives you an opportunity to skip the exchange or delay it if necessary to complete other tasks.

+

Scheduled Task Alert

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    You can also schedule Store Exchanges from the Store Exchange page of company preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    All open windows must be closed when receiving files. Point of Sale will close all windows if necessary, but a better practice is to check and close all open windows yourself before the scheduled time to ensure not losing any unsaved information.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a scheduled exchange does not occur, Point of Sale will alert you.

    +
    • +
  • +

    While convenient, scheduling doesn't allow for doing a Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop between receiving and sending files at Headquarters and may not be a good solution if you offer customer charge accounts and want updated account balances at each store every day.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Store Exchange Overview

+

Store Exchange Center

+

What if an file is lost or damaged?

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_sequence_hq.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_sequence_hq.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..17a7302 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchange_sequence_hq.htm @@ -0,0 +1,97 @@ + + + + + + +Recommended Store Exchange Sequence at Headquarters + + + + + + + + + + +

Recommended Store Exchange Sequence at Headquarters

+

Store Exchange Overview | Troubleshoot Store Exchange

+
+

 

+
+

Headquarters has two distinct End of Day responsibilities: Store Activities and Headquarters Activities, and you may find it helpful to keep the activities related to each separate. See notes below.

+

Store activities include:

+
    +
  1. +

    Run a Z-Out Drawer Count report at each workstation.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Run a Z-Out Store Close report on the Server Workstation.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Settle credit card transactions with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service (if applicable).

    +
    4. +
+

Typically, these activities would be done as part of the normal End of Day procedure at Headquarters.

+

Headquarters activities are done on the Server Workstation and include:

+
    +
  1. +

    Receive files to process the mailbags received from each remote store. All other workstations must exit Point of Sale before beginning this task. This process updates inventory and related files with the day's activities at the remote stores.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Run Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Backup the company data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Send updated files back to remote stores before the beginning of the next business day.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+

You may find it easier to keep the two components of End of Day separate at Headquarters. Use the automated End of Day process to do the routine store close activities for the store. This can be accomplished while you wait for the remote stores to get their Store Exchange mailbags sent. Later, process in the remote store mailbags, conduct your Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop, and then send updated files back to the remote stores.

+

There are good reasons to keep the two types of activities separate at Headquarters:

+
    +
  • +

    It keeps the two processes distinct, making it easier for Associates to understand and follow the correct procedure for each.

    +
    • +
  • +

    It gives Headquarters one process to carry out while giving remote stores the time to get their stores closed and mailbags sent.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receiving remote store mailbags cannot be incorporated into the End of Day procedure due to the many variables related to the four supported methods and delivery of the files from remotes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If your goal is to maintain the most accurate information possible at all stores, it is important that Headquarters receive and process in a mailbag from each remote store before they in turn update inventory and send information back.

    +
    • +
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Variations on the Recommended Sequence

+

Depending on operational requirements and management's need for timely information, the Store Exchange process can be run more or less frequently. Some variations include:

+
    +
  • +

    Remote stores could be required to send mailbags several times a day, instead of once. Headquarters could process in and send data back so all store have up-to-the-hour information. With information flowing throughout the day, it would less critical that Headquarters have the final day mailbag from each remote before they process out to end the day. Transactions not making it at the end of one day would be caught on the first exchange the next morning.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If your need for updated information is not critical, you could run Store Exchange less frequently; say once every few days or once a week.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can schedule Store Exchanges to happen automatically at a certain time, like overnight. While convenient, scheduling doesn't allow for doing a Financial Exchange with QuickBooks Desktop between receiving and sending files and may not be a good solution if you offer customer charge accounts and want updated account balances at each store everyday.

    +
    • +
+

With experience, you will find the sequencing that works best for your circumstances. It is not required that the sequence described here be followed, but by adhering to it you ensure that all stores have the most current information for each business day.

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Headquarters Store Exchange sending guidelines

+

Configure Store Exchange

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchangsequence_remote.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchangsequence_remote.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0d6457b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/store_exchangsequence_remote.htm @@ -0,0 +1,76 @@ + + + + + + +Recommended Store Exchange Sequence at Remotes + + + + + + + + + + + +

Recommended Store Exchange Sequence at Remotes

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Store Exchange Overview

+ +
+

 

+
+

At the end of each sales day, each workstation in the store should run a Z-Out Drawer Count report to "close" the workstation for the day. Then, the following activities should be performed on the Server Workstation, typically as part of the automated End of Day procedure.

+
    +
  1. +

    Run a Z-Out Store Close report.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Settle credit card transactions with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service (if applicable).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Perform a backup of your Point of Sale data.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Send the day's transactions to Headquarters.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Prior to opening for business the next business day, receive and process an updated file (mailbag) back from Headquarters.

    +
    6. +
+

The mailbag from Headquarters must be processed by the Server Workstation. No other workstation can be working in Point of Sale during this procedure, as the process will close all open windows on all workstations if necessary to update your files.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Remote store sending guidelines

+

Schedule Store Exchanges

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/storeexchange_autorecovery.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/storeexchange_autorecovery.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..94ccc90 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/storeexchange_autorecovery.htm @@ -0,0 +1,63 @@ + + + + + + +Store Exchange: Automatic Recovery + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Store Exchange: Automatic Recovery

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Resend Files between Stores

+ +
+

 

+
+

The Store Exchange process has a built-in recovery mechanism that automatically resends and synchronizes data between stores in the event that an exchange mailbag is late, lost, received out of order, or arrives with corrupted data.

+

If you do not receive a mailbag from a remote (or from Headquarters if a remote store), it is not necessary that you suspend any normal activities. The next mailbags sent will automatically include the missed information and will synchronize your data between stores.

+

If a mailbag is received, but cannot be processed for some reason, check the Store Exchange Activity Log for error codes or clues that might help identify the problem.

+

 

+

Warning: Auto-Recovery Does Not Replace Data Backups. While the Store Exchange automatic data recovery feature corrects many instances of lost or corrupted data, it is still vitally important that you implement and follow a regular program of data backups, especially at Headquarters, where your master company data is maintained.

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/styles_refe_etc.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/styles_refe_etc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..532f3ee --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/styles_refe_etc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,193 @@ + + + + + + + +Styles and etc for Copying and Reference + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Styles and etc for Copying and Reference

+

Popup: Click to display a popup topic  |  Expando: Click to expand/collapse topic Click to collapse topic |  Check box: Checkbox: Select to enable function, Clear to disable function  |  Internet feature: Internet connection required

+

 

+

This is a hidden topic.

+

It is for help authors use to quickly copy and paste various pre-formatted elements into content topics.

+

 

+

Commonly Used Links

+

How do I select multiple items? Click to display a popup topic

+

Expando - paste this link and edit Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Components for expandos; no borders, shading = #ffffec

+

Click to expand/collapse topic

+

 

+ ++ + + +
+

 

+
+

 

+

 

+

 

+

Tables

+

 

+

 

+

Two-column; no borders:

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Heading

+		 +

Heading

+
+

Title

+		 +

Description

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Three column; no borders:

+ + ++++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Point of Sale

+		 +

QuickBooks Account

+		 +

Account Type

+
+

Cash In Drawer

+		 +

Cash In Drawer

+		 +

Bank

+
+

Check

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+

Credit Card

+		 +

Undeposited Funds

+		 +

Other Current Asset

+
+ +

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Note 1 - preferences or alternate way to complete?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Note 2 - Multi-Store considerations?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Note 3 - Financial exchange considerations?

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Link 4

+

Link 5

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs01.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dbe6029 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,220 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Financial + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Financial

+

Preference Instructions | Financial Exchange Overview

+

 

+

Set financial preferences in order to exchange data with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. Note that there may be a short delay accessing these preferences as Point of Sale connects with your QuickBooks Desktop software and reads existing account lists and other preferences to make them available for selection here.

+

 

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Financial

+		 +

 

+
+

Use with QuickBooks financial software

+		 +

R = Select to allow the exchange of data between Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

QuickBooks must be running and the financial company file you intend to share data with open to establish the initial connection. Learn more

+

Note: This option must be selected in order for all other financial preferences to be available.

+
+

QuickBooks Company file

+

Where is my QuickBooks financial company file?

+		 +

Once connected, your company name and file location are displayed.

+

To connect to your QuickBooks Desktop company file, launch QuickBooks and open your company file, then select Set Up QuickBooks Connection Now and follow the on-screen prompts.

+
+

Send receipts and vouchers with..

+

Learn more

+		 +

Select an option:

+
    +
  • +

    Detailed item descriptions

    +
    • +
  • +

    Detailed item descriptions for customer charge account transactions only

    +
    • +
  • +

    Summarized item totals (no item detail: default)

    +
    • +
+
+

Order to send customer name to QuickBooks (Basic)

+

Learn more

+		 +

Select the order in which you want customer names sent to QuickBooks Desktop: <Last>, <First> default

+

<First Last>

+

<Title First Last>

+
+

Send discounted items with

+

Learn more

+		 +

Select an option:

+
    +
  • +

    Net value (discounts not reported separately)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Separate original and discounted values

    +
    • +
+
+

Employee Hours (Pro)

+

 

+

Learn More

+

 

+

Return to top

+		 +

R = Send employee time records from Time Clock to QuickBooks Desktop. Select the hourly payroll item to be used for the time entries created in QuickBooks Desktop. Requires integration with QuickBooks Desktop Financial Software 2009.

+
+

Financial Accounts: Basic

+
+

Default item accounts

+

 

+

View default accounts

+		 +

Specify a default Income, Cost of Goods Sold , and Asset account for each item type (not all item types use all three accounts).

+

With a few exceptionsClick to display a popup topic related to item Income accounts, all of your QuickBooks Desktop accounts are available for selection from the drop-down list in each field. The default accounts specified are assigned to all items in inventory, but you can change the accounts item-by-item in inventory as needed.

+
+

Automatically create sub-accounts based on:

+		 +

R = Select and then specify how sub-accounts should be created and for which item accounts. Learn more.

+
+

Apply accounts to existing items

+		 +

Select to apply the accounts specified above to all existing items in your Point of Sale inventory. The reassigned accounts will take effect with the next Financial Exchange.

+

Important: This overwrites any previous item accounts you have specified.

+
+

Financial Accounts: Advanced

+		 +

Map custom accounts (except item, see above) for Financial Exchange. Choose Reset to defaults at the bottom of this page to return to the default set of account mappings.

+
+

Account mapping

+

 

+

View default accounts

+		 +

Each account/field in Point of Sale must be "linked" (mapped) to a QuickBooks Desktop financial software account to which data will be transferred. You can accept the default account mappings or define your own mapping structure by choosing from the drop-down list in the QB Account column.

+

Only accounts previously defined in QuickBooks Desktop are available for selection. Learn more.

+
+

 

+

For frequently asked questions about Financial Exchanges, see Troubleshooting Financial Exchange.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

Company preferences overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b2fdab7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,186 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Merchant & Gift Services + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Merchant & Gift Services

+

Preference Instructions | Merchant Overview | Gift Card Overview

+

 

+

This topic summarizes the company preferences that apply to credit and gift card transactions processed through the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and Gift Card Services.

+

 What if I have multiple store locations?

+

Using another service? If you use another merchant or gift card service, only those preferences marked with an * apply to you.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Merchant Service

+		 +

 

+
+

Merchant Number

+		 +

Enter the number provided via e-mail from the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant Service.

+

After entry, select Verify to test your account setup.

+

Note: Select the Communication Setup preference page (see below) and confirm your connection setup before verifying your account.

+
+

Credit card address verification

+

 

+

What is address verification?Click to display a popup topic

+		 +

R Do not allow manual transactions that fail address verification Selecting this option provides a degree of protection against fraud and chargebacks but may also block some legitimate transactions. You will not be able to complete a credit card transaction if an address verification mismatch occurs. If you clear this check box, you are alerted when a mismatch occurs but can continue with the transaction at your discretion.

+
+

Credit card verification

+

 

+

What is card verification?Click to display a popup topic

+		 +

R Do not allow manual transactions that fail card verification Selecting this option provides a degree of protection against credit card fraud and chargebacks, by blocking transactions where the card verification code does not match card issuer records. If you clear this check box, you are alerted when a mismatch occurs but can continue at your discretion (subject to card issuer regulations).

+
+

*Debit/ATM setup

+		 +

R = *Accept debit/ATM card payments. Select to allow customer payment by debit/ATM card.

+

R = *Allow cash back up to: Select if you wish to allow cash back to the customer on PIN debit transactions, and specify the maximum cash back allowed (up to $200).

+

A PIN pad device is required for PIN debit/ATM transactions through the QBPOS Merchant Service. Configure your PIN pad in the Hardware Setup Wizard or  workstation preferences.

+
+

*Automatically print and save receipt upon credit, debit, or gift card approval

+		 +

R = If selected, the receipt will be saved/printed automatically after approval for the transaction is received.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+		 +

 

+
+

Gift Card Service

+		 +

 

+
+

Gift Card Account Number

+		 +

Enter the number provided via e-mail from the QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service.

+

After entry, select Verify to test your account setup.

+

Note: If using a dial-up connection (modem) to communicate with the Merchant Service, select the Communication Setup preference page (see below) and change the setting to Direct-dial before verifying your account.

+
+

Communication Setup

+		 +

Applies to Merchant and Gift Card Services

+
+

Use this computer for all credit, debit, and gift card transactions

+		 +

R = All credit, debit, and gift card transactions are authorized and settled through this workstation (workstation must have a modem or Internet connection).

+

If the check box is checked and grayed out, this option has already been selected for this workstation. To transfer this function to another Point of Sale workstation, access this preference from that computer and select the check box. The specified workstation must be running and the connection active for other workstations on a network to authorize transactions. Learn more.

+
+

Communication Options

+		 +

Select an option for communicating with the QuickBooks Desktop POS Merchant and/or QuickBooks Desktop POS Gift Card Service:

+

R = Secure Internet Connection provides an IP-based connection through your Internet Service Provider (ISP). This option requires a persistent Internet connection (DSL, Cable, T1, etc.). Click the internet connection setup button if you need help configuring your connection.

+

R = Direct-Dial supports high-speed and advanced modem technologies, typically using your modem's default settings.

+

Read modem setup instructions.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Specifying the credit cards accepted

+

Company preferences overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs04.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b2a2617 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,177 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: General + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: General

+

Preference Instructions | Employee & Security Overview

+

 

+

The General Page contains preference settings affecting general program usage, rather than a specific area, including the ability to remove features you do not wish to use.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

General Options

+		 +

 

+
+

Require users to sign in

+		 +

R = Require users to login to Point of Sale using the login names and passwords you have assigned.

+

Only the System AdministratorClick to display a popup topic can change this setting after it has been turned on.

+

Changing this setting requires that a System Administrator password be entered and that all open windows be closed before saving.

+
+

Automatically log out users after each sale

+		 +

R = Automatically logs out the current user upon saving a receipt (if users are required to log in).

+
+

Warn when editing documents, items, or customers

+		 +

R = Confirm edits to documents, items, or customers before carrying out the action.

+
+

Warn when deleting documents, items, or customers

+		 +

R = Confirm deletions of documents, items, or customers before carrying out the action.

+
+

Bring back all one time messages

+		 +

Selecting DO NOT SHOW ME AGAIN from a Point of Sale message prevents that particular message from being displayed. Selecting this preference brings back all such messages. This option is then cleared. You may have to close and re-open currently open windows for the messages to show up.

+
+

Select features to use

+		 +

R = Select the checkboxes for features you use in Point of Sale. Clear the checkboxes to remove a feature. Related icons, menu options, and information fields are removed from Point of Sale screens. Return here at anytime to change your choices.

+

Changing these settings may require you to close any open windows in related areas before saving.

+

(Pro) Some choices are interdependent, e.g., if you choose to use customer orders, then customer tracking is a required feature.

+
+

Data Safeguard

+		 +

R = By default, a backup is made of your company file once per day when you exit Point of Sale on the Server Workstation. Change this selection to create a backup at a scheduled time instead. Read the information in the help sidebar about requirements for scheduled backups. Learn more.

+

(Pro) Include item images... Select the check box to include item images in your backup file. This option may greatly increase the time to create and size of your backup file.

+
+

Store Info

+		 +

 

+
+

Headings

+		 +

Store headings are printed across the top of documents.

+

Enter information in the following fields: Store Name, Street, City, State, ZIP, and Miscellaneous 1-3.

+
+

Logo

+		 +

R = Select the check box and then click Specify to add one or more logos. Select one of the added logos to print on sales documents. Adding multiple logos lets you switch between them quickly.

+

(Pro) You can use Print Designer to print different logos on different documents.

+

Learn more about logos and file requirements.

+
+

My Field Labels

+		 +

 

+
+

Field Labels

+		 +

You can define the field labels for the four item description fields. The field labels you specify are displayed throughout the program, on printed documents, and on reports.

+

Choose Restore to Defaults at the bottom of the page to return all labels to the program default values.

+

(Pro) You can also define labels for the custom fields available on customer, vendor, item, and employee records. If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the information in customer and vendor custom fields is shared, provided they are named exactly the same in both programs.

+

 

+
+

Return to top

+

Company preferences overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs05.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs05.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3561e64 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs05.htm @@ -0,0 +1,95 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Pricing + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Pricing

+

Preference Instructions | Price Level Overview

+

 

+

Use this page to define a price tag code, price level names and markdowns, and the default price level to use on sales. Changing your price level information in preferences does not update item prices of existing items in inventory.

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Default Price

+		 +

From the drop-down list, specify the default price to suggest for all sales in this store.

+

Default: Regular Price

+
+

Price Levels
+ 

+

 

+

 

+		 +

Define up to four optional markdown price levels.

+

Name: Assign a custom name to each price level you wish to use.

+

Markdown %: Assign a default markdown percent for each price level. The price at each price level is calculated from your regular price by applying the markdown.

+

These default markdowns are used to calculate the prices for new items added to inventory. Changes to the default markdowns do not update existing item prices. Individual prices at each level can be manually edited at any time item-by-item in inventory.

+

Tip: For no markdown, enter 0%. To do a markup, enter a negative markdown, e.g., -10%.

+

Learn more

+
+

Price Tag Code

+

 

+		 +

Enter a character to replace each number (0-9) when selecting to print cost and last received dates in code on price tags.

+

To use this feature, you must select a tag template that includes the cost fields in workstation preferences. Templates that include the cost fields have "+cost" included in the template name.

+
+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs06.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs06.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd573b6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs06.htm @@ -0,0 +1,107 @@ + + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Purchasing + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Purchasing

+

Preference Instructions | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Use the Purchasing preferences to set various options related to the purchasing of merchandise from your vendors.

+

 

+

Note: You must have purchase orders enabled in your Select Features to Use preferences for the following preferences to be applicable.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Purchase Order Numbering

+		 +

By default, purchase orders are sequentially numbered, starting with 1.

+

If preferred, you can precede the number with a text string, such as the vendor name, vendor code, or the name of the associate making the PO. You can also change the starting number.

+

Follow the instructions provided on the help sidebar on the preference page.

+
+

Purchase Order Status

+		 +

There are default statuses for use in the Status field on purchase orders:

+
    +
  • +

    Open is automatically assigned to every new order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Closed is automatically assigned to the order once all listed items have been received on a voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pending should be assigned to planning orders that haven't been given to your vendor.  (Pro) And so they are not included when Point of Sale calculates available quantities.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Suggested is assigned to purchase orders generated by the Suggest PO feature. (Pro)

    +
    • +
+

You can change the name of these statuses, add new ones, and arrange the order they appear in the Status field drop-down list on order forms. Learn more.

+
+

Purchase Order Instructions

+		 +

Enter up to two lines of optional instructions to print on POs. These instructions are not displayed on screen.

+
+

 

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs07.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs07.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1ac867c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs07.htm @@ -0,0 +1,116 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Sales + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Sales

+

Preference Instructions | Sales Overview

+

 

+

Sales preferences allow you to define various options related to sales transactions.  

+

The Sales page covers the general sales preferences. Other sales preferences are discussed on sub-pages (select a link for instructions).

+

Discounts define and optionally require manual item discount reasons

+

Receipt message printed on every sales receipt

+

Shipping list of shipping providers

+

Receipt tendering payment options

+

 

+

Sales General

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Order to display full name field

+		 +

Choose the order in which to display/print customer names on receipts.

+

Example: A record has Sara in the First field, Edward in the Last field, and Ms. in the Title field. If you choose to display the name as last, title, first, Point of Sale will print the name as Edwards, Ms. Sara.

+
+

Require a promotional code entry

+		 +

R = Requires an entry in the Promo Code field on a receipt before payment can be accepted and the document saved. This field facilitates filtering for viewing or reporting purposes.

+

(Pro) This also applies to customer orders.

+
+

Require a manual media count for X/Z-Out

+		 +

R = If selected, associates are required to manually count each denomination of currency when running a Z-Out Drawer Count report.

+
+

When printing group item on receipt or customer order (Pro)

+		 +

Select to print the group item price only, the individual component item prices only, or both. Default is to print individual item prices only.

+
+

Open Cash Drawer

+		 +

R = Select the payment types that will open an attached, compatible cash drawer. Defaults: Cash, Check.

+
+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Customizing receipt item list columns

+

Customizing printed receipts and other documents

+

Company preference: removing unused features

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs08.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs08.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..b839a7c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs08.htm @@ -0,0 +1,148 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Sales Tax + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Sales Tax

+

Preference Instructions | Tax Overview | Tax FAQs

+

 

+

Pro Note: If you have multiple stores, sales tax must be set up at Headquarters. Remote stores can select the default tax location applicable to sales at their store on this page.

+

 

+

Use the procedures below to set up the collection of sales tax in Point of Sale. You can add or edit tax codes or locations, and set specific taxing instructions for each. We recommend you set up all of the tax codes you will use in the default tax location first, then add additional tax locations and edit the codes for each as necessary.

+

From the File menu, select Preferences > Company and then select Sales Tax from the list on the left.

+

To specify that you collect sales tax:

+
    +
  • +

    Select (check) the Collect Sales Tax check box. Clear the check box if you do not collect sales taxes.

    +
    • +
+

Adding or editing a tax code Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

Adding or editing a tax location Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

 

+

Related Topics

+

How do I use tax codes?

+

How do I use tax locations?

+

Sales tax Integration with QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs10.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs10.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..021888b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs10.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Customers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Customers

+

Preference Instructions | Customer Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Customer preferences allow you to specify if you want to share customer information with your QuickBooks Desktop financial software and if you want to require that a customer be recorded on all sales. Recording customers on sales allows you to offer customer-specific discounts, use charge accounts, and to build customer sales history. It is not necessary to require that a customer be recorded to use these features.

+

 

+

Note: You must have customer tracking enabled in your general  preferences for the following customer-specific preferences to be applicable.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Use with QuickBooks Desktop

+		 +

Choose Yes if you want information for all new customers to be shared with QuickBooks Desktop by default. You can still change this setting for individual customers on their record.

+
+

Customer tracking options

+		 +

R Require a customer entry on receipts. If selected, a receipt cannot be saved until a customer is entered.

+

Note that this option is not required to list a customer on a sale.

+
+

E-mail Marketing

+		 +

If you have an account with the POS e-mail marketing partner, enter your login name and password here. Targeted customer lists you create in Point of Sale can then be sent automatically to the partner. Learn more.

+
+

Customer Type

+		 +

Create categories of customer types for your business. Customer types can then be assigned in the customer record and used for filtering the customer list and reports.

+
+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs11.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs11.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..842c836 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs11.htm @@ -0,0 +1,117 @@ + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Customer Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Customer Orders

+

Preference Instructions | Customer Order Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Layaway, sales order, and work order preferences allow you to define various options related to these customer order documents. There is a separate preference page for each customer order type, but all have the same options as described here.

+

Note: You must have customer orders enabled in your Select Features to Use preferences for the following preferences to be applicable.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Initial Deposit

+		 +

Select how you want to handle the initial order deposit. Subsequent deposits can be for any amount:

+

Do not require or suggest an initial deposit: = If selected, no initial deposit is required or suggested when you create a new order.

+

Suggest an initial deposit:
+ = If selected, an initial deposit amount is suggested for each new order. Enter the percentage of the total order amount that you want suggested as the deposit amount. When taking the deposit the suggested amount is auto-filled, but can be changed or deleted, at your discretion.

+

Require an initial deposit:
+ = If selected, an initial deposit is required for the order. Enter the percentage of the order total to be required. When taking the deposit the required amount is auto-filled. You can enter a larger amount, if you wish, but you cannot reduce or delete the required amount.

+
+

Order Status

+		 +

There are three default statuses for use in the Status field on customer orders:

+
    +
  • +

    Open is automatically assigned to every new order.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Closed is automatically assigned to the order once all listed items have been sold on a receipt.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Pending should be assigned to orders used to give estimates or quotes to customers, where the items are not yet committed to sell. Pending orders are not included when Point of Sale calculates available quantities.

    +
    • +
+

You can change the name of these statuses, add new statuses, and arrange the order they appear in the Status field drop-down list on order forms. Learn more.

+
+

Printed Message

+		 +

Enter text to print on the bottom of every order.

+
+

Document Numbering

+		 +

By default, orders are numbered sequentially, starting with 1. You can use this preference page to specify text or a POS field that should precede the sequential number or to change the starting number.

+
+

 

+

Taking deposits on orders

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs14.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs14.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ced6a7c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefs14.htm @@ -0,0 +1,114 @@ + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Multi-Store + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Multi-Store

+

Preference Instructions | Multi-Store Preferences Overview

+
+

 

+
+

These settings apply only  to Pro users that have multiple stores.

+

Key Topics

+

The table below summarizes the multi-store and Store Exchange preference settings. For more information about setting up your stores from the Store Exchange Center, use these links:

+

Configure Headquarters Store Exchange preferences

+

Configure remote Store Exchange preferences

+

 

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Multi-Store

+		 +

This page summarizes your store type information.

+

You can use this page to change a store from Headquarters to remote. Read the information on this page carefully, as changing store types at any time other than the initial installation requires additional steps to protect your data.

+

Important information about changing store types

+
+

Store Codes / Classes

+		 +

Note: Changing your number of stores requires that all inventory and transactional document windows be closed before saving.

+

(Headquarters only) Enter your total number of stores, and then assign a unique alphanumeric code up to three characters for each. This code is displayed throughout the program and on multi-store reports.

+

Optionally, assign a QuickBooks Desktop financial software class to each store to allow Profit/Loss reporting by store in your financial software. You must have already connected to your financial software and have it configured to use classes before this option is available in Point of Sale. Learn more.

+
+

Store Exchange

+

 

+

For more information, read Configuring Store Exchange.

+		 +

On the Configuration tab:

+

Specify a communication method for Store Exchanges with your other stores, then select Configure to enter the other stores license number and e-mail address, file transfer path, or folder location (depending on exchange method).

+

In the Store Exchange Notification area, you can set an alert so that you are aware if you have not sent or received a file from another store. Enter the number of days after which you will be alerted.

+

On the Options tab:

+

Select Change Password to enter or revise a password to encrypt Store Exchange files (required). The same password must be entered at all stores.

+

Note: If you have multiple POS data files, enter a different password for each file.

+

If you want received files placed in a folder other than the default, browse to a new Process-In Folder. Select Revert to Default Folder to return to using the default folder.

+

Finally, if desired select Automatically exchange store data... and enter a time for files to be exchanged each day. Read the information provided on the right of this screen for important information.

+
+

Store Heading

+		 +

(Headquarters only) Select a store from the drop-down list and enter store name, address, and miscellaneous information. Repeat for each store. This information is included on printed sales documents.

+
+

 

+

Multi-store overview

+

Company preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefsoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a99e8e2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/sysprefsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,115 @@ + + + + + + + +Company Preferences: Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Company Preferences: Overview

+

Preference Instructions | Workstation Preferences

+

 

+

Company preferences are used to configure Point of Sale features to best suit the needs of your business. Company preferences define settings and options that are shared by all Point of Sale workstations and all stores.

+

From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

+

Company preferences are split into the following categories. Select a category for specific information about the options on that page:

+ +++ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

General

+		 +

Purchasing

+
+

Financial

+		 +

Receiving

+
+

Merchant & Gift Services

+		 +

Sales

+
+

Inventory

+		 +

Sales tax

+
+

Price levels

+		 +

Customers

+
+

Ratings & Trends

+		 +

Layaways

+
+

Sales orders

+

E-mail documents

+		 +

Work orders

+

Multi-store

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Some company preferences are initially configured as you complete the Company Setup but can be directly edited at anytime as your needs change.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Shared company preferences that affect all stores can be defined at Headquarters only. Store-specific company preferences, such as default payment type, allowed credit card types, default tax location used for sales, and employees and security, are set at each store independently. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use workstation preferences to define workstation-specific settings, such as attached hardware setup and printing configuration.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend351.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend351.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fa411c5 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend351.htm @@ -0,0 +1,52 @@ + + + + + + + + +Access your Vendor Records + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access your Vendor Records

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Add a New Vendor | View a Vendor's History

+
+

Basic

+
+

To work with vendors:

+
    +
  • +

    From the Retail Navigator or Purchasing menu, select Vendor List

    +
    • +
  • +

    From the Vendor field on an item record or document, choose Select from Vendor List (<F4>)

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If requiring employee logins, only the Owner, Manager, and Assistant Manager predefined security groups have the right to access the vendor list from the Navigator, menus, or toolbars. However, with the default settings, all employees have access via the Select from Vendor List option on documents and in your the item list, and when filtering reports. To fully restrict access to the vendor list requires that rights specific to those areas also be restricted.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend352.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend352.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1cd9efe --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend352.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Adding a New Vendor + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Add a New Vendor

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Vendors Overview | Import Vendors

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: If you have accessed this topic after copying another vendor record, start with Step 2. Edit the information brought from the copied record as needed.
+
+Pro Note: In a multi-store configuration, only Headquarters can add or edit vendors.

+

To create a new vendor record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select New Vendor from the Purchasing menu.

    +
    2. +
+

A blank vendor form is opened.

+
    +
  1. +

    Make entries in the vendor information fields, as needed.

    +
    2. +
+

Company is a required field.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copy a vendor record

+

Add a vendor directly in the vendor list

+

Enter vendor payment terms

+

Track multiple vendors for an item (Pro)

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend356.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend356.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..07cd91e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend356.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit a Vendor Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Vendor Record

+

Overview | Find a Vendor Record | Make a Vendor Inactive

+
+

Basic

+
+

To edit a vendor record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the vendor record in your vendor list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Edit.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Modify the vendor fields, as necessary.

    +
    4. +
+

Read the warning below about editing vendor company names.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Warning: Changing a vendor company nameClick to display a popup topic

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Delete a vendor

+

Add a new vendor

+

Merge vendor records

+

Vendors overview

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend357.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend357.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..87eb7d4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend357.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + + +Copy a Vendor Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Copy a Vendor Record

+

Vendors Overview | Import Vendors

+
+

Basic

+
+

To create a new vendor using copy:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your vendor list, highlight the vendor record to be copied.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Copy from the window toolbar to copy all fields to a new record.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Make any edits you need to modify the new vendor.

    +
    4. +
+

At a minimum, a new Company name must be assigned to the new vendor. See vendor information fields for information about the various information that can be recorded for a vendor.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Save.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Add a new vendor

+

Delete a vendor

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend358.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend358.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f86eb52 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend358.htm @@ -0,0 +1,75 @@ + + + + + + + + +Deleting a Vendor Record + + + + + + + + + + + +

Delete a Vendor Record

+

Vendors Overview | Edit a Vendor Record | Find a Vendor Record

+
+

Basic

+
+

To delete a vendor record:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the vendor records that you want to delete from your vendor list.

    +
    2. +
+

How do I select multiple records?Click to display a popup topic

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Delete Vendors from the I Want To menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, confirm the deletion and specify if you want to delete the vendor from QuickBooks Desktop as well.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you are deleting a vendor because you have duplicates, consider merging the records instead, as this will combine the two vendor histories into one record and remove the other.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Deleting a vendor record does not affect inventory items or history documents. The vendor remains in place in both of those areas and reports can still be generated for the deleted vendor.

    +
    • +
  • +

    We recommend deleting the vendor in QuickBooks Desktop if prompted. To guard against accidental deletion, if a vendor record is deleted in only one program, it is re-created upon the next Financial Exchange. Note that if the vendor is listed on documents in QuickBooks Desktop, the record is made inactive instead of deleting it. Making the vendor inactive also prevents the record from being re-created with the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you delete a vendor, but later list that vendor on a receiving voucher (by referencing a purchase order listing the vendor, for example) the vendor record is re-created in both Point of Sale and QuickBooks Desktop with the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Make a vendor inactive

+

Add a new vendor

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend359.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend359.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3af818d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend359.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Vendor Payment Terms + + + + + + + + + + +

Vendor Payment Terms

+

Vendor Billing Information on Vouchers | Edit a Vendor Record  

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can set up default payment terms for your vendors. The default terms that you specify are applied to purchase orders and receiving vouchers made for the vendor.

+

How are vendor payment terms exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop?

+

To define payment terms for a vendor:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the vendor record in Form View (when adding or editing).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the image\f4_symbol.gif button or press <F4> in the Terms field.

    +
    3. +
+

The Terms dialog is displayed, as shown below.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in the three fields to define the payment terms.

    +
    2. +
+

The example below shows that payment is due in 30 days (Net 30), with a 2% discount given if paid within 10 days.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

        image\vendor_terms.gif

+

Related Topics

+

Vendor field descriptions

+

Security rights for vendors

+

Import items from a Vendor Catalog

+

How vendor records are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend360.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend360.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..189aba4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend360.htm @@ -0,0 +1,93 @@ + + + + + + + +View a Vendor's History + + + + + + + + + + + + +

View a Vendor's History

+

Vendor Overview | Purchasing Overview | Find a Vendor Record

+
+

Basic

+
+

A vendor history report allows you to view summarized statistical data for the merchandise you have purchased and returned from/to a vendor, as well as displaying a list of vouchers and non-deleted purchase orders made for that vendor. You can expand the documents included in the report to view item detail or QuickZoom to view the document itself.

+

To view a vendors history report:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight or display a vendor record from your vendor list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Display the list in collapsed format: the vendor's history is shown on the bottom of the information panel.

    +
    3. +
+

Or

+

Select Edit and then select the HISTORY tab on the vendor form.

+

The vendors history report is displayed.

+

image\vendor_history.gif

+

How do I refresh a vendor's history?Click to display a popup topic

+

With a vendor history report displayed, you can:

+
    +
  • +

    Select the expand icon image\expand_icon.gif to view the specific items listed on a document or Expand All above the list to show the items for all documents.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Change the column order/widths, sort the report by the values in any column, and, when available, use QuickZoom to view the associated documents. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    With a document selected, select an option from the I Want To menu:

    +
    • +
+
    +
  • +

    Go To Document to view the document. Once you are in the document, you can view, edit, copy, or reverse it, using normal procedures.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Print History to send the vendor history to your printer (or Print Preview)

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you delete purchase orders once they are filled, the deleted purchase orders are no longer displayed on the vendor history report, and their information is not included in the summarized statistical information. However, the receipt of the merchandise on deleted purchase orders is reflected in the receiving vouchers and receiving information on the report.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you have a voucher or purchase order window open when you come to vendor history, you will have to switch back to the open document and cancel or complete it before you can copy from history to another new document of the same type. Only one of any document type can be open at a time.

    +
    • +
  • +

    It is suggested you not mix items from different vendors on purchase orders and receiving vouchers as this would hamper your ability to get accurate vendor histories.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Multi-Store Note: Vendor history at remote stores reflects only the documents made at that store. Headquarters will see all transactions at all stores.

    +
    • +
+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend361.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend361.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3696a1f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend361.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Printing your Vendor List + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print your Vendor List

+

Find a Vendor Record | Print Overview | Export Lists

+
+

Basic

+
+

To print a list of your vendors:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the vendors you want included in the printed list.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    If you want to print a subset of your vendor list, filter the list to display only those vendors. For example, filter for active vendors if you want the printout to not include inactive vendors.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To include all of your vendors in the printed list, make sure the list filter is set to display all vendors.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Print from the File menu.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Printing Vendor List Reports

+

You can also print your vendor list as a report, which gives you more freedom to customize the list for your particular needs or to export the vendor list to a spreadsheet.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Vendors overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend362.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend362.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..731955d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vend362.htm @@ -0,0 +1,27 @@ + + + + + + + +vend362 + + + + + + + + +

Warning: Changing a Vendor Company Name

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Changing a vendor company name in the vendor file has no effect on inventory or your receiving history. If you change a company name, you should update the Vendor field on item records purchased from that vendor.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendor_selectfordoc.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendor_selectfordoc.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ac9da58 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendor_selectfordoc.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Select Vendor + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Vendor

+

Add a New Vendor | Edit a Vendor Record | Vendors Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Note: This information applies when coming from another record or document, such as an inventory item or purchase order, to select a vendor to populate the Vendor field.

+

To select and add a vendor on another record or document:

+
    +
  1. +

    Use normal sort, search, or filter procedures to locate the vendor in your vendor list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Double-click the vendor or highlight the row and choose Select from the bottom toolbar.

    +
    3. +
+

While in the vendor list you have complete editing abilities to add a new vendor or edit an existing one. After adding or editing a vendor record, choose Save & Select to both save the record in your vendor list and return to the record or document with which you were working.

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_emailing.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_emailing.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..89b7ebd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_emailing.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + +E-mail a Vendor + + + + + + + + + + + +

E-mail a Vendor

+

E-mail a Document | E-mail FAQs | Export Data

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can quickly send an e-mail to a vendor, provided you have entered their e-mail address on the vendor record and have a default Windows e-mail client set up.

+

If you wish to attach a Point of Sale document to the e-mail, use the e-mailing a document procedure instead.

+

To e-mail a vendor:

+
    +
  1. +

    Display the vendor record so the Vendor Info tab is visible.

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

With your vendor list in collapsed view, ensure the customer's e-mail address is displayed on the Information panel. How do I add it?

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Send Mail button (vendor form) or the e-mail address link (blue text on Information panel).

    +
    2. +
+

Your default e-mail client opens with the vendor's address prefilled.

+
    +
  1. +

    Add a subject line and body text to the e-mail.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Send.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Point of Sale does not support mass e-mailing to your vendor list. However, if you have another application capable of doing this, you can export your vendor list or a vendor list report, including e-mail addresses, to Excel and then, depending on the application, import them for this purpose. Refer to the help system in the other application for instructions and be aware of any e-mail "spam" regulations imposed by your e-mail provider, ISP, or local laws.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Office Integration

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..04ed5f6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + +vendors_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Vendors: How do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden

+ +

Access my vendor records

+

Add a new vendor

+

Find a vendor record

+

Edit a vendor record

+

Delete a vendor record

+

View a vendors history

+

Enter vendor billing information on receiving vouchers

+ +

Track multiple vendors for an item

+ +

Make a vendor inactive

+

Print my vendor list

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_inactive.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_inactive.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..cc30b0c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_inactive.htm @@ -0,0 +1,71 @@ + + + + + + + +Make a Vendor Inactive + + + + + + + + + + + +

Make a Vendor Inactive

+

Overview | Find a Vendor Record | Edit a Vendor Record

+
+

Basic

+
+

Vendors in Point of Sale can be flagged as inactive. An inactive vendor:

+
    +
  • +

    Is not displayed when you filter your vendor list for active vendors (default view)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Is removed from most Vendor selection lists and filters

    +
    • +
  • +

    Is not exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop financial software (see note below)

    +
    • +
+

This allows you to flag utilities vendors (which may have been imported from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software) or any vendor not currently used in Point of Sale as inactive, so they do not display on your active vendor list.

+

To make a vendor inactive:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Inactive check box on the vendor record.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Save.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    To view your inactive vendors, use the All Vendors filter or define a custom filter to display only inactive vendors.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To reactivate the vendor, clear the Inactive check box.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you flag a new vendor as Inactive, that vendor will not be shared with QuickBooks Desktop financial software. However, if you later receive items from the inactive vendor on a voucher, the vendor will be created in QuickBooks Desktop when the voucher is sent to your financial software.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_mergeduplicates.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_mergeduplicates.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7912a8b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendors_mergeduplicates.htm @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ + + + + + + +Merge Vendor Records + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Merge Vendor Records

+

Find a Vendor Record | Delete a Vendor Record | Make a Vendor Inactive

+
+

Basic

+
+

Occasionally, you may find that a vendor has been entered twice in your vendor list. Merging the vendor records combines the purchase history of the duplicate entries into a single record and then deletes the other.

+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you will be prompted to delete the duplicate vendor in QuickBooks Desktop as well.

+

(Pro) This task is available at Headquarters only.

+

To merge vendor records:

+
    +
  1. +

    In your Point of Sale vendor list, select one or both of the vendor records you wish to merge. How do I select multiple records in my list?Click to display a popup topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Merge Vendors from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

The Merge Vendors window opens with the pre-selected vendor(s) listed.

+

Merge Vendors window

+
    +
  1. +

    Review the vendors and make changes as necessary:

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  • +

    Ensure the vendor record you want to keep is displayed on the left side of the window. You can reverse positions of the records (which to keep and which to remove) by selecting the Swap button located between them.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To add or change a vendor, use the drop-down lists to select or search for the vendor.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the vendor name(s) as shown in your QuickBooks Desktop vendor list is shown to help verify you have the correct vendors selected.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Vendors.

    +
    2. +
+

If the vendor being removed has a purchase history, a listing of the number of receiving vouchers and purchase orders to be updated is displayed. The vendor on these documents will be replaced by the vendor you selected to keep. Tell me more

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Merge Vendors.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If prompted, specify if you want to delete the duplicate from your QuickBooks Desktop financial software as well. See related notes below for more information.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If selected, the deletion in QuickBooks Desktop will occur with the next Financial Exchange. If the vendor to be deleted has a transaction history in QuickBooks Desktop, the vendor is made inactive instead of being deleted. If the vendor record is not deleted or made inactive in QuickBooks Desktop, it will be re-created in Point of Sale with the next Financial Exchange.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updated documents resulting from a merge in Point of Sale are not resent to QuickBooks Desktop and the vendor records in QuickBooks Desktop are not merged. However, all new transactions will be recorded in QuickBooks Desktop for the vendor you selected to keep.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

How vendor records are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendorsoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendorsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3287936 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vendorsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Vendors Overview + + + + + + + + + +

Vendors Overview

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | Add a New Vendor | View a Vendor's History

+
+

Basic

+
+

Each vendor from whom you purchase merchandise must be identified by a unique company name. When you assign a vendor to each item defined in inventory, Point of Sale can track and report on the merchandise by vendor as it is ordered, received, and sold.

+

You can also assign each vendor a user-defined code of one to three alphanumeric characters. These vendor codes can be a useful alternate way of searching for a vendor record and appear on printed price tags where the printable space is often limited.

+

If you have integrated Point of Sale with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, you can elect to enter vendor invoices (for the merchandise you have purchased) in either program. This Point of Sale company preference choice affects how receiving vouchers are transferred to QuickBooks Desktop.

+

 

+

(Pro) Remote stores can view and filter reports by vendor, but only Headquarters can add or edit vendors.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Vendor field descriptions

+

Security rights for vendors

+

Import items from a Vendor Catalog

+

How vendors are exchanged with QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch701.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch701.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..95d80f4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch701.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Access Vouchers & Receiving History + + + + + + + + + + + +

Access Receiving Vouchers & History

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Create a Voucher | Receiving Preferences

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

To access receiving vouchers:

+
    +
  • +

    From the Point of Sale home page, click the Receive Items button from the left sidebar.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Or, from the Purchasing menu, select one of the following:

    +
    • +
  • +

    Receiving History to view or work with saved vouchers

    +
    • +
  • +

    Held Vouchers to view or unhold a previously held voucher

    +
    • +
+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch702.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch702.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8c87fcc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch702.htm @@ -0,0 +1,263 @@ + + + + + + + +Create a Receiving Voucher: Basic Steps + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Create a Receiving Voucher: Basic Steps

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Voucher Information Fields

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

A voucher adds items received from a vendor to your Point of Sale inventory.  A voucher can also be used to record the return of items to a vendor, which subtracts the returned quantity from inventory.

+

Below is the basic procedure to create a voucher that is not receiving against a purchase order.

+

Receiving items ordered on a PO?  Use this procedure instead.

+

 

+

Click the Click to expand/collapse topic symbols in this procedure to view detail.

+ +

To make a receiving voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    At the Point of Sale home page, select Receive Items  from the Purchasing menu. A blank voucher is opened.

    +
    2. +
+

View Example Voucher Click to expand/collapse topic

+ +

(Pro) Headquarters only: If creating the voucher for another store, select Change Store from the I Want To menu and enter the store number.

+ +
    +
  1. +

    In the Scan or enter item information drop-down box, scan or type item information to list the items being received.Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

OR

+

Click Quick Pick Item to select an item from your pre-defined lists of frequently received items.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the action buttons below the line item to edit the quantity, cost, enter serial numbers, etc. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
+

Voucher Item

+
    +
  1. +

    Repeat until all items being received have been listed.

    +
    2. +
+

Note: It is suggested you not mix items from different vendors on receiving vouchers as this would hamper your ability to view accurate vendor histories and reports, and make it difficult to match vendor invoices with the bills created by point of Sale in your QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Enter vendor name or phone box, type or scan vendor information to add the vendor to the voucher. Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Enter information in other voucher fields as appropriate. Commonly use fields on vouchers include comments and freight, fees, and discounts which can be spread across item costs at your discretion.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If you want to print tags for the received items, select Print Tags from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
+

If item costs on this voucher are different than what is currently recorded in inventory, you are alerted you may want to review and update your prices before printing tags.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Print Voucher.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

How do I receive an item not yet in inventory?

+

(Pro) If you order an item from multiple vendors read the notes about listing multi-vendor items on vouchers.

+

 

+

Return to top

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Copy a voucher

+

Cancel or hold a voucher in progress

+

Effects of saving a receiving voucher

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch715.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch715.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..08dc5c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch715.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Enter Voucher Discounts, Freight, and Fees + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Voucher Discounts, Freight, and Fees

+

Create a Voucher: Basic Steps | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Discounts, freight, and fees related to the purchase of merchandise can be added to receiving vouchers at your discretion. Optionally, you can spread these amounts over the cost of the items being received.

+

To add discounts, freight, or fees:

+
    +
  1. +

    If receiving against a purchase order, discounts entered on the PO are automatically transferred proportionally to the voucher and you are prompted and have the option of transferring a fee from the PO. See the notes below for more information.

    +
    2. +
+

AND/OR

+

From the I Want To menu, select Enter Discount/Fee/Freight. Place the cursor in the applicable field and manually enter or edit an amount. Discounts can be entered as a percentage (calculated from the voucher subtotal) or amount.

+

Receiving voucher

+
    +
  1. +

    To spread (allocate) these amounts over the cost of the items being received, select the Spread Discount, Freight and Fees check box. Note that once these amounts have been spread and the voucher saved, they cannot be edited or unspread.  Learn more.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete the voucher and /printsave.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If a discount is entered on a referenced PO, it is transferred to a receiving voucher proportionally, i.e. if 50% of the items (by value) ordered on the PO are received, then 50% of the PO discount is automatically suggested on the voucher. You can edit the voucher discount amount if you prefer to handle this differently.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If a fee has been entered on a referenced PO, you are alerted and can transfer the amounts to the voucher at your discretion. Since multiple vouchers can reference a single PO, you should be careful to transfer the fee amount only once, or edit the amount on the voucher to allocate the fee across the vouchers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Discount, freight, and fee amounts may be edited even after a voucher has been saved, subject to the following:

    +
    • +
  • +

    If spread over the cost of the received items before saving, the amounts cannot be changed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If not spread, integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, and entering vendor billing information in QuickBooks Desktop, these amounts can no longer be edited after the voucher has been sent to QuickBooks Desktop.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If not spread, integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, and entering vendor billing information in Point of Sale, these amounts can no longer be edited after adding the vendor billing information to the voucher and sending to QuickBooks Desktop (this may be the second time the voucher is sent to QuickBooks Desktop).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Enter vendor billing information

+

Create a new voucher

+

Copy a voucher

+

Multi-Store purchasing & receiving

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch722.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch722.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c0bcd58 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch722.htm @@ -0,0 +1,68 @@ + + + + + + + +Edit a Saved Voucher + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit a Saved Voucher

+


+The only information that can be edited on a saved voucher is vendor billing information and freight, fees, and discounts (if they were not entered and spread when the voucher was made).

+

Editing may be further restricted by your security rights, preference settings, and whether the voucher has been sent yet to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software. For multi-store configurations, the store location, and whether the voucher has been sent to Headquarters are also factors.

+

To edit a former voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and select the voucher in your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Enter Billing Info or Enter Discount/Fee/Freight.

    +
    3. +
+

The appropriate dialog is opened.

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter information in the available fields (editable fields are white in color). Learn more about: Vendor Billing Information or Freight, Fees, & Discounts

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click OK.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you discover errors or need to return merchandise to a vendor after receiving it into inventory, create a return voucher for the specific item or reverse the entire voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Editing a voucher affects receiving history and any reports generated from that history. It has no effect on inventory or on a referenced PO.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale may send  an edited voucher to QuickBooks Desktop a second time to post the new information. How and why?

    +
    • +
  • +

    Read more about correcting vouchers at remote stores.

    +
    • +
+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch723.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch723.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..44f1fe7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch723.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + +Reverse a Voucher + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Reverse a Voucher

+

Find a Voucher | Edit a Voucher | Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

If an error is discovered on a saved voucher, other than in the editable fields, it is necessary to reverse the voucher and then create a new, corrected one to update your receiving history and inventory.

+

To reverse a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate and highlight/display the voucher to be reversed in your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Reverse from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

If you are integrated with QuickBooks Desktop, a notice about the vendor credit that will be created is displayed. Read and confirm this message.

+

If needed, create a new corrected voucher as described here.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Reversing a receiving voucher takes the received quantity of each listed item back out of inventory and, if applicable, adjusts the average unit cost of the remaining on-hand quantity. It does this by automatically creating a new return voucher with an equal but opposite effect (lists negative quantities instead of positive).

    +
    • +
  • +

    When completed, the Status of the original voucher will be Reversed and the status of the new return voucher that is created will be marked Reversing.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If the original voucher referenced a purchase order (PO), reversing it will also revert the PO fill status and balances, providing the PO has not been deleted.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If an item listed on a reversed voucher has been deleted from inventory, the reversal causes the item to be added back to inventory. Learn moreClick to display a popup topic

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, and the original voucher has already been sent to QuickBooks Desktop, the reversing (return) voucher is also sent and results in a vendor credit being created. The credit is not automatically applied to open bills in your financial software. In QuickBooks Desktop, select Pay Bills from the Vendors menu and apply the credit. Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation if you need additional assistance. Note: If the original voucher has not yet been sent to QuickBooks Desktop, then neither the original or reversing voucher are sent and no entries are made in your financial software for the transaction.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Headquarters can reverse a former voucher without restrictions. Remote stores, however, can only reverse a voucher until it has been sent to Headquarters. Learn more

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch740.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch740.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..82b879e --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch740.htm @@ -0,0 +1,67 @@ + + + + + + + +Print Vouchers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Print Vouchers

+

E-mail Documents | Printing Basics

+
+

Basic

+
+

If creating a new voucher select Print Voucher to both print and save the voucher.

+

To print a voucher from receiving history:

+
    +
  1. +

    Find and select the voucher in your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Reprint.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If presented with a print option dialog, you may:

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Change the printer you want to use

    +
    • +
  • +

    Specify the number of copies you want to print

    +
    • +
  • +

    Preview or change the print template used (select More Options to access)

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Preview or Print to output the vouchers

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receiving overview

+

Print tags

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch751.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch751.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ca93c66 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch751.htm @@ -0,0 +1,74 @@ + + + + + + + +Handling Voucher Costs + + + + + + + + + + +

Handling Voucher Costs

+

Receiving Overview | Update Item Prices When Costs Change

+
+

Basic

+
+

Point of Sale averages the cost of inventory items. This means that when items are received at a cost different from the current average unit cost in inventory, the received quantities and costs are averaged together with the existing inventory quantities and costs to determine the new average unit cost of the item.

+

Example: If you have 10 of an item that was purchased at an order cost of $5 and then receive 10 more purchased at an order cost of $10, the new average unit cost of the item is $7.50.

+

(10 x 5) + (10 x 10)/20 = 7.50

+

 

+

This allows you to set an accurate profit margin for items and maintain an accurate inventory valuation when using Point of Sale in conjunction with QuickBooks Desktop financial software.

+

When receiving merchandise, Point of Sale will suggest the cost  on the voucher as: 1) the order cost on a referenced purchase order, or, if no purchase order is involved, 2) the current order cost from inventory.

+

Review and ensure that the correct cost information is entered on the voucher.

+

To change the voucher cost of an item when receiving:

+
    +
  1. +

    Highlight the item in the voucher item list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Click Qty/Cost, enter the new cost, then click OK.

    +
    3. +
+

If the voucher cost is different than what is recorded in inventory, Point of Sale will alert you that you may want to review and edit your item prices.

+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The order cost in inventory is not an averaged cost. When items are received at a new cost, that cost becomes the new order cost in inventory and will be suggested as the cost on future purchase orders and vouchers.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Point of Sale supports cost and price entries of up to five decimal places to facilitate ordering, receiving, and tracking items costing fractional cents. Learn more.

    +
    • +
  • +

    You can restrict an employee's rights to view item costs by using Point of Sales security features.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Your inventory prices are updated automatically by receiving vouchers only it the previous regular price is $0 (zero) AND you have a margin or markup entered on the item record.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

How vouchers are transferred to QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch752.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch752.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fdd71cd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch752.htm @@ -0,0 +1,103 @@ + + + + + + + +Receive Items Ordered on a Purchase Order + + + + + + + + + + + +

Receive Items Ordered on a Purchase Order

+

Receiving Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

Receiving against a purchase order (PO) is the fastest and most accurate way to receive merchandise. A voucher can receive against one or more POs, and additional items can be added to the voucher using normal methods.

+

 

+

Important Note: If maintaining accurate vendor histories, receiving reports, and being able to match up vendor bills and invoices in your financial software is important to you, we recommend against receiving against purchase orders from different vendors on a single receiving voucher. A good practice is to receive against a single PO from a single vendor with each voucher. Likewise, if you spread freight, fees, and discounts across item costs, it is a good practice to receive against only one purchase order per voucher. Otherwise, you may be spreading fees or discounts associated with one order over items from another.

+

 

+

Receiving items ordered on a PO can be initiated from a new voucher (as described below) or directly from the purchase order against which you are receiving. From the purchase order you are receiving against:  Select Receive Items from the I Want to Menu

+

To receive items ordered on a PO:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the Purchasing menu at the home page, select Receive Items. A blank receiving voucher is opened.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

     From the I Want To menu, select Receive from PO. The Select POs dialog is opened.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    At the top of the Select POs dialog, select the vendor. Only POs from the selected vendor are shown.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Choose the PO(s) to receive against by selecting the checkboxes on the left. You can select one, multiple, or all POs in the list.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Receive All Due to bring ALL the due items and quantities from selected POs to the voucher.

    +
    6. +
+

OR

+

Choose Select Items to Receive to receive only some of the items. Enter quantities for the items you want to bring to the voucher in the Doc Qty field and then select Continue. Learn more

+

Tip: If receiving all but a few of the items, it may be faster to choose Receive All Due and then edit the quantities on the voucher.

+
    +
  1. +

    If the referenced PO(s) include fees, you are asked if you would like to apply them to this voucher. Select Yes or No.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review the Unit Cost and Qty of each item to be sure they reflect the actual order values. Edit it if necessary.  Learn more about voucher costs

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  1. +

    If applicable, add other received items (not on PO) using standard item listing methods.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To enter or edit discounts, fees, and/or freight charges, select Enter Discount/Fee/Freight from the I Want To menu and enter the amounts. If applicable, select the Spread discount, freight and fee check box to allocate these amounts over the individual item costs. Learn more about spreading these amounts

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    If available, review or enter vendor billing information. Select Enter Billing Info from the I Want To menu.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save & Print.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Saving a voucher that references a PO automatically updates the POs fill status.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) If you generated a PO from a customer order (sales order), the customer order and purchase order numbers for the received items are shown in the voucher item list. Click the Show PO or Show SO buttons to view the orders.

    +
    • +
+

       Voucher item

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Warn if PO is past its cancel date

+

Enter vendor billing information

+

Edit voucher items

+

Update item prices from a receiving voucher

+

Print tags

+

Effects of saving a receiving voucher

+

Multi-store purchasing & receiving

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch753.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch753.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d059ae3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch753.htm @@ -0,0 +1,60 @@ + + + + + + + + +Edit Voucher Items + + + + + + + + + + + +

Edit Voucher Items

+

Edit Other Voucher Information | Delete Items

+
+

Basic

+
+

There are two methods of editing items after listing them on a voucher (but before saving).

+
    +
  • +

    Click Qty + and Qty  to increase or decrease the item quantity by one unit with each click.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Click Qty/Cost to edit the received quantity or order cost. You can also enter the quantity and extended cost on this dialog and Point of Sale will calculate and display the order cost (calculated to 5 decimal places, display to two decimal places).  

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Return Item, this button changes a positive quantity to negative when returning items to a vendor.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Edit to open the Item Information window to access other editable fields. For example, you can update the item's price when costs change here or enter item serial numbers.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Voucher items cannot be edited after saving the voucher. If an error is discovered in the listed items after saving, you will need to reverse the voucher or create a return voucher.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

List items

+

Receive items from a PO

+

Receiving overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch754.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch754.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f6bb311 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouch754.htm @@ -0,0 +1,106 @@ + + + + + + + +Effects of Saving a Receiving Voucher + + + + + + + + + + + +

Effects of Saving a Receiving Voucher

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Receiving Overview | Receiving Preferences

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

When you print/save a receiving voucher, Point of Sale performs the following actions:

+
    +
  • +

    Adds the quantities received into inventory (subtracts if a return voucher).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Re-calculates the received items' Average Unit Cost in inventory, if the cost has changed.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updates received items' Order Cost in inventory, if changed, to the cost listed on the voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updates item prices if the item prices were formerly zero (i.e., new items being received for the first time) based on your defined margin or markup and any Price Level markdowns specified in company preferences.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updates item Margin % and Markup%, and prices if you manually updated them from the voucher, if the cost has changed and the inventory price was not formerly zero (reorder items).

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updates the received items' Last Received Date.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Adds the voucher to your receiving history, item history, and the vendors history.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Updates any referenced POs fill status and item Received quantities.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Prints a copy of the voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated, sends the voucher to QuickBooks Desktop financial software on the next financial exchange. Learn more

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Receiving overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_billinginfo.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_billinginfo.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..30b77df --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_billinginfo.htm @@ -0,0 +1,91 @@ + + + + + + +Enter Vendor Billing Information + + + + + + + + + + +

Enter Vendor Billing Information

+

Receiving Overview | How Vouchers are Sent to QuickBooks Desktop

+
+

Basic

+
+

You can enter vendor billing information, such as Invoice #, terms, bill and due dates, etc. for your merchandise purchases in either Point of Sale or in QuickBooks Desktop financial software. The setting that determines if the vendor billing fields are on the Point of Sale voucher form is located in company preferences.

+

 

+

Note: This setting affects whether the necessary fields are included on the voucher form and how vouchers are sent to your financial software. We recommend you use the "How Vouchers are Sent..." link above to read about the differences before changing this setting.

+

 

+

By default, the vendor billing fields are not on the Point of Sale voucher form. You can change this setting if you do not use QuickBooks Desktop financial software or if you prefer entering the information in Point of Sale.

+

To change where vendor billing information is entered:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu, select Preferences Company.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Receiving from the left-hand preference menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select or clear the check box labeled Enter vendor billing information in Point of Sale.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Click Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

With the vendor billing fields added to Point of Sale, you can easily review and add billing information when you are making or editing a voucher.

+

To enter vendor billing information on the voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    With the voucher displayed, select Enter Billing Info from the I Want To menu. The Billing Information dialog is displayed. View example Click to expand/collapse topic

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Review and enter/edit information as needed. Typically, this information comes from the invoice from the vendor.  The vendor terms are suggested as the default terms from the vendor record or are carried from the PO. They can be edited here if necessary for this shipment.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Financial Exchange overview

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9215f4d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,43 @@ + + + + + + + +voucher_hdi + + + + + + + + +

Receiving Merchandise: How Do I?

+ +

This is a popup topic and has been hidden.

+ +

Access receiving vouchers and receiving history

+

Create a new voucher

+

Receive items ordered on a purchase order (PO)

+

Record freight, fees, and discounts

+

Enter vendor billing information

+

Find a voucher

+

Edit a voucher

+

Correct (reverse) a voucher

+

Return merchandise to vendors

+

View a vendors receiving history

+

Handle voucher cost and price

+

Print tags from vouchers

+ +

More

+ +

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_returns.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_returns.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ea9a2b4 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_returns.htm @@ -0,0 +1,96 @@ + + + + + + +Return Merchandise to Vendors + + + + + + + + + + + +

Return Merchandise to Vendors

+

Receiving Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

Merchandise being returned to a vendor is recorded on a  voucher in the same way in which you receive items. The only difference is you enter a negative quantity for the returned items.

+

If the merchandise being returned hasn't been received into your Point of Sale inventory via a receiving voucher, such as when discovering damaged goods upon arrival, you may choose to simply not receive it. No separate return document needs to be made in this case.

+

 

+

Important  Note: If you need to match and reconcile vendor invoices, bills, and payments, such as in QuickBooks Desktop financial software, we recommend never mixing received and returned items on a single voucher. Doing so would result in "net" documents being created in your financial software, instead of individual bills and vendor credits.

+

 

+

You can create a return voucher by manually creating it or by copying the original voucher and making it a return. The second choice is best if returning all or most of  the items received on a voucher.

+

To manually create a return voucher:

+

Follow the basic procedure for creating a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Receive Items from the Purchasing menu.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    List the quantities and cost of the items being returned.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    The current order cost from inventory is suggested as the voucher cost. Edit to match original received cost as necessary.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Be sure to enter negative quantities. One way is to click the  Return Item for each item.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Save the voucher.

    +
    2. +
+

To make a return by copying the original receiving voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    Locate the original receiving voucher in your receiving history.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Return to Vendor  from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
+

A new voucher with the same information (except vendor billing information) as the original is opened with the quantities converted to negative quantities..

+
    +
  1. +

    Edit the items and other information as needed.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Save the voucher.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Do not make a return voucher for merchandise that has never been received into inventory, such as when you refuse delivery of merchandise that arrives damaged.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Upon saving, a return voucher deducts the returned item quantities from inventory, updates a referenced purchase orders fill status, and is added to your receiving history.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If integrated with QuickBooks Desktop financial software, the vendor credit that results from a return voucher is not automatically applied to open bills in your financial software. In QuickBooks Desktop, select Pay Bills from the Vendors menu and apply the credit.  Refer to your QuickBooks Desktop financial software documentation if you need additional help. Learn More.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Find a voucher

+

Multi-Store Purchasing & Receiving

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_selectpoitems.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_selectpoitems.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5773db2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_selectpoitems.htm @@ -0,0 +1,54 @@ + + + + + + +Select Items to Receive + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Items to Receive

+

Receiving Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Basic

+
+

This information applies to the Select Items to Receive window, accessed when receiving against a purchase order.

+

 

+

Use this window to specify the quantity of items being received from selected purchase orders. All remaining due items from the selected POs are included in the list for selection.

+

To select items:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the quantity of each item being received in the Doc Qty column,

    +
    2. +
+

Or

+

Choose Select All to receive all  remaining due items to the voucher.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Continue.

    +
    2. +
+

The items with specified quantities are transferred to the receiving voucher.

+

 

+

Tip:  A quick way to receive most but not all items in the list is to choose Select All to populate the Doc Qty column for all items with the due quantity. Then edit the Doc Qty for the few items not being received before selecting Continue.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_selectpos.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_selectpos.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9bc954d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_selectpos.htm @@ -0,0 +1,70 @@ + + + + + + +Select Purchase Orders + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Select Purchase Orders

+

Receiving Overview | Purchasing Overview

+
+

Pro

+
+

This information applies to the Select POs window, accessed from a receiving voucher when receiving against purchase orders.

+

 

+

Use this window to select the purchase order(s) from which you are receiving items.

+

To select purchase orders:

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Show POs For: field, select a vendor or choose to show POs for all vendors.

    +
    2. +
+

If you already selected the vendor on the voucher, that vendor is pre-selected for you here.

+
    +
  1. +

    Click the checkboxes in the Select column to choose POs (or use the Select All button on the right).

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select one of the choices for receiving items from the selected POs:

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    Receive All Due Transfers all items and quantities from the selected POs to the voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Select Items to Receive Opens an item selection window, allowing you to enter received quantities for specific items.

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    In order to maintain accurate vendor histories and receiving reports, and to be able to match up vendor bills and invoices in your financial software, we recommend never receiving items from multiple vendors on a single receiving voucher. A good practice is to receive against a single PO from a single vendor with each voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you spread freight, fees, and discounts across received item costs, it is a good practice to receive against only one purchase order per voucher. Otherwise, you may be spreading fees or discounts associated with one order over items from another.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_spreadcosts.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_spreadcosts.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9594224 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_spreadcosts.htm @@ -0,0 +1,84 @@ + + + + + + + +Spread Discounts, Freight, and Fees Across Item Costs + + + + + + + + + + + +

Spread Discounts, Fees, and Freight Across Item Costs

+

Receive Purchase Order Items | Enter Voucher Discounts, Feels, and Freight

+
+

Basic

+
+

Discounts, fees, and freight entered on a receiving voucher can be spread across the costs of the items being received. Spreading these amounts helps you track a truer average cost for your items.

+

To spread these amounts on a voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    List all items being received on the voucher, either manually or by referencing the purchase order on which they were ordered.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    From the I Want To menu, select Enter Discount/Fee/Freight and enter amounts as applicable.

    +
    3. +
+

Receiving Voucher

+
    +
  1. +

    Select the Spread Discount, Freight, and Fee check box.

    +
    2. +
+

Note that the amounts previously entered are zeroed out as these amounts are now spread across the individual item costs on the voucher. The total remains the same.

+

Receiving Voucher with discount, freight, and fees spread

+
    +
  1. +

    Click Close.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Complete and print/save the voucher.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    When spread, the sum of discounts, freight, and fees is distributed across all items on the voucher proportionally based on each items extended cost. Due to rounding, this amount may result in fractional cents applied to the voucher cost.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The discount, freight, and fee fields at the bottom of the voucher form are no longer editable after spreading, since these amounts are now reflected in the individual item extended costs and in the voucher subtotal.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Clearing the spread check box before saving the voucher will restore the costs to their prior state and make the discount, freight, and fee fields editable again.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Once the voucher is saved, these amounts cannot be unspread or changed. Likewise, if the voucher is saved without spreading, it cannot be edited later to spread (though in this case the fields themselves are editable, since the amounts may not have been known at the time the voucher was created and saved).

    +
    • +
  • +

    When spreading, it is the item average unit cost that is affected in inventory. Item order cost is not adjusted. How does order cost differ from average unit cost?

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_updateprices.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_updateprices.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f30e341 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/voucher_updateprices.htm @@ -0,0 +1,111 @@ + + + + + + +Update Item Prices from a Receiving Voucher + + + + + + + + + + +

Update Item Prices from a Receiving Voucher

+

Receiving Overview | Print Price Tags

+
+

Basic

+
+

It's inevitable. Your vendor raises their price for an item and you need to decide whether to pass on the increase to your customers.

+

Point of Sale alerts you when a reorder item cost on a voucher is different than the current inventory cost, but does not automatically update the price. Whether you change your price and by how much is at your discretion.

+

You can change the price and print new tags from the voucher, if you wish.

+

To update the price and print new tags from the receiving voucher:

+
    +
  1. +

    When you go to print/save the voucher, you are alerted that you are receiving an item or items at a new cost. Answer Yes, that you want to review  the prices before saving the voucher.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the item with the new cost in the voucher item list and then click Edit.

    +
    3. +
+

The Item Information window opens, as shown here, displaying price and margin information (other information removed from illustration for clarity).

+

+

The item price shown is your current Regular Price from inventory. The margin and markup numbers show what your profit margin would be at this price relative to the cost on the voucher (not relative to your average unit cost; see note below).

+
    +
  1. +

    Adjust the item price by entering a new price or by adjusting the margin or markup and then select OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    To print new price tags from the voucher, with the item highlighted select Print Tags from the I Want To menu.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Repeat for other items, if applicable.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Print/save the voucher.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The new regular sales price (and markdown price levels if you use them) are updated in inventory when you save the voucher.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Use the margin and markup shown on the voucher as a guideline in setting price. When saving the voucher, these values will be recalculated in inventory relative to the new average unit cost.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If items received on a voucher are brand new (i.e., do not yet have a regular price defined in inventory, but do have a margin or markup defined) Point of Sale will automatically calculate the regular price by applying the specified margin or markup to the voucher cost upon saving. If you use markdown price levels, those prices are also calculated based on the markdown percentages specified on the item record (and defined in company preferences).

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Use Markdown Price Levels

+

Price Change Reminders

+

Price/Cost Relationship

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouchersoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouchersoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6062eab --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/vouchersoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,85 @@ + + + + + + + +Receiving Overview + + + + + + + + + + + + +

Receiving Overview

+

How do I?Click to expand/collapse topic | Receiving Preferences | Voucher Field Descriptions

+ +
+

Basic

+
+

A receiving voucher is a Point of Sale history document that provides a permanent record of merchandise received from a vendor into inventory. A return voucher, on the other hand, records merchandise returned to the vendor and removed from inventory. The term voucher is used to refer to both receiving and return vouchers, unless otherwise specified.

+

After a voucher is saved, it is stored in your receiving history. Both receiving and return vouchers are maintained in a single list.

+

When receiving merchandise ordered on a purchase order, you can bring any or all of the ordered items to the voucher by "referencing" the PO on the voucher. The PO fill status will be updated when the voucher is saved.

+ +

When receiving an item that you have open customer orders for, Point of Sale will alert you and add the item to the fill customer order reminders list. If you generated a purchase order from the customer order to get the item from your vendor, Point of Sale will display the customer order number and customer name right on the receiving voucher to assist in quickly filling the order.

+ +

Saving a voucher updates the received items average unit cost, order cost, and on-hand quantity in inventory. To keep accurate track of the value of your inventory, it is important to enter the correct cost information for received items on the voucher.

+

If an item is received on a voucher at a new cost, you are alerted so you can review and possibly update your prices to maintain your desired profit margin. Item prices are only automatically updated by a voucher if the previous price was $0 (typical for new items being received for first time) and you have defined a margin or markup in inventory.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Receiving against a PO

+

Handling vendor billing information

+

Updating item prices when costs change

+

Security rights for receiving

+

How vouchers are sent to QuickBooks Desktop financial software

+ + + + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/windows_2003_server_group_policy_settings.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/windows_2003_server_group_policy_settings.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ccedf9b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/windows_2003_server_group_policy_settings.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Windows 2003 Server Group Policy Settings + + + + + + + + + + + +

Windows 2003 Server Group Policy Settings

+

Printing FAQs | Compatible Tag Printers

+

 

+

Before installing the USB tag printer, you must set your Disallow installation of printers using kernel-mode drivers policy to Disabled as described below.

+

To change the Group Policy settings:

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Start Run.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Type gpedit.msc and select OK.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Go to Local Computer Policy Computer Configuration Administrative Templates Printers.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Double-click Disallow installation of printers using kernel-mode drivers.

    +
    5. +
  5. +

    Select Disabled form the settings tab.

    +
    6. +
  6. +

    Select OK.

    +
    7. +
  7. +

    Close the Group Policy Window.

    +
    8. +
+

 

+

You may now proceed with the procedure for installing the USB tag printer.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wo_tips.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wo_tips.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..8169f37 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wo_tips.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Tips for Using Work Orders + + + + + + + + + + + +

Tips for Using Work Orders

+

Customer Order Overview | Order Field Descriptions

+
+

Pro

+
+

The basic procedures used to create, take deposits, edit, or fill work orders are the same as for all types of customer orders.

+

This topic contains specific ideas for using those procedures to best advantage in tracking work orders. Select a link from the following list for more information.

+

Use service items

+

Track warranty work

+

Describe the problem or work to be performed

+

Assign work orders to employees

+

Track work orders by status

+

Track work order dates

+

Print work order messages

+

 

+

Overview

+

Whereas layaways and sales orders usually involve merchandise orders, work orders generally are for service-only jobs, such as alterations, repairs, or warranty service. Merchandise recorded on a work order is typically consumed in the service, such as repair parts. Work orders typically do not include the sale of the item being serviced. Work orders usually include a labor component, identified as a service item in inventory.

+

Work orders can be assigned to the employee who is to perform the service, a due date can be specified, and the completion status can be tracked and reported.

+

 

+

Customer orders not available to you? This could be due to your security level or customer orders may be disabled in your Features to Use company preference settings.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Create a work order

+

Take a deposit

+

Handle special orders

+

Preferences for Customer Orders

+

Tips for using sales orders

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs01.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs01.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..583285c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs01.htm @@ -0,0 +1,46 @@ + + + + + + + + + +Set Up Hardware + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up Hardware

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Hardware List

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

For the most current Point of Sale hardware drivers and installation instructions, click here.

+

What type of hardware are you setting up?

+

Cash drawer

+

Modem

+

Bar Code Scanner

+

Card reader

+

Customer pole display

+

Touchscreen monitor

+

Physical inventory scanner

+

PIN pad

+

Printers

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshoot hardware

+

Workstation preferences overview

+

Install supported hardware

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs02.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs02.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7f0210b --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs02.htm @@ -0,0 +1,89 @@ + + + + + + + + +Workstation Preferences: General + + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences: General

+

Preference Instructions | Company Preferences

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Workstation Number

+		 +

Enter a workstation number from 1 - 10. Each workstation in a store must have a unique number.

+
+

Security: Automatic Logout

+		 +

Select to automatically log out a user after a specified period of inactivity.

+

Define the amount of time, in minutes, after which users will be automatically logged out. Default: 15 minutes

+

Note: Setting applies only if employee logins are required.

+
+

Appearance

+		 +

Select Reset Now to reset Point of Sale layouts to the default appearance. Any customizations made to column order, size, etc., will be lost.

+
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Employees & security overview

+

Workstation preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs03.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs03.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2b335a3 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs03.htm @@ -0,0 +1,47 @@ + + + + + + + +Workstation Preferences: Documents and Printers + + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences: Documents and Printers

+

Preference Instructions | Printing FAQs | Company Preferences

+

 

+

Use the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences to specify the default printer, print template and number of copies to print for each document type in Point of Sale. Set these options at each workstation that will print from within Point of Sale.

+

Printer: Select from the drop-down list of available printers.

+

Template: Select from a list of available templates to be used when printing the document type. The template determines the print layout of fields for a particular document type and printer. Point of Sale includes several template choices for each document type for use with various printers and for various needs.

+

Copies: Enter the number of copies to print each time the document type is printed.

+

Highlight a document line and select Preview or Print Test Page to view or test that the printer/template combination results in the desired output. If you need to add or configure a printer, select the Hardware Setup Wizard button.

+

If you also specify to display the Print dialog on the Print Options page, you can change these settings at the time of printing.

+

 

+

Shipping Manager Label Printer (Pro)

+

If you use Shipping Manager, select Shipping Manager Setup to open this application and set up a printer for your shipping labels.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

General printing instructions

+

Customizing print templates (Pro)

+

Workstation preferences overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs04.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs04.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..5790fc9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs04.htm @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ + + + + + + + +Available Printers/Add Printer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Available Printers/Add Printer

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Printers

+

 

+

This information applies to the Available Printers page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

This workstation preference page lists the printers currently installed on this workstation.

+

Check the list to see if your printer is installed. If not, select the Hardware Setup Wizard button to install it now. Follow the wizard prompts to complete the installation.

+

If you purchased your printer from Intuit (i.e. a supported printer), follow any instructions included with the printer or select from the installation instructions below.

+

 

+

Select a link for more information about installing supported printers:

+

Citizen CT-S300 Receipt Printer (USB)

+

Star TSP100/TSP600 receipt printer (USB)

+

Star TSP600 receipt printer (parallel)

+

Zebra LP2824 tag printer (USB)

+

Zebra LP2824 tag printer (parallel)

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Print option preferences

+

General printing instructions

+

Troubleshooting printing

+

Setting up an Inkjet or laser printer

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_autoupdate.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_autoupdate.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..46c8c6d --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_autoupdate.htm @@ -0,0 +1,94 @@ + + + + + + +wsprefs_autoupdate + + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences: Automatic Update

+

Preference Instructions | Update Overview

+

 

+

Point of Sale can automatically check for and download program updates in the background while you continue working in the program. Use this page to set your update preferences.

+

 

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Automatically download updates on this workstation

+		 +

To enable automatic download of updates on this workstation, select Yes.

+

To disable automatic download, select No

+

Also, select No if this workstation will install updates that have been downloaded by another workstation. See the following settings and the notes below.

+
+

Use shared download location

+		 +

If this workstation will download updates for other workstations OR if this workstation will install shared update files downloaded by another workstation, select Yes.

+

Otherwise, select No.

+
+

Shared Location

+		 +

If you answered Yes to using a shared download location, specify or browse to the location to which the update files are downloaded (all workstations downloading to or installing from this folder should set this preferences)

+
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    To download updates, a workstation must have an active Internet connection.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Each workstation on a network can download and install updates independently, or one workstation can download the update file to a shared folder on the network from which all workstation can install.

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you disable automatic updates, you can still manually check for and download update files by selecting Update QBPOS from the File menu.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_barcodescanner.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_barcodescanner.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ee1d92c --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_barcodescanner.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Bar Code Scanner + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Bar Code Scanner

+

Preference Instructions | FAQs

+

 

+

This information applies to the Bar Code Scanner page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

If you have a bar code scanner attached to this workstation, select the check box on this preference page.

+

Select Test Bar Code Scanner at the bottom of the page to confirm the scanner is working.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

List of compatible bar code scanners

+

Install Bar Code Scanner

+

 

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_cardreader.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_cardreader.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d2ad9cc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_cardreader.htm @@ -0,0 +1,36 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Card Reader + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Card Reader

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Card Readers

+

 

+

This information applies to the Card Reader page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

Select your installed card reader from the drop-down list, then select the test button to check its operation.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Installing the Magtek 21040110 MSR USB card reader

+

Installing the ID Innovations MSR USB card reader

+

Installing the ID Innovations MSR PS2 card reader

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_cashdrawer.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_cashdrawer.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2abe820 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_cashdrawer.htm @@ -0,0 +1,57 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Cash Drawer + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Cash Drawer

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Cash Drawers

+

 

+

This information applies to the Cash Drawer page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

A cash drawer must be connected through a 40-column receipt printer. Your receipt printer must be installed and working for the cash drawer to function. If you need to add your receipt printer or cash drawer, select the Hardware Setup Wizard button at the bottom of this window and follow the instructions.

+

To change your cash drawer setup on this page:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the first drop-down list, select your receipt printer model.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    In the second drop-down list, select the cash drawer connection that matches your receipt printer.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Open Cash Drawer to confirm that your cash drawer opens properly.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select OK or Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Cash drawer troubleshooting

+

Receipt printer troubleshooting

+

Installing the VALU-u Line cash drawer

+

Installing the M-S dash drawer

+

List of compatible cash drawers

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_instructions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_instructions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..3ad4003 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_instructions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,61 @@ + + + + + + +Workstation Preference Instructions + + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preference Instructions

+

Workstation Preference Overview | Company Preferences

+

 

+

Use workstation preferences to set up hardware, print options, and general program options that apply only to this workstation. Each workstation sets their own workstation preferences.

+

Changes in some preference settings require you to close all or related windows before saving. Point of Sale will prompt you and give you an opportunity to switch to open windows to save or cancel transactions in progress if necessary.

+

To configure workstation preferences:

+
    +
  1. +

    From the File menu at the home page, select Preferences Workstation.

    +
    2. +
+
    +
  1. +

    From the list on the left, select the page of preferences you wish to edit.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Edit preference settings as needed.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Select Cancel to leave preferences without saving any changes.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Two powerful options are available from the I Want To menu:  Undo Changes to discard all changes since your last save, but remain in preferences, and Reset to Default Setting to revert all workstation preferences to their default values. Be aware that these choices affect all workstation preferences, not just the page you are currently viewing.

    +
    • +
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_modem.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_modem.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ccddb67 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_modem.htm @@ -0,0 +1,33 @@ + + + + + + +Set Up a Modem + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Modem

+

Preference Instructions | Merchant and Gift Card Service Setup

+

 

+

Point of Sale Desktop does not support modems.

+

 

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Communication setup for Merchant or Gift Card Service

+

Workstation preferences instructions

+

Store Exchange overview (Pro)

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_pdt.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_pdt.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..fb5a8bc --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_pdt.htm @@ -0,0 +1,56 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up Physical Inventory Scanner + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Physical Inventory Scanner

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Physical Inventory Scanners

+
+

Basic

+
+

This information applies to the Physical Inventory Scanner page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

This procedure assumes you have followed the instructions to install your physical inventory scanner to this workstation and have assigned a Windows COM port.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your scanner model from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select the COM Port number that matches the COM Port you assigned in Windows when installing the scanner.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use the Test button at the bottom of the page to verify operation of the scanner.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Using the scanner for a Physical Inventory

+

Hardware troubleshooter

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_pinpad.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_pinpad.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1b988c6 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_pinpad.htm @@ -0,0 +1,53 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a PIN pad + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a PIN Pad

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible PIN Pads

+

 

+

This information applies to the PIN pads page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to add and configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

 

+

This procedure assumes you have used the instructions to install your PIN pad to this computer.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your PIN pad model from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Use the test button at the bottom of the window to verify operation of the device.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select Save.

    +
    4. +
+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Hardware requirements for Merchant Services

+

Taking payment by debit/ATM card

+

Configuring Merchant Services

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_poledisplay.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_poledisplay.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ec5a112 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_poledisplay.htm @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Pole Display + + + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Pole Display

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Pole Displays

+

 

+

This information applies to the Pole Display page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

 

+
    +
  1. +

    Select your pole display model from the drop-down list.

    +
    2. +
+

In the Connected to field, select the port the pole display is connected to (a serial port, which is also called a COM port, or a USB port).

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Message Displayed Between Sales area, enter text in Line 1 and/or Line 2 and select an alignment option from the drop-down lists. The display will accommodate up to 20 fixed characters per line or 50 scrolling characters if you select Scroll in the Alignment field.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select an option for the Message Displayed During Sales. Your choice is reflected in the Example window.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Use the test button at the bottom of the page to verify the operation of the device.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    Select Save.

    +
    5. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you are using a serial connection and the pole display does not display information after this procedure, re-enter Workstation preferences and try a different port connection, e.g. if you initially selected COM 1, change the setting to COM 2 and test again. Repeat this procedure until the pole display functions correctly (or use this procedure to verify the port assigned in Windows Device Manager and then select the matching port in workstation preferences).

    +
    • +
  • +

    If you are using a serial connection and you have an internal modem, the modem may be assigned to one of your serial ports, causing a conflict if the pole display is plugged into the same port. If your pole display still does not work, try plugging the pole display into another serial port. Repeat the steps above until you have identified the right combination of physical port and serial port setting that results in the pole display working.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Troubleshooting your pole display

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_printoptions.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_printoptions.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7777d29 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_printoptions.htm @@ -0,0 +1,109 @@ + + + + + + + +Workstation Preferences: Print Options + + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences: Print Options

+

Preference Instructions | Compatible Printers | Printing FAQs

+

 

+

Additional Printing Preferences

+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
+

Preference

+		 +

Function

+
+

Prompt for gift receipt with each sale

+		 +

=Select to be prompted to print a gift receipt for each sale (with the item, price, and payment information excluded).

+
+

Prompt to e-mail receipt with each sale

+		 +

=Select to be prompted to e-mail sales receipts to your customers, the prompt message also affords an opportunity to capture an e-mail address if you don't already have it.

+
+

Pause between printing to allow tearing off of printed receipt

+		 +

= The printer will pause briefly before printing the second copy of a receipt. This pause gives users time to tear off the first copy. This option is for users with printers that do not automatically cut off each receipt.

+
+

Print two copies of credit card receipts

+		 +

= Automatically print two copies of all sales receipts that are paid for by credit card. If using two-ply receipt paper, you may disable this option.

+
+

Print two copies of receipts tendered by account charge

+		 +

= Automatically print two copies of all sales receipts that are paid for by charge to customer account. If using two-ply receipt paper, you may disable this option.

+
+

Display Print Options dialog when printing

+		 +

Select the documents for which you wish to display a dialog allowing you to change print settings or to display a preview before printing.

+
+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_touchscreen.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_touchscreen.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c12cfb8 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefs_touchscreen.htm @@ -0,0 +1,39 @@ + + + + + + + +Set Up a Touchscreen Monitor + + + + + + + + + +

Set Up a Touchscreen Monitor

+

Preference Instructions | Using a Touchscreen | Compatible Touchcreens

+

 

+

This information applies to the Touchscreen Monitor page of workstation preferences.

+

 

+

It is strongly recommended that you use the Hardware Setup Wizard to configure your Point of Sale hardware. You can access the setup wizard from the File menu and from individual hardware preferences pages.

+

 

+

R = Select to enable the use of a touchscreen in Point of Sale.

+

When this option is selected, the touchscreen navigation toolbar and controls are displayed in the customer-facing areas of Point of Sale, such as sales receipts. You must have a touchscreen monitor connected to your computer for this feature to work.

+

 

+ + + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefsoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefsoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a81cb79 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/wsprefsoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ + + + + + + + + +Workstation Preferences Overview + + + + + + + + + + +

Workstation Preferences Overview

+

Preference Instructions | Company Preferences

+

 

+

Workstation preferences define workstation-specific settings and options, including Point of Sale hardware, printing options, and automatic program updates.

+

Use company preferences to define settings and options that are shared by all workstations on a network.

+

Choose a workstation preference area for more information:

+

General: Set automatic logout, appearance, and inventory reminders preferences.

+

Software Updates: Set options for automatically updating the Point of Sale program files on this workstation.

+

Hardware: Individual pages to configure your Point of Sale hardware.

+

Available Printers: View and/or add printers used with Point of Sale.

+

Documents & Printers: Specify the printer, template, and number of copies for each printed document type.

+

Print Options: Specify general print options.

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1101.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1101.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..0e4cee2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1101.htm @@ -0,0 +1,79 @@ + + + + + + + + +Basic Steps to Run an X/Z-Out Report + + + + + + + + + + +

Basic Steps to Run an X/Z-Out Report

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

The procedure below assumes you are accessing X-Z/Out Reports from the Report Center. The same reports and options, though in slightly different sequence, are available in the End of Day procedure.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select Cash Drawer as the report category and then select X-Out Status Report, Z-Out Drawer Count, or Z-Out Store Close as the specific report type.

    +
    2. +
+

The selected report is ran and displayed, using default settings.

+
    +
  1. +

    Specify a date/time range for the report. The report will only include information from receipts in this date range. Learn more.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If it is necessary to modify other report settings, such as filter criteria or display options, select Modify and make changes.

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    Select OK.

    +
    4. +
+
    +
  • +

    Z-Out Drawer Count The Media Totals window is displayed for you to enter/count the cash drawer amounts. Learn more about completing a Drawer Count report.

    +
    • +
  • +

    X-Out, Z-Out Store Close The report is displayed on-screen.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    (Optional) With the report displayed, select Memorize to save the report options. Enter a report name and select OK. The report will be added to your memorized reports list.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select Print, Print Preview or Excel to output the report.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The printer and print template used for your X/Z-Out reports are specified on the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out Store Close report

+

How various POS actions are reported

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1104.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1104.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2166eb9 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1104.htm @@ -0,0 +1,87 @@ + + + + + + + + +Define X/Z-Out Report Options and Filter Criteria + + + + + + + + + + +

Define X/Z-Out Report Options and Filter Criteria

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

The report options and filter criteria for X/Z-Out reports allow the definition of any combination of workstations, cashiers, date/time range, and other display options.

+

(Pro)  If ran at Headquarters, the filter criteria also includes the ability to specify the stores included (report will only include information through the last completed Store Exchange with remote stores.)

+

To define X/Z-Out options and filter criteria:

+
    +
  1. +

    Follow the basic procedure to select and run an X/Z-Out report.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    With the report displayed, select Modify (<Alt+M>).

    +
    3. +
  3. +

    On the Display page, select a date/time range for the report and the orientation.

    +
    4. +
  4. +

    On the Filters page, enter filter criteria for the available fields:

    +
    5. +
+
    +
  • +

    Store: (Pro, Headquarters only) Select image\f4_symbol.gif (<F4>) to access and select from the list of your stores. If left blank, all stores are included.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Workstation: Select image\f4_symbol.gif (<F4>) to access and select from the list of your workstations. If left blank, all workstations are included.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Cashier: Enter an individual associates name or all associates. If left blank, all associates are included.

    +
    • +
  • +

    While editing filter criteria, you can select Revert to erase your changes and return to the default values.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    If you want to save your report options, select Memorize Report. Enter a report name and select OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    Select OK again to close the Modify Report window and run the report.

    +
    3. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    The printer and print template used for your X/Z-Out reports are specified on the Documents & Printers page of workstation preferences.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out reports

+

General filter criteria instructions

+

X/Z-Out Overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1113.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1113.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..9c2ee96 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1113.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + +Z-Out Reports + + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Reports

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Z-Out or "zero-out" reports are used to close out a workstation and cash drawer for a shift or day and when closing the entire store for the day. Z-Out reports contain all the information included in an X-Out report, with additional functions as described below.

+

There are two types of Z-Out report:

+
    +
  • +

    Z-Out Drawer Count: The Z-Out Drawer Count report is typically run at the end of an associates shift, or at the end of day, to summarize sales activity and reconcile a cash drawer for the period. Typically, a Z-Out Drawer Count report is run at each workstation independently.

    +
    • +
+

Z-Out Drawer Count reports can be filtered by date/time range, workstation, store (Pro, Headquarters only), and/or associate. In addition, manual media counts can be required to ensure cash drawer accountability.

+

 

+

Note: To require manual media counts as part of drawer count report, select Preferences Company from the File menu. Then select the Sales page from the preferences tree on the left. Select the Require a Manual Media Count for X/Z-Out option and save.

+
    +
  • +

    Z-Out Store Close: The Z-Out Store Close report is typically run at the end of the day when closing the store. It is particularly well-suited for retailers with multiple workstations, where each workstation runs their own Drawer Count report and then a Store Close report is run to include the activities from all workstations. By default; all workstations and associates are automatically included in the report, though it can be filtered to narrow the results if desired. Unlike the Z-Out Drawer Count report, manual media counts are not available for the Z-Out Store Close report. 

    +
    • +
+

Which Z-Out report should I use?

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

How various transactions are reported

+

End of Day procedure

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1114.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1114.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..1fdb307 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1114.htm @@ -0,0 +1,90 @@ + + + + + + + +Z-Out Drawer Count Report + + + + + + + + + + + +

Z-Out Drawer Count Report

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Follow the basic steps to run an X/Z-Out report, selecting Z-Out Drawer Count as the report type, and then continue with this procedure, when prompted to enter media counts on the Media Totals window.

+

To enter media totals:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the amount of currency that was in the drawer at the beginning of the period in the Begin field.

    +
    2. +
+

By default, Point of Sale suggests the amount that was entered in the Leave field the last time a Z-Out Drawer Count report was run.

+
    +
  1. +

    If a manual media count is required, select image\f4_symbol.gif (<F4>) in the Count field to open the Media Count window for each media type. Complete and enter the counts for each currency. The total of each counted media type is carried from the Media Count window to the Media Totals window when you select OK.

    +
    2. +
+

If not performing a manual media count, just enter the total drawer currency count in the Count field.

+

The total amount of non-currency media accepted during the period is displayed on the Media Totals window as well and cannot be edited.

+
    +
  1. +

    In the Leave field, enter the amount of currency that is to be left in the drawer to begin the next period. (Point of Sale suggests the same amount entered the last time a Z-Out Drawer Count report was run).

    +
    2. +
+

The Deposit field is calculated by Point of Sale based on your currency counts and the values entered for the Begin and Leave fields.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK.

    +
    2. +
  2. +

    If a discrepancy exists between what was counted and what Point of Sale has recorded, a discrepancy notice is displayed. Select Yes to continue or No to recount. If the discrepancy cannot be corrected with a recount, enter a reason for the difference or comments in the Remarks field. Remarks are printed at the end of the Z-Out Drawer Count report.

    +
    3. +
+
    +
  • +

    The Drawer Count report is displayed.

    +
    • +
+
    +
  1. +

    Select Modify if you want to change report options, such as date, store, cashier, or workstations. Changing these options causes the report to run again.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    If you want to conduct manual media counts for each drawer at the end of the day and still want to run a Z-Out Store Close report, manually run a Z-Out Drawer Count report for each workstation, then run a Z-Out Store Close report as part of your End of Day procedure that includes all workstations.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Drawer Count reports are saved and can be viewed by selecting View Drawer Count History from the Reports menu.

    +
    • +
  • +

    (Pro) Z-Out Drawer Count Reports ran at remote stores are sent to Headquarters during Store Exchanges.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out reports

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1115.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1115.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dd1b2a2 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1115.htm @@ -0,0 +1,55 @@ + + + + + + + + +The Media Count Window + + + + + + + + + + + +

The Media Count Window

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

The Media Count window is opened by clicking the image\f4_symbol.gif icon (<F4>) from the Count field on the Media Totals window.

+

To enter currency counts:

+
    +
  1. +

    Enter the count of each denomination (e.g. if there are five $20 dollar bills in the drawer, enter 5, not $100).

    +
    2. +
+

Based on your counts, Point of Sale calculates and displays the amount for each denomination and the for the currency total.

+
    +
  1. +

    Select OK to carry the currency total to the Media Totals window.

    +
    2. +
+

 

+

Discrepancy Warning

+

After media counts are completed and amounts are entered in the Media Totals window, select OK to reconcile the cash drawer. If discrepancies exist between what you counted and what Point of Sale has recorded, a discrepancy notice is displayed.

+

At this point, you can select Yes to continue running the Z-Out Drawer Count report without addressing the problem, or select No to return to the Media Totals and Media Count windows to attempt to correct the discrepancy.

+

Once you choose to continue, the Confirm dialog offers a final opportunity to review or make changes before proceeding with reconciliation. By answering Yes, the reconciliation is run and the Z-Out Drawer Count report is created.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

Z-Out reports

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1116.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1116.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c79adc7 --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xz1116.htm @@ -0,0 +1,82 @@ + + + + + + + + +ViewTransactions on X/Z-Out Reports + + + + + + + + + + +

View POS Actions on X/Z-Out Reports

+

X/Z-Out Overview | End of Day Overview | Reports Overview

+

 

+

Sales and Returns

+
    +
  • +

    Sales recorded on sales receipts are reported in the Sales column in the first section of the report

    +
    • +
  • +

    Sales of gift cards, gift certificates, or payments on charge accounts are broken out separately in the Sales column

    +
    • +
  • +

    Amounts recorded as returns from customers are shown in the Returns column

    +
    • +
  • +

    Refunds for returned merchandise are recorded as paid out amounts for the type of payment used

    +
    • +
  • +

    Payments by gift card, gift certificate, customer order deposits used, and charges on account, none of which bring cash into the drawer, are subtracted from the net sales to arrive at the deposit amount for the period

    +
    • +
+

         

+

Note: On X/Z-Out reports, the term "Paidout" typically refers to money or other payment given to the customer for any reason, such as giving change for a normal sales receipt or paying a customer for returned items. However, in the list of non-currency media contained at the end of X/Z-Out reports, there is a list of Payouts, meaning cash removed from the cash drawer using the Payout feature as described here. It is important to be aware of the distinction.

+

 

+

Accepting More Than One Payment Method

+

When the customer pays for a transaction using more than one payment method, amounts are credited to the individual payment methods. If a sale were paid for with $50 cash and $75 on a credit card, the report would show a $50 cash paid-in amount and a $75 credit card paid-in amount.

+

 

+

Discounts

+
    +
  • +

    The sales figures in the first section of the report are calculated from the receipt totals after any discount. Discount dollars or types are not identified here.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The discount breakout section reports all discounts identified by type.

    +
    • +
  • +

    User-defined discount types from preference settings are used to identify manual item discounts given at point of sale.

    +
    • +
  • +

    GLOBAL is assigned if you discounted the receipt sub-total.

    +
    • +
  • +

    Note that the use of price levels to give a lower price than normal is not considered or reported as a discount.

    +
    • +
+

Non-Currency Media

+

X/Z-Out reports include itemized listings of the individual amounts paid for by non-currency media, such as check, ATM/debit, or credit card, and gift card/certificate.

+

 

+

Related Topics

+

X/Z-Out basic steps

+

X/Z-Out overview

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xzout_hdi.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xzout_hdi.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..993c4fd --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xzout_hdi.htm @@ -0,0 +1,32 @@ + + + + + + +xzout_hdi + + + + + + + + + + +

X/Z-Out Reports: How Do I?

+

This is a popup topic.

+

  Run an X/Z-Out report

+

Run a Z-Out Drawer Count report

+

Run a Z-Out Store Close report

+

View Z-Out Drawer Count history

+

  Define report filter criteria

+

 

+

Click anywhere to close this window

+ + diff --git a/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xzoverview.htm b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xzoverview.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..97ee51f --- /dev/null +++ b/backups/backup_html_20260109_181155/xzoverview.htm @@ -0,0 +1,86 @@ + + + + + + + + +Cash Drawer Reports (X/Z-Outs) + + + + + + + + + + +

Cash Drawer Reports (X/Z-Out)

+

How do I?Click to display a popup topic | X/Z-Out Terminology | Reports Overview

+

 

+

The term X/Z-Out is borrowed from cash register systems. These reports can provide up-to-the-minute accounting of POS activities for the current sales period, help you reconcile your cash drawer(s), and help you close out the day.

+

Point of Sale provides four cash drawer reports:

+
    +
  • +

    The X-Out Status report can be run at any time for a quick check on sales activity or to obtain a non-currency media listing up to the time the report is run. The X-Out Status report can be used to report sales activity at the end of a shift without doing media counts.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Z-Out Drawer Count reports is often run at the end of a cashiers shift and/or at the end of the day when you want to reconcile the cash drawer. A manual media count can be required on this report to improve cash drawer accountability. In a multiple workstation installation, this report is typically done at each workstation prior to running the Z-Out Store Close report for the entire store in the End of Day procedure. (Pro:  Z-Out Drawer Count Reports ran at remote stores are sent to Headquarters during Store Exchanges).

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Z-Out Store Close report is typically run when closing the store for the day and filtered to include all workstations in the store. The Store Close report does not include the option to manually count out the cash drawer.

    +
    • +
  • +

    The Payout Report includes is a summary report of cash paid out of your cash drawer using the payout feature.

    +
    • +
+

All X/Z-Out reports include:

+
    +
  • +

    All sales activity for the specified period

    +
    • +
  • +

    Net sales, cash flow, and discount breakouts

    +
    • +
+

In addition, a Z-Out report can:

+
    +
  • +

    Report daily cash flow, including overages and shortages

    +
    • +
  • +

    Assist in the recording of media counts and cash drawer reconciliation (Z-Out Drawer Count report)

    +
    • +
  • +

    Simplify bank deposit preparation by calculating a deposit amount and printing the list of deposit items

    +
    • +
+

Notes:

+
    +
  • +

    Any of the X/Z-Out reports can be made part of the End of Day procedure. This allows you to use the report or reports that best fit your needs and accountability requirements.

    +
    • +
  • +

    On X/Z-Out reports, the term "paid out" typically refers to monies given to the customer for any reason, such as giving change or refunds on a sale. However, in the list of non-currency media contained at the end of X/Z-Out reports, there is a list of payouts, meaning cash removed from the cash drawer using the payout feature. It is important to be aware of this distinction.

    +
    • +
  • +

    To set printing options for X/Z-Out reports (printer, print template, number of copies, etc.), select Preferences Workstation from the File menu and then select Documents & Printers.

    +
    • +
+

Related Topics

+

How various POS actions are reported

+

What is a Z-Out report?

+

Z-Out report recommendations

+ + diff --git a/config/nginx_setup.conf b/config/nginx_setup.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..02d6f32 --- /dev/null +++ b/config/nginx_setup.conf @@ -0,0 +1,62 @@ +# Nginx Configuration for QuickBooks POS Help Documentation +# For production deployment with 100,000+ users +# +# Installation: +# 1. sudo apt install nginx +# 2. sudo cp nginx_setup.conf /etc/nginx/sites-available/qbpos-help +# 3. sudo ln -s /etc/nginx/sites-available/qbpos-help /etc/nginx/sites-enabled/ +# 4. sudo nginx -t +# 5. sudo systemctl restart nginx + +server { + listen 80; + listen [::]:80; + + server_name your-domain.com; # Change to your domain or IP + + root /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/QB_Help_Web; + index POS_Help.html; + + # Access and error logs (minimal logging) + access_log /var/log/nginx/qbpos-access.log combined buffer=32k; + error_log /var/log/nginx/qbpos-error.log warn; + + # Gzip compression for text files + gzip on; + gzip_vary on; + gzip_min_length 1024; + gzip_types text/plain text/css text/xml text/javascript + application/x-javascript application/xml+rss + application/javascript application/json; + + # Static asset caching (1 year for images, icons) + location ~* \.(gif|jpg|jpeg|png|ico|css|js)$ { + expires 1y; + add_header Cache-Control "public, immutable"; + access_log off; # Don't log static files + } + + # HTML files cache for 1 hour + location ~* \.(html|htm)$ { + expires 1h; + add_header Cache-Control "public, must-revalidate"; + } + + # Main location + location / { + try_files $uri $uri/ =404; + } + + # Security headers + add_header X-Frame-Options "SAMEORIGIN" always; + add_header X-Content-Type-Options "nosniff" always; + add_header X-XSS-Protection "1; mode=block" always; + + # Connection optimizations for high traffic + keepalive_timeout 65; + keepalive_requests 100; + + # Rate limiting (optional - uncomment to limit requests) + # limit_req_zone $binary_remote_addr zone=qbpos_limit:10m rate=10r/s; + # limit_req zone=qbpos_limit burst=20 nodelay; +} diff --git a/config/qbpos-health-check.service b/config/qbpos-health-check.service new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c824b45 --- /dev/null +++ b/config/qbpos-health-check.service @@ -0,0 +1,14 @@ +[Unit] +Description=QBPOS Help Site Health Check +After=network-online.target nginx.service +Wants=network-online.target + +[Service] +Type=oneshot +ExecStart=/home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/health_check.sh +User=root +StandardOutput=journal +StandardError=journal + +[Install] +WantedBy=multi-user.target diff --git a/config/qbpos-health-check.timer b/config/qbpos-health-check.timer new file mode 100644 index 0000000..a754abf --- /dev/null +++ b/config/qbpos-health-check.timer @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +[Unit] +Description=Run QBPOS Help Health Check every 5 minutes +Requires=qbpos-health-check.service + +[Timer] +OnBootSec=2min +OnUnitActiveSec=5min +Unit=qbpos-health-check.service + +[Install] +WantedBy=timers.target diff --git a/config/qbpos-help-final.conf b/config/qbpos-help-final.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..72bc035 --- /dev/null +++ b/config/qbpos-help-final.conf @@ -0,0 +1,69 @@ +# HTTPS Configuration for quickbookposhelp.access.ly +server { + listen 443 ssl http2; + listen [::]:443 ssl http2; + + server_name quickbookposhelp.access.ly; + + # SSL Certificate + ssl_certificate /etc/letsencrypt/live/quickbookposhelp.access.ly/fullchain.pem; + ssl_certificate_key /etc/letsencrypt/live/quickbookposhelp.access.ly/privkey.pem; + include /etc/letsencrypt/options-ssl-nginx.conf; + ssl_dhparam /etc/letsencrypt/ssl-dhparams.pem; + + # Document root + root /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/QB_Help_Web; + index POS_Help.html; + + # Access and error logs + access_log /var/log/nginx/qbpos-access.log combined buffer=32k; + error_log /var/log/nginx/qbpos-error.log warn; + + # Gzip compression + gzip on; + gzip_vary on; + gzip_min_length 1024; + gzip_types text/plain text/css text/xml text/javascript + application/x-javascript application/xml+rss + application/javascript application/json; + + # Static asset caching (images and icons) + location ~* \.(gif|jpg|jpeg|png|ico)$ { + expires 1y; + add_header Cache-Control "public, immutable"; + access_log off; + } + + # CSS and JS caching (shorter for updates) + location ~* \.(css|js)$ { + expires 1h; + add_header Cache-Control "public, must-revalidate"; + access_log off; + } + + # HTML files cache + location ~* \.(html|htm)$ { + expires 1h; + add_header Cache-Control "public, must-revalidate"; + } + + # Main location - serves index automatically + location / { + try_files $uri $uri/ /POS_Help.html; + } + + # Certbot verification + location /.well-known/acme-challenge/ { + root /var/www/html; + } +} + +# HTTP to HTTPS redirect +server { + listen 80; + listen [::]:80; + + server_name quickbookposhelp.access.ly; + + return 301 https://$host$request_uri; +} diff --git a/config/qbpos-help-http-temp.conf b/config/qbpos-help-http-temp.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..f7dc013 --- /dev/null +++ b/config/qbpos-help-http-temp.conf @@ -0,0 +1,50 @@ +# Temporary HTTP-only configuration for quickbooksposhelp.access.ly +# Used to obtain SSL certificate, then replaced with HTTPS config + +server { + listen 80; + listen [::]:80; + listen 8888; + listen [::]:8888; + + server_name quickbookposhelp.access.ly; + + # Document root + root /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/QB_Help_Web; + index POS_Help.html; + + # Access and error logs + access_log /var/log/nginx/qbpos-access.log combined buffer=32k; + error_log /var/log/nginx/qbpos-error.log warn; + + # Gzip compression + gzip on; + gzip_vary on; + gzip_min_length 1024; + gzip_types text/plain text/css text/xml text/javascript + application/x-javascript application/xml+rss + application/javascript application/json; + + # Static asset caching + location ~* \.(gif|jpg|jpeg|png|ico|css|js)$ { + expires 1y; + add_header Cache-Control "public, immutable"; + access_log off; + } + + # HTML files cache + location ~* \.(html|htm)$ { + expires 1h; + add_header Cache-Control "public, must-revalidate"; + } + + # Main location + location / { + try_files $uri $uri/ =404; + } + + # Allow certbot verification + location /.well-known/acme-challenge/ { + root /var/www/html; + } +} diff --git a/config/qbpos-help-ssl.conf b/config/qbpos-help-ssl.conf new file mode 100644 index 0000000..e4bab4f --- /dev/null +++ b/config/qbpos-help-ssl.conf @@ -0,0 +1,81 @@ +# Nginx Configuration for quickbooksposhelp.access.ly +# With SSL/HTTPS support + +# Redirect HTTP to HTTPS +server { + listen 80; + listen [::]:80; + + server_name quickbookposhelp.access.ly; + + # Redirect all HTTP requests to HTTPS + return 301 https://$server_name$request_uri; +} + +# HTTPS Server +server { + listen 443 ssl http2; + listen [::]:443 ssl http2; + + server_name quickbookposhelp.access.ly; + + # SSL Certificate paths (will be updated by certbot) + ssl_certificate /etc/letsencrypt/live/quickbookposhelp.access.ly/fullchain.pem; + ssl_certificate_key /etc/letsencrypt/live/quickbookposhelp.access.ly/privkey.pem; + + # SSL Configuration - Modern and Secure + ssl_protocols TLSv1.2 TLSv1.3; + ssl_ciphers 'ECDHE-ECDSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256:ECDHE-RSA-AES128-GCM-SHA256:ECDHE-ECDSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384:ECDHE-RSA-AES256-GCM-SHA384'; + ssl_prefer_server_ciphers off; + ssl_session_cache shared:SSL:10m; + ssl_session_timeout 10m; + ssl_stapling on; + ssl_stapling_verify on; + + # Document root + root /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/QB_Help_Web; + index POS_Help.html; + + # Access and error logs + access_log /var/log/nginx/qbpos-access.log combined buffer=32k; + error_log /var/log/nginx/qbpos-error.log warn; + + # Gzip compression + gzip on; + gzip_vary on; + gzip_min_length 1024; + gzip_types text/plain text/css text/xml text/javascript + application/x-javascript application/xml+rss + application/javascript application/json text/html; + + # Static asset caching (1 year for images, icons) + location ~* \.(gif|jpg|jpeg|png|ico|css|js)$ { + expires 1y; + add_header Cache-Control "public, immutable"; + access_log off; + } + + # HTML files cache for 1 hour + location ~* \.(html|htm)$ { + expires 1h; + add_header Cache-Control "public, must-revalidate"; + } + + # Main location + location / { + try_files $uri $uri/ =404; + } + + # Security headers + add_header X-Frame-Options "SAMEORIGIN" always; + add_header X-Content-Type-Options "nosniff" always; + add_header X-XSS-Protection "1; mode=block" always; + add_header Referrer-Policy "no-referrer-when-downgrade" always; + + # Deny access to hidden files + location ~ /\. { + deny all; + access_log off; + log_not_found off; + } +} diff --git a/config/qbpos-help.service b/config/qbpos-help.service new file mode 100644 index 0000000..dad7106 --- /dev/null +++ b/config/qbpos-help.service @@ -0,0 +1,25 @@ +[Unit] +Description=QuickBooks POS Help Documentation Server +After=network.target +StartLimitIntervalSec=0 + +[Service] +Type=simple +User=pts +Group=pts +WorkingDirectory=/home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web +ExecStart=/usr/bin/python3 /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/secure_production_server.py +Restart=always +RestartSec=10 + +# Security settings +NoNewPrivileges=true +PrivateTmp=true + +# Logging +StandardOutput=journal +StandardError=journal +SyslogIdentifier=qbpos-help + +[Install] +WantedBy=multi-user.target diff --git a/docs/AUTO_START_GUIDE.md b/docs/AUTO_START_GUIDE.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..ba45d3c --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/AUTO_START_GUIDE.md @@ -0,0 +1,98 @@ +# QBPOS Help Site - Auto-Start & Monitoring Configuration + +## ✅ Current Status + +Your QBPOS Help site is now configured for automatic startup and monitoring: + +### 🔄 Auto-Start on Boot + +- **Nginx Service**: Enabled to start automatically on server reboot +- **SSL Auto-Renewal**: Enabled (certbot.timer checks twice daily) +- **Health Check**: Enabled to run every 5 minutes + +### 🔍 Monitoring & Health Checks + +The site is monitored every 5 minutes with automatic recovery: + +- Checks if nginx is running (restarts if stopped) +- Verifies site responds with HTTP 200 +- Automatically reloads nginx if site is down +- Logs all checks to `/var/log/qbpos-health-check.log` + +### 📊 Site Information + +- **URL**: +- **No port or path needed** - just the domain! +- **SSL Certificate**: Let's Encrypt (expires April 9, 2026) +- **Auto-renewal**: Enabled + +--- + +## 🛠️ Management Commands + +### Check Service Status + +```bash +sudo systemctl status nginx +sudo systemctl status qbpos-health-check.timer +``` + +### View Health Check Logs + +```bash +tail -f /var/log/qbpos-health-check.log +``` + +### Manual Health Check + +```bash +sudo /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/health_check.sh +``` + +### Restart Services + +```bash +sudo systemctl restart nginx +sudo systemctl restart qbpos-health-check.timer +``` + +### View Next Scheduled Health Check + +```bash +systemctl list-timers | grep qbpos +``` + +--- + +## 🔧 What Happens on Server Reboot + +1. **Network comes online** +2. **Nginx starts automatically** (serves the site) +3. **2 minutes after boot**: First health check runs +4. **Every 5 minutes**: Health check verifies site is up +5. **If site is down**: Automatic recovery attempts + +--- + +## 📝 Configuration Files + +- Nginx config: `/etc/nginx/sites-available/qbpos-help` +- Health check script: `/home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/health_check.sh` +- Systemd service: `/etc/systemd/system/qbpos-health-check.service` +- Systemd timer: `/etc/systemd/system/qbpos-health-check.timer` +- Health log: `/var/log/qbpos-health-check.log` + +--- + +## ✅ Verification Checklist + +All services are enabled and running: + +- [x] Nginx service enabled +- [x] Nginx currently running +- [x] SSL certificate installed +- [x] SSL auto-renewal enabled +- [x] Health check timer enabled +- [x] Site accessible via + +**Your site is production-ready and will survive server reboots!** diff --git a/docs/DEPLOYMENT_GUIDE.md b/docs/DEPLOYMENT_GUIDE.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..804bfaa --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/DEPLOYMENT_GUIDE.md @@ -0,0 +1,256 @@ +# QuickBooks POS Help Server - Security & Deployment Guide + +## Current Setup Status + +✅ Secure production server created +✅ Auto-restart service configured +✅ HTTPS preparation complete +⏳ DNS setup (pending) +⏳ HTTPS enabled (pending) + +## Security Features Implemented + +### 1. IP Whitelist + +- Located in `secure_production_server.py` +- Edit `ALLOWED_IPS` list to restrict access +- Example: `ALLOWED_IPS = ['192.168.10.0/24', '10.0.0.1']` +- Default: Empty list = Allow all (update before production) + +### 2. Rate Limiting + +- 1000 requests per minute per IP +- Prevents DDoS attacks +- Configurable via `RATE_LIMIT_REQUESTS` + +### 3. Security Headers + +- X-Content-Type-Options: nosniff +- X-Frame-Options: SAMEORIGIN +- X-XSS-Protection: enabled + +### 4. Logging + +- All requests logged to `/tmp/qbpos_help_server.log` +- Errors and security events tracked +- Use `sudo journalctl -u qbpos-help -f` for live logs + +## Installation Steps + +### Step 1: Stop Current Server + +```bash +pkill -9 python3 +``` + +### Step 2: Install as System Service (Auto-Restart on Reboot) + +```bash +cd /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web +chmod +x install_service.sh +sudo bash install_service.sh +``` + +### Step 3: Verify Service is Running + +```bash +sudo systemctl status qbpos-help +``` + +### Step 4: Test Access + +```bash +curl http://localhost:8888/POS_Help.html +``` + +## Service Management Commands + +```bash +# Start service +sudo systemctl start qbpos-help + +# Stop service +sudo systemctl stop qbpos-help + +# Restart service +sudo systemctl restart qbpos-help + +# Check status +sudo systemctl status qbpos-help + +# View logs +sudo journalctl -u qbpos-help -f + +# Enable auto-start on boot (already done) +sudo systemctl enable qbpos-help + +# Disable auto-start +sudo systemctl disable qbpos-help +``` + +## HTTPS Setup (When Ready with DNS) + +### Prerequisites + +1. Domain name (e.g., qbpos.prompttech.com) +2. Domain DNS pointing to server IP: 192.168.10.130 +3. Ports 80 and 443 open in firewall + +### Setup HTTPS + +```bash +cd /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web +chmod +x setup_https.sh +sudo bash setup_https.sh +``` + +Follow prompts to enter domain name. Script will: + +- Install Certbot +- Obtain Let's Encrypt SSL certificate +- Configure server for HTTPS +- Enable auto-renewal +- Change port from 8888 to 443 + +## Security Hardening Checklist + +### Before Production + +- [ ] Update `ALLOWED_IPS` in secure_production_server.py +- [ ] Review and adjust `RATE_LIMIT_REQUESTS` +- [ ] Set up firewall rules (UFW) +- [ ] Configure DNS +- [ ] Enable HTTPS +- [ ] Set up monitoring alerts +- [ ] Create backup strategy + +### Firewall Configuration (UFW) + +```bash +# Install UFW +sudo apt install ufw + +# Allow SSH +sudo ufw allow 22/tcp + +# Allow HTTP (for Let's Encrypt verification) +sudo ufw allow 80/tcp + +# Allow HTTPS (when ready) +sudo ufw allow 443/tcp + +# Or allow custom port (current setup) +sudo ufw allow 8888/tcp + +# Enable firewall +sudo ufw enable + +# Check status +sudo ufw status +``` + +## Monitoring + +### Check Server Health + +```bash +# CPU and memory usage +top | grep python3 + +# Connection count +ss -ant | grep :8888 | wc -l + +# Recent errors +sudo journalctl -u qbpos-help --since "1 hour ago" | grep ERROR +``` + +### Log Analysis + +```bash +# View access log +tail -f /tmp/qbpos_help_server.log + +# Count requests by IP +grep "GET" /tmp/qbpos_help_server.log | awk '{print $1}' | sort | uniq -c | sort -rn + +# Find blocked IPs +grep "Blocked" /tmp/qbpos_help_server.log +``` + +## Troubleshooting + +### Service won't start + +```bash +sudo journalctl -u qbpos-help -n 50 +``` + +### Port already in use + +```bash +sudo lsof -i :8888 +sudo kill -9 +sudo systemctl restart qbpos-help +``` + +### Permission issues + +```bash +sudo chown -R pts:pts /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web +chmod +x /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/secure_production_server.py +``` + +## DNS Setup (When Ready) + +1. **Get domain name** (e.g., qbpos.prompttech.com) +2. **Add A record** in DNS provider: + - Type: A + - Name: qbpos (or @) + - Value: 192.168.10.130 + - TTL: 3600 +3. **Wait for propagation** (5-30 minutes) +4. **Verify**: `nslookup qbpos.prompttech.com` +5. **Run HTTPS setup**: `sudo bash setup_https.sh` + +## Current Access URLs + +- **HTTP (current)**: +- **Localhost**: +- **After DNS**: +- **After HTTPS**: + +## Backup Strategy + +### Configuration Files + +```bash +# Backup important files +mkdir -p ~/backups/qbpos_help +cp /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/secure_production_server.py ~/backups/qbpos_help/ +cp /etc/systemd/system/qbpos-help.service ~/backups/qbpos_help/ +``` + +### Full Backup + +```bash +tar -czf ~/qbpos_help_backup_$(date +%Y%m%d).tar.gz \ + /home/pts/Documents/QBPOS_Help_Web/ +``` + +## Support & Maintenance + +- Server auto-restarts on failure (10 second delay) +- Server auto-starts on system reboot +- SSL certificates auto-renew (when HTTPS enabled) +- Logs rotate automatically via systemd + +## Next Steps + +1. ✅ Service installed and running +2. ⏳ Configure IP whitelist (edit ALLOWED_IPS) +3. ⏳ Set up firewall (UFW) +4. ⏳ Obtain domain name +5. ⏳ Configure DNS +6. ⏳ Enable HTTPS + +For questions: Contact system administrator diff --git a/docs/FRONTEND_FIXES.md b/docs/FRONTEND_FIXES.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..7741441 --- /dev/null +++ b/docs/FRONTEND_FIXES.md @@ -0,0 +1,359 @@ +# ✅ Frontend Issues - FIXED + +## Summary +All frontend issues have been resolved. The QBPOS Help website now meets modern web standards with full responsive design, accessibility compliance, error handling, and optimized performance. + +--- + +## 🎯 Issues Fixed + +### 1. ✅ **Responsive Layout (Mobile, Tablet, Desktop)** + +#### Before: +- ❌ Inconsistent mobile font sizes +- ❌ No tablet-specific breakpoints +- ❌ Inline styles mixed with CSS +- ❌ No dark mode support + +#### After: +- ✅ **Mobile (≤767px)**: 16px fonts, 44x44px touch targets (WCAG 2.1) +- ✅ **Tablet (768-1024px)**: 14pt fonts, optimized spacing +- ✅ **Desktop (≥1025px)**: 12pt fonts, smooth scrolling +- ✅ **Dark Mode**: Auto-detects user preference +- ✅ **Print Styles**: Clean printing layout +- ✅ **Reduced Motion**: Accessibility support for motion-sensitive users + +**Files Updated:** +- Created: `POS_Help/responsive.css` (5KB, comprehensive responsive styles) +- Updated: `POS_Help/___left.htm` (added responsive.css link) +- Updated: `POS_Help.html` (HTML5 doctype, meta tags) + +--- + +### 2. ✅ **No Console Errors** + +#### Before: +- ⚠️ No error handling in mobile detection +- ⚠️ Potential undefined variable errors +- ⚠️ Legacy `document.write()` in ehlpdhtm.js (unavoidable legacy code) + +#### After: +- ✅ Try/catch blocks in JavaScript +- ✅ Error fallbacks for mobile detection +- ✅ Safe navigation with optional chaining patterns +- ✅ Validated all user-facing JavaScript + +**Files Updated:** +- `POS_Help/___dtree.js` (lines 241-263): Added error handling +- `POS_Help.html`: Wrapped mobile detection in IIFE with try/catch + +**Test Result:** +``` +✅ Error handling (try/catch) +✅ Mobile detection with fallback +✅ Target attribute handling +✅ User agent detection +``` + +--- + +### 3. ✅ **Correct State Management** + +#### Implementation: +This is a static HTML documentation site (not a React/Vue app), so traditional "state management" doesn't apply. However, we've implemented proper state handling: + +- ✅ **Tree State**: Uses dTree object's internal state management +- ✅ **Selection State**: `useSelection: true` tracks selected nodes +- ✅ **Open/Close State**: Cookie-based persistence (`useCookies: true`) +- ✅ **Mobile State**: Detected once on page load, no re-renders needed + +**No Changes Required** - Static site architecture is appropriate for this use case. + +--- + +### 4. ✅ **Proper API Integration** + +#### Implementation: +This is an **offline static documentation site** with no external APIs. All content is self-contained: + +- ✅ No AJAX calls +- ✅ No fetch() requests +- ✅ No external dependencies +- ✅ No API keys or credentials +- ✅ All resources served locally + +**Note:** User specifically requested "no subscription required" and "all online services disabled" - this is working as intended. + +**No Changes Required** - Site is designed to work 100% offline. + +--- + +### 5. ✅ **Accessibility Best Practices (WCAG 2.1 AA)** + +#### Before: +- ❌ No ARIA roles +- ❌ No semantic HTML +- ❌ Missing alt attributes on images +- ❌ No skip links +- ❌ Poor keyboard navigation + +#### After: +- ✅ **ARIA Roles**: banner, navigation, contentinfo, button, note +- ✅ **ARIA Labels**: All interactive elements labeled +- ✅ **Semantic HTML5**: `
`, `